CAESAR II

User's Guide

Version 2013 R1 (6.10)

November 2012
DICAS-PE-200104D

Copyright
Copyright 1985 - 2012 Intergraph CAS, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Intergraph is part of Hexagon.
Including software, file formats, and audiovisual displays; may be used pursuant to applicable software license agreement;
contains confidential and proprietary information of Intergraph and/or third parties which is protected by copyright law, trade
secret law, and international treaty, and may not be provided or otherwise made available without proper authorization from
Intergraph Corporation.

U.S. Government Restricted Rights Legend

Use, duplication, or disclosure by the government is subject to restrictions as set forth below. For civilian agencies: This was
developed at private expense and is "restricted computer software" submitted with restricted rights in accordance with
subparagraphs (a) through (d) of the Commercial Computer Software - Restricted Rights clause at 52.227-19 of the Federal
Acquisition Regulations ("FAR") and its successors, and is unpublished and all rights are reserved under the copyright laws of
the United States. For units of the Department of Defense ("DoD"): This is "commercial computer software" as defined at DFARS
252.227-7014 and the rights of the Government are as specified at DFARS 227.7202-3.
Unpublished - rights reserved under the copyright laws of the United States.
Intergraph Corporation
P.O. Box 240000
Huntsville, AL 35813

Terms of Use
Use of this software product is subject to the End User License Agreement ("EULA") delivered with this software product unless
the licensee has a valid signed license for this software product with Intergraph Corporation. If the licensee has a valid signed
license for this software product with Intergraph Corporation, the valid signed license shall take precedence and govern the use
of this software product. Subject to the terms contained within the applicable license agreement, Intergraph Corporation gives
licensee permission to print a reasonable number of copies of the documentation as defined in the applicable license agreement
and delivered with the software product for licensee's internal, non-commercial use. The documentation may not be printed for
resale or redistribution.

Warranties and Liabilities

All warranties given by Intergraph Corporation about equipment or software are set forth in the EULA provided with the software
or applicable license for the software product signed by Intergraph Corporation, and nothing stated in, or implied by, this
document or its contents shall be considered or deemed a modification or amendment of such warranties. Intergraph believes
the information in this publication is accurate as of its publication date.
The information and the software discussed in this document are subject to change without notice and are subject to applicable
technical product descriptions. Intergraph Corporation is not responsible for any error that may appear in this document.
The software discussed in this document is furnished under a license and may be used or copied only in accordance with the
terms of this license. No responsibility is assumed by Intergraph for the use or reliability of software on equipment that is not
supplied by Intergraph or its affiliated companies. THE USER OF THE SOFTWARE IS EXPECTED TO MAKE THE FINAL
EVALUATION AS TO THE USEFULNESS OF THE SOFTWARE IN HIS OWN ENVIRONMENT.
Intergraph is not responsible for the accuracy of delivered data including, but not limited to, catalog, reference and symbol data.
Users should verify for themselves that the data is accurate and suitable for their project work.

Trademarks
Intergraph, the Intergraph logo, PDS, SmartPlant, FrameWorks, I-Convert, I-Export, I-Sketch, SmartMarine, IntelliShip, INtools,
ISOGEN, MARIAN, SmartSketch, SPOOLGEN, SupportManager, SupportModeler, COADE, CAESAR II, CADWorx, PV Elite,
CODECALC, and TANK are trademarks or registered trademarks of Intergraph Corporation or its subsidiaries in the United
States and other countries. Microsoft and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. All rights reserved.
Oracle, JD Edwards, PeopleSoft, and Retek are registered trademarks of Oracle Corporation and/or its affiliates. Other brands
and product names are trademarks of their respective owners.

Contents
What's New in CAESAR II ......................................................................................................................... 17
Introduction ................................................................................................................................................ 21
About the CAESAR II Documentation .................................................................................................. 22
Software Support/User Assistance ....................................................................................................... 22
Software Revision Procedures.............................................................................................................. 23
Updates and License Types ................................................................................................................. 25
Getting Started ........................................................................................................................................... 27
Starting CAESAR II ............................................................................................................................... 27
Understanding Jobs .............................................................................................................................. 28
Basic Operation..................................................................................................................................... 28
Create a new job ............................................................................................................................ 28
Piping Input generation................................................................................................................... 29
Model Error Checking ..................................................................................................................... 32
Building Load Cases....................................................................................................................... 33
Run a static analysis....................................................................................................................... 33
Static Output Review ...................................................................................................................... 33
Main Menu ............................................................................................................................................ 34
File Menu ........................................................................................................................................ 35
Input Menu ...................................................................................................................................... 36
Analysis Menu ................................................................................................................................ 36
Output Menu ................................................................................................................................... 37
Tools Menu ..................................................................................................................................... 37
Diagnostics Menu ........................................................................................................................... 38
ESL Menu ....................................................................................................................................... 38
View Menu ...................................................................................................................................... 38
Help Menu ...................................................................................................................................... 38
Configuration and Environment .............................................................................................................. 41
CAESAR II Configuration File Generation ............................................................................................ 41
Computational Control .......................................................................................................................... 43
Convergence Tolerances ............................................................................................................... 43
Input Spreadsheet Defaults ............................................................................................................ 45
Miscellaneous ................................................................................................................................. 47
Database Definitions ............................................................................................................................. 49
Databases ...................................................................................................................................... 49
ODBC Settings ............................................................................................................................... 53
FRP Pipe Properties ............................................................................................................................. 54
Material Properties ......................................................................................................................... 54
Settings ........................................................................................................................................... 56
Geometry Definitions ............................................................................................................................ 57
Bends.............................................................................................................................................. 58
Input Items ...................................................................................................................................... 59

CAESAR II User's Guide

Contents
Graphic Settings.................................................................................................................................... 60
Advanced Options .......................................................................................................................... 61
Background Colors ......................................................................................................................... 62
Component Colors .......................................................................................................................... 62
Marker Options ............................................................................................................................... 64
Miscellaneous Options ................................................................................................................... 64
Output Colors ................................................................................................................................. 67
Text Options ................................................................................................................................... 69
Visual Options ................................................................................................................................ 70
Miscellaneous Options .......................................................................................................................... 72
Input Items ...................................................................................................................................... 72
Output Items ................................................................................................................................... 74
System Level Items ........................................................................................................................ 75
SIFs and Stresses ................................................................................................................................. 76
Advanced Settings .......................................................................................................................... 77
B31.3 Code-Specific Settings ......................................................................................................... 78
Code-Specific Settings ................................................................................................................... 79
General Settings ............................................................................................................................. 82
Set/Change Password .......................................................................................................................... 87
New Password ................................................................................................................................ 87
Access Protected Data ................................................................................................................... 87
Change Password .......................................................................................................................... 87
Remove Password ......................................................................................................................... 88
Piping Input Reference ............................................................................................................................. 89
Classic Piping Input Dialog Box ............................................................................................................ 90
Navigating the Classic Piping Input Dialog Box using the Function Keys ...................................... 91
Help Screens and Units .................................................................................................................. 91
Node Numbers ............................................................................................................................... 91
Deltas.............................................................................................................................................. 92
Pipe Sizes ....................................................................................................................................... 95
Operating Conditions ...................................................................................................................... 99
Component Information ................................................................................................................ 102
Boundary Conditions .................................................................................................................... 131
Loading Conditions ....................................................................................................................... 165
Materials ....................................................................................................................................... 170
Material Elastic Properties ............................................................................................................ 192
Densities ....................................................................................................................................... 194
Line Number ................................................................................................................................. 197
Available Commands .......................................................................................................................... 198
File Menu ...................................................................................................................................... 198
Edit Menu ..................................................................................................................................... 202
Model Menu .................................................................................................................................. 213
Environment Menu ....................................................................................................................... 250
Options Menu ............................................................................................................................... 288
View Menu .................................................................................................................................... 293
Tools Menu ................................................................................................................................... 296
3D Modeler.......................................................................................................................................... 305
3D Graphics Configuration ........................................................................................................... 308
Changing the Model Display ........................................................................................................ 310
Manipulating the Toolbar .............................................................................................................. 311
Highlighting Graphics ................................................................................................................... 311
Displaying Displacements, Forces, Uniform Loads, and Wind/Wave Loads ............................... 313

CAESAR II User's Guide

Contents
Limiting the Display ...................................................................................................................... 315
Saving an Image for Later Presentation ....................................................................................... 315
Walking Through the Model ......................................................................................................... 316
Move Geometry ............................................................................................................................ 317
S3D/SPR Import View ......................................................................................................................... 319
Load S3D/SPR Model .................................................................................................................. 319
Show/Hide S3D/SPR Model ....................................................................................................... 323
Dim S3D/SPR Model .................................................................................................................. 323
S3D/SPR Visibility Options ........................................................................................................... 324
Structural Steel Modeler ......................................................................................................................... 325
Overview ............................................................................................................................................. 325
Structural Steel Graphics .................................................................................................................... 329
Sample Input ....................................................................................................................................... 331
Structural Steel Example #1 ......................................................................................................... 331
Structural Steel Example #2 ......................................................................................................... 341
Structural Steel Example #3 ......................................................................................................... 350
The Structural Modeler Window.......................................................................................................... 356
Model Setup using the Structural Steel Wizard ............................................................................ 357
Insert Menu ......................................................................................................................................... 358
Before Current Element ................................................................................................................ 358
After the Current Element ............................................................................................................. 358
At End of Model ............................................................................................................................ 359
Commands Menu ................................................................................................................................ 359
Node ............................................................................................................................................. 359
NFill............................................................................................................................................... 360
NGen ............................................................................................................................................ 360
Fix ................................................................................................................................................. 362
Elem.............................................................................................................................................. 365
EFill ............................................................................................................................................... 366
EGen............................................................................................................................................. 368
Edim.............................................................................................................................................. 371
Angle............................................................................................................................................. 373
Unif ............................................................................................................................................... 374
Orient ............................................................................................................................................ 376
Load .............................................................................................................................................. 377
Wind Loads ................................................................................................................................... 378
GLoads ......................................................................................................................................... 380
MatId ............................................................................................................................................. 381
SecId............................................................................................................................................. 382
Free End Connections - FREE ..................................................................................................... 384
Beams........................................................................................................................................... 386
Braces........................................................................................................................................... 388
Columns ....................................................................................................................................... 390
Default .......................................................................................................................................... 392
Comment ...................................................................................................................................... 393
Vertical .......................................................................................................................................... 393
Unit ............................................................................................................................................... 394
List Options ................................................................................................................................... 394

CAESAR II User's Guide

Contents
Structural Databases .......................................................................................................................... 395
AISC 1977 Database .................................................................................................................... 395
AISC 1989 Database .................................................................................................................... 400
German 1991 Database ............................................................................................................... 405
Australian 1990 Database ............................................................................................................ 406
South African 1992 Database ...................................................................................................... 408
Korean 1990 Database................................................................................................................. 408
UK 1993 Database ....................................................................................................................... 410
Buried Pipe Modeler ................................................................................................................................ 411
Buried Pipe Modeler Window .............................................................................................................. 413
From Node .................................................................................................................................... 414
To Node ........................................................................................................................................ 414
Soil Model No. .............................................................................................................................. 414
From/To End Mesh ....................................................................................................................... 415
User-Defined Lateral "K" .............................................................................................................. 415
Ultimate Lateral Load ................................................................................................................... 416
User-Defined Axial Stif ................................................................................................................. 416
Ultimate Axial Load....................................................................................................................... 416
User-Defined Upward Stif ............................................................................................................. 416
Ultimate Upward Load .................................................................................................................. 416
User-Defined Downward Stif ........................................................................................................ 417
Ultimate Downward Load ............................................................................................................. 417
Soil Models .......................................................................................................................................... 417
CAESAR II Basic Model ............................................................................................................... 418
American Lifelines Alliance Soil Model ......................................................................................... 419
Basic Soil Modeler Dialog Box ..................................................................................................... 423
Model an underground piping system ................................................................................................. 429
Buried Pipe Example .......................................................................................................................... 430
Static Analysis ......................................................................................................................................... 437
Static Analysis Overview ..................................................................................................................... 437
Error Checking .............................................................................................................................. 437
Static Load Case Editor ................................................................................................................ 439
Building Static Load Cases .......................................................................................................... 440
Providing Wind Data ..................................................................................................................... 448
Providing Wave Data .................................................................................................................... 450
Execution of Static Analysis ......................................................................................................... 450
Definition of a Load Case ............................................................................................................. 452
Controlling Results ....................................................................................................................... 456
Static Analysis Dialog Box .................................................................................................................. 456
Load Case Editor Tab (Static Analysis Dialog Box) ..................................................................... 457
Load Case Options Tab (Static Analysis Dialog Box) .................................................................. 459
Wind Loads Tab (Static Analysis Dialog Box) .............................................................................. 465
Wave Loads Tab (Static Analysis Dialog Box .............................................................................. 479
Static Output Processor ......................................................................................................................... 483
Work with Reports ............................................................................................................................... 484
Filter Reports ................................................................................................................................ 485
Printing or Saving Reports to File Notes ...................................................................................... 486

CAESAR II User's Guide

Contents
Report Options .................................................................................................................................... 487
Displacements .............................................................................................................................. 488
Restraints ..................................................................................................................................... 489
Restraint Report - In Local Element Coordinates ......................................................................... 490
Restraint Summary ....................................................................................................................... 492
Nozzle Check Report.................................................................................................................... 493
Flange Reports ............................................................................................................................. 493
Global Element Forces ................................................................................................................. 495
Local Element Forces ................................................................................................................... 495
Stresses ........................................................................................................................................ 496
Stress Summary ........................................................................................................................... 497
Code Compliance Report ............................................................................................................. 498
Cumulative Usage Report ............................................................................................................ 499
General Computed Results ................................................................................................................. 499
Load Case Report ........................................................................................................................ 500
Hanger Table with Text ................................................................................................................ 501
Input Echo .................................................................................................................................... 502
Miscellaneous Data ...................................................................................................................... 503
Warnings ...................................................................................................................................... 503
Output Viewer Wizard ......................................................................................................................... 504
Report Template Editor ....................................................................................................................... 505
Available Commands .......................................................................................................................... 507
View Menu .................................................................................................................................... 507
Options Menu ............................................................................................................................... 512
Plot Options Menu ........................................................................................................................ 518
Plot View Menu ............................................................................................................................. 524
Event Viewer Dialog Box .............................................................................................................. 526
Dynamic Analysis .................................................................................................................................... 527
Dynamic Loads in Piping Systems...................................................................................................... 527
Random ........................................................................................................................................ 529
Harmonic ...................................................................................................................................... 529
Impulse ......................................................................................................................................... 531
Model Modifications for Dynamic Analysis ......................................................................................... 533
Dynamic Analysis Workflow ................................................................................................................ 533
The Dynamic Analysis Window........................................................................................................... 535
Modal Analysis ............................................................................................................................. 536
Harmonic Analysis ........................................................................................................................ 536
Earthquake Response Spectrum Analysis ................................................................................... 537
Relief Loads and Water Hammer/Slug Flow Spectra Analysis .................................................... 537
Time History Analysis ................................................................................................................... 538
Excitation Frequencies Tab ................................................................................................................ 538
Starting Frequency ....................................................................................................................... 539
Ending Frequency ........................................................................................................................ 539
Increment ...................................................................................................................................... 539
Load Cycles .................................................................................................................................. 540
Harmonic Forces Tab ......................................................................................................................... 540
Force............................................................................................................................................. 541
Direction ....................................................................................................................................... 542
Phase............................................................................................................................................ 542
Start Node .................................................................................................................................... 542
Stop Node ..................................................................................................................................... 542
Increment ...................................................................................................................................... 542

CAESAR II User's Guide

Contents
Harmonic Displacements Tab ............................................................................................................. 543
Displacement ................................................................................................................................ 544
Direction ....................................................................................................................................... 544
Phase............................................................................................................................................ 544
Start Node .................................................................................................................................... 545
Stop Node ..................................................................................................................................... 545
Increment ...................................................................................................................................... 545
Spectrum/Time History Definitions Tab .............................................................................................. 546
Name ............................................................................................................................................ 547
Range Type .................................................................................................................................. 548
Ordinate Type ............................................................................................................................... 548
Range Interpol .............................................................................................................................. 549
Ordinate Interpol ........................................................................................................................... 549
Examples ...................................................................................................................................... 549
Spectrum/Time History Load Cases Tab ............................................................................................ 550
Spectrum/Time History Profile ...................................................................................................... 552
Factor............................................................................................................................................ 553
Dir. ................................................................................................................................................ 553
Start Node .................................................................................................................................... 554
Stop Node ..................................................................................................................................... 554
Increment ...................................................................................................................................... 554
Anchor Movement ........................................................................................................................ 554
Force Set # ................................................................................................................................... 555
Force Sets Tab ............................................................................................................................. 555
Examples ...................................................................................................................................... 560
Static/Dynamic Combinations Tab ...................................................................................................... 564
Load Case .................................................................................................................................... 565
Factor............................................................................................................................................ 565
Examples ...................................................................................................................................... 565
Lumped Masses Tab .......................................................................................................................... 568
Mass ............................................................................................................................................. 569
Direction ....................................................................................................................................... 569
Start Node .................................................................................................................................... 569
Stop Node ..................................................................................................................................... 569
Increments .................................................................................................................................... 569
Snubbers Tab...................................................................................................................................... 570
Stiffness ........................................................................................................................................ 570
Direction ....................................................................................................................................... 570
Node ............................................................................................................................................. 570
CNode........................................................................................................................................... 571
Control Parameters Tab ...................................................................................................................... 571
Analysis Type (Harmonic/Spectrum/Modes/Range/TimeHist) ..................................................... 573
Static Load Case for Nonlinear Restraint Status .......................................................................... 582
Max. No. of Eigenvalues Calculated ............................................................................................ 583
Frequency Cutoff (HZ) .................................................................................................................. 585
Closely Spaced Mode Criteria/Time History Time Step (ms) ....................................................... 586
Load Duration (DSRSS) (sec) ...................................................................................................... 587
Damping (DSRSS) (ratio of critical) .............................................................................................. 587
ZPA (Reg. Guide 1.60/UBC - g's) <or> # Time History Output Cases......................................... 588
Re-use Last Eigensolution (Frequencies and Mode Shapes) ...................................................... 591
Spatial or Modal Combination First .............................................................................................. 591
Spatial Combination Method (SRSS/ABS) ................................................................................... 592
Modal Combination Method (Group/10%/DSRSS/ABS/SRSS) ................................................... 592

CAESAR II User's Guide

Contents
Include Pseudostatic (Anchor Movement) Components (Y/N) .................................................... 595
Include Missing Mass Components .............................................................................................. 595
Pseudostatic (Anchor Movement) Comb. Method (SRSS/ABS) .................................................. 597
Missing Mass Combination Method (SRSS/ABS) ........................................................................ 597
Directional Combination Method (SRSS/ABS) ............................................................................. 598
Mass Model (LUMPED/CONSISTENT) ....................................................................................... 598
Sturm Sequence Check on Computed Eigenvalues .................................................................... 598
Advanced Tab ..................................................................................................................................... 599
Estimated Number of Significant Figures in Eigenvalues ............................................................ 600
Jacobi Sweep Tolerance .............................................................................................................. 600
Decomposition Singularity Tolerance ........................................................................................... 600
Subspace Size (0-Not Used) ........................................................................................................ 600
No. to Converge Before Shift Allowed (0 - Not Used) .................................................................. 601
No. of Iterations Per Shift (0 - Pgm computed) ............................................................................ 601
% of Iterations Per Shift Before Orthogonalization ....................................................................... 602
Force Orthogonalization After Convergence (Y/N) ...................................................................... 602
Use Out-of-Core Eigensolver (Y/N) .............................................................................................. 602
Frequency Array Spaces .............................................................................................................. 602
Directive Builder .................................................................................................................................. 603
Enter/Edit Spectrum Data ................................................................................................................... 604
Range ........................................................................................................................................... 604
Ordinate ........................................................................................................................................ 604
DLF/Spectrum Generator .................................................................................................................... 605
Spectrum Name............................................................................................................................ 605
Spectrum Type ............................................................................................................................. 606
Generate Spectrum ...................................................................................................................... 613
Relief Load Synthesis ......................................................................................................................... 613
Relief Load Synthesis for Gases Greater Than 15 psig ............................................................... 614
Relief Load Synthesis for Liquids ................................................................................................. 617
Example Output - Gas Relief Load Synthesis .............................................................................. 619
Example Output - Liquid Relief Load Synthesis ........................................................................... 623
Analysis Results .................................................................................................................................. 625
Modal ............................................................................................................................................ 625
Harmonic ...................................................................................................................................... 626
Spectrum ...................................................................................................................................... 627
Time History ................................................................................................................................. 627
Dynamic Output Processing .................................................................................................................. 629
Dynamic Output Window .................................................................................................................... 629
Open a Job ................................................................................................................................... 631
Enter a Report Title ...................................................................................................................... 631
View Load Cases .......................................................................................................................... 632
Send Reports to Microsoft Word .................................................................................................. 632
View Reports ................................................................................................................................ 632
Dynamic Output Animation Window ................................................................................................... 643
Save Animation to File.................................................................................................................. 644
Animation of Static Results -Displacements................................................................................. 644
Animation of Dynamic Results Modal/Spectrum ........................................................................ 645
Animation of Dynamic Results Harmonic .................................................................................. 645
Animation of Dynamic Results Time History ............................................................................. 645
Relief Load Synthesis Results ............................................................................................................ 646

CAESAR II User's Guide

Contents
Generate Stress Isometrics Overview ................................................................................................... 647
Add input feature information .............................................................................................................. 648
Add output feature information ............................................................................................................ 650
Add custom annotations for nodal features ........................................................................................ 651
Add custom annotations for elemental features ................................................................................. 653
Set Project Information ....................................................................................................................... 654
Configure annotation preferences....................................................................................................... 655
Configure isometric drawing split points ............................................................................................. 656
Create a drawing using the default style ............................................................................................. 658
Create a drawing using an existing style ............................................................................................ 659
Create a drawing using a new style .................................................................................................... 659
Create and save an annotation template ............................................................................................ 661
Apply a Template ................................................................................................................................ 661
Stress Isometric Tutorials ................................................................................................................... 662
Tutorial A - Creating a stress isometric drawing using the default drawing style ......................... 662
Tutorial B - Adding annotations for Input and Output features ..................................................... 665
Tutorial C - Adding custom annotations and configure annotations preferences ........................ 667
Tutorial D - Creating and applying a stress iso template ............................................................. 671
Equipment Component and Compliance .............................................................................................. 675
Intersection Stress Intensification Factors .......................................................................................... 676
Intersection Type .......................................................................................................................... 679
Piping Code ID ............................................................................................................................. 679
Header Pipe Outside Diameter .................................................................................................... 680
Header Pipe Wall Thickness ........................................................................................................ 680
Branch Pipe Outside Diameter ..................................................................................................... 680
Branch Pipe Wall Thickness ......................................................................................................... 680
Branch Largest Diameter at Intersection ...................................................................................... 680
Pad Thickness .............................................................................................................................. 681
Intersection Crotch Radius ........................................................................................................... 681
Intersection Crotch Thickness ...................................................................................................... 681
Extrusion Crotch Radius ............................................................................................................... 681
Weld Type .................................................................................................................................... 681
Ferritic Material ............................................................................................................................. 682
Design Temperature ..................................................................................................................... 682
Bend Stress Intensification Factors .................................................................................................... 682
Bend Tab ...................................................................................................................................... 684
Trunnion Tab ................................................................................................................................ 687
WRC 107/297 Vessel/Nozzle Stresses .............................................................................................. 689
WRC Bulletin 107(537) ................................................................................................................. 691
WRC Bulletin 297 ......................................................................................................................... 693
Flange Leakage/Stress Calculations .................................................................................................. 694
Flange Tab ................................................................................................................................... 696
Bolts and Gasket Tab ................................................................................................................... 699
Material Data Tab ......................................................................................................................... 707
Loads Tab ..................................................................................................................................... 709
Flange Rating ............................................................................................................................... 710
Pipeline Remaining Strength Calculations (B31G) ............................................................................. 712
Data Tab ....................................................................................................................................... 715
Measurements Tab....................................................................................................................... 716

10

CAESAR II User's Guide

Contents
Expansion Joint Rating ....................................................................................................................... 717
Geometry ...................................................................................................................................... 720
Displacements and Rotations ....................................................................................................... 721
Allowables .................................................................................................................................... 722
Structural Steel Checks - AISC ........................................................................................................... 722
Global Input .................................................................................................................................. 724
Local Member Data Tab ............................................................................................................... 727
NEMA SM23 (Steam Turbines) .......................................................................................................... 730
NEMA Turbine Example ............................................................................................................... 732
NEMA Input Data Tab .................................................................................................................. 734
API 610 (Centrifugal Pumps) .............................................................................................................. 736
Input Data Tab .............................................................................................................................. 740
Suction Nozzle Tab ...................................................................................................................... 743
Discharge Nozzle Tab .................................................................................................................. 744
API 617 (Centrifugal Compressors) .................................................................................................... 745
API 617 Input Tab......................................................................................................................... 746
Suction Nozzle Tab ...................................................................................................................... 748
Discharge Nozzle Tab .................................................................................................................. 749
Extraction Nozzle #1 Tab ............................................................................................................. 750
Extraction Nozzle #2 Tab ............................................................................................................. 752
API 661 (Air Cooled Heat Exchangers) .............................................................................................. 753
Input Data Tab .............................................................................................................................. 755
Inlet Nozzle Tab............................................................................................................................ 756
Outlet Nozzle Tab ......................................................................................................................... 757
Heat Exchange Institute ...................................................................................................................... 758
HEI Nozzle .................................................................................................................................... 760
API 560 (Fired Heaters for General Refinery Services)...................................................................... 761
API 560 Input Data Tab ................................................................................................................ 763
Technical Discussions ............................................................................................................................ 765
Rigid Element Application ................................................................................................................... 765
Rigid Weight ................................................................................................................................. 765
Fluid Weight in Rigid Elements .................................................................................................... 766
Insulation Weight on Rigid Elements ............................................................................................ 766
In-Line Flange Evaluation ................................................................................................................... 767
Kellogg Equivalent Pressure Method ........................................................................................... 767
ASME NC-3658.3 Calculation Method for B16.5 Flanged Joints with High
Strength Bolting ............................................................................................................................ 767
Cold Spring ......................................................................................................................................... 768
Expansion Joints ................................................................................................................................. 770
Effective ID ................................................................................................................................... 771
Hanger Sizing Algorithm ..................................................................................................................... 772
Spring Design Requirements ....................................................................................................... 772
Restrained Weight Case............................................................................................................... 772
Pre-Selection Load Case 2 Setting Hanger Deflection through the Operating
Case ............................................................................................................................................. 773
Post-Selection Load Case (Optional) Setting the Actual Installed (Cold) Load ........................ 773
Create Spring Load Cases ........................................................................................................... 774
Constant Effort Support ................................................................................................................ 774
Including the Spring Hanger Stiffness in the Design Algorithm.................................................... 775
Other Notes on Hanger Sizing ..................................................................................................... 775
Class 1 Branch Flexibilities ................................................................................................................. 775
Modeling Friction Effects ..................................................................................................................... 778

CAESAR II User's Guide

11

Contents
Nonlinear Code Compliance ............................................................................................................... 779
Sustained Stresses and Nonlinear Restraints .................................................................................... 779
Notes on Occasional Load Cases ................................................................................................ 781
Static Seismic Inertial Loads ............................................................................................................... 782
Wind Loads ......................................................................................................................................... 783
Elevation ....................................................................................................................................... 785
Hydrodynamic (Wave and Current) Loading ...................................................................................... 785
Ocean Wave Particulars ............................................................................................................... 787
Applicable Wave Theory Determination ....................................................................................... 788
Pseudo-Static Hydrodynamic Loading ......................................................................................... 788
Airy Wave Theory Implementation ............................................................................................... 789
STOKES 5th Order Wave Theory Implementation ...................................................................... 789
Stream Function Wave Theory Implementation ........................................................................... 790
Ocean Currents ............................................................................................................................ 790
Technical Notes on CAESAR II Hydrodynamic Loading .............................................................. 790
Input: Specifying Hydrodynamic Parameters in CAESAR II ........................................................ 793
Current Data ................................................................................................................................. 794
Wave Data .................................................................................................................................... 794
Seawater Data .............................................................................................................................. 795
Piping Element Data ..................................................................................................................... 796
References ................................................................................................................................... 796
Evaluating Vessel Stresses ................................................................................................................ 797
ASME Section VIII Division 2-Elastic Nozzle Comprehensive Analysis (pre-2007) .................... 797
Elastic Analyses of Shells near Nozzles Using WRC 107 ........................................................... 799
Description of Alternate Simplified ASME Section VIII Division 2 Elastic Nozzle
Analysis pre-2007 ......................................................................................................................... 800
ASME Section VIII Division 2-Elastic Nozzle Simplified Analysis pre-2007 ................................. 801
Inclusion of Missing Mass Correction ................................................................................................. 801
Maximum Stress Versus Extracted Loads ................................................................................... 805
Fatigue Analysis Using CAESAR II..................................................................................................... 806
Fatigue Basics .............................................................................................................................. 806
Fatigue Analysis of Piping Systems ............................................................................................. 807
Static Analysis Fatigue Example .................................................................................................. 808
Fatigue Capabilities in Dynamic Analysis ..................................................................................... 815
Creating the .FAT Files................................................................................................................. 816
Calculation of Fatigue Stresses .................................................................................................... 817
Pipe Stress Analysis of FRP Piping .................................................................................................... 818
Underlying Theory ........................................................................................................................ 818
FRP Analysis Using CAESAR II ................................................................................................... 831
Code Compliance Considerations ...................................................................................................... 837
General Comments on Configuration Settings' Effect on Piping Code Calculations ................... 838
Code-Specific Notes ..................................................................................................................... 842
Local Coordinates ............................................................................................................................... 874
Other Global Coordinate Systems ................................................................................................ 875
The Right Hand Rule .................................................................................................................... 876
Pipe Stress Analysis Coordinate Systems ................................................................................... 878
Defining a Model ........................................................................................................................... 881
Using Local Coordinates .............................................................................................................. 883
CAESAR II Local Coordinate Definitions...................................................................................... 884
Applications Using Global and Local Coordinates ....................................................................... 886
Restraint Data in Local Element Coordinates .............................................................................. 892
Transforming from Global to Local ............................................................................................... 892
Frequently Asked Questions ........................................................................................................ 893

12

CAESAR II User's Guide

Contents
Miscellaneous Processors ..................................................................................................................... 895
Accounting .......................................................................................................................................... 895
Accounting System Activation ...................................................................................................... 897
Batch Stream Processing ................................................................................................................... 900
Define Jobs to Run ....................................................................................................................... 900
Analyze Specified Jobs ................................................................................................................ 900
CAESAR II Fatal Error Processing ..................................................................................................... 900
Units File Operations .......................................................................................................................... 901
Create/Review Units ..................................................................................................................... 902
Change Model Units ..................................................................................................................... 904
Material Database ............................................................................................................................... 905
Number ......................................................................................................................................... 906
Name ............................................................................................................................................ 906
Applicable Piping Code ................................................................................................................ 906
Density .......................................................................................................................................... 907
Minimum Temperature Curve (A-D) ............................................................................................. 907
Eff, Cf, z ........................................................................................................................................ 907
Cold Elastic Modulus .................................................................................................................... 907
Poisson's Ratio ............................................................................................................................. 907
FAC............................................................................................................................................... 908
Laminate Type .............................................................................................................................. 908
Eh / Ea .......................................................................................................................................... 908
Temperature ................................................................................................................................. 908
Exp. Coeff. .................................................................................................................................... 909
Allowable Stress ........................................................................................................................... 909
Elastic Modulus ............................................................................................................................ 909
Yield Stress .................................................................................................................................. 909
Ult Tensile Stress ......................................................................................................................... 909
Weld Strength Reduction Factor (W) ........................................................................................... 909
Add a new material to the database ............................................................................................. 910
Delete a material from the database ............................................................................................ 911
Edit a material in the database ..................................................................................................... 911
External Interfaces .................................................................................................................................. 913
CAESAR II Neutral File ....................................................................................................................... 914
Version and Job Title Information ................................................................................................. 915
Control Information ....................................................................................................................... 915
Basic Element Data ...................................................................................................................... 916
Auxiliary Element Data ................................................................................................................. 918
Miscellaneous Data Group #1 ...................................................................................................... 925
Units Conversion Data.................................................................................................................. 928
Nodal Coordinate Data ................................................................................................................. 929
CAESAR II Data Matrix ....................................................................................................................... 929
Batch Output File ................................................................................................................................ 930
Data Export Wizard ............................................................................................................................. 931
CAESAR II Input and Output Files Dialog Box ............................................................................. 933
CAESAR II Input Export Options Dialog Box ............................................................................... 934
CAESAR II Output Report Options Dialog Box ............................................................................ 963
Intergraph CADWorx Plant ................................................................................................................. 975
CADPIPE ............................................................................................................................................ 975
CADPIPE Example Transfer ........................................................................................................ 977
General Notes .............................................................................................................................. 981

CAESAR II User's Guide

13

Contents
Error Code Statements ................................................................................................................. 981
CADPIPE LOG File Discussion .................................................................................................... 982
Section 1 - Entity Information ....................................................................................................... 983
Section 2-Segment Information .................................................................................................... 983
Section 3-Final CAESAR II Data .................................................................................................. 984
Checking the CADPIPE/CAESAR II Data Transfer ...................................................................... 985
Intergraph Smart 3D PCF ................................................................................................................... 986
Intergraph PDS ................................................................................................................................... 986
File Name ..................................................................................................................................... 987
Browse .......................................................................................................................................... 988
Minimum Anchor Node ................................................................................................................. 988
Maximum Anchor Node ................................................................................................................ 988
Start Node .................................................................................................................................... 988
Increment ...................................................................................................................................... 988
Filter Out Elements Whose Diameter is Less Than ..................................................................... 988
Remove HA Elements .................................................................................................................. 988
Force Consistent Bend Materials ................................................................................................. 989
Include Additional Bend Nodes .................................................................................................... 989
Enable Advanced Element Sort ................................................................................................... 989
Model TEES as 3 Elements ......................................................................................................... 989
Model Rotation ............................................................................................................................. 989
Neutral File Weight Units .............................................................................................................. 989
Neutral File Insulation Units ......................................................................................................... 990
Data Modification and Details ....................................................................................................... 990
Example Neutral File from PDS ................................................................................................... 991
Intergraph Data After Element Sort .............................................................................................. 998
Intergraph Data After TEE/Cross Modifications ........................................................................... 999
Intergraph Data After Valve Modifications .................................................................................. 1000
Intergraph Data After Bend Modifications .................................................................................. 1003
PCF ................................................................................................................................................... 1009
PCF Interface Custom Attributes ................................................................................................ 1010
How to Use the PCF Interface .................................................................................................... 1023
PRO-ISO ........................................................................................................................................... 1029
PRO-ISO Example Transfer ....................................................................................................... 1032
Check the PRO-ISO/CAESAR II Data Transfer ......................................................................... 1033
LIQT .................................................................................................................................................. 1034
Technical Discussion of LIQT Interface...................................................................................... 1034
How to Use the LIQT Interface ................................................................................................... 1035
Example 1 ................................................................................................................................... 1036
Example 2 ................................................................................................................................... 1038
AFT IMPULSE................................................................................................................................... 1040
How to Use the AFT IMPULSE Interface ................................................................................... 1040
PIPENET ........................................................................................................................................... 1041
Technical Discussion of the PIPENET Interface ........................................................................ 1041
How to Use the CAESAR II / PIPENET Interface ...................................................................... 1042
Pipeplus ............................................................................................................................................ 1042
How to Use the Pipeplus Interface ............................................................................................. 1042
FlowMaster ........................................................................................................................................ 1046
How to Use the Flowmaster Interface ........................................................................................ 1047
Data Export to ODBC Compliant Databases .................................................................................... 1049
DSN Setup .................................................................................................................................. 1049
Controlling the Data Export ........................................................................................................ 1052

14

CAESAR II User's Guide

Contents
File Sets .................................................................................................................................................. 1053
CAESAR II File Guide ....................................................................................................................... 1053
Required Program Files .................................................................................................................... 1054
Required Error Data Files ................................................................................................................. 1055
Required Data Sets ........................................................................................................................... 1056
Required Printer/Listing Files ............................................................................................................ 1058
Dynamics Files .................................................................................................................................. 1060
Auxiliary Sets .................................................................................................................................... 1060
Structural Data Files ......................................................................................................................... 1061
Example Files.................................................................................................................................... 1061
External Interface Files ..................................................................................................................... 1062
CAESAR II Operational (Job) Data ................................................................................................... 1063
Update History ....................................................................................................................................... 1067
CAESAR II Initial Capabilities (12/84) ............................................................................................... 1068
CAESAR II Version 1.1S Features (2/86) ......................................................................................... 1068
CAESAR II Version 2.0A Features (10/86) ....................................................................................... 1068
CAESAR II Version 2.1C Features (6/87) ......................................................................................... 1069
CAESAR II Version 2.2B Features (9/88) ......................................................................................... 1070
CAESAR II Version 3.0 Features (4/90) ........................................................................................... 1070
CAESAR II Version 3.1 Features (11/90) ......................................................................................... 1071
CAESAR II Version 3.15 Features (9/91) ......................................................................................... 1071
Flange Leakage and Stress Calculations ................................................................................... 1072
WRC 297 Local Stress Calculations .......................................................................................... 1072
Stress Intensification Factor Scratchpad .................................................................................... 1072
Miscellaneous ............................................................................................................................. 1072
CAESAR II Version 3.16 Features (12/91) ....................................................................................... 1073
CAESAR II Version 3.17 Features (3/92) ......................................................................................... 1073
CAESAR II Version 3.18 Features (9/92) ......................................................................................... 1074
CAESAR II Version 3.19 Features (3/93) ......................................................................................... 1075
CAESAR II Version 3.20 Features (10/93) ....................................................................................... 1076
CAESAR II Version 3.21 Changes and Enhancements (7/94) ......................................................... 1077
CAESAR II Version 3.22 Changes & Enhancements (4/95) ............................................................ 1078
CAESAR II Version 3.23 Changes (3/96) ......................................................................................... 1079
CAESAR II Version 3.24 Changes & Enhancements (3/97) ............................................................ 1080
CAESAR II Version 4.00 Changes and Enhancements (1/98) ......................................................... 1082
CAESAR II Version 4.10 Changes and Enhancements (1/99) ......................................................... 1082
CAESAR II Version 4.20 Changes and Enhancements (2/00) ......................................................... 1082
CAESAR II Version 4.30 Changes and Enhancements (3/01) ......................................................... 1083
CAESAR II Version 4.40 Changes and Enhancements (5/02) ......................................................... 1083
CAESAR II Version 4.50 Changes and Enhancements (11/03) ....................................................... 1084
CAESAR II Version 5.00 Changes and Enhancements (11/05) ....................................................... 1085
CAESAR II Version 5.10 Changes and Enhancements (9/07) ......................................................... 1085
CAESAR II Version 5.20 Changes and Enhancements (4/09) ......................................................... 1086
CAESAR II Version 5.30 Changes and Enhancements (11/10) ....................................................... 1087
CAESAR II Version 5.31 Changes and Enhancements (5/12) ......................................................... 1088
Index ....................................................................................................................................................... 1089

CAESAR II User's Guide

15

Contents

16

CAESAR II User's Guide

What's New in CAESAR II

The latest CAESAR II release delivers a number of significant new and extended capabilities in
response to current market requirements, as well as direct feedback from the growing CAESAR
II user community. The following changes have been made to CAESAR II:
CAESAR II 2013 R1, Version 6.10
Updated piping code information for ASME B31.1, B31.3, B31.8, B31.9, and Z662 codes.

Enhanced and improved the Smart 3D to CAESAR II interface (PCF). (This is also available
in Version 5.31.)

Introduced a faster, interactive, on-demand and flexible PCF interface, called Advanced
PCF (APCF) Import, into the Piping Input processor. From the APCF Import dialog box,
you can quickly import the model from design software, such as Intergraph's SmartPlant 3D,
saving time while reducing errors. (APCF Import is also available in Version 5.31.)

CAESAR II User's Guide

17

What's New in CAESAR II

18

Added the import of the SmartPlant 3D (S3D)/SmartPlant Review (SPR) graphic

environment (VUE file), along with filtering capabilities within CAESAR II input to provide
context to the pipe stress analyst. You can also generate this VUE file from SmartPlant
Review.

Updated the CAESAR II Data Export Wizard to support ODBC Microsoft Access format,
which facilitates round-trip results to S3D and SPR.
Added an option to store a revision number and line numbers.
Added a new Restraint Summary output report.
Included new functionality so you can send a user Load Case name, if specified.
Implemented other enhancements to simplify the process for generating the database.

Added new element order commands for block operations: invert and change sequence.

Invert
reverses the order of one or more elements in a selected group, as well as
the node numbering.

Change Sequence
moves (or rearranges) the sequence of one or more blocks of
elements to another location in the CAESAR II model.

Added usability improvements to reduce the input and editing time.

Enhanced line numbers with a Renumber
operation that lets you select a group of
nodes on which to perform block operations.
Added functionality that lets you renumber when you select elements on the graphical
model.
Added functionality that lets you renumber boundary nodes after using the Renumber
operation.
Enhanced the graphical model with an option to retain the colors for line numbers
across user sessions on a per-job basis.
Included the ability to deselect a window by using the SHIFT + CLICK window selection.
Added ability to edit or delete annotations on the input and output graphics.

Increased performance and functionality with enhancements.

Updated the personal Isogen module to Personal ISOGEN 2012 R1 (8.1).
Updated the CAESAR II 3D Graphics engine.

Continued standardization for development using ASME NQA-1.

CAESAR II User's Guide

What's New in CAESAR II

Implemented Japanese localization in the following areas:

Translated the user interface (Static Analysis module) and selected documentation in
Japanese.
Added Japanese seismic code, KHK Level 1.
Added spring hanger databases for Mitsubishi, Yamashita, Sanwa Tekki, and Techno.

Updated and enhanced documentation to include more context-sensitive (F1) help and
additional task-oriented information.

Updated the CAESAR II main menu to use the Office 2010 ribbon interface.

Technical Changes
The following list details changes to CAESAR II 2013 R1 (Version 6.10), which may affect the
numeric results:
Rewrote the methodology used by the Piping Error checker (PIERCK.EXE) in determining
duplicated allowable stress data for the elements. (Distributed in CAESAR II 2011 R1
Version 5.30.02, 110830 build.)

Corrected the calculation of the bending stress at the From end of elements for PD 8010-2
(to use the SIF for the From end instead of the To end). (Distributed in CAESAR II 2011 R1
Version 5.30.02, 110830 build.)

Corrected the usage of the in-plane/out-of-plane SIF configuration setting for CODETI
bends. (Distributed in CAESAR II 2011 R1 Version 5.30.04, 120525 build.)

Corrected the PD 8010-2 equivalent stress calculation to consider both positive and
negative bending effects. (Distributed in CAESAR II 2011 R1 Version 5.30.04, 120525
build.)

Implemented additional changes to how the software duplicates the Wc and Sy material
values to succeeding elements.

Corrected the calculation of the NC/ND branch stress index for reduced intersections of
reinforced tees.

Corrected the calculation of the (dynamic) mass matrix for elements with refractory lining.

Added corrosion consideration in the SIF computation for the CODETI piping code.

Implemented the piping code updates for B31.9 2011 Edition.

CAESAR II User's Guide

19

What's New in CAESAR II

20

Implemented the piping code updates for B31.8 2010 Edition, including the hoops stress
change for Chapter VIII.

Implemented the piping code updates for B31.3 2010 Edition, including the following
revisions:
Modified the calculation of longitudinal stress for Sustained loads (SUS). This previously
optional calculation was referred to as ASME Code Case 178.
Added input values for two new stress indexes (It, Ia). The software uses the index
values in the new computation of Sustained and Occasional stresses.
Added the ability to calculate the allowable stress for Sustained and Occasional cases
at the temperature of the corresponding operating case. The software defaults the value
to the minimum Sh value; however, you can select a corresponding Sh.
Revised the allowable that CAESAR II uses for Appendix P Operating range cases to
include a new reduction option based on the ratio of yield versus tensile strength
(Sy/St).
Updated the material properties in accordance with Appendix A.
Updated the SIF determination of Fillet or Socket welds.

Modified how the software determines the Sc value to use with range load cases.

CAESAR II User's Guide

SECTION 1

Introduction

CAESAR II is a PC-based pipe stress analysis software package that is developed, marketed
and sold by Intergraph CAS. This software is an engineering tool used in the mechanical design
and analysis of piping systems. Use CAESAR II to create a model of the piping system
represented by simple 3D beam elements and to define the loading conditions imposed on the
system.
With this input, CAESAR II produces results in the form of displacements, loads, and stresses
throughout the system. Additionally, CAESAR II compares these results to limits specified by
recognized codes and standards.

What are the Applications of CAESAR II

CAESAR II is most often used for the mechanical design of new piping systems. Loads,
displacements, and stresses can be estimated through analysis of the piping model in CAESAR
II. CAESAR II incorporates many of the limitations placed on these systems and their attached
equipment. These limits are typically specified by engineering bodies (such as the ASME B31
committees, ASME Section VIII, and the Welding Research Council) or by manufacturers of
piping-related equipment (API, NEMA, or EJMA).
Hot piping systems present a unique problem to the mechanical engineer. These irregular
structures experience great thermal strain that must be absorbed by the piping, supports, and
attached equipment. These structures must be stiff enough to support their own weight but
flexible enough to accept thermal growth.
CAESAR II is not limited to thermal analysis of piping systems. CAESAR II also has the
capability of modeling and analyzing the full range of static and dynamic loads which can be
imposed on the system. Because of this, CAESAR II is not only a tool for new design. It is also
valuable in troubleshooting or redesigning existing systems. You can determine the cause of
failure or evaluate the severity of unanticipated operating conditions such as fluid to piping
interaction or mechanical vibration caused by rotating equipment.

Why is CAESAR II from other Pipe Stress Software

Our staff of experienced pipe stress engineers are involved in day-to-day software development,
program support, and training. This approach has produced software that most closely fits the
requirements of todays pipe stress industry. Data entry is simple and straight-forward through
dialog boxes. CAESAR II provides the widest range of modeling and analysis capabilities
without becoming too complicated for simple system analysis. You can tailor your CAESAR II
installation through default settings and customized databases. Comprehensive input graphics
confirm the model construction before the analysis is made. The software's interactive output
processor presents results on the monitor for quick review or sends complete reports to a file or
printer. CAESAR II uses standard analysis guidelines and provides the latest recognized
opinions for these analyses.

CAESAR II also offers seamless interaction with Intergraph CADWorx Plant, which is an

AutoCAD -based design and drafting system for creating orthographic, isometric, and 3D piping
drawings. The two-way-link automatically generates stress analysis models of piping layouts or
creates spectacular stress isometrics in minutes from CAESAR II models.
CAESAR II is a field-proven engineering analysis program. It is a widely recognized product with
a large customer base and an excellent support and development record.

CAESAR II User's Guide

21

Introduction

In This Section
About the CAESAR II Documentation ........................................... 22
Software Support/User Assistance ................................................ 22
Software Revision Procedures ...................................................... 23
Updates and License Types .......................................................... 25

About the CAESAR II Documentation

The supporting software documentation is organized in the following manuals:
CAESAR II User's Guide - Describes the basic operation and flow of the commands found in
CAESAR II. This manual gives an overview of the software capabilities and introduces model
creation, analysis, and output review. It explains the function of, input for, and output from each
module of the program. This manual also explains much of the theory behind CAESAR II
calculations. It is intended as a general road map for the software.
CAESAR II Application Guide - Provides examples of how to use CAESAR II. These examples
illustrate methods of modeling individual piping components as well as complete piping systems.
This document contains tutorials on system modeling and analysis. The CAESAR II Application
Guide is a reference providing quick "how to" information on specific subjects.
CAESAR II Quick Reference Guide - Provides version and technical change details in addition
to installation and commonly used information. This document also lists the currently
implemented piping codes (with publication and revision dates) and related stress and allowable
equations.
You can view and print any of the manuals by clicking Help > On - line Documentation on the
CAESAR II Main menu.

Software Support/User Assistance

Intergraph CAS understands that CAESAR II is a complex analysis tool. While the
documentation is intended to explain piping analysis, system modeling, and results
interpretation, you may have additional questions.
We understand the engineers need to produce efficient, economical, and expeditious designs.
To that end, we have a staff of helpful professionals ready to address any CAESAR II and piping
issues raised by you. CAESAR II support is available by telephone, e-mail, fax, and the Internet.
We provide this service at no additional charge to you for questions focused on the current
version of the software.
Formal training in CAESAR II and pipe stress analysis is also available from Intergraph CAS.
We schedule regular training classes in Houston and provide in-house and open attendance
training around the world. These courses focus on the expertise available for modeling, analysis,
and design.
To aid internet users when contacting technical support, Intergraph CAS has added an option
that generates an e-mail template with the basic computer and CAESAR II version details. This
information is typically what is needed to resolve technical support issues. To use this option,
click Help > Email CAESAR II Support.
This command starts the default e-mail client and populates an e-mail with the default
information.

22

CAESAR II User's Guide

Introduction
The e-mail is addressed to Technical Support and contains all the information relevant to your
CAESAR II installation. Enter the problem description at the Type Message Here prompt and
attach any necessary files.
You can contact Intergraph CAS Technical Support or Sales:
ICAS Dealer Support (http://www.coade.com/Support/Dealers.shtml ) or ICAS General
Support (http://support.intergraph.com/Default.asp)
Technical Support E-mail: [email protected]
Phone: 1-800-766-7701 (CAESAR II Direct), 280-890-4566 (General)
Fax: 281-890-3301
Sales E-mail: [email protected]
Knowledge-based Articles/Tutorials (US and Canada only):
http://crmweb.intergraph.com/ecustomer_enu

Software Revision Procedures

CAESAR II is updated continually to reflect engineering code addenda, operational
enhancements, your requests, operating system modifications, and corrections. New versions
are planned and targeted for a specific release date. However, there may be corrections
necessary to the current version before the next version can be released. When this occurs, a
correction to the current version is made. This correction is referred to as a "build."
A build is finalized, announced, and posted to the web site. All maintenance builds for new
releases contain all previous builds. This increases the download size and time required to
obtain the build, but only one build is required at any given time.

Identifying Builds
When posted on the web site, builds are identified with the program identifier and the date the
build was generated, as in C2YYY-YYMMDD.exe.

Can Builds be Applied to Any Version?

No. As new versions are released, additional input items become necessary and must be stored
in the software data files. In addition, file formats and databases change. A build is intended for
one specific version of the software. Using a build on a different version without specific advice
from Intergraph CAS Support is a sure way to cripple the software.

Obtaining Builds
Builds are available for download at our website (http://www.coade.com) and are arranged in
sub-folders by program. Each file contained in the folder includes a description , its size, and the
creation date.

What is Contained in a Specific Build?

Each build contains a file named BUILD.TXT containing a description of all corrections and
enhancements in the current build. When necessary, additional usage instructions can be found
in this file.

Installing Builds
Builds distributed for Windows-based applications use a Windows installation procedure with a
standard SETUP.EXE program to actually install the build. This procedure ensures that the
necessary files are registered with the system and that the uninstall utility can perform its task.

CAESAR II User's Guide

23

Introduction
Detecting/Checking Builds
When a build is ready to be released, Help > About CAESAR II is revised to reflect the build
level. To see which program modules have been modified, you can run an Intergraph CAS utility
program from within the program folder.
Diagnostics > Build Version scans each of the .EXE modules in the program folder and lists
the size, memory requirements, and build level for each file. A sample display from this utility is
shown below.

Archiving and Reinstalling an Older, Patched Version

When a new version of the software is released, what should be done with the old, existing
version? The distribution disks sent from Intergraph CAS should be saved. Additionally, any
builds obtained should be archived. This allows full usage of this version at some later time, if it
becomes necessary.
To reinstall an older version of the software, first install the software from the Intergraph CAS
CDs. Then, install the latest build. Each build includes the modifications made in all prior builds.

24

CAESAR II User's Guide

Introduction

Updates and License Types

You can identify CAESAR II update sets by their version number. The current release is Version
2013 R1 (6.10). Intergraph CAS schedules and distributes these updates periodically,
depending on their scope and necessity. The type of CAESAR II license that you have
determines whether you receive these updates. There are three types of CAESAR II licenses:
Full Run - Provides unlimited access to CAESAR II. Updates, maintenance, and support are
available on an annual basis.
Lease - Provides unlimited access to CAESAR II with updates, maintenance, and support
provided as long as the lease is in effect.
Limited Run - Provides 50 static or dynamic analyses of piping system models over an
unlimited period of time, but does not include program updates. Your license is upgraded, if
necessary, whenever you purchase a new set of 50 runs.
Intergraph CAS only ships the current version of CAESAR II, no matter which type of license
you purchase. Updates will be delivered on request to lease users and to full run users who
have a current support/maintenance contract.

CAESAR II User's Guide

25

Introduction

26

CAESAR II User's Guide

SECTION 2

Getting Started
This section explains the CAESAR II basic operation, and steps you through a quick static
piping analysis.
The main steps required to perform a static analysis are:
1. Starting CAESAR II (on page 27)
2. Create a new job (on page 28)
3. Piping Input generation (on page 29)
4. Model Error Checking (on page 32)
5. Building Load Cases (on page 33)
6. Run a static analysis (on page 33)
7. Static Output Review (on page 33)
A complete tutorial is provided in the CAESAR II Applications Guide.

In This Section
Starting CAESAR II ........................................................................ 27
Understanding Jobs ....................................................................... 28
Basic Operation ............................................................................. 28
Main Menu ..................................................................................... 34

Starting CAESAR II
1. Click Start > All Programs > Intergraph CAS > CAESAR II >
CAESAR II. You may
also have a CAESAR II icon on your desktop that you can use to start CAESAR II.
The main CAESAR II window displays.

This window contains the main menu and toolbar from which you select jobs and analysis
types, start analysis, and review output.
2. Click File > Set Default Data Directory.
The Default Data Directory Specification dialog box displays.

CAESAR II User's Guide

27

Getting Started
3. Define the folder to save your jobs and other CAESAR II data files. The default folder is
C:\ProgramData\Intergraph CAS\CAESAR II\version\Examples.
4. From the Language menu, select your language for the interface.
5. In Windows Explorer, go to C:\ProgramData\Intergraph CAS\CAESAR II\version\System.
6. Using a text editor, open Company.txt and specify your company name on the first line.
This will place your company name is the header of CAESAR II calculations.

Understanding Jobs
All CAESAR II analyses require a job name for identification purposes. All subsequent input,
analysis, or output reviews reference the job specified. You create a new job by selecting File >
New or by clicking New
on the main toolbar. You open an existing job by selecting File >
Open or by clicking Open
on the main toolbar.
After you have created or opened a job, the job name displays in the title bar of the main
CAESAR II window. Use the commands on the Input, Analysis, and Output menus to define,
analyze, and review your data.

Basic Operation
To help you get familiar with CAESAR II, we will step through a basic piping analysis.

Topics
Create a new job ............................................................................ 28
Piping Input generation .................................................................. 29
Model Error Checking .................................................................... 32
Building Load Cases ...................................................................... 33
Run a static analysis ...................................................................... 33
Static Output Review ..................................................................... 33

Create a new job

1. Click Start > All Programs > Intergraph ICAS > CAESAR II > CAESAR II
.
The CAESAR II main window displays.
2. Click File > New.
The New Job Name Specification dialog box displays.
3. In the Enter the name for the NEW job file box, type MyFirstPipingModel.
4. Select the Piping Input option.
5. In the Enter the data directory box, type C:\temp\CAESAR II.
You can put your job file in another folder if you want, just remember where and
substitute that folder for C:\temp\CAESAR II when needed.

28

CAESAR II User's Guide

Getting Started
6. Click OK.
The job is created and the job name displays in the main window title bar.

Next, the Review Current Units dialog box displays.

7. Review the units listed in the dialog box, and then click OK.
The Piping Input window displays.
You can use Input > Piping to activate the Piping Input window.

Piping Input generation

Model input generation consists of describing the piping elements and any external influences
(boundary conditions or loads) acting on those elements. Two node numbers identify each pipe
element end. Every pipe element also requires the specification of geometric, cross sectional,
and material data. One method of data entry is the Piping Spreadsheet.
You define a piping element on its own spreadsheet. Some data, when defined on a piping
element, is automatically duplicated by CAESAR II to subsequent piping spreadsheets. This
means that for many elements you only have to confirm the node numbers and enter the
delta-dimensions, and then CAESAR II automatically duplicates from the previous element the
other data such as pipe diameter, operating temperatures, material type, and so forth. You can
always enter specific data to override the duplicated data in the piping spreadsheet for an
element.
The menus, toolbars, and accelerators offer a number of additional commands to enter auxiliary
processors or use special modelers or databases. The commands and general input instructions
of the piping spreadsheet are discussed in detail in Piping Input Reference (on page 89).
1. In the DX box, type 10-0 (which is 10 ft).
2. In the Diameter box, type 8 (8-in. nominal).
CAESAR II automatically converts this value to the actual diameter.
3. In the Wt/Sch box, type S (standard schedule pipe wall).
CAESAR II automatically converts this to wall thickness.
4. In the Temp 1 box, type 600 (degrees Fahrenheit).
5. In the Pressure 1 box, type 150 (psig).
6. Double-click the Bend check box.
The Bends tab displays.

CAESAR II User's Guide

29

Getting Started
This adds a long radius bend at the end of the element, and adds intermediate nodes 18
and 19 at the near weld and mid-points of the bend, respectively (node 20 physically
represents the far weld point of the bend).

7. Double-click the Restraint check box.

The Restraint tab displays.

30

CAESAR II User's Guide

Getting Started
8. In the first Node box, type 10, and then select ANC from the first Type drop list.

9. Select A106 B from the Material drop list.

This selection fills in the material parameters such as density and modulus elasticity.
10. Double-click the Allowable Stress check box.
The Allowable Stresses tab displays.
11. Select the B31.3 code from the Code drop list.
Allowable stresses for the given material, temperature, and code display automatically.
12. In the Fluid Den 1 box, type 0.85SG (0.85 specific gravity).
The software automatically converts this value to density.
13. After you finish defining the first element, you need to move to the next element. You can do
this by pressing Alt-C, by clicking Continue
, or by selecting Edit > Continue from the
menu.
Node numbers are automatically generated in the From and To boxes and data is carried
forward from the previous element.
14. In the DY box, type 10-0 (10 feet).
15. Double-click the Restraint check box.
16. In the first Node box, type 30, and then select ANC from the first Type drop list.
The two-element model (a well-defined configuration anchored at each end) is complete.

CAESAR II User's Guide

31

Getting Started
The piping input preprocessor has an interactive graphics and a list view function to make model
editing and verification easier. You can verify your model using the Graphics or List utilities,
although a combination of both modes is recommended. By default, the graphics screen
displays to the right of the input spreadsheet. You can click the small pin in the upper-left corner
to collapse the input spreadsheet to provide maximum graphic space.

Model Error Checking

When you are finished modeling, you must run File > Error Check
before you can run an
analysis.
The two main functions of this error check are to verify your input data by checking each
individual piping element for consistency and to build the execution data files used by the
analysis and review processes.
Errors that will prevent the analysis from running (such as a corrosion allowance greater than
the wall thickness) are flagged as fatal errors and display in red text. Unusual items (such as a
change of direction without a bend or intersection) are flagged as warnings and display in green
text. Other informational messages that may show intermediate calculations or general notes
display in blue text. All messages display in the Errors and Warnings tab next to the model
graphics.
When you double-click an error or warning message, CAESAR II displays the spreadsheet of
the associated element and highlights the element in the graphic display. You can sort error

32

CAESAR II User's Guide

Getting Started
messages by clicking the column titles. Use File > Print
to print the entire error report or
selected sections. Use the options arrow on the Error Check icon to display only fatal errors or
all errors.
If there is a fatal error, you must return to the input module to make corrections. Click the
Classic Piping Input tab or double-click the row number for the error message.
If the error check process completes without fatal errors, a center of gravity report displays, the
analysis data files are generated, and the solution phase can commence. If fatal errors do exist,
the analysis data files are not generated and the solution phase cannot begin. You must make
corrections and rerun the Error Checker until successful before analysis is permitted.

Building Load Cases

After the analysis data files have been created by the error checker, you can run a static
analysis. The first step of a static analysis is to define the load cases. For new jobs (there are no
previous solution files available), the static analysis module recommends load cases to you
based on the load types encountered in the input file. These recommended load cases are
usually sufficient to satisfy the piping code requirements for the Sustained and Expansion load
cases. If the recommended load cases are not satisfactory, you can modify them.
1. From the Piping Input window, select Edit > Edit Static Load Cases
.
The Static Analysis dialog box displays.
2. You can build loads two ways:
Combine the load components defined in the input (weight, displacements, thermal
cases, and so forth) into load cases (basic cases), or
Combine pre-existing load cases into new load cases (combination cases).
3. Build the basic cases by selecting one or more load components in the Loads Defined in
Input list and then dragging and dropping them to the Load Cases list to the right. You can
also type on any of the individual load case lines. Stress types (indicating which code
equations should be used to calculate and check the stresses) are selected from the Stress
Type list.
Combination cases, if needed, must follow the basic cases. You can build combination
cases by selecting one or more load components and the dragging and dropping the basic
load cases from earlier in the load case list to combine cases (or blank load cases) later in
the list.
You can have a maximum of 999 static load cases. For more information, see Static
Analysis Dialog Box (on page 456).

Run a static analysis

After the load cases are defined, you can run the analysis.
1. Select File > Batch Run
to run the actual finite element solution.
The analysis creates the element stiffness matrices and load vectors and solves for
displacements, forces and moments, reactions, and stresses. The analysis also performs
the design and selection of spring hangers and iterative stiffness matrix modifications for
nonlinear restraints. Finally, the Static Output Processor window displays.

Static Output Review

When the analysis is finished, you can review the results using the Static Output Processor
window.

CAESAR II User's Guide

33

Getting Started
1. On the main CAESAR II window, select Output > Static.
The Static Output Processor window displays.
2. In the Load Case Analyzed list, select one or more load cases for which to review results.
3. In the Standard Reports list, select one or more reports to review.
4. Click --> Add.
5. Select where you want to view the results: the screen, Microsoft Word or Excel, the printer,
or an ASCII file.
6. Click Finish to view the reports.
7. Click Options > Graphical Output to review the analytic results in graphics mode, which
can produce displaced shapes, stress distributions, and restraint actions.
The actual study of the results depends on the purpose of each load case and the reason for the
analysis. Usually the review checks that the system stresses are below their allowables,
restraint loads are acceptable, and displacements are not excessive. Additional post processing
(such as equipment, nozzle, and structural steel checks) might be required depending on the
model and type of analysis.
After you finish reviewing the output, return to the main window by exiting the output review
module.

Main Menu
After starting CAESAR II, the main menu and toolbar appear. Keep this window as small as
possible to conserve screen space.

Topics
File Menu ....................................................................................... 34
Input Menu ..................................................................................... 36
Analysis Menu ............................................................................... 36
Output Menu .................................................................................. 37
Tools Menu .................................................................................... 37
Diagnostics Menu .......................................................................... 38
ESL Menu ...................................................................................... 38
View Menu ..................................................................................... 38
Help Menu...................................................................................... 38

34

CAESAR II User's Guide

Getting Started

File Menu
The File menu is used to create and save piping and structural jobs.

Topics
Set Default Data Directory ............................................................. 35
New ................................................................................................ 35
Open .............................................................................................. 35

Set Default Data Directory

Sets the default data (project) directory without selecting a specific job file. Some CAESAR II
options do not require that a job be selected but must know in which directory to work. All
CAESAR II generated data files are written to this directory. Click File > Set Default Data
Directory on the main menu to activate the Default Data Directory Specification dialog box.
Click Examples to set the default data directory to the examples directory delivered with
CAESAR II.

The data directory specification is very important because any configuration, units, or
other data files found in that directory are considered to be local to that job.

New
Starts a new piping or structural job. Click File > New
Job Name Specification dialog box.

on the main menu to activate the New

New Job Name Specification Dialog Box

Controls parameters for creating a new CAESAR II job.
Enter the name for the NEW job file - Specifies the job name.
Piping Input - Indicates that the job is a piping job.
Structural Input - Indicates that the job is a structural job.
Enter the data directory - Specifies the location of the job file. You can type the directory into
the field, or click the browse button to browse to the directory.

Open
Opens an existing piping or structural job. Click File > Open
on the main menu to activate
the Open dialog box. Use the Open dialog box to browse to and select the job file to open. Click
System to jump to the CAESAR II system folder. Click Example to jump to the CAESAR II
delivered example jobs folder.

CAESAR II User's Guide

35

Getting Started
You can also roll-back to a previous revision of a piping input job using the Open dialog box.
CAESAR II saves the last 25 revisions, deleting the oldest revision when necessary.
1. Click File > Open.
2. Browse to and then select the piping input job to roll-back.
3. In the Previous Revisions list in the bottom-right corner of the Open dialog box, select the
revision to rollback to.

4. Click Open.
The software asks you to confirm restoring the selected backup.
5. Click Yes to restore the previous revision.

Input Menu
The Input menu is used to select the modules to define the job input parameters. Piping and
Underground are available for piping jobs. Structural Steel is available for structural jobs.
Piping - Defines piping job parameters. For more information, see Piping Input Reference (on
page 89).
Underground - Converts an existing piping model to buried pipe. For more information, see
Buried Pipe Modeler (on page 411).
Structural Steel - Defines structural steel for the job. For more information, see Structural Steel
Modeler (on page 325).

Analysis Menu
The Analysis menu displays the available calculations in CAESAR II.
Statics - Performs Static analysis of pipe or structure. The command is available after error
checking the input files. For more information, see Static Analysis Dialog Box (on page 456).
Dynamics - Performs Dynamic analysis of pipe or structure. The command is avail\-able after
error checking the input files. For more information, see Dynamic Analysis (on page 527).

36

CAESAR II User's Guide

Getting Started
SIFs - Displays scratch pads used to calculate stress intensification factors at intersections and
bends. For more information, see Intersection Stress Intensification Factors (on page 676) and
Bend Stress Intensification Factors (on page 682).
WRC 107(537)/297 - Calculates stresses in vessels due to attached piping. For more
information, see WRC 107 Vessel Stresses (see "WRC Bulletin 107(537)" on page 691).
Flanges - Performs flange stress and leakage calculations. For more information, see Flange
Leakage/Stress Calculations (on page 694).
B31.G - Estimates pipeline remaining life. For more information, see Pipeline Remaining
Strength Calculations (B31G) (on page 712).
Expansion Joint Rating - Evaluates expansion joints using EJMA equations. For more
information, see Expansion Joint Rating (on page 717).
AISC - Performs AISC code check on structural steel elements.
NEMA SM23 - Evaluates piping loads on steam turbine nozzles.
API 610 - Evaluates piping loads on centrifugal pumps.
API 617 - Evaluates piping loads on compressors.
API 661 - Evaluates piping loads on air-cooled heat exchangers.
HEI Standard - Evaluates piping loads on feedwater heaters.
API 560 - Evaluates piping loads on fired heaters.

Output Menu
The Output menu lists all available output of piping or structural calculations that can be
selected for review.
Static - Displays the results of a static analysis. For more information, see Static Output
Processor Window (see "Static Output Processor" on page 483).
Harmonic - Displays Harmonic Loading results.
Spectrum Modal - Displays Natural Frequency/Mode Shape calculations or Uni\-form/Force
Spectrum Loading results.
Time History - Displays Time History Load Simulation results.
Animation - Displays Animated Graphic simulations of any of the above results.

Tools Menu
The Tools menu activates various CAESAR II supporting utilities.
Configure/Setup - The CAESAR.cfg configuration file contains directives that dictate how
CAESAR II will operate on a particular computer and how it will perform a particular analysis.
Each time that you open the software, it searches for this configuration file in the current data
folder. If the configuration file is not found in the current data folder, the software then searches
the CAESAR II system folder. If the configuration file is not found in either location, a fatal error
is generated and CAESAR II exits. For more information, see Configuration and Environment
(on page 41).
Calculator - Launches an on-screen calculator.
Create/Review Units - Creates custom sets of units or lets you review the units configuration.
For more information, see Create/Review Units (on page 902).
Change Model Units - Converts an existing input file to a new set of units. For more
information, see Change Model Units (on page 904).

CAESAR II User's Guide

37

Getting Started
Material Database - Edits or adds to the CAESAR II Material Database. For more information,
see Material Database (on page 905).
Accounting - Activates or customizes job accounting or generates accounting reports. For more
information, see Accounting (on page 895).
Multi-Job Analysis - Enables the user to run a stream of jobs without operator intervention. For
more information, see Batch Stream Processing (on page 900).
External Interfaces - Displays the interfaces to and from third party software (both CAD and
analytical). For more information, see External Interfaces (on page 913).
ISOGEN Isometrics - Starts CAESAR II Isometrics. For more information, see Generate Stress
Isometrics (see "Generate Stress Isometrics Overview" on page 647).
I-Configure - Starts I-Configure.
Explore System Folder - Opens the CAESAR II System folder.
Reset Layouts to Default - Restores all CAESAR II window layouts to the default positions. In
addition, all toolbar customizations are reset to the default state and your video driver is to
OpenGL.

Diagnostics Menu
The Diagnostics menu activates utilities to help troubleshoot problem installations.
CRC Check - Verifies program files are not corrupted.
Build Version - Determines the build version of CAESAR II files.
Error Review - Reviews description of CAESAR II errors.

ESL Menu
The ESL menu accesses utilities that interact with the External Software Lock (ESL). These
commands are disabled if you are using SmartPlant License Manager.
Show Data - Displays data stored on the ESL.
Access Codes - Allows runs to be added or other ESL changes, to be made either through Fax
or E-mail (in conjunction with option below).
Authorization Codes - See the Access Codes option.
Check ESL Driver - Verifies the location and version of the ESL.
Install ESL Driver - Installs the ESL Drivers.

View Menu
The View menu is used to enable and customize the status bar and all toolbars.
Toolbar - Displays or hides toolbars and allows you to customize toolbars.
Status Bar - Displays or hides the status bar at the bottom of the window.

Help Menu
The Help menu displays the available CAESAR II documentation.
Online Documentation - Displays CAESAR II documentation in HTML or PDF format.
Desktop (Online) Help - Launches Intergraph CAS online technical support.
Online Registration - Enables you to register electronically with Intergraph CAS. An active
internet connection is required.

38

CAESAR II User's Guide

Getting Started
Information - Provides information on the best ways to contact Intergraph CAS personnel for
technical support and provides internet links for Intergraph CAS downloads and information.
Check for Upgrades - Enables you to verify the most current version of CAESAR II is installed.
About CAESAR II - Displays CAESAR II version and copyright information.
Throughout CAESAR II context-sensitive, on-screen help is available by clicking ? or pressing
[F1] while the cursor is in any input field. A help screen displays showing a discussion and the
required units, if applicable.

CAESAR II User's Guide

39

Getting Started

40

CAESAR II User's Guide

SECTION 3

Configuration and Environment

This section discusses the configuration options that are available.

In This Section
CAESAR II Configuration File Generation ..................................... 41
Computational Control ................................................................... 43
Database Definitions ...................................................................... 48
FRP Pipe Properties ...................................................................... 54
Geometry Definitions ..................................................................... 57
Graphic Settings ............................................................................ 60
Miscellaneous Options ................................................................... 72
SIFs and Stresses ......................................................................... 76
Set/Change Password ................................................................... 87

CAESAR II Configuration File Generation

The CAESAR.cfg configuration file contains instructions that dictate how CAESAR II operates
on a particular computer and how it performs a particular analysis. Each time that you open the
software, it searches for this configuration file in the current data directory and uses it to perform
the analysis.
If the configuration file is not found in the current data directory, the software then
searches the installation folder. If the configuration file is not found in either location, a fatal error
is generated and CAESAR II exits.
The CAESAR.cfg file may vary from computer to computer, and many of the
configuration spreadsheet values modify the analysis. To produce identical results between
computers, use the same configuration file. Make a copy of the setup file to be archived with
input and output data so that identical reruns can be made. The units file, if it is modified, must
also be identical if the same results are to be produced.

View the current CAESAR.cfg file

1. To display the CAESAR.cfg file, click Tools > Configure/Setup.
Alternatively, you can click Configure
on the toolbar.
The CAESAR II Configuration Editor window displays. The attributes for Computational
Control display.
In the left-hand pane, the configuration spreadsheets categories display.
In the right-hand pane, the configuration spreadsheet values for that category display.
The Data Directory displays the path where the current configuration file is stored.
2. Click the title in the Categories pane to navigate to the appropriate configuration
spreadsheets.
3. Click the X in the right-hand corner to exit.

CAESAR II User's Guide

41

Configuration and Environment

Create a new CAESAR.cfg file
1. Click Tools > Configure/Setup to display the CAESAR.cfg file.
Alternatively, you can click Configure
on the toolbar.
The CAESAR II Configuration Editor window displays. The attributes for Computational
Control display.
2. Click Save and Exit

located in the top-left corner of the Configuration Editor window.

Change the current CAESAR.cfg file for this computer

1. To display the CAESAR.cfg file, click Tools > Configure/Setup.
Alternatively, you can click Configure
on the toolbar.
The CAESAR II Configuration Editor window displays. The attributes for Computational
Control display.
2. Click the description to change a value for a configuration attribute,
A drop-down menu which contains the possible values for the attribute displays.
3. Select a new value.
The new value displays in bold text.
4. Continue changing values until you are finished.
5. Click Save and Exit

located in the top-left corner of the Configuration Editor window.

Reset the current CAESAR.cfg file to the default settings

Click Alt D to reset an individual field value in the current configuration file to its default
value.
Click Reset All -> Set Current Defaults to reset all the values for the current configuration
file to the default values.
1. Click Tools > Configure/Setup to display the CAESAR.cfg file.
Alternatively, you can click Configure
on the toolbar.
The CAESAR II Configuration Editor window displays. The attributes for Computational
Control display.
2. Click the Reset All drop-down menu.
The various default file options display.
3. Select your desired default file.
The values in left-hand pane change to the default values. Values change to normal text
from bold text.
4. Save the changes.
The following section explains each of the CAESAR II configuration file Category options.

42

CAESAR II User's Guide

Configuration and Environment

Computational Control
The Computational Control category provides access to the following groups of configuration
settings:
Convergence Tolerances (on page 43)
Input Spreadsheet Defaults (on page 45)
Miscellaneous (on page 47)

Figure 1: Computation Control Configuration Settings

Convergence Tolerances
Topics
Decomposition Singularity Tolerance ............................................ 44
Friction Angle Variation .................................................................. 44
Friction Normal Force Variation ..................................................... 44
Friction Slide Multiplier ................................................................... 44
Friction Stiffness ............................................................................ 44
Rod Increment (Degrees) .............................................................. 45
Rod Tolerance (Degrees) .............................................................. 45

CAESAR II User's Guide

43

Configuration and Environment

Decomposition Singularity Tolerance

Defines the value used by the software to check the ratio of off-diagonal to on-diagonal
coefficients in the row. The default value is 1.0 e+10. If this ratio is greater than the
decomposition singularity tolerance, then a numerical error may occur. This problem does not
have to be associated with a system singularity. This condition can exist when very small, and/or
long pipes are connected to very short, and/or large pipes. These solutions have several general
characteristics:
When computer precision errors of this type occur, they are very local in nature. They
typically affect only a single element or very small part of the model and are readily
noticeable upon inspection.
The 1E10 limit can be increased to 1E11 or 1E12 and still provide a reasonable check on
solution accuracy. Any solution computed after increasing the limit should always be
checked closely for reasonableness. At 1E11 or 1E12, the number of significant figures in
the local solution is reduced to two or three.
Although the 1E10 limit can be increased to 1E20 or 1E30 to get the job to run, it is
important to remember that the possibility for a locally errant solution exists when stiffness
ratios are allowed to get this high. Solutions should be carefully checked.

Friction Angle Variation

Specifies the friction sliding angle variation. The default value is 15-degrees.
This parameter had more significance in software versions prior to 2.1. It is currently only
used in the first iteration when a restraint goes from the non-sliding to sliding state. All
subsequent iterations compensate for the angle variation automatically.

Friction Normal Force Variation

Defines the amount of variation in the normal force that is permitted before an adjustment is
made in the sliding friction force. The default value is 0.15, or 15 percent. Normally, you should
not adjust this value.

Friction Slide Multiplier

Specifies the internal friction sliding force multiplier.
You should never adjust this value unless you are instructed to do so by Intergraph
CAS Support.

Friction Stiffness
Specifies the friction restraint stiffness.
The default value for the friction restraint stiffness is 1.0E+06 lb/in.
If the structural load normal to a friction restraint is less than the restraint load multiplied by the
coefficient of friction, the pipe will not move at this support this restraint node is "non-sliding."
To model the non-sliding state, stiffnesses are inserted in the two directions perpendicular to the
restraint's line of action to oppose any sliding motion.
Nonlinear convergence problems may be alleviated by reducing the friction restraint stiffness.
Lower friction stiffness will more readily distribute friction loads throughout the system and allow
nonlinear convergence. However, this lower stiffness affects the accuracy of the results. Lower

44

CAESAR II User's Guide

Configuration and Environment

stiffness values permit more "non-sliding" movement, but given the indeterminate nature of the
friction problem in general, this error may not be crucial.

Rod Increment (Degrees)

Specifies the maximum amount of angular change that any one support can experience
between iterations. For difficult-to-converge problems, values of 0.1 have proven effective.
When small values are used, you should be prepared for a large number of iterations. The total
number of iterations can be estimated from the following:
Estimate number of Iterations = 1.5(x)/(r)/(Rod Increment)
Where:
x = maximum horizontal displacement at any one rod
r = rod length at that support

Rod Tolerance (Degrees)

Specifies the angular plus-or-minus permitted convergence error. Unless the change from
iteration n to iteration n+1 is less than this value, the rod will not converge. The default value is
1.0 degree.
For systems subject to large horizontal displacements, values of 5.0 degrees for
convergence tolerances have been used successfully.

Input Spreadsheet Defaults

Topics
Alpha Tolerance ............................................................................. 45
Coefficient of Friction (Mu) ............................................................. 45
Default Rotational Restraint Stiffness ............................................ 45
Default Translational Restraint Stiffness ....................................... 46
Hanger Default Restraint Stiffness ................................................ 46
Minimum Wall Mill Tolerance (%) .................................................. 46
New Job Ambient Temperature ..................................................... 46
New Job Bourdon Pressure ........................................................... 46

Alpha Tolerance
Indicates the breakpoint at which CAESAR II decides that the entry in the Temp fields on the
input spreadsheet is a thermal expansion coefficient or a temperature. The default value is 0.05.
Any entry in the Temp fields whose absolute magnitude is less than 0.05 is taken to be a
thermal expansion coefficient in terms of inches per inch (dimensionless).

Coefficient of Friction (Mu)

Specifies the value that is applied by default as the coefficient of friction to all translational
restraints. If you enter 0, which is the default value, no friction is applied.

Default Rotational Restraint Stiffness

Defines the value used for non-specified rotational restraint stiffnesses. By default this value is
assumed to be (1.0E12 in-lb/deg).

CAESAR II User's Guide

45

Configuration and Environment

Default Translational Restraint Stiffness

Defines the value used for non-specified translational restraint stiffnesses. By default this value
is assumed to be (1.0E12 lb./in).

Hanger Default Restraint Stiffness

Defines the value used for computing the hanger restrained weight loads. Where hangers are
adjacent to other supports or are themselves very close, such as where there are two hangers
on either side of a trunnion support, the CAESAR II hanger design algorithm may generate
poorly distributed hot hanger loads in the vicinity of the close hangers. Using a more flexible
support for computing the hanger restrained weight loads often allows the design algorithm to
more effectively distribute the systems weight. A typical entry is 50,000 lbs/in.; the default value
is (1.0E12 lb/in).

Minimum Wall Mill Tolerance (%)

Specifies the default percentage of wall thickness allowed for mill and other mechanical
tolerances.
For most piping codes, this value is only used during the minimum wall thickness
computation. Mill tolerance is usually not considered in the flexibility analysis.
The default value is 12.5, corresponding to a 12.5% tolerance. To eliminate mill tolerance
consideration, set Minimum Wall Mill Tolerance (%) to 0.0.

New Job Ambient Temperature

Represents the installed, or zero expansion, strain state. The default ambient temperature for all
elements in the system is 70F/21C.
This value is only used to initialize the ambient temperature input field for new jobs.
Changing this configuration value will not affect existing jobs. To change the ambient
temperature for an existing job, use the Ambient Temperature (on page 259) field in the Piping
Input Special Execution Parameters dialog box.

New Job Bourdon Pressure

Specifies the type of Bourdon pressure effect used. The Bourdon effect causes straight pipe to
elongate and bends to open up translationally along a line connecting the curvature end points.
If the Bourdon effect is disabled, there will be no global displacements due to pressure.
None - Disables the Bourdon effect. There will be no global displacements due to pressure.
Trans Only - Includes only translation effects (Bourdon Pressure Option #1).
Trans + Rot - Includes translational and rotational effects on bends. This option may apply
for bends that are formed or rolled from straight pipe, where the bend-cross section will be
slightly oval due to the bending process. (Bourdon Pressure Option #2)

46

For straight pipe, Bourdon Pressure Option #1 is the same as Bourdon Pressure Option #2.
For elbows, Bourdon Pressure Option #1 should apply for forged and welded fittings where
the bend cross-section can be considered essentially circular.
The Bourdon effect (Trans only) is always considered when FRP pipe is used, regardless
of the actual setting of the Bourdon flag.

CAESAR II User's Guide

Configuration and Environment

Miscellaneous
Topics
Bend Axial Shape .......................................................................... 47
Ignore Spring Hanger Stiffness...................................................... 47
Include Insulation in Hydrotest....................................................... 47
Include Spring Stiffness in Hanger OPE Travel Cases ................. 47
Incore Numerical Check ................................................................ 47
Missing Mass ZPA ......................................................................... 48
Use Pressure Stiffening on Bends ................................................. 48
WRC-107 Interpolation Method ..................................................... 48
WRC-107(537) Version ................................................................. 48

Bend Axial Shape

Controls whether the displacement mode is ignored. For bends 45-degrees or smaller, a major
contributor to deformation can be the axial displacement of the short-arched pipe. With the axial
shape function disabled, this displacement mode is ignored and the bend will be stiffer.

Ignore Spring Hanger Stiffness

Indicates whether the software uses the stiffness of spring hangers in the analysis. The default
setting is False, meaning that the software does not ignore the stiffness of spring hangers.
Setting this option to True is consistent with hand computation methods of spring hanger
design, which ignores the effects of the springs.
Intergraph CAS recommends that you never change this value.

Include Insulation in Hydrotest

Controls whether the weight of any insulation and cladding will be considered in the hydrotest
case. To ignore the insulation and cladding in the hydrotest case, select False (the default
setting). To include the weight of insulation and cladding in the hydrotest case, select True.

Include Spring Stiffness in Hanger OPE Travel Cases

Controls how the software handles spring hangers. If you select True, the software places the
designed spring stiffness into the Hanger Operating Travel Case and iterates until the system
balances. This iteration scheme therefore considers the effect of the spring hanger stiffness on
the thermal growth of the system (vertical travel of the spring). If this option is used, it is very
important that the hanger load in the cold case (in the physical system) be adjusted to match the
reported hanger cold load.
If you select False, spring hangers are designed the traditional way.

Incore Numerical Check

Enables the incore solution module to test the solution stability for the current model and
loadings. This option, if selected, adds the solution of an extra load case to the analysis.

CAESAR II User's Guide

47

Configuration and Environment

Missing Mass ZPA

Indicates which spectrum value CAESAR II uses. If you select Extracted (the default setting),
the software will use the spectrum value at the last "extracted" mode. Changing this value to
Spectrum instructs CAESAR II to use the last spectrum value as the ZPA for the missing mass
computations.

Use Pressure Stiffening on Bends

Controls whether CAESAR II includes pressure stiffening effects in those codes that do not
explicitly require its use. In these cases, pressure stiffening effects will apply to all bends,
elbows, and both miter types. In all cases, the pressure used is the maximum of all pressures
defined for the element.
Pressure stiffening effects are defined in Appendix D of B31.1 and B31.3.
When set to Default, the software considers the pressure stiffening of bends according to the
active piping code.

WRC-107 Interpolation Method

Specifies the interpolation method used by the software. The curves in WRC Bulletin 107 cover
typical applications of nozzles in vessels or piping; however, should any of the interpolation
parameters, such as U, Beta, and so forth, fall outside the limits of the available curves, then
CAESAR II uses the last curve value in the appropriate WRC table.

WRC-107(537) Version
Sets the version of the WRC-107(537) bulletin used in the computations. Valid options are:
Aug'65 - August 1965
Mar'79 - March 1979
March '79 1B1/2B1 - March 1979 with the 1B1-1 and 2B-1 off axis curves. This is the
default setting.
In 2010, WRC Bulletin 537 was released. According to the foreword of WRC Bulletin
537, "WRC 537 provides exactly the same content in a more useful and clear format. It is not an
update or a revision of 107." CAESAR II uses the graphs from Bulletin 107. Bulletin 537 simply
provides equations in place of the curves found in Bulletin 107.

48

CAESAR II User's Guide

Configuration and Environment

Database Definitions
The Database Definitions category provides access to the following groups of configuration
settings:
Databases (on page 49)
ODBC Settings (on page 53)

Databases
Topics
Alternate CAESAR II Distributed Data Path .................................. 50
Default Spring Hanger Table ......................................................... 50
Expansion Joints ............................................................................ 51
Load Case Template ..................................................................... 51
Piping Size Specification ............................................................... 51
Structural Database ....................................................................... 51
Units File Name ............................................................................. 51
User Material Database File Name ............................................... 52
Valve/Flange Data File Location .................................................... 53
Valves and Flanges ....................................................................... 53

CAESAR II User's Guide

49

Configuration and Environment

Alternate CAESAR II Distributed Data Path

Specifies which system folder will remain active. Select a folder in the list.
Because the CAESAR.cfg file is written to the local data folder, you can configure different data
folders to reference different system folders. All of the system folders contain formatting files,
units files, text files, and other user-configurable data files. Some of these formatting files are
language or code-specific. Therefore, you may want to switch between system folders
depending on the current job.
System folder names must use the following naming convention: SYSTEM.xxx, where .xxx, is a
three-character suffix identifying the folder. You can create as many system folders as needed
below the CAESAR II installation folder, presuming you follow the required naming convention.
Any folders so named and located display in the Alternate CAESAR II Distributed Data Path
list.

There must be a primary system folder, named System, in which the software can place
accounting, version, and diagnostic files that it creates during execution. The location of the
primary system folder is dependent on the specific edition of the Windows Operating System
as follows:
Windows XP
"C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\INTERGRAPH CAS\CAESAR
II\x.xx\System"
Windows Vista
"C:\Program Data\INTERGRAPH CAS, Inc\CAESAR II\x.xx\System"
Windows 7
"C:\Program Data\INTERGRAPH CAS, Inc\CAESAR II\x.xx\System"
For versions 5.30 and later, x.xx in each of the above sample paths represents the
CAESAR II version number.
The CAESAR II distribution CD contains language files for English, French, German, and
Spanish. These formatting files can be installed in separate system folders, with an
appropriate suffix, to allow switching between languages.
The secondary system folders are only referenced for language and formatting files.

Default Spring Hanger Table

Defines the value of the default spring hanger table, which is referenced during the spring
hanger design stage of the solution. The software includes tables from more than 30 different
vendors.

50

CAESAR II User's Guide

Configuration and Environment

Expansion Joints
Specifies which expansion joint database the software should reference during subsequent input
sessions. Available databases provided include Pathway, Senior Flexonics, IWK, Piping
Technology, and China.

Load Case Template

Specifies which load case template is active. The active template file is used to recommend load
cases.

Because the CAESAR.cfg file is written to the local data folder, you can configure different
data directories to reference different template files.
The software first searches for template files in the local data folder, followed by the active
System folder.

Piping Size Specification

Specifies the piping specification standard. Select one of the following standards: ANSI
(American National Standard), JIS (Japanese Industrial Standard), or DIN (German Standard).
By default, the software uses the ANSI pipe size and schedule tables in the input processor.

Structural Database
Specifies which database file is used to acquire the structural steel shape labels and cross
section properties. Select one of the following: AISC 1977, AISC 1989, German 1991, South
African 1991, Korean 1990, Australian 1990, United Kingdom, or China.

Units File Name

Specifies which of the available units files is active. The active units file is used for new job
creation and all output generation.

Because the CAESAR.cfg file is written to the local data directory, you can configure
different data directories to reference different units files.
The software first searches for units files in the local data directory, followed by the active
System directory.

CAESAR II User's Guide

51

Configuration and Environment

User Material Database File Name

Specifies which user material database (UMD) file the software will access. By default, when
you add to or modify the supplied material database, the changes are saved to a file named
umat1.umd, which is located in the \System folder.
Versions of CAESAR II prior to 5.30 used the name umat1.bin. This file can be copied,
then renamed, if necessary, to umat1.umd.
In some cases, it may be necessary to manipulate several UMD files. This can occur if UMD
files are acquired from different sources. Because a specific file name can only be used once, it
will be necessary to rename any additional UMD files. As long as the file suffix is UMD, and the
file resides in the \System folder, the various CAESAR II modules will be able to access them.
Material database files are accessed as described below:
Piping Input and Analysis
The CAESAR II supplied material database (cmat.bin) is read.
The specified user material database (UMD) is read. Updated materials in the UMD file are
used in place of those from the CAESAR II supplied database.
The Material Database Editor
The CAESAR II supplied material database (cmat.bin) is read.
The specified user material database (UMD) is read. Updated materials in the UMD file are
used in place of those from the CAESAR II supplied database.
Any changes or additions are saved to the specified user material database (UMD).

Create a New UMD File

1. Open the Configuration Editor and click Database Definitions.
2. In User Material File Name, type in a new name.

The UMD suffix should not be changed.

The file name plus the period plus the UMD suffix should not exceed 15 characters.
Do not use spaces (blanks) in the file name.

3. Before exiting the Configuration Editor, click Save and Exit

to save the modified
configuration.
4. When you open the Piping Input or the Material Database Editor, the new UMD file will be
created.

52

CAESAR II User's Guide

Configuration and Environment

Valve/Flange Data File Location

Defines where CAESAR II looks for the valve/flange data file. The possible settings for this
directive are:
CAESARII Directory - Directs the software to look for the valve/flange data files in the
CAESAR II folders below %allusersprofile%.
Specs in CII, Data in CW - Directs the software to look for the specification files in the
CAESAR II folders below %allusersprofile%, but to look for the actual data files in the
CADWorx folders.
CADWorx Directory - Directs the software to look for the valve/flange data files in the
CADWorx folders.

Valves and Flanges

Specifies which valve/flange database should be referenced by CAESAR II during subsequent
input sessions. The available databases are:
GENERIC.VHD - Reference a generic database.
CRANE.VHD - Reference the Crane database.
NOFLANGE.VHD - Reference a database (generic) without attached flanges.
CADWORKX.VHD - Reference the CADWorx Plant database.

ODBC Settings
Topics
Append Reruns to Existing Data.................................................... 53
Enable Data Export to ODBC-Compliant Databases .................... 53
ODBC Compliant Database Name ................................................ 54

Append Reruns to Existing Data

Controls how the software handles data from multiple runs.
False - Overwrite data from previous runs in the ODBC database. This is the default setting.
True - Add new data to the database, thus storing multiple runs of the same job in the
database.

Enable Data Export to ODBC-Compliant Databases

Turns on or off the capability to create ODBC-compliant databases for static output.

CAESAR II User's Guide

53

Configuration and Environment

ODBC Compliant Database Name

Enter the name of the ODBC project database. All jobs run in this data folder will write their
output to the database specified here.

FRP Pipe Properties

The FRP Properties category provides access to the following groups of configuration settings:
Material Properties (on page 54)
Settings (on page 56)

Material Properties
Topics
Axial Modulus of Elasticity ............................................................. 55
Axial Strain: Hoop Stress (Ea/Eh*Vh/a) ......................................... 55
FRP Alpha (xe-06) ......................................................................... 55
FRP Density ................................................................................... 55
FRP Laminate Type ....................................................................... 55
FRP Property Data File .................................................................. 56
Ratio Shear Modulus: Elastic Modulus .......................................... 56

54

CAESAR II User's Guide

Configuration and Environment

Axial Modulus of Elasticity

Displays the axial elastic modulus of fiberglass reinforced plastic pipe. This is the default value
used to set the data in the input processor. When necessary, you may override this value.

Axial Strain: Hoop Stress (Ea/Eh*Vh/a)

Displays the product of the ratio of the axial to the hoop elastic modulus and Poisson's ratio,
which relates the strain in the axial direction to a stress in the hoop direction.
Ea - Elastic modulus in the axial direction.
Eh - Elastic modulus in the hoop direction.
Vh/a - Poisson's ratio relating the strain in the axial direction due to a stress in the hoop
direction.

FRP Alpha (xe-06)

Enter the thermal expansion coefficient for the fiberglass reinforced plastic pipe used (multiplied
by 1,000,000). For example, if the value is 8.5E-6 in/in/deg, you will enter 8.5. The exponent
(E-6) is implied.
If a single expansion coefficient is too limiting for your application, the actual thermal
expansion may always be calculated at temperature in inches per inch (or mm per mm) and
entered directly into the Temperature field on the Pipe spreadsheet.

FRP Density
Displays the weight of the pipe material on a per unit volume basis. This field is used to set the
default weight density of FRP materials in the piping input module.

FRP Laminate Type

Specifies the default laminate type as defined in the BS 7159 code for the fiberglass reinforced
plastic pipe. Valid laminate types are:
CSM and Woven Roving - Chopped strand mat (CSM) and woven roving (WR)
construction with internal and external surface tissue reinforced layer.
CSM and Multi-filament - Chopped strand mat and multi-filament roving construction with
internal and external surface tissue reinforced layer.
CSM - All chopped strand mat construction with internal and external surface tissue
reinforced layer.
The software uses this entry to calculate the flexibility and stress intensity factors of bends;
therefore, this default entry may be overridden using the Type field on the bend auxiliary dialog
boxes.

CAESAR II User's Guide

55

Configuration and Environment

FRP Property Data File

Select the file from which the software will read the standard FRP material properties. After the
file is selected, the software will give you the option of reading in from that file.
You may create FRP material files as text files with the .frp extension; these files should be
stored in the CAESAR\System sub-folder. The format of the files must adhere to the format
shown in the following sample FRP data file:

The data lines must exactly follow the order shown in the above sample FRP data file.
The four data lines defining the UKOOA envelope are intended for future use and may be
omitted.

Ratio Shear Modulus: Elastic Modulus

Enter the ratio of the shear modulus to the modulus of elasticity (in the axial direction) of the
fiberglass reinforced plastic pipe used. For example, if the material modulus of elasticity (axial)
is 3.2E6 psi, and the shear modulus is 8.0E5 psi, the ratio of these two, 0.25, should be entered.

Settings
Topics
BS 7159 Pressure Stiffening.......................................................... 56
Exclude F2 from UKOOA Bending Stress ..................................... 57
Use FRP Flexibilities ...................................................................... 57
Use FRP SIF .................................................................................. 57

BS 7159 Pressure Stiffening

Displays the method used to calculate the effect of pressure stiffening on the bend SIFs. The BS
7159 code explicitly requires that the effect of pressure stiffening on the bend SIFs be calculated
using the design strain (this is based upon the assumption that the FRP piping is fully
pressurized to its design limit). This is the default method for CAESAR II.
When the piping is pressurized to a value much lower than its design pressure, it may be more
accurate to calculate pressure stiffening based on the actual pressure stress, rather than its
design strain.
This alternative method is a deviation from the explicit instructions of the BS 7159 code.

56

CAESAR II User's Guide

Configuration and Environment

Exclude F2 from UKOOA Bending Stress

Modifies the UKOOA requirements for axial bending stress. Some sources, such as Shell's DEP
31.40.10.19-Gen. (December 1998) and ISO/DIS 14692 suggest that, when using the UKOOA
code, the axial bending stress should not be multiplied by the Part Factor f2 (the System Factor
of Safety) prior to combination with the longitudinal pressure stress.
True - Modify the UKOOA requirements for axial bending stress.
False - Use the UKOOA exactly as written.

Use FRP Flexibilities

Controls the fitting flexibility factor used by the software.
True - Set the fitting flexibility factor to 1.0 when FRP pipe is selected (Material #20). This is
the default setting.
False - Apply the standard "code" flexibility factor equations to all FRP fittings.
If the BS 7159 or UKOOA Codes are in effect, code flexibility factors will always be used,
regardless of the setting of this directive.

Use FRP SIF

Controls the SIF used by the software.
True - Set the fitting SIF to 2.3 when FRP pipe is selected (Material #20). This is the default
setting.
False,- Apply the standard "code" SIF equations to all FRP fittings. Optionally, you can
manually enter an alternative value.
If the BS 7159 or UKOOA Codes are in effect, code SIFs will always be used, regardless
of the setting of this directive.

Geometry Definitions
The Geometry Directives category provides access to the following groups of configuration
settings:
Bends (on page 58)
Input Items (on page 59)

CAESAR II User's Guide

57

Configuration and Environment

Bends
Topics
Bend Length Attachment Percent .................................................. 58
Maximum Allowable Bend Angle ................................................... 58
Minimum Allowable Bend Angle .................................................... 58
Minimum Angle to Adjacent Bend.................................................. 59

Bend Length Attachment Percent

Controls the amount of accuracy included in the system dimensions around bends. The default
attachment is 1.0 percent.
Whenever the element leaving the tangent intersection of a bend is within (n)% of the bend
radius on either side of the weldline, CAESAR II inserts an element from the bend weldline to
the To node of the element leaving the bend. The inserted element has a length equal to exactly
(n)% of the bend radius. You can use Bend Length Attachment Percent to adjust this
percentage to reduce the error due to the inserted element; however, the length tolerance for
elements leaving the bend will also be reduced.

Maximum Allowable Bend Angle

Specifies the maximum angle CAESAR II will accept for a bend. The default value is
95-degrees.
Very large angles, short radius bends can cause numerical problems during solution. When you
have a reasonable radius and a large angle, problems rarely arise. However, if the large angle
bend plots well when compared to the surrounding elements, then the bend can probably be
used without difficulty. Well-proportioned bends up to 135-degrees have been tested without a
problem.

Minimum Allowable Bend Angle

Specifies the minimum angle CAESAR II will accept for a bend angle. The default value is 5.0
degrees.
Very small angles, short radius bends can cause numerical problems during solution. When you
have a reasonable radius and a small angle, problems rarely arise. However, if the small angle
bend is grossly small compared to the surrounding elements, then a different modeling
approach is recommended so that the bend is not used.

58

CAESAR II User's Guide

Configuration and Environment

Minimum Angle to Adjacent Bend

Controls the CAESAR II error checking tolerance for the "closeness" of points on the bend
curvature. The default value is 5.0-degrees.
Nodes on a bend curvature that are too close together can cause numerical problems during
solution. Where the radius of the bend is large, such as in a cross-country pipeline, it is not
uncommon to find nodes on a bend curvature closer than 5-degrees.

Input Items
Topics
Auto Node Number Increment ....................................................... 59
Connect Geometry Through CNodes ............................................ 59
Horizontal Thermal Bowing Tolerance .......................................... 59
Loop Closure Tolerance ................................................................ 60
Z-Axis Vertical ................................................................................ 60

Auto Node Number Increment

Sets the value for the Automatic Node Numbering routine. Any non-zero, positive value that you
enter is used to automatically assume the To node value on the piping input spreadsheets. The
new To node number is determined as:
"To Node" = "From Node" + Auto Node Number Increment
If this value is set to 0.0, automatic node numbering is disabled.

Connect Geometry Through CNodes

Controls whether each restraint, nozzle, or hanger exists at the same point in space as its
connecting node.
Restraints, flexible nozzles, and spring hangers may be defined with connecting nodes. By
default, CAESAR II ignores the position of the restraint node and the connecting node. They
may be at the same point, or they may be hundreds of feet apart. In many cases, enabling this
option will cause "plot-wise" disconnected parts of the system to be re-connected and to appear
as-expected in both input and output plots.

Horizontal Thermal Bowing Tolerance

Specifies the maximum slope of a straight pipe element for which thermal bowing effects will be
considered.
Thermal bowing is usually associated with fluid carrying horizontal pipes in which the fluid does
not fill the cross section. In these cases, there is a temperature differential across the cross
section. You can use Horizontal Thermal Bowing Tolerance to define the interpretation of
"horizontal." By default, the software uses a value of 0.0001 as the horizontal threshold value. If
a pipe elements pitch is less than this tolerance, the element is considered to be horizontal, and
thermal bowing loads can be applied to it. An elements pitch is computed using the following
formula:
2
2
2 1/2
PITCH = | DY | / ( DX + DY + DZ )

CAESAR II User's Guide

59

Configuration and Environment

Loop Closure Tolerance

Sets the loop closure tolerance used by CAESAR II for error checking. You can set this value
interactively for each job analyzed, or you can enter the desired loop closure tolerance using this
option and override the software default value of 1.0 in without distraction.

Z-Axis Vertical
Controls in which plane the Z-axis lies. By default, CAESAR II assumes the Y-axis is vertical
with the X- and Z-axes in the horizontal plane.
False - Place the Z-axis in the horizontal plane. This is the default setting.
True - Make the Z-axis vertical. The X- and Y-axes will be in the horizontal plane.
This setting applies only to jobs created after this setting is changed.

Graphic Settings
The Graphics Settings category provides access to configuration settings that used to set the
different plot option colors, font characteristics, and the view options.
Advanced Options - Contains options that should only be used by graphics experts. For
more information, see Advanced Options (on page 61).
Background Colors - Contains options that define the color of the plot window. For more
information, see Background Colors (on page 62).
Component Colors - Contains options that define the color for various components in the
plot. For more information, see Component Colors (on page 62).
Marker Options - Contains options that set the node marker color and size. For more
information, see Marker Options (on page 64).
Miscellaneous Options - Contains options that determine how graphics are displayed
either by default or when using the Reset Plot option. For more information, see
Miscellaneous Options (on page 64).
Output Colors - Contains options that set the colors used when plotting code stress in
output. For more information, see Output Colors (on page 67).
Text Options - Contains options for defining font, font style, font size, and color. Scripts are
supported. For more information, see Text Options (on page 69).
Visual Options - Contains options that control general plotting visibility. For more
information, see Visual Options (on page 70).

60

CAESAR II User's Guide

Configuration and Environment

To change a color, click it once and then click the ellipses button that appears to the right.
Select a color in the dialog box that appears, and then click OK. To save the color settings, click
Save and Exit
before closing the Configuration Editor.

Advanced Options
Topics
Backplane Culling .......................................................................... 61
Culling Maximum Extent ................................................................ 62
Use Culling Frustrum ..................................................................... 62

Backplane Culling
This setting should only be used by graphics experts. If you are experiencing difficulties with
your graphics, contact Intergraph CAS Support for assistance.

CAESAR II User's Guide

61

Configuration and Environment

Culling Maximum Extent

This setting should only be used by graphics experts. If you are experiencing difficulties with
your graphics, contact Intergraph CAS Support for assistance.

Use Culling Frustrum

This setting should only be used by graphics experts. If you are experiencing difficulties with
your graphics, contact Intergraph CAS Support for assistance.

Background Colors
Topics
Bottom ............................................................................................ 62
Top ................................................................................................. 62
Use Background Color ................................................................... 62

Bottom
Sets the color for the bottom of the plot window.

Top
Sets the color for the top of the plot window.

Use Background Color

Controls the background color. Set this option to True if you want the plot background to be one
uniform color instead of blending between the top and bottom colors.

Component Colors
Topics
Anchor CNode ............................................................................... 63
Anchors .......................................................................................... 63
Expansion Joints ............................................................................ 63
Flange ............................................................................................ 63
Hanger CNode ............................................................................... 63
Hangers ......................................................................................... 63
Nozzles .......................................................................................... 63
Pipes .............................................................................................. 63
Restraint CNode ............................................................................ 63
Restraints ....................................................................................... 63
Rigids ............................................................................................. 64
SIFs/Tees....................................................................................... 64
Steel ............................................................................................... 64

62

CAESAR II User's Guide

Configuration and Environment

Anchor CNode
Sets the color of Cnode anchors when displayed in the graphics.

Anchors
Sets the color of anchors when displayed in the graphics.

Expansion Joints
Sets the color of expansion joints when displayed in the graphics.

Flange
Sets the color of all flanges when displayed in the graphics.

Hanger CNode
Sets the color of Cnode hangers when displayed in the graphics.

Hangers
Sets the color of the spring hangers (and spring cans) when displayed in the graphics.

Nozzles
Sets the color of all nozzles when displayed in the graphics.

Pipes
Sets the color of all pipe elements when displayed in the graphics.

Restraint CNode
Sets the color of the restraint Cnode when displayed in the graphics.

Restraints
Sets the color of all restraints (except for anchors and hangers) when displayed in the graphics.

CAESAR II User's Guide

63

Configuration and Environment

Rigids
Sets the color of all rigid elements when displayed in the graphics.

SIFs/Tees
Sets the color of all tees when displayed in the graphics.

Steel
Sets the color of all structural steel elements in both the structural steel plot and the piping plot
when structural steel is included.

Marker Options
Topics
Marker Color .................................................................................. 64
Marker Size .................................................................................... 64

Marker Color
Sets the color of the node markers shown in the graphics.

Marker Size
Sets the size of the node markers shown in the graphics.

Miscellaneous Options
These options determine how graphics display by default or how they display when you use the
Reset Plot option while in the graphics.

Topics
Default Operator ............................................................................ 65
Default Projection Mode ................................................................ 65
Default Render Mode ..................................................................... 65
Default View ................................................................................... 65
Disable Graphic Tooltip Bubble ..................................................... 65
Force Black and White Printing ..................................................... 66
Idle Processing Count .................................................................... 66
Optimal Frame Rate ...................................................................... 66
Restore Previous Anchor Size ....................................................... 66
Restore Previous Hanger Size ...................................................... 66
Restore Previous Operator ............................................................ 66
Restore Previous Projection Mode ................................................ 67
Restore Previous Render Mode .................................................... 67
Restore Previous Restraint Size .................................................... 67
Restore Previous View .................................................................. 67
Video Driver ................................................................................... 67

64

CAESAR II User's Guide

Configuration and Environment

Default Operator
Controls the initial display of graphics. Available options are Zoom to Window, Annotate,
Orbit, Pan, Restore Previous, Select, and Zoom with Mouse. The default setting is Zoom to
Window.

Default Projection Mode

Specifies the projection of graphics in the software. You can select Orthographic, Perspective,
or Stretched. The default projection setting is Orthographic.

Default Render Mode

Specifies the render mode. Available options are Phong Shading, Centerline, Flat, Gouraud
Shading, Silhouette, Triangulated, and Wireframe, either with or without hidden lines. The
default render mode setting is Phong Shading.
Centerline and Silhouette are the fastest render modes and less memory intensive for
your computer graphics card.

Default View
Specifies the graphical view. Available options are SE Isometric, SW Isometric, NW Isometric,
NE Isometric, Top, Bottom, Front, Back, Left, Right, and Restore Previous. The default
view setting is SE Isometric.

Disable Graphic Tooltip Bubble

Enables or disables the tooltip bubble that displays information about the element that you
mouse over in the graphics view.
True - Tooltip bubble does not display.
False - Tooltip bubble displays.

CAESAR II User's Guide

65

Configuration and Environment

Force Black and White Printing

Controls printing output of graphics. If set to True, graphics are printed using only black and
white.

Idle Processing Count

Controls the number of objects the software is allowed to draw during a single idle cycle.
CAESAR II draws the model whenever your machine becomes idle, that is, whenever any
interaction between you and the computer ceases. For example, there may three or four idle
messages between keystrokes. On slower machines, it may increase performance to lower this
value, and vice versa.

Optimal Frame Rate

Determines how many times per second the software will re-draw the piping display when it is
being manipulated, such as when you are zooming, panning, or rotating the display. If you
experience graphics problems such as sluggishness during operations or large boxes being
drawn instead of the piping system display, lower this number.

Restore Previous Anchor Size

Returns the anchor size to its previous setting.
True - Restore the anchor size to its previous setting.
False - Use the default setting.

Restore Previous Hanger Size

Returns the hanger size to its previous setting.
True - Restore the hanger size to its previous setting.
False - Use the default setting.

Restore Previous Operator

Returns the operator to its previous setting.
True - Restore the operator to its previous setting.
False - Use the default setting.

66

CAESAR II User's Guide

Configuration and Environment

Restore Previous Projection Mode

Returns the projection mode to its previous state. Projection mode is either isometric or
orthographic.
True - Restore the projection mode to its previous setting.
False - Use the default setting.

Restore Previous Render Mode

Returns the render mode to its previous state.
Four render modes are available in CAESAR II: solids, wireframes, silhouette, and
centerline.
True - Restore the render mode to its previous setting.
False - Use the default setting.

Restore Previous Restraint Size

Returns the restraint size to its previous setting.
True - Restore the restraint size to its previous setting.
False - Use the default setting.

Restore Previous View

Returns the standard view to its previous setting.
The standard views are Front, Back, Top, Bottom, Left, Right, SW Isometric, SE
Isometric, NW Isometric and NE Isometric.
True - Restore the standard view to its previous setting.
False - Use the default setting.

Video Driver
Determines the video driver used in plotting. Select OpenGL, Direct 3D, or Windows Basic
Video.

Output Colors
Topics
Actual Stress Settings .................................................................... 68
Displaced Shape ............................................................................ 68
Percent Stress Settings ................................................................. 68

CAESAR II User's Guide

67

Configuration and Environment

Actual Stress Settings

Assigns a color to a specific level of stress. When plotting code stress in output, the software will
color the elements in terms of actual stress. The levels are currently set as follows:
Level

Actual Stress

Level 1

<10,000 psi

Level 2

10,000 to 15,000 psi

Level 3

15,000 to 20,000 psi

Level 4

20,000 to 25,000 psi

Level 5

25,000 to 30,000 psi

Level 6

> 30,000 psi

When plotting code stress in output, the software can also color elements in terms of
percent of code allowable. For more information, see Percent Stress Settings (on page 68).

Displaced Shape
Sets the color of the Displaced Shape option when displayed in output graphics.

Percent Stress Settings

Assigns a color to a specific level of stress. When plotting code stress in output, the software will
color the elements in terms of the percent of code allowable. The levels are currently set as
follows:
Level

Percent (of Code Allowable)

Stress

Level 1

< 20%

Level 2

20 to 40%

Level 3

40 to 60%

Level 4

60 to 80%

Level 5

80 to 100%

Level 6

>100%

When plotting code stress in output, the software can also color elements in terms of
actual stress. For more information, see Actual Stress Settings (on page 68).

68

CAESAR II User's Guide

Configuration and Environment

Text Options
You can use these options to select font, font style, and font size and color. Scripts are
supported. The different plot texts are node numbers and names, annotation, and legends.

Topics
Annotation Text .............................................................................. 69
Legend Text ................................................................................... 69
Node Text ...................................................................................... 69
Output Text .................................................................................... 69
Rendered Mode Text Always Visible ............................................. 69
Silhouette Mode Text Always Visible ............................................. 69

Annotation Text
Defines the font, font size, and color of annotation text.

Legend Text
Sets the text color and font style settings of all legends, such as displacements, temperatures,
and so forth, when displayed in the graphics.

Node Text
Determines the color and font style settings of node numbers and node names when displayed
in the graphics.

Output Text
Defines the font, font size, and color of output text.

Rendered Mode Text Always Visible

Controls the display of rendered text. By default, the software will not draw text that is occluded
by anything else, including other text. For example, if a pipe is in front of text, the text will not be
drawn. If some text overlaps other text, the text that is further back will be hidden. To override
this behavior so that all text is shown, set RenderedModeTextAlwaysVisible to True.

Silhouette Mode Text Always Visible

Controls the display of silhouette text.

CAESAR II User's Guide

69

Configuration and Environment

Visual Options
These options control general plotting visibility.

Topics
Always Use System Colors............................................................ 70
Always Use System Fonts ............................................................. 70
Axis Mode ...................................................................................... 70
Fixed Size Restraint Size ............................................................... 70
Hide Overlapping Text ................................................................... 70
Restraint Helix is a Line ................................................................. 71
Shadow Mode ................................................................................ 71
Show Bounding Box ...................................................................... 71
Smooth Transitions ........................................................................ 71
Use Fixed Size Restraints ............................................................. 71
Visibility % ...................................................................................... 71

Always Use System Colors

Stores the colors the software uses to display the model in the registry.

Always Use System Fonts

Stores the fonts that the software uses to display the model in the registry.

Axis Mode
Turns on and off the display of the axes in the plot. By default, the axes displays in the lower left
corner of the plot.

Fixed Size Restraint Size

Controls the restraint size. By default, the software draws restraints relative to the size of the
pipe to which they are attached. For example, the symbol is larger on a 12-inch pipe than on a
2-inch pipe. You can override this behavior so that the software uses the same size restraint
everywhere by setting Use Fixed Size Restraints (on page 71) to True and defining a Fixed
Size Restraint Size value.

Hide Overlapping Text

Hides node text that is overwritten by other text. This makes reading the plot easier, but
eliminates some node text.

70

CAESAR II User's Guide

Configuration and Environment

Restraint Helix is a Line

Controls how the software draws a restraint helix.
By default, a restraint with a variable retention is drawn with a small spring to indicate that it is
not fixed. If this property is set to True (the default setting), the software draws the spring as a
line; otherwise, the software draws the spring as a coiled cylinder.
If drawing the restraint helix as a line degrades plot performance, set Restraint Helix is a
Line to False.

Shadow Mode
Defines the shadow mode. Select Hard, Soft, or None. The default setting is None.

Show Bounding Box

Controls whether a bounding box appears around the model when it is being manipulated--for
example, rotated or panned-- with the mouse.
True - Display a bounding box.
False - Suppress the display of a bounding box.

Smooth Transitions
Specifies whether graphics have a smooth transition when the view is changed.
True - Enable smooth transition.
False - Change the view instantly. This option reduces the video card memory
requirements.

Use Fixed Size Restraints

Controls the size of the restraint. When it is set to True, this property draws restraints based on
the value defined by the property Fixed Size Restraint Size (on page 70).

Visibility %
Determines the percentage of incident light that passes through an element volume when using
the Translucent Objects or Hidden Lines option in the graphics. Setting this to zero makes all
elements completely opaque while a setting of 100% renders all elements transparent. The
default setting is 50%.

CAESAR II User's Guide

71

Configuration and Environment

Miscellaneous Options
The Miscellaneous Options category provides access to the following groups of configuration
settings:
Input Items (on page 72)
Output Items (on page 74)
System Level Items (on page 75)

Input Items
Topics
Autosave Time Interval .................................................................. 73
Disable "File Open" Graphic Thumbnail ........................................ 73
Disable Undo/Redo Ability ............................................................. 73
Dynamic Example Input Text ......................................................... 73
Enable Autosave ............................................................................ 73
Prompted Autosave ....................................................................... 74

72

CAESAR II User's Guide

Configuration and Environment

Autosave Time Interval

Sets the time interval used to perform the auto-save function. Type a value in minutes.

Disable "File Open" Graphic Thumbnail

Controls whether the graphic thumbnail plot in the Open dialog box (accessed by clicking File >
Open in the software) is displayed. The graphics thumbnail plots a small image of the model as
a single line drawing. On some slower, memory limited processors, or when scanning very large
models, this thumbnail graphic may take a few seconds to plot the model.
True - Turn on the display of thumbnail graphics.
False - Turn off the display of thumbnail graphics.

Disable Undo/Redo Ability

Controls the Undo/Redo feature of the input module. On some installations, it may be useful to
disable the Undo/Redo feature of the input module. With Undo/Redo enabled, CAESAR II can
process a job approximately one-half the size of that which can be processed when Undo/Redo
is disabled (for similar memory settings). Likewise, with Undo/Redo enabled, the input module
speed may be reduced.

Dynamic Example Input Text

Controls how much example text is placed in new dynamic input files. By default, the software
places example text and spectrum definitions in the input stream of new dynamic input files.
After you are familiar with the input, this example text may be unnecessary. Select from the
following options to vary how much of this example text is incorporated in the input:
MAX - Place all of the examples and spectrum definitions in the input stream of new
dynamic input files.
NONE -Eliminate all the example text and all the built-in spectrum definitions. This setting is
intended for experienced users.
SPEC - Eliminate all of the example text, but leaves the predefined spectrum definition. This
means that the built-in spectrum definitions (El Centro, and so forth) will still be defined and
available for use.

Enable Autosave
Controls whether CAESAR II will automatically save the piping input at specified intervals.
True - Turn on autosave.
False - Turn off autosave.

CAESAR II User's Guide

73

Configuration and Environment

Prompted Autosave
Controls whether the software prompts you at the specified time interval to save the input. You
must also set Enable Autosave to True.
True - Prompt before performing the autosave
False - Perform the autosave without prompting.

Output Items
Topics
Displacement Reports Sorted by Nodes ....................................... 74
Output Reports by Load Case ....................................................... 74
Output Table of Contents ............................................................... 74
Time History Animation .................................................................. 75

Displacement Reports Sorted by Nodes

Turns on and off nodal sort. By default, the software sorts the nodes in ascending order during
the force/stress computations. This produces a displacement output report in which the nodes
are ordered in increasing magnitude. Select False to turn off this nodal sort. The resulting
displacement reports will be produced in the order the nodes were entered during model
building.

Output Reports by Load Case

Controls how output reports are sorted. By default, the software generates output reports sorted
by load case. Select False to turn off this option, which causes output reports to be sorted by
type. For reports by type, all displacement reports will be generated, then all restraint reports,
then all force reports, and so on.

Output Table of Contents

Controls the generation of a table of contents, which is normally produced after a static or a
dynamic output session.
True - Generate a table of contents upon exit. This is the default setting.
False - Suppress generation of a table of contents.

74

CAESAR II User's Guide

Configuration and Environment

Time History Animation

Controls the creation of the file used to animate the time history displacement of the piping
system. By default, this setting is turned on, which instructs CAESAR II to generate a file of
displacements, <jobname>.XYT, for every time step. This file is used in subsequent interactive
animation sessions by the user. The size of this file is dependent on the size of the model and
the number of time steps analyzed. Consequently, it may be advantageous from a disk usage
point of view not to create this file.
True - Generate the displacement file. This is the default setting.
False - Suppress generation of the displacement file.

System Level Items

Topics
Compress CAESAR II Files ........................................................... 75
Memory Allocated (Mb) .................................................................. 76
User ID ........................................................................................... 76

Compress CAESAR II Files

Controls the compression of CAESAR II files.
True - Compress all of the CAESAR II job files into an archive named <jobname>.c2, when the
job is not active. After the archive is created, the component files (_a, _j, _p, _7, _s, and so
forth) are deleted.
False - Leave the component files in the data directory and do not create the c2 archive.
The advantages and disadvantages to using the compressed c2 archive are outlined
follows:
Advantages
Only one job file exists in the data directory.
The job and all related data are easily archived.
The job and all related data can be transmitted in its entirety.
Disadvantages
The archive makes it difficult to get to the component files.
The archive is big, since it contains all component files, so saving or transmitting takes
more resources than manipulating a single component file would.
For larger jobs, the compression/decompression activity slows down file access.

CAESAR II User's Guide

75

Configuration and Environment

Memory Allocated (Mb)

Modifies the Windows registry to increase the amount of RAM available to CAESAR II. Setting
this option to a number greater than the available RAM will cause Windows to use Virtual
Memory (hard disk space to be used as RAM). Because doing this may slow the software, it is
usually recommended only for very large piping models.

User ID
Creates a control file for a specific computer. Enter a three-character user ID for each user, or
more exactly, each workstation.
When multiple workstations attempt to access CAESAR II data in the same directory
simultaneously, the control file in the data directory becomes corrupted, which may cause
abnormal software execution. In situations where there may be more than one concurrent user
running CAESAR II in a given data directory, you can use this option to create a separate
control file for each computer, thus allowing simultaneous access of the CAESAR II data within
the same directory.
This user ID is not a password and is specific to the computer requiring access and not to
the user.

SIFs and Stresses

The SIFs and Stresses category provides access to the following groups of configuration
settings:
Advanced Settings (on page 77)
B31.3 Code-Specific Settings (on page 78)

76

CAESAR II User's Guide

Configuration and Environment

Code-Specific Settings (on page 79)

General Settings (on page 82)

Advanced Settings
Topics
Class 1 Branch Flexibility ............................................................... 77
Use Schneider ............................................................................... 78
Use WRC 329 ................................................................................ 78

Class 1 Branch Flexibility

Activates the Class 1 flexibility calculations. By default, this setting is False.
The appearance of this parameter in the configuration file will completely change the modeling
of intersections in the analysis. For intersections not satisfying the reduced branch rules that d/D
0.5 and that D/T100, the branch will start at the surface of the header pipe. A perfectly rigid
junction between the center\-line of the header and surface will be formed automatically by
CAESAR II using the element offset calculations. SIFs act at the surface point for the branch.
When the reduced branch rules are satisfied, the local flexibility of the header is also inserted at
this surface point. Intersections not satisfying the reduced intersection rules will be stiffer and
carry more loads, while intersections satisfying the reduced intersection rules will be more
flexible and will carry less load. All changes to the model are completely transparent to the user.
In systems where the intersection flexibility is a major component of the overall system stiffness,

CAESAR II User's Guide

77

Configuration and Environment

you are urged to run the analysis both with and without the Class 1 Branch Flexibility active to
determine the effect of this modeling on the analysis.

Use Schneider
Activates the Schneider reduced intersection assumptions. By default, this setting is False.
It was because of observations by Schneider that much of the work on WRC 329 was started.
Schneider pointed out that the code SIFs could be in error when the d/D ratio at the intersection
was less than 1.0 and greater than 0.5. In this d/D range, the SIFs could be in error by a factor
as high as 2.0. Using the Schneider option in CAESAR II results in a multiplication of the out of
plane branch stress intensification by a number between 1 and 2 when the d/D ratio for the
inter\-section is between 0.5 and 1.0. For B31.1 and other codes that do not differentiate
between in and out-of-plane SIFs, the multiplication will be used for the single stress
intensification given.

Use WRC 329

Activates the WRC329 guidelines for all intersections, not just for reduced intersections. By
default, this setting is False.
The recommendations made by Rodabaugh in section 5.0 of WRC329 will be followed exactly in
making the stress calculations for intersections. Every attempt has been made to improve the
stress calculations for all codes, not just the four discussed in Rodabaughs paper. Throughout
this document, WRC330 and WRC329 are used synonymously (330 was the draft version of
329). When finally published, the official WRC designation was 329.

B31.3 Code-Specific Settings

Topics
Apply Para 319.2.3(c) Saxial ......................................................... 78
Implement Appendix P ................................................................... 79
Set Sustained SIF Multiplier .......................................................... 79
Use SL Formulation Para 320 (2010) ............................................ 79

Apply Para 319.2.3(c) Saxial

Enables the software to include axial terms in the expansion stress according to Paragraph
319.2.3(c) of B31.3. Choose one of the following settings:
No (Default) - Exclude axial stresses from the (Expansion) Displacement Stress Range
value. (This is Se in Eq. (17) of B31.3.)
|Sa| + Se - Include the absolute value of the axial stress to the (Expansion) Displacement
Stress Range, and report the sum as the (Expansion) Displacement Stress Range, Se. This
selection is more conservative than ( |Sa| + Sb ) ** 2.
( |Sa| + Sb ) ** 2 - Include the absolute value for the axial stress to the bending term in the
(Expansion) Displacement Stress Range equation (Se, Eq (17) in B31.3). This selection is
less conservative than |Sa| + Se. This option is more nearly theoretically correct, and
consistent with Appendix P Eqs (P17a) and (P17b).

78

CAESAR II User's Guide

Configuration and Environment

Implement Appendix P
Controls the implementation of the alternate rules in B31.3 Appendix P. This option produces a
code compliance operating load case, with allowable stress values.

Set Sustained SIF Multiplier

Modifies the SIF. The default setting is 1.0.
The following interpretations apply to B31.3 code prior to the 2010 Edition.
B31.3 Code Interpretation 1-34 dated February 23, 1981 File: 1470-1 states that for sustained
and occasional loads you can use an SIF of 0.75i, but not less than 1.0. To comply with this
interpretation (1-34), you would enter 0.75.
B31.3 Code Interpretation 6-03 dated December 14, 1987 permitted you to ignore the stress
intensification for sustained and occasional loads. To comply with this interpretation (6-03), enter
0.0001.

Use SL Formulation Para 320 (2010)

Controls what formula CAESAR II uses for computing longitudinal stress for sustained loads
(SL) for the B31.3 code. The 2010 Edition of B31.3 code introduced a specific formula for
computing SL. This code formula was previously optional and referred to as B31.3 Code Case
178.
The software defaults to automatically computing sustained loads using this formula. You can
change the Use B31.3-2010 SL Formulation configuration setting in the Configuration Editor
> SIFs and Stresses to False if you do not want CAESAR II to use this formula, for example in
the case of pre-2010 Edition jobs.
CAESAR II sets this configuration setting to True by default, which means the software
overrides the directives for F/A and torsion and uses this formula to calculate sustained case
stresses.

Code-Specific Settings
Topics
B31.1 Reduced Z Fix ..................................................................... 80
B31.1/B31.3 Verified Welding and Contour Tees .......................... 80
EN-13480 - Use In-Plane/Out-Plane SIF ....................................... 80
Ignore B31.3 Wc Factor ................................................................. 80
No RTF/WLT in Reduced Fitting SIFs ........................................... 80
Occasional Load Factor ................................................................. 81
Pressure Variation in EXP Case .................................................... 81
Reduced Intersection ..................................................................... 81

CAESAR II User's Guide

79

Configuration and Environment

B31.1 Reduced Z Fix

Makes the correction to the reduced branch stress calculation that existed in the 1980 through
1989 versions of B31.1. This error was corrected in the 1989 version of B31.1.
True - Turn on the correction. This is the default setting.
False - Turn off the correction.

B31.1/B31.3 Verified Welding and Contour Tees

Controls the assumption that the geometry of B31.3 welding and contour insert tees
(sweepolets) meets the dimensional requirements of the code and can be classified as B16.9
tees.
True - Assume that the fitting geometry meets the requirements of Note 11, introduced in
the A01 addendum, and a flexibility characteristic of 4.4*T/r will be used.
False - Use a flexibility characteristic of 3.1*T/r, as per the A01 addendum. This is the
default setting.
In order to match runs made with CAESAR II prior to Version 4.40, set this option to
True. Prior to Version 4.40, CAESAR II always used a flexibility characteristic of 4.4*T/r.

EN-13480 - Use In-Plane/Out-Plane SIF

Controls the use of in-plane and out-of-plane SIFs. The EN-13480 piping code (and other
European piping codes) defaults to the use of a single SIF, applied to the SRSS of all three
bending moments. Optionally, you can utilize distinct in-plane and out-of-plane SIF values for
in-plane and out-of-plane moments.
To use distinct in-plane and out-of-plane SIFs, select True.

Ignore B31.3 Wc Factor

Controls the application of the circumferential weld strength reduction factor, which is now an
option in B31.1 and B31.3.
True - Suppress the application of a weld strength reduction factor.
False - Apply the weld strength reduction factor at all bends, tees, and reducers for
temperatures greater than the starting creep temperature, as defined in the code.

No RTF/WLT in Reduced Fitting SIFs

Controls whether welding tees and reinforced tees are included in the SIFs for reduced fittings.
Part of the discussion centers around just what should be considered a reduced fitting. The
CAESAR II default (False) is to assume that welding tees and reinforced fabricated tees are
covered by the reduced fitting expressions, even though the reduced fitting expressions do not
explicitly cover these intersection types. If you want to leave welding tees and rein\-forced tees
out of this definition, set this option to True.

80

CAESAR II User's Guide

Configuration and Environment

Occasional Load Factor

Specifies the occasional load factor. The default value of 0.0 tells CAESAR II to use the value
that the active piping code recommends. B31.1 states that the calculated stress may exceed the
maximum allowable stress from Appendix A, (Sh), by 15% if the event duration occurs less than
10% of any 24-hour operating period, and by 20% if the event duration occurs less than 1% of
any 24 hour operating period. The default for B31.1 applications is 15%. If 20% is more suitable
for the system being analyzed, then this option can be used to enter the 20%.
B31.3 states, "The sum of the longitudinal stresses due to pressure, weight, and other sustained
loadings (S1) and of the stresses produced by occasional loads such as wind or earthquake
may be as much as 1.33 times the allowable stress given in Appendix A. Where the allowable
stress value exceeds 2/3 of yield strength at temperature, the allowable stress value must be
reduced as specified in Note 3 in 302.3.2." The default for B31.3 applications is 33%. If this is
too high for the material and temperature specified, then a smaller occasional load factor could
be input.
This configuration option is used to seed new job files. After the static load cases have
been defined, changing this directive will have no effect for static analysis. For existing static
load case definitions, the occasional load multiplier can be changed on the Load Case Options
tab. Dynamic analyses will always reference this configuration option.

Pressure Variation in EXP Case

Controls whether any pressure variation between the referenced load cases will be considered
in the resulting expansion case. When set to Default, the software considers the pressure
variation according to the active piping code.

Reduced Intersection
Defines the code rules for reduced intersection. Select one of the following options:
B31.1 (Pre 1980) - Use the pre-1980 B31.1 code rules used for reduced intersection. These
rules did not define a separate branch SIF for the reduced branch end. The branch stress
intensification factor will be the same as the header stress intensification factor regardless of
the branch-to-header diameter ratio.
B31.1 (Post 1980) - Use the post-1980 B31.1 code rules for reduced intersections. The
reduced intersection SIF equations in B31.1 from 1980 through 1989 generated
unnecessarily high SIFs because of a mistake made in the implementation. (This is
according to WRC329.) For this reason, many analysts opted for the pre-1980 B31.1 SIF
calculation. CAESAR II corrects this mistake by automatically setting B31.1 Reduced Z Fix
to True (the default setting). You can vary the status of this flag in the CAESAR II
configuration file to generate any interpretation of B31.1 desired. The default for a new job is
for B31.1(Post 1980) and for B31.1 Reduced Z Fix to be set to True.

The No RFT/WLT in Reduced Fitting SIFs (see "No RTF/WLT in Reduced Fitting
SIFs" on page 80) option also affects the SIF calculations at reduced intersections.
WRC 329 - Use the recommendations of WRC329 for reduced intersections. A reduced
intersection is any intersection where the d/D ratio is less than 0.975. The WRC329
recommendations result in more conservative stress calculations in some instances and less
conservative stress calculations in others. In all cases, the WRC329 values should be more
accurate and more in-line with the respective codes intent.

CAESAR II User's Guide

81

Configuration and Environment

ASME Sect. III - Use the 1985 ASME Section III NC and ND rules for reduced intersections.
Schneider - Activate the Schneider reduced intersection stress intensification factor
multiplication. Has the same effect as Use Schneider (on page 78).

General Settings
Topics
Add F/A in Stresses ....................................................................... 82
Add Torsion in SL Stress ............................................................... 82
All Cases Corroded ........................................................................ 83
Allow User's SIF at Bend ............................................................... 83
Base Hoop Stress On (ID/OD/Mean/Lam) .................................. 83
Default Piping Code ....................................................................... 83
New Job Liberal Expansion Stress Allowable ............................... 84
Use PD/4t....................................................................................... 84
Yield Stress Criterion ..................................................................... 85

Add F/A in Stresses

Specifies whether the axial stress term is included in the code stress computation. Setting this
option to Default causes CAESAR II to use whatever the currently active piping code
recommends. Only the B31.3-type piping codes, that is, codes where the sustained stress
equation is not explicitly given, have the F/A stresses included in the sustained and occasional
stress equations. The B31.1-type codes do not include the F/A stresses because the equations
given explicitly in the code do not include it. The F/A stresses discussed here are not due to
longitudinal pressure. These are the F/A stresses due to structural loads in the piping system
itself.

Add Torsion in SL Stress

Controls how the software handles the torsion term in those codes that do not include it already
by default.
Some piping codes include torsion in the sustained and occasional stresses by explicitly
including it in the stress equation (B31.1), and some do not include torsion in the sustained and
occasional stresses by implicitly calling for longitudinal stresses only (B31.3). To force
CAESAR II to include the torsion term in those codes that do not include it already by default,
select Yes. If you select Default, the software uses whatever the currently active piping code
implies.
In a sustained stress analysis of a very hot piping system subject to creep, it is
recommended that you include torsion in the sustained stress calculation using this parameter in
the setup file.

82

CAESAR II User's Guide

Configuration and Environment

All Cases Corroded

Controls whether CAESAR II uses corroded section modulus in stress calculations.
A recent version of the B31.3 piping code mentioned reducing the section modulus for sustained
or occasional stress calculations by the reduction in wall thickness due to corrosion. Some have
interpreted this to mean that the reduced section modulus should be used for all stress
calculations, including expansion. This option allows you to apply this conservative interpretation
of the code. Enabling All Cases Corroded causes the software to use the corroded section
modulus for the calculation of all stress types. This method is recommended as conservative,
and probably more realistic as corrosion can significantly affect fatigue life, or expansion. If,
however, you disable this option, the software will strictly follow the piping code
recommendations. That is, depending on the active piping code, some load cases will consider
corrosion and some will not.

Allow User's SIF at Bend

Controls the stress intensification factor for bends. Previously this was not permitted, and the
code-defined SIF was always used. To override the codes calculated SIF for bends, select
True. The user-defined SIF acts over the entire bend curvature and must be specified at the To
end of the bend element. The default setting is False.

Base Hoop Stress On (ID/OD/Mean/Lam)

Indicates how the value of hoop stress should be calculated. The default is to use the ID of the
pipe. Most piping codes consider the effects of pressure in the longitudinal component of the
CODE stress. Usually, the value of the hoop stress has no bearing on the CODE stress, so
changing this directive does not affect the acceptability of the piping system.
If necessary, you may change the way CAESAR II computes the hoop stress value. Available
options are:
ID - Compute hoop stress according to Pd/2t, where d is the internal diameter of the pipe.
OD - Compute hoop stress according to Pd/2t, where d is the outer diameter of the pipe.
Mean - Compute hoop stress according to Pd/2t, where d is the average or mean diameter
of the pipe.
Lam - Compute maximum hoop stress according to Lam's solution: s =
P(Ro2+Ri2)/(Ro2-Ri2).

Default Piping Code

Specifies the piping code that you design to most often. This code will be used as the default if
no code is specified in the problem input. The default piping code is B31.3, the chemical plant
and petroleum refinery code. Valid entries are:
B31.1
B31.3
B31.4
B31.4 Chapter IX
B31.5
B31.8
B31.8 Chapter VIII
B31.11

CAESAR II User's Guide

83

Configuration and Environment

ASME-NC(Class 2)
ASME-ND(Class 3)
NAVY505, Z662
Z662 Chapter 11
BS806
SWEDISH1
SWEDISH2
B31.1-1967
STOOMWEZEN
RCCM-C
RCCM-D
CODETI
Norwegian
FDBR
BS-7159
UKOOA
IGE/TD/12
DNV
EN-13480
GPTC/Z380
PD 8010-1
PD 8010-2
ISO-14692
HPGSL
JPI

New Job Liberal Expansion Stress Allowable

Instructs the software to default new jobs to use the liberal expansion stress allowable. This
allowable adds the difference between the hot allowable stress and the sustained stress to the
allowable expansion stress range if it is allowed by the particular code in use. To instruct the
software to default new jobs to not use this allowable, select False.

Use PD/4t
Instructs the software to use the simplified form of the longitudinal stress term when computing
sustained stresses. Some codes permit this simplified form when the pipe wall thickness is thin.
This option is used most often when you are comparing CAESAR II results to older pipe stress
program results. The more comprehensive calculation--the default--is recommended.

84

CAESAR II User's Guide

Configuration and Environment

Yield Stress Criterion

Specifies the method the software uses to calculate maximum stress. CAESAR II can calculate
this maximum stress (which is not a code stress) according to either the von Mises Theory or
the Maximum Shear Theory.
Code stress refers to a stress calculated by an equation provided by the code. For more
information on code-defined stresses, see the CAESAR II Quick Reference Guide.
The Stresses Extended output report produced by CAESAR II contains a value representative of
the maximum stress state through the cross section, calculated according to the indicated yield
criteria theory.
Configuration
Setting

Failure Theory

Calculated Stress

Max3D Shear

Maximum Shear Stress

Maximum Stress Intensity

von Mises

Maximum Energy of
Distortion

Octahedral Shearing Stress

CAESAR II computes the selected stress at four points along the axis normal to the plane of
bending (outside top, inside top, inside bottom, outside bottom), and includes the maximum
value in the stresses report. The equations used for each of these yield criteria are listed below.
If Von Mises Theory is used, the software computes the octahedral shearing stress, which
differs from the von Mises stress by a constant factor.
For codes B31.4 Chapter IX, B31.8 Chapter VIII, and DnV, this setting controls which
equation the software uses to compute the equivalent stress. For these three codes, the
software uses the equations shown in the piping code to determine the yield stress criterion in
the Stresses Extended output report.

Stress Formulation
CAESAR II reports the largest stress using four calculation points through the pipe cross
section, as show in the following figure.

The four points are established by a line perpendicular to the bending moment acting on the
pipe (shown in red). Points 1 and 4 are on the outside surface of the pipe, where radial stress is
zero. Point 1 is in bending tension and Point 4 is in bending compression. Points 2 and 3 are on
the inside surface of the pipe where radial stress is compressive (negative) pressure.
Longitudinal stress (Sl), hoop stress (Sh), radial stress (Sr) and shear stress (St) are calculated
at each position using the appropriate formulas.

CAESAR II User's Guide

85

Configuration and Environment

Position

Longitudinal Stress (Sl)

Radial
Shear
Stress
Stress (St)
(Sr)

Hoop Stress (Sh)

1
2
3
4
The table formulas assume that this is a B31.3-style stress equation with Lam hoop
stress.
These stresses are translated into the principal stresses S1, S2, and S3. The following shows a
graphical representation of a typical calculation of the four position points.

Determine the principal stress using the longitudinal stress (Sl), the hoop stress (Sh), and the
sheer stress (St)which sets the red line. The principal stress refers to the points where the red
circle crosses the normal stress axis (shear stress equals zero). Place the radial stress (Sr)
(which has a shear stress of zero) on the same axis. The largest intersection point is S1 and the
smallest is S3.

Equivalent Stress, Octahedral Shearing Stress, von Mises Stress:

86

CAESAR II User's Guide

Configuration and Environment

Use the S1, S2, and S3 values in the equation above to determine the octahedral shearing
stress at each position. CAESAR II reports the largest of these four values.

3D Maximum Shear Stress Intensity (S.I.):

S.I. = S1-S3
When you configure CAESAR II to report 3D maximum shear stress intensity, the software
reports the largest intensity (S1-S3).

Set/Change Password
The Security command provides you with the option of using a password protection scheme for
the configuration file. By setting a password on the primary configuration file (done by setting the
default data folder to the CAESAR II software folder), a corporate standard can be enforced
throughout the network. Subsequent use of the configuration module in other data folders will
allow only modification of display or other environment directives that do not affect calculated
results.
When you click the Security command, a menu displays with the following four options:
New Password (on page 87)
Access Protected Data (on page 87)
Change Password (on page 87)
Remove Password (on page 88)

New Password
Enter a password. After entering a password, you have the ability to change configuration
settings from the program folder, or alter or remove the password.

Initially, New Password is the only option available.

When entering a new password, you are prompted for the new password a second time to
ensure the password was typed as expected the first time.

Access Protected Data

Allows you to modify protected options. This option is accessible only after a password exists.
The use of this option is not necessary if there is no previously specified password. If no
password has been set, you can modify all configuration settings.

Change Password
Allows you to change your current password. You must first enter the correct existing password.
The current password may be changed at any time by anyone who has authorization to do so.
After a password has been set, all computation controls, stress options, and any other
configuration options, which could affect the CAESAR II computations are disabled and cannot
be changed.
All protected option labels, edit boxes, and default buttons are grayed out when disabled.

CAESAR II User's Guide

87

Configuration and Environment

Remove Password
Deletes the current password. Anyone with authorization can remove the current password by
entering the correct existing password for this option. After a password is removed, all options
that appear in the Configuration Editor can be modified from any folder where you have
read/write access rights.

88

CAESAR II User's Guide

Piping Input Reference

SECTION 4

Piping Input Reference

This section describes how to specify job parameters through the menus, boxes, and
commands of the software.
To edit a piping model, open a piping file from the CAESAR II main menu. Then, click Input >
Piping. The CAESAR II Classic Piping Input dialog box displays.

This dialog box describes the piping on an element-by-element basis. It consists of menus and
toolbars which perform a number of supporting operations, and data fields that contain
information about each piping element. A graphic representation of the model displays
automatically. This model updates as you add new elements.

CAESAR II User's Guide

89

Piping Input Reference

In This Section
Classic Piping Input Dialog Box ..................................................... 90
Available Commands ..................................................................... 198
3D Modeler .................................................................................... 305
S3D/SPR Import View ................................................................... 319

Classic Piping Input Dialog Box

Data boxes are grouped into blocks of related data on the left side of the screen. Double click >>
in the upper right corner of any group to display an expanded set of boxes in a dialog box. You
can arrange these dialog boxes to meet your needs.
The right side of the screen offers an auxiliary area with tabs that support items entered through
check boxes. Press F12 to display the various auxiliary tabs.

90

CAESAR II User's Guide

Piping Input Reference

Navigating the Classic Piping Input Dialog Box using the

Function Keys
Function keys help you to quickly type data without using the mouse to move to various input
boxes. By default, when you place the cursor inside a box on the Classic Piping Input dialog
box, pressing a function key on the keyboard moves the cursor to the beginning of a block of
input data according to the list below.
Function Key

Destination

F2

From Node

F3

DX

F4

Diameter

F5

Temp 1

F6

Material

F7

Elastic Modulus (c)

F8

Refractory Thickness

F9

Line number

Help Screens and Units

Press the question mark key ? or the F1 function key while the cursor is in any of the input data
cells to display interactive help text for that item. Hover the cursor over a box to display a tool tip
indicating the current units.

Node Numbers
Each element is identified by its end node number. Because each input screen represents a
piping element, you must specify the element end points - the From node and To node. These
points are used as locations at which information can be entered or extracted. The From node
and To node are both required.
CAESAR II generates both values if the AUTO_NODE_INCREMENT option is set to a
value other than zero using the Tools > Configure/Setup command on the main menu.
Double-click >> to display the Edit Node Numbers dialog box.

CAESAR II User's Guide

91

Piping Input Reference

From
Specifies the node number for the starting end of the element. Node numbers must be numeric,
ranging from 1 to 32000. Normally, the From node number is automatically generated by
CAESAR II from the preceding element. You can change the node numbers, but be careful not
to use the same node number more than once in a model.

To
Specifies the node number for the end of the element. Node numbers must be numeric, ranging
from 1 to 32000. You can change the node numbers, but be careful not to use the same node
number more than once in a model.

Name
Assigns nonnumeric names to node points. Double-click the Name check box to display an
auxiliary dialog box where you can assign names of up to 10 characters to the From and To
nodes. These names display instead of the node numbers in graphic plots and reports.
Nonnumeric names can be truncated in 80 column reports.

Deltas
Type element lengths as delta dimensions according to the X, Y, and Z rectangular coordinate
system established for the piping system. The Y-axis represents the vertical axis in CAESAR II.
CAESAR II treats each element as a vector. The vector length is equal to the element length.
The vector direction points from the From node to the To node.
The delta dimensions DX, DY, and DZ, are the measurements along the X, Y, and Z-axes
between the From node and the To node. In most cases you only need to use one of the three
options, because the piping usually runs along the global axes. Where the piping element is
skewed, you must make two or three entries. You must define at least one option for all
elements except zero-length expansion joints.
When you are using feet and inches for compound length and length units, valid entries
include formats such as: 3-6, 3 ft. -6 in, and 3-6-3/16.
You can use offsets to modify the stiffness of the current element by adjusting its length and the
orientation of its neutral axis in 3-D space.

92

CAESAR II User's Guide

Piping Input Reference

Double-click >> to display the Edit Deltas dialog box.

DX
Specifies the X component of the element.
CAESAR II accepts [compound length]-[length]-[fraction] formats (such as feet - inch - fraction or
meter - decimal - centimeters) as valid input values in most cells. You can use simple forms of
addition, multiplication, and division as well as exponential format.
Optionally, use a tic mark ( ' ) instead of the first dash ( - ), to indicate feet in this field.

DY
Specifies the Y component of the element.
CAESAR II accepts [compound length]-[length]-[fraction] formats (such as feet - inch - fraction or
meter - decimal - centimeters) as valid input values in most cells. You can use simple forms of
addition, multiplication, and division as well as exponential format.
Optionally, use a tic mark ( ' ) instead of the first dash ( - ), to indicate feet in this field.

DZ
Specifies the Z component of the element.
CAESAR II accepts [compound length]-[length]-[fraction] formats (such as feet - inch - fraction or
meter - decimal - centimeters) as valid input values in most cells. You can use simple forms of
addition, multiplication, and division as well as exponential format.
Optionally, use a tic mark ( ' ) instead of the first dash ( - ), to indicate feet in this field.

CAESAR II User's Guide

93

Piping Input Reference

Offsets
Indicates whether the software corrects modeled dimensions of an element back to its actual
dimensions. Double-click the Offsets check box on the Classic Piping Input dialog box to
select or clear this option.
Specify the distances from the position of the From node in 3-D space to the actual From end of
the element.
Specify the distances from the position of the To node in 3-D space to the actual To end of the
element.
If you leave any offset direction distances blank, the software defaults them to zero.
Thermal expansion is 0 for the offset portion of an offset element. No element flexibility is
generated for the offset portion of the element. The following figure shows a common usage for
the offset element.

94

CAESAR II User's Guide

Piping Input Reference

Length
Specifies the distance between the To node and the From node.
Optionally, use a tic mark ( ' ) instead of the first dash ( - ), to indicate feet in this field.

Direction Cosines
Specifies the X, Y, and Z components or element direction cosines.
For an element aligned with the X-axis,
Cos X ..... 1.0
Cos Y ..... <Blank>
Cos Z ..... <Blank>
For an element aligned with the Y-axis,
Cos X ..... <Blank>
Cos Y ..... 1.0
Cos Z ..... <Blank>
For an element aligned with the Z-axis,
Cos X ..... <Blank>
Cos Y ..... <Blank>
Cos Z ..... 1.0

Pipe Sizes
Type the dimensions for the element. Plus mill tolerance is used only for the IGE/TD/12 piping
code. Seam weld is used only for the IGE/TD/12 piping code. These options carry forward from
one element to the next during the design session so you only need to type values for those
elements at which a change occurs. You can specify nominal pipe sizes and schedules.
CAESAR II converts these values to actual outside diameter and wall thickness. Outside
diameter and wall thickness are required data inputs.
Nominal diameters, thicknesses, and schedule numbers are a function of the pipe size
specification. Click Tools > Configure/Setup on the main menu or click CAESAR II
Configuration
on the CAESAR II Tools toolbar to select ANSI, JIS, or DIN as the piping
size specification.

CAESAR II User's Guide

95

Piping Input Reference

Double-click >> to display the Edit Pipe Sizes dialog box.

Diameter
Specifies the pipe diameter. Normally, you should type the nominal diameter and CAESAR II
converts it to the actual outer diameter necessary for the analysis. There are two ways to
prevent this conversion:
Use a modified UNITS file with the Nominal Pipe Schedules turned off,
Specify diameters whose values are off slightly from a nominal size (in English units the
tolerance on diameter is 0.063 in.).
Use F1 to obtain additional information and the current units for this input box. Available nominal
diameters are determined by the active pipe size specification, set by the configuration software.
The following are the available nominal diameters.
ANSI Nominal Pipe ODs, in inches (file ap.bin)
1 1 2 2 3 3 4 5 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 42
JIS Nominal Pipe ODs, in millimeters (file jp.bin)
15 20 25 32 40 50 65 80 90 100 125 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 550 600 650
DIN Nominal Pipe ODs, in millimeters (file dp.bin)
15 20 25 32 40 50 65 80 100 125 150 200 250 300 350 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000
1200 1400 1600 1800 2000 2200

96

CAESAR II User's Guide

Piping Input Reference

Wt/Sch
Specifies the thickness of the pipe. Normal input consists of a schedule indicator (such as S,
XS, or 40), which is converted to the proper wall thickness by CAESAR II. If actual thickness is
entered, CAESAR II accepts it as entered. Available schedule indicators are determined by the
active piping specification, set by the configuration software.

ANSI B36.10 Steel Nominal Wall Thickness Designation:

S - Standard
XS - Extra Strong
XXS - Double Extra Strong

ANSI B36.10 Steel Pipe Numbers:

10 20 30 40 60 80 100 120 140 160

ANSI B36.19 Stainless Steel Schedules:

5S 10S 40S 80S

JIS PIPE SCHEDULES

1990 Steel Schedules:
10 20 30 40 60 80 100 120 140 160
1990 Stainless Steel Schedules:
5S 10S 40S

DIN PIPE SCHEDULES

None
Only the s (standard) schedule applies to wall thickness calculations for DIN.

Seam Welded
Indicates whether the piping element is seam welded

B31.1 / B31.3
If the B31.1 or B31.3 piping codes are active, select the Seam-welded check box to activate the
Wl box. Wl (the weld strength reduction factor) is used by the software to determine the
minimum wall thickness of the element.

IGE/TD/12
If the IGE/TD/12 piping code is active, select the Seam welded check box when straight pipes
are seam welded. This option affects the stress intensification factor calculations for that pipe
section due to seam welded fabrication.

CAESAR II User's Guide

97

Piping Input Reference

WI Factor
Specifies the WI factor.

+Mill Tol %; Wl
Specifies the positive mill tolerance. This option is only enabled when IGE/TD/12 is active. It is
used when the Base Stress/Flexibility On option of the Special Execution Options is set to
Plus Mill Tolerance. In that case, piping stiffness and section modulus is based on the nominal
wall thickness increased by this percentage. You can change this value on an
element-by-element basis.
If the B31.3 piping code is activated, this box specifies the weld strength reduction factor (W l), to
be used in the minimum wall calculation for straight pipe.

-Mill Tol %
Displays the negative mill tolerance. This value is read from the configuration file and used in
minimum wall thickness calculations. Also, for IGE/TD/12, this value is used when the Base
Stress/Flexibility On option of the Special Execution Options is set to Plus Mill Tolerance.
In that case, piping stiffness and section modulus is based on the nominal wall thickness,
decreased by this percentage. You can change this value on an element-by-element basis.

Corrosion
Specifies the corrosion allowance used to calculate a reduced section modulus. There is a
configuration option available to consider all stress cases as corroded. For more information,
see All Cases Corroded (on page 83).

Pipe Density
Displays the pipe density value. The appropriate pipe density is filled in automatically when you
provide a proper material number. You can override this value at any time. The software then
duplicates the value through the rest of the input.

Fluid Density
Displays the fluid density. Specify the fluid density when the internal fluid the piping system
transports significantly affects the weight loads. When the specific gravity of the fluid is known,
you can type that instead of the density. For example, you could type 0.85SG. Specific gravities
are converted to the appropriate densities immediately on input. To type specific gravity, follow
the numeric value with the letters SG (no spaces). The software automatically converts this
value to density.
In the default ENGLISH units system, densities are typed in pounds per cubic inch.

98

CAESAR II User's Guide

Piping Input Reference

Propagate Properties
Indicates whether to propagate the property changes. Clear this checkbox to indicate that
properties apply to the current element only.

Operating Conditions
You can specify up to nine temperatures and ten pressures (one extra for the hydrostatic test
pressure) for each piping element. The temperatures are actual temperatures, not changes from
the ambient temperature. CAESAR II uses these temperatures to obtain the thermal strain and
allowable stresses for the element from the Material Database. As an alternative, you can
directly specify the thermal strains. For more information, see Alpha Tolerance (on page 45).
Thermal strains have absolute values on the order of 0.002, and are unitless. Pressures are
typed as gauge values and cannot be negative. Each temperature and each pressure that you
typed creates a loading for you to use when building load cases. Both thermal and pressure
data carries forward from one element to the next until changed. Typing a value in the Hydro
pressure box causes CAESAR II to build a hydro case in the set of recommended load cases.
CAESAR II uses an ambient temperature of 70F, unless changed using the Special
Execution Parameters option. For more information, see New Job Ambient Temperature (on
page 46).
Double-click >> to display the Edit Operating Conditions dialog box.

CAESAR II User's Guide

99

Piping Input Reference

Temperatures
Specifies operating temperatures. There are nine temperature boxes to allow up to nine different
operating cases. The error checker validates temperature values to insure that they are within
the code allowed ranges. You can exceed the ranges by typing the expansion coefficient in the
temperature box in units of length/length. When you are using material 21 (user-defined
material), type a thermal expansion coefficient instead of a temperature.
Values, whose absolute values are less than the Alpha Tolerance, in the temperature box are
taken to be thermal expansion coefficients. The Alpha Tolerance is a configuration file
parameter and is taken to be 0.05 by default. For example, if you wanted to type the thermal
expansion coefficient equivalent to 11.37in./100ft., the calculation would be:
11.37in./100ft. * 1 ft./ 12in. = .009475 in./in.
Type this into the appropriate Temperature box.
A cut short does no more than reduce the length of a pipe element to zero. For example;
if you wanted 8.5 cm of cold spring you could put in an 8.5 cm long element and then thermally
shrink its length to zero. This allows the cold spring to be manipulated as an individual thermal
case rather than as a concentrated force.
Access to operating conditions 4 through 9 is granted through the Extended Operating
Conditions dialog box, accessible by clicking the >> button in the upper right corner of the
frame surrounding the standard Temperature and Pressure input boxes. You can keep this
dialog box open or closed for your convenience.

100

CAESAR II User's Guide

Piping Input Reference

CAESAR II automatically suggests load cases according to IGE/TD/12 Appendix 7. Use the
following conventions for the specification of the operating conditions.
T1 Maximum Temperature
T2 Minimum Temperature
T3 Minimum Summer Temperature
T4 Maximum Winter Temperature
T5 Maximum Temperature (flow induced) (optional)
T6 Minimum Temperature (flow induced) (optional)
P1 Maximum Incidental Pressure
P2 Maximum Operating Pressure
P3 Compressor Operation
P4 Demand Pressure
HP Hydrotest Pressure

Thermal Expansion
Displays thermal expansion coefficients. CAESAR II displays the corresponding thermal
expansion coefficients in the fields when you enter operating temperatures in the temperature
fields. When the thermal expansion coefficients are not in the material database, you can enter
thermal expansion coefficients in the temperature field if the absolute values are less than the
Alpha Tolerance in the configuration. The Alpha Tolerance is 0.05 by default. For more
information, see Alpha Tolerance (on page 45). You can enter up to nine thermal expansion
coefficients in units of length/length in the temperature field on the Extended Operating
Conditions dialogue box. CAESAR II displays these values in the Thermal Expansion boxes.

Pressures
Specifies operating pressures. There are ten pressure boxes to allow up to nine operating, and
one hydrotest, pressure cases. When you type multiple pressures, be careful with the setup of
the analysis load cases. Inspect the software's recommendations carefully before proceeding.
Access to operating pressures 3 through 9 is granted through the Extended Operating
Conditions dialog box, accessible by using the >> button in the upper right corner of the frame
surrounding the standard Temperature and Pressure input boxes. You can leave this dialog
box open or closed for your convenience.
Type a value in the HydroPress box to signal CAESAR II to recommend a Hydrotest load case.
Type the design gage pressure (that is, the difference between the internal and external
pressures).
The Bourdon effect (pressure elongation) is disabled by default because it is assumed to
be non-conservative. If you want to enable the Bourdon effect, you can do so by using the
Special Execution options. For more information, see New Job Bourdon Pressure (on page
46).
The Bourdon effect is always considered in the analysis of fiberglass reinforced plastic pipe,
which is Material id=20.
CAESAR II automatically suggests load cases according to IGE/TD/12 Appendix 7. You must
use the following conventions for the specification of the operating conditions.
T1 Maximum Temperature
T2 Minimum Temperature

CAESAR II User's Guide

101

Piping Input Reference

T3 Minimum Summer Temperature
T4 Maximum Winter Temperature
T5 Maximum Temperature (flow induced) (optional)
T6 Minimum Temperature (flow induced) (optional)
P1 Maximum Incidental Pressure
P2 Maximum Operating Pressure
P3 Compressor Operation
P4 Demand Pressure
HP Hydrotest Pressure

Component Information
Special components, such as bends, rigid elements, expansion joints, and tees require
additional information. You can define this information by selecting the component checkbox
and then typing data in the auxiliary dialog box.

Bend
Double-click Bend if the active element ends in a bend, elbow or mitered joint. This displays the
auxiliary dialog box tab on the right hand side of the screen. CAESAR II usually assigns three
nodes to a bend. This defines near, mid, and far nodes on the bend. For more information, see
Bends (on page 103).

Rigid
Double-click Rigid if the active element is much stiffer than the connecting pipe, such as a
flange or valve. This displays an auxiliary dialog box tab to collect the component weight. For
more information, see Rigid (on page 107). For rigid elements, CAESAR II follows these rules:
When the rigid element weight is defined as a value other than zero, CAESAR II computes
any extra weight due to insulation and contained fluid. The software then adds that value to
the defined weight value.
The weight of fluid added to a non-zero weight rigid element is equal to the same weight that
would be computed for an equivalent straight pipe. The weight of insulation added is equal
to the same weight that would be computed for an equivalent straight pipe multiplied by
1.75.
If the weight of a rigid element is zero or blank, CAESAR II assumes that the element is an
artificial construction element rather than an actual piping element. In this case, no insulation
or fluid weight is computed for that element.
The stiffness of the rigid element is relative to the diameter wall thickness. Make sure that
the diameter on a rigid element indicates the rigid stiffness to generate.

Expansion Joint
Double-click Expansion Joint if the active element is an expansion joint. This displays an
auxiliary dialog box tab, used to collect stiffness parameters and effective diameter. For more
information, see Expansion Joints (on page 108). Expansion joints can be modeled as

102

CAESAR II User's Guide

Piping Input Reference

zero-length (with all stiffnesses acting at a single point) or as finite-length (with the stiffnesses
acting over a continuous element). In the former case, all stiffness must be typed. In the latter
case, either the lateral or angular stiffness must be omitted.

SIF & Tees

Double-click SIF & Tees if the active element has special stress intensification factors (SIFs).
CAESAR II automatically calculates these factors for each component. For more information,
see SIFs & Tees (on page 111).
Bends, rigids, and expansion joints are mutually exclusive. For more information, see
Rigid (on page 107) and Expansion Joints (on page 108).

Bends
Indicates that the element is entering a bend. Select or clear this option by double-clicking the
Bend check box on the Classic Piping Input dialog box.
You can place Intermediate node points at specified angles along the bend, or at the bend
mid-point (M).

CAESAR II User's Guide

103

Piping Input Reference

Radius
Displays the bend radius. CAESAR II assumes a long radius by default. You can override this
value. Alternatively, select a value from the list.
Long - Indicates a long radius bend. The radius is equal to 1.5 times the nominal diameter.
Short - Indicates a short radius bend. The radius is equal to the nominal pipe diameter.
3D - Indicates a 3D bend. The radius is equal to 3 times the nominal diameter.
5D - Indicates a 5D bend. The radius is equal to 5 times the nominal diameter.

Type
Specifies the bend type. For most codes, this refers to the number of attached flanges and can
be selected from the list. If there are no flanges on the bend, leave Type blank. A bend should
be considered flanged if there is any heavy or rigid body within two diameters of the bend that
significantly restricts the bends ability to ovalize.
When using the BS 7159 or UKOOA Codes with Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic (FRP) pipe, this
entry refers to the material laminate type and may be 1, 2, or 3. These laminate types are
All chopped strand mat (CSM) constructing with internal and external surface tissue
reinforced layer.
Chopped strand mat (CSM) and woven roving (WR) construction with internal and external
surface tissue reinforced layer.
Chopped strand mat (CSM) and multi-filament roving construction with internal and external
surface tissue reinforced layer.
The laminate type affects the calculation of flexibility factors and stress intensification factors for
the BS 7159 and UKOOA Codes only.
For ISO 14692, only type 3 filament-wound laminate is considered.

Angle
Displays the angle to a point on the bend curvature. You can place additional nodes at any point
on the bend curvature provided the added nodes are not within five degrees of each other. You
can change the 5 node-spacing limit by using the configuration. For more information, see
Minimum Angle to Adjacent Bend (on page 59).
The element To node is always physically located at the far end of the bend. By default,
CAESAR II places a node at the midpoint of the bend (designated by the letter M in this box) as
well as at the zero degree position (start) of the bend, if possible.

104

CAESAR II User's Guide

Piping Input Reference

Node
Displays the node number associated with the extra point on the bend. CAESAR II places
unique node numbers in these boxes whenever you initiate a bend. New, unique node numbers
must be assigned to the points whenever you add points on the bend curvature. If numbering by
fives and the To node number for the bend element is 35, a logical choice for the node number
for an added node at 30 degrees on the bend would be 34. You can treat the added nodes on
the bend like any other nodes in the piping system. Nodes on the bend curvature may be
restrained, displaced, or placed at the intersection of more than two pipes. Nodes on a bend
curvature are most commonly used as an intersection for a dummy leg or for the location of a
restraint. All nodes defined in this manner are plotted at the tangent intersection point for the
bend.

Miter Points
Displays the number of cuts in the bend if it is mitered. When you type a number, CAESAR II
checks if the mitered bend input is closely or widely spaced. If the bend is determined to be
widely spaced, and the number of miter cuts is greater than one, the bend should be broken
down into n single cut widely spaced miters, where n is the total number of cuts in the bend.
The number of cuts and the radius of the bend are all that is required to calculate the SIFs and
flexibilities for the bend as defined in the B31 codes. The bend radius and the bend miter
spacing are related by the following equations:
Closely Spaced Miters
R = S / (2 tan )
q = Bend Angle / (2 n) where n = number of miter cuts
Widely Spaced Miters
R = r2 (1.0 + cot q) / 2.0
r2 = (ri + ro) / 2.0
= Bend Angle / 2.0

Fitting Thickness
Specifies the thickness of the bend if that thickness is different than the thickness of the
matching pipe. If the thickness is greater than the matching pipe wall thickness, then the inside
diameter of the bend is smaller than the inside diameter of the matching pipe. CAESAR II
calculates section modulus for stress computations based on the properties of the matching pipe
as defined by the codes.
The pipe thickness is used twice when calculating SIFs and flexibility factors; once as Tn, and
once when determining the mean cross-sectional radius of the pipe in the equation for the
flexibility characteristic (h):
h = (Tn)(R) / (r2)
Tn = Thickness of bend or fitting
R = Bend radius
r = Mean cross-sectional radius of matching pipe
= (OD - WT) / 2
OD = Outside Diameter of matching pipe
WT = Wall Thickness of matching pipe

CAESAR II User's Guide

105

Piping Input Reference

Most codes use the actual thickness of the fitting (this entry) for Tn, and the wall thickness of the
matching pipe for the calculation of the mean cross-sectional radius of the pipe (the WT value).
More specifically, the individual codes use the two wall thicknesses as follows:
Code

For Tn:

For Mean Radius Calculation:

B31.1

Fitting

Fitting

B31.3

Fitting

Matching Pipe

B31.4

Fitting

Matching Pipe

B31.5

Fitting

Matching Pipe

B31.8

Fitting

Matching Pipe

B31.8 Ch VIII

Fitting

Matching Pipe

SECT III NC

Fitting

Matching Pipe

SECT III ND

Fitting

Matching Pipe

Z662

Matching Pipe

Matching Pipe

NAVY 505

Fitting

Fitting

B31.1 (1967)

Fitting

Fitting

SWEDISH

Fitting

Matching Pipe

BS 806

N/A

N/A

STOOMWEZEN

N/A

N/A

RCC-M C/D

Matching
Pipe

Matching Pipe

CODETI

Fitting

Fitting

NORWEGIAN

Fitting

Fitting

FDBR

Fitting

Fitting

BS 7159

Fitting

Fitting

UKOOA

Fitting

Fitting

IGE/TD/12

Fitting

Fitting

EN-13480

Fitting

Matching Pipe

GPTC/Z380

Fitting

Matching Pipe

The bend fitting thickness (FTG) is always used as the pipe thickness in the stiffness matrix
calculations. However, the thickness of the matching pipe (WT) is always used in the bend
stress calculations.

106

CAESAR II User's Guide

Piping Input Reference

K-Factor
Specifies the bend flexibility factor. CAESAR II calculates the factor according to the current
piping code. You can type a value to override this calculation.

Seam-Welded
Indicates that the bend is seam welded.
B31.3
If the B31.3 piping code is active, the Seam Welded check box is used to activate the Wl
box for bends. The Wl box is the weld strength reduction factor used to determine the
minimum wall thickness of the bend element.
IGE/TD/12
Used by IGE/TD/12 to calculate the stress intensification factors due to seam welded elbow
fabrication as opposed to extruded elbow fabrication. This option is only available when
IGE/TD/12 is active.

Wl for Bends
B31.1 / B31.3 - Defines the weld strength reduction factor (W l) for bend elements. This value is
used in the minimum wall thickness calculations.
ISO 14692 - Replaces this box with EPTp/(EbTb) where Ep and Eb are the axial modulus of the
attached pipe and the bend respectively, T p and Tb are the average wall thickness of the
attached pipe and the bend respectively. If these values are omitted, the software uses a default
value of 1.0. This value affects the calculation of the flexibility factor for bends.

Rigid
Indicates that you are supplying rigid element data. Select or clear this option by double-clicking
the Rigid check box on the Classic Piping Input dialog box.
Type a value for Rigid Weight. This value should always be zero or positive and should not
include the weight of any insulation or fluid. If you type no weight, then CAESAR II models the
element as a weightless construction element.
Rigid weights are defined automatically if you use the Valve and Flange database.

CAESAR II automatically includes 1.0 times the fluid weight of equivalent straight pipe and 1.75
times the insulation weight of equivalent straight pipe.
Rigid elements with zero weight are considered to be modeling constructs and do not have fluid
or insulation weight added.

CAESAR II User's Guide

107

Piping Input Reference

The rigid element stiffness is proportional to the matching pipe. For example, a 13 in. long 12 in.
diameter rigid element is stiffer than a 13 in. long 2 in. diameter rigid element. This fact should
be observed when modeling rigid elements that are part of a small pipe/large vessel, or small
pipe/heavy equipment model. The stiffness properties are computed using 10 times the
thickness of the rigid element. For additional details, see Technical Discussions (on page 765).
Enter the rigid element in the DX, DY, and DZ boxes.
See Valve (on page 216) for automatic input for these types of components.

Expansion Joints
Indicates that you are supplying expansion joint data. Select or clear this option by
double-clicking Expansion Joint on the Classic Piping Input dialog box.
This auxiliary dialog box tab controls options for expansion joint stiffness parameters and
effective diameter. For a non-zero length expansion joint, you must omit either the transverse or
the bending stiffness.
Setting the effective diameter to zero deactivates the pressure thrust load. Use this
method in conjunction with setting a large axial stiffness to simulate the effect of axial tie-rods.

Zero Length Expansion Joints

Specifies zeros in the DX, DY, and DZ fields (or leave the fields blank) for hinged and gimball
joints. Use 1.0 to define completely flexible stiffness and 1.0E12 to define completely rigid
stiffness. You must type all stiffnesses.

Finite Length Expansion Joints

Specifies the expansion joint vector in the DX, DY, and DZ boxes. Because the transverse
stiffness is directly related to the bending stiffness for finite length expansion joints, type only
one of these stiffnesses. CAESAR II calculates the other stiffness automatically based on
flexible length, effective ID, and the other stiffness. In general, type the transverse stiffness and
leave the bending stiffness blank.

Bellows Stiffness Properties

Specifies the expansion joint parameters.
If the element length is zero, then you should define all of the stiffnesses. If the element length is
not zero, then you should leave blank either the Bending Stif or the Trans Stif box. CAESAR II
automatically calculates the stiffness that you did not type. You can type all stiffnesses for
rubber expansion joints
If the torsional stiffness value is not specified, CAESAR II uses a default value of 0.10000E+06.
Bending STIFFNESSES from EJMA (and from most expansion joint manufacturers) that are
used in a finite length expansion joint model should be multiplied by four before being used in
any piping software. Bending STIFFNESSES from EJMA (and from most expansion joint
manufacturers) that are used in a ZERO length expansion joint model should be used without
modification.

108

CAESAR II User's Guide

Piping Input Reference

Use 1.0 for bellows stiffnesses that are completely flexible.
Use 1.0E12 for rigid bellows stiffnesses.
Zero length expansion joints can be used in many modeling applications, such as defining struts
or hinged ends. The orientation of zero length expansion joints is taken from the element that
precedes the expansion joint if the To node of the preceding element is equal to the From node
on the expansion joint element. If the preceding element does not go into the expansion joint,
then the orientation is taken from the element that follows the expansion joint if it properly leaves
the joint.

Effective ID
Specifies the effective inside diameter for pressure thrust from the manufacturer's catalog. For
all load cases, including pressure, CAESAR II calculates the pressure thrust force tending to
blow the bellows apart. If left blank, or zero, then no axial thrust force due to pressure is
calculated. Many manufacturers give the effective area of the expansion joint: A eff. The Effective
ID is calculated from the effective area by:
Effective ID = (4Aeff / )

1/2

Reducer
Indicates that you are supplying reducer data. Select or clear this option by double-clicking
Reducer on the Classic Piping Input dialog box.

Specifies the Diameter 2, Thickness 2, and Alpha values at the To node of the reducer. The
diameter and wall thickness at the From node of the reducer element are taken from the current
piping element data.
CAESAR II constructs a concentric reducer element made of ten pipe cylinders, each of a
successively larger or smaller diameter and wall thickness over the element length. CAESAR II
calculates SIFs according to the current piping code (for more information, see Code
Compliance Considerations (on page 837)) and applies these internally to the Code Stress

CAESAR II User's Guide

109

Piping Input Reference

Calculations. These SIFs are dependent on the slope of the reducer transition (among other
code-specific considerations), Alpha. If Alpha is left blank, then the software calculates this
value based on the change in pipe diameter over 60% of the element length.
If specified, Diameter 2 and Thickness 2 are carried forward when the next pipe element is
created as Diameter and Wt/Sch. If not specified, Diameter 2 and Thickness 2 are assumed to
be equal to Diameter and Wt/Sch on the following element dialog box.

If there is no value for Alpha is specified on the dialog box, CAESAR II reports the alpha value
in the Errors and Warnings dialog box.

Diameter 2
Specifies the diameter at the To of the reducer element. The value carries forward as the
diameter of the following element. Nominal values are converted to actual values if that feature
is active. If left blank, CAESAR II uses the diameter from the following element as Diameter 2.

Thickness 2
Specifies the wall thickness at the To node of the reducer element. The value carries forward as
the wall thickness of the following element. Nominal values are converted to actual values if that
feature is active. If this option is left blank, CAESAR II uses the thickness from the following
element as Thickness 2.

110

CAESAR II User's Guide

Piping Input Reference

Alpha
Specifies the slope, in degrees, of the reducer transition. If left blank, CAESAR II assumes the
slope equal to the arc tangent 1/2(the change in diameters) / (length of sloped portion of
reducer).
TD/12. This entry is a required input for IGE/TD/12.

Because all reducers are different, the actual length of sloped portion of reducer is unknown
unless you define it. Because of this, if Alpha is not specified, CAESAR II makes an assumption
that the length of sloped portion of reducer is equal to 60% of the total reducer length. If you
leave the Alpha value blank, then CAESAR II defaults to arc tangent 1/2(the change in
diameters) / (0.60 x element length).

R1
Specifies the transition radius for the large end of the reducer as shown in Appendix 4, Table 8
of IGE/TD/12 Code. This option is enabled only when IGE/TD/12 is active.

R2
Specifies the transition radius for the small end of the reducer as shown in Appendix 4, Table 8
of IGE/TD/12. This option is enabled only when IGE/TD/12 is active.

CAESAR II User's Guide

111

Piping Input Reference

SIFs & Tees

Indicates that you are supplying SIF and tee data. Select or clear by double-clicking the SIFs &
Tees check box on the Classic Piping Input dialog box.
This auxiliary dialog box tab controls options for stress intensification factors (SIFs), or fitting
types, for up to two nodes per element. If you select components from the list, CAESAR II
automatically calculates the SIF values according to the applicable code unless you override this
behavior. Certain fittings and certain codes require additional data. Boxes display as appropriate
for the selected fitting.

There are two basic component types:

Three element intersection components
Two element joint components

112

CAESAR II User's Guide

Piping Input Reference

A fully defined intersection model requires that three pipes frame into the intersection node and
that two of them are co-linear. Partial intersection assumptions are made for junctions where
you have coded one or two pipes into the intersection node, but these models are not
recommended. Two element joint components can be formed equally well with one or two
elements framing into the node.
You only need to type the intersection or joint type and properties on one of the elements going
to the junction. CAESAR II duplicates the intersection characteristics for all other pipes framing
into the intersection.
Fully review the warning messages coming from CAESAR II during error checking. These
messages detail any assumptions made during the assembly and calculation of the intersection
SIFs.
The available intersections and joint types, along with the other parameters that can affect the
stress intensification factors for the respective component, are shown in the table that follows.

Input Items Optionally Effecting SIF Calculations

1

REINFORCED FABRICATED TEE

FTG RO

CROTC
H

UNREINFORCED FABRICATED
TEE

FTG RO

CROTC
H

WELDING TEE

FTG RO

CROTC
H

SWEEPOLET

CROTC
H

WELDOLET

CROTC
H

EXTRUDED WELDING TEE

GIRTH BUTT WELD

WELD D OR ID

SOCKET WELD (NO UNDERCUT)

FILLET

SOCKET WELD (AS WELDED)

FILLET

10

TAPERED TRANSITION

WELD D

11

THREADED JOINT

12

DOUBLE WELDED SLIP-ON

13

LAP JOINT FLANGE (B16.9)

14

BONNEY FORGE SWEEPOLET

15

BONNEY FORGE LATROLET

16

BONNEY FORGE INSERT

WELDOLET

17

FULL ENCIRCLEMENT TEE

CAESAR II User's Guide

PAD THK

FTG RO

CROTC
H

WELD ID

FTG RO

WELD ID

113

Piping Input Reference

Node
Specifies the node number where the stress intensification exists. CAESAR II displays the To
node of the current element by default. You can type any node in the system, but it is most often
at a pipe intersection or joint.
If the node is at an intersection, CAESAR II calculates SIFs for all pipes going to the intersection
if the intersection Type is specified. You only need to type the intersection type once. CAESAR
II finds all other pipes framing into the intersection and applies the appropriate SIFs.
If the node is at a two-pipe joint, such as a butt weld, CAESAR II calculates SIFs for the two
pipes going to the joint node if the joint Type is specified. You only need to specify the joint type
once. CAESAR II finds the other pipe completing the joint and applies the appropriate SIFs.
If the node is not at an intersection or a joint then, leave the Type box blank and type user
defined SIFs in the SIF(i) and SIF(o) boxes. Entries in the SIF(i) and SIF(o) boxes only apply to
the element on which they are defined.
User defined stress intensification factors must be greater than or equal to one.
CAESAR II calculates and displays code-defined SIFs in the Intersection SIF scratchpad.
Access this scratchpad by clicking Environment > Review SIFs at Intersection Nodes on the
Classic Piping Input dialog box. You can modify parameters used in the scratchpad so that
you can observe the effects of different geometries and thicknesses. Most changes made in the
scratchpad can be automatically transferred back into the model.
If the node is on any part of the bend curvature then the following applies:
1. You cannot override code calculated SIFs for bends by default. A configuration option exists
to override this default. For more information, see Allow User's SIF at Bend (on page 83). If
you set Allow User's SIF at Bend to True, then you can specify SIFs for bend To nodes.
The SIFs specified in this way apply for the entire bend curvature.
2. CAESAR II applies user-defined SIFs to straight pipe going to points on a bend curvature
regardless of any parameter in the setup file. This option is commonly used to intensify
injector tie-ins at bends, or dummy legs, or other bend attachment-type of supports.

Type
Specifies the type of tee or joint.
For non-FRP piping codes, there are six types of tees and ten types of joints. These
elements correspond to 1 to 6 and 7 to 16 in the previous table. For more information, see
Input Items Optionally Effecting SIF Calculations (on page 113).
For BS 7159 and UKOOA, there are two types of tees: Moulded and Fabricated. Moulded
tee corresponds to Welding tee (3) or Extruded welding tee (6), and Fabricated tee
corresponds to Reinforced fabricated tee (1).
For ISO 14692, there are types of tee and joints: Tee, Qualified tee and Joint.

114

CAESAR II User's Guide

Piping Input Reference

SIF (i)
Indicates the in-plane stress intensification factors (SIFs) for a bend or intersection.
Specify this value for any point in the piping system by selecting the SIFs & Tees check box on
the Classic Piping Input dialog box. Enter the node number to which the stress applies. Then,
specify the SIF (i) and SIF (o) values on the SIFs/Tees tab.
If you do not specify a value in the SIF (i) and SIF (o) boxes, CAESAR IIperforms
code-related calculations.
For more information on stress intensification factors (SIFs) in CAESAR II, see Stress
Intensification Factors Details.
SIF (o)
Indicates the out-of-plane stress intensification factors (SIFs) for a bend or intersection.
Specify this value for any point in the piping system by selecting the SIFs & Tees check box on
the Classic Piping Input dialog box. Enter the node number to which the stress applies. Then,
specify the SIF (i) and SIF (o) values on the SIFs/Tees tab.
If you do not specify a value in the SIF (i) and SIF (o) boxes, CAESAR II performs
code-related calculations.
For more information on stress intensification factors (SIFs) in CAESAR II, see Stress
Intensification Factors Details.
Stress Index - Axial (Ia)
Indicates the sustained longitudinal (axial) force index (I a). You can use this index value (along
with the longitudinal force due to sustained loads and the dimensions of a cross-sectional area
of the pipe) to determine the amount of stress that is due to sustained longitudinal force.
Specify this value for any point in the piping system by selecting the SIFs & Tees check box on
the Classic Piping Input dialog box. Enter the node number to which the stress index applies.
Then, specify the Stress Index - Axial (Ia) and Stress Index - Torsion (It) values on the
SIFs/Tees tab.
If you do not specify a value in the Stress Index - Axial (Ia) box, CAESAR II sets the
value to 1.0 by default.
For more information on stress intensification factors (SIFs) in CAESAR II, see Stress
Intensification Factors Details.
Stress Index - Torsion (It)
Indicates the sustained torsional moment index (It). You can use this index value (along with the
torsional moment due to sustained loads) to determine the amount of stress that is due to
sustained torsional moment.
Specify this value for any point in the piping system by selecting the SIFs & Tees check box on
the Classic Piping Input dialog box. Enter the node number to which the stress index applies.
Then, specify the Stress Index - Torsion (It) and Stress Index - Axial (Ia) values on the
SIFs/Tees tab.
If you do not specify a value in the Stress Index - Torsion (It) box, CAESAR II sets the
value to 1.0 by default.
For more information on stress intensification factors (SIFs) in CAESAR II, see Stress
Intensification Factors Details.

CAESAR II User's Guide

115

Piping Input Reference

Pad Thk
Specifies the thickness of the reinforcing pad for reinforced fabricated or full encirclement tees,
intersection type #1 and #17 respectively. The pad thickness is only valid for these intersection
types. In most piping codes, the beneficial effect of the pad thickness is limited to 1.5 times the
nominal thickness of the header. This factor does not apply in BS 806 or Z184, and is 2.5 in the
Swedish piping code. If the thickness of a type 1 or type 17 intersection is left blank or zero the
SIFs for an unreinforced fabricated tee are used.

Ftg Ro
Specifies the fitting outside radius for branch connections. This option is used for reduced
branch connections in the ASME and B31.1 piping codes, Bonney Forge Insert Weldolets, and
for WRC 329 intersection SIF calculations. Configuration options exist to invoke the WRC 329
calculations and to limit the application of the reduced branch connection rules to unreinforced
fabricated tees, sweepolets, weldolets, and extruded welding tees. If omitted, Ftg Ro defaults to
the outside radius of the branch pipe.

CROTCH R
Specifies the crotch radius of the formed lip on an extruded welding tee, intersection type 6. This
is also the intersection weld crotch radius for WRC329 calculations. Specifying this value can
result in a 50% reduction in the stress intensification at the WRC 329 intersection. If you attempt
to reduce the stress riser at a fabricated intersection by guaranteeing that there is a smooth
transition radius from the header to the branch pipe, then you may reduce the resulting stress
intensification by a factor of 2.0.

WELD (D)
Specifies the average circumferential weld mismatch measured at the inside diameter of the
pipe. This value is used for Butt Welds and Tapered transitions. This is the average; not the
maximum mismatch. You must verify that any maximum mismatch requirements are satisfied for
your particular code.
FILLET
Specifies the fillet leg length. This option is used only in conjunction with a socket weld
component. This value is the length of the shorter leg for an unequal leg fillet weld. If a fillet leg
is given, both socket weld types result in the same SIF. See appendix D of the B31 piping codes
for further clarification.

116

CAESAR II User's Guide

Piping Input Reference

Weld ID
Specifies the weld ID value. The following values are valid.
0 or BLANK - As Welded
1 - Finished/Ground Flush
Used for:
BONNEY FORGE SWEEPOLETS
BONNEY FORGE INSERT WELDOLETS
BUTT WELDS IN THE SWEDISH PIPING CODE
If this value is 1 then the weld is considered to be ground flush on the inside and out and the SIF
is taken as 1.0.
For more information on how input parameters are used to compute SIFs for girth butt welds,
see WELD (D) (on page 116).

B1; Wc
Specifies values that depend upon the code that you are using.

ASME Class 2 and ASME Class 3

Defines the primary stress index used for the given node on the current element.
Unless you otherwise over ride this value, the following values are applied for ASME Class 2
and Class 3 piping:
Straight Pipe:

B1 = 0.5 B2 = 1.0

Curved Pipe:

B1 = -0.1 + 0.4h; but not <0 or >0.5

B2 = 1.30/h**2/3 but not <1.0; h = tR/ rm**2

Intersections:

B1 = 0.5

Butt Welded Tees:

B2b = 0.4(R/T)**2/3 but not < 1.0

B2r = 0.5(R/T)**2/3 but not < 1.0

Branch Connections:

(r < 0.5R)
B2b = 0.50 C2b but not < 1.0
B2r = 0.75 C2r but not < 1.0
C2b = 3(R/T)**2/3 (r/R)**1/2 (t/T)(r/FTG ro) but not < 1.5
C2r = 1.15(r/t)**1/4 but not < 1.5

B31.1 / B31.3
Defines the weld strength reduction factor (W c) used to reduce the allowable stress for the
sustained load case.

BS-7159 and UKOOA

Defines the pressure stress multiplier (m) if it is different than the code requirements. For
straight pipe, m = 1.0; for bends and tees, m is defined in Figures 7.1 and 7.12 of the BS 7159
Code.

CAESAR II User's Guide

117

Piping Input Reference

IGE/TD/12
Override the cyclic pressure stress intensification factor Ip(Cyc) if it is different than the code
calculations (calculated according to Table 9, Figure 5, and Figure 7 of the code).

B2
Specifies the primary stress index for the given node on the current element. This entry is only
applicable for ASME Class 2 and 3 piping.
If omitted, B1 and B2 are defaulted as follows:
Straight Pipe:

B1=0.5 B2=1.0

Curved Pipe:

B1=-0.1+0.4h; but not <0 or >0.5

2/3
2
B2=1.30/h ; but not <1.0; h=tR/rm

Intersections:

B1=0.5

Butt-Welded Tees:

B2b=0.4(R/T) but not <1.0

2/3
B2r=0.5(R/T) but not <1.0

Branch Connections:

(r<0.5R)
B2b=0.50 C2b but not <1.0
B2r=0.75 C2r but not <1.0
2/3
1/2
C2b=3(R/T) (r/R) (t/T)(r/FTG ro) but not <1.5
1/4
C2r=1.15(r/t) but not <1.5

2/3

You can use the SIF(IN) and SIF(OUT) boxes to override the CAESAR II calculated values for
any intersection. Override values only apply for the single element on which they are defined.
SIFs can be calculated for partial intersections and dummy legs.
When IGE/TD/12 is active, the SIF/TEE dialog box changes its appearance to
accommodate specialized SIF parameters. Refer to the supplementary IGE/TD/12
documentation for further information.

Code Options (B31.1 & B31.8)

B31.1:
Indicates that the tee meets the dimensional criteria of Figure D1 as well as Notes 6a, 6c, 6d,
6e, and 6f. This allows the software to use the branch equation when determining the SIF value
for the tee. Note that this option relies on the setting of the Configuration Options Reduced
Intersection and No RFT / WLT in Reduced Fitting SIFs.

B31.8:
Indicates that the software should use B31.8 Notes 6, 9, or 10, as applicable, when determining
the SIF value for the tee.

ASME NC and ND:

Indicates that the tee meets the dimensional criteria of Figure 3673.2(b)-2 as well as Notes 10
and 11. This allows the software to use the branch equation when determining the SIF value for
the tee. Note that this option relies on the setting of the Configuration Options Reduced
Intersection and No RFT / WLT in Reduced Fitting SIFs.

118

CAESAR II User's Guide

Piping Input Reference

ASME NC/ND 3673.2(b)-1 Note 3

Indicates that the material for this tee is ferrous, which enables the software to compute the Y
value based on the highest temperature value specified.

Input Items Optionally Effecting SIF Calculations For ISO 14692

1

Tee

Joint

Qualified Tee

User-Defined SIFs Anywhere in the Piping System

SIFs for non-intersection points are normally taken to be 1.0 unless the piping element is a
bend. If the SIF should be greater than (1.0), then you can type the non-unity SIF in the
Intersection Auxiliary box without specifying the intersection type. A user-defined SIF only acts
at the node on the current element.

Stress Intensification Factors Details

CAESAR II calculates SIFs automatically for bends and defined intersections as specified by the
applicable piping code. You can type a user-defined SIF for any point in the piping system by
activating the SIFs & Tees check box on the Classic Piping Input dialog box. Type the node
number where the stress is to be intensified in the first available Node box. Type the in-plane
and out-plane stress intensification factors in the SIF(i) and the SIF(o) boxes. Specify any axial
and torsion stress on the elements on the Stress Index - Axial (Ia) and Stress Index - Torsion
(It) boxes.
You cannot specify SIFs for bend elements unless the Allow User's SIF at Bend option
is set to True in the configuration file. For more information, see Allow User's SIF at Bend (on
page 83). Code defined SIFs always apply.
CAESAR II does not allow user-defined stress intensification factors to be less than 1.0.
The node to be intensified must be the To or the From node on the current element.
Stresses are only intensified at the element end going to the specified node. For example, if two
pipes frame into node 10, one going from 5 to 10, and the other from 10 to 15 and a stress
intensification factor of 2.0 for node 10 is defined on the element from 5 to 10, then the 10 end of
the element from 5 to 10 has a stress intensification of 2.0 and the 10 end of the element from
10 to 15 has a stress intensification of 1.0.
You can use user-defined stress intensification factors to override code calculated values for
nodes at intersections. For example, let node 40 be an intersection defined by an unreinforced
fabricated tee. The header pipes framing into the intersection go from 35 to 40 and from 40 to
45. The branch pipe framing into the intersection goes from 175 to 40. The code-calculated
values for the stress intensification factors in the header pipes are:
SIF(i) = 4.50
SIF(o) = 3.75

CAESAR II User's Guide

119

Piping Input Reference

and in the branch pipe are
SIF(i) = 6.70
SIF(o) = 5.58
Also assume that finite element analysis of the intersection showed the header stress
intensification factors to be 2.3 and 1.87 respectively and the branch stress intensification
factors to be equal to the code recommended value, that is 6.70 and 5.58. To properly override
the code-calculated stress intensification factors for the header pipes, two pipe elements must
be modified:
35 to 40

Node 40
Type:
SIF(i): 2.3
SIF(o): 1.87

40 to 15

Node 40
Type:
SIF(i): 2.3
SIF(o): 1.87

The stress intensification for the branch pipes can be calculated according to the code, so part
of the branch pipe data might appear:
175 to 40

NODE 40
Type: 2 - Unreinforced
SIF(i):
SIF(o):

If either of the SIF boxes for the header elements going to 40 were left blank, the
code-calculated value would be used in its place. This is only true where code-calculated values
exist along with user-specified values.
If the element from 110 to 115 needs the stress intensification factors for each of its ends is 2.0,
then a part of that element data might appear:
110 to 115

Node 110
Type:
SIF(i): 2.0
SIF(o):
Node: 115
Type:
SIF(i): 2.0
SIF(o):

Leaving the out-of-plane stress intensification factor blank implies that it is equal to the in-plane
stress intensification factor. There are no code-calculated values to override these user-input
values.
You are not permitted to override code-calculated stress intensification factors for bend
elements unless the Allow User's SIF at Bend option is set to True in the configuration file.
Additionally, bend stress intensification factors supersedes any code-calculated intersection
stress intensification factors for the same node. This characteristic allows you to apply
code-calculated intersection stress intensification factors to dummy legs without disturbing the
normal bend stress intensification factors. The node on the dummy leg, which is also on the

120

CAESAR II User's Guide

Piping Input Reference

bend curvature, is defined as an intersection on the Intersection SIF Scratchpad. The
intersection stress intensification factors are calculated and can be applied to the dummy leg
end that connects to the bend. Bend stress intensification factors are unchanged.
Stress intensification factors can be calculated for intersections having one, two, or three pipes
framing into it. Where two pipes form a partial intersection, CAESAR II assumes that the larger
pipe is the header and the smaller the branch.
Where one pipe forms a partial intersection, CAESAR II assumes that the intersection is full
sized.
CAESAR II does not calculate stress intensification factors for intersections having more than
three pipes framing into it.

SIF Scratchpad
View the stress intensification factors calculated by CAESAR II interactively from the Classic
Piping Input dialog box by clicking Environment > Review SIFs at Intersection Nodes. The
SIF scratchpads display after you type in the node number to review when prompted. The node
must be a valid bend node when reviewing SIFs at bends.

You can interactively change any of the data and recalculate the SIFs. This allows you to see
the effect of changing geometries and properties on code stress intensification factors.
CAESAR II allows you to transfer data from the scratchpad back to the actual model.

CAESAR II User's Guide

121

Piping Input Reference

IGE\TD\12 Requirements
IGE\TD\12 requires different information than the other codes used in CAESAR II. When
IGE\TD\12 is active, the SIFs/Tees Auxiliary field changes to accommodate specialized SIF
parameters. For more information regarding the specialized parameters refer to the text and
figures at the end of this section.

Node
Specifies the node number where the stress intensification exists. CAESAR II displays the To
node of the current element by default. You can type any node in the system, but it is most often
at a pipe intersection or joint.
If the node is at an intersection, CAESAR II calculates SIFs for all pipes going to the intersection
if the intersection Type is specified. You only need to type the intersection type once. CAESAR
II finds all other pipes framing into the intersection and applies the appropriate SIFs.
If the node is at a two-pipe joint, such as a butt weld, CAESAR II calculates SIFs for the two
pipes going to the joint node if the joint Type is specified. You only need to specify the joint type
once. CAESAR II finds the other pipe completing the joint and applies the appropriate SIFs.

122

CAESAR II User's Guide

Piping Input Reference

If the node is not at an intersection or a joint then, leave the Type box blank and type user
defined SIFs in the SIF(i) and SIF(o) boxes. Entries in the SIF(i) and SIF(o) boxes only apply to
the element on which they are defined.
User defined stress intensification factors must be greater than or equal to one.
CAESAR II calculates and displays code-defined SIFs in the Intersection SIF scratchpad.
Access this scratchpad by clicking Environment > Review SIFs at Intersection Nodes on the
Classic Piping Input dialog box. You can modify parameters used in the scratchpad so that
you can observe the effects of different geometries and thicknesses. Most changes made in the
scratchpad can be automatically transferred back into the model.
If the node is on any part of the bend curvature then the following applies:
1. You cannot override code calculated SIFs for bends by default. A configuration option exists
to override this default. For more information, see Allow User's SIF at Bend (on page 83). If
you set Allow User's SIF at Bend to True, then you can specify SIFs for bend To nodes.
The SIFs specified in this way apply for the entire bend curvature.
2. CAESAR II applies user-defined SIFs to straight pipe going to points on a bend curvature
regardless of any parameter in the setup file. This option is commonly used to intensify
injector tie-ins at bends, or dummy legs, or other bend attachment-type of supports.

Type
Specifies the type of tees or joints.
Do/r3
Specifies the following terms for each component type:
Forged Tee to BS 1640 - Specifies the Do value. For more information on Do, see IGE\TD\12
Reference (on page 126).
Weldolet - Specifies the r3 value. For more information on r3, see IGE\TD\12 Reference (on
page 126).
Drawn/Extruded Tee - Specifies the Do value. For more information on Do, see IGE\TD\12
Reference (on page 126).
Weldoflange - Specifies the r3 value. For more information on r3, see IGE\TD\12 Reference
(on page 126).
T/Th/T'b
Specifies the following terms for each component type:
Forged Tee to BS 1640 - Specifies the T value. For more information on T, see IGE\TD\12
Reference (on page 126).
Weldolet - Specifies the theta value. For more information on theta, see IGE\TD\12 Reference
(on page 126).
Drawn/Extruded Tee - Specifies the T value. For more information on T, see IGE\TD\12
Reference (on page 126).
Weldoflange - Specifies the theta value. For more information on theta, see IGE\TD\12
Reference (on page 126).

CAESAR II User's Guide

123

Piping Input Reference

Te/Tb
Specifies the following terms for each component type:
Fabricated Tee with Pad - Specifies the Te value. For more information on Te, see IGE\TD\12
Reference (on page 126).
Forged Tee to BS 1640 - Specifies the Tb value. For more information on Tb, see IGE\TD\12
Reference (on page 126).
Weldolet - Specifies the Tb value. For more information on Tb, see IGE\TD\12 Reference (on
page 126).
Drawn/Extruded Tee - Specifies the Tb value. For more information on Tb, see IGE\TD\12
Reference (on page 126).
Full Encirclement Tee - Specifies the Te value. For more information on Te, see IGE\TD\12
Reference (on page 126).
Long Weldneck Flange - Specifies the Tb value. For more information on Tb, see IGE\TD\12
Reference (on page 126).
Weldoflange - Specifies the Tb value. For more information on Tb, see IGE\TD\12 Reference
(on page 126).

rp/do
Specifies the following terms for each component type:
Fabricated Tee - Specifies the rp value. For more information on rp, see IGE\TD\12 Reference
(on page 126).
Forged Tee to BS 1640 - Specifies the do value. For more information on do, see IGE\TD\12
Reference (on page 126).
Weldolet - Specifies the rp value. For more information on rp, see IGE\TD\12 Reference (on
page 126).
Drawn/Extruded Tee - Specifies the do value. For more information on do, see IGE\TD\12
Reference (on page 126).
Long Weldneck Flange - Specifies the rp value. For more information on rp, see IGE\TD\12
Reference (on page 126).
Weldoflange - Specifies the rp value. For more information on rp, see IGE\TD\12 Reference
(on page 126).

r2/rc
Specifies the following terms for each component type:
Fabricated Tee - Specifies the r2 value. For more information on r2, see IGE\TD\12 Reference
(on page 126).
Forged Tee to BS 1640 - Specifies the rc value. For more information on rc, see IGE\TD\12
Reference (on page 126).
Sweepolet - Specifies the rc value. For more information on rc, see IGE\TD\12 Reference (on
page 126).
Weldolet - Specifies the r2 value. For more information on r2, see IGE\TD\12 Reference (on
page 126).
Drawn/Extruded Tee - Specifies the rc value. For more information on rc, see IGE\TD\12
Reference (on page 126).

124

CAESAR II User's Guide

Piping Input Reference

Long Weldneck Flange - Specifies the r2 value. For more information on r2, see IGE\TD\12
Reference (on page 126).
Weldoflange - Specifies the r2 value. For more information on r2, see IGE\TD\12 Reference
(on page 126).

r1/Tc/Lh
Specifies the following terms for each component type:
Fabricated Tee - Specifies the r1 value. For more information on r1, see IGE\TD\12 Reference
(on page 126).
Forged Tee to BS 1640 - Specifies the Tc value. For more information on Tc, see IGE\TD\12
Reference (on page 126).
Sweepolet - Specifies the r1 value. For more information on r1, see IGE\TD\12 Reference (on
page 126).
Weldolet - Specifies the r1 value. For more information on r1, see IGE\TD\12 Reference (on
page 126).
Drawn/Extruded Tee - Specifies the Lh value. For more information on Lh, see IGE\TD\12
Reference (on page 126).
Long Weldneck Flange - Specifies the r1 value. For more information on r1, see IGE\TD\12
Reference (on page 126).
Weldoflange - Specifies the r1 value. For more information on r1, see IGE\TD\12 Reference
(on page 126).

L1/Lb
Specifies the following terms for each component type:
Fabricated Tee - Specifies the L1 value. For more information on L1, see IGE\TD\12 Reference
(on page 126).
Weldolet - Specifies the L1 value. For more information on L1, see IGE\TD\12 Reference (on
page 126).
Drawn/Extruded Tee - Specifies the Lb value. For more information on Lb, see IGE\TD\12
Reference (on page 126).
Long Weldneck Flange - Specifies the L1 value. For more information on L1, see IGE\TD\12
Reference (on page 126).
Weldoflange - Specifies the L1 value. For more information on L1, see IGE\TD\12 Reference
(on page 126).

CAESAR II User's Guide

125

Piping Input Reference

IGE\TD\12 Reference
Use the figures below to identify the specialized parameters.

Forged Tee

Weldolet

126

CAESAR II User's Guide

Piping Input Reference

Drawn/Extruded Tee

Weldoflange

CAESAR II User's Guide

127

Piping Input Reference

Full Encirclement Tee

Long Weldneck Flange

128

CAESAR II User's Guide

Piping Input Reference

Sweepolet

Fabricated Tee

CAESAR II User's Guide

129

Piping Input Reference

Fabricated Tee with Pad

Weld ID
Specifies the weld ID value. The following values are valid.
0 or BLANK - As Welded
1 - Finished/Ground Flush
Used for:
BONNEY FORGE SWEEPOLETS
BONNEY FORGE INSERT WELDOLETS
BUTT WELDS IN THE SWEDISH PIPING CODE
If this value is 1 then the weld is considered to be ground flush on the inside and out and the SIF
is taken as 1.0.
For more information on how input parameters are used to compute SIFs for girth butt welds,
see WELD (D) (on page 116).

Stress Concentration Factors

Overrides the stress concentration factors calculated according to the IGE/TD/12 Code
equations. Any values typed here apply only to the element on which they have been specified
except when entered on a bend node. In that case, they apply throughout the bend.
For branches of tees, any bending SCFs specified here must include the "w" term.

Fatigue Class
Overrides the fatigue class calculated according to the IGE/TD/12 Code equations. Any values
selected here apply only to the element on which they have been specified except when entered
on a bend node. In that case, they apply throughout the bend.

130

CAESAR II User's Guide

Piping Input Reference

Boundary Conditions
The checkboxes in this block open the auxiliary dialog box tabs to collect information on items
which restrain (or impose movement on) the pipe. These items include restraints, hangers,
flexible nozzles or displacements. Though not required, it is recommended that you define such
information on the dialog box which has that point as the From node or To node. This is of
benefit if the data must be located for modification. The auxiliary dialog box tabs allow you to
specify up to four restraints (devices which in some way modify the free motion of the system),
one hanger, one nozzle, or two sets of nodal displacements per element. If needed, you can
define additional conditions for any node on other elements.

Restraints
Indicates that you are supplying restraint data. Select or clear this option by double-clicking the
Restraints check box on the Classic Piping Input dialog box.
This auxiliary dialog box tab controls data for up to four restraints for each element. Node
number and restraint types are required. All other information is optional. If you omit the
stiffness, entry defaults to rigid.
You can specify skewed restraints by typing direction cosines with the type, such as X
(1,0,1) for a restraint running at 45 in the X-Z plane.

CAESAR II User's Guide

131

Piping Input Reference

You can specify as many as four restraints for an element. If you need to specify more than four
restraints on one element, you can place the additional restraints on any other element.
Do not use restraints in the following three situations:
1. Imposed Displacements - Specify displacements for the point using the Displacement
Auxiliary box.
2. Flexible Nozzles - Use the Nozzles Flex check box to open the Nozzles Auxiliary Data
box to input the vessel or tank characteristics required by WRC 297, PD 5500, or API 650 to
calculate local nozzle flexibilities. After these flexibilities have been calculated, CAESAR II
automatically inserts the necessary restraints and flexibilities into the piping model.
3. Hangers program designed or pre-defined spring hangers - Use the Hangers check
box to open the Hanger Auxiliary Data box.

Node
Specifies the node number where the restraint is to act. The node number does not have to be
on the current element.

CNode
Specifies the connecting node. Restraints with connecting nodes can be used to tie one node in
the piping system to any other node in the system. If left blank then the restraint node is tied by
the restraint stiffness to a fixed point in space. If the connecting node is specified then the
restraint node is tied by the restraint stiffness to the connecting node.
In all cases, CNodes associate nodal degrees of freedom. Additionally, CNodes can be used to
geometrically connect different parts of a model graphically. This option is controlled by the
configuration option Connect Geometry through CNodes (on page 59).

Type
Specifies the restraint type. You can select a restraint from the list in the Restraint Auxiliary
box. For more information, see Section 3 of the CAESAR II Applications Guide.

132

Restraint Type

Abbreviation

Anchor

ANC

Translational Double Acting

X, Y, or Z

Rotational Double Acting

RX, RY, or RZ

Guide, Double Acting

GUIDE

Double Acting Limit Stop

LIM

Translational Double Acting Snubber

XSNB, YSNB, ZSNB

Translational Directional

+X, -X, +Y, -Y, +Z, -Z

Rotational Directional

+RX, -RX, +RY, etc.

Directional Limit Stop

+LIM, -LIM

Large Rotation Rod

XROD, YROD, ZROD

Translational Double Acting Bilinear

X2, Y2, Z2

CAESAR II User's Guide

Piping Input Reference

Rotational Double Acting Bilinear

RX2, RY2, RZ2

Translational Directional Bilinear

-X2, +X2, -Y2, etc.

Rotational Directional Bilinear

+RX2, -RX2, +RY2, etc.

Bottom Out Sprint

XSPR, YSPR, ZSPR

Directional Snubber

+XSNB, -XSNB, +YSNB, etc.

Anchor
Specifies an anchor restraint. This type of restraint is defined for all degrees of freedom at the
node.

X, Y, or Z
Specifies translational restraints which can be preceded by a (+) or (-). If you type a sign, it
defines the direction of allowed free displacement along the specified degree-of-freedom. For
example, a +Y restraint is a restraint against movement in the minus -Y direction. It is free to
move in the plus Y direction.

X (cosx, cosy, cosz) or X (vecx, vecy, vecz)

Specifies translational skewed restraints. These values can be preceded by a (+) or (-). If you
type a direction vector such as vecx, vecy, or vecz, CAESAR II converts the direction vector into
the corresponding cosines.

RX, RY, or RZ
Specifies rotational restraints which can be preceded by a (+) or (-). If you type a sign, it defines
the direction of allowed free displacement along the specified degree-of-freedom.

Guide
Specifies a transverse restraint that can be skewed.

LIM
Specifies limit stops. These are axial restraints that can be preceded by a (+) or (-). If you type a
sign, it defines the direction of allowed free displacement along the element longitudinal axis.

XROD, YROD, ZROD

Specifies translational, large rotation, rod, or hanger-type restraints. These values can be
preceded by a (+) or (-) sign to indicate the orientation of the pivot point about which the rod
swings. A (+) is assumed. In the case of a YROD, this implies that the pivot point is above the
pipe. The rod or hanger length is also required.

CAESAR II User's Guide

133

Piping Input Reference

XROD (COSX, COSY, COSZ) or XROD (VECX, VECY, VECZ)
Specifies translational skewed, large rotation rod, or hanger type restraints.

X2, Y2, Z2
Specifies bilinear restraints. These are restraints that have two different stiffnesses associated
with them. The stiffness is dependent upon the loading on the restraint. Bilinear restraints can
be preceded by a (+) or a (-).

RX (cosx, cosy, cosz) or RX (vecx, vecy, vecz)

Specifies rotational skewed restraints.

XSPR, YSPR, ZSPR

Specifies spring supports. These values can be preceded by a (+) or a (-).
A bottom out spring requires additional input. The additional input includes the spring rate,
allowed travel, and initial load. If the allowed travel in the direction of support is exceeded, the
spring bottoms-out.

XSNB, YSNB, ZSNB

Specifies snubbers, which are restraints that engage only during quick movements such as
those induced by a shock. They only act on the piping system in the occasional load case.
Snubbers can be preceded by a (+) or a (-).
Because CAESAR II cannot perform load stepping, static analysis with snubbers requires a
preliminary manual analysis to determine thermal movements. Here is the procedure.
1. Analyze a hot operating case without your occasional loads.
2. Take the displacements from this analysis at the snubbers and put them back into the input.
3. At the location where the snubbers are defined, define a CNODE and put these
displacements on the CNODE.
4. For your real analysis, apply these displacements to all load cases. Because they are on the
far side of the snubber, they won't affect anything unless the load case is called OCC, which
activates the snubber stiffness.
So:
When you run your standard OPE case (W+T1+P1+D1), the snubber node displaces as
before. There are no restraints because the load case is OPE, not OCC.
When you run the operating + occasional case (W+T1+P1+D1+WIND1), the snubber
node displaces along with its CNODE. There is a difference in these two displacements
due to the WIND1 load and the snubber stiffness, because the case is now set as OCC.

134

CAESAR II User's Guide

Piping Input Reference

K2
Specifies the yield stiffness of a bilinear restraint. When the load on the restraint exceeds Fy, the
stiffness on the restraint changes from K1 to K2. Type a negative value to model shallow trench
or groove-type pipeline supports. Caesar II treats K2 values of zero as rigid. Type a value of 1.0
for very small stiffnesses.

Gap
Specifies the following values:

TYPE = X Y Z GUI LIM RX RY RZ

GAP - Specifies the distance along the restraint line of action that the restrained node can travel
before resistance to movement begins. The gap value must be positive. The gap is given in
degrees for rotational restraints. If the translational restraint is not preceded by a sign, then the
restraint is double acting and the gap exists for both positive and negative displacements along
the line of action. For example, if a 0.25 in. gap is specified at a +Y restraint, then the restrained
node can move freely 0.25 in. in the minus Y direction before restraint occurs. The gap
specification does not affect the amount of free displacement that can occur along the positive Y
direction in this example.
You can enter two restraints having the same line of action but with different signs at the same
node when you define windows of allowed movement. Be careful to remember to form the
window with signs on restraints rather than with signs on gaps. A gap is a measure of length in
CAESAR II. A gap is always positive.
Examples:
TYPE GUI GAP 1/4 ... One quarter in. gap on either side of the guided restraint.
TYPE +Y GAP 3.0 ... Three in. gap below the support that must be closed before the +Y
support begins acting.
TYPE RX GAP 5.0 ... Five degree gap about the X axis about which the pipe may rotate
freely before rotational restraint occurs.
TYPE = XROD YROD ZROD
Len - Specifies the swinging length of the rod or hanger. This is the distance along the restraint
line of action from the restrained node to the pivot point. The restraint swings about the pivot
point. If a CNODE is defined then the restraint swings about the CNODE. Len is a required
entry.
TYPE = X2 Y2 Z2 RX2 RY2 RZ2
K2 - Specifies the yield stiffness of a bilinear restraint. When the load on the restraint exceeds
Fy, the stiffness on the restraint changes from K1 to K2. Type a negative value to model shallow
trench or groove-type pipeline supports. CAESAR II treats K2 values of zero as rigid. Type 1.0
for very small stiffnesses.
TYPE = XSPR YSPR ZSPR
"x" - Specifies the distance traveled along the spring axis before bottom-out occurs. In the case
of a typical YSPR, this is the movement in the negative Y direction before the spring bottoms
out.
TYPE = XSNB YSNB ZSNB

CAESAR II User's Guide

135

Piping Input Reference

Stif
Specifies stiffness associated with any support, guide, limit stop, rod, or spring that can be
defined as a restraint. If you leave this option blank then the defined restraint is considered rigid.
The default rigid restraint stiffness is 1.0E12.
K1 is the initial stiffness of a bilinear restraint (for example, X2). If the restraint is not rigid, then
you can type any positive stiffness.
Avoid stiffnesses greatly in excess of 1.0E15. If a stiffness value is specified for an anchor, the
stiffness applies for all six degrees of freedom at the anchored node.

Mu
Specifies the following values:

TYPE = X Y Z GUI LIM

MU - Specifies the static friction coefficient. Friction provides resistance to movement along the
direction normal to the restraint line of action. The magnitude of the friction force is equal to MU
* Fn, where Fn is the normal force on the restraint. You can automatically assign a friction
coefficient to every new translational restraint by assigning a value to the Coefficient of
Friction box in the configuration. For more information, see Coefficient of Friction (Mu) (on page
45).

TYPE = XROD YROD ZROD

Fi - Specifies the initial spring load. Leave this box blank for a rigid YROD. If you use YROD to
model a spring hanger, type the hanger stiffness into the STIF box. Type the initial cold load on
the hanger.

TYPE = X2 Y2 Z2 RX2 RY2 RZ2

Fy - Specifies the yield load. If the load on the support is less than Fy then the initial stiffness K1
is used. If the load on the support is greater than Fy then the second stiffness K2 is used.

TYPE = XSPR YSPR ZSPR

F - Specifies the initial spring cold load. This input is required and is almost always positive.

TYPE = XSNB YSNB ZSNB

na - Not Applicable. This box is not used when the restraint TYPE is snubber.

136

CAESAR II User's Guide

Piping Input Reference

Hangers
Indicates that you are supplying hanger data. Select or clear this option by double-clicking
Hangers on the Classic Piping Input dialog box.
This auxiliary dialog box controls options for hanger installations. You can fully define the hanger
data, or the hanger can be designed by CAESAR II. In this case, two special load cases are run
and the results are used as design parameters to select the springs from the user-specified
catalog.
CAESAR II provides catalogs for over 25 different spring hanger vendors.

CAESAR II User's Guide

137

Piping Input Reference

Node
Specifies the node number to which the hanger is connected.

CNode
Specifies the connecting node number. This value is used only when the other end of the
hanger is to be connected to another point in the system, such as another pipe node.

Design Data
There are two sections on the Hanger auxiliary dialog box.
Design Data - Specifies the hanger data if you need CAESAR II to design the hanger for you.
Predefined Hanger Data - Specifies the hanger data if you know the hanger information.

Hanger Table
Specifies the active hanger table.
The following spring tables are currently included in CAESAR II:
1. Anvil

2. Bergen Power

3. Power Piping

4. NPS Industries

5. Lisega

6. Fronek

7. Piping Technology

8. Capitol

9. Piping Services

10. Basic Engineers

11. Inoflex

12. E. Myatt

13. SINOPEC

14. BHEL

15. Flexider

16. Carpenter & Paterson

17. Pipe Supports Ltd.

18. Witzenmann

19. Sarathi

20. Myricks

21. China Power

22. Pipe Supports USA

23. Quality Pipe Supports 24. PiHASA

25. Binder

26. Gradior

27. NHK

28. PSSI GmbH

29. Seonghwa

30. Mitsubishi

31. Yamashita

32. Sanwa Tekki

33. Techno Industries

Additional design options are invoked if you use the following checkboxes.
Extended Range
Cold Load
Hot load centered (if possible)
For example, to use Grinnell Springs and cold load design, select the Cold Load Design
checkbox.

138

CAESAR II User's Guide

Piping Input Reference

To use Grinnell Extended Range springs, click Cold Load Design, and to get the design Hot
load centered in the middle of the hanger table, if possible, select all three checkboxes.
The Hanger Design Control Data dialog box defaults to the hanger table-specified in the
configuration file.
CAESAR II includes the maximum load range to permit the selection of less expensive variable
support hangers in place of constant effort supports when the spring loads are just outside the
manufacturers recommended range. Make sure that the maximum load range is available from
the manufacturer as a standard item.
Extended Load Range Springs - Extended load ranges are the most extreme ranges on the
spring load table. Some manufacturers build double-spring supports to accommodate this range.
Others adjust the top or bottom travel limits to accommodate either end of the extended table.
Make sure that the manufacturer can supply the spring before you use the maximum ranges.
Use of the extended range often eliminates the need to go to a constant effort support. Lisega
springs do not support the extended range idea. A request for extended Lisega springs results in
the standard Lisega spring table and ranges.
Cold Load Spring Hanger Design - Cold load spring hanger design is a method of designing
the springs in which the hot (or operating) load is supported in the cold (or installed) position of
the piping. This method of spring design offers several advantages over the more usual hot load
design:
Hanger stops are easier to remove.
There is no excessive movement from the neutral position when the system is cold or when
the stops are removed.
Spring loads can be adjusted before the system is brought up to temperature.
Some feel that the cold load approach yields a much more dependable design.
Operating loads on connected equipment are lower in some system configurations. A hot
vertical riser anchored at the bottom turning horizontally into a nozzle connection is a typical
configuration resulting in this load-reduction. The spring to be designed is at the elbow
adjacent to the nozzle. Operating loads are lower because the difference between the hot
and cold loads counters the moment produced by the vertical thermal expansion from the
anchor.
The disadvantages to cold load design are:
In some systems, the loads on rotating equipment may be increased by a value proportional
to the spring rate times the travel in the hot condition.
Most installations are done on a hot load design basis.
The decision to use hot or cold load hanger design rests with you.
Middle of the Table Hanger Design (Hot Load Centered) - Many designers prefer that the hot
load be centered as closely as possible to the middle of the spring table. This provides as much
variability as possible in both directions before the spring bottoms out when the system is hot.
This was necessary before effective computer modeling of piping systems, when the weights at
hangers were approximated by chart methods or calculated by hand. Activating this option does
not guarantee that spring hot loads is at the middle of the spring table, but CAESAR II makes
every effort to move the hot load to this position. The CAESAR II design algorithm goes to a
higher size spring if the design load is closer to the middle of the larger spring's range, but never
switches spring types. This option, when it is effective, can only result in a one-size larger
spring. CAESAR II attempts to move the hot load to the next higher spring when it is within 10%
of the maximum travel range for the spring. If the new spring is not satisfactory, then the old one
is used to get a hot load close to the middle of the table even though its hot load is within 10% of
the high end of the table load range.

CAESAR II User's Guide

139

Piping Input Reference

Available Space (neg. for can)
Specifies the amount of room above or below the pipe where you can install the hanger or can.
If the value is negative, then CAESAR II assumes that a can is to be installed. If the value is
positive, then CAESAR II assumes that a hanger is to be in installed. Hangers or cans are
selected for a particular location only if they can be installed in the space allotted. The precise
definition of available space varies with the manufacturer. Drawings and tables for each
manufacturer are shown at the end of this section.
This is the available vertical clearance for the hanger or can:

Leave the box blank or set to zero if the Available Space is not an important design criteria.
When the available space is the governing factor in a hanger design, several smaller springs are
typically chosen in place of one large spring.

140

CAESAR II User's Guide

Piping Input Reference

Allowable Load Variation (%)
Specifies the limit on the allowed variation between the hot and cold hanger loads. If this value
is not specified, the only limit on load variation is that inherent in the spring table. This is
approximately 100% when the hot load is smaller than the cold load and 50% when the hot load
is larger than the cold load. Hot loads are smaller than cold loads whenever the operating
displacement in the Y direction is positive. The default value for the load variation is 25%.
The Allowable Load Variation value is the percentage variation from the hot load:

or as may be more familiar:

The Allowable Load Variation value is typed as a percentage. For example, type twenty five
percent as 25.0.

Rigid Support Displacement Criteria

Specifies the minimum amount of travel for hanger design. This is a cost saving feature that
replaces unnecessary springs with rigid rods.
The hanger design algorithm operates by first running a restrained weight case. The load to be
supported by the hanger in the operating condition is determined from this case. After the
hanger design load is known, the software runs an operating case with the hot hanger load
installed. This analysis determines the travel at the hanger location. If this determined hanger
travel is less than the Rigid Support Displacement Criteria, then a rigid Y-support is selected
instead of a spring for the location.
The software does not apply the criteria if you leave the Rigid Support Displacement Criteria
box blank or zero.
A typical value is 0.1 in.
You should insert a single directional restraint instead of a rigid rod in some cases.
Rigid rods are double-acting restraints. In some cases these can develop large hold down forces
that do not really exist because the support has lifted off, or because the rigid rod has bowed
slightly. When this condition develops, you should rerun the hanger design inserting single
directional restraints where rigid rods were put in by CAESAR II.
Do not replace hangers with rigid rods in very stiff parts of the piping system. These parts are
usually associated with rotating equipment or vessel nozzles that need to be protected.

CAESAR II User's Guide

141

Piping Input Reference

Maximum Allowed Travel Limit
Specifies the maximum amount of travel for hanger design. CAESAR II selects a constant effort
support if the design operating travel exceeds this limit, even though a variable support from the
manufacturer table would have been satisfactory in every other respect.
You can design a constant effort hanger by specifying a very small number for the Maximum
Allowed Travel Limit. A value of 0.001 typically forces CAESAR II to select a constant effort
support for a particular location.

No. Hangers at Location

Specifies the number of hangers at a location.
Type a positive number to indicate the exact number of hangers at that location.
Leave the box blank to indicate that CAESAR II can place as many hangers as necessary to
make the installation work.
Type a negative number to indicate the maximum number of hangers that you accept. For
example, if you want to use as few springs as possible, yet are willing to use as many as 5
springs if necessary, type -5 in the No. of Hangers at Location box.

Allow Short Range Springs

Indicates that hanger design allows short range springs.
CAESAR II gives you the option of excluding short range springs from consideration from the
selection algorithms. Short range springs are considered specialty items in some instances and
are not used unless their shorter length is required for clearance reasons. Clear this check box
in this case.
If this option is not selected, CAESAR II selects a mid-range spring over a short-range spring,
assuming that they are more standard, readily available, and in general cheaper than their
short-range counterparts.
If the default should be that short range springs are used wherever possible, then check the box
on the Hanger Design Control Data dialog box.

Operating Load (Total at Loc.)

Overrides the operating load that CAESAR II is calculating.
This value is normally specified when you think that loads on a piece of equipment are reduced
if a hanger in the vicinity of the equipment is artificially caused to carry a proportionately larger
part of the total load. This operating load is the hot load that the hanger is designed to support
after it undergoes any travel due to the thermal expansion of the piping. CAESAR II's calculated
hanger operating loads may be read from the hanger table printed in the output processor. The
column is titled HOT LOAD. The value also appears in this table. Type the total operating load
that you want to use at the location. For example, if there are two hangers specified at the
location and each should carry 500 lb., then the operating load specified should be 1,000 lb.

142

CAESAR II User's Guide

Piping Input Reference

Hanger Hardware Weight
Specifies any additional weight that must be supported by the hanger that exists between the
hanger and the pipe. This weight could affect the hanger design if the magnitude of this weight
is great enough.

Multiple Load Case Design Option

Specifies the load case for hanger design. You can base the spring selection algorithm on one
or more operating conditions. A two-pump installation where only one pump operates at a time
is a good application for multiple load case hanger design.
There are currently thirteen different multiple load case design algorithms available:
Design spring per operating case #1.
Design spring per operating case #2.
Design spring per operating case #3, #4, #5, #6, #7, #8, and #9.
Design spring for maximum operating load.
Design spring for maximum travel.
Design spring for average load and average travel.
Design spring for maximum load and maximum travel.
You can specify the Multiple Load Case Design option at the global level on the Hanger
Design Control Data dialog box. The globally specified option applies for all hanger design
locations unless overridden on a specific hanger design dialog box.
Type the number of operating thermal cases to consider when sizing springs for this system on
the Hanger Design Control Data dialog box. This value defaults to 1.0. Also type the Multiple
Load Case Design option to be the default value unless the design option is to be specified
individually for each hanger to be designed in the system.

CAESAR II User's Guide

143

Piping Input Reference

Example Problem: Multiple Load - Case Spring - Hanger Design
This example illustrates the different hanger designs that can result from the use of different
multiple load case design options.

144

CAESAR II User's Guide

Piping Input Reference

Multiple Load Case Design Option for Hanger Design

Hanger A
Multiple Load Case
Design Option

Design Hanger Travel

Design Hanger Load

0.752 in

730.0 lb

0.029 in

560.0 lb

10

0.752 in

730.0 lb

11

0.752 in

730.0 lb

12

0.3905 in

645.0 lb

13

0.752 in

730.0 lb

3
4
5
6
7
8
9

CAESAR II User's Guide

145

Piping Input Reference

Hanger B
Multiple Load Case
Design Option

Design Hanger Travel

Design Hanger Load

0.032 in

592.0 lb

0.733 in

587.0 lb

10

0.032 in

592.0 lb

11

0.733 in

587.0 lb

12

0.3825 in

589.5 lb

13

0.733 in

592.0 lb

3
4
5
6
7
8
9

Free Restraint at Node

Specifies the node number for the equipment where the restraint is freed. You can also specify
the corresponding free code to tell CAESAR II which of the restraint or anchor directions to free.
For nozzles that are further removed from the hanger usually only the Y direction should be
freed. Anchors or restraints simulating equipment connections that are in the immediate vicinity
of the hanger are usually freed during the hanger design restrained weight run so that loads
normally going to the equipment nozzle are carried by the hanger.
Hangers are commonly used around equipment nozzles to support the weight of the pipe as it
thermally expands away from the nozzle. The hanger can usually be designed to take almost
the full weight of the pipe between the anchor and the hanger if the anchor is freed when making
the restrained weight calculation. The pipe going to the anchor is treated just like a free end, but
only for the hanger weight calculation only.
The Free Restraint at Node box works in conjunction with the Free Code box. If the Free Code
is not specified for an anchor, then the software assumes that the anchor is completely free for
the restrained weight run.
The restrained Weight hanger design pass is the first analysis step in the hanger design. It is run
automatically by CAESAR II. The following steps comprise the restrained weight run:
1. Putting rigid Y restraints at each hanger location.
2. Removing anchors and restraints that are to be freed.
3. Running the weight analysis to find the hot hanger loads.
Nonlinear restraints are not freed during hanger design.

146

CAESAR II User's Guide

Piping Input Reference

Free Code
Specifies the directions in which the anchor or restraint is released. When an anchor or restraint
should be released for the restrained weight run, type the node number for that anchor in the
Free Restraint at Node box and specify the free code describing the directions to be released
in the Free Code box on the same hanger dialog box. The available free codes are as follows:
Free the anchor or restraint in the Y direction only.
Free the anchor or restraint in the Y and X directions only.
Free the anchor or restraint in the Y and Z directions only.
Free all translational degrees of freedom for the anchor or restraint. (X,Y, and Z)
Free all translational and rotational degrees of freedom for the anchor or restraint. (X, Y, Z,
RX, RY, and RZ)
The last option usually results in the highest adjacent hanger loads, but you should only use that
option when the horizontal distance between the hanger and the anchor is within about 4 pipe
diameters.

Predefined Hanger Data

Specifies predefined hanger data. When you use the Predefined Hanger Data section on the
hanger dialog box and there is more than one hanger at the location, use the No. of Hangers at
Location box in the Design Data section to specify the number of hangers. Then, type the
spring rate and pre-load applicable to a single hanger. There is no reason to try to compute the
equivalent spring rates or theoretical loads.
Pre-defined hanger data can be specified in one of two ways:
Specify all information for the hanger.
Specify only the spring rate for the hanger.
If you specify all of the information, and the restraint configuration for the node is completely
defined, then it is not included in the hanger design algorithm.
For a position to be completely pre-defined, one of the following conditions must apply:
Spring rate and theoretical cold load
Constant effort support load

Spring Rate
Specifies the spring rate.

CAESAR II User's Guide

147

Piping Input Reference

Theoretical Cold (Installation) Load
Specifies the cold load for the hanger. If you type both the spring rate and the cold load, the
hanger location is completely predefined and CAESAR II does not perform analysis level design
for the hanger.

Resetting Loads on Existing Spring Hangers

If only the spring rate is given, CAESAR II assumes that you want to rerate the spring at the
given location. The software reads the old spring rate from the existing hanger and inputs it
directly to CAESAR II. Leave the Theoretical Cold Load box blank for the rerate. If more than a
single spring exists at the location, then type the total number of springs in the No. of Hangers
at Location box in the Design Data section. CAESAR II assumes that the load is distributed
evenly among multiple springs at the same point.
CAESAR II goes through its normal hanger design procedure to calculate the load and travel for
all proposed hanger locations including the location with springs to be reset. The stiffness of the
reset springs is not used for this redesign. After CAESAR II sizes the springs, it makes a
comparison with the user-defined spring rates. If the selected spring rate is within 5% of your
existing spring rate, CAESAR II lists the spring's figure number and size in the output report. If
the selected spring rate is more than 5% of your value, no manufacturer's data is listed. In either
case, CAESAR II uses the spring rate that you typed in all following analyses. It is up to you to
confirm that the new hot and cold loads are within the existing spring's working range.
The primary use of the rerate capability is to find new installed loads for old springs. Springs
might be rerated after the shutdown of a unit that has been operating continuously for a long
period, or after mechanical or process changes are made to a piping system.

Constant Effort Support Load

Specifies the support load for the constant effort hanger.

Nozzles
Indicates that you are supplying nozzle data. Select or clear this option by double-clicking
Nozzle Flex on the Classic Piping Input dialog box.
This auxiliary dialog box tab controls options for flexible nozzle connections. When you type
values in this dialog box tab, CAESAR II automatically calculates the flexibilities and adds them
to the active element. CAESAR II calculates nozzle loads according to WRC 297, API 650 or BS
5500 criteria.

148

CAESAR II User's Guide

Piping Input Reference

WRC 297
Performs nozzle flexibility calculations according to WRC 297.

When you type a nozzle node number, CAESAR II scans the current input data for the node and
fills the corresponding diameter and wall thickness in the Nozzle Outer Diameter and Nozzle
Wall Thickness boxes.
Current nozzle flexibility calculations are in accordance with the Welding Research Council
Bulletin No. 297, issued August 1984 for cylinder-to-cylinder intersections.
A valid nozzle node has the following properties:
Only a single element connects to the nozzle node.
The nozzle node is not restrained and does not have displacements specified for any of its
degrees of freedom.
Computed nozzle flexibilities are automatically included in the piping system analysis through
software-generated restraints. This generation is completely automatic. Six restraints are
established for each flexible nozzle input.
If you define a vessel node number, then the vessel node acts like a connecting node for each
of the six restraints. Vessel nodes are subject to the same restrictions shown above for nozzle
nodes.

CAESAR II User's Guide

149

Piping Input Reference

You should not put a restrainer on an element between the nozzle node and any
specified vessel node. CAESAR II creates the required connectivity from the nozzle flexibility
data and any user-generated stiffnesses between these two points erroneously add to the
nozzle stiffnesses.
After the error checking, CAESAR II displays all useful WRC curve data on the Errors and
Warnings dialog box. You can use these values to define the illustrated nozzles in the WRC
297 bulletin. It is sometimes helpful to know just how close a particular nozzle is to one of the
several asymptotic limits, or to a curve boundary.

You can see the WRC 297 computed data only during the error checking process.

150

CAESAR II User's Guide

Piping Input Reference

Nozzle Node
Specifies the node number located at the nozzle intersection with the vessel shell. There should
only be a single piping element connected to this node. There should be no restraints acting on
the node. The nozzle element must be perpendicular to the vessel shell.
You can model hillside nozzles and latrolets. To do this, the first (and possibly very short) nozzle
element that comes from the vessel must be perpendicular to the vessel to keep the local
stiffness properly oriented. The second, longer nozzle element can then go off on the true
centerline of the nozzle.

Vessel Node (Optional)

Specifies the node number on the vessel surface at the point where the nozzle intersects the
vessel shell. This is optional. If you do not specify this value, then the nozzle node is connected
by the stiffnesses to a point fixed rigidly in space. If you specify this value, then the nozzle node
is connected by the stiffnesses to the vessel node. Specify the vessel nodes when you want to
model through the vessel from the nozzle connection to the skirt or foundation.

Nozzle Outer Diameter

Specifies the outside diameter of the nozzle. CAESAR II fills this field automatically using the
corresponding pipe diameter. You can override this value because it does not have to be equal
to the diameter of the pipe used to model the nozzle.

Nozzle Wall Thickness

Specifies the wall thickness of the nozzle. CAESAR II fills this field automatically using the
corresponding pipe wall thickness. You can override this value because it does not have to be
equal to the wall thickness of the pipe element used to model the nozzle.

Vessel Outer Diameter

Specifies the outside diameter of the vessel.

Vessel Wall Thickness

Specifies the wall thickness of the vessel at the point where the nozzle connects to the vessel.
Do not include the thickness of any reinforcing pad.

CAESAR II User's Guide

151

Piping Input Reference

Vessel Pad Thickness
Specifies the thickness of any reinforcing pad at the nozzle. This thickness is added to the
vessel wall thickness before the software performs nozzle stiffness calculations.

Distance to Stiffener or Head

Specifies the distance along the vessel center-line from the center of the nozzle opening in the
vessel shell to the closest stiffener or head in the vessel that significantly stiffens the vessel's
cross-section against local deformation normal to the shell surface.

Distance to Opposite Stiffener

Specifies the distance along the vessel center line from the center of the nozzle opening in the
vessel shell to the closest stiffener or head in the vessel in the opposite direction from the
previous one. This entry is ignored for spherical vessels.

Vessel Centerline Direction Cosine VX, VY, VZ

Specifies the direction vector or direction cosines which defines the center-line of the vessel. For
example, a vertical vessel in a Y-up coordinate system, these entries would read:
Vessel Centerline Direction Cosine VX - <blank>
Vessel Centerline Direction Cosine VY - 1.0
Vessel Centerline Direction Cosine VZ - <blank>
If the centerlines of the nozzle and vessel are collinear, CAESAR II flags this as an error.

Vessel Temperature (Optional)

Specifies the estimated temperature of the vessel or nozzle junction. If you type this value, you
must also type a valid vessel material number in the corresponding field. The software uses the
estimated temperature to calculate the hot modulus-of-elasticity.

Vessel Material (Optional)

Specifies the vessel material number. If you type this value, you must pair the vessel material
number with a valid vessel temperature. The allowed vessel material number can be any valid
material number from the material database. This value corresponds to the pipe materials used
in the dialog box. If the vessel temperature and the vessel material number are left blank or
zero, then the software uses an elastic modulus of 29.0E6 psi.

152

CAESAR II User's Guide

Piping Input Reference

API 650
Performs nozzle flexibility calculations according to API 650.

CAESAR II can also calculate nozzle flexibilities according to Appendix P of API 650, "Design of
Carbon Steel Atmospheric Oil Storage Tanks."

Nozzle Node
Specifies the node number located at the nozzle intersection with the vessel shell. There should
only be a single piping element connected to this node. There should be no restraints acting on
the node. The nozzle element must be perpendicular to the vessel shell.
You can model hillside nozzles and latrolets. To do this, the first (and possibly very short) nozzle
element that comes from the vessel must be perpendicular to the vessel to keep the local
stiffness properly oriented. The second, longer nozzle element can then go off on the true
centerline of the nozzle.

CAESAR II User's Guide

153

Piping Input Reference

Tank Node (optional)
Specifies the node number on the tank surface at the point where the nozzle intersects the tank
shell.
This is optional. If you do not specify one, then the nozzle node is connected by the stiffnesses
to a point fixed rigidly in space. If you type this value, then the nozzle node is connected by the
stiffnesses to the tank node.
Specify the tank node when you want to model through the tank from the nozzle connection to
the foundation.

Nozzle Outer Diameter

Specifies the outside diameter of the nozzle. CAESAR II fills this field automatically using the
corresponding pipe diameter. You can override this value because it does not have to be equal
to the diameter of the pipe used to model the nozzle.

Nozzle Wall Thickness

Specifies the wall thickness of the nozzle. CAESAR II fills this field automatically using the
corresponding pipe wall thickness. You can override this value because it does not have to be
equal to the wall thickness of the pipe element used to model the nozzle.

Tank Outer Diameter

Specifies the outside diameter of the storage tank. API 650 Addendum 1 does not recommend
these computations for diameters less than 120 feet.

Tank Wall Thickness

Specifies the wall thickness of the storage tank at the point where the nozzle connects to the
tank. Do not include the thickness of any reinforcing pad.

Reinforcing on Shell (1) or Nozzle (2)

Specifies whether the reinforcing is on the shell or on the nozzle. If the reinforcing is on the
shell, then type 1. If it is on the nozzle, type 2.

Nozzle Height
Specifies the height from the centerline of the nozzle to the base of the tank.

Fluid Height
Specifies the liquid level of the fluid in the storage tank. This value must be greater than the
nozzle height.

Fluid SG
Specifies the specific gravity of the stored liquid. This value is unitless.

154

CAESAR II User's Guide

Piping Input Reference

Tank Coefficient of Thermal Expansion

Specifies the coefficient of thermal expansion of the plate material of the tank. Values are listed
in engineering handbooks or the appropriate section of the API 650, App P. If this value is left
blank, the software assumes a value of zero.
Temperature Change
Specifies the change in temperature from ambient to the maximum that the tank normally
experiences. For example, if the maximum summertime temperature is 107F, then the
temperature change would be 107 70 = 37, where 70 is the default ambient temperature
defined in configuration and environment. You would type 37 in this box. If this value is left
blank, the software assumes a value of zero.

Tank Modulus of Elasticity

Specifies the hot modulus-of-elasticity for the tank. If this value is left blank, the software
assumes a value of 0.2950E+08.

Set Displacement Vector

Specifies the displacement vector to assign to the calculated displacements. If you select one
among D1 to D9, the calculated displacements become the boundary conditions of the current
job, and CAESAR II can use them for the stress analysis. If you have already specified
displacements on the Classic Piping Input dialog box, CAESAR II uses the calculated
displacements to replace the original displacements. If you select None, CAESAR II does not
use the calculated displacements for the stress analysis.

CAESAR II User's Guide

155

Piping Input Reference

PD 5500
Performs nozzle flexibility calculations according to PD 5500.

CAESAR II can also calculate nozzle flexibilities according to Appendix G of the PD 5500
Specification for Unfired Fusion Welded Pressure Vessels.
Nozzle Node
Specifies the node number located at the nozzle intersection with the vessel shell. There should
only be a single piping element connected to this node. There should be no restraints acting on
the node. The nozzle element must be perpendicular to the vessel shell.
You can model hillside nozzles and latrolets. To do this, the first (and possibly very short) nozzle
element that comes from the vessel must be perpendicular to the vessel to keep the local
stiffness properly oriented. The second, longer nozzle element can then go off on the true
centerline of the nozzle.

156

CAESAR II User's Guide

Piping Input Reference

Vessel Node (Optional)
Specifies the node number on the vessel surface at the point where the nozzle intersects the
vessel shell. This is optional. If you do not specify this value, then the nozzle node is connected
by the stiffnesses to a point fixed rigidly in space. If you specify this value, then the nozzle node
is connected by the stiffnesses to the vessel node. Specify the vessel nodes when you want to
model through the vessel from the nozzle connection to the skirt or foundation.

Vessel Type - Cylinder (0) or Sphere (1)

Indicates whether the vessel is cylindrical or spherical.
Type 0 if the vessel is cylindrical. For cylinders, the distances to stiffeners or heads and the
vessel direction cosines are required.
Type 1 if the vessel is spherical. For spheres, the boxes for the distances to stiffeners or heads
and vessel direction cosines are ignored.

Nozzle Outer Diameter

Specifies the outside diameter of the nozzle. CAESAR II fills this field automatically using the
corresponding pipe diameter. You can override this value because it does not have to be equal
to the diameter of the pipe used to model the nozzle.

Vessel Outer Diameter

Specifies the outside diameter of the vessel.

Vessel Wall Thickness

Specifies the wall thickness of the vessel at the point where the nozzle connects to the vessel.
Do not include the thickness of any reinforcing pad.

Vessel Pad Thickness

Specifies the thickness of any reinforcing pad at the nozzle. This thickness is added to the
vessel wall thickness before the software performs nozzle stiffness calculations.

Distance to Stiffener or Head

Specifies the distance along the vessel center-line from the center of the nozzle opening in the
vessel shell to the closest stiffener or head in the vessel that significantly stiffens the vessel's
cross-section against local deformation normal to the shell surface.

CAESAR II User's Guide

157

Piping Input Reference

Distance to Opposite Stiffener
Specifies the distance along the vessel center line from the center of the nozzle opening in the
vessel shell to the closest stiffener or head in the vessel in the opposite direction from the
previous one. This entry is ignored for spherical vessels.

Vessel Centerline Direction Cosine VX, VY, VZ

Specifies the direction vector or direction cosines which defines the center-line of the vessel. For
example, a vertical vessel in a Y-up coordinate system, these entries would read:
Vessel Centerline Direction Cosine VX - <blank>
Vessel Centerline Direction Cosine VY - 1.0
Vessel Centerline Direction Cosine VZ - <blank>
If the centerlines of the nozzle and vessel are collinear, CAESAR II flags this as an error.
Vessel Temperature (Optional)
Specifies the estimated temperature of the vessel or nozzle junction. If you type this value, you
must also type a valid vessel material number in the corresponding field. The software uses the
estimated temperature to calculate the hot modulus-of-elasticity.

Vessel Material (Optional)

Specifies the vessel material number. If you type this value, you must pair the vessel material
number with a valid vessel temperature. The allowed vessel material number can be any valid
material number from the material database. This value corresponds to the pipe materials used
in the dialog box. If the vessel temperature and the vessel material number are left blank or
zero, then the software uses an elastic modulus of 29.0E6 psi.

Displacements
Indicates that you are supplying displacement data. Select or clear this option by double-clicking
Displacements on the Classic Piping Input dialog box.
This auxiliary dialog box tab controls imposed displacements for up to two nodes for each
element. If a displacement value is entered for any vector, this direction is considered to be fixed
for any other nonspecified vectors.

158

CAESAR II User's Guide

Piping Input Reference

Leaving a direction blank for all nine vectors models the system as free to move in that
direction. Specify 0.0 to indicate that the system is fully restrained in that direction.

Node
Specifies the node number where the displacement is defined. Do not place a restraint at this
node.

Vector 1, Vector 2, ... Vector 9

Specifies the six components of the displacements for a vector. You can enter as many as nine
vectors, corresponding to nine operating temperatures. The six components of a vector are for
six degrees of freedom along global X, Y and Z directions. If you leave any field blank, that
degree of freedom is free.

If an imposed displacement is specified for a specific degree-of-freedom, then that

degree-of-freedom is considered restrained for all load cases whether or not they contain
that displacement set.
You can import displacements into the CAESAR II model from a file. For more information,
see Import/Export Displacements from File (on page 297).

CAESAR II User's Guide

159

Piping Input Reference

Flange Checks
Indicates that you are supplying flange data to evaluate an in-line flange. Select or clear this
option by double-clicking the Flange check box on the Classic Piping Input dialog box.

You can read the values for the Flange Class/Grade and Gasket Diameter, G boxes from a file
if you select ASME - 2003 from the Flange Pressure Ratings dialog box. The G values are
located in the ASME-2003.G text file in the system folder under the application data folder.
Flange evaluation is based on a specific load case temperature. To evaluate the flanges
in a model, use the Load Case Options tab of the Static Load Case Editor to specify to which
operating temperature the flanges should be evaluated.

From, To, Both

Specifies whether the flange is on the From end, the To end, or both ends of the element.
Specifies whether to evaluate the flanges using the Kellogg Equivalent Pressure Method or
the ASME B&PVC Section III Subsection NC-3658.3 method.

Peq
Evaluate the flanges using the Kellogg Equivalent Pressure Method.
Peq = 16M/()G + 4F/()G + PD Pressure Rating
Where:
Peq = equivalent pressure (for checking against flange rating)
M = bending moment on flange
G = diameter of effective gasket reaction
F = axial force on flange
PD = design pressure
3

160

CAESAR II User's Guide

Piping Input Reference

NC-3658.3
Evaluate the flanges using the ASME B&PVC Section III Subsection NC-3658.3 method.
S = 36,000 * Mfs / (CAb * 3125) Min(Sy, 36000) non-occasional load case
S = 36,000 * Mfd / (CAb * 3125) 2.0 * Min(Sy, 36000) occasional load case
Where (note that the constants 36,000 and 3125 should be 248.22 and 21.6 in standard SI
units):
S = flange stress
Mfs = bending or torsional moment (whichever is greater) acting on the flange, developed
during a non-occasional load case
Mfd = bending or torsional moment (whichever is greater) acting on the flange, developed
during an occasional load case
Sy = yield strength of flange material at design temperature; (where Sy, given in psi, shall
not be taken as greater than 36,000 psi)
C = bolt circle diameter
Ab = total cross sectional area of bolts
PD = design pressure

Read from File

Displays the Flange Pressure Ratings dialog box. Click this button to read
Temperature-Pressure Rating data from a file (ASME and DIN flanges are shipped with
CAESAR II).
As an alternative to reading from a file, you can type the data directly into the table.
You can create your own data files by following the format described in the CAESAR II
documentation.
Values for both Flange Class/Grade and Gasket Diameter, G can be read from a file if you
select ASME 2003 from the Flange Pressure Ratings dialog box. The G values are in the
text file ASME-2003.G located in the system folder of your application data directory.

Flange Class/Grade
Displays the flange class and material grade. Typically, flanges are identified by pressure class
and material grade, but you can type anything in this box. If the flange Temperature-Pressure
Rating data is read in from a file, then CAESAR II automatically builds a flange name made up
of the File Name, the Pressure Class, and the Material Class.

Gasket Diameter, G / Bolt Circle

Displays the gasket diameter. Values for Gasket Diameter, G can be read from a file if you
select ASME 2003 from the Flange Pressure Ratings dialog box. The G values are in the
text file ASME-2003.G located in the system folder of your application data directory. This box
does double duty depending on which analysis technique is active.

CAESAR II User's Guide

161

Piping Input Reference

Peq Method:
Specify the diameter at the location of the gasket load reaction. From ASME Section VIII,
Division 1, Appendix 2, (except as noted in sketch (1) of Fig 2-4), G is defined as (see Table
2-5.2):
when b0 is less than or equal to 1/4, G equals the mean diameter of the gasket contact face
when b0 is greater than 1/4, G equals the outside diameter of the gasket contact face less
2b.
When using the Peq method with the Stoomwezen Piping Code, use the bolt circle
diameter instead of the gasket load reaction diameter (see chapter D0701 of the Code RToD).
The results of this Peq Method are considered by Stoomwezen to be conservative.

NC-3658 Method:
Specify the bolt circle diameter. This value is the diameter of the circle that passes through the
bolt centers.
Flange evaluation is based on a specific load case temperature. To evaluate the flanges
in a model, use the Load Case Options tab of the Static Load Case Editor to specify the
operating temperature to which the flanges should be evaluated.

Temperature-Pressure Table
Specifies temperature and pressure values. Use this table to define the flange
Temperature-Pressure rating as a function of temperature for a particular material grade. You
can type up to 24 temperature-pressure pairs. These values must be typed in ascending
temperature order.
Flange evaluation is based on a specific load case temperature. To evaluate the flanges
in a model, use the Load Case Options tab of the Static Load Case Editor to specify to which
operating temperature the flanges should be evaluated.

Bolt Area (Ab)

Specifies the total cross-sectional area of the bolts at the root of thread or the section of least
diameter under stress.

Flange Yield Strength, SYC, SY1-SY9

Specifies the flange yield stress at the cold (ambient) temperature and at each of the operating
temperatures, for use in calculating the flange allowable stress.
Flange evaluation is based on a specific load case temperature. To evaluate the flanges
in a model, use the Load Case Options tab of the Static Load Case Editor to specify to which
operating temperature the flanges should be evaluated.

162

CAESAR II User's Guide

Piping Input Reference

Nozzle Lmt Check

Indicates that you are supplying equipment data. Select or clear this option by double-clicking
the Nozzle Lmt Check check box on the Classic Piping Input dialog box.
Equipment nozzle evaluation is one of the most important tasks in analyzing a piping system.
The various nozzle loads, when subjected to the operating criteria of the piping system, must be
less than their associated allowable loads. Verification of the nozzle loads is a time consuming
task, which cannot be performed until the pipe stress requirements are met.
CAESAR II enables you to define overall nozzle limits. This permits CAESAR II to perform a first
pass screening. Actual detailed nozzle evaluation can then be focused on those nozzles that fail
this initial screening.
To illustrate this procedure, consider the limits defined for a nozzle displayed below:

CAESAR II User's Guide

163

Piping Input Reference

The data above specifies the nozzle limits and how the resulting loads (from the analysis) are
compared to the limits. After the analysis has been performed and the results are available, you
can select the specific load case the nozzle must be evaluated against as well as the Nozzle
Check report. For more information on the Nozzle Check report see the Equipment Report.
Nozzle Limit Check is a first pass at qualifying the equipment nozzles. This is a simple
check based on the limits defined on this dialog box. This screening is not a substitute for the
more rigorous checks of the actual equipment standards.

Node
Specifies the node number representing the equipment nozzle to be checked. The node should
have a restraint or a displacement in the CAESAR II model, because this node represents an
equipment nozzle.

Comparison Method
Specifies the method used to compare the actual nozzle loads to the defined limits. Available
choices are:
Absolute - Each load is compared directly to the corresponding limit. That is, FX to
FX_allowable, FY to FY_allowable, and so on.
|Fa| |Fal|
|Fb| Fbl|
|Fc| |Fcl|
|Ma| |Mal|
|Mb| |Mbl|

|Mc| |Mcl|
SRSS - The square root sum of the squares (SRSS) of each load divided by the
corresponding allowable is compared to 1.0.

Forces
and

Moments
Unity Check - The sum of the three forces and three moments, each divided by their
respective allowables is compared to 1.0.

and

164

CAESAR II User's Guide

Piping Input Reference

Ref Vector X, Y, Z
Specifies the three components or direction cosines of the reference vector. The reference
vector is used with the current element orientation to define the local coordinate system ABC for
this equipment check. See Axis B, in the Forces - Moments (on page 165) fields. The vector
must be perpendicular to the current pipe element. This vector need not be unity.
Examples:
( 0, 1, 0 ) - the reference vector is in the global "Y" direction
( 1, 0, 0 ) - the reference vector is in the global "X" direction
( 0.7071, 0, 0.7071 ) - the reference vector is skewed 45 degrees in the global X-Z plane.

Read from File

Displays the Open dialog box. Select a file (some files are shipped with CAESAR II) and read
force and moment data into the Forces - Moments fields. Alternatively, you can enter the data
directly into the fields.

Forces - Moments
Specifies the three components of the force and the three components of the moment for the
load limits. The load limits are based on the local coordinate system ABC, where: axis A is
defined by the current element (From to To is positive), axis B is defined by the reference
vector, and axis C is the cross product of A and B (the right hand rule). For more information on
the use of these limits (Fal, Fbl, Fcl, Mal, Mbl, Mcl), see Comparison Method (on page 164).
A - Pipe/nozzle axis
B - Major equipment axis (the longitudinal direction of a vessel, or the pump shaft direction.)
C - Other perpendicular direction.

Loading Conditions
The check boxes in this block allow you to define loadings acting on the pipe. These loads may
be individual forces or moments acting at discrete points, distributed uniform loads (which can
be specified on force per unit length, or gravitational body forces), or wind loadings (wind
loadings are entered by specifying a wind shape factorthe loads themselves are specified
when building the load cases. The uniform load and the wind shape factor check boxes are
unchecked on subsequent input screens. This does not mean that the loads were removed from
these elements; instead, this implies that the loads do not change on subsequent screens.

You can specify uniform loads in g-values by setting a parameter in the Special
Execution Options. For more information, see Configuration and Environment (on page 41).

CAESAR II User's Guide

165

Piping Input Reference

Forces/Moments
Indicates that you are supplying force and moment data. Select or clear this option by
double-clicking the Forces/Moments check box on the Classic Piping Input dialog box.
This auxiliary database tab controls imposed forces or moments for up to two nodes per
element. You can use up to nine force vectors.

Node
Specifies the node number where the forces and moments act.

Vector 1, Vector 2, ... Vector 9

Specifies the three components of the force and the three components of the moment for a
vector. You can enter as many as nine vectors. The components of the force and the moment
are along the global X, Y, and Z directions.

Uniform Loads
Indicates that you are supplying uniform load data. Select or clear this option by double-clicking
the Uniform Loads check box on the Classic Piping Input dialog box.

166

CAESAR II User's Guide

Piping Input Reference

This auxiliary database tab controls up to three uniform load vectors. These uniform loads are
applied to the entire current element, as well as all subsequent elements in the model, until
explicitly changed or zeroed out.

The uniform load data is distributive and applies to current and all following elements until you
change it.
Assuming uniform loading in F/L, a snow load of 8.0 pounds per foot (assuming units of pounds
per inch in a Y-up coordinate system) could be specified as follows:
Vector 1

Vector 2

Vector 3

Vector 2

Vector 3

X
Y

-8/12

Z
or may be specified:
Vector 1
X
Y

-.6667

Z
Assuming uniform load in Gs, your entries of X = 1.0, Y = 0.0, Z = 0.0 represent a 1.0g load on
the piping system in the horizontal X direction. Your entries of X = 0.0, Y = -1.0, Z = 0.0
represent a 1.0g load in the minus Y direction, and is exactly equal to the pipe weight load in
Y-up coordinate system.
Uniform load in Gs is used most often for static earthquake loadings.
You can activate uniform loads in Gs by selecting the Uniform load in Gs check box
using the Environment > Special Execution Parameters command on the Classic Piping
Input dialog box.

CAESAR II User's Guide

167

Piping Input Reference

Vector 1, Vector 2, Vector 3
Specifies the three components of the uniform load for a vector. You can enter as many as three
vectors. The components of the uniform load are along the global X, Y, and Z directions. The
uniform load is either in terms of force per unit length or in terms of a magnifier of gravitational
loading (G).

in G's, in F/L
Indicates the unit of the uniform load.

Wind / Wave Loads

Indicates that you are supplying environmental load data. Select or clear this option by
double-clicking the Wind/Wave check box on the Classic Piping Input dialog box.
This auxiliary dialog box tab indicates whether this portion of the pipe is exposed to wind or
wave loading. The pipe cannot be exposed to both.
Selecting Wind exposes the pipe to wind loading; selecting Wave exposes the pipe to wave,
current, and buoyancy loadings; selecting Off turns off both types of loading.
This dialog box tab is also used to specify the Wind Shape Factor when Wind is specified. The
dialog box tab is used to specify various wave coefficients when Wave is specified. The
software automatically computes the wave coefficients if you leave these boxes blank.
Entries on this auxiliary dialog box tab apply to all subsequent piping, until changed on a later
element.
Specific wind and wave load cases are built using the Static Load Case Editor.

168

CAESAR II User's Guide

Piping Input Reference

Wind Loads
Indicates that you are supplying wind load data.

Wind load data is distributive and applies to the current and all following elements until you
change it.

Wind Shape Factor

Specifies the coefficient as defined in ASCE#7 in Figure 6-21 for chimneys, tanks, and similar
structure. A value of 0.5 to 0.65 is typically used for cylindrical sections. Activating the wind
option activates the Wind Load Input tab, which is accessed from the Load Case Editor during
static analysis.

Wave Loads
Indicates that you are supplying wave load data.

CAESAR II User's Guide

169

Piping Input Reference

Wave load data is distributive and applies to current and all following elements until you change
it.

Drag Coefficient, Cd
Specifies the drag coefficient as recommended by API RP2A. Typical values range from 0.6 to
1.20. Type 0.0 to calculate the drag coefficient based on particle velocities.
Added Mass Coefficient, Ca
Specifies the added mass coefficient. This coefficient accounts for the added mass of fluid
entrained into the pipe. Typical values range from 0.5 to 1.0. Type 0.0 to calculate the added
mass coefficient based on particle velocities.

Lift Coefficient, Cl
Specifies the lift coefficient. This coefficient accounts for wave lift which is the force
perpendicular to both the element axis and the particle velocity vector. Type a value of 0.0 to
calculate the added lift coefficient based on particle velocities.

Marine Growth
Specifies the thickness of any marine growth adhering to the external pipe wall. The software
increases the pipe diameter experiencing wave loading by twice this value.

Marine Growth Density

Specifies the density used if you are including the weight of the marine growth in the pipe
weight. If you leave this box blank, the software ignores the weight of the marine growth.

Off
Indicates that you do not want either wind or wave loads on the current and all following
elements until you change it.

Materials
CAESAR II requires the specification of the pipe materials elastic modulus, Poissons ratio,
density, and (in most cases) expansion coefficient. The software provides a database containing
the parameters for many common piping materials. This information is retrieved by picking a
material from the list, by typing the material number, or by typing the entire material name and
then picking it from the match list.

The coefficient of expansion does not appear on the dialog box, but you can review it during
error checking.
These material properties carry forward from one element to the next during the design session
so you only need to type values for those elements in which a change occurs.

170

CAESAR II User's Guide

Piping Input Reference

Double-click >> to display the Edit Materials dialog box.

Material
Displays the material name. Materials are specified either by name or number. All available
material names and their CAESAR II material numbers are displayed in the list. Because this list
is quite long, typing a partial material name (such as A106) allows you to select from matching
materials.
Numbers 1-17 corresponds to the generic materials without code allowable stresses.
Material 18 represents the cold spring element for cut short.
Material 19 represents the cold spring element for cut long.
Material 20 is used to define Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic (FRP) pipe.
Material 21 is for user-defined material.
When you select a material from the database, the physical properties as well as the allowable
stresses are obtained and placed in the dialog box.
If you change the temperature or piping code later, these allowable stress values are
automatically updated.
For user-defined material, enter the corresponding properties.

Allowable Stress
Indicates that you are supplying allowable stress data. Select or clear this option by
double-clicking the Allowable Stress check box on the Classic Piping Input dialog box.

CAESAR II User's Guide

171

Piping Input Reference

This auxiliary dialog box tab is used to select the piping code and to enter any data required for
the code check. Allowable stresses are automatically updated for material, temperature and
code if available in the Material Database.

The Allowable Stress Auxiliary changes according to the piping code. It incorporates piping
codes with their associated inputs. Press F1 to display the help screen to be sure that you
correctly interpret each new input data cell.
Allowable stress data is distributive and applies to current and all following elements until
you change it.
Click Fatigue Curves to specify material fatigue curve data. The Material Fatigue Curve dialog
box displays. Type stress versus cycle data with up to 8 points per curve.

Code
Specifies the piping code. CAESAR II uses B31.3 by default. You can change this default setting
in the configuration. The following table lists the piping codes. You can find their current
publication dates in the CAESAR II Quick Reference Guide.

172

B31.1

Swedish Power Piping Code (Method 1)

B31.3

Swedish Power Piping Code (Method 2)

B31.4

B31.1 - 1967

CAESAR II User's Guide

Piping Input Reference

B31.4, Chapter IX

Stoomwezen

B31.5

RCC-M C

B31.8

RCC-M D

B31.8, Chapter VIII

CODETI

B31.9

B31.11

Norwegian TBK-6

GPTC/Z380

ASME Sect III NC (Class 2) FDBR

ASME Sect III ND (Class 3) BS 7159
Navy 505

UKOOA

CAN/CSA Z662

IGE/TD/12

CAN/CSA Z662, Chapter

11

DNV

BS 806

ISO 14692

EN-13480

PD 8010-1

HPGSL

PD 8010-2

JPI
The following topics discuss each of the input data cells. For more information about code
compliance considerations, see Technical Discussions (on page 765).

SC
Specifies the cold stress value. Typically, this is the cold allowable stress for the specific
material taken directly from the governing piping code. CAESAR II fills this box automatically
after you select the material and piping code. The value of SC is usually divided by the
longitudinal weld efficiency (Eff) before being used. See the notes that follow for the specific
piping code.
B31.1 - Allowable stress tables in Appendix A include the longitudinal weld joint efficiencies
where applicable. Do not use these efficiencies for flexibility stress calculations. If the joint
efficiency (Eff) is given on this dialog box, then CAESAR II divides the SC by the joint efficiency
before using it in the allowable stress equations.
B31.3 - Values from tables in Appendix A do not include the joint efficiency. The Eff value
should be zero, blank, or one. The 1980 version of B31.3 included the longitudinal weld joint
efficiencies as part of the tables in Appendix A. If you are using this version of the code, then
you should type a value for Eff in the appropriate box on this dialog box.
B31.4, B31.4 Chapter IX - Not used. The only stress value in B31.4 is the yield stress taken
from Table 1 in the appendix. For more information, see Sy (on page 179).
B31.5 - Values from tables in Appendix A do not include the joint efficiency. The value of Eff
should be zero, blank, or one.
B31.8 - Su, the specified minimum ultimate tensile strength.
B31.8 Chapter VIII - Not used. The only stress value in B31.8 is the yield stress taken from
Appendix D. For more information, see Sy (on page 179).

CAESAR II User's Guide

173

Piping Input Reference

B31.9 - SC is taken directly from I-1. If you define a value for Eff, the software only uses it in the
minimum wall thickness check.
B31.11 - Not used. The only stress value used in B31.11 is the yield stress.
ASME NC and ND - SC is taken directly from Appendix I. If you define a value for Eff, the
software ignores it.
Navy 505 - There is no mention of joint efficiency in the 505 specification; however, it is implied
in Footnote 1 of Table TIIA. If a joint efficiency is given, then CAESAR II divides SC by the joint
efficiency before using it in the allowable stress equations. Eff should be zero, blank, or one.
CAN Z662 - Not used. The only stress value in Z184 is the yield stress specified in the
standards or specification under which the pipe was purchased. For more information, see Sy
(on page 179).
BS 806 - 0.2% of the proof stress at room temperature from Appendix E. Eff is not used in BS
806. If you define a value for Eff, the software ignores it.
Swedish Method 1 - Not used. Method 1 only uses the yield or creep rupture stress at
temperature (SHn and Fn respectively on this dialog box). Eff is used, but is the circumferential
weld joint efficiency and has a different meaning.
Swedish Method 2 - SC is the allowable stress at room temperature from Appendix 2. Eff is not
used. If you define a value for Eff, the software ignores it.
B31.1 (1967) - SC is the allowable stress at room temperature from the tables in Appendix A.
These tables include the longitudinal weld joint efficiencies where applicable. Do not use these
efficiencies for flexibility stress calculations. If you define a value for Eff, then CAESAR II divides
the SC by the joint efficiency before using it in the allowable stress equations.
Stoomwezen (1989) - SC is the yield stress at room temperature. This value is referred to as
Re in the code.
RCC-M C, D - SC is taken from the Appendix. Eff is not used. If you define a value for Eff, the
software ignores it.
CODETI - This is famb from the code. Eff is not used. If you define a value for Eff, the software
ignores it.
Norwegian - This is f1 from the code. Eff is not used for longitudinal joint efficiency.
BS 7159 - Not used. Design stress is typed in the SH boxes.
UKOO - Not used. Design stress (in the hoop direction) is typed in the SH boxes.
IGE/TD/1 - Not used.
DN - Not used.
EN-13480 - SC is the basic allowable stress at minimum metal temperature as defined in
Section 12.1.3.
GPTC/Z380 - Not used.
PD 8010-1 - Not used.
PD 8010-2 - Not used.
ISO 14692 - SC is used in a different way. See reference for ISO 14692.
HPGSL - Not used.
JPI - Not used.

174

CAESAR II User's Guide

Piping Input Reference

SH1, SH2, ... SH9
Specifies the hot stresses. Typically, these are the hot allowable stress for the specific material
taken directly from the governing piping code. CAESAR II fills the boxes automatically after you
select the material and piping code. There are nine boxes corresponding to the nine operating
temperatures. You must type a value for each defined temperature case. The value of SH is
usually divided by the longitudinal weld efficiency (Eff) before being used. See the
recommendations that follow for the specific piping code.
B31.1 - Allowable stress from Appendix A. For more information, see SC (on page 173).
B31.3 - Allowable stress from Appendix A. For more information, see SC (on page 173).
B31.4 - B31.4 Chapter IX. SH is not used.
B31.5 - Allowable stress from Appendix A. For more information, see SC (on page 173).
B31.8 - Temperature derating factor, T, according to Table 841.116A.
B31.8, Chapter VIII - Temperature derating factor, T (according to Table 841.116A).
B31.9 - Allowable stress from Table I-1. For more information, see SC (on page 173).
B31.11 - Not used.
ASME NC and ND - Allowable stress from Appendix I.
Navy 505 - Allowable stress from Table XIIA. For more information, see SC (on page 173).
CAN Z662 - Not used.
BS 806 - 0.2% of the proof stress at design temperature Appendix E. Eff is not used.
Swedish Method 1 - Yield stress at temperature from Appendix 1.
Swedish Method 2 - Allowable stress at temperature from Appendix 2.
B31.1 (1967) - Allowable stress from Appendix A. For more information, see SC (on page 173).
Stoomwezen - Yield stress at design temperature. This value is referred to as Re (vm) in the
code.
RCC-M C, D - Taken from the Appendix.
CODETI - f from the code.
Norwegian - f2 from the code.
FDBR - Hot allowable defined in Section 3.2.
BS 7159 - Design stress sd in the longitudinal direction as defined in Section 4.3 of the code.
That is d =d * Elamx . Specify design stress in the circumferential (hoop) direction by typing the
ratio of the circumferential design stress to the axial design stress in the Eff box. Because
design strain should be the same for both directions, the value in the Eff box is also the ratio of
Elamf(hoop) to Elamx (longitudinal).
UKOOA - Allowable design stress in the hoop direction defined in the code as f1 * LTHS. The
three hot allowable stress boxes correspond to the three possible temperature cases.
DNV - Yield stress is used here instead of hot allowable stress.
IGE/TD/12 - Yield stress is used here instead of a hot allowable stress.
EN-13480 - Allowable stress at maximum metal temperature.
GPTC/Z380 - Temperature reduction factor T according to Par. 192.115.
PD-8010 (Part 1 & Part 2) - Not used.
ISO 14692 - SH is used in a different way. See the reference for ISO 14692.
HPGSL - Not used.
JPI - Not used.

CAESAR II User's Guide

175

Piping Input Reference

SY1, SY2, ... SY9
Specifies the yield point or 0.2% endurance strength at the design temperature. This option only
displays when you select JPL or HPGSL in the Codes list.
This is Syt, the specified minimum yield or stated proof stress of the pipe material at maximum
temperature.
If you do not enter a value, the software takes the value from the Material Database if
that value is available and applicable.

UTS1, UTS2, ... UTS9

Specifies the ultimate tensile strength at the design temperature.
If you do not enter a value, the software takes the value from the Material Database if
that value is available and applicable.

F1, F2, ... F9

Specifies the stress range reduction factor for most piping codes.
B31.1 - Stress range reduction factor is obtained from equation 1c. Consult the applicable piping
code for methods of combining cycle life data where several thermal states exist and where the
number of thermal cycles is high. The software assumes a value of one if you do not type a
value.
B31.3 - Stress range reduction factor is obtained from equation 1c corresponding to Fig 302.3.5.
If certain criteria are met, then the stress range reduction factor is allowed to exceed 1.0. The
number of cycles can be specified in this box for B31.3. This allows CAESAR II to compute the
cyclic reduction factor according to equation 1c.
B31.4 - Not used.
B31.8 - Stress range reduction factor is obtained from the equation given in Section 833.8(b).
The number of cycles can be specified in this box for B31.8 which allows CAESAR II to compute
the cyclic reduction factor according to this equation.
B31.8 CHAPTER VIII - Not used.
B31.9 - References B31.1 for detailed stress analysis. For more information, see Paragraph
919.4.1.b.
CODETI - Called U in the code.
NORWEGIAN - Called fr in the code. This value can be as high as 2.34.
DNV - Material ultimate tensile strength at temperature.
CAN Z662 F1 = L - the location factor is obtained from Table 4.2
Application

CLASS 1

CLASS 2

CLASS 3

CLASS 4

General & Cased crossings

1.000

0.900

0.700

0.550

Roads

0.750

0.625

0.625

0.500

Railways

0.625

0.625

0.625

0.500

Stations

0.625

0.625

0.625

0.500

Gas (non-sour)

176

CAESAR II User's Guide

Piping Input Reference

Other

0.750

0.750

0.625

0.500

General & Cased crossings

0.900

0.750

0.625

0.500

Roads

0.750

0.625

0.625

0.500

Railways

0.625

0.625

0.625

0.500

Stations

0.625

0.625

0.625

0.500

Other

0.750

0.750

0.625

0.500

General & Cased crossings

1.000

0.800

0.800

0.800

Roads

0.800

0.800

0.800

0.800

Railways

0.625

0.625

0.625

0.625

Stations

0.800

0.800

0.800

0.800

Other

0.800

0.800

0.800

0.800

Uncased railway crossings

0.625

0.625

0.625

0.625

All others

1.000

1.000

1.000

1.000

Gas (sour service)

HVP

LVP

Class 1 - Location areas containing ten or fewer dwelling units intended for human
occupancy
Class 2 - Location areas containing 11 to 46 dwelling units intended for human occupancy
OR
buildings with more than 20 persons
outside areas with more than 20 persons
industrial installations
Class 3 - Location areas with more than 46 dwelling units intended for human occupancy
OR institutions where rapid evacuation may be difficult
Class 4 - Location areas where buildings intended for human occupancy have 4 or more
stories.
F2 = T - The temperature derating factor, is obtained from Table 4.4
Temperature

Derating Factor T

up to 120 (C)

1.00

150

0.97

180

0.93

200

0.91

230

0.87

F3 - F9 - Not used.

CAESAR II User's Guide

177

Piping Input Reference

CAN Z662 Chapter 11 F1 - Not used.
F2 = T - Temperature derating factor obtained from Table 4.4
F3 = - Design factor for Condition A from Table 11.1.
F4 = - Design factor for Condition B from Table 11.1.
F5 - F9 - Not used.
BS 806 - Mean stress to failure in design life at design temperature. F1, F2, ... F9. This value
corresponds to the nine possible thermal states.
FDBR - Identical to B31.1,unless you type the expansion coefficients directly instead of
temperatures. In that case, the software cannot determine Ehot. In this case, type a value of 1.0
in the FAC box and use these boxes to specify the product of f * Ehot / Ecold for each
temperature case.
SWEDISH METHOD 1 - Creep rupture stress at temperature. F1, F2 ... F9. This value
corresponds to the nine possible thermal states.
STOOMWEZEN - Creep related material properties as follows:
F1 = Rrg - Average creep stress to produce 1% permanent set after 100,000 hours at
temperature (vm).
F2 = Rmg - Average creep tensile stress to produce rupture after 100,000 hours at
temperature (vm).
F3 = Rmmin - Minimum creep tensile stress to produce rupture after 100,000 hours at
temperature (vm).
BS 7159 - Fatigue factor Kn. This value is used inversely compared to other codes so that its
value is greater than 1.0. Kn is calculated as follows:
Kn = 1 + 0.25(As/sn) (log10(n) - 3)
Where:
As = stress range during fatigue cycle
n = Maximum stress during fatigue cycle
n = number of stress cycles during design life
UKOOA - Ratio r from the material UKOOA idealized allowable stress envelope. This ratio is
defined as sa(0:1)/sa(2:1) as shown on the figure below. One value should be given for each of
the operating temperature cases.
IGE/TD/12 - UTS value.
EN-13480 - Stress range reduction factor taken from Table 12.1.3-1 (which matches the B31.1
table above), or computed from equation 12.1.3-4. You can specify the number of cycles in this
box for EN-13480. This allows CAESAR II to compute the cyclic reduction factor according to
equation 12.1.3-4.
GPTC/Z380 - Not used.
PD-8010 (Part 1 & Part 2) - Not used.
ISO 14692 F is used in a different way. See the Reference for ISO 14692.
HPGSL - Stress range reduction factor at design temperature.
JPI - Stress range reduction factor at design temperature.

178

CAESAR II User's Guide

Piping Input Reference

Eff
Specifies the longitudinal weld joint efficiency. The field changes according to the current piping
code.
B31.1, B31.1-1967, B31.5 - Allowable stress tables include longitudinal weld joint efficiencies
where applicable. If Eff is specified, then values for SC and SH are divided by Eff before they
are used in the flexibility calculations. Eff is ignored in the minimum wall calculation.
B31.3, B31.4, B31.8, B31.9, B31.11, NAVY 505, Z662 (J), BS 806 (e), CODETI (z), FDBR (vl),
GPTC/Z380 - Allowable stress or yield stress tables do not include longitudinal weld joint
efficiencies. Eff is ignored for the flexibility calculations. SH is multiplied by Eff when calculating
the minimum wall thickness.
B31.4 Chapter IX, B31.8 Chapter VIII, ASME NC, ASME ND, RCCM-C, RCCM-D - Ignored for
both flexibility and minimum wall thickness calculations. The box is disabled for these codes.
Swedish Method 1, Swedish Method 2, Norwegian TBK 5-6 - Circumferential joint factor z
and is used in the calculation of the code stresses rather than in the calculation of the
allowables. This applies to both flexibility or minimum wall thickness.
Stoomwezen - Cyclic reduction factor referred to as Cf in the code. CAESAR II does not
consider weld joint efficiency for this code.
BS 7159 - Ratio of the hoop modulus to the axial modulus of elasticity Eh/Ea. The software uses
a default value of 1.0, as though the material is isotropic if you leave this box blank.
UKOOA - Replace this box with f2. This is the system design factor. The value is typically 0.67.
IGE/TD/12 - Replace this box with Dfac. This is the system design factor (f) as described in
Table 2 of the IFE/TD/12 code. The value must be 0.3, 0.5, and 0.67.
DNV - Replaces this box with usage factor Ns (pressure yielding) from Tables C1 or C2. The
value must be between 0.77 and 0.96.
EN-13480 - Ignored for the flexibility calculations. SH is multiplied by Eff when calculating the
minimum wall thickness.
PD-8010 Part 1 - Weld joint factor used in determining the allowable hoop stress. See Section
6.4.3.1 for details.
PD-8010 Part 2 - Not used.
ISO 14692 Eff is used in different way. See the Reference for ISO 14692.
HPGSL - Longitudinal weld joint efficiency.
JPI - Longitudinal weld joint efficiency.

Sy
Specifies the yield stress. CAESAR II fills the box automatically after you select the material and
piping code. The field changes according to the current piping code, and is generally used for
the transmission and non-US piping codes.
B31.1 - Used only for the hydrotest allowable.
B31.3 - Used only for the hydrotest allowable.
B31.4, B31.4 Chapter IX - Used for the allowable stress determination.

CAESAR II User's Guide

179

Piping Input Reference

B31.5 - Used to satisfy the requirements of Paragraph 523.2.2.f.4. This paragraph addresses
ferrous materials in piping systems between -20F and -150F. The value typed here should be
the quantity (40% of the allowable) as detailed in the Code. When Sy is defined, the OPE case
is considered a stress case. This value is the allowable reported in the output report. The
computed operating stress includes all longitudinal components and ignore torsion.
B31.8, B31.8 Chapter VIII - Specified minimum yield stress.
B31.9 - Used only for the hydrotest allowable.
B31.11 - Specified minimum yield stress.
ASME Sect III Class 2 and 3 - Basic Material Yield Strength at design temperature for use in
Eqn. 9 for consideration of Level A and B service limits. Level C and Level D service limits must
be satisfied in separate runs by adjusting the value for the occasional factor in the CAESAR II
configuration file. If the occasional factor is set to 1.2, the allowable stress is the minimum of 1.2
x 1.5 SH or 1.5 SY. If the factor is 1.5, the allowable is the minimum of 1.5 x 1.5 SH or 1.8 SY. If
the factor is 2.0, the allowable is the minimum of 2.0 x 1.5 SH or 2.0 SY. To satisfy the code,
replace SH with SM for the latter two.
Navy 505 - Not used.
CAN Z662 - Minimum yield strength taken from the standards or specifications under which the
pipe was purchased or according to clause 4.3.3.
BS 806 - Sustained stress limit. The lower of 0.8 X 0.2% Proof stress value or the creep rupture
design stress value defined in Appendix A under cold, or any other, operating condition. See
17.2(c)
Swedish Method 1 - Not used. Type the yield stress at temperature in the respective SHn
boxes for the up to nine possible thermal states.
Swedish Method 2 - Ultimate tensile strength at room temperature.
B31.1 (1967) - Not used.
Stoomwezen (1989) - Tensile strength at room temperature. This value is referred to as Rm in
the code.
RCC-M C, D - Used only for the hydrotest allowable.
CODETI - Used only for the hydrotest allowable.
Norwegian - Allowable stress at 7000 load cycles, RS, from Code Table 10.2. If you do not type
a value, then this factor is not considered to control the expansion stress allowable.
FDBR - Used only for the hydrotest allowable.
BS 7159 - Not used.
UKOOA - Not used.
IGE/TD/12 - Minimum yield stress (SMYS).
DnV - Used only for the hydrotest allowable.
EN-13480 - Used only for the hydrotest allowable.
GPTC/Z380 - Minimum yield stress.
PD-8010 Part 1 - Minimum yield stress.
PD-8010 Part 2 - Minimum yield stress.
ISO-14692 - Sy is used in a different way. See the Reference for ISO 14692.
HPGSL - Not used.
JPI - Not used.

180

CAESAR II User's Guide

Piping Input Reference

SYa
Specifies the specified minimum yield or stated proof stress of the pipe material at room
temperature. This is also referred to as SMYS or SY.
If you do not enter a value, the software takes the value from the Material Database if
that value is available and applicable.

SY (c)
Specifies the minimum yield point or 0.2% endurance strength at room temperature.

Ksd
Material shakedown factor described in Table 4 of the IGE/TD/12 code. Typical values are:
Carbon Steel: 1.8
Austenitic Steeel: 2.0

UTSa
Specifies the ultimate tensile strength of the pipe material corresponding to the specified
ambient temperature.

UTS (c)
Specifies the minimum tensile strength at room temperature.

DFac
Specifies the system design factor (f) as described in Table 2 of the IGE/TD/12 code. Its value
must be 0.3, 0.5, and 0.67.
If you do not enter a value, the software takes the value from the Material Database if
that value is available and applicable.

Fac
Specifies the multiplication factor. The field changes according to the current piping code, and is
generally used for the transmission and non-US piping codes.
B31.1 - Not used.
B31.3 - Not used.
B31.4 - Indicates whether the pipe is restrained, such as long or buried, or unrestrained.
The equation for pipe under complete axial restraint is:
Stress = (Fac) x abs[ E(T2-T1) + (1-) Shoop ] + (SE + SL)(1-Fac)

CAESAR II User's Guide

181

Piping Input Reference

Where:
E = elastic modulus
= thermal expansion coefficient per degree
T2 = operating temperature
T1 = ambient temperature
= Poisson's ratio
Shoop = hoop stress in the pipe.
SE = expansion stress due to bending
SL = sustained stress due to pressure.
Fac should be 1.0, 0.0, or 0.001. This value should be one for pipe under complete axial
restraint. This value should be one when the pipe is fully restrained, such as buried for a long
distance. The default value for Fac is 0.0. When Fac is 0.001, this indicates to CAESAR II that
the pipe is buried but that the soil supports have been modeled. This causes the hoop stress
component, rather than the longitudinal stress, to be added to the operating stresses if the axial
stress is compressive.
B31.4 Chapter IX - F1, hoop stress design factor, according to Table A402.3.5(a) of B31.4.
Appropriate values are 0.72 for pipelines or 0.60 for platform piping and risers.
B31.5 - Not used.
B31.8 - Construction design factor from Table 841.114B.
Construction Type: (Descriptions are approx.)

Factor

A (CLASS 1) Wasteland, Deserts, Mountains, Grazing Land, Farmland,

Sparsely Populated Areas.

0.72

B (CLASS 2) Fringe Areas Around Cities, Industrial Areas, Ranch, or

Country Estates.

0.60

C (CLASS 3) Suburban Housing Developments, Shopping Centers,

Residential Areas.

0.50

D (CLASS 4) Multi-Story Buildings are prevalent, traffic is heavy, and

where there may be numerous other utilities underground.

0.40 (0.4 defaults if

left blank)

B31.8 Chapter VIII - F1, Hoop stress design factor, according to Table A842.22 of B31.8.
Appropriate values are 0.72 for pipelines or 0.50 for platform piping and risers.
B31.9 - Not used.
B31.11 - Indicates whether the pipe is restrained, such as long or buried, or unrestrained.
The equation for pipe under complete axial restraint is:
Stress = (Fac) x abs[ E(T2-T1) + (1-) Shoop ] + (SE + SL)(1-Fac)
Where:
E = elastic modulus
= thermal expansion coefficient per degree
T2 = operating temperature
T1 = ambient temperature
= Poisson's ratio
Shoop = hoop stress in the pipe.
SE = expansion stress due to bending
SL = sustained stress due to pressure.
Fac should be 1.0, 0.0, or 0.001. This value should be one for pipe under complete axial
restraint. This value should be one when the pipe is fully restrained, such as buried for a long
distance. The default value for Fac is 0.0. When Fac is 0.001, this indicates to CAESAR II that

182

CAESAR II User's Guide

Piping Input Reference

the pipe is buried but that the soil supports have been modeled. This causes the hoop stress
component, rather than the longitudinal stress, to be added to the operating stresses if the axial
stress is compressive.
ASME Sect III, Class 2 and 3 - Not used.
B31.1 (1967) - Not used.
Navy 505 - Not used
CAN Z662 - Indicates whether the pipe is restrained, such as long or buried, or unrestrained.
The equation for pipe under complete axial restraint is:
Stress = (Fac) x abs[ E(T2-T1) + (1-) Shoop ] + (SE + SL)(1-Fac)
Where:
E = elastic modulus
= thermal expansion coefficient per degree
T2 = operating temperature
T1 = ambient temperature
= Poisson's ratio
Shoop = hoop stress in the pipe.
SE = expansion stress due to bending
SL = sustained stress due to pressure.
Fac should be 1.0, 0.0, or 0.001. This value should be one for pipe under complete axial
restraint. This value should be one when the pipe is fully restrained, such as buried for a long
distance. The default value for Fac is 0.0. When Fac is 0.001, this indicates to CAESAR II that
the pipe is buried but that the soil supports have been modeled. This causes the hoop stress
component, rather than the longitudinal stress, to be added to the operating stresses if the axial
stress is compressive.
BS806 - Not used.
Swedish Power Code, Method 1 - Sigma(tn) multiplier. This value is usually 1.5. This value
should be 1.35 for prestressed (cold sprung) piping. The default value is 1.5.
Swedish Power Code, Method 2 - Not used.
Stoomwezen - Constant whose value is either 0.44 or 0.5. For more information, see
Stoomwezen Section 5.2.
RCC-M C, D - Not used.
CODETI - Not used.
Norwegian - Material ultimate tensile strength at room temperature, RM. If this value is not
specified, this factor is not considered to control the expansion stress allowable.
FDBR - Overrides the ratio of Ehot/Ecold which is automatically determined by CAESAR II.
The modulus ratio is used to compute the expansion case allowable stress based on the
material and temperature. Normally, you can leave this box blank. However, if necessary, you
can type a value greater than zero and less than one to override the ratio calculated by the
software.
To use FBDR, type the hot modulus in the Elastic Modulus box of the dialog box. CAESAR II
looks up the cold modulus and computes this necessary ratio. Using the hot modulus in the
flexibility analysis is a deviation of FBDR from every other piping code in CAESAR II.
If you type expansion coefficients directly instead of temperatures, then the software cannot
determine Ecold. In this case, type a value of 1.0 in this cell and use the cyclic reduction factor
boxes to specify the product of (f * Ehot /Ecold) for each temperature case.
BS 7159 - Mean temperature change multiplier k as defined in Section 7.2.1 of the code. This
should be 0.85 for liquids, 0.8 for gases, and 1.0 for ambient temperature changes. If left blank,
this value defaults to 1.0.

CAESAR II User's Guide

183

Piping Input Reference

UKOOA - Mean temperature change multiplier k as defined for the BS 7159. If left blank, this
value defaults to 1.0.
IGE/TD/12 - Material shakedown factor Ksd described in Table 4 of the IGE/TD/12 code. Typical
values are 1.8 for carbon steel and 2.0 for austenitic steel..
HPGSL - Not used.
JPI - Not used.
DNV - Usage factor Nu (pressure bursting) from Tables C1or C2. Values must be between 0.64
and 0.84.
EN-13480 - Not used.
GPTC/Z380 - Construction design factor from Table 192.111.
PD-8010 Part 1 - Same usage as B31.4.
PD-8010 Part 2 - Not used.
ISO 14692 - Fac is used in a different way. See the Reference for ISO 14692.

Pvar
Specifies the pressure variance. The field changes according to the current piping code.
ASME and RCC-M C, D - Variance in the pressure between operating and peak to be used as
the component in equation 9 above that found from B1 * P * Do / 2tn. Do not type the peak
pressure for Pvar. Type the difference between the operating pressure and the peak pressure.
Swedish Power Code, Methods 1 & 2 - Beta for the Seff calculation. If not given, this value
defaults to 10%. Type ten percent as 10.0. Values must be between 0.1 and 25.0. Values
specified outside of this range are automatically adjusted to the outer limit of the allowed range.
The definition for beta, as given in the Swedish piping code in section 5.6.2.1, is the "maximum
allowable minus the tolerance as a percentage of the nominal wall thickness".
Stoomwezen - Cm coefficient in the code whose value is usually 1.0.
Norwegian - Difference between design pressure P (in equation 10.7) and peak pressure
Pmaks (in equation 10.8).
The table that follows defines when each of these parameters is valid input for the piping code
(V) or not required (N).
DNV - Usage factor N for equivalent stress check from Table C4. Values must be between 0.77
and 1.00.
PD-8010 Part 1 - Design factor as discussed in Section 6.4.1.2. Typical limits on this value are
0.3 and 0.72, depending on categories and class locations. This design factor determines the
allowable hoop stress. This value has no units for PD-8010 Part 1.
PD-8010 Part 2 - Design factor as discussed in Section 6.4.1 Table 2. Type the value of fd for
the hoop stress evaluation. This value should be either 0.6 (riser/land fall) or 0.72
(seabed/tie-in). CAESAR II determines the appropriate fd values for the equivalent stress from
Table 2. This value has no units for PD-8010 Part 2.
This value is taken from the Material Database, if available and applicable, unless you
enter a value.
ISO 14692 - Pvar is used in a different way. See the Reference for ISO 14692.

184

CAESAR II User's Guide

Piping Input Reference

"f" Allowed Maximum of 1.2
Indicates whether to allow a maximum cyclic reduction factor. The 2004 edition of B31.3 permits
the cyclic reduction factor (f) to exceed 1.0 under certain conditions. To allow "f" to exceed 1.0,
up to the limit of 1.2, click On. To prohibit "f" from exceeding 1.0, click Off.
This setting is distributive and applies to current and all following elements until you
change it.

Appendix P - OPE Allowable Reduction

Indicates whether the software reduces the Operating Range Allowable value by 15%. Appendix
P in the 2010 Edition of B31.3 requires a reduction of the Operating Range Allowable value by
15% for materials with ratio of Sy/St > 0.8. The software selects this check box by default for the
B31.3 code. When selected, CAESAR II performs this reduction, when applicable.
You must set the Implement Appendix P configuration setting to True for CAESAR II to
display this check box on the Allowable Stresses tab of the Classic Piping Input dialog box.
You can find this configuration setting in the SIFs and Stresses > B31.3 Code-Specific
Settings section of the the Configuration Editor.

Restrained Piping per B31.8

Indicates whether or not the piping is restrained. B31.8 (2003) distinguishes between restrained
and unrestrained piping for the purposes of stress computations. When implementing the B31.8
piping code, you must define which sections of the piping system are restrained according to
Code Section 833.1.
If the pipe is restrained, click On. If the pipe is not restrained, click Off.
In general, restrained piping is piping in which the soil or supports prevent axial displacement of
flexure at bends. Unrestrained piping is piping that is free to displace axially or flex at bends.
Additional details are provided in Section 833.1. For more information, consult the code directly.

Fatigue Curves
Displays the Material Fatigue Curves dialog box.

CAESAR II User's Guide

185

Piping Input Reference

Cycle Stress Table

Specifies cycle and stress values. Use the material fatigue curve data to evaluate fatigue load
cases and cumulative use scenarios. You can enter up to eight cycle-stress pairs. These values
must be entered in ascending cycle order.
IGE/TD/12 provides the opportunity to enter up to five fatigue curves, representing fatigue
classes D, E, F, G, and W. Fatigue evaluations are explicitly specified by IGE/TD/12. CAESAR II
offers them as extensions to other codes.
You must type cycle/stress pairs in ascending order (ascending by cycles). Type stress values
as the allowable stress range rather than allowable stress amplitude. The software considers
fatigue curves to be specified using a logarithmic interpolation.
Static fatigue cases are evaluated against the full range of the fatigue curve, while
dynamic fatigue cases are assumed to represent amplitudes, and are therefore evaluated
against half of the range of the fatigue curve.
Read from File
Displays the Open dialog box so that you can select a file (some files are shipped with CAESAR
II) and read cycles and stress data into the Cycles and Stress boxes.

Composition/Type
Specifies the material composition of the pipe.
Aluminum - Aluminum alloy or alloy steel containing 9% nickel. For use at temperatures
lower than room temperature.
Austenite - Austenite stainless steel and high nickel contained allows. For use at
temperatures higher than room temperature.
Others - Any material other than aluminum or austenite.

TD/12 Modulus Correction

IGE/TD/12 Section A5.6 requires that the allowable fatigue stress (as specified in the fatigue
3
2
curves) be adjusted by the ratio of the material modulus-of-elasticity divided by 20910 N/mm .
This divisor can be adjusted if necessary by changing the entry in the Modulus Correction box.

Allowable Stress (ISO 14692)

Activates allowable stress data. Select or clear this option by double-clicking the Allowable
Stress check box on the Classic Piping Input dialog box. When you select material 20 for FRP
(Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic) and piping code ISO 14692, the Allowable Stress auxiliary
dialog box changes.

186

CAESAR II User's Guide

Piping Input Reference

al(0:1)
Specifies the long term axial stress at 0:1 stress ratio. Typically, the axial stress (hoop stress is
0 at this point) is lower than the axial stress al(2:1) (hoop stress is double the axial stress at this
point). The ratio of these stresses, called bi-axial stress ratio, can range between 0.5 and 0.75
for plain pipe depending on the winding angle and specific pipe type
.

al(1:1)
Specifies the long term axial stress at 1:1 stress ratio. According to ISO 14962,, hoop stress has
the same value as that for axial stresses at a 1:1 stress ratio, that is hl(1:1)=al(1:1). However,
CAESAR II allows you to type different values for al(1:1) and hl(1:1) for a generalized failure
profile. In this case, CAESAR II displays a warning message in the Error Checker.
If you leave both the al(1:1) and hl(1:1) boxes blank, CAESAR II assumes that a simplified
envelope is used for plain pipe.

hl(1:1)
Specifies the long term hoop stress at 1:1 stress ratio. According to ISO 14692, hoop stress has
the same value as that for axial stresses at a 1:1 stress ratio. That is, hl(1:1) = al(1:1). However,
CAESAR II allows a different value for al(1:1) and hl(1:1) for a generalized failure profile. In this
case, CAESAR II displays a warning message displays in the Error Checker.
If you specify al(1:1) and leave hl(1:1) blank, CAESAR II assumes that hl(1:1) is equal to al(1:1),
and displays a warning message in the Error Checker. For more information, see al(1:1) (on
page 187).

al(2:1)
Specifies the long term axial stress at a 2:1 stress ratio. According to ISO 14962, hoop stress is
twice the axial stress at a 2:1 ratio, that is hl(2:1) = 2 * al(2:1). This is a natural condition when a
pressurized pipe is enclosed at both ends. However CAESAR II allows you to type different
values for hl(2:1) 2 * al(2:1). In this case, CAESAR II displays a warning message in the Error
Checker.

hl(2:1)
Specifies the long term hoop stress at a 2:1 stress ratio. According to ISO 14692, hoop stress is
twice the axial stress at a 2:1 stress ratio. That is, hl(2:1)= 2*al(2:1). However, CAESAR II allows
hl(2:1) to have a different value than twice of al(2:1). In this case, CAESAR II displays a warning
message in the Error Checker.
If you specify al(2:1) and leave hl(2:1) blank, CAESAR II assumes that hl(2:1) is equal to twice
al(2:1), and displays a warning message in the error checker. For more information, see al(2:1)
(on page 187).

CAESAR II User's Guide

187

Piping Input Reference

Qs
Specifies the qualified stress for joints, bends, and tees. A qualified stress, Qs, provided by the
manufacturer is defined as:

Pq is the qualified pressure;

D is the average diameter of the pipe;
tr is the average reinforced wall thickness of the pipe.
The qualified stress, qs, for fittings is calculated as:

CAESAR II does not require qualified stress Qs for plain pipe. Qs for pipe = hl(2:1), and
hl(2:1) is required input for plain pipe.
You must enter qualified stress Qs for joints, bends and tees even if these fitting are not in
the piping model. You can enter positive values (1000.0 for Qs and 1.0 for r, for example) to
pass the Error Checker.

r
Specifies the bi-axial stress ratio for bends, tees, and joints. The bi-axial stress r is defined as:

where:
sh(2:1) is the short-term hoop strength, under 2:1 stress conditions;
sa(0:1) is the short-term axial strength, under axial loading only.

188

CAESAR II User's Guide

Piping Input Reference

In the absence of data from the manufacturer, use the default values:
Fitting

Component

Short-term
Strength Bi-axial
Stress Ratio (r)*

Bends

Filament-wound unidirectional 90
and
Filament-wound and hand-lay 1
100% hand-lay

Tees

Filament-wound and hand-lay 1

1.0

Other Hand
laminated

CSM/WR 1, 9

1.9

Spigot/Socket Adhesive or
Mechanical Connection
Threaded
Flange
Laminated

1.0
0.45
1.0
2.0

Joints

0.45
1.0
1.9

You can use a higher factor for r if justified by testing according to 6.2.6
ISO 14692-2-2002.
CAESAR II assumes that the bi-axial stress ratio r is 1.0 for tees according to ISO 14692.
CAESAR II displays a warning message in the Error Checker if the bi-axial stress ratio r is
greater than 20 for bends or joints. You can ignore the warning message.
If a piping system has no joints or bends, the corresponding bi-axial stress ratio r should not be
required. However, you must type a positive value (such as 1.0) for r to get rid of error
messages.

Eh/Ea
Specifies the ratio of the hoop modulus to the axial modulus of elasticity. If you leave this box
blank, CAESAR II uses a default value of 2.0.

Hand Lay
Indicates that the bend is hand-layed. If this box is selected, the software assumes smooth
bends. This affects the calculations of both the flexibility factor and the SIFs for the bend.

1, 2, ... 9 for Partial Factor for Temperature (A1)

Specifies the partial factor for temperature. Because each operating temperature needs an A 1
factor, you may need to specify up to 9 factors if all 9 operating temperatures are defined in a
model. If you leave the boxes blank, CAESAR II uses the default value of 1.0.
The following passage is from ISO14692-3:2002(E) section 7.4.2 Design Temperature.
The effect of temperature on reduction of mechanical properties shall be accounted for by the
partial factor A1, which is determined according to Annex D in ISO 14692-2:2002.

CAESAR II User's Guide

189

Piping Input Reference

The maximum operating temperature of the piping system shall not exceed the temperature
used to calculate the partial factor A1 of the GRP components. If the operating temperature is
less than or equal to 65C, then A1 is generally equal to 1.0
The effect of low temperatures on material properties and system performance shall be
considered. For service temperatures below 0C, the principal should consider the need for
additional testing, depending on the resin system. Both qualification as well as additional
mechanical tests should be considered.
Glass Reinforced Plastic GRP materials do not undergo ductile/brittle transition within the
temperature range of this part of ISO 14692. Because of this, there is no significant abrupt
change in mechanical properties at low temperatures. A concern is that at temperatures lower
than 35C, internal residual stresses could become large enough to reduce the safe operating
envelope of the piping system.

Chemical Resistance (A2)

Specifies the partial factor for chemical resistance. If you leave the box blank, CAESAR II uses
the default value of 1.0.
The following passage is from ISO 14692-3:2002(E) section 7.4.3 Chemical Degradation.
The effect of chemical degradation of all system components from either the transported
medium or the external environment shall be considered on both the pressure and temperature
ratings. System components shall include adhesive and elastomeric seals/locking rings, if used,
as well as the basic glass fiber and resin materials.
The effect of chemical degradation shall be accounted for by the partial factor A 2 for chemical
resistance, which is determined according to Annex D in ISO 14692-2:2002. If the normal
service fluid is water, then A2 = 1. Reference shall be made to manufacturers' data if available.

In general, the aqueous fluids specified in the qualification procedures of ISO 14692-2:2002
are among the more aggressive environments likely to be encountered. However, strong
acids, alkalis, hypochlorite, glycol, aromatics and alcohol can also reduce the properties of
Glass Reinforced Plastic(GRP) piping components; the effect depends on the chemical
concentration, temperature and resin type.
The information from the manufacturers' tables is based on experience and laboratory tests
at atmospheric pressure, on published literature, raw material suppliers' data, and so on.
Chemical concentrations, wall stresses, reinforcement type and resin have not always been
taken into account. Therefore the tables only give an indication of the suitability of the piping
components to transport the listed chemicals. In addition, the mixing of chemicals may
cause severe situations.

Cyclic Service (A3)

Specifies the partial factor for cyclic service. If you leave the box blank, CAESAR II uses the
default value of 1.0.
The following passage is from ISO 14692-3:2002(E) section 7.4.4 Fatigue and Cyclic Loading.
Cyclic loading is not necessarily limited to pressure loads. Thermal and other cyclic loads shall
therefore be considered when assessing cyclic severity.
If the predicted number of pressure or other loading cycle is less than 7000 over the design life,
the service shall be considered static. If required, the limited cyclic capability of the pipe system
components can be demonstrated according to 6.4.5 of ISO 14692-2:2002.

190

CAESAR II User's Guide

Piping Input Reference

If the predicted number of pressure or other loading cycles exceeds 7000 over the design life,
then the designer shall determine the design cyclic severity, Rc, of the piping system. Rc is
defined as:

where Fmin and Fmax are the minimum and maximum loads (or stresses) of the load (or stress)
cycle.
The partial factor, A3 , for cyclic service is given by:

where N is the total number of cycles during service life.

This equation is intended for cyclic internal pressure loading only, but may be applied with
caution to axial loads provided they remain tensile, that is, it is not applicable for reversible
loading.

System Design Factor

Specifies the system design factor. This value is multiplied by the occasional load factor (k) to
generate the value of the part factor for loading (f 2). If you leave this box blank, CAESAR II uses
the default value of 0.67.
The purpose of the system design factor is to define an acceptable margin of safety between the
strength of the material and the operating stresses for the three load cases. These load cases
are occasional, sustained including thermal loads, and sustained excluding thermal loads. The
following table shows the relationship between the system design factor, the occasional load
factor, and f2, along with their default values.
Loading Type

Load
Duration

System Design Occasional

Factor (SDF)
Load Factor

Occasional

Short-term 0.67

1.33

0.89

Sustained Including
Long-term 0.67
Thermal Loads

1.24

0.83

Sustained
Excluding Thermal
Loads

1.00

0.67

Long-term 0.67

Part Factor For

Loading (f2)

The part factor for loading f2 is equal to System Design Factor times the Occ Load
Factor.

Thermal Factor (k)

Specifies the thermal factor. This factor is defined in Section 8.4 of ISO-14692-3:2002(E). In the
absence of further information, the thermal factor k should be taken as 0.85 for liquids and 0.8
for gasses. If you leave this box blank, CAESAR II uses a default value of 1.0.

CAESAR II User's Guide

191

Piping Input Reference

Material Elastic Properties

Specifies the elastic modulus and Poissons ratio of the material. These values must be typed
for Material type 21 (user specified).

Material properties in the database can be changed permanently using the CAESAR II
Material Database editor. For more information, see Material Database (on page 905).
Double-click >> to display the Edit Elastic Properties dialog box.

Material Properties
Displays the properties associated with the material. CAESAR II automatically fills in the
Modulus of Elasticity, Poisson's Ratio, and other material properties. If you want to change
any material property extracted from the material database, change the value in the
corresponding box.

192

CAESAR II User's Guide

Piping Input Reference

Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic (FRP)

The CAESAR II FRP pipe element models an orthotropic material whose properties can be
defined by:
Ea - Axial Modulus-of-elasticity
Eh - Hoop Modulus-of-elasticity
h/a - Poisson's ratio of the strain in the axial direction resulting from a stress in the hoop
direction.
G - Shear Modulus (Not related to the Elastic Modulus and Poisson's ratio in the
conventional manner.)

FRP pipe is specified by setting the Material box to 20. The material name displays and FRP
properties from the configuration file display on the dialog box.
Some of the material parameters are renamed when the FRP material is selected: Elastic
Modulus changes to Elastic Modulus/axial and Poisson's Ratio changes to "E a/Eh*h/a". The
latter entry requires the value of the following expression: (Ea*h/a) / Eh. This expression is
equal to a/h, Poisson's ratio of the strain in the hoop direction resulting from a stress in the axial
direction. The shear modulus G is defined by typing the ratio of G/Ea (shear modulus to axial
modulus) on the special execution parameters screen. You can type only one ratio for each job.
The decrease in flexural stiffness at bends and intersections due to changes in the circular
cross-section is typically negligible because the hoop modulus is usually considerably higher
than the axial modulus for FRP pipe. Because of this, a default flexibility factor of 1 is used for
these components. Similarly, because the fatigue tests performed by Markl on steel pipe is likely
to have no bearing on FRP design, an SIF of 2.3 is applied for all fittings. CAESAR II uses these
recommendations for all FRP fittings unless you specifically override the defaults. You can
override the defaults on a point-by-point basis or by forcing all calculations to adhere to the
requirements of the governing code through a CAESAR II configuration parameter. Note that if
the BS 7159, UKOOA, or ISO 14692 code is in effect, all SIFs and flexibility factors are
calculated according to that code regardless of the configuration parameter settings.

Propagate Properties
Indicates whether to propagate the property changes. Clear this checkbox to indicate that
properties apply to the current element only.

CAESAR II User's Guide

193

Piping Input Reference

Densities
The densities of the piping material, insulation, and fluid contents are specified in this block. The
piping material density is a required entry and is usually extracted from the Material Database.
You can also type Fluid density in terms of specific gravity, if convenient, by following the input
immediately with the letters: SG, for example, 0.85SG (there can be no spaces between the
number and the SG).

If an insulation thickness is specified (in the pipe section properties block) but no
insulation density is specified, CAESAR II defaults to the density of calcium silicate.
Double-click >> to display the Edit Densities dialog box.

194

CAESAR II User's Guide

Piping Input Reference

Refract Thk
Specifies the thickness of refractory to apply to the piping. Refractory is applied to the inside of
the pipe. It is included in the dead weight of the system and reduces the internal pipe area
affecting the fluid weight in the system.

Refract Density
Displays the density of the refractory lining. If you select a value from the list, the numeric value
replaces the material name when the box is registered.
Refractory densities are much higher than insulation densities and could lead to under
sized restraints.
Densities for some typical refractory materials display below:
MATERIAL

DENSITY (lb./cu.in. )

A.P. GREEN GREENCAST 94

0.09433

A.P. GREEN KRUZITE

CASTABLE

0.08391

A.P. GREEN MC-30

0.08391

A.P. GREEN MC-22

0.07234

A.P. GREEN KAST-SET

0.06655

A.P. GREEN KAST-O-LITE 25

0.05208

A.P. GREEN VSL-35AST 94

0.02257

B & W KAOCRETE B

0.05787

B & W KAOCRETE 32-C

0.08333

B & W KAO-TAB 95

0.09549

B & W KAOLITE 2200

0.03241

B & W KAOLITE 2200-HS

0.04745

B & W KAOLITE 2500-LI.

0.03472

CAESAR II User's Guide

195

Piping Input Reference

Insul Thk
Specifies the thickness of the insulation to be applied to the piping. Insulation applied to the
outside of the pipe is included in the dead weight of the system and in the projected pipe area
used for wind load computations.
Even if you specify the unit weight of the insulation or cladding, the thickness values are
still required so that the software can determine the correct projected area.

Clad Thk
Specifies the thickness of the cladding to be applied to the piping. Cladding is applied to the
outside of the insulation. It is included in the dead weight of the system and in the projected pipe
area used for wind load computations.
Even if you specify the unit weight of cladding plus insulation, the thickness values are
still required so that the software can determine the correct projected area.

Insulation Density
Displays the density of the insulation on a per unit volume basis. If you select a value from the
list, the numeric value replaces the material name when the box is registered.
If you leave this box blank, then the software assumes that the insulation is CALCIUM SILICATE
having a density of 0.006655.
Verify that this assumed value is appropriate for the current application. Sample density values
for insulation materials are:
MATERIAL

DENSITY

AMOSITE ASBESTOS

.009259

CALCIUM SILICATE

.006655

CAREYTEMP

.005787

FIBERGLASS (OWEN/CORNING) .004051

196

FOAM-GLASS/CELLULAR
GLASS

.004630

HIGH TEMP

.01389

KAYLO 10 (TM)

.007234

MINERAL WOOL

.004919

PERLITE / CELO-TEMP 1500

.007523

POLY URETHANE

.001273

STYRO FOAM

.001042

SUPER X

.01447

CAESAR II User's Guide

Piping Input Reference

Cladding Density
Displays the thickness of the cladding to apply to the piping. Cladding is applied to the outside of
the insulation and is included in the dead weight of the system. Cladding is also included in the
projected pipe area used for wind load computations.

Insul/Cladding Unit Weight

Displays an alternative to specifying the insulation and cladding thickness and density. This is
an optional combined uniform load (weight per unit length).
If you are applying wind loads, then you must type the insulation and cladding thickness
to obtain the correct projected area for wind load computation.

Propagate Properties
Indicates whether to propagate the property changes. Clear this checkbox to indicate that
properties apply to the current element only.

Line Number
Specifies the line number for an element.

Line numbers carry forward to successive elements. Because of this, you only need to specify
data on the first element of a new line.
To assign a line number name, do one of the following:
Select the Line Number box, or press F9. Select <new..> to automatically assign a name.
The line number is named Line Number X, where X is a sequential number.
Use the auto-complete feature that populates with the nearest match as you type. For
example, if you have a line named 8-300-123 and you want to assign 8-150-124, Type 8
and the box automatically fills with the first line number that matches what you have typed.
Press End to change the last character.

See Also
Line Numbers (on page 250)

CAESAR II User's Guide

197

Piping Input Reference

Available Commands
Topics
File Menu ....................................................................................... 198
Edit Menu ....................................................................................... 202
Model Menu ................................................................................... 213
Environment Menu ......................................................................... 250
Options Menu................................................................................. 288
View Menu ..................................................................................... 293
Tools Menu .................................................................................... 296

File Menu
Performs actions associated with opening, closing, and running the job file.

New
Creates a new CAESAR II job.

New Job Name Specification Dialog Box

Controls parameters for creating a new CAESAR II job.
Enter the name for the NEW job file - Specifies the job name.
Piping Input - Indicates that the job is a piping job.
Structural Input - Indicates that the job is a structural job.
Enter the data directory - Specifies the location of the job file. You can type the directory into
the field, or click the browse button to browse to the directory.

Open
Opens an existing CAESAR II job.

Open Dialog Box

Controls options for opening existing files.
Look in - Specifies the directory in which the file exists.
Name - Lists the files in the selected directory that match the selected file type. You can sort the
list by clicking the Name, Data modified, or Type column headers.
File Name - Specifies the name of the selected file. This field is automatically filled in if you click
a file in the Name list.
Files of type - Specifies the type of file listed in the Name list.
System - Changes the Look in field to the CAESAR II System folder.
Examples - changes the Look in field to the CAESAR II Examples folder.

198

CAESAR II User's Guide

Piping Input Reference

Open CADWorx Model

Opens an existing CADWorx model.

Open Dialog Box

Controls options for opening existing files.
Look in - Specifies the directory in which the file exists.
Name - Lists the files in the selected directory that match the selected file type. You can sort the
list by clicking the Name, Data modified, or Type column headers.
File Name - Specifies the name of the selected file. This field is automatically filled in if you click
a file in the Name list.
Files of type - Specifies the type of file listed in the Name list.
System - Changes the Look in field to the CAESAR II System folder.
Examples - changes the Look in field to the CAESAR II Examples folder.

Save <filename>
Saves the current CAESAR II job under its current name.

Save As
Saves the current CAESAR II job under a new name.

Save As Dialog Box

Save in - Specifies the directory in which to save the job.
Name - Lists the files in the selected directory that match the selected file type. You can sort the
list by clicking the Name, Data modified, or Type column headers.
File Name - Specifies the name of the selected file. This field is automatically filled in if you click
a file in the Name list.
Save as type - Specifies the type of file listed in the Name list.
Save - Writes the file to the selected directory.

Save as Graphics Image

Saves the current CAESAR II job as an HTML page, .TIFF, .BMP, or .JPG file.

Save As Dialog Box

Save in - Specifies the directory in which to save the job.
Name - Lists the files in the selected directory that match the selected file type. You can sort the
list by clicking the Name, Data modified, or Type column headers.
File Name - Specifies the name of the selected file. This field is automatically filled in if you click
a file in the Name list.
Save as type - Specifies the type of file listed in the Name list.
Save - Writes the file to the selected directory.

CAESAR II User's Guide

199

Piping Input Reference

Archive
Assigns a password to the job to prevent inadvertent alteration of the model or to type the
password to unlock the file. Archived input files cannot be altered or saved without this
password; however, they can be opened and reviewed.

Archive Dialog Box

Controls options for archiving a CAESAR II job.
Password - Specifies the password for the job. Enter a password between 6 and 24 characters
in length.

Error Check
Sends the model through interactive error checking. This is the first step of analysis. When
the error check is complete, the Errors and Warnings dialog box displays the results. For more
information, see Error Checking (on page 437).

Batch Run
Error checks the model in a non-interactive way. This process halts only for fatal errors. It
uses the existing or default static load cases and performs the static analysis.

Print Setup
Sets up the printer for the input listing.

Print Setup Dialog Box

Controls parameters for setting up a printer.
Name - Specifies the name of the printer.
Properties - Displays printer properties.
Size - Specifies the size of the paper in the printer.
Source - Specifies the active paper tray
Portrait - Prints the file using a vertical orientation.
Landscape - Prints the file using a horizontal orientation.
Network - Allows you to specify a printer from the network.

Print Preview
Displays a preview of the print job.

Print <filename>
Prints the current job. The software prompts you to select the reports to print, prior to
printing.
You can change the report contents by modifying the .inp file.
Any time an input listing is written to a file or to the printer, the format of each of the reports is
obtained from the .inp file. The .inp files are ASCII text files which can be modified to create

200

CAESAR II User's Guide

Piping Input Reference

reports of differing styles or content. You can modify the Initial.inp to change the page length in
the report, and the starting and stopping column positions. Any text editor (such as Notepad)
can be used to change any of the .inp files. If you change the .inp file, you may receive fatal
errors during report generation if impossible formats, or if invalid commands are requested.
If you prefer a different (more columnar) form of the basic element data, three additional
formatting files have been provided.
ELEMENT0.INP - Intergraph CAS standard element format
ELEMENT1.INP - 1st alternate element format
ELEMENT2.INP - 2nd alternate element format
ELEMENT3.INP - 3rd alternate element format
To use any of these formatting files, change directories to the CAESAR II\System directory.
Then, copy the formatting file that you want to use into Element.inp.
To print an Input Echo from the input dialog box, click File > Print. To write an Input Echo to the
screen for review, click File > Print Preview.
You can print an input listing from the output module as part of the entire output report.

Input Listing Options Dialog Box

Controls which options are included in the print job. Select the box for items to include. Clear the
box for items not to include.

Recent Piping Files

Displays a list of most recently opened piping files.

Recent Structural Files

Displays a list of most recently opened structural files.

CAESAR II User's Guide

201

Piping Input Reference

Exit
Closes the session. You are prompted to save unsaved changes.

Edit Menu
Performs actions associated with cutting and pasting, navigating through the elements, and
performing a few small utilities.

Cut
Cuts selected elements from the document and pastes them to the Clipboard. The selected
elements replace the previous contents of the Clipboard.

Copy
Copies selected elements to the Clipboard. When you use this command, it replaces the
previous contents of the Clipboard with the new contents.

Paste
Inserts the Clipboard contents into the file. The command is not available if the Clipboard is
empty.

Continue
Moves the dialog box to the next element in the model. The software adds a new element if
there is no next element.

Duplicate
Copies the selected element either before or after the current element.

Insert
Inserts an element.

Insert Element Dialog Box

Controls options for inserting an element.
Before - Inserts a new element prior to the current element. The To node of the new element is
then equal to the From node of the current element.
After - Inserts a new element following the current element. The From node of the new element
is then equal to the To node of the current element.

Delete
Deletes the current element.

202

CAESAR II User's Guide

Piping Input Reference

Find
Displays a specific element in the view. This command displays a dialog box that allows you
to specify the From and To nodes to search for. You can enter the node numbers in either of
the two fields, or in both. If you entering only the From node number, the software searches for
the first available element that starts with that node number. If you enter only the To node
number, the software searches for an element ending with that node number. When the
software locates the element it highlights the element and fits it in the view. You can zoom out to
better identify the location of the highlighted element within the model.

Find Element Dialog Box

Controls parameters for finding elements.
Node Numbers - Specifies the node numbers to search for. Enter a single node number to find
the next element containing that node number (either as a From or To node). Enter two node
numbers to find the next element containing both of those node numbers (in either order).
Zoom to Node if Found - Indicates that the software will display the found node in the active
view.

Global
Specifies the absolute (global) coordinates for the start node of each discontiguous system
segment. This may be required for three reasons:
1. To show nodal coordinates in absolute, rather than relative coordinates.
2. Defining global coordinates for discontiguous segments allows the piping segments to plot in
the correct locations, rather than superimposed at the origin.
3. It is important that the pipe be given the correct elevation if wind loading is present.

Global Coordinates Dialog Box

Controls parameters for defining the absolute coordinates for the start node of an element.
X - Specifies the X coordinate.
Y - Specifies the Y coordinate.
Z - Specifies the Z coordinate.

Close Loop
Closes a loop by filling in the delta coordinates between two nodes in the model.

CAESAR II User's Guide

203

Piping Input Reference

Increment
Specifies the increment between nodes. CAESAR II uses the nodal increment set in
Configure/Setup when generating the From and To nodes for new elements. You can override
this behavior by typing a different value in this dialog box. For more information, see Auto Node
Number Increment (on page 59).

Set Node Increment Dialog Box

Specifies the parameters for setting an increment between nodes.
Node increment - Specifies the increment between node numbers.

Distance
Finds the distance between two nodes. You can find the distance between the origin and a
node that you specify, or the distance between two nodes.

Distance Dialog Box

Controls the parameters for finding distances between nodes.
Origin and Current Node - Calculates the distance between coordinate (0.0,0.0,0.0) and the
To node of the current element.
Nodes - Calculates the distance between two nodes. Enter the node numbers in the fields.

List
Displays all of the applicable input data in a dialog box. You can edit, delete, or modify data in
the lists.
Show All Lists - Displays the List dialog box.
Close All Lists - Closes the List dialog box and clears (un-checks) all the list options, such as
Allowables, Bends, Elements, and so forth.
The List dialog box contains a row of tabs at the bottom. These tabs specify the various list
options that can be displayed. When you select a tab, the row headings at the top of the dialog
box display the specific input data and controlling parameters in the corresponding columns. All
of the input data can be accessed through the various List reports. An example List dialog box is
shown below with the Elements List.

204

CAESAR II User's Guide

Piping Input Reference

The reports are generated in column format. Move the cursor into any box to type a new value
to replace the original value. You can scroll through the reports either vertically or horizontally.
Press F1 while in any of the data cells to display help information. Cell input may be deleted by
highlighting the selection and pressing Delete. Standard Windows commands such as Cut and
Paste are supported on a box-by-box basis.
If you edit input data on the List dialog box, the software updates the Classic Piping Input dialog
box as well. Values that carry forward on the Classic Piping Input dialog box are highlighted in
red if there is a change in the data value. For example, in the example shown above, the PIPE
OD in. value changes from 8.6250 inch to 6.6250 inch on the element From Node 30 to To
Node 50. The first element in the list with the new value is highlighted in red. Note that elements
2 through 3 inherit the value of element 1 automatically. In this example, the value of the PIPE
OD in. does not change until you enter a new value for element 4. All elements below element
4 inherit that value unless a new value in entered.
Other options from the Elements List include the following:
The Find command (started with Ctrl F or Edit > Find) quickly jumps to the element where the
given node is located. Find remembers the last node number that you typed, so subsequent
searches of the same node can be accomplished by pressing Ctrl F.
Access to the element Auxiliary Data screens is available by highlighting an element row and
right-clicking on an element line and clicking Block Operation > Aux Screens. By
single-clicking on any checked items from the dialog box shown below the appropriate Auxiliary
Data box displays. You can edit the data in the Auxiliary Data box, which updates the input
dialog box. Additionally, you can type new data by double-clicking on any of the unchecked
boxes to open the Auxiliary Data dialog box. You can delete an entire Auxiliary Data box by
double-clicking on the checked item. A prompt warns you of the operation.

Block Operations
The software provides the ability to perform global editing operations on selected parts of the
piping system. These operations include varieties of rotations, deletions, duplications, node
renumbering, and status reporting.

To access Block Operations commands from the 3D Graphics pane

1. Access the Block Operations commands from the Block Operations tool bar.

CAESAR II User's Guide

205

Piping Input Reference

2. Select one of the following icons to perform the indicated operation.
Rotate
Duplicate
Delete
Renumber
Invert
Change Sequence

To access Block Operations commands from the Elements dialog box

1. Right-click in the Elements dialog box to display the menu.
2. Click Block Operation.
3. Select one of the sub-menu items to perform the indicated operation.
Rotate
Delete
Duplicate
Nodes
Invert
Change Sequence
Status

To define a block of elements in the 3D Graphics pane

1. Use the Select Element button on the Standard Operators tool bar to select a single
element.
You can click on the element in the 3D Graphics pane to select it.
The selected element highlights.
2. To select more than one element, move the cursor to each additional element to select in
the 3D Graphics pane and press the Shift key while clicking the additional elements.
The entire group (block) of elements highlights.
Alternatively, you can click the Select Group icon in the Standard tool bar and draw a box
around the items you want to select.
The highlighted elements define the set that any Block Operations command affects. A block
may contain any number of elements from a single element to every element in the model.

To define a block of elements from the Elements dialog box

1. Move the cursor to the first element in the group (block) to be operated on and click the row
number for that item.
This element highlights in the Element dialog box and in the 3D Graphics pane.
2. Move the cursor to the last element in the group (block) to be operated on, press Shift and
click the corresponding row number.
3. Alternatively, you can click the Select Group icon in the Standard tool bar and draw a box
around the items you want to select.
The entire group (block) of elements highlights.
The highlighted rows define the elements that any block operations affect. A block may contain
any number of elements from a single element to every element in the model.

206

CAESAR II User's Guide

Piping Input Reference

To define a block of elements by selecting by Line Number
1. Display the LineNumbers dialog box.
2. Select the element or block of elements you want to do a Block Operation on.
The corresponding element(s) highlight in the 3D Graphics pane.
The highlighted rows define the elements that any block operations change. A block may
contain any number of elements from a single element to every element in the model.
Rotate
Rotates elements defined in the block.
Displays the Block Rotate dialog box. This dialog box rotates the block through some angle
about the X, Y, or Z axis.
Unskew - Returns skewed geometry to an orthogonal orientation.
Setup - Determines what in the block should be rotated, including restraints, displacements,
force/moments, uniform loads, flexible nozzles, flanges, and element characteristics. The default
is for all items that appear in the block to be rotated with the block.
Degrees - Specifies the degrees of the rotation.
Delete
Deletes the selected block of elements.
A confirmation message displays before the delete action is taken.

CAESAR II User's Guide

207

Piping Input Reference

Duplicate
Duplicates elements in a block.
Displays the Block Duplicate dialog box. You can make identical copies of the block. You can
also make a mirror image by flipping the chosen elements in one of the orthogonal planes.
Mirror imaging is done on the piping delta dimensions only. That is, restraints are copied but not
mirror imaged. A +Y restraint does not become a -Y restraint when mirrored in the XZ plane.

Setup - Restraints, displacements, forces/moments, uniform loads, nozzles, flanges, and

element characteristics can be individually included or excluded from the duplication.
After the type of duplication is determined, you must decide the following:
Where in the Elements List to put the duplicated group of elements, either at the end of the
current block, the end of the input file, or after a specific element in the model.
What node increments to add to the nodes in the block so that they define unique pipe
elements. Be sure this increment is large enough to avoid any duplication of node numbers.
Renumber
Rearrange the node numbers in the block.
You can use this feature to clean up part or all of the piping system. It is not unusual to put the
entire model in one block and do a full renumber of all of the nodes.
Make copies of any large jobs before renumbering them. Be particularly careful when
renumbering systems containing large numbers of interconnected restraints with CNodes.
1. Select the block of nodes you want to renumber.
You can do this in the 3D Graphics pane or in the Elements dialog box.
2. Click the
Renumber icon in the Block Operations tool bar.

208

CAESAR II User's Guide

Piping Input Reference

The Block Renumber dialog box displays.

The Renumber check box is selected.

3. Enter the starting node in Start Node.
4. Enter the increment for the renumbering in Node Increment.
Be sure that the start node and increment values results in unique node numbers for
the elements being renumbered.
5. If you want to renumber the nodes of the elements that are connected to the selected block,
check the Renumber the boundary nodes check box.
CAESAR II renumbers the nodes of the elements that are connected to the selected block
and the model is connected the same way as it was before the renumber. The boundary
nodes include the From and To nodes of the elements connected to the selected block plus
the nodes of the auxiliary data block that are connected to the selected block.
Every node in the block on the piping system is renumbered.
It is common for CAESAR II not to renumber a CNode in a block. This is because the
CNode is connected to a node outside the block. The CNodes are not renumbered if they do not
connect to a node in the block and on the piping system.
Any possible confusion can be avoided in these instances by starting the renumbering at a
node greater than the largest node in the model. If all of the nodes are renumbered successfully
(that is, there are not any dangling CNodes), then the node Increment command can be issued
with a negative increment to shift the newly renumbered nodes back into the original range.

CAESAR II User's Guide

209

Piping Input Reference

Typically, you may graphically select multiple blocks to renumber. However CAESAR II can only
perform the renumber operation for the first block. In this case, CAESAR II displays a message
box with information about which block will be renumbered. You can then continue to renumber
the second block and so on until all blocks are renumbered.

Invert
Assigns new From Node and To Node values to the selected block of elements. The Invert
command reverses the order of the elements in the selected group as well as the node
numbering while preserving the geometry of the input model.
Contiguous segments (sets of elements) may be selected in either the Elements dialog
box, the 3D Graphics pane, or the Line Numbers dialog box.

Why Use the Invert command

The Invert command can be very helpful when you have imported a new piping input model from
an external source, such as a Piping Component File (PCF), and you want to re-assign node
numbers. For example, for an imported run from a termination to a tee, invert it to run from the
tee to the termination.

To Use the Invert command

1. Select the block of elements (nodes) you want to finvert, either from the Elements dialog box
or from the 3D Graphics pane or from the Line Numbers dialog box.

If you select a block of elements from the Elements dialog box or from the Line
Numbers dialog box, the corresponding elements are selected (highlighted) in the 3D
Graphics panel.
If you select a block of elements in the 3D Graphics pane or from the Line Numbers
dialog box, the corresponding elements are NOT selected (highlighted) in the Elements
dialog box.

2. Click the
Invert icon on the Block Operations tool bar.
Alternatively, right-click in the Elements dialog box to display the menu and click Block
Operation > Invert.
The node numbers are reversed.
Notice that nothing changes in the 3D Graphics pane- only the node numbers are
changed.

210

CAESAR II User's Guide

Piping Input Reference

3. Review the Elements dialog box to verify the new node number assignments.
The From Node and To Node values are renumbered for the selected elements.
For example:
Element Number

Original node numbers

New node number

21

95 - 100

115 - 110

22

100- 105

110 -105

23

105 - 110

105 - 100

24

110 - 115

100 - 95

Change Sequence
Changes or rearranges the sequence (order) of elements while preserving the geometry.

Why Use the Change Sequence Command

Typically, the Elements dialog box displays by the order of elements entered during the input
process. The order in the list is important because when you specify some particular input
values for an element in the list, that value propagates to all the elements in the list following it
UNTIL that value is explicitly changed.
When you import piping model data (in the form of PCFs) from other piping input design
software such as Intergraph Smart3D, CAESAR II imports the elements in one sequence.
However, that sequence may not be what you want. For example, you may want all the high
pressure elements to be listed together. This reduces the number of unique input fields to verify
and can help you to logically organize the model. You can re-organize elements in a way so that
those with similar carry-forward properties are placed consecutively.

To Use the Change Sequence Command

1. Select the block of elements (nodes) whose sequence you want to change, either from the
Elements dialog box , from the 3D Graphics pane, or from Line Numbers dialog box.
2. Click Change Sequence
in the Block Operations tool bar.
Alternately, you can right-click in the Elements dialog box and click Block Operations >
Change Sequence.
The Change Sequence dialog box displays.

CAESAR II User's Guide

211

Piping Input Reference

3. Choose where in the list you want to move the selected block.
To move the selected block AFTER a given element, click Follow.
To move the selected block BEFORE a given element, click Precede.
The cursor changes to indicate the operation is in progress.
4. From the Elements dialog box, position the cursor in the line where you want the selected
block to be placed. Alternatively, you can select elements in the 3D Graphics pane and then
click on the element where you want to move them.
The selected block of elements displays in the new order.
The 3D graphics model does not change. This command only affects the Elements
dialog box display contents. Remember that this command provides you with the capability
of organizing "like" types of elements together.
To re-store the order of the Elements dialog box to the original list, use the
Undo button.
Status
Displays the Block Status dialog box. This dialog box displays the piping data in the current job
and in the block.

Next Element
Skips to the next element.

Previous Element
Skips to the previous element.

First Element
Skips to the first element.

Last Element
Skips to the last element.

Undo
Reverses or cancels any modeling steps. This can also be accomplished by pressing Ctrl-Z.
You can undo an unlimited number of steps. Undo is limited only by the amount of available
memory.
Making any input change while in the middle of the undo stack resets the redo stack.

Redo
Repeats the last step done You can redo an unlimited number of steps. Redo is limited by
the amount of available memory.
Making any input change while in the middle of the redo stack resets the undo stack.

212

CAESAR II User's Guide

Piping Input Reference

Edit Static Load Cases

Displays the Static Analysis dialog box. For more information, see Static Analysis (on page
437).

Edit Dynamic Load Cases

Displays the Dynamic Analysis dialog box displaying static load information. For more
information, see Dynamic Analysis Overview (see "Dynamic Loads in Piping Systems" on page
527).

Review Units
Displays the Review Current Units dialog box. This dialog box displays the units used to create
the report file. Changing the units in the configuration does not affect the input. To change the
input units, click Tools > Change Model Units.

Model Menu
Performs actions associated with modeling as well as specifying associated system-wide
information.

Break
Divides an element into two or more individual elements. Click Model > Beak on the Classic
Piping Input dialog box. This command displays the Break at element <node> - <node>
dialog box.

Break at element <node> - <node> Dialog Box

Controls options for breaking an element.
A straight run of pipe between two nodes needs to be broken to insert a restraint, or some
other change in properties.

CAESAR II User's Guide

213

Piping Input Reference

A long straight run of pipe needs to be broken into multiple, uniform lengths of pipe with
similar support conditions on each length. For example, a long straight run of rack piping, or
a buried run with multiple soil supports at each point in the run.

The example above illustrates a single nodal insert between the nodes 10 and 20. The node to
be inserted is 15 and is 6 ft. from the node 10. Alternatively, you could insert node 15 an
appropriate distance from the To node 20. If there was some other node in the model with a
restraint (or imposed displacements) like the one to be put on the newly generated node 15,
then the node identifying that restraint location could be filled in at the line Get Support From
Node and the restraint would be automatically placed at 15. In this case, the +Y support at node
10 is copied to node 15.
For multiple inserts in a rack piping system the dialog box might appear as follows:

214

CAESAR II User's Guide

Piping Input Reference

If you type the node where a +Y restraint has already been defined at the prompt for "support
condition", a +Y restraint is placed at all of the generated nodes, namely 110, 112, ... , 120. The
multiple insert Break is used primarily for three reasons:
Rack piping supports where the total length and node spacing is known and typed directly
when requested at the prompts.
Underground pipe runs where the overall length of the run is known, and the lengths of the
individual elements in the run are known.
To add mass points in order to refine a model for dynamic analysis.
Break does not work when the element is an expansion joint or the delta dimensions in
the DX, DY, and DZ boxes are blank or zero.
Insert Single Node - Indicates that only one node is inserted.
Insert Multiple Nodes - Indicates that more than one node is inserted.

Single Node Information

New Node Number - Indicates the node number for the inserted node.
Distance in (in.) from Node <node number> - Specifies the distance from the selected node.

Multiple Node Information

Total Number of Break Elements - Specifies the number of elements to insert.
Node Step - Specifies the increment between node numbers.
Length of each element - Displays the length of each element to insert.

CAESAR II User's Guide

215

Piping Input Reference

Allow Duplicate Node Numbers - Indicates that duplicate node numbers are allowed.
Get Support From Node - Specifies the node from which to copy support information.

Valve
Provides access to the valve and flange databases. This command displays the Valve and
Flange Database: <database name> dialog box.

Valve and Flange Database: <database name> Dialog Box

There are currently four databases provided:
CRANE steel valves and total flange length
GENERIC valves and 2/3 flange length
Corner and Lada valves - no flanges
CADWorx Plant (this is the CAESAR II default)
CAESAR II automatically generates data lengths and weights of rigid elements for flange-valve
-flange combinations when you select the Flange-Valve-Flange check box.
The CRANE database contains all flanged and welded fittings in the CRANE steel valve catalog.
The GENERIC database contains information from a variety of sources. In some cases, such as
weights for control valves, information from different sources was found to vary considerably. In
these cases the largest reasonable weight was selected for use in the database. In other cases
only the length of the fitting was available.

The default database, CADWorx Plant, is a subset of the full component database provided
with CADWorx Plant, Intergraph CAS's piping design and drafting software. This database
offers nine different component types (gate, globe, check, control, ball, plug, butterfly valves,
flange pair, and single flange) as well as four different end types (flanged, no-flanged, threaded,

216

CAESAR II User's Guide

Piping Input Reference

or socket). Selection of flanged-end components or flanges themselves automatically provides
for gaskets.

Selecting flanged ends (FLG) for a valve simply adds the length and weight of two
flanges and gaskets to the valve length and weight. NOFLG selects a valve without including the
two mating flanges.
Rigid Type - Specifies the rigid type for the fitting.
End Type - Specifies the end type for the fitting.
Class - Specifies the class for the fitting.
Whole element - Indicates that the selections apply to the whole element.
From end - Indicates that the selections apply to the From end of the fitting.
To end - Indicates that the selections apply to the To end of the fitting.
Both ends - Indicates that the selections apply to both ends of the fitting.
Flange-Valve-Flange - Automatically generates data lengths and weights of rigid elements for
flange-valve-flange combinations.
Activate Flange Check - Turns on the flange check.

Adding an Element from the Valve Flange Database

1. Type the node numbers for the rigid element in the From and To boxes on the Classic
Piping Input dialog box.
2. Click Valve/Flange
on the toolbar, or click Model > Valve from the menu.
3. Highlight blocks to select the fitting.
4. Select where to insert the new element.

CAESAR II User's Guide

217

Piping Input Reference

Clicking the Flange Valve Flange check box enables CAESAR II to generate three
RIGID elements whose length and weight are automatically populated with data from the
Valve/Flange database.
5. Click OK to accept the selection.
If the particular selection is valid for the current line size, CAESAR II displays the length of
the element in the DX, DY, and DZ boxes, designates the element as RIGID, and inserts the
weight in the appropriate slot in the Auxiliary box.
The assumed orientation of the rigid is taken from the preceding element. CAESAR II is doing a
table lookup based on line-size and is inserting the selected table values into the dialog box.
Should the line size change at a later time, you must come back and ask CAESAR II to perform
another table look-up for the new size.
Use of the CADWorx Plant database offers several benefits over the use of other databases:
The CADWorx Plant database provides more accurate component lengths and weights
than those typically available in the GENERIC database.
Using the same component data for CAESAR II and CADWorx Plant modeling promotes
the efficiency of the bi-directional interface between them. Total sharing of data files and
specifications between CAESAR II and CADWorx Plant occurs when the CADWorx
installation option is saved in the registry. In that case, you should edit the third line of the
CADWORX.VHD file to name the actual CADWorx specifications. These specifications are
located in the CADWORX\SPEC subdirectory. For more information on editing this file, see
below.
You can more easily modify the CADWorx Plant Valve and Flange database, because the
specification files and component data files are ASCII text files. This process, which involves
possibly editing the CADWORX.VHD, specification, and data files, is described below.
The CADWORX.VHD file is structured as follows:

The first line must read CADWORX.DAT. It must not be changed.

The second line is editable. It must begin with a zero. The second number on the line
designates the number of specifications to make available. It can be a maximum of 7.
The third line is editable. It lists the available specifications. Each specification name must
consist of 8 characters, padded by blanks on the right. The specification names designate
files with extension .SPC, located in the SPEC subdirectory of the CAESAR II or the
CADWorx Plant specification directory (if the CADWORX option is set in the registry).
The fourth line is editable. It designates whether each specification uses English or Metric
nominal pipe sizes. Seven blanks followed by a 1 indicate an English nominal, while seven
blanks followed by a 2 indicate a metric nominal.
The last five lines are not editable.
The specification files are located in the SPEC subdirectory of the CAESAR installation
directory. They are designated by the extension .SPC. The specification files correlate pipe size
and component with the appropriate data file. Individual lines in the file list the library
(subdirectory to the LIB_I or LIB_M directory, depending on whether English or Metric units are
in effect), file name (with an extension equal to the library name), range of nominal pipe sizes for
which the specified data file applies. You can edit any of these items. The last item on the line is

218

CAESAR II User's Guide

Piping Input Reference

the component type number, and should not be changed. Other items in the file pertain to
CADWorx Plant and are not significant to CAESAR II.
The data files hold the dimensional and weight values. Data files for different types of
components hold different types of data. The data columns are labeled. The only data with
significance to CAESAR II involves the weight and lengths. You can change these values. The
following is a typical component data file for weld neck flanges:

You can find more extensive information on editing these files in the CADWorx Plant User
Manual.

CAESAR II User's Guide

219

Piping Input Reference

Expansion Joint
Displays the Expansion Joint Database <data file> and Expansion Joint Modeler dialog
boxes.
CAESAR II automatically generates an expansion joint model from catalog data that you select.
The catalog used may be selected in the CAESAR II Configure/Setup routine. You decide where
in the model the expansion joint should go, that is, between which two nodes, and the modeler
assembles the completed joint. Selectable joint styles include Untied, Tied, Hinged, Gimbaled,
Untied-Universal, and Tied Universal expansion joints.
An example selection session is illustrated as follows. Of particular note are the following items:
You can select any of four material types. These material types are used to adjust the
bellows stiffnesses to the actual highest temperature in the model. This typically results in
higher stiffnesses than those shown in the vendor's catalog because the stiffnesses in the
catalog may be based on a higher design temperature.
You can select any combination of end types.
Bellows, liner, cover, rod, and hinge or gimbal assembly weights are looked up from the
stored database and automatically included in the expansion joint model.
For universal joints, the minimum allowed length is stored, but when the available space
exceeds the minimum allowed, you are prompted for the length that you want the expansion
joint assembly to occupy.
The last screen that follows shows the "proposed" model before it is inserted into the
CAESAR II input. This allows you to investigate the characteristics of several joints before
settling on one.
Actual maximum pressure ratings are also a part of the database, and in many cases
exceed the nominal pressure rating shown in the catalog. You can use pressures up to
these actual allowed maximums.
Allowed joint movements are also stored as part of the database and are printed with each
proposed model. These values should be recorded for use in checking the model after a
successful design pass has been completed.
Pressure thrust is included in the modeling considerations for each of the expansion joint
styles, removing this concern.
In the case of "tied" expansion joints, rigid elements are used to model the tie-bars.
Restraints with connecting nodes are used to contain the pressure thrust, and to keep the
ends of the expansion joint parallel.

220

CAESAR II User's Guide

Piping Input Reference

CAESAR II User's Guide

221

Piping Input Reference

222

CAESAR II User's Guide

Piping Input Reference

Expansion Joint Modeler - From / To Nodes
Indicates whether the expansion joint assembly should be installed at the From end or the To
end of the current element if the length of the current element exceeds the length of the
expansion joint assembly.

Expansion Joint Modeler - Hinge/Pin Axis

Specifies the direction cosines which define the axis of the hinge pin of the expansion joint
assembly. That is, the axis about which the joint can rotate.
For example, if the hinge can rotate about the X-axis, type:1.0 0.0 0.0

Expansion Joint Modeler - Tie Bar Plane

Specifies the direction cosines corresponding to a line drawn from the mid-point of one tie rod to
the mid-point of the other. If an expansion joint has only two tie rods permitting rotation about
the plane defined by the tie rods, type the direction cosines which, when crossed with the axis of
the expansion joint assembly, define the plane.
In this example, you would enter VX as1.000, VY as -0.000, and VZ as 0.000.

Expansion Joint Modeler - Overall Length

Specifies the length of the universal joint. Alternatively, select the check box to default the joint
length to the shortest recommended length. The length of a universal joint is variable depending
upon the length of the intermediate spool piece.

Expansion Joint Modeler - Expansion Joint Database

Specifies the database to use in the modeler. The current expansion joint vendor provides
multiple databases.
You can change the default expansion joint vendor in Expansion Joints (on page 51).

Torsional Spring Rates

Type a large value such as 1E10 if the torsional spring rate is unknown. This produces
conservative results. These results are conservative with respect to loads and non-conservative
with respect to displacements. It is very common to rate the bellows allowed torsion by the
amount of rotation that it experiences. Large torsional stiffnesses result in small, seemingly
satisfactory rotations. When results from a piping analysis are communicated back to the
expansion joint manufacturer, it is important to report both the rotation and the stiffness used to
produce that rotation. For more information, see Expansion Joints (on page 770).

CAESAR II User's Guide

223

Piping Input Reference

Expansion Joint Design Notes
It was common practice in the expansion joint industry to design expansion joint bellows and
hardware (restraints) for the system pressure, and pressure thrust only. Generally, no
consideration was given to the system deadweight or thermal forces. This poor practice was
tolerated before the wide-spread use of piping analysis software because:
The deadweight and thermal forces are normally small compared to the pressure and
pressure thrust.
Designers laid out expansion joints so that the thermal forces were very low and therefore
not significant.
The allowable stresses used in hardware designs have a significant safety factor.
The forces and moments generally were not known. Today, when an expansion joint is
modeled, it is recommended that al information relating to the joint be submitted to the
expansion joint manufacturer. This is especially true of the forces and moments resulting from
the operating loads, such as deadweight, thermal forces, and operating deflections. Better
evaluations of the loading conditions on the bellows and hardware simply help the manufacturer
make sure that his design is suited for the intended installation and service.

Expansion Joint Modeler - Modeler Results

Click Build to insert the proposed model of the expansion joint assembly into the piping system
model.
The Bellows Catalog Data (at the bottom of the Expansion Joint Modeler dialog box) shows
the bellows stiffness parameters and allowable movements from the vendor catalog. Note the
allowable movements for later evaluation of the expansion joint.

Expansion Joint Modeler Notes

Expansion joints cannot be inserted on an element that is either already rigid or an expansion
joint. Bends, however, can be at either end of the element where you are inserting the
expansion.
You do not have to give a length on the element where you are inserting the expansion joint.
The six types of expansion joint models supported currently by CAESAR II are:
Untied single bellows
Tied single bellows
Hinged single bellows
Gimbaled single bellows
Untied universal bellows
Tied universal bellows
The four possible joint end types are:
Welded-end
Slip-on flange
Weld neck flange
Plate flange
If the length of the element to receive the expansion joint model is given, then the expansion
joint assembly should fit within this length. If it does not, a warning message displays. If a

224

CAESAR II User's Guide

Piping Input Reference

universal joint has been requested, the length of the receiving element should be at least long
enough to accept the smallest possible universal length, as defined by the minimum spool piece
size from the manufacturers' database. If the element to receive the universal expansion joint
model is zero, you are prompted for the expansion joint length. If the element to receive the
universal expansion joint model had an original length, then the maximum possible space
available for the universal is reported and you are asked for the length. If the element to receive
any expansion joint is longer than the expansion joint to be inserted, you are prompted for the
end of the element where the joint should be inserted. Overall universal lengths should be
limited to about 10 times the pipe diameter before the center spool piece weight begins to
become a problem.
If there is a bend at either the From or the To end of the element to receive the expansion joint,
then you must define the length of the element.
To find extra nodes needed for the expansion joint model, CAESAR II starts with the element
From node and increments by one until a sufficient number of nodes not used elsewhere in the
model are encountered. It is these nodes that are reported in the Proposed-model dialog box.
Angular stiffnesses reported are given in the current set of units. Only the translational stiffness
label is found at the top of the bellows stiffness report. If you are unsure about the rotational
stiffness units, they may be seen either in the help screens or in the UNITS report from the LIST
option.
You are prompted to adjust the stiffness for the expansion joint if the highest operating
temperature is given and not equal to the expansion joint catalog design temperature. This
reduces bellows stiffnesses greater than those published in the catalog.
Bellows, tie-bar, and hinge/gimbal assembly weights are combined together and distributed over
the expansion joint rigid end pieces.
The expansion joint modeler makes every attempt possible to generate nodes in the model that
are unique. Inspect the nodes that are generated closely and make sure that you do not use
them unintentionally in any future model building.
Review the generated CAESAR II models and be sure that everything is consistent with your
intentions.

Expansion Joint Styles

The following six styles of expansion joints are built automatically by CAESAR II. With each type
is a brief discussion of its use when associated with hot, pressurized equipment protection.

Untied
Specifies a single unrestrained expansion joint. This type of joint can absorb movement in all
directions. It also subjects the system to pressure thrust which must be designed for, external to
the expansion joint. This type of joint should almost never be used by the expansion joint novice
needing to protect hot, pressurized equipment. Guide restrictions limiting displacements into the
joint, regular maintenance problems because of all of the support hardware away from the
bellows, and pressure thrust make using and analyzing this type of bellows difficult.

CAESAR II User's Guide

225

Piping Input Reference

Tied
Specifies a tied single expansion joint that is capable only of transverse (lateral) movement.
Pressure thrust is restrained internally by the tie-bars. This is a good, dependable expansion
joint to use for several reasons:
You do not have to design for pressure thrust.
Tie rods provide stability to the overall joint. This makes working with it in the field easier.
There is a single displacement mode (lateral). You can compare this mode directly to the
rated lateral movement in the catalog without the need for the relatively complicated
geometric calculations in the Expansion Joint Rating.
The disadvantages to the single tied expansion joint are:
They are fairly stiff in practice. This joint often does not provide the needed flexibility to
sufficiently reduce the loads on sensitive equipment.
The tie-bar assembly does provide some nonlinear restraining effect on flexibility that is
unaccounted for in the analysis. This may be appreciable when the bellows displacement
becomes large, such as when it is most critical that it perform as predicted.

Hinged
Specifies a single hinged expansion joint. This type of joint can only angulate about one axis.
Pressure thrust is retained internally by the hinge mechanism. Hinge joints are often used in
pairs to absorb considerable displacement in a single plane while transmitting very little load to
any attached equipment. The piping system must be designed to assure that displacement into
the hinges is planar for all types of thermal and occasional loadings to be experienced by the
system. Where pressure loads to be absorbed by the hinge mechanism are high, considerable
friction forces can be generated that somewhat limits further flexing of the joint. This transmits
larger loads than expected back into the piping system.

Gimbal
Specifies a single gimbal expansion joint. This type of joint can angulate about two axes.
Gimbaled joints restrain both pressure thrust and torsion by the gimbal mechanism. These joints
are often used in pairs to absorb considerable displacement in several directions, while
transmitting very little load to any attached equipment.

U-UNIV
Specifies an untied universal expansion joint. This type of unit is similar to a single unrestrained
expansion joint. It can absorb movement in all directions and normally has a much higher
capacity for transverse (lateral) deflection than a single bellows. An untied universal subjects the
system to pressure thrust loads which must be designed for external to the expansion joint.
Even when pressure is negligible, these joints can often be difficult to use in practice unless
proper guiding of the thermal displacement protects the joint against unwanted movement.

226

CAESAR II User's Guide

Piping Input Reference

T-UNIV
Specifies a tied universal expansion joint. This is similar to a tied single joint, except that the tied
universal has much higher transverse (lateral) movement capability. Pressure thrust loads are
restrained internally by the tie-bars. These types of joints are a good option where vertical pipe
runs close to the equipment are available. The tie-bars restrict movement to a single mode
(lateral) and eliminate the worry about pressure thrust design. Longer lengths result in smaller
lateral stiffnesses, but overall length is somewhat restricted by the weight of the center spool. A
good rule of thumb is to restrict the overall length of the assembly to ten times the pipe diameter.
Be careful not to put the assembly into compression, as the tie bar mechanisms are not
designed to take this load and damage to the bellows can result.
These six types of expansion joints are not all of the types available, but they are the most
common. If a joint is needed that is not covered by the above, select the style closest to that
required. Edit the resulting input after the EJ Modeler is complete and processing returns to the
Classic Piping Input dialog box.

Available Expansion Joint End-Types

The following expansion joint end-types are available in the CAESAR II modeler.

Welded
Indicates standard pipe beveled for welding.

Slipon
Indicates a slip-on flange.

WN
Indicates a weld neck flange.

Plate
Indicates a plate flange in accordance with the manufacturers catalog.
Slip-on, weld neck, and plate flanges may not be available in all diameters and pressure ratings,
such as over 24-in. diameters. Consult the catalog for specific interface dimensions, codes, and
materials. When you select a combination that is not available, you are warned that there are no
database values for his particular geometry and line size.

CAESAR II User's Guide

227

Piping Input Reference

Bellows Application Notes
The following considerations are important when selecting the number of convolutions for a
particular application:

Movement Capability
The more convolutions selected, the greater the movement capacity of the bellows. It is a
common practice to perform a quick hand calculation to estimate the required movement and
then select the number of convolutions from the rated movements in the catalog. After an
analysis is performed, the exact evaluation of the bellows performance can be made using the
expansion joint rating module provided with CAESAR II.

Spring Forces
Specifies the spring forces. The more convolutions that you select, the lower the resulting
bellows spring forces become. This is particularly critical when the expansion joint is located
near rotating equipment.

Available Space
The more convolutions selected, the greater the required overall length. If working in a confined
area, the number of convolutions may be restricted by the space.

Pressure Rating
The pressure rating should be equal to, or larger than the design pressure of the system. In
many instances, larger pressures can be tolerated than the rated pressure shown. In many
small diameter expansion joints, the same bellows is used in 50, 150, and 300 psi-rated joints.
The CAESAR II modeler contains the true minimum pressure limits for all of the bellows in the
database, and checks the maximum pressure in the line (as specified) against the allowed
pressure. This allows you to select a smaller joint with more flexibility for certain applications.

Materials
Bellows can be formed from most ductile materials that can be welded by the automatic T.I.G.
butt welding process and yield a homogeneous ductile weld structure. Because the specific
media content varies from system to system, and most media data specified prior to system
operation is approximate with considerable fluctuation possible, it is not feasible to make specific
recommendations concerning bellows materials. The following are the four most common
bellows materials that are supported by CAESAR II:
304SSA240 tp 304 Stainless Steel
316SSA240 tp 316 Stainless Steel
600IncInco 600 High Nickel
625IncInco 625 High Nickel

228

CAESAR II User's Guide

Piping Input Reference

Liners
Internal liners smooth the flow through the expansion joint. The smooth flow reduces pressure
drop and also prevents flow-induced vibration of the bellows. Liners are generally recommended
when the flow velocity exceeds 1.3 ft./sec. as a minimum, and are definitely recommended when
the flow velocity exceeds about 25 ft./sec. Consult the manufacturers catalog for additional
information. Heavy gage liners should be used in high velocity or turbulent flow systems. Also,
heavy liners should be used when the media is abrasive.

Covers
External covers protect very thin bellows, (0.010 to 0.090 in.) from mechanical damage. Covers
are also recommended when the line is insulated.

Title Page
Displays the title page of the current job. This is up to 60 lines of text that is stored with the
problem, and may be used for detailing run histories, discussing assumptions, and so on. These
lines may be printed with the output report through the input echo.

Hanger Design Control Data

Displays system-wide hanger design criteria.

Hanger Design Control Data Dialog Box

Spring hanger design can be globally controlled by typing data into the Hanger Design Control
Data dialog box shown above. The Hanger Design Control Data dialog box contains five items
that also appear on each individual hanger design spreadsheet. These parameters can be set
once in the dialog box, and then apply for all individual hangers to be defined unless specifically
overridden at the individual hanger input level. These items are:
Short-range springs
Rigid support displacement criteria
Maximum-allowed travel limit
Hanger table
Multiple load-case design option

CAESAR II User's Guide

229

Piping Input Reference

In addition, the Hanger Design Control Data dialog box tells the hanger design algorithm the
number of temperature cases to be used in the hanger design, and whether or not the actual
cold loads should be calculated. All of these options are discussed in detail in the following
sections.

No. of Hanger - Design Operating Load Cases

Specifies the number of load cases to be considered when designing spring hangers. This value
may be between 1 and 9 and corresponds to the number of thermal load cases to be used in
hanger design. If more than one operating case is to be considered in the hanger design then
you must also select the Multiple Load Case Design Option to use.

Calculate Actual Cold Loads

Indicates that CAESAR II makes one additional pass after the hanger design is completed and
the hangers are installed, to determine the actual installed loads that should be used when the
hangers are first installed and the load flanges adjusted in the field. This calculation tends to be
important in the following situations:
The stiffness of the piping system is small.
The stiffness of the hanger selected is high.
The hanger travel is large. This is usually more important in smaller diameter piping systems
that are spring supported away from equipment nozzles.
Actual cold loads should be calculated when springs in smaller diameter lines are to be adjusted
in the cold position.

230

CAESAR II User's Guide

Piping Input Reference

Allow Short Range Springs
Indicates that hanger design allows short range springs.
CAESAR II gives you the option of excluding short range springs from consideration from the
selection algorithms. Short range springs are considered specialty items in some instances and
are not used unless their shorter length is required for clearance reasons. Clear this check box
in this case.
If this option is not selected, CAESAR II selects a mid-range spring over a short-range spring,
assuming that they are more standard, readily available, and in general cheaper than their
short-range counterparts.
If the default should be that short range springs are used wherever possible, then check the box
on the Hanger Design Control Data dialog box.

Allowable Load Variation (%)

Specifies the limit on the allowed variation between the hot and cold hanger loads. If this value
is not specified, the only limit on load variation is that inherent in the spring table. This is
approximately 100% when the hot load is smaller than the cold load and 50% when the hot load
is larger than the cold load. Hot loads are smaller than cold loads whenever the operating
displacement in the Y direction is positive. The default value for the load variation is 25%.
The Allowable Load Variation value is the percentage variation from the hot load:

or as may be more familiar:

The Allowable Load Variation value is typed as a percentage. For example, type twenty five
percent as 25.0.

Rigid Support Displacement Criteria

Specifies the minimum amount of travel for hanger design. This is a cost saving feature that
replaces unnecessary springs with rigid rods.
The hanger design algorithm operates by first running a restrained weight case. The load to be
supported by the hanger in the operating condition is determined from this case. After the
hanger design load is known, the software runs an operating case with the hot hanger load
installed. This analysis determines the travel at the hanger location. If this determined hanger
travel is less than the Rigid Support Displacement Criteria, then a rigid Y-support is selected
instead of a spring for the location.
The software does not apply the criteria if you leave the Rigid Support Displacement Criteria
box blank or zero.
A typical value is 0.1 in.
You should insert a single directional restraint instead of a rigid rod in some cases.
Rigid rods are double-acting restraints. In some cases these can develop large hold down forces
that do not really exist because the support has lifted off, or because the rigid rod has bowed

CAESAR II User's Guide

231

Piping Input Reference

slightly. When this condition develops, you should rerun the hanger design inserting single
directional restraints where rigid rods were put in by CAESAR II.
Do not replace hangers with rigid rods in very stiff parts of the piping system. These parts are
usually associated with rotating equipment or vessel nozzles that need to be protected.

Maximum Allowed Travel Limit

Specifies the maximum amount of travel for hanger design. CAESAR II selects a constant effort
support if the design operating travel exceeds this limit, even though a variable support from the
manufacturer table would have been satisfactory in every other respect.
You can design a constant effort hanger by specifying a very small number for the Maximum
Allowed Travel Limit. A value of 0.001 typically forces CAESAR II to select a constant effort
support for a particular location.

Hanger Table
Specifies the active hanger table.
The following spring tables are currently included in CAESAR II:
1. Anvil

2. Bergen Power

3. Power Piping

4. NPS Industries

5. Lisega

6. Fronek

7. Piping Technology

8. Capitol

9. Piping Services

10. Basic Engineers

11. Inoflex

12. E. Myatt

13. SINOPEC

14. BHEL

15. Flexider

16. Carpenter & Paterson

17. Pipe Supports Ltd.

18. Witzenmann

19. Sarathi

20. Myricks

21. China Power

22. Pipe Supports USA

23. Quality Pipe Supports 24. PiHASA

25. Binder

26. Gradior

27. NHK

28. PSSI GmbH

29. Seonghwa

30. Mitsubishi

31. Yamashita

32. Sanwa Tekki

33. Techno Industries

Additional design options are invoked if you use the following checkboxes.
Extended Range
Cold Load
Hot load centered (if possible)

232

CAESAR II User's Guide

Piping Input Reference

For example, to use Grinnell Springs and cold load design, select the Cold Load Design
checkbox.
To use Grinnell Extended Range springs, click Cold Load Design, and to get the design Hot
load centered in the middle of the hanger table, if possible, select all three checkboxes.
The Hanger Design Control Data dialog box defaults to the hanger table-specified in the
configuration file.
CAESAR II includes the maximum load range to permit the selection of less expensive variable
support hangers in place of constant effort supports when the spring loads are just outside the
manufacturers recommended range. Make sure that the maximum load range is available from
the manufacturer as a standard item.
Extended Load Range Springs - Extended load ranges are the most extreme ranges on the
spring load table. Some manufacturers build double-spring supports to accommodate this range.
Others adjust the top or bottom travel limits to accommodate either end of the extended table.
Make sure that the manufacturer can supply the spring before you use the maximum ranges.
Use of the extended range often eliminates the need to go to a constant effort support. Lisega
springs do not support the extended range idea. A request for extended Lisega springs results in
the standard Lisega spring table and ranges.
Cold Load Spring Hanger Design - Cold load spring hanger design is a method of designing
the springs in which the hot (or operating) load is supported in the cold (or installed) position of
the piping. This method of spring design offers several advantages over the more usual hot load
design:
Hanger stops are easier to remove.
There is no excessive movement from the neutral position when the system is cold or when
the stops are removed.
Spring loads can be adjusted before the system is brought up to temperature.
Some feel that the cold load approach yields a much more dependable design.
Operating loads on connected equipment are lower in some system configurations. A hot
vertical riser anchored at the bottom turning horizontally into a nozzle connection is a typical
configuration resulting in this load-reduction. The spring to be designed is at the elbow
adjacent to the nozzle. Operating loads are lower because the difference between the hot
and cold loads counters the moment produced by the vertical thermal expansion from the
anchor.
The disadvantages to cold load design are:
In some systems, the loads on rotating equipment may be increased by a value proportional
to the spring rate times the travel in the hot condition.
Most installations are done on a hot load design basis.
The decision to use hot or cold load hanger design rests with you.
Middle of the Table Hanger Design (Hot Load Centered) - Many designers prefer that the hot
load be centered as closely as possible to the middle of the spring table. This provides as much
variability as possible in both directions before the spring bottoms out when the system is hot.
This was necessary before effective computer modeling of piping systems, when the weights at
hangers were approximated by chart methods or calculated by hand. Activating this option does
not guarantee that spring hot loads is at the middle of the spring table, but CAESAR II makes
every effort to move the hot load to this position. The CAESAR II design algorithm goes to a
higher size spring if the design load is closer to the middle of the larger spring's range, but never
switches spring types. This option, when it is effective, can only result in a one-size larger
spring. CAESAR II attempts to move the hot load to the next higher spring when it is within 10%
of the maximum travel range for the spring. If the new spring is not satisfactory, then the old one
is used to get a hot load close to the middle of the table even though its hot load is within 10% of
the high end of the table load range.

CAESAR II User's Guide

233

Piping Input Reference

Multiple Load Case Design Options

Specifies the multiple load case design option. Whenever more than one thermal load case is
used in the hanger sizing algorithm, CAESAR II must know how you want to weigh the results
from the different cases. There are currently 13 different methods that you can use for multiple
load case hanger design selection. These 13 methods are described in greater detail under the
hanger auxiliary data section.
1. Design per Load Case #1
2. Design per Load Case #2
3. Design per Load Case #3
4. Design per Load Case #4
5. Design per Load Case #5
6. Design per Load Case #6
7. Design per Load Case #7
8. Design per Load Case #8
9. Design per Load Case #9
10. Design for the maximum operating load
11. Design for the maximum travel
12. Design for the average load and the average travel
13. Design for the maximum load and the maximum travel

Seismic Wizard
Selects a particular Seismic Code and its associated data. The wizard computes the
applicable g factor and fills in the appropriate data cells. X-component is set into Vector 1,
Y-component is set into Vector 2, and Z-component is set into Vector 3; all other load
components are set to zero.
A warning displays if the current element has uniform loads defined.
Because the wizard sets data in gravitational loading, you must verify other uniform load
definitions for correctness.

ASCE Static Seismic Wizard

Computes the static g factor based on the ASCE 7-2005 (IBC 2006) methodology.

234

CAESAR II User's Guide

Piping Input Reference

CAESAR II displays the calculated gravity factor on the Uniform Loads tab.

Uniform Loads Tab

Importance Factor I (ASCE)

Specifies the component importance factor from ASCE #7 Section 13.1.3. Type 1.5 for
life-safety components, components containing hazardous material, or components that are
required for continuous operation. Type 1.0 for all others.

Response Factor R (ASCE)

Specifies the component response modification factor, from ASCE #7 Table 13.6-1. Type 12.0
for piping according to ASME B31 with joints made by welding or brazing. Type a value range as
low as 3.0 for other joints and for less ductile materials.

CAESAR II User's Guide

235

Piping Input Reference

Max. Mapped Res. Acc. Ss (ASCE)
Specifies the maximum mapped MCE spectral response acceleration at short periods according
to Section 11.4.1, Chapter 22 Seismic Ground Motion and Long-period Transition Maps
provide values for Ss.

Site Class (ASCE)

Specifies the site class code. Based on the soil properties, the site is classified as Site Class A,
B, C, D, E, or F according to Chapter 20. If you do not know the soil properties in sufficient detail
to determine the site class, use Site Class D.

Component Elevation Ratio z/h (ASCE)

Specifies the ratio of height in structure at the point of attachment over the average height of the
supporting structure.

Component Amplification Factor ap (ASCE)

Specifies the component amplification factor from Table 13.6-1. Type 2.5 for distribution system,
such as piping. This term reflects the relationship of the piping response to the structure
response.

ASCE Example Problem

For further information on the Seismic Wizard see the example below.
The Importance Factor IP = 1
The Component Response Modification Factor RP = 12.0, from Table 13.6-1 for "Piping in
accordance with ASME B31",
The Mapped MCE Spectral Response Acceleration Ss = 1.552, Mapped MCE Spectral
Response Acceleration at short periods according to section 11.4.1.
The Site Coefficient (Fa) = 1.0 for Site Class D, according to Table 11.4-1.
The Maximum Considered Earthquake MCE SMS - The MCE is adjusted for site class effects as
defined in Section 11.4.3,
SMS = Fa SS = 1.552
SDS - Design elastic response acceleration at short period (0.2 sec), from Section 11.4.4.
SDS= 2/3 SMS = 2/3 * 1.552 = 1.0347
The appropriate seismic acceleration is aH
= [ (0.4aPSDS) / ( RP / IP )] ( 1 + 2z/h)
= [(0.4 x 2.5 x 1.0347)/(12.0/1.0)](1 + 2 * 0.5)
= 0.17245
Check limits on aH:
aH <= 1.6 * SDS* IP = 1.6 * 1.0347 * 1.0 = 1.65552
aH >= 0.3 * SDS * IP = 0.3 * 1.0347 * 1.0 = 0.31041
aH = 0.31041
aH = 0.2 SDS= 0.2 * 1.0347 = 0.20694,

236

CAESAR II User's Guide

Piping Input Reference

Section 13.1.7 states, "The earthquake loads determined in accordance with Section 13.3.1
shall be multiplied by a factor of 0.7."
aH = 0.7 * 0.31041 = 0.2173
av = 0.7 * 0.20694 = 0.1149
CAESAR II displays the calculated gravity factor on the Uniform Loads tab.

CFE Sismo Static Seismic Wizard

Computes the static g factor based on the Manual De Diseno por Sismo (Seismic Design
Manual) 1993 methodology.

CFE Sismo Seismic Wizard

CAESAR II displays the calculated gravity factor on the Uniform Loads tab.

Uniform Loads Tab

CAESAR II User's Guide

237

Piping Input Reference

Seismic Zone (CFE)
Specifies the seismic zone. Zone D is the zone of highest seismic activity. Zone A is the least
active. For more information, review the Manual De Diseno por Sismo (Seismic Design
Manual). A map with different regions displays on page 1.3.29.

Structure Group (CFE)

Specifies the structural group as defined in the following table:
Group A

High Degree of Safety

Group B

Intermediate Degree of Safety

Group C

Low Degree of Safety

Soil Type (CFE)

Specifies the soil type as defined in the following table:
I Hard Soil

Ground deposits formed exclusively by layers with propagation velocity bo = 700

m/s or modulus of rigidity >= 85000 t/m2

II Med. Soil

Ground deposits with fundamental period of vibration and effective velocity of

propagation which meets the condition: c5 5c cc

III Soft Soil

Ground deposits with fundamental period of effective vibration of propagation

which meets the conditions: c5 5c cc

First Mode Period (CFE)

Specifies the period of first natural mode of the piping system in seconds.

Increase Factor (CFE)

Specifies the increase factor. The Mexican Earthquake Code considers an SRSS type effect on
the structure. This value scales up the earthquake loads in a linear (Scalar) fashion. This value
is traditionally 1.118 and should always be greater or equal to 1.0.

CFE Sismo Example Problem

For further information on CFE Sismo, see the example below.
For seismic zone D and soil type I, the following parameters are found in Table 3.1.
0
a = 0.50
C = 0.50
Ta (s) = 0.0
Tb (s) = 0.0
r=
If T> Tb , then
r
a = c ( Ta / Tb) = 0.50 * (0.6 / 1.15) ^ 0.5 = 0.3612

238

CAESAR II User's Guide

Piping Input Reference

For a structure group of A High Safety, the acceleration is multiplied by 1.5
a = 0.3612 * 1.5 = 0.5417
CAESAR II displays the calculated gravity factor on the Uniform Loads tab.

NBC Static Seismic Wizard

Computes the static g factor based on the NBC 2005 methodology.

CAESAR II User's Guide

239

Piping Input Reference

Importance Factor IE (NBC)
Specifies the importance factor as defined in Article 4.1.8.5 as defined in the following table:
Importance Category

Importance Factor (IE)

Low

0.8

Normal

1.0

High

1.3

Post-disaster

1.5

Site Class (NBC)

Specifies the site classification for the seismic site response from Table 4.1.8.4.A.

Sa(0.2) (NBC)
Specifies the spectral response acceleration value at 0.2 seconds as defined in Paragraph
4.1.8.4.(1).

Component Elevation Ratio [hx/hn] (NBC)

Specifies the component elevation ratio. The values hx and hn are the height above the base to
level n or x respectively. The base of the structure is the level at which horizontal earthquake
motions are imparted to the structure.

Component Amplification Factor [Rp] (NBC)

Specifies the force amplification factor from Table 4.1.8.17.

Element or Component Factor [Cp] (NBC)

Specifies the component factor from Table 4.1.8.17.

Component Force Amp. Factor [Ar] (NBC)

Specifies the component response modification factor from Table 4.1.8.17.

240

CAESAR II User's Guide

Piping Input Reference

NBC Example
For further information on the use of the Static Seismic Wizard see the example below.
Importance Factor IE = 1.0 for a "Normal" category by Table 4.1.8.5.
The Site Class is "C" for "Very dense soil and soft rock" by Table 1.1.8.4.A:
Sa (0.2) = 0.55, spectral response acceleration value at 0.2 s, as defined in Sentence
4.1.8.4.(1).
According to Table 4.1.8.4.B.,Fa = 1.0:
Sp = Cp Ar Ax / Rp = 1 * 1 * (1 + 2 * 0.5) / 3 = 0.6667
Cp = 1, Ar = 1 and Rp = 3 according to Table 4.1.8.17.
The maximum value of Sp is 4.0 and minimum value of Sp is 0.7, therefore:
Sp = 0.7
aH= 0.3 * Fa Sa (0.2)IE Sp = 0.3 * 1.0 * 0.55 * 1.0 * 0.7 = 0.1155
CAESAR II displays the calculated gravity factor on the Uniform Loads tab.

Optimization Wizard
Assists with expansion loop design. This wizard allows you to specify the element into which
the loop should be incorporated, the loop type, the item to be optimized - nodal stress or
restraint load, and the target value to which the item should be optimized. The optimization
routines run the analysis several times to arrive at an acceptable loop size such that the code
stress or restraint load on the target element is at the specified limit. Besides offering the
opportunity to specify various loop configurations and a selection of height to width ratios, the
wizard also provides an option to allow CAESAR II to select the most economical (based on
length of pipe and number of bends) of those possible.
To use the optimization wizard, the job must be run at least once so that there is an issue, such
as an overstress, to resolve. These results must be current. The process is illustrated by the
example LOOP-WIZARD.C2, as displayed below.
Reviewing the results of the LOOP-WIZARD job shows that it is suffering an expansion
overstress of 46,741 psi. The allowable value at node 20 is 41,288 psi. This is due to the
expansion of the long run 60-140. A loop should be installed somewhere along that run. The
questions are where, and how big should it be?

CAESAR II User's Guide

241

Piping Input Reference

Before you start the Loop Optimizer, examine the area of the plant surrounding the piping
system. To do this, import the CADWorx (or AutoCAD) plant model, using the CADWorks
Model
command. In this case, import the
...\EXAMPLES\LOOP-WIZARD-PLANT\OVERALL.DWG model. This model shows that there is
a convenient area to place a loop beside element 60-70.

242

CAESAR II User's Guide

Piping Input Reference

Select element 60-70 and then click Model > Optimization Wizard
Optimization Wizard. The Loop Design Wizard dialog box displays.

start the Loop

Using the Loop Optimization Wizard:

1. Loop 60-70 is already indicated as the element upon which the loop is installed. You can
change this value by selecting a different value from the list, or by selecting other elements
in the model.
2. Click Stress as the optimization type. Optionally, you can optimize restraint load
components as well.
3. Select EXP from the Load Case list. This fills in the element list showing stresses on the left
side of the dialog box.
4. Type 36,000 in the Stress box to define a target maximum stress. This value refines the
element list, so that it displays only those elements with stress levels higher than the target.
5. Select the Max Stress box to limit the maximum stress in the system to the target value.
6. Select the Loop Type from the available icons. For this example, select the first loop type.

CAESAR II User's Guide

243

Piping Input Reference

7. Select <none> from the Height to Width Ratio list to allow the loop height to vary to any
size while keeping the width constant. In this case, the terminal run of pipe is set to one
bend radius with the loop width fixed to the remaining length of element 60-70.

At this point there are two alternatives to indicating where the loop should be placed.

244

CAESAR II User's Guide

Piping Input Reference

8. Click Draw Cube to generate a transparent cube anchored on the selected element. You
can adjust the size and location of this cube by using the mouse. Use the corner points (Pt1
or Pt2) to adjust the major direction of the loop and the available space. Use the triangle to
adjust the minor axis of the loop and the available space. Drag the cube over the decking
adjacent to element 60-70 to build a cube with a Major dimension of 17ft 11 inches in the X
direction.

9. After the dialog box is complete, Click Design to start the optimization procedure.
The progress of the design scheme displays. After the loop is designed, you are informed of
how much pipe and how many bends were required to create the loop.

CAESAR II User's Guide

245

Piping Input Reference

10. Click Undo
to restart the Loop Wizard using different loop types. You can use this
information to find the most economical implementation.

When the optimizer finishes, the new expansion loop is inserted into the selected element.

11. Run a final analysis to verify all results. There are instances where the optimizer reports an
error. Examples of such situations are: (a) requesting a loop insertion in an element that is
not long enough, or (b) setting an impossible target maximum.
Selecting the special loop type enables CAESAR II to select the best loop to reach the
indicated target. This loop type is indicated on the dialog box by a lightning bolt. The best

246

CAESAR II User's Guide

Piping Input Reference

characteristic of each loop is based on the relative cost of bends to straight pipe. When you
select the lightning bolt loop type, the Bend Cost Factor box activates. The default value of
100 indicates that a bend costs 100 times as much as the equivalent length of straight pipe.
Adjust this value can as necessary.

Loop Optimization Wizard Overview

The Loop Optimization Wizard automates the sizing of expansion loops in a piping system.

Optimization Type
Specifies the type of output value to reduce. The available values include Stress Level and
Restraint Load Component.

Load Case (for Design)

Specifies the load case for which to reduce an output value. Adding a loop may well solve a
problem in a displacement-driven load case (Operating or Expansion) but not in a force-driven
load case (Sustained or Occasional).
After you select the Load Case value, the software displays Stress or Restraint Load output
values for review and selection.

Target Stress
Specifies the target level to which you would like to reduce the output value. Typing a stress
value (or a Load, in conjunction with a Load Component type) acts as a filter, showing only
elements which have stress values exceeding that level. This target value also becomes the
stress or load for which the selected target (Maximum System Stress, Restraint Load
Component, or Node) is optimized.
Design is not activated until you designate both a Target and Optimization Type.

Max. Stress
Optimizes the maximum stress level in the system (as opposed to a stress level at a single
node) to the value in the Target Data box.
Design is not activated until you designate both a Target and Optimization Type.

CAESAR II User's Guide

247

Piping Input Reference

At Node
Specifies either the node at which the stress level is to be optimized (and the element upon
which that node is located) or the node at which a restraint load component is to be optimized
(along with the Load Component Type). Double-click one of the entries in the
Element/Node/Stress list or a Load Component in the Restraint Load to automatically fill in
these entries.
Design is not activated until you designate both a Target and Optimization Type.

On Element

For Stress Optimization:

Specifies the element on which the node for which the stress level is to be optimized is located.
Double-click one of the entries in the Element/Node/Stress list to automatically fill in this entry.
Design is not activated until you designate both a Target and Optimization Type.

For Restraint Load Optimization:

Specifies the restraint load component which is to be optimized. Double-click one of the Load
Component entries in the Restraint Load list to automatically fill in this entry.
Design is not activated until you designate both a Target and Optimization Type.

Element/Node/Stress/Restraint Load Component

Displays the items which you can double-click to automatically fill in the entries designating the
item (either nodal stress or restraint load component) for which the results should be optimized.

Create Loop on Element

Specifies the element which is replaced by the loop. You can select the element from the list or
from the model. The Loop Optimization Wizard can only be used to substitute loops in place of
single elements.

Loop Type
Specifies the general configuration of the loop.

248

Type #1 - places the loop at the From end of the original element in the plane of the
Major Direction.

Type #2 - Places a 2-D (both dimensions the same size) loop at the From end of the
original element, first in the plane of the Major Direction and then in the plane of the Minor
Direction.

Type #3 - Places the loop in the middle of the original element in the plane of the
Major Direction.

CAESAR II User's Guide

Piping Input Reference

Type #4 - Places 2-D (both dimensions the same size) loop in the middle of the
original element, first in the plane of the Major Direction and then in the plane of the Minor
Direction.

Type #5 - Places the loop at the To end of the original element, in the plane of the
Major Direction.

Type #6 - Places 2-D (both dimensions the same size) loop at the To end of the
original element, first in the plane of the Major Direction and then in the plane of the Minor
Direction.

Type # 7 - Builds a loop of the same size as the original element.

Type # 8 - Builds a 2-D (both dimensions the same size) loop of the same size as the
original element, first in the Major Direction and then in the Minor Direction.

Type #9 - Causes CAESAR II to try all eight loop types and find the most
economically efficient solution based on total pipe length and number of bends.

Bend Cost Factor

Specifies the relative cost of a bend relative to straight pipe. This value is used when CAESAR II
is asked to select the most economic loop design. For example, if a bend (including hardware,
fabrication, and other costs) costs 100 times as much as the same length of straight pipe, then
the appropriate value would be 100.0.

Width to Height Ratio

Specifies the loop height to width ratio that should be maintained when building the loop.
Available options are 2.0, 1.0, 0.5, and none. Select none if the segments of the selected loop
configurations still coincide with the original element run. For example, segment #4 of Loop
Type #1, segment #6 of Loop Type #2, segments #1 and #5 of Loop Type #3, segments #1 and
#7 of Loop Type #4, or segment #1 of Loop Types #5 and #6 have a length equal to exactly the
length of a long radius bend. This entry does not apply in the event that Loop Types #7 or #8
were selected. In this case, the height to width ratio is not used. The height varies as necessary
and the width is held constant to the length necessary to make up the original element length.
This last option is often preferable in areas where there is limited room for wide loops.

Draw Cube
Graphically creates the anticipated area where the loop is installed. This cube may then be
resized or moved to reflect the preferred area for the loop. The Loop Optimization Wizard tries
to design a loop that fits in the allocated space.

Major Direction
Specifies the direction and distance of the primary direction of the loop.

CAESAR II User's Guide

249

Piping Input Reference

Minor Direction
Specifies direction and distance of the secondary direction of a 2-D loop.

Major Direction Available Space

Specifies the maximum available space for the loop in the major direction.

Minor Direction Available Space

Specifies the maximum available space for the loop in the minor direction.

Design (Button)
Begins the loop optimization process. If an appropriate loop cannot be designed, you must
change some of the parameters and try again.

Line Numbers
Displays the Line Numbers dialog box.

Line Numbers Dialog Box

Controls options for line numbers.
Create from Selection - Creates line numbers from the selected elements.
Remove Line Number - Deletes line numbers from the selected elements.
Reset Visibility Settings - Returns visibility settings to their default settings.
<type here to search> - Limits the elements that display to those elements that match the text
in this field. Clear this field to display all elements.
Show/Hide - Turns the display of line numbers for elements on or off.
Visibility - Specifies the opacity of elements. 100% indicates that the element is opaque.
0% indicates that the element is completely translucent, or invisible.
Color - Displays the Color dialog box from which you can specify a color for the element.
Name - Specifies the name of the element.

See Also
Line Number (on page 197)

Environment Menu
Performs actions associated with miscellaneous items.

Review SIFs at Intersection Nodes

Displays the Node Selection dialog box.

250

CAESAR II User's Guide

Piping Input Reference

Node Selection Dialog Box
Controls options for selecting the node.
Enter intersection Node Number to be reviewed - Specifies the number of the node where
you want to evaluate the stress intensification factors.
OK - Displays the Review Intersection SIF's dialog box.

Review Intersection SIF's Dialog Box

Controls options for reviewing intersection SIFs.
Node Specifies the node number where the stress intensification exists. CAESAR II displays
the To node of the current element by default. You can type any node in the system, but it is
most often at a pipe intersection or joint.
If the node is at an intersection, CAESAR II calculates SIFs for all pipes going to the intersection
if the intersection Type is specified. You only need to type the intersection type once. CAESAR
II finds all other pipes framing into the intersection and applies the appropriate SIFs.
If the node is at a two-pipe joint, such as a butt weld, CAESAR II calculates SIFs for the two
pipes going to the joint node if the joint Type is specified. You only need to specify the joint type
once. CAESAR II finds the other pipe completing the joint and applies the appropriate SIFs.
If the node is not at an intersection or a joint then, leave the Type box blank and type user
defined SIFs in the SIF(i) and SIF(o) boxes. Entries in the SIF(i) and SIF(o) boxes only apply to
the element on which they are defined.
User defined stress intensification factors must be greater than or equal to one.
CAESAR II calculates and displays code-defined SIFs in the Intersection SIF scratchpad.
Access this scratchpad by clicking Environment > Review SIFs at Intersection Nodes on the
Classic Piping Input dialog box. You can modify parameters used in the scratchpad so that
you can observe the effects of different geometries and thicknesses. Most changes made in the
scratchpad can be automatically transferred back into the model.
If the node is on any part of the bend curvature then the following applies:
1. You cannot override code calculated SIFs for bends by default. A configuration option exists
to override this default. For more information, see Allow User's SIF at Bend (on page 83). If
you set Allow User's SIF at Bend to True, then you can specify SIFs for bend To nodes.
The SIFs specified in this way apply for the entire bend curvature.
2. CAESAR II applies user-defined SIFs to straight pipe going to points on a bend curvature
regardless of any parameter in the setup file. This option is commonly used to intensify
injector tie-ins at bends, or dummy legs, or other bend attachment-type of supports.
Type Specifies the type of tee or joint.
For non-FRP piping codes, there are six types of tees and ten types of joints. These
elements correspond to 1 to 6 and 7 to 16 in the previous table. For more information, see
Input Items Optionally Effecting SIF Calculations (on page 113).
For BS 7159 and UKOOA, there are two types of tees: Moulded and Fabricated. Moulded
tee corresponds to Welding tee (3) or Extruded welding tee (6), and Fabricated tee
corresponds to Reinforced fabricated tee (1).
For ISO 14692, there are types of tee and joints: Tee, Qualified tee and Joint.
Pad Thk Specifies the thickness of the reinforcing pad for reinforced fabricated or full
encirclement tees, intersection type #1 and #17 respectively. The pad thickness is only valid for
these intersection types. In most piping codes, the beneficial effect of the pad thickness is
limited to 1.5 times the nominal thickness of the header. This factor does not apply in BS 806 or
Z184, and is 2.5 in the Swedish piping code. If the thickness of a type 1 or type 17 intersection is
left blank or zero the SIFs for an unreinforced fabricated tee are used.

CAESAR II User's Guide

251

Piping Input Reference

Ftg Ro Specifies the fitting outside radius for branch connections. This option is used for
reduced branch connections in the ASME and B31.1 piping codes, Bonney Forge Insert
Weldolets, and for WRC 329 intersection SIF calculations. Configuration options exist to invoke
the WRC 329 calculations and to limit the application of the reduced branch connection rules to
unreinforced fabricated tees, sweepolets, weldolets, and extruded welding tees. If omitted, Ftg
Ro defaults to the outside radius of the branch pipe.
Crotch R Specifies the crotch radius of the formed lip on an extruded welding tee, intersection
type 6. This is also the intersection weld crotch radius for WRC329 calculations. Specifying this
value can result in a 50% reduction in the stress intensification at the WRC 329 intersection. If
you attempt to reduce the stress riser at a fabricated intersection by guaranteeing that there is a
smooth transition radius from the header to the branch pipe, then you may reduce the resulting
stress intensification by a factor of 2.0.
Weld ID Specifies the weld ID value. The following values are valid.
0 or BLANK - As Welded
1 - Finished/Ground Flush
Used for:
BONNEY FORGE SWEEPOLETS
BONNEY FORGE INSERT WELDOLETS
BUTT WELDS IN THE SWEDISH PIPING CODE
If this value is 1 then the weld is considered to be ground flush on the inside and out and the SIF
is taken as 1.0.
For more information on how input parameters are used to compute SIFs for girth butt welds,
see WELD (D) (on page 116).
Weld(d) Specifies the average circumferential weld mismatch measured at the inside diameter
of the pipe. This value is used for Butt Welds and Tapered transitions. This is the average; not
the maximum mismatch. You must verify that any maximum mismatch requirements are
satisfied for your particular code.
Fillet Specifies the fillet leg length. This option is used only in conjunction with a socket weld
component. This value is the length of the shorter leg for an unequal leg fillet weld. If a fillet leg
is given, both socket weld types result in the same SIF. See appendix D of the B31 piping codes
for further clarification.
Header OD Specifies the actual outside diameter of the header matching pipe.
Header Thk Specifies the actual wall thickness of the header matching pipe.
Branch OD Specifies the actual outside diameter of the matching pipe.
Branch Thk Specifies the actual wall thickness of the matching pipe.
Header SIF(i) Displays the SIF in-plane for the header.
Header SIF(o) Displays the SIF out-of-plane for the header.
Branch SIF(i) Displays the SIF in-plane for the branch.
Branch SIF(o) Displays the SIF out-of-plane for the branch.
Flexibility Characteristic Displays the flexibility characteristic.
Branch Section Modulus Displays the branch section modulus.
Recalculate - Displays SIFs after you enter a different set of data. If you change the input data,
CAESAR II allows you to transfer the data back to the CAESAR II model.

252

CAESAR II User's Guide

Piping Input Reference

Review SIFs at Bend Nodes

Displays the Node Selection dialog box.

Node Selection Dialog Box

Controls options for selecting the node.
Enter bend Node Number to be reviewed - Specifies the node number where you want to
evaluate the stress intensification factors.
OK - Displays the Review Bend SIF's dialog box.

Review Bend SIF's Dialog Box

Controls options for reviewing bend SIFs.
Node Displays the node number.
Bend Radius Displays the bend radius. CAESAR II assumes a long radius by default. You
can override this value. Alternatively, select a value from the list.
Long - Indicates a long radius bend. The radius is equal to 1.5 times the nominal diameter.
Short - Indicates a short radius bend. The radius is equal to the nominal pipe diameter.
3D - Indicates a 3D bend. The radius is equal to 3 times the nominal diameter.
5D - Indicates a 5D bend. The radius is equal to 5 times the nominal diameter.
Bend Type Specifies the bend type. For most codes, this refers to the number of attached
flanges and can be selected from the list. If there are no flanges on the bend, leave Type blank.
A bend should be considered flanged if there is any heavy or rigid body within two diameters of
the bend that significantly restricts the bends ability to ovalize.
When using the BS 7159 or UKOOA Codes with Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic (FRP) pipe, this
entry refers to the material laminate type and may be 1, 2, or 3. These laminate types are
All chopped strand mat (CSM) constructing with internal and external surface tissue
reinforced layer.
Chopped strand mat (CSM) and woven roving (WR) construction with internal and external
surface tissue reinforced layer.
Chopped strand mat (CSM) and multi-filament roving construction with internal and external
surface tissue reinforced layer.
The laminate type affects the calculation of flexibility factors and stress intensification factors for
the BS 7159 and UKOOA Codes only.
For ISO 14692, only type 3 filament-wound laminate is considered.
Bend Angle Displays the bend angle.
Fitting Thickness Specifies the thickness of the bend if that thickness is different than the
thickness of the matching pipe. If the thickness is greater than the matching pipe wall thickness,
then the inside diameter of the bend is smaller than the inside diameter of the matching pipe.
CAESAR II calculates section modulus for stress computations based on the properties of the
matching pipe as defined by the codes.
The pipe thickness is used twice when calculating SIFs and flexibility factors; once as Tn, and
once when determining the mean cross-sectional radius of the pipe in the equation for the
flexibility characteristic (h):
h = (Tn)(R) / (r2)
Tn = Thickness of bend or fitting
R = Bend radius

CAESAR II User's Guide

253

Piping Input Reference

r = Mean cross-sectional radius of matching pipe
= (OD - WT) / 2
OD = Outside Diameter of matching pipe
WT = Wall Thickness of matching pipe
Most codes use the actual thickness of the fitting (this entry) for Tn, and the wall thickness of the
matching pipe for the calculation of the mean cross-sectional radius of the pipe (the WT value).
More specifically, the individual codes use the two wall thicknesses as follows:
Code

For Tn:

For Mean Radius Calculation:

B31.1

Fitting

Fitting

B31.3

Fitting

Matching Pipe

B31.4

Fitting

Matching Pipe

B31.5

Fitting

Matching Pipe

B31.8

Fitting

Matching Pipe

B31.8 Ch VIII

Fitting

Matching Pipe

SECT III NC

Fitting

Matching Pipe

SECT III ND

Fitting

Matching Pipe

Z662

Matching Pipe

Matching Pipe

NAVY 505

Fitting

Fitting

B31.1 (1967)

Fitting

Fitting

SWEDISH

Fitting

Matching Pipe

BS 806

N/A

N/A

STOOMWEZEN

N/A

N/A

RCC-M C/D

Matching
Pipe

Matching Pipe

CODETI

Fitting

Fitting

NORWEGIAN

Fitting

Fitting

FDBR

Fitting

Fitting

BS 7159

Fitting

Fitting

UKOOA

Fitting

Fitting

IGE/TD/12

Fitting

Fitting

EN-13480

Fitting

Matching Pipe

GPTC/Z380

Fitting

Matching Pipe

The bend fitting thickness (FTG) is always used as the pipe thickness in the stiffness matrix
calculations. However, the thickness of the matching pipe (WT) is always used in the bend
stress calculations.
Number of Miter Cuts Displays the number of cuts in the bend if it is mitered. When you type
a number, CAESAR II checks if the mitered bend input is closely or widely spaced. If the bend is

254

CAESAR II User's Guide

Piping Input Reference

determined to be widely spaced, and the number of miter cuts is greater than one, the bend
should be broken down into n single cut widely spaced miters, where n is the total number of
cuts in the bend. The number of cuts and the radius of the bend are all that is required to
calculate the SIFs and flexibilities for the bend as defined in the B31 codes. The bend radius
and the bend miter spacing are related by the following equations:
Closely Spaced Miters
R = S / (2 tan )
q = Bend Angle / (2 n) where n = number of miter cuts
Widely Spaced Miters
R = r2 (1.0 + cot q) / 2.0
r2 = (ri + ro) / 2.0
= Bend Angle / 2.0
Seam Weld Indicates that the bend is seam welded.
B31.3
If the B31.3 piping code is active, the Seam Welded check box is used to activate the Wl
box for bends. The Wl box is the weld strength reduction factor used to determine the
minimum wall thickness of the bend element.
IGE/TD/12
Used by IGE/TD/12 to calculate the stress intensification factors due to seam welded elbow
fabrication as opposed to extruded elbow fabrication. This option is only available when
IGE/TD/12 is active.
Matching Pipe OD Specifies the outside diameter of the matching pipe. This is used in the
average cross sectional radius calculation:
r2 = (OD - WT) / 2
OD = Outside Diameter as entered
WT = Wall Thickness of attached pipe
The B31.3 (1993) code defines r2 as the mean radius of matching pipe.
Matching Pipe Thk Specifies the match pipe wall thickness. You should not subtract any
corrosion. All SIF calculations are made ignoring corrosion. This wall thickness is used in the
mean radius (r2) calculation as defined in the piping codes.
Elastic Modulus Specifies the elastic modulus among EC, E1 to E9. This value is used for
the pressure stiffening calculations.
Pressure Specifies the pressures among PMax, P1 to P9, PHydro and none. This value is
used for the pressure stiffening calculations.
Bend In-Plane SIF Displays the SIF under in-plane bending.
Bend Out-of-Plane SIF Displays the SIF under out-of-plane bending.
In-Plane Flexibility Factor Displays the flexibility factor under in-plane bending.
Out-of-Plane Flexibility Displays the flexibility factor under out-of-plane bending.
Flexibility Characteristic Displays the pipe factor.
Recalculate - Displays the SIFs after you enter a different set of data. If you change the input
data, CAESAR II allows you to transfer the data back to a CAESAR II model.

CAESAR II User's Guide

255

Piping Input Reference

Special Execution Parameters

Displays the Special Execution Parameters dialog box. Click Environment > Special
Execution Parameters. These parameters remain set for that particular job.

Print Forces on Rigids and Expansion Joints

Indicates whether forces are printed on rigid elements and expansion joints. Forces and
moments are not normally printed for these elements because the forces that act on these
elements can usually be read directly from the forces that act on the adjacent pipe elements.
Select this option to cause forces and moments to be calculated and printed for all rigid
elements and expansion joints in the system.

256

CAESAR II User's Guide

Piping Input Reference

Print Alphas and Pipe Properties
Indicates whether the software prints alphas and pipe properties. CAESAR II prints the thermal
expansion coefficients along with the pipe, insulation, fluid, and refractory weights in the error
checker. This report can be very useful during error checking to help identify possible problems
in the temperature or weight input specifications. Rigid elements and expansion joints are
treated the same as straight pipe. Rigid weights and insulation cladding factors are not reflected
in this table.

Activate Bourdon Effects

Specifies the Bourdon effects option to use. Choose the option from the drop list to activate the
Bourdon pressure effect. The Bourdon pressure effect causes straight pipes to elongate, or
displace along their axes, and causes curved pipes or bends to elongate along the line that
connects the bends near and far nodes. If the Bourdon effect is not activated, there are no
global displacements due to pressure. The Bourdon effect is always considered when plastic
pipe is used, regardless of the setting of the Activate Bourdon Effects option.
By default, CAESAR II does not include the Bourdon effect in the analysis of steel piping
systems. That is, there are no displacements of the system due to pressure.
As an option, you can include pressure displacement effects. These effects can be appreciable
in long runs of pipe or in high pressure, large diameter bends adjacent to sensitive equipment.
Bourdon effects are almost always important in fiberglass reinforced plastic piping systems. For
this reason the Bourdon (Translational) is automatically turned on for all FRP pipe runs and
bends.
Two Bourdon options are available:
Use the Translation only option when the elbows in the system are forged or welded
fittings and can reasonably be assumed to have a circular cross section.
Use the Translational & Rotational option when the bends in the system are fabricated by
the hot or cold bending of straight pipe. In these cases the slight residual ovalization of the
bend cross section, after bending, causes the bend to try to straighten out when pressurized.
Fixed end moments are associated with this opening. These fixed end moments do not exist
when the original shape of the bend cross-section is circular.

Branch Error and Coordinate Prompts

Specifies how branch error and coordinate prompts display. You are prompted for two pieces of
information:
The loop closure tolerance.
The global coordinates of the first point of the piping system and each following piece of the
piping system that is not connected to the first.
This data is needed the first time CAESAR II prepares a global geometry calculation. This
calculation is made on three different occasions:
Before preprocessor plots are generated.
Before global coordinate reports are built.
Before error checking is performed.
Alternatively, you can select Edit > Global and specify the global coordinates to avoid any
prompting.

CAESAR II User's Guide

257

Piping Input Reference

There are several major uses for this flag:
Set the loop closure tolerance.
Define the elevation of the piping system for wind/wave load calculations.
Give the proper east-west or north-south coordinates for dimension checks.
Move parts of the system around in the plotted output for visual checking.
Whenever you create a physical loop in the piping system, there are at least two different sets of
dimensions between the same points. If the two dimensions are not within a certain tolerance of
each other, a fatal error occurs. You can set this tolerance interactively or in the configuration
file. Select Both for the Branch Error and Coordinate Prompts option to cause CAESAR II to
interactively prompt for this tolerance.

Thermal Bowing Delta Temperature

Specifies the temperature differential which exists between the top of the pipe and the bottom of
the pipe. This differential is used to compute an elemental load. It is added to each temperature
case for horizontal pipes.
This entry is computed from the equation:
dT = Ttop - Tbottom
For example, consider a horizontal pipe where the temperature on the top is 20 degrees hotter
than the temperature on the bottom. The proper value to type in this box is 20, not -20.

Liberal Stress Allowable

Indicates whether or not to use liberal stress allowable. Conservative formulation of the
allowable expansion stress range for many codes in CAESAR II is calculated from:
f ( 1.25 Sc + .25 Sh )
When select this option, the difference between Sh and Sl, provided Sh > Sl, is added to the
term inside the parenthesis. That is:
SA(Liberal) = f[ 1.25 Sc + .25 Sh + ( Sh - Sl) ]
The liberal expression is only used when there is at least one sustained stress case in the load
set. If there is more than one sustained stress case in a single problem, then the largest of Sl,
considering all of the sustained cases, for any single element end is chosen to subtract from Sh.
Because the sustained stress varies from one pipe to another, the allowable expansion stress
also varies.
By default, CAESAR II uses the liberal stress allowable setting in the configuration file in its
computation of the expansion stress allowable. New models are created using this configuration
setting. If you do not want to use this default setting for calculating the expansion, clear this
check box.

258

CAESAR II User's Guide

Piping Input Reference

Uniform Load in G's
Specifies whether to use a magnifier of gravitational loading for the uniform load. Uniform load
can be defined either in terms of force per unit length or in terms of a magnifier of gravitational
loading. Uniform load in G's is used most often for static earthquake loadings.

Earthquake loads are occasional loadings and as such are not directly addressed by the
CAESAR II recommended load case logic. You must form your own combination cases at
the output processor level that represent the algebraic sum of the stresses due to sustained
and occasional loads. For more information, see Occasional Load Factor (on page 81).
When you select this option, the in Gs radio button is activated on the first Uniform Load
auxiliary dialog box on the Classic Piping Input dialog box. You can override this option by
selecting the in F/L option.

Ambient Temperature
Specifies the actual ambient temperature. The default ambient temperature for all elements in
the system is 70F/21C. If this does not accurately represent the installed, or zero expansion
strain state, then type the actual value in this box. The ambient temperature is used in
conjunction with the specified hot temperature and the interpolated expansion coefficient to
calculate the thermal expansion per inch of pipe length experienced by the element when going
from the ambient temperature to the hot temperature.
A default ambient temperature can be defined in the configuration file. For more information, see
New Job Ambient Temperature (on page 46). The software uses this configuration file value to
set the ambient temperature when you create a new model.

FRP Coef. of Thermal Expansion (x 1,000,000 )

Specifies the thermal expansion coefficient. The default thermal expansion coefficient for
fiberglass reinforced plastic pipe is 12.0E-6 in./in./deg.F. If you have a more suitable value for
the particular composite, type that value in this box. For example, if the improved value was:
8.5E-6 in./in./deg. F., then type 8.5 in this box. The exponent (E-6) is implied. This expansion
coefficient is used in conjunction with the temperatures on the Classic Piping Input dialog box
for each plastic pipe element to calculate the thermal expansion for the element.
This method does not provide for any variation in the thermal expansion coefficient as a function
of temperature. This could prove limiting should there be parts of the system at different
non-ambient temperatures. In this case, you can always calculate the thermal expansion at
temperature in inches per inch and input this value directly into the Temperature box on the
Classic Piping Input dialog box.
For new models, the default value is obtained from the configuration file.

CAESAR II User's Guide

259

Piping Input Reference

FRP Ratio of Shear Modulus/Emod Axial
Specifies the ratio of the shear modulus to the modulus of elasticity in the axial direction of the
fiberglass reinforced plastic pipe. For example, if the material modulus-of-elasticity (axial) is
3.2E6 psi, and the shear modulus is 8.0E5 psi, type 0.25 as the ratio of these two.
For new models, the default value is obtained from the configuration file.

FRP Laminate Type

Specifies the default laminate type as defined in the BS 7159 code for the fiberglass reinforced
plastic pipe. Valid laminate types are:
CSM and Woven Roving - Chopped strand mat (CSM) and woven roving (WR)
construction with internal and external surface tissue reinforced layer.
CSM and Multi-filament - Chopped strand mat and multi-filament roving construction with
internal and external surface tissue reinforced layer.
CSM - All chopped strand mat construction with internal and external surface tissue
reinforced layer.
The software uses this entry to calculate the flexibility and stress intensity factors of bends;
therefore, this default entry may be overridden using the Type field on the bend auxiliary dialog
boxes.

Z-Axis Vertical
Indicates that the Z axis is vertical. Traditionally CAESAR II has used a coordinate system
where the Y-axis coincides with the vertical axis. In one alternative coordinate system, the
Z-axis represents the vertical axis (with the X axis chosen arbitrarily, and the Y-axis being
defined according to the right hand rule. CAESAR II now gives you the ability to model using
either coordinate system. You can also switch between the systems in most cases.
You can specify that CAESAR II start with the Z axis vertical. For more information, see Z-Axis
Vertical (on page 60).
A new piping model determines its axis orientation based on the setting in the Configure/Setup
module. An existing piping model uses the same axis orientation under which it was last saved.
You can change the axis orientation from Y-Axis to Z-Axis vertical by clicking the check box on
the Environment-Special Execution Parameters dialog box.
Clicking this check box causes the model to immediately convert to match the new axis
orientation. That is, Y-values become Z-values or the reverse. There is no change in the model;
only the representation changes.
This allows any piping input file to be immediately translated from one coordinate system into
the other.
When including other piping files in a model, the axis orientation of the included files need not
match that of the piping model. Translation occurs immediately upon inclusion.
When including structural files in a piping model, the axis orientation of the include files need not
match that of the piping model. Translation occurs immediately upon inclusion.
The axis orientation on the Static Load Case Builder (such as wind and wave loads), the Static
Output Processor, The Dynamic Input Module, and the Dynamic Output Processor is dictated by
the orientation of the model input file.

260

CAESAR II User's Guide

Piping Input Reference

Bandwidth Optimizer Options
Orders the set of equations that represent the piping system for both static and dynamic
analyses. The optimizer may be run with a variety of different switch settings. The default
settings were chosen for their combination of ordering efficiency and speed. These settings
should suffice for the majority of piping systems analyzed. For systems having greater than 100
nodes, or that are highly interconnected, the following optimum parameters should be used.
Optimizer Method = Both
Next Node Selection = Decreasing
Final Ordering = Reversed
Collins Ordering = Band
Degree Determination = Connections
User Control = None
If the User Control is set to Allow User Re-looping, CAESAR II lets you interactively try as
many different combinations of switch settings as needed. When the most efficient ordering is
obtained, you can continue on with the analysis. This interactive prompting for optimization
parameters is done in the analysis level processing.

Include Piping Input Files

Includes other piping models in the current piping model. Piping models added may have a
node offset applied and can optionally be rotated about the Y-axis before being added.

Include Piping Files Dialog Box

File Name - Displays the file to include. Click Browse to browse for the file name. The file need
not reside in the current data directory.
Read Now - Specifies whether or not the file is read immediately. Select Y if the file is to be read
immediately and stored as part of the current input. The file read may be edited as part of the
current job. Select N, if the file is to be read for plotting and fully processed only during error
checking. The file read may not be edited as part of the current job.
RotY - Specifies the angle about the Y axis to rotate the model before including it in the current
job. The rotation applies regardless of the Read Now setting.
Restraints, uniform loads, and concentrated forces are not rotated. Additionally, the
rotation of the model can be accomplished from the List utility For more information, see Rotate
(on page 207).
Inc - Specifies the increment to be added to all of the nodes in the model before including it in
the current job. The node increment applies regardless of the Read Now setting.

CAESAR II User's Guide

261

Piping Input Reference

Including Structural Input Files

Includes existing structural model into the current job. The structural model must have been
built and successfully error checked in the structural steel preprocessor accessed from the
CAESAR II menu. For more information, see Structural Steel Modeler (on page 325).
After a structural model has been built, you can include it into any piping input. You can include
the names of up to 20 different structural models. After this is done, you can plot and analyze
the structural model with the piping model. The structural models need not reside in the current
folder.
Piping systems are usually tied to structural steel models by the use of restraints with
connecting nodes. Make absolutely sure there are no node number conflicts between structure
and pipe models. After you define a restraint with a connecting node between the pipe and
structure, CAESAR II knows where to put the structure in the resulting preprocessor plot. If no
connection between the pipe and the structure is given, the structure is plotted starting from the
origin of the piping system. In this case, the resulting plot may not meet your expectations.

Advanced PCF Import (APCF)

The Advanced PCF Import (APCF) option provides an interactive, customizable way of
importing Piping Component Files (PCFs) to the CAESAR II piping environment.
Provides more control and flexibility over element sequencing and node numbering
Provides the capability to build and verify the model in an incremental way
Provides the capability to selectively update the CAESAR II model
An interactive interface is built directly into the CAESAR II input environment that:
Does everything that the PCF batch process does (See PCF/Intergraph Smart 3D PCF doc
in External Interfaces section)
Builds the piping input model on a line-by-line basis if needed
Provides the ability to define and control node numbering
Uses the Block Operations modeling tools to ease modeling changes.
You can perform the APCF function to create a new model or add to any existing job model. The
CAESAR II input model constructed from the PCFs assumes the Units System of the current
job, plus automatically attach/intersect the piping generated from the PCF to the existing piping,
if appropriate.
The PCF file format is a standard drawing exchange format developed by Alias Ltd. A PCF is a
flat text file containing detailed information about the piping system components. The
information is extracted from a CAD system. Details on the format of the PCF and its capabilities
can be obtained from Alias.

Converting the PCF

1. Before you begin the conversion, determine:
Which files will be converted
How they should be combined
How they should be numbered on the first conversion process.
2. Click Environment > Advanced PCF Import (APCF) to begin the conversion of a PCF(s)
to a CAESAR II Piping Input file.

262

CAESAR II User's Guide

Piping Input Reference

The Advanced PCF Import (APCF) dialog box displays.

3. Click Choose Files.

4. Select the PCF(s) to convert.
A PCF has a file extension of .pcf.

CAESAR II User's Guide

263

Piping Input Reference

PCFs may be selected all at once or each one may be added to the conversion list just prior
to being converted. Only those files with the check box selected are processed.

Files can be arranged in the order you want to process them by dragging-and-dropping the
file names to the desired position in the conversion list.
In the example, the elements of the header, which includes files TPA-551-0012, 551-00513,
521-90100_BL, 521-90100, and 521-90102, are processed first.
Vents off of that header are processed next (in the example, 521-12101, 521-12113,
521-12112, 521-12111, 521-12138, 521-12137, 521-10103, 521-10104, 521-90461).
Finally, the separate detached section files (551-0012, 551-0041) are processed last.
5. Set the conversion options listed in the lower left-hand pane.
Condense Options
Miscellaneous Options
CAESAR II Element Properties
The options can be set identically for all conversion passes, or they can be changed for
each pass. The example uses Piping Materials based on Pipe Spec and also set a Diameter
Limit (exclude pipes below 3" nominal) as well as condense rigids, tees, and bends.

264

CAESAR II User's Guide

Piping Input Reference

In this example, clear the check boxes for all files except those comprising the header. This
converts the header files. To process them together, define a Start Node of 0 for files 2
through 5 ("0" signifies "carry on numbering with the next available number"). Start
numbering the system with node 1000 and continue with an increment of 10.
This means that all of the elements from all of the files are combined, sorted, ordered,
numbered, and so forth. For example, a header from the first five files is processed before
adding branches from the first file as though they came from a single large PCF. This is
assured by processing a group of files together during the same process, and defining the
Start Node for files after the first in the group as "0". Processing files individually or entering
a Start Node (or changing the Node Increment) for specific files in the group being
processed causes those files to be processed individually.
6. Begin the conversion by clicking the Begin Processing button.
This creates the first portion of the CAESAR II piping input model.
At this point, all CAESAR II functions (3D graphics pane, Classic Input Piping dialog box,
Elements dialog box) are available for examining the resultant piping input model.
Remember that you can use the Undo button.

7. In the example, you can select the vent lines to be processed separately, each with their
own numbering system.
8. In the example, check each of the next 9 file names, plus define the Start Node for each.

CAESAR II User's Guide

265

Piping Input Reference

This causes each individual vent line to be fully processed before proceeding to the next.
Alternatively these files could be processed individually simply by running them one at a
time.

The vents are processed as requested.

266

CAESAR II User's Guide

Piping Input Reference

Undo is available.

CAESAR II User's Guide

267

Piping Input Reference

9. Process the second detached section, with both files processed together, and the Start
Node set at node at 10000.

268

CAESAR II User's Guide

Piping Input Reference

After the conversion processing completes, the CAESAR II piping input model looks like this
in the example.

At this point, the entries for Delta Coordinates, Temperatures, Pressures, and so forth may
contain values calculated to several decimal places due to repetitive unit conversions and
other calculations during the conversion process. For example, see the DX = -5390.7523
mm and the Temp 1 = 250.0214C.
These entries can be automatically rounded to the nearest integer by closing the APCF
Import dialog box using the "X" in the right top corner.

We recommend that this round-off process not be done until all PCFs have been
imported. This is because connectivity is determined based upon sharing global
coordinates. If element delta coordinates get rounded off, then nodal global coordinates may
get changed enough that they fall outside of the connection tolerances.

CAESAR II User's Guide

269

Piping Input Reference

Warnings in Log.RTF file

During the conversion process, Status Messages display in the Message Area in the lower right
of the dialog box.
These messages are also written to a LOG file with the name XXXX.LOG.RTF, where XXXX
represents the name (less the extension) of the Combined CAESAR II file (in the case where
many PCFs are being combined into a single CAESAR II model) or the first CAESAR II file in
the list (where one or more PCFs are being combined into individualCAESAR II models).
1. Click Save Warnings to save the warnings to a different file.

Topics
PCF Interface Custom Attributes ................................................... 270
How to Use the Advanced PCF Import (APCF) ............................. 283

PCF Interface Custom Attributes

PCFs contain custom attributes in the form of component-attribute<n>. Intergraph Smart 3D can
generate PCFs with ISO_STRESS PCF configuration. This configuration assures that a number
of various data fields are passed in specific PCF data fields.
COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE1 = Design pressure
COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE2 = Maximum temperature
COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE3 = Material name
COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE4 = Wall thickness (reducing thickness in the case of reducing
components)
COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE5 = Insulation thickness
COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE6 = Insulation density
COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE7 = Corrosion allowance
COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE8 = Component weight
COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE9 = Fluid density
COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE10 = Hydro test pressure
The units associated with the values of these attributes are defined by including a descriptive
unit label after the value. For example, the pressure attribute, COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE1, can
be specified as COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE1 15.3 barg. If the unit label chosen (barg) is not
one of the labels recognized by CAESAR II as defined through Tools > Create/Review Units
on the CAESAR II Main menu, then you must include that label in the PCF_UNITS_MAP.TXT
file in the CAESAR II System folder.

The only PCF SUPPORT attribute that is not ignored is the SUPPORT-DIRECTION
attribute. It must have a value of UP, DOWN, EAST, WEST, NORTH, or SOUTH.
One note on the Material Number setting is that the selected material is applied to a piping
element as the default only if the PCF COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE3 for that element is not
specified or recognized.
You can achieve the best results by preparing customized mapping files before beginning the
conversion process.
You may use default mapping files if the values fit our model. There are a number of mapping
files that define various values. Locate these files in the CAESAR II System folder.

270

CAESAR II User's Guide

Piping Input Reference

PCF Unit Mapping
The PCF_UNITS_MAP.TXT file maps the PCF Units name to the conversion factor used to
convert it to the CAESAR II internal units (English).
This file defines three columns:
CAESAR II Unit

Displays the internal unit used by the software

PCF Unit

Displays the user-supplied unit label

Conversion from CAESAR II -> PCF

Displays the conversion factor used to convert the

user-supplied unit to a CAESAR II internal unit

Comments can be added at the end of each line separated from the last column value by
spaces and preceded by the "*" character.
All PCF component attributes can be specified inside the PCF with their associated units. Any
unit specified by the PCF component attributes which is not a standard internal CAESAR II unit
as defined by the Tools > Create/Review Units dialog box on the CAESAR II Main menu needs
to be mapped inside the PCF_UNITS_MAP.TXT file.
CAESAR II divides the user-supplied value by this constant to calculate the value for the
attribute that is displayed by the software according to the units specified in the configuration
options (except that temperature from C to F will also add the 32 ).

To Modify the PCF_UNITS_MAP.TXT File

Locate this file in the CAESAR II System folder.
This is an optional task. You can review the default file and determine if you need to
make changes to fit your model.
1. Open the PCF_UNITS_MAP.TXT file in any text editor, such as Notepad.
An example of the CAESAR II default file is shown below.

CAESAR II User's Guide

271

Piping Input Reference

2. Modify any of the units definitions or add another unit definition as needed.
3. Save, and close the file.

PCF Material Mapping

The PCF_MAT_MAP.TXT file maps PCF material names to a corresponding CAESAR II
material number. Note that the first line is currently reserved to the CAESAR II version number.
The match in this file must be an exact match. If no match is found, then the software searches
the CAESAR II material database to find the "best match" (where the "best match" tries to do an
intelligent match, adjusting for dashes, spaces, "GR", "SA" versus "A", and so forth) for the
material name.
PCF COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE3 is used by the software to set the material attribute for each
component. If the COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE3 value is not defined or recognized, the software
applies the default material as specified by the Material Number value in the dialog box.
Any material specified by the PCF COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE3 which is not a standard
CAESAR II material as defined in the Tools > Material Data Base dialog under the Material >
Edit menu must be mapped inside the PCF_MAT_MAP.TXT file.

To Modify the PCF_MAT_MAP.TXT File

This file is located in the CAESAR II System folder.
This is an optional task. You can review the default file and determine if you need to
make changes to fit your model.
1. Open the PCF_MAT_MAP.TXT file in any text viewer, such as Notepad.
The CAESAR II default file looks like this.

2. Modify any of the materials definitions.

3. Save and close the file.

272

CAESAR II User's Guide

Piping Input Reference

PCF Restraint Mapping
The PCF_RES_MAP.TXT file defines the CAESAR II restraint types corresponding to PCF
support/restraint names.
The PCF SUPPORT attribute is used by CAESAR II to apply supports at the specified
coordinates. Only the SUPPORT-DIRECTION identifier is interpreted by the software if no
match is found for a particular support NAME in the PCF_RES_MAP.TXT file. The
SUPPORT-DIRECTION identifier must have a value of UP, DOWN, EAST, WEST, NORTH, or
SOUTH.
In order to fine-tune the support configuration placed on the imported model by CAESAR II for a
given PCF SUPPORT component, the PCF support NAME identifier value needs to be mapped
in the PCF_RES_MAP.TXT file.
The example below shows a typical PCF SUPPORT component, highlighting the support NAME
value which should be used to define CAESAR II support mapping.

To Modify the PCF_RES_MAP.TXT File

Locate the file in the CAESAR II system folder.
This is an optional task. You can review the default file and determine if you need to
make changes to fit your model.
This file defines the CAESAR II function corresponding to PCF support/restraint names.
1. Open the PCF_RES_MAP.TXT file in any text editor, such as Notepad.
2. Modify any of the restraints definitions.
3. Save, and close the file.
In the example, the Support type VG100 corresponds functionally to two CAESAR II supports:
+Vertical support (weight support)
Guide, each with friction coefficients equal to 0.3

CAESAR II User's Guide

273

Piping Input Reference

This file supports a wide range of support functions, plus the key words MU= (for friction) and
GAP= (to define gaps in the restraint).

Syntax for each support type is:

<Support Name>
<N->
<Restraint Function>
<MU=>
<GAP=>
<Support Name> - CAESAR II considers a matching as any PCF support/restraint name that
contains this <Support Name> (not an exact match). Best results are achieved if the <Support
Names> are listed in order of longest names to shortest names. Otherwise VG1" might register
as a match before VG100 is processed.
<N> - Followed by N lines of: This means how many CAESAR II restraints need to get placed
on the corresponding Restraint auxiliary screen. N should be limited to 4 or less.
<Restraint Function> - This is defined in terms of CAESAR II function (GUI, LIM, VHGR, and
so forth.), Global Axes (VERT, NS, EW, and so forth), or Local Axes (A, B, C, and so forth):
ANC, GUI, LIM, VHGR, CHGR These create a CAESAR II Anchor, Guide, Axial Restraint,
Variable Hanger, or Constant Hanger, respectively. The last two create to-be-designed
hangers, which may end up as either variable or constant hangers.
VERT, EW, NS These create translational restraints corresponding to the compass points
of the global axes (Y, X, Z respectively for the Y-up setting, and Z, X, Y respectively for the
Z-up setting). See the figure below. One-way restraints may be created by prefixing with "+"
or "-".

274

A, B, C These create translational restraints corresponding to the local axes of the

support/pipe installation. The A corresponds to the centerline of the pipe, B corresponds to

CAESAR II User's Guide

Piping Input Reference

the "direction" attributed to the support, and C corresponds to the cross-product of the A and
B axes. As with the global restraints, one-way restraints may be created by prefixing with +
or -. See the figure below.

<MU=> Optional keyword followed by a value for adding a friction coefficient to the restraint (not
valid with ANC, VHGR, CHGR).
<GAP=> Optional keyword followed by a value and set of units for adding a gap to the restraint
(not valid with ANC, VHGR, CHGR).
The software also processes equipment nozzles designated by the
END-CONNECTION-EQUIPMENT keyword as imposed thermal displacements in all degrees of
freedom, all with values of 0.0. This creates an initial behavior of an anchor, but allows you to
easily impose actual thermal displacements when known.

Examples
The examples below illustrate typical restraint configurations, along with suggested mapping
entries.
Variable Spring Hanger

CAESAR II User's Guide

275

Piping Input Reference

These represent variable spring hangers, and are mapped onto a single CAESAR II support (=
VHGR). This is interpreted as a program-designed spring hanger in CAESAR II.

Constant Effort Spring Hanger

This represents a constant effort spring hanger, and thus is mapped onto a single CAESAR II
support (= CHGR). This is treated as a program-designed spring hanger in CAESAR II.
Note that it is identical to the VHGR shown in the figure above.

276

CAESAR II User's Guide

Piping Input Reference

These hanger rod assemblies only resist downward (weight) loads, and allow upward
movement. In CAESAR II, they are typically modeled as +Y (or +Z, depending on how the
vertical axis is set).

These sliding supports only resist downward (weight) loads, and allow upward movement. They
are represented as a single +VERT support. However, since they slide against a base, most
stress analysts prefer to add a friction coefficient (MU=x.xx).

YRIGID 1
VERT MU=0.3
or
YRIGID 1
B
MU=0.3
These restraints resist load/movement in both directions (so the "+" of the previous two supports
is eliminated). If the restraint is always installed vertically, then use the first definition (VERT). If
the restraint is installed in any direction (for example, vertically or horizontally), use the second
definition B, indicating that it acts along the installed support direction. This assumes that the

CAESAR II User's Guide

277

Piping Input Reference

installed direction of the restraint is always defined as the direction from the main steel towards
the pipe. Since sliding is involved, a friction coefficient is included as well.

UGUIDE
1
GUI
MU=0.3
or
UGUIDE
1
C
MU=0.3
If this restraint is always installed vertically on horizontal lines (as shown in the figure above),
then the support function can always be modeled as a Guide (with sliding friction). If the restraint
may be installed in any direction at all (with restraint direction corresponding to the direction of
the attachment point toward the pipe), then use the second definition (C) as it represents the
direction lateral to the pipe and the restraint.

TEESUPPORT 2
+VERT
MU=0.3
GUI
MU=0.3
This restraint maps to two functions:
+VERTical
GUIde

278

CAESAR II User's Guide

Piping Input Reference

Since sliding is involved in both functions, friction coefficients are provided for both.

VERTLATERAL
2
VERT
MU=0.3
GUI
MU=0.3
or
VERTLATERAL
2
B
MU=0.3
C
MU=0.3
This restraint maps to two functions:
up/down restraint
side-to-side restraint
If it is always installed vertically, then it is defined as a VERTical and a GUIde. If it is possible
that the restraint may be rotated about the pipe to be installed in any direction, then use the
second definition, which represents restraint along the direction of the support as well as lateral
to the support and pipe.

VERTAXIAL
+VERT
LIM
or
VERTAXIAL
+VERT
A

CAESAR II User's Guide

2
MU=0.3
MU=0.3
2
MU=0.3
MU=0.3

279

Piping Input Reference

This restraint maps to two functions:
+VERT support
An axial restraint. The axial restraint can be defined equally as LIM or A (as A corresponds
to restraint along the direction of the pipe centerline).

SWAYSTRUT
1
B
These represent sway struts, which may be installed in any direction, and provide restraint along
the line of action of the sway strut. Assuming that the restraint direction corresponds to the
direction of the sway strut, then the best way to define these restraints is B (restraint along the
support direction).

ANCHOR
ANC

280

CAESAR II User's Guide

Piping Input Reference

These restraints all restrict movement of the pipe in all six degrees-of-freedom, so they can be
defined as Anchors ("ANC").

PENETRATION
+C
-C
-VERT
+VERT

4
GAP=aMM
GAP=bMM
GAP=cMM
GAP=dMM

In the example above, the pipe (and the local A-axis) is running into the page. With B up, +C is
to the right.
Some of these can get quite complex, especially if restraints have different gaps in different
directions. It may require trial and error to determine exactly how the +/- restraint directions
correspond to the support direction passed in the PCF. In some cases, you may want to model
the restraint behavior in CAESAR II rather than in the mapping file.
PCF Stress Intensification Factor Mapping
The PCF_SIF_MAP.TXT file defines the CAESAR II SIF data to be applied at the intersection of
tees and olets. The file also provides support for some SIF keywords.
Stress Intensification Factors (SIF) are not assigned a separate PCF
COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE or defined in any other way inside PCFs. In order to tune Stress
Intensification Factor settings of imported PCF components, CAESAR II provides the
PCF_SIF_MAP.TXT mapping file.
The file defines five columns:
SKEYS

PCF components use SKEYS to indicate how their subtype is

used within the general component group.

CAESAR II SIF TYPE

Should be set to the SIF type number used by CAESAR II as

shown in the CAESAR II SIF TYPE figure below.

PAD=X.X UNITS

(optional) Should be set to the SIF pad thickness, including the

applicable unit (for example, PAD=10 MM)

CAESAR II User's Guide

281

Piping Input Reference

Ii=X.XX

(optional) Should be set to the in-plane SIF of the component.

This is a multiplier, and therefore unit-less (for example, Ii=1.23)

Io=X.XX

(optional) Should be set to the out-plane SIF of the component.

This is a multiplier, and therefore unit-less (for example, Io=2.34)

Applying the above example values to set the TERF SKEY to the associated reinforced type
requires the following mapping entry to be specified inside the PCF_RES_MAP.TXT file:
TERF 1 PAD=10 MM Ii=1.23 Io=2.34
Each PCF component defines an SKEY. For an example, see the SUPPORT component
identifier listed in the figure in PCF Restaint Mapping (see "PCF Restraint Mapping" on page
273) (SKEY 01HG). In this case, these are typically four-character words indicating tee type
(CROSS, OLET) and end type. The PCF menu command matches the SKEYS to the entries in
this mapping file. If an SKEY is not found in this file, you should add it.

To Modify the PCF_SIF_MAP.TXT File

Locate this file in the CAESAR II system folder.
This step is strongly recommended in order to take advantage of the capabilities of the
PCF menu command.

282

CAESAR II User's Guide

Piping Input Reference

1. Open the PCF_SIF_MAP.TXT file in any text editor, such as Notepad.

2. Modify any of the SIF definitions.

3. Save, and close the file.

CAESAR II User's Guide

283

Piping Input Reference

How to Use the Advanced PCF Import (APCF)
1. Click Environment > Advanced PCF Import (APCF) from the Piping Input menu.
The Advanced PCF Import (APCF) dialog box displays.

2. Click the Choose Files button.

A PCF must have a file extension of .pcf.
You can add one or multiple files to be converted.
Remove PCF(s) from the File Name list by pressing Delete on the keyboard.
The selected file(s) displays in the File Name portion of the dialog box.
3. Enter the Start Node and Increment value for each of the file names.
4. Change any of the Conversion Options in the lower left-hand pane as needed.
Condense Rigids (on page 286)
Condense Tees (on page 1027)
Condense Elbows (on page 286)
Use Pipe Materials Only (on page 286)
Combine PCF Files (on page 287)

284

CAESAR II User's Guide

Piping Input Reference

Model Rotation (on page 287)
Diameter Limit (on page 287)
Material Number (on page 287)
Pipe Schedule/Wall Thickness (on page 287)
5. Click the Begin Processing button to initiate the conversion process.
During the Conversion Process, Status Messages display in the Message Area in the lower
right of the PCF Interface dialog box.
These messages are also written to a LOG file with the name XXXX.LOG.RTF, where XXXX
represents the name (less the extension) of the Combined CAESAR II file. The log file is
placed in the selected CAESAR II output file folder.
6. View your new CAESAR II input model.
For example, this CAESAR II model was created from the sample file 1001-P.PCF:

Elements are ordered and nodes are numbered in a logical manner.

The following attributes transfer correctly from the PCF_UNITS_ MAP_TXT file.
Materials
Diameter and Wall Thickness
Corrosion Allowance and Fluid Density
Operating Conditions (Temperature and Pressures) also are translated.
The following attributes transfer correctly from the PCF_RES_MAP.TXT file.
Restraints

CAESAR II User's Guide

285

Piping Input Reference

The following attributes transfer correctly from the PCF_SIF_MAP.TXT file.

Tees convert with the correct SIFs in this case a Welding Tee and a Weldolet.
Besides supports/restraints, boundary conditions such as equipment connections transfer
(in this example, at all three nozzle connections are set). The user can easily change the
thermal displacements.
Weights of in-line components, insulation thickness and density, all material properties, and
Allowable Stress information transfer correctly.
Line numbers are assigned according to the name of the PCF file.
In this example, the output displays the applicable CAESAR II warnings, which are informational
only.
Phantom components (PCF items marked as "CONTINUATION" or "STATUS DOTTED"
or "MATERIAL LIST EXCLUDE") are ignored during the conversion process.
Tee components are modeled using the thickness of the matching pipe.
Node Numbering preferences (start node and increment) are based on the Node
Numbering Increment set in the active CAESAR II Configuration file.
Start Node
Indicates the starting node number in the resulting CAESAR II model. By default, the entire
model is renumbered using this value as the starting point. To disable renumbering, you must
set this option and Increment (on page 286) to zero.
Increment
Defines the value used as a node number increment. This value is used during the renumbering
of the model. To disable renumbering, you must set this option and Start Node (on page 286) to
zero.
Condense Rigids
Instructs the software to combine rigids that connect to each other into a single element.
This indicates whether these items should be condensed/merged into adjacent elements. For
example, a valve with adjacent gaskets and flanges would be combined into a single rigid
element.
If activated, then elements are condensed/merged unless there is a valid reason not to (change
of cross section, change of operating conditions, restraint at the location, and so forth).
The default value is TRUE.
Condense Elbows
Controls whether the software treats elbows as two designated elements. When set to TRUE,
this directive instructs the software NOT to treat elbows as two designated elements. Rather, it
is condensed into its adjacent elements for each direction in which the elbow travels.
The default value is TRUE.
Use Pipe Materials Only
Instructs the software to apply pipe materials only as defined by the PCF
COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE3 identifiers.
Activating this option replaces the material of various components (elbows, valves, flanges,
reducers, tees, and so forth) with the appropriate piping material, where possible, leading to a
much more homogenous CAESAR II model. Matching components to their corresponding piping
material is done by assembling a matrix of Pipe Spec/diameter combinations, based the
available data transmitted in the PCF. Where an exact match is available, the material

286

CAESAR II User's Guide

Piping Input Reference

substitution is made. Where piping materials are available for the Pipe Spec but not the
diameter, a match is made to the closest diameter. Where no piping material is available for the
Pipe Spec, the component material is retained. For example, A106 Grade B would be applied
but A234 Grade WPB would be ignored.
If you choose to condense Rigids, Tees, or Elbows, set Use Pipe Materials Only to
TRUE.
Combine PCF Files
Converts and combines PCFs in the dialog box into a single CAESAR II model. You are
prompted for the name of the combined CAESAR II file.
When you merge multiple PCFs into a single CAESAR II model using Combine PCF
Files, line numbers are assigned based on the originating PCF name.
Model Rotation
The rotation of the +X-axis of the CAESAR II model should be rotated about the vertical axis
away from the PCF's East compass point. The default setting is zero, which imposes no rotation.
Select +90 to rotate the model a positive 90-degrees. Select -90 to rotate the model a negative
90-degrees.
Z can also be vertical based on special execution setting.
Alternatively, you can rotate the model after importing it to CAESAR II. Use the Rotate
command on the Block Operations toolbar.

Diameter Limit
Use this to exclude the processing of small pipes, such as vents and drains, by specifying the
size (nominal diameter) below which pipes will be ignored. Enter a diameter limit of -1.000 to
include all pipe sizes that you want to import into CAESAR II.
Material Number
Select the CAESAR II material to be assigned to components which do not have the material
attribute explicitly set otherwise.
The default is low carbon steel (material number 1).
Pipe Schedule/Wall Thickness
Select the default schedule of the pipe to be used in case the wall thickness of the pipe cannot
be determined from the PCF.

Show Informational Messages

Displays informational messages upon the conversion of nominal to actual diameters, schedule
to wall thickness, and specific gravity to density. Click Environment > Show Informational
Messages.
Clear the check box to suppress these messages.

CAESAR II User's Guide

287

Piping Input Reference

Reset View on Refresh

Controls the way graphics behave when you add or modify elements. When this option is
turned on, CAESAR II resets the plot to the default view each time you refresh.

CAESAR II Configuration
Opens the configuration file for review and editing. For more information, see Configuration and
Environment (on page 41).

Options Menu
Performs actions associated with the display of the model.

Range
Displays only the elements that contain nodes within a range. This is helpful when you need
to locate specific nodes or a group of related elements in a large model. This command displays
the Range dialog box. Alternatively, press U.

Using the Range command affects the display and operation of other 3D graphics
highlighting options. For example, if part of the model is not visible because of the use of the
Range command, then the Diameters command only highlights the elements that are
visible. Also, if using the Range command hides any nodes containing the predefined
displacements, the Displacements legend grid still displays, but the model may not highlight
correctly.
Find may not work properly for the part of the model that is hidden by the range. The
corresponding message displays in the status bar.

Range Dialog Box

Restraints
Turns the display of restraints on or off.

Anchors
Turns the display of anchors on or off.

288

CAESAR II User's Guide

Piping Input Reference

Displacements
Turns the display of displacements on or off.

Hangers
Turns the display of hangers on or off.

Nozzle Flexibility
Turns the display of nozzle flexibility on or off.

Flange Check
Turns flange checking on or off.

Nozzle Check
Turns nozzle checking on or off.

Forces
Updates the model to show each force in a different color. Use this option to see the force
variations throughout the system or to verify that changes have been made. A color key displays
the force defined in the model. You can change the assigned colors to meet your needs.
The force parameters display in a table. Use the scroll bars to view all of the data. Click Next >>
and Previous << to move through the displacement or force vectors.

Uniform Loads
Updates the model to show each uniform load in a different color. Use this option to see the
uniform load variations throughout the system or to verify that changes have been made. A color
key displays the uniform loads defined in the model. You can change the assigned colors to
meet your needs.
The uniform load parameters display in a table. Use the scroll bars to view all of the data. Click
Next >> and Previous << to move through the displacement or force vectors.
Uniform Loads has three vectors defined. The Node column represents the start node number
where the uniform loads vector was first defined. Because the data propagates throughout the
model until changed or disabled, the model is colored accordingly.

CAESAR II User's Guide

289

Piping Input Reference

Wind/Wave
Updates the model to show each wind or wave load in a different color. Use this option to
see the variations throughout the system or to verify that changes have been made. A color key
displays the wind or wave loads defined in the model.
The wind and wave load parameters display in a table. Use the scroll bars to view all of the data.
Click Next >> and Previous << to move through the loads.
All the elements with wind defined display in red. All the elements with wave data defined
display in green. The legend grid shows the relevant data.

Compass
Turns the display of the orientation tee on or off.

Node Numbers
Turns the display of node numbers on or off. Alternatively, press N. You can display node
numbers for a specific element such as only restraints or only anchors.

Length
Turns the display of element lengths on or off. Alternatively, press L.

Tees
Turns the display of tees on or off.

Expansion Joints
Turns the display of expansion joints on or off.

Diameters
Updates the model to show each diameter in a different color. Use this option to see the
diameter variations throughout the system or to verify that diameter changes have been made.
Alternatively, press D. A color key displays the diameters defined in the model. You can change
the assigned colors to meet your needs.

290

CAESAR II User's Guide

Piping Input Reference

Wall Thickness
Updates the model to show each wall thickness in a different color. Use this option to see the
wall thickness variations throughout the system or to verify that changes have been made.
Alternatively, press W. A color key displays the thicknesses defined in the model. You can
change the assigned colors to meet your needs.

Corrosion
Updates the model to show each corrosion allowance in a different color. Use this option to
see the corrosion variations throughout the system or to verify that changes have been made. A
color key displays the corrosion allowances defined in the model. You can change the assigned
colors to meet your needs.

Piping Codes
Updates the model to show each piping code in a different color. Use this option to see the
piping code variations throughout the system or to verify that changes have been made.

Material
Updates the model to show each material in a different color. Use this option to see the
material variations throughout the system or to verify that changes have been made.
Alternatively, press M. A color key displays the materials defined in the model. You can change
the assigned colors to meet your needs.

Pipe Density
Updates the model to show each pipe density in a different color. Use this option to see the
pipe density variations throughout the system or to verify that changes have been made. A color
key displays the pipe densities defined in the model. You can change the assigned colors to
meet your needs.

Fluid Density
Updates the model to show each fluid density in a different color. Use this option to see the
fluid density variations throughout the system or to verify that changes have been made. A color
key displays the fluid densities defined in the model. You can change the assigned colors to
meet your needs.

CAESAR II User's Guide

291

Piping Input Reference

Refractory Thickness
Updates the model to show each refractory thickness in a different color. Use this option to see
the refractory thickness variations throughout the system or to verify that changes have been
made. A color key displays the thicknesses defined in the model. You can change the assigned
colors to meet your needs.

Refractory Density
Updates the model to show each refractory density in a different color. Use this option to see the
refractory density variations throughout the system or to verify that changes have been made. A
color key displays the refractory densities defined in the model. You can change the assigned
colors to meet your needs.

Insulation Thickness
Updates the model to show each insulation thickness in a different color. Use this option to
see the insulation thickness variations throughout the system or to verify that changes have
been made. Alternatively, press I. A color key displays the thicknesses defined in the model.
You can change the assigned colors to meet your needs.

Insulation Density
Updates the model to show each insulation density in a different color. Use this option to see
the insulation density variations throughout the system or to verify that changes have been
made. A color key displays the insulation densities defined in the model. You can change the
assigned colors to meet your needs.

Cladding Thickness
Updates the model to show each cladding thickness in a different color. Use this option to see
the cladding thickness variations throughout the system or to verify that changes have been
made. A color key displays the thicknesses defined in the model. You can change the assigned
colors to meet your needs.

Cladding Density
Updates the model to show each cladding density in a different color. Use this option to see the
cladding density variations throughout the system or to verify that changes have been made. A
color key displays the cladding densities defined in the model. You can change the assigned
colors to meet your needs.

292

CAESAR II User's Guide

Piping Input Reference

Insul/Cladding Unit Wt.

Updates the model to show each insulation or cladding unit weight in a different color. Use this
option to see the variations throughout the system or to verify that changes have been made. A
color key displays the insulation or cladding unit weights defined in the model. You can change
the assigned colors to meet your needs.

Temperatures
Displays the temperature parameters that you have defined.

Pressures
Displays the pressure parameters that you have defined.

View Menu
Performs actions associated with viewing the model.

Toolbars
Changes the toolbars. You determine which buttons display and their locations. Click View >
Toolbars, or right-click the toolbar, and then select Customize.
You can also customize toolbars by pressing Shift and dragging buttons to new positions.
Click Reset on the Customize dialog box to undo changes.

Customize Dialog box

Controls options for customizing the CAESAR II interface.

Toolbars Tab (Customize Dialog Box)

Controls options for customizing toolbars.
Toolbars - Displays the toolbars. Select the checkbox to display the toolbar. Clear the checkbox
to hide the toolbar.
New - Displays the New Toolbar dialog box.
Rename - Displays the Rename Toolbar dialog box.
Delete - Deletes the selected toolbar. You can only delete custom toolbars.
Reset - Returns the toolbars to their original configuration.

New Toolbar Dialog Box

Controls options for creating new toolbars.
Toolbar name - Displays the name of the toolbar.

Rename Toolbar Dialog Box

Controls options for renaming toolbars.
Toolbar name - Displays the name of the toolbar.

CAESAR II User's Guide

293

Piping Input Reference

Commands Tab (Customize Dialog Box)
Controls options for adding commands to toolbars.
Categories - Controls the category of commands available to drag.
Commands - Lists the commands in the selected category. Select a command and drag it to a
toolbar.

Options Tab (Customize Dialog Box)

Controls options for toolbars.
Always show full menus - Specifies whether menus show all commands, or only the most
commonly used commands.
Show full menus after a short delay - Indicates whether or not menus expand to show all
commands. This option is only available if Always show full menus is cleared.
Reset menu and toolbar usage data - Returns the Always show full menus and Show full
menus after a short delay check boxes to their default settings.
Large icons - Displays large icons on the toolbars and menus.
Show ScreenTips on toolbars - Displays tooltips when you hover the cursor above toolbar
buttons.
Show shortcut keys in ScreenTips - Displays the keyboard shortcut keys as tooltips when you
hover the cursor above toolbar buttons. This option is only available if Show ScreenTips on
toolbars is selected.
Menu animations - Specifies how menu animations are applied.

Keyboard Tab (Customize Dialog Box)

Controls options for assigning keyboard shortcuts to commands.
Category - Specifies the category of commands to modify.
Commands - Lists the commands in the category.
Key assignments - Lists the keyboard shortcuts assigned to the selected command.
Press new shortcut key - Displays the shortcut key.
Description - Displays a description of the selected command.
Assign - Adds the shortcut key from the Press new shortcut key field to the Key assignments
list for the command.
Remove - Deletes the selected entry from the Key assignments list.
Reset All - Returns all keyboard shortcuts to their default settings.

Menus Tab (Customize Dialog Box)

Controls options for customizing menus.
Show Menu - Specifies the active menu.
Reset - Returns the selected menu to the default settings.
Select context menu - Specifies the active context menu.
Reset - Returns the selected context menu to the default settings.

294

CAESAR II User's Guide

Piping Input Reference

Reset
Resets the view to the default settings.

Toggle Graphics Update

Turns graphics updating on or off.

Front View
Displays the model from the front. Alternatively, press Z.

Back View
Displays the model from the back. Alternatively, press Shift + Z.

Top View
Displays the model from the top. Alternatively, press Y.

Bottom View
Displays the model from the bottom. Alternatively, press Shift + Y.

Left-side View
Displays the model from the left side. Alternatively, press X.

Right-side View
Displays the model from the right side. Alternatively, press Shift + R.

Southeast ISO View

Displays the model isometrically from the southeast. Alternatively, press F10.

Southwest ISO View

Displays the model isometrically from the southwest.

CAESAR II User's Guide

295

Piping Input Reference

Northeast ISO View

Displays the model isometrically from the northeast.

Northwest ISO View

Displays the model isometrically from the northwest.

4 View
Displays the model in four windows.
This command automatically places the horizontal and vertical dividers, or splitter bars, and
changes the cursor to a four-way arrow. You can change the position of the splitter bars by
moving the mouse. Click to fix the position.
Drag the splitter bars to change the size of the windows. Drag the splitter bars out of the view to
remove those views. You can drag the splitter located at the top or left scroll bar to add views.
You can manipulate the image in any of these panes individually.

Review Error Report

Displays the Errors and Warnings dialog box. This option is only available if you have run the
File > Error Check command. For more information, see Error Check (on page 200).

Review Static Results

Displays the results of the static load analysis. This option is only available if you have run
the Edit > Edit Static Load Cases command. For more information, see Edit Static Load
Cases.

Tools Menu
Performs actions associated with toolbars, mini-windows, and importing and exporting
displacements.

Reset Toolbar Layout

Sets toolbars to the default layout.

296

CAESAR II User's Guide

Piping Input Reference

Mini-windows
Displays a list of mini-windows that you can display. Mini-windows provide a quick way to
provide specific types of data.
Node Numbers - Displays the Edit Node Numbers dialog box.
Edit Deltas - Displays the Edit Deltas dialog box.
Pipe Sizes - Displays the Edit Pipe Sizes dialog box.
Temps & Pressures - Displays the Edit Operating Conditions dialog box.
Materials - Displays the Edit Materials dialog box.
Elastic Properties - Displays the Edit Elastic Properties dialog box.
Densities - Displays the Edit Densities dialog box.
Auxiliary Data - Displays the Auxiliary Data dialog box.
Classic Input - Displays the Classic Piping Input dialog box.

Import/Export Displacements from File

Imports or exports nodal displacements from a file.
CAESAR II Versions 5.10 and later enables you to import and export displacements to and from
a text file. This feature is very useful in situations where you need to define several
displacements in a CAESAR II model. You can import the displacements into a CAESAR II
model with a few mouse clicks instead of manually typing all the displacements in the Classic
Piping Input. A displacements file in the specified format must exist.
This feature works only on From and To nodes using a fixed file (.disp) format for
versions 5.10 and 5.20.
In CAESAR II Version 2013 R1 (6.10), this feature works on the From and To nodes, CNodes,
and Bend middle nodes in either the fixed file format (.disp), or the comma separated value
(.csv) format. You can easily generate and maintain a displacement file in .csv format using
Microsoft Excel.

Import/Export Displacements Dialog Box

Controls parameters for importing and exporting nodal displacements.
Export Displacements To a File - Specifies the file name for the export. Type the full path to
the file, or use the browse button to browse to the file.
Export - Exports the nodal displacements to the specified file.
Import Displacements From a File - Specifies the file name for the import. Type the full path to
the file, or use the browse button to browse to the file.
Import - Imports the specified nodal displacement file.

CAESAR II User's Guide

297

Piping Input Reference

Displacement File Formats
A displacement file is a flat text file in (versions 5.10 and 5.20), which can be created and edited
by any text editor such as Notepad.
In CAESAR II Version 2013 R1 (6.10) a displacement file can be in either fixed format .disp or
comma separated value format .csv.
For both formats, use * to indicate a comment line in the displacement file. You can type
anything on the line following the *.
Displacement files can have as many comment lines as necessary.
The comment line is not counted in line numbering in the file format descriptions.

Fixed Format
A fixed format displacement file has the .disp extension and this format:
1. The first line has only one the conversion factor value, which is used to divide the
translational displacements (DX, DY, and DZ) to convert them to the internal unit of inches.
2. The second line is either Y axis up or Z axis up to indicate the CAESAR II Coordinate
System that the following displacement data corresponds to.
3. All the remaining lines are displacement data lines:
a. Each line must have 58 values: Node X, Y, Z and 54 displacements for the nodes (6
degrees of freedom times 9 vectors is 54).
b. The first value is a node number.
c. The following three values, the three coordinates of a node, are ignored.
d. The final 54 values are displacements of the node, in the order: DX1, DY1, DZ1, RX1,
RY1, RZ1... DX9, DY9, DZ9, RX9, RY9, RZ9.
e. The first character space is reserved for the comment "*", each of the 58 values must be
12 characters long so the total length of a displacement data line should be 697
(1+58x12) characters long.
f. The position of each of the 54 displacement values is used to determine its location in a
CAESAR II model. For example, values at position 5, 8, 55 and 58 correspond to DX1,
and RX1, DZ9, and RZ9 of the node in the model.
g. A value must occupy a 12 character field. When a value has fewer than 12 characters,
you must pad either to the left or right of the blanks to make it 12 characters in length. If
there is no displacement value, a 12 character blank field must be reserved for it.
When creating the blank space use the Space Bar. Do not use the Tab key.

298

CAESAR II User's Guide

Piping Input Reference

Comma Separated Value Format
A comma separated value format displacement file has the .csv extension and follows this
format:
1. The first line has only the conversion factor value, which is used to divide the translational
displacements (DX, DY, and DZ) to convert them to the internal unit of inches.
2. The second line is either Y axis up or Z axis up to indicate the CAESAR II Coordinate
System that the following displacement data corresponds to.
3. All the remaining lines are displacement data lines:
a. Each line could have 58 values: Nodes X, Y, Z and the 54 displacements for the node (6
degrees-of-freedom times 9 vectors is 54).
b. The first value is a node number, which is required.
c. The following three values, the three coordinates of the node, are ignored.
d. The final 54 values are displacements of the node, in the order: DX1, DY1, DZ1, RX1,
RY1, RZ1... DX9, DY9, DZ9, RX9, RY9, RZ9. They are optional. You can specify all 54
values, or not a single value, or any number of values in between.
e. Values are separated by commas. The length of a displacement data line is not fixed.
f. Because each value is followed by a comma, a comma counter is used to determine the
placement of the value in a CAESAR II model. For example, values at positions 5, 8, 55
and 58 correspond to DX1, and RX1, DZ9, and RZ9 of the node in the model,
respectively.
g. A value can be any number of characters in length. When there is no displacement
value, you can use a zero length or blank field. For example, if a comma is followed by a
comma, or if a comma is followed by blank spaces and then a comma, it means that its
corresponding location in a CAESAR II model has no displacement value.
Generally, the csv format is recommended for a displacement file because it is relatively easy to
generate and maintain in Microsoft Excel. The fixed format of a displacement file is more
difficult to maintain.
A displacement file from version 5.10 or 5.20 cannot be used directly in CAESAR II
Version 2013 R1 (6.10) because the formats are different.

Warning Messages
There are three kinds of warning messages:
1. Node xxx is not in the model - Indicates that a node in the displacement file does not exist in
the CAESAR II model.
2. Node xxx could not find an empty location - Indicates that a node in the displacement file
exists in the CAESAR II model but that the software thinks that all displacement slots in the
model have already been occupied by other nodes. In this case, it is still possible for you to
input displacements for the node through the CAESAR II Classic Piping Input dialog box.
3. Node xxx does not have displacements - Indicates that a node in the displacement file does
not have a displacement value.
where xxx denotes a node number such as 100.
Generally, when a warning message is issued it indicates that an error exists either in the
displacement file or in the corresponding CAESAR II model. Carefully examine the offending
node in the displacement file or in the corresponding model and correct the error.

CAESAR II User's Guide

299

Piping Input Reference

Summary Report
The Import and Export Summary reports are generated in the import and export operations.
The reports provide information about the nodes in a displacement file just imported into a
CAESAR II Import model:
1. The number of displacement nodes existing in the model before import.
2. The number of displacement nodes existing in the model after import.
3. The number of displacement nodes that have been read in.
4. The number of displacement nodes that are not in the model.
5. The number of displacement nodes that cannot find empty locations in the model.
6. The number of displacement nodes that do not have displacements.
7. The number of displacement nodes that have stored displacements in the model.
8. The number of displacement nodes that are replacing values in the model.
9. The number of displacement nodes that are new in the model.
Similar in operation to the warning messages, the summary report can help you identify potential
problems in a displacement file. However, you should remember the following points:
1. Because every displacement data line in a displacement file has a node number, the total
number of nodes processed is equal to the total number of displacement data lines in the
file.
2. Each displacement data line should have a unique node number. However, if the same
node number appears in many data lines, it would be counted many times. In this case, the
displacement values in the last data line are used in the model, overwriting the previous
values.
3. If no node number appears in a displacement data line, CAESAR II indicates the
corresponding data line number and stops the import process.
4. If there is a node in a displacement file that is not in the model, or cannot find a slot in the
model, or does not have a displacement, the displacement file or the model should be
checked carefully to understand the reasons behind it.
5. If a displacement node exists both in the model and the displacement file, the displacement
values from the file are used to overwrite the ones in the model, and this node is counted as
a replacement node.
6. The number of displacement nodes existing in the model after import should be equal to the
number of displacement nodes existing in the model before import, plus the number of new
displacement nodes.
7. The number of displacement nodes that have stored displacements in the model should be
equal to the number of replacement nodes, plus the number of new displacement nodes.

300

CAESAR II User's Guide

Piping Input Reference

Exporting Displacements to a File
1. Click Tools > Import/Export Displacements from File.
The Import/Export Displacements dialog box displays.
2. Type the path and name of a displacement file in the Export Displacements To a File box,
or click ... to browse to the file.
3. Click Export to send the nodal displacements to the selected file.
4. Click Done to exit the Import/Export Displacements dialog.
If there are no displacements in a CAESAR II job, an export operation creates a
displacement template file in which all nodes are listed according to the element list.

Importing Displacements from a File

1. Click Tools > Import/Export Displacements from File.
The Import/Export Displacements dialog box displays.
2. Type the path and name of the displacement file in the Import Displacements From a File
box, or click ... to browse to the file.
The Open dialog box displays.

Two file formats can be used to create a displacement file:

Fixed format with a .disp file extension.
Commas Separated Value format with a .csv file extension.
By default, displacement files display in comma separated values format(.csv).

CAESAR II User's Guide

301

Piping Input Reference

You can also choose displacement files with the fixed format (.disp) by clicking
Displacement Import File (*.dsp) from the Files of type list.

3. Select the displacement file.

4. Click Open.
5. Click Import.

302

CAESAR II User's Guide

Piping Input Reference

During the import process, if an erroneous condition is detected for a displacement node a
warning message displays. A summary report is generated after all displacement data is
processed.

For more details about warning messages and the summary report, see Imposed Loads.
6. After reviewing warning messages and a summary report, click Done.
The first two figures show displacement files Notepad for disp and csv formats. The third
and fourth figures show displacement files in Microsoft Excel.

CAESAR II User's Guide

303

Piping Input Reference

For a detailed description of both file formats, see Displacement File Formats (on page 298).

Notepad Example (*.disp) format

Notepad Example (*.csv) format

Excel Example (*.csv) format

If a CAESAR II job has no displacements the displacement export operation creates a
displacement template file as shown below.

304

CAESAR II User's Guide

Piping Input Reference

Excel Example (*.csv) format Displacement File Template

3D Modeler
When you start CAESAR II and start the piping input processor, the software automatically
displays a graphic representation of the model to the right of the Classic Piping Input dialog
box. To increase the window space available for graphics you can hide the Classic Piping
Input dialog box by clicking . The initial view for a job that has never been plotted displays
according to the configuration defaults. These defaults include:
A rendered view - restraints shown
XYZ compass - isometric view
Tees and nozzles highlighted - orthographic projection
The plotting begins by displaying the model in centerline/single line mode to speed up the
process. Then all the elements are rendered one-by-one. Later, the restraints and other relevant
items are added.

CAESAR II User's Guide

305

Piping Input Reference

The model is fully operational while it is being drawn. You can apply any available option
to the model at any time. The status bar at the bottom displays the drawing progress in the form
of Drawing element X of Y. When the plot operation is complete the status message changes
to Ready.

When you hover the cursor over a button, the name of the button and a short description of the
functionality displays in the status bar at the bottom of the view window.
There are several methods of accomplishing nearly every command in the Input Plot utility. You
can access commands by clicking buttons, by selecting menu items, or by using hot keys.
Center Line View - Displays model data in single line mode. This often makes the view
clearer. In this mode, restraints and other element information items display. Display the
volume or double line plot by clicking the corresponding button. Press V to switch among
the views in the following order: Shaded View (rendered mode) / Two Line Mode / Center
Line View.
Shaded View - Displays the model as shaded 3D shapes. Restraints and other element
information items display.
Silhouette - Displays the model as a silhouette. Restraints and other element information
items display.
Hidden Line Wire Frame - Displays the model as a wire frame with hidden lines removed.
Restraints and other element information items display.
Wire Frame - Displays the model as a wire frame. Restraints and other element
information items display.

306

CAESAR II User's Guide

Piping Input Reference

Translucent - Displays the model as translucent 3D shapes. Restraints and other element
information items display.
Front - Displays the model from the front. Alternatively, press Z.
Back - Displays the model from the back. Alternatively, press Shift + Z.
Top - Displays the model from the top. Alternatively, press Y.
Bottom - Displays the model from the bottom. Alternatively, press Shift + Y.
Left - Displays the model from the left. Alternatively, press X.
Right - Displays the model from the right. Alternatively, press Shift + X.
Southeast ISO View - Displays the model isometrically from the southeast. Alternatively,
press F10.
Node Numbers - Turns the display of node numbers on or off. Alternatively, press N. You
can display node numbers for a specific element such as only restraints or only anchors.
Length - Turns the display of element lengths on or off. Alternatively, press L.
Select Element - Select a single element in the model. Hover over an element in the
model to display information about that element. Press Ctrl when you select to add or
remove elements from the selection.
Select Group - Select a group of elements in the model by dragging a window around
them. You can add elements to the selection by pressing Ctrl while dragging the window.
Remove elements from the selection by pressing Shift while dragging the window.
Perspective - Displays the model in perspective mode.
Orthographic - Displays the model in orthographic mode.
You can turn off the display of nodes, restraints, hangers, and anchors for a clearer view.
The size of boundary condition symbols (such as restraints, anchors, and hangers) is relative to
the pipe size outer diameter. You can change the size of these symbols clicking the black arrow
to the right of the relevant button and selecting a size from the list.
You can adjust the color of the node numbers, lengths, elements, boundary conditions, and so
on by clicking Change Display Options . For more information, see 3D Graphics
Configuration (on page 308).
Reset - Returns the model returns to its default state as defined by the configuration. Any
elements hidden by the Range command are restored.
Zoom - Increases or decreases the magnification of the model. Move the cursor up or
down holding the left mouse button. Release the mouse button to stop the zoom.
Alternatively, press + and - to zoom in and out. You can change the zoom level of the
model while in another command by rotating the mouse wheel.
Zoom to Window - Changes the magnification of the model to fit an area that you
specify. Click one corner of the area and then while holding the mouse button, stretch a
box diagonally to the opposite corner of the area
Zoom to Selection - Fits the selected element in the view.
Zoom to Extents - Fits the entire model in the view.

CAESAR II User's Guide

307

Piping Input Reference

Orbit - Rotates the model interactively. Rotate the model using the mouse or the arrow
keys on the keyboard. To use the mouse, click the left mouse button on the model to start
a bounding box. Hold the left mouse button and move the mouse to the other end of the
bounding box. Release the mouse button to update the view. If the bounding box is not
visible, check the corresponding box on the User Options tab of the Plot Configuration
dialog box For more information, see 3D Graphics Configuration (on page 308). During
rotation, the model may in centerline mode, or some of the geometry details may
disappear or become distorted. This is to improve the display speed. The actual
conversion depends on the size and complexity of the model. After the rotation is
complete, the model returns to its original state.
Another method of orbiting the model is the Gyro-operator. Press G. The model performs
a 360-degree rotation in the plane of view.
Pan - Pans the model. The cursor changes to a hand. Move the cursor while holding
down the left mouse button. You can also pan the view while another command is active
by holding down the middle mouse button or mouse wheel while moving the mouse.
Walk Through - Explores the model with a setup similar to a virtual reality application.
This command produces the effect of walking towards the model
Load CADWorx Model - Displays the model in CADWorx.

3D Graphics Configuration
The CAESAR II 3D Graphics engine remembers the state of the model between sessions.
When you exit and return, the model displays in the same state in which it was last viewed.
To obtain a more uniform look for the graphics, change the color and font options:
1. Click Tools > Configure/Setup on the main menu to display the CAESAR II Configuration
Editor dialog box.
2. Open the Graphics Settings category.
3. Set the Always Use System Fonts and Always Use System Colors options to True under
the Visual Options section.

308

CAESAR II User's Guide

Piping Input Reference

These settings are stored in the computer's registry and CAESAR II always displays the
graphics according to these settings.

If the settings are set to False, then the state of each model is maintained individually as an
XML data file (job- name.XML) in the current data folder. After starting another input session,
CAESAR II reads this XML file and restores the 3D graphics to its previous state. This includes
the rotation and zoom level of the model; color settings, data display, and the current graphics
operator.
Option

Description

Colors

Select any color item in the list, then click

to display a Windows color selection
tool. Select the new color. Click Reset All to return all of the settings to CAESAR II
defaults, as defined in configuration,.

Fonts

Selecting any font item in the list, then click

to display the standard Windows
font selection tool. Set the options to meet your requirements and click OK.

CAESAR II User's Guide

309

Piping Input Reference

Changing the Model Display

You can specify the way the model displays when you open a file. The session can start with a
preset command active (such as Zoom), or start with the last command still active. Similarly, the
graphics can start in a preset view (such as isometric), or in the last rotated zoomed position.

310

Option

Description

Show Bounding Box

Determines if rotations using the mouse include an outline box

surrounding the model.

Hide Overlapped
Text

Prevents text from appearing on top of other text items.

Restore Previous
Operator

Determines whether the software remembers your last command

(operator) between sessions or always defaults to a specified
command.

Restore Previous
View

Determines whether the graphics engine remembers the last displayed

view of the model, or defaults to a specified view.

Default Projection
Mode

Determines the initial projection style of the model.

CAESAR II User's Guide

Piping Input Reference

Visibility

Alters the degree of transparency when translucent pipe is activated.

Increasing this value makes it easier to see through the pipe elements.
The Visibility option is only effective when viewing the model in
rendered mode.

Markers

Displays a symbol denoting the elements end points.

Manipulating the Toolbar

You can rearrange or remove buttons on toolbars. There are two methods to make these
adjustments.
Right-click the toolbar, and click Customize.
Remove or reposition the button using drag and drop.
To remove buttons from the toolbar click the down arrow located at the end of each toolbar and
then click Add or Remove Buttons. Turn on the check box to add buttons to the toolbar. Clear
the checkbox to remove buttons. To rearrange buttons, press ALT and then drag the button to a
different location. To restore the CAESAR II default toolbar configuration, click Reset .
For more information, see Toolbars (on page 293).

Highlighting Graphics
You can review the piping model in the context of certain data such as by diameter, wall
thickness, temperature, or pressure.
Command

Description

Diameters

Updates the model to show each diameter in a different color. Use this
option to see the diameter variations throughout the system or to verify
that diameter changes have been made. Alternatively, press D. A color
key displays the diameters defined in the model. You can change the
assigned colors to meet your needs.

Wall Thickness

Updates the model to show each wall thickness in a different color.

Use this option to see the wall thickness variations throughout the
system or to verify that changes have been made. Alternatively, press
W. A color key displays the thicknesses defined in the model. You can
change the assigned colors to meet your needs.

Insulation
Thickness

CAESAR II User's Guide

Updates the model to show each insulation thickness in a different

color. Use this option to see the insulation thickness variations
throughout the system or to verify that changes have been made.
Alternatively, press I. A color key displays the thicknesses defined in
the model. You can change the assigned colors to meet your needs.
You can change the display to cladding thickness or refractory
thickness by selecting that option from the list.

311

Piping Input Reference

312

Cladding Thickness

Updates the model to show each cladding thickness in a different

color. Use this option to see the cladding thickness variations
throughout the system or to verify that changes have been made. A
color key displays the thicknesses defined in the model. You can
change the assigned colors to meet your needs.
You can change the display to insulation thickness or refractory
thickness by selecting that option from the list.

Refractory Thickness

Updates the model to show each refractory thickness in a different

color. Use this option to see the refractory thickness variations
throughout the system or to verify that changes have been made. A
color key displays the thicknesses defined in the model. You can
change the assigned colors to meet your needs.
You can change the display to insulation thickness or cladding
thickness by selecting that option from the list.

Material

Updates the model to show each material in a different color. Use this
option to see the material variations throughout the system or to verify
that changes have been made. Alternatively, press M. A color key
displays the materials defined in the model. You can change the
assigned colors to meet your needs.

Piping Codes

Updates the model to show each piping code in a different color. Use
this option to see the piping code variations throughout the system or
to verify that changes have been made.

Corrosion

Updates the model to show each corrosion allowance in a different

color. Use this option to see the corrosion variations throughout the
system or to verify that changes have been made. A color key displays
the corrosion allowances defined in the model. You can change the
assigned colors to meet your needs.

Pipe Density

Updates the model to show each pipe density in a different color. Use
this option to see the pipe density variations throughout the system or
to verify that changes have been made. A color key displays the pipe
densities defined in the model. You can change the assigned colors to
meet your needs.

Fluid Density

Updates the model to show each fluid density in a different color. Use
this option to see the fluid density variations throughout the system or
to verify that changes have been made. A color key displays the fluid
densities defined in the model. You can change the assigned colors to
meet your needs.

Insulation Density

Updates the model to show each insulation density in a different color.

Use this option to see the insulation density variations throughout the
system or to verify that changes have been made. A color key displays
the insulation densities defined in the model. You can change the
assigned colors to meet your needs.
You can change the display to cladding density, insulation or cladding
unit weight, or refractory density by selecting that option from the list.

CAESAR II User's Guide

Piping Input Reference

Cladding Density

Updates the model to show each cladding density in a different color.

Use this option to see the cladding density variations throughout the
system or to verify that changes have been made. A color key displays
the cladding densities defined in the model. You can change the
assigned colors to meet your needs.
You can change the display to insulation density, insulation or cladding
unit weight, or refractory density by selecting that option from the list.

Insul/Cladding Unit Wt. Updates the model to show each insulation or cladding unit weight in a
different color. Use this option to see the variations throughout the
system or to verify that changes have been made. A color key displays
the insulation or cladding unit weights defined in the model. You can
change the assigned colors to meet your needs.
You can change the display to insulation density, cladding density, or
refractory density by selecting that option from the list.
Refractory Density

Updates the model to show each refractory density in a different color.

Use this option to see the refractory density variations throughout the
system or to verify that changes have been made. A color key displays
the refractory densities defined in the model. You can change the
assigned colors to meet your needs.
You can change the display to insulation density, insulation or cladding
unit weight, or insulation density by selecting that option from the list.

The legend window can be resized, docked, or removed from view.

You can still zoom, pan, or rotate the model while in highlight mode. You can also use any
of orthographic projections and single line or volume modes without affecting the model
highlighted state.
Clicking one of the highlight commands a second time cancels the coloring effect.
If you print the model while it is in highlight mode, the color key legend displays in the upper
left corner of the page, even if the actual legend window has been dragged away from the
view.

Displaying Displacements, Forces, Uniform Loads, and

Wind/Wave Loads
You can display applied or predefined displacements, forces, uniform loads, or wind and wave
loads in a table. You can scroll the display windows vertically and/or horizontally to view all node
points where data has been defined. To move through the defined displacement or force vectors
1 through 9, click Next >> and Previous <<. The color key assists you in locating the node
points on the model when the model geometry is complex.
The displacements window shows user-specified values as well as free or fixed degrees of
freedom (DOF). In this case, a DOF is free if a displacement value is not specified in any of the
displacement load vectors. If a DOF has a specified displacement in at least one of the load
vectors, then it is fixed in all other load vectors.
Forces - Updates the model to show each force in a different color. Use this option to
see the force variations throughout the system or to verify that changes have been
made. A color key displays the force defined in the model. You can change the
assigned colors to meet your needs.
The force parameters display in a table. Use the scroll bars to view all of the data. Click

CAESAR II User's Guide

313

Piping Input Reference

Next >> and Previous << to move through the displacement or force vectors.

Uniform Loads - Updates the model to show each uniform load in a different color. Use
this option to see the uniform load variations throughout the system or to verify that
changes have been made. A color key displays the uniform loads defined in the model.
You can change the assigned colors to meet your needs.
The uniform load parameters display in a table. Use the scroll bars to view all of the
data. Click Next >> and Previous << to move through the displacement or force
vectors.
Uniform Loads has three vectors defined. The Node column represents the start node
number where the uniform loads vector was first defined. Because the data propagates
throughout the model until changed or disabled, the model is colored accordingly.
Wind/Wave - Updates the model to show each wind or wave load in a different color.
Use this option to see the variations throughout the system or to verify that changes
have been made. A color key displays the wind or wave loads defined in the model.
The wind and wave load parameters display in a table. Use the scroll bars to view all of
the data. Click Next >> and Previous << to move through the loads.
All the elements with wind defined display in red. All the elements with wave data
defined display in green. The legend grid shows the relevant data.

314

The legend window can be resized, docked, or removed from view.

You can still zoom, pan, or rotate the model while in highlight mode. You can also use any
of orthographic projections and single line or volume modes without affecting the model
highlighted state.
Clicking one of the highlight commands a second time cancels the coloring effect.
If you print the model while it is in highlight mode, the color key legend displays in the upper
left corner of the page. This is true even if the actual legend window has been dragged away
from the view.
You can display predefined displacements by pressing F3. You can display forces/moment
vectors by pressing F5.
Select Element
displays element data. When this command is active, hovering the
cursor over a pipe element displays the element's nodes, delta dimensions, and pipe size
data. Clicking an element highlights the element and updates the information on the dialog
box. Click in the empty space of the graphics view to unhighlight the element. The dialog box
still contains the information from the last element that you selected.

CAESAR II User's Guide

Piping Input Reference

Limiting the Display

Sometimes it is necessary to limit the amount of information displayed on the screen. This may
be useful when the model is large, or if it has many similar looking branches.
Find - Displays a specific element in the view. This command displays a dialog box
that allows you to specify the From and To nodes to search for. You can enter the
node numbers in either of the two fields, or in both. If you entering only the From
node number, the software searches for the first available element that starts with that
node number. If you enter only the To node number, the software searches for an
element ending with that node number. When the software locates the element it
highlights the element and fits it in the view. You can zoom out to better identify the
location of the highlighted element within the model.
3D Cutting Plane - Defines the cutting plane for the model. This option is useful when
trying to emphasize a specific element. In many cases, the elements or node numbers
are not defined consecutively. Because of this, it may be easier to cut a portion of the
model at a certain location to see more details.
When the cutting plane displays, use the handles to move and or rotate the planes. If
cutting the plane's handles are not visible, or the display goes blank, use the Zoom
command to expand the view. To disable the cutting plane, select the command
again.
This command can be used along any of the three axes.
Range - Displays only the elements that contain nodes within a range. This is helpful
when you need to locate specific nodes or a group of related elements in a large
model. This command displays the Range dialog box. Alternatively, press U.
For more information, see Range (on page 288).
Line Numbers - Displays the Line Numbers pane which allows graphical editing of
line numbers. You can:

assign a new line number to the block of elements that have been selected on the
3D graphical display.
remove an existing line number.
set and reset visibility options to hide and unhide elements.
assign a color to an individual line number.
To reassign one or more elements from one line number to another existing line
number, simply drag-and-drop (move) the desired elements between existing Line
Numbers in the Line Numbers pane.
When you click the Line Number name in the Line Number pane, the
corresponding elements are highlighted in the 3D pane and are selected to perform
Block operations.

Saving an Image for Later Presentation

Occasionally, it is necessary to add a graphical representation of a model to the CAESAR II
Stress reports. The graphics view can be saved as a graphic by clicking File > Save As
Graphics Image. The model geometry, colors, highlighting, as well as restraints and most of the
other options are transferred to the graphic. The default graphic file name is the job name with

CAESAR II User's Guide

315

Piping Input Reference

an extension .TIF. This is a standard Windows-supported image file extension that can be
opened for viewing. The image resolution can also be changed in the Save Image dialog box.
This is a static graphic file.
Due to certain limitations of the modeler, the legend window and text cannot be saved to the
graphic. However, all coloring, as well as the annotations and markups are saved.
You also have the option to save the graphics as .HTML file. After saving as .HTML CAESAR II
creates two files in the current data directory using the current job name: *.HTML and *.HSF.
Opening the .HTML file displays the corresponding .HSF file.
This is an interactive file.
The first time a CAESAR II-created .HTML file is opened with an Internet browser, you receive a
message asking you to download a control from Tech Soft 3D. Answer Yes to allow the
download, and the image displays. After the model displays, right-clicking the model shows the
available viewing options such as orbit, pan, zoom, different render modes, and so on. The
image can be printed or copied to the clipboard.
Internet Explorer (IE) version 5.0 and earlier may not display the image properly.
Intergraph CAS recommends IE6 or later.
Annotate - Adds a brief description to the model. The annotation may be especially useful
in the output processor. The annotation text box is a single line. Annotation is printed and
saved to the bitmap. Annotation is not saved to HTML.
Annotate w/Leader - Adds a brief description to the model. This annotation includes a
leader line. Drag the annotation box to extend the leader. The annotation text box is a
single line. The annotation with a leader stays with the model when you zoom, pan, rotate,
or use any of the highlight options. Annotation is printed and saved to the bitmap.
Annotation is not saved to HTML.
The color, font face, and size of the annotation text can be changed by clicking Tools >
Configure/Setup on the main menu. For more information, see 3D Graphics Configuration (on
page 308).
Freehand Markup - Draws a line in the model. Click and drag the mouse to draw the line.
Rectangle Markup - Draws a rectangle in the model. Click and drag the mouse to draw the
rectangle.
Circle Markup - Draws a circle in the model. Click and drag the mouse to draw the circle.

The markup annotation text box is a single line. The color and the font face/size cannot be
changed. The default color is red.
Markup annotations are saved to the .TIF file and spooled to the printer.
The geometry and the text of the markup annotations are temporary. They are not saved
with the model. These graphics and disappear from view with any change such as zoom,
rotate, pan, or reset all.

Walking Through the Model

CAESAR II lets you explore the model with a feature similar in operation to a virtual reality
game. It produces the effect of walking towards the model. After you are close to or inside the
model, you can look left, right, up, and down, step to a side, or ride an elevator up and down.
Walk Through is useful in providing a real-time interactive view of the model.

316

CAESAR II User's Guide

Piping Input Reference

Click Walk Through

to display the cursor as a pair of feet.

Walking Around
You can begin walking by clicking and holding the left mouse button. Move forward by moving
the mouse toward the top of the window. Move back by doing the opposite.
Walk Through also provides an additional control
that aids in navigation. Clicking the
various hot spots on the control duplicates mouse movements with the added benefit of
providing the ability to move in a perfectly straight line.
In addition, Walk Through also provides you with the added functionality of determining the
walking speed. In general, walking speed is determined by the distance between where you first
click and how far you move the mouse. The keys below which, if held down while walking, effect
walk through's operation:
Shift - Changes the walk mode to run mode, effectively doubling the walk speed.
Ctrl - Changes the walk mode to slow mode, effectively halving the walk speed.
Alt - Enables you to look left or right without changing the walk path. Releasing the key,
automatically returns your viewpoint to looking forward.
To exit from this command, click any other command.

Move Geometry
Moves selected elements to a new location in the model.

Moving elements
1. Click Move Geometry
to display marker control points at all nodes and tangent points.
On bends, the marker control points display on the far weld-line.
2. Click and drag the cursor to select the nodes to move.
3. Click any of the selected nodes.
The mouse is in move mode. The mouse movement is clamped to either the x, y, or z axis.
4. To change the axis press Tab or click one of the Axis commands on the Edit Mode toolbar.
5. Click to specify the new location.
The model geometry is updates.
6. Alternatively, you can type the magnitude of the movement. If you type a single number, the
movement is applied to the currently selected axis. You can move in multiple directions at
once by typing <x-value>, <y-value>, <z-value>.

CAESAR II User's Guide

317

S3D/SPR Import View

CAESAR II provides functionality to load SmartPlant3D / SmartMarine3D (S3D/SPR) reference
models either partially or in full. Loaded S3D/SPR graphic models can then be filtered to adjust
the visibility of or isolate specific component classes. This functionality allows you to interpret
the design environment surrounding the piping system and use this knowledge to readily identify
optimal support point and expansion loop locations, judge available clearances, and so forth.
Generally, this functionality provides a more seamless means of communication across all
disciplines involved in the design process when Smart 3D is used as the overall design platform.
This document reviews all options available to you when working with S3D/SPR reference
models.
Click the S3D Import View icon in the Reference Models Tools tool bar in the Piping Input
window.
Drop-down menu options are:
Load S3D/SPR Model
Show/Hide S3D/SPR Model
Dim S3D/SPR Model
S3D/SPR Visibility Options

Load S3D/SPR Model

In the Reference CAD Models tool bar, click the
The Load S3D/SPR Model dialog box displays.

CAESAR II User's Guide

icon.

319

Piping Input Reference

Load S3D/SPR Dialog Box

To Load a Full Smart 3D model from a VUE file
1. Click the Select a file button and navigate to the location of the VUE file you want to
display.
Alternatively, you can type the path name in the field.
2. Select Full Load.
3. Click Load File to display the Smart 3D graphic file in the CAESAR II 3D Graphics pane.

To Load a Partial Smart 3D model using the Bounding Box

The bounding box functionality allows you to only see the details of the S3D/SPR graphic model
within a box.
You can either define the bounding box to the boundaries of the existing CAESAR II model or
select part of the existing CAESAR II model using the Select by Window option on the
Standard Operators tool bar. Then, click the Draw Cube button, and adjust as needed.
1. Click Select a file and select a Smart 3D VUE file to display.
2. Click the Partial Load button.
3. Click the Re-import check box to refresh or change your visibility settings.
4. Click the Use Model Bounding-Box radio button.

320

CAESAR II User's Guide

Piping Input Reference

5. Alternatively, select elements in the area of interest by drawing a selection window around
them using the Selection by Window option in the Standard Operators tool bar. Then
click the option Bounding-box from Selection.
6. Click Draw Cube button.
You can then re-size or pan the cube is all six dimensions (up, down, left, right, front, back)
until you have enclosed all the parts of the model you want to load into a CAESAR II model.
As shown in the figure above, the bounding box has 6 markers:
Anchor Marker - This marker indicates the starting point of the bounding box (shown in red).
You cannot resize the model using this marker.
The 3 faces to which the anchor marker is connected are fixed (cannot be moved via any of
the markers). You can move the whole bounding box by panning it.
Top Face Marker - This marker is used to move the top face (for example, the face which is
perpendicular to top-view-axis of the model, such as Y_Up, Z_Up).
Base Markers - The bounding box has 3 base markers which allow you to re-size the
bounding box by selecting any one of them and dragging the mouse.
Base Marker 1 moves the rest of the two faces along with Base Marker 3
Base Marker 2 moves these two faces simultaneously
Base Marker 3 moves the rest of the two faces along with Base Marker 1
Centroid Marker - This marker sits at the center of the bounding box volume and moves the
whole bounding box from one position to another.
The values for the X, Y, and Z axes display in the Starting Point boxes depending on
how you manipulate the size and shape of the cube with the graphics tools. You cannot
enter data in the Starting Point boxes; they are for informational purposes only.
1. Click the Load File button.
This displays the components lying inside the bounding box. A component that originates within
the bounding box and extends beyond the boundaries of the bounding box displays in its
entirety. A component that lies completely outside of the bounding box is totally excluded from
the view.

Select a file
Select a Smart 3D VUE file from your hard drive.
Alternatively, you can type the path name to the location of your VUE file.

Full Load
Click this radio button if you want to load the entire Smart 3D model from the selected VUE file.
You can select either Full Load or Partial Load as one of the VUE Loading Options.

Partial Load
Click this radio button if you want to load a selected portion of the Smart 3D model from the
selected VUE file. This option allows you to use the bounding box to filter the S3D/SPR model to
the area of interest.
You can select either Full Load or Partial Load as one of the VUE Loading Options.

Re-Import
Select this check box if you want to re-import or refresh a Smart 3D VUE file.

CAESAR II User's Guide

321

Piping Input Reference

Use Model Bounding Box
Select this radio button to define the bounding box you want to use. This option defines the
bounding box to the boundaries of your existing CAESAR II model.

Bounding - Box from Selection

Select this radio button to define a Bounding-Box from the selected part of the model.

322

CAESAR II User's Guide

Piping Input Reference

Starting Point X
The values for the X, Y, and Z axes display in the Starting Point boxes depending on how you
manipulate the size and shape of the cube with the graphics tools. You cannot enter data in the
Starting Point boxes; they are for informational purposes only.

Starting Point Y
The values for the X, Y, and Z axes display in the Starting Point boxes depending on how you
manipulate the size and shape of the cube with the graphics tools. You cannot enter data in the
Starting Point boxes; they are for informational purposes only.

Starting Point Z
The values for the X, Y, and Z axes display in the Starting Point boxes depending on how you
manipulate the size and shape of the cube with the graphics tools. You cannot enter data in the
Starting Point boxes; they are for informational purposes only.

Bounding Volume - Width

Enter a value for the Bounding Volume Width.

Bounding Volume : Height

Enter a value for the Bounding Volume Height.

Bounding Volume - Depth

Enter a value for the Bounding Volume Depth.

Show/Hide S3D/SPR Model

In the Reference CAD Models tool bar, click the
icon drop-down list and click Show 3D
Model.
This option is available if there is a S3D model to display.

Dim S3D/SPR Model

In the Reference CAD Models tool bar, click the
icon drop-down list and click Dim 3D
Model.
This option is available if there is a S3D model to display.

CAESAR II User's Guide

323

Piping Input Reference

S3D/SPR Visibility Options

In the Reference CAD Models tool bar, click the
icon drop-down list and click S3D/SPR
Visibility Option.
This option is available if there is a S3D/SPR model to display. You can then modify the
graphics to display/hide types of components from the S3D/SPR graphic model.

S3D Graphics Environment Dialog Box

1. Select the S3D/SPR Visibility Options menu option from the S3D Import View menu.
The Graphics Environment Options dialog box displays.

Use this option to hide details of the S3D/SPR reference model that are not needed or could
be distracting while you are working with this model. For example, if you import a Smart 3D
piping model using the CAESAR II APCF or PCF option and want to reference the S3D/SPR
graphic model for context, the piping elements in the CAESAR II model and the S3D/SPR
graphic reference model can overlap and cause confusion. You can turn off the display of
piping elements from the S3D/SPR graphic reference model enabling you to compare the
changes more easily.
2. You can select a value from 0% to 100% for each of the five categories of components in a
Smart 3D model.
The value is the percentage of light allowed to pass through the object. For example, a low
percentage value indicates the graphics elements are nearly invisible.
3. Check the corresponding check box(es) to display the elements for a given category or
select the top check box to display all the categories.
The Smart 3D graphic displays the categories you select at the given visibility values.
4. Click the

Hide/show icon to hide or display the S3D model graphic.

5. Click the
refresh visibility icon to refresh the S3D model graphic to display the revised
visibility settings.

324

CAESAR II User's Guide

SECTION 5

Structural Steel Modeler

Structural Input or Input > Structural Steel adds structural elements to a model. Using the
modeler, you can perform the following functions:
Open and view structural files.
Enter command and parameter data to build structural models.

In This Section
Overview .........................................................................................325
Structural Steel Graphics ................................................................329
Sample Input...................................................................................331
The Structural Modeler Window .....................................................356
Insert Menu .....................................................................................358
Commands Menu ...........................................................................359
Structural Databases ......................................................................395

Overview

CAESAR II User's Guide

325

Structural Steel Modeler

Start the CAESAR II Structural Element Processor from the main menu by opening a
structural file, and then choosing Input > Structural Steel.

Define the structural steel model

Input is interactive, and you use commands to define parameters. If you are not familiar with the
command input, thoroughly review the examples in this section, and use F1 to launch help.

326

CAESAR II User's Guide

Structural Steel Modeler

The following example shows a structural steel model with two sections and multiple elements
defined.
FIX 5 ALL - Fixes node 5, all degrees of freedom.
SECID=1,W10X49 - Defines properties for section #1 (a 20-inch wide flange of 49 pounds per
foot).
EDIM 5 10 DY=12-0 - Defines a vertical member from 5 to 10.

Because many structures have a considerable degree of repeatability, there are various forms,
options, and deviations for these commands to help you generate large structural models. The
method of single element generation is well suited to the needs of most pipers.
Create new lines by selecting a keyword command from the Edit menu or from the toolbar. The
most commonly used commands are as follows:
EDim (on page 371) - Defines structural elements.
Fix (on page 362) - Defines structural anchors (ALL) or restraints.
Load (on page 377) - Defines concentrated forces.
Unif (on page 374) - Defines uniform loads.
Secid (on page 382) - Defines cross-section properties.
From the Edit menu you can complete other common functions, including:
Edit > Undo - Reverse the last action.
Edit > Copy Card - Copies an existing card. You must select the card you want to copy
first.
Edit > Paste Card - Pastes a card in the model where you have your cursor.
Edit > Delete Card - Deletes a card. You must select the card you want to delete first.
Certain commands set parameters that remain set for all further element generations:
Default (on page 392) - sets the default Section ID and Material ID.
Angle (on page 373) - sets the default element orientation.
Beams (on page 386), Braces (on page 388), and Columns (on page 390) - sets the
default end connection type.

Select the database for a structural steel model

The full AISC database with more than 900 cross-sectional shapes is available on a
per-member-name basis. Additionally, you can define any arbitrary cross-sectional shapes.

CAESAR II User's Guide

327

Structural Steel Modeler

You must use the CAESAR II Configuration Editor to select the proper database before
starting the construction of a structural model. You can select sections from a tree structure,
grouping the sections by type. Sections include the following:
AISC77.BIN (see AISC 1977 Database (on page 395))
AISC89.BIN (see AISC 1989 Database (on page 400))
UK. BIN (see UK Database (see "UK 1993 Database" on page 410))
AUST90.BIN (see Australian Database (see "Australian 1990 Database" on page 406))
SAFRICA.BIN (see South African Database (see "South African 1992 Database" on page
408))
KOREAN.BIN (see Korean Database (see "Korean 1990 Database" on page 408))
GERM91.BIN (see German Database (see "German 1991 Database" on page 405))

AISC names should be typed exactly as shown in the AISC handbook with the exception that
fractions should be represented as decimals to four decimal places. Input is case-sensitive. For
example, the angle L6X3-1/2X1/2 would be entered L6X3.5X0.5000.
Member-end connection freedom is a concept used quite frequently in structural analysis
that has no real parallel in piping work. Several of the structural examples contain free-end
connection specifications (such as column, beam, and brace), so you should study these
examples for details.
Structural models may be run alone (singularly), or may be included in piping jobs.

Run the structural model without piping (singularly)

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

328

Open the structural file

Click Input > Structural Steel.
Enter the structural steel model.
Click File > Save to exit the model.
Click Yes.
The program saves, checks, and builds the CAESAR II execution files automatically. The
software opens the Model Generation Status dialog box.

CAESAR II User's Guide

Structural Steel Modeler

6. Click OK, and close the Structural Steel Modeler dialog box to return to the main menu.
7. Click Analysis > Statics to start CAESAR II at the analysis level.
8. Select the load cases you want to analyze.
CAESAR II recommends the weight only (W) load case. If needed, create additional load
cases to address other input loads or concentrated forces.
9. Click Run Analysis
to begin the analysis, and then click OK.
When the analysis finishes, it places the files in the CAESAR II Static Output processor.
You can click
Static Output to view or print output reports.
10. Exit the Static Output Processor.
If needed, click Analysis > AISC to independently run a Unity Check (stress evaluation)
for the most heavily loaded members, as defined by the American Institute of Steel Construction
(AISC). Displacements, forces, and moments are available for each structural element.

Include the structural model in a piping job

Use caution when establishing steel node numbers. Common nodes with piping have
the steel anchored to the corresponding pipe node. Usually, piping is connected to steel through
restraints with connecting nodes (CNodes).
1. Complete steps 1 through 6 from the previous section for running a structural model alone.
2. Open the Piping Input file.
3. Edit the piping file to meet your requirements.
4. Click Environment > Include Structural Files.
The Include Structural Files dialog box displays.
5. Click Browse to select the structural files to include in the piping job.
You can include up to 10 structural input files.
6. Click OK.
7. Exit the Include Structural Files dialog box after all structural models have been included
in the piping job.
8. Click Run Analysis
to begin error checking the model. After you resolve and eliminate
any warnings and errors, you can run the entire model successfully.
The structural elements are included in the model for the flexibility calculations. These
elements appear as any other pipe element, except that stresses are not computed.
Stand-alone AISC Code Check software is available to verify that forces and moments
on standard structural shapes do not exceed the various allowable stress limits as defined by
the American Institute of Steel Construction.

Structural Steel Graphics

The graphics model in the Structural Steel Modeler lets you verify the model geometry for
completeness and accuracy. An interactive Card Stack pane lets you enter and update the
element data. The graphics view instantly reflects any changes.

CAESAR II User's Guide

329

Structural Steel Modeler

The Structural Steel Modeler 3D graphics engine shares the same general capabilities as the
graphics model of the Piping Input Processor. It uses the same toolbar that lets you zoom,
orbit, pan, and perform several other options. You also have the ability to switch orthographic
views and volume to single line mode.

The structural steel model can also show or hide the supports and restraints, anchors, the
compass, node numbers, and element lengths. The restraints may also be changed in size
relative to the structural elements.
The graphics view displays in the right pane when you define enough information in the Card
Stack pane. For example, using Method 2 - Node/Element Specification Generator, if you have
only specified the Nodes for the card stack, the graphics view does not display because there is
not a model to show. However, after you define a single element (Elem) between two points in
space, a corresponding graphical element displays in the graphic view. When using Method 1 Element Definition Edim (similar to defining elements in the CAESAR II Piping Input
Processor), the corresponding graphical element displays after the Edim command finishes.
You can resize or disable the Card Stack pane from showing to allow the graphics view to fill
the entire screen. Additionally, you can dock the Card Stack pane on or off the main window.
After you dock the pane off the main window, you can remove it completely from the view or
close it. To show or hide the Card Stack pane, click .
The Structural Steel Modeler has a Change Display Option that lets you change the default
colors for all steel elements and restraints. For more information, see 3D Graphics Configuration
(on page 308).
Loads, such as uniform or wind, are not available in graphics mode in the Structural
Steel Modeler.
An additional feature of the Structural Steel Modeler is the ability to flip the coordinate system
automatically between displaying the Y-axis up (or Y-up) to the Z-axis up (or Z-up). All relevant
data is modified to comply with the new coordinate system.

330

CAESAR II User's Guide

Structural Steel Modeler

Sample Input
This section contains structural steel examples. These examples are presented so that you can
enter them into the computer from the listed input.

Structural Steel Example #1

Determine the stiffness of the structural steel support shown below. Use the estimated rigid
support piping loads from the piping analysis to back-calculate each stiffness.

A U-bolt pins the pipe to the top of the channel at node 20. The piping loads output from the pipe
stress program are:
Fx= -39.0 lbs.
Fy= -1975.0 lbs.
Fz= 1350.0 lbs.

CAESAR II User's Guide

331

Structural Steel Modeler

Complete the initial specifications for Example #1
1. Click File > New from the CAESAR II main menu.
2. Enter a job name (for example, SUPP), click the Structural Input option, and browse to
select the data directory. Then, click OK.

The software opens the Units Selection dialog box.

3. Specify the units to use with this job, then click Next.
The software opens the Vertical Axis Selection dialog box.
4. Verify that the vertical axis is set to the Y-axis,and then click Next. Selecting the Y-axis
means that the gravity works in the Y--axis direction on this model.
Be sure this coordinate system matches the piping model.
The software opens the Material Specification dialog box.

332

CAESAR II User's Guide

Structural Steel Modeler

5. Click Next in the Material Specification dialog box to use default material properties.
The software opens the Cross Section Specification dialog box.

6. Specify the cross section by typing in the name exactly as it appears (including exact
capitalization and trailing zeros) or by clicking Select Section ID and selecting the name
from the list.
For this example, enter the Section ID 1 name as W16X26.
7. Click Add Another Section to create other cross sections. Enter Section ID 2 as MC8X22.8
and Section ID 3 as L6X4X0.5000. Repeat this until you have three sections specified in this
example, then click Next.
The software opens the Model Definition dialog box.
8. Select Method 1 Element Definitions (the default setting) to use the Element Dimension
(EDIM) option to define individual elements that span between two node points. Then, click
Finish. This input works similarly to piping input, where elements are defined by their end
points and delta X, Y, Z distances between those end points.
The Method 2 Node/Element Specifications option uses commands to define an array of
nodes in space and commands to add elements bounded by these nodes.

CAESAR II User's Guide

333

Structural Steel Modeler

The software opens the CAESAR II Structural Modeler dialog box, where you can
interactively input data. Click the arrow on each line in the modeler to expand or condense
the information.

Specify the structural steel model input for Example #1

1. Click on the Commands toolbar to enter commands and parameters that define the model
input.

334

CAESAR II User's Guide

Structural Steel Modeler

2. Click
Edim to add the first element to the end of the list, then click the arrow to the left to
expand the data for that group, and enter the column data.

Notice that the first element is at node 5 to node 10 and runs 12 feet in the Y direction and
has a section number of 1 (the default section).
Press TAB to move quickly from one Card Stack box to the next.

CAESAR II User's Guide

335

Structural Steel Modeler

3. When you complete the first element, click
the next four elements.

Edim and repeat the entry process to add

To delete a card element, select Edit > Delete Card. To copy an existing card
element, select Edit > Copy Card.

336

CAESAR II User's Guide

Structural Steel Modeler

After you complete the element entry, the software displays the current model.

CAESAR II User's Guide

337

Structural Steel Modeler

4. Click

Fix to add the restraint at the base of the column.

5. Click
Loads to enter the loads on this support. You can use a previous CAESAR II
analysis for these loads.
6. Enter the loads at Node 20 [(FX, FY, FZ)=(-39, -1975, 1350)].

338

CAESAR II User's Guide

Structural Steel Modeler

The software displays the completed model.

7. Add comments to the model by first setting where CAESAR II inserts comments from the
Insert menu option. You can specify for comments to appear before or after the currently
selected element, or at the end of the model elements list. Click
Comment to add
comments to the model.

CAESAR II User's Guide

339

Structural Steel Modeler

After you insert a comment, you must click the down arrow to expand the comment
element and add the comment text. The following example shows the completed model with
new comments inserted.

8. Click File > Save to check and save the model. Then, click OK.
CAESAR II checks the input. If the error checker does not find any fatal errors, CAESAR II
writes the execution files and you can use the model in a piping analysis or you can analyze
the model singularly. For the purposes of this example, you will analyze the model by itself.
9. Close the CAESAR II Structural Modeler dialog box and return to the CAESAR II main
menu.
10. With the SUPP file still open as the current model, click Analysis > Statics on the toolbar.
Remember to replace the Weight load in Load Case 1 (L1) with F1 (the applied
loads).
11. Click
Run the Analysis.
CAESAR II performs the structural steel analysis, just as a piping analysis.

340

CAESAR II User's Guide

Structural Steel Modeler

The output from a structural analysis is comprised of displacements, forces, and moments. The
results from the analysis of the SUPP model show the displacements at Node 20.

These displacements are excessive for a support, which is to be assumed rigid in another
analysis. The translational stiffness for the support can be computed as follows:
Kx = 39 lb. / 10.125 in. = 3.85 lb./in
Ky = 1975 lb. / 0.4228 in. = 4671 lb./in.
Kz = 1350 lb. / 0.8444 in. = 1599 lb./in.

Structural Steel Example #2

Design a support to limit the loads on the waste heat boilers flue gas nozzle connection. The
maximum allowable loads on the nozzle are as follows:
Faxial = 1500 lb.
Fshear = 500 lb.
Mtorsion = 10000 ft. lb.
Mbending = 5000 ft. lb.
In this example, create the structural steel input file, SUPP2.str, from a text file. The structural
steel preprocessor converts this file to the CAESAR II model.

CAESAR II User's Guide

341

Structural Steel Modeler

Check the piping and structure shown in the following four figures:

342

CAESAR II User's Guide

Structural Steel Modeler

CAESAR II User's Guide

343

Structural Steel Modeler

Create the structural input file using a text editor
1. Using a text editor, enter the following input parameters for the model:
UNIT ENGLISH.FIL
;DEFINE SECTIONS
SECID 1 W24X104
SECID 2 W18X50
;DEFINE MATERIALS
MATID 1 YM=29E6 POIS=0.3 G=11.6E6 DENS=0.283
;COLUMN STRONG AXIS ORIENTATION
ANGLE=90
;VERTICAL COLUMNS
EDIM 230 235 DY=10EDIM 235 220 DY=13-10
EDIM 200 205 DY=10EDIM 205 210 DY=13-10
;SLOPED COLUMNS
EDIM 245 250 DX=8.392- DY=10EDIM 260 255 DX=8.392- DY=10EDIM 250 220 DX=11.608- DY=13-10
EDIM 255 210 DX=11.608- DY=13-10
MAKE BEAMS DEFAULT SECTION
DEFAULT SECID=2;
EDIM 235 240 DZ=-2.5EDIM 240 205 DZ=-2.5EDIM 220 215 DZ=-2.5EDIM 215 210 DZ= -2.5EDIM 250 255 DZ=-5;THE FINAL SET OF HORIZONTAL BEAMS
;ALONG THE X AXIS HAVE A
;STANDARD STRONG AXIS ORIENTATION
ANGLE=0
EDIM 250 235 DX=11.608EDIM 255 205 DX=11.608;ANCHOR THE BASE NODES
FIX 200 TO=260 BY=30 ALL
FIX 245 ALL
After the data is processed, this file does not display the line breaks in Microsoft's
Notepad text editor, but the data remains valid. Use a more robust editor to display the
individual lines.
2. Name and save the file as SUPP2.str.

Import the structural input file into the Structural Steel Modeler
1. Click File > Open from the CAESAR II main menu.
2. Change File of type to Structural (*.str)
SUPP2.str. Then, click Open.

344

and navigate to the file you created,

CAESAR II User's Guide

Structural Steel Modeler

3. Click Input > Structural Steel from the CAESAR II main menu.
The software opens the structural model for SUPP2.str.

4. After you have confirmed that the model is correct, click File > Save, and click Yes to save
the model.
5. Select all the check boxes in the Model Generation Status dialog box, and click OK.
CAESAR II checks the input. If the error checker does not find any fatal errors, CAESAR II
writes the execution files and you can use the model in a piping analysis or you can analyze
the model singularly. For the purposes of this example, you will analyze the model with a
piping model.
6. Close the CAESAR II Structural Modeler dialog box and return to the CAESAR II main
menu.

Input piping data for Example #2

Next, enter the input for the piping system to be analyzed in a new piping job.
1. Click File > New from the CAESAR II main menu.
2. Change File of type to Piping Input (*.c2)
, enter the file name as PIPE2 (for the
purposes of this example).
3. Navigate and select the CAESAR II data folder, and click OK.
The software opens the Review Current Units dialog box.
4. Verify the current units are English, then click OK.
The software opens the piping input for PIPE2.c2.
5. Click the Classic Piping Input tab on the left of the graphical display.

CAESAR II User's Guide

345

Structural Steel Modeler

Enter the the piping input data using the Input Echo report data shown below. For more
information on how to quickly enter piping input data, see Navigating the Classic Piping Input
Dialog Box using the Function Keys (on page 91).
PIPE DATA
From 5 to 10 DX= 6.417 ft.
PIPE
Dia = 30.000 in.
Wall= .375 in.
GENERAL
T1= 850 F
Mat= (186)A335 P5
Insul Thk= .000 in.
BEND at "TO" end
Radius= 45.000 in. (LONG)
RESTRAINTS
Node 5 ANC
ALLOWABLE STRESSES
B31.3 (2008)
---------------------------------------------------------From 10 to 15 DY= -8.000 ft.
---------------------------------------------------------From 15 to 20 DY= -13.833 ft
---------------------------------------------------------From 20 to 25 DY= -8.000 ft.
BEND at "TO" end
Radius= 45.000 in. (LONG)
---------------------------------------------------------From 25 to 30 DX= 10.000 ft.
RESTRAINTS
Node 30 +Y
---------------------------------------------------------From 30 To 35 DX= 30.000 ft.
RESTRAINTS
Node 35 +Y
---------------------------------------------------------From 35 To 40 DX= 10.000 ft.
BEND at "TO" end
Radius= 45.000 in. (LONG)
---------------------------------------------------------From 40 To 45 DZ= -3.750 ft.
---------------------------------------------------------From 45 To 50 DZ= -4.000 ft.
PIPE
Dia= 30.000 in.
Wall= .375 in.
Insul Thk= .000 in.
REDUCER
Diam2= 36.000 in.
Wall2= .375 in.
---------------------------------------------------------From 50 To 55 DZ= -20.000 ft.
PIPE
Dia= 36.000 in.
Wall= .375 in.
Insul Thk= .000 in.
---------------------------------------------------------From 55 To 60 DZ= -20.000 ft.

346

CAESAR II User's Guide

Structural Steel Modeler

---------------------------------------------------------From 60 To 65 DZ= -10.000 ft.
RESTRAINTS
Node 65 ANC
---------------------------------------------------------From 15 To 115 DX= -2.500 ft.
PIPE
Dia= 30.000 in.
Wall= .375 in.
Insul Thk= .000 in.
RIGID Weight= .00 lb.
RESTRAINTS
Node 115 X
Cnode 215
Node 115 Z
Cnode 215
---------------------------------------------------------From 20 To 120 DX= -2.500 ft.
RIGID Weight= .00 lb.
RESTRAINTS
Node 120 X
Cnode 240
In this piping input example, there are two weightless, rigid elements at nodes 15 to 115 and 20
to 120 that run out from the pipe centerline to the connecting points of the structure.
The two restraint sets at the end of the data115 and 120are pipe nodes and their
CNodes215 and 240are structural steel nodes in SUPP2.

CAESAR II User's Guide

347

Structural Steel Modeler

Connect the pipe to the structure
1. From the Classic Piping Input dialog box, click Environment > Include Structural Input
Files.
The software opens the Include Structural Files dialog box.
2. Enter the name of the structural steel model to be included (in this example, SUPP2).
You can type the name and click Add, or click Browse to search for the file (which has
the .str or the compressed .c2s extension), select the file, and click OK.
3. If the pipe and structure do not plot properly relative to one-another, then one of the
following situations may have occurred:
a. The connecting nodes were not defined correctly.
b. The Connect Geometry Through CNodes option was not set to True in the
Configuration Editor. For more information, see Connect Geometry Through CNodes
(on page 59) in the Configuration Options.
Refer to the Pipe2 plotted pipe and structure shown below:

4. After the software plots the pipe and structure relative to one another, exit the Piping Input
(see "Piping Input generation" on page 29) dialog box and run the error check.
The error checker includes the pipe and structure together during checking. The execution
files that the software writes also include the structural data.

348

CAESAR II User's Guide

Structural Steel Modeler

5. Run the analysis using the default load cases.
The following shows the restraint report for Load Case 1, W+T1 (OPE):

The loads on the anchor at 5 are excessive. The structural steel frame and pipe support
structure as shown are not satisfactory.

In this example, displacement of the structure is small relative to the displacement of the pipe.
The pipe is thermally expanding out away from the boiler nozzle and down, away from the boiler
nozzle.

CAESAR II User's Guide

349

Structural Steel Modeler

The pipe is pulling the structure in the positive X direction at the top support and pushing the
structure in the negative X direction at the bottom support. These displacements result in higher
loads on the boiler nozzle. The vertical location of the structural supports should be studied
more closely.
You could add vertical springs at 30 and 35, which might help, along with a repositioning of the
structural supports vertically. For example, the support at node 120 should be moved down so
that its line of action in the X direction more closely coincides with the center line of the pipe
between nodes 25 and 40.

Structural Steel Example #3

Estimate the X, Y, and Z stiffness of the structure at the point 1000. In general, the stiffness of a
three-dimensional structure, condensed down to the stiffness of a single point, must be
represented by a 66 stiffness matrix. As a first estimate, only the on-diagonal, translational
stiffnesses are estimated.

350

CAESAR II User's Guide

Structural Steel Modeler

Specify the structural input data for Example #3
1. Click File > New from the CAESAR II main menu.
2. Change File of type to Structural Input, enter the file name as SUPP3 (for the purposes of
this example).
3. Navigate and select the CAESAR II data folder, and click OK.
The software opens the Units Selection dialog box.
4. Click Next to accept ENGLISH,FIL, the default value for current units.
The software opens the Vertical Axis Selection dialog box.
5. Verify that the vertical axis is set to the Y-axis,and then click Next.
The software opens the Material Specification dialog box.
6. Click Next in the Material Specification dialog box to use default material properties.
The software opens the Cross Section Specification dialog box.
7. Specify the two cross sections, Section ID 1 as W12X65 and Section ID 2 as W10X22.
The software opens the Model Definition dialog box.
Select Method 1 Element Definitions (the default setting) to use the element dimension
(EDIM) method of input. Then, click Finish.
The software opens the CAESAR II Structural Modeler dialog box, where you can
interactively input data. Click the arrow on each line in the modeler to expand or condense
the information.
8. Use the interactive input processor to input the following commands.
You can also import these commands by inputting them in a text editor and then
importing the .str file into the model. For more information, see Structural Steel Example 2
(see "Structural Steel Example #2" on page 341).
UNIT ENGLISH.FIL
VERTICAL=Y
MATID 1 YM=29E6 POIS=0.3 G=11.6E6 DENS=0.283
SECID 1 W12X65
SECID 2 W10X22
; Preceding entries completed by opening dialog
; Columns have strong axis in Z (Default is X)
ANGLE=90
; Generate all columns
EDIM FROM=5 TO=10 BY=5 LAST=20 DY=12EDIM 25 30 BY=5 LAST=40 DY=12EDIM 45 50 BY=5 LAST=60 DY=12EDIM 65 70 BY=5 LAST=80 DY=12; Beam orientation is standard
ANGLE=0
; Set the default Section ID to 2
DEF SECID=2
; Beams are pinned, both ends are free to rotate
BEAM FREE FBNDSTR FBNDWEAK FTORS TBNDSTR TBNDWEAK TTORS
; Define most beams
EDIM 10 30 5 LAST=35 DZ=-14EDIM 30 50 5 LAST=60 DX=-10EDIM 50 70 5 LAST=80 DZ=14EDIM 70 10 5 LAST=20 DX=10; Node 1000 will be fixed in rotation

CAESAR II User's Guide

351

Structural Steel Modeler

BEAM FIX FAXIAL FSHRSTR FSHRWEAK TAXIAL TBNDSTR TBNDWEAK TSHRSTR
TSHRWEAK TTORS
; Add midpoint 1000 on top beam
EDIM 20 1000 DZ=-7EDIM 40 1000 DZ=7; Define anchors at the bottom of each column
FIX 5 65 BY=20 ALL
; Set representative loads
LOAD 1000 FX=0000 FY=10000 FZ=10000
9. After you enter all of the model data, the SUPP3 structural model appears as follows:

10. When you are satisfied that the model has been entered properly, click File > Save to check
and save the model.
CAESAR II checks the input. If no fatal errors are found, the software writes the CAESAR II
Execution files. The model may now be used in a piping analysis or analyzed by itself. For
the purposes of this example the model will be analyzed by itself.
11. Return to the CAESAR II Main menu.

352

CAESAR II User's Guide

Structural Steel Modeler

Analyze the structural model for Example #3
The structural input processor generates a number of lists you can use for documentation and
checking.
1. Open the Classic Piping Input dialog box for the SUPP3 model.
2. Click Analysis > Statics.
From this point, structural steel analysis is performed just like a piping analysis. Output from
a structural analysis is comprised of displacements, forces, and moments.
Remember to replace the Weight load in Load Case 1 with F1 (the applied loads).
The Displacements and Global Element Forces reports for the (Force Only) load case are
shown below:

CAESAR II User's Guide

353

Structural Steel Modeler

354

CAESAR II User's Guide

Structural Steel Modeler

The structure is more stiff in the X direction, even though the Z dimension is greater, due to the
orientation of the columns. The Global Element Forces (which displays forces and moments)
report is particularly interesting because all of the beams have pinned ends. Most of the beams
carry no load. This is because the transfer of the load to the beams in this model is due to
rotations at the column ends, and not translations. Cross-braces would eliminate this problem
and cause the beams to pick up more of the load. The 1000 end of the elements from 20-1000
and from 40-1000 carries a moment because it is not a pinned end connection. The 1000 end is
just a point at midspan for the application of the load.
Kx = 10,000 lb. / 7.0909 in. = 1410 lb./in
Ky = 10,000 lb. / 0.2828 in. = 35360 lb./in.
Kz = 10,000 lb. / 25.7434 in. = 388 lb./in.

CAESAR II User's Guide

355

Structural Steel Modeler

The Structural Modeler Window

Use Structural Input
to enter information to build your structural model. The Structural
Modeler window is divided into two sections. The Card Stack pane displays model parameters,
called cards, on the left and the graphical view of the model you are building displays on the
right.

The Card Stack pane is sub-divided into two columns. The first column displays cards and card
parameters. Enter parameter data in the second column. To add a card to the stack, select the
command from either the Commands menu or the Commands tool bar. For more information,
see Commands Menu (on page 359).
Click + to expand the Card Stack and view the parameters available for a command. Type or
select the values in the second column. Add all the commands to the card stack then click
to
generate the structural model.
Card Stack, List Options, and Errors tabs are available at the bottom of the Card Stack pane.
The tabs display mode, keyword and error information. Click Auto Hide
to collapse the tabs
to the left side of the window. Click Close X to hide the tabs.
The Errors tab does not display when there are no errors in the model.

356

CAESAR II User's Guide

Structural Steel Modeler

Model Setup using the Structural Steel Wizard

Define job parameters for a new model using the Structural Steel Wizard.

Create a new job file

1. Click File > New.
The New Job Name Specification dialog box appears.
2. In the Enter the name for the NEW job file box, type the name of the structural steel file
you want to create.
3. Select Structural Input .
4. In the Enter the data directory box, type the directory name or browse for a directory.
5. Click OK.
The Units Selection page of the Structural Steel Wizard appears.

Select a units file

Use the Units Selection page of the Structural Steel Wizard to select the units file to use with
your model.
1. In the Select a units file for this model box, select a units file.
2. Click Next.
The Vertical Axis Selection page of the Structural Steel Wizard appears.
Click Accept Defaults if you want to use the options previously selected in Tools >
Configure/Setup.

Select a vertical axis

Use the Vertical Selection page of the Structural Steel Wizard to select the units file to use
with your model.
1. In the Select which axis is vertical for this box, select Y or Z.
2. Click Next.
The Material Specification page of the Structural Steel Wizard appears.

Select material properties

Use the Materials Specification page of the Structural Steel Wizard to enter material
properties for the structural steel members.
1. Type values for Density, Yield Strength, Young's (Young's Modulus), Poisson's Ratio
and Shear Modulus.
2. Optionally, type one or more thermal expansion coefficient values for Expansion
Coefficients.
3. Click Add Another Material if you need to define additional material properties.
The value of the Material ID increases by one.
4. Click Next.
The Cross Section Specification page of the Structural Steel Wizard appears.
You can have up to nine values for the Expansion Coefficient and use a separate
Material ID for each coefficient.

CAESAR II User's Guide

357

Structural Steel Modeler

Define a cross-section
Use the Cross Section Specification page of the Structural Steel Wizard to enter the
cross-sections in the model.
1. Click Select Section ID.
The Section ID Selection dialog box appears.
2. Expand the hierarchy as needed, select a cross-section and click OK.
You can also type a cross section name in the Name box. For more information, see
Structural Databases (on page 395) for cross section names in the CAESAR II databases.
3. Optionally, select User Defined? to create a custom section. Enter values for Area, Ixx
(moment of inertia about the strong axis), Iyy (moment of inertia about the weak axis),
Torsional R (torsional resistivity constant), BoxH (overall height) and BoxW (overall width).
4. Click Add Another Section if you need to define additional cross-sections.
The value for the Section ID increases by one.
5. Click Next.
The Model Definition page of the Structural Steel Wizard appears.

Select the model definition method

Use the Model Definition page of the Structural Steel Wizard to select the method you need
to build your model.
1. Select Method 1 - Element Definitions or Method 2 - Node / Element Specification.
2. Click Finish.
The Structural Steel Wizard closes and the new job file opens in the Structural Steel
Modeler window.

Insert Menu
Use the Insert menu to specify where to place a command from the Command menu in the
Card Stock pane.

Before Current Element

Places a new card above the selected card in the Card Stack.

After the Current Element

Places a new card below the selected command in the Card Stack.

358

CAESAR II User's Guide

Structural Steel Modeler

At End of Model
Places a new card at the end of the model (that is, at the bottom of the Card Stack).

Commands Menu
Use the Commands Menu to add cards in the Card Stack pane. The cards define parameters
used in the structural model.

Node
Node or Commands > Node defines the coordinates of a point in global X, Y, and Z space
and places the following card in the Card Stack pane:

Define the coordinates

1. Select the appropriate row in the Card Stack pane.
2. Use the needed command from the Insert menu to place the NODE command in the
needed position. For more information, see Insert Menu (on page 358).
3. Click Node
.
The NODE card is added to the Card Stack.
4. Click
to expand the NODE card and view the properties.
5. Add values to the NODE properties.
6. Click Save
to finish.
The CAESAR II Error Checker automatically checks the model for errors.

node number
Specifies the node number.

x, y, z
Specifies the global coordinates.

CAESAR II User's Guide

359

Structural Steel Modeler

NFill
NFill or Commands > NFill defines evenly spaced nodes between two end points and places
the following card in the Card Stack:

Add a node between defined end points

1. Select the appropriate row in the Card Stack.
2. Use the needed command from the Insert menu to place the NFILL card in the needed
position. For more information, see Insert Menu (on page 358).
3. Click Nfill
.
The NFILL card is added to the Card Stack.
4. Click
to expand the NFILL card and view the properties.
5. Add values to the NFILL properties.
6. Click
Save if you are finished.
The CAESAR II Error Checker automatically checks the model for errors.

from
Specifies the from node number.

to
Specifies the to node number.

by
Specifies the increment in the range.

NGen
NGen or Commands > NGen duplicates patterns of nodes and places the following card in
the Card Stack pane:

360

CAESAR II User's Guide

Structural Steel Modeler

The first and last node in the base node pattern must exist before you can use NGen. Other
nodes not previously defined in the base node pattern are evenly spaced by a defined increment
between the first and last node. Subsequent nodal patterns start from the base pattern. DX, DY,
and DZ offsets define nodes duplicated from the base pattern of nodes.

Duplicate node
1. Select the appropriate row in the Card Stack pane.
2. Use the needed command from the Insert menu to place the NGEN card in the needed
position. For more information, see Insert Menu (on page 358).
3. Click NGen
.
The NGEN card is added to the Card Stack.
4. Click to
expand the NGEN card and view the properties.
5. Add values to the NGEN properties.
6. Click Save
to finish.
The CAESAR II Error Checker automatically checks the model for errors.

from
Specifies the first node in the base node pattern. You must enter a value for an existing node
before you can use NGen.

to
Specifies the last node in the base node pattern. You must enter a value for an existing node
before you can use NGen.

inc
Specifies a value for the increment you want to use in the base node pattern between the first
node and the last node. If you do not enter a value, the default is 1.

last
Specifies the number of times to duplicate the base node pattern. If you do not enter a value,
single pattern duplication occurs.

nodeInc
Specifies a value for the increment that you want to use in the base node pattern to the nodes in
the first generated pattern and then from this pattern to the next generated pattern and so forth.

CAESAR II User's Guide

361

Structural Steel Modeler

dx, dy, dz
Specifies the global coordinate offsets to get from the nodes in the base pattern to the nodes in
the first generated pattern, and then from this pattern to the next generated pattern, and so forth.

Example
The nodes from 1100 to 2000 with an increment of 100 are duplicated twice. Each new pattern
is offset by 10 ft. in the Z-direction. The new nodes created are from 2100 to 3000 and also from
3100 to 4000.

Fix
Fix or Commands > Fix defines the restraint boundary conditions at the structural member
end points and places the following card in the Card Stack pane:

Define restraint boundary conditions

1. Select the appropriate row in the Card Stack pane.
2. Use the needed command from the Insert menu to place the FIX card in the needed
position. For more information, see Insert Menu (on page 358).
3. Click Fix .
The FIX card is added to the Card Stack.
4. Click
to expand the FIX card and view the properties.
5. Add values to the FIX properties.
6. Click Save
to finish.
The CAESAR II Error Checker automatically begins to check the model for errors.
If needed you can enter the stiffness in the field following the fixity indicator. If you omit the
stiffness value, the fixity is considered to be rigid.

362

CAESAR II User's Guide

Structural Steel Modeler

from
Specifies the first node number in the range.
If you are using FIX to define a single node point, you do not need values for to and by.

to
Specifies the last node number in the range.
If you are using FIX to define a single node point, you do not need values for to and by.

by
Specifies the increment in the range.
If you are using FIX to define a single node point, you do not need values for to and by.

x
Specifies the Free or Fixed value in the x direction.

x stiffness
Specifies the value for the translational stiffness in the x direction.

y
Specifies the Free or Fixed value in the y direction.

y stiffness
Specifies the value for the translational stiffness in the y direction.

z
Specifies the Free or Fixed value in the z direction.

z stiffness
Specifies the value for the translational stiffness in the z direction.

CAESAR II User's Guide

363

Structural Steel Modeler

rx
Specifies the value for the rotation in the x direction.

rx stiffness
Specifies the value for the rotational stiffness in the x direction.

ry
Specifies the value for the rotation in the y direction.

ry stiffness
Specifies the value for the rotational stiffness in the y direction.

rz
Specifies the value for the rotation in the z direction.

rz stiffness
Specifies the value for the rotational stiffness in the z direction.

all
Specifies that all six degrees of freedom (DOF) are Free or Fixed.
This parameter is the equivalent of an anchor.

all stiffness
Specifies the same stiffness value for all six degrees of freedom (DOF).

Example
1. FIX 1 ALL. Fix all degrees of freedom at node #1.
2. FIX 5 X1000 Y1000 Z1000. Fix X, Y and Z degrees of freedom at node #5, and use
1,000 lb./in. springs.
3. FIX 100 TO 110. ALL Fix rigidly all degrees of freedom for the nodes from 100 to 110. The
increment between 100 and 110 defaults to 1. Eleven nodes have their fixities defined here.
4. FIX 105 TO 125 BY 5 X1000,1000,1000 Fix X, Y, and Z degrees of freedom for the nodes:
105, 110, 115, 120, and 125, and use 1,000 lb./in. springs.
5. FIX (1) to (10) ALL Fix all degrees of freedom for the first 10 nodes in the node list.

364

CAESAR II User's Guide

Structural Steel Modeler

Elem
Elem or Commands > Elem defines a single element between two nodes and places the
following card in the Card Stack pane:

You can use a section identifier and a material identifier for the element. If you omit the section
and/or material IDs the program uses the current default.

Define an element between two elements

1. Select the appropriate row in the Card Stack pane.
2. Use the needed command from the Insert menu to place the ELEM card in the needed
position. For more information, see Insert Menu (on page 358).
3. Click ELEM
.
The ELEM command is added to the Card Stack.
4. Click
to expand the ELEM card and view the properties.
5. Add values to the ELEM properties.
6. Click Save
to finish.
The CAESAR II Error Checker automatically checks the model for errors.

from
Specifies the from node number.

to
Specifies the to node number.

secId
Specifies the Section ID for the first element generated.

matId
Specifies the Material ID for the first element generated.

CAESAR II User's Guide

365

Structural Steel Modeler

EFill
EFill generates a consecutive string of elements and places the following card in the Card
Stack pane:

You can use the EFill command at any time, none of the elements generated need to exist
prior to adding the EFill command.

Add consecutive elements

1. Select the appropriate row in the Card Stack pane.
2. Use the needed command from the Insert menu to place the EFILL card in the needed
position. For more information, see Insert Menu (on page 358).
3. Click EFill
.
The EFILL card is added to the card stack.
4. Click
to expand the EFILL card and view the properties.
5. Add values to the EFILL properties.
6. Click Save
to finish adding cards to the Card Stack.
The stack is saved and the Error Checker checks your model for errors

from
Specifies the from node number on the first element generated.

to
Specifies the to node number on the first element generated.

366

CAESAR II User's Guide

Structural Steel Modeler

inc
Specifies the increment to get from the from node on the first element to the from node on the
second element. If you do not enter a value, the default is 1.

incTo
Specifies the increment to use to get from the to node of the first element to the to node of the
second element. If you do not enter a value, the value of inc is used.

last
Specifies the to node on the last element generated.

secId
Specifies the Section ID for the first element generated.

matId
Specifies the Material ID for the first element generated.

insecid
Specifies the increment to use to get from the Section ID for the first element to the Section ID
for the second element. If you do not enter a value, the default is 0.

incMatId
Specifies the increment to get from the Material ID for the first element to the Material ID for the
second element. If you do not enter a value, the default is 0.

Example
Elements are generated between each pair of nodes between nodes 1200 and 2000. The
increment between From nodes and To nodes is 100. Nine elements are created in this
example.
Elem was not necessary here. Create all nine elements using EFill and by substituting node
1100 in place of node 1200 in the from field.

CAESAR II User's Guide

367

Structural Steel Modeler

EGen
EGen or Commands EGen duplicates patterns of elements and places the following card in
the Card Stack pane:

Existing elements in the base pattern are redefined during generation.

Duplicate elements
1. Select the appropriate row in the Card Stack pane.
2. Use the needed command from the Insert menu to place the EGEN card in the needed
position. For more information, see Insert Menu (on page 358).
3. Click EGen .
The EGEN card is added to the Card Stack.
4. Click
to expand the EGEN card and view the properties.
5. Add values to the EGEN properties.
6. Click Save
to finish.
The CAESAR II Error Checker checks the model for errors.

from
Specifies the from node on the first element in the base pattern.

to
Specifies the to node on the first element in the base pattern.

368

CAESAR II User's Guide

Structural Steel Modeler

inc
Specifies the increment to use to get from the from node on the first element in the base pattern
to the from node on the second element in base pattern. If you do not enter a value, the default
is 1.

incTo
Specifies the increment to use to get from the to node of the first element to the to node of the
second element. If you do not enter a value, the value of inc is used.

last
Specifies the to node on the last element in the base pattern. The software generates multiple
copies from the base pattern of elements.

genInc
Specifies the increment to get from the from node on the first element in the base pattern to the
from node on the first element in the first duplicate pattern.

genIncTo
Specifies the increment to use to get from the to node on the first element in the base pattern to
the to node on the first element in the first duplicate pattern. If you do not enter a value, the
value of genInc is used.

genLast
Specifies the to node on the last element in the last pattern to be duplicated from the base
pattern.

secId
Specifies the Section ID to use for the elements in the base pattern. If you do not enter a value,
the value from the Default card is used. For more information, see Default (on page 392).

matId
Specifies the Material ID to use for the elements in the base pattern. If you do not enter a value,
the value from the Default card is used. For more information, see Default (on page 392).

CAESAR II User's Guide

369

Structural Steel Modeler

inSecId
Specifies the Section ID increment to use between patterns. For example, the first pattern of
elements generated from the base pattern of elements has a Section ID of SECID + INCSECID.
If you do not enter a value, the default is 0.

incMatId
Specifies the Material ID increment to use between patterns. If you do not enter a value, the
default is 0.

Example
Building on the Example for EFill (see "Example" on page 367). The base element pattern from
1100 to 2000 is reproduced two additional times, from 2100 to 3000 and from 3100 to 4000.
Each element has nodal increments of 100. The increment between the Base Element and the
Next Element is 1000 and the last node in the last pattern is 4000. The cross members are
created using the base pattern from 1100 to 2100 and reproducing it in nodal increments of 100
until node 4000 is reached.

370

CAESAR II User's Guide

Structural Steel Modeler

Edim
EDim or Commands > EDim defines elements using the dimensions of the element instead
of references to nodes and places the following card in the Card Stock pane:

Any existing elements encountered are redefined. If you are defining a single element, do not
enter values for inc, incto, and last.

Define elements using element dimensions

1. Select the appropriate row in the Card Stack pane.
2. Use the needed command from the Insert menu to place the EDIM card in the needed
position. For more information, see Insert Menu (on page 358).
3. Click EDim
.
The EDIM card is added to the Card Stack.
4. Click
to expand the EDIM card and view the properties.
5. Add values to the EDIM properties.
6. Click Save
to finish.
The CAESAR II Error Checker checks the model for errors.

from
Specifies the from node on the first element to be defined.

CAESAR II User's Guide

371

Structural Steel Modeler

to
Specifies the to node on the last element to be defined.

inc
Specifies the increment to get from the from node on the first element to the from node on the
second element. If you do not enter a value, the default is 1.

incTo
Specifies the increment to use to get from the to node of the first element to the to node of the
second element. If you do not enter a value, the value of inc is used.

last
Specifies the to node on the last element to be defined.

dx, dy, dz
Specifies the global coordinate offsets to get from the nodes in the base pattern to the nodes in
the first generated pattern, and then from this pattern to the next generated pattern, and so forth.

secID
Specifies the Section ID for the first element. If you do not enter a value, the current default is
used.

matID
Specifies the Material ID for the first element. If you do not enter a value, the current default is
used.

incSecId
Specifies the Section ID increment to use to get from the Section ID of the first element to the
Section ID of the second element.

incmatId
Specifies the Material ID increment to get from the Material ID of the first element to the
Material ID of the second element.

372

CAESAR II User's Guide

Structural Steel Modeler

Example
1. EDIM 5 to 10 DY = 12-3 SECID=2. Column 12-3 high from 5 to 10.
2. EDIM 5, 10 DY=12-3, 2. Same column
3. EDIM 2 TO 3 LAST=8 DX=13-3. Defining beams 13-3 long and elements 2-3, 3-4, 4-5, 5-6,
6-7, and 7-8. INC defaults to 1.

Angle
Angle or Commands > Angle defines the default element strong axis orientation and places
the following card in in the Card Stack pane:

Define the element strong axis

1. Select the appropriate row in the Card Stack pane.
2. Use the needed command from the Insert menu to place the ANGLE card in the needed
position. For more information, see Insert Menu (on page 358).
3. Click Angle
.
The ANGLE card is added to the Card Stack.
4. Click
to expand the ANGLE card and view the properties.
5. Add values to the ANGLE properties.
6. Click Save
to finish.
The CAESAR II Error Checker automatically checks the model for errors.

Define structural columns when the strong axis is not parallel to the global X-axis
Use Angle
with a structural column when the strong axis of the column is not parallel to the
global X-axis. When the strong axis of the column is parallel to the global Z-axis, redefine the
default orientation to ANGLE=90. Define the column elements then use ANGLE again to reset
the default orientation to its original value of ANGLE=0.0.

Define the angle of rotation

Orient
and Angle
both define the angle of rotation in degrees about the element center
line from the standard orientation to the element strong axis. Use Orient
to define this angle
for a single element or for a group of elements, and Angle
to define the default orientation to
its original value, such as, ANGLE=0.0.
The default orientation angle is 0.

Find the positive angular rotation

Use the right hand rule to find positive angular rotation. Extend the thumb along the element in
the direction of the to node. The fingers of the right hand circle in the direction of a positive
orientation angle.

Determine the default element orientation

If the member is vertical, then the default strong axis is along the global-X axis.
If the member is non-vertical then the default strong axis is perpendicular to the center line
of the member and in the horizontal plane of the member.

CAESAR II User's Guide

373

Structural Steel Modeler

The strong axis for the WF shape is:

angle
Specifies a value for the default Strong Axis Orientation Angle to use for all subsequent
defined elements.

Unif
Unif or Commands > Unif defines a constant uniform load that acts over the full length of
the member and places the following card in the Card Stack pane:

Uniform loads can have special meanings when used in CAESAR II Piping runs.
If you are defining a uniform load that acts on a single element only, do not enter values for
inc, incTo, and last.

Define a uniform load

1. Select the appropriate row in the Card Stack pane.
2. Use the needed command from the Insert menu to place the UNIF command in the needed
position. For more information, see Insert Menu (on page 358).
3. Click Unif
.
The UNIF card is added to the Card Stack.
4. Click
to expand the UNIF card and view the properties.
5. Add values to the UNIF properties.
6. Click Save
to finish.
The CAESAR II Error Checker automatically checks the model for errors.

374

CAESAR II User's Guide

Structural Steel Modeler

from
Specifies the from node on the first element this uniform load is to act on.

to
Specifies the to node on the first element this uniform load is to act on.

inc
Specifies the increment to get from the from node on the first element to the from node on the
second element. If you do not enter a value, the default is 1.

incTo
Specifies the increment to use to get from the to node of the first element to the to node of the
second element. If you do not enter a value, the value of inc is used.

last
Specifies the to node on the last element this uniform load is to act on.

ux, uy, uz
Specifies the magnitude of the uniform load in the global X, Y, and Z directions. Unless used in
a piping analysis using G loads, use uniform loads in units of force per unit length of member.
When used in a piping analysis with G loads the uniform loads are in units of gravitational
acceleration, for example, uy=-1 would define a uniform load identical to the member weight
load.

Examples
1. UNIF 1 TO 2 UY=-2.3 On the element from 1 to 2 a uniform load with a magnitude of 2.3
lbs. per inch acts in the -Y direction.
2. UNIF 1, 2, UY -2, 3 Same
3. UNIF 100 TO 200 INC=2 INCTO=3
4. LAST=500 UX=0.03, -1, 0.03 There are uniform loads acting on elements 100-200,
102-203,...,300-500 with a small horizontal component and a -1 load in the Y. It looks like
you have G load input for the piping problem.
5. UNIF (1) to (30) UY=-2.3 The first thirty elements in the element list have a uniform load of
-2.3 pounds per inch acting in the -Y direction.

CAESAR II User's Guide

375

Structural Steel Modeler

Orient
Orient or Commands > Orient defines the element strong axis orientation and places the
following card in the Card Stack pane:

Define the element strong axis orientation

1. Select the appropriate row in the Card Stack pane.
2. Use the needed command from the Insert menu to place the ORIENT card in the needed
position in the Card Stack. For more information, see Insert Menu (on page 358).
3. Click Orient
.
The ORIENT card is added to the Card Stack.
4. Click
to expand the ORIENT card and view the properties.
5. Add values to the ORIENT properties.
6. Click Save
to finish.
The CAESAR II Error Checker automatically checks the model for errors.

from
Specifies the from node on the first element.
You can use node numbers or element indices as values for from.

to
Specifies the to node on the first element.
You can use node numbers or element indices as values for to.

inc
Specifies the increment to get from the from node on the first element to the from node on the
second element. If you do not enter a value, the default is 1.

376

CAESAR II User's Guide

Structural Steel Modeler

incTo
Specifies the increment to use to get from the to node of the first element to the to node of the
second element. If you do not enter a value, the value of inc is used.

last
Specifies the to node on the last element to have its orientation angle defined.

angle
Specifies the rotation in degrees from the default position to the actual position of the member
strong axis.

Examples
1. ORIENT 1 TO 2 ANGLE=90. The strong axis for the element from 1 to 2 is 90 away from
the default position.
2. ORIENT 5 TO 10 INC=5 LAST=30 ANGLE=90. The vertical column elements: 5-10, 10-15,
15-20, 20-25, and 25-30 have their strong axes 90 away from the default position. Their
new strong axis is along the Z axis. With their new orientation, the columns are better suited
to take X direction forces.
3. ORIENT 1 TO (20) ANGLE=90. The first twenty elements in the element list have their
strong axes 90 away from the default position.

Load
Load or Commands > Load defines concentrated forces and moments that act at structural
member end points. It places the following card in the Card Stock pane:

Define concentrated forces and moments

1. Select the appropriate row in the Card Stack pane.
2. Use the needed command from the Insert menu to place the LOAD card in the needed
position. For more information, see Insert Menu (on page 358).
3. Click Load
.
The LOAD command is added to the Card Stack.
4. Click
to expand the LOAD card and view the properties.

CAESAR II User's Guide

377

Structural Steel Modeler

5. Add values to the LOAD properties.
6. Click Save
to finish.
The CAESAR II Error Checker automatically checks the model for errors.

from
Specifies the from node on the first element the load is to act on.
If you are defining a load for a single node point, you do not need values for to and by.

to
Specifies the to node on the first element the load is to act on.
If you are defining a load for a single node point, you do not need values for to and by.

by
Specifies the increment in the range.
If you are defining a load for a single node point, you do not need values for to and by.

fx, fy, fz
Specifies the magnitude of concentrated forces in the global X, Y, and Z directions.

mx, my, mz
Specifies the magnitude of the moments in the global X, Y, and Z directions.

Examples
1. LOAD 305 FY-1000. Have a minus 1,000 lb. Y direction load acting at the structural node
#305.
2. LOAD 10 TO 18 BY=1 FX=707, FZ=707. Have skewed loads in the horizontal plane acting
at each of the nodes 10, 11,..., 17, 18. You do not have to use by here, the default is 1.
th
3. LOAD (15) to (25) FY=-383. A load of 383 pounds acts in the -Y direction on the 15
th
through the 25 nodes in the Node list.

Wind Loads
Wind or Commands > Wind defines the magnitude of the wind shape factor for the
structural elements and places a card in the Card Stack pane:

378

CAESAR II User's Guide

Structural Steel Modeler

Define wind shape factor
1. Select the appropriate row in the Card Stack pane.
2. Use the needed command from the Insert menu to place the WIND card in the needed
position. For more information, see Insert Menu (on page 358).
3. Click Wind
.
The Wind card is added to the Card Stack.
4. Click
to expand the WIND card and view the properties.
5. Add values to the WIND properties.
6. Click Save
to finish.
The CAESAR II Error Checker checks the model for errors.

from
Specifies the from node on the first element the wind load is to act on.

to
Specifies the to node on the first element the wind load is to act on.

inc
Specifies the increment to get from the from node on the first element to the from node on the
second element. If you do not enter a value, the default is 1.

incTo
Specifies the increment to use to get from the to node of the first element to the to node of the
second element. If you do not enter a value, the value of inc is used.

last
Specifies the to node of the last element the wind load is to act on.

shape
Specifies a value for the magnitude of the wind shape factor. For structural steel members this
value is usually 2.0. For elements not exposed to the wind, disable wind loading on the structure
by resetting this value to 0. This value populates to all subsequently defined elements. If you do
not enter a value, the default is 2.0.

CAESAR II User's Guide

379

Structural Steel Modeler

Examples
1. WIND 1 TO 2 SHAPE=2.0. The element from 1 to 2 has a shape factor with a magnitude of
2.0 applied. This value is applied to all the following elements.
2. WIND 1, 2, SHAPE 2.0. Same
3. WIND 100 TO 200 INC=2 INCTO=3
4. LAST=500 SHAPE=1.8 There is a wind shape factor of 1.8 on elements 100-200,
102-203,...,300-500.

GLoads
GLoad or Commands > GLoad processes all specified uniform loads as G loads instead of
force/length loads and places the following card in the Card Stack pane:

You cannot use this command with any other parameters.

If structural and piping models are mixed, the GLOADS cards must match. For example,
uniform loads in the piping model must be designed as G loads in the special execution
parameters.

Specify GLoads
1. Select the appropriate row in the Card Stack pane.
2. Use the needed command from the Insert menu to place the GLOADS card in the needed
position. For more information, see Insert Menu (on page 358).
3. Click GLoad .
The GLOADS card is added to the card stack.
4. Click Save
to finish.
The CAESAR II Error Checker automatically checks the model for errors.

380

CAESAR II User's Guide

Structural Steel Modeler

MatId
MatId or Commands > MatId specifies material properties that correspond to a Material ID
number and places the following card in the Card Stack pane:

You must have at least one valid material specification in the input file. For more information,
see Material Properties (on page 192).

Add material properties

1. Select the appropriate row in the Card Stack pane.
2. Use the needed command from the Insert menu to place the MATID card in the needed
position. For more information, see Insert Menu (on page 358).
3. Click MatId
.
The MATID card is added to the Card Stack.
You can use one Matid for a group of elements that has many Section IDs (Secid).
4. Click to expand the Matid card and view the properties.
5. Add values to the Matid properties.
Use Matid 1 for default A-36 structural steel properties.
6. Click Save
to finish.
The CAESAR II Error Checker automatically checks the model for errors.

matId
Specifies a Material ID number. This number is usually 1, and numbered sequentially for
additional materials.
You can change the value assigned by the model input file.

CAESAR II User's Guide

381

Structural Steel Modeler

ym
Specifies a value for Youngs Modulus of Elasticity. The default value is 30,000,000 (30x106) psi
for A-36 structural steel.

pois
Specifies a value for Poissons Ratio. The default value is 0.3 for A-36 structural steel.

g
Specifies a value for the shear modulus. The default value is 11,000,000 (11x106) psi for A-36
structural steel and is typically about one-third the value of Young's Modulus.

ys
Specifies a value for the yield strength. The default value is 36,000 (36x103) psi for A-36
structural steel. This property is currently not used.

dens
Specifies a value for the material density. The default value is 0.283 for A-36 structural steel.

Alpha [x]
Specifies from one to nine values for the coefficients of thermal expansion.
Enter values for Alpha after entering a value for dens.

SecId
SecId or Commands > SecId assigns member cross-section properties to the Section ID
numbers and places the following card in the Card Stack pane:

Add cross-section properties

1. Select the appropriate row in the Card Stack pane.
2. Use the needed command from the Insert menu to place the SECID card in the needed
position. For more information, see Insert Menu (on page 358).
3. Click SecId
.
The SECID card is added to the Card Stack.
4. Click
to expand the SECID card and view the properties.

382

CAESAR II User's Guide

Structural Steel Modeler

5. Add values to the SECID properties.
6. Click Save
to finish.
The CAESAR II Error Checker automatically checks the model for errors.

section Id
Specifies a user-defined Section ID for this set of cross-section properties. Section IDs usually
start at 1 and increase incrementally by one, but you can assign values in any order.

name
Specifies an American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC) shape name. For a user-defined
shape, type USER. You must enter the AISC names exactly as shown in the AISC handbook
with the exceptions:
Enter fractions as decimals. For example, type LX6X3-1/2X1/2 as L6X3.5X0.5
Omit all leading or trailing zeros.
You can select the section name from the window after clicking the Select Section ID
button.

User-Defined
Specifies a user-defined shape. You must enter values for the additional parameters to define a
user-defined cross-section.

area
2

Specifies the cross-section area (in length units).

lxx
4

Specifies the strong axis moment of inertia (in length units).

lyy
4

Specifies the weak axis moment of inertia (in length units).

torsion
4

Specifies the torsional resistivity constant (in length units).

CAESAR II User's Guide

383

Structural Steel Modeler

boxH
Specifies the height (along the weak axis) of a rectangular box for plotting.

boxW
Specifies the width (along the strong axis) of a rectangular box for plotting.

Free End Connections - FREE

Free or Commands > Free defines the free element end connection types and places the
following card in the Card Stack pane:

For example, use Free

to describe the element ends in a structure that has pinned-only
beam-to-column connections.
You can also use Beams , Braces , and Columns
to set the free end connection
defaults for certain types of members. For more information, see Beams (on page 386), Braces
(on page 388), and Columns (on page 390).
After you define each element and set the defaults, the program automatically adds a card
to the Card Stack and adds values to FREE parameters. Use this to help keep track of the
connections and nodes that define the element.

Define Free End connection types

1. Select the appropriate row in the Card Stack pane.
2. Use the needed command from the Insert menu to place the FREE card in the needed
position. For more information, see Insert Menu (on page 358).
3. Click Free
.
The Free command is added to the Card Stack.
4. Click
to expand the FREE card and view the properties.

384

CAESAR II User's Guide

Structural Steel Modeler

5. Add values to the FREE properties.
6. Click Save
to finish.
The CAESAR II Error Checker automatically checks the model for errors.

from
Specifies the from node on the first element that this FREE command is to apply to.

to
Specifies the to node on the first element that this FREE command is to apply to.

inc
Specifies the increment to get from the from node on the first element to the from node on the
second element. If you do not enter a value, the default is 1.

incTo
Specifies the increment to use to get from the to node of the first element to the to node of the
second element. If you do not enter a value, the value of inc is used.

last
Specifies a value for the to node on the last element this FREE command is to apply to. You
can omit last, inc, and incTo if the FREE command is only to apply to a single element.

Parameters for Degrees of Freedom

The following parameters define the degrees of freedom (DOF) at the element end that is free.
Any combination can be used.

At the from node

FAXIAL

Axial translational DOF

FSHRSTR

Strong axis shear translational DOF

FSHRWEAK

Weak axis shear translational DOF

FTORS

Torsional DOF

FBNDSTR

Strong axis bending DOF

FBNDWEAK

Weak axis bending DOF

At the to node
TAXIAL

Axial translational DOF

TSHRSTR

Strong axis shear translational DOF

TSHRWEAK

Weak axis shear translational DOF

TTORS

Torsional DOF

CAESAR II User's Guide

385

Structural Steel Modeler

TBNDSTR

Strong axis bending DOF

TBNDWEAK

Weak axis bending DOF

Examples
1. A small WF shape has a pinned connection to a large I-beam. The weak axis bending of the
WF shape is not transmitted to the web of the I-beam. If the element defining the WF shape
uses nodes 1040 to 1045 then the FREE card for this element has the following format:
FREE 1040 TO 1045 fbndweak, tbndweak
2. The westward side of a building has a row of beams on the ground floor that are attached
rigidly to columns at the other end. The beams are identified by the pattern of nodes:
610-710, 620-720, 630-730, ..., 690-790. There are eight beams in this group. The 600 end
is pinned. The FREE cards for this group have the following format:
FREE 610 TO 710 INC=10 LAST=790 ftors, fbndstr, fbndweak

Beams
Beams or Commands > Beams defines default end connection types for members identified
by the orientation of their center lines. It places the following card in the Card Stack pane:

A beam is any member whose center line lies completely along either the global X or global Z
axis. After you use Beams
to define the element end connections, any element subsequently
defined inherits those end connection conditions.
Use the standard structural element connections Beams , Braces , and Columns
to define default end connection types for members identified by the orientation of their center
line. For more information, see Braces (on page 388), and Columns (on page 390).

Add beam element connections

1. Select the appropriate row in the Card Stack pane.
2. Use the needed command from the Insert menu to place the BEAMS card in the needed
position. For more information, see Insert Menu (on page 358).
3. Click Beams .
The BEAMS card is added to the Card Stack.

386

CAESAR II User's Guide

Structural Steel Modeler

4. Click
to expand the BEAMS card and view the properties.
5. Add values to the BEAMS properties.
6. Click Save
to finish.
The CAESAR II Error Checker automatically checks the model for errors.
If fix is the only parameter defined for Beams, then all degrees of freedom for the beam
are fixed.

mode
Defines the beams end connection type:
Free - Releases end connections.
Fix - Resets released end connections.
If fix is the only parameter defined for Beams, then all degrees of freedom for the beam
are fixed.

Parameters for Degrees of Freedom

The following parameters define the degrees of freedom (DOF) at each element end. Any
combination can be used. By default, each end is fixed in all six degrees of freedom.

At the from node

FAXIAL

Axial translational DOF

FSHRSTR

Strong axis shear translational DOF

FSHRWEAK

Weak axis shear translational DOF

FTORS

Torsional DOF

FBNDSTR

Strong axis bending DOF

FBNDWEAK

Weak axis bending DOF

At the to node
TAXIAL

Axial translational DOF

TSHRSTR

Strong axis shear translational DOF

TSHRWEAK

Weak axis shear translational DOF

TTORS

Torsional DOF

TBNDSTR

Strong axis bending DOF

TBNDWEAK

Weak axis bending DOF

CAESAR II User's Guide

387

Structural Steel Modeler

Examples
1. A group of beams that has both ends pinned must use the Free command. The BEAMS
card for this group has the following format:
Beams FREE
ftors
fbndstr
fbndweak
tbndstr
tbndweak
2. Pinned-end beams must be returned to end connection default values. The BEAMS card for
this group has the following format:
Beams FIX
ftors
fbndstr
fbndweak
tbndstr
tbndweak

Braces
Braces or Commands > Braces defines default end connection types for members
identified by the orientation of their center lines. It places the following card in the Card Stack
pane:

A brace is any member whose center line does not completely lie along any of the global axes.
After you use Braces
to define element end connections, any brace element subsequently
defined inherits those end connection conditions.
Use the standard structural element connections Beams , Braces , and Columns
to define default end connection types for members identified by the orientation of their center
line. For more information, see Beams (on page 386) and Columns (on page 390).

388

CAESAR II User's Guide

Structural Steel Modeler

Add Braces
1. Select the appropriate row in the Card Stack pane.
2. Use the needed command from the Insert menu to place the BRACES card in the needed
position. For more information, see Insert Menu (on page 358).
3. Click Braces .
The BRACES command is added to the Card Stack.
4. Click
to expand the BRACES card and view the properties.
5. Add values to the BRACES properties.
6. Click Save
to finish.
The CAESAR II Error Checker automatically checks the model for errors.
If fix is the only parameter defined for Braces, then all degrees of freedom for the brace
are fixed.

mode
Defines the braces end connection type:
Free - Releases end connections.
Fix - Resets released end connections.
If fix is the only parameter defined for Braces, then all degrees of freedom for the brace
are fixed.

Parameters for Degrees of Freedom

The following parameters define the degrees of freedom (DOF) at each element end. Any
combination can be used. By default, each end is fixed in all six degrees of freedom.

At the from node

FAXIAL

Axial translational DOF

FSHRSTR

Strong axis shear translational DOF

FSHRWEAK

Weak axis shear translational DOF

FTORS

Torsional DOF

FBNDSTR

Strong axis bending DOF

FBNDWEAK

Weak axis bending DOF

At the to node
TAXIAL

Axial translational DOF

TSHRSTR

Strong axis shear translational DOF

TSHRWEAK

Weak axis shear translational DOF

TTORS

Torsional DOF

TBNDSTR

Strong axis bending DOF

TBNDWEAK

Weak axis bending DOF

CAESAR II User's Guide

389

Structural Steel Modeler

Examples
1. A group of braces that has both ends pinned to adjoining columns must use the Free
command. The BRACES card for this group has the following format:
Braces FREE
ftors
fbndstr
fbndweak
tbndstr
tbndweak
2. Pinned-end braces must be returned to end connection default values. The BRACES card
for this group has the following format:
Braces FIX
ftors
fbndstr
fbndweak
tbndstr
tbndweak
If Fix appears on the line following Braces then all end connections for the brace are
fixed.

Columns
Columns or Commands > Columns defines default end connection types for members
identified by the orientation of their center lines. It places the following card in the Card Stack
pane:

A column is any member whose centerline is completely vertical. After you use Columns
define the element end connections, any element subsequently defined inherits those end
connection freedoms.

to

Use the standard structural element connections Beams , Braces , and Columns
to define default end connections types for members identified by the orientation of their center
line. For more information, see Beams (on page 386) and Braces (on page 388).

390

CAESAR II User's Guide

Structural Steel Modeler

Add columns
1. Select the appropriate row in the Card Stack pane.
2. Use the needed command from the Insert menu to place the COLUMNS card in the needed
position. For more information, see Insert Menu (on page 358).
3. Click Columns .
The Columns command is added to the Card Stack.
4. Click
to expand the COLUMNS card and view the properties.
5. Add values to the COLUMNS properties.
6. Click Save
to finish.
The CAESAR II Error Checker automatically checks the model for errors.
If fix is the only parameter defined for Columns, then all degrees of freedom for the
column are fixed.

mode
Defines the columns end connection type:
Free - Releases end connections.
Fix - Resets released end connections.
If fix is the only parameter defined for Columns, then all degrees of freedom for the column are
fixed.

Parameters for Degrees of Freedom

The following parameters define the degrees of freedom (DOF) at each element end. Any
combination can be used. By default, each end is fixed in all six degrees of freedom.

At the from node

FAXIAL

Axial translational DOF

FSHRSTR

Strong axis shear translational DOF

FSHRWEAK

Weak axis shear translational DOF

FTORS

Torsional DOF

FBNDSTR

Strong axis bending DOF

FBNDWEAK

Weak axis bending DOF

At the to node
TAXIAL

Axial translational DOF

TSHRSTR

Strong axis shear translational DOF

TSHRWEAK

Weak axis shear translational DOF

TTORS

Torsional DOF

TBNDSTR

Strong axis bending DOF

TBNDWEAK

Weak axis bending DOF

CAESAR II User's Guide

391

Structural Steel Modeler

Examples
1. A group of corner columns that are pinned at their to ends must use the Free command.
The COLUMNS card for this group has the following format:
Columns FREE
ftors
fbndstr
fbndweak
tbndstr
tbndweak
2. Pinned-end columns must be returned to end connection default values. The COLUMNS
card for this group has the following format:
Columns FIX
ftors
fbndstr
fbndweak
tbndstr
tbndweak
If Fix is all that appears on the line following Columns, then all end connections for the
column are fixed.
As a general rule an element cannot undergo rigid body motion. Therefore, an element cannot
have both ttors and ftors released at the same time. Additionally beams typically have moment
releases only at their ends, not at intermediate nodes used to apply loads or connect bracing.

Default
Default or Commands > Default specifies the default values of the Section ID and the
Material ID and places the following card in the Card Stack pane:

If you create an element without a Section ID or Material ID, the default values defined here are
used.

Set the default Section ID or Material ID

1. Select the appropriate row in the Card Stack pane.
2. Use the needed command from the Insert menu to place the DEFAULT card in the needed
position. For more information, see Insert Menu (on page 358).
3. Click Default
.
The DEFAULT card is added to the Card Stack.
4. Click
to expand the DEFAULT card and view the properties.
5. Add values to the DEFAULT properties.
6. Click Save
to finish.
The CAESAR II Error Checker automatically checks the model for errors.

392

CAESAR II User's Guide

Structural Steel Modeler

Comment
Comment or Commands > Comment adds a comment card to the Card Stack pane:

Add a comment
1. Select the appropriate row in the Card Stack pane.
2. Use the needed command from the Insert menu to place the COMMENT card in the
needed position. For more information, see Insert Menu (on page 358).
3. Click Comment
.
The COMMENT card is added to the Card Stack.
4. Click
to expand the COMMENT card.
5. Type the information to add.
6. Click Save
to finish.
The CAESAR II Error Checker automatically checks the model for errors.

Vertical
Vertical or Commands > Vertical specifies the axis orientation of a new or existing model
and places the following card in the Card Stack pane:

The axis orientation of the Static Load Case Builder, (for example in wind and wave
loads), the Static Output Processor, the Dynamic Input Module, and the Dynamic
Output Processor is specified only by the orientation in the input file. For more information,
see Select a Vertical Axis (on page 357).
Unlike the piping and equipment files elsewhere in CAESAR II, changing this command
does not change the orientation of the structural input file. It rotates the model into the new
coordinate system.
When you include the structural files in a piping model, the axis orientations of the structural
files do not have to match the orientation of the piping model. The software translates the
orientation.

Specify the axis orientation

1. Select the appropriate row in the Card Stack pane and use the needed command from the
Insert menu to place the VERTICAL card in the needed position. For more information, see
the Insert Menu (on page 358).
2. Click Vertical
.
The Vertical command is added to the Card Stack.
3. Select Y or Z as the vertical axis.

CAESAR II User's Guide

393

Structural Steel Modeler

Find the axis orientation of a new model
In the main CAESAR II window, click Tools > Configure/Setup to determine the axis
orientation of a new structural model based on the selected setting.

Find the axis orientation of an existing model

Open an existing model and check the last saved axis orientation to visually determine the axis
orientation.

Unit
Unit or Commands > Unit specifies the unit file and places the following card in the Card
Stack pane:

Use this command before entering any material, section, or dimensional data.
You do not have to choose the same file selected in configuration setup. For more
information, see Select a units file (on page 357).

List Options
List Options displays node and coordinate data, specifies node ranges, and selects reports.
Click ALL to display a copy of each report.

View reports
1. Click the List Options tab located at the bottom of the Card Stock.
The List Options pane appears.
2. Select the report you want to see.
The selected report appears in the Report pane.

394

CAESAR II User's Guide

Structural Steel Modeler

Structural Databases
The CAESAR II Structural databases contain over 20 different properties for each crosssection. For the finite element solution, only six of these items are employed:
Area
Strong axis moment of inertia
Weak axis moment of inertia
Torsional resistivity constant
Member section height
Member section depth
There are seven different structural databases included in CAESAR II
AISC 1977
AISC 1989
German 1991
Australian 1990
South African 1992
Korean 1990
UK 1993

AISC 1977 Database

W36X300

W36X280

W36X260 W36X245

W36X230

W36X210

W36X194

W36X182

W36X170 W36X160

W36X150

W36X135

W33X241

W33X221

W33X201 W33X152

W33X141

W33X130

W33X118

W30X211

W30X191 W30X173

W30X132

W30X124

W30X116

W30X108

W30X99

W27X178

W27X161

W27X146

W27X114

W27X102

W27X94

W27X84

W24X162

W24X146

W24X131

W24X117

W24X104 W24X94

W24X84

W24X76

W24X68

W24X62

W24X55

W21X147

W21X132

W21X122

W21X111

W21X101

W21X93

W21X83

W21X73

W21X68

W21X62

W21X57

W21X50

W21X44

W18X119

W18X106

W18X97

W18X86

W18X76

W18X71

W18X65

W18X60

W18X55

W18X50

W18X46

W18X40

W18X35

W16X100

W16X89

W16X77

W16X67

W16X57

W16X50

W16X45

W16X40

W16X36

W16X31

W16X26

W14X730

W14X665

W14X605

W14X550

W14X500 W14X455

W14X426

W14X398

W14X370

W14X342

W14X311 W14X283

W14X257

W14X233

W14X211

W14X193

W14X176 W14X159

W14X145

W14X132

CAESAR II User's Guide

395

Structural Steel Modeler

W14X120

W14X109

W14X99

W14X90

W14X82

W14X74

W14X68

W14X61

W14X53

W14X48

W14X43

W14X38

W14X34

W14X30

W14X26

W14X22

W12X336

W12X305

W12X279

W12X252

W12X230 W12X210

W12X190

W12X170

W12X152

W12X136

W12X120 W12X106

W12X96

W12X87

W12X79

W12X72

W12X65

W12X58

W12X53

W12X50

W12X45

W12X40

W12X35

W12X30

W12X26

W12X22

W12X19

W12X16

W12X14

W10X112

W10X100

W10X88

W10X77

W10X68

W10X60

W10X54

W10X49

W10X45

W10X39

W10X33

W10X30

W10X26

W10X22

W10X19

W10X17

W10X15

W10X12

W8X67

W8X58

W8X48

W8X40

W8X35

W8X31

W8X28

W8X24

W8X21

W8X18

W8X15

W8X13

W8X10

W6X25

W6X20

W6X16

W6X15

W6X12

W6X9

W5X19

W5X16

W4X13

M14X18

M12X11.8 M10X9

M8X6.5

M6X20

M6X4.4

M5X18.9 M4X13

S24X121

S24X106 S24X100

S24X90 S24X80

S20X96

S20X86

S20X75

S20X66

S18X70 S18X54.7

S15X50

S15X42.9

S12X50

S12X40.8

S12X35 S12X31.8

S10X35

S10X25.4

S8X23

S8X18.4

S7X20

S7X15.3

S6X17.2

S6X12.5

S5X14.7

S5X10

S4X9.5

S4X7.7

S3X7.5

S3X5.7

396

C15X50

C15X40

C15X33.9

C12X30

C12X25

C12X20.7

C10X30

C10X25

C10X20

C10X15.3

C9X20

C9X15

C9X13.4

C8X18.7

C8X13.7

C8X11.5

C7X14.7

C7X12.2

C7X9.8

C6X13

C6X10.5

C6X8.2

C5X9

C5X6.7

C4X7.25

C4X5.4

C3X6

C3X5

C3X4.1

CAESAR II User's Guide

Structural Steel Modeler

MC18X58

MC18X51.9

MC18X45.8

MC18X42.7

MC13X50

MC13X40

MC13X35

MC13X31.8

MC12X50

MC12X45

MC12X40

MC12X35

MC12X37

MC12X32.9

MC12X30.9

MC12X10.6

MC10X41.1

MC10X33.6

MC10X28.5

MC10X28.3

MC10X25.3

MC10X24.9

MC10X21.9

MC10X8.4

MC10X6.5

MC9X25.4

MC9X23.9

MC8X22.8

MC8X21.4

MC8X20

MC8X18.7

MC8X8.5

MC7X22.7

MC7X19.1

MC7X17.6

MC6X18

MC6X15.3

MC6X16.3

MC6X15.1

MC6X12

WT18X150

WT18X140

WT18X130

WT18X122.5

WT18X115

WT18X105

WT18X97

WT18X91

WT18X85

WT18X80

WT18X75

WT18X67.5

WT16.5X120.5

WT16.6X110.5

WT16.5X100.5 WT16.5X76

WT16.5X70.5

WT16.5X65

WT16.5X59

WT15X105.5

WT15X95.5

WT15X86.5

WT15X66

WT15X62

WT15X58

WT15X54

WT15X49.5

WT13.5X89

WT13.5X80.5

WT13.5X73

WT13.5X57

WT13.5X51

WT13.5X47

WT13.5X42

WT12X81

WT12X73

WT12X65.5

WT12X58.5

WT12X52

WT12X47

WT12X42

WT12X38

WT12X34

WT12X31

WT12X27.5

WT10.5X73.5

WT10.5X66

WT10.5X61

WT10.5X55.5

WT10.5X50.5

WT10.5X46.5

WT10.5X41.5

WT10.5X36.5

WT10.5X34

WT10.5X31

WT10.5X28.5

WT10.5X25

WT10.5X22

WT9X59.5

WT9X53

WT9X48.5

WT9X43

WT9X38

WT9X35.5

WT9X32.5

WT9X30

WT9X27.5

WT9X25

WT9X23

WT9X20

WT9X17.5

WT8X50

WT8X44.5

WT8X38.5

WT8X33.5

WT8X28.5

WT8X25

WT8X22.5

WT8X20

WT8X18

WT8X15.5

WT8X13

WT7X365

WT7X332.5

WT7X302.5

WT7X275

WT7X250

WT7X227.5

WT7X213

WT7X199

WT7X185

WT7X171

WT7X155.5

WT7X141.5

WT7X128.5

WT7X116.5

WT7X105.5

WT7X96.5

WT7X88

CAESAR II User's Guide

397

Structural Steel Modeler

398

WT7X79.5

WT7X72.5

WT7X66

WT7X60

WT7X54.5

WT7X49.5

WT7X45

WT7X41

WT7X37

WT7X34

WT7X30.5

WT7X26.5

WT7X24

WT7X21.5

WT7X19

WT7X17

WT7X15

WT7X13

WT7X11

WT6X168

WT6X152.5

WT6X139.5

WT6X126

WT6X115

WT6X105

WT6X95

WT6X85

WT6X76

WT6X68

WT6X60

WT6X53

WT6X48

WT6X43.5

WT6X39.5

WT6X36

WT6X32.5

WT6X29

WT6X26.5

WT6X25

WT6X22.5

WT6X20

WT6X17.5

WT6X15

WT6X13

WT6X11

WT6X9.5

WT6X8

WT6X7

WT5X56

WT5X50

WT5X44

WT5X38.5

WT5X34

WT5X30

WT5X27

WT5X24.5

WT5X22.5

WT5X19.5

WT5X16.5

WT5X15

WT5X13

WT5X11

WT5X9.5

WT5X8.5

WT5X7.5

WT5X6

WT4X33.5

WT4X29

WT4X24

WT4X20

WT4X17.5

WT4X15.5

WT4X14

WT4X12

WT4X10.5

WT4X9

WT4X7.5

WT4X6.5

WT4X5

WT4X12.5

WT4X10

WT4X7.5

WT3X8

WT3X6

WT3X4.5

WT2.5X9.5

WT2.5X8

WT2X6.5

MT7X9

MT6X5.9

MT5X4.5

MT4X3.25

MT3X10

MT3X2.2

MT2.5X9.45

MT2X6.5

ST12X60.5

ST12X53

ST12X50

ST12X45

ST12X40

ST10X48

ST10X43

ST10X37.5

ST10X33

ST9X35

ST9X27.35

ST7.5X25

ST7.5X21.45

ST6X25

ST6X20.4

ST6X17.5

ST6X15.9

ST5X17.5

ST5X12.7

ST4X11.5

ST4X9.2

ST3.5X10

ST3.5X7.65

ST3X8.625

ST3X6.25

ST2.5X7.375

ST2.5X5

ST2X4.75

ST2X3.85

ST1.5X3.75

ST1.5X2.85

CAESAR II User's Guide

Structural Steel Modeler

Double Angle - Long Legs Back - to - Back
D8X8X1.1250

D8X8X1.0000

D8X8X0.8750

D8X8X0.7500

D8X8X0.6250

D8X8X0.5000

D6X6X1.0000

D6X6X0.8750

D6X6X0.7500

D6X6X0.6250

D6X6X0.5000

D6X6X0.3750

D5X5X0.8750

D5X5X0.7500

D5X5X0.5000

D5X5X0.3750

D5X5X0.3125

D4X4X0.7500

D4X4X0.6250

D4X4X0.5000

D4X4X0.3750

D4X4X0.3125

D4X4X0.2500

D3.5X3.5X0.3750

D3.5X3.5X0.3125 D3.5X3.5X0.2500 D3X3X0.5000

D3X3X0.3750

D3X3X0.3125

D3X3X0.2500

D3X3X0.1875

D2.5X2.5X0.3750 D2.5X2.5X0.3125

D2.5X2.5X0.2500 D2.5X2.5X0.1875 D2X2X0.3750

D2X2X0.3125

D2X2X0.2500

D2X2X0.1875

D2X2X0.1250

D8X6X1.0000

D8X6X0.7500

D8X6X0.5000

D8X4X1.0000

D8X4X0.7500

D8X4X0.5000

D7X4X0.7500

D7X4X0.5000

D7X4X0.3750

D6X4X0.7500

D6X4X0.6250

D6X4X0.5000

D6X4X0.3750

D6X3.5X0.3750

D6X3.5X0.3125

D5X3.5X0.7500

D5X3.5X0.5000

D5X3.5X0.3750

D5X3.5X0.3125

D5X3X0.5000

D5X3X0.3750

D5X3X0.3125

D5X3X0.2500

D4X3.5X0.5000

D4X3.5X0.3750

D4X3.5X0.3125

D4X3.5X0.2500

D4X3X0.5000

D4X3X0.3750

D4X3X0.3125

D4X3X0.2500

D3.5X3X0.3750

D3.5X3X0.3125

D3.5X3X0.2500

D3.5X2.5X0.3750

D3.5X2.5X0.3125 D3.5X2.5X0.2500 D3X2.5X0.3750

D3X2.5X0.2500

D3X2.5X0.1875

D3X2X0.3750

D3X2X0.3125

D3X2X0.2500

D3X2X0.1875

D2.5X2X0.3750

D2.5X2X0.3750

D2.5X2X0.2500

D2.5X2X0.1875

CAESAR II User's Guide

399

Structural Steel Modeler

Double Angle - Short Legs Back - to - Back
B8X6X1.0000

B8X6X0.7500

B8X6X0.2500

B8X4X1.0000

B8X4X0.7500

B8X4X0.5000

B7X4X0.7500

B7X4X0.5000

B7X4X0.3750

B6X4X0.7500

B6X4X0.6250

B6X4X0.5000

B6X4X0.3750

B6X3.5X0.3750

B6X3.5X0.3125

B5X3.5X0.7500

B5X3.5X0.5000

B5X3.5X0.3750

B5X3.5X0.3125

B5X3X0.5000

B5X3X0.3750

B5X3XO.3125

B5X3X0.2500

B4X3.5X0.5000

B4X3.5X0.3750

B4X3.5X0.3125

B4X3.5X0.2500

B4X3X0.5000

B4X3X0.3750

B4X3X0.3125

B4X3X0.2500

B3.5X3X0.3750

B3.5X3X0.3125

B3.5X3X0.2500

B3.5X2.5X0.3750

B3.5X2.5X0.3125 B3.5X2.5X0.2500 B3X2.5X0.3750

B3X2.5X0.2500

B3X2.5X0.1875

B3X2X0.3750

B3X2X0.3125

B3X2X0.2500

B3X2X0.1875

B2.5X2X0.3750

B2.5X2X0.3125

B2.5X2X0.2500

B2.5X2X0.1875

AISC 1989 Database

W44X285 W44X248

W44X224

W44X198

W40X328

W40X298

W40X268 W40X244

W40X221

W40X192

W40X655

W40X593

W40X531 W40X480

W40X436

W40X397

W40X362

W40X324

W40X297 W40X277

W40X249

W40X215

W40X199

W40X183

W40X167 W40X149

W36X848

W36X798

W36X720

W36X650

W36X588 W36X527

W36X485

W36X439

W36X393

W36X359

W36X328 W36X300

W36X280

W36X260

W36X245

W36X230

W36X256 W36X232

W36X210

W36X194

W36X182

W36X170

W36X160 W36X150

W36X135

W33X619

W33X567

W33X515

W33X468 W33X424

W33X387

W33X354

W33X318

W33X291

W33X263 W33X241

W33X221

W33X201

W33X169

W33X152

W33X141 W33X130

W33X118

W30X581

W30X526

W30X477

W30X433 W30X391

W30X357

W30X326

W30X292

W30X261

400

CAESAR II User's Guide

Structural Steel Modeler

W30X235 W30X211

W30X191

W30X173

W30X148

W30X132

W30X124 W30X116

W30X108

W30X99

W30X90

W27X539

W27X494 W27X448

W27X407

W27X368

W27X336

W27X307

W27X281 W27X258

W27X235

W27X217

W27X194

W27X178

W27X161 W27X146

W27X114

W27X102

W27X94

W27X84

W24X492 W24X450

W24X408

W24X370

W24X335

W24X306

W24X279 W24X250

W24X229

W24X207

W24X192

W24X176

W24X162 W24X146

W24X131

W24X117

W24X104

W24X103

W24X94

W24X76

W24X68

W24X62

W24X55

W21X402 W21X364

W21X333

W21X300

W21X275

W21X248

W21X223 W21X201

W21X182

W21X166

W21X147

W21X132

W21X122 W21X111

W21X101

W21X93

W21X83

W21X73

W21X68

W21X57

W21X50

W21X44

W18X311

W18X283 W18X258

W18X234

W18X211

W18X192

W18X175

W18X158 W18X143

W18X130

W18X119

W18X106

W18X97

W18X86

W18X76

W18X71

W18X65

W18X60

W18X55

W18X50

W18X46

W18X40

W18X35

W16X100

W16X89

W24X84

W21X62

WT18X115

WT18X128

WT18X116

WT18X105

WT18X97

WT18X91

WT18X85

WT18X80

WT18X75

WT18X67.5

WT16.5X177

WT16.5X159

WT16.5X145.5

WT16.5X131.5

WT16.5X120.5

WT16.5X110.5

WT16.5X100.5

WT16.5X84.5

WT16.5X76

WT16.5X70.5

WT16.5X65

WT16.5X59

WT15X117.5

WT15X105.5

WT15X95.5

WT15X86.5

WT15X74

WT15X66

WT15X62

WT15X58

WT15X54

WT15X49.5

WT13.5X108.5

WT13.5X97

WT13.5X89

WT13.5X80.5

WT13.5X73

WT13.5X64.5

WT13.5X57

WT13.5X51

WT13.5X47

WT13.5X42

CAESAR II User's Guide

401

Structural Steel Modeler

WT12X88

WT12X81

WT12X73

WT12X65.5

WT12X58.5

WT12X52

WT12X51.5

WT12X47

WT12X42

WT12X38

WT12X34

WT12X31

WT12X27.5

WT10.5X83

WT10.5X73.5

WT10.5X66

WT10.5X61

WT10.5X55.5

WT10.5X50.5

WT10.5X46.5

WT10.5X41.5

WT10.5X36.5

WT10.5X34

WT10.5X31

WT10.5X28.5

WT10.5X25

WT10.5X22

WT9X71.5

WT9X65

WT9X59.5

WT9X53

WT9X48.5

WT9X43

WT9X38

WT9X35.5

WT9X32.5

WT9X30

WT9X27.5

WT9X25

WT9X23

WT9X20

WT9X17.5

WT8X50

WT8X44.5

WT8X38.5

WT8X33.5

WT8X28.5

WT8X25

WT8X22.5

WT8X20

WT8X18

WT8X15.5

WT8X13

WT7X365

WT7X332.5

WT7X302.5

WT7X275

WT7X250

WT7X227.5

WT7X213

WT7X199

WT7X185

WT7X171

MT7X9

MT6X5.9

MT5X4.5

ST12X60.5

ST12X53

ST12X50

ST12X45

ST12X40

ST10X48

ST10X43

ST10X37.5

ST10X33

ST9X35

ST9X27.35

ST7.5X25

ST7.5X21.45

ST6X25

ST6X20.4

ST6X17.5

ST6X15.9

ST5X17.5

ST5X12.7

ST4X11.5

ST4X9.2

ST3.5X10

ST3.5X7.65

ST3X8.625

ST3X6.25

ST2.5X7.375

ST2.5X5

ST2X4.75

ST2X3.85

ST1.5X3.75

WT7X155.

MT4X3.25

MT3X2.2

MT2.5X9.45

ST1.5X2.85

402

CAESAR II User's Guide

Structural Steel Modeler

CAESAR II User's Guide

403

Structural Steel Modeler

404

CAESAR II User's Guide

Structural Steel Modeler

German 1991 Database

I80

I100 I120

I140

I160

I180

I200

I220 I240

I260

I280

I300

I320

I340 I360

I380

I400

I425

I450

I475 I500

I550

I600

IPE80

IPE100 IPE120 IPE140 IPE160 IPE180

IPE200

IPE220 IPE240 IPE270 IPE300 IPE330

IPE360

IPE400 IPE450 IPE500 IPE550 IPE600

IPEO180 IPEO200

IPEO220

IPEO240

IPEO270

IPEO300

IPEO330 IPEO360

IPEO400

IPEO450

IPEO500

IPEO550

IPEV400 IPEV450

IPEV500

IPEV550

IPEV600

IPBI-100

IPBI-120

IPBI-140

IPBI-160

IPBI-180

IPBI-200

IPBI-220

IPBI-240

IPBI-260

IPBI-280

IPBI-300

IPBI-320

IPBI-340

IPBI-360

IPBI-400

IPBI-450

IPBI-500

IPBI-550

IPBI-600

IPBI-650

IPBI-700

IPBI-800

IPBI-900

IPBI-1000

IPB-100

IPB-120

IPB-140

IPB-160

IPB-180

IPB-200

IPB-220

IPB-240

IPB-260

IPB-280

IPB-300

IPB-320

IPB-340

IPB-360

IPB-400

IPB-450

IPB-500

IPB-550

IPB-600

IPB-650

IPB-700

IPB-800

IPB-900

IPB-1000

U30X15

U30

U40X20

U40

U50X25

U50

U60

U65

U80

U100

U120

U140

U160

U180

U200

U220

U240

U260

U280

U300

U320

U350

U380

U400

IPEO600

CAESAR II User's Guide

405

Structural Steel Modeler

T20

T25

T30

T35

T40

T45

T50

T60

T70

T80

T90

T100

T120

T140

Australian 1990 Database

UB760X244 UB760X220 UB760X197

UB760X173 UB760X148 UB690X140

UB690X125 UB610X125 UB610X113

UB610X101 UB530X92

UB530X82

UB460X82

UB460X74

UB460X67

UB410X60

UB410X54

UB360X57

UB360X51

UB360X45

UB310X46

UB310X40

UB250X37

UB250X31

UB200X30

UB200X25

UB180X22

UB180X18

UB150X18

UB150X14

UC310X283 UC310X240 UC310X198 UC310X158

UC310X137 UC310X118

UC310X97

UC250X89

UC250X73

UC200X60

UC200X52

UC150X37

UC150X30

UC150X23

UC100X15

UBP310X79 UBP250X85

TFB125X65

UC200X46

UBP250X63

TFB100X45

TFC125X65 TFC100X50

PFC380X100

TFC75X40

PFC300X90 PFC250X90 PFC230X75 PFC200X75 PFC180X75

PFC150X75

EL200X200X26 EL200X200X20 EL200X200X18

EL200X200X16 EL200X200X13 EL150X150X19
EL150X150X16 EL150X150X12 EL150X150X10
EL125X125X16 EL125X125X12 EL125X125X10

406

EL125X125X8

EL100X100X12 EL100X100X10

EL100X100X8

EL100X100X6

EL90X90X10

EL90X90X8

EL90X90X6

EL75X75X10

EL75X75X8

EL75X75X6

EL75X75X5

CAESAR II User's Guide

Structural Steel Modeler

EL65X65X10

EL65X65X8

EL65X65X6

EL65X65X5

EL55X55X6

EL55X55X5

EL50X50X8

EL50X50X6

EL50X50X5

EL50X50X3

EL45X45X6

EL45X45X5

EL45X45X3

EL40X40X6

EL40X40X5

EL40X40X3

EL30X30X6

EL30X30X5

EL30X30X3

EL25X25X6

EL25X25X5

EL25X25X3

UL150X100X12 UL150X100X10

UL150X90X16

UL150X90X12

UL150X90X10

UL150X90X8

UL125X75X12

UL125X75X10

UL125X75X8

UL125X75X6

UL100X75X10

UL100X75X8

UL100X75X6

UL75X50X8

UL75X50X6

UL75X50X5

UL65X50X8

UL65X50X6

UL65X50X5

CAESAR II User's Guide

407

Structural Steel Modeler

South African 1992 Database

Korean 1990 Database

408

W594X302

W588X300

W582X300

W612X202

W606X201

W600X200

W596X199

W488X300

W482X300

W506X201

W500X200

W496X199

W440X300

W434X299

W450X200

W446X199

W390X300

W386X299

W404X201

W400X200

W396X199

W350X350

W344X354

W344X348

W336X249

W354X176

W350X175

W346X174

W310X310

W310X305

W304X301

W300X305

W300X300

W298X299

W294X302

W298X201

W294X200

W300X150

W298X149

W250X255

W250X250

W248X249

W244X252

W244X175

W340X250

CAESAR II User's Guide

Structural Steel Modeler

W250X125

W248X124

W208X202

W200X204

W200X200

W194X150

W200X100

W150X150

W148X100

W150X75

W125X125

W100X100

L250X250X35 L250X250X25 L200X200X25 L200X200X20 L200X200X15

L175X175X15 L175X175X12 L150X150X19 L150X150X15 L150X150X12
L150X150X10 L130X130X15 L130X130X12 L130X130X10 L130X130X9
L120X120X8

L100X100X13 L100X100X10 L100X100X8

L100X100X7

L90X90X13

L90X90X10

L90X90X9

L90X90X8

L90X90X7

L90X90X6

L80X80X7

L80X80X6

L75X75X12

L75X75X9

L75X75X6

L70X70X6

L65X65X8

L65X65X6

L65X65X5

L60X60X6

L60X60X5

L60X60X4

L50X50X6

L50X50X5

L50X50X4

L45X45X5

L45X45X4

L40X40X5

C300X90

C300X91

C300X92

C125X65

C100X50

C75X40

M300X150

M250X125

M200X100

CAESAR II User's Guide

C300X93

C300X94

M150X75

M125X75

409

Structural Steel Modeler

UK 1993 Database

410

CAESAR II User's Guide

SECTION 6

Buried Pipe Modeler

Buried Pipe Modeler or Input > Underground takes an unburied layout and buries it. The
modeler performs the following functions:
Allows the direct input of soil properties. The modeler contains the equations for buried pipe
stiffnesses. These equations are used to calculate the stiffnesses on a per length of pipe
basis and then generate the restraints that simulate the discrete buried pipe restraint.
Breaks down straight and curved lengths of pipe to locate soil restraints using a zone
concept. Where transverse bearing is a concern near bends, tees, and entry/exit points, soil
restraints are located in close proximity.
Breaks down straight and curved pipe so that when axial loads dominate, soil restraints are
spaced far apart.
Allows the direct entry of user-defined soil stiffnesses on a pipe-length basis. Input
parameters include axial, transverse, upward, and downward stiffnesses, as well as ultimate
loads. You can specify stiffnesses separately or in conjunction with CAESAR IIs
automatically generated soil stiffnesses.
The Buried Pipe Modeler is designed to read a standard CAESAR II input data file that
describes the basic layout of the piping system as if it was not buried. From this input, the
software creates a second input data file that contains the buried pipe model. This second input
file typically contains a much larger number of elements and restraints than the first job. The first
file that serves as the pattern is called the original job. The second file that contains the element
mesh refinement and the buried pipe restraints is called the buried job. CAESAR II names the
buried file by appending the letter B to the name of the original job.
The original job must already exist. During the process of creating the buried model, the
modeler removes any restraints in the buried section. Any additional restraints in the buried
section can be entered in the resulting buried model. The buried job, if it exists, is overwritten by
the successful generation of a buried pipe model. It is the buried job that is eventually run to
compute displacements and stresses.
Typical buried pipe displacements are considerably different than similar above-ground
displacements. Buried pipe deforms laterally in areas immediately adjacent to changes in
directions, such as those found in bends and tees. In areas far removed from bends and tees,
the deformation is primarily axial. The optimal size of an element, that is, the distance between a
single FROM and a TO node, is dependent upon which of these deformation patterns is to be
modeled. Because there is no continuous support model, the software must locate additional
point supports along a line to simulate this continuous support. These additional point supports
can also be user-defined. For a given stiffness per unit length, one of the following must be
added:
Several closely spaced, low stiffness supports
A limited number of distant and high stiffness supports
Where the deformation is lateral, smaller elements are needed to properly distribute the forces
from the pipe to the soil. The length over which the pipe deflects laterally is called the "lateral
bearing length" and can be calculated using the following equation:
0.25
Lb = 0.75() [4EI/Ktr]

CAESAR II User's Guide

411

Buried Pipe Modeler

Where:
E

Pipe modulus of elasticity

Pipe moment of inertia

Ktr =

Transverse soil stiffness on a per length basis

CAESAR II places three elements in the vicinity of this bearing span to properly model the local
load distribution. The bearing span lengths in a piping system are called the Zone 1 lengths. The
intermediate lengths in a piping system are called Zone 2 lengths, and the axial displacement
lengths in a piping system are called the Zone 3 lengths. To properly transmit axial loads, Zone
3 element lengths are computed using 100 x Do, where Do is the outside diameter of the piping.
The Zone 2 mesh consists of four elements of increasing length; starting at 1.5 times the length
of a Zone 1 element at its Zone 1 end, and progressing in equal increments to the last which is
50 x Do long at the Zone 3 end. CAESAR II views a typical piping system element breakdown or
mesh distribution as shown below. All pipe density is set to zero for all pipe identified as buried
so that deadweight causes no bending around these point supports.

CAESAR II automatically puts a Zone 1 mesh gradient at each side of the pipe framing
into an elbow. You must tell CAESAR II where the other Zone 1 areas are located in the piping
system.
A critical part of the modeling of an underground piping system is the proper definition of Zone
1or lateral bearing regions. These bearing regions primarily occur:
On either side of a change in direction.
For all pipes framing into an intersection.
At points where the pipe enters or leaves the soil.
Using any user-defined node within or near Zone 1.

Data Conversion
CAESAR II converts the original job into the buried job by meshing the existing elements and
adding soil restraints. The conversion process creates all of the necessary elements to satisfy

412

CAESAR II User's Guide

Buried Pipe Modeler

the Zone 1, Zone 2, and Zone 3 requirements, and places restraints on the elements in these
zones. All elbows are broken down into at least two curved sections, and very long radius
elbows are broken down into segments whose lengths are not longer than the elements in the
immediately adjacent Zone 1 pipe section. Node numbers are generated by adding 1 to the
elements FROM node number. The software checks a node number to make sure that is
unique in the model. All densities on buried pipe elements are zeroed to simulate the continuous
support of the pipe weight. A conversion log is also generated, which details the process in full.

See also
Buried Pipe Modeler Window (on page 413)
Soil Models (on page 417)

Buried Pipe Modeler Window

To start the Buried Pipe Modeler, click Underground Pipe Modeler
displays:

. The following window

Alternatively, you can click Input > Underground.

The Buried Pipe Modeler window is used to enter the buried element descriptions for the job
and allows you to define:
Which part of the piping system is buried
Mesh spacing at specific element ends
Soil stiffnesses
The first two columns of the data input grid contain element node numbers for each piping
element included in the original system. The next three columns allow you to describe the
sections of the piping system that are buried and to define any required fine mesh areas.
A finer mesh area is necessary for buried areas that will need to undergo lateral
displacements.
The remaining eight columns are used to define soil stiffnesses and ultimate loads.

Buried Pipe Modeler Toolbar

The Buried Pipe Molder toolbar displays icons for commonly-used commands.
Open - Opens an input data file that will serve as the original job.

CAESAR II User's Guide

413

Buried Pipe Modeler

Save - Creates an input data file that contains the buried pipe model. By
default, the software appends the filename of the original job with the letter B
to create the second input data file (the buried job).
Print - Prints the data input from the Buried Pipe Modeler window.
Soil Models - Opens the Basic Soil Modeler dialog box in which you
specify soil properties for the CAESAR II buried pipe equations used by the
software to generate one or more soil restraint systems. For more
information, see Basic Soil Modeler Dialog Box (on page 423).
Convert - Converts the original job into the buried job by meshing the
existing elements and adding soil restraints.
Find - Activates the search feature.

Change the Name of a Buried Pipe Job

1. Click File > Change Buried Pipe Job Name.
2. In the Change Job Name dialog box, type a new name for the buried pipe job and click OK.
The software updates the name of the job.

From Node
Displays the node number for the starting end of the element

To Node
Displays the node number for the end of the piping element.

Soil Model No.

Defines which of the elements in the model are buried.
If you enter 0, the element is not buried.
If you enter 1, then the buried soil stiffnesses per length basis should be defined in columns
6 through 13.
If you enter a number greater than 1, the software points to a CAESAR II soil restraint model
generated using the equations outlined in Soil Models (on page 417).
You can define soil properties, such as buried depth, friction factor, undrained shear
strength, using the Basic Soil Modeler dialog box (on page 423). The software uses these
properties to calculate the buried soil stiffnesses on a stiffness per length basis. Because
the soil properties can change from point-to-point along the pipeline, several different soil
models can be entered for a single job. Each different soil model is given a unique soil
model number starting with 2. Consider the following example:

414

From Node

To Node

Soil Model No.

10

10

15

15

20

20

25

25

30

CAESAR II User's Guide

Buried Pipe Modeler

30

35

35

40

The pipe from nodes 5 through 15 is not buried. From nodes 15 through 30, you will define
your own stiffnesses (using columns 6 through 13 of the data input area). From nodes 35
through 40, the software will use the property values defined in the corresponding soil model
number to generate stiffnesses.

From/To End Mesh

Indicates a fine mesh is needed at the From or To element end.
Long, single elements that you enter need to be broken down into smaller elements to properly
distribute the soil forces. The software performs this breakdown automatically. If the particular
end of an element will undergo lateral displacement, it must have a finer mesh than an element
end that only undergoes axial displacements.
Axial displacement ends are at the end of a virtual anchor length.
Element ends undergo lateral displacements wherever there is a bend at the end of the element.
In this case, the software automatically places a fine mesh along the element entering the bend
and along the element leaving the bend. At all other locations, you must tell the software where
the fine meshes must go. These locations include:
1 - Element ends that frame into intersections.
2 - Element ends that enter or exit from the soil.
3 - Element ends where there is any change in direction not defined by a bend.
Follow the rule that too many mesh elements will never hurt the solution, whereas too few
may produce incorrect results. Thus, always check the appropriate box if you are uncertain.
Consider the following example:

CAESAR II places a fine mesh at the 5 end of the element because the pipe enters the soil at 5
and there are probably some displacements there. The software automatically places fine
meshes at element ends where there are bends, so checking the FROM END MESH/TO END
MESH boxes is not needed on the 10-15 element. A fine mesh is also placed at each element
end that frames into the intersection at 20. Finally, a fine mesh is placed at the terminal points
35 and 30.

User-Defined Lateral "K"

Specifies the soil stiffness perpendicular to the pipe axis on a stiffness per length basis. This
stiffness value acts in both directions perpendicular to the pipe. This option is required if Soil
Model No. (on page 414) is set to 1; otherwise, leave this option blank.
The smallest allowable non-zero value is 0.5.

CAESAR II User's Guide

415

Buried Pipe Modeler

Ultimate Lateral Load

Specifies the ultimate lateral load carrying capacity of the soil on a force per length basis. It is at
this point in the loading where the soil behavior becomes perfectly plastic. This option is
required if Soil Model No. (on page 414) is set to 1; otherwise, leave this option blank.
The smallest allowable non-zero value is 0.5.

User-Defined Axial Stif

Specifies the soil stiffness along the axis of the pipe on a stiffness per length basis. This
stiffness value acts in both directions along the axis of the pipe. This option is required if Soil
Model No. (on page 414) is set to 1; otherwise, leave this option blank.
The smallest allowable non-zero value is 0.5.
To stimulate a rigid, perfectly plastic soil for axial pipeline deformation, enter 1.0E12.

Ultimate Axial Load

Specifies the ultimate axial load carrying capacity of the soil on a force per length basis. It is at
this point in the loading where the soil behavior becomes perfectly plastic. This option is
required if Soil Model No. (on page 414) is set to 1; otherwise, leave this option blank.
The smallest allowable non-zero value is 0.5.

User-Defined Upward Stif

Specifies the soil stiffness in the upward direction on a stiffness per length basis. The value that
you enter is the stiffness that will resist upward displacement of the pipeline. This option is
required if Soil Model No. (on page 414) is set to 1; otherwise, you can leave this option blank.
The smallest allowable non-zero value is 0.5.

If the upward and downward stiffnesses are equal, then you need only enter a value for
one--the stiffness value that is not entered defaults to the stiffness value that is entered.
If both User-Defined Upward Stif and User-Defined Downward Stif (on page 417) are set
to 0 or left blank, a fatal error results.

Ultimate Upward Load

Specifies the ultimate upward load carrying capacity of the soil on a force per length basis. The
value you enter is the maximum resistance of the soil to an upward displacement of the pipeline.
It is at this point in the loading where the soil behavior becomes perfectly plastic. This option is
required if Soil Model No. (on page 414) is set to 1; otherwise, leave this option blank.
The smallest allowable non-zero value is 0.5.

416

If the upward and downward ultimate loads are equal, then you need only enter a value for
one. The other load defaults to the entered value.
If both Ultimate Upward Load and Ultimate Downward Load (on page 417) are set to 0 or
left blank, a fatal error results.

CAESAR II User's Guide

Buried Pipe Modeler

User-Defined Downward Stif

Specifies the soil stiffness in the downward direction on a stiffness per length basis. The value
that you enter is the stiffness that will resist downward (-Y) displacement of the pipeline. This
option is required if Soil Model No. (on page 414) is set to 1; otherwise, you can leave this
option blank.
The smallest allowable non-zero value is 0.5.

If the upward and downward stiffnesses are equal, then you need only enter a value for one.
The other stiffness defaults to the entered value.
If both User-Defined Upward Stif (on page 416) and User-Defined Downward Stif are set
to 0 or left blank, a fatal error results.

Ultimate Downward Load

Specifies the ultimate downward load carrying capacity of the soil on a force per length basis.
The value you enter is the maximum resistance of the soil to a downward (-Y) displacement of
the pipeline. It is at this point in the loading where the soil behavior becomes perfectly plastic.
This option is required if Soil Model No. (on page 414) is set to 1; otherwise, leave this option
blank.
The smallest allowable non-zero value is 0.5.

If the upward and downward ultimate loads are equal, then you need only enter a value for
one. The other load defaults to the entered value.
If both Ultimate Upward Load (on page 416) and Ultimate Downward Load are set to 0
or left blank, a fatal error results.

Soil Models
Only use the following procedures for estimating soil distributed stiffnesses and
ultimate loads when you do not have better available data or methods suited.
The soil restraint modeling algorithms used by the software are based on the following:
CAESAR II Basic Model - Stress Analysis Methods for Underground Pipelines, L.C. Peng,
published in 1978 in Pipeline Industry. For more information, see CAESAR II Basic Model
(on page 418).
American Lifelines Alliance - "Appendix B: Soil Spring Representation" from the
Guidelines for the Design of Buried Steel Pipe by the American Lifelines Alliance
(http://www.americanlifelinesalliance.org/pdf/Update061305.pdf). For more information, see
American Lifelines Alliance (see "American Lifelines Alliance Soil Model" on page 419).
Soil supports are modeled as bi-linear springs having an initial stiffness, an ultimate load, and a
yield stiffness. The yield stiffness is typically set close to zero. After the ultimate load on the soil
is reached, there is no further increase in load even though the displacement may continue. The
axial and transverse ultimate loads must be calculated to analyze buried pipe. Many researchers
differentiate between horizontal, upward, and downward transverse loads, but when the
variance in predicted soil properties and methods are considered, this differentiation is often
unwarranted.
The software allows the explicit entry of these data if it is necessary to your specific
project.

CAESAR II User's Guide

417

Buried Pipe Modeler

After the axial and lateral ultimate loads are known, the stiffness in each direction can be
determined by dividing the ultimate load by the yield displacement. Researchers have found that
the yield displacement is related to both the buried depth and the pipe diameter. The calculated
ultimate loads and stiffnesses are on a force per unit length of pipe basis.

See also
Basic Soil Modeler Dialog Box (on page 423)

CAESAR II Basic Model

The following recommendations apply when you select CAESAR II Basic Model as the
Soil Model Type in the Basic Soil Modeler dialog box. For more information about the dialog
box and the available soil properties, see Basic Soil Modeler dialog box (on page 423).
Either FRICTION COEFFICIENT or UNDRAINED SHEAR STRENGTH may be left blank. With
clays, the friction coefficient is typically left blank and is automatically estimated by CAESAR II
as Su/600 psf. Both sandy soils and clay-like soils can be defined here.

The soil restraint equations use these soil properties to generate restraint ultimate loads and
stiffnesses. Defining a value for TEMPERATURE CHANGE is optional. If entered the thermal
strain is used to compute and print the theoretical virtual anchor length. These equations are:
Axial Ultimate Load (Fax)
Fax = D[ (2sH) + (pt) + (f)(D/4) ]
Where:
D = Friction coefficient, typical values are:
0.4 for silt
0.5 for sand
0.6 for gravel
0.6 for clay or Su/600
s= Soil density
H = Buried depth to the top of pipe
p= Pipe density
t = Pipe nominal wall thickness
f= Fluid density
D = Pipe diameter
Su = Undrained shear strength (specified for clay-like soils)
Transverse Ultimate Load (Ftr)
2
2
Ftr = 0.5s(H+D) [tan(45 + /2)] OCM

418

CAESAR II User's Guide

Buried Pipe Modeler

If Su is given (that is, the soil is clay), then Ftr as calculated above is multiplied by Su/250 psf.
Where:
= Angle of internal friction, typical values are:
27-45 for sand
26-35 for silt
0 for clay

OVERBURDEN COMPACTION MULTIPLIER (OCM) is an artificial CAESAR II term that

allows you to take a conservative approach when modeling uncertain soil response.
Because a higher stiffness generally produces conservative results, you may wish to
increase the transverse soil stiffness. CAESAR II uses the OCM to serve this purpose.
You can reduce the OCM from its default of 8 to values ranging from 5 to 7, depending on
the degree of compaction of the backfill. There is no theory which suggests that the OCM
cannot equal 1.0.
For a strict implementation of Peng's Theory as discussed in his articles (April 78 and May
78 issue of Pipeline Industry), use a value of 1.0 for the OCM.
Yield Displacement (yd):
yd = Yield Displacement Factor(H+D)
The Yield Displacement Factor defaults to 0.015(suggested for H = 3D).
Axial Stiffness (Kax) on a per length of pipe basis:
Kax=Fax / yd
Transverse Stiffness (Ktr) on a per length of pipe basis:
Ktr=Ftr / yd

American Lifelines Alliance Soil Model

The following information references "Appendix B: Soil Spring Representation" in
the American Lifelines Alliance document Guidelines for the Design of Buried Steel Pipe
(http://www.americanlifelinesalliance.org/pdf/Update061305.pdf). This document provides
bilinear stiffness of soil for axial, lateral, uplift and bearing. Each stiffness term has a component
associated with sandy soils (subscripted q) and a component associated with clays (subscripted
c). Data can be entered for pure granular soils and pure clays.
Soil stiffness for both clay and sand (cohesive and granular soils, respectively) are defined
through the following user-defined parameters:
c = soil cohesion representative of the soil backfill
H = soil depth to top of pipe (this is converted by C2 to depth to pipe centerline in ALA
calculations)
= effective unit weight of soil
= total dry unit weight of fill
Ko = coefficient of earth pressure at rest (can be calculated based on internal friction angle of
soil)
f = coating-dependent factor relating the internal friction angle of the soil to the friction angle at
the soil-pipe interface
= internal friction angle of soil

CAESAR II User's Guide

419

Buried Pipe Modeler

Elastic range of soil is either fixed or a function of D & H with limits based on D.

420

Yield Displacement
Factor

Entry

Limited by

t (dT) Axial

Length units

p (dP) Lateral

Multiple of D

0.04(H+D/2)

qu (dQu) Upward

Multiple of H

Minimum

qu (dQu) Upward

Multiple of D

qd (dQd) Downward

Multiple of D

CAESAR II User's Guide

Buried Pipe Modeler

Axial

Tu = peak friction force at pipe-soil interface maximum axial soil force per unit length that can be
transmitted to pipe)
D = pipe OD
= adhesion factor (for clays only)

c = soil cohesion representative of the soil backfill (undrained shear strength)

H = depth of cover to pipe centerline
= effective unit weight of soil
Ko = coefficient of earth pressure at rest
The ratio of the horizontal effective stress acting on a supporting structure and the vertical
effective stress in the soil at that point. At rest indicates the pipe does not move for this
calculation.
= interface angle of friction for pipe and soil, = f
f = coating-dependent factor relating the internal friction angle of the soil to the friction angle
at the soil-pipe interface
Pipe Coating

Concrete

1.0

Coal Tar

0.9

Rough Steel

0.8

Smooth Steel

0.7

Fusion Bonded Epoxy

0.6

Polyethylene

0.6

= internal friction angle of soil

t = axial displacement to develop
Tu = 0.1 inch for dense sand, 0.2 inch for loose sand, 0.3 inch for stiff clay, and 0.4 inch for
soft clay

CAESAR II User's Guide

421

Buried Pipe Modeler

Lateral
Pu = maximum horizontal soil bearing capacity (maximum lateral soil force per unit length that
can be transmitted to pipe)
Nch = horizontal soil bearing capacity factor for clay (0 for c=0)
Nqh = horizontal soil bearing capacity factor for sand (0 for =0)

Factor

Nch

H/D

6.752

0.065

-11.063

7.119

--

Nqh

20

H/D

2.399

0.439

-0.03

1.059E-3

-1.754E-5

Nqh

25

H/D

3.332

0.839

-0.090

5.606E-3

-1.319E-4

Nqh

30

H/D

4.565

1.234

-0.089

4.275E-3

-9.159E-5

Nqh

35

H/D

6.816

2.019

-0.146

7.651E-3

-1.683E-4

Nqh

40

H/D

10.959

1.783

0.045

-5.425E-3 -1.153E-4

Nqh

45

H/D

17.658

3.309

0.048

-6.443E-3 -1.299E-4

Nqh can be interpolated for between 20and 45.

Vertical Uplift
Qu = maximum vertical upward soil bearing capacity (maximum vertical uplift soil force per unit
length that can be transmitted to pipe)
Ncv = vertical upward soil bearing capacity factor for clay (0 for c=0)

Nqv = vertical upward soil bearing capacity factor for sand

422

CAESAR II User's Guide

Buried Pipe Modeler

= 0.01H to 0.02H for dense to loose sands < 0.1D

= 0.1H to 0.2H for stiff to soft clays < 0.2D

Vertical Bearing

Qd - maximum vertical bearing soil force per unit length that can be transmitted to pipe.
Nc, Nq, N = vertical downward soil bearing capacity factors

= total dry unit weight of fill

qd = vertical displacement to develop Qd
= 0.1D for granular soils
= 0.2D for cohesive soils

Basic Soil Modeler Dialog Box

Soil Models specifies options for the soil model method to use and defines basic soil
properties, such as undrained sheer strength, friction angles, and so forth. The modeler uses the
values that you define to compute axial, lateral, upward, and downward stiffnesses, along with
ultimate loads. Each set of soil properties is identified by a unique soil model number, starting
with the number 2. The soil model number is used in the buried element descriptions to tell
CAESAR II in what type of soil the pipe is buried. You can enter up to 15 different soil model
numbers in any one buried pipe job.

Soil model number 1 is reserved for user-defined values.

The soil models you enter do not have to be used in the current job. This provides a
convenient mechanism for soil property range studies.

Soil Model Type and Classification

Select the soil model method on which the software will base its calculations. Three different soil
model methods are available, each with its own set of soil properties.
American Lifelines Alliance (Sand/Gravel) - This is the default model is that is presented
for granular soils in "Appendix B" of the America Lifelines Alliance document Guidelines for
the Design of Buried Steel Pipe. This model was developed jointly by the American Society
of Civil Engineers and the Federal Emergency Management Agency in July 2001 (addenda
through February 2005.
American Lifelines Alliance (Clay) - This model is for clay soils and from the same
document as American Lifelines Alliance (Sand/Gravel).
CAESAR II Basic Model - A modified implementation of the method described by L.C.
Peng in his two-part article "Stress Analysis Methods for Underground Pipe Lines",
published in Pipe Line Industry (April/May 1978).
For more information, see Soil Models (on page 417).

CAESAR II User's Guide

423

Buried Pipe Modeler

ALPHA - ADHESION FACTOR

Specifies the soil adhesion factor. This option displays only when you select American
Lifelines Alliance in the Soil Model Type list and Clay as the Soil Classification.
If no value is defined, the soil adhesion factor is calculated using C - SOIL COHESION OF
BACKFILL based upon the following equation:
Alpha = 0.608-0.123C-0.274/(C**2+1)+0.695/(C**3+1)
Where C is in kips/sq.ft.
Possible values are listed in Figure B.2, "Appendix B: Soil Spring Representation" from
the Guidelines for the Design of Buried Steel Pipe by the American Lifelines Alliance

C - SOIL COHESION OF BACKFILL

Specifies the soil cohesion representative of the backfill. This option displays only when you
select American Lifelines Alliance in the Soil Model Type list and Clay as the Soil
Classification.
Typical values for cohesive soils are between 2.5 and 20 psi (18 and 140kPa).

dP - YIELD DISP FACTOR, LAT, MAX MULTIPLE OF D

Specifies the value of the soil displacement at which the ultimate lateral restraint load is
developed. This is calculated using as the following equation:
dP = 0.4 (H + D/2)
However, the calculated value must be limited to a maximum multiple for the pipe outer diameter
(D). Typical values are between 0.1 and 0.15.

dQd - YIELD DISP FACTOR, DOWN, MULTIPLE OF D

Specifies the value of the soil displacement at which the ultimate downward restraint load is
development. This value is calculated as a multiple of the pipe outer diameter (D). Typical
values are as follows:
Granular soils - 0.1
Cohesive soils - 0.2

dQu - YIELD DISP FACTOR, UP, MAX MULTIPLE OF D

Specifies the value of the soil displacement at which the ultimate upward restraint load is
developed. This value is calculated as per the following equation:
dQu = MIN (MULTIPLE OF H) * H, (MULTIPLE OF D) * D)
The maximum multiple of the pipe outer diameter (D), must be entered here. Typical values are
as follows:
Sand - 0.1
Clay - 0.2

424

CAESAR II User's Guide

Buried Pipe Modeler

dQu - YIELD DISP FACTOR, UPWARD, MULTIPLE of H

Specifies the value of the soil displacement at which the ultimate upward restraint load is
developed. This value is calculated as per the following equation:
dQu - MIN (MULTIPLE OF H) * H, (MULTIPLE OF D) * D
The maximum multiple of the pipe buried depth (H) must be entered here. Typical values are as
follows:
Dense Sand - 0.01
Loose Sand - 0.02
Stiff Clay - 0.1
Soft Clay - 0.2

dT - YIELD DISP FACTOR, AXIAL

Specifies the value of the soil displacement at which the ultimate axial restraint load is
developed. This option displays only when you select American Lifeline Alliance in the Soil
Model Type list.
Typical values are as follows:
Dense Sand - 0.1 in. (2.5 mm.)
Loose Sand - 0.2 in (5.0 mm.)
Stiff Clay - 0.3 in. (7.5 mm.)
Soft Clay - 0.4 in. (10 mm.)

GAMMA - DRY SOIL DENSITY

Specifies the dry density of the soil on a per unit volume basis. This option displays only if you
select American Lifeline Alliance in the Soil Model Type list and Sand/Gravel as the Soil
Classification.
Typical soil densities are listed below:
Soil

Dry Density
4.33E-2
lb./cu.in.

Clay
Very Loose Sand

<=

5.79E-2
lb./cu.in.

1.200E-3
kg/cu.cm.
<=

1.606E-3
kg/cu.cm.

Loose Sand

6.08E-2
lb./cu.in.

1.686E-3
kg/cu.cm.

Medium Sand

6.48E-2
lb./cu.in.

1.797E-3
kg/cu.cm.

Dense Sand

6.66E-2
lb./cu.in.

1.847E-3
kg/cu.cm.

Very Dense Sand

CAESAR II User's Guide

>=

6.95E-2
lb./cu.in.

>=

1.928E-3
kg/cu.cm.

425

Buried Pipe Modeler

GAMMA PRIME - EFFECTIVE SOIL DENSITY

Specifies the effective density of the soil on a per unit volume basis. This option displays only
when you select American Lifelines Alliance in the Soil Model Type list.
The effective density of the soil may differ from the dry density if the soil is wet, and thus less
buoyant. The effective density of the soil is less than the dry density of the soil. If the water table
may engulf the pipe even for a short time, then it is probably appropriate to enter a wet effective
density. If the soil is expected to remain dry, then enter the dry soil density. The following tables
list some typical soil densities:
Soil

Dry Density

Clay
Very Loose Sand

<=

<=

1.200E-3
kg/cu.cm.

5.79E-2
lb./cu.in.

<=

1.606E-3
kg/cu.cm.

Loose Sand

6.08E-2
lb./cu.in.

1.686E-3
kg/cu.cm.

Medium Sand

6.48E-2
lb./cu.in.

1.797E-3
kg/cu.cm.

Dense Sand

6.66E-2
lb./cu.in.

1.847E-3
kg/cu.cm.

Very Dense Sand

>=

Soil

Very Loose Sand

6.95E-2
lb./cu.in.

>=

1.928E-3
kg/cu.cm.

Wet (Buoyant) Density

2.73E-2
lb./cu.in.

Clay
<=

3.62E-2
lb./cu.in.

7.572E-4
kg/cu.cm.
<=

1.005E-3
kg/cu.cm.

Loose Sand

3.80E-2
lb./cu.in.

1.055E-3
kg/cu.cm.

Medium Sand

4.05E-2
lb./cu.in.

1.123E-3
kg/cu.cm.

Dense Sand

4.17E-2
lb./cu.in.

1.155E-3
kg/cu.cm.

Very Dense Sand

426

4.33E-2
lb./cu.in.

>=

4.35E-2
lb./cu.in.

>=

1.206E-3
kg/cu.cm.

CAESAR II User's Guide

Buried Pipe Modeler

F - COATING FACTOR
Specifies the coating dependent factor that relates the internal friction angle of the soil to the
friction angle at the soil-pipe interface. This option displays only if you select American Lifeline
Alliance in the Soil Model Type list and Sand/Gravel as the Soil Classification.
Typical values for external pipe coatings are:
Concrete - 1.0
Coal Tar - 0.9
Rough Steel - 0.8
Smooth Steel - 0.7
Fusion Bonded Epoxy - 0.6
Polyethelyne - 0.6

FRICT. ANGLE
Specifies the internal friction angle of the soil. Typical values are:
Clay - 0
Silt - 26-25
Sand - 27-45

For the American Lifelines Alliance soil model, this entry must be between 20- and
45-degrees.
For the CAESAR II basic soil model, this entry is used in the soil restraint equations to
generate restraint ultimate loads and stiffnesses.

FRICTION COEFFICIENT
Specifies the coefficient of friction between pipe and soil. If the undrained shear strength (on
page 428) is entered, the friction coefficient may be left blank. The friction coefficient is
calculated using the following equation:
Friction Coeffecient = Su/0.4167E + 1
Typical friction coefficient values are:
Silt - 0.4
Sand - 0.5
Gravel - 0.6
Clay - 0.6 or Su/ 0.4167E + 1
This option displays only when you select CAESAR II Basic Model in the Soil Model Type list.

H - BURIED DEPTH TO TOP OF PIPE

Specifies the buried pipe depth to the top of the pipe. This option displays only when you select
American Lifelines Alliance in the Soil Model Type list.
The American Lifetime Alliance method actually defines H as "depth to pipe centerline".
CAESAR II automatically converts this based upon the individual pipe sizes.
Upward soil stiffness calculations are considered to be applicable for H/D ratios of 10 and
below.

CAESAR II User's Guide

427

Buried Pipe Modeler

KO - COEFFICIENT OF PRESSURE AT REST

Specifies the coefficient of earth pressure. This option displays only if you select American
Lifeline Alliance in the Soil Model Type list and Sand/Gravel as the Soil Classification.
Typical values are on the order of 1.0. If left blank, K0 defaults to the following:
K0 - 1.0 - sin(internal friction angle of the soil)
The internal friction angle of the soil is defined by FRICT. ANGLE (Sand=27-45;
Silt=26-35; Clay=0) (deg.) (see "FRICT. ANGLE" on page 427).

OVERBURDEN COMPACTION MULTIPLIER

Specifies the factor by which the transverse ultimate load is multiplied. This option displays only
when you select CAESAR II Basic Model in the Soil Model Type list.
This value is used in the soil restraint equations to generate restraint ultimate loads and
stiffnesses. The default value is 8. This number can be reduced depending on the degree of
compaction of the backfill. Backfill efficiency can be approximated using the proctor number,
defined in most soils text books. Standard practice is to multiple the proctor number by 8 and
use the result as the compaction multiplier.

SOIL DENSITY
Specifies the weight of the soil on a per unit volume basis. This value is used in the soil restraint
equations to generate restraint ultimate loads and stiffnesses. This option displays only when
you select CAESAR II Basic Model in the Soil Model Type list.

TEMPERATURE CHANGE
Specifies the installed to operating pipe temperature difference.
The thermal expansion coefficient and the temperature change inputs are required if you want
CAESAR II to calculate and display the virtual anchor length.

THERMAL EXPANSION COEFFICIENT

Specifies the pipe thermal expansion coefficient multiplied by 1E06.
The thermal expansion coefficient and the temperature change inputs are required if you want
CAESAR II to calculate and display the virtual anchor length.

UNDRAINED SHEAR STRENGTH

Specifies the undrained shear strength. This option displays only when you select CAESAR II
Basic Model in the Soil Model Type list.
You can leave this option blank if Friction Coefficient is defined.

YIELD DISPLACEMENT FACTOR

Specifies the value used to calculate the soil restraint stiffness. This value must be greater than
0.0. This option displays only when you select CAESAR II Basic Model in the Soil Model Type
list.

428

CAESAR II User's Guide

Buried Pipe Modeler

The yield displacement factor is inversely proportional to the soil restraint stiffness. By default,
the yield displacement depth of 1.5% of the buried depth is used, which translates to a yield
displacement factor of 0.015.

Model an underground piping system

The recommended workflow for using the Buried Pipe Modeler is outlined in the steps below.
A buried pipe example problem is provided to illustrate the features of the modeler. This
example should not be considered a guide for recommended underground piping design. For
more information, see Buried Pipe Example (on page 430).
1. Click Underground Pipe Modeler
on the CAESAR II toolbar or click Input >
Underground to open the modeler.
2. Click File > Open on the Buried Pipe Modeler main menu and select the original unburied
job.
The original job serves as the basis for the buried pipe model. It must already exist
and need only contain the basic geometry of the piping system. The modeler will remove
any existing restraints in the buried portion.
3. Click Soil Models
on the Basic Pipe Modeler toolbar.
4. In the Basic Soil Modeler dialog box, select a Soil Model Type.
The software populates the dialog box with soil data properties specific to the soil model you
select.
5. Enter the necessary soil data and click OK to exit the dialog box.
To enter additional soil models, click Add New Soil Model.
The software saves the soil data in a file with the extension SOI.
6. In columns 1-5 of the buried element data input area, describe the sections of the piping
system that are buried and define any required fine mesh areas and click Save
.
User-defined soil data can be entered in columns 6-13.
7. On the Basic Pipe Modeler toolbar, click Convert
to convert the original model into the
buried model. This step produces a detailed description of the conversion.
By default, the software appends the name of the job with the letter B. For example, if the
original job is named UndergroundPipe, the software saves the second input file with the
name UndergroundPipe B. If the default name is not appropriate, click File > Change
Buried Pipe Change Name and rename the buried job.
8. Click File > Exit to return the CAESAR II main window. From here, you can use Input >
Piping to review and edit the buried model, add any additional underground restraints (such
as thrust block) to the buried model, and perform the analysis of the buried pipe job.

A buried pipe example problem is provided to illustrate the features of the modeler. This
example should not be considered a guide for recommended underground piping design.
For more information, see Buried Pipe Example (on page 430).

CAESAR II User's Guide

429

Buried Pipe Modeler

Buried Pipe Example

The following buried pipe example problem is provided to illustrate the features of the
modeler. This example should not be considered a guide for recommended underground piping
design.
Consider the following example:

The following input listing represents the unburied model shown above.

430

CAESAR II User's Guide

Buried Pipe Modeler

Terminal nodes 100 and 1900 are above ground. Nodes 1250 and 1650 (on the sloped runs)
mark the soil entry and exit points.
Using the Basic Soil Modeler dialog box (on page 423), Soil Model Number 2 properties for a
sandy soil is defined.

Elements 1250-1300 through 1600-1650 are buried using soil model number 2. Zone 1 meshing
is indicated at the entry and exit points.

CAESAR II User's Guide

431

Buried Pipe Modeler

Clicking Convert
model.

432

on the Buried Pipe Modeler toolbar begins the conversion to a buried

CAESAR II User's Guide

Buried Pipe Modeler

The screen listing can also be printed.

CAESAR II User's Guide

433

Buried Pipe Modeler

The original unburied model is shown along with the buried model below. Restraints have been
added around the elbows and along the straight runs.

Bi-linear restraints have been added to the buried model. The stiffness used is based upon the
distance between nodes.

434

CAESAR II User's Guide

Buried Pipe Modeler

The first buried element, 1250-1251, has no density.

The buried job can now be analyzed.

CAESAR II User's Guide

435

Buried Pipe Modeler

436

CAESAR II User's Guide

SECTION 7

Static Analysis
Displays the Static Analysis dialog box.

In This Section
Static Analysis Overview ............................................................... 437
Static Analysis Dialog Box ............................................................. 456

Static Analysis Overview

You must run error checking before you can run static analysis. If error checking reports no fatal
errors, you can specify the load cases to analyze. CAESAR II recommends an initial set of load
cases that you can edit.

Error Checking
You must successfully complete the error checking portion of the piping preprocessor before
you can perform static analysis. The required analysis data files are created after error checking
is completed. Similarly, any changes that you make to the model are not reflected in the analysis
unless you rerun the error checking. CAESAR II does not allow an analysis to take place until
you successfully run the error checker if the input has changed.
Error Check - Saves the input and starts the error checking procedure. This command is
only available from the piping or structural steel input dialog boxes.
Batch Run - Checks the input data, analyzes the system, and presents the results without
any additional actions from you. The software assumes that the loading cases do not need to
change and that the default account number (if accounting active) is correct. These criteria are
usually met after the first pass through the analysis.
The error checker software reviews the CAESAR II model and alerts you to any possible errors,
inconsistencies, or noteworthy items. These items display in a grid as errors, warnings, or notes.
The total numbers of errors, warnings, or notes display in corresponding boxes above the
message grid. Double-click the column headers to sort the messages by type, message
number, or element/node number. Click File > Print to print the messages.

CAESAR II User's Guide

437

Static Analysis

Fatal Error Message

The software reports an error when the analysis cannot continue. This is caused by a problem in
the model such as a piping element with no defined length. These errors are called fatal errors
because you must correct them before you can continue the analysis.
Click the error message to display to the associated element. Click the tabs at the bottom of the
window to display either the Classic Piping Input dialog box or the Errors and Warnings
dialog box.

Warning Message
The software reports a warning when there is a problem that can be overcome using some
assumptions. An example of this is the wall thickness of an element that is insufficient to meet
the minimum wall thickness for the given pressure (hoop stress). You do not have to correct
warnings to get a successful analysis, but you should carefully review them.

438

CAESAR II User's Guide

Static Analysis

Note Message
The software reports a note to inform you of a fact related to the model. An example of a note is
the number of hangers to be designed by CAESAR II. There is nothing for you to correct when a
note displays.

Static Load Case Editor

After error-checking your model, specify your static load cases using the Edit Static Load
Cases
command, which is only available after you have successfully error checked the
piping input file.
The Static Analysis dialog box lists the following:
Available loads that are defined in the input.
Available stress types.
Current load cases offered for analysis.
For detailed information on this dialog box, see Static Analysis Dialog Box (on page 456).

CAESAR II User's Guide

439

Static Analysis
CAESAR II lists recommended load cases if the job is entering static analysis for the first time.
The list displays loads saved during the last session if the job has been run previously.

Building Static Load Cases

The CAESAR II load case editor combines native and combination loads as needed by the
various piping codes that CAESAR II supports.
This section describes which load cases to use in a variety of situations. If you need assistance
in load case definition for a situation not covered here, or if you need further clarification of the
load cases described, please contact ICAS Technical Support by e-mail at
[email protected].
Standard load cases for B31.1, B31.3, ASME SECT III Class 2 & 3, NAVY 505, B31.4, B31.5,
B31.8, B31.9, B31.11, Canadian Z662, RCC-M C & D, Stoomwezen, CODETI, Norwegian,
FDBR, and BS 806 piping codes are as follows
Standard load cases for situations where you have weight, temperature, and pressure:
L1

W+T1+P1

(OPE)

L2

W+P1

(SUS)

L3

L1-L2

(EXP)*

* Use the algebraic combination method on the Load Case Options tab for the expansion case.
Some of the piping codes perform a code stress check on the operating case and some
do not. For more information, see the CAESAR II Quick Reference Guide for the equations used
by the various piping codes to obtain code stress and allowable stress.

440

CAESAR II User's Guide

Static Analysis
The expansion case is a combination case that results from subtracting the sustained case from
the operating case. Because of this, the expansion case represents the change in the piping
system due to the effect of temperature, but in the presence of other loads. This is important
because the restraint status of the operating and sustained cases can be different if there are
nonlinear restraints (such as +Y, -Z, any restraint with a gap, and so on) or boundary conditions
(such as friction).
Standard load cases for B31.4 Ch IX, B31.8 Ch VIII, and DNV codes:
L1

W+T1+P1

(OPE)

L2

W+P1

(SUS)

No expansion stress is calculated for these piping codes.

Standard load cases for BS7159 and UKOOA piping codes:
L1

W+T1+P1

(OPE)

No expansion or sustained stress is calculated for these piping codes.

Load Cases with Hanger Design

When CAESAR II designs spring hangers, two additional load cases are required. The letter H
designates the hanger installation load (pre-load) that is always present in a spring hanger.
L1

(HGR) *HS = Rigid

L2

W+T1+P1

(HGR) *HS = Ignore

L3

W+T1+P1+H

(OPE) *HS = As Designed

L4

W+P1+H

(SUS) *HS = As Designed

L5

L3-L4

(EXP) **

*HS is the hanger stiffness defined on the Load Case Options tab.
** Use the algebraic combination method on the Load Case Options tab.
When you use only predefined spring hangers, there is no need for the first two load cases.
However, the letter H is still required in the operating and sustained load cases. Other hanger
load cases are required when you use multiple load case design. In such instances, let
CAESAR II recommend the load cases. You can then add or edit the non-hanger design load
cases as necessary.

CAESAR II User's Guide

441

Static Analysis

Load Cases with Thermal Displacements

Thermal displacements are generally associated with specific operating conditions. D1 is
applied with T1, D2 to T2, and so on. When one temperature is below ambient, and one is
above ambient, you can determine the full expansion stress range.
L1

W+T1+D1+P1

(OPE)

L2

W+T2+D2+P1

(OPE)

L3

W+P1

(SUS)

L4

L1-L3

(EXP) * effects of D1 and T1

L5

L2-L3

(EXP) * effects of D2 and T2

L6

L1-L2

(EXP) * full expansion stress

range

* Use the algebraic combination method on the Load Case Options tab.
Include the thermal displacements in the operating cases as shown for piping codes with
no expansion stress computation.

Load Cases with Thermal Displacements and Settlement

Use a CNode for settlement on any affected restraints. This CNode must be a node number that
is not used elsewhere in the model. Place the settlement on the CNode using a displacement
vector that is not already used for thermal displacements. This example uses D3 to describe
restraint settlement.
L1

W+T1+D1+D3+P1

(OPE)

L2

W+T2+D2+D3+P1

(OPE)

L3

W+P1

(SUS)

L4

W+P2

(SUS)

L5

L1-L3

(EXP) * effects of D1 and T1 and

settlement

L6

L2-L4

(EXP) * effects of D2 and T2 and

settlement

L7

L1-L2

(EXP) * full expansion stress range

between OPE1 and OPE2

Settlement is evaluated as an expansion load because it is strain related with a half-cycle.

* Include the thermal and settlement displacements in the operating cases as shown for piping
codes with no expansion stress computation.

Load Cases with Pitch and Roll

There is often platform movement, or relative movement, between two platforms with
inter-connected piping, in an offshore piping system. This also applies to FSPO and other
shipboard piping systems. Apply the pitch and roll displacements to CNodes on each affected
restraint. Use displacement vectors not already in use to describe thermal displacement
boundary conditions. There is usually a + displacement and a - displacement to describe the

442

CAESAR II User's Guide

Static Analysis
peak pitch and roll conditions. Look at the state of the platform at its peaks to determine the
worst two conditions for relative displacement between piping separated by the largest distance
along the line of wave travel. D3 and D4 describe two peak pitch conditions. D1 is a thermal
displacement.
L1

W+T1+D1+D3+P1

(OPE)

L2

W+T1+D1+D4+P1

(OPE)

L3

W+P1

(SUS)

L4

L1-L3

(EXP) *

L5

L2-L3

(EXP) *

* Use the algebraic combination method on the Load Case Options tab of the Static Analysis
dialog box.
It is likely that you will want to perform a fatigue analysis because of the large number of
displacement cycles common in pitch and roll situations. Select the appropriate fatigue curve on
the first piping input under the Allowable Stress area on the Classic Piping Input dialog box.
Add the following cases to the previous example on the Load Case Options tab. Enter the
number of cycles for each pitch condition for fatigue stress type (FAT).
L6

L1-L3

(FAT)

21000000

L7

L2-L3

(FAT)

21000000

The 21000000 represents 21 million load cycles during the life of the piping system. Use the
number of cycles that you would expect to occur during the life of such a storm for large
displacements, such as those that occur during a 1-year, 30-year, or 100-year event. Multiply
this number by the number storms likely to happen during the lifetime of the piping system.

Static Seismic Load Cases

In the Classic Piping Input dialog box, click the Uniform Loads tab and select the in G's
option. On the first element, type the seismic load in Gs. Enter the X-direction acceleration in the
Vector 1 box, the Y-direction acceleration in the Vector 2 box, and the Z-direction acceleration
in the Vector 3 box. This makes load case generation easier. Because a seismic event is likely
to occur while the piping system is in operation, an operating case should have all operating
loads plus the seismic load. This load case is then used with the standard operating case to
segregate the effect of the seismic load. The seismic load is then combined with the static
sustained load case for code compliance considerations.
L1

W+T1+P1

(OPE)

L2

W+T1+P1+U1

(OPE)

L3

W+T1+P1-U1

(OPE)

L4

W+T1+P1+U2

(OPE)

L5

W+T1+P1-U2

(OPE)

L6

W+T1+P1+U3

(OPE)

L7

W+T1+P1-U3

(OPE)

L8

W+P1

(SUS)

CAESAR II User's Guide

443

Static Analysis
L9

L1-L8

(EXP)

L10

L2-L1

(OCC)

L11

L3-L1

(OCC)

L12

L4-L1

(OCC)

L13

L5-L1

(OCC)

L14

L6-L1

(OCC)

L15

L7-L1

(OCC)

L16

L8+L10

(OCC)

L17

L8+L11

(OCC)

L18

L8+L12

(OCC)

L19

L8+L13

(OCC)

L20

L8+L14

(OCC)

L21

L8+L15

(OCC)

Load cases 2 through 7 include all the loads and call these operating cases. The subtracted
uniform load vectors reverse the direction of the uniform load applied. Use these load case
results for occasional restraint loads and occasional displacements. Load cases 10 through 15
signify the segregated occasional loads. These are called occasional load cases, but you do not
need a code stress check here because these are only part of the final solution for code
compliance. Because of this, you can select the Suppress option for the Output Status on the
Load Case Options tab. Also, these combination load cases all use the Algebraic
Combination Method on the Load Case Options tab. Load cases 16 through 21 are all used
for code compliance. Add the segregated occasional results to the sustained case results and
use either the Scalar or ABS Absolute Value Combination Method on the Load Case
Options tab. Both scalar and absolute will give the same code stress results although the
displacements, forces, and moments could be different. Because you do not use any results
except the stresses for combination cases, it does not matter which combination method you
use.
Sometimes you want to combine the results of vertical g-loads with horizontal g-loads. A factor
is often applied to the vertical g-load component of the combined load. You can accomplish this
when you type the Uniform Load data on the Classic Piping Input dialog box for the vertical
component, or you can do this directly in the load case editor as shown below. Using the
previous example, combine .67 vertical g-load with each horizontal component.

444

L1

W+T1+P1

(OPE)

L2

W+T1+P1+U1+0.67U2

(OPE)

L3

W+T1+P1-U1+0.67U2

(OPE)

L4

W+T1+P1+U1-0.67U2

(OPE)

L5

W+T1+P1-U1-0.67U2

(OPE)

L6

W+T1+P1+U3+0.67U2

(OPE)

L7

W+T1+P1-U3+0.67U2

(OPE)

L8

W+T1+P1+U3-0.67U2

(OPE)

CAESAR II User's Guide

Static Analysis
L9

W+T1+P1-U3-0.67U2

(OPE)

L10

W+P1

(SUS)

L11

L1-L10

(EXP)

L12

L2-L1

(OCC)

L13

L3-L1

(OCC)

L14

L4-L1

(OCC)

L15

L5-L1

(OCC)

L16

L6-L1

(OCC)

L17

L7-L1

(OCC)

L18

L8-L1

(OCC)

L19

L9-L1

(OCC)

L20

L10+L12

(OCC)

L21

L10+L13

(OCC)

L22

L10+L14

(OCC)

L23

L10+L15

(OCC)

L24

L10+L16

(OCC)

L25

L10+L17

(OCC)

L26

L10+L18

(OCC)

L27

L10+L19

(OCC)

Sometimes you need to combine the horizontal and vertical components of seismic loading. You
can do this on the Static Analysis dialog box. Set up the static seismic load cases as shown in
the first example, then combine the segregated horizontal and vertical load cases together using
the SRSS Combination Method on the Load Case Options tab. Add these results to the
sustained case.
L1

W+T1+P1

(OPE)

L2

W+T1+P1+U1

(OPE)

L3

W+T1+P1-U1

(OPE)

L4

W+T1+P1+U2

(OPE)

L5

W+T1+P1-U2

(OPE)

L6

W+T1+P1+U3

(OPE)

L7

W+T1+P1-U3

(OPE)

L8

W+P1

(SUS)

L9

L1-L8

(EXP)

L10

L2-L1

(OCC) *

L11

L3-L1

(OCC) *

CAESAR II User's Guide

445

Static Analysis
L12

L4-L1

(OCC) *

L13

L5-L1

(OCC) *

L14

L6-L1

(OCC) *

L15

L7-L1

(OCC) *

L16

L10+L12

(OCC) **

L17

L10+L13

(OCC) **

L18

L11+L12

(OCC) **

L19

L11+L13

(OCC) **

L20

L14+L12

(OCC) **

L21

L14+L13

(OCC) **

L22

L15+L12

(OCC) **

L23

L15+L13

(OCC) **

L24

L8+L16

(OCC) ***

L25

L8+L17

(OCC) ***

L26

L8+L18

(OCC) ***

L27

L8+L19

(OCC) ***

L28

L8+L20

(OCC) ***

L29

L8+L21

(OCC) ***

L30

L8+L22

(OCC) ***

L31

L8+L23

(OCC) ***

* Use the algebraic combination method on the Load Case Options tab.
** Use the SRSS combination method on the Load Case Options tab.
*** Use the ABS or Scalar combination method on the Load Case Options tab.
Change the operating load cases that include seismic loads to OCC for piping codes that
do not perform a sustained code stress check. Use these cases for code compliance. The
combination cases are not needed in such cases.

Recommended Load Cases

When you initially open the Static Analysis dialog box, the software recommends three types of
load cases, based on the loads defined in the model: Operating, Sustained, and Expansion. The
software does not recommend Occasional load cases.
Operating load cases represent the loads acting on the pipe during hot operation. These load
cases include primary loadings (weight pressure, and force), secondary loadings (displacements
and thermal expansions). Operating cases are used to find hot displacements for interference
checking, and to find hot restraint and equipment loads. CAESAR II combines weight, pressure
case, and hanger loads with each of the thermal load cases when recommending operating load
cases. For example, the software combines the first displacement set with the first thermal set,
the second displacement set with the second thermal set, and so on. Then, the software
combines any cold spring loads.

446

CAESAR II User's Guide

Static Analysis
Sustained load cases represent the primary force-driven loadings acting on the pipe. This case
is weight and pressure alone. This usually coincides with the cold as-installed load case.
Sustained load cases are used to satisfy the code sustained stress requirements, as well as to
calculate as-installed restraint and equipment loads. Sustained load cases are generally built by
combining weight with each of the pressure and force sets, and then with any hanger loads.
Expansion load cases represent the range between the displacement extremes usually between
the operating and sustained cases. Expansion load cases are used to meet expansion stress
requirements. Generally, when you specify only one temperature and one pressure, the
recommended cases look similar to the following:
Case 1

W+D1+T1+P1+H (OPE)

Operating

Case 2

W+P1+H (SUS)

Sustained load case

Case 3

L1-L2 (EXP)

Expansion load case

Review any load recommendations made by CAESAR II.

CAESAR II does not recommend any occasional load cases. Definition of these is your
responsibility.
If the recommended load cases do not satisfy the analysis requirements, you can delete or
modify them. Conversely, you can reset the load cases at any time to the software
recommended set.
If you have an operating temperature below ambient in addition to one above ambient you
should add another expansion load case as follows:
Case 1

W+D1+T1+P1+H (OPE)

Operating

Case 2

W+D2+T2 +P1+H (OPE)

Operating

Case 3

W+P1+H (SUS)

Sustained load case

Case 4

L1-L3 (EXP)

Expansion load case

Case 5

L2-L3 (EXP)

Expansion load case

Case 6

L2-L1 (EXP)

Add this case because CAESAR II

does not recommended it
automatically.

Recommended Load Cases for Hanger Selection

Two additional load cases must be analyzed to get the data required to select a variable support
if you want to let the software design spring hangers. The two basic requirements for sizing
hangers are the deadweight carried by the hanger, which is hanger hot load, and the range of
vertical travel to be accommodated. The first load case, traditionally called Restrained Weight,
consists of only deadweight (W). For this analysis, CAESAR II includes a rigid restraint in the
vertical direction at every location where a hanger is to be sized. The load on the restraint from
this analysis is the deadweight that must be carried by the support in the hot condition. For the
second load case, the hanger is replaced with an upward force equal to the calculated hot load,
and an operating load case is run. This load case, traditionally called Free Thermal, includes
the deadweight and thermal effects, the first pressure set if defined, and any displacements,
W+D1+T1+P1. The vertical displacements of the hanger locations, along with the previously
calculated deadweights, are then passed on to the hanger selection routine. After the hangers
are sized, the added forces are removed and replaced with the selected supports along with

CAESAR II User's Guide

447

Static Analysis
their pre-loads cold loads designated by load component H. Load component H can appear in
the load cases for hanger design if you have predefined any springs. In this case, it would
represent the pre-defined operating loads. CAESAR II then continues with the load case
recommendations as defined above. A typical set of recommended load cases for a single
operating load case spring hanger design is as follows:
Case 1

Weight for hanger loads

Case 2

W+D1+T1+P1

Operating for hanger travel

Case 3

W+D1+T1+P1+H (OPE)

Operating, hangers included

Case 4

W+P1+H (SUS)

Sustained load case

Case 5

L3-L4 (EXP)

Expansion load case

These hanger sizing load Cases 1 and 2 generally supply no information to the output reports
other than the data found in the hanger tables. Cases 3, 4, and 5 match the recommended load
cases for a standard analysis with one thermal and one pressure defined. The displacement
combination numbers in Case 5 have changed to reflect the new order. If multiple temperatures
and pressures existed in the input, they too would appear in this set after the second spring
hanger design load case. Two other hanger design criteria also affect the recommended load
cases. If the actual cold loads for selected springs are to be calculated, one additional load
case, WNC+H, would appear before Case 3. If the hanger design criteria of the piping system is
set so that the proposed springs must accommodate more than one operating condition, other
load cases must appear before Case 3 above. You must perform an extra hanger design
operating load case for each additional operating load case used to design springs. See Load
Cases with Hanger Design (on page 441) for more information on these options.

Providing Wind Data

If you specify the wind shape factor in the Classic Piping Input dialog box, CAESAR II lists
WIN1, WIN2, WIN3 and WIN4 as available loads in Static Load Case Editor. Because the
software requires additional information to make an analysis, CAESAR II activates the Wind
Loads tab so that you can define the extra wind load data.

You can specify up to four different wind load profiles. Omit any of them to exclude the data from
the analysis. CAESAR II supports thirteen wind codes. For more information, see Wind Loads
Tab (Static Analysis Dialog Box) (on page 464).

448

CAESAR II User's Guide

Static Analysis
Select Wind Code or Profile
There are thirteen wind codes that you can use to generate wind loads on piping systems.
AS/NZ 1170:2002

IBC 2006

Brazil NBR 6123

IS 875

BS6399-97

Mexico 1993

China GB 50009

NBC 2005

EN 1991-1-4:2005

UBC

ASCE # 7 Standard Edition 2005

User -Defined Pressure versus Elevation Table

User-Defined Velocity versus Elevation

Table

Wind Direction Specification

You define wind direction by using the Wind Direction Specification boxes. You only need to
specify the method and the wind direction if you are using a pressure or velocity versus
elevation table. After clicking User Wind Profile, a dialog box prompts you for the
corresponding pressure or velocity table. You only need to make a single entry in the table if a
uniform pressure or velocity is to act over the entire piping system. Otherwise, type the pressure
or velocity profile for the applicable wind loading.

ASCE #7 Wind Load Parameters

According to ASCE #7, the following are typical basic wind-speed values:
California and West Coast Areas -124.6 ft./sec. (85 mph)
Rocky Mountains - 132.0 ft./sec (90 mph)
Great Plains - 132.0 ft./sec (90 mph)
Non-Coastal Eastern United States -132.0 ft./sec (90 mph)
Gulf Coast - 190.6 ft./sec (130 mph)
Florida-Carolinas - 190.6 ft./sec (130 mph)
Miami - 212.6 ft./sec (145 mph)
New England Coastal Areas - 176.0 ft./sec (120 mph)

CAESAR II User's Guide

449

Static Analysis

Providing Wave Data

If you specify the hydrodynamic coefficients in Classic Piping Input dialog box, CAESAR II lists
WAV1, WAV2, WAV3 and WAV4 as available loads in Static Load Case Editor. Because the
software requires additional information to make an analysis, CAESAR II activates the Wave
Loads tab so that you can define the extra wave load data.

You can specify up to four different wave load profiles. Current data and wave data can be
specified and included together. Omit either of them to exclude the data from the analysis.
CAESAR II supports three current models and six wave models. For more information, see
Wave Loads Tab (Static Analysis Dialog Box (on page 479).

Execution of Static Analysis

The static analysis performed by CAESAR II follows the regular finite element solution routine.
Element stiffnesses are combined to form a global system stiffness matrix. Each basic load case
defines a set of loads for the ends of all the elements. These elemental load sets are combined
into system load vectors. Using the relationship of force equals stiffness times displacement
(F=KX), the unknown system deflections and rotations can be calculated. The known deflections
however, may change during the analysis as hanger sizing, nonlinear supports, and friction all
affect both the stiffness matrix and load vectors. The root solution from this equation, the
system-wide deflections and rotations, is used with the element stiffnesses to determine the
global (X, Y, Z) forces and moments at the end of each element. These forces and moments are
translated into a local coordinate system for the element from which the code-defined stresses
are calculated. Forces and moments on anchors, restraints, and fixed displacement points are
summed to balance all global forces and moments entering the node. Algebraic combinations of
the basic load cases pick up this process where appropriate at the displacement, force and
moment, or stress level.
After the setup for the solution is complete, the calculation of the displacements and rotations is
repeated for each of the basic load cases. During this step, the Incore Solution Status dialog
box displays.

450

CAESAR II User's Guide

Static Analysis

This dialog box serves as a monitor of the static analysis. It is divided into several areas. The
upper-left side reflects the job size by listing the number of equations to be solved and the
bandwidth of the matrix that holds these equations. Multiplying the number of equations by the
bandwidth gives a relative indication of the job size. This area also lists the current load case
being analyzed and the total number of basic load cases to be solved. The iteration count, as
well as the current case number, shows how much work has been completed. Load cases with
nonlinear restraints can require several solutions, or iterations, before the changing assumptions
about the restraint configuration, such as resting or lifting off, active or inactive, are confirmed.
In the lower-left corner of the Incore Solver dialog box are two bar graphs that indicate where
the program is in an individual solution. These bar graphs illustrate the speed of the solution. By
checking the data in this first box, you have an idea of how much longer to wait for the results.
The right side of the solution screen also provides information regarding the status of nonlinear
restraints and hangers in the job. For example, messages noting the number of restraints that
have yet to converge or any hangers that appear to be taking no load, are displayed here. You
can step through nonlinear restraint status on an individual basis by pressing the F2 through F4
keys.
After the analysis of the system deflections and rotations, the results are post-processed to
calculate the local forces, moments, and stresses for the basic load cases and all results for the
algebraic combinations, for example L1-L2. These total system results are stored in a file with
the suffix _P (for example, TUTOR._P).

CAESAR II User's Guide

451

Static Analysis
The _A, or input file, the _P, or output file, and the OTL (Output Time Link file) are all that
are required to archive the static analysis. The remaining scratch files can be deleted without
any impact on the completed work.
During this post-processing, the Status frame lists the element for which the forces and stresses
are being calculated. After the last stresses of an element are computed, the output processor
dialog box displays. Use this dialog box to review the graphic and tabular results of the analysis.
For more information on interactive processing of output results, see Dynamic Input and
Analysis.

Definition of a Load Case

In CAESAR II, a load case is a group of piping system loads that are analyzed together and
occur at the same time. An example of a load case is an operating analysis composed of the
thermal, deadweight, and pressure loads together. Another example is an as-installed analysis
of deadweight loads alone. A load case can also be composed of the combinations of the results
of other load cases. For example, a load case can be the difference in displacements between
the operating and installed cases. No matter what the contents of the load case, it always
produces a set of reports, which list restraint loads, displacements and rotations, internal forces,
moments, and stresses. Because of piping code definitions of calculation methods and/or
allowable stresses, the load cases are also tagged with a stress type. For example, the
combination mentioned previously might be tagged as an EXPansion stress case.

452

CAESAR II User's Guide

Static Analysis
Piping System Loads
The piping system loads that compose the basic non-combination load sets relate to various
input items found on the Classic Piping Input dialog box. The following tables list the individual
load set designations, their names and the input items, which make them available for analysis.
Designation

Name

Input items which activate this

load case

Deadweight

Pipe Weight, Insulation Weight,

Refractory Weight, Cladding
Weight, Fluid Weight, Rigid Weight

WNC

Weight No fluid Contents

Pipe Weight, Insulation Weight,

Refractory Weight, Cladding
Weight, Rigid Weight

WW

Water Weight

Pipe Weight, Insulation Weight,

Refractory Weight, Cladding
Weight, Water-filled Weight, Rigid
Weight (usually used for Hydro
Test)

T1

Thermal Set 1

Temperature #1

T2

Thermal Set 2

Temperature #2

T3

Thermal Set 3

Temperature #3

T9

Thermal Set 9

Temperature #9

P1

Pressure Set 1

Pressure #1

P2

Pressure Set 2

Pressure #2

P3

Pressure Set 3

Pressure #3

P9

Pressure Set 9

Pressure #9

HP

Hydrostatic Test Pressure

Hydro Pressure

D1

Displacements Set 1

Displacements (1st Vector)

D2

Displacements Set 2

Displacements (2nd Vector)

D3

Displacements Set 3

Displacements (3rd Vector)

D9

Displacement Set 9

Displacements (9th Vector)

F1

Force Set 1

Forces/Moments (1st Vector)

F2

Force Set 2

Forces/Moments (2nd Vector)

F3

Force Set 3

Forces/Moments (3rd Vector)

F9

Force Set 9

Forces/Moments (9th Vector)

WIN1

Wind Load 1

Wind Shape Factor

WIN2

Wind Load 2

Wind Shape Factor

WIN3

Wind Load 3

Wind Shape Factor

CAESAR II User's Guide

453

Static Analysis
WIN4

Wind Load 4

Wind Shape Factor

WAV1

Wave Load 1

Wave Load On

WAV2

Wave Load 2

Wave Load On

WAV3

Wave Load 3

Wave Load On

WAV4

Wave Load 4

Wave Load On

U1

Uniform Loads

Uniform Loads (1st Vector)

U2

Uniform Loads

Uniform Loads (2nd Vector)

U3

Uniform Loads

Uniform Loads (3rd Vector)

CS

Cold Spring

Material # 18 or 19

Hanger Initial Loads

Hanger Design or Prespecified

Hangers

Available piping system loads display on the left side of the Static Analysis dialog box.

Basic Load Cases

Basic load cases can consist of a single load, such as WNC for an as-installed weight analysis.
A basic load can also include several loads added together, such as W+T1+P1+D1+F1 for an
operating analysis. The stress categories SUStained, EXPansion, OCCasional, OPErating, and
FATigue are specified at the end of the load case definition. The definition of the two examples
is: WNC (SUS) and W+T1+P1+D1+H (OPE). Enter each basic load case in this manner.
Load components, such as W, T1, D1, WIND1, can be preceded by scale factors such as 2.0,
-0.5, and so forth. Likewise, you can precede references to previous load cases by scale factors
when you build combination cases. This provides you with several benefits.
If one loading is a multiple of the other (such as Safe Shutdown Earthquake being two times
Operating Basis Earthquake) you only have to type one loading in the Classic Piping Input
dialog box. You can use this loading in a scaled or unscaled form in the Static Analysis
dialog box.
If a loading can be directionally reversible, such as wind or earthquake, you only have to
type one loading in the Classic Piping Input dialog box. You can use this loading preceded
by a + or a - to switch the direction.
Load Rating Design Factor (LRDF) methods can be implemented by scaling individual load
components by their risk-dependent factors. For example:
1.05W + 1.1T1+1.1D1+1.25 WIND1
You can select the stress type from the list on each line.
You can combine the results of the basic load cases using algebraic combination cases. Always
type these algebraic combinations after the last of the basic load cases. Designate combinations
of basic load cases by using the prefix L1, L2, and so on.

454

CAESAR II User's Guide

Static Analysis
You must specify the expected number of load cycles for all load cases with stress type
FAT.

The following family of load cases provides an example of algebraic combinations.

Load
Case

Designation

W+T1+P1+H+0.67C Hot operating. The 0.67scale factor takes credit only for 2/3
S (OPE)
of the cold spring.

W1+P1+H+0.67CS( Cold operating with cold spring included.

OPE)

W1+P1+H(SUS)

Traditional sustained case.

WIN1(OCC)

Wind case. This will be manipulated later to represent

average wind 1X, maximum wind 2X (in the positive and
negative directions).

L1-L2(EXP)

Traditional cold to hot expansion case. Use L for load,

rather than DS.

L1-L2(FAT)

Same case evaluated for fatigue at 10,000 cycles.

L1+L4(OPE)

Hot operating with average wind (in positive direction).

L1-L4(OPE)

Hot operating with average wind (in negative direction).

L1+2L4(OPE)

Hot operating with maximum wind (in positive direction).

10

L1-2L4(OPE)

Hot operating with maximum wind (in negative direction).

11

L2+L4(OPE)

Cold operating with average wind (in positive direction).

CAESAR II User's Guide

Comments

455

Static Analysis
Load
Case

Designation

Comments

12

L2-L4(OPE)

Cold operating with average wind (in negative direction).

13

L2+2L4(OPE)

Cold operating with maximum wind (in positive direction).

14

L2-2L4(OPE)

Cold operating with maximum wind (in negative direction).

15

L3+L4(OCC)

Occasional stress case, sustained plus average wind.

16

L3+2L4(OCC)

Occasional stress case, sustained plus maximum wind.

17

L9+L10+L11+L12(O Maximum restraint load case. The combination option

PE)
should be MAX.

CAESAR II permits the specification of up to 999 load cases for analysis. Copy the model
to a new file to specify the additional load cases if more cases are required.

Controlling Results
CAESAR II allows you to specify whether any or all of the load case results are retained for
review in the Static Analysis dialog box. You can use the two options found on the Load Case
Options tab. These are Output Status (on page 460) and Output Type (on page 460).

Static Analysis Dialog Box

Controls options for static analysis.

File Menu
Save - Saves the file. For more information, see Save <filename> (on page 199).
Print - Prints the file. For more information, see Print <filename> (on page 200).
Analyze - Runs the static analysis.
Exit - Closes the Static Analysis dialog box.

Edit Menu
Add Entry - Inserts a blank load case following the selected line in the list. If no line is
selected, the load case is added at the end of the list. To select a load case, click the number to
the left of the list.
Delete Entry - Removes the current entry from the Load Cases list.
Recommend - Replaces the current load cases with the CAESAR II recommended load cases.
Load Cycles - Hides or displays the Load Cycles column in the Load Cases list. Entries in this
column are only valid for load cases defined with the fatigue stress type.
Import Load Cases - Copies the load cases from a file. The units and load types of the copied
file must match those of the current file.
Click the blank line above L1, and then click Add Entry
beginning of the currently defined load cases.

456

to add a new load case to the

CAESAR II User's Guide

Static Analysis
Tabs
Load Case Editor Tab (Static Analysis Dialog Box) (on page 457)
Load Case Options Tab (Static Analysis Dialog Box) (on page 459)
Wind Loads Tab (Static Analysis Dialog Box) (on page 464)
Wave Loads Tab (Static Analysis Dialog Box (on page 479)

Load Case Editor Tab (Static Analysis Dialog Box)

Controls options for editing load cases. You can define up to 999 load cases. Click a line in the
Load Cases list to edit the load.
You can only specify the load components listed in the Loads Defined in Input list. The entries
must be identical to what is displayed in the list. You can change the Stress Type value by
clicking in the box and then selecting a different value from the list. Stress type determines the
stress calculation method and the allowable stress to use.
You can build load cases by dragging components from the Loads Defined in Input list and
dropping them on the Load Cases list. Drag basic load cases and drop them on other load
cases to create algebraic combination cases. CAESAR II prompts you for the combination type
when necessary. Use the Load Case Options tab to select combination methods and other
specifics pertaining to the load cases.
When you define a fatigue (FAT) stress type for a load case, the software displays the
Load Cycles box. Enter the number of anticipated load cycles for that load case.
You must specify all basic (non-combination) load sets before you can declare any algebraic
combinations. This is true for both user-defined and edited load cases.

Loads Defined in Input

Displays the load types available in the model input. For example, if T2 displays on the list then
the model has defined Operating Temperature 2. If T2 does not display then the model does
not include a second operating temperature.
The load types that can be defined are:
W - Weight including pipe, fluid, and insulation.
WW - Weight including pipe, water filled, and insulation.
WNC - Weight with no contents. Includes pipe and insulation.
T1 - Operating temperature 1.
T2 - T9 - Additional operating temperatures 2 through 9.
P1 - Operating pressure 1.
P2 - P9 - Additional operating pressures 2 through 9.
F1 - Concentrated force vector 1.
F2 - F9 - Additional force vectors 2 through 9.
D1 - Displacement vector 1.
D2 - D9 - Additional displacement vectors 2 through 9.
U1 - Uniform load vector 1.
U2 - U3 - Additional uniform load vectors 2 through 3.
WIN1 - Wind load vector 1
WIN2 - WIN4 - Additional wind load vectors 2 through 4.
WAV1 - Wave load vector 1.

CAESAR II User's Guide

457

Static Analysis
WAV2 - WAV4 - Additional wave load vectors 1 through 4.
CS - cold spring, material 18 or 19.
H - Hanger initial loads.
HP - Hydrostatic pressure.

Load Cases
Defines the load cases to be analyzed. Load cases are comprised of one or more major load
types as defined in the input. Major load cases are load cases that require a solution to the
matrix equation [K]{x} = {f}.
For example:
W+T1+P1+F1 (OPE) is a major load case
W+P1+F1 (SUS) is a major load case
Algebraic combination load cases are combinations of previously solved major load cases. For
example:
L1-L2 (EXP) is a combination case which combines the displacements, forces, and stresses
using a combination method that you select in Load Case Options.
L4+L6+L8 (OCC) is a combination case which combines the displacements, forces, and
stresses using a combination method that you select in Load Case Options.
The + and - signs are unary operators/sign of multiplier. If no value precedes the load for
major load cases or the load case for combination cases, then the multiplier is +1.0 or -1.0. If a
value precedes the load or the load case, then the multiplier is +value or -value.

Stress Types
Displays the stress types. The stress type applies to the load cases. It defines how the element
stresses and allowables are computed. The available stress types are:
OPE - Operating case. For B31.1 and B31.3 (and similar codes) this case is not a code
compliance case. Allowable stresses are not reported.
SUS - Sustained case.
EXP - Expansion case.
OCC - Occasional load case.
FAT - Fatigue load case.
HGR - Spring hanger design. These are load cases that CAESAR II uses internally to design
and select spring hangers. Results are not available for these cases.
HYD - Hydro test. Select hanger status. For a hydrotest case, the default hanger status is rigid
or locked.

458

CAESAR II User's Guide

Static Analysis

Load Cycles
Load cycles are used only for fatigue type load cases. The load cycle value is the anticipated
number of applications of this load on the system. This value is used to determine the allowable
stress from the fatigue curve for the material. For static cases, calculated stresses are
considered full range. For dynamic cases, calculated stresses are considered half range, which
is the amplitude of the full stress range.

Recommend
Displays the Recommended Load Cases dialog box. This dialog box suggests the load cases
that should be run to satisfy the basic requirements of the piping codes. You can then choose to
run the load cases as presented, or you can modify them to meet your requirements.

Recommended Load Cases Dialog box

Displays a list of load cases that CAESAR II recommends to satisfy the expansion and
sustained code compliance requirements. You can choose to run the load cases as presented,
or you can modify the cases to meet your requirements.

Load Cycles
Adds a Load Cycles column to the dialog box.

Import Load Cases

Opens a load case file.

Load Case Options Tab (Static Analysis Dialog Box)

Controls options for load cases, including defining more meaningful load case names.

CAESAR II User's Guide

459

Static Analysis
The user-defined names appear in the Load Case report. For more information, see Controlling
Results (on page 456). You can use these names in place of the default load case names
anywhere in the Static Analysis dialog box.

Load Case Name

Describes the CAESAR II load case name. This name replaces the CAESAR II load case
definition name when you review the output. Clear the box to display the CAESAR II load case
definition name.
Load case names cannot exceed 132 characters.

Output Status
Controls the disposition of the load case results. The available options are Keep or Suppress.
Use Keep when the load case is producing results that you want to review. The default for
all new cases (except for HGR load cases) is Keep.
Use Suppress for artificial cases such as the preliminary hanger cases, or intermediate
construction cases. Load cases used for hanger design, that is, the weight load case and
hanger travel cases designated with the stress type HGR, must be designated as Suppress.
For example, a wind only load case could be designated as Suppress because it was built only
to be used in subsequent combinations and has no value as a standalone load case. For all load
cases created under previous versions of CAESAR II, all load cases except the HGR cases are
converted as Keep.

Output Type
Designates the type of results available for load cases that have a Keep status. Use this field to
help minimize clutter on the output and to ensure that only meaningful results are retained. The
available options are:
Disp/Force/Stress - Provides displacements, restraint loads, global and local forces, and
stresses. This is a good choice for operating cases where you are designing to a code which
does a code check on operating stresses, because the load case is of interest for
interference checking (displacements) and restraint loads at one operating extreme (forces).
Disp/Force - Provides displacements restraint loads, global and local forces. This is a good
choice for OPE cases where you are designing for those codes which do not do a code
check on OPE stresses.
Disp/Stress - Provides displacements and stresses only.
Force/Stress - Provides restraint loads, global and local forces, and stresses. This is a
good choice for the Sustained (cold) case, because the load case would be of interest for
restraint loads at one operating extreme (forces), and code compliance (stresses). FR
combination loads cases developed under previous versions of CAESAR II are converted
with this force/stress type.
Disp - Provides displacements only.
Force - Provides restraint loads, global, and local forces only.
Stress - Provides stresses only. This is a good choice for a sustained plus occasional load
case (with Abs combination method), because this is an artificial construct used for code
stress checking purposes. ST combination load cases developed under previous versions of
CAESAR II are converted with this stress type.

460

CAESAR II User's Guide

Static Analysis

Combination Method
Specifies the combination method to use for combination cases only. Load cases to combine
are designated as L1, L2, and so on. Select the combination method from the list.
Load case results are multiplied by any associated scale factors before performing the
combination and comparison.
The available methods are:
Algebraic - Indicates a signed algebraic combination of displacement and force level. This
method combines the displacement vectors and the force vectors algebraically and then
calculates the stresses from the combined forces. Displacements are the algebraic combination
of the displacement vectors. Forces are the algebraic combination of the force vectors. Stresses
are not combined. Stresses are calculated from the algebraically combined forces. The
Algebraic method would typically be used to calculate EXP code stresses.
The obsolete CAESAR II combination methods DS and FR used an Algebraic combination
method. Therefore, load cases built in previous versions of CAESAR II using the DS and FR
methods are converted to the Algebraic method. Also, new combination cases automatically
default to this method, unless you change them.
Algebraic combinations can be built only from basic load cases. Basic load cases are
non-combination load cases or other load cases built using the Algebraic combination method.
Scalar - Indicates a signed combination of displacement, force, and stress level. This method
combines the displacement vectors, force vectors, and stress scalars. Displacements are the
algebraic combination of the displacement vectors. Forces are the algebraic combination of the
force vectors. Stresses are the scalar combination of the stress scalars.
The combination of displacements and forces are the same for ALG and Scalar methods. The
combinations of stress levels are different between ALG and Scalar methods because the
stresses are calculated from the combined forces in the ALG method and summed in the Scalar
method. .
For example:
Load Case 1: bending stress = 100 psi, due to X-moment
Load Case 2: bending stress - 100 psi, due to Z-moment
Algebraic (vectorial) sum = square root of (100*100 + 100*100) = 141.4 psi
Scalar sum = 100 + 100 = 200 psi
Scalar is typically used to sum (SUS + OCC) code stresses.
The obsolete CAESAR II combination methods ST used a Scalar combination method.
Therefore, load cases built in previous versions of CAESAR II using the ST method are
converted to the Scalar method.
SRSS - Indicates a combination of the square root of the sum of the squares of quantities, such
as the displacements of the forces or the stresses. Displacements are the square root of the
sum of the squares of the displacements of all cases included in the combination. Forces are the
square root of the sum of the squares of the forces of all cases included in the combination.
Stresses are the square root of the sum of the squares of the stresses of all cases included in
the combination. This method is typically used to combine seismic directional components.
ABS - Indicates a combination of the absolute values of quantities, such as the displacements,
the forces, or the stresses. Displacements are the sum of the absolute value of the
displacements of all cases included in the combination. Forces are the sum of the absolute
value of the forces of all cases included in the combination. Stresses are the sum of the
absolute value of the stresses of all cases included in the combination. This method is typically
used to combine SUS cases with OCC cases for occasional stress code check.

CAESAR II User's Guide

461

Static Analysis
MAX - Indicates a combination that reports the maximum displacement, the maximum force,
and the maximum stress value of the cases combined. This method retains the original sign.
Displacements are the displacements having the maximum absolute values of all the load cases
included in the combination. Forces are the forces having the maximum absolute values of all
the load cases included in the combination. Stresses are the stresses having the maximum
absolute values of all the load cases included in the combination. This method is typically used
to report the greatest restraint loads from among a selected set of load cases.
MIN - Indicates a combination that reports the minimum displacement, the minimum force, and
the minimum stress value of the cases combined. This method retains the original sign.
Displacements are the displacements having the minimum absolute values of all the load cases
included in the combination. Forces are the forces having the minimum absolute values of all the
load cases included in the combination. Stresses are the stresses having the minimum absolute
values of all the load cases included in the combination.
SIGNMAX - Indicates a combination that reports the maximum displacement, the maximum
force, and the maximum stress value of the cases combined. The sign is considered in the
comparison. Displacements are the maximum signed values of all the displacements from each
case included in the combination. Forces are the maximum signed values of all the forces from
each case included in the combination. Stresses are the maximum signed values of all the
stresses from each case included in the combination. This method is typically used in
conjunction with SignMin to report the envelope of restrain loads from among a selected set of
load cases.
SIGNMIN - Indicates a combination that reports the minimum displacement, the minimum force,
and the minimum stress value of the cases combined. The sign is considered in the comparison.
Displacements are the minimum signed values of all the displacements from each case included
in the combination. Forces are the minimum signed values of all the forces from each case
included in the combination. Stresses are the minimum signed values of all the stresses from
each case included in the combination. This method is typically used in conjunction with
SignMax to report the envelope of restraint loads from among a selected set of load cases.

Snubbers Active
Indicates whether snubbers are active. Select the check box to indicate that snubbers are
considered to be rigid restraints for the load case. By default, OCC load cases activate this
option while other types of load cases clear this option.

Hanger Stiffness
Specifies the hanger stiffness for the load case. The three options are: As Designed, Rigid,
and Ignore.
As Designed - Causes the software to consider the actual spring hanger stiffnesses. Use this
option for most real (non-hanger design) load cases.
Rigid - Causes the software to model the spring hangers as rigid restraints. Use this option for
restrained weight cases and hydrotest cases if the spring hangers are pinned.
Ignore - Causes the software to remove the spring hanger stiffnesses from the model. Use this
option for hanger travel cases, unless you want to include the stiffness of the selected spring in
the operating for hanger travel case and iterate to a solution. In that case, select As Designed.
You must also adjust the hanger load in the cold case (in the physical system) to match the
reported hanger cold load.
User-defined hangers are not made rigid during restrained weight cases.

462

CAESAR II User's Guide

Static Analysis

Elastic Modulus
Designates use of Cold (EC) or any of the nine (EH1-EH9) hot elastic moduli to determine
results on a load case per condition basis.
EC - Cold elastic modulus.
EH1 - Hot elastic modulus corresponding to T1.
EH2 - EH9 - Hot elastic modulus corresponding to T2 through T9.

Elbow Stiffening Pressure

Specifies the pressure used to determine the modifiers for the SIF and k factors.
Pmax - Maximum of P1 through P9.
None - No pressure stiffening for the elbow.
P1 - P9 - Operating pressures 1 through 9.
Phydro - Hydrostatic pressure.

Elbow Stiffening Elastic Modulus

Specifies the elastic modulus is used to determine the modifiers for the SIF and k factors.
EC - Cold elastic modulus.
EH1 - EH9 - Hot elastic modulus corresponding to T1 through T9.

SUS Case Sh
Designates the use of a hot allowable stress (Sh) to determine the results on a per-load case
basis. Use this option for sustained (SUS) and occasional (OCC) load cases.
Sh_min - Minimum of Sh1 through Sh9.
Sh1 - Sh9 - Hot allowable stresses corresponding to T1 though T9.
The SUS Case Sh option applies only to B31.3 2010 Edition codes and later.

Friction Multiplier
Specifies the multiplier of friction factors used in this particular load case. The friction factor (Mu)
used at each restraint is this multiplier times the Mu factor at each restraint. Set this value to
zero to deactivate friction for this load case.

CAESAR II User's Guide

463

Static Analysis

Occ Load Factor

Displays/overrides the occasional load factor defined in the configuration. The default value
changes according to the piping code and the frequency of occurrence.
ISO-14962 - Occasional load factors are defined differently for different load cases (Operating,
Sustained, Occasional, and Hydrotest). The default occasional load factors for these load
cases are:
1.0 - Sustained load cases
1.25 - Operating load cases
1.33 - Occasional and Hydrotest cases
The Occasional load factor and the System design factor from the Allowable Stress dialog
box are multiplied together to generate the Part Factor for Loading (f2) as defined in
ISO-14692. As an example, using a default system design factor of 0.67 with the above default
occasional load factors results in the following default values for the part factor for loading:
Load Case Type

System Design
Factor

Occasional Load
Factor

Part Factor for

Loading

Sustained

0.67

1.00

0.67

Operating

0.67

1.24

0.83

Occasional

0.67

1.33

0.89

Hydrotest

0.67

1.33

0.89

Flange Analysis Temperature

Specifies the temperature used to determine the flange allowable.
None No flange analysis.
T1 - T9 - Operating temperatures 1 through 9.
Tmax - Maximum of T1 through T9.
TAmb Ambient temperature.

464

CAESAR II User's Guide

Static Analysis

Wind Loads Tab (Static Analysis Dialog Box)

Controls options for wind loads.

Editing Wind Case

Specifies the wind case to edit. The first box indicates the active wind case. The second box
displays the total number of defined cases.

Copy Wind Vector

Displays the Copy Environmental Loading Data dialog box, which is used to copy the wind
data from any defined wind case to any remaining wind case. This is especially useful for large
wind pressure or Velocity versus Elevation tables.

Copy Environmental Loading Data Dialog Box

Copies the wind or wave data from the current wind or wave case to any specified remaining
wind or wave case. Use this feature when there is large wind or wave pressure or with Velocity
versus Elevation tables.

Select Wind Code or Profile

Specifies the wind code or one of the user-defined (velocity or pressure) profiles. Depending on
the choice here, the dialog is updates.

Wind Direction Specification

Specifies the direction vector (cosine) which defines the direction of the wind. The magnitude of
the vector is not significant. For example:
Wind in X direction, vector is 1, 0, 0
Wind in Z direction, vector is 0, 0, 1
Wind at 45 degrees, vector is .707, 0, .707

User Wind Profile

Displays the CAESAR II dialog box.

CAESAR II Dialog Box

Specifies the Pressure and Elevation values. The units used in the grid are taken from the
input file. They do not necessarily match the current setting in the configuration file.

CAESAR II User's Guide

465

Static Analysis

Basic Wind Speed

Specifies the three-second gust speed at 33 ft. (10 m.) above ground for Exposure C category
as determined according to Section 6.5.6.3.

Wind Exposure
Specifies the wind exposure. This value is the exposure category that adequately reflects the
characteristics of ground surface irregularities. Exposure categories are defined in ASCE
#7-2005 Sec. 6.5.6.3 as follows:
2 - Exposure B - Urban, suburban, and wooded areas, prevailing, for at least 2,600 ft.
upwind.
3 - Exposure C - All cases not "B" or "D".
4 - Exposure D - Flat coastal areas, prevailing at least, 5,000 ft. upwind.
2, 3 and 4 are the options for wind exposure categories, and are equivalent to categories
B, C, and D, from ASCE #7-2005.

Structural Damping Coef.

Specifies the structural damping coefficient. This value is the percentage of critical damping and
is used to calculate the gust factor for the wind load calculations.

Structural Classification
Specifies the classification of buildings and structures based on the type of occupancy.
ASCE #7-1995 Table 1-1, classification is as follows:
1 - Category I - Failure represents low hazard.
2 - Category II - All structures except 1, 3, and 4.
3 - Category III - Primary occupancy more than 300 people.
4 - Category IV - Essential facilities (Hospitals, and so forth)
1, 2, 3 and 4 are the options for structural classification categories, and are equivalent to
categories I, II, III and IV defined in ASCE#7.

Importance Factor
Specifies the importance factor (I). This value is used to calculate the velocity pressure for wind
load calculations. The importance factor depends on the structural classification and whether or
not the region is prone to hurricanes, as shown in the table below.
For ASCE #7-2005 Input the importance factor from ASCE #7-2005 Table 6-1

466

Category

Non-Hurricane

Hurricane Prone

1-I

0.87

0.77

2-II

1.00

1.00

3-III

1.15

1.15

4-IV

1.15

1.15

CAESAR II User's Guide

Static Analysis
1, 2, 3, and 4 are the options for structural classification categories, and are equivalent to
categories I, II, III and IV, defined in ASCE #7.

Structure Natural Frequency, f (Hz)

Specifies the natural frequency used to calculate the dynamic wind gust effect factor for
dynamically sensitive structures. (f < 1 Hz. )
If the natural frequency is zero CAESAR II uses a gust effect factor 0.85.

Height of Hill or Escarpment

Specifies the height of hill or escarpment value. This value is the height relative to the upwind
terrain. It is used in calculations of the topographic factor of structures sited on the upper half of
hills and ridges or near the edges of escarpments.

Crest Distance
Specifies the distance upwind of crest to where the difference in ground elevation is half the
height of hill or escarpment.

Distance from Crest to Site

Specifies the distance upwind or downwind from the crest to the building site.

Hill Type
Specifies the hill type. This value is the hill type is defined as follows:
0 - NO HILL
1 - 2-D Ridge
2 - 2-D Escarpment
3 - 3-D Axisymmetric Hill

Design Wind Speed

Specifies the NBC Reference Wind Pressure. The reference velocity pressure q is the
appropriate value determined in conformance with Subsection 1.1.3 (based on probability) or
Table C-1.
Design Wind Speed - Specifies the design value of the wind speed. This varies according to
geographical location and according to company or vendor standards. Typical wind speeds in
miles per hour are 85.0, 100.0, 110.0, and 120.0.
Type the lowest value reasonably allowed by the standards you are following because
the wind design pressure (and thus force) increases as the square of the speed.

CAESAR II User's Guide

467

Static Analysis

UBC Options
Specifies options for the UBC and IBC wind codes.
UBC Exposure Factor/IBC Exposure Constant - Specifies the UBC Exposure Factor as
defined in UBC-91 Section 2312 or the IBC Exposure Constant:
Exposure B - Terrain with building, forest or surface irregularities 20 feet or more in height
covering at least 20 percent or the area extending one mile or more from the site.
Exposure C - Terrain which is flat and generally open, extending one-half mile or more from
the site in any full quadrant.
Exposure D - The most severe exposure with basic wind speeds of 80 mph or more.
Terrain which is flat and unobstructed facing large bodies of water over one mile or more in
width relative to any quadrant of the building site. This exposure extends inland from the
shoreline 1/4 mile or 0 times the building (vessel) height, whichever is greater.
Most petrochemical sites use a value of 3, exposure C. This value is used to set the Gust
Factor Coefficient (Ce) found in Table 23-G.
UBC Importance Factor - Specifies the UBC importance factor. The software uses this value
directly without modification. This value is taken from Table 23-L of the UBC standard.
Followings are the context of Table 23-L:
Category

Value

I - Essential facilities

1.15

II - Hazardous facilities

1.15

III - Special occupancy structures

1.00

IV - Standard occupancy structures

1.00

Reference Wind Pressure

Specifies the NBC Reference Wind Pressure. The reference velocity pressure q is the
appropriate value determined in conformance with Subsection 1.1.3 (based on probability) or
Table C-1.
Design Wind Speed - Specifies the design value of the wind speed. This varies according to
geographical location and according to company or vendor standards. Typical wind speeds in
miles per hour are 85.0, 100.0, 110.0, and 120.0.
Type the lowest value reasonably allowed by the standards you are following because
the wind design pressure (and thus force) increases as the square of the speed.

468

CAESAR II User's Guide

Static Analysis

NBC Importance Factor

Specifies the NBC importance factor. This value is the importance factor for wind taken from the
table below. This is table 4.1.7.1 on page 4-17 of Division B of NBC 2005.
Importance Category

Importance Factor, Iw
ULS

SLS

Low

0.8

0.75

Normal

1.0

0.75

High

1.15

0.75

Post Disaster

1.25

0.75

Roughness Factor
Specifies the Roughness Factor:
1 - Round, moderately smooth
2 - Round, rough (D'/D = 0.02)
3 - Round, very rough (D'/D = 0.08)

Height of the Windward Face

Specifies the height of a piping section that is exposed to wind blow.

Ref. Wind Velocity [Vb,0]

Specifies the fundamental value of the basic wind velocity of the area where the equipment is
situated. Vb,0 is used along with Cdir and CSeason to compute Vb.
Terrain Category - Select the appropriate terrain category from the table below. Category 0
generates the highest wind loads while category 4 produces the lowest wind loads.
Terrain
Category

Description

Sea or Coastal area exposed to the open sea

Lakes or flat and horizontal areas with negligible vegetation and without
obstacles

Area with low vegetation such as grass and isolated obstacles (trees,
buildings) with separations of at least 20 obstacle heights

Area with regular cover of vegetation or buildings or with isolated obstacles

with separations of maximum 20 obstacle heights (such as villages,
suburban terrain, permanent forest)

Area in which at least 15% of the surface is covered with buildings and their
average height exceeds 15 m

CAESAR II User's Guide

469

Static Analysis
Directionality Factor [Cdir] - Value of the directional factor Cdir found in the National Annex.
The recommended value is 1.0.
Season Factor [Cseason] - Value of the season factor Cseason found in the National Annex.
The recommended value is 1.0.
Structural Factor [CsCd] - Structural factor used to determine the force on the vessel. This
value is defined in Section of the EN 1991-1-4:2005(E) Wind load specification in Annex D. This
value normally ranges between 0.90 and 1.10. The greater the structural factor value, the higher
the element load.
Force Coefficient [Cf] - Force coefficient which accounts for the fact that the vessel is circular
in cross section. This value modifies the area of the vessel that the wind is blowing against. This
value is often specified in the design specifications or can be computed based on the
methodology given in Section 7.9 for circular cylinders. A typical value for Cf would be between
0.7 and 0.8.

Mexico 1993 Options

Specifies the options available for the Mexico 1993 wind code.
Paragraph 4.6.2 ISOTACH MAPS. REGIONAL VELOCITY, VR - Velocity of the wind, VR, is
the maximum mean velocity likely to occur within a certain recurrence period in a determined
zone or region of the country.
The isotach maps that are included in this clause with the different periods of return, such
velocities refer to homogenous conditions that correspond to a height of 10 meters over the
surface of the floor in the flat terrain (Category 2 per table I.1). It does not consider the local
terrain roughness characteristics or the specific topography of the site. Therefore, such velocity
is associated with 3 second wind gusts and it takes into account the possibility that there might
be hurricane winds present in the coastal zones.
The regional velocity, VR, is determined by taking into account the geographic location of the
site of the building's uproot and its destination.
In figures I.1 through I.4, the isotach regional maps are shown, corresponding to the periods of
recurrence for 200, 50 and 10 years.
The importance of the structures (Para. 4.3) dictates the periods of recurrence which should be
considered for the wind design. From this, the groups A, B and C associate themselves with the
periods of return of 200, 50 and 10 years, respectively. The uproot site is located in the map with
the recurrence period which corresponds to the group to which the building belongs to, in order
to obtain the regional velocity. In the Tomo III from Ayudas de Dise O a table is shown with the
main cities in the country and their corresponding regional velocities for the different periods of
return.
Structural Classification - Specifies the structural classification.
Class

Description

Every remote structural element exposed directly to the wind action.

Horizontal or vertical structures that measure less than 20 meters of
length.

Horizontal or vertical structures that measure between 20 and 50

meters of length.

Horizontal or vertical structures that measure more than 50 meters of

length.

Terrain Category - Defined in Table I.1, based on the type of soil and roughness.

470

CAESAR II User's Guide

Static Analysis
Category

Description

Open terrain, practically smooth, without obstructions.

Flat or undulating soil, with few obstructions.

Terrain covered by many obstructions narrowly spaced.

Terrain with many big, tall, narrowly spaced obstructions.

TOPOGRAPHY FACTOR, FT (Paragraph 4.5.4) - This factor takes into account the local
topographic effect from the place in which the structure uproots. For example, if the building is
found on the hillsides, on top of hills or on mountains at important heights with respect to the
general level of the terrain of its outskirts, it is probable that wind accelerations generates and
the regional velocity should be increased.
Damping Factor - Typically, this value is 0.01.
DRAG COEFFICIENT, Ca (Table 1.28)
Cross Section

Type of Surface

H/b
1

25

40

Smooth or little rough

(d'/b 0.0)

0.5

0.6

0.7

0.7

Rough (d'/b 0.02)

0.7

0.8

0.9

1.2

Very rough (d'/b 0.08)

0.8

1.0

1.2

1.2

Circular
2
(bVD 6 m /s)

Any

0.7

0.8

1.2

1.2

Hexagonal or octagonal

Any

1.0

1.2

1.4

1.4

Square (wind normal to a Any

face)

1.3

1.4

2.0

2.2

Square (wind on a
corner)

1.0

1.1

1.5

1.6

Circular
2
(bVD 6 m /s)

Any

where:
b is the diameter or the horizontal dimension of the structure, including the roughness of the
wall; to determine the product bVD, this diameter is the one that is located at two thirds of the
total height, from the level of the land, in m
d' is the dimension that exceeds from the roughness, such as ribs or "spoilers", in m
VD is the velocity of the wind of design (4.6), in m/s, and it is valued for the two thirds of the
total height
For intermediate values of H/b and d'/b lineal interpolation is permitted.
Strouhal Number St - The Strouhal number is unitless; 0.2 for circular sections and 0.14 for
rectangular sections.

CAESAR II User's Guide

471

Static Analysis
Barometric Height Height

Barometric Pressure (mm Hg)

760

500

720

1000

675

1500

635

2000

600

2500

565

3000

530

3500

495

Ambient Temperature
Specifies the actual ambient temperature. The default ambient temperature for all elements in
the system is 70F/21C. If this does not accurately represent the installed, or zero expansion
strain state, then type the actual value in this box. The ambient temperature is used in
conjunction with the specified hot temperature and the interpolated expansion coefficient to
calculate the thermal expansion per inch of pipe length experienced by the element when going
from the ambient temperature to the hot temperature.
A default ambient temperature can be defined in the configuration file. For more information, see
New Job Ambient Temperature (on page 46). The software uses this configuration file value to
set the ambient temperature when you create a new model.

Terrain Roughness Category

Specifies the terrain roughness category.

472

Cat

Description

Examples

Limitations

Open terrain,
Coastal flat stripes, swamp
practically smooth and zones, aerial fields, pasture fields
without obstructions.
and crop lands with no hedges or
fences. Flat snow-covered
surfaces.

The minimum length for this

type of terrain in the
direction of the wind must be
of 2000 m or 10 times the
height of the structure to be
designed.

Flat terrain or
undulated, with few
obstructions.

Crop lands or farms with few

obstructions around such as
hedges of fences, trees and
scattered buildings.

The obstructions have a

height of 1.5 to 10 m, in a
minimum length of 1500 m.

Terrain covered by
many obstructions
narrowly spaced out.

Urban, suburban areas and

forests, or any other terrain with
many obstructions widely
scattered. The sizes of the
buildings are like the houses and
living spaces.

The obstructions have a 3 to

5 m height. The minimum
length for this type of terrain
in the direction of the wind
must be 500 m or 10 times
the height of the structure.

CAESAR II User's Guide

Static Analysis
4

Terrain with many big, Cities with downtown areas and

tall, and narrowly
well developed industrial complex
spaced-out
areas.
obstructions.

At least 50% of the buildings

have a height of more than
20 m. The obstructions
measure up from 10 to 30 m
in height. The minimum
length for this type of land in
the direction of the wind
should be the biggest
between 400 m and 10 times
the height of the
construction.

Pipe Surface Condition

Specifies the pipe surface condition. The three options are: 1 Smooth, 2 Rough, and 3 Very
Rough.

Total Wind Height

Specifies the structural damping coefficient. This value is the percentage of critical damping and
is used to calculate the gust factor for the wind load calculations.

Brazil NBR 6123 Options

Specifies options for the Brazil NBR 6123 wind code.
Basic Wind Velocity (Vo) - Velocity from a three second gust, exceeded only once in 50 years.
It is measured at 10 meters over smooth open ground and depends on the plant location. As a
general rule, the wind may blow in any horizontal direction. This velocity is taken from Figure 1,
and item 8 which shows the iso-velocities over Brazil. The referred to Figures and Tables are
found in the Petrobras document BPE-500-P4-19i and the Brazilian Wind Code NBR 6123.
Topographical Factor (S1) - Accounts for the variations and profile of the land. For plain or
slightly uneven ground, use a value of 1. The larger this value is, the greater the final computed
wind pressure is. If the vessel is on a hill top, this value should be computed according to
section 5.2 of NBR 6123.
Roughness Category (S2) Category

Description

Plain ground with large dimensions (more than 5 km of extension)

Plain (or slightly uneven) ground with few, and separated, obstacles

Plain or uneven ground obstructed by obstacles (walls or separated low

buildings)

Ground with many grouped obstacles in industrial or urban areas

Ground with many grouped and tall obstacles (such as developed

industrial areas)

Using Category I produces a higher wind load than Category II and so forth.
Dimension Class -

CAESAR II User's Guide

473

Static Analysis
Class

Description

Greatest dimension is less than or equal to 20 meters

Greatest dimension is greater than 20m and less than 50 meters

Greatest dimension is greater than or equal to 50 meters

Statistical Factor (S3) - Accounts for security and the expected life of the equipment. For
industrial plants S3 is generally taken to be 1.0.
Pipe Surface Condition - Vessel surface condition can be classified as smooth or rough. A
selection of rough results in an increased value of the shape coefficient. Using a rough
classification generates a higher wind load on the vessel as there is more drag. The shape
coefficient is computed based on the height to diameter ratio of the vessel.

IS-875 Options
Specifies options for the IS-875 wind code
IS-875 Basic Wind Speed - Basic wind speed as applicable to 10 m height above mean ground
level for different zones in the country can be directly calculated if the proper value is defined in
the Wind Zone Number box. Alternatively, wind speed can be defined here. Basic wind speed
should be based on peak gust velocity averaged over a short time interval of about 3 seconds
and correspond to mean heights above ground level in an open terrain. This box is optional.
IS-875 Wind Zone Number - Figure 1 of IS-875 shows different Wind Zones of the country.
Various zone numbers and corresponding Basic Wind Speed values are:
Zone 1

33 m/sec 73.82 miles/hour

Zone 2

39 m/sec 87.25 miles/hour

Zone 3

44 m/sec 98.43 miles/hour

Zone 4

47 m/sec 105.15 miles/hour

Zone 5

50 m/sec 111.86 miles/hour

Zone 6

55 m/sec 123.04 miles/hour

The value typed here must be between 1 and 6. The zone the vessel is in is determined from a
map of India showing the various wind zones.
Optionally, you can define the basic wind speed directly in the Basic Wind Speed box. If the
wind speed is specified, it overrides the value of wind speed and zone based on the table
above.
IS-875 Risk Factor (K1) - Assuming the mean probable design life as 100 years, the
corresponding risk coefficient values for various wind zones are:

474

Zone

K1

Zone 1

1.05

Zone 2

1.06

Zone 3

1.07

Zone 4

1.07

Zone 5

1.08

Zone 6

1.08

CAESAR II User's Guide

Static Analysis
IS-875 Terrain Category - Terrain in which specific equipment is assessed as one of the
following categories:
Category 1 - Exposed open terrain with few or no obstructions and in which the average
height of any object surrounding the equipment is less than 1.5 m. This category includes
open sea - coasts and flat treeless plains.
Category 2 - Open terrain with well scattered obstructions having height generally between
1.5 to 10 m. This includes airfields, open parklands and undeveloped sparsely built up
outskirts of towns and suburbs. This category is commonly used for design purpose.
Category 3 - Terrain with numerous closely spaced obstructions having the size of buildings
and structures up to 10 m in height. This includes well wooded areas, towns, and industrial
areas full or partially developed.
Category 4 - Terrain with numerous tall, closely spaced obstructions. This includes large
city centers, generally with obstructions above 25 m, and well developed industrial
complexes.
IS-875 Equipment Class - Equipment and structures are classified into following classes
depending upon their size.
Class A - Equipment and components having a maximum dimension (greatest horizontal or
vertical dimension) less than 20 m.
Class B - Equipment and components having a maximum dimension (greatest horizontal or
vertical dimension) between 20 and 50 m.
Class C - Equipment and components having a maximum dimension (greatest horizontal or
vertical dimension) greater than 50 m.
IS-875 Topography Factor - The topography factor ranges between 1.0 and 1.36. This factor
takes care of local topographic features such as hills, valleys, cliffs, ridges and so on, which can
significantly affect wind speed in their vicinity. The effect of topography is to accelerate wind
near summits of hills or crests of cliffs and decelerate the wind in valleys or near the foot of cliffs.
Effect of topography is significant if upwind slope is greater than about 3 degrees. Below 3
degrees, the value of K3 can be taken as 1.0. For slopes above 3 degrees, the value of K3
ranges between 1.0 and 1.36.
Use the Gust Response Factor - If this box is checked, the software computes the gust
response factor per IS-875 and uses it in the appropriate equations. Experience has shown that
these gust response factors are very conservative. Select this box only if the design
specifications and the customer or owner explicitly require you to do so.

Beta
Specifies the structural damping coefficient. Type the value of structural damping coefficient
(percentage of critical damping) beta. The default value is 0.01.
This value is used to compute the dynamic gust effect factor G as outlined in the commentary
section 6.6 page 158 of ASCE 95 or section 6.5.8 pages 29-30 of the 98 standard. If your design
Code is not ASCE, then the software uses the damping coefficient in accordance with that
particular wind design code.
If your design specification does not call out for a specific value of beta, then leave the value of
0.01 in this cell. Please note that other values of beta can be specified for the filled case and the
empty case. Again if the specifications do not supply these values for empty and filled leave
these cells blank.

CAESAR II User's Guide

475

Static Analysis

As/Nz 1170:2002 Options

Specifies options for the As/Nz 1170L2002 wind code.
Design Wind Speed - Design Wind Speed Vr. This is the regional wind speed described in
section 3.2 of the code.
Wind Region -Wind region. The wind region is determined from the geographic locations for
Australia and New Zealand. The maps of these locations are in Figure 3.1 of the code.
Terrain Category - Value discussed in section 4.2.1 of the code. These categories are defined
as:
Category 1 - Exposed open terrain with few or no obstructions and water surfaces at
serviceable wind speeds
Category 2 - Water surfaces, open terrain, grassland with few, well-scattered obstructions
having heights generally from 1.5 m to 10 m.
Category 3 - Terrain with numerous closely spaced obstructions 3 m to 5 m high such as
areas of suburban housing
Category 4 - Terrain with numerous large, high (10 m to 30 m high) and closely spaced
obstructions such as large city centers and well-developed industrial complexes
Choose the terrain category with due regard to the permanence of the obstructions that
constitute the surface roughness. In particular, vegetation in tropical cyclonic regions cannot be
relied upon to maintain surface roughness during wind events.
Lee Effect Multiplier (Mlee) - Specifies the Lee Effect Multiplier. The default value is 1.0.
Paragraph 4.4.3 discusses the issue of the lee effect multiplier. In the case of New Zealand,
reference is made to the New Zealand site map. For all other sites, it shall be taken as 1.0.
Hill Shape Factor (Mh) - Specifies the appropriate hill shape factor, which can be obtained from
Table 4.4 of the code. Please refer to paragraph 4.4.2 which gives precise details for the
derivation of the hill shape factor.
Upwind Slope
(H/2Lu)

Mh

< 0.05

1.00

0.05

1.8

0.10

1.16

0.20

1.32

0.30

1.48

>= 0.45

1.71

Wind Direction Multiplier (Md) - Specifies the wind direction multiplier. The default value is 1.0
The wind direction multiplier is detailed in paragraph 3.4 of the code, specifically Table 3.2. As
the wind multiplier is determined from the cardinal wind directions (N, NE, E, SE, S SW, W and
NW), the value for any direction is specified in the table as 1.0. We recommend this value be
used for all cases.
Convert to Permissible Stress Gust Wind Speed - In the standard AS/NZS 1170.2 Supp
1:2002 Section C3 there is a discussion regarding the division of the wind speed given in the
standard by the square root of 1.5. Checking the box converts the wind speed given to a
permissible stress basis. Doing this lowers the wind loads on the vessel.

476

CAESAR II User's Guide

Static Analysis
Surface Roughness Value (hr) - This value is used to compute the ratio hr/d which is then
used to compute the drag force coefficient (Cd) for rounded cylindrical shapes per Table E3. For
pressure vessels, this value ranges from 0.003 mm for painted metal surfaces to 15 mm for
heavily rusted surfaces. Light rust has a value of 2.5 mm while galvanized steel has a value of
0.15 mm.
The ratio hr/d is taken to be unitless (mm/mm).
Site Elevation (E) Specify the height of the site above the mean sea level, E.
Average Spacing of Shielding Buildings - Specifies the average spacing of the shielding
buildings. This is discussed in paragraph 4.3.3 of the code.
Average Breadth of Shielding Buildings (bs) - Specifies the average breadth of the buildings
that shield the piping.
Average Height of Shielding Buildings (hs) - Specifies the average height of the buildings
that shield the piping.
Number of Upwind Bldgs at 45 degs - Specifies the number of upwind buildings within a 45
degree arc. The upwind buildings are the ones shielding the piping.

BS-6399-97 Options
Specifies options for the BS-6499-97 British Wind Code.
Design Wind Speed - Specifies the design value of the wind speed. These vary according to
geographical location and according to company or vendor standards. Here are a few typical
wind speeds in miles per hour. Typical wind speeds are shown in Figure 6 of BS 6399. The wind
speeds are only relevant to the United Kingdom. The wind speeds vary typically from 20 m/sec
to 31 m/sec (44.7 mph to 69.3 mph).
Type the lowest value reasonably allowed by the standards you are following, because the wind
design pressure (and thus force) increases as the square of the speed.
Site Elevation - delta s - Enter the site altitude above mean sea level (paragraph 2.2.2.2 of the
code). Use this value plus the Base Elevation to calculate the height of each point in the vessel
above mean sea level. For example, if the vessel is installed on a site that is 100 m (328 ft)
above sea level, it is exposed to a higher wind pressure (P) than if installed on the beach (at
mean sea level).
Upwind Building Height (Obstruction Height) - Ho - For buildings in town terrain, type the
average height of the building upwind of the piping (as they tend to shield the piping from the
wind). To be conservative, this value can be zero, so the piping takes the full force of the wind.
Ho is used to modify the effective piping wind height (He) for any piping element. See paragraph
1.7.3.3 of BS6399.
Upwind Building Spacing - X - For buildings in town terrain, type the average spacing of the
buildings upwind of the piping (as they tend to shield the piping from the wind). If the buildings
are closer together, they provide greater protection from the wind. See paragraph 1.7.3.3 of
BS6399.
Pipe Location - Specifies the location where the system is installed, either in the country, or in a
town. The BS6399 factors in Table 4 modify the wind velocity. The final wind pressure acting on
any element of the piping is determined by the distance from the coast, whether located in the
country or a town, and the effective height (He). This table derives Sb, which is calculated by
internally.
Distance to Coast Line - Specifies the distance the vessel is located from the coast in
kilometers. This distance affects the corrected wind speed (Ve). The BS6399 factors in Table 4
modify the wind velocity. The final wind pressure acting on any element of the vessel is
determined by the distance from the coast, whether located in the country or a town, and the
effective height (He). This table derives Sb, which is calculated by internally.

CAESAR II User's Guide

477

Static Analysis
Size Effect Factor - Ca - Specifies the size effect factor Ca. This value is normally taken from
Figure 4 of BS-6399-2. This factor generally ranges from 0.53 to a maximum value of 1.0. The
size effect factor is a function of the diagonal dimension a, the effective height, the site in the
town or country and the distance to the sea.
Factor Kb from Table 1 - Kb - Specifies the 'Building-type factor Kb' taken from Table 1 of
BS6399. Choose from one of five values: 8, 4, 2, 1 or 0.5. CAESAR II sets the default to 2, but
any other value may be chosen. Please note the following limitations of Kb based on the vessel
height:
Kb

Maximum Vessel Total Height

23 m (75.4 ft)

75 m (246 ft)

240 m (787 ft)

300 m (984 ft)

0.5

300 m (984 ft)

Designing towers over 75 meters in height is unlikely and you would need to consider many
other things.
BS 6399 Table 1. Building-type Factor Kb
8

Welded Steel unclad frames

Bolted steel and reinforced concrete unclad frames

Portal sheds and similar light structures with few internal walls

Framed buildings with structural walls around lifts and stairs only (e.g. office
buildings of open plan or with partitioning)

0.5

Framed buildings with structural walls around lifts and stairs with additional
masonry subdivision walls (for example, apartment buildings), building of masonry
construction and timber-framed housing

Annual Probability Factor - Q - Calculates the final probability factor (Sp) associated with the
likelihood of high velocity gusts occurring over certain periods such as 50 years. The default
value is Q = 0.02. The code sets 0.02 as a standard value for a mean recurrence value of 50
years. Annex D of BS6399 should be consulted for a fuller explanation.

478

Explanation

0.632

NOTE 1: The annual mode, corresponding to the most likely annual

maximum value. (Sp = 0.749)

0.227

NOTE 2: For the serviceability limit, assuming the partial factor for loads for
the ultimate limit is f = 1.4 and for the serviceability limit is f = 1.0, giving Sp
= Sqrt(1 / 1.4) = 0.845. (Sp = 0.845)

0.02

NOTE 3: The standard design value, corresponding to a mean recurrence

interval of 50 years. (Sp = 1.000)

0.0083

NOTE 4: The design risk for bridges, corresponding to a mean recurrence

interval of 50 years. (Sp = 1.048)

CAESAR II User's Guide

Static Analysis
0.00574

NOTE 5: The annual risk corresponding to the standard partial factor for
loads, corresponding to a mean recurrence interval 1754 years. This is
back-calculated assuming the partial factor load for the ultimate limit is ?f =
1.4 and all risk is ascribed to the recurrence of wind. (Sp = Sqrt(1.4))

0.001

NOTE 6: The design risk for nuclear installations, corresponding to a mean

recurrence interval of 10,000 years. (Sp = 1.263)

Seasonal Factor - Ss - BS6399 in paragraph 2.2.2.4 states: "...For permanent buildings and
buildings exposed for continuous periods of more than 6 months a value of 1.0 should be used
for Ss..." PVElite uses 1.0 as the default value for this reason. Using a value of less than 1.0 is
not recommended, or should only be used with solid research.
Directional Factor - Sd - Taken from Table 3 of BS6399. Because a tower is symmetrical about
its central axis, the default value has been taken as 1.0. It is recommended that this value not be
reduced other than for exceptional circumstances. For other values, please consult Table 3. The
values in that table range between 0.73 and 1.00.

Wave Loads Tab (Static Analysis Dialog Box

Controls options for wave loads.

Editing Wave Case

Specifies the wave case to edit. The first box indicates the active wave case. The second box
displays the total number of defined cases.

Copy Wave Vector

Displays the Copy Environmental Loading Data dialog box.

Copy Environmental Loading Data Dialog Box

Copies the wind or wave data from the current wind or wave case to any specified remaining
wind or wave case. Use this feature when there is large wind or wave pressure or with Velocity
versus Elevation tables.

Current Profile Type

Specifies the means of modeling the current speed against the depth profile. Available current
profiles are:
Power Law - Current speed decays with depth to the 1/7 power.
Linear Table - Define the depth versus. speed table
Linear - Current speed decays linearly with depth becoming zero at the sea bottom.

CAESAR II User's Guide

479

Static Analysis

Surface Velocity
Specifies the current speed at the free surface elevation, excluding the wave. This value is
superseded by the entries in a depth versus speed table.

Direction Cosines
Specifies the X- and Z- cosines defining the direction of the current. The current direction may
differ from the direction of any accompanying wave.

Wave Theory
Specifies the wave theory by which to model any wave effects. The available theories are:
Stream Function - Dean's stream function theory
Stream Function, Modified - Dean's stream function theory modified to include a shear
current. This shear current is assumed to vary linearly from the surface speed to the bottom
speed. Therefore, this option only works with the Linear current profile.
STOKE'S 5th - Stoke's 5th order wave theory.
STOKE'S 5th, Modified - Stoke's 5th order wave theory modified to address particle data
above the mean sea level.
AIRY - Basic linear wave theory.
AIRY, Modified - Basic linear wave theory modified to address particle data above the
mean sea level.

Stream Function Order

Specifies the order of the stream function when using the stream function wave theory. Typical
values are from 5-21.

Water Depth
Specifies the water depth at this location.

Wave Height
Specifies the wave height (the crest to trough distance).

Wave Period
Specifies the wave period. That is, the time it takes for successive crests to pass a fixed
reference point.

480

CAESAR II User's Guide

Static Analysis

Wave Kinematics Factor

Specifies the wave kinematics factor. According to Section 2.3.1b of API RP 2A-WSD
"Recommended Practice for Planning, Designing and Constructing Fixed Offshore Platforms -Working Stress Design", the horizontal wave velocities calculated by the Stream Function or
Stokes 5th wave theories may be multiplied by this factor in order to fit them to the wave
spreading and other irregularities associated with real world wave characteristics.
Typical ranges for this factor are 0.85 to 0.95 for tropical storms and 0.95 to 1.0 for extra-tropical
storms. For particular recommendations for Gulf of Mexico and other U.S. waters, refer to
Sections 2.3.4d.1 and 2.3.4f.1 of API RP 2A-WSD.

Wave Direction Cosines

Specifies the X- and Z- cosines defining the direction of the wave. The wave direction may differ
from the direction of any accompanying current.

Wave Phase Option

Indicates whether all elements of the model should be simultaneously loaded with the same
phase of the wave (typically the phase of maximum loading) or whether each element
experiences a different loading phase, based upon its location relative to the model origin.

Phase Angle
Specifies the wave phase angle to use to calculate the wave loadings at either:
every element
model origin

Free Surface Elevation

Specifies the elevation of mean sea level, in terms of model elevation. This submerges the
elements of the model to the appropriate level.

Kinematic Viscosity
Specifies the kinematic viscosity of the fluid. Typical values for seawater are:
Temp (F)

v(in-in/sec)

Temp (C)

v(mm-mm/sec)

60

1.81e-3

15.556

1.171

50

2.10e-3

10.000

1.356

40

2.23e-3

4.444

1.440

30

2.88e-3

-1.111

1.858

CAESAR II User's Guide

481

Static Analysis

Density
Specifies the density of the sea water. A typical value for salt water is 0.037 (lb./cu.in.) or
0.00103 (kg/cu.cm.)

Current Table Depth

Displays the depth values. When using Linear Table Current Model, type up to 10 depths. A
value of 0.0 indicates the surface. Positive numbers indicate distance downward from the
surface.

Current Table Velocity

Displays the velocity values. When using Linear Table Current Model, type up to the current
speeds corresponding to the specified depths. Current speed typed in this table overrides the
Surface Velocity value.

482

CAESAR II User's Guide

Static Output Processor

SECTION 8

Static Output Processor

Provides an interactive review of static analysis results for the open job. The Static Output
Processor window automatically displays upon completion of a static analysis. You can also
select Output > Static from the main CAESAR II menu to open the window anytime after an
analysis has been completed.
The Static Output Processor window displays analysis results in a tabular form, in a graphical
animated form, or a combination of the two. Use commands in the Static Output Processor
window to:
Interactively review reports for any selected combination of load cases and/or report types.
Print or save to file copies for any combination of load cases and/or report types.
Add title lines to output reports.
Select extended or summarized versions of most standard reports.
Load Cases Analyzed - Lists all of the load cases which have been analyzed for the current
job. The cases are numbered, and labeled with the type (load category) addressed by the case.
Load types are:
OPE - operating, not a stress compliance case for B31.1/B31.3 and similar codes.
SUS - sustained, stress compliance for primary loads.
EXP - expansion, stress compliance for secondary loads.
OCC - occasional, stress compliance for occasional loads.
FAT - fatigue, stress compliance for cumulative damage.
HAR - harmonic case for dynamic evaluation of harmonic loads.
HGR - construction case used for spring hanger design - results are not available for these
load cases.
The load case description also includes the individual load components that contributed to the
load case.
The results for a load case can be viewed by selecting the load case. Multiple load cases can be
selected using the <Shift> and <Ctrl> keys in combination with the mouse. Load cases can be
deselected by using the <Ctrl> key in combination with the mouse.
Standard Reports - Lists the available reports associated with those load cases. For more
information, see Work with Reports (on page 484) and Report Options (on page 487).
General Computed Results - Lists reports, such as input listings or hanger selection reports,
that are not associated with load cases. For more information, see General Computed Results
(on page 499).
Custom Reports - Lists generated or imported custom reports. For more information, see Work
with Reports (on page 484) and Report Template Editor (on page 505).
Output Viewer Wizard - Selects specific reports and reviews their order before sending the
output to the selected device. To close the Output Viewer Wizard, click Less <<. For more
information, see Output Viewer Wizard (on page 504).

CAESAR II User's Guide

483

Static Output Processor

Work with Reports

When generated, a report displays in a tabbed Reports Viewer window. You can detach
individual reports from the tabbed view, and position them around the screen. Additionally, you
can dock a report next to other opened reports for a comparison view. Select the tab at the
bottom of the report, and while holding down the mouse, move the report. The outline shadow
shows the new location of the report. Release the mouse button to place the report in the new
location.

When a report is open, you can double-click the column headings to sort the report by
ascending or descending value order. Column order can be re-arranged by dragging columns to
another location. You can also adjust the column size or hide the column altogether. All changes
are for the current report in the current viewing session. To make permanent changes to the
report, use the Report Template Editor (on page 505).
You can print or save individual reports to a text file or to Microsoft Word or Microsoft Excel by
selecting Send Report To or Send All To from the right-click menu.
While the report is active, you can adjust the display properties available from the View menu,
change the background color, and turn on horizontal and vertical grid lines. Grid lines can help
in generating better print results.
Click View > Change Page Break to adjust the page configuration for an active report. You can
also scale the report to fit on one page, or adjust it to fit on a specified number of pages by using
the Allow Adjustment of Page Breaks and Show Page Break Lines options.

484

CAESAR II User's Guide

Static Output Processor

Filter Reports
Select Filters from the Static Output Processor menu to display a displacement, restraint,
force, or stress within a specified range. You can also filter on specific line numbers.

Filters are useful in processing reports containing fields from more than one class, such as the
Restraint Summary Extended report where fields from two classes of restraints and
displacements are present. For example, if the restraints class is failing but the displacements
class is passing, then the default OR combination would print the entire dataset. To exclude this
dataset from the report, the Classes combination should be switched to AND. All filter choices
are saved with the current job.
If you do not define a filter for any of the fields in the report, these fields are assumed to pass
the filter condition and are printed. From and To nodes apply to all class tabs.
By default both Fields and Classes are combined using the OR method. If any of the
filtering fields passes the filter condition, the entire dataset is printed. You can choose to switch
to the AND method in which only if all the filtering conditions are met will the entire dataset be
printed. First, the fields in each class are checked for the filter compliance. This initial field check
determines whether the entire class will pass or fail. Secondly, all classes are checked for the
filter compliance. The data is filtered by line numbers first, then by nodes, then by Classes and
Fields as specified on the Filter Options tab.
Using Filters
1. Select Filters on the menu.

CAESAR II User's Guide

485

Static Output Processor

2. Type the From node and To node numbers.

3.
4.

5.

6.
7.
8.

If you enter both a From and To node number, then the nodes in the specified range
display.
If you enter just a From node number, then the From node and all nodes greater than it
display.
If you enter just a To node number, then the To node and all nodes less than it display.
Select the Filter Options tab.
Select the appropriate Filter Options option: Absolute Value or Signed Value. The default
is to filter by the magnitude, regardless of the sign or direction. You can filter by a specific
direction of load or displacement. This feature is particularly useful when looking for lifting off
the supports in directional restraints (such as +Y).
Select the appropriate Combinations Fields option. Fields refer to the particular data items
(columns) in each class. For example, DX and RZ are in the Displacements class, or FX
and MZ are in the Restraints class, or Code Stress and Bending Stress are in the
Stresses class.
Select the appropriate Combinations Classes. Classes refers to the major types of output,
for example Displacements, Restraints, Forces, or Stresses.
Click the Class tab you want to apply the filter to.
Enter the information on the Class tab. Each tab contains related fields with a drop box and
an edit box. Each corresponding edit box displays the value to compare to. Each of the
drop boxes has a list of comparison operators:
Operator

Description

>

Greater than

>=

Greater or Equal

<

Less than

<=

Less or Equal

==

Equal

\=

Not Equal

9. Click Apply to define the filter.

Printing or Saving Reports to File Notes

The tabular results brought to the screen may be sent directly to a printer. Different
combinations of load cases and report types may be chosen, each followed by the File-Print
command, to create a single report.
Prints copies of the reports. To print copies of multiple reports as a single report,
use the Output Viewer Wizard to populate the report order tree, click Send To
Printer and then Finish.
Sends reports to a file (in ASCII format) rather than the printer. After selection, a
dialog displays where you select the file name. To change the file name for a new
report, select FILE-SAVE AS.

486

CAESAR II User's Guide

Static Output Processor

Typically, the set of output reports to print out for documentation purposes is:
Load Case

Report

Purpose

SUSTAINED

STRESS

Code compliance

EXPANSION

STRESS

Code compliance

OPERATING

DISPLACEMENTS

Interference checks

OPERATING

RESTRAINTS

Hot restraint, equipment loads

SUSTAINED

RESTRAINTS

As-installed restraint, equipment loads

Load cases used for hanger sizing produce no reports. Also, the hanger table and hanger
table with text reports are printed only once even though more than one active load case may be
highlighted.
To save multiple reports as a single report to a file, use the Output Viewer Wizard.

The signs in all CAESAR II Reports show the forces and moments that act "ON"
something. The Element Force/Moment report shows the forces and moments that act
"ON" each element to keep that element in static equilibrium. The Restraint Force/Moment
report shows the forces and moments that act "ON" each restraint.
When sending reports to MSWord, if a file named "header.doc" exists in the \caesar\system
directory, its contents are read and used as the page header when CAESAR II exports the
report to MSWord. The intent is that "header.doc" contains the company logo, address
details and formatting for tables. The interface uses a style names "report table" which you
can set up in "header.doc".

Report Options
For most load cases, except hanger design and fatigue, there are a variety of different report
options that can be selected for review.
Most standard reports have short and long versions, designated by the word Extended.
The extended reports usually have more data items available and may require a landscape
option when printed.
Displacements - Shows the nodal translations and rotations at each of the nodes. These
values represent the solution vector for each load case. For more information, see
Displacements (on page 488).
Restraints - Shows the loads imposed on the system supports for each load case. For more
information, see Restraints (on page 489).
Restraint Summary - Combines the restraint reports for any number of (user selected) load
cases. This provides a concise summary of the loads on the restraints, across load cases.
For more information, see Restraint Summary (on page 492).
Global Element Forces - Shows the element forces and moments acting on the ends of the
element. These forces and moments are aligned with the global coordinate system, and
represent the element free-body diagram. For more information, see Global Element Forces
(on page 495).
Local Element Forces - Shows the element forces and moments acting on the ends of the
element. These forces and moments are aligned with the local element coordinate system,
and represent the element free-body diagram. For more information, see Local Element
Forces (on page 495).

CAESAR II User's Guide

487

Static Output Processor

Stresses - Shows the element stresses acting on the ends of the elements. This report
also includes codes SIFs, code allowables, and the "code" stress when applicable. For more
information, Stresses (on page 496).
Cumulative Damage - Lists the combined fatigue stresses for all selected fatigue load
cases and compares it to the corresponding allowable for each node of each element. Note
that this report is only available for those jobs that include fatigue cases. For more
information, see Cumulative Usage Report (on page 499).

Displacements
Translations and rotations for each degree of freedom are reported at each node in the model.

Use the Filters feature to sort reports containing fields from more than one class. For
more information, see Filter Reports (on page 485).

488

CAESAR II User's Guide

Static Output Processor

Restraints
Forces and moments on each restraint in the model are reported. There is a separate report
generated for each load case selected.

Use the Filters feature to sort reports containing fields from more than one class. For
more information, see Filter Reports (on page 485).

CAESAR II User's Guide

489

Static Output Processor

Restraint Report - In Local Element Coordinates

It is possible to generate a restraint report where the loads and moments are aligned with the
local element coordinate system. This is particularly useful when addressing skewed nozzles,
where the axial, longitudinal and circumferential results are needed. As an example, consider
the small system shown below:

490

CAESAR II User's Guide

Static Output Processor

This system consists of two small horizontal lines anchored at both ends. The last element of
each line is skewed 45 degrees in the X-Z plane. At the end of this skewed line is an axial
restraint, as illustrated in the following figure:

The typical Global Restraint report for this system displays in the following table. At node 140,
this report shows two equal loads in the (global) X and Z directions. These values (24,463) are
the global component loads acting on the skewed restraint. The actual magnitude of the restraint
load, acting in-line with the pipe can be found by performing the SRSS of these component
loads, which yields 34595. This value is the load on the restraint acting axially with the pipe.
Operating Case Restraint Loads Global Coordinate System
NODE

FX lb.

FY lb.

FZ lb.

MX ft.lb.

MY ft.lb.

MZ ft.lb.

100

-24463

-514

66

1340.5

-273.3

-6418.6

Rigid ANC

119

-24528

0.0

0.0

0.0

Rigid Z

140

24463

24463

0.0

0.0

0.0

Flex X

200

-24463

-514

66

1340.5

-273.3

-6418.6

Rigid ANC

219

-24528

0.0

0.0

0.0

Rigid Z

240

24463

24463

0.0

0.0

0.0

Flex X

CAESAR II User's Guide

491

Static Output Processor

The process of performing SRSS or sine/cosine operations to obtain restraint loads in the
element coordinate system can be tedious. As an alternative, generate a restraint report where
all of the loads are aligned with the associated element coordinate system. The report for the
same small job displays in the table below.
Operating Case Restraint Loads Local Element Coordinate System
NODE

fx lb.

fy lb.

fz lb.

mx ft.lb.

my ft.lb.

mz ft.lb.

100

-24463

66

514

1340.5

-6418.6

273.3

Rigid ANC

119

-24528

0.0

0.0

0.0

Rigid Z

140

34595

0.0

0.0

0.0

Flex X

200

-24463

66

514

1340.5

-6418.6

273.3

Rigid ANC

219

-17344

-17344

0.0

0.0

0.0

Rigid Z

240

34595

0.0

0.0

0.0

Flex X

In reviewing the relationship between the local versus global restraint loads note the following:
The global FY (vertical) load at node 100 of -514 translates to a local fz load. For details on the
global to local coordinate system relations, see Technical Discussions (on page 765). (These
two values are shown in the tables in bold.)
At node 140, the skewed axial restraint, the first table showing the global coordinate system
loads, reports the two equal component loads. The second table showing the local loads,
reports only the resultant axial load at the restraint. (These values are shown in the tables in
bold.)

Restraint Summary
Similar to the restraint report, this option provides force and moment data for all valid selected
load cases together on one report.

Use the Filters feature to sort reports containing fields from more than one class. For
more information, see Filter Reports (on page 485).

492

CAESAR II User's Guide

Static Output Processor

Nozzle Check Report

The Nozzle Check report defines the appropriate force/moment limits on a specified nozzle.

Data for each load case reported is a result of calculation (and can also be viewed on a Local
Restraints report). The Limits shown in the report are the values from the input. Similarly, the
Comparison method also reflects the input setting. The loads shown are the loads on the
nozzle for the indicated load cases. If any load exceeds its corresponding allowable load, then
the entire line is shown in red (with an asterisk at the far right in the event the report is printed in
black and white.)
The Resultant column reports the resultant forces and moments for the SRSS Comparison
method, and the unity check value for the Unity Check method.

Flange Reports
Flange Reports are available after completing the In-line Flange Evaluation analysis. There
are two methods and two corresponding reports for evaluating flanges under load: Kellogg
Equivalent Pressure Method (Peq) and ASME B&PVC Section III Subsection NC-3658.3
Method (NC-3658.3).

CAESAR II User's Guide

493

Static Output Processor

The reports display some of the relevant input items along with the calculated corresponding
moments and stresses or equivalent pressure for each node where the flange evaluation was
requested. This is an elemental type report, and the flanges may be defined on either end of the
element. Because of this, some lines in the report with no corresponding output are blank.

494

CAESAR II User's Guide

Static Output Processor

Global Element Forces

Forces and moments on the piping are reported for each node in the model.

Use the Filters feature to sort reports containing fields from more than one class. For
more information, see Filter Reports (on page 485).

Local Element Forces

These forces and moments have been transferring into the CAESAR II Local Coordinate
system. For more information, see Technical Discussions (on page 765).

Use the Filters feature to sort reports containing fields from more than one class. For
more information, see Filter Reports (on page 485).

CAESAR II User's Guide

495

Static Output Processor

Stresses
SIFs and code stresses are reported for each node in the model. The code stresses are
compared to the allowable stress at each node as a percentage. Stresses are not computed at
nodes on rigid elements or on structural steel elements.

Use the Filters feature to sort reports containing fields from more than one class. For
more information, see Filter Reports (on page 485).

496

CAESAR II User's Guide

Static Output Processor

Stress Summary
The highest stresses at each node are presented in summary format for all selected load cases.

Use the Filters feature to sort reports containing fields from more than one class. For
more information, see Filter Reports (on page 485).

CAESAR II User's Guide

497

Static Output Processor

Code Compliance Report

Stress checks for multiple load cases can be included in a single report using the Code
Compliance report. The report shows the stress calculation for all selected load cases together,
on an element-by-element basis.

498

CAESAR II User's Guide

Static Output Processor

Cumulative Usage Report

The Cumulative Usage report is available only when there are one or more fatigue-type load
cases present. After the Cumulative Usage report is generated, regardless of the number of
load cases selected, the report shows the combined impact of simulating selected fatigue
loadings.

General Computed Results

General Computed Results lists reports, such as input listings or hanger selection reports,
which are not associated with load cases.

Topics
Load Case Report .......................................................................... 500
Hanger Table with Text .................................................................. 501
Input Echo ...................................................................................... 502
Miscellaneous Data ....................................................................... 503
Warnings ........................................................................................ 503

CAESAR II User's Guide

499

Static Output Processor

Load Case Report

The Load Case Report documents the Basic Names (as built in the Load Case Builder),
User-Defined Names, Combination Methods, Load Cycles, and Load Case Options (Out\-put
Status, Output Type, Snubber Status, Hanger Stiffness Status, and Friction Multiplier) of the
static load cases. This report is available from the General Computed Results column of the
Static Output Processor.

500

CAESAR II User's Guide

Static Output Processor

Hanger Table with Text

The Hanger Table and Hanger Table with Text reports provide basic information regarding
spring hangers either selected by CAESAR II or by you. Information provided includes the node
number, the number of springs required, the hanger table figure number and size, the hot load,
the theoretical installed load, which is what the hangers are set to in the field prior to pulling the
pins, the actual installed load, which is the load on the hanger when the pipe is empty, the
spring rate from the catalog, and the horizontal movement determined from the CAESAR II
out\-put. If constant effort supports are selected, then the hanger constant effort force is
reported.
Hanger Table with Text has additional information about variable support spring designed,
maximum and minimum allowed single spring load, and recommended installation clearance as
read from the catalogs.

CAESAR II User's Guide

501

Static Output Processor

Input Echo
The Input Echo option allows you to select which portions of the input are reported in this
output format. All basic element data (geometry), operating conditions, material properties, and
boundary conditions are available in this report option. Select what you want to see, and then
click OK.

502

CAESAR II User's Guide

Static Output Processor

Miscellaneous Data
The Miscellaneous Data report displays SIF and Flexibility data for Bends and Tees, Allowable
Stress Summary, Reducers report, Nozzles Flexibility data, Pipe Properties report with weights
and minimum calculated wall thickness for each element, Thermal Expansion Coefficients for
each element as used during analysis, Center-of-Gravity report (C.G.), Bill of Materials (B.O.M.),
Wind, and Wave input data.

Warnings
All warnings reported during the error checking process are summarized here.

CAESAR II User's Guide

503

Static Output Processor

Output Viewer Wizard

After clicking More >> in the lower right corner of the Static Output Processor, the Output
Viewer Wizard dialog box displays. The Output Viewer Wizard can be hidden again by clicking
Less <<.

The Output Viewer Wizard consists of the Report Order window and auxiliary operational
buttons. You can add any report to the view by clicking Add. You can delete any report by
clicking Remove. You can arrange the order of the reports by highlighting the report and then
moving it up or down by clicking Move Up or Move Down.
You can send a report to the screen or to a printer by selecting the appropriate radio button in
the upper section of the Output Viewer Wizard dialog box. After clicking Finish, the reports are
automatically sent to the specified device in the order displayed in the Report Order window.
To generate a table of contents, select Generate Table of Contents (TOC).
The Table of Contents does not display if Send to Screen is selected, regardless if the
Generate Table of Contents (TOC) check box was selected or cleared.

504

CAESAR II User's Guide

Static Output Processor

Report Template Editor

You can create your own reports or edits existing reports using the Report Template Editor. To
create a new report, select one or more load cases, and then click Add New Custom Report
Template
(Options > Custom Reports > New on the menu). You can also customize an
existing report by selecting the load case, a standard or custom report name, and then clicking
Edit an Existing Custom Report Template
(Options > Custom Reports > Edit on the
menu).

The Report Template Editor dialog box consists of two sections: the template editor to the left
and the preview grid to the right.
The template editor has a tree-like structure and resembles Window Explorers folder view.
There are 11 major categories available: Template Name and Template Settings for general
report editing, and several output fields; Displacements, Restraints, Local Restraints, Equipment
Nozzle Checks, Global and Local Forces, Flange Evaluation, Stresses, and Hanger Table Data.
The Template Name category allows you to specify the report name, enter a brief description of
the report, and select the report type. The report name followed by the template description
displays on the preview grid if the Include Report Name option is checked under the Template
Settings category.
There are three report types available:
Individual - Generates output reports, one per selected load case, in a format similar to the
standard Displacements or Restraints reports.
Summary - Generates a single output report for all the specified load cases as a summary,
in a format similar to the standard Restraint Summary report.
Code Compliance - Generates an output stress check report for multiple load cases as a
single report, similar to the standard Code Compliance report.

CAESAR II User's Guide

505

Static Output Processor

Actual columns and their order on the reports are controlled solely by you. Data from
various categories can be customized on a single report to suit your needs.
The Template Settings category provides options for the report header and the report body
text, formatting, and alignment. You can also set the font face, size, and color for the header and
the report body. You can include or remove specific header text (such as Report Name, Job
Title or Filters Description) by selecting and clearing the check box next to the corresponding
item. Report Line Spacing changes the spacing between lines of text. The Summary Line
check box (used with Summary-type reports) toggles the appearance of the summary line with
MAX values for each field or column per node. Select the Node Number/Name check box (used
with Summary-type reports) to repeat the Node information on each Loadcase line. If you clear
this option, then the node will appear on the separate line above the data for load cases. These
two options may help with later data manipulations when sending the reports to a Microsoft
Excel spreadsheet
Any changes in the editor are immediately reflected in the preview window.
Each of the following categories consists of related output data. For example, the
Displacements category contains three translational (DX, DY, and DZ) and three rotational
(RX, RY, and RZ) fields, Stresses contains Axial, Bending, and Code stresses among other
stress related fields. A number next to the field name indicates the Column Order this field will
be placed in. When nothing or a zero value is specified, this column will not be included in the
current report.
Each field contains the following information:
Field Name

506

Description

Column Number

Indicates the order of the fields in the output report.

Precision

Indicates the number of decimal places to be displayed.

Sort Order

Specifies whether the data in the column is in ascending, descending,

or in no order. This gives you flexibility of reviewing reports for
maximum (or minimum) values.

Font

Specifies the text font face, size and color for this field whenever
special formatting is required. Set the generic font settings for the
entire report at the Template Settings > Body category.

Align Values

Controls left, right, or center alignment of the values in the column.

Field Caption

Customize the name of the field as it appears on the report. This may
be useful to customize the display of the output displacements in the
report to reflect the plant North/South/East/West directions or vertical
and Horizontal notations instead of generic X, Y, Z.

Column Width

Controls the size of the column in terms of the number of displayed

characters or digits. In addition, resizing the columns in the Preview
Grid adjusts the Column Width value. Type 0 to close the column and
remove it from the report. Type -1 to size the column to the predefined
default size.

Units Based
Precision

Indicates whether to enable the automatic control of the displayed

number of decimal places to be calculated based on the selected
display units. This value is used together with the Units Conversion
Label value. The Precision value is ignored in this case. When set to
No, the Precision value takes place.

CAESAR II User's Guide

Static Output Processor

When a category or any particular field is highlighted in the editor, the help text for this
field displays in the Help box at the bottom of the editor window.
The Preview Grid on the right of the Custom Report Template Editor dialog is interactive. You
can drag the columns by their heading to arrange the order of the fields in the reports.
Double-clicking the column header sorts that columns values in ascending or descending order.
The dragged column number or sorted order value will automatically be saved in the Column
Number or Sort Order entry of that field in the editor tree. Click the column header once to
highlight that field in the editor tree, extend its contents and scroll it to view.
The Preview Grid is limited to the first 50 lines. The entire report is available after you
select the appropriate load cases and custom report name on the Static Output Processor
dialog box and click View Report.
Any current changes to the custom report template can be saved by clicking Save. The custom
report template can also be saved under a different name by clicking Save As... The Save As...
dialog box prompts you to enter the new template name, a brief description, and the report type.
Click Preview Report to remove the grid lines from the Preview Grid. Click the same button
again to add the grid lines for editing.

Available Commands
The Static Output Processor window menus and toolbars provide commands to review,
create, and modify reports. The 3D/HOOPS Graphics toolbars navigate and display report
information in graphics mode.

Topics
View Menu ..................................................................................... 507
Options Menu ................................................................................ 511
Plot Options Menu ......................................................................... 518
Plot View Menu .............................................................................. 524
Event Viewer Dialog Box ............................................................... 526

View Menu
Activates and disables toolbars.

Topics
Standard Toolbar ........................................................................... 508
Displacements Toolbar .................................................................. 509
Grow Toolbar ................................................................................. 509
Restraints Toolbar ......................................................................... 509
Stresses Toolbar ............................................................................ 510
Reports Navigation Toolbar ........................................................... 511
Custom Reports Toolbar................................................................ 511

CAESAR II User's Guide

507

Static Output Processor

Standard Toolbar
Open - Opens a different job for output review. You are prompted for the file to
open.
Save - Saves the selected reports to a text file. You are prompted for the file
name. A table of contents for all currently selected reports is added to the end of
the text file.
Load Case Name - Selects either the CAESAR II Default Load Case Names or
the User-Defined Load Case Names for output reports. The selected name also
displays in the Load Cases Analyzed list box in the Static Output Processor
window. The user-defined load case names are entered in the Load Case Editor
on the Load Options tab, see Load Case Options Tab (see "Load Case Options
Tab (Static Analysis Dialog Box)" on page 459).
Node Name - Defines the formatting of the node numbers and names for
generated reports. Select the format to use from the Node Name Choice dialog
box.
Title Lines - Inserts report titles for a group of reports. For more information, see
Title Lines (on page 517).
Return to Input - Opens the Piping Input Processor. For more information, see
Piping Input Reference (on page 89).
View Animation - Shows animation of the displacement solution. For more
information, see View Animations (on page 516).
Graphical Output - Superimposes analytical results onto a plot of the system
model. For more information, see Graphical Output (on page 516).
Print - Prints the selected reports. After closing, or exiting, a Table of Contents is
printed.
Using Microsoft Word - Send the report directly to Microsoft Word. For more
information, see Using Microsoft Word (on page 513).
Using Microsoft Excel - Sends output reports directly to Excel. For more
information, see Using Microsoft Excel (on page 513).
On Screen - Displays the selected reports in a window on the computer screen.
For more information, see On Screen (on page 512).

508

CAESAR II User's Guide

Static Output Processor

Displacements Toolbar
Maximum Displacements - Places the actual magnitude of the X, Y, or
Z displacements on the currently displayed model.
The element containing the displaced node is highlighted, and the
camera viewpoint is repositioned preserving the optical distance to the
model. This brings the displaced node to the center of the view.
1. The software starts with the highest value for the given direction.
After you press Enter, the remaining values are placed in a similar
manner until all values become zero.
2. Click Maximum Displacements again to clear the view of the
displayed values and highlighting.
Click Show > Displacement > Maximum Displacement >X, Y, or
Z to access this command from the menu. If Show Element Viewer
Grid is selected, then the viewer displays the Displacements report for
the selected load case and highlights the column and row to represent
the displacement direction and current node.

Grow Toolbar
Deflected Shape - Overlays the scaled geometry with a different color into the
current plot for the selected load case. Click the down arrow to display an
additional menu with the selected feature checked and the Adjust Deflection
Scale option.
Adjust Deflection Scale - Specifies the deflected shape plot scale factor. You
may not be able to see the deflected shape if the value is too small. If you enter
a scale value that is too large, the model may be discontinued. Select Show >
Displacement > Scale to access this command from the menu.
Grow - Displays the expansion of a selected pipe due to the addition of heat.

Restraints Toolbar
Output Restraints Symbols - Adds restraint symbols to the plot.
Restraints are plotted as arrowheads with the direction of the arrow
indicating the direction of the force exerted by the restraint on the piping
geometry.
Maximum Restraint Loads - Places the actual magnitude of the
calculated restraint loads for a selected load case on the currently
displayed geometry. Maximum Restraints Loads displays the load
magnitude value next to the node, highlights the element containing the
node, and is brought to the center of the graphics view. The Zoom to
Selection and Show Event Viewer Grid options are still available. After
pressing Enter, any remaining values are placed in a similar manner.

CAESAR II User's Guide

509

Static Output Processor

Stresses Toolbar
Overstress - Displays the overstressed point distribution for a particular load
case. Nodes with a calculated code stress to allowable stress ratio of 100%
or more display in red. The remaining nodes or elements display in the color
selected for the lowest percent ratio. This feature is useful to quickly observe the
overstressed areas in the model.
Overstressed conditions are only detected for load cases where a code
compliance check was done (such as where there are allowable stresses
available).
Overstressed nodes display in red in the Event Viewer dialog box (if it is
enabled).
The model is still fully functional. You can zoom, pan, or rotate it.
Maximum Code Stress - Displays the stress magnitudes in descending order.
Maximum Code Stress operation is similar to Maximum
Displacements. The stress value is displayed next to the node, and the element
containing the node is highlighted and moved to the center of the view.
If needed, use the Zoom to Selection and Show Event Viewer Grid options.
Press Enter and the next highest value is placed with corresponding element
highlighting.
In addition to the numbers that could be found in a corresponding report, this
command provides a graphical representation and distribution of large,
calculated code stresses throughout the system.
Code Stress Colors by Value - Displays the piping system in a range of colors
where the color corresponds to a certain boundary value of the code stress. Use
this feature to see the distribution of the code stresses in the model for a
particular load case.
In addition to the model color highlight in the graphics view, the corresponding
color key legend window is displayed in the top left corner of the graphics view.
The legend window can be resized and moved.
The colors and corresponding stress levels can be set in the
Configuration/Environment. For more information, see Configuration and
Environment (on page 41).
Code Stress Colors by Percent - Displays the piping system in a range of
colors, where the color corresponds to a certain percentage ratio of code stress
to allowable stress. This option is only valid for load cases where a code
compliance check was done such as where there are allowable stresses.
Use Code Stress Colors by Percent to see the distribution of the code stress to
allowable ratios in the model for a particular load case. The legend window with
the corresponding color key also displays in the upper-left corner of the graphics
view. The legend window can be resized and moved.
Clicking the arrow to the right of the button displays an additional menu with two
options: Display and Adjust Settings. Selecting the Display option displays the
color distribution. Selecting the Adjust Settings option displays the Stress
Settings dialog box where values and corresponding colors can be set or
adjusted. These settings are related to the particular job for which they are set,
and are saved in the corresponding job_name.XML file in the current job data
directory (see 3D Graphics Configuration (on page 308)).

510

CAESAR II User's Guide

Static Output Processor

Reports Navigation Toolbar

Navigation commands in this toolbar become enabled by selecting at least one report.
/

View Previous Report / View Next Report - Navigates through the

report tabs.
Go To - Displays the list of currently-opened reports in alphabetical order
so that you can quickly and conveniently display the required report.
Find in Report - Provides search capabilities for a specific node number,
maximum values of any of the report fields, of for any text or number.
Zoom In / Zoom Out - Zooms the view in or out without affecting the
actual report font or formatting. The zoom level can also be controlled
from the right-mouse-click context menu. The zoom level is applied to the
current report and is temporal until the report is closed.
Save Current Custom Report Template - Saves the changes to the
custom report when the Report Template Editor is opened.
Save Current Custom Report Template with a New Name - Enables
keeping the original report and saving the changes to another report
when the Report Template Editor is launched.
Preview Report - Removes the grid lines from the Preview Grid.
Clicking the button again adds the grid lines.

Custom Reports Toolbar

Commands in the Custom Reports toolbar enable you to manipulate the generated reports.
Add New Custom Report Template - Creates a new custom report. For more
information, see New Custom Report Template (on page 513).
Edit Existing Custom Report Template - Modifies an existing custom report. For
more information, see Edit Custom Report Template (on page 514).
Delete Custom Report Template - Deletes a custom report. For more
information, see Delete Custom Report Template (on page 515).
Reset Default Custom Report Templates - Replaces the current custom report
templates with the default templates. For more information, see Reset Default
Custom Report Templates (on page 515).
Import Custom Report - Imports a custom report template. For more information,
see Import Custom Report (on page 515).
Export Custom Report - Saves any custom generated report to a text file. For
more information, see Export Custom Report (on page 515).

CAESAR II User's Guide

511

Static Output Processor

Options Menu
Specifies common settings that are available on all reports such as how node numbers display
and title information.

Topics
On Screen ...................................................................................... 512
Set Report Font ............................................................................. 512
Using Microsoft Word .................................................................... 513
Using Microsoft Excel .................................................................... 513
New Custom Report Template ...................................................... 513
Edit Custom Report Template ....................................................... 514
Delete Custom Report Template ................................................... 515
Reset Default Custom Report Templates ...................................... 515
Import Custom Report ................................................................... 515
Export Custom Report ................................................................... 515
View Animations ............................................................................ 516
Graphical Output ............................................................................ 516
Title Lines....................................................................................... 517
Load Case Name ........................................................................... 517
Node Name .................................................................................... 517
Return to Input ............................................................................... 517

On Screen
Displays the selected reports on the monitor. This permits the analysis data to be reviewed
interactively in text format. After selecting the combination of one or more active load cases with
any combination of report options, select Options > View Reports > On Screen. Each report is
presented one at a time for inspection. You can scroll through the reports vertically and
horizontally. You can also click On Screen
on the toolbar.

Set Report Font

Activates the Font dialog box used to define the text font, font style, and font size. You can
select this command from Options > View Reports > Set Report Font on the Static Output
Processor window menus, or by clicking the small down arrow next to On Screen
on the
standard toolbar. Some fonts that you can display reports in to the screen may not be available
on your printer. If the font is not available for your printer, the closest matching font on your
printer is used.

512

CAESAR II User's Guide

Static Output Processor

Using Microsoft Word

Send output reports directly to Microsoft Word, which permits the use of all of Microsoft Word
formatting features (font selection, margin control, and so forth) and printer support from
CAESAR II. Select Options > View Reports > Using Microsoft Word or click
on the
toolbar.
Word is available as an output device to the Static Output Processor and the Dynamic
Output windows. You can append multiple reports to form a final report by:
1. Select the required reports.
2. Click View Reports Using Microsoft Word
.
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 to add more reports.
A table of contents, reflecting the cumulatively produced reports, displays on the first page of the
Microsoft Word document.

Using Microsoft Excel

Sends output reports directly to Excel, which permits the use of all of Microsoft Excels
features and printer support from CAESAR II. Excel is available as an output device to the
Static Output Processor window. You can append multiple reports to form a final report by:
1. Select the required reports.
2. Click View Reports using Microsoft Excel
.
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 to add more reports.
Each report displays in a separate spreadsheet with the corresponding report name. There is no
generated table of contents.

New Custom Report Template

Creates a new custom report using the Report Template Editor dialog box. For more
information, see Report Template Editor (on page 505). You must select at least one load case
from the Load Cases Analyzed list before you can create a new report template.
1. From the Load Cases Analyzed list, select the load case for the custom report template.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Click Options > Custom Reports > New

.
In the Template Name box, enter a name for your custom report.
In the Template Description box, enter a description.
Using the Report Template Editor dialog box options, create your custom report.

CAESAR II User's Guide

513

Static Output Processor

6. Click Save Current Custom Report Template

on the Reports Navigation toolbar.

Do not use File > Save or the Save command on the main toolbar.
Your report appears in the Custom Reports list.

Edit Custom Report Template

Modifies and saves existing custom reports using the Report Template Editor. For more
information, see Report Template Editor (on page 505).
1. Select one or more load cases from the list.
2. From the Custom Reports list, select the report to edit.
3. Select Options > Custom Reports > Edit
.
4. Using the Report Template Editor dialog box options, edit your custom report.
5. Click Save Current Custom Report Template

on the Reports Navigation toolbar.

Do not use File > Save or the Save command on the main toolbar.
- OR Click Save Current Custom Report Template with a New Name
new custom report leaving the original report unchanged.

514

to save your edit to a

CAESAR II User's Guide

Static Output Processor

Delete Custom Report Template

Deletes a custom report template. You cannot delete a standard delivered report using this
command.
You cannot undo the deletion of a custom report template.
1. From the Custom Reports list, select the report to delete.
2. Select Options > Custom Reports > Delete
.
3. Click Yes to confirm that you want to delete the report.

Reset Default Custom Report Templates

Replaces the current report templates, both CAESAR II delivered and custom defined
reports, with the default report templates delivered with CAESAR II. Use this command if you
received a new version or a patch of CAESAR II and want to use the new reports.
Make sure that you export any custom reports that you want to keep before using
this command. This command affects ALL jobs system-wide and cannot be undone. For more
information about exporting custom reports, see Export Custom Report (on page 515).

Import Custom Report

Imports a custom report template that was exported earlier using Options > Custom
Reports > Export
.
The report template file extension is *.C2RPT and can be read from any network location. After
the report template file is imported, it becomes a part of the current configuration. The new
report is appended to the Custom Reports list of the Static Output Processor window. The
default name of the template file corresponds to the custom report name. You can also access
this feature by selecting Options > Custom Reports > Import.

Export Custom Report

Saves any custom generated report to a text file, which you can then share with others. The
report template file name extension is *.C2RPT and can be saved to any accessible location.
The default file name is the custom report name. Use Options > Custom Reports > Import
to import these saved custom reports.
1. In the Custom Reports list, select the report to export.
2. Select Options > Custom Reports > Export
3. Select a folder and enter a file name.
4. Click Save.

CAESAR II User's Guide

515

Static Output Processor

View Animations
Displays the piping system as it moves to the displaced position of the basic load cases. To
animate the static results, select Options > View Animations. The following screen appears:

The Animated Plot menu has several plot selections. Motion and Volume Motion are the
commands to activate the animation. Motion uses centerline representation while Volume
Motion produces 3D graphics. Select the load case from the drop down list. Animations may be
sped up, slowed down, or stopped using the toolbars.
CAESAR II also enables you to save animated plots as HTML files by selecting File > Save As
Animation. After saving these files, you can view them on any computer outside of CAESAR II.
The corresponding animation graphics file <job_name>.HSF must be transferred along
with the HTML file for proper display.

Graphical Output
To support a graphics mode, the Static Output Processor window provides 3D/HOOPS
Graphics toolbars that contain commands to zoom, orbit, and pan, as well as provide the ability
to switch views and modes.
The 3D/HOOPS Graphics Output toolbar commands include the display of displaced shapes,
highlighting and zooming to maxi\-mum displacements, restraint loads, and stresses of the
model. Another advantage provided by 3D/HOOPS graphics is the graphical representation of
stresses by value and by percentage use color.

516

CAESAR II User's Guide

Static Output Processor

A variety of CAESAR II Output Plot functions, accessed from the Output toolbar or the Show
menu, are broken into sub-menus:
Displacements
Restraints
Forces/Moments
Stresses

Output Toolbar
Show Event Viewer Grid - Shows or hides the Event Viewer on the plot. See
Event Viewer Dialog Box (on page 526).
Select Elements - Selects one element at a time in the graphics. The Event
Viewer dialog box is also used in conjunction with Select Elements. When
Select Elements is active, or when you double-click on an element, CAESAR II
highlights the element and displays it in the Event Viewer dialog box with the
corresponding element highlighted in the report grid.

Title Lines
Inserts report titles for a group of reports. You can enter a two-line title or description for a
report. The title can be assigned once for all load case reports sent to the printer or a disk drive;
or the title can be changed for each individual report before it is moved to the output device.
The title line allows for 28 characters per line.

Load Case Name

Selects either the CAESAR II Default Load Case Names or the User-Defined Load Case
Names for output reports. The selected name also displays in the Load Cases Analyzed list
box in the Static Output Processor window. The user-defined load case names are entered in
the Load Case Editor on the Load Options tab, see Load Case Options Tab (see "Load Case
Options Tab (Static Analysis Dialog Box)" on page 459).

Node Name
Defines the formatting of the node numbers and names for generated reports. Select the
format to use from the Node Name Choice dialog box.

Return to Input
Opens the Piping Input Processor. For more information, see Piping Input Reference (on
page 89).

CAESAR II User's Guide

517

Static Output Processor

Plot Options Menu

Performs actions associated with the display of the model. You must select Options >
Graphical Output
before these commands are available.

Topics
Range ............................................................................................ 519
Restraints ....................................................................................... 519
Anchors .......................................................................................... 519
Displacements ............................................................................... 519
Hangers ......................................................................................... 519
Nozzle Flexibility ............................................................................ 519
Flange Check ................................................................................. 519
Nozzle Check ................................................................................. 520
Forces ............................................................................................ 520
Uniform Loads ............................................................................... 520
Wind/Wave..................................................................................... 520
Compass ........................................................................................ 520
Node Numbers ............................................................................... 521
Length ............................................................................................ 521
Tees ............................................................................................... 521
Expansion Joints ............................................................................ 521
Diameters....................................................................................... 521
Wall Thickness ............................................................................... 521
Corrosion ....................................................................................... 521
Piping Codes ................................................................................. 522
Material .......................................................................................... 522
Pipe Density ................................................................................... 522
Fluid Density .................................................................................. 522
Refractory Thickness ..................................................................... 522
Refractory Density ......................................................................... 522
Insulation Thickness ...................................................................... 523
Insulation Density .......................................................................... 523
Cladding Thickness ....................................................................... 523
Cladding Density ............................................................................ 523
Insul/Cladding Unit Wt. .................................................................. 523
Temperatures ................................................................................ 523
Pressures ....................................................................................... 524

518

CAESAR II User's Guide

Static Output Processor

Range
Displays only the elements that contain nodes within a range. This is helpful when you need
to locate specific nodes or a group of related elements in a large model. This command displays
the Range dialog box. Alternatively, press U.

Using the Range command affects the display and operation of other 3D graphics
highlighting options. For example, if part of the model is not visible because of the use of the
Range command, then the Diameters command only highlights the elements that are
visible. Also, if using the Range command hides any nodes containing the predefined
displacements, the Displacements legend grid still displays, but the model may not highlight
correctly.
Find may not work properly for the part of the model that is hidden by the range. The
corresponding message displays in the status bar.

Range Dialog Box

Restraints
Turns the display of restraints on or off.

Anchors
Turns the display of anchors on or off.

Displacements
Turns the display of displacements on or off.

Hangers
Turns the display of hangers on or off.

Nozzle Flexibility
Turns the display of nozzle flexibility on or off.

Flange Check
Turns flange checking on or off.

CAESAR II User's Guide

519

Static Output Processor

Nozzle Check
Turns nozzle checking on or off.

Forces
Updates the model to show each force in a different color. Use this option to see the force
variations throughout the system or to verify that changes have been made. A color key displays
the force defined in the model. You can change the assigned colors to meet your needs.
The force parameters display in a table. Use the scroll bars to view all of the data. Click Next >>
and Previous << to move through the displacement or force vectors.

Uniform Loads
Updates the model to show each uniform load in a different color. Use this option to see the
uniform load variations throughout the system or to verify that changes have been made. A color
key displays the uniform loads defined in the model. You can change the assigned colors to
meet your needs.
The uniform load parameters display in a table. Use the scroll bars to view all of the data. Click
Next >> and Previous << to move through the displacement or force vectors.
Uniform Loads has three vectors defined. The Node column represents the start node number
where the uniform loads vector was first defined. Because the data propagates throughout the
model until changed or disabled, the model is colored accordingly.

Wind/Wave
Updates the model to show each wind or wave load in a different color. Use this option to
see the variations throughout the system or to verify that changes have been made. A color key
displays the wind or wave loads defined in the model.
The wind and wave load parameters display in a table. Use the scroll bars to view all of the data.
Click Next >> and Previous << to move through the loads.
All the elements with wind defined display in red. All the elements with wave data defined
display in green. The legend grid shows the relevant data.

Compass
Turns the display of the orientation tee on or off.

520

CAESAR II User's Guide

Static Output Processor

Node Numbers
Turns the display of node numbers on or off. Alternatively, press N. You can display node
numbers for a specific element such as only restraints or only anchors.

Length
Turns the display of element lengths on or off. Alternatively, press L.

Tees
Turns the display of tees on or off.

Expansion Joints
Turns the display of expansion joints on or off.

Diameters
Updates the model to show each diameter in a different color. Use this option to see the
diameter variations throughout the system or to verify that diameter changes have been made.
Alternatively, press D. A color key displays the diameters defined in the model. You can change
the assigned colors to meet your needs.

Wall Thickness
Updates the model to show each wall thickness in a different color. Use this option to see the
wall thickness variations throughout the system or to verify that changes have been made.
Alternatively, press W. A color key displays the thicknesses defined in the model. You can
change the assigned colors to meet your needs.

Corrosion
Updates the model to show each corrosion allowance in a different color. Use this option to
see the corrosion variations throughout the system or to verify that changes have been made. A
color key displays the corrosion allowances defined in the model. You can change the assigned
colors to meet your needs.

CAESAR II User's Guide

521

Static Output Processor

Piping Codes
Updates the model to show each piping code in a different color. Use this option to see the
piping code variations throughout the system or to verify that changes have been made.

Material
Updates the model to show each material in a different color. Use this option to see the
material variations throughout the system or to verify that changes have been made.
Alternatively, press M. A color key displays the materials defined in the model. You can change
the assigned colors to meet your needs.

Pipe Density
Updates the model to show each pipe density in a different color. Use this option to see the
pipe density variations throughout the system or to verify that changes have been made. A color
key displays the pipe densities defined in the model. You can change the assigned colors to
meet your needs.

Fluid Density
Updates the model to show each fluid density in a different color. Use this option to see the
fluid density variations throughout the system or to verify that changes have been made. A color
key displays the fluid densities defined in the model. You can change the assigned colors to
meet your needs.

Refractory Thickness
Updates the model to show each refractory thickness in a different color. Use this option to see
the refractory thickness variations throughout the system or to verify that changes have been
made. A color key displays the thicknesses defined in the model. You can change the assigned
colors to meet your needs.

Refractory Density
Updates the model to show each refractory density in a different color. Use this option to see the
refractory density variations throughout the system or to verify that changes have been made. A
color key displays the refractory densities defined in the model. You can change the assigned
colors to meet your needs.

522

CAESAR II User's Guide

Static Output Processor

Insulation Thickness
Updates the model to show each insulation thickness in a different color. Use this option to
see the insulation thickness variations throughout the system or to verify that changes have
been made. Alternatively, press I. A color key displays the thicknesses defined in the model.
You can change the assigned colors to meet your needs.

Insulation Density
Updates the model to show each insulation density in a different color. Use this option to see
the insulation density variations throughout the system or to verify that changes have been
made. A color key displays the insulation densities defined in the model. You can change the
assigned colors to meet your needs.

Cladding Thickness
Updates the model to show each cladding thickness in a different color. Use this option to see
the cladding thickness variations throughout the system or to verify that changes have been
made. A color key displays the thicknesses defined in the model. You can change the assigned
colors to meet your needs.

Cladding Density
Updates the model to show each cladding density in a different color. Use this option to see the
cladding density variations throughout the system or to verify that changes have been made. A
color key displays the cladding densities defined in the model. You can change the assigned
colors to meet your needs.

Insul/Cladding Unit Wt.

Updates the model to show each insulation or cladding unit weight in a different color. Use this
option to see the variations throughout the system or to verify that changes have been made. A
color key displays the insulation or cladding unit weights defined in the model. You can change
the assigned colors to meet your needs.

Temperatures
Displays the temperature parameters that you have defined.

CAESAR II User's Guide

523

Static Output Processor

Pressures
Displays the pressure parameters that you have defined.

Plot View Menu

Performs actions associated with viewing the model. You must select Options > Graphical
Output
before these commands are available.

Topics
Reset.............................................................................................. 524
Front View ...................................................................................... 524
Back View ...................................................................................... 524
Top View ........................................................................................ 524
Bottom View ................................................................................... 525
Left-side View ................................................................................ 525
Right-side View .............................................................................. 525
Southeast ISO View....................................................................... 525
Southwest ISO View ...................................................................... 525
Northeast ISO View ....................................................................... 525
Northwest ISO View ....................................................................... 525
4 View ............................................................................................ 525

Reset
Resets the view to the default settings.

Front View
Displays the model from the front. Alternatively, press Z.

Back View
Displays the model from the back. Alternatively, press Shift + Z.

Top View
Displays the model from the top. Alternatively, press Y.

524

CAESAR II User's Guide

Static Output Processor

Bottom View
Displays the model from the bottom. Alternatively, press Shift + Y.

Left-side View
Displays the model from the left side. Alternatively, press X.

Right-side View
Displays the model from the right side. Alternatively, press Shift + R.

Southeast ISO View

Displays the model isometrically from the southeast. Alternatively, press F10.

Southwest ISO View

Displays the model isometrically from the southwest.

Northeast ISO View

Displays the model isometrically from the northeast.

Northwest ISO View

Displays the model isometrically from the northwest.

4 View
Displays the model in four windows.
This command automatically places the horizontal and vertical dividers, or splitter bars, and
changes the cursor to a four-way arrow. You can change the position of the splitter bars by
moving the mouse. Click to fix the position.
Drag the splitter bars to change the size of the windows. Drag the splitter bars out of the view to
remove those views. You can drag the splitter located at the top or left scroll bar to add views.
You can manipulate the image in any of these panes individually.

CAESAR II User's Guide

525

Static Output Processor

Event Viewer Dialog Box

Use options in the Event Viewer dialog box to navigate among the elements, navigate to
various reports within a load case, and view the reports for other load cases. This is done in the
Report Selection window on the left in the dialog box.
The dialog box has a tree structure similar in operation to Windows Explorer.
Click the + sign for a particular load case expands the tree to show reports.
Select the report to display the data in the grid view to the right.
Select a node or an element in the grid view when Select Elements is enabled to highlight
the corresponding element on the graphics view.
Zoom to the selected element if the corresponding Zoom to Selection is enabled. Similarly,
click an element on the graphics view to highlight the corresponding data row in the report
view. This is a bidirectional connection.
Change the load case within the Event Viewer dialog box to update the graphics view (if
applicable), and the Load Case Selection box on the toolbar.

526

CAESAR II User's Guide

Dynamic Analysis

SECTION 9

Dynamic Analysis
Performs dynamic analysis on a piping model. This section introduces dynamic analysis
concepts and describes data input for each of the options available. The command is also
available from Analysis > Dynamics.

In This Section
Dynamic Loads in Piping Systems ................................................ 527
Model Modifications for Dynamic Analysis .................................... 533
Dynamic Analysis Workflow........................................................... 533
The Dynamic Analysis Window ..................................................... 535
Excitation Frequencies Tab ........................................................... 538
Harmonic Forces Tab .................................................................... 540
Harmonic Displacements Tab........................................................ 543
Spectrum/Time History Definitions Tab ......................................... 546
Spectrum/Time History Load Cases Tab ....................................... 550
Static/Dynamic Combinations Tab ................................................ 564
Lumped Masses Tab ..................................................................... 568
Snubbers Tab ................................................................................ 570
Control Parameters Tab ................................................................ 571
Advanced Tab ................................................................................ 599
Directive Builder ............................................................................. 603
Enter/Edit Spectrum Data .............................................................. 604
DLF/Spectrum Generator .............................................................. 605
Relief Load Synthesis .................................................................... 613
Analysis Results ............................................................................ 625

Dynamic Loads in Piping Systems

A piping system can respond far differently to a dynamic load than it would to a static load of the
same magnitude. Static loads are those which are applied slowly enough that the system has
time to react and internally distribute the loads, thus remaining in equilibrium. In equilibrium, all
forces and moments are resolved (that is, the sum of the forces and moments are zero) and the
pipe does not move.
A dynamic load changes quickly with time. The piping system does not have time to internally
distribute the loads. Forces and moments are not always resolved, resulting in unbalanced loads
and pipe movement. Because the sum of forces and moments are not in equilibrium, the
internally-induced loads can be differenteither higher or lowerthan the applied loads.
The software provides several methods for analyzing different types of system response under
dynamic loads. Each method provides a trade-off of accuracy versus computing requirements.
The methods include modal natural frequency calculations, harmonic analysis, response
spectrum analysis, and time history analysis.
Modal natural frequency analysis measures the tendency of a piping system to respond to
dynamic loads. The modal natural frequencies of a system typically should not be too close to

CAESAR II User's Guide

527

Dynamic Analysis
equipment operating frequencies. As a general rule, higher natural frequencies usually cause
less trouble than low natural frequencies. CAESAR II provides calculation of modal natural
frequencies and animated plots of the associated mode shapes.
Harmonic analysis addresses dynamic loads that are cyclic in nature, such as fluid pulsation in
reciprocating pump lines or vibration due to rotating equipment. These loads are modeled as
concentrated forces or displacements at one or more points in the system. To provide the proper
phase relationship between multiple loads, a phase angle can also be used. Any number of
forcing frequencies can be analyzed for equipment start-up and operating modes. Harmonic
responses represent the maximum dynamic amplitude the piping system undergoes and have
the same form as a static analysis: node deflections and rotations, local forces and moments,
restraint loads, and stresses. For example, if the results show an X displacement of 5.8 cm at a
node, then the dynamic motion due to the cyclic excitation is from +5.8 cm. to -5.8 cm. at that
node. The stresses shown are one half of, or one amplitude of, the full cyclic stress range.
Response spectrum analysis allows an impulse-type transient event to be characterized by
response versus frequency spectra. Each mode of vibration of the piping system is related to
one response on the spectrum. These modal responses are summed together to produce the
total system response. The stresses for these analyses, summed with the sustained stresses,
are compared to the occasional stress allowables defined by the piping code. Spectral analysis
can be used in a wide variety of applications. For example, in uniform inertial loading, ground
motion associated with a seismic event is supplied as displacement, velocity, or acceleration
response spectra. The assumption is that all supports move with the defined ground motion and
the piping system catches up to the supports. It is this inertial effect which loads the system.
The shock spectra, which define the ground motion, can vary between the three global
directions and can even change for different groups of supports (such as independent or uniform
support motion). Another example is based on single point loading. CAESAR II uses this
technique to analyze a wide variety of impulse-type transient loads. Relief valve loads, water
hammer loads, slug flow loads, and rapid valve closure type loads all cause single impulse
dynamic loads at various points in the piping system. The response to these dynamic forces can
be predicted using the force spectrum method.
Time history analysis is one of the most accurate methods, because it uses numeric integration
of the dynamic equation of motion to simulate the system response throughout the load
duration. This method can solve any type of dynamic loading, but due to its exact solution,
requires more resources (such as computer memory, calculation speed and time) than other
methods. Time history analysis is not appropriate when, for example, the spectrum method
offers sufficient accuracy.
Force versus time profiles for piping are usually one of three types: Random (on page 529),
Harmonic (see Newsletter Index http://www.coade.com/Mechanical%20Engineering%20News%20Index.shtml), or Impulse (on
page 531). Each profile has a preferred solution method. These profiles and the load types
identified with them are described below.

528

CAESAR II User's Guide

Dynamic Analysis

Random
With this type of profile, the load unpredictably changes direction or magnitude with time. Even
with the unpredictability, some load characteristics can predominate. Loads with random
force/time profiles are best solved using a spectrum method or a static equivalent.
The major types of loads with random time profiles are wind and earthquake.

Wind
Wind velocity causes forces due to the decrease of wind momentum as the air strikes the pipe
creating an equivalent pressure on the pipe. Wind loadings, even though they can have
predominant directions and average velocities over a given time, are subject to gusting, such as
sudden changes in direction and velocity. As the time period lengthens, the number of wind
changes also increases in an unpredictable manner, eventually encompassing nearly all
directions and a wide range of velocities.

Earthquake
Seismic (earthquake) loadings are caused by the introduction of random ground motion, such as
accelerations, velocities, and displacements and corresponding inertia loads (the mass of the
system times the acceleration) into a structure through the structure-to-ground anchorage.
Random ground motion is the sum of an infinite number of individual harmonic (cyclic) ground
motions. Two earthquakes can be similar in terms of predominant direction (for example, along
a fault), predominant harmonic frequencies (if some underlying cyclic motions tend to dominate),
and maximum ground motion, but their exact behavior at any given time can be quite different
and unpredictable.

Harmonic
With this type of profile, the load changes direction and/or magnitude following a harmonic
profile, ranging from its minimum to its maximum over a fixed time period. For example, the load
can be described by a function of the form:
F(t) = A + B cos( t + )
Where:
F(t) = force magnitude as a function of time
A = mean force
B = variation of maximum and minimum force from mean
= angular frequency (radian/sec)
= phase angle (radians)
t = time (sec)
Loads with harmonic force/time profiles are best solved using a harmonic method. The major
types of loads with harmonic time profiles are equipment vibration, acoustic vibration, and
pulsation.

Equipment Vibration
If rotating equipment attached to a pipe is slightly out-of-tolerance (for example, when a drive
shaft is out-of-round), it can impose a small cyclic displacement onto the pipe at the point of
attachment. This is the location where the displacement cycle most likely corresponds to the
operating cycle of the equipment. The displacement at the pipe connection can be imperceptibly

CAESAR II User's Guide

529

Dynamic Analysis
small, but could cause significant dynamic-loading problems. Loading versus time is easily
predicted after the operating cycle and variation from tolerance is known.

Acoustic Vibration
If fluid flow characteristics are changed within a pipe (for example, when flow conditions change
from laminar to turbulent as the fluid passes through an orifice), slight lateral vibrations may be
set up within the pipe. These vibrations often fit harmonic patterns, with predominant
frequencies somewhat predictable based upon the flow conditions. For example, Strouhals
equation predicts that the developed frequency (Hz) of vibration caused by flow through an
orifice will be somewhere between 0.2 V/D and 0.3 V/D, where V is the fluid velocity (ft./sec) and
D is the diameter of the orifice (ft). Wind flow around a pipe sets up lateral displacements as well
(a phenomenon known as vortex shedding), with an exciting frequency of approximately 0.18
V/D, where V is the wind velocity and D is the outer diameter of the pipe.

Pulsation
During the operation of a reciprocating pump or a compressor, the fluid is compressed by
pistons driven by a rotating shaft. This causes a cyclic change over time in the fluid pressure at
any specified location in the system. Unequal fluid pressures at opposing elbow pairs or
closures create an unbalanced pressure load in the system. Because the pressure balance
changes with the cycle of the compressor, the unbalanced force also changes. The frequency of
the force cycle is likely to be some multiple of that of the equipment operating cycle, because
multiple pistons cause a corresponding number of force variations during each shaft rotation.
The pressure variations continue to move along through the fluid. In a steady state flow
condition, unbalanced forces may be present simultaneously at any number of elbow pairs in the
system. Load magnitudes can vary. Load cycles may or may not be in phase with each other,
depending upon the pulse velocity, the distance of each elbow pair from the compressor, and
the length of the piping legs between the elbow pairs.
For example, if the pressure at elbow a is Pa(t) and the pressure at elbow b is Pb(t), then the
unbalanced force acting along the pipe between the two elbows is:
F(t) = (Pa(t) - Pb(t)) A
Where:
A = internal area of the pipe
Assuming that the pressure peak hits the elbow "a" at time t = 0, Pa(t) is:
Pa(t) = Pavg + 0.5 (dP) cos t
Where:
Pavg = average pressure in the line
dP = alternating component of the pressure
= driving angular frequency of pulse
If the length of the pipe between the elbows is L, then the pressure pulse reaches elbow bts
after it has passed elbow a:
ts = L / c
Where:
c = speed of sound in the fluid

530

CAESAR II User's Guide

Dynamic Analysis
Therefore the expression for the pressure at elbow b is:
Pb(t) = Pavg + 0.5(dP) cos ( t - Q)
Where:
Q

= phase shift between the pressure peaks at a and b

= ts

Combining these equations, the unbalanced pressure force acting on an elbow pair is:
F(t) = 0.5(dP)A * [ cos t - cos (t - L/c) ]
Under steady-state conditions, a similar situation exists at all elbow pairs throughout the piping
system.

Impulse
With this type of profile, the load magnitude ramps up from zero to some value, remains
relatively constant for a time, and then ramps down to zero again. For rapid ramping times, this
type of profile resembles a rectangle. Loads with impulse force/time profiles are best solved
using time history or force spectrum methods. Major types of loads with impulse time profiles are
relief valve, fluid hammer, and slug flow.

Relief Valve
When system pressure reaches a dangerous level, relief valves are set to open in order to vent
fluid and reduce the internal pressure. Venting through the valve causes a jet force to act on the
piping system. This force ramps up from zero to its full value over the opening time of the valve.
The relief valve remains open (and the jet force remains relatively constant) until sufficient fluid
is vented to relieve the over-pressure condition. The valve then closes, ramping down the jet
force over the closing time of the valve.

Fluid Hammer
When the flow of fluid through a system is suddenly halted through valve closure or a pump trip,
the fluid in the remainder of the system cannot be stopped instantaneously. As fluid continues to
flow into the area of stoppage (upstream of the valve or pump), the fluid compresses causing a
high pressure situation. On the other side of the restriction, the fluid moves away from the
stoppage point, creating a low pressure (vacuum) situation. Fluid at the next elbow or closure
along the pipeline is still at the original operating pressure, resulting in an unbalanced pressure
force acting on the valve seat or the elbow.
The fluid continues to flow, compressing (or decompressing) fluid further away from the point of
flow stoppage, causing the leading edge of the pressure pulse to move through the line. As the
pulse moves past the first elbow, the pressure is now equalized at each end of the pipe run,
leading to a balanced (that is, zero) pressure load on the first pipe leg. The unbalanced
pressure, by passing the elbow, has now shifted to the second leg. The unbalanced pressure
load continues to rise and fall in sequential legs as the pressure pulse travels back to the
source, or forward to the sink.
The ramp up time of the profile roughly coincides with the elapsed time from full flow to low flow,
such as the closing time of the valve or trip time of the pump. Because the leading edge of the
pressure pulse is not expected to change as the pulse travels through the system, the
ramp-down time is the same. The duration of the load from initiation through the beginning of the
down ramp is equal to the time required for the pressure pulse to travel the length of the pipe
leg.

CAESAR II User's Guide

531

Dynamic Analysis
Slug Flow
Most piping systems are designed to handle single-phase fluids (that is, fluids that are uniformly
liquid or gas). Under certain circumstances, the fluid may have multiple phases. For example,
slurry systems transport solid materials in liquids and gases may condense, creating pockets of
liquid in otherwise gaseous media. Systems carrying multi-phase fluids are susceptible to slug
flow.
In general, fluid changes direction in a piping system through the application of forces at elbows.
This force is equal to the change in momentum with respect to time, or
Fr = dp / dt = v A [2(1 - cos )]
Where:
dp = change in momentum
dt = change in time
2

v
A

1/2

= fluid density
= fluid velocity
= internal area of pipe

= inclusion angle at elbow

With constant fluid density, this force is normally constant and is small enough that it can be
easily absorbed through tension in the pipe wall. The force is then passed on to adjacent elbows
with equal and opposite loads, zeroing the net load on the system. Therefore these types of
momentum loads are usually ignored in analysis. If the fluid velocity or density changes with
time, this momentum load will also change with time, leading to a dynamic load which may not
be canceled by the load at other elbows.
For example, consider a slug of liquid in a gas system. The steady state momentum load is
insignificant because the fluid density of a gas is effectively zero. The liquid suddenly slug hits
the elbow, increasing the momentum load by orders of magnitude. This load lasts only as long
as it takes for the slug to traverse the elbow, and then suddenly drops to near zero again with
the exact profile of the slug load depending upon the shape of the slug. The time duration of the
load depends upon the length of the slug divided by the velocity of the fluid.

Where:
F1 = v A(1 - cos )
2

Fr = v A [2(1 - cos )]
2

F2 = v A sin
2

532

CAESAR II User's Guide

Dynamic Analysis

Model Modifications for Dynamic Analysis

To perform a dynamic analysis, the static model must first be created and error checked. The
model is also usually run through static analysis before the dynamic analysis begins, but this is
not required unless nonlinear supports or hanger selections are included in the model. If
nonlinear supports are present, the static analysis must be run and the results made available
before the dynamic analysis can be performed.
The dynamic analysis techniques used by CAESAR II require strict linearity in the piping and
structural systems. Dynamic responses associated with nonlinear effects are not addressed. An
example of a nonlinear effect is slapping, such as when a pipe lifts off the rack at one moment
and impacts the rack the next. For the dynamic model, the pipe must be either held down or
allowed to move freely. Nonlinear restraints used in the static analysis must be set to active or
inactive for the dynamic analysis. CAESAR II allows you to set the nonlinear restraints to any
configuration found in the static results by specifying the value of Static Load Case for Nonlinear
Restraint Status (on page 582) on the Control Parameters tab. You usually select the
operating case to set the nonlinear restraint configuration. For example, if a +Y support is active
in the static operating case and the operating case is used to set the status of the nonlinear
supports for dynamics, CAESAR II installs a double-acting Y support at that location for the
dynamic analysis. The pipe does not move up or down at that point regardless of the dynamic
load.
Another nonlinear effect is friction. Friction effects must also be linearized for use in dynamic
analysis. By default, CAESAR II excludes the effects of friction from the dynamic analysis. If
requested, CAESAR II can approximate the friction resistance to movement in the dynamic
model by including spring stiffness normal to the restraint line of action. For a Y restraint with
friction, the friction stiffness is added in the X and Z directions. You define the stiffness of these
springs as a function of the friction load calculated in the static analysis. CAESAR II calculates
the friction stiffness by multiplying the resultant force on the restraint from the selected static
case results, the friction coefficient, and the Stiffness Factor for Friction defined on the
Control Parameters tab. For example, if a normal force on the restraint from the static analysis
is 1000 lb and the friction coefficient (mu) is 0.3, then the total friction load is 300 lb. If Stiffness
Factor for Friction is 500, then springs having a stiffness of SQRT(10002 +
3002)*0.3*500=156605 lb./in are inserted into the dynamic model in the two directions
perpendicular to the line of action of the friction restraint. Converting friction damping into
stiffness is not mathematically legitimate, but serves as a good engineering approximation for
dynamic friction in a wide variety of situations.

Dynamic Analysis Workflow

Before starting and error checking a dynamic analysis, develop dynamic analysis data using the
following steps. The steps can occur in any order.

Specify the loads

You do not need to specify dynamic loads if only natural frequencies are to be counted or
calculated. Harmonic analysis requires the driving frequencies and forces or displacements to
define and locate the sinusoidally varying point loads.
Creating the dynamic loads for spectra or time history analysis requires the most attention. The
response spectra or time history profile must be defined, built, or selected. Force sets are built
for force response spectra and time history analysis. Response spectra/time history and force
sets are combined with other data to build the load cases to be analyzed. Finally, additional load
cases may be constructed by combining shock results with static results to check code

CAESAR II User's Guide

533

Dynamic Analysis
compliance on occasional stresses. The software provides methods to simplify many of these
tasks.

Modify the mass and stiffness model

For dynamic analysis, CAESAR II converts each piping element from a continuous beam
element between two nodes to a stiffness between two masses. Additional stiffness is added at
the node points to model anchors, restraints, hangers, and other supports in the static analysis
model. The masses assigned to each node are one half the sum of all element masses framing
into the node. These masses are used as translational inertias only. Rotational moments of
inertia are ignored in the dynamic mass model. Their inclusion in the analysis would cause a
large increase in solution time without a corresponding improvement in the general accuracy of
the analysis.
In many instances, the mass and stiffness established in the static model is used without
modification in the dynamic analysis. Some situations, however, can be improved by the
deletion of mass points or degrees of freedom. This usually occurs in models with unnecessary
masses far from the area of interest or unnecessary degrees of freedom that do not act in the
direction of interest. Some piping systems have supports that are installed to suppress vibration
and do not affect the static analysis. If these shock absorbers or snubbers were not part of the
static model, they can be added to the dynamic model as additional stiffness.

Set the parameters that control the analysis

Options on the Control Parameters tab set the type of analysis to be performed: calculation of
natural frequencies and mode shapes, harmonic analysis, spectral analysis, or time history.
General settings for the analysis are also defined, such as maximum frequency cutoff, mode
summation methods, static configuration for nonlinear restraints, and the friction factor for
including friction in the dynamic analysis. The Advanced tab allows you to change the
parameters governing the eigensolution which does the modal extraction. These parameters
should only be altered under special circumstances.
For more information, see Control Parameters Tab (on page 571) and Advanced Tab (on page
599).

534

CAESAR II User's Guide

Dynamic Analysis

The Dynamic Analysis Window

After the basic model has been constructed, click Analysis > Dynamics or Dynamic Analysis
to perform a dynamic analysis. The Dynamic Analysis window opens.

Toolbar Commands
Analysi Specifies the type of analysis. Select Modal, Harmonic, Earthquake (spectrum),
s
Relief Loads (spectrum), Water Hammer/Slug Flow (spectrum), or Time History.
Type
The window tabs change for each analysis.
Save Input and File > Save Input - Saves entered values to the CAESAR II file.
Check Input and File > Check Input - Opens the Dynamic Syntax Check dialog box
to check entered values for errors.
Run the Analysis and File > Run Analysis - Performs the error check and, if no
errors are found, performs the analysis the dynamic analysis for the selected Analysis
Type and the entered values. Analysis results are then available for review. For more
information, see Analysis Results (on page 625).
Add Entry and Edit > Add Entry - Adds a row to the table.
Delete Entry and Edit > Delete Entry - Deletes a row from the table.
Enter/Edit Spectrum Data and Tools > Spectrum Data Points - Specifies spectrum
data for manually-entered or ASCII-file-based spectrum definitions. For more
information, see Enter/Edit Spectrum Data (on page 604).
DLF/Spectrum Generator and Tools > DLF Spectrum Generator - Converts
spectrum time waveform excitation data into a frequency domain dynamic load factor
(DLF) curve or other response spectrum. For more information, see DLF/Spectrum
Generator (on page 605).

CAESAR II User's Guide

535

Dynamic Analysis
Relief Load Synthesis and Tools > Relief Load Synthesis - Calculates the
magnitudes of relieving thrust forces. For more information, see Relief Load Synthesis
(on page 613).
Cmt

Changes the selected row in the table to a comment line. You can add comment lines
anywhere in the table.

Modal Analysis (on page 536)

Harmonic Analysis (on page 536)
Earthquake Response Spectrum Analysis (on page 537)
Relief Loads and Water Hammer/Slug Flow Spectra Analysis (on page 537)
Time History Analysis (on page 538)
Dynamic analysis uses the units from the piping input file or from the configuration file of a
structural-only analysis. For more information on dynamic load cases, data, and procedures, see
Interfaces (see "External Interfaces" on page 913).
If the model contains spring hangers selected by the software or nonlinear boundary
conditions (such as single directional supports, gaps, rods, or friction), then a static analysis
must be performed before the dynamic analysis to determine how the nonlinear supports are
acting.

Modal Analysis
Enter values on the following tabs when Modal is selected for Analysis Type in the Dynamic
Analysis window.
Lumped Masses Tab (on page 568)
Snubbers Tab (on page 570)
Control Parameters Tab (on page 571)
Advanced Tab (on page 599)
Modal analysis extracts natural frequencies and shapes for the modes of vibration of the pipe
system. No loads are specified.

Harmonic Analysis
Enter values on the following tabs when Harmonic is selected for Analysis Type in the
Dynamic Analysis window.
Excitation Frequencies Tab (on page 538)
Harmonic Forces Tab (on page 540)
Harmonic Displacements Tab (on page 543)
Lumped Masses Tab (on page 568)
Snubbers Tab (on page 570)
Control Parameters Tab (on page 571)

536

CAESAR II User's Guide

Dynamic Analysis

Earthquake Response Spectrum Analysis

Enter values on the following tabs when Earthquake (spectrum) is selected for Analysis Type
in the Dynamic Analysis window.
Spectrum Definitions Tab (see "Spectrum/Time History Definitions Tab" on page 546)
Spectrum Load Cases Tab (see "Spectrum/Time History Load Cases Tab" on page 550)
Static/Dynamic Combinations Tab (on page 564)
Lumped Masses Tab (on page 568)
Snubbers Tab (on page 570)
Control Parameters Tab (on page 571)
Advanced Tab (on page 599)
For earthquake loads, you define one or more response spectra and apply them in a specified
direction over part or all of the piping system.

Relief Loads and Water Hammer/Slug Flow Spectra Analysis

Enter values on the following tabs when Relief Loads (spectrum) or Water Hammer/Slug
Flow (spectrum) are selected for Analysis Type in the Dynamic Analysis window.
Spectrum Definitions Tab (see "Spectrum/Time History Definitions Tab" on page 546)
Force Sets Tab (on page 555)
Spectrum Load Cases Tab (see "Spectrum/Time History Load Cases Tab" on page 550)
Static/Dynamic Combinations Tab (on page 564)
Lumped Masses Tab (on page 568)
Snubbers Tab (on page 570)
Control Parameters Tab (on page 571)
Advanced Tab (on page 599)

Relief Loads
This method solves relief valve loading on a piping system through force spectrum analysis. The
force-time profile is estimated using relief load synthesis and then converted to a force multiplier
(dynamic load factor, or DLF) spectrum. The force is then applied in conjunction with this
spectrum.

Water Hammer/Slug Flow

This method solves water hammer or slug problems. It is similar to the force spectrum analysis
used for relief valve loadings, except that relief load synthesis is not required. The force-time
profile is estimated and then converted to a force multiplier spectrum. This is linked to force sets
in the load cases.
Force-time profile estimation methods are shown in the CAESAR II Applications Guide.
Steps proceed as described for relief loads.

CAESAR II User's Guide

537

Dynamic Analysis

Time History Analysis

Enter values on the following tabs when Time History is selected for Analysis Type in the
Dynamic Analysis window.
Time History Definitions Tab (see "Spectrum/Time History Definitions Tab" on page 546)
Force Sets Tab (on page 555)
Time History Load Cases Tab (see "Spectrum/Time History Load Cases Tab" on page 550)
Static/Dynamic Combinations Tab (on page 564)
Lumped Masses Tab (on page 568)
Snubbers Tab (on page 570)
Control Parameters Tab (on page 571)
Advanced Tab (on page 599)
Time history analysis solves the dynamic equation of motion for extracted nodes of vibration.
The results are then summed to find the system results. Loadings are specified in terms of
force-time profiles and force sets. The force-time profile defines the load timing. The force set
defines the load direction and location. Either the profile or the force set can be used to define
the magnitude.

Excitation Frequencies Tab

This tab is available when Harmonic is selected for Analysis Type in the Dynamic Analysis
window.
One or more individual frequencies or frequency ranges can be specified, one to a row.
CAESAR II performs a separate analysis for each frequency.
A frequency range has values for Starting Frequency, Ending Frequency, and Increment.
You can enter the number of anticipated load cycles for each frequency range. Load cases are
then calculated with a fatigue stress type. Otherwise, the load cases are calculated with an
occasional stress type.
Harmonic loads may be specified on the Harmonic Forces Tab (on page 540) or the
Harmonic Displacements Tab (on page 543).

Topics
Starting Frequency ........................................................................ 539
Ending Frequency .......................................................................... 539
Increment ....................................................................................... 539
Load Cycles ................................................................................... 540

538

CAESAR II User's Guide

Dynamic Analysis

Starting Frequency
Specifies the starting frequency for the analysis in Hertz (Hz). This is the frequency at which the
harmonic forces or displacements are applied.
Harmonic displacements and forces have the form:
A*cosine(t+ )
where A is the amplitude of the force or displacement, is the phase angle, and is the
frequency of the loading.
Real and imaginary solutions are developed for each frequency in the defined range, from which
any phased solution can be calculated. There must be a starting frequency for a frequency
range to be valid.

Ending Frequency
Specifies the ending frequency for a range of frequencies. Enter the frequency in Hertz (Hz).
The harmonic forces or displacements are applied at each frequency between the Starting
Frequency (on page 539) and Ending Frequency according to the value specified for
Increment (on page 539). This is an optional value.

Increment
Specifies the frequency increment used to step from Starting Frequency (on page 539) to
Ending Frequency (on page 539). The harmonic forces or displacements are applied at each
frequency along the specified increment. This is an optional value. If no value is entered, the
software uses a default increment of 1.0 Hz.
The frequencies for harmonic excitation are taken from each defined frequency range. Individual
frequencies for excitation are calculated using a "do loop" type of logic to determine the
frequencies in a specified frequency range:
X = STARTING FREQUENCY
5 CONTINUE
COMPUTE SOLUTION FOR FREQUENCY "X"
X = X + INCREMENT
IF( X .LT. ENDING FREQUENCY+0.001) GO TO 5
The sign of the frequency increment may be modified by the software to properly step from the
starting frequency to the ending frequency. The starting frequency, the ending frequency, or the
increment may be given as a fraction.

Example
Find harmonic solutions for the following group of turbine equipment speeds:
Warm up speed: 100 rpm
Speed increments to bring turbine online: 400, 800, 1200, 1600, 2000, 2400, 2800, 3200
rpm. Speeds are passed through very slowly while coming up to operating speed.

Operating speed: 3600 rpm

Convert rotations per minute to cycles per second (Hertz) by dividing by 60:
Warm up speed: 100/60
Speed increments: 400/60 to 3200/60 by increments of 400/60
Operating speed: 3600/60

CAESAR II User's Guide

539

Dynamic Analysis
A low frequency field vibration exists in the piping system at about 3 Hertz:
Approximate field-observed excitation frequency: 3 Hz
The response of the piping system when the dynamic load is applied at 3 Hz is almost zero. This
is true regardless of the magnitude of the dynamic load. The maxi\-mum varying pressure load
was applied, and there were still no appreciable dynamic displacements when the excitation
frequency was 3 Hz. Apply the dynamic load over a range of frequencies around 3 Hertz and
see if any dynamic response can be observed.
Group of field-observed frequencies: "Guessed"
Excitation frequency: 3 Hz
Defined by the input below are:
(2.5, 2.6, 2.7, ..., 3.3, 3.4, 3.5) Hz.
2.5 3.5 0.1

Load Cycles
Specifies the number of load cycles. If the harmonic load case is also subjected to fatigue
loading, enter the number of expected cycles. This is an optional value.
The load cycle value is the anticipated number of applications of the load on the system. This
value is used to determine the allowable stress from the fatigue curve for the material.
For static cases, the full range of calculated stresses is considered. For dynamic cases,
half the range (that is, the amplitude) of calculated stresses is considered.

Harmonic Forces Tab

This tab is available when Harmonic is selected for Analysis Type in the Dynamic Analysis
window.
Values must be entered on either the Harmonic Forces tab or the Harmonic
Displacements tab.

Harmonic Phasing
Phasing is important if more than one force or displacement is included. The phase angle
(entered in degrees) relates the timing of one load or displacement to another. For example, if
two harmonic loads act along the same line but at different nodes, the loads can be directed
towards each other (that is, in opposite directions), producing no net dynamic imbalance on the
system. The loads can also act in the same direction (that is, to the right or to the left together),
producing a net dynamic imbalance in the system equal to the sum of the two forces. The phase
angle determines this relationship. For example, the follow load data is entered for in-phase
loading of 1500 lbf in the X direction with a 0 phase at nodes 10 and 105:

540

Force

Direction

Phase

Start Node

1500

10

1500

105

CAESAR II User's Guide

Dynamic Analysis
The follow load data is entered for out-of-phase loading of 1500 lbf in the X direction with the
phase in opposite directions at nodes 10 and 105, pulling the system apart:
Force

Direction

Phase

Start Node

1500

10

1500

180

105

The two most common phased loadings are those due to rotating equipment and reciprocating
pumps.
Rotating equipment can have an eccentricity, a speed, and a mass. These items must be
converted into a harmonic load acting on the rotor at the theoretical mass centerline. The
magnitude of the harmonic load is calculated from:
Fn = (mass)(speed)2(eccentricity)
where speed is the angular velocity of the shaft in cycles per second. This load is applied along
both axes perpendicular to the shaft axis and at a 90 phase shift.
In the case of a reciprocating pump, the pump introduces a pressure wave into the line at some
regular interval that is related to the pump valving and speed. This pressure wave moves away
from the pump at the speed of sound in the fluid. These pressure waves cause loads at each
bend in the piping system. The load on each subsequent elbow in the system, starting from the
first elbow, is phase-shifted by an amount that is a function of the distance between the elbows,
from the first elbow to the current elbow. The amount of phase shift between elbow-elbow pairs
produces the net unbalanced dynamic load in the piping. The phase shift, in degrees from the
first elbow, is calculated from:
phase = [(frequency)(length) / (speed of sound)]360
where frequency is the frequency of wave introduction at the pump, and length is the distance
from the first elbow to the current elbow under study. The magnitude of the pressure load at
each elbow is:
Harmonic Force = 0.5 (Pressure variation) (Area)
With phasing considerations, all specified loads are considered to act together at each
applied frequency.

Topics
Force .............................................................................................. 541
Direction ......................................................................................... 542
Phase ............................................................................................. 542
Start Node ...................................................................................... 542
Stop Node ...................................................................................... 542
Increment ....................................................................................... 542

Force
Specifies the magnitude of the harmonic force to be applied.
The form of the harmonic forcing function is:
F(t) = A*cosine(t-)
where "F(t)" is the force as a function of time. "A" is the maximum amplitude of the dynamic
force. "" is the frequency of the excitation (in radians per second), and "" is the phase angle
(in radians).

CAESAR II User's Guide

541

Dynamic Analysis

Direction
Specifies the direction of the force. Valid entries are X, Y, Z, direction cosines, or direction
vectors. The format for direction cosines is (cx, cy, cz), such as (0.707,0.0,0.707). The format for
direction vectors is (vx, vy, vz), such as (1,0,1).

Phase
Specifies the phase angle of the force in degrees.
Harmonic loading can start with its maximum load at time equal to zero, or the harmonic load
can start with its maximum at any time between zero and 2*/ seconds. The phase angle f is
the method used to specify this time shift in the dynamic load waveform. The phase angle is
calculated from the time shift using the equation:
(degrees) = 180t/
where t is given in seconds and is given in radians per second.
The phase angle is usually entered as either zero or 90. Use the phase specification when
defining eccentric loads on rotating equipment.
A value for Phase is required. If the phase angle is zero, you must enter 0.

Start Node
Specifies the starting node number in the model at which the force is applied.
If entered without values for Stop Node and Increment, then the start node must exist in the
piping system. If entered with values for Stop Node and Increment, then the range of nodes
identified in the range must include at least one node in the piping system.

Stop Node
Specifies the ending node number in the model through which the force is applied. Used as a
part of a "range of nodes" force loading with Start Node and Increment. This value is optional.

Increment
Specifies the node number increment used to step from Start Node to Stop Node. Each node
that is incremented between the start and stop nodes is loaded with the value of Force. This
value is optional.

Example 1
A pressure pulse traveling in the line causes the line to shake at about 2 hertz. The magnitude
of the pressure loading is estimated to be about 460 lb. The pressure wave travels from 95 to
100. The harmonic force to model this load is shown as follows. The magnitude is divided by 2
because the total variation in the dynamic load is a function of the cosine, which varies from -1
to 1. To find the true response magnitudes from a positive-only harmonic load pulse, a static
solution with 460/2 lb. acting in the +X direction is superimposed on the static 460/2 lb. solution
to provide the constant shifting of the load axis. There is a negative load at node 95 due to the
negative sign on the cosine. The pressure pulse is always positive and a negative load never
exists. The superposition of the 460/2 static solution assures that the dynamic load (and
probably the resulting displacements) is always positive.
460 LB pressure load at 2 Hertz
460/2 X 0 95

542

CAESAR II User's Guide

Dynamic Analysis
Example 2
A pump is shaking in the X-Y plane. The pump axis is along the global Z axis. The magnitude of
the dynamic load is calculated to be 750 lb. from the manufacturer-provided masses and
eccentricities. Apply this rotating equipment load on the inline pump at node 350. The X and Y
loads are 90 degrees out of phase with one another. When the X load is at its maximum the Y
load is zero, and when the Y load is at its maximum the X load is zero.
Estimated eccentric load on inline pump DOH-V33203001
750 X 0 350
750 Y 90 350

Harmonic Displacements Tab

This tab is available when Harmonic is selected for Analysis Type in the Dynamic Analysis
window.
Values must be entered on either the Harmonic Forces tab or the Harmonic
Displacements tab.

Harmonic Phasing
Phasing is important if more than one force or displacement is included. The phase angle
(entered in degrees) relates the timing of one load or displacement to another. For example, if
two harmonic loads act along the same line but at different nodes, the loads can be directed
towards each other (that is, in opposite directions), producing no net dynamic imbalance on the
system. The loads can also act in the same direction (that is, to the right or to the left together),
producing a net dynamic imbalance in the system equal to the sum of the two forces. The phase
angle determines this relationship. For example, the follow load data is entered for in-phase
loading of 1500 lbf in the X direction with a 0 phase at nodes 10 and 105:
Force

Direction

Phase

Start Node

1500

10

1500

105

The follow load data is entered for out-of-phase loading of 1500 lbf in the X direction with the
phase in opposite directions at nodes 10 and 105, pulling the system apart:
Force

Direction

Phase

Start Node

1500

10

1500

180

105

The two most common phased loadings are those due to rotating equipment and reciprocating
pumps.
Rotating equipment can have an eccentricity, a speed, and a mass. These items must be
converted into a harmonic load acting on the rotor at the theoretical mass centerline. The
magnitude of the harmonic load is calculated from:
Fn = (mass)(speed)2(eccentricity)
where speed is the angular velocity of the shaft in cycles per second. This load is applied along
both axes perpendicular to the shaft axis and at a 90 phase shift.
In the case of a reciprocating pump, the pump introduces a pressure wave into the line at some
regular interval that is related to the pump valving and speed. This pressure wave moves away

CAESAR II User's Guide

543

Dynamic Analysis
from the pump at the speed of sound in the fluid. These pressure waves cause loads at each
bend in the piping system. The load on each subsequent elbow in the system, starting from the
first elbow, is phase-shifted by an amount that is a function of the distance between the elbows,
from the first elbow to the current elbow. The amount of phase shift between elbow-elbow pairs
produces the net unbalanced dynamic load in the piping. The phase shift, in degrees from the
first elbow, is calculated from:
phase = [(frequency)(length) / (speed of sound)]360
where frequency is the frequency of wave introduction at the pump, and length is the distance
from the first elbow to the current elbow under study. The magnitude of the pressure load at
each elbow is:
Harmonic Force = 0.5 (Pressure variation) (Area)
With phasing considerations, all specified loads are considered to act together at each
applied frequency.

Topics
Displacement ................................................................................. 544
Direction ......................................................................................... 544
Phase ............................................................................................. 544
Start Node ...................................................................................... 545
Stop Node ...................................................................................... 545
Increment ....................................................................................... 545

Displacement
Specifies the magnitude of the displacement to be applied.
The form of the harmonic displacement function is:
D(t)=(A)*cosine(t-)
where "D(t)" is the displacement as a function of time, "A" is the maximum amplitude of the
dynamic displacement. "" is the frequency of the excitation (in radians per second), and "" is
the phase angle (in radians).

Direction
Specifies the direction of the displacement. Valid entries are X, Y, Z, direction cosines, or
direction vectors. The format for direction cosines is (cx,cy, cz), such as (0.707,0.0,0.707). The
format for direction vectors is (vx, vy, vz), such as (1,0,1).

Phase
Specifies the phase angle of the displacement in degrees.
Harmonic displacement can start with its maximum displacement at time equal to zero, or the
harmonic displacements can start with its maximum displacements at any time between zero
and t + 2 / seconds. The phase angle is the method used to specify this time shift in the
dynamic load waveform. The phase angle can be calculated from the time shift using the
equation:
(degrees) = 180t /
where t is given in seconds and is given in radians per second.
A value for Phase is required. If the phase angle is zero, you must enter 0.0.

544

CAESAR II User's Guide

Dynamic Analysis

Start Node
Specifies the number of the starting node in the model at which the displacement is applied.
If the node is a supported node, then the dynamic displacement is assumed to act at the support
point. If the node is not sup\-ported, then the dynamic displacement is assumed to describe the
exact motion of the pipe at that point. This differentiation only becomes important when the node
is supported by a flexible restraint. For example, node 55 is supported in the Y direction by a
restraint having a stiffness of 5,000 lb./in. A harmonic displacement is also specified at node 55
in the Y direction. In this case, the harmonic displacement does not describe the dis\-placement
that is attached to 55. Instead, the displacement creates a load in the Y direction at 55 equal to
the harmonic displacement times 5,000 lb./in.
If Start Node has a value but Stop Node and Increment do not, then the start node must exist
in the piping system. If all three have values, then the range of nodes identified in the range
must include at least one node in the piping system.

Stop Node
Specifies the number of the ending node in the model through which the displacement is
applied. Used as a part of a "range of nodes" displacement loading with Start Node and
Increment. This value is optional.

Increment
Specifies the node number increment used to step from Start Node to Stop Node. Each node
incremented between the start and stop nodes is displaced with the value of Displacement.
This value is optional.

Example 1
A large ethylene compressor shakes the node exiting the compressor flange a field-measured 8
mils in the Y direction, and 3 mils in the Z direction. The dynamic displacements are assumed to
be simultaneous with no phase shift. This is because the load causing the displacements is
believed to be from the compressor plunger moving in the X, or axial, direction. The
dis\-placements are skewed because the piping configuration entering the compressor is itself
skewed.
Harmonic Displacements at Compressor Flange
0.008

0.0

330

0.003

0.0

330

CAESAR II User's Guide

545

Dynamic Analysis
Example 2
Applying estimated eccentric forces to the pump described in the harmonic force example (see
"Increment" on page 542) did not produce the displacements witnessed in the field. Field
personnel have measured the dynamic displacements in the vertical (Y) and transverse (Z)
directions at the pump piping connections. The centerline of the pump, at the intersection of the
horizontal suction and vertical discharge is node 15. The magnitude of the Z displacement is
measured at 12 mil. The magnitude of the Y displacement is measured at 3 mils. It is assumed
that the vibration is due to the rotation of the pump shaft, and so the Z and Y loads will be taken
to be 90 degrees out of phase.
Harmonic displacements modeling pump vibration on the inline pump DOH-V33203001:
Z magnitude of the load - zero deg. phase shift
0.012 Z 0 15
Y magnitude of the load - 90 deg. phase shift
0.003 Y 90 15

Spectrum/Time History Definitions Tab

The Spectrum Definitions tab is available when Earthquake (spectrum), Relief Loads
(spectrum) and Water Hammer/Slug Flow (spectrum) are selected for Analysis Type in the
Dynamic Analysis window.
The Time History Definitions tab is available when Time History is selected for Analysis
Type in the Dynamic Analysis window.

Spectrum Definitions
One analysis may have multiple spectrum types and definitions. Predefined spectra are included
in the spectrum definition list. Any combination of these predefined spectra can be used as is,
deleted, or used with any other defined spectra.

You can include the basic spectrum data definitions in the comments for each ASCII spectrum
file. Select Cmt to create a comment line. For more information, see Enter/Edit Spectrum Data
(on page 604) and Examples (on page 549).

Spectrum Data Files

Special force spectrum data files are created by the DLF/Spectrum Generator (on page 605).
The response spectrum table values are entered directly or saved as a file. Data stored in a file
can be used by any analysis.

546

CAESAR II User's Guide

Dynamic Analysis
When using a file created by DLF/Spectrum Generator
, you must specify the type of data
which contained in the file, because the file only contains a table of data points. This data is
always frequency versus force-multiplier with linear interpolation. A typical definition is in this
format:
Name

Range Type

Ordinate
Type

Range
Interpol

Ordinate
Interpol

#TESTFILE

FREQ

FORCE

LIN

LIN

The data in this file may also be read in directly using Enter/Edit Spectrum Data
. In
this case, omit the "#" from the spectrum declaration. For more information, see Enter/Edit
Spectrum Data (on page 604).

Time History Definitions

Time history profiles are defined in a way similar to the definition of response spectra. The
profile must be given a name, time versus force data definitions, and interpolation methods.
Response spectra data must also be defined directly or from a file. The profile data may be
entered with actual forces or normalized to 1.0, depending on how the force sets are defined.
One force-time profile should be defined for each independent point load on the piping system.
The load case consists of one or more force profiles. Multiple force profiles can create a
staggered loading on the system.

Topics
Name ............................................................................................. 547
Range Type ................................................................................... 548
Ordinate Type ................................................................................ 548
Range Interpol ............................................................................... 549
Ordinate Interpol ............................................................................ 549
Examples ....................................................................................... 549

Name
Specifies the name of the spectrum. Names should reflect the spectrum and its intended use.
This name is used when defining the load cases. The name can be any 24-character identifier
and is associated with a particular spectrum or load profile.
Do not include spaces in the name.
The following predefined spectra are delivered with the software. No additional definitions are
required when using these spectra.

El Centro
The El Centro California N-S component, taken from Biggs, "Introduction to Structural
Dynamics," applies to systems with 5-10 percent critical damping.

CAESAR II User's Guide

547

Dynamic Analysis
REG. GUIDE 1.60
1.60H.5 and 1.60V.5
1.60H2 and 1.60V2
1.60H5 and 1.60V5
1.60H7 and 1.60V7
1.60H1.0 and 1.60V10
Each of these spectra defines the horizontal and vertical components for 0.5, 2, 5, 7, and 10
percent critically damped systems. Associated with each of these spectra is a value for ZPA.
(Zero Period Acceleration), the maximum ground acceleration at the site. This value defaults to
0.5 g and can be changed on the Control Parameters Tab (on page 571).

Uniform Building Code

UBCSOIL1
UBCSOIL2
UBCSOIL3
These spectra represent the normalized (horizontal) response spectra for three soil types
provided in Figure 23-3 of the Uniform Building Code, (1991 Edition).

The spectrum name (or load profile) can be preceded by a (#) sign. The (#) sign instructs
CAESAR II to read the spectrum table from a file having the same name as the spectrum
with no extension. Several jobs in the current folder can then access this shock data.

If data is to be entered manually, click Enter/Edit Spectrum Data

, then create new rows
and enter the appropriate Range Type and Ordinate Type values. For more information,
see Enter/Edit Spectrum Data (on page 604).
The complete definition of a shock includes its name, range type, ordinate type, range
interpolation method, ordinate interpolation method, and the shock data point table.
Everything but the shock data point table can be entered on the

Range Type
Specifies the type of values on the abscissa (horizontal) axis of the spectrum/DLF curve. Select
FREQUENCY or PERIOD.
If the value is PERIOD, then the spectrum table data is in seconds. If the value is FREQUENCY,
then the data is in Hertz (cycles per second).
For Time History analysis only, select TIME. The spectrum table data is in milliseconds (ms).
The values can be abbreviated by any part of the word, but only the first letter is required.

Ordinate Type
Specifies the type of values on the ordinate (vertical) axis of the spectrum/DLF curve. Select
FREQUENCY , VELOCITY, ACCELERATION, G-ACCELERATION, or FORCE-MULTIPLIER.
If the value is FREQUENCY, then the spectrum table data is in Hertz (cycles per second).If the
value is VELOCITY, then the data is in length per second. If the value is ACCELERATION, then
the data is in length per second squared. If the value is G-ACCELERATION, then the data are
in g's.
For Time History analysis only, select FORCE-MULTIPLIER.
The values can be abbreviated by any part of the word, but only the first letter is required.

548

CAESAR II User's Guide

Dynamic Analysis

Range Interpol
Specifies how the values on the abscissa (horizontal) axis are interpolated. Select LINEAR or
LOGARITHMIC.
See Examples (on page 549) for additional discussion.
The values can be abbreviated as LIN and LOG.

Ordinate Interpol
Specifies how the values on the ordinate (vertical) axis are interpolated. Select LINEAR or
LOGARITHMIC.
See Examples (on page 549) for additional discussion.
The values can be abbreviated as LIN and LOG.

Examples
Example 1
The analysis requires that the El Centro shock be applied in the X and Z directions using a
factor of 1.0, and in the Y direction using a factor of 0.667.
No spectrum definition is required for this shock. El Centro is a predefined spectrum. All of its
shock data resides in the CAESAR II shock database.

Example 2
The analysis requires the use of the Nuclear Regulatory Guide 1.60 shock loads. At a maximum
acceleration value of 0.25 gs, analysis is to be performed using 1.0 times the horizontal and
vertical components of the shock as specified in Reg. Guide 1.60.
There is no spectrum definition required for either of these two shock loads. The Reg. Guide
1.60 shock spectra are predefined. You must only specify the maximum acceleration (ZPA) of
0.25 gs on the Control Parameters Tab (on page 571), and must use the Reg. Guide spectra
corresponding to the anticipated system damping. Lower damping values mean more
conservative results.

Example 3
The analysis requires a shock spectrum that is given by the client and developed for the site. A
plot of the spectrum appears as follows. The horizontal axis is period and the vertical axis is
acceleration. Because of the variation of the numbers along each axis, a logarithmic
interpolation for each axis is used. Because the shock name is not preceded by a (#) sign, the
spectrum is not predefined, and you must manually enter the points for this spectrum. The
spectrum definition input for pointing to this file is:
Name

Range Type

Ordinate Type

Range Interpol

Ordinate Interpol

BENCHNO4

PERIOD

ACCELERATION

LOG

LOG

Example 4
All analysis on a particular project requires the use of the spectrum table shown as follows. The
data points of the spectrum are entered into an ASCII file named BENCH1 in the current folder.

CAESAR II User's Guide

549

Dynamic Analysis
The file can be created using any standard editor. The spectrum definition input for pointing to
this file is:
Name

Range Type

Ordinate Type

Range Interpol

Ordinate Interpol

#BENCH1

PERIOD

ACCELERATION

LOG

LOG

Listing of ASCII file "BENCH1":

* SPECTRUM FOR NUCLEAR BENCHMARK NO.1. THIS SPECTRUM IS
* TO BE USED FOR ALL LINES ON PROJECT 1-130023-A03.
* FILENAME = "BENCH1"
* RANGE TYPE = PERIOD (SECONDS)
* ORDINATE TYPE = ACCELERATION (IN./SEC./SEC.)
* INTERPOLATION FOR BOTH AXES = LOGARITHMIC.
PERIOD(SEC)
ACCELERATION(IN/SEC/SEC)
0.1698E-02
0.1450E+03
0.2800E-01
0.3800E+03
0.5800E-01
0.7750E+03
0.7100E-01
0.7750E+03
0.9100E-01
0.4400E+03
0.1140E+00
0.1188E+04
0.1410E+00
0.1188E+04
0.1720E+00
0.7000E+03
0.2000E+00
0.8710E+03
0.8710E+03
0.2500E+00
0.3230E+00
0.4000E+03

Spectrum/Time History Load Cases Tab

The Spectrum Load Cases tab is available when Earthquake (spectrum), Relief Loads
(spectrum) and Water Hammer/Slug Flow (spectrum) are selected for Analysis Type in the
Dynamic Analysis window.
The Time History Load Cases tab is available when Time History is selected for Analysis
Type in the Dynamic Analysis window. A time history analysis has only one load case.

Load cases consist of simultaneously applied spectra. Each spectrum in the case is assigned a
direction and factor.

550

CAESAR II User's Guide

Dynamic Analysis
Additional Spectrum Options
The following options are only available for the Earthquake (spectrum), Relief Loads
(spectrum) and Water Hammer/Slug Flow (spectrum) analysis types.
Editing Load Case - Specifies a load case to edit.
Stress Types - Specifies the stress type for the load case:
OPE - Stress from operating loads.
OCC - Stress from occasional short-term loads.
SUS - Stress from primary sustained loads.
EXP - Stress from secondary thermal expansion loads.
FAT - Stress from fatigue loads.
Fatigue Cycles - Specifies the number of fatigue cycles. This option is only available when FAT
is selected for Stress Types.
Directives - Displays the Directive Builder (on page 603) dialog box.
Add New Load Case - Adds a new load case.
Delete Current Load Case - Deletes the current load case.

Load Cases for Force Spectrum

Spectrum load cases for force spectrum analyses are set up differently than spectrum load
cases for earthquake analyses. Force spectrum analyses must link a force multiplier spectrum to
a force set.
A load case definition consists of one or more lines, as shown below. The direction specified on
this line does not need to be the direction of the load (which is specified in the force set). This
direction is used for labeling and designation of independent versus dependent loadings.
Spectrum

Factor

Dir.

Force Set #

TESTFILE

1.0

Complexity increases as the number of components in the load case goes beyond one,
and as the time history phenomena being modeled deviates from true impulse type loading. For
more information, see Examples (on page 560).

Load Cases for Earthquakes

For earthquakes, the direction defines the orientation of the uniform inertial loading.
Earthquakes typically have X, Y, and Z components. The factor is used to modify the magnitude
of the shock. For example, the seismic evaluation of a piping system includes two load cases:
1.0 times (100% of) the El Centro spectrum in the X direction and 0.67 times (67% of) the
El Centro spectrum in the Y direction
1.0 in Z and 0.67 in Y.
CAESAR II also supports options for independent support motion earthquakes, where parts of
the system are exposed to different shocks. For example, a piping system is supported from
both ground and building supports. Because the building filters the earthquake, supports
attached to the building are not exposed to the same shock as the supports attached to the
ground. Two different shock inputs are required: one for the ground supports and one for the
building supports. To specify an independent support motion shock, the node range that defines
a particular group of supports is required. The maximum displacement (seismic anchor
movements) of the support attachment point must also be specified.

CAESAR II User's Guide

551

Dynamic Analysis
The example below shows a typical uniform support earthquake specification and a typical
independent support motion earthquake:
* UNIFORM SUPPORT MOTION EARTHQUAKE INPUT
ELCENTRO
1
X
ELCENTRO
1
Z
ELCENTRO
.667 Y
* INDEPENDENT SUPPORT MOTION EARTHQUAKE INPUT
HGROUND
1
X
1
100
1
0.25
HGROUND
1
Z
1
100
1
0.25
VGROUND
1
Y
1
100
1
0.167
HBUILDING
1
X
101
300
1
0.36
HBUILDING
1
Z
101
300
1
0.36
VBUILDING
1
Y
101
300
1
0.24
The uniform support motion earthquake contains only components of the El Centro earthquake
acting uniformly through all of the supports. There is a 33% reduction in the earthquakes
magnitude in the Y direction.
The independent support motion earthquake above has two different support groups: 1-100 and
101-300. The 1-100 group is exposed to a ground spectrum. The 101-300 group is exposed to a
building spectrum. Different horizontal and vertical components are used for the ground and the
building spectra. The last values specified are the seismic support movements (that is the
Anchor Movement).
Stress Types can be assigned to the spectrum load cases. If FAT is selected, you must
also enter a value for Fatigue Cycles, the number of anticipated load cycles.

Load Case for Time History

Only a single load case is defined for time history analysis. The direction entry (Dir.) is used only
for labeling, not as an analytic input value.

Topics
Spectrum/Time History Profile ....................................................... 552
Factor ............................................................................................. 553
Dir. ................................................................................................. 553
Start Node ...................................................................................... 554
Stop Node ...................................................................................... 554
Increment ....................................................................................... 554
Anchor Movement .......................................................................... 554
Force Set # .................................................................................... 555
Force Sets Tab .............................................................................. 555
Examples ....................................................................................... 560

Spectrum/Time History Profile

Specifies the name of a spectrum or time history pulse/shock definition applied to the load case,
as defined on the Spectrum/Time History Definitions Tab (on page 546). More than one
definition can be listed, with one on each row. Each spectrum or time history pulse specified is
applied to the model in this load case.

552

CAESAR II User's Guide

Dynamic Analysis

Factor
Specifies a value for the spectrum shock table multiplier. This value is usually 1.0.

Dir.
Specifies the applied direction of the spectrum/DLF shock load. Select X, Y, or Z. You can also
enter direction cosines, such as (.707, 0, .707), or direction vectors, such as (1,0,1).
This value is used as follows, depending on the analysis type:
For earthquake analysis:
Direction specifies the loading direction.
Direction indicates the dependence or independence of the loads. When modal
combinations precede spatial combinations, loads with the same direction are summed at
the modal level before any spatial combination.
Direction acts as an output label for the maximum contributor, such as 3X(1), where the first
profile in direction X is reported as X(1). 3X(1) indicates that the largest contributor to the
total response is from the third mode of vibration and due to the first spectrum/shock defined
as X.
For force spectrum analysis, the force vector (direction) is already established:
Direction indicates the dependence or independence of the loads as discussed above.
Direction acts as an output label for the maximum contributor, as discussed above for
earthquake analysis.
For time history analysis, time history combinations are algebraic (in-phase):
Direction acts only as an output label for the maximum contributor, such as 3X(1).
To define an earthquake type of loading, CAESAR II must know what how the earthquake shock
acts from the shock spectrum table. CAESAR II must also know the direction of the shock. A
shock load case is typically comprised of three shock components in the X, Y, and Z directions.
The combination of each of these components shock loads defines the earthquakes dynamic
loading of the piping system.
Skewed directions can be entered by giving a direction cosine or direction vector. Skewed shock
contributions are entered when the piping or structural system appears particularly sensitive to a
shock along a skewed line. This most often occurs when a majority of the piping system does
not lay along the X and Z axes.
Any number of shock components can act in the same direction. For example, there can be two
X direction components. This usually occurs with independent support shock contributions
where one X direction component applies to one support group and another X direction
component applies to a different support group. There can also be two shock components in the
same direction without having independent support contributions, by defining two shock
contributions in the same direction without start, stop, or increment node entries.
In the simplest form of force spectrum loading, there is only a single shock component in the
load case. For that situation, there is only a single line of input on the Load Cases tab. When
there are multiple lines of input on the load case screen, such as in analyzing a traveling
pressure wave that impacts different elbow-elbow pairs, there can be many components to the
shock load case. The combination of responses from each of these shock loading components
can be established in one of two ways. If the value of Direction is the same for each load
component, then the directional combination method is used to combine the responses from
each load component. If the value of Direction is different for each load component, then the
spatial combination method is used to combine the responses from each load component.
Directional combinations are always made before modal combinations, while spatial

CAESAR II User's Guide

553

Dynamic Analysis
combinations can be made before or after modal combinations. The default is to perform the
modal combinations before spatial combinations. Either spatial or directional combinations can
be made using the ABS or SRSS method.

Start Node
Specifies the number of the starting node of a group of restraints at which the spectrum load is
applied for independent support motion analysis (ISM). The spectrum is applied to all restraint
nodes in the group between Start Node and Stop Node in steps of Increment. The range of
nodes must include at least one node in the piping system.
The component of an independent support shock applies only to a group of support points. For
example, different shock spectra are generated for rack level piping and for ground level piping.
The rack supports are subject to one shock excitation, influenced by the racks response to the
earthquake. The ground level supports are subject to a different shock excitation, not influenced
by the rack. One node range is used to define the rack support shock contributions and another
is used to define the ground support shock contributions.
This option is only available when Earthquake (spectrum) is selected for Analysis Type.

Stop Node
Specifies the number of the ending node of a group of restraints at which the spectrum load is
applied for independent support motion analysis (ISM). The spectrum is applied to all restraint
nodes in the group between Start Node and Stop Node in steps of Increment. The range of
nodes must include at least one node in the piping system. If no value is entered, the load is
applied at the start node.
This option is only available when Earthquake (spectrum) is selected for Analysis Type.

Increment
Specifies the node number increment used to step from Start Node to Stop Node for in a group
of restraints that is loaded by this spectrum for Independent Support Motion analysis (ISM). The
spectrum is applied to all restraint nodes in the group between Start Node and Stop Node in
steps of Increment. The range of nodes must include at least one node in the piping system. If
no value is entered, the load is applied at the start node.
This option is only available when Earthquake (spectrum) is selected for Analysis Type.

Anchor Movement
Specifies the absolute displacement of the restraints included in this spectrum shock case for
independent support motion analysis (ISM). This displacement is applied to all restrained nodes
in the node group, and is used to calculate the pseudostatic load components representing the
relative displacement of the individual restraint sets. If no value is entered, and if the defined
shock for this row does not encompass the entire system, this value is calculated by the
software. The value is taken from the lowest frequency entry of the response spectrum: the
2
specified displacement, velocity/frequency (for velocity spectra), or acceleration/frequency (for
acceleration spectra). Frequency is angular frequency.
This option is only available when Earthquake (spectrum) is selected for Analysis Type.

554

CAESAR II User's Guide

Dynamic Analysis

Force Set #
Specifies the force set number corresponding to a set entered in the Force Sets tab if the
spectrum/load profile name describes a force-type spectrum (instead of displacement, velocity,
or acceleration). For more information, see Force Sets Tab (on page 555). If no value is entered,
Factor and Dir. must also have no values.
This option is not available when Earthquake (spectrum) is selected for Analysis Type.

Force Sets Tab

The Force Sets tab is available when Relief Loads (spectrum), Water Hammer/Slug Flow
(spectrum), and Time History are selected for Analysis Type in the Dynamic Analysis
window.
Spectrum or time history analysis can have multiple force sets.

Force spectrum analyses, such as a relief valve loading, differ from earthquake analyses
because there is no implicit definition of the load distribution. For example, the loading for
earthquakes is uniform over the entire structure and proportional to the pipe mass. For relief
valves and other point loadings, the load is not uniformly distributed and is not proportional to
the mass. A water hammer load is proportional to the speed of sound and the initial velocity of
the fluid. Its point of application is at subsequent elbow-elbow pairs. Force spectrum analyses
require more information than the more common earthquake simulations: the load magnitude,
direction, and location. Forces that occur together are grouped into like-numbered force sets
and are manipulated in the analysis together. For example, the following shows two different
loading levels of the same type of load:
Force

Direction

Node

Force Set #

-3400

35

-1250

35

For a skewed load, force components belong to the same force set, because the components
always occur together:
Force

Direction

Node

Force Set #

-2134

104

-2134

104

CAESAR II User's Guide

555

Dynamic Analysis
Force Spectrum Workflow
The general procedure for applying a force spectrum load is as follows:
1. Determine the pulse time history acting at a single node or over a group of nodes. The pulse
waveform must be the same for all nodes in a group, but the maximum pulse amplitude may
vary.
2. To convert a time history to a response spectrum, use the DLF/Spectrum Generator (on
page 605) to build a DLF versus frequency file for the time-pulse waveform. This is a
standard shock table file. This step is not needed for a time history analysis. The data is
automatically added to the dynamic input and can be saved to a separate file.
3. On the Spectrum Definitions tab or Time History Definitions tab, define the DLF versus
frequency file just created as a force spectrum data file with linear interpolation along the
frequency axis and linear interpolation along the ordinate axis. Begin the shock name with a
#. The software then reads the shock table from the data file.
4. Determine the maximum force magnitude that acts on each node subject to the pulse load.
5. On the Force Sets tab, specify the maximum amplitude of the dynamic load, the direction,
and the nodes.
If the force-time profiles are normalized to 1.0, the maximum magnitudes of the loads
are entered here. If the profiles are entered using their actual values, the force set values
are entered as 1.0.
6. On the Spectrum Load Cases tab or Time History Load Cases tab, enter the force
spectrum name (defined in the Spectrum Definitions tab), the table multiplication factor
(usually 1.0), a direction, and the Force Set # (defined on the Force Sets tab). This step
defines the link between the force spectrum and the force loading pattern.
7. Set up any other parameters needed to run the spectrum analysis. Perform error checking,
and after there are no fatal errors, run the analysis.

You can include any number of user comment lines by clicking Cmt. There can be any
number of line entries in the Force spectrum data.
If there are multiple force spectrum components in a single dynamic load case, carefully
select the combination method. The same rules that cover earthquake shocks and
components apply to force spectrum shocks and components

Topics
Force...............................................................................................556
Direction..........................................................................................557
Node ...............................................................................................557
Force Set # .....................................................................................557
Examples ........................................................................................557

Force
Specifies the magnitude of the impulse force (dynamic load) at the node. The sign of this value
is according to the CAESAR II global coordinate system
The total applied force is the product of this value, the selected force value from the
spectrum or load profile, and the factor entered for the load case.

556

CAESAR II User's Guide

Dynamic Analysis

Direction
Specifies the direction of the impulse force (dynamic load). Valid entries are X, Y, Z, direction
cosines, or direction vectors. The format for direction cosines is (cx, cy, cz), such as
(0.707,0.0,0.707). The format for direction vectors is (vx, vy, vz), such as (1,0,1).

Node
Specifies the node at which the impulse force (dynamic load) is applied. The node must exist in
the model.

Force Set #
Specifies the numeric value associated with this row (force set). Force sets are used to
construct the dynamic load cases. Values are arbitrary, but usually start at 1 and increment by
one.
Each impulse can be assigned to a different force set, which provides the most capability when
constructing load cases. Multiple rows with the same value form a single force set.

Examples
Example 1
Nodes 5, 10, and 15 define a cantilever pipe leg that is part of an offshore production platform.
The dynamic load as a function of time is equal to a half sine wave. The waveform is the same
for all three nodes, but the maximum dynamic load on node 5 is 5030 lb., on node 10 is 10,370
lb., and on node 15 is 30,537 lb. Three force sets are built for this problem. One has the
dynamic loads acting in the X direction. The second has the dynamic loads acting in the Z
direction. The third has the dynamic loads acting simultaneously in the X an Z directions. The
force spectrum input data is:
X DIRECTION HALF SINE WAVE/CURRENT LOADING
Force

Direction

Node

Force Set #

5030

10370

10

30537

15

Z DIRECTION HALF SINE WAVE/CURRENT LOADING

Force

Direction

Node

Force Set #

5030

10370

10

30537

15

CAESAR II User's Guide

557

Dynamic Analysis
X AND Z DIRECTION WAVE/CURRENT LOADING
Force

Direction

Node

Force Set #

5030

5030

10370

10

10370

10

30537

15

30537

15

Example 2
A relief valve at node 565 is being investigated for different reactor decompression conditions.
The maximum load for the first condition is 320 kips in the X direction. The maximum load for
the second decompression condition is 150 kips in the X direction. The third decompression
condition maximum load is 50 kips. Three different maximum force sets are defined:
REACTOR DECOMP CONDITION 1
Force
320000

Direction

Node

Force Set #

565

REACTOR DECOMP CONDITION 2

Force
150000

Direction

Node

Force Set #

565

REACTOR DECOMP CONDITION 3 (MOST FREQUENT)

Force

Direction

Node

Force Set #

50000

565

Example 3
A startup shock wave passes through a single elbow system. Nodes in the piping model are 5,
10, and 15 as shown:

As the wave starts off between 5 and 10 there is an initial dynamic axial load on the anchor at 5.
When the shock wave hits the elbow at 10, the axial load in the 5-10 elements balance the initial
imbalance at node 5, and there become an axial imbalance in the 10-15 element. This shock
load is modeled as two completely separate impacts on the piping system. The first is the

558

CAESAR II User's Guide

Dynamic Analysis
dynamic anchor load at 5. If 5 is a flexible anchor then this load may cause dynamic
displacements of the piping system and 5 will just be subject to the dynamic time history pulse
due to the shock. Assume the anchor at 5 is a flexible vessel nozzle. The second shock load is
the unbalanced dynamic pressure load in the 10-15 element that exists until the shock reaches
the node 15. Friction losses in the line reduce the shock magnitude as it travels down the line. In
the time the wave leaves the anchor at 5 until it encounters the bend at 10 there is a 50% drop
in the pulse strength as shown:

This pressure drop was calculated using a transient fluid simulator. Between nodes 10 and 15
the pulse strength drops even further as shown:

The force spectrum loads are:

CAESAR II User's Guide

559

Dynamic Analysis
X DIRECTION LOAD ON FLEXIBLE ANCHOR AT 5
Force

Direction

Node

Force Set #

-5600

Z DIRECTION LOAD ON ELBOW AT 10

Force

Direction

Node

Force Set #

2800

10

Examples
Example 1
Define a shock load case that excites the entire piping system with a vibration of one times the
El Centro earthquake in the X direction, one times the El Centro earthquake in the Z, and 0.667
times the El Centro earthquake in the Y direction.
Spectrum

Factor

Dir.

ELCENTRO

ELCENTRO

ELCENTRO

0.667

Example 2
Define a shock load case that excites the piping system with the horizontal and vertical
components of the Reg. Guide 1.60 shock spectra for a 2 percent critically damped system. The
maximum ground acceleration is 0.22 gs.
The maximum ground acceleration is set on the Control Parameters tab and has no effect on
the shock load case definitions.
Spectrum

Factor

Dir.

1.60H2

1.60V2

1.60H2

Example 3
Define a shock load case that is comprised of custom shocks BENCH1 and BENCH2. BENCH1
acts in the X and Z directions, and BENCH2 acts in the Y direction. The scale factor for all
shocks is 1.0.

560

Spectrum

Factor

Dir.

BENCH1

BENCH2

BENCH1

CAESAR II User's Guide

Dynamic Analysis
One of the shock load cases excites the piping system along a line that is 45 degrees off of the
global axes in the horizontal plane. It is suspected that this direction of excitation yields the
worst possible results. Apply the custom shock BENCH1 in the horizontal direction and
BENCH2 in the vertical direction.
Spectrum

Factor

Dir.

BENCH1

(1,0,1)

BENCH1

(-1,0,1
)

BENCH2

Example 4
Define a shock load case that excites the piping system with a vibration of two times the El
Centro earthquake in the X, Y, and Z directions. There should be two shock load cases. The first
should use an independent summation and the second a simultaneous summation.
The load cases are defined as shown. Remember that independent summation means MODAL
then SPATIAL, and simultaneous means SPATIAL then MODAL.
There are several ways to accomplish the same objective using parameters on other
tabs, such as the Control Parameters tab. Only the method using the explicit definition of the
load case combination method is shown in this example.
LOAD CASE 1 SHOCK CONTRIBUTIONS
MODAL(GROUP), SPATIAL(SRSS), MODAL COMBINATIONS FIRST
Spectrum

Factor

Dir.

ELCENTRO

ELCENTRO

ELCENTRO

LOAD CASE 2 SHOCK CONTRIBUTIONS

SPATIAL(SRSS), MODAL(GROUP), SPATIAL COMBINATIONS FIRST
Spectrum

Factor

Dir.

ELCENTRO

ELCENTRO

ELCENTRO

CAESAR II User's Guide

561

Dynamic Analysis
Example 5
Define a shock case that has the custom spectrum 1DIR acting only in the Z direction. Set the
stress type for the case to be operating and use modal summations before spatial summations.
Modal or spatial summations are not shown below because modal summation is the CAESAR II
default and is controlled by Spatial or Modal Combination First (on page 591) on the Control
Parameters tab.
Stress Types: OPE
Spectrum

Factor

Dir.

1DIR

Example 6
The support nodes 5, 25, 35, 45, and 56 are pipe shoes sitting on concrete foundations. The
support nodes 140, 145, 157, 160, and 180 are second level rack sup\-ports, that is, pipe shoes
sitting on structural steel beams in the second level of the rack. The ground level shock
spectrum name is GROUND04, and the second level rack spectrum name is RACKLEVEL2-04.
Set up the shock load case to define these independent support excitations and omit any
relative support movement.
GROUND LEVEL EXCITATION
Spectrum

Factor

Dir.

Start
Node

Stop
Node

Increment

Anchor
Movement

GROUND04

56

GROUND04

56

GROUND04

56

RACK LEVEL 2 EXCITATION

Spectrum

Factor

Dir.

Start
Node

Stop
Node

Increment

Anchor
Movement

RACKLEVEL2-04

140

180

RACKLEVEL2-04

140

180

RACKLEVEL2-04

140

180

Next, set up a shock load case, and define all combinations options explicitly. Use the same
shock components as defined above, except assume that the pseudostatic component is added
using the SRSS combination method. Also change the modal summation method to SRSS. This
is the recommended method. When the modal summation method is SRSS it does not matter
whether modal or spatial combinations are performed first. The order is only a factor when
closely spaced modes are considered in the grouping, 10 percent, and DSRSS methods.
MODAL(SRSS),PSEUDOSTATIC(SRSS),SPATIAL(SRSS)

562

CAESAR II User's Guide

Dynamic Analysis
GROUND LEVEL EXCITATION
Spectrum

Factor

Dir.

Start
Node

Stop
Node

Increment

GROUND04

56

GROUND04

56

GROUND04

56

Anchor
Movement

RACK LEVEL 2 EXCITATION

Spectrum

Factor

Dir.

Start
Node

Stop
Node

Increment

RACKLEVEL2-04

140

180

RACKLEVEL2-04

140

180

RACKLEVEL2-04

140

180

Anchor
Movement

Example 7
The last elbow in the relief valve piping is at node 295. The spectrum name: BLAST contains the
DLF response spectrum for relief valve firing. SPECTRUM/TIME HISTORY FORCE SET #1
contains the load information and its point of application. Show the load case input that provides
the most conservative combination of modal results. Because there is only a single loading, no
consideration is given to spatial or directional combinations.
Shock Name, Factor, Direction, and Force Set #
ABSOLUTE MODAL SUMMATION, ONLY A SINGLE LOADING
COMPONENT AND SO NO CONSIDERATION GIVEN TO SPATIAL OR
DIRECTIONAL COMBINATIONS.
BLAST, 1, X, 1
MODAL (ABS)
Click Directives to open the Directive Builder dialog box and select these values. For
more information, see Directive Builder (on page 603).
Use the same example above and combine the modes using the grouping method. This will
produce the most realistic solution.
BLAST, 1, X, 1
MODAL (GROUP)

CAESAR II User's Guide

563

Dynamic Analysis
Example 8 (Force Response Spectrum)
There are two elbow-to-elbow pairs that are of significance in this job. Water hammer loads act
on the elbow at 40 in the X direction and on the elbow at 135 in the Y-direction. In the
SPECTRUM/TIME HISTORY FORCE SET input, force set #1 is defined as the load at 40 and
force set #2 is defined as the load at 135. Add the response quantities from each load
component first, using an ABS summation, and then the resulting modal response quantities,
using the grouping summation method. Two identical methods for achieving the same results
are shown.
Shock Name, Factor, Direction, and Force set #
BECAUSE THE "DIRECTION" INPUT IS THE SAME, THAT IS "X", FOR BOTH,
LOAD CONTRIBUTIONS, THE DIRECTIONAL COMBINATION METHOD
WILL GOVERN HOW THE HAMMER 40 AND HAMMER135 RESPONSES
ARE COMBINED.
HAMMER40, 1, X, 1
HAMMER135, 1, X, 2
DIRECTIONAL (ABS), MODAL(GROUP)
or
BECAUSE THE "DIRECTION" INPUT IS DIFFERENT, THAT IS "X" AND "Y,"
THE SPATIAL COMBINATION METHOD WILL GOVERN HOW THE
HAMMER40 AND HAMMER135 RESPONSES ARE COMBINED. NOTE THAT
ON THE DIRECTIVE LINE THE "SPATIAL" DIRECTIVE COMES BEFORE
THE "MODAL" DIRECTIVE.
HAMMER40, 1, X, 1
HAMMER135, 1, Y, 2
SPATIAL(ABS), MODAL(GROUP)

Static/Dynamic Combinations Tab

The Static/Dynamic Combinations tab is available when Earthquake (spectrum), Relief
Loads (spectrum), Water Hammer/Slug Flow (spectrum), and Time History are selected for
Analysis Type in the Dynamic Analysis window.
Each analysis can have multiple load case combinations. Multiple static and dynamic cases can
exist:
Each static or dynamic case must be on a separate line.
The order of the load cases is not important, and has no effect on the results.
Comment lines may be included.
Static cases alone can be combined without dynamic cases.
Dynamic cases alone can be combined without static cases.
Most piping codes combine occasional dynamic stresses with sustained static stresses. This
combination is compared to the occasional allowable stress.
Each combination references static load case and dynamic load case numbers to be combined.
Any number of static or dynamic loads can be combined in a single combination load case.
Each combination is on a separate row.

564

CAESAR II User's Guide

Dynamic Analysis
Additional Options
The following options are also available:
Editing Load Case - Select a load case to edit.
Stress Types - Select the stress type for the load case:
OPE - Stress from operating loads.
OCC - Stress from occasional short-term loads.
SUS - Stress from primary sustained loads.
EXP - Stress from secondary thermal expansion loads.
FAT - Stress from fatigue loads.
This option is not available for time history analysis.
Fatigue Cycles - Specifies the number of fatigue cycles. This option is only available when FAT
is selected for Stress Types and is s not available for time history analysis.
Directives - Opens the Directive Builder (on page 603) dialog box, where you can control the
combination method parameters, using methods such as ABS and SRSS (square root of the
sum of the squares).
Add New Load Case - Adds a new load case.
Delete Current Load Case - Deletes the current load case.

Topics
Load Case...................................................................................... 565
Factor ............................................................................................. 565
Examples ....................................................................................... 565

Load Case
Specifies the static or dynamic load case to be included in the combination case. Select a load
case from the list. Static load cases start with S, and dynamic load cases are start with D. Each
is then followed by a load case number of a static or shock analysis defined on the Load Cases
tab. For more information, see Spectrum/Time History Load Cases Tab (on page 550).
The following examples are valid values: S1, STATIC1, S3, STATIC3, D1, DYNAMICS1, S#1,
and D#1. Use any length up to 24 characters. For static load case definitions, the static case
must exist and have already been run (also, the S cant refer to a spring hanger design case).
For dynamic load case definitions, the dynamic load case number refers to the shock load case.

Factor
Specifies a multiplication factor to be applied to the results of the load case. The resulting
product is then used in the combination case. The default is 1.0.

Examples
Example 1
The static load cases are:
1 = W+P1+D1+T1+H (OPE)
2 = W+P1+H (SUS)
3 = L1 - L2 (EXP)

CAESAR II User's Guide

565

Dynamic Analysis
The dynamic load cases are:
1 = Operating Basis Earthquake
2 = 1/2 the Operating Basis Earthquake
Combine the operating basis earthquake stresses with the sustained static stresses:
Load Case

Factor

STATIC2

1.0

DYNAMIC1

1.0

or
Load Case

Factor

S2

D1

Example 2
The static load cases are:
1 = W + P1 (For hanger design)
2 = W + P1 + D1 + T1 (For hanger design)
3 = W + P1 + D1 + T1 + H (OPE)
4 = W + P1 + H (SUS)
5 = L3 - L4 (EXP)
There is one dynamic load case. Create an occasional case that is the sum of the sustained and
the dynamic stresses using the SRSS combination method and the ABS combination method.
Additionally, combine the expansion static case and the dynamic case using the SRSS
combination method. This is a total of three combination load cases. The first two static hanger
design load cases cannot be used in a combination case.
* COMBINATION CASE 1:
* SRSS COMBINATION OF SUSTAINED AND DYNAMIC CASES
STRESSTYPE(OCC), COMBINATION(SRSS)
Load Case

Factor

STATIC4

DYNAMIC1

* COMBINATION CASE 2:
* ABS COMBINATION OF SUSTAINED AND DYNAMIC CASES
STRESSTYPE(OCC), COMBINATION(ABS)
Load Case

Factor

STATIC4

DYNAMIC1

* COMBINATION CASE 3:
* SRSSCOMBINATION OF EXPANSION AND DYNAMIC CASES
STRESSTYPE(OCC), COMBINATION(SRSS)

566

CAESAR II User's Guide

Dynamic Analysis
Load Case

Factor

STATIC5

DYNAMIC1

Stress type and combination are defined on the Directive Builder dialog box. For more
information, see Directive Builder (on page 603).

Example 3
The static load cases are:
1 = W+T1+P+D1+H (OPE)
2 = W+P+H (SUS)
3 = U1 (OCC) Static seismic simulation
4 = L1-L2 (EXP)
5 = L2+L3 (OCC) (SCALAR)
Create an SRSS combination of the static seismic case and both the sustained and operating
static cases:
* COMBINATION CASE 1:
COMBINATION (SRSS), STRESSTYPE (OCC)
Load Case

Factor

STATIC2

STATIC3

* COMBINATION CASES 2:
COMBINATION (SRSS), STRESSTYPE (OCC)
Load Case

Factor

STATIC1

STATIC3

Example 4
The static load cases are:
1 = W+P1(Hanger design restrained weight case)
2 = W+T1+P1+D1 (Hanger design load case #1)
3 = W+T2+P1+D1 (Hanger design load case #2)
4 = WNC+P1(Hanger design actual cold loads)
5 = W+T1+H+P1+D1 (OPE)
6 = W+P1+H(SUS)
7 = L5-L6 (EXP)
Combine the static sustained stresses with 1/2 the shock case 1 results, 1/2 the shock case 2
results, and 1.333 times the shock case 3 results. The combination method is SRSS. For a
second combination case, combine the static sustained stresses with 1/2 the shock case 4
results, 1/2 the shock case 5 results, and 1.333 times the shock case 6 results.
* COMBINATION CASE 1:

CAESAR II User's Guide

567

Dynamic Analysis
COMBINATION (SRSS)
Load Case
STATIC6

Factor
1

DYNAMIC1

1/2

DYNAMIC2

1/2

DYNAMIC3

1.333

or
COMBINATION (SRSS)
Load Case

Factor

S6

D1

0.5

D2

0.5

D3

1.333

* COMBINATION CASE 2:
COMBINATION (SRSS)
Load Case
STATIC6

Factor
1

DYNAMIC4

0.5

DYNAMIC5

0.5

DYNAMIC6

1.333

Lumped Masses Tab

This tab is available for any selection of Analysis Type in the Dynamic Analysis window.
Add or delete mass from the model. Extra mass which that is ignored as insignificant in the
static model (such as a flange pair) can be added here. Weights modeled as downward acting
concentrated forces are also added here because CAESAR II does not assume that
concentrated forces are system weights (that is, forces due to gravity acting on a mass). Masses
can also be deleted from the static mass model to economize the analysis. This is the same as
deleting degrees-of-freedom. If the system response to some dynamic load is isolated to specific
sections of the piping system, other sections of the system may be removed from the dynamic
model by removing their mass. Mass can also be deleted selectively for any of the three global
coordinate directions when deletion of directional degrees-of-freedom is desired.
For example, if a piping system includes a structural frame where the piping rests on the
structure and is connected to it only in the Y direction, these two systems are independent of
each other in the X and Z directions. The X and Z mass of the structure can be removed without
affecting the analysis results. With the X and Z masses removed, calculations proceed much
faster.

568

CAESAR II User's Guide

Dynamic Analysis
Topics
Mass .............................................................................................. 569
Direction ......................................................................................... 569
Start Node ...................................................................................... 569
Stop Node ...................................................................................... 569
Increments ..................................................................................... 569

Mass
Specifies the magnitude of the concentrated mass (in current units) to be applied to the
specified node. A positive value is added to the calculated mass assigned to the node, a
negative value is subtracted from the calculated mass, and a zero value eliminates the mass.

Direction
Specifies the direction in which the mass acts. The values for translated mass are X, Y, Z, and
ALL (where ALL represents X, Y, and Z). The values for rotated mass are RX, RY, RZ, and
RALL (where RALL represents RX, RY, and RZ).
Rotational masses only apply when the consistent mass model is used. For more
information, see Mass Model (LUMPED/CONSISTENT) (on page 598) on the Control
Parameters tab.

Start Node
Specifies the number of the starting node at which this mass is applied.
If entered without values for Stop Node and Increment, then the start node must exist in the
piping system. If entered with values for Stop Node and Increment, then the range of nodes
identified in the range must include at least one node in the piping system.

Stop Node
Specifies the number of the ending node in the model to which the mass is applied. Used as
part of a "range of nodes" lumped mass command with Start Node and Increment. This value
is optional.

Increments
Specifies the node number increment used to step from Start Node to Stop Node. Used as part
of a "range of nodes" lumped mass command. This value is optional and defaults to 1 if no value
is entered.
There can be any number of line entries on the Lumped Masses tab.
The zero mass capability is particularly useful when you are not interested in the modes for part
of the system. That part of the system is usually modeled only for its stiffness effect.

Example 1
450 is added to the assigned mass at node 40 in the X, Y, and Z directions.
450 ALL 40

CAESAR II User's Guide

569

Dynamic Analysis
Example 2
All nodes from 12 to 25 have all assigned mass removed in the X, Y, and Z directions. Some
nodes may not exist in this range but this is acceptable as long as at least one node in the range
exists in the system.
0.0 ALL 12 25 1

Example 3
375 is added in the X, Y, and Z directions for nodes 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, and 50, if they exist. All
assigned mass is removed for all nodes from 1 and 600 in the X and Y directions.
375 A 25 50 5
0.0 X 1 600 1
0.0 Y 1 600 1

Snubbers Tab
This tab is available for any selection of Analysis Type in the Dynamic Analysis window.
Add snubbers to the model. Snubbers are supports that only resist dynamic loading while
allowing static displacement, such as displacement from thermal growth. Snubbers must have
their stiffness defined. Snubbers are not rigid by default because they are typically not as stiff as
other types of restraints.
Snubbers may also be added in Input > Piping as part of the static model. In either the
static or dynamic analysis, a snubber is idealized as a stiffness rather than damping at a point.

Topics
Stiffness ......................................................................................... 570
Direction ......................................................................................... 570
Node .............................................................................................. 570
CNode ............................................................................................ 571

Stiffness
Specifies the stiffness of the snubber. The value must be positive. If the snubber is rigid enter a
value of 1.0E12.

Direction
Specifies the direction for the line of action of the snubber. Valid entries are X, Y, Z, direction
cosines, or direction vectors. The format for direction cosines is (cx, cy, cz), such as
(0.707,0.0,0.707). The format for direction vectors is (vx, vy, vz), such as (1,0,1).

Node
Specifies the node number where the snubber acts.
Connecting nodes for snubbers work in the same way as for restraints.

570

CAESAR II User's Guide

Dynamic Analysis

CNode
Specifies the second node number to which the other end of the snubber is connected. This
value is optional. If the snubber acts between the piping system and a fixed point in space, then
do not enter a value for CNode.
Connecting nodes for snubbers works in the same way as for restraints.

Example 1
Add a rigid snubber at node 150 in the Z direction.
1E12 Z 150

Example 2
Add rigid snubbers at nodes 160, 165, and 170 in the Z direction.
1E12 Z 160
1E12 Z 165
1E12 Z 170

Example 3
Add a rigid snubber between the structural steel node 1005 and the piping node 405 in the Z
direction.
1E12 Z 405 1005

Example 4
Add a 5,000 lb./in. snubber in the X and Y directions at the piping node 500. The X snubber
connects to the structural steel node 1050 and the Y snubber connects to the overhead line at
node 743.
* HORIZONTAL SNUBBER BETWEEN STEAM LINE AND STEEL
5000 X 500 1050.
* VERTICAL SNUBBER BETWEEN STEAM LINE AND OVER HEAD COOLING WATER
LINE
5000 Y 500 743

Control Parameters Tab

This tab is available for any selection of Analysis Type in the Dynamic Analysis window.

CAESAR II User's Guide

571

Dynamic Analysis
The type of analysis determines the parameters available on the Control Parameters tab. The
software displays the list of applicable parameters. The control parameters available for each
analysis are shown below:

Table Notes:
X

Required.

Required if system has nonlinear restraints or hanger design.

Used only where friction is defined.

Max. No. of Eigenvalues and Frequency Cutoff work as a pair in terminating the eigen extraction.

Used if modal combination method is GROUP.

Used if modal combination method is DSRSS.

Used if USNRC Regulatory Guide 1.60 or Uniform Building Code seismic spectra are specified in the shock
definition.

Used if independent support movement (USM) loads are present or if defined shock does not include all
supports in the system.

Used if pseudo-static components are included.

Used if missing mass components are included.

10

Used if more than one spectrum load is applied in the same direction.

For modal analysis, set the number of modes of vibration to extract by specifying a
maximum number, a cutoff frequency, or both.

572

CAESAR II User's Guide

Dynamic Analysis
Topics
Analysis Type (Harmonic/Spectrum/Modes/Range/TimeHist) ...... 573
Static Load Case for Nonlinear Restraint Status ........................... 582
Max. No. of Eigenvalues Calculated .............................................. 583
Frequency Cutoff (HZ) ................................................................... 585
Closely Spaced Mode Criteria/Time History Time Step (ms) ........ 586
Load Duration (DSRSS) (sec) ....................................................... 587
Damping (DSRSS) (ratio of critical) ............................................... 587
ZPA (Reg. Guide 1.60/UBC - g's) <or> # Time History Output Cases
....................................................................................................... 588
Re-use Last Eigensolution (Frequencies and Mode Shapes) ....... 591
Spatial or Modal Combination First ............................................... 591
Spatial Combination Method (SRSS/ABS) .................................... 592
Modal Combination Method (Group/10%/DSRSS/ABS/SRSS) .... 592
Include Pseudostatic (Anchor Movement) Components (Y/N) ...... 595
Include Missing Mass Components ............................................... 595
Pseudostatic (Anchor Movement) Comb. Method (SRSS/ABS) ... 597
Missing Mass Combination Method (SRSS/ABS) ......................... 597
Directional Combination Method (SRSS/ABS) .............................. 598
Mass Model (LUMPED/CONSISTENT)......................................... 598
Sturm Sequence Check on Computed Eigenvalues ..................... 598

Analysis Type
(Harmonic/Spectrum/Modes/Range/TimeHist)
Displays the dynamic analysis type selected for Analysis Type. For more information, see The
Dynamic Analysis Window (on page 535). Displays M (Modal), H (Harmonic), S1 (Earthquake
spectrum), S2 (Relief Loads spectrum), S3 (Water Hammer/Slug Flow spectrum), or T (Time
History).
Harmonic Analysis (on page 573)
Spectrum Analysis (on page 577)
Time History (on page 580)

Harmonic Analysis
The response of a system to a dynamically applied load is generally expressed through the
dynamic equation of motion:
Where:
M = system mass matrix
= acceleration vector, as a function of time
C = system damping matrix
= velocity vector, as a function of time
K = system stiffness matrix
x(t) = displacement vector, as a function of time
F(t) = applied load vector, as a function of time
The harmonic solver is most commonly used to analyze low frequency field vibrations due to
fluid pulsation or out-of-round rotating equipment displacements. This differential equation

CAESAR II User's Guide

573

Dynamic Analysis
cannot be solved explicitly, except in a few specific cases. Harmonic analysis looks at one of
these casesthe set of dynamic problems where the forces or displacements (such as
pulsation or vibration) acting on the piping system take sinusoidal forms. When damping is zero
under harmonic loading, the dynamic equation of the system can be reduced to
M (t) + K x(t) = F0 cos (w t + Q)
Where:
F0 = harmonic load vector
w = angular forcing frequency of harmonic load (radian/sec)
t = time
Q = phase angle (radians)
This differential equation is solved directly for the nodal displacements at any time. From there
the system reactions, forces and moments, and stresses are calculated.
The equation has a solution of the form
x (t) = A cos (w t + Q)
Where:
A = vector of maximum harmonic displacements of system
Because acceleration is the second derivative of displacement with respect to time,
(t) = -A w2 cos w t
Inserting these equations for displacement and acceleration back into the basic harmonic
equation of motion yields,
-M A cos ( t + Q) + K A cos ( t + Q) = Fo cos ( t + Q)
2

Dividing both sides of this equation by cos ( t + Q),

-M A + K A = Fo
Reordering this equation,
2

(K - M ) A = Fo
This is exactly the same form of the equation as is solved for all linear (static) piping problems.
The solution time for each excitation frequency takes only as long as a single static solution,
and, when there is no phase relationship to the loading, the results directly give the maximum
dynamic responses. Due to the speed of the analysis, and because the solutions are so directly
applicable, you should make as much use of this capability as possible. Keep two
considerations in mind:
When damping is not zero, the harmonic equation can only be solved if the damping matrix
is defined as the sum of multiples of the mass and stiffness matrix (Rayleigh damping), that
is
[C] = a [M] + b [K]
On a modal basis, the relationship between the ratio of critical damping Cc and the
constants a and b is
2

Where:
= Undamped natural frequency of mode (rad/sec)
For practical problems, a is extremely small, and can be ignored. The definition of b reduces
to
= 2 Cc/

574

CAESAR II User's Guide

Dynamic Analysis

CAESAR II uses this implementation of damping for its harmonic analysis, but two problems
exist. First, for multi-degree-of-freedom systems, there is not really a single b, but there
must be only a single b in order to get a solution of the harmonic equation. The second
problem is that the modal frequencies are not known prior to generation of the damping
matrix. Therefore the w used in the calculation of b is the forcing frequency of the load,
instead of the natural frequency of a mode. When the forcing frequency of the load is in the
vicinity of a modal frequency, this gives a good estimation of the true damping.
If multiple harmonic loads occur simultaneously and are not in phase, system response is
the sum of the responses due to the individual loads
x(t) = S Ai cos ( t + Qi)
Where:
Ai = displacement vector of system under load i
Qi = phase angle of load i
In this case, an absolute maximum solution cannot be found. Solutions for each load, and
the sum of these, must be found at various times in the load cycle. These combinations are
then reviewed in order to determine which one causes the worst load case. Alternatively,
CAESAR II can select the frequency/phase pairs which maximize the system displacement.

Damped harmonics always cause a phased response.

The biggest use by far of the harmonic solver is in analyzing low frequency field vibrations
resulting from either fluid pulsation or out-of-round rotating equipment displacements. The
approach typically used is described briefly below:
1. A potential dynamic problem is first identified in the field. Large cyclic vibrations or high
stresses (fatigue failure) are present in an existing piping system, raising questions of
whether this represents a dangerous situation. As many symptoms of the problem (such as
quantifiable displacements or overstress points) are identified as possible for future use in
refining the dynamic model.
2. A model of the piping system is built using CAESAR II. This should be done as accurately
as possible, because system and load characteristics affect the magnitude of the developed
response. In the area where the vibration occurs, you should accurately represent valve
operators, flange pairs, orifice plates, and other in-line equipment. You may also want to add
additional nodes in the area of the vibration.
3. Assume the cause of the load, and estimate the frequency, magnitude, point, and direction
of the load. This is difficult because dynamic loads can come from many sources. Dynamic
loads may be due to factors such as internal pressure pulses, external vibration, flow
shedding at intersections, and two-phase flow. In almost all cases, there is some frequency
content of the excitation that corresponds to (and therefore excites) a system mechanical
natural frequency. If the load is caused by equipment, then the forcing frequency is probably
some multiple of the operating frequency. If the load is due to acoustic flow problems, then
the forcing frequency can be estimated through the use of Strouhals equations (from fluid
dynamics). Use the best assumptions available to estimate the magnitudes and points of
application of the dynamic load.
4. Model the loading using harmonic forces or displacements, normally depending upon
whether the cause is assumed to be pulsation or vibration. Perform several harmonic
analyses, sweeping the frequencies through a range centered about the target frequency to
account for uncertainty. Examine the results of each of the analyses for signs of large
displacements, indicating harmonic resonance. If the resonance is present, compare the
results of the analysis to the known symptoms from the field. If they are not similar, or if
there is no resonance, this indicates that the dynamic model is not a good one. It must then
be improved, either in terms of a more accurate system (static) model, a better estimate of
the load, or a finer sweep through the frequency range. After the model has been refined,

CAESAR II User's Guide

575

Dynamic Analysis
repeat this step until the mathematical model behaves just like the actual piping system in
the field.
5. At this point, the model is a good representation of the piping system, the loads and the
relationship of the load characteristics to the system characteristics.
6. Evaluate the results of this run in order to determine whether they indicate a problem.
Because harmonic stresses are cyclic, they should be evaluated against the endurance limit
of the piping material. Displacements should be reviewed against interference limits or
esthetic guidelines.
7. If the situation is deemed to be a problem, its cause must be identified. The cause is
normally the excitation of a single mode of vibration. For example, the Dynamic Load Factor
for a single damped mode of vibration, with a harmonic load applied is

Where:
DLF = dynamic loading factor
Cc = ratio of system damping to "critical damping,"
where "critical damping" =
f = forcing frequency of applied harmonic load
n = natural frequency of mode of vibration
A modal extraction of the system is done; one or more of these modes should have a
natural frequency close to the forcing frequency of the applied load. The problem mode can
be further identified as having a shape very similar to the shape of the total system vibration.
This mode shape has been dynamically magnified far beyond the other modes and
predominates in the final vibrated shape.
8. The problem mode must be eliminated. You typically want to add a restraint at a high point
and in the direction of the mode shape. If this cannot be done, the mode may also be altered
by changing the mass distribution of the system. If no modification of the system is possible,
it may be possible to alter the forcing frequency of the load. If the dynamic load was
assumed to be due to internal acoustics, you should reroute the pipe to change the internal
flow conditions. This may resolve or amplify the problem, but in either case avoids
CAESAR IIs "good model" of the system. After modifying the system, the harmonic problem
is re-run using the single forcing frequency determined as a "good model." The stresses and
displacements are then re-evaluated.
9. If the dynamic problem has been adequately solved, the system is now re-analyzed
statically to determine the effects of any modifications on the static loading cases.
Adding restraint normally increases expansion stresses, while adding mass increases
sustained stresses.
Process output from a harmonic analysis in two ways:
Use the output processor to review displacement, restraint, force, or stress data either
graphically or in report form.
Animate the displacement pattern for each of the frequency load cases.
The results of harmonic dynamic loads cannot be combined using the Static/Dynamic
Combination option.

576

CAESAR II User's Guide

Dynamic Analysis

Spectrum Analysis
Spectrum analysis attempts to estimate the maximum response developed in a system during a
transient load. The results are a statistical summation of the maxi\-mum displacements, forces,
reactions, and stresses. The individual responses do not represent an actual physical loading
case because the maxima may all occur at different times. Spectrum analyses are especially
useful when the loading profile is random, or not exactly known, such as with seismic loads.
CAESAR II provides the ability to perform two types of spectrum analyses which may be
combined: seismic and force spectra. Seismic loadings may be evaluated either uniformly over
the entire system, or applied through individual support groups with corresponding anchor
movements. Force spectra analyses may be used to analyze impulse loadings, such as those
due to relief valve, fluid hammer, or slug flow.

Seismic Spectrum Analysis

Seismic loads cannot be solved through time history analyses, because earthquakes cause
random motion which may be different for each earthquake, even those occurring at the same
site. To simplify the analytical definition of the earthquake, it is necessary to get the expected
random waveform of acceleration (or velocity or displacement) versus time into a simple
frequency-content plot. The most predominantly used frequency-content plot is the response
spectrum. A response spectrum for an earthquake load can be developed by placing a series of
single degree-of-freedom oscillators on a mechanical shake table and feeding a typical (for a
specific site) earthquake time history through it, measuring the maximum response
(displacement, velocity, or acceleration) of each oscillator.
The expectation is that even though all earthquakes are different, similar ones should produce
the same maximum responses, even though the time at which they occur differs with each
individual occurrence. Responses are based on the maximum ground displacement and
acceleration, the dynamic load factors determined by the ratios of the pre\-dominant harmonic
frequencies of the earthquake to the natural frequencies of the oscillators, and system damping.
Response spectra for a number of damping values can be generated by plotting the maximum
response for each oscillator. A plot of a set of typical response spectra is shown below:

CAESAR II User's Guide

577

Dynamic Analysis
Seismic response spectra resemble harmonic Dynamic Load Factor curves, because seismic
loads indicate strong harmonic tendencies. As the damping value increases, the system
response approaches ground motion. Seismic spectra also usually show strong evidence of
flexible, resonant, and rigid areas. Spectra may have multiple peaks due to filtering by the
building and/or piping system. Multiple peaks are usually enveloped in order to account for
uncertainties in the analysis. Seismic response spectra peaks are typically spread to account for
inaccuracies as well.
The idea behind the generation of the response spectra is that the modes of vibration of a
system respond to the load in the exact same manner as a single degree-of-freedom oscillator.
System response may be plotted in terms of displacement, velocity, or acceleration, because
these terms of the spectra are all related by the frequency:
d=v/=a/
Where:
d = displacement from response spectrum at frequency
v = velocity from response spectrum at frequency
2

= angular frequency at which response spectrum parameters are taken

a = acceleration from response spectrum at frequency
Response Spectrum analysis proceeds according to the following steps:
Modes of vibration are extracted from the system using an Eigensolver algorithm. Each mode
has a characteristic frequency and mode shape.
1. The maximum response of each mode under the applied load is determined from the
spectrum value corresponding to the natural frequency of the mode.
2. The total system response is determined by summing the individual modal responses, using
methods that reflect the time independence of the responses and the portion of system
mass allocated to each mode.
There are four major sources of earthquake spectra available in CAESAR II:
El Centro
This predefined data is taken from J. Biggs Introduction to Structural Dynamics and is based on
the north-south component of the May 18, 1940 El Centro California earthquake. The recorded
maximum acceleration was 0.33 g. The spectrum provided here is intended to apply to elastic
systems having 5 to 10 percent critical damping.
Nuclear Regulatory Guide 1.60
The predefined spectrum names are:
1.60H.5 1.60V.5
- Horizontal/vertical, 0.5% damping
1.60H2 1.60V2
- Horizontal/vertical, 2.0% damping
1.60H5 1.60V5
- Horizontal/vertical, 5.0% damping
1.60H7 1.60V7
- Horizontal/vertical ,7.0% damping
1.60H10 1.60V10 - Horizontal/vertical, 10.0% damping
These spectra are constructed according to the instructions given in Regulatory Guide 1.60 for
seismic design of nuclear plants. They must also be scaled up or down by the maximum ground
acceleration (ZPAzero period acceleration), specified in the CAESAR II control parameter
spreadsheet.

578

CAESAR II User's Guide

Dynamic Analysis
Uniform Building Code
The pre\-defined spectrum names are:
UBCSOIL1 Spectrum for rock and stiff soils
UBCSOIL2 Spectrum for deep cohesionless or stiff clay soils
UBCSOIL3 Spectrum for soft to medium clays and sands
These spectra represent the normalized response spectra shapes for three soil types provided
in Figure 23-3 of the Uniform Building Code (1991 Edition). When used, they must be scaled by
the ZPA, which is the product of Z and I, where Z is the seismic zone coefficient and I is the
earthquake importance factor, from UBC Tables 23-I and 23-L. The ZPA can be specific using
the CAESAR II control parameter spreadsheet.
User defined spectra
User defined spectra may be entered with period or frequency as the range, and displacement,
velocity, or acceleration as the ordinate. These spectra may be read in from a text file or entered
directly into a spectrum table during dynamic input processing.

Independent Support Motion Applications

Earthquake ground motions are caused by the passing of acoustic shock waves through the
soil. These waves are usually hundreds of feet long. If supports having foundations in the soil
are grouped together within a several hundred foot radius, they typically see exactly the same
excitation from the earthquake. If all of the supports for a particular piping system are attached
directly to ground type supports, each support is excited by an essentially identical time
waveform. This type of excitation is known as uniform support excitation. Often pipe is
supported from rack, building, or vessel structures as well as from ground type supports. These
intermediate structures sometimes filter or accentuate the effect of the earthquake. In this
situation, the supports attached to the intermediate structure are not exposed to the same
excitation as those that are attached directly to ground foundations. To accurately model these
systems, different shocks must be applied to different parts of the piping system. This type of
excitation is known as independent support motion (ISM) excitation. While the different support
groups are exposed to different shocks, there are also relative movements between support
groups that dont exist for uniform support excitation. The movement of one support group
relative to another is termed pseudostatic displacement, or seismic anchor movements. For
uniform support excitation, there are spatial and modal response components available for
combination. For independent support excitation, there are spatial and modal response
components available for each different support group, plus pseudostatic components of the
earthquake that must also be added into the dynamic response.
The major difference when running ISM type earthquake loads comes while building the shock
load cases. In the uniform excitation case, the shock acts implicitly over all of the supports in the
system. In the ISM case different shocks act on different groups of supports. The Spectrum
Load Cases tab appears, with the following parameters:
Spectrum (name)
Factor
Dir (direction)
Start Node
Stop Node
Increment
Anchor Movement
Name, Factor, and Dir are all that is required for uniform support excitations. For ISM type
shocks, the group of nodes over which the shock acts must be specified as well, using Start
Node, Stop Node, and Increment. Anchor Movement is used to explicitly define the seismic

CAESAR II User's Guide

579

Dynamic Analysis
displacement of the restraint set. This displacement is used to calculate the pseudostatic load
components. If omitted, the software defaults to the displacement derived from the response
spectrum entry corresponding to the lowest frequency.

Force Spectrum Analysis

A similar method can be followed for non-random loads, such as an impulse load for which the
force versus time profile is known. A look at the equation for the earthquake problem explains
why the force spectrum solution is very similar to the earthquake solution:
The term on the right hand side is a dynamic force acting on the piping system, such as F = Ma,
so the analogous equation to be solved for the force spectrum problem is:
Where:
F = the dynamic load (water hammer or relief valve)
Instead of the displacement, velocity, or acceleration spectrum used for the seismic problem, a
Dynamic Load Factor spectrum is used for a force spectrum problem. A DLF spectrum gives the
ratio of the maximum dynamic displacement divided by the maximum static displacement. The
earthquake response spectrum analysis method starts with the time history of an earthquake
excitation. The force spectrum analysis method is done in exactly the same way, except that the
analysis starts with the force versus time profile. Just as for the earthquake, this time history
loading is applied to a shake table of single degree-of-freedom bodies. A response spectrum
(DLF versus natural frequency) is generated by dividing the maximum oscillator displacements
by the static displacements expected under the same load. An alternate means of generating a
response spectrum for an impulse load is to numerically integrate the dynamic equation of
motion for oscillators of various frequencies under the applied load. Use Tools > DLF Spectrum
Generator.
Process output from a spectrum analysis in two ways:
Use the output processor to review the natural frequencies, mode shapes, participation
factors, included mass/force, displacements, restraint loads, forces, or stresses in report
form. Dynamic results also show the largest modal contributor, along with the mode and
shock load responsible for that contribution.
Animate the individual mode shapes extracted for the spectrum analysis.

Time History
Time history analysis is a more accurate, more computationally intensive analytical method than
response spectrum analysis. It is best suited to impulse loadings or other transient loadings
where the profile is known. This method of analysis involves the actual solution of the dynamic
equation of motion throughout the duration of the applied load and subsequent system vibration,
providing a true simulation of the system response.
As noted in Harmonic Analysis (on page 573), the dynamic equation of motion for a system is

This differential equation cannot be solved explicitly, but may be integrated using numeric
techniques by slicing the duration of the load into many small time steps. Assuming that the
change in acceleration between time slices is linear, the system accelerations, velocities,
displacements, and corresponding reactions, internal forces, and stresses are calculated at
successive time steps.

580

CAESAR II User's Guide

Dynamic Analysis
Because the total response of a system is equivalent to the sum of the responses of its
individual modes of vibration, the above equation can be simplified assuming that the damping
matrix C is orthogonal. Use the transformation x = FX, to be expressed in modal coordinates:

Where:
= acceleration vector (in modal coordinates), as a function of time
C = diagonal damping matrix, where entry Ci = wi ci
i = angular frequency of mode i
ci = ratio of damping to critical damping for mode i
(t) = velocity vector (in modal coordinates), as a function of time
x(t) = displacement vector (in modal coordinates), as a function of time
= diagonal stiffness matrix, where entry i = i
This transformation represents N uncoupled second order differential equations, where N is the
number of modes of vibration extracted. N can then be integrated and summed, using the
in-phase, algebraic summation method to give the total system response. CAESAR II uses the
Wilson method (an extension of the Newmark method) to integrate the equations of motion,
providing an unconditionally stable algorithm regardless of time step size chosen.
Only one dynamic load can be defined for a time history analysis. This dynamic load case can
be used in as many static/dynamic combination load case as necessary. The single load case
may consist of multiple force profiles applied to the system simultaneously or sequentially. Each
force versus time profile is entered as a spectrum with an ordinate of Force (in current units) and
a range of Time (in milliseconds). The profiles are defined by entering the time and force
coordinates of the corner points defining the profile.
2

A time can only be entered once. A time with zero force outside of the defined profile
need not be entered explicitly.
For example, the profiles shown in the following figure are entered as:
Time (MS)

Force

Time (MS)

Force

0.0

20.0

1000.0

10.0

300.0

60.0

1000.0

20.0

1000.0

30.0

0.0

0.0

CAESAR II User's Guide

581

Dynamic Analysis
The load profiles are linked with force sets (indicating magnitude, direction, and location of the
applied load) in the shock case. The magnitude of the applied load is determined by the product
of the profile force, the force set magnitude, and the scale in the shock case.
Only forces, not moments or restraint displacements, can be entered in the time history load
profile. Moments can be modeled using force couples, and restraint displacements can be
simulated by entering forces equal to the desired displacement times the restraint stiffness in the
direction of the displacement.
Process output from a Time History analysis in three ways:
Use the output processor to review the natural frequencies, mode shapes, participation
factors, included mass/force, displacements, and restraint loads, forces, or stresses in report
form. CAESAR IIs implementation of time history analysis provides two types of results.
One results case contains the maximum individual components (such as axial stress,
X-displacement, and MZ reaction) of the system response, along with the time at which it
occurred. Several results cases represent the actual system response at specific times.
Dynamic results also show the largest modal contributor, along with the mode and transient
load responsible for that contribution.
Animate the shock displacement for the transient load cases. During animation, the
displacements, forces, moments, stresses, and other data associated with individual
elements are displayed at every time step and for the dynamic load alone, or for any of the
static/dynamic combinations.
Animate the individual mode shapes included in the time history response.

Static Load Case for Nonlinear Restraint Status

(Available for: Modal, Harmonic, Spectrum, Range, and Time History)
Specifies the static load case as described below. Select a load case from the list.
CAESAR II cannot perform a dynamic analysis on nonlinear systems. For dynamic analyses, a
one-directional restraint must be modeled as either seated (active) or lifted off (inactive), and a
gap must be either open (inactive) or closed (active). This process is automated when the static
load case is selected. CAESAR II automatically sets the linear condition at the non-linear
restraints in the system to correspond to their status in the selected load case. Think of this as
being the loading condition of the system (such as operating load) at the time at which the
dynamic load occurs. This automated linearization does not always provide an appropriate
dynamic model, and you may need to select other static load cases or manually alter the
restraint condition in order to simulate the correct dynamic response.
A static load case must precede the dynamics job whenever:
There are spring hangers to be designed in the job. The static runs must be made in order
to determine the spring rate to be used in the dynamic model.
There are non-linear restraints in the system, such as one-directional restraints,
large-rotation rods, bi-linear restraints, or gaps. The static analysis must be made in order to
determine the active status of each of the restraints for linearization of the dynamic model.
There are frictional restraints in the job, such as any restraints with a nonzero (mu) value.
The most common static load cases during a typical CAESAR II analysis are:

Example 1: Analyses containing no hanger design

1 = W+P1+D1+T1+H (OPE)
2 = W+P1+H (SUS)
3 = L1-L2 (EXP)

582

CAESAR II User's Guide

Dynamic Analysis
If the operating condition is likely to exist throughout the duration of the dynamic transient, use
parameter 1. If the installed condition is more likely to exist during the transient, use parameter
2. It is extremely unlikely that expansion case 3 is correct, because it does not represent the
system status at any given time, but represents the difference between the first two cases.

Example 2: Analyses containing hanger design

1 = W+P1(For hanger design)
2 = W+P1+D1+T1(For hanger design)
3 = W+P1+D1+T1+H (OPE)
4 = W+P1+H (SUS)
5 = L3-L4 (EXP)
The correct static load cases to use are those in which the selected spring hangers have been
included. If the operating condition is the correct load case, use parameter 3. For the installed
condition, use parameter 4.

Stiffness Factor for Friction

(Available for: Modal, Harmonic, Spectrum, Range, and Time History)
Specifies the friction stiffness factor as described below. Enter a value greater than zero to
consider friction stiffness in the analysis. Enter 0.0 to ignore friction in the analysis.
Dynamic analyses in CAESAR II act only on linear systems, so any non-linearities must be
linearized prior to analysis. Modeling of friction in dynamic models presents a special case,
because friction actually impacts the dynamic response in two ways. Static friction (before
breakaway) affects the stiffness of the system by providing additional restraint. Kinetic friction
(after breakaway) affects the damping component of dynamic response. Due to mathematical
constraints, damping is ignored for all analyses except time history and harmonics, for which it is
only considered on a system-wide basis.
CAESAR II allows friction to be taken into account through the use of this friction stiffness factor.
The software approximates the restraining effect of friction on the pipe by including stiffnesses
transverse to the direction of the restraint at which friction was specified. The stiffness of these
"frictional" restraints is calculated as:
Kfriction = (F) () (Fact)
Where:
Kfriction = Stiffness of frictional restraint inserted by CAESAR II.
F = The load at the restraint taken from the selected static solution.
= Friction coefficient at restraint, as defined in the static model.
Fact = Friction stiffness factor entered here.
This factor should be adjusted as necessary in order to make the dynamic model simulate the
actual dynamic response of the system. The factor does not correspond to any actual dynamic
parameter, but is actually an adjustment factor to modify system stiffness. Entering a friction
factor greater than zero causes these friction stiffnesses to be inserted into the dynamic
analysis. Increasing this factor correspondingly increases the effect of the friction. Values such
as 1000 are typical. Entering a friction factor equal to zero ignores any frictional effect in the
dynamic analysis.

Max. No. of Eigenvalues Calculated

(Available for: Modal, Spectrum, and Time History)

CAESAR II User's Guide

583

Dynamic Analysis
Specifies the number of modal responses to be included in the system results through a mode
number cutoff. Enter a value for Setting. Enter 0 to limit modes extracted to the value of
Frequency Cutoff (HZ) (on page 585). Enter higher values as described below.
The first stage of the spectrum and time history analyses (and the only step for modal analysis)
is the use of the Eigensolver algorithm to extract piping system natural frequencies and mode
shapes. For the spectrum and time history analyses, the response under loading is calculated
for each of the modes, with the system response being the sum of the individual modal
responses. The more modes that are extracted, the more the sum of those modal responses
resembles the actual system response. This algorithm uses an iterative method for finding
successive modes, so extraction of a large number of modes usually requires much more time
than does a static solution of the same piping system. The object is to extract sufficient modes
to get a suitable solution, without straining computational resources.
This parameter is used, in combination with Frequency Cutoff (HZ), to limit the maximum
number of modes of vibration to be extracted during the dynamic analysis. If this parameter is
entered as 0, the number of modes extracted is limited only by the frequency cutoff and the
number of degrees-of-freedom in the system model.

Example
A system has the following natural frequencies:
Mode Number

Frequency (Hz)

0.6

3.0

6.1

10.7

20.3

29.0

35.4

40.7

55.6

The modes extracted for different values of Max. No. of Eigenvalues Calculated and
Frequency Cutoff are:
Max. No. of
Eigenvalues
Calculated

Frequency
Cutoff

Number of
Modes
extracted

33

50

33

60

If you are more interested in providing an accurate representation of the system displacements,
request the extraction of a few modes, allowing a rapid calculation time. However, if an accurate
estimate of the forces and stresses in the system is the objective, calculation time grows as it
becomes necessary to extract far more modes. This is particularly true when solving a fluid

584

CAESAR II User's Guide

Dynamic Analysis
hammer problem in the presence of axial restraints. Often modes with natural frequencies of up
to 300 Hz are large contributors to the solution.
To determine how many modes are sufficient, extract a certain number of modes and review the
results. Repeat the analysis by extracting five to ten additional modes and comparing the new
results to the old. If there are significant changes between the results, repeat the analysis again,
adding five to ten more modes. This iterative process continues until the results taper off,
becoming asymptotic.
This procedure has two drawbacks. First is the time involved in making the multiple analyses
and the time involved in extracting the potentially large number of modes. The second
drawback, occurring with spectrum analysis, is less obvious. A degree of conservatism is
introduced when combining the contributions of the higher order modes. Possible spectral mode
summation methods include methods that combine modal results as same-sign (positive)
values: SRSS, ABSOLUTE, and GROUP. Theory states that the rigid modes act in phase with
each other, and should be combined algebraically, permitting the response of some rigid modes
to cancel the effect of other rigid modes. This is what occurs in a time history analysis. Because
of this conservatism, it is possible to get results which exceed twice the applied load, despite the
fact that the Dynamic Load Factor (DLF) of an impulse load cannot be greater than 2.0.

Frequency Cutoff (HZ)

(Available for: Modal, Spectrum, and Time History)
Specifies a frequency cutoff point in Hertz as described below.
When extracting modes to be used in dynamic analysis, you can specify a value for either Max.
No. of Eigenvalues Calculated (on page 583) or a frequency cutoff. Modal extraction ceases
when the Eigensolver extracts either the number of modes requested, or extracts a mode with a
frequency above the cutoff, whichever comes first.
You can select a frequency cutoff point for modes up to, but not far beyond, a recognized "rigid"
frequency, and then include the missing mass correction For more information, see Include
Missing Mass Components (on page 595). Choosing a cutoff frequency to the left of the
resonant peak of the response spectrum provides a non-conservative result, because resonant
responses may be missed. During spectrum analysis, using a cutoff frequency to the right of the
peak, but still in the resonant range, yields either over- or under-conservative results, depending
upon the method used to extract the ZPA from the response spectrum. For time history analysis,
selecting a cutoff frequency to the right of the peak, but still in the resonant range, usually yields
non-conservative results. The missing mass force is applied with a dynamic load factor of 1.0.
Extracting a large number of rigid modes for calculation of the dynamic response may be
conservative in the case of spectrum analysis, because all spectral modal combination methods
(such as SRSS, GROUP, and ABS) give conservative results versus the algebraic combination
method used during time history analysis. This gives a more realistic representation of the net
response of the rigid modes. Based upon the response spectrum shown below, an appropriate
cutoff point for the modal extraction is about 33 Hz.
1. Non-conservative cutoff (Misses amplification of any modes in resonant range)
2. Conservative cutoff (Multiplies missing mass contribution by excessive DLF1.6)
3. Optimal cutoff (Includes all modes in resonant range, uses low DLF1.05for missing
mass contribution, minimizes combination of rigid modes)

CAESAR II User's Guide

585

Dynamic Analysis
4. Conservative Cutoff (Too many rigid modes combined using non-conservative summation
methods)

When the analysis type is SPECTRUM, MODES, or TIMEHIST, either this parameter or Max.
No. of Eigenvalues Calculated (on page 583) must have a value.

Closely Spaced Mode Criteria/Time History Time Step (ms)

(Available for: Spectrum/GROUP and Time History)
Specifies a frequency or time-slice spacing as described below. The usage of this parameter
varies with the analysis type.

Spectrum Analysis
For a spectrum analysis with the GROUP Modal Combination Method (as defined by USNRC
Regulatory Guide 1.92), this value specifies the frequency spacing defining each modal group,
that is, the percentage of the base frequency between the lowest and highest frequency of the
group. Regulatory Guide 1.92 specifies the group spacing criteria as 10%, or 0.1. This is the
default value in CAESAR II. For more information, see Modal Combination Method
(Group/10%/DSRSS/ABS/SRSS) (on page 592).

Time History Analysis

For a time history analysis, this value is the length of the time slice, in milliseconds. The
software uses the value during its step-by-step integration of the equations of motion for each of
the extracted modes. CAESAR II uses the unconditionally stable Wilson q integration method
where any size time step provides a solution. A smaller step provides greater accuracy but more
strain on computational resources. The time step should be sufficiently small that it can
accurately map the force versus time load profile (that is, the time step should be smaller than
typical force ramp times). Additionally, the time step must be small enough that the contribution
of the higher order modes is not filtered from the response. For this reason, the time step should
be selected so that time step (in seconds) times maximum modal frequency (in Hz) is less than
0.1. For example, if Frequency Cutoff (HZ) (on page 585) is 50 Hz, this value should be set to a
maximum of 2 milliseconds:
0.002 sec x 50 Hz = 0.1

586

CAESAR II User's Guide

Dynamic Analysis

Load Duration (DSRSS) (sec)

(Available for: Spectrum/DSRSS and Time History)
Specifies the duration of the applied dynamic load, as described below.

Spectrum Analysis
For a time history analysis, this parameter specifies the total length of time over which the
dynamic response is simulated. The load duration divided by the time step size from Closely
Spaced Mode Criteria/Time History Time Step (ms) (on page 586) gives the total number of
integration steps making up the solution. CAESAR II limits the number of time steps to 5000 or
as permitted by available memory and system size. The duration should be at least equal to the
maximum duration of the applied load plus the period of the first extracted mode. This allows
simulation of the system response throughout the imposition of the external load, plus one full
cycle of the resulting free vibration. After this point, the response dies out according to the
damping value used. For example, if the applied load is expected to last 150 milliseconds and
the lowest extracted frequency is 3 Hz, set the load duration to a minimum of 0.150 plus 1/3, or
0.483 seconds.

Time History Analysis

For a spectrum analysis using the double sum (DSRSS) modal combination method (as defined
by USNRC Regulatory Guide 1.92), this value specifies the duration of the earthquake. This
duration is used to calculate the modal correlation coefficients based on empirical data. For
more information, see Modal Combination Method (Group/10%/DSRSS/ABS/SRSS) (on page
592).

Damping (DSRSS) (ratio of critical)

(Available for: Spectrum/DSRSS, Harmonics, and Time History)
Specifies the ratio of critical damping as described below. Typical values for piping systems, as
recommended in USNRC Regulatory Guide 1.61 and ASME Code Case N-411, range from 0.01
to 0.05, based upon pipe size, earthquake severity, and the natural frequencies of the system.
Damping is not generally considered in the mathematical solutions required for spectrum or
harmonic analysis. It is ignored or solved as specialized cases in most analyses, and must be
instead considered through adjustment of the applied loads (by generation of the response
spectrum) and/or system stiffness.
For a time history analysis, damping is used explicitly, because this method uses a numeric
solution to integrate the dynamic equations of motion.
For a spectrum analysis using the double sum (DSRSS) modal combination method (as defined
by USNRC Regulatory Guide 1.92), the damping value is used in the calculation of the modal
correlation coefficients. CAESAR II does not permit the specification of damping values for
individual modes. For more information, see Modal Combination Method
(Group/10%/DSRSS/ABS/SRSS) (on page 592).
For a harmonic analysis, this ratio is converted to Rayleigh Damping, where the damping matrix
can be expressed as multiples of the mass and stiffness matrices:
[C] = a [M] + b [K]

CAESAR II User's Guide

587

Dynamic Analysis
On a modal basis, the relationship between the ratio of critical damping C c and the constants
and are given as:

Where:
= undamped natural frequency of mode (radians/sec)
For many practical problems, is extremely small, and so may be ignored, reducing the
relationships to:
=0
= 2 Cc /
CAESAR II uses this implementation of damping for its harmonic analysis, with the exception
that a single is calculated for the multi-degree-of-freedom system, and the used is that of the
load forcing frequency. When the forcing frequency is in the vicinity of a modal frequency, this
gives an accurate estimate of the true damping value.

ZPA (Reg. Guide 1.60/UBC - g's) <or> # Time History

Output Cases
(Available for: Spectrum/1.60/UBC and Time History)
Specifies an acceleration factor or distinct times as described below. The usage of this
parameter varies with the analysis type.

Normalized Response Spectra

For specific pre-defined normalized response spectra, this value is the acceleration factor (in
g's) by which the spectrum is scaled. For example, when a spectrum analysis uses one of the
pre-defined spectra names beginning with "1.60" (such as 1.60H.5 or 1.60V7), CAESAR II
constructs an earthquake spectrum according to the instructions given in USNRC (formerly
USAEC) Regulatory Guide 1.60. This guide requires that the shape of the response spectrum
be chosen from the curves shown in the following figures, based upon the system damping
value. The last number in the default CAESAR II spectrum name indicates the percent critical
damping. For example, 1.60H.5 indicates 0.5% critical damping, while 1.60V7 indicates 7%. If
the analysis uses one of the pre-defined spectra names beginning with "UBC" (such as
UBCSOIL1),
CAESAR II uses the normalized seismic response spectra for the corresponding soil type from
Table 23-3 of the Uniform Building Code (1991 Edition). Reg Guide 1.60 and the UBC curves
are normalized to represent a ground acceleration (ZPA or zero period acceleration) of 1g. The
true value is actually site dependent. Therefore, using the ZPA value appropriately scales any
Regulatory Guide 1.60 or the Uniform Building Code response spectra.

588

CAESAR II User's Guide

Dynamic Analysis

CAESAR II User's Guide

589

Dynamic Analysis

Time History Analysis

For a time history analysis, this value is the number of distinct times at which the results of the
load cases (the dynamic load as well as all static/dynamic combinations) are generated. In
addition, CAESAR II generates one set of results for each load case containing the maximum of
each output value (such as displacement, force, or stress) along with the time at which it
occurred. The times for which results are generated are determined by dividing as evenly as
possible the load duration by the number of output times. For example, if the load duration is
one second and five output cases are requested, results are available at 200, 400, 600, 800,
and 1000 milliseconds, in addition to the maximum case. The total number of results cases
generated for an analysis is the product of the number of load cases (one dynamic case plus the
number of static/dynamic combination cases) times the number of results cases per load (one
maxima case plus the requested number of output cases). The total number of results cases is
limited to 999:
(1 + # Static/Dynamic Combinations) x (1 + # Output Cases) 999
At least one output case, in addition to the automatically generated maxima case, must be
requested. More than one is not necessary, because the worst case results are reflected in the
maxima case and individual results at every time step are available through the ELEMENT
command when animating time history results.

590

CAESAR II User's Guide

Dynamic Analysis

Re-use Last Eigensolution (Frequencies and Mode Shapes)

(Available for: Spectrum and Time History)
Specifies the handling of the previous eignesolution when repeating a dynamic analysis. Select
N (for no) to perform a new eigensolution. Select Y (for yes) to skip the eigensolution and reuse
the results of the earlier analysis, and only perform calculations for displacements, reactions,
forces, and stresses. This option is only valid after an initial eigensolution is performed and is
still available. The mass and stiffness parameters of the model must be unchanged or the
previous eigensolution is invalid.

Spatial or Modal Combination First

(Available for: Spectrum)
Specifies the method for combining load case results as described below. Select Spatial to first
combine spatial components of the load case. Select Modal to first combine modal components
of the load case.
In a spectrum analysis, each of the modal responses must be summed. In addition, if multiple
shocks have been applied to the structure in multiple directions, the results must be combined,
such as spatially combining the X-direction, Y-direction, and Z-direction results. A difference in
the final results (spatial first versus modal first) arises whenever different methods are used for
the spatial and modal combinations. The combination of spatial components first implies that the
shock loads are dependent, while the combination of modal components first implies that the
shock loads are independent.
Dependent and independent refer to the time relationship between the X, Y, and Z components
of the earthquake. With a dependent shock case, the X, Y, and Z components of the earthquake
have a direct relationship. A change in the shock along one direction produces a corresponding
change in the other directions. For example, an earthquake acts along a specific direction
having components in more than one axis, with a fault at a 30 angle between the X- and
Z-axes. The Z-direction load is scaled by a factor of tan 30, but the identical version of the
X-direction load is used. In this example, spatial combinations should be made first.
An independent shock has X, Y, and Z time histories producing related frequency spectra but
completely unrelated time histories. The Independent type of earthquake is far more common,
so in most cases the modal components should be combined first.
For example, IEEE 344-1975 (IEEE Recommended Practices for Seismic Qualification of Class
1E Equipment for Nuclear Power Generating Stations) states:
"Earthquakes produce random ground motions which are characterized by simultaneous but
statistically INDEPENDENT horizontal and vertical components."

CAESAR II User's Guide

591

Dynamic Analysis
This is usually less of an issue for force spectrum combinations. Normally there are no separate
spatial components to combine because X- Y- and Z-shocks are not acting simultaneously.
When there is more than one potential force load, the spatial combination method may be used
to indicate the independence of the loadings. For example, select Modal if two independent
relief valves may or may not fire simultaneously and the two shocks are defined as being in
different directions (such as X and Y). If the two valves are dependent and will definitely open
simultaneously, select Spatial. Otherwise, the direction defined for a force spectrum loading has
no particular meaning.

Nuclear Regulatory Guide 1.92 (published in February, 1976) describes the requirements for
combining spatial components when performing seismic response spectra analysis for
nuclear power plants.
Because all time history combinations are done algebraically (in-phase), this option has no
effect on time history results.

Spatial Combination Method (SRSS/ABS)

(Available for: Spectrum)
Specifies the method for combining the spatial contributions of the shocks in a single spectrum
load case. Select SRSS for a square root of the sum of the squares combination method. Select
ABS for an absolute combination method.
This option is only used for spectrum runs with more than a single excitation direction. Because
directional forces are usually combined vectorially, SRSS is usually the best selection. ABS is
provided for additional conservatism.
Because all time history combinations are done algebraically (in-phase) this option has
no effect on time history results.

Modal Combination Method (Group/10%/DSRSS/ABS/SRSS)

(Available for: Spectrum)
Specifies the method for combining individual modes into the total system response.
GROUP - Grouping Method (on page 593)
10% - Ten Percent Method (on page 593)
DSRSS - Double Sum Method (on page 594)
SRSS - Square Root of the Sum of the Squares Method (on page 594)
ABS - Absolute Method (on page 595)
The response spectrum yields the maximum response at any time during the course of the
applied load, and each of the modes of vibration usually have different frequencies .As a result,
the peak responses of all modes do not occur simultaneously and an appropriate means of
summing the modal responses must be considered.
Nuclear Regulatory Guide 1.92 (published in February, 1976) defines the requirements for
combining modal responses when performing seismic response spectra analysis for nuclear
power plants. The four options presented there are available, along with one other, for modal
combinations under non-nuclear seismic and force spectrum analyses.

592

CAESAR II User's Guide

Dynamic Analysis

Grouping Method
This method is defined in USNRC Regulatory Guide 1.92. The grouping method attempts to
eliminate the drawbacks of the Absolute and SRSS methods. It assumes that modes are
completely correlated with any modes with similar closely spaced frequencies, and are
completely uncorrelated with those modes with widely different frequencies. The total system
response is calculated as

Where:
R = total system response of the element
N = number of significant modes considered in the modal response combination
th
Rk = the peak value of the response of the element due to the k mode
P = number of groups of closely-spaced modes (where modes are considered to be
closely-spaced if their frequencies are within 10% of the base mode in the group), excluding
individual separated modes. No mode can be in more than one group.
i = number of first mode in group q
j = number of last mode in group q
Rlq = response of mode l in group q
Rmq = response of mode m in group q
The responses of any modes which have frequencies within 10% of each other are added
together absolutely, and the results of each of these groups are combined with the remaining
individual modal results using the SRSS method.
The 10% value controlling the definition of closely spaced frequencies can be changed by
using the Closely Spaced Mode Criteria/Time History Time Step (ms) (on page 586) parameter.

Ten Percent Method

This method is defined in the USNRC Regulatory Guide 1.92. The ten percent method is similar
to the grouping method. It assumes that modes are completely correlated with any modes with
similar closely spaced frequencies, and are completely uncorrelated with those modes with
widely different frequencies. The grouping method assumes that modes are only correlated with
those that fall within the group (within a 10% band). This method assumes that modes are
correlated with those that fall within 10% of the subject model, effectively creating a 20% band
(10% up and approximately 10% down). The total system response is calculated as

Where:
th
th
Ri, Rj = the peak value of the response of the element due to the i and j mode,
respectively, where mode i and j are any frequencies within 10% of the each other,
The 10% value controlling the definition of closely spaced frequencies can be changed by
using the Closely Spaced Mode Criteria/Time History Time Step (ms) (on page 586) parameter.

CAESAR II User's Guide

593

Dynamic Analysis

Double Sum Method

This method is defined in USNRC Regulatory Guide 1.92. This combination method is the most
technically correct for earthquake loads, because it attempts to estimate the actual intermodal
correlation coefficient based upon empirical data. The total system response is calculated as:

Where:
Rs = the peak value of the response of the element due to mode s
eks = intermodal correlation coefficient = [ 1 + {( k' - s') /(k' k + s' s)} ]

2 -1

k' = k [ 1 - k ]

2 1/2

s' = s [ 1 - s ]

2 1/2

k' = k + 2 / ( td k )
s' = s + 2 / ( td s )
k = frequency of mode k, rad/sec
s = frequency of mode s, rad/sec
k = ratio of damping to critical damping of mode k, dimensionless
s = ratio of damping to critical damping of mode s, dimensionless
td = duration of earthquake, sec
The load duration (td) and the damping ratio () can be specified by using the Load
Duration (DSRSS) (sec) (on page 587) and Damping (DSRSS) (ratio of critical) (on page 587)
parameters.

Square Root of the Sum of the Squares Method

This method defines the total system response as the square root of the sum of the squares of
the individual modal responses. This is effectively the same as using the double sum method
with all correlation coefficients equal to 0.0, or the grouping method with none of the modes
being closely spaced. The total system response is calculated as:

This method is based upon the statistical assumption that all modal responses are completely
independent, with the maxima following a relatively uniform distribution throughout the duration
of the applied load. This is usually non-conservative, especially if there are any modes with very
close frequencies, because those modes will usually experience their maximum DLF at
approximately the same time during the load profile.
Because all time history combinations are done algebraically (in-phase), this modal
combination method has no effect on time history results.

594

CAESAR II User's Guide

Dynamic Analysis

Absolute Method
This method defines the total system response as the sum of the absolute values of the
individual modal responses. This is effectively the same as using the double sum method with
all correlation coefficients equal to 1.0, or the grouping method, with all modes being closely
spaced. The total system response is calculated as:

This method gives the most conservative result, because it assumes that the all maximum
modal responses occur at exactly the same time during the course of the applied load. This is
usually overly-conservative, because modes with different natural frequencies will probably
experience their maximum DLF at different times during the load profile.

Include Pseudostatic (Anchor Movement) Components (Y/N)

(Available for: Spectrum with ISM included)
Specifies the inclusion of independent support motion (anchor movement) components as part
of a shock load case and independent support spectral loadings, as described below. Select Y
(for yes) to include the components or N (for no) to ignore them.
The excitation of a group of supports produces both a dynamic response and a static response.
The static response is due to the movement of one group of supports or anchors relative to
another group of supports or anchors. These static components of the dynamic shock loads are
called pseudostatic components. USNRC recommendations (August 1985) suggest the
following procedure for pseudostatic components:
1. For each support group, calculate the maximum absolute response for each input direction.
2. Combine same direction responses using the absolute sum method.
3. Combine directional responses using the SRSS method.
4. Obtain the total response by combining the dynamic and pseudostatic responses, using the
SRSS method.

Include Missing Mass Components

(Available for: Spectrum and Time History)
Specifies the inclusion of a correction representing the contribution of higher order modes not
explicitly extracted for the modal/dynamic response, providing greater accuracy without
additional calculation time. Select Y (for yes) or N (for no).
During spectrum (either seismic or force spectrum) or time history analyses, the response of a
system under a dynamic load is determined by superposition of modal results. One of the
advantages of this type of modal analysis is that only a limited number of modes are excited and
need to be included in the analysis. The drawback to this method is that although displacements
may be obtained with good accuracy using only a few of the lowest frequency modes, the force,
reaction, and stress results may require extraction of far more modes (possibly far into the rigid
range) before acceptable accuracy is attained.
This option automatically calculates the net (in-phase) contribution of all non-extracted modes
and combines it with the modal contributions, avoiding the long calculation time and excessively
conservative summation methods. For more information, see Inclusion of Missing Mass
Correction (on page 801).

CAESAR II User's Guide

595

Dynamic Analysis
Use Included Missing Mass Components on the Control Parameters tab as an alternative
method of ensuring that sufficient modes are considered in the dynamic model. This report is
compiled for all spectrum and time history shock cases, whether missing mass is to be included
or not. It displays the percentage of system mass along each of the three global axes and the
percentage of total force which has been captured by the extracted modes. For more
information, see Include Missing Mass Components (on page 595).
The percentage of system mass active along each of the three global axes (X-, Y-, and Z-) is
calculated by summing the modal mass (corresponding to the appropriate directional
degree-of-freedom) attributed to the extracted modes and dividing that sum by the sum of the
system mass acting in the same direction:
Summed over i = 1 to n, by 6 (X-direction degrees of freedom):
% Active MassX
Summed over 1 = 2 to n, by 6 (Y-direction degrees of freedom):
% Active MassY
Summed over 1 = 3 to n, by 6(Z-direction degrees of freedom):
% Active MassZ
Where:
Me = vector (by degree-of-freedom) of sum (over all extracted modes) of effective modal
masses
M = vector corresponding to main diagonal of system mass matrix
The maximum possible percentage of active mass that is theoretically possible is 100%, with
90-95% usually indicating that a sufficient number of modes have been extracted to provide a
good dynamic model.
The percentage of active force is calculated by the following factors:
Separately summing the components of the effective force acting along each of the three
directional degrees-of-freedom
Combining them algebraically
Doing the same for the applied load
Taking the ratio of the effective load divided by the applied load

Examples
Summed over i = 1 to n, by 6 (X - Direction degrees of freedom):
Fe = Fe
x

[i]

Fx = F[i]
Summed over i = 2 to n, by 6 (Y - Direction degrees of freedom):
Fe = Fe
y

[i]

Fy = F[i]
Summed over i = 3 to n, by 6 (Z - Direction degrees of freedom):
Fe = Fe
z

[i]

Fz = F[i]

596

CAESAR II User's Guide

Dynamic Analysis
Where:
FeX,FeY,FeZ = effective force (allocated to extracted modes) acting along the global X-, Y-,
and Z-axes, respectively
Fr = vector of effective forces (allocated to extracted modes)
FX,FY,FZ = total system forces acting along the global X-, Y-, and Z-axes, respectively
F = vector of total system forces
The maximum possible percentage which is theoretically possible for this value is also 100%. In
practice it may be higher, indicating an uneven distribution of the load and mass in the system
model. There is nothing inherently wrong with an analysis where the included force exceeds
100%. If the missing mass correction is included, the modal loadings are adjusted to
automatically conform to the applied loading. The percentage of included force can often be
brought under 100% by extracting a few more modes. At other times, the situation can be
remedied by improving the dynamic model through a finer element mesh, or, more importantly,
equalizing the mass point spacing in the vicinity of the load.

Pseudostatic (Anchor Movement) Comb. Method

(SRSS/ABS)
(Available for: Spectrum)
Specifies the method for combining pseudostatic responses with dynamic (inertial) responses.
Select SRSS for a square root of the sum of the squares combination method. Select ABS for
an absolute combination method.
This option is applicable only when there is at least one independent support motion excitation
component in a shock load case. Pseudostatic combinations are performed after all directional,
spatial, and modal combinations. Select SRSS for pseudostatic combinations, as recommended
by USNRC. ABS gives conservative results. For more information, see Include Pseudostatic
(Anchor Movement) Components (Y/N) (on page 595).

Missing Mass Combination Method (SRSS/ABS)

(Available for: Spectrum)
Specifies the method for combining the missing mass/force correction components with the
modal (dynamic) results. Select SRSS for a square root of the sum of the squares combination
method. Select ABS for an absolute combination method.
Research suggests that the modal and rigid portions of the response are statistically
independent, so SRSS is usually most accurate. ABS provides a more conservative result,
based upon the assumption that the modal maxima occur simultaneously with the maximum
ground acceleration. Missing mass components are combined following the modal combination.
For more information, see Include Missing Mass Components (on page 595).
Even though missing mass components may be included during time history analyses, all
time history combinations are done algebraically (in-phase), so this parameter has no effect on
time history results.

CAESAR II User's Guide

597

Dynamic Analysis

Directional Combination Method (SRSS/ABS)

(Available for: Spectrum)
Specifies the method for combining shock components acting in the same direction. Select
SRSS for a square root of the sum of the squares combination method. Select ABS for an
absolute combination method.
This option is typically used with independent support motion load cases, where responses from
different support groups caused by excitation in the same direction are combined. It also
combines the rare case of multiple uniform shock spectra acting in the same direction. Select
ABS for directional combinations of pseudostatic responses, as recommended by USNRC.
Select SRSS for force spectrum loads when several loads are all defined with the same shock
direction. The loads are then modeled as independent loads. ABS always models as dependent
loads. For more information, see Include Pseudostatic (Anchor Movement) Components (Y/N)
(on page 595).
Because all time history combinations are done algebraically (in-phase) this parameter
has no effect on time history results.

Mass Model (LUMPED/CONSISTENT)

(Available for: Modal, Harmonic, Spectrum, and Time History)
Specifies a mass model type. Select CONSISTENT or LUMPED.
A lumped mass model makes very coarse simplifications that often result in correspondingly
coarse results. The benefit is that it does not require a lot of memory for data storage.
The consistent mass model is well documented. Most texts on the subject, such as Structural
Dynamics - Theory and Computation by Mario Paz, describe how to build the mass matrix. The
consistent mass matrix takes into consideration the effects of bending and other rotational
effects of the beam on its mass distribution, gives a more realistic result, but requires much
more data storage.

If mass is added at a degree of freedom, CAESAR II assumes that it is a concentrated

mass, and puts it on the on-diagonal term, effectively treating it as a lumped mass.
If mass is zeroed at a degree of freedom, CAESAR II assumes that you want to eliminate
consideration of that DOF and zero out all elements on that row/column.

Sturm Sequence Check on Computed Eigenvalues

(Available for: Spectrum, Modal, and Time History)
Specifies usage of the Sturm sequence calculation as described below. Select Y (for yes) or N
(for no). Y is the default value.
In most cases, the eigensolver detects modal frequencies from the lowest to the highest
frequency. When there is a strong directional dependency in the system, the modes may
converge in the wrong order. This could cause a problem if the eigensolver reaches the cutoff
number of modes, but has not found the modes with the lowest frequency.

598

CAESAR II User's Guide

Dynamic Analysis
This procedure determines the number of modes that should have been found between the
highest and lowest frequencies, and compares that against the actual number of modes
extracted. If those numbers are different, a warning appears. For example, if 22 natural
frequencies are extracted for a system, and if the highest natural frequency is 33.5 Hz, the
Sturm sequence checks that there are exactly 22 natural frequencies in the model between zero
and 33.5+p Hz, where p is a numerical tolerance found from:

The Sturm sequence check fails where there are two identical frequencies at the last frequency
extracted. For example, consider a system with the following natural frequencies:
0.6637

1.2355

1.5988

4.5667

4.5667

If you only ask for the first four natural frequencies, a Sturm sequence failure occurs because
there are five frequencies that exist in the range between 0.0 and 4.5667 + p (where p is
0.0041). To correct this problem, you can:
Increase the frequency cutoff by the number of frequencies not found. (This number is
reported by the Sturm sequence check.)
Increase the value of Frequency Cutoff (HZ) (on page 585) by some small amount, if the
frequency cutoff terminated the eigensolution. This usually allows the lost modes to fall into
the solution frequency range.
Fix the subspace size at 10 and rerun the job. Increasing the number of approximation
vectors improves the possibility that at least one of them contains some component of the
missing modes, allowing the vector to properly converge.

Advanced Tab
This tab is available when Modal, Earthquake (spectrum), Relief Loads (spectrum), Water
Hammer/Slug Flow (spectrum), and Time History are selected for Analysis Type in the
Dynamic Analysis window.
The values on this tab rarely need to be changed.

Topics
Estimated Number of Significant Figures in Eigenvalues .............. 600
Jacobi Sweep Tolerance ............................................................... 600
Decomposition Singularity Tolerance ............................................ 600
Subspace Size (0-Not Used) ......................................................... 600
No. to Converge Before Shift Allowed (0 - Not Used) ................... 601
No. of Iterations Per Shift (0 - Pgm computed).............................. 601
% of Iterations Per Shift Before Orthogonalization ........................ 602
Force Orthogonalization After Convergence (Y/N) ........................ 602
Use Out-of-Core Eigensolver (Y/N) ............................................... 602
Frequency Array Spaces ............................................................... 602

CAESAR II User's Guide

599

Dynamic Analysis

Estimated Number of Significant Figures in Eigenvalues

2

Specifies the approximate number of significant figures in the calculated eigenvalues ( , where
is the angular frequency in rad/sec). The default value is 6. For example, if a calculated
eigenvalue is 44032.32383 using the default value of 6, then the first digit to the right of the
decimal is usually the last accurately computed figure.
The eigenvectors, or mode shapes, are calculated to half as many significant figures as are the
eigenvalues. If the eigenvalues have six significant figures of accuracy, then the eigenvectors
have three.
This number should not be decreased. Increases to 8 or 10 are not unusual but result in slower
solutions with little change in response results.

Jacobi Sweep Tolerance

Specifies the Jacobi sweep tolerance in scientific notation. The default value is 1.0E-12.
Eigen analyses use an NxN subspace to calculate the natural frequencies and mode shapes for
a reduced problem. The first step is to perform a Jacobi denationalization of the subspace.
Iterations are performed until the off-diagonal terms of the matrix are approximately zero.
Off-diagonal terms are considered to be close enough to zero when their ratio to the on-diagonal
term in the row is smaller the Jacobi sweep tolerance.
Do not change the default value unless you understand the IEEE-488 double precision
word (of approximately 14 significant figures) on the IBM PC and the approximate size of the
on-diagonal coefficients in the stiffness matrix for the problem to be solved (which may be
estimated from simple beam expressions).

Decomposition Singularity Tolerance

Specifies the decomposition singularity tolerance for the eigensolver in scientific notation. The
default value is 1E10.
During the decomposition of what may be a shifted stiffness matrix, the eigensolver performs a
singularity check to make sure that the shift is not too close to an eigenvalue that is to be
calculated. If a singular condition is detected, a new shift, not quite as aggressive as the last
one, is calculated and a new decomposition is attempted. If the new composition fails, a fatal
error is reported. Increasing the singularity tolerance may eliminate this fatal error, but do not
enter a value greater than 1E13. Singularity problems may also exist when very light, small
diameter piping is attached to very heavy, large diameter piping, or when very short lengths of
pipe are adjacent to very long lengths of pipe.

Subspace Size (0-Not Used)

Specifies the subspace size as described below. The default value is 0 and usually does not
need to be changed. The software then selects an expected optimal subspace size.
The eigensolution reduces the NDOFxNDOF problem to an NxN problem during each subspace
iteration, where N is the subspace size.
For the default value of 0, CAESAR II uses the square root of the bandwidth as the subspace
size, with a minimum of 4, resulting in sizes of 4 to 8 for typical piping configurations. Increasing
the subspace size slows the eigensolution but increases the numerical stability. Values in the
range between 12 and 15 are appropriate when unusual geometries or dynamic properties are
encountered, or when a job is large (having 100 elements or more, and/or requires that 25 or
more frequencies be extracted).

600

CAESAR II User's Guide

Dynamic Analysis

No. to Converge Before Shift Allowed (0 - Not Used)

Specifies the shifting strategy for the eigen problem to be solved as described below.
For a value of 0, CAESAR II selects an estimated optimal shifting strategy. Improving the
convergence characteristics increases the speed of the eigensolution. The convergence rate for
the lowest eigenpair in the subspace is inversely proportional to 1/2, where 1 is the lowest
eigenvalue in the current subspace and 2 is the next lowest eigenvalue in the current
subspace. A slow convergence rate is represented by an eigenvalue ratio of one, and a fast
convergence rate is represented by an eigenvalue ratio of zero. The shift is employed to get the
convergence rate as close to zero as possible. The cost of each shift is one decomposition of
the system set of equations. The typical shift value is equal to the last computed eigenvalue plus
90 percent of the difference between this value and the lowest estimated nonconverged
eigenvalue in the subspace. As 1 shifts closer to zero, the ratio 1/2 becomes increasingly
smaller and the convergence rate increases. When eigenvalues are very closely spaced, shifting
can result in eigenvalues being lost (as checked by the Sturm sequence check).
A large value entered for this parameter effectively disables shifting so that no eigenvalues are
missed, but the solution takes longer to run. When the system to be analyzed is very large,
shifting the set of equations can be very time consuming. In these cases, set the value between
4 and 8.

No. of Iterations Per Shift (0 - Pgm computed)

Specifies the number of subspace iterations per shift as described below.
For a value of 0, CAESAR II calculates an estimated optimal number of iterations. This
parameter and % of Iterations Per Shift Before Orthogonalization (on page 602) control solution
shifting by limiting the number of Gram-Schmidt orthogonalizations. Trying to limit this number is
very dangerous for small subspace problems, but less dangerous when the subspace size is
large, at around 10-20 percent of the total number of eigenpairs required.
Gram-Schmidt orthogonalization is by default performed once during each subspace iteration.
The orthogonalization assures that the eigenvector subspace does not converge to an already
found eigenpair. A large number of repeated eigenpairs calculations can appreciably slow down
the extraction of the highest eigenpairs. Proper setting of these two parameters limits the
orthogonalization in the eigensolution, such as to every second, third, or fourth iteration, and
increases the solution speed. The subspace may still converge to earlier eigenpairs during
subsequent non-orthogonalized subspace iteration passes.
Use caution when setting these parameters. Select Y as the value for Force
Orthogonalization After Convergence (Y/N) (on page 602) if the frequency of orthogonalization
is slowed.

CAESAR II User's Guide

601

Dynamic Analysis

% of Iterations Per Shift Before Orthogonalization

Specifies the decimal equivalent of the needed percentage, as described below.
For a value of 0, CAESAR II calculates a number of iterations per shift to be performed. A
maximum of N eigenpairs can conceivably converge per subspace pass, where N is the
subspace size (although this is highly unlikely). By default a Gram-Schmidt orthogonalization is
performed for each subspace pass. This parameter and No. of Iterations Per Shift (0 - Pgm
computed) (on page 601) control solution shifting by limiting the number of Gram-Schmidt
orthogonalizations. For example, if 12 is the number of iterations, and this parameter is 50
percent (entered as 0.50), the Gram-Schmidt orthogonalization is performed every six iterations.
Use caution when setting these parameters. Select Y as the value for Force
Orthogonalization After Convergence (Y/N) (on page 602) if the frequency of orthogonalization
is slowed.

Force Orthogonalization After Convergence (Y/N)

Specifies whether CAESAR II forces orthogonalization after eigenpair convergence. Select Y
(for yes) or N (for no).
Select Y for eigensolutions when % of Iterations Per Shift Before Orthogonalization (on page
602) is set to a non-zero value. When a subspace pass completes and sees at least one
eigenpair convergence, a Gram-Schmidt orthogonalization is performed even if the specified
percentage of iterations has not been completed.

Use Out-of-Core Eigensolver (Y/N)

Specifies use of the out-of-core eigensolver. Select Y (for yes) or N (for no).
This out-of-core eigensolver is used primarily as a benchmarking and debugging aid. Select Y to
automatically run the out-of-core eigensolver on any problem size. Using this solver can take
considerably more time than the in-core solver, but always produce exactly the same results.
A problem may be too big to fit into the in-core solver because the capacity is based upon
the amount of available extended memory. The out-of-core solver then runs automatically. This
parameter does not need to be changed to Y to have this automatic switch occur.

Frequency Array Spaces

Specifies the maximum number of eigenpairs that can be extracted for the problem. The default
value of 100 is arbitrary. Increase the value as needed.

602

CAESAR II User's Guide

Dynamic Analysis

Directive Builder
Click Directives on the Spectrum Load Cases or Static/Dynamic Combinations tabs to open
the Directive Builder dialog box and select parameters for the current load case. These
parameters are load-case-specific changes to the global parameters set for all dynamic analysis
load cases. For more information, see Spectrum/Time History Load Cases Tab (on page 550)
and Static/Dynamic Combinations Tab (on page 564).
For most analyses, the global parameters apply and you do not need to specify the
parameters on this dialog box.

Directional Combination Method - Select SRSS or ABS. For more information, see Missing
Mass Combination Method (SRSS/ABS) (on page 597).
Modal Combination Method - Select GROUP, 10%, DSRSS, SRSS, or ABS. For more
information, see Modal Combination Method (Group/10%/DSRSS/ABS/SRSS) (on page 592).
Spatial Combination Method - Select SRSS or ABS. For more information, see Spatial
Combination Method (SRSS/ABS) (on page 592).
Spatial or Modal Combination First - Select SPATIAL or MODAL. For more information, see
Re-use Last Eigensolution (Frequencies and Mode Shapes) (on page 591).
Pseudostatic Combination Method - Select SRSS or ABS. For more information, see
Pseudostatic (Anchor Movement) Comb. Method (SRSS/ABS) (on page 597).
Missing Mass Combination Method - Select SRSS or ABS. For more information, see Missing
Mass Combination Method (SRSS/ABS) (on page 597).
Static/Dynamic Combination Method - Select SRSS or ABS to define how the load case is
combined. The ABS method takes the absolute value of all displacement, force, and stress data
for each load case and adds them. The SRSS method sums the square of all displacement,
force, and stress data for each load case and then takes the square root of the result. This is the
only parameter available on the Static/Dynamic Combinations tab.

CAESAR II User's Guide

603

Dynamic Analysis

Enter/Edit Spectrum Data

Enter/Edit Spectrum Data and Tools > Spectrum Data Points allow you to view and edit
spectrum data for manually-entered or ASCII-file-based spectrum definitions.
The command is available when entering values on the Spectrum Definitions tab or the Time
History Definitions tab. For more information, see Spectrum/Time History Definitions Tab (on
page 546).
Click the command, make a selection in the Select a Spectrum Name dialog box, and click OK.
The spectrum name dialog box appears. You can add, edit, or delete rows, or add ASCII data.
Enter a sufficient number of data points to fully describe the spectrum.

Add Row - Adds a new row after the selected row.

Delete Row - Deletes the selected row.
Read From File - Reads data from an ASCII text file.

Range
Specifies a spectrum range value. The range/ordinate pairs define the spectrum/DLF curve.

Ordinate
Specifies a spectrum ordinate value. The range/ordinate pairs define the spectrum/DLF curve.
Valid formats are:
Exponents, such as 0.3003E+03, 0.3423E-03, or 0.3003E3.
Explicit multiplication or division, such as 4032.3/386, or 1.0323*12.

604

CAESAR II User's Guide

Dynamic Analysis

DLF/Spectrum Generator
DLF/Spectrum Generator and Tools > DLF Spectrum Generator converts spectrum time
waveform excitation data into a frequency domain dynamic load factor (DLF) curve. DLF data is
automatically referenced in the Spectrum Definitions tab. For more information, see
Spectrum/Time History Definitions Tab (on page 546).
The DLF curve can also be saved to a file and later referenced by CAESAR II as a FORCE
response spectrum curve.

Spectrum Name
Displays the name of the selected value of Spectrum Type. You can type a different name.
For UBC, ASCE7, IBC, and CFE Diseno por Sismo:
This is the group name for the pair of seismic shock spectra that is generated here. A suffix
of H and V is added to indicate the horizontal and vertical spectrum, respectively. After it has
been properly entered, these names are listed in the Spectrum Definitions tab and can be
used to build load cases on the Spectrum Load Cases tab.
For B31.1 Relief & User Defined Time History Waveform:
This is the name given to the Force Response Spectrum created from the time history load
defined here. After it has been properly entered, this name is listed in the Spectrum
Definitions tab and can be used to build load cases on the Spectrum Load Cases tab.

CAESAR II User's Guide

605

Dynamic Analysis

Spectrum Type
Specifies the name of the spectrum. The data from this spectrum is used to generate the DLF
curve.

UBC
Select to create earthquake spectra (horizontal and vertical) according to the 1997 Uniform
Building Code.
The horizontal design response spectrum is based on UBC Figure 16-3 shown below.
Ts=Cv/2.5Ca & T0=Ts/5

The vertical spectrum is to 50% of ICa across the entire period range.

606

CAESAR II User's Guide

Dynamic Analysis
Importance Factor
Specifies the seismic importance factor, I, as defined in Table 16-K. The calculated spectrum
accelerations are multiplied by this value to generate the horizontal shock spectrum. Values
range from 1.0 to 1.25 based on the function of the structure.
For this code, the vertical shock spectrum is also multiplied by the importance factor.

Seismic Coefficient Ca
Specifies the zero period acceleration, Ca, for the site as defined in Table 16-Q. The value is
based on soil profile type and seismic zone factor, and ranges from 0.06 to 0.66.

Seismic Coefficient Cv
Specifies the ground acceleration at higher periods (lower frequencies), Cv, for the site as
defined in Table 16-R. The value is based on soil profile type and seismic zone factor, and
ranges from 0.06 to 1.92.

ASCE7
Select to create earthquake spectra (horizontal and vertical) according to the ASCE #7-02
standard.
The horizontal design response spectrum is based on ASCE 7, Figure 9.4.1.2.6 shown below.
Ts=SD1/SDS & T0=Ts/5.
Above a period of four seconds, the horizontal spectrum acceleration changes.

The vertical spectrum is set to 20% of SDS (from 9.5.2.7.1) across the entire period range.
Neither I nor R affects the vertical spectrum.

CAESAR II User's Guide

607

Dynamic Analysis
Importance Factor
Specifies the occupancy importance factor, based on the function of the structure. The
calculated spectrum accelerations are multiplied by this value to generate the horizontal shock
spectrum.
ASCE 7 - The occupancy importance factor is I, as defined in Table 11.5. Values range from
1.0 to 1.5 and applied according to paragraph 12.9.2.
IBC - The occupancy importance factor is IE, as defined in Section 1616.2 and shown in
Table 1604.5. Values range from 1.0 to 1.5.

Site Coefficient Fa
Specifies the acceleration-based site coefficient Fa. This value adjusts the mapped short period
acceleration and is based on site class (soil profile) and the mapped short period maximum
considered earthquake acceleration (Ss). Values range from 0.8 to 2.5.
ASCE 7 - Fa is listed in Table 11.4-1.
IBC - Fa is listed in Table 16.15.1.2(1).

Site Coefficient Fv
Specifies the velocity-based site coefficient Fv. This value adjusts the mapped one-second
period acceleration and is based on site class (soil profile) and the mapped one-second period
maximum considered earthquake acceleration (S1). Values range from 0.8 to 3.5.
ASCE 7 - Fv is listed in Table 11.4-2.
IBC - Fv is listed in Table 1615.1.2(2).

Mapped MCESRA at Short Periods (Ss)

Specifies the mapped maximum considered earthquake spectral response acceleration at short
periods, Ss. This is the mapped ground acceleration at the system location for a structure
having a period of 0.2 second and 5% critical damping.
ASCE 7 - Ss values are mapped in Chapter 22.
IBC - Ss values are mapped in Section 1615.1.

Mapped MCESRA at One Second (S1)

Specifies the mapped maximum considered earthquake spectral response acceleration at a
period of one second, S1.This is the mapped ground acceleration at the system location for a
structure having a period of one second and 5% critical damping.
ASCE 7 - S1 values are mapped in Chapter 22.
IBC - S1 values are mapped in Section 1615.1.

608

CAESAR II User's Guide

Dynamic Analysis
Response Modification R
Specifies the response modification coefficient, R. This coefficient reflects system ductility. The
calculated spectrum accelerations are divided by this value to generate the horizontal shock
spectrum. Values range from 3.0 to 8.0 for most plant structures. A value of 3.5 for piping is
common.
ASCE 7 - R is defined in Table 12.2-1 and applied according to paragraph 12.9.2.
IBC - R is defined in Table 1617.6 and used according to equation 16-53.

IBC
Select to create earthquake spectra (horizontal and vertical) according to the International
Building Code, 2000.
The horizontal design response spectrum is based on IBC 2000, Fig. 1615.1.4 shown below.
Ts=SD1/SDS & T0=Ts/5

The vertical spectrum is set to 20% of SDS (from 1617.1.2) across the entire period range.
IBC generally uses the same spectrum data parameters as ASCE7 (on page 607).

CFE Diseno por Sismo

Select to create earthquake spectra (horizontal and vertical) according to the Mexico's
Earthquake Resistant Design code.
As with every other earthquake loading analysis, the object is to calculate the shear force at the
center of mass of each vessel element. After the shear force at each elevation is known, the
moments are accumulated to the base, leg or lug support.
You should begin the analysis by calculating the weights and centroidal distances of all of the
vessel elements. It is very important to model the structure in sections that are appropriate in
length. For cylinders, this value is about 10 or 12 feet (3 m). This ensures that the software has
enough information to calculate the natural period of vibration with sufficient accuracy.
Using the input data and calculated earthquake weights and natural frequency, CAESAR II
determines the values from table 3.1 of the Mexican Seismic Code.

CAESAR II User's Guide

609

Dynamic Analysis
The values are:
ao

Spectral coordinate used in computing a

Spectral coordinate used in computing a

Ta(s)

Period value used in computing a

Tb(s)

Period value used in computing a

Exponent used in computing a

For group A structures, the values of the spectral ordinates a o and c are multiplied by 1.5.

Seismic Zone
Specifies the seismic zone. Select A, B, C, or D. The zones are described in Manual de Diseno
por Sismo for Mexico. The map on page 1.3.29 shows the seismic zones.

Soil Type
Specifies the soil type.
I - Hard Soil - Ground deposits formed exclusively by layers with propagation velocity b 0 =
700 m/s or modulus of rigidity 85000.
II - Medium Soil - Ground deposits with fundamental period of vibration and effective
velocity of propagation which meets the condition Bc Ts + Bs Tc > Bc Tc.
III - Soft Soil - Ground deposits with fundamental period of vibration and effective velocity of
propagation which meets the condition Bc Ts + Bs Tc < Bc Tc.

Structural Group
Specifies the structural group based on the degree of safety. Select A - High Safety, B Intermediate Safety, or C - Low Safety.
Towers and tanks are examples of group A structures requiring a high degree of safety in
their design

Increase Factor
Specifies a value for the increased factor of safety, as required by some facilities. The default
value is 1.0. This value directly multiplies the spectrum values. This value is traditionally 1.118
and should always be greater than or equal to 1.0.

610

CAESAR II User's Guide

Dynamic Analysis

B31.1 Appendix II (Safety Valve) Force Response Spectrum

Selecting to create a normalized force response spectrum for loads from a safety valve
discharge into an open system according to the nonmandatory rules of B31.1, Appendix II Rules for the Design of Safety Valve Installations.
The spectrum is based on B31.1 Appendix II, Fig. II-3-2.

Opening Time
Specifies the opening time of the relief value in milliseconds.

User Defined Time History Waveform

Select to create a normalized force response (Dynamic Load Factor or DLF) spectrum based on
manually entered load versus time history.

Maximum Table Frequency

Specifies the maximum frequency in the table to be used to generate the DLF curve. This value
is usually no more than 100 Hz and is commonly 40 to 60 Hz for relief valves. For other types of
impulse loadings, a larger maximum may be needed.
If piping frequencies greater than this value are found in the system and included in the
spectrum analysis, then the spectrum value at the maximum table frequency is used. You can
decide which frequencies are important and how high the frequency must go by looking at the
solution participation factors and the animated mode shapes. Only the lower frequencies
typically contribute to the system displacements, forces, and stresses.

Number of Points
Specifies the number of points to be generated for the spectrum table. Fifteen to twenty points
are usually sufficient. These points are distributed in a cubic relationship starting at zero hertz.

CAESAR II User's Guide

611

Dynamic Analysis
Enter Pulse Data
Specifies time and force pulse data for the waveform. Click Enter Pulse Data to enter the Time
and Force values as shown below. This command is available only for User Defined Time
History Waveform.

Figure 2: Input Table Dialog

Save/Continue - Saves the force spectrum values to an ASCII file.

Time
Specifies time waveform values in milliseconds for the points to be modeled.

Force
Specifies forces corresponding to the points on the force/time curve.
The absolute magnitude of the force is not important, but the form of the time history
loading is important. The actual maximum value of the dynamic load is taken from the force
pattern defined on the Force Sets Tab (on page 555). There can be any number of line entries in
the excitation frequency data.

612

CAESAR II User's Guide

Dynamic Analysis

Generate Spectrum
Displays the Spectrum Table Values dialog box with the force spectrum values based on
entered spectrum data.
This command is available for all values of Spectrum Type except User Defined Time History
Waveform.

Save To File - Saves the force spectrum values to an ASCII file. For seismic spectra, two files
are saved: horizontal (with H appended to the file name) and vertical (with V appended to the file
name). Use this command if you want to reuse the spectrum values in other analyses. Click OK
if you only want to use the values in the current analysis.
OK - Loads the spectrum data into the current analysis.
Cancel - Closes the window without loading the spectrum data into the current analysis.

Relief Load Synthesis

Relief Load Synthesis and Tools > Relief Load Synthesis calculates the magnitudes of
relieving thrust forces. Dynamic forces associated with relieving devices can cause considerable
mechanical damage to equipment and supports. There are two types of destructive dynamic
forces associated with relief devices that must be evaluated:
Thrust at the valve/atmosphere interface.
Acoustic shock due to the sudden change in fluid momentum and the associated traveling
pressure waves.
The first step in performing a relief load analysis is to compute the magnitudes of the relieving
thrust forces. For open-type vent systems, use Relief Load Synthesis
. Results are
calculated for liquids and for gases greater than 15 psig.
This command is only available when Relief Loads (spectrum) and Time History are selected
as Analysis Type.
The discussion here concerns only the thrust at the valve/atmosphere interface. Acoustic
traveling pressure waves can be addressed similar to water hammer. For more information, see
Relief Loads and Water Hammer/Slug Flow Spectra Analysis (on page 537).

CAESAR II User's Guide

613

Dynamic Analysis

Relief Load Synthesis for Gases Greater Than 15 psig

Click Gas to enter gas properties. CAESAR II assumes that a successful vent stack/relief
system design maintains the following gas properties:

Line Temperature
Specifies the stagnation condition temperature of the gas to be relieved. This is typically the gas
temperature upstream of the relief valve.

Pressure (abs)
Specifies the stagnation pressure of the gas to be relieved. This is typically the gas pressure
upstream of the relief valve. This value is the absolute pressure.
Stagnation properties can vary considerably from line properties if the gas flow velocity in
the line is high.

ID of Relief Valve Orifice

Specifies the flow passage inside diameter for the smallest diameter in the relief valve throat.
This information is typically provided by the relief valve manufacturer.

614

CAESAR II User's Guide

Dynamic Analysis

ID of Relief Valve Piping

Specifies the flow passage inside diameter of the relief valve piping.

ID of Vent Stack Piping

Specifies the inside diameter of the vent stack piping. If CAESAR II is sizing the vent stack, or if
the vent stack piping is the same size as the relief valve piping, then do not enter a value.

Length of the Vent Stack

Specifies the length of the vent stack. Add double the lengths of fittings and elbows or calculate
the appropriate equivalent lengths for non-pipe fittings and add the lengths. Typical values for
these constants are shown below:
Ratio of Gas-Specific
Heats

(k) Gas Constant (R)

(ft. lbf./lbm./deg. R

Superheated Steam

1.300 Nitrogen

55.16

Saturated Steam

1.100 Carbon Dioxide

35.11

Nitrogen

1.399 Acetylene

59.35

Carbon Dioxide

1.288 Ammonia

90.73

Acetylene

1.232 n-Butane

26.59

Ammonia

1.304 Ethane

51.39

n-Butane

1.093 Ethylene

55.09

Ethane

1.187 Methane

96.33

Ethylene

1.240 Propane

35.05

Methane

1.226

Propane

1.127

This value is a required.

Ratio of Gas Specific Heats (k)

Specifies the ratio of gas specific heats, k. The value for air is 1.4.

Gas Constant (R)

Specifies the gas constant, R. The value for air is 53.0.

Does the Vent Pipe have an Umbrella Fitting (Y/N)

Specifies whether or not the vent pipe has an umbrella fitting. Select Y (for yes) if the vent stack
slips inside of the piping system, or N (for no) if the vent stack is connected to the piping system.

CAESAR II User's Guide

615

Dynamic Analysis
Umbrella Fitting Example
The vent stack pipe is not hard-piped to the relief valve pipe. The relief valve pipe slips inside of
the vent pipe.

Non-Umbrella Fitting Example

The vent stack pipe is hard-piped to the relief valve pipe.

616

CAESAR II User's Guide

Dynamic Analysis

Should CAESAR II Size the Vent Stack (Y/N)

Specifies whether or not the software sizes the vent stack. Select Y (for yes) for CAESAR II to
calculate the length and diameter of the vent stack. The software sizing algorithm searches
through a table of available inside pipe diameters starting at the smallest diameter until a vent
stack ID is found that satisfies the thermodynamic criteria. The calculated inside diameter is
automatically inserted into the input.

Relief Load Synthesis for Liquids

Click Liquid to enter liquid properties. CAESAR II assumes that a liquid vent system has one of
the following configurations:

Relief Valve or Rupture Disk

Specifies whether a relief valve or rupture disk is used. Select RV for a relief valve. The software
sets the nozzle coefficient, k, to 0.80. Select RD for a rupture disk. The software sets the nozzle
coefficient, k, to 0.67. You can also enter the relieving device nozzle coefficient k if it is known.

Supply Press. (abs)

Specifies the stagnation, or zero velocity, pressure of the supply line.

ID Relief Orifice or Rupture Disk Opening

Specifies the inside diameter of the contracted opening in the relieving device. This information
is typically provided by the relief valve manufacturer.
For special purpose calculations, this ID may be equal to the ID of the relief exit piping.

CAESAR II User's Guide

617

Dynamic Analysis

ID Relief Exit Piping

Specifies the inside diameter of the piping connected to the downstream side of the relief valve.

ID Manifold Piping
Specifies the insider diameter of the manifold if the relief exit piping runs into a manifold. Do not
enter a value if there is not a manifold.

ID Supply Header
Specifies the inside diameter of the supply header.

Fluid Density (Specific Gravity)

Specifies the specific gravity of the fluid being relieved.

Length of Relief Exit Piping

Specifies the equivalent length of the relief exit piping. Add twice the piping length for fittings and
elbows, or the calculated fitting equivalent length.

Length of Manifold Piping

Specifies the equivalent length of the manifold piping, if any. Add twice the piping length for
fitting and elbows. Enter 0 or do not enter a value if there is not a manifold system or if the
manifold is not filled by the relieving fluid.

Fluid Bulk Modulus

Specifies the bulk modulus of the fluid. If no value is entered, a default valve of 250,000 psi is
used. See Example Output - Liquid Relief Load Synthesis (on page 623) for typical values.
These are the values for an iso\-thermal compression as taken from Marks Standard Handbook
for Engineers, p. 3-35, 8th edition.

Supply Header Pipe Wall Thickness

Specifies the wall thickness of the supply header.

618

The error message "NUMERICAL ERROR OR NO FLOW CONDITION DETECTED,"

means that a physically impossible configuration was described.
Flashing of volatile relief liquids is not considered in this analysis. If the relieving liquid
flashes in the exhaust piping as its pressure drops to atmospheric, then use another method
to calculate the resulting gas properties and thrust loads.

CAESAR II User's Guide

Dynamic Analysis

Example Output - Gas Relief Load Synthesis

Figure 3: Relief Load Synthesis Output (Gas)

Topics
Computed Mass Flowrate (Vent Gas) ........................................... 620
Thrust at Valve Pipe/Vent Pipe Interface ....................................... 620
Thrust at the Vent Pipe Exit ........................................................... 620
Transient Pressure Rise on Valve Opening .................................. 621
Transient Pressure Rise on Valve Closing .................................... 621
Thermodynamic Entropy Limit/Subsonic Vent Exit Limit ............... 621
Valve Orifice Gas Conditions/Vent Pipe Exit Gas Conditions/
Subsonic Velocity Gas Conditions ................................................. 622

CAESAR II User's Guide

619

Dynamic Analysis

Computed Mass Flowrate (Vent Gas)

The calculated gas mass flow rate, based on choked conditions at the relief orifice. If greater
mass flow rates are expected, then investigate the error in either the approach used by
CAESAR II or in the expected mass flow rate.

Thrust at Valve Pipe/Vent Pipe Interface

The thrust load acting back on the relief valve piping if there is an umbrella fitting between the
vent stack and the relief valve piping.
If the vent stack is hard piped to the relief valve piping, then this intermediate thrust is balanced
by tensile loads in the pipe and can be ignored.

Thrust load acts directly on valve opening. Only the valve pipe/vent stack
interface thrust acts in this
configuration.

Thrust at the Vent Pipe Exit

The thrust load acting on the elbow just before the pipe opens into the atmosphere when there
is an elbow in the vent stack piping.

620

CAESAR II User's Guide

Dynamic Analysis

Transient Pressure Rise on Valve Opening

The estimated magnitude of the negative pressure wave that is superimposed on the line
pressure when the relief valve fist opens. This negative pressure wave moves back through the
relief system piping similar to the pressure wave in the downstream piping of a water hammer
type system. The magnitude of this wave is estimated as (Po-Pa)*Ap, where Po is the
stagnation pressure at the source, Pa is atmospheric pressure, and Ap is the area of the header
piping.

Transient Pressure Rise on Valve Closing

The estimated magnitude of the positive pressure wave that is superimposed on the line
pressure when the relief device slams shut. This positive pressure wave moves back through
the relief system piping similar to the pressure wave in the supply side piping of a water hammer
type system. The magnitude of this wave is estimated from: r*c*dv where r is the fluid density, c
is the speed of sound in the fluid and dv is the change in the velocity of the fluid.

Thermodynamic Entropy Limit/Subsonic Vent Exit Limit

The thermodynamic entropy limit or subsonic vent exit limit. These values should always be
greater than one. If either value falls below 1.0, then the thermodynamic assumptions made
regarding the gas properties are incorrect and the calculated thrust values should be
disregarded.

CAESAR II User's Guide

621

Dynamic Analysis

Valve Orifice Gas Conditions/Vent Pipe Exit Gas

Conditions/Subsonic Velocity Gas Conditions
The thermodynamic properties of the gas at three critical points in the relief system.

The entire formulation for the thrust gas properties is based on an ideal gas equation of state. If
the pressures and temperatures displayed above for the gas being vented are outside of the
range where the ideal gas laws apply, then some alternate source should be sought for the
calculation of the thrust loads of the system. In addition, all three of these points should be
sufficiently clear of the gas saturation line. When the exit gas conditions become saturated, the
magnitude of the thrust load can be reduced significantly. In this case, consult the manufacturer.

622

CAESAR II User's Guide

Dynamic Analysis

Example Output - Liquid Relief Load Synthesis

Computed Mass Flow Rate
The calculated exhaust mass flow rate in U.S. gallons per minute. CAESAR II makes the
necessary pressure drop calculations between the stagnation pressure upstream of the relief
device and atmospheric conditions at the exit of the manifold.

Thrust at the End of the Exit Piping

The calculated thrust load at the last cross section in the exit piping. If there is no manifold, then
this is the external thrust load acting on the piping system. If there is a manifold, then this thrust
is opposed by tension in the pipe wall at the junction of the exit piping and manifold. For more
information, see the graphics in Orifice Flow Conditions/Exit Pipe End Flow Conditions/Manifold
Pipe End Flow Conditions (on page 624).

Thrust at the End of the Manifold Piping

The calculated thrust load at the last cross section in the manifold piping. If there is no manifold
system, then this thrust is equal to the thrust at the end of the exit piping. See the figures that
follow for clarification. For more information, see the graphics in Orifice Flow Conditions/Exit
Pipe End Flow Conditions/Manifold Pipe End Flow Conditions (on page 624).

Transient Pressure Rise on Valve Opening

The estimated magnitude of the negative pressure wave that is superimposed on the line
pressure when the relief valve fist opens. This negative pressure wave moves back through the
relief system piping similar to the pressure wave in the downstream piping of a water hammer
type system. The magnitude of this wave is estimated as (Po-Pa)*Ap, where Po is the
stagnation pressure at the source, Pa is atmospheric pressure, and Ap is the area of the header
piping.

Transient Pressure Rise on Valve Closing

The estimated magnitude of the positive pressure wave that is superimposed on the line
pressure when the relief device slams shut. This positive pressure wave moves back through
the relief system piping similar to the pressure wave in the supply side piping of a water hammer
type system. The magnitude of this wave is estimated from: r*c*dv where r is the fluid density, c
is the speed of sound in the fluid and dv is the change in the velocity of the fluid.

CAESAR II User's Guide

623

Dynamic Analysis

Orifice Flow Conditions/Exit Pipe End Flow Conditions/Manifold

Pipe End Flow Conditions
The calculated fluid properties at the three critical cross-sections in the relief piping. If pressures
or velocities here do not seem reasonable, then some characteristic of the relief model is in
error.

If the L dimensions are significant (by several feet), then unbalanced thrust loads acting
between the elbow-elbow pairs are very similar to a water hammer load. Water hammer pulses
travel at the speed of sound in the fluid, while the fluid/atmosphere interface pulses travel at the
velocity of the flowing fluid. These unbalanced loads can cause significant piping displacements
in much shorter pipe runs. The magnitude of these loads is equivalent to the calculated thrust
and the duration may be found from the calculated fluid velocity and distance between each
elbow-elbow pair.

624

CAESAR II User's Guide

Dynamic Analysis

Analysis Results
Each type of dynamic analysis has its own procedure for producing results, but all start in the
same way:
1. Save and check the dynamic input.
2. Run the analysis.
3. The account number is requested (if accounting is active).
4. The ESL is accessed (limited run ESLs are decremented).
5. The element and system stiffness matrices are assembled.
6. Load vectors are created where appropriate.
7. The system mass matrix is generated.
From this point the processing progresses according to the type of analysis selected.
After calculations are complete, control is passed to the Dynamic Output Processor. For more
information, see Dynamic Output Processing (on page 629).

Topics
Modal ............................................................................................. 625
Harmonic........................................................................................ 626
Spectrum........................................................................................ 627
Time History ................................................................................... 627

Modal
After dynamic initialization and basic equation assembly are completed, CAESAR II opens the
Dynamic Eigensolver, which calculates natural frequencies and modes of vibration.

CAESAR II User's Guide

625

Dynamic Analysis
Each natural frequency appears as it is calculated, along with the lapsed time of the analysis.
The processor searches for the natural frequencies, starting with the lowest, and continues until
the frequency cutoff is exceeded or the mode count reaches its limit. Both the frequency cutoff
and mode cutoff are dynamic analysis control parameters. The amount of time to calculate or
find these frequencies is a function of the system size, the grouping of the frequencies and the
cutoff settings.
Eigensolution may be canceled at any time, with the analysis continuing using the mode shapes
calculated up to that point. After the last frequency is calculated, the software uses the Sturm
Sequence Check to confirm that no modes were skipped. If the check fails, you can return to the
dynamic input or continue with the spectral analysis. Sturm Sequence Check failures are usually
satisfied if the frequency cutoff is set to a value greater than the last frequency calculated.
After calculations are complete, control is passed to the Dynamic Output Processor. You can
review natural frequencies and mode shapes in text format. You can also display the node
shapes in and animated format.

Harmonic
For each forcing frequency listed in the dynamic input, CAESAR II performs a separate analysis.
These analyses are similar to static analyses and take the same amount of time to complete. At
the completion of each solution, the forcing frequency, its largest calculated deflection, and the
phase angle associated with it are listed. The root results for each frequency, and the system
deflections, are saved for further processing. Only twenty frequencies may be carried beyond
this point and into the output processor. When all frequencies are analyzed, the software
presents the frequencies. You can then select the frequencies and phase angles needed for
further analysis. This choice can be made after checking deflections at pertinent nodes for those
frequencies.

Selecting Phase Angles

Phased solutions are generated when damping is considered or when you enter phase angles in
the dynamic input.
For all phased harmonic analyses, you can select separate phase angle solutions, including the
cycle maxima and minima, for each excitation frequency. Each separate phase angle solution
represents a point in time during one complete cycle of the system response. For a solution
without phase angles, you know when the maximum stresses, forces, and displacements occur.
When phase angles are entered, you do not know when the maximum stresses, forces, and
displacements are going to occur during the cycle. For this reason, the displacements and
stresses are often checked for a number of points during the cycle for each excitation frequency.
You must select these points interactively when the harmonic solution ends.
There is a complete displacement, force, moment, and stress solution for each frequency/phase
selected for output. You have the option of letting the software select the frequency/phase pairs
offering the largest displacements on a system basis. The largest displacement solution usually
represents the largest stress solution, but this is not always guaranteed. The displaced shapes
for the remaining frequencies are processed like static cases, with local force, moment, and
stress calculations. Control then shifts to the Dynamic Output Processor, which provides an
animated display of the harmonic results.
All harmonic results are amplitudes. For example, if a harmonic stress is reported as 15,200 psi,
then the stress due to the dynamic load, which is superimposed onto any steady state
component of the stress, can be expected to vary between +15,200 psi and -15,200 psi. The
total stress range due to this particular dynamic loading is 30,400 psi.

626

CAESAR II User's Guide

Dynamic Analysis

Spectrum
The spectrum analysis procedure can be broken down into:
Calculating the systems natural frequencies, mode shapes, and mass participation factors
Pulling the corresponding response amplitudes from the spectrum table and calculating the
system response for each mode of vibration
Combining the modal responses and directional components of the shock.
The first part of the analysis proceeds exactly as in modal analysis.
After natural frequencies are calculated, system displacements, forces, moments, and stresses
are calculated and combined on the modal level. After all the results are collected, the Dynamic
Output Processor appears. You can review spectral results, natural frequencies, and animated
mode shapes.

Time History
Modal time history analysis follows steps similar to a spectrum analysis. The modes of vibration
of the system are calculated. The dynamic equation of motion is solved through numeric
integration techniques for each mode at a number of successive time steps. The modal results
are then summed, yielding system responses at each time step.
The Dynamic Output Processor displays one load case (and optionally, one load combination)
with the maximum loads developed throughout the load application. You can also request
snap-shot cases at different load levels.

CAESAR II User's Guide

627

Dynamic Analysis

628

CAESAR II User's Guide

SECTION 10

Dynamic Output Processing

In This Section
Dynamic Output Window ............................................................... 629
Dynamic Output Animation Window .............................................. 643
Relief Load Synthesis Results ....................................................... 646

Dynamic Output Window

Shows the load case analysis and results of a dynamic analysis operation. The Dynamic
Output window is accessed directly following completion of the dynamic analysis, or it can be
accessed anytime subsequently from the following commands in the Output menu:
Harmonic - Displays the results from a harmonic analysis.
Frequency/Modal - Displays results from a modal-only solution. This command is also
enabled if a spectrum solution was run.
Spectrum - Displays results from earthquake, water-hammer, and relief valve solutions.
Time History - Displays time history results.

CAESAR II User's Guide

629

Dynamic Output Processing

Window Commands
Open - Opens a different job for output review. You are prompted for
the file; Modal/Spectrum results are stored in *._s files, while Time
History results are stored in *._t files.
Save - Writes the selected reports to file, in ASCII format.
Print - Prints the selected reports. To print a hard copy of the reports
click File > Print. To send reports to a file rather than the printer, click
File > Save, and then type in or select the name of the file. To change
the file name for a new report, select File > Save As.
View Animation - Allows you to view animated motion. Modem and
spectrum results allow animation of the mode shapes, while time
history analysis provides an animated simulation of the system
response to the force-time profile.
Input - Displays the Piping Input window.
View Load Cases - Provides a summary of each dynamic load case
including the spectrum name, scale factor, direction cosines, and node
range.
Word - Sends reports to Microsoft Word.
View Reports - Displays the selected reports in the Dynamic Output
window.

Dynamic Output Window Display Lists

Load Cases Analyzed - Shows the load cases that were analyzed. For spectrum analysis, the
load cases listed constitute all of the spectrum load cases as well as all of the static/dynamic
combinations. For time history analysis, the listed loads are the results maxima case containing
each of the snap-shot cases for the single time history load case, and each of the static/dynamic
combinations.
Report Options - Shows the reports available for the analyzed load cases.
General Results - Lists reports that are not associated with load cases.
For a description of the options, see Report Types (on page 633).
You can select the reports and the load cases you want to view by Use CTRL+ or SHIFT+ and
select one or more load cases and reports. You can send the reports to a printer, print to a file,
save to a file or set to display.
The General Results Reports that display in the right-hand column do not require that a
Report Option be selected highlight to print.

630

CAESAR II User's Guide

Dynamic Output Processing

Open a Job
Opens a different job for output review.
To review an output from a different job, click Open and browse for the output file.
Modal and Spectrum results are stored in *._s files. Time History results are stored in
*._t files.

Enter a Report Title

To include a report title at the top of each page of the report, click Enter Report Titles
.
There are two options for report titles, Edit 2-line Report Title and Edit Load Case Labels.

Click Edit 2-line Report Title and the following dialog box appears.

These two lines will be added to the top of each report page. Enter the report title, and click OK.
Now click Edit Load Case Labels and the following dialog box appears.

Here you can change the names of the load cases as they appear in the reports. Click OK to
close, and then click Done.

CAESAR II User's Guide

631

Dynamic Output Processing

View Load Cases

To review the dynamic load cases including spectrum name, scale factor, direction cosines, and
node range, click View Load Cases

Here you can scroll through the various load cases. Click OK to close.

Send Reports to Microsoft Word

This feature is activated when producing a report and enables the use of all of MS Word
formatting, such as font selection and margin control, and printing features. You can append
multiple reports to form a final report.
All reports that are to be saved in the Word output file need not be declared at one time.
Subsequent reports sent to the file during the session are appended to the file started in the
session. (These output files are only closed when a new output device, file or printer is defined.)
After closing the report, a table of contents is added.
1. To send a report to Microsoft Word, select the reports and click View Reports using
Microsoft Word
.
Microsoft Word automatically opens, and the report is generated.
Hold down the CTRL key to select multiple reports at once.

View Reports
Each report selected is presented, one at a time, for inspection. Scroll through the reports where
necessary. See Report Types (on page 633) for a list of available reports.

View Reports Commands

The following toolbar displays at the top of the report when you click View Reports.
< Previous - Takes you back to the previous report.
> Next - Takes you to the next report.
Find - Enables you to locate and highlight text in the report such as node numbers.
Print - Prints the selected report(s).

632

CAESAR II User's Guide

Dynamic Output Processing

Report Types
Two types of reports are available from the Dynamic Output window: reports that are
associated with specific load cases (the Report Options shown in the center column), and
reports that are not associated with specific load cases (the General Results in the right
column).
For modal analysis, there are no load cases, so the center column is blank.
Reports associated with load cases are those associated with the spectral or time history
displacement solution. The report options are displacements, reactions, forces, moments, and
stresses.

Displacements
Provides the magnitude of the displacement for each load case. The summing methodology for
Spectral analysis results in all positive displacements. For time history analysis, the results
include the applicable sign.
The displacement report gives the maximum displacement that is anticipated because the
application of the dynamic shock. For spectral analysis, note that all of the displacement values
are positive. The direction of the displacement is indeterminate. For example, there is a
tendency for the system to oscillate because of the potential energy stored after undergoing
some maximum dynamic movement. The displacements printed are relative to the movement of
the earth.

Restraints
Provides the magnitude of the reactions for each load case. A typical entry is shown below.
NODE

FX

716
649
2X(1)

The first line for each node contains the maximum load that occurred at some time during the
dynamic event. The second line for each node contains the maximum modal contribution to the
load. The third line for each node tells the mode and loading that was responsible for the
maximum. This form of the report permits easy identification of the culprit modes.
The mode identification line is broken down as follows:
2

(1)

mode

load direction

(load component)

For example, at node 5 the resultant dynamic load due to the shock was 716. The largest modal
component (of the 716) was 649, due to mode 2, and produced by the first X direction
component (either the first support motion set for displacement response spectrum analysis, or
the first force set for force response spectrum analysis). This form of dynamic output report
enables you to know if there is a problem. If there is a problem, it enables you to identify which
mode of vibration and load component is the major contributor to the problem.
If the component shows up as a (P), then it was the pseudo-static (seismic anchor movement)
contribution of the loading that resulted in the major component of the response. If the

CAESAR II User's Guide

633

Dynamic Output Processing

component shows up as an (M), it indicates a missing mass contribution. A typical restraint
report is shown below.

Local Forces
Provides elemental forces and moments in the element local a-b-c coordinate system. The a-b-c
coordinate system is defined below.
For straight pipe not connected to an intersection:
a is along the element axis (for example, perpendicular to the pipe cross-section)
b is a XY, unless a is vertical and then b is along the X axis
c is a Xb.
For bends and elbows, and for each segment end:
a is along the element axis (perpendicular to the pipe cross-section)
b is to the plane of the bend
c is a Xb.
For intersections, and for each segment framing into the intersection:
a is along the element axis (perpendicular to the pipe cross-section)
b is to the plane of the intersection
c is a Xb.
The X indicates the vector cross product.
Force, moment, and stress reports are similar to restraint reports in that each has the maximum
response, followed by:
1. Modal maximum

634

CAESAR II User's Guide

Dynamic Output Processing

2. Modal maximum load identifier.
All force/moment reports are set up to represent the forces and moments that act on the end of
the element to keep the element in equilibrium.

Global Forces
Contains information identical to information provided for Local Forces (on page 634), except
that it is oriented along the global X, Y, and Z axes. A typical report is shown below.

CAESAR II User's Guide

635

Dynamic Output Processing

Stresses
Contains axial, bending, maximum octahedral, and code stresses, as well as in-plane and
out-of-plane stress intensification factors. These reports contain mode and modal maximum
data. A typical report is shown below.

636

CAESAR II User's Guide

Dynamic Output Processing

Forces/Stresses
Summarizes the forces and code stresses for a particular load case. This report contains
maximum responses, the calculated stress, and the calculated stress allowable.

CAESAR II User's Guide

637

Dynamic Output Processing

Cumulative Usage
Shows on an element-by-element basis the impact of each load case on the total fatigue
allowable and the cumulative impact of all simultaneously-selected load cases. This report is
available only for one or more fatigue stress types. Only one report is generated, regardless of
the number of selected fatigue load cases. If the total usage factor exceeds 1.0; it implies fatigue
failure under that loading condition.

Mass Participation Factors

Provides one number for each mode and load direction for a dynamic load case. This value
provides you with an understanding of the effect that the dynamic loading and the mass had on

638

CAESAR II User's Guide

Dynamic Output Processing

the particular mode. The absolute magnitude has no significance; only the relationship between
values for a single load case is important.

CAESAR II User's Guide

639

Dynamic Output Processing

Natural Frequencies
Calculated modal natural frequencies are reported in Hertz and radians per second. The period
is reported in seconds.

Modes Mass Normalized

Scales the largest displacement in the mode shape to the largest mass in the model.

Modes Unity Normalized

Scales the largest displacement in the mode shape to 1.0, with all other displacements and
rotations scaled accordingly. This mode report is the easiest way to get an understanding of the
mode shape.
The example below shows two mode shapes from a small job. In the first mode, the largest
single component is in the Y direction. In the second mode, the largest single component is in
the Z direction.

640

CAESAR II User's Guide

Dynamic Output Processing

Unity normalized means that the largest displacement component in the mode is set to
1.0, and all other displacement values are scaled accordingly.

Included Mass Data

Displays the percent of the total system mass/force included in the extracted modes, and the
percent of system mass/force included in the missing mass correction (if any) for each of the
individual shocks of the dynamic load cases. The value gives an indication of the accuracy of
the total system response captured by the dynamic model, with 100% being the ideal.
% Mass Included - Shows the percentage of mass active in each of the X, Y, and Z directions.
% Force Active - Shows the value that is computed by taking the algebraic sum in each of the
global directions, and then applying the SRSS method to each of the three directions. The sums
of the three directions are added vectorally.
% Force Added - Shows the value obtained by subtracting % Force Active from 100.

CAESAR II User's Guide

641

Dynamic Output Processing

Dynamic Input
Lists the input for the piping model or for the dynamic input.

Mass Model
Shows how CAESAR II lumped masses for the dynamic runs. The mass lumping report should
show a fairly uniform distribution of masses. Large or irregular variations in the values must be
investigated. Usually these large values can be reduced by breaking down exceedingly long,
straight runs of pipe.
The mass lumping report, shown below is very uniform in distribution, and should produce a
good dynamic solution. CAESAR II ignores rotational terms.

642

CAESAR II User's Guide

Dynamic Output Processing

Active Boundary Conditions
Shows how CAESAR II deals with the nonlinear restraints in the job. It shows which directional
supports are included, which gaps are assumed closed, and how friction resistance is modeled.

Dynamic Output Animation Window

The Dynamic Output Animation window enables you to review analytic results in graphic
mode. This window shares the same general capabilities as the Piping Input window. It uses the
3D/HOOPS graphic standard toolbar that provides zoom, orbit, pan, and several other
navigation options. It also provides the ability to switch views and modes. You can open the
animation windows by clicking Output > Animation and then selecting the appropriate
animation type.
Dynamic Output Animation window can be activated from the Dynamic Output window by
clicking View Animation .
The animation commands enable you to view animated motion of the system for static
displacements or various dynamic movements. The mode and spectrum results, for example,
allow animation of the mode shapes, while time history analysis provides an animated
simulation of the system response to the force-time profile.
A piping model is shown in its default state (volume mode, isometric view, orthographic
projection). If necessary, you can display the model using an isometric view, or by any of the
defined orthographic views: Front/Back, Top/Bottom, or Left/Right by clicking the corresponding
toolbar buttons. You can interactively rotate, zoom, or pan the model. Zoom to Window and
Zoom to Selection options are also available.

CAESAR II User's Guide

643

Dynamic Output Processing

Perspective or orthographic projections can also be set. Node numbers can be displayed by
clicking Nodes. The desired load case or mode shape can be selected from the corresponding
drop down list. The frequency of the load case associated with the animation is shown at the top
of the view plot whenever the Action > Titles option is selected.
The Animated Plot menu displays several plot selections. Motion and Volume Motion activate
the animation. The Motion command uses the centerline representation while Volume Motion
produces the volume graphics image. Each of the motion options causes the graphics processor
to animate the current plot. If Node Numbers is clicked, the node number text is moved
together with the corresponding node. When the plot is animated in the window, it may be sped
up, slowed down, or stopped using appropriate the toolbar command. After selecting a different
load case or mode shape from the drop down list, the motion automatically stops. Select one of
the motion commands again to activate the model movement.
The File > Print Motion command prints all of the vibration positions of the current mode. It is
not available for time history animation. For clarity purposes, we recommend you use the single
line (Motion) option to generate the printouts.

Save Animation to File

The animated graphics can be saved to a file by clicking Create an Animation File.
Alternatively, you can access this command from the Dynamic Plot File > Save as Animation.
After activating this command, the standard MS Windows Save As dialog box displays and
prompts you to enter the file name and directory to save the files. By default the current file
name and current data directory is used. There are two file types that are created: an HTML file
and an HSF file. To view the saved animation, find the corresponding HTML file and double-click
it. The corresponding HSF file containing the animation routines is displayed. The HTML file
contains buttons to play or pause the animation. The model can also be viewed at different
orthogonal planes, or returned to the isometric view.
The HTML is an interactive file.
The first time a CAESAR II file is created, the HTML file is opened with your default internet
browser. The software displays a message requesting permission to download a control from
Tech Soft 3D. Click Yes to allow the download, after which the image displays. After the model
appears, right-click the model to view the available options such as orbit, pan, zoom, and/or
different render modes. The image can be printed or copied to the clipboard.

Animation of Static Results -Displacements

You can view the piping system as it moves to the displaced position for the basic load cases.
To animate the static results, click Static Output > Options > View Animation.
You can click View Animation
to view graphic animation of the displacement
solution.
Static animation graphics has all the standard model projection and motion toolbar commands.
The load case can be selected from the drop-down list. The title consists of the load case name
followed by the file name, and can be toggled on and off from the Action menu.
The Static Animation processor allows viewing of the single line and volume motion, controls
the speed of the movement, and the animation can be saved to a file as described above.
We recommend you use the Deflected Shape command button on the 3D/HOOPS
Graphics view of the Static Output Processor toolbar. For more information refer to
3D/HOOPS Graphics Tutorial for Static Output Processor, Deflected Shape.

644

CAESAR II User's Guide

Dynamic Output Processing

Animation of Dynamic Results Modal/Spectrum

You can view the calculated modes of vibration that correspond to particular natural frequencies
of the system. This feature is available from the Dynamic Output Animation window after running
the modal analysis.
After invoking the modal animation type, the system is displayed in its default state. Natural
frequencies can be selected from the drop-down list to animate the corresponding mode shape.
The title shows the natural frequency in Hz followed by the current file name and the date.
Animated graphics for a particular mode shape (frequency) can be viewed in a single line or
volume mode motion with speed control, and/or saved to an HTML file for later presentation.

Animation of Dynamic Results Harmonic

You can calculate the system response to the excitation frequency. This response can be
animated.
The Harmonics animation module can be launched from the animation Harmonic Output
window by clicking View Animation
. The system displays in its default isometric state.
The animation screen displays the same toolbar options described earlier, which allow single
line and volume motion as well as speed up and slow down options. Occasional cases
corresponding to the excitation frequencies may be selected from the drop down list. The title
shows the currently selected frequency, file name, and the date. The title may be disabled from
the Action menu.
Animated graphics for each analyzed load case can be saved to an HTML file for later
presentation.

Animation of Dynamic Results Time History

The Time History animation window can be launched from the Dynamic Output Animation
window by clicking View Animation . The system displays in the centerline isometric mode.
The model can be rotated, zoomed, or panned and can be set to different orthographic
projections. The current time history time step and the job name are shown in the title on the top
of the graphics view. Due to complexity of the time history calculations and to decrease the
animation time, the animation is only available in centerline mode.
Save Animation to File is not available in the time history animation for the same
reason.
An additional feature of the Time History animation module is the Element Viewer. The
Element Viewer displays specific element information for a given time step. After clicking
Element Viewer, the Element Info dialog box displays the nodal displacements, forces,
moments, code stress, and SIF information provided for the current element at a current time
step. Clicking Next >> or Previous << changes the information to correspond to the next or
previous element in the system for the same time step.
When you click Motion
to start the animation, the current time step is displayed in the title
line, and the task bar at the bottom of the window shows the progress.

CAESAR II User's Guide

645

Dynamic Output Processing

There are several ways to move the model:

You can increase

, decrease
, or stop
the animation speed.
Click Next >> or Previous << while the Element Info dialog box is active to update the
information for the current element for the next or previous time step. If the animation is
stopped, this advances or moves back the animation one step. Click View Animation again
after you stop the animation to continue the time history motion from the location (the time
step) where the animation was stopped.
Click Plot the First Time Step or Plot the Last Time Step to bring the animation to the
beginning or the end, correspondingly.
Drag the time slider to the appropriate time step. The position of the bar adjusts
automatically as the animation progresses. You can click on the slider and then drag it along
the time-line to find the time step you want, or to see the displaced shape of the model.
If the Element Info dialog box is active, the highlighted element information is updated to
correspond to the current time step.
You can enable the node numbers; however, we recommend node numbering be disabled
when using animation. As the animated elements move, the node numbers are redrawn for
every position in the system. This creates a blinking effect that makes it hard to follow the
animation.

Relief Load Synthesis Results

Relief Load Synthesis and Tools > Relief Load Synthesis calculates the magnitudes of
relieving thrust forces. Results are calculated for liquids and for gases greater than 15 psig. This
command is only available when Relief Loads (spectrum) and Time History are selected as
Analysis Type. For more information, see Relief Load Synthesis (on page 613).
Example Output - Gas Relief Load Synthesis (on page 619)
Example Output - Liquid Relief Load Synthesis (on page 623)

646

CAESAR II User's Guide

SECTION 11

Generate Stress Isometrics Overview

Generate Stress Isometrics
on the Home tab creates stress isometric drawings. Using
Stress Isometric Annotations you can include the piping model data created by CAESAR II in
the display area and then generate a stress isometric drawing. CAESAR II classifies the piping
model data as input and output. The data you enter to define a piping model is the input data,
and the data generated by CAESAR II after analyzing a model is the output data.
The Stress Isometric Tutorials (on page 662) are design to familiarize you to the interface and
explain the procedures in more detail with the help of examples and illustrations. We
recommend you read the tutorials and follow the instructions if you have not previously created
a stress isometric drawing. The tutorials instruct you in a step-by-step manner to open a piping
model, add annotations, and create a stress isometric drawing.

CAESAR II User's Guide

647

Generate Stress Isometrics Overview

In This Section
Add input feature information......................................................... 648
Add output feature information ...................................................... 650
Add custom annotations for nodal features ................................... 651
Add custom annotations for elemental features ............................ 653
Set Project Information .................................................................. 654
Configure annotation preferences ................................................. 655
Configure isometric drawing split points ........................................ 656
Create a drawing using the default style ....................................... 658
Create a drawing using an existing style ....................................... 659
Create a drawing using a new style ............................................... 659
Create and save an annotation template ....................................... 661
Apply a Template ........................................................................... 661
Stress Isometric Tutorials .............................................................. 662

Add input feature information

The Input tab of the Stress Isometrics Annotations pane displays a list of input features
available in CAESAR II. You can select various features from the Feature list to view
information related to a feature.
1. Select File > Open to open a model.
2. On the Home tab, click Generate Stress Isometrics
to open the model in the C2Isogen
module.
3. Select StressIso > Annotations to open the Stress Isometric Annotations pane.
The Input tab is active by default.
4. Click the Feature list to select an input feature.
The nodes associated to the feature or the model parameters are displayed under the
Feature list.
5. Select the check boxes in the Select column to view the feature information on the
associated node in the display area. Select the check box again to clear the selection.
6. Similarly, you can select other input features in the Feature list to view nodes or elements
associated to the selected features.
7. Select StressIso > Save Annotation to save annotations for the selected input information.

648

The nodes and model parameters are available for selection only if the input feature is used
to analyze the model.
Model parameters such as Diameter, Insulation thickness, and Wall Thickness are indicated
in the drawing only when there is a change in these parameters.
To select all the nodes in the list, select first check box, press SHIFT, and then select the
last check box in the list.

CAESAR II User's Guide

Generate Stress Isometrics Overview

To remove a node or an element from a selection set, click the annotation tag in the display,
area and then press DELETE.

CAESAR II User's Guide

649

Generate Stress Isometrics Overview

Add output feature information

The Output tab defines what result information generated by CAESAR II after analyzing a
model to include in the drawing. The Load Cases list on the Output tab displays the load cases
used to analyze the model. The hanger data is not specific to a load case, and is available for
selection as a separate option. The analysis results are categorized as Displacement,
Restraints, and Stresses in the Results box.
1. Select File > Open to open a model.
2. On the Home tab, click Generate Stress Isometrics
to open the model in the C2Isogen
module.
3. Select StressIso > Annotations to open the Stress Isometric Annotations pane.
The Input tab is active by default.
4. Select the Output tab to view the load cases used to analyze the model.
5. Click Load Cases to select a load case.
The results generated for the load case are listed in the Results box.
6. Select the result type you want, and then select the nodes to include the information for
annotation.
7. Select StressIso > Save Annotation to save annotations for the selected output
information.

650

The Node number, Node Name, and Description columns display information entered in
CAESAR II and cannot be edited.
The output features are available for selection only if the piping model is analyzed.
The Load Cases list displays load cases created for static analysis only.

CAESAR II User's Guide

Generate Stress Isometrics Overview

To remove a node or an element from a selection set, click the annotation tag in the display
area, and then press DELETE.

Add custom annotations for nodal features

The Nodal Annotations tab adds your custom notes to the drawing for each node that you
select. The Node # and Node Name columns display the node information you enter in
CAESAR II. You can type your comments for the available nodes in the User Annotations
column.
1. Select File > Open to open a model.
2. On the Home tab, click Generate Stress Isometrics
to open the model in the C2Isogen
module.
3. Select StressIso > Annotations.
4. Select the Nodal Annotations tab to view a list of all the nodes in the model.
5. To add a note for a node, click the associated cell in the User Annotation column and then
type your note.
6. Select StressIso > Save Annotation to save custom annotations.

CAESAR II User's Guide

651

Generate Stress Isometrics Overview

The comments you add in the User Annotations column can be viewed only in the
drawing, tags for user annotations are not visible in the display area.

652

CAESAR II User's Guide

Generate Stress Isometrics Overview

Add custom annotations for elemental features

The Elemental Annotations tab lists all the elements of the model, you can add custom
remarks for each element in the User Annotation column on this tab. The From, From Name,
To, and To Name columns display the information you enter for each node in CAESAR II. To
add personal notes for the elements:
1. Select File > Open to open a model.
2. On the Home tab, click Generate Stress Isometrics
to open the model in the C2Isogen
module.
3. Select StressIso > Annotations.
4. Select the Elemental Annotations tab to view a list of model elements.
5. To add a comment for an element, click the associated cell in the User Annotations
column, and then type your comment.
6. Select StressIso > Save Annotation to save custom annotations.
The comments you add in the User Annotations column can be viewed only in the
drawing, tags for user annotations are not visible in the display area.

CAESAR II User's Guide

653

Generate Stress Isometrics Overview

Set Project Information

The Project Attributes tab defines general information about your project.
1. Select File > Open to open a model.
2. On the Home tab, click Generate Stress Isometrics
to open the model in the C2Isogen
module.
3. Select StressIso > Annotations.
4. Select the Project Attributes tab.
5. Type values for each attribute in the Attribute Value column.
6. Select StressIso > Save Annotation to save the values.

654

CAESAR II User's Guide

Generate Stress Isometrics Overview

Configure annotation preferences

The Settings tab on the Stress Isometric Annotations pane lists all the input and output
features available for annotation. You select a text box shape for each feature allowing you to
represent information in different text box shapes on the drawing. The feature information is then
displayed in the drawing according to the shape you select.
1. Select File > Open to open a model.
2. On the Home tab, click Generate Stress Isometrics
to open the model in the C2Isogen
module.
3. Select StressIso > Annotations.
4. Select the Settings tab to view the list of features.
5. Click TextBox Shape list associated to a feature, and then select a text box shape for the
feature.
6. Select StressIso > Save Annotation to save annotation preferences.
The text box shapes you select for different features are visible only in the drawing.

CAESAR II User's Guide

655

Generate Stress Isometrics Overview

Configure isometric drawing split points

The Split tab defines the split points for new isometric drawings. For example, your model
contains nodes 10 through 250. If you select nodes 90 and 170 for example, the first isometric
drawing will have nodes 10 through 80. The second isometric drawing will have nodes 90
through 160, and the third isometric drawing will have nodes 170 through 250.
1. Select File > Open to open a model.
2. On the Home tab, click Generate Stress Isometrics
to open the model in the C2Isogen
module.
3. Select StressIso > Annotations.
4. Select the Split tab.
5. In the Split column, select the nodes at which to start new isometric drawings.

656

CAESAR II User's Guide

Generate Stress Isometrics Overview

6. Select StressIso > Save Annotation to save the values.

CAESAR II User's Guide

657

Generate Stress Isometrics Overview

Create a drawing using the default style

1

You can use different drawing styles to create a drawing. Using the Isometric Drawing
Generation dialog box you can select a style or create a new style. Selecting the default style to
create a drawing applies predefined set of styles and rules to the drawing. Use this option if you
are not familiar with the drawing styles, or, if you do not want to create a custom drawing style.
To create a drawing using the default style:
1. Select File > Open to open a model.
2. On the Home tab, click Generate Stress Isometrics
to open the model in the C2Isogen
module.
3. Select StressIso > Create Drawing to open the Isometric Drawing Generation dialog
box.
4. Select Use Default Style, and then click OK to create drawings.
The Drawings dialog box displays a list of drawings created for the piping model.
5. Select the drawings to view, and then click View to open the drawings in your default
viewer.

The drawings created using the default style are saved in the same folder as the piping
model.
The unit system used in creating the pipe model is used in the drawing, by default.
You cannot make any changes to the default drawing style.
The drawing status message displays the number of files and drawings created for the
model, and reports the errors generated during creation of the drawing.

A drawing style is a set a parameters that you define to represent your piping system drawing.
These parameters typically include drawing format, drawing size, drawing frame, units, and
options to display other information like materials list, weld list, and so on.

658

CAESAR II User's Guide

Generate Stress Isometrics Overview

Create a drawing using an existing style

Using this option you can apply an existing drawing style and create a drawing. You must have
an existing style to use this option. You can create a new style using C2Isogen, or some other
application like Alias I-Configure. To create a drawing using an existing style:
1. Select File > Open to open a model.
2. On the Home tab, click Generate Stress Isometrics
to open the model in the C2Isogen
module.
3. Select StressIso > Create Drawing to open the Isometric Drawing Generation dialog
box.
4. Select Use Existing Style, and then click OK to open the Select Existing Style dialog box.
2
5. To select an isometric directory for your project, click Browse, and then select the root
directory.
3
6. To select a project , click Browse, and then select a project.
7. To select an isometric style, click Browse, and then select the style you want to apply.
8. Click Create Drawing to open the Drawings dialog box.
9. Select the drawings to view, and then click View to open the drawings in your default
viewer.
You must follow the standard folder structure to save the project file and the styles.

Create a drawing using a new style

Using this feature you can customize various parameters associated to a drawing such as the
drawing frame, units, drawing size, and so on. To create a new style you must first create an

An isometric directory is the root directory for files associated to a style. An isometric directory
can contain many projects.
3
Projects are create in an isometric directory and contain different drawing styles.

CAESAR II User's Guide

659

Generate Stress Isometrics Overview

isometric directory. The style you create is saved in a project that is created when you create an
isometric directory for a new style. To define and create a new style:
1. Select File > Open to open a model.
2. On the Home tab, click Generate Stress Isometrics
to open the model in the C2Isogen
module.
3. Select StressIso > Create Drawing to open the Isometric Drawing Generation dialog
box.
4. Select Create New Style, and then click OK to open the Isometric Style Configuration
dialog box.
5. To the right of Create New Isometric Directory, click Browse to select an empty folder, or
create a new folder.
6. Under Create New Isometric Directory, click Create to generate the required folder
structure and files.
4
7. To select a drawing frame , click Browse and select a drawing frame in the Open Drawing
Frame Template dialog box.
8. Similarly, to specify a folder to save your drawings in Drawing Path, click Browse and
select a folder.
9. Select Units to select a unit system for your drawing.
10. Select Drawing Size to select a size for the drawing.
11. Click Create Drawing to save the style you created and generate drawing files.
12. On the Drawings dialog box, select the files you want to view, and then click View to open
the drawings in your default viewer.

You must choose an empty folder to create an isometric directory.

If you want to delete an existing style, you must use to delete the style.

Drawing frames are the backing sheets used to create your drawing. By default, different types
of drawing frames are generated when you create a new style.

660

CAESAR II User's Guide

Generate Stress Isometrics Overview

Create and save an annotation template

You can create a standard template and apply this template to different piping models. The
selections that you make while creating a template are then applied to the new model. To
include nodes or elements associated to an input feature you must select all the nodes or
elements of that feature. To create and save a template:
1. Select File > Open to open a model.
2. On the Home tab, click Generate Stress Isometrics
to open the model in the C2Isogen
module.
3. Select StressIso > Annotations to open the Stress Isometric Annotations pane.
4. Select the Input tab.
5. From the Feature list, select an input feature that you want to include in your template.
6. To select all the nodes or elements, press SHIFT and then select the first and the last check
box of the list.
7. Similarly, select all the nodes and elements of other input features that you want to include
in your template.
8. To define annotation preferences for your template, click the Settings tab and select text
box shapes for the input features.
9. Select StressIso > Save Template to open the Save Annotation Template dialog box.
10. On the Save Annotation Template dialog box, type a file name and then click Save to save
the template.
Only input features can be selected and saved as a template.

Apply a Template
You can apply an existing template to a new piping model. All the selections made while
creating a template are applied to the new model along with the annotation preferences. You
can apply a template to a piping model only if a stress Iso file associated to the model does not
already exist. To apply an annotation template to a new model.
1. Select File > Open to open a model.
2. On the Home tab, click Generate Stress Isometrics
to open the model in the C2Isogen
module.
3. Select StressIso > Apply Template to open the Open Annotation Template dialog box.
4. Select the template file to use, and then click Open to apply the template.
5. To clear all annotations, select StressIso > Reset Annotation.
6. To save the applied annotations, select StressIso > Save Annotation.

CAESAR II User's Guide

661

Generate Stress Isometrics Overview

Stress Isometric Tutorials

Topics
Tutorial A - Creating a stress isometric drawing using the default drawing
style ................................................................................................ 662
Tutorial B - Adding annotations for Input and Output features ...... 664
Tutorial C - Adding custom annotations and configure annotations
preferences .................................................................................... 667
Tutorial D - Creating and applying a stress iso template ............... 670

Tutorial A - Creating a stress isometric drawing using the

default drawing style
Using Stress Isometric Annotations you can annotate the input and output features from
CAESAR II and generate a drawing in different formats. Stress Isometric Annotations provides
you the flexibility to define different drawing styles to create a drawing. This tutorial directs you
to open a file in CAESAR II and create a drawing using the default drawing style.

Topics
Opening an existing CAESAR II file .............................................. 662
Creating a drawing using the default style ..................................... 663

662

CAESAR II User's Guide

Generate Stress Isometrics Overview

Opening an existing CAESAR II file

1. Select Start > Intergraph CAS > CAESAR II > CAESAR II.
2. Select File > Open.
3. On the Open dialog box, click the Examples button on the right side.
This opens the Examples folder.
4. Select RELIEF.c2 from the file list, and then click Open.
5. On the Home tab, click Generate Stress Isometrics
module.

to open the model in the C2Isogen

Creating a drawing using the default style

To create a drawing using the default drawing style:
1. Select StressIso > Create Drawing to open the Isometric Drawing Generation dialog
box. You can select an existing drawing style, create new style, or use the default drawing
style to create a drawing.
2. Select Use Default Style, and then click OK to generate the drawing files.
The drawing files you create using default style are saved in the model folder.

CAESAR II User's Guide

663

Generate Stress Isometrics Overview

3. Select the drawing from the list, and then click View to view the drawing in your default
viewer or select an application in the Open With dialog box.
The drawing you created without any annotations displays.

664

CAESAR II User's Guide

Generate Stress Isometrics Overview

Tutorial B - Adding annotations for Input and Output

features
This tutorial instructs you on how to annotate input and output features of a model. The Stress
Isometric Annotations pane lists all the input and output features used in the CAESAR II file.

Topics
Adding annotations for input features ............................................ 665
Adding annotations for output features .......................................... 666

Adding annotations for input features

In Tutorial A (see "Tutorial A - Creating a stress isometric drawing using the default drawing
style" on page 662), we learned to open a CAESAR II file and create a drawing without any
annotations. All the information associated to the input features is saved in the CAESAR II file
when you define specific inputs for a model. You can make the drawing more insightful by
adding this information to the drawing. In this part of the tutorial we add annotations for input
features to the Relief.c2 file.
1. Select File > Open.
2. On the Open dialog box, click the Examples button on the right side.
3. Select RELIEF.c2 from the file list, and then click Open.
4. On the Home tab, click Generate Stress Isometrics
to open the model in the C2Isogen
module.
5. Select StressIso > Annotations to open the Stress Isometric Annotations pane. By
default, the pane opens the Input tab.

6. The Feature list displays all the input features available in CAESAR II. Depending on the
feature you select a list of nodes associated to the feature is displayed.

CAESAR II User's Guide

665

Generate Stress Isometrics Overview

Click the check boxes in the Select column if you want to include the information associated
to the node or element in your drawing. For example, select Node Numbers in the Feature
list, and then select nodes 110 and 115. Annotations for the selected node numbers are
added to the model and are visible in the display area.

Adding annotations for output features

Similar to the input features, CAESAR II file saves the result data after you analyze a model.
The Output tab lists the load cases used for the stress analysis and classifies them as
Displacement, Restraint, and Stresses induced in the model for each case. You can make this
result data available in the drawing by selecting nodes and elements displayed for the result
type.
To add annotations for output features:
1. Select the Output tab to view the load cases used for stress analysis.

666

CAESAR II User's Guide

Generate Stress Isometrics Overview

2. The Load Cases list displays a list of load cases used in the analysis, the results generated
for each load case are listed in the Results box. You can view a list of nodes or elements
for each result set and then select nodes and elements you want to annotate. Let us
consider Load Case 3 and then select elements 75-80 and 110-115 for Stress. You can now
view the annotations for the selected elements in the display area.

Tutorial C - Adding custom annotations and configure

annotations preferences
Along with annotating input and output features you can also add custom notes to the nodes
and elements of a model. The annotations you add can be represented in different formats to
improve drawing readability. In this tutorial we learn to add custom notes to nodes and elements
and choose representation formats for the features.

Topics
Adding custom annotations ........................................................... 667
Configuring annotation preferences .............................................. 669

Adding custom annotations

In the earlier tutorial we learned to add annotations for input and output features. In this tutorial
we continue adding annotations to Relief.c2 file we opened in Opening an existing CAESAR II
file (on page 662).
To add custom annotations:

CAESAR II User's Guide

667

Generate Stress Isometrics Overview

Select Nodal Annotations tab to view the list of nodes defined in the model. You can now add
your remarks in the User Annotations cell associated to each node. For example, click the cell
associated to node 80 and type This is a user annotation for node 80.

1. Similarly, select Elemental Annotations tab to view the list of elements in the model and
add your remarks in the User Annotation cell associated to the element you want to
annotate. Here we add a note for element 75-80.
2. Click the User Annotations cell associated to element 75-80 and type This is a custom
annotation for element 75-80.

668

CAESAR II User's Guide

Generate Stress Isometrics Overview

The custom annotations you add are not shown in the display area and can be viewed only
in the drawing.

Configuring annotation preferences

All the information that you annotate in your drawing can be represented in different formats,
selecting different textbox shapes to display different feature can make the drawing more easy
to understand. In this part of the tutorial we learn to configure annotation preferences for the
drawing.
It is evident in the drawing illustrated in the first part of this tutorial that all the annotations you
made are displayed in a rectangular box. This makes it difficult to differentiate between the
input, output, and custom annotations added to the drawing. To choose different formats to
represent your annotations:
1. Select the Settings tab to view the list of input, output, and custom annotation features. You
can select different box shapes for the features you annotate.

CAESAR II User's Guide

669

Generate Stress Isometrics Overview

2. Let us select Circle for Node Numbers, No Box for Output Stress Data, and Filleted
Rectangle for Nodal Annotations and Elemental Annotations.

You cannot view these changes in the display area, the changes you made are updated
when you create a drawing.

670

CAESAR II User's Guide

Generate Stress Isometrics Overview

Tutorial D - Creating and applying a stress iso template

This tutorial instructs you to create a template for stress iso annotations .You can apply this
template to your piping models and ensure consistency in representation of the input features in
the drawing. Only input features of a model can be included in a template, we recommend you
open a piping model that has all the input features you want to include in your template.

Topics
Creating a template ....................................................................... 671
Applying a template ....................................................................... 673

Creating a template
In this tutorial we learn to create and save a stress iso annotation template. For this tutorial,
open Relief.c2 from the CAESAR II example folders.
To create a template:
1. Select StressIso > Annotation to open the Stress Isometric Annotations pane. You can
only include the input features in a template. To include an input feature in a template you
must select all the nodes listed for that feature.

CAESAR II User's Guide

671

Generate Stress Isometrics Overview

2. Click the Feature list, select a feature, and then select all the nodes listed for the feature.
For example let us select all the nodes listed for the Restraint/hanger Types feature.

3. Similarly, select all the nodes or elements of other input features that you want to include.
4. Select Settings tab to specify a text box shape for the input feature you selected in the
earlier part of this tutorial. Let us select Filleted Rectangle for the Restraint/hanger types
feature.
5. Select StressIso > Save Template to save your selections as a template. A template file
with .ist extension is saved in the model folder.

672

CAESAR II User's Guide

Generate Stress Isometrics Overview

Applying a template
After you create and save a template, you can apply this template to your piping models. When
you select all the nodes of a feature to create a template, that input feature gets selected when
you apply the template to a new piping model. You can clear the selections if you do not want to
display all the nodes or elements of the input feature included in a template.
This part of the tutorial directs you on how to apply a saved template to a piping model. You can
apply a template to a piping model only if the model is not already annotated and the stress iso
file (.iso) associated to the model does not exist.
To apply a template to a new model:
1. Select Start > Intergraph CAS > CAESAR II > CAESAR II.
2. Select File > Open.
3. On the Open dialog box, click the Examples button on the right side.
This opens the Examples folder.
4. Select Jacket.c2 from the file list, and then click Open.
5. On the Home tab, click Generate Stress Isometrics
to open the model in the C2Isogen
module.
6. Select StressIso > Apply Annotation, and then select a template file.
7. Select StressIso > Annotation to view the selections you made while creating the template
in the display area.

It can be seen in the above figure that all the nodes listed under Restraint/hanger types are
selected in the new model.

CAESAR II User's Guide

673

SECTION 12

Equipment Component and Compliance

You can use the CAESAR II Equipment and Component Compliance Analysis modules to enter
data and check vessels, flanges, turbines, compressors, pumps and heat exchangers for
excessive piping loads according to appropriate standards. Output reports can be sent to the
printer, the terminal, or saved as a file.
Suction (inlet), discharge (exhaust), and extraction lines are analyzed for forces and moments in
separate runs of pipe stress software. After all of the loadings for a particular piece of equipment
are calculated, you can run an analysis to determine if these loads are acceptable according to
the governing code.
A convenient feature of the analysis modules is the ability to separately analyze the nozzles on
equipment separately. You often only have suction side loads, and the dimensions of the pump
are unknown. In these cases, CAESAR II accepts a zero or a blank entry for the unknown data
and generates a single-nozzle equipment check report. Although overall compliance is not being
evaluated, you can still check individual nozzle limits. This is a valuable tool, especially if you
are more interested in load guidance, rather than some fixed or precise limit on allowables.
The analysis modules are available on the CAESAR II Analysis menu and share the same
interface for easy transition between the modules.
SIFs @ Intersections - Calculates stress intensification factors at intersections. For more
information, see Intersection Stress Intensification Factors (on page 676).
SIFs @ Bends - Calculates stress intensification factors at bends. For more information, see
Bend Stress Intensification Factors (on page 682).
WRC 107/207 - Calculates stresses in vessels due to attached piping. For more information, see
WRC 107/297 Vessel/Nozzle Stresses (on page 689).
Flanges - Performs flange stress and leakage calculations. For more information, see Flange
Leakage/Stress Calculations (on page 694).
B31.G - Estimates pipeline remaining life. For more information, see Pipeline Remaining
Strength Calculations (B31G) (on page 712).
Expansion Joint Rating - Evaluates expansion joints using EJMA equations. For more
information, see Expansion Joint Rating (on page 717).
AISC - Performs AISC code check on structural steel elements. For more information, see
Structural Steel Checks - AISC (on page 722).
NEMA SM23 - Evaluates piping loads on steam turbine nozzles. For more information, NEMA
SM23 (Steam Turbines) (on page 730).
API 610 - Evaluates piping loads on centrifugal pumps. For more information, see API 610
(Centrifugal Pumps) (on page 736).
API 617 - Evaluates piping loads on compressors. For more information, see API 617
(Centrifugal Compressors) (on page 745).
API 661 - Evaluates piping loads on air-cooled heat exchangers. For more information, see API
661 (Air Cooled Heat Exchangers) (on page 753).
HEI Standard - Evaluates piping loads on feedwater heaters. For more information, see Heat
Exchange Institute (on page 758).
API 560 - Evaluates piping loads on fired heaters. For more information, see API 560 (Fired
Heaters for General Refinery Services) (on page 761).

CAESAR II User's Guide

675

Equipment Component and Compliance

In This Section
Intersection Stress Intensification Factors ..................................... 676
Bend Stress Intensification Factors ............................................... 682
WRC 107/297 Vessel/Nozzle Stresses ......................................... 689
Flange Leakage/Stress Calculations ............................................. 694
Pipeline Remaining Strength Calculations (B31G) ........................ 712
Expansion Joint Rating .................................................................. 717
Structural Steel Checks - AISC...................................................... 722
NEMA SM23 (Steam Turbines) ..................................................... 730
API 610 (Centrifugal Pumps) ......................................................... 736
API 617 (Centrifugal Compressors) ............................................... 745
API 661 (Air Cooled Heat Exchangers) ......................................... 753
Heat Exchange Institute ................................................................. 758
API 560 (Fired Heaters for General Refinery Services) ................ 761

Intersection Stress Intensification Factors

Analysis > SIFs @ Intersections computes intersection stress intensification factors (SIFs) for
any of the three-pipe type intersections available in CAESAR II. To begin, specify a new job
name in the New Job Name Specification dialog box or click Browse to navigate to an existing
job file.
All CAESAR II analyses require a job name for identification purposes. After you have
created, or opened, a job, you can enter input data on the Global Input and Local Member
tabs and Output menus to define, analyze, and review your data.

676

CAESAR II User's Guide

Equipment Component and Compliance

The software opens the Intersection Stress Intensification Factors window.

CAESAR II User's Guide

677

Equipment Component and Compliance

Enter the necessary problem-specific data in the input fields, and then click Run Analysis
to
run the analysis. After processing is complete, stress intensification factors are reported for a
range of different configuration values on the Output tab, as shown below.

Topics
Intersection Type ........................................................................... 679
Piping Code ID ............................................................................... 679
Header Pipe Outside Diameter ...................................................... 680
Header Pipe Wall Thickness.......................................................... 680
Branch Pipe Outside Diameter ...................................................... 680
Branch Pipe Wall Thickness .......................................................... 680
Branch Largest Diameter at Intersection ....................................... 680
Pad Thickness ............................................................................... 681
Intersection Crotch Radius ............................................................ 681
Intersection Crotch Thickness ....................................................... 681
Extrusion Crotch Radius ................................................................ 681
Weld Type ...................................................................................... 681
Ferritic Material .............................................................................. 682
Design Temperature ...................................................................... 682

678

CAESAR II User's Guide

Equipment Component and Compliance

Intersection Type
Specifies the intersection type to be reviewed. After you click Run Analysis
, the software
generates tables that show the relationship between the SIFs for the entered piping code, WRC
329, ASME III (NC and ND), and Schneider recommendations. You can choose from the
following:
Reinforced Fabricated Tee
Unreinforced Fabricated Tee
Welding Tee
Sweepolet
Weldolet
Extruded Welding Tee
Bonney Forge Sweepolet
Bonney Forge Latrolet
Bonney Forge Insert Weldolet

Piping Code ID
Specifies the piping code ID. The following piping codes are allowed:
1 - B31.1
3 - B31.3
4 - B31.4
5 - B31.5
8 -B31.8 & B31.8, Chapter VIII
10 - B31.9
11 - B31.11
12 - ASME Sect.III, Class 2
13 - ASME Sect.III, Class 3
14 - Navy 505 (1984)
15 - CAN/CSA Z662
16 - CAN/CSA Z662, Chapter 11
17 - BS 806 (1993) (Issue 1, September 1993)
18 - Swedish Method 1, 2nd Edition Stockholm (1979)
19 - Swedish Method 2, 2nd Edition Stockholm (1979)
20 - B31.1 (1967)
21 - Stoomwezen
22 - RCC-M C
23 - RCC-M D
24 - CODETI
25 - Norwegian TBK 5-6
26 - FDBR
27 - BS 7159
28 - UKOOA
29 - IGE/TD/12
30 - Det Norske Veritas (DNV) (1996)
31 - B31.4, Chapter IX (Offshore)

CAESAR II User's Guide

679

Equipment Component and Compliance

32 - EN-13480
33 - GPTC/Z380
34 - PD-8010, Part 1
35 - PD-8010, Part 2
36 - ISO-14692
37 - HPGSL
38 - JPI
For a complete list of current publication dates for piping codes, see the CAESAR II Quick
Reference Guide.

Header Pipe Outside Diameter

Specifies the outside diameter of the matching pipe.
Do not enter the fitting diameter.

Header Pipe Wall Thickness

Specifies the wall thickness of the header matching pipe.
Do not enter the fitting thickness.

Branch Pipe Outside Diameter

Specifies the outside diameter of the matching pipe.
Do not enter the diameter of the fitting.

Branch Pipe Wall Thickness

Specifies the wall thickness of the matching pipe.
Do not enter the wall thickness of the fitting.

Branch Largest Diameter at Intersection

Specifies the largest diameter for the branch pipe fitting at the intersection. See the figures in the
piping code appendices for a more detailed description of this dimension.
This is the largest diameter of any thickened nozzle neck or transition that exists at the
intersection.
Defaults to the matching pipe diameter if omitted.

680

CAESAR II User's Guide

Equipment Component and Compliance

Pad Thickness
Specifies the thickness of the pad on the reinforced fabricated tee.
In most piping codes, the beneficial effect of the thickness of a pad is limited to a thickness less
than 1.5 times the nominal thickness of the fitting. This factor does not apply in BS806 or Z6662,
and is 2.5 in the Swedish piping code.
This option displays only for reinforced fabricated tees.

Intersection Crotch Radius

Specifies the intersection weld crotch radius for WRC329. Specifying this value can result in a
50% reduction in the stress intensification at the intersection when WRC 329 intersection
options are selected.
When you specify this value, you are assuring that there no significant stress riser at the
intersection weld.
To be effective in reducing the stress intensification, this value must be bigger than Tb/2 and
Th/2. You must also check the value (Tb'+y)/2 in the code, where y is the largest thickness at
the intersection. The crotch radius must also be larger than this value.
As of the 2001 addendum, B31.3 uses this value to determine if the fitting meets the
geometric criteria of B16.9 (see Note 8 in Appendix D of B31.3 for details). If this value and the
Intersection Crotch Thickness are defined, CAESAR II applies Note 8 to determine how the
flexibility characteristic is to be computed. If these values are left blank, the software uses the
setting in the configuration file to determine how the flexibility characteristic is to be computed.

Intersection Crotch Thickness

Specifies the thickness of the fitting in the crotch.
As of the 2001 addendum, B31.3 uses this value to determine if the fitting meets the geometric
criteria of B16.9 (see Note 8 in Appendix D of B31.3 for details). If this value and the
Intersection Crotch Radius are defined, CAESAR II applies Note 8 to determine how the
flexibility characteristic is to be computed. If these values are left blank, the software uses the
setting in the configuration file to determine how the flexibility characteristic is to be computed.

Extrusion Crotch Radius

Specifies the crotch radius for extruded welding tees. This option displays only for extruded
welding tees.

Weld Type
Specifies the weld type.
As Welded - This is an unfinished weld.
Finished/Ground Flush - The weld is ground flush on the inside and out and the SIF is 1.0.

CAESAR II User's Guide

681

Equipment Component and Compliance

Ferritic Material
Indicates that the material for this tee is ferrous, which enables the Y value to be computed on
the highest temperature value specified. This option is available for when you select ASME NC
and ASME ND in the Piping Code ID list.

Design Temperature
Specifies the system highest temperature. This value is required for piping codes ASME NC
and ASME ND to calculate material properties.

Bend Stress Intensification Factors

Analysis > SIFs @ Bends provides a scratch pad for determining stress intensification factors
(SIFs) for various bend configurations under different codes. You can compute bend stress
intensification factors for the following:
Pipe bends without any additional attachments. These calculations are done according to
the piping code being used.
Mitered pipe bends. These calculations are done according to the piping code being used.
Pipe bends with a trunnion attachment. These calculations are taken from the paper Stress
Indices for Piping Elbows with Trunnion Attachments for Moment and Axial Loads, by
Hankinson, Budlong and Albano, in the PVP Vol. 129, 1987.
To begin, specify a new job name in the New Job Name Specification dialog box or click
Browse to navigate to an existing job file.
All CAESAR II analyses require a job name for identification purposes. After you have
created, or opened, a job, you can enter input data on the Global Input and Local Member
tabs and Output menus to define, analyze, and review your data.

682

CAESAR II User's Guide

Equipment Component and Compliance

The Bend Stress Intensification Factors window consists of two input tabs--the Bend tab (on
page 684) and the Trunnion tab (on page 687).

In most cases data that does not apply is left blank. For example, to review the SIFs for a
bend that does not have a trunnion, do not enter values for the trunnion-related input fields on
the Trunnion tab.

CAESAR II User's Guide

683

Equipment Component and Compliance

Bend Tab
Topics
Piping Code ID ............................................................................... 684
Pipe Outside Diameter ................................................................... 685
Wall Thickness of Attached Pipe ................................................... 685
Wall Thickness of Bend ................................................................. 685
Bend Radius .................................................................................. 685
Bend Angle (Degrees) ................................................................... 686
Number of Flanges (Laminate Type for BS7159 & UKOOA) ........ 686
Number of Cuts .............................................................................. 686
Seam Welded ................................................................................ 686
Pressure (Design Strain for BS 7159 & UKOOA) .......................... 686
Elastic Modulus .............................................................................. 687
Pressure Stiffening ........................................................................ 687

Piping Code ID
Identifies the piping code. The following piping codes are allowed:
1 - B31.1
3 - B31.3
4 - B31.4
5 - B31.5
8 -B31.8 & B31.8, Chapter VIII
10 - B31.9
11 - B31.11
12 - ASME Sect.III, Class 2
13 - ASME Sect.III, Class 3
14 - Navy 505 (1984)
15 - CAN/CSA Z662
16 - CAN/CSA Z662, Chapter 11
17 - BS 806 (1993) (Issue 1, September 1993)
18 - Swedish Method 1, 2nd Edition Stockholm (1979)
19 - Swedish Method 2, 2nd Edition Stockholm (1979)
20 - B31.1 (1967)
21 - Stoomwezen
22 - RCC-M C
23 - RCC-M D
24 - CODETI
25 - Norwegian TBK 5-6
26 - FDBR
27 - BS 7159
28 - UKOOA
29 - IGE/TD/12
30 - Det Norske Veritas (DNV) (1996)
31 - B31.4, Chapter IX (Offshore)

684

CAESAR II User's Guide

Equipment Component and Compliance

32 - EN-13480
33 - GPTC/Z380
34 - PD-8010, Part 1
35 - PD-8010, Part 2
36 - ISO-14692
37 - HPGSL
38 - JPI
For a complete list of current publication dates for piping codes, see the CAESAR II Quick
Reference Guide.

Pipe Outside Diameter

Defines the pipe outside diameter in the units shown.
Used in the average cross sectional radius calculation:
r2 = (OD - WT) / 2
OD = Outside Diameter as entered
WT = Wall Thickness of attached pipe
The B31.3 code defines r2 as the "mean radius of matching pipe".

Wall Thickness of Attached Pipe

Specifies the matching pipe nominal wall thickness. Do not subtract out any corrosion. All SIF
calculations are made ignoring corrosion.
This wall thickness is used in the (r2), mean radius calculation as defined in the piping codes.

Wall Thickness of Bend

Specifies the thickness of the bend fitting if it is different than the thickness of the matching pipe.
This is the thickness used in the flexibility characteristic equation for (h):
h =
Tn =
r

(Tn)(R) / (ry)
Thickness of bend or fitting
Mean cross sectional radius of matching pipe

Bend Radius
Specify the radius of the bend. The distance from the arc center to the centerline of the bend
curvature.

CAESAR II User's Guide

685

Equipment Component and Compliance

Bend Angle (Degrees)

Specifies the angle between the downstream leg of the bend and a straight line extending along
the upstream leg of the bend. If no value is entered, the software uses the default value of 90.

Number of Flanges (Laminate Type for BS7159 & UKOOA)

Sets the number of rigid fittings that are attached to the end of the bend preventing the
ovalization of the bend .Ovalization provides for a large amount of the flexibility of the bend.
BS-806 (the British Power Piping Code) recommends that flanges or valves (or any rigid
cross-sectional fitting) that are within two diameters of the ending weld point of the bend be
considered as attached to the end of the bend for this calculation.
Attachments to the end of the bend are considered to affect about 30 of the arc of the bend. For
the BS 7159 code, this entry refers to the material laminate type and must be of the following
values:
1 - All chopped strand mat (CSM) construction with internal and external surface tissue
reinforced layer.
2 - Chopped strand mat (CSM) and woven roving (WR) construction with internal and
external surface tissue reinforced layer.
3 - Chopped strand mat (CSM) and multi-filament roving construction with internal and
external surface tissue reinforced layer.
Laminate type affects the calculation of flexibility factors and stress intensification factors
for the BS 7159 code only.

Number of Cuts
Specifies the number of cuts in the miter bend.
If only a single cut is entered, then the bend is always considered to be a widely spaced mitered
bend. For multi-cut miters, CASEAR II uses the radius and the number of cuts to determine if
the miter is closely or widely spaced.

Seam Welded
Indicates when straight pipes are seam welded and affects the SIF calculations for that pipe
section due to seam welded fabrication. This option is only available when IGE/TD/12 is active.

Pressure (Design Strain for BS 7159 & UKOOA)

Specifies the pressure design strain. This is an optional entry, used with the pressure stiffening
calculation.
For the BS 7159 Code, this entry is the material Design Strain, d.

686

CAESAR II User's Guide

Equipment Component and Compliance

Elastic Modulus
Identifies the cold modulus of elasticity. Used with the pressure stiffening calculation. This is an
optional entry.

Pressure Stiffening
Controls the pressure stiffening effects on elbows. Pressure stiffening has its most significant
effect in larger diameter bends adjacent to sensitive equipment (compressors). Including
pressure stiffening where it is not included by default draws more of the system moment to the
nozzle adjacent to the bend.
This option is controlled using the CAESAR II setup file but is most commonly left to the default
condition. The default is different for each piping code because some codes mention pressure
stiffening explicitly, while others do not. Available options are:
Yes - Include pressure stiffening.
No - Remove pressure stiffening.
Default - Follow the piping code default.

Trunnion Tab
There are limits that must be satisfied before SIFs can be calculated on trunnions. These limits
come directly from the paper by Hankinson, Budlong and Albano.
t/T 0.2 and t/T 2.0
D/T 20 and D/T 60
d/D 0.3 and d/D 0.8
Where:
t = Wall thickness of the trunnion
T = Wall thickness of the bend
d = Outside diameter of the trunnion
D = Outside diameter of the bend
To review the SIFs for a bend that does not have a trunnion, do not enter values for
the trunnion-related input fields on the Trunnion tab.

Topics
Outside Diameter ........................................................................... 688
Wall Thickness ............................................................................... 688
Stress Concentration Factor .......................................................... 688
Stress Concentrations and Intensification ..................................... 688

CAESAR II User's Guide

687

Equipment Component and Compliance

Outside Diameter
Specifies the staunchion outside diameter. This is an optional entry, used only if there is a
staunchion or dummy leg attached to the bend. If you define Staunchion OD, you must also
define Wall Thickness.
The stress intensification factors for dummy legs is from the paper: "Stress Indices for Piping
Elbows with Trunnion attachments for Moment and Axial Loads.", PVP Vol. 129, 1987.
The equation (1.7)i = (C2)(K2)is used to get from the calculated (C2) coefficients to the stress
intensification factor (i). If you do not define a value for the stress concentration factor, it defaults
to 2.0.

Wall Thickness
Designates the staunchion wall thickness. This is an optional entry, used only if there is a
staunchion or dummy leg attached to the bend.
The stress intensification factors for dummy legs are from the paper: "Stress Indices for Piping
Elbows with Trunnion attachments for Moment and Axial Loads.", PVP Vol. 129, 1987.
The equation (1.7)i = (C2)(K2) is used to get from the calculated (C2) coefficients to the stress
intensification factor (i). If you do not define a value for the stress concentration factor, it defaults
to 2.0.

Stress Concentration Factor

The equation (1.7)i = (C2)(K2) is used to get from the calculated (C2) coefficients to the stress
intensification factor (i). If you do not define a value for the stress concentration factor, it defaults
to 2.0.

Stress Concentrations and Intensification

Designates the stress intensification calculation for bends with trunnions. It is based on the
relationship between the ASME NB stress indices C2, K2, and the B31 code i factor or stress
intensification factor. That relationship has long been taken to be
(m)(i) = (C2)(K2)
Where:
m = multiplier, usually either 1.7 or 2.
i = B31 stress intensification factor
C2 = ASME NB secondary stress index
K2 = ASME NB peak stress index
The peak stress index (K2) is commonly known as the stress concentration factor. This factor is
the ratio of the highest point stress at an intensification (or an elbow) and the nominal local
computed stress at the same point. Peak stresses typically only exist in a very small volume of
material, on the order of fractions of the wall thickness of the part.
Because most piping components are formed without crude notches, gross imperfections or
other anomalies, the peak stress index is kept well in control. Where a smooth transition radius
is provided which is at least t/2, and where (t) is the characteristic thickness of the part, the peak
stress index is typically taken as 1.0. At unfinished welds, sockets, and where no transition
radius is provided, the peak stress index approaches values of 2.0.

688

CAESAR II User's Guide

Equipment Component and Compliance

If you enter a trunnion (where there will be a weld between the trunnion and the elbow),
and you do not enter a stress concentration factor, CAESAR II assumes a stress concentration
factor of 2.0.

WRC 107/297 Vessel/Nozzle Stresses

Analysis > WRC 107/297 calculates stresses in vessels due to attached piping. The software
opens the WRC 107/297 window.

The module allows multiple analyses to be saved inside the same file. The Job Explorer--the
left pane of the WRC 107/297 window--lists each analysis contained in the job, sorted by
analysis type: WRC-107 or WRC-297. The items in the list are created by combining the item
description and the item number, which can be subsequently changed in the data input window.
The Loads pane, which contains a data input grid, displays the selected analysis type.
The following commands are available on the WRC 107/297 toolbar.
Defines a data set as a WRC-107 analysis.
Defines a data set as a WRC-297 analysis.
Starts the analysis and displays the results in the WRC 197/207 window.
Performs the initial WRC 107 calculation and summation and sends the result to
Microsoft Word.

CAESAR II User's Guide

689

Equipment Component and Compliance

Removes an analysis from the job.
To add a new analysis to the job, click the corresponding analysis type, 107 or 297,on the
toolbar. You can remove an analysis from the job by selecting it in the Job Explorer, and then
clicking Erase
on the toolbar. To display an analysis in the Loads pane, select it from the
list in the Job Explorer.
The analysis results and the graphical representation display on the Analysis and Drawing tabs
on the right side of the Loads pane. The data that displays on both of these tabs automatically
updates after each change in the Loads pane, even if they are hidden.
The following example shows a sample analysis report.

Nozzle curves in the WRC Bulletin 107 cover typical applications of nozzles in vessels or
piping. If any of the interpolation parameters fall outside the limits of the available curves,
CAESAR II uses the last curve value in the appropriate WRC table.

Topics
WRC Bulletin 107(537) .................................................................. 691
WRC Bulletin 297 .......................................................................... 693

690

CAESAR II User's Guide

Equipment Component and Compliance

WRC Bulletin 107(537)

The Welding Research Council Bulletin 107 (WRC 107) has been used extensively since 1965
to estimate local stresses in vessel/attachment junctions. There are three editions of the WRC
107 bulletin available in the software. You can set the default using Tools > Configure/Setup.
For more information about the options available in the editor, see Configuration and
Environment (on page 41).
In 2010, WRC Bulletin 537 was released. According to the foreword of WRC Bulletin
537, "WRC 537 provides exactly the same content in a more useful and clear format. It is not an
update or a revision of 107." CAESAR II uses the graphs from Bulletin 107. Bulletin 537 simply
provides equations in place of the curves found in Bulletin 107.
The WRC 107 Bulletin provides an analytical tool to evaluate the vessel stresses in the
immediate vicinity of a nozzle. You can use this method to compute the stresses at both the
inner and outer surfaces of the vessel wall, and report the stresses in the longitudinal and
circumferential axes of the vessel/nozzle intersection. The convention adopted by WRC 107 to
define the applicable orientations of the applied loads and stresses for both spherical and
cylindrical vessels are shown below.

Spherical Shells

Cylindrical Shells

Defining WRC Axes:

P-axis: Along nozzle centerline and positive
entering vessel.
M1-axis: Perpendicular to nozzle centerline
along convenient global axis.
M2-axis: Cross P-axis into M1 axis and the
result is M2-axis.

Defining WRC Axes:

P-axis: Along nozzle centerline and positive
entering vessel.
MC-axis: Along vessel centerline and positive
to correspond with any parallel global axis.
M2-axis: Cross the P-axis with MC axis and
result is ML-axis.

CAESAR II User's Guide

691

Equipment Component and Compliance

Defining WRC Stress Points:
u - Upper, stress on outside of vessel wall at
junction.
l - Lower, stress on inside of vessel at junction.
A - Position on vessel at junction along negative
M1 axis.
B - Position on vessel at junction along positive
M2 axis.
C - Position on vessel at junction along positive
M2 axis.
D - Position on vessel at junction along negative
M2 axis.

Defining WRC Stress Points:

u - Upper, stress on outside of vessel wall at
junction.
l - Lower, means stress on inside of vessel at
junction.
A - Position on vessel at junction along
negative MC axis.
B - Position on vessel at junction, along
positive MC axis.
C - Position on vessel at junction, along
positive ML axis.
D - Position on vessel at junction, along
negative ML axis.
Shear axis VC is parallel and in the
same direction as the bending axis ML.
Shear axis VL is parallel and in the opposite
direction as the bending axis MC.

WRC 107 is commonly used to conservatively estimate vessel shell stress state at the edge of a
reinforcing pad. The stress state in the vessel wall when the nozzle has a reinforcing pad can be
estimated by considering a solid plug with an outside diameter equal to the O.D. of the
reinforcing pad, subjected to the same nozzle loading.
Before attempting to use WRC 107 to evaluate the stress state of any nozzle-vessel
junction, always verify that the geometric restrictions limiting the application of WRC 107 are not
exceeded. These vary according to the attachment and vessel types. Refer to the WRC 107
bulletin directory for this information.
Using WRC 107 is not recommended when the nozzle is very light or when the parameters in
the WRC 107 data curves are unreasonably exceeded. Output from WRC 107 includes the
figure numbers for the curves accessed, the curve abscissa, and the values retrieved. Check
these outputs against the actual curve in WRC 107 to become familiar with the accuracy of the
stresses calculated. For example, if parameters for a particular problem are always near or past
the end of the figures curve data, then the calculated stresses may not be reliable.

WRC 107 Stress Summations

Because the stresses computed by WRC 107 are highly localized, they do not fall immediately
under the B31 code rules as defined by B31.1 or B31.3. However, Appendix 4-1 of ASME
Section VIII, Division 2 Mandatory Design Based on Stress Analysis does provide a detailed
approach for dealing with these local stresses. The analysis procedure outlined in the
aforementioned code is used in CAESAR II to perform the stress evaluation. In order to evaluate
the stresses through an elastic analysis, three stress combinations (summations) must be made:
Pm
Pm + Pl + Pb
Pm + Pl + Pb + Q
P is the design pressure of the system. Pm is the general membrane stress due to internal
pressure removed from discontinuities and can be estimated for the vessel wall from the
expression (PD) / (4t) for the longitudinal component and (PD) / (2t) for the hoop component.
The allowable for Pm is kSmh, where Smh is the allowable stress intensity. The value of k can
be taken from Table AD-150.1 of the code, which ranges from 1.0 for sustained loads to 1.2 for
sustained plus wind loads or sustained plus earthquake loads. Pl is the local membrane stress

692

CAESAR II User's Guide

Equipment Component and Compliance

at the junction due to the sustained piping loads. Pb is the local bending stress (and is zero at
the nozzle to vessel connections according to Section VIII, Division 2 of ASME Code). Q is the
secondary stress due to thermal expansion piping loads or the bending stress due to internal
pressure thrust and sustained piping loads. The allowable stress intensity for the second stress
combination is 1.5kSmh, as defined by the Figure 4-130.1 of the Code. Smh is the hot stress
intensity allowable at the given design temperature. Both Pl and Q are calculated by WRC 107.
The third combination defines the range of the stress intensity, and its allowable is limited to
1.5(Smc+Smh).
A summation is provided automatically following the WRC 107 analysis and displays on the
Drawing window within the main WRC 107/297 window. The calculation provides a comparison
of the stress intensities to the entered allowables, along with a corresponding Pass/Fail ruling.
Failed items display in red.

WRC Bulletin 297

Published in August of 1984, Welding Research Council (WRC) 297 attempts to extend the
existing analysis tools for the evaluation of stresses in cylinder-to-cylinder intersections. WRC
297 differs from the widely-used WRC 107 primarily in that WRC 297 is designed for larger d/D
ratios (up to 0.5). WRC 297 also computes stresses in the nozzle and the vessel, whereas WRC
107 only computes stresses in the vessel.
The CAESAR II WRC 297 module provides input tabs for vessel data, nozzle data, and imposed
loads. WRC 297 supports one set of loads. You can enter the loads in either global CAESAR II
convention or in the local WRC 297 coordinate system. If the global CAESAR II convention is
selected, vessel and nozzle direction cosines must be present in order to convert the loads into
the local WRC 297 convention as discussed in the WRC 297 bulletin.
The CAESAR II version of WRC 297 adds the pressure component of the stress using Lames
equations, multiplied by the stress intensification factors found in ASME Section VIII, Div. 2,

CAESAR II User's Guide

693

Equipment Component and Compliance

Table AD-560.7. The pressure stress calculation is not a part of the WRC 297 bulletin but is
added here for your convenience.
CAESAR II also uses, through Input > Piping, the nozzle flexibility calculations described
in WRC 297. For more information, see Piping Input Reference (on page 89).
After you provide the necessary input, CAESAR II calculates the stress components at the four
locations on the vessel around the nozzle and also the corresponding locations on the nozzle.
Stresses are calculated on both the outer and inner surfaces (upper and lower). These stress
components are resolved into stress intensities at these 16 points around the connection. For
more information on the allowable limits for these stresses and output processing, see WRC
Bulletin 107 (see "WRC Bulletin 107(537)" on page 691).

Flange Leakage/Stress Calculations

Analysis > Flanges performs flange stress and leakage calculations. Historically, there have
been two different ways to calculate stress and one way to estimate leakage for flanges that
have received general application over the past 20 years. The stress calculation methods are
from the following sources:
ASME Section VIII
ANSI B16.5 Rating Tables
The leakage calculations are also based on the B16.5 rating table approach. Leakage is a
function of the relative stiffnesses of the flange, gasket and bolting. Using the B16.5 estimated
stress calculations to predict leakage does not consider the gasket type, stiffness of the flange,
or the stiffness of the bolting. Using B16.5 to estimate leakage makes the tendency to leak
proportional to the allowable stress in the flange. A flange with a higher allowable is able to
resist higher moments without leakage. Leakage is very weakly tied to allowable stress, if at all.
Flanges attempts to improve upon the solution of this difficult analysis problem. Equations
model the flexibility of the annular flange plate and its ability to rotate under moment, axial force,
and pressure. The results compare favorably with three-dimensional finite element analysis of
the flange junction. These correlations assume that the distance between the inside diameter of
the flange and the center of the effective gasket loading diameter is smaller than the distance
between the effective gasket loading diameter and the bolt circle diameter. In other words, that
(G-ID) < (BC-G), where, G is the effective gasket loading diameter, ID is the inside diameter of
the flange, and BC is the diameter of the bolt circle.
The following trends apply:
Thinner flanges have a greater the tendency to leak.
Larger diameter flanges have a greater tendency to leak.
Stiffer gaskets have a greater tendency to leak.
Leakage is a function of bolt tightening stress.
To begin working with the flange stress and leakage calculations, specify a new job name in the
New Job Name Specification dialog box or click Browse to navigate to an existing job file.
All CAESAR II analyses require a job name for identification purposes. After you have
created, or opened, a job, you can enter input data on the Global Input and Local Member
tabs and Output menus to define, analyze, and review your data.

694

CAESAR II User's Guide

Equipment Component and Compliance

The software opens the Flange Leakage/Stress Calculations window.

Input for the flange stress and leakage calculations is divided into four input tabs:
Flange (see "Flange Tab" on page 695) - Describes flange geometry.
Bolts and Gasket (see "Bolts and Gasket Tab" on page 699) - Defines data for the bolts and
gasket.
Material Data (see "Material Data Tab" on page 707) - Defines material and stress-related
data.
Loads (see "Loads Tab" on page 709) - Describes the imposed loads.

CAESAR II User's Guide

695

Equipment Component and Compliance

Flange Tab
The following options are used to describe flange geometry.

Topics
Flange Type ................................................................................... 696
Flange Class .................................................................................. 696
Flange Grade ................................................................................. 696
Flange Outside Diameter (A) ......................................................... 697
Flange Inside Diameter (B) ............................................................ 697
Flange Thickness (t) ...................................................................... 698
Flange Face OD or Lapjt Cnt ......................................................... 698
Flange Face ID or Lapjt Cnt ID ...................................................... 698
Small End Hub Thickness.............................................................. 698
Large End Hub Thickness ............................................................. 699
Hub Length .................................................................................... 699

Flange Type
Specifies the flange type. Selecting a flange type is required only if an ASME stress calculation
for the flange is needed. If you are performing only a leakage check, you can omit this entry.

Flange Class
Identifies the ANSI B16.5 or API 605 flange rating, (class).
B16.5 valid classes are 150, 300, 400, 600, 900, 1500, 2500
API 605 valid classes are 75, 150, 300, 400, 600, 900
B16.5 specifications govern up to, and including 24-inch pipe; API 605 specifications govern
nominal pipe sizes 26- though 60-inch.
The flange rating entry is used to access the B16.5 or API pressure/temperature rating table.
Minimum and maximum allowed ratings for all different materials available in the tables are
stored. Minimum and maximum computed allowed equivalent pressures, and safety factors are
found from this data. API 605 does not have minimum and maximum data. The minimum and
maximum data is the same when the nominal English pipe size is greater than 24-inches.

Flange Grade
Specifies the grade of the attached flange. The grade of the attached flange is a value such as
1.1, 1.2, or 2.1. It can be found in the ANSI Standard B16.5 code for flanges and fittings. The
flange grade is used in conjunction with the flange class and design temperature to look up the
allowable pressure rating for the ANSI flange.
If the grade is 1.10, then type 1.101. If you are designing a custom flange and do not want the
printout for the allowable pressure, then type 0.

696

CAESAR II User's Guide

Equipment Component and Compliance

Flange Outside Diameter (A)

Defines the flange outside diameter if an ASME stress calculation for the flange is needed. You
can omit this entry if only a leakage check is to be performed.
This value is required only for ASME stress calculations. It is available in the flange ANSI
B16.5/API dimensional database. You can access the flange database properties by pressing
Ctrl+F from any data input field in the Flange tab.

Flange Inside Diameter (B)

Specifies the inner diameter of the flange. For integral type flanges, this value will also be the
inner pipe diameter. This value is referred to as "B" in the ASME code.
The flange inside diameter is contained in the flange database. The software looks up
this value whenever you press Ctrl+ F in the Flange tab. The flange database contains
properties of ANSI B16.5 and API 605 flanges.
For inside diameters not specified in B16.5, the matching ID of standard wall pipe is used. Verify
this dimension based on the actual application and use of the flange. The following table shows
pipe inside diameters for various nominal sizes. All sizes are shown in inches.
Nominal Size

Matching Inside Pipe Diameter

STD

Sch 40

Sch 60

Sch 80

1.049

1.049

0.957

2.067

2.067

1.939

3.068

3.068

2.900

4.026

4.046

3.826

5.047

5.047

4.813

6.065

6.065

5.671

7.981

7.981

7.813

7.625

10

10.020

10.020

9.750

9.564

12

12.000

11.938

11.626

11.376

14

13.250

13.126

12.814

12.500

16

15.250

15.000

14.688

14.314

18

17.250

16.876

16.500

16.126

20

19.250

18.814

18.376

17.938

24

23.250

22.626

22.064

21.564

CAESAR II User's Guide

697

Equipment Component and Compliance

Flange Thickness (t)

Specifies the thickness of the flange.
The flange thickness is contained in the flange database. The software looks up this value
whenever you press Ctrl+F while working in the Flange tab. The flange database contains
properties of ANSI B16.5 and API 605 flanges.

Flange Face OD or Lapjt Cnt

Indicates one of the following:
For all except lap joints - The outer diameter of the flange face. The software uses the
minimum of the flange face outer diameter and the gasket outer diameter to calculate the
outside flange contact point but uses the maximum in design when selecting the bolt circle.
This is done so that the bolts do not interfere with the gasket. The software uses the
maximum of the flange face ID and the gasket ID to calculate the inside contact point of the
gasket. This value is required for calculating the contact gasket width and the effective
gasket diameter, G.
For lap joints - The lap joint contact outer diameter. This is usually the flange face outer
diameter. For additional details, see ASME Section VIII, Division 1, Appendix 2, Figure 2-4,
Sketches 1 and 1A.

Flange Face ID or Lapjt Cnt ID

Indicates one of the following:
For all except lap joints - The inner diameter of the flange face. The software uses the
maximum of the flange face ID and the gasket ID to calculate the inner contact point of the
gasket. This value is required for calculating the contact gasket width and the effective
gasket diameter, G.
For lap joints - The lap joint contact inner diameter. This is usually the flange inner
diameter. For additional details, see ASME Section VIII, Division 1, Appendix 2, Figure 2-4,
Sketches 1 and 1A.

Small End Hub Thickness

Specifies the thickness of the small end of the hub. This value is referred to as g0 in the ASME
code.
For weld neck flange types, this is the thickness of the shell at the end of the flange. For slip on
flange geometries, this is the thickness of the hub at the small end. For flange geometries
without hubs, this thickness can be entered as zero, or omitted.
This value is required only for ASME stress calculations. It is available in the flange ANSI
B16.5/API dimensional database. You can access the flange database properties by pressing
Ctrl+F from any data input field in the Flange tab.

698

CAESAR II User's Guide

Equipment Component and Compliance

Large End Hub Thickness

Specify the thickness of the large end of the hub. This value is referred to as g1 in the ASME
code. It can be the same as Small Hub Thickness.
For flange geometries without hubs, this thickness can be entered as zero, or left blank.
This value is required only for ASME stress calculations. It is available in the flange ANSI
B16.5/API dimensional database. You can access the flange database properties by pressing
Ctrl+F from any data cell in the Flange tab.

Hub Length
Defines the hub length. This value is referred to as h in the ASME code. For flange geometries
without hubs, this length can be entered as zero, or left blank.
This value is required only for ASME stress calculations. It is available in the flange ANSI
B16.5/API dimensional database. You can access the flange database properties by pressing
Ctrl+F from any data input field in the Flange tab.
When analyzing an optional type flange that is welded at the hub end, enter the hub length as
the leg of the weld, and include the thickness of the weld in the large end.
When analyzing a flange with no hub, such as a ring flange or a lap joint flange, enter a zero or
leave the field blank for the Hub Length, Small End Hub Thickness, and Large End Hub
Thickness. When designing a loose, ring-type flange that has a fillet weld at the back, enter the
size of a leg of the fillet weld as the large end of the hub.

Bolts and Gasket Tab

The following options are used to define data for the bolts and gasket.

Topics
Number of Bolts ............................................................................. 700
Bolt Diameter ................................................................................. 700
Bolt Initial Tightening Stress .......................................................... 700
Gasket Outer Diameter .................................................................. 701
Gasket Inner Diameter ................................................................... 701
Uncompressed Gasket Thickness ................................................. 701
Effective Gasket Modulus .............................................................. 701
Leak Pressure Ratio ...................................................................... 701
Gasket Seating Stress ................................................................... 703
Nubbin Width or Ring ..................................................................... 705
Facing Sketch ................................................................................ 705
Facing Column ............................................................................... 705

CAESAR II User's Guide

699

Equipment Component and Compliance

Number of Bolts
Specifies the number of bolts.
The number of bolts in standard ANSI B16.5 and API 605 flanges is contained in the
flange database and is accessed by the software whenever you press Ctrl+F.

Bolt Diameter
Specifies the nominal diameter of the bolts. Standard bolt diameters for ANSI B16.5 and API
605 flanges are contained in the flange database and are accessed by the software whenever
press Ctrl+F.

Bolt Initial Tightening Stress

Specifies the stress induced in the bolt during tightening after the flange has been seated. This
is the stress in the bolt when the system is about to be pressurized and thermally loaded.
If this value is omitted, the software uses the following bolt tightening rule to compute the
tightening stress in the bolt. (In English units: (i) = 45,000 / (d).
This entry is used only in the flexibility model of the flange to estimate the initial compression of
the gasket.

Bolt Tightening Stress Notes

This is a critical item for leakage determination and for computing stresses in the flange. The
ASME Code bases its stress calculations on a predetermined, specified, fixed equation for the
bolt stress. The resulting value is however often not related to the actual tightening stress that
appears in the flange when the bolts are tightened. For this reason, Bolt Initial Tightening
Stress, is used only for the flexibility/leakage determination. The value for the bolt tightening
stress used in the ASME Flange Stress Calculations is as defined by the ASME Code:
Bolt Load = Hydrostatic End Force + Force for Leaktight Joint
If Bolt Initial Tightening Stress is left blank, CAESAR II uses the value

Where 45,000 psi is a constant and d is the nominal diameter of the bolt.
This is a rule of thumb tightening stress that will typically be applied by field personnel tightening
the bolts. This computed value is printed in the output from the Flanges output. Compare this
value to the bolt stress printed in the ASME stress report (also in the output). The
rule-of-thumb tightening stress is frequently larger than the ASME required stress. When the
ASME required stress is entered into the Bolt Initial Tightening Stress field, a comparison of
the leakage safety factors can be made and the sensitivity of the joint to the tightening torque
can be determined. You are strongly encouraged to adjust these numbers to get a feel for the
relationship between all of the factors involved.

700

CAESAR II User's Guide

Equipment Component and Compliance

Gasket Outer Diameter

Specifies the outer diameter of the gasket. The software uses the minimum of the flange face
outer diameter and the gasket outer diameter to calculate the outside flange contact point, but
uses the maximum in design when selecting the bolt circle. This is done so that the bolts do not
interfere with the gasket. The software uses the maximum of the flange face ID and the gasket
ID to calculate the inside contact point of the gasket.
This value is required for calculating the contact gasket width and the effective gasket diameter,
G.

Gasket Inner Diameter

Specifies the inner diameter of the gasket. The software uses the maximum of the flange face ID
and the gasket ID to calculate the inner contact point of the gasket.
This value is required for calculating the contact gasket width and the effective gasket diameter,
G.

Uncompressed Gasket Thickness

Specifies the uncompressed thickness of the gasket. The software uses this value to construct
an elastic compression model of the gasket reaction at the effective gasket diameter.

Effective Gasket Modulus

Specifies the modulus of elasticity of the gasket material that occurs during loading and
unloading of the gasket. Several sources have shown this modulus to be somewhat higher than
the initial tightening modulus for spiral wound metal gaskets. Typical values used for spiral
wound metal gaskets are:
High End: 437500.0
Low End: 347000.0
Typical values are between 300,000 and 400,000 psi for spiral wound gaskets. The
higher the modulus the greater the tendency for the software to predict leakage. Errors on the
high side when estimating this value will lead to a more conservative design.

Leak Pressure Ratio

Specifies the ratio of gasket pressure to internal pressure at the instant when leakage starts
multiplied by a factor of safety. This is termed the "Gasket Factor" in ASME Sect. VIII Div. 1

CAESAR II User's Guide

701

Equipment Component and Compliance

The following table, extracted from Sect VIII Div. 1 gives gasket factors for some common types
of gaskets.
Gasket Materials and Contact Facings Notes
Table 2-5.1
Gasket Material

Seating Stress
y (^06)

Self-energizing types (O rings, metallic

elastomer, and other self-sealing types)

0.

0.

Elastomers without fabric or a high

percent of asbestos fiber:
Below 75A Shore Durometer
75A or higher Shore Durometer

.50
1.00

0.
200.

Asbestos with Suitable Binder

1/8" thick
1/16" thick
1/32" thick

2.00
2.75
3.50

600.
3700.
6500.

Elastomers with cotton fabric

1.25

400.

Elastomers with Asbestos fabric

3 ply
2 ply
1 ply

2.25
2.50
2.75

2200.
2900.
3700.

Vegetable fiber

1.75

1100.

Spiral-wound, asbestos filled:

Carbon
Stainless, Monel, Nickel alloys

2.50
3.00

10000.
10000.

2.50
2.75
3.00
3.25
3.50

2900.
3700.
4500.
5500.
6500.

2.75
3.00
3.25
3.50
3.75

3700.
4500.
5500.
6500.
7600.

Corrugated Metal, w/ Asbestos or

corrugated metal, jacketed with:
soft aluminum
soft copper or brass
iron or soft steel
Monel or 4%-6% chrome
Stainless steels and nickel alloys
Corrugated Metal:
soft aluminum
soft copper or brass
iron or soft steel
Monel or 4%-6% chrome
Stainless steels and nickel alloys

702

Gasket
Factor
m

CAESAR II User's Guide

Equipment Component and Compliance

Flat metal, jacketed asbestos filled
soft aluminum
soft copper or brass
iron or soft steel
Monel
4%-6% chrome
Stainless steels and nickel alloys

3.25
3.50
3.75
3.50
3.75
3.75

5500.
6500.
7600.
8000.
9000.
9000.

Grooved Metal
soft aluminum
soft copper or brass
iron or soft steel
Monel or 4%-6% chrome
Stainless steels and nickel alloys

3.25
3.50
3.75
3.75
4.25

5500.
6500.
7600.
9000.
10100.

Solid flat metal

soft aluminum
soft copper or brass
iron or soft steel
Monel or 4%-6% chrome
Stainless steels and nickel alloys

4.00
4.75
5.50
6.00
6.50

8800.
13000.
18000.
21800.
26000.

Gasket Seating Stress

Specifies the initial seating stress required for the gasket being used. This entry is required only
if ASME stress calculations are to be performed.
The following table, extracted from Sect VIII Div. 1 gives gasket factors for some common types
of gaskets.
Gasket Materials and Contact Facings Notes
Table 2-5.1
Gasket Material

Gasket
Factor
m

Seating Stress
y (^06)

Self-energizing types (O rings, metallic

elastomer, and other self-sealing types)

0.

0.

Elastomers without fabric or a high

percent of asbestos fiber:
Below 75A Shore Durometer
75A or higher Shore Durometer

.50
1.00

0.
200.

Asbestos with Suitable Binder

1/8" thick
1/16" thick
1/32" thick

2.00
2.75
3.50

600.
3700.
6500.

Elastomers with cotton fabric

1.25

400.

CAESAR II User's Guide

703

Equipment Component and Compliance

Elastomers with Asbestos fabric
3 ply
2 ply
1 ply

2.25
2.50
2.75

2200.
2900.
3700.

Vegetable fiber

1.75

1100.

Spiral-wound, asbestos filled:

Carbon
Stainless, Monel, Nickel alloys

2.50
3.00

10000.
10000.

2.50
2.75
3.00
3.25
3.50

2900.
3700.
4500.
5500.
6500.

Corrugated Metal:
soft aluminum
soft copper or brass
iron or soft steel
Monel or 4%-6% chrome
Stainless steels and nickel alloys

2.75
3.00
3.25
3.50
3.75

3700.
4500.
5500.
6500.
7600.

Flat metal, jacketed asbestos filled

soft aluminum
soft copper or brass
iron or soft steel
Monel
4%-6% chrome
Stainless steels and nickel alloys

3.25
3.50
3.75
3.50
3.75
3.75

5500.
6500.
7600.
8000.
9000.
9000.

Grooved Metal
soft aluminum
soft copper or brass
iron or soft steel
Monel or 4%-6% chrome
Stainless steels and nickel alloys

3.25
3.50
3.75
3.75
4.25

5500.
6500.
7600.
9000.
10100.

Solid flat metal

soft aluminum
soft copper or brass
iron or soft steel
Monel or 4%-6% chrome
Stainless steels and nickel alloys

4.00
4.75
5.50
6.00
6.50

8800.
13000.
18000.
21800.
26000.

Corrugated Metal, w/ Asbestos or

corrugated metal, jacketed with:
soft aluminum
soft copper or brass
iron or soft steel
Monel or 4%-6% chrome
Stainless steels and nickel alloys

704

CAESAR II User's Guide

Equipment Component and Compliance

Nubbin Width or Ring

Specifies the nubbin width, if applicable. This value is required only for facing sketches 1c, 1d, 2
and 6 (FLANGE) equivalents 3, 4, 5, and 9). For sketch 9, this is not a nubbin width but the
contact width of the metallic ring.

Facing Sketch
Specifies the facing sketch number according to the following correlations, according to Table
2-5-2 of the ASME code.
Facing Sketch

CAESAR II Equivalent

Description

1a

flat finish faces

1b

serrated finish faces

1c

raised nubbin-flat finish

1d

raised nubbin-serrated finish

1/64 inch nubbin

1/64 inch nubbin both sides

large serrations, one side

large serrations, both sides

metallic O-ring type gasket

This value is required for calculating the contact gasket width and the effective gasket diameter,
G.

Facing Column
Specifies the facing column number according to the following correlations:
Gasket Material
Self-energizing types (O rings, metallic elastomer, and other
self-sealing types)
Elastomers without fabric or a high percent of asbestos fiber:
Below 75A Shore Durometer
75A or higher Shore Durometer

Facing Column
2

2
2

Asbestos with Suitable Binder

1/8" thick
1/16" thick
1/32" thick

2
2
2

Elastomers with cotton fabric

CAESAR II User's Guide

705

Equipment Component and Compliance

Elastomers with Asbestos fabric
3 ply
2 ply
1 ply

2
2
2

Vegetable fiber

Spiral-wound, asbestos filled:

Carbon
Stainless, Monel, Nickel alloys

2
2

Corrugated Metal, w/ Asbestos or corrugated metal, jacketed with:

soft aluminum
soft copper or brass
iron or soft steel
Monel or 4%-6% chrome
Stainless steels and nickel alloys

706

2
2
2
2
3.50

Corrugated Metal:
soft aluminum
soft copper or brass
iron or soft steel
Monel or 4%-6% chrome
Stainless steels and nickel alloys

2
2
2
2
2

Flat metal, jacketed asbestos filled

soft aluminum
soft copper or brass
iron or soft steel
Monel
4%-6% chrome
Stainless steels and nickel alloys

2
2
2
2
2
2

Grooved Metal
soft aluminum
soft copper or brass
iron or soft steel
Monel or 4%-6% chrome
Stainless steels and nickel alloys

2
2
2
2
2

Solid flat metal

soft aluminum
soft copper or brass
iron or soft steel
Monel or 4%-6% chrome

2
2
2
2

Stainless steels and nickel alloys

CAESAR II User's Guide

Equipment Component and Compliance

Material Data Tab

The following options are used to define material and stress-related data.

Topics
Flange Material .............................................................................. 707
Bolt Material ................................................................................... 707
Design Temperature ...................................................................... 707
Flange Allowable @ Design Temperature ..................................... 707
Flange Allowable @ Ambient Temperature ................................... 708
Flange Modulus of Elasticity @ Design ......................................... 708
Flange Modulus of Elasticity @ Ambient ....................................... 708
Bolt Allowable @ Design Temperature.......................................... 708
Bolt Allowable @ Ambient Temperature........................................ 708
Flange Allowable @ Stress Multiplier ............................................ 709
Bolt Allowable Stress Multiplier...................................................... 709

Flange Material
Displays the material database for flanges, taken from ASME Section VIII, Division 1.

Bolt Material
Displays the material database for bolting, taken from ASME Section VIII, Division 1.

Design Temperature
Specifies the flange design temperature. This value is required for ASME stress calculations,
and for ANSI B16.5/API rating table look-ups.
The design temperature is not used in the flexibility model of the flange.

Flange Allowable @ Design Temperature

Specifies the allowable stress for the flange material at the design temperature. This value is
required only if an ASME stress analysis of the flange is to be performed.
This value is available in the ASME Sect. VIII Div. 1 material database delivered with the
software. You can access the database by typing a material name in the Flange Material box or
by clicking Browse and selecting a material in the Material Selection list.
After it is in the database, fill in the spaces for database entry where the defaults are not correct.
Press F1 when the material inputs are satisfactory. The material selection can be changed after
pressing F1 by moving the cursor around the tab fields and pressing Enter when the cursor is
on the appropriate material. When you select the material in this way, it becomes the default for
the next material database entry.

CAESAR II User's Guide

707

Equipment Component and Compliance

Flange Allowable @ Ambient Temperature

Specifies the allowable stress for the flange material at the ambient temperature. This value is
only required if an ASME stress analysis of the flange is to be performed.
This value is available in the ASME Sect. VIII Div. 1 material database delivered with the
software. You can access the database by typing a material name in the Flange Material box or
by clicking Browse and selecting a material in the Material Selection list.
After it is in the database, fill in the spaces for database entry where the defaults are not correct.
Press F1 when the material inputs are satisfactory. The material selection can be changed after
pressing F1 by moving the cursor around the tab fields and pressing Enter when the cursor is
on the appropriate material. When you select the material in this way, it becomes the default for
the next material database entry.

Flange Modulus of Elasticity @ Design

Defines the value of the modulus of elasticity to be used for the determination of the Flange
Rigidity Factor "J", for the DESIGN case defined in Appendix S of the A93 addendum.

Flange Modulus of Elasticity @ Ambient

Defines the value of the modulus of elasticity to be used for the determination of the Flange
Rigidity Factor "J", for the SEATING case defined in Appendix S of the A93 addendum.

Bolt Allowable @ Design Temperature

Indicates the allowable stress for the bolt material at the design temperature. This value is only
required if an ASME stress analysis of the flange is to be performed.
This value is available in the ASME Sect. VIII Div. 1 material database delivered with the
software. You can access the database by typing a material name in the Flange Material box or
by clicking Browse and selecting a material in the Material Selection list.
After it is in the database, fill in the spaces for database entry where the defaults are not correct.
Press F1 when the material inputs are satisfactory. The material selection can be changed after
pressing F1 by moving the cursor around the tab fields and pressing Enter when the cursor is
on the appropriate material. When you select the material in this way, it becomes the default for
the next material database entry.

Bolt Allowable @ Ambient Temperature

Specify the allowable stress for the bolt material at the ambient temperature. This value is only
required if an ASME stress analysis of the flange is to be performed.
This value is available in the ASME Sect. VIII Div. 1 material database delivered with the
software. You can access the database by typing a material name in the Flange Material box or
by clicking Browse and selecting a material in the Material Selection list.
After it is in the database, fill in the spaces for database entry where the defaults are not correct.
Press F1 when the material inputs are satisfactory. The material selection can be changed after
pressing F1 by moving the cursor around the tab fields and pressing Enter when the cursor is
on the appropriate material. When you select the material in this way, it becomes the default for
the next material database entry.

708

CAESAR II User's Guide

Equipment Component and Compliance

Flange Allowable @ Stress Multiplier

Applies the increased allowable (1.5) for the radial and tangential operating ASME flange
allowables. This increase is implied in B31.1 Appendix II Section 4.2.3 when it states that the
longitudinal hub, tangential and radial stress allowables are equal to the yield stress at design
temperature, which is essentially 1.5(S).
Prior to the 1992 edition of the ASME NC code, NC paragraph 3658.1(d) also stated that
the tangential and radial stress allowables could be increased by 50%. The 1992 edition of NC
eliminated this increase on these allowables.

Bolt Allowable Stress Multiplier

Designates a factor by which to increase the operating bolt allowables.
Section VIII Division 2, Article 4-141 of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code allows for
operating loads on bolts to equal two times the standard table allowables. In some cases, this
increase can be by as much as three times the table allowables.

Loads Tab
The following options are used to describe the imposed loads.

Topics
Design Pressure ............................................................................ 709
Axial Force ..................................................................................... 709
Bending Moment ............................................................................ 710
Disable Leakage Calculations ....................................................... 710
Disable Stress Calculations ........................................................... 710
Disable ANSI B16.5 Check ............................................................ 710

Design Pressure
Indicates the internal line pressure (lbs./sq.in.) in gage. This pressure is used in the flexibility
model of the flange in the ASME stress calculations and is the B16.5/API rating.

Axial Force
Defines the externally applied axial force applied to the flange joint by the attached piping. The
software does not include the effect of shear forces in the flexibility model.

CAESAR II User's Guide

709

Equipment Component and Compliance

Bending Moment
Specifies the external moment applied to the flange joint by the attached piping. If you have two
bending moments, SRSS them and enter the result here.

Disable Leakage Calculations

Turns off the leakage calculations performed by CAESAR II. Use this option if you want a flange
report, which only contains ASME Section VIII, Division 1, Appendix 2 results.

Disable Stress Calculations

Turns off the flange stress calculations performed by CAESAR II. Use this option if you want a
flange report, which only contains leakage calculations and omits ASME Section VIII, Division 1,
Appendix 2 results.

Disable ANSI B16.5 Check

Turns off the report for the ANSI B16.5 Equivalent Pressure check. This check compares the
equivalent pressure to the MAWP (as listed in ANSI B16.5) for the flange class and material.
The ANSI MAWP does not consider bolting or gasket properties, and it is not a good indicator of
the leakage characteristics of the flange.

Flange Rating
This is an optional input. It has been a common practice in the industry to use the ANSI B16.5
and API 605 temperature/pressure rating tables as a gauge for leakage. Because these rating
tables are based on allowable stresses and are not intended for leakage prediction, the leakage
predictions that resulted are a function of the allowable stress for the flange material, not the
flexibility, or modulus of elasticity, of the flange. To give you a comparison to the old practice,
the minimum and maximum rating table values from ANSI and API are stored and are used to
print minimum and maximum leakage safety factors that are predicted from this method. An
example of the output that you get upon entering the flange rating is shown below:
EQUIVALENT PRESSURE MODEL Equivalent Pressure (lb./sq.in.) 1639.85
ANSI/API Min Equivalent Pressure Allowed 1080.00
ANSI/API Max Equivalent Pressure Allowed 1815.00
According to the older method, this shows that leakage occurred if a carbon steel flange is used,
and leakage does not occur if an alloy flange is used. Both flanges have essentially the same
flexibility tendency to leak.
The following input parameters are used only for the ASME Section VIII Division 1 stress
calculations:
Flange Type
Flange Outside Diameter
Design Temperature
Small End Hub Thickness
Large End Hub Thickness
Hub Length
Flange Allowables
Bolt Allowables

710

CAESAR II User's Guide

Equipment Component and Compliance

Gasket Seating Stress
Optional Allowable Multipliers
Flange Face & Gasket Dimensions
Specify the Flange Type (on page 696) on the Flange (see "Flange Tab" on page 695) tab. To
acquire material allowables from the Section VIII, Division 1 material library, use the Flange
Material (on page 707) list on the Material Data (see "Material Data Tab" on page 707) tab.
An input listing for a typical flange analysis is shown below:
CA E S A R I I MISCELLANEOUS REPORT ECHO
Flange Inside Diameter [B](in.) 30.560
Flange Thickness [t](in.) 4.060
Flange Rating (Optional) 300.000
Bolt Circle Diameter (in.) 38.500
Number of Bolts 32.000
Bolt Diameter (in.) 1.500
Bolt Initial Tightening Stress(lb./sq.in.)
Effective Gasket Diameter [G] (in.) 33.888
Uncompressed Gasket Thickness (in.) 0.063
Basic Gasket Width [b0] (in.) 0.375
Leak Pressure Ratio [m] 2.750
Effective Gasket Modulus(b./sq.in.) 300,000.000
Externally Applied Moment (optional)(in.lb.) 24,000.000
Externally Applied Force (optional)(lb.) 1,000.000
Pressure [P](lb./sq.in.) 400.000
The following inputs are required only if you wish to perform stress calcs
as per Sect VIII Div. 1
Flange Type (1-8, see ?-Help or Alt-P to plot) 1.000
Flange Outside Diameter [A](in.) 41.500
Design TemperatureF 650.000
Small End Hub Thickness [g0](in.) 1.690
Large End Hub Thickness [g1](in.) 3.440
Hub Length [h](in.) 6.620
Flange Allowable @Design Temperature(lb./sq.in.) 17,500.000
Flange Allowable @Ambient Temperature(lb./sq.in.) 17,500.000
Flange Modulus of Elasticity @Design(lb./sq.in.) 0.279E+08
Flange Modulus of Elasticity @Ambient(lb./sq.in.) 0.279E+08
Bolt Allowable @Design Temperature(lb./sq.in.) 25,000.000
Bolt Allowable @Ambient Temperature(lb./sq.in.) 25,000.000
Gasket Seating Stress [y](lb./sq.in.) 3,700.000
Flange Allowable Stress Multiplier 1.000
Bolt Allowable Stress Multiplier (VIII Div 2 4-1411.000
Disable Leakage Calculations (Y/N) N
Flange Face OD or Lapjt Cnt OD(in.) 34.500
Flange Face ID or Lapjt Cnt ID(in.) 33.000
Gasket Outer Diameter (in.) 36.000
Gasket Inner Diameter (in.) 33.000
Nubbin Width (in.)
Facing Sketch 1.000
Facing Column 2.000
Disable Leakage Calculations (Y/N) N

CAESAR II User's Guide

711

Equipment Component and Compliance

Pipeline Remaining Strength Calculations (B31G)

Analysis > B31G evaluates corroded pipelines to determine when specific pipe segments must
be replaced. The original B31G document is conservative. CAESAR II performs additional
calculations to modify the original criteria. This additional work can be found in project report
PR-3805, by Battelle, Inc. The details of the original B31G criteria, as well as the modified
methods, are discussed in detail in this report.
CAESAR II determines the following values according to the original B31G criteria and four
modified methods. The values are
The hoop stress to cause failure
The maximum allowed operating pressure
The maximum allowed flaw length
The four modified methods vary in the manner in which the corroded area is estimated. The
methods are:
.85dL - Approximates the corroded area as 0.85 times the maximum pit depth times the flaw
length.
Exact - Determines the corroded area numerically using the trapezoid method.
Equivalent - Determines the corroded area by multiplying the average pit depth by the flaw
length. Additionally, an equivalent flaw length (flaw length * average pit depth / maximum pit
depth) is used in the computation of the Folias factor.
Effective - Uses a numerical trapezoid summation; however, various sub-lengths of the total
flaw length are used to arrive at a worst case condition. If the sub-length that produces the
worst case coincides with the total length, the Exact and Effective methods yield the same
result.
To begin, specify a new job name in the New Job Name Specification dialog box or click
Browse to navigate to an existing job file.
All CAESAR II analyses require a job name for identification purposes. After you have
created, or opened, a job, you can enter input data on the Global Input and Local Member
tabs and Output menus to define, analyze, and review your data.

712

CAESAR II User's Guide

Equipment Component and Compliance

The software opens the Pipeline Remaining Strength Calculations (B31G) window. The
window consists of two input tabs--Data (see "Data Tab" on page 714) and Measurements (see
"Measurements Tab" on page 716).

CAESAR II User's Guide

713

Equipment Component and Compliance

After the data is entered, click Run Analysis
report is shown below:

714

to begin the computations. A typical output

For additional information or backup on these computations, an intermediate computation

file is generated.
For more information on the analysis methods used by this command, see the B31G
document or the Battelle project report PR-3-805.

CAESAR II User's Guide

Equipment Component and Compliance

Data Tab
Most of the data required by this processor is acquired through actual field
measurements.

Topics
Pipe Nominal Diameter .................................................................. 715
Pipe Wall Thickness ...................................................................... 715
Design Pressure ............................................................................ 715
Material Yield Strength .................................................................. 715
Material Specified Minimum Yield ................................................. 715
Flaw Length ................................................................................... 715
Measurement Increment ................................................................ 715
Factor of Safety (FS) ..................................................................... 716
Design Factor (S) ........................................................................... 716

Pipe Nominal Diameter

Specifies the pipe diameter.

Pipe Wall Thickness

Specifies the un-corroded pipe wall thickness.

Design Pressure
Specifies the design pressure. This value is the maximum pressure reported in the output
section, although the maximum allowed pressure may be less than the input design pressure.

Material Yield Strength

Defines the material yield strength. If this value is unknown, enter the specified minimum yield
strength in this cell.

Material Specified Minimum Yield

Defines the minimum yield strength.

Flaw Length
Indicates the length of flaw or anomaly. This value is a measured quantity, usually taken in a
straight line.

Measurement Increment
Specify the measurement increment in this cell. This value defines how often along the flaw
length depth or thickness measurements are made.
The number of measurements should be calculated by (flaw length / measurement increment)
+ 1.

CAESAR II User's Guide

715

Equipment Component and Compliance

Factor of Safety (FS)

Defines the factor of safety. For those pipelines in which the maximum operating stress level
does not exceed 72% of the specified minimum yield strength, the safety factor is 100/72 = 1.39.
The safety factor cannot be less than 1.0.

Design Factor (S)

Specifies the design factor from the applicable piping code.

Measurements Tab
You can enter a maximum of twenty pit measurements on the Measurements input screen.

First, you must define the measurements. Select Pits if the measurements are in pit depths.
Select Thicknesses if the measurements are remaining wall thicknesses.
Pit depths are required for the computations. If remaining thicknesses are specified, the
pit depths are computed from wall thickness - remaining thickness.
In the individual cells, enter the measurement obtained along the flaw length. The values are
based on the selection of Pits or Thicknesses.

716

CAESAR II User's Guide

Equipment Component and Compliance

Expansion Joint Rating

Analysis > Expansion Joint Rating computes a limit for the total displacement per corrugation
of an expansion joint. According to EJMA (Expansion Joint Manufacturers Association), the
maximum permitted amount of axial movement per corrugation is defined as e rated where
ex + ey + eq < erated
The terms in the above equation are defined as:
ex = The axial displacement per corrugation resulting from imposed axial movements.
ey = The axial displacement per corrugation resulting from imposed lateral deflections.
eq = The axial displacement per corrugation resulting from imposed angular rotation, that is,
bending.
erated = The maximum permitted amount of axial movement per corrugation. You can find
this value in the expansion joint manufacturers catalog.
In addition, EJMA states, Also, [as an expansion joint is rotated or deflected laterally] it should
be noted that one side of the bellows attains a larger projected area than the opposite side.
Under the action of the applied pressure, unbalanced forces are set up which tend to distort the
expansion joint further. In order to control the effects of these two factors a second limit is
established by the manufacturer upon the amount of angular rotation and/or lateral deflection
which may be imposed upon the expansion joint. This limit may be less than the rated
movement. Therefore, in the selection of an expansion joint, care must be exercised to avoid
exceeding either of these manufacturers limits.
This module is intended to assist you in satisfying these limitations. This module computes the
terms defined in the above equation and the movement of the joint ends relative to each other.
These relative movements are reported in both the local joint coordinate system and the global
coordinate system.
To begin, specify a new job name in the New Job Name Specification dialog box or click
Browse to navigate to an existing job file.
All CAESAR II analyses require a job name for identification purposes. After you have
created, or opened, a job, you can enter input data on the Global Input and Local Member
tabs and Output menus to define, analyze, and review your data.

CAESAR II User's Guide

717

Equipment Component and Compliance

The software opens the EJMA Expansion Joint window. The window consists of three input
screens--Geometry (on page 720), Displacements and Rotations (on page 721), and Allowables
(on page 722).

After the necessary data is entered, click Run Analysis

to begin the computations. After
processing completes, a report displaying both the input echo and the output calculations are
shown on a new tab called Output.

718

CAESAR II User's Guide

Equipment Component and Compliance

The units used for the coordinate and displacement values are the length units defined in
the active units file. Rotations are in units of degrees.

C A E S A R II MISCELLANEOUS REPORT ECHO

EJMA EXPANSION JOINT RATING
Node Number for FROM end 120.000
Node Number for TO end 125.000
Number of Convolutions 4.000
Flexible Joint Length (in.)4.447
Effective Diameter(in.)4.996
X Coordinate of from end (in.).000
Y Coordinate of from end (in.).000
Z Coordinate of from end (in.).000
X Coordinate of to end (in.)4.447
X Displacement of from end (in.).300
Y Displacement of from end (in.).250
Z Displacement of from end (in.).000
X Rotation of from end (deg).000
Y Rotation of from end (deg)1.222
Z Rotation of from end (deg).030
X Displacement of to end (in.)-.100
Y Displacement of to end (in.).120
Z Displacement of to end (in.).000
X Rotation of to end (deg).000

CAESAR II User's Guide

719

Equipment Component and Compliance

Y Rotation of to end (deg)-.020
Z Rotation of to end (deg).890
OUTPUT:
AXIAL DISPLACEMENTS PER CONVOLUTION
Axial Displacement.100
Axial Displacement due to Lateral .133
Axial Displacement due to Rotation.016
Axial Displacement TOTAL.250
RELATIVE MOVEMENTS OF END i WITH RESPECT TO END j
(Local Joint Coordinate System)
Relative Axial Displacement, x.401
Relative Lateral Displacement, y.158
Relative Bending, theta (deg)1.511
Relative Torsion (deg) .019
RELATIVE MOVEMENTS OF END i WITH RESPECT TO END j
(Global Piping Coordinate System)
Relative X Displacement-.399
Relative Y Displacement-.132
Relative Z Displacement.095
Relative Rotation about X (deg).000
Relative Rotation about Y (deg)-1.242
Relative Rotation about Z (deg).860
In the previous output, the axial displacement total in the report is the total axial displacement
per corrugation due to axial, lateral, and rotational displacement of the expansion joint ends.
This is the value that is compared to the rated axial displacement per corrugation. If e(total) is
greater than the rated axial displacement per corrugation, then there is the possibility of
premature bellows failure. Be sure that the displacement rating from the manufacturer is on a
per corrugation basis. If it is not, multiply the axial displacement total by the number of
corrugations and compare this value to the manufacturers allowable axial displacement. Most
manufacturers allowed rating is for some set number of cycles (often 10,000). If the actual
number of cycles is less, then the allowed movement can often be greater. Similarly, if the actual
number of cycles is greater than 10,000, then the allowed movement can be smaller. In special
situations, contact the manufacturers because many factors can affect allowed bellows
movement.
The y in the report is the total relative lateral displacement of one end of the bellows with
respect to the other, and theta is the total relative angular rotation of one end of the bellows with
respect to the other. CAESAR II does not include x in the denominator for the lateral
displacement calculations as outlined in EJMA.

Geometry
Topics
Node Number for "From" End ........................................................ 721
Node Number for "To" End ............................................................ 721
Number of Convolutions ................................................................ 721
Flexible Joint Length ...................................................................... 721
Effective Diameter ......................................................................... 721
Z Axis Up ....................................................................................... 721
Coordinates.................................................................................... 721

720

CAESAR II User's Guide

Equipment Component and Compliance

Node Number for "From" End

Identifies the node number that represents the From end of the expansion joint. This value is
used for labeling purposes.

Node Number for "To" End

Identifies the node number that represents the To end of the expansion joint. This value is used
for labeling purposes.

Number of Convolutions
Defines the number of convolutions in the expansion joint.

Flexible Joint Length

Specifies the flexible length of the bellows.

Effective Diameter
Specifies the diameter of the circle whose area is equal to the effective area of the expansion
joint. The effective ID can be estimated using the following equation:
1.13 * sqrt (Effective Area)
You can find the effective area of the joint in the manufacturer's catalog.

Z Axis Up
Indicates that the z-axis is upward in your CAESAR II input file.

Coordinates
Defines the spatial coordinate at the appropriate end of the expansion joint

Displacements and Rotations

Defines the displacements and rotations at the appropriate end of the expansion joint. These
values typically come from the displacement report of a CAESAR II run.

CAESAR II User's Guide

721

Equipment Component and Compliance

Allowables
Specifies the allowed expansion joint movement (translation or rotation) on a per convolution
basis and for the entire bellows. Enter values using the following units of measure:
Axial

inches

Lateral

inches

Bending

inches or degrees

Torsional

inches or degrees

You can acquire this data using the vendor catalog.

Structural Steel Checks - AISC

Analyze > AISC performs AISC code check on structural steel elements. Compliance is
evaluated according to the AISC (American Institute of Steel Construction) code. This code
check uses the forces and moments at the ends of the structural members, computes stresses,
and allowables, and determines a unity check value. If the unity check value is less than 1.0, the
member is acceptable for the given loading conditions. CAESAR II performs the AISC unity
check according to either the 1977 or the 1989 edition of the AISC code.
Member properties are obtained from the AISC database and used to compute the actual
and allowable stress values for the axial and bending terms comprising the unity check
equations. The database must be either AISC77.BIN or AISC89.BIN and is set using Tools >
Configuration/Setup. For more information, see Configuration and Environment (on page 41).
There are a few differences between the 1977 and 1989 AISC Code Revisions that affect unity
check computation. The most noticeable difference is that the 1989 code provides a method for
computing the unity check on single angles. This procedure, which was not addressed in the
1977 code, can be found in a special code section following the commentary. The steps
necessary to compute the unity check for single angles can be followed by reviewing the
message file (generated upon request).
The other differences between these two code revisions deal with members in compression.
Several constants for Qs have been altered, and a new factor k c has been added. kc is a
compression element restraint coefficient defined in the 1989 edition of the code.
Because of these code differences, CAESAR II stores the name of the active database in the
input file for the AISC module when the data file is first created. Attempting to switch databases
or compute unity checks on angles using the 1977 code generates error messages and
processing terminates. You are urged to consult the applicable AISC Manuals when using this
command.
To begin the unity check calculations, specify a new job name in the New Job Name
Specification dialog box or click Browse to navigate to an existing job file.
All CAESAR II analyses require a job name for identification purposes. After you have
created, or opened, a job, you can enter input data on the Global Input and Local Member
tabs and Output menus to define, analyze, and review your data.

722

CAESAR II User's Guide

Equipment Component and Compliance

The software displays the AISC window, which consists of two input screens:Global Input (on
page 724) and Local Member Data (see "Local Member Data Tab" on page 727).

Output Reports
You can direct the output reports to the screen or to a printer. The output report begins with a
one page summary describing the current global data and units, as shown below.

The remaining pages in the output report show the data for the individual members. The last
column of the report contains the most important data (namely the unity check value) and the

CAESAR II User's Guide

723

Equipment Component and Compliance

governing AISC equation. A sample member output reports are shown below. The report is
applicable to jobs where sidesway is allowed.

Global Input
The following options are used to enter data that applies to all members being evaluated.

Topics
Structural Code .............................................................................. 725
Allowable Stress Increase Factor .................................................. 725
Stress Reduction Factors Cmy and Cmz ...................................... 725
Youngs Modulus ........................................................................... 725
Material Yield Strength .................................................................. 725
Bending Coefficient ........................................................................ 726
Form Factor Qa ............................................................................. 726
Allow Sidesway .............................................................................. 726
Resize Members Whose Unity Check Value Is . . . ....................... 726
Minimum Desired Unity Check ...................................................... 726
Maximum Desired Unity Check ..................................................... 727

724

CAESAR II User's Guide

Equipment Component and Compliance

Structural Code
Identifies the code and year, typically matching the database in use. Slight variations in the
computations depend on which code year is selected. Single angles can only be checked if
AISC 1989 is selected.

Allowable Stress Increase Factor

Designates the multiplication factor applied to the computed values of the axial and bending
allowable stresses. Typically, this value is 1.0. However, in extreme events, such as
earthquakes and 100-year storms, the AISC code permits the allowable stresses to be
increased by a factor. Usually, a 1/3 increase is applied to the computed allowables, making the
allowable stress increase factor equal to 1.33. For more details see the AISC code, section
1.5.6.

Stress Reduction Factors Cmy and Cmz

Specifies the interaction formula coefficients (Cmy and Cmz) for the strong and weak axis of the
elements (in-plane and out-of-plane). Values include the following:
0.85 for compression members in frames subject to joint translation (sidesway).
For restrained compression members in frames braced against sidesway and not subject to
transverse loading between supports in the plane of bending:
0.6 - 0.4(M1/M2)

but not less than 0.4, where (M1/M2) is the ratio of the smaller to larger moments at the
ends, of that portion of the member un-braced in the plane of bending under consideration.
For compression members in frames braced against joint translation in the plane of loading
and subject to transverse loading between supports, the value of Cmy can be determined by
rational analysis. Alternatively, the following values are suggested per the AISC code:
0.85 for members whose ends are restrained against rotation in the plane of bending.
1.0 for members whose ends are unrestrained against rotation in the plane of bending.

Youngs Modulus
Specifies the slope of the linear portion of the stress-strain diagram. For structural steel this
value is usually 29,000,000 psi.

Material Yield Strength

Defines the minimum yield stress of the steel being used. The term yield stress denotes the
minimum yield point (for those steels that have a yield point) or the minimum yield strength (for
those that do not have a yield point).

CAESAR II User's Guide

725

Equipment Component and Compliance

Bending Coefficient
Specifies the bending coefficient (Cb). Use 1.0 in computing the value of Fby and Fbz for use in
Formula 1.6-1a or when the bending moment at any point in an unbraced length is larger than
the moment at either end of the same length. Otherwise, Cb shall be:
Cb = 1.75 + 1.05(M1/M2) + 0.3(M1/M2)2
but not more than 2.3, where (M1/M2) is the ratio of the smaller to larger moments at the ends.

Form Factor Qa
Defines the allowable axial stress reduction factor equal to the effective area divided by the
actual area.
Consult the latest edition of the AISC code for the current computation methods for the
effective area.

Allow Sidesway
Controls the ability of a frame or structure to experience sidesway (joint translation). This affects
the computation of several of the coefficients used in the unity check equations. Additionally, for
frames braced against sidesway, moments at each end of the member are required. Sidesway
is allowed.

Resize Members Whose Unity Check Value Is . . .

Determines whether the AISC module attempts to resize specific members as a result of the
unity check computations. This option is most often used for an initial pass at optimization.
Selecting this option requires that you specify a minimum unity check and a maximum unity
check. If the computed unity check falls outside this range, the module resizes the member
appropriately. The final member size is shown in the output report.
A resized member overwrites the initial input member size in the input file (input and output
share a common file). If member resizing occurs, check the final member size to ensure the
following:
1. The selected member is commonly available.
2. The selected member is optimal in its group.
3. The selected member does not violate fabrication requirements for flange or web size.

Minimum Desired Unity Check

Defines the minimum acceptable unity check allowed. Accepted values are between 0.0 and
1.0. Members whose computed unity check value is less than this minimum are resized to a
smaller shape.
The Minimum Desired Unity Check value must be less than the Maximum Desired
Unity Check value. The recommended value for the minimum desired unity check is 0.7, which
allows lightly loaded members to be reduced in size.

726

CAESAR II User's Guide

Equipment Component and Compliance

Maximum Desired Unity Check

Defines the maximum acceptable unity check allowed. Accepted values are between 0.0 and
1.0. Members whose computed unity check value is greater than this maximum are resized to a
larger shape.
The Maximum Desired Unity Check value must be greater than the Minimum Desired
Unity Check value. The recommended value for the maximum desired unity check is 0.9, which
leaves a margin for loading inaccuracies.

Local Member Data Tab

The following options are used to enter local member data for each member being evaluated.

Topics
Member Start Node ....................................................................... 727
Member End Node ......................................................................... 727
Member Type ................................................................................. 728
In-And Out-Of-Plane Fixity Coefficients Ky And Kz ....................... 728
Unsupported Axial Length ............................................................. 728
Unsupported Length (In-Plane Bending) ....................................... 728
Unsupported Length (Out-Of-Plane Bending) ............................... 728
Double Angle Spacing ................................................................... 729
Young's Modulus ........................................................................... 729
Material Yield Strength .................................................................. 729
Axial Member Force ....................................................................... 729
In-Plane Bending Moment ............................................................. 729
Out-of-Plane Bending Moment ...................................................... 729
In-Plane Small Bending Moment ................................................. 729
In-Plane Large Bending Moment ................................................ 730
Out-of-Plane Small Bending Moment .......................................... 730
Out-of-Plane Large Bending Moment ......................................... 730

Member Start Node

Identifies the start node, or i end, of a structural element. This option is required. Enter an
integer value between 1 and 32,000.

Member End Node

Identifies the member end node, or the j end, of a structural element. This option is required.
Enter an integer value between 1 and 32,000.

CAESAR II User's Guide

727

Equipment Component and Compliance

Member Type
Specifies the AISC shape label found in the AISC manual. The shape label is used to acquire
the member geometric properties from the database. For properties to be obtained, the label
you enter must match exactly the label in the database.
Because many of the angle labels can be found in the single angles, the double angles (long
legs back to back), and the double angles (short legs back to back), require an angle type to tell
them apart. Enter a D double angles with equal legs, and double angles with long legs back to
back. Enter a B for double angles with short legs back to back.

In-And Out-Of-Plane Fixity Coefficients Ky And Kz

Specifies the coefficients used to compute the strong and weak axis slenderness ratios.
Recommended values are listed in the following table:
End Conditions Theoretical K Recommended Design K
fixed-fixed

0.5

0.65

fixed-pinned

0.7

0.8

fixed-sliding

1.0

1.2

pinned-pinned

1.0

1.0

fixed-free

2.0

2.1

pinned-sliding

2.0

2.0

Unsupported Axial Length

Defines the length used to determine the buckling strength of the member. Typically, this is the
total length of the member.

Unsupported Length (In-Plane Bending)

Defines the length of the member between braces or supports which prevent bending about the
strong axis of the member.

Unsupported Length (Out-Of-Plane Bending)

Defines the length of the member between braces or supports which prevent bending about the
weak axis of the member.

728

CAESAR II User's Guide

Equipment Component and Compliance

Double Angle Spacing

Indicates the gap or space separating the adjacent legs. The spacing, as defined in the AISC
manual, must be 0.0, .375, or .75-inches.

Young's Modulus
Specifies the slope of the linear portion of the stress-strain diagram. For structural steel this
value is usually 29,000,000 psi. This value of Youngs modulus overrides the Young's Modulus
(see "Youngs Modulus" on page 725) value specified on the Global Input tab.

Material Yield Strength

Defines the minimum yield stress of the steel being used. The term yield stress denotes the
minimum yield point (for those steels that have a yield point) or the minimum yield strength (for
those that do not have a yield point). This value of the material yield strength overrides the
Material Yield Strength (on page 725) value specified on the Global Input tab.

Axial Member Force

Specifies the force (tension or compression) that acts along the axis of the member. The sign of
the number is not significant because a worst case load condition is assumed, that is, all positive
loads.

In-Plane Bending Moment

Specifies the maximum bending moment in the member (when sidesway is permitted) that will
cause bending about the strong axis Y-Y of the member. The sign of the number is not
significant because a worst case load condition of all positive loads is assumed

Out-of-Plane Bending Moment

Specifies the maximum bending moment in the member (when sidesway is permitted) that will
cause bending about the weak axis Z-Z of the member. The sign of the number is not significant
because a worst case load condition of all positive loads is assumed

In-Plane Small Bending Moment

Specifies the end moments for structures braced against sidesway. This value is the smaller of
the two in-plane bending moments that cause bending about the strong axis Y-Y of the member.

CAESAR II User's Guide

729

Equipment Component and Compliance

In-Plane Large Bending Moment

Specifies the end moments for structures braced against sidesway. This value is the larger of
the two in-plane bending moments which cause bending about the strong axis Y-Y of the
member.

Out-of-Plane Small Bending Moment

Specifies the end moments for structures braced against sidesway. This value is the smaller of
the two out-of-plane bending moments that cause bending about the weak axis Z-Z of the
member.

Out-of-Plane Large Bending Moment

Specifies the end moments for structures braced against sidesway. This value is the larger of
the two out-of-plane bending moments that cause bending about the weak axis Z-Z of the
member.

NEMA SM23 (Steam Turbines)

Analysis > NEMA SM23 evaluates piping loads on steam turbine nozzles. There are two types
of force/moment allowables computed during a NEMA run:
Individual nozzle allowables.
Cumulative equipment allowables.
Each individual suction, discharge, and extraction nozzle must satisfy the equation:
3F + M < 500De
Where:
F = resultant force on the particular nozzle.
M = resultant moment on the particular nozzle.
De = effective nominal pipe size of the connection.

730

CAESAR II User's Guide

Equipment Component and Compliance

A typical discharge nozzle calculation is shown below

For cumulative equipment allowables, NEMA SM23 states that "the combined resultants of the
forces and moments of the inlet, extraction, and exhaust connections resolved at the centerline
of the exhaust connection", be within a certain multiple of Dc, where Dc is the diameter of an
opening whose area is equal to the sum of the areas of all of the individual equipment
connections. A typical turbine cumulative (summation) equipment calculation is shown below:

SFX, SFY, and SFZ are the respective components of the forces from all connections resolved
at the discharge nozzle. FC(RSLT) is the result of these forces. SMX, SMY and SMZ are the
respective components of the moments from all connections resolved at the discharge nozzle.
Dc is the diameter of the equivalent opening as discussed above.
The software opens the NEMA SM23 window. Aside from the description, there is only one input
tab for the NEMA turbine. The Nema Input tab enables iterative addiction of an arbitrary number
of nozzles to the model. To add a nozzle, click Add Nozzle.

CAESAR II User's Guide

731

Equipment Component and Compliance

NEMA Turbine Example

Consider a turbine where node 35 represents the inlet nozzle and node 50 represents the outlet
nozzle. The output from a CAESAR II analysis of this piping system includes the forces and
moments acting on the pipe elements that attach to the turbine:
NODE

FX

FY

FZ

MX

MY

MZ

30

-108

-49

-93

73

188

603

35

108

67

93

162

-47

-481

50

-192

-11

369

-522

39

55

192

-63

11

78

117

-56

To find the forces acting on the turbine at points 35 and 50, reverse the sign of the forces that
act on the piping:
LOADS ON TURBINE @ 35 -108 -67 -93 -162 47 481
LOADS ON TURBINE @ 50 192 -7 11 -369 522 -39

Output Reports
The first page of the output is the input echo. The second page, as well as some of the
remaining pages, displays the individual nozzle calculations. The last page displays the
summation calculations. The example below shows a sample input echo report.
The actual number of output pages varies and depends on the number of nozzles defined
in the input.

The NEMA output report for the above turbine example shows that the turbine passed. The
highest summation load is only 56% of the allowable. If the turbine had failed, **FAILED** would
have displayed, in red, under the STATUS column opposite to the load combination that was

732

CAESAR II User's Guide

Equipment Component and Compliance

excessive. The following two examples show sample NEMA output nozzle calculations and
NEMA output summation calculations, respectively.

CAESAR II User's Guide

733

Equipment Component and Compliance

NEMA Input Data Tab

The following options are used to enter input data used to evaluate piping loads for steam
turbine nozzles.

Topics
Z-Axis Vertical ................................................................................ 734
Cos X & Y ...................................................................................... 734
Nozzle Number .............................................................................. 734
Nozzle Type ................................................................................... 735
Nozzle Diameter ............................................................................ 735
DX .................................................................................................. 735
DY .................................................................................................. 735
DZ .................................................................................................. 735
Global Force FX ............................................................................. 736
Global Force FY ............................................................................. 736
Global Force FZ ............................................................................. 736
Global Moment MX ........................................................................ 736
Global Moment MY ........................................................................ 736
Global Moment MZ ........................................................................ 736
Select Load Jobs and Load Case .................................................. 736

Z-Axis Vertical
Controls the plane in which the Z-axis lies. By default, CAESAR II assumes the Y-axis is vertical
with the X- and Z-axes in the horizontal plane. If you select this option, the software places the
Z-axis in the vertical plane, and the X- and Y-axes are in the horizontal plane.

Cos X & Y
Specifies the direction cosines (X, Z) for the equipment shaft centerline. For example, if shaft CL
is along the Z-axis, the direction cosines are as follows:
cosine X = 0.0
cosine Z = 1.0

Nozzle Number
Identifies the node number that describes the nozzle flange connection. Enter a positive number
only.

734

CAESAR II User's Guide

Equipment Component and Compliance

Nozzle Type
Identifies the nozzle type. This is used only for informational purposes in the output report.

Nozzle Diameter
Specifies the nozzle pipe nominal diameter.

DX
Specifies the X-distance from the force/moment resolution point to the nozzle.
NEMA SM 23 is ambiguous about the point of resolution of the combined forces and moments.
The resolution points are interpreted to be the following two points:
1. The face of the flange at the exhaust nozzle connection.
2. The intersection point of the exhaust nozzle centerline and the equipment shaft centerline.
In order to resolve the forces and moments at the current nozzle connection, enter the
X-distance from the current nozzle to each connection. Distance from the exhaust to the exhaust
nozzle is 0.0. In order to resolve the forces and moments at the intersection point of the exhaust
nozzle and the shaft centerlines, enter the X-distance from the intersection point to each
connection.

DY
Specifies the Y-distance from the force/moment resolution point to the nozzle.
NEMA SM 23 is ambiguous about the point of resolution of the combined forces and moments.
The resolution points are interpreted to be the following two points:
1. The face of the flange at the exhaust nozzle connection.
2. The intersection point of the exhaust nozzle centerline and the equipment shaft centerline.
In order to resolve the forces and moments at the current nozzle connection, enter the
Y-distance from the current nozzle to each connection. Distance from the exhaust to the exhaust
nozzle is 0.0. In order to resolve the forces and moments at the intersection point of the exhaust
nozzle and the shaft centerlines, enter the Y-distance from the intersection point to each
connection.

DZ
Specifies the Z-distance from the force/moment resolution point to the nozzle.
NEMA SM 23 is ambiguous about the point of resolution of the combined forces and moments.
The resolution points are interpreted to be the following two points:
1. The face of the flange at the exhaust nozzle connection.
2. The intersection point of the exhaust nozzle centerline and the equipment shaft centerline.
In order to resolve the forces and moments at the current nozzle connection, enter the
Z-distance from the current nozzle to each connection. Distance from the exhaust to the exhaust
nozzle is 0.0. In order to resolve the forces and moments at the intersection point of the exhaust
nozzle and the shaft centerlines, enter the Z-distance from the intersection point to each
connection.

CAESAR II User's Guide

735

Equipment Component and Compliance

Global Force FX
Specifies the X-component of the force that the piping system exerts on the nozzle.

Global Force FY
Specifies the Y-component of the force that the piping system exerts on the nozzle.

Global Force FZ
Specifies the Z-component of the force that the piping system exerts on the nozzle.

Global Moment MX
Specifies the X-component of the moment that the piping system exerts on the nozzle.

Global Moment MY
Specifies the Y-component of the force that the piping system exerts on the nozzle.

Global Moment MZ
Specifies the Z-component of the force that the piping system exerts on the nozzle.

Select Load Jobs and Load Case

Opens up a dialog box that you can use to navigate to the appropriate loads job or load case.

API 610 (Centrifugal Pumps)

Analyze > API 610 evaluates piping loads on centrifugal pumps. In October 2004, API released
the 10th edition of API 610 for centrifugal pumps for general refinery service. The API 610 load
satisfaction criteria are outlined below:

736

CAESAR II User's Guide

Equipment Component and Compliance

If clause F.1.2 is satisfied, then the pump is acceptable. Clause F.1.2a states that the individual
component nozzle loads must fall below two times the allowables listed in the Nozzle Loadings
table (Table 4) shown below:

Further, F.1.2 b) and c) must also be satisfied.

Clause F.1.2b states that the resultant applied forces and moments acting on each pump nozzle
flange shall satisfy the equations F.1 and F.2 of the code. Referring to the API 610 report, you
can determine whether F.1.2b is satisfied by comparing the Force/Moment to two. If either
resultant exceeds two, the nozzle status is reported as ** FAILED **.
The F.1.2c requirements give equations translating the applied component forces and moments
to the center of the pump. The requirements of these equations, and whether they have satisfied
API 610, are shown on the bottom of the report.
To begin an analysis of piping loads on centrifugal pumps, specify a new job name in the New
Job Name Specification dialog box or click Browse to navigate to an existing job file. .
All CAESAR II analyses require a job name for identification purposes. After you have
created, or opened, a job, you can enter input data on the Global Input and Local Member
tabs and Output menus to define, analyze, and review your data.
The software displays the API 610 window, which consists of three data input tabs: Input Data
(see "Input Data Tab" on page 740), Suction Nozzle (see "Suction Nozzle Tab" on page 743),
and Discharge Nozzle (see "Discharge Nozzle Tab" on page 744).

CAESAR II User's Guide

737

Equipment Component and Compliance

The following example is taken from the API 610 code and shows the review of an overhung
end-suction process pump in English units. The three CAESAR II input tabs are shown.

738

CAESAR II User's Guide

Equipment Component and Compliance

An example of the processing output is shown below:

API 610 Discharge Nozzle

CAESAR II User's Guide

739

Equipment Component and Compliance

Input Data Tab

The following options are used to enter input data used to evaluate piping loads on centrifugal
pumps.

Topics
Vertical In-Line Pumps................................................................... 740
Centerline Direction Cosine X........................................................ 741
Centerline Direction Cosine Z ........................................................ 741
Basepoint Node Number ............................................................... 742
Suction Nozzle Node Number ....................................................... 742
Suction Nozzle Nominal Diameter ................................................. 742
Suction Nozzle Type ...................................................................... 742
Discharge ....................................................................................... 742
Discharge Nozzle Nominal Diameter ............................................. 742
Discharge Nozzle Type .................................................................. 742
Factor for Table 4 Allowables ........................................................ 743

Vertical In-Line Pumps

Indicates that the pump is the vertical in-line type supported only by the attached piping. API
states that for the vertical in-line pump, you can use 2.0 times the loads from Table 4. However,

740

CAESAR II User's Guide

Equipment Component and Compliance

even if the pump fails the 2.0 Table 2 criteria, it may still pass. If the principal stress on the
nozzle is less than 6,000 psi, then that nozzle passes. If the principal stress on either nozzle is
greater than 6,000 psi, the overall status is reported as **FAILED**
In API 610 there is an example problem which illustrates the way stresses are computed on
these in-line pump nozzles. The two basic equations for determining stress are
Stresses (s) = Force / Area + Moment / Section Modulus
Shear Stresses (t) = Force / Area + Torque * distance / J
Where J is the polar moment of inertia.
In the second equation, both terms of the equation are always added together. On the other
hand, the Force/Area term in the first equation depends on the sign of the force (tension or
compression) that you enter in the force and moment spreadsheet. The sign of the force is
determined by Centerline Direction Cosine X (on page 741). For vertical in-line pumps, enter the
value in the direction extending from the discharge to the suction nozzle. The distances that are
usually entered for pedestal mounted pumps can be left blank because they are not used.

Centerline Direction Cosine X

Indicates one of the following, depending on whether Vertical In-Line Pumps is selected.
Vertical In-Line Pumps - Specifies the direction cosines (X,Z) for the nozzles. The positive
direction is from discharge to the suction nozzle. For example, if the nozzles are in the
X-axis, the direction cosines are:
cosine X=1.0
cosine Z=0.0
Horizontal Pumps - Specifies the direction cosines (X,Z) for the pump centerline. For
example, if the pump is along the Z-axis, the direction cosines are:
cosine X=0.0
cosine Z=1.0

Centerline Direction Cosine Z

Indicates one of the following, depending on whether Vertical In-Line Pumps is selected.
Vertical In-Line Pumps - Specifies the direction cosines (X,Z) for the nozzles. The positive
direction is from discharge to the suction nozzle. For example, if the nozzles are in the
X-axis, the direction cosines are:
cosine X=1.0
cosine Z=0.0
Horizontal Pumps - Specifies the direction cosines (X,Z) for the pump centerline. For
example, if the pump is along the Z-axis, the direction cosines are:
cosine X=0.0
cosine Z=1.0

CAESAR II User's Guide

741

Equipment Component and Compliance

Basepoint Node Number

Identifies the node number that describes the intersection of the axis of the shaft and the
centerline of the pedestals. Enter only a positive value. This node does not have to appear in
any of the piping models but is used by API 610 as a point of reference on the pump about
which to sum moments.
In the 8th Ed. of the Standard, the base point refers to the center of the pump. The center of the
pump is defined by the intersection of the pump shaft centerline and a vertical plane passing
midway between the four pedestals.

Suction Nozzle Node Number

Identifies the node number that describes the suction nozzle flange connection. Enter only a
positive number.

Suction Nozzle Nominal Diameter

Defines the suction nozzle pipe nominal diameter.

Suction Nozzle Type

Specifies the location of the suction nozzle. Select Top, Side, or End. Each position has
different allowables.
For pumps with centerline along Y-axis (vertical), select Side.

Discharge
Identifies the node number that describes the discharge nozzle flange connection. Enter only a
positive number.

Discharge Nozzle Nominal Diameter

Defines the discharge nozzle pipe nominal diameter.

Discharge Nozzle Type

Specifies the location of the discharge nozzle. Select Top, Side, or End. Each position has
different allowables.
For pumps with centerline along Y-axis (vertical), select Side.

742

CAESAR II User's Guide

Equipment Component and Compliance

Factor for Table 4 Allowables

Defines the factor by which all Table 4 allowables are multiplied. This value is between 1.0 and
2.0. Values less than 1.0 are replaced by a default factor of 1.0, while values larger than 2.0 are
replaced by a default factor of 2.0. If left blank, a default value of 1.0 is used.
Typically, a value of 1.0 is used when evaluating individual nozzle loads. When checking vertical
in-line pumps, this value can be equal to 2.0. The value of 2.0 is also valid when suction and
discharge nozzle loads are evaluated together as defined in Appendix F of the API 610
Standard.

Suction Nozzle Tab

The following options are used to enter input data for suction nozzles.

Topics
DX .................................................................................................. 743
DY .................................................................................................. 743
DZ .................................................................................................. 744
Forces on Nozzle ........................................................................... 744
Moments on Nozzle ....................................................................... 744

DX
Specifies the distance between the suction nozzle and base point along the X-axis. Enter a
positive value if the suction nozzle X-coordinate is greater than that of the base point, that is, if
the suction nozzle is farther out on the positive X-axis.

When analyzing vertical in-line pumps, the X-, Y-, and Z-distances (DX, DY, and DZ) are not
used.
The API 610 10th Edition defines the base point as the center of the pump. The center of
the pump is defined as the intersection of the pump shaft centerline and a vertical plane
passing through the center of the two pedestals.

DY
Specifies the distance between the suction nozzle and base point along the Y-axis. Enter a
positive value if the suction nozzle Y-coordinate is greater than that of the base point, that is, if
the suction nozzle is farther out on the positive Y-axis.

When analyzing vertical in-line pumps, the X, Y, and Z distances (DX, DY, and DZ) are not
used.
The API 610 10th Edition defines the base point as the center of the pump. The center of
the pump is defined as the intersection of the pump shaft centerline and a vertical plane
passing through the center of the two pedestals.

CAESAR II User's Guide

743

Equipment Component and Compliance

DZ
Specifies the distance between the suction nozzle and base point along the Z-axis. Enter a
positive value if the suction nozzle Z-coordinate is greater than that of the base point, that is, if
the suction nozzle is farther out on the positive Z-axis.

When analyzing vertical in-line pumps, the X, Y, and Z distances (DX, DY, and DZ) are not
used.
The API 610 10th Edition defines the base point as the center of the pump. The center of
the pump is defined as the intersection of the pump shaft centerline and a vertical plane
passing through the center of the two pedestals.

Forces on Nozzle
Identifies the X-, Y-, or Z-component of the force that the piping system exerts on the suction
nozzle.
Enter the forces in their global orientation. For vertical in-line pumps, the orientation of the
nozzle centerline is used to determine if the nozzle is in tension or compression. Positive
direction is from discharge to suction nozzle.

Moments on Nozzle
Identifies the X-, Y-, or Z-component of the moment that the piping system exerts on the suction
nozzle.

Discharge Nozzle Tab

The following options are used to enter input data used for discharge nozzles.

Topics
DX .................................................................................................. 744
DY .................................................................................................. 745
DZ .................................................................................................. 745
Forces on Nozzle ........................................................................... 745
Moments on Nozzle ....................................................................... 745

DX
Specifies the distance between the discharge nozzle and base point along the X-axis. Enter a
positive value if the discharge nozzle X-coordinate is greater than that of the base point, that is,
if the discharge nozzle is farther out on the positive X-axis.

744

When analyzing vertical in-line pumps, the X-, Y-, and Z- distances (DX, DY, and DZ) are
not used.
The API 610 10th Edition defines the base point as the center of the pump. The center of
the pump is defined as the intersection of the pump shaft centerline and a vertical plane
passing through the center of the two pedestals.

CAESAR II User's Guide

Equipment Component and Compliance

DY
Specifies the distance between the discharge nozzle and base point along the Y-axis. Enter a
positive value if the discharge nozzle Y-coordinate is greater than that of the base point, that is,
if the discharge nozzle is farther out on the positive Y-axis.

When analyzing vertical in-line pumps, the X-, Y-, and Z-distances (DX, DY, and DZ) are not
used.
The API 610 10th Edition defines the base point as the center of the pump. The center of
the pump is defined as the intersection of the pump shaft centerline and a vertical plane
passing through the center of the two pedestals.

DZ
Specifies the distance between the discharge nozzle and base point along the Z-axis. Enter a
positive value if the discharge nozzle Z-coordinate is greater than that of the base point, that is,
if the discharge nozzle is farther out on the positive Z-axis.

When analyzing vertical in-line pumps, the X-, Y-, and Z-distances (DX, DY, and DZ) are not
used.
The API 610 10th Edition defines the base point as the center of the pump. The center of
the pump is defined as the intersection of the pump shaft centerline and a vertical plane
passing through the center of the two pedestals.

Forces on Nozzle
Identifies the X-, Y-, or Z-component of the force that the piping system exerts on the discharge
nozzle.
Enter the forces in their global orientation. For vertical in-line pumps, the orientation of the
nozzle centerline is used to determine if the nozzle is in tension or compression. Positive
direction is from discharge to suction nozzle.

Moments on Nozzle
Identifies the X-, Y-, or Z-component of the moment that the piping system exerts on the
discharge nozzle.

API 617 (Centrifugal Compressors)

Analysis > API 617 evaluates piping loads on compressors. The requirements of this standard
are similar to those of NEMA SM-23 (1991). The allowable load values for API-617 are
approximately 85% higher than the NEMA allowables.
To begin, specify a new job name in the New Job Name Specification dialog box or click
Browse to navigate to an existing job file.
All CAESAR II analyses require a job name for identification purposes. After you have
created, or opened, a job, you can enter input data on the Global Input and Local Member
tabs and Output menus to define, analyze, and review your data.
The software opens the API 617 window, which consists of the following five input tabs:

CAESAR II User's Guide

745

Equipment Component and Compliance

API 617 Input (see "API 617 Input Tab" on page 746)
Suction Nozzle (see "Suction Nozzle Tab" on page 748)
Discharge Nozzle (see "Discharge Nozzle Tab" on page 749)
Extraction Nozzle #1 (see "Extraction Nozzle #1 Tab" on page 750)
Extraction Nozzle #2 (see "Extraction Nozzle #2 Tab" on page 752)

API 617 Input Tab

Topics
Node Number................................................................................. 747
Nominal Diameter .......................................................................... 747
Node Number................................................................................. 747
Nominal Diameter .......................................................................... 747
Node Number................................................................................. 747
Nominal Diameter .......................................................................... 747
Node Number................................................................................. 747
Nominal Diameter .......................................................................... 747
Equipment Centerline .................................................................... 747
Factor for Allowables ..................................................................... 748

746

CAESAR II User's Guide

Equipment Component and Compliance

Node Number
Indicates the node number that describes the suction nozzle flange connection. Enter a positive
number.

Nominal Diameter
Specifies the suction nozzle pipe nominal diameter.

Node Number
Indicates the node number that describes the extraction nozzle #1 flange connection. Enter a
positive number.

Nominal Diameter
Specifies the extraction nozzle #1 pipe nominal diameter.

Node Number
Indicates the node number that describes the discharge nozzle flange connection. Enter a
positive number.

Nominal Diameter
Specifies the discharge nozzle pipe nominal diameter.

Node Number
Indicates the node number that describes the extraction nozzle #2 flange connection. Enter a
positive number.

Nominal Diameter
Specifies the extraction nozzle #2 pipe nominal diameter.

Equipment Centerline
Indicates the direction cosines (X,Z) for the equipment shaft centerline. For example, if shaft CL
is along the Z-axis, the direction cosines are:
cosine X = 0.0
cosine Z = 1.0

CAESAR II User's Guide

747

Equipment Component and Compliance

Factor for Allowables

Designates the multiplication factor by which all allowables are multiplied, if necessary
API 617 does not recommend the use of a multiplier. The code specifically states what
the allowables are.

Suction Nozzle Tab

The following options are used to enter input data for suction nozzles.

Topics
X Distance to Suction .................................................................... 748
Y Distance to Suction .................................................................... 748
Z Distance to Suction ..................................................................... 748
X Force Acting on Suction Nozzle ................................................. 748
Y Force Acting on Suction Nozzle ................................................. 748
Z Force Acting on Suction Nozzle ................................................. 749
X Moment Acting on Suction Nozzle ............................................. 749
Y Moment Acting on suction Nozzle .............................................. 749
Z Moment Acting on Suction Nozzle ............................................. 749

X Distance to Suction
Specifies the X-distance from the largest suction/discharge nozzle to the suction nozzle.

Y Distance to Suction
Specifies the Y-distance from the largest suction/discharge nozzle to the suction nozzle.

Z Distance to Suction
Specifies the Z-distance from the largest suction/discharge nozzle to the suction nozzle.

X Force Acting on Suction Nozzle

Specifies the X-component of the force that the piping system exerts on the suction nozzle.

Y Force Acting on Suction Nozzle

Specifies the Y-component of the force that the piping system exerts on the suction nozzle.

748

CAESAR II User's Guide

Equipment Component and Compliance

Z Force Acting on Suction Nozzle

Specifies the Z-component of the force that the piping system exerts on the suction nozzle.

X Moment Acting on Suction Nozzle

Specifies the X-component of the moment that the piping system exerts on the suction nozzle.

Y Moment Acting on suction Nozzle

Specifies the Y-component of the moment that the piping system exerts on the suction nozzle.

Z Moment Acting on Suction Nozzle

Specifies the Z-component of the moment that the piping system exerts on the suction nozzle.

Discharge Nozzle Tab

The following options are used to enter input data for discharge nozzles.

Topics
X Distance to Discharge ................................................................ 749
Y Distance to Discharge ................................................................ 749
Z Distance to Discharge ................................................................ 750
X Force Acting on Discharge Nozzle ............................................. 750
Y Force Acting on Discharge Nozzle ............................................. 750
Z Force Acting on Discharge Nozzle ............................................. 750
X Moment Acting on Discharge Nozzle ......................................... 750
Y Moment Acting on Discharge Nozzle ......................................... 750
Z Force Acting on Discharge Nozzle ............................................. 750

X Distance to Discharge
Specifies the X-distance from the largest suction/discharge nozzle to the discharge nozzle.

Y Distance to Discharge
Specifies the Y-distance from the largest suction/discharge nozzle to the discharge nozzle.

CAESAR II User's Guide

749

Equipment Component and Compliance

Z Distance to Discharge
Specifies the Z-distance from the largest suction/discharge nozzle to the discharge nozzle.

X Force Acting on Discharge Nozzle

Specifies the X-component of the force that the piping system exerts on the discharge nozzle.

Y Force Acting on Discharge Nozzle

Specifies the Y-component of the force that the piping system exerts on the discharge nozzle.

Z Force Acting on Discharge Nozzle

Specifies the Z-component of the force that the piping system exerts on the discharge nozzle.

X Moment Acting on Discharge Nozzle

Specifies the X-component of the moment that the piping system exerts on the discharge
nozzle.

Y Moment Acting on Discharge Nozzle

Specifies the Y-component of the moment that the piping system exerts on the discharge
nozzle.

Z Force Acting on Discharge Nozzle

Specifies the Z-component of the force that the piping system exerts on the discharge nozzle.

Extraction Nozzle #1 Tab

The following options are used to enter input data for the extraction nozzle #1.

Topics
X Distance to Extraction Nozzle #1 ............................................... 751
Y Distance to Extraction Nozzle #1 ............................................... 751
Z Distance to Extraction Nozzle #1 ............................................... 751
X Force Acting on the Extraction Nozzle ....................................... 751
Y Force Acting on the Extraction Nozzle ....................................... 751
Z Force Acting on the Extraction Nozzle ....................................... 751
X Moment Acting on the Extraction Nozzle ................................... 751
Y Moment Acting on the Extraction Nozzle ................................... 751
Z Moment Acting on the Extraction Nozzle ................................... 751

750

CAESAR II User's Guide

Equipment Component and Compliance

X Distance to Extraction Nozzle #1

Specifies the X-distance from the largest suction/discharge nozzle to the extraction nozzle #1.

Y Distance to Extraction Nozzle #1

Specifies the Y-distance from the largest suction/discharge nozzle to the extraction nozzle #1.

Z Distance to Extraction Nozzle #1

Specifies the Z-distance from the largest suction/discharge nozzle to the extraction nozzle #1.

X Force Acting on the Extraction Nozzle

Specifies the X-component of the force that the piping system exerts on the extraction nozzle
#1.

Y Force Acting on the Extraction Nozzle

Specifies the Y-component of the force that the piping system exerts on the extraction nozzle
#1.

Z Force Acting on the Extraction Nozzle

Specifies the Z-component of the force that the piping system exerts on the extraction nozzle
#1.

X Moment Acting on the Extraction Nozzle

Specifies the X-component of the moment that the piping system exerts on the extraction nozzle
#1.

Y Moment Acting on the Extraction Nozzle

Specifies the Y-component of the moment that the piping system exerts on the extraction nozzle
#1.

Z Moment Acting on the Extraction Nozzle

Specifies the Z-component of the moment that the piping system exerts on the extraction nozzle
#1.

CAESAR II User's Guide

751

Equipment Component and Compliance

Extraction Nozzle #2 Tab

The following options are used to enter input data for the extraction nozzle #2.

Topics
X Distance to Extraction Nozzle #2 ............................................... 752
Y Distance to Extraction Nozzle #2 ............................................... 752
Z Distance to Extraction Nozzle #2 ............................................... 752
X Force Acting on the Extraction Nozzle ....................................... 752
Y Moment Acting on Extraction Nozzle ......................................... 752
Z Force Acting on the Extraction Nozzle ....................................... 752
X Moment Acting on the Extraction Nozzle ................................... 753
Y Moment Acting on the Extraction Nozzle ................................... 753
Z Moment Acting on the Extraction Nozzle ................................... 753

X Distance to Extraction Nozzle #2

Specifies the X-distance from the largest suction/discharge nozzle to the extraction nozzle #2.

Y Distance to Extraction Nozzle #2

Specifies the Y-distance from the largest suction/discharge nozzle to the extraction nozzle #2.

Z Distance to Extraction Nozzle #2

Specifies the Z-distance from the largest suction/discharge nozzle to the extraction nozzle #2.

X Force Acting on the Extraction Nozzle

Specifies the X-component of the force that the piping system exerts on the extraction nozzle
#1.

Y Moment Acting on Extraction Nozzle

Specifies the Y-component of the moment that the piping system exerts on |the extraction
nozzle #2.

Z Force Acting on the Extraction Nozzle

Specifies the Z-component of the force that the piping system exerts on the extraction nozzle
#1.

752

CAESAR II User's Guide

Equipment Component and Compliance

X Moment Acting on the Extraction Nozzle

Specifies the X-component of the moment that the piping system exerts on the extraction nozzle
#1.

Y Moment Acting on the Extraction Nozzle

Specifies the Y-component of the moment that the piping system exerts on the extraction nozzle
#1.

Z Moment Acting on the Extraction Nozzle

Specifies the Z-component of the moment that the piping system exerts on the extraction nozzle
#1.

API 661 (Air Cooled Heat Exchangers)

Analysis > API 661 evaluates piping loads on air-cooled heat exchangers. These calculations
cover the allowed loads on the vertical, co-linear nozzles (item 9 in the figure below) found on
most single or multi-bundled air cooled heat exchangers. The following figures from API 661
illustrate the type of open exchanger body analyzed by this standard.

The two requirements must be met for API 661compliance:

5.1.11.1 - Each nozzle in the corroded condition must be capable of withstanding the
moments and forces defined in Heat Exchangers figure.
5.1.11.2 - The sum of the forces and moments on each fixed header, that is, each individual
bundle, must be less than 1,500 lb. transverse to the bundle, 2,500 lb. axial to the bundle,
and 3,000 pound axial on the nozzle centerline. The allowed moments are 3,000, 2,000, and
4,000 ft.-lb., respectively. This recognizes that the application of these moments and forces
will cause movement and that this movement will tend to reduce the actual loads.

CAESAR II User's Guide

753

Equipment Component and Compliance

To begin, specify a new job name in the New Job Name Specification dialog box or click
Browse to navigate to an existing job file.
All CAESAR II analyses require a job name for identification purposes. After you have
created, or opened, a job, you can enter input data on the Global Input and Local Member
tabs and Output menus to define, analyze, and review your data.
The software opens the API 661 window, which consists of the following three screens for input
of project-specific data: Input Data (see "Input Data Tab" on page 755), Inlet Nozzle (see "Inlet
Nozzle Tab" on page 756), and Outlet Nozzle (see "Outlet Nozzle Tab" on page 757).

754

CAESAR II User's Guide

Equipment Component and Compliance

A typical API 661 report is shown below:

Input Data Tab

The following options are used to enter input data used to evaluate piping loads on air-cooled
heat exchangers.

Topics
Inlet Nozzle Node Number............................................................. 756
Inlet Nozzle Nominal Diameter ...................................................... 756
Outlet Nozzle Node Number .......................................................... 756
Outlet Nozzle Nominal Diameter ................................................... 756
Table 4 Force and Moment Multiplier ............................................ 756
Resultant Force and Moment Multiplier ......................................... 756
Tube Bundle Direction ................................................................... 756

CAESAR II User's Guide

755

Equipment Component and Compliance

Inlet Nozzle Node Number

Indicates the inlet nozzle node number that is the connecting point between piping and the
exchanger. This entry is optional. If defined, enter a positive number.

Inlet Nozzle Nominal Diameter

Specifies the nominal diameter of the exchanger inlet connection.

Outlet Nozzle Node Number

Indicates the outlet nozzle node number that is the connecting point between piping and the
exchanger. This entry is optional. If defined, enter a positive number.

Outlet Nozzle Nominal Diameter

Specifies the nominal diameter of the exchanger outlet connection.

Table 4 Force and Moment Multiplier

Defines the Table 4 (Figure 6) Force and Moment multiplier. This is the value upon which the
passed or failed status is based. If you leave this option blank, the software uses a default value
of 1.0.

Resultant Force and Moment Multiplier

Indicates the resultant force and moment multiplier. The computed force and moment ratios are
compared to this value. If you leave this option blank, the software uses a default value of 1.0.

Tube Bundle Direction

Specifies the CAESAR II global tube direction. If the X-direction is defined, the force and
moment allowables for the X- and Z-directions are flipped. The same applies to the Resultant
Force and Moment Multiplier allowables.

Inlet Nozzle Tab

The following options are used to enter input data for the inlet nozzle.

Topics
Y Distance from Nozzle Face to Header Center ........................... 757
X Force Applied to Inlet Nozzle ..................................................... 757
Y Force Applied to Inlet Nozzle ..................................................... 757
Z Force Applied to Inlet Nozzle...................................................... 757
X Moment Applied to Inlet Nozzle ................................................. 757
Y Moment Applied to Inlet Nozzle ................................................. 757
Z Moment Applied to Inlet Nozzle .................................................. 757

756

CAESAR II User's Guide

Equipment Component and Compliance

Y Distance from Nozzle Face to Header Center

Designates the Y-dimension of the suction nozzle to the header center. This dimension must be
positive. Refer to Figure 5 in API 661. In the figure, the number 6 arrowhead points to the
approximate center of the header location.

X Force Applied to Inlet Nozzle

Specifies the X-force that the piping system exerts on the inlet nozzle.

Y Force Applied to Inlet Nozzle

Specifies the Y-force that the piping system exerts on the inlet nozzle. This component can be
considered a radial load.

Z Force Applied to Inlet Nozzle

Specifies the Z-force that the piping system exerts on the inlet nozzle.

X Moment Applied to Inlet Nozzle

Specifies the X-moment that the piping system exerts on the inlet nozzle.

Y Moment Applied to Inlet Nozzle

Specifies the Y-moment that the piping system exerts on the inlet nozzle.

Z Moment Applied to Inlet Nozzle

Specifies the Z-moment that the piping system exerts on the Inlet nozzle.

Outlet Nozzle Tab

The following options are used to enter input data for the outlet nozzle.

Topics
Y Distance From Header Center to Nozzle Face .......................... 758
X Force Applied to Outlet Nozzle .................................................. 758
Y Force Applied to Outlet Nozzle .................................................. 758
Z Force Applied to Outlet Nozzle ................................................... 758
X Moment Applied to Outlet Nozzle ............................................... 758
Y Moment Applied to Outlet Nozzle ............................................... 758
Z Moment Applied to Suction Nozzle ............................................ 758

CAESAR II User's Guide

757

Equipment Component and Compliance

Y Distance From Header Center to Nozzle Face

Indicates the Y-dimension of the header center to the discharge nozzle. Refer to Figure 5 in API
661. In this figure, the number 6 arrowhead points to the approximate center of the header
location.

X Force Applied to Outlet Nozzle

Indicates the X-force which the piping system exerts on the outlet nozzle.

Y Force Applied to Outlet Nozzle

Specifies the Y-force that the piping system exerts on the outlet nozzle. This can be considered
a radial load.

Z Force Applied to Outlet Nozzle

Specifies the Z-force that the piping system exerts on the outlet nozzle.

X Moment Applied to Outlet Nozzle

Specifies the X-moment that the piping system exerts on the outlet nozzle.

Y Moment Applied to Outlet Nozzle

Specifies the Y-moment which the piping system exerts on the outlet nozzle.

Z Moment Applied to Suction Nozzle

Specifies the Z-moment which the piping system exerts on the outlet nozzle.

Heat Exchange Institute

Analysis > HEI Standard evaluates the allowable loads on shell type heat exchanger nozzles.
To begin, specify a new job name in the New Job Name Specification dialog box or click
Browse to navigate to an existing job file.
All CAESAR II analyses require a job name for identification purposes. After you have
created, or opened, a job, you can enter input data on the Global Input and Local Member
tabs and Output menus to define, analyze, and review your data.

758

CAESAR II User's Guide

Equipment Component and Compliance

The software opens the HEI STD window, in which you can enter the necessary input data. The
following example shows sample input for the HEI module:

Because the pressure is greater than zero, a pressure thrust force is computed and
combined with the radial force.
Section 3.14 of the HEI bulletin discusses the computational methods used to compute these
allowable loads. The method employed by HEI is a simplification of the WRC 107 method,
where the allowable loads have been linearized to show the relationship between the maximum
permitted radial force and the maximum permitted moment vector. If this relationship is plotted
(using the moments as the abscissa and the forces as the ordinate), a straight line can be drawn
between the maximum permitted force and the maximum permitted moment vector, forming a
triangle with the axes. For any set of applied forces and moments, the nozzle passes if the
location of these loads falls inside the triangle. Conversely, the nozzle fails if the location of the
loads falls outside the triangle.
Because the pressure is greater than zero, a pressure thrust force is computed and
combined with the radial force modified to include both the plot of the allowables and the
location of the current load set on this plot. The HEI bulletin states that the effect of internal
pressure has been included in the combined stresses; however, the effect of the pressure on the
nozzle thrust has not. This requires combination with the other radial loads. CAESAR II
automatically computes the pressure thrust and adds it to the radial force if Add Pressure
Thrust is selected on the HEI Nozzle (on page 760) tab.

CAESAR II User's Guide

759

Equipment Component and Compliance

HEI Nozzle
The following options are used to enter input data for shell type heat exchanger nozzles.

Topics
Design Pressure ............................................................................ 760
Nozzle Outside Diameter ............................................................... 760
Shell Outside Diameter .................................................................. 760
Shell Thickness .............................................................................. 760
Material Yield Strength .................................................................. 760
Material Allowable Stress .............................................................. 760
Maximum Radial Force .................................................................. 761
Maximum Longitudinal Moment ..................................................... 761
Add Pressure Thrust Force............................................................ 761

Design Pressure
Sets the design pressure under which the vessel is operating. Enter a non-negative value.

Nozzle Outside Diameter

Indicates the outside diameter of the nozzle attachment.

Shell Outside Diameter

Indicates the outside diameter of the pressure vessel.

Shell Thickness
Defines the shell wall thickness. This software does not take any corrosion allowance into
consideration.

Material Yield Strength

Specifies the yield strength (Sy) of the shell material at the operating temperature. Refer to
ASME Section VIII Division 1 for this information. Enter a positive value. The yield strength is
greater than the allowable stress.

Material Allowable Stress

Indicates the allowable stress of the shell material at the operating temperature, according to
ASME Section VIII Division 1. Enter a positive value.

760

CAESAR II User's Guide

Equipment Component and Compliance

Maximum Radial Force

Defines the radial force that the piping system is exerting on the nozzle. If you enter a negative
number, the force is considered to be compressive and is counteracted by any included
pressure thrust force.
The pressure thrust force is calculated using the nozzle diameter and the shell thickness. The
maximum force for the given moment includes the pressure thrust force term.

Maximum Longitudinal Moment

Specifies the moment about the transverse axis of the vessel which the piping exerts on the
nozzle. Enter a non-negative value.

Add Pressure Thrust Force

Controls whether the thrust force generated by the internal pressure is included or ignored.
Select this option to include the pressure thrust force. To ignore this force, do not select this
option. This is the default setting.
All versions prior to CAESAR II 3.21a always included the pressure thrust force in
analysis.

API 560 (Fired Heaters for General Refinery Services)

Analysis > API 560 evaluates piping loads on fired heaters. To begin, specify a new job name
in the New Job Name Specification dialog box or click Browse to navigate to an existing job
file.
All CAESAR II analyses require a job name for identification purposes. After you have
created, or opened, a job, you can enter input data on the Global Input and Local Member
tabs and Output menus to define, analyze, and review your data.

CAESAR II User's Guide

761

Equipment Component and Compliance

The software opens the API 560 window. The window consists of one input tab on which you
can enter data for the tube nominal diameter and the forces and moments acting on the tube.

When you run the analysis, CAESAR II compares the input forces and moments to the
allowables as published in API 560. An example of the equipment report output is shown below.

762

CAESAR II User's Guide

Equipment Component and Compliance

API 560 Input Data Tab

The following options are used to enter input data for the tube nominal diameter and the forces
and moments acting on the tube.

Topics
Tube Node Number ....................................................................... 763
Tube Nominal Diameter ................................................................. 763
Tube Axial Force ............................................................................ 763
Tube Horizontal Shear Force......................................................... 763
Tube Vertical Shear Force ............................................................. 763
Tube Torsional Moment ................................................................. 764
Tube Horizontal Moment ............................................................... 764
Tube Vertical Moment .................................................................... 764

Tube Node Number

Identifies the node number for the tube that is being analyzed. Because there are many tubes in
a fired heater, analyze the most highly loaded tubes.

Tube Nominal Diameter

Indicates the nominal diameter of the tube.

Tube Axial Force

Specifies the axial force acting on the tube at the tube/header junction. If the tube direction is X,
then enter the FX value from the appropriate load case.

Tube Horizontal Shear Force

Specifies the horizontal force acting on the tube at the tube/header junction. If the tube direction
is X, then enter the FZ value from the appropriate load case.

Tube Vertical Shear Force

Specifies the vertical force acting on the tube at the tube/header junction. If the tube direction is
X, then enter the FY value from the appropriate load case.

CAESAR II User's Guide

763

Equipment Component and Compliance

Tube Torsional Moment

Indicates the torsional moment acting on the tube at the tube/header junction. If the tube
direction is X, then enter the MX value from the appropriate load case.

Tube Horizontal Moment

Indicates the horizontal moment acting on the tube at the tube/header junction. If the tube
direction is X, then enter the MZ value from the appropriate load case.

Tube Vertical Moment

Indicates the vertical moment acting on the tube at the tube/header junction. If the tube direction
is X, then enter the MY value from the appropriate load case.

764

CAESAR II User's Guide

SECTION 13

Technical Discussions
In This Section
Rigid Element Application .............................................................. 765
In-Line Flange Evaluation .............................................................. 767
Cold Spring .................................................................................... 768
Expansion Joints ............................................................................ 770
Hanger Sizing Algorithm ................................................................ 772
Class 1 Branch Flexibilities ............................................................ 775
Modeling Friction Effects ............................................................... 778
Nonlinear Code Compliance .......................................................... 779
Sustained Stresses and Nonlinear Restraints ............................... 779
Static Seismic Inertial Loads.......................................................... 782
Wind Loads .................................................................................... 783
Hydrodynamic (Wave and Current) Loading ................................. 785
Evaluating Vessel Stresses ........................................................... 797
Inclusion of Missing Mass Correction ............................................ 801
Fatigue Analysis Using CAESAR II ............................................... 805
Pipe Stress Analysis of FRP Piping ............................................... 818
Code Compliance Considerations ................................................. 837
Local Coordinates .......................................................................... 874

Rigid Element Application

A piping element that is stiffer or heavier than pipe of the same size (for example, a flanged
valve) can be modeled as a rigid element in CAESAR II. CAESAR II sets the stiffness of a rigid
element based on the inside diameter defined for the pipe but with a wall thickness set to ten
times the entered value. Note that long rigid elements may bend.
Rigid elements in CAESAR II are rigid relative to the pipe around it. For example, if a 6-inch line
ties into a 72-inch heat exchanger and rigid elements are used to model the heat exchanger,
those exchanger elements are better represented by 72 inch pipe rather than 6 inch pipe.

Rigid Weight
Specifies a value for the weight of the rigid element. The rigid material weight is the weight of
the rigid excluding insulation, refractory, cladding, or fluid. If left blank, then the weight of the
rigid defaults to 0. A rigid element with zero weight is often used as a construction element, used
to move a centerline load to the shell wall, or used to model the effective stiffness and thermal
growth of a piece of equipment.
If left blank or 0, then the software does not add the additional weight due either to
insulation, refractory, cladding, or fluid.

CAESAR II User's Guide

765

Technical Discussions

Fluid Weight in Rigid Elements

The fluid weight in a rigid element is assumed to be equal to the fluid weight in an equivalent
straight pipe of similar length and inside diameter.

Insulation Weight on Rigid Elements

The insulation weight for the rigid is assumed to be equal to 1.75 times the insulation for an
equivalent length of straight pipe of the entered outside diameter.

Total Weight on Rigid Elements

The total weight for rigid elements where the entered weight is zero will be zero.
The total weight for rigid elements where the entered weight is not zero is calculated as follows:
Weight = W u + W f + W r +1.75(W i+W c)
Where:
W u = User-defined rigid weight (the Thermal Expansion/Pipe Weight report will show
user-defined weight divided by entered length)
W f = Calculated fluid weight for equivalent straight pipe (this is reduced by refractory lining)
W r = Calculated refractory weight for equivalent straight pipe
W i = Calculated insulation cladding weight for equivalent straight pipe
W c = Calculated cladding weight for equivalent straight pipe
CAESAR II does not calculate stress on rigid elements. Forces and moments are not normally
printed for rigid elements however, you can select the appropriate check box found in
Environment>Special Execution Parameters from the Piping Input spreadsheet to print
these loads.

Modeling using Rigids

Zero-weight rigid elements are useful where modeling non-pipe components where thermal
growth or load transfer is important.
Use zero-weight rigids to model piping hardware such as expansion joint tie rods, base plates,
and trunnions.
You can also use these dummy rigids to provide connectivity between the centerline of an
element and the outside edge of the element. The most common example of this is when you
need to add a dummy rigid that runs from the node at the centerline of the vessel to the outside
wall where you want to connect the nozzle.
You can also model equipment using a series of rigid elements, joining nozzles to a body and
perhaps to a support point. This approach will properly distribute thermal strain through the
component based on this geometry and the entered element temperatures. For more
information on the use of these construction rigids, see the CAESAR II Applications Guide in
various sections as appropriate to a particular modeling technique.

766

CAESAR II User's Guide

Technical Discussions

In-Line Flange Evaluation

Allows you to choose the method to use for evaluating flanges under load:
The Kellogg Equivalent Pressure Method
The ASME NC-365.8 Calculation for B16.5 Flanged Joints

Kellogg Equivalent Pressure Method

Converts piping axial forces and bending moments into an equivalent pressure on the flange.
After the conversion is complete, the software adds this equivalent pressure to the pressure
defined in the load case. It then compares this sum to the allowable pressure rating for the
flange at the appropriate temperature. (The pressure-temperature table is defined in the model
input and the temperature is specified in the Load Case Options.) The formula for the total
equivalent pressure displays below:
3

Peq = 16M/()G + 4F/ ()G + PD

Where:
Peq = total equivalent pressure (for checking against flange rating)
M = calculated bending moment on flange
G = diameter of effective gasket reaction
F = absolute value of the calculated axial force on flange
PD = pressure specified in the load case (for example, P1 for W+T1+P1)
The allowable pressure rating will be multiplied by the occasional load factor specified in
the Load Case Options.

ASME NC-3658.3 Calculation Method for B16.5 Flanged

Joints with High Strength Bolting
Restricted to joints using flanges, bolting, and gaskets as specified in ANSI B16.5 that use
bolting materials having an S value at 100F (38C) greater than or equal to 20,000 psi (138
MPa). CAESAR II uses the analysis method for Service Level A as stated in NC-3658.3(a)(2):
Mfs 3125(Sy/36,000)CAb
or
Mfd 6250(Sy/36,000)CAb
Where:
Mfs = Bending or torsional moment, whichever is greater, acting on the flange, and due to
weight, thermal expansion, sustained anchor movements, relief valve steady state thrust,
and other sustained mechanical loads. CAESAR II considers any moments developed
during a non-Occasional Load Case to be Mfs.
Mfd = Bending or torsional moment, whichever is greater, acting on the flange, as defined for
Mfs and but also including any dynamic loadings. CAESAR II considers any moments
developed during an Occasional Load Case to be Mfd, effectively the doubling flange
capacity for Occasional loadings.
Sy = Yield strength of flange material at design temperature. CAESAR II allows evaluation
to be done using as many as 10 different temperatures; Sy/36,000; where Sy, is given in psi,
cannot be greater than 36,000 psi

CAESAR II User's Guide

767

Technical Discussions
C = Bolt circle diameter
Ab = Total cross sectional area of bolts
PD = Design pressure
CAESAR II calculates an Equivalent Stress S in the flange and compares it to Sy (or 2*Sy for
occasional load cases), in the following manner:
S = 36,000* Mfs / (CAb * 3125) Min(Sy, 36000)
(non-Occ)
S = 36,000 * Mfd / (CAb * 3125) 2.0 * Min(Sy, 36000)
(Occ)
For systems of units that do not express stress in psi, the software converts the 36,000 values in
the above equations to the appropriate set of units.
You can do flange evaluations in Static Analysis only.

Cold Spring
Cold spring is a method where you introduce pipe strain in the installed state to modify the
resulting strain in the operating state. Adding this preload is commonly used to adjust (reduce)
equipment load in the operating state. A cut short describes an intentional gap in the pipe
assembly requiring an initial tensile load to close the final joint. A cut long describes an
intentional overlap in the pipe assembly requiring an initial compressive load to close the final
joint. This initial gap or overlap is modeled as a cut short material or a cut long material,
respectively. CAESAR II reduces the cut short to zero length and doubles the cut long in any
load case that includes the CS load in the load case definition.
This initial cold pull is difficult to implement with any accuracy and, being used in systems that
operate in the creep range, their long term effect is difficult to control or even predict. Due to the
difficulty of properly installing a cold spring system, most piping codes recommend that you only
use two-thirds of the specified cold spring for equipment load calculations. You can calculate the
cold spring element length (ignoring equipment growth) by using the following equation:
Ci = xLi dT
Where:
Ci = length of cold spring in direction i; where i is X, Y, or Z (inches)
Li = total length of pipe subject to expansion in direction i (inches)
= mean thermal expansion coefficient of material between ambient and operating temperature
(in/in/F)
dT = change in temperature (F)
x = percent cold spring
When x = 0%, there is no cold spring and there will be no reduction in the thermal strain found in
the operating load. When x = 100%, the operating load will have no thermal strain as all the
expected pipe strain will be realized in the installed state of the piping system. If x = 50%, the
pipe strain will be shared equally by both the installed load and operating load. This percent cold
spring (x) is not the same term as the two-thirds allowance mentioned above.
No credit can be taken for cold spring in the stress calculations, because the expansion
stress provisions of the piping codes require the evaluation of the stress range, which is
unaffected by cold spring, except perhaps in the presence of non-linear boundary conditions, as
discussed below. The cold spring adjusts installed and operating loads and the stress mean, but
not the stress range used in most expansion stress calculations.

768

CAESAR II User's Guide

Technical Discussions
Cold Spring Considerations
You must consider several factors when using cold spring:
Verify that the cold reactions on equipment nozzles due to cold spring do not exceed nozzle
allowables.
Verify that the expansion stress range does not include the effect of the cold spring.
Verify that the cold spring value/tolerance is much greater than fabrication tolerances.
For elevated temperature cases, where cold spring is used to reduce operating equipment
load, using the hot modulus of analysis may also have a significant effect on the load
magnitude.

Modeling cold springs

1. Specify the cold gaps or overlaps as elements defined as cut short or cut long materials,
respectively.
2. Make the lengths of the cold spring elements only of their actual lengths to implement the
code recommendations.
3. Reset the material property on the element following the cold spring element.
4. Analyze the cold spring system by running the following load cases:
Load Case 1 (OPE)
W+T1+P1+CS includes all of the design cold spring
Load Case 2 (OPE)

W+P1+CS includes all of the design cold spring but not

the temperature.

Load Case 3 (SUS)

W+P1 standard sustained case for code stress check

Load Case4 (EXP)

L1-L2 expansion case for code stress check.

Both the sustained loads and the operating loads must fall within the manufacturers
allowables for a specific piece of equipment.
5. Verify that using cold spring in the ambient state does not overload a piece of rotating
equipment as the unit starts.
Material numbers 18 and 19 are used to signal CAESAR II that the element in the
spreadsheet represents a length of pipe that is to be cut short or long during fabrication.

Other Applications for Cold Spring

While often used to reduce the magnitude of loads on equipment and restraints (see below), you
can also use cold spring to accelerate the thermal shakedown of the system in fewer operating
cycles.

CAESAR II User's Guide

769

Technical Discussions

Expansion Joints
Checking the expansion joint box on the element enables definition of an expansion joint for that
element. Expansion joints can be modeled as a single element across the flexible length of the
joint or as a zero length element at the midpoint of the expansion joint. Expansion joints
elements have a zero length if the Delta fields on the Pipe Element spreadsheet are left blank or
zero.
When an expansion joint has a defined length, CAESAR II builds the expansion joint as a beam
element using the element length with the entered expansion joint stiffnesses.
Four stiffness values define the expansion joint:
Axial
Transverse
Torsion
Bending

Examples of the Stiffnesses

Define Finite Length Joints

For expansion joints where flexible length is defined, the bending stiffness is defined by the
entered, flexible, length and the transverse stiffness of the joint. Some expansion joint catalogs
list what would be called bending flexibility rather than the required bending stiffness used in
CAESAR II. This bending flexibility is adequate for an expansion joint modeled by two rigid
elements that are pinned at the joint midpoint (a zero length expansion joint) but it is the wrong
value for a flexible beam element. To address this ambiguity, CAESAR II calculates and applies
a bending stiffness based on the entered expansion joint length and transverse stiffness. We
suggest that you only enter the bending term from manufacturers' catalogs when using the
zero-length expansion joint model or for rubber joint which do not follow beam bending
definitions.
Typically, expansion joint manufacturers do not supply torsional stiffness data. If the
manufacturer does not supply the data, enter a large torsional stiffness value, and verify that the
resulting load on the bellows is not excessive. When the piping system is tight, and the diameter
large, the magnitude of the large torsional stiffness can significantly affect the magnitude of the
torsion carried by the joints. For example, a stiffness of 100,000 in.lb./deg. and 1E12 in.lb./deg.

770

CAESAR II User's Guide

Technical Discussions
can produce considerably different torsional load results. Conservatively speaking, the tendency
is to use the larger stiffness except that the torsional stiffness value is probably closer to the
100,000 in.lb./deg. In instances where a large torsional stiffness value is important, you can get
a stiffness estimate from the manufacturer, or use the equation below to derive an estimate. Use
this equation to conservatively estimate torsional loads on the bellows and surrounding
equipment.

Where
= 3.14159
Re = Expansion joint effective radius
t = Bellows thickness
E = Elastic Modulus
= Poissons Ratio
L = Flexible bellows length
When the expansion joint has a zero length, none of the expansion joint stiffnesses are
related. You must be sure that you enter a value in all of the Stiffness fields.

Calculate the Pressure Thrust

CAESAR II calculates the pressure thrust on the expansion joint if you type a value for the
bellows Effective ID on the Expansion Joint auxiliary dialog box. If there is no Effective ID, the
mathematical model for pressure thrust applies a force equal to the pressure multiplied by the
effective area of the bellows at the two nodes that define the expansion joint. The force can
open the bellows if the pressure is positive, and close the bellows if the pressure is negative.
You should note that this model does not correctly locate pressure load components in the
vicinity of the expansion joint. In most cases, the misapplied load does not affect the solution.
There are two components of the pressure thrust to apply in practice rather than the one
component applied in the model. The first component is equal to the pressure times the inside
area of the pipe and acts at the first change in direction of the pipe on either side of the
expansion joint. This load will tend to put the pipe wall between the change in direction and the
expansion joint in tension. The second component is equal to the pressure times the difference
between the bellows effective area and inside pipe area. This load acts at the end of the
expansion joint and tends to open the bellows up putting the pipe between the expansion joint
and the change in direction in compression. In the mathematical model, the full component of
the pressure thrust force is placed on the ends of the bellows instead of having a portion shifted
out on either side of the expansion joint.

Effective ID
The pressure area used to set the pressure thrust force on an expansion joint is provided by the
expansion joint manufacturer either as an effective area or effective inside diameter (ID). If the
pressure thrust load is to be included in the analysis, the Effective ID must be provided in the
expansion joint model definition. Any load case that includes a pressure term (for example,
+P1) will include a thrust force on either end of the expansion joint based on this effective
ID.

CAESAR II User's Guide

771

Technical Discussions

Hanger Sizing Algorithm

At locations that you define, CAESAR II will select a rigid, variable or constant effort support
using the automated procedure defined here. Attention here is focused on selecting a variable
(spring) support from a manufacturers catalog. Be sure to review and verify all supports sized
by CAESAR II.

Spring Design Requirements

A rigid rod is selected if the vertical thermal growth at the location is less than the value entered
as Rigid Support Displacement Criteria and a constant support is selected if the vertical
thermal growth at the location is greater than the value entered as Max. Allowed Travel Limit.
Otherwise, CAESAR II selects the smallest single spring that satisfies all design requirements
provided in the hanger design data.
The spring design requirements are:
1. Both the operating (typically hot) and the installed (typically cold) loads must be within the
allowed working range of the spring.
2. The absolute value of the change in the load (the product of the travel and the selected
spring rate) divided by the design load must be less than the specified "Allowable Load
Variation" value. The default variation is 25%.
MSS SP-69 defines load variation as the ratio of the change in load and the operating
load. CAESAR II, in using the design load, will use the theoretical cold load (discussed
below), instead of the operating load, if the user selects "Cold Load" design.
3. If you specify "Available Space", then this space must be greater than the basic height of the
spring selected. Positive values are compared with hanger height and negative values are
compared with spring can height.
If the software cannot find a single spring that satisfies the design requirements, it
searches for two identical springs that will each carry half the load. If the software cannot find
any springs that satisfies the design requirements, it recommends a constant effort support for
the location.

Restrained Weight Case

If you need to design a hanger, the first analysis case that you must run is the restrained weight
case. This case usually includes weight, pressure, and concentrated loads. Hanger hot loads
are calculated in the restrained weight case.

Run the restrained weight case

1. Place rigid Y-restraints at each hanger location.
2. Determine any anchors you want to designate as freed.
3. Verify the freed anchors are properly released.
Loads on the Y-restraints at hangers, calculated from the restrained weight case, are
designated as the hanger hot design loads.

772

CAESAR II User's Guide

Technical Discussions

Pre-Selection Load Case 2 Setting Hanger Deflection

through the Operating Case
After the restrained weight case, you must run an operating analysis. The operating case must
always be the second load case in the set of defined analysis cases. You can define the
operating load cases for hanger design any way you see fit. CAESAR II recommends the load
cases it thinks you should run whenever it detects the first attempt to analyze a particular
system. You can accept or reject the recommendations. If you define your own hanger design
load cases, you must understand exactly what is done in the "restrained weight" and operating
passes of the hanger design algorithm.

Run an operating case

1. Remove the Y-restraints.
2. Insert the hot loads calculated from the hanger locations in the restrained weight analysis.
3. Change any freed anchors from the restrained weight analysis to fixed.
The vertical displacement of the operating case at each hanger location defines the travel of that
particular hanger. If there are single directional restraints or gaps in the system and a changed
status in the operating case, then the hanger loads are redistributed.
When CAESAR II detects a nonlinear status change, it reruns the restrained weight case
with the restraints left as they were at the end of the operating case. To determine the updated
travel, you must calculate the new restraint loads and run another operating case.

Post-Selection Load Case (Optional) Setting the Actual

Installed (Cold) Load
If you need to calculate the actual hanger installed loads, the third analysis level combination
case must define the weight configuration that exists in the field when a spring is installed.
Typically, this case includes weight without fluid contents and other live loads. The theoretical
cold, or installed load, is the load on the spring when the "unbalanced" installed load is applied
and the pipe is not allowed to displace vertically (the load will be "balanced" when the pipe is in
the operating or design position). The actual installed load may differ from the theoretical
installed load by (K)(d), where (K) is the spring stiffness and (d) is the displacement of the pipe
in the installed condition.

Calculate the actual installed load

1. Install the hangers.
2. Apply the theoretical cold load and all other loads (for example, empty weight) that will be
present when the springs are set.
3. Calculate the position of all springs (d).
4. Set the actual installed spring load based on this installed position (installed load =
Theoretical Cold Load - (K)(d)).

CAESAR II User's Guide

773

Technical Discussions

Create Spring Load Cases

Up to three load cases are needed for spring sizing:
"Restrained" Weight (required)
Operating (required)
Installed Weight (optional)
After the Hanger Algorithm runs the hanger load cases, it selects the hangers. The program
inserts the newly-selected springs into the piping system and includes them and their preload
(the Theoretical Cold Load) in the analysis of all remaining load cases.
Hanger installed loads are concentrated forces and are only included in subsequent load cases
that contain the hanger preload force set (+H).
You can specify any number of user-defined load cases after setting up the required spring load
cases.
Spring hanger design does not affect the ability of CAESAR II to check code compliance. In load
cases recommended by CAESAR II, the normal code compliance cases always follow the set of
load cases required for hanger design.
Multiple operating case spring hanger design implies that hanger loads and travels from more
than one operating case are included in the spring hanger selection algorithm.
Each spring in a multiple operating case hanger design has a Multiple Load Case Design
option. This design option tells CAESAR II how multiple loads and travels for a single hanger
are combined to get a single design load and travel. The set-up of the analysis cases is slightly
different for multiple operating case hanger design in that now there is more than one operating
case. You can use the Hanger Design Control dialog to specify the actual number of operating
cases.
The load cases that you analyze for multiple load case hanger design operating cases are:
Restrained Weight (this does not change)
Operating case #1

Operating case #9
Installed Weight (if requested)

Constant Effort Support

Enables you to specify the support load for a constant effort hanger and define the hanger
location. This value is also included in all hanger design runs and all analysis cases following
the hanger cases that include the hanger preload force set in their formulation.

774

CAESAR II User's Guide

Technical Discussions

Including the Spring Hanger Stiffness in the Design

Algorithm
The operating cases for hanger travel are normally analyzed with no stiffness included at the
hanger locations. This is why these cases are traditionally referred to as "free thermal" cases.
However, when the piping system is very flexible, or the selected springs are very stiff, the
actual resulting spring loads in the installed condition can vary significantly from the theoretically
calculated results. With such a load change, perhaps this shorter, more accurate spring
deflection may allow a smaller spring selection. In that case, CAESAR II enables you to include,
using an iterative process, the stiffness of the selected springs in the operating cases for hanger
travel.
You can activate this trait for all new models through the Configure\Setup by setting the option
to Include Travel to As Designed. You can also activate this option for individual models on the
Load Case Options Tab (Static Analysis Dialog Box) (on page 459) tab by changing the Hanger
Stiffness option to As Designed.
Selecting this option could lead to convergence problems. If you use this option, be sure to
check the hanger load in the cold case in the field so that it matches the reported hanger Cold
Load.
You must always include the hanger preload force set H (the Theoretical Cold Load) in
subsequent load cases.
Applying thermal and displacement effects to the live loaded system should make an
installed hanger move to the hot, or balanced, load in this operating case.

Other Notes on Hanger Sizing

At times, CAESAR II indicates that certain hanger locations carry no load and selects zero
load constant effort supports at these locations. Typically, zero load constant effort supports
indicate poor hanger locations. It is important to not simply ignore these selections as and
other hangers selected in the vicinity of these zero load hangers have improper operating
loads assigned. Relocate or remove these zero load selections.
Unless you specifically designate your hanger design load cases with a KEEP status, they
display in the output reports as NOT ACTIVE.

Class 1 Branch Flexibilities

This analytical option was added to CAESAR II for the following reasons:
Automatic local flexibilities at intersections help you bound the true solution. Because the
computer time to do an analysis is less expensive, more frequently you can run several
solutions of the same model using slightly different input techniques to determine the effect
of the modeling difference on the results. This gives you a degree of confidence in the
numbers you get. For example, structural steel supporting structures can be modeled to see
the effect of their stiffnesses, nozzle flexibilities can be added at vessel connections to see
how these features redistribute load throughout the model, friction is added to watch its
effect on displacements and equipment loads, and with CAESAR II you can include Class 1
intersection flexibilities. The characteristic that makes this option convenient to use is that
you can enable or disable the Class 1 flexibilities using a single option in the setup file. No
other modification to the input required.

CAESAR II User's Guide

775

Technical Discussions

In WRC 329, there are a number of suggestions made to improve the stress calculations at
intersections. These suggestions are fairly substantial and are given in order of importance.
The most important item, as felt by E. Rodabaugh, in improving the stress calculations at
intersections is given, in part, as follows:
"In piping system analyses, it may be assumed that the flexibility is represented by a rigid
joint at the branch-to-run centerlines juncture. However, you should be aware that this
assumption can be inaccurate and should consider the use of a more appropriate flexibility
representation."
Use of the Class 1 Branch Flexibility feature may be summarized as follows: Include the
Class 1 Branch Flex option in the setup file.
Where reduced branch geometry requirements are satisfied, CAESAR II constructs a rigid
offset from the centerline of the header pipe to its surface, and then adds the local flexibility
of the header pipe, between the end of the offset, at the header, and the start of the branch.
Stresses computed for the branch are for the point at its connection with the header.
Where reduced branch geometry requirements are not satisfied, CAESAR II constructs a
rigid offset from the centerline of the header pipe to its surface. The branch piping starts at
the end of this rigid offset. There is NO local flexibility due to the header added. (It is
deemed to be insignificant.) Stresses computed for the branch are for the point at its
connection with the header.
The reduced branch geometry requirements that CAESAR II checks are
d/D 0.5 and

D/T 100.0

Where:
d = Diameter of Branch
D = Diameter of Header
T = Wall thickness of Header
If you use the Class 1 branch flexibilities, intersection models in the analysis become stiffer
when the reduced geometry requirements do not apply, and become more flexible when the
reduced geometry requirements do apply. Stiffer intersections typically carry more loads and
thus have higher stresses lowering the stress in other parts of the system that have been
unloaded. More flexible intersections typically carry less load and thus have lower stresses. This
causes higher stresses in other parts of the system that have "picked up" the extra load.
The branch flexibility rules used in CAESAR II are taken from ASME III, Subsection NB, (Class
1), 1992 Edition, Issued December 31, 1992, from Code Sections NB-3686.4 and NB-3686.5.
When the reduced branch rules apply, use the following equations for the local stiffnesses:
TRANSLATIONAL:
AXIAL
=
RIGID
CIRCUMFERENTIAL =
RIGID
LONGITUDINAL
=
RIGID
ROTATIONAL:
AXIAL
=
RIGID
CIRCUMFERENTIAL =
(kx)d/EI
LONGITUDINAL
=
(kz)d/EI

776

CAESAR II User's Guide

Technical Discussions
Where:
RIGID =
1.0E12 lb./in. or 1.0E12 in.lb./deg.
d
=
Branch Diameter
E
=
Youngs Modulus
I
=
Cross Section Moment of Inertia
D
=
Header Diameter
T
=
Header Thickness
Tb
=
Branch Fitting Thickness
1.5
0.5
kx
=
0.1(D/T) [(T/t)(d/D)] (Tb/T)
0.5
kz
=
0.2(D/T)[(T/t)(d/D)] (Tb/T)
For more information, see WRC 329 Section 4.9 Flexibility Factors. A brief quote from this
section follows:
"The significance of "k" depends upon the specifics of the piping system. Qualitatively, if "k" is
small compared to the length of the piping system, including the effect of elbows and their
k-factors, then the inclusion of "k" for branch connections will have only minor effects on the
calculated moments. Conversely, if "k" is large compared to the piping system length, then the
inclusion of "k" for branch connections will have major effects. The largest effect will be to
greatly reduce the magnitude of the calculated moments acting on the branch connection. To
illustrate the potential significance of "ks" for branch connections, we use the equation [above]
to calculate "k" for a branch connection with D=30 in., d=12.75 in., and T=t=0.375 in.:
1.5
0.5
k = 0.1(80) (0.425) * (1.0) = 46.6
This compares to the more typical rigid-joint interpretation that k=1, rather than k=46.6 !"
Further discussion in section 4.9 illustrates additional problems that can arise by overestimating
the stiffness at branch connections. Problems arise by believing "mistakenly" that the stress at
the intersection is too high. Further reference should be made to this section in WRC 329.
Branch automatic flexibility generation can be used where the user has only defined the branch
element in the model, that is has left the header piping out of the analysis. In this case there will
be no "offset" equal to one-half of the header diameter applied to the branch end. A "partial
intersection" is one where either the header pipe is not modeled, is modeled with a single
element, or is part of a geometric intersection where the header pipes are not colinear. In the
case where there is no header pipe going to the intersection, there will be no modification to the
model for the class 1 branch flexibilities. When at least a single header pipe is recognized, the
local flexibility directions are defined by the branch alone and in accordance with the CAESAR II
defaults for circumferential and longitudinal directions for the branch and header. You must build
full intersection models at all times, not only when employing the class 1 branch flexibility. In
most cases, building full intersection models eliminates problems caused by the assumptions
necessary when a partial intersection is described.
In the equations in NB-3686.5 for tn, the thickness of the branch pipe is used in all cases.
When branches are skewed with respect to the header pipe, and where the two header pipes
are colinear, the local Class 1 flexibilities are still taken to be the longitudinal and circumferential
directions that are tangent to the header surface at its intersection with the branch.
Class 1 branch flexibilities can be formed at both ends of a single pipe element.
The offsets necessary to form the class 1 intersections are automatically generated by
CAESAR II. There is no extra input required by you to have CAESAR II build these
intersections.
If there are already user-defined offsets at an intersection end, the computed offset to get from
the header centerline to its surface along the centerline of the branch is added to the already
entered user offset.

CAESAR II User's Guide

777

Technical Discussions
Automatic offsets are generated providing that the distance from the header centerline to the
header surface along the branch centerline is less than or equal to 98% of the total pipe straight
length.
When an element with a bend designation is part of an intersection model, the offset and
flexibility calculations are not performed.

Modeling Friction Effects

There are two methods to solving friction problems:
Insert a force at the node which must be overcome for motion to occur.
Insert a stiffness which applies an increasing force up to the value of Mu * Normal Force.
CAESAR II uses the stiffness method.
If there is motion at the node under evaluation then the friction force is equal to Mu * Normal
force. However, because there is a non-rigid stiffness placed at that location to resist the initial
motion; the node could experience some displacement. The force at the node is the product of
the displacement and the stiffness. If the resultant force is less than the maximum friction force
(Mu * Normal Force) the node is assumed to be not sliding. As a result, you might see
displacements at nodes that have not achieved the "sliding" friction force in the output report.
The maximum value of the force at the node is the friction force (Mu * Normal force). After the
system reaches this value, the reaction at the node stops increasing. This constant force value
is then applied to the global load vector during the next iteration to determine the nodal
displacements. The example below explains what happens in a "friction" problem.
1. The default friction stiffness is 1,000,000 lb./in. To solve convergence problems, consider
decreasing this value.
2. Until the calculated load at the node equals (Mu * Normal force), the restraint load is the
product of the displacement multiplied by the friction stiffness.
3. Should the calculated load exceed the maximum value of the friction force, the friction force
stops increasing because a constant effort force opposite the sliding direction is inserted in
the model in place of the friction stiffness.
If you increase the friction stiffness in the setup file, the displacements at the node may
decrease slightly. Usually, this causes a re-distribution of the loads throughout the system that
could have an adverse effect on the solution convergence.
If problems arise during the solution of a job with friction at supports, reducing the friction
stiffness typically improves convergence. You must do several runs with varying values of the
friction stiffness to ensure the behavior of the system is consistent.
For more information on this subject, see "Inclusion of a Support Friction into a Computerized
Solution of a Self-Compensating Pipeline" by J. Sobieszczanski, published in the Transactions
of the ASME, Journal of Engineering for Industry, August 1972. A summary of the major points
of this paper is below.

Summary of J. Sobieszczanskis ASME Paper

778

For dry friction, the friction force magnitude is a step function of displacement. This
discontinuity means the problem as intrinsically nonlinear and eliminates the possibility of
using the superposition principle.
The friction loading on the pipe can be represented by an ordinary differential equation of
the fourth order with a variable coefficient that is a nonlinear function of both dependent and
independent variables. No solution in closed form is known for an equation of this type.
The solution has to be sought by means of numerical integration to be carried out
specifically for a particular pipeline configuration.

CAESAR II User's Guide

Technical Discussions

Dry friction can be idealized by a fictitious elastic foundation, discretized to a set of elastic
spring supports.
A well-known property of an elastic system with dry friction constraints is that it may attain
several static equilibrium positions within limits determined by the friction forces.
The whole problem then has clearly not a deterministic, but a stochastic character.

Nonlinear Code Compliance

You can adhere to nonlinear piping code compliance requirements by doing the following:
1. Performing an operating and sustained analysis of the system and including with each case
the effect of nonlinear restraints.
2. Subtracting the sustained case displacements from the operating case displacements to find
the displacement range.
3. Calculating the expansion stresses from the displacement range solved for in step 2.
CAESAR II uses this method for calculating the expansion stress range. In addition, CAESAR II
scans your input and recommends load cases and combinations for performing the operating,
sustained, and expansion stress calculations. This recommendation is useful when performing
spring hanger analysis of a multiple operating case system.

Sustained Stresses and Nonlinear Restraints

The proper computation of sustained stresses has been an issue since the late 1970s when
computerized pipe stress analysis programs first attempted to address the problem of non-linear
restraints. The existing piping codes offered little guidance on the subject, because their criteria
were developed during the era when all analyses were simplified to behave in a strictly linear
fashion. The problem arises because the codes require that a piping system be analyzed
separately for sustained loadings; you must determine which stresses are caused by which
loadings. Sustained loads are force loadings that are assumed not to change, while expansion
loadings are displacement loadings that vary with the system operating conditions.
Determination of the sustained loads is the simple part most everybody agrees that those
forces consist of weight, pressure, and spring preloads. These forces remain relatively constant
as the piping system goes through its thermal growth. However, confusion occurs when the
status of nonlinear restraints change (pipes lift off of supports, gaps close, and so forth) as the
pipe goes from installed to operating state. In this case, you must determine which boundary
conditions to use when evaluating the applied forces. Or in other words, what portion of the
stress in the operating case is caused by weight loads, and what portion is caused by expansion
effects?
There is no corresponding confusion on the question of calculating expansion stresses,
because the codes are explicit in their instructions that the expansion stress range is the
difference between the operating and cold stress positions, both of which are known.
The obvious answer to this question by the developers of some pipe stress programs was that
the sustained stress calculation should be done using the operating, or hot boundary condition.
This compounded the problem in that the laws of superposition no longer held. In other words,
the results of sustained (W+P) and thermal (T) cases, when added together, did not equal the
results of the operating (W+P+T) case. One pioneering program, DYNAFLEX, attempted to
resolve this by introducing the concept of the "thermal component of weight" an oxymoron, in
our opinion. Other programs, notably those which came from the mainframe/linear analysis
world, had to approximate the behavior of these non-linear restraints. Their approach to the
problem is to run an operating case, obtain the restraint status, and modify the model according
to these results. All subsequent load cases analyzed use this restraint configuration. The fact

CAESAR II User's Guide

779

Technical Discussions
that the laws of static superposition did not hold was hopefully not noticed by the user. CAESAR
II, on the other hand, represents technology developed expressly for operation on the personal
computer, and therefore incorporates directly the effects of non-linear restraints. This is done by
considering each load case independently. The restraint configuration is determined for each
load case by the program as it runs, based upon the actual loads that are considered present.
Some users have asserted that there are actually two sustained load cases. In fact, there has
been a B31.3 code interpretation that indicates that the sustained stress may also be checked
with the operating restraint configuration. Calculating the sustained stresses using the operating
restraint status raises several other issues; what modulus of elasticity should be used, and
which sustained stresses should be used for occasional cases.
It is our assertion that there is only one sustained case (otherwise, it is not "sustained") there
can be, however, multiple sustained stress distributions. The two most obvious are those
associated with the cold (installed) and hot (operating) configurations; however, there are also
numerous in-between, as the piping system load steps from cold to hot. Whether the "true"
sustained load case occurs during the installed or operating case is a matter of the frame of
reference. If an engineer first sees a system in its cold condition, and watches it expand to its
operating condition, it appears that the first case (because weight and pressure primary loads
are present) is the sustained case, and the changes he viewed are thermal effects (due to
heat up) secondary loads due to displacements. If a second engineer first sees the same
system in the operating case and watches it cool down to the cold case, he may believe that the
first case he saw (the operating case) is the sustained case, and changes experienced from hot
to cold are the thermal expansion effects (the thermal stress ranges are the same in both
cases). Consider the further implications of cryogenic systems where changes from installed to
operating are the same as those experienced by hot systems when going from operating to
installed. After elastic shakedown has occurred, the question becomes clouded even further due
to the presence of thermally induced pre-stresses in the pipe during both the cold and hot
conditions. We feel either the operating or installed case (or some other one in-between) could
justifiably be selected for analysis as the sustained case, as long as the program is consistent.
We have selected the installed case (less the effect of cold spring) as our reference sustained
case, because thermal effects can be completely omitted from the solution (as intended by the
code). This best represents the support configuration when the sustained loads are initially
applied. If the pipe lifts off of a support when going from installed to operating, we view this as a
thermal effect which is consistent with the piping codes view of thermal effects as the
variation of stress distribution as the piping system goes from cold to hot, and is explicitly
corroborated by one code, an earlier edition of the French petrochemical code, which states that
weight stress distributions due to thermal growth of the pipe should be considered as expansion
stresses). For example, we feel that a change in a rigid support load from 2,000 lbs to zero
should be treated no differently than would be a variable spring load changing from 6,000 lbs to
4,000 lbs (or another rigid support load going 2,000 lbs to 1 lb). In the former case, if the pipe
became "overstressed", it would yield, and sag back to the support, relieving the stress. This
process is identical to the way that all other expansion stresses are relieved in a piping system.
We are confident that our interpretation is correct. However, we understand that our users may
not always agree with us that is why CAESAR II provides the greatest ability to custom tailor
the analysis to your individual specifications. If you want, you can analyze a "hot sustained"
case by adding two load cases to those normally recommended by CAESAR II. This is done by
assuming that the pipe expands first, and then the sustained loads are applied (this is of course
an idealized concept, but the stresses can only be segregated by segregating the applied loads,
so the sustained loads can only be applied either before, or after, the expansion loads).

780

CAESAR II User's Guide

Technical Discussions
The following are the default load cases, as well as those required for a "hot sustained."
Default

New

L1: W+P1+T1(OPE)

L1: W+P1+T1(OPE)

L2: W+P1(SUS)

L2: W+P1(SUS)

L3: L1-L2(EXP)

L3: T1(EXP)
L4: L1-L2(EXP)
L5: L1-L3(SUS)

In the new load case list, the second case still represents the cold sustained, while the fourth
case represents the expansion case (note that L1-L2, or W+P1+T1-W-P1, equals T1, with
non-linear effects taken into account). The third case represents the thermal growth of the
"weightless," non-pressurized pipe, against the non-linear restraints.
The fifth case (L1-L3, or W+P1+T1-T1, equals W+P1) represents the application of weight and
pressure to that expanded case, or the "hot sustained" case. Note that when the piping system
is analyzed as above, the actual effects of the non-linear restraints are considered (they are not
arbitrarily removed from the model), and the laws of superposition still hold.
An alternative school of thought believes that a "hot sustained" is only valid if: (1) the sustained,
primary loads are applied, (2) all springs are showing their Hot Load settings, and (3) any
supports that lift off (or otherwise become non-active) have been removed from the model. An
analysis such as this is achievable by setting the "Keep/Discard" status of the Restrained
Weight case (the first hanger design load case) to "Keep", thus permitting the results of that
case to be viewable as for any other load case. The Restrained Weight case automatically
removes restraints that become non-active during the designated operating case, and apply the
Hot Load at each of the hanger locations.

Notes on Occasional Load Cases

Several piping codes require that you add the stresses from occasional loads (such as wind or
earthquake) to the sustained stresses (due to weight, pressure, and other constant loads) before
comparing them to their allowables. You can recreate this combination in CAESAR II using the
following load cases:
CASE #
1

W+P+H

(SUS):

Sustained stresses

WIND

(OCC):

Wind load set

U1

(OCC):

Uniform g load set for earthquake

L1+L2

(OCC):

Code stresses for wind

L1+L3

(OCC):

Code stresses for earthquake*

* Scalar Summation Method required

If you must model nonlinear effects in the system, the load case combinations are not so straight
forward. Friction, one-direction restraints, and double-acting restraints with gaps are the
nonlinear items which complicate modeling. For this example, we will use wind loading on a long
vertical run of pipe with a guide. Assume there is a 1-inch gap between the pipe and guide.
Under normal operation, the pipe moves -inch towards the stop leaving a gap of 1--inch on
either side of the pipe and a -inch gap on the other side. If you analyze the wind loads alone,
the pipe is allowed to move 1-inch from its center point in the guide to the guide stop. Because

CAESAR II User's Guide

781

Technical Discussions
occasional loads are usually analyzed with the system in operation, the pipe may be limited to a
-inch motion as the gap is closed in one direction, and 1--inch if the gap is closed in the
opposite direction. With nonlinear effects modeled in the system, the occasional deflections (and
stresses) are influenced by the operating position of the piping.
The following list of CAESAR II load cases takes this point into consideration. The load cases
displayed below are only for wind acting in one direction, that is, +X. Depending on the system,
the most critical loads could occur in any direction +/-X, +/-Z, or skewed in XZ. The intention of
the load case construction is to find the effect of the occasional load on the piping system in the
operating condition. The stress due to the moment change from the operating to the operating
plus wind case is added to the stress from the sustained case.
CASE #
1

W+T1+P1

(OPE):

Operation analysis

W+P1

(SUS):

Sustained stresses

W+T1+P1+WIN
D1

(OPE):

Operating analysis with wind

L1-L2

(EXP):

Expansion stresses (Algebraic summation)

L3-L1

(OCC):

Net deflection of wind(Algebraic summation)

L2+L5

(OCC):

Code stresses for wind (Scalar summation)

Case 5 computes the isolated wind effect on the piping system in the operating condition. Case
6 adds the stresses from Case 5 to the sustained stresses from Case 2.

Static Seismic Inertial Loads

Static earthquake loads are applied in a manner very similar to static wind loads. The static
loading magnitude is considered to be in direct proportion to the weight of the element. Express
earthquake load magnitudes in terms of the gravitational acceleration constant g. If you model
an earthquake with a 0.5-g load in the X direction, then half of the systems weight is turned into
a uniform load and applied in the X direction.
You create earthquake static load cases the same way you create wind occasional load cases.
Use the same load case, nonlinearity, and directional sensitivity logic. In some cases, the client
specifies the magnitude of the earthquake loading in g's and the direction(s). In other cases,
analysis is left to the discretion of the analyst. It is not unusual to see only X-Y or Z-Y
components of an earthquake. It is also not uncommon to see X, Y, and Z simultaneous
components.
Dynamic (response spectrum) evaluation of earthquake loads are discussed later in this section,
in the dynamic analysis and output sections, and in the screen reference section.
The ASCE #7 method for determining earthquake coefficients is described below. After you
calculate the earthquake coefficients, enter the g-factors as uniform loads on the piping
spreadsheet.

782

CAESAR II User's Guide

Technical Discussions
Calculate the horizontal seismic design force using equation 13.3-1 from ASCE 7 (10):
Fp = [(0.4 ap SDS W p) / (Rp / Ip)] (1 + 2 z / h)
But since W p is "component operating weight", Fp/W p = calculated (horizontal) acceleration,
aH, so;
aH = [(0.4 ap SDS) / ( Rp / Ip )] (1 + 2 z / h),
additionally;
aH 1.6 SDS Ip
and:
aH 0.3 SDS Ip
Where:
ap = Component amplification factor, from Table 13.6-1
= 2.5 for "Piping"
SDS = Design elastic response acceleration at short period (0.2 sec), from Section 11.4.4
Rp = Component response modification factor, from Table 13.6-1
= 12.0 for "Piping in accordance with ASME B31... with joints made by welding or
brazing"; values range as low as 3.0 for other joints and for less ductile materials.
Ip = Component importance factor, from Section 13.1.3
= 1.5 for life-safety components, components containing hazardous material, or
components that are required for continuous operation; 1.0 for all others
z = Height in structure at point of attachment
h = Average roof height of structure

Wind Loads
You can define your own wind pressure profile or wind speed profile, or you can access wind
load data from the following wind codes:

ASCE7 2005
AS/NZ 1170:2002
Brazil NBR 6123
BS6399-97
China GB 50009

IBC 2006
IS 875
Mexico 1993
NBC 2005
UBC

EN 1991-1-4:2005

Generate Wind Loads

By defining a wind shape factor in the model input, CAESAR II allows you to define up to four
wind vectors in the Load Case Editor. Multiply the pipe exposed area by the equivalent wind
pressure and the pipe shape factor.
CAESAR II includes insulation thickness in the cladding. You must also consider the angle
to the wind with your calculations.

CAESAR II User's Guide

783

Technical Discussions
Determine the Equivalent Wind Pressure
There are three ways to determine the equivalent wind pressure:
Selecting a regional wind specification (by building code)
Use the Pressure versus Elevation Table Entry method
Use the Velocity versus Elevation Table Entry method

Calculate the Total Wind Force on the Element

Calculate the total wind force on the element by using the following equation:
F = PeqSA
Where:
F = the total wind force on the element
Apply the wind force in the three global
directions as a function of the element
direction cosines.
Peq = the equivalent wind pressure (dynamic
pressure)
Calculate Peq for each end of the element and
then take the average.
The average applies uniformly over the whole
length of the element.
S = the pipe element wind shape factor
A = the pipe element exposed area as shown
in the figure to the right.
If you enter velocity versus elevation table data, then the program converts the velocity to a
dynamic pressure using the following equation:
P = 1/2 V

Where V is the wind velocity and is the air density.

Enter the Wind Shape Factor on the piping spreadsheet. For cylindrical elements, a value
between 0.5 and 0.7 is used. A value of 0.65 is typical. The wind shape factor as entered is
distributive. This means that the shape factor entered on a spreadsheet is carried forward and
applies for all following elements until zeroed or changed.
There is no need to enter the same shape factor on each piping spreadsheet. Zero or
disable the wind shape factor if the piping system runs inside of a building or similarly protective
structure.
Enter wind load parameters on the Wind Loads (see "Wind Loads Tab (Static Analysis Dialog
Box)" on page 464) tab of the Static Load Case Builder. You can enter up to four different wind
loads per analysis. These typically might be setup to model wind loads in the +X, -X, +Z, and -Z
directions.

784

CAESAR II User's Guide

Technical Discussions

Elevation
It is important to set the proper elevation of the piping system (height above ground) when
running a wind analysis. When a wind shape factor is specified in the input, CAESAR II prompts
you for the elevation (and horizontal coordinates) of this first node. By default, CAESAR II
assigns the "From" node of the first element an elevation of 0.0. You can also use the procedure
below to set the reference wind elevation of the piping system.

Set the true elevation

1. Click EDIT > GLOBAL.
A dialog appears.
2. Enter the global coordinates of the first node in the system.
3. Repeat step 2 for each (if any) disconnected section until you are finished.
You can specify and save the coordinates for up to 100 node points from the model.

Hydrodynamic (Wave and Current) Loading

Ocean waves are generated by wind and propagate out of the generating area. Ocean wave
generation is dependent on the wind speed, the duration of the wind, the water depth, and the
distance over which the wind blows the fetch length. There are several two dimensional wave
theories, but the three most widely used are the Airy (linear) wave theory, Stokes 5th Order
wave theory, and Dean's Stream Function wave theory. The latter two theories are non-linear
wave theories and provide a better description of the near surface effects of the wave.
Of course, wave motion is a three dimensional action but it can be adequately
represented by two dimensions. One dimension is the direction the wave travels, and the other
dimension is vertical through the water column. Two dimensional waves are not found in the
marine environment, but are somewhat easy to define and determine properties for. In actuality,
waves undergo spreading, in the third dimension. To understand this concept think about a
stone dropped in a pond. As the wave spreads, the diameter of the circle increases. In addition
to wave spreading, a real sea state includes waves of various periods, heights, and lengths. To
address these actual conditions you must use a sea spectrum that includes a spreading
function.
Airy (linear) wave theory assumes the free surface is symmetric about the mean water level.
Additionally, water particle motion is in a closed circular orbit, the diameter of which decays with
depth. You should take the term circular loosely because, the orbit varies from circular to
elliptical based on whether the wave is in shallow or deep water.
Additionally, for shallow water waves, the wave height to depth ratio (H/D) is limited to 0.78 to
avoid breaking.
None of the wave theories address breaking waves.

CAESAR II User's Guide

785

Technical Discussions
The figure below shows a typical wave and associated hydrodynamic parameters.

786

SWL - The still water level.

L - The wave length or horizontal distance between successive crests or troughs.
H - The wave height or vertical distance between the crest and trough.
D - The water depth or vertical distance from the bottom to the still water level.
- The surface elevation measured from the still water level.

CAESAR II User's Guide

Technical Discussions

Ocean Wave Particulars

The Airy Wave Theory Implementation (on page 789) theory provides a good first approximation
to the water particle behavior. The nonlinear theories provide a better description of particle
tH
motion, over a wider range depths and wave heights. Stokes 5 Wave theory is based on a
power series. This wave theory does not apply the symmetric free surface restriction.
Additionally, the particle paths are no longer closed orbits, which mean there is a gradual drift of
the fluid particles, that is, a mass transport.
tH
Stokes 5 Order Wave theory however, does not adequately address steeper waves over a
complete range of depths. Deans Stream Function wave theory attempts to address this
deficiency. This wave theory employs an iterative numerical technique to solve the stream
function equation. The stream function describes not only the geometry of a two dimensional
flow, but also the components of the velocity vector at any point, and the flow rate between any
two streamlines.
The most suitable wave theory is dependent on the wave height, the wave period, and the water
depth. Based on these parameters, the applicable wave theory can be determined from the
figure below (from API-RP2A, American Petroleum Institute - Recommended Practice 2A).

CAESAR II User's Guide

787

Technical Discussions

Applicable Wave Theory Determination

The limiting wave steepness for most deep water waves is usually determined by the Miche
Limit:
H / L = 0.142 tanh( kd )
Where:
H is the wave height
L is the wave length
k is the wave number (2)/L
d is the water depth

Pseudo-Static Hydrodynamic Loading

You can model individual pipe elements that experience loading due to hydrodynamic effects.
Fluid effects can impose a substantial load on the piping elements in a manner similar to,
but more complex than wind loading.
Use wave theories and profiles to compute the water particle velocities and accelerations at the
2
node points. Then use, Morrisons equation, F = * * Cd * D * U * |U| + /4 * * Cm * D * A to
compute the force on the element.
Where:
- is the fluid density
Cd- is the drag coefficient
D - is the pipe diameter
U - is the particle velocity
Cm - is the inertial coefficient
A - is the particle acceleration
The particle velocities and accelerations are vector quantities that include the effects of any
applied waves or currents. In addition to the force imposed by Morrisons equation, piping
elements are also subjected to a lift force and a buoyancy force. The lift force is defined as the
force acting normal to the plane formed by the velocity vector and the axis of the element. The
lift force is defined as:
Fl = * * Cl * D * U2
Where:
- is the fluid density
Cl - is the lift coefficient
D - is the pipe diameter
U - is the particle velocity
The buoyancy force acts upward and is equal to the weight of the fluid volume displaced by the
element.
A piping system can be described by using the standard finite element equation:
[K] {x} = {f}
Where:
[K] - is the global stiffness matrix for the entire system
{x} - is the displacement / rotation vector to solve for
{f} - is global load vector

788

CAESAR II User's Guide

Technical Discussions
Calculate pseudo-static hydrodynamic loading
1. Place the element loads generated by the hydrodynamic effects in their proper locations in
{f}, similar to weight, pressure, and temperature.
2. Perform a standard finite element solution on the system of equations to finalize [K] and {f}.
3. Use the resulting displacement vector {x} to compute element forces.
4. Use the computed element forces to compute the element stresses.
Except for the buoyancy force, all other hydrodynamic forces acting on the element are a
function of the particle velocities and accelerations.

Airy Wave Theory Implementation

Airy Wave theory is also known as Linear Wave theory due to the assumption that the wave
profile is symmetric about the mean water level. Standard Airy Wave theory allows for the
computation of the water particle velocities and accelerations between the mean surface
elevation and the bottom. The Modified Airy Wave theory allows for the consideration of the
actual free surface elevation in the computation of the particle data. CAESAR II includes both
the standard and modified forms of the Airy wave theory.
To apply the Airy Wave theory, you must enter several descriptive parameters about the wave.
The software uses these parameters along with the Newton-Raphston iteration to determine the
wave length. Each wave has its own unique wave length that the program determines solving
the dispersion relation, shown below:
2

L = (gT / 2) * tanh(2D / L)
Where:
g - is the acceleration of gravity
T - is the wave period
D - is the mean water depth
L - is the wave length to solve for
After determining the wave length (L), you can determine any other wave parameters you want.
The parameters determined and used by CAESAR II are: the horizontal and vertical particle
velocities (UX and UY), the horizontal and vertical particle acceleration (AX and AY), and the
surface elevation above (or below) the mean water level (ETA). For more information on the
equations for these parameters, refer to any text which discusses ocean wave theories.

STOKES 5th Order Wave Theory Implementation

th

The Stokes Wave is a 5 order gravity non-linear wave. CAESAR II uses the solution technique
described in a paper published in 1960 by Skjelbreia and Hendrickson of the National
Engineering Science Company. The standard formulation as well as a modified formulation, to
the free surface, is available in CAESAR II Stokes 5th Order Wave Theory.
The solution follows a procedure very similar to that used in the Airy Wave Theory
Implementation (on page 789). You can determine the characteristic parameters of the wave by
using Newton-Raphston iteration, after finding the water particle values of interest.
The Newton-Raphston iteration procedure solves two non-linear equations for constants beta
and lambda. After you determine these values, you can compute the other constants. After
computing all of the constants, use CAESAR II to compute: the horizontal and vertical particle
velocities (UX and UY), the horizontal and vertical particle acceleration (AX and AY), and the
surface elevation above the mean water level (ETA).

CAESAR II User's Guide

789

Technical Discussions

Stream Function Wave Theory Implementation

The solution to Dean's Stream Function Wave Theory used by CAESAR II is described in the
text by Sarpkaya and Issacson. As previously mentioned, this is a numerical technique to solve
the stream function. The solution subsequently obtained, provides the horizontal and vertical
particle velocities (UX and UY), the horizontal and vertical particle acceleration (AX and AY),
and the surface elevation above the mean water level (ETA).

Ocean Currents
In addition to the forces imposed by ocean waves, piping elements can also be subjected to
forces imposed by ocean currents. There are three different ocean current models in
CAESAR II: linear current, piece-wise, and power law profile.
The linear current profile assumes that the current velocity through the water column varies
linearly from the specified surface velocity (at the surface) to zero (at the bottom).
The piece-wise linear profile employs linear interpolation between specific user-defined
depth/velocity points.
The power law profile decays the surface velocity to the 1/7 power.
While waves produce unsteady flow where the particle velocities and accelerations at a point
constantly change, currents produce a steady, non-varying flow.

Technical Notes on CAESAR II Hydrodynamic Loading

The input parameters necessary to define the fluid loading are described in detail in the next
section. The basic parameters describe the wave height and period, and the current velocity.
The most difficult to obtain, and also the most important parameters, are the drag, inertia, and lift
coefficients: Cd, Cm, and Cl. Based on the recommendations of API RP2A and DNV (Det Norske
Veritas), values for Cd range from 0.6 to 1.2, values for Cm range from 1.5 to 2.0. Values for Cl
show a wide range of scatter, but the approximate mean value is 0.7.
The inertia coefficient Cm is equal to one plus the added mass coefficient Ca. This added mass
value accounts for the mass of the fluid assumed to be entrained with the piping element.
In actuality, these coefficients are a function of the fluid particle velocity, which varies over the
water column. In general practice, two dimensionless parameters are computed that are used to
obtain the Cd, Cm, and Cl values from published charts. The first dimensionless parameter is the
Keulegan-Carpenter Number, K. K is defined as:
K = Um * T / D
Where:
Um = Maximum Fluid Particle Velocity
T = Wave Period
D = Characteristic Diameter of the Element
The second dimensionless parameter is the Reynolds number, Re. Re is defined as
Re = U m * D /
Where:
Um = Maximum Fluid Particle Velocity
D = Characteristic Diameter of the Element
= Kinematic Viscosity of the Fluid 1.26e-5 ft /sec for Sea Water
2

790

CAESAR II User's Guide

Technical Discussions
After you calculate K and Re use the charts to obtain Cd, Cm, and Cl. For more information, see
Mechanics of Wave Forces on Offshore Structures by T. Sarpkaya. Figures 3.21, 3.22, and 3.25
are example charts, which display below.

CAESAR II User's Guide

791

Technical Discussions

In order to determine these coefficients, the fluid particle velocity (at the location of interest)
must be determined. The appropriate wave theory is solved, and these particle velocities are
readily obtained.
Of the wave theories discussed, the modified Airy and Stokes 5th theories include a modification
of the depth-decay function. The standard theories use a depth-decay function equal to cosh(kz)
/ sinh(kd),
Where:
k - is the wave number, 2 /L
L - is the wave length
d - is the water depth
z - is the elevation in the water column where the data is to be determined
The modified theories include an additional term in the numerator of this depth-decay function.
The modified depth-decay function is equal to cosh(d) / sinh(kd),
Where:
- is equal to z / (d + h)
The term d represents the effective height of the point at which the particle velocity and
acceleration are to be computed. The use of this term keeps the effective height below the still
water level. This means that the velocity and acceleration computed are convergent for actual
heights above the still water level.
As previously stated, the drag, inertia, and lift coefficients are a function of the fluid velocity and
the diameter of the element in question. Note that the fluid particle velocities vary with both
depth and position in the wave train (as determined by the applied wave theory). Therefore,
these coefficients are in fact not constants. However, from a practical engineering point of view,
varying these coefficients as a function of location in the Fluid field is usually not implemented.
This practice can be justified when one considers the inaccuracies involved in specifying the
instantaneous wave height and period. According to Sarpkaya, these values are insufficient to
accurately predict wave forces, a consideration of the previous fluid particle history is necessary.
In light of these uncertainties, constant values for Cd, Cm, and Cl are recommended by API and
many other references.
The effects of marine growth must also be considered. Marine growth has the following effects
on the system loading: the increased pipe diameters increase the hydrodynamic loading; the
increased roughness causes an increase in Cd, and therefore the hydrodynamic loading; the
increase in mass and added mass cause reduced natural frequencies and increase the dynamic

792

CAESAR II User's Guide

Technical Discussions
amplification factor; it causes an increase in the structural weight; and possibly causes
hydrodynamic instabilities, such as vortex shedding.
Finally, Morrisons force equation is based the "small body" assumption. The term "small" refers
to the "diameter to wave length" ratio. If this ratio exceeds 0.2, the inertial force is no longer in
phase with the acceleration of the fluid particles and diffraction effects must be considered. In
such cases, the fluid loading as typically implemented by CAESAR II is no longer applicable.
Additional discussions on hydrodynamic loads and wave theories can be found in the references
at the end of this article.

Input: Specifying Hydrodynamic Parameters in CAESAR II

The hydrodynamic load analysis requires the specification of several measurable parameters
that quantify the physical aspects of the environmental phenomenon in question.
You can enter four different wave loads here. Use the Editing Load Case buttons to
move up or down between the Wave Load Input Spreadsheets.
The necessary hydrodynamic parameters are discussed in the following paragraphs and a
CAESAR II hydrodynamic loading dialog is shown in the figure below.

CAESAR II User's Guide

793

Technical Discussions

Current Data
Profile Type Defines the interpolation method you want CAESAR II to use to determine the
current velocity as a function of depth. Available options for this entry are:
Power Law Profile Determines the current velocity at depth D according to the equation:
p
Vd = Vs * [di / D]
Where:
Vd - is the velocity at depth di
Vs - is the specified velocity at the surface
D - is the water depth
p - is the power, set to 1/7
Piece-wise Linear Profile Performs a linear interpolation of a velocity verse depth table
that you must provide, to determine the current velocity at depth d i. The table should start at
the surface (a depth of zero) and progress in increasing depth to the sea bed.
Linear Profile Performs a linear interpolation to determine the current velocity at depth
di. However, this method assumes the current velocity varies linearly from the specified
surface velocity to zero at the sea bed.
Current Speed Defines the current speed at the surface. The units for this entry are
(length/time) as defined by the active units file at the time of input. This value should always
be a positive entry.
Current Direction Cosines Defines the direction of fluid transport due to the current.
These fields are unit-less and follow the standard software global axis convention.

Wave Data
Wave Theory Indicator Specifies which wave theory to use to compute the water particle
velocities and accelerations. The wave theories available are:
Standard Airy Wave This is also known as linear wave theory. Discussion of this theory can
be found in the previously mentioned references.
Modified Airy Wave This is a modification of the standard Airy theory which includes the free
surface effects due to the wave. The modification consists of determining a depth scaling factor
equal to the depth divided by the depth plus the surface elevation. Note that this scale factor
varies as a function of the location in the wave train.
Standard Stokes 5th Wave This is a 5th order wave theory, also discussed in the
previously mentioned references.
Modified Stokes 5th Wave This is a modification of the standard Stokes 5th theory. The
modification is the same as applied to the Airy theory.
Stream Function Wave This is Deans Stream Function theory, also discussed in the
previously mentioned references.
Modified Stream Function Wave This is Deans Stream Function theory, modified to
directly consider current in the wave solution.
Stream Function Order When the Stream Function theory is activated, the solution order
must be defined. Typical values for the stream function order range from 3 to 13, and must be
an odd value (see API-RP2A figure).
Water Depth Defines the vertical distance (in units of length) from the still water level the
surface to the sea bed.
Wave Height Defines the height of the incident wave. The height is the vertical distance in
units of length from the wave crest to the wave trough.

794

CAESAR II User's Guide

Technical Discussions
Wave Period Defines the time span (in seconds) for two successive wave crests to pass a
fixed point.
Wave Kinematic Factor Because the two dimensional wave theories do not account for
spreading, a reduction factor is often used for the horizontal particle velocity and acceleration.
Wave kinematic measurements support values in the range of 0.85 to 0.95. Refer to the
applicable offshore codes before using this item.
Wave Direction Cosines Define the direction of wave travel. These fields are unit-less and
follow the standard software global axis convention.
Wave Phase Angle Defines the position of the wave relative to the starting node of the
piping system. The phase angle is a measure (in degrees) of position in the wave train, where 0
is the wave crest, 180 is the wave trough, and 360 is the following crest. Because the wave
propagates over the piping structure, each point in the structure experiences all possible wave
phase angles. One analysis technique specifies the wave phase at the system origin, and then
the phase at each node point in the model is deter\-mined. From these exact phase locations,
the water particle data is computed from the wave theory.
Alternatively, a conservative engineering approach is to use the same phase angle usually zero
for all points in the model. This technique produces higher loads; however, the extra
conservatism is warranted when given the unknowns in specifying environmental data.

Seawater Data
Free Surface Elevation Defines the height of the free surface from the global system origin.
If the system origin is at the free surface, this entry should be specified as zero. If the system
origin is at the sea bottom, this entry is equal to the water depth. By default, the first node in a
CAESAR II model is at an elevation of zero. You can change the elevation by pressing [Alt-+G].
Kinematic Viscosity Defines the kinematic viscosity of water. This value is used to
determine the Reynolds number, which is subsequently used to determine the hydrodynamic
coefficients Cd, Cm, and Cl. Typical values of kinematic viscosity for sea water display below.
Temp Deg (F)

n(ft2/sec)

Temp (C)

n(m2/sec)

60

1.26

e-5

15.556

1.17058

50

1.46

e-5

10.000

1.35639

40

1.55

e-5

4.444

1.44000

30

2.00

e-5

-1.111

1.85807

e-6
e-6
e-6
e-6

Fluid Weight Density - Defines the weight density of the fluid. For sea water, this value is
approximately .037037 pounds per cubic inch (.001025 kg/cm3, 1.0256SG).

CAESAR II User's Guide

795

Technical Discussions

Piping Element Data

Element Exposure In implementing hydrodynamic loading in a software program, you must
be able to indicate that elements are either exposed to the fluid or not exposed to the fluid. In
CAESAR II, this is accomplished by a set of options, which indicate that the particular element is
exposed to hydrodynamic loads, wind loads, or not exposed. This specification carries forward
for all subsequent elements until changed.
Hydrodynamic Coefficients Piping elements that are subjected to hydrodynamic loading
must have drag (Cd), inertia (Cm), and a lift (Cl) coefficient defined. The specification of these
items is optional. Alternatively, you can specify these values as constants to be applied to all
subsequent exposed elements, regardless of depth or phase position in the wave. Alternatively,
You can leave these values blank, which causes CAESAR II to interpolate their values from the
charts previously discussed.
Marine Growth Defines the amount of marine growth on the piping elements. This value is
used to increase the diameter of the piping elements. The units for this field are the units of the
current diameter. The diameter used in the computation of the hydrodynamic forces is equal to
the pipe diameter plus twice the marine growth entry.

References
1. Mechanics of Wave Forces On Offshore Structures, Turgut Sarpkaya and Michael Isaacson,
Van Nostrand Reinhold Co., 1982, ISBN 0-442-25402-4.
2. Handbook of Ocean and Underwater Engineering, Myers, Holm, and McAllister,
McGraw-Hill Book Co., 1969, ISBN 07-044245 -2.
3. Fifth Order Gravity Wave Theory, Lars Skjelbreia and James Hendrickson, National
Engineering Science Co., Pasadena, California, 1960.
4. Planning and Design of Fixed Offshore Platforms, McClelland and Reifel, Van Nostrand
Reinhold Co., 1986, ISBN 0-442-25223-4.
5. Intercomparison of Near-Bottom Kinematics by Several Wave Theories and Field and
Laboratory Data, R. G. Dean and M. Perlin, Coastal Engineering, #9 (1986), p399-437.
6. A Finite Amplitude Wave on a Linear Shear Current, R. A. Dalrymple, Journal of
Geophysical Research, Vol 79, No 30, 1974.
7. Application of Stream Function Wave Theory to Offshore Design Problems, R. G. Dean,
OTC #1613, 1972.
8. Stream Function Representation of Nonlinear Ocean Waves, R. G. Dean, Journal of
Geophysical Research, Vol 70, No 18, 1965.
9. American Petroleum Institute - Recommended Practice 2A (API-RP2A), American
Petroleum Institute, July 1993.
10. Improved Algorithm for Stream Function Wave Theory, Min-Chih Huang, Journal of
Waterway, Port, Coastal, and Ocean Engineering, January 1989.
11. Stream Function Wave Theory with Profile Constraints, Min-Chih Huang, Journal of
Waterway, Port, Coastal, and Ocean Engineering, January/February 1993.

796

CAESAR II User's Guide

Technical Discussions

Evaluating Vessel Stresses

ASME Section VIII Division 2 CAESAR II applies rules prior to the 2007 Edition provides a
procedure to analyze the local stresses in vessels and nozzles. For this example, we will only
discuss the nozzle analysis approach.
Always refer to the applicable design code if any of the limits described in this section are
approached, or if any unusual material, weld, or stress situation exists, or there are non-linear
concerns such as the operation of material within creep range.
The first step is to determine if the elastic approach is satisfactory. To summarize, Section
AD-160 states that if the model meets all of the following conditions, then a fatigue analysis is
not required:
1. The expected design number of full-range pressure cycles does not exceed the number of
allowed cycles corresponding to a Sa value of 3Sm (4Sm for non-integral attachments) on the
material fatigue curve. Sm is the allowable stress intensity for the material at the operating
temperature.
2. The expected design range of pressure cycles other than startup or shutdown must be less
than ( for non-integral attachments) the design pressure times (Sa/Sm), where Sa is the
value from the material fatigue curve for the specified number of significant pressure
fluctuations.
3. The vessel does not experience localized high stress due to heating.
4. The full range of stress intensities due to mechanical loads including piping reactions does
not exceed Sa, from the fatigue curve, for the expected number of load fluctuations.
After deciding if an elastic analysis is satisfactory, you must determine whether to take either a
simplified or a comprehensive approach to do the vessel stress analysis. For more information
on the simplified or the comprehensive approach, see ASME Section VIII Division 2-Elastic
Nozzle Simplified Analysis (see "ASME Section VIII Division 2-Elastic Nozzle Simplified Analysis
pre-2007" on page 801) or ASME Section VIII Division 2-Elastic Nozzle Comprehensive
Analysis (see "ASME Section VIII Division 2-Elastic Nozzle Comprehensive Analysis (pre-2007)"
on page 797). For more information on Section VIII Division 2 requirements, refer to the latest
version of the ASME code.

ASME Section VIII Division 2-Elastic Nozzle Comprehensive

Analysis (pre-2007)
To address the local allowable stress problem, you should have the endurance curve for the
material of construction and complete design pressure/temperature loading information.
Carefully consult the code before performing the local stress analysis if:
any elastic limit is approached
there is anything unusual in the nozzle/vessel connection design
The material Sm table and the endurance curve for carbon steels used in this
section are for illustration purposes. You should only use values taken directly from the code in
your design.
There are three criteria you must satisfy before considering stresses in the vessel wall due to
nozzle loads within the allowables. The three criteria are summarized as:
Pm < kSmh
Pm + Pl + Pb< 1.5kSmh
Pm + Pl + Pb + Q < 3Smavg

CAESAR II User's Guide

797

Technical Discussions
Where Pm, Pl, Pb, and Q are the general primary membrane stress, the local primary membrane
stress, the local primary bending stress, and the total secondary stresses (membrane plus
bending), respectively; and k, Smh, and Smavg are the occasional stress factor, the hot material
allowable stress intensity, and the average material stress intensity (S mh + Smc) / 2.
The stress classification defined by the Section VIII Division 2 code in the vicinity of nozzles,
classifies the bending stress terms caused by any external load moments or internal pressure in
the vessel wall near a nozzle or other opening, as secondary stress Q, regardless of whether
they were caused by sustained or expansion loads. This definition causes P b to disappear and
leads to a more detailed classification:
Pm - General primary membrane stress (primarily due to internal pressure)
Pl - Local primary membrane stress, which may include the following:
Membrane stress due to internal pressure
Local membrane stress due to applied sustained forces and moments
Q - Secondary stresses, which may include the following:
Bending stress due to internal pressure
Bending stress due to applied sustained loads
Membrane stress due to applied expansion loads
Bending stress due to applied expansion loads
Each of the stress terms defined in the above classifications contains three parts: two stress
components in normal directions and one shear stress component. To combine these stresses,
the following rules apply:
1. Compute the normal and shear components for each of the three stress types, that is, P m,
Pl, and Q.
2. Compute the stress intensity due to the Pm and compare it against kSmh.
3. Add the individual normal and shear stress components due to Pm and Pl; compute the
resultant stress intensity and compare its value against 1.5kSmh.
4. Add the individual normal and shear stress components due to Pm, Pl, and Q, compute the
resultant stress intensity, and compare its value to against 3Smavg.
5. Determine if there is an occasional load as well as a sustained load, these types can be
repeated using a value of 1.2 for k.
These criteria can be readily found from Figure 4-130.1 of Appendix 4 of ASME Section VIII,
Division 2 2004 and the surrounding text. Note that the primary bending stress term, P b, is not
applicable to the shell stress evaluation, and therefore disappears from the Section VIII, Division
2 requirements. Using the same analogy, write the peak stress limit as:
Pl + Pb + Q + F < Sa
The preceding equation need not be satisfied, provided the elastic limit criteria of AD-160 is met
based on the statement explicitly given in Section 5-100, which is cited below:
"If the specified operation of the vessel meets all of the conditions of AD-160, no analysis for
cyclic operation is required and it can be assumed that the peak stress limit discussed in 4-135
has been satisfied by compliance with the applicable requirements for materials, design,
fabrication, testing and inspection of this division."

798

CAESAR II User's Guide

Technical Discussions

Elastic Analyses of Shells near Nozzles Using WRC 107

Check vessel stresses in shells using WRC 107
1. Check the geometric limitation to see whether WRC 107 is applicable.
2. If yes, determine whether the elastic approach as outlined in Section VIII Division 2 AD-160
is applicable.
3. Compute the sustained, expansion, and occasional loads in the vessel shell due to the
applied nozzle loads.
4. Consider the local restraint configuration to determine whether some or all the axial
pressure thrust load P * Ain should be added to the sustained and occasional loads. If you
choose, the program can automatically calculate the thrust load and add it to the applied
loads.
5. Calculate the pressure stresses, Pm, on the vessel shell wall in both the longitudinal and
circumferential hoop directions for both sustained and occasional load cases.
Notice that two different pressure terms are required in carrying out the pressure stress
calculations. P is the design pressure of the system (sustained), while Pvar is the difference
between the peak pressure and the design pressure of the system, which is used to qualify
the vessel membrane stress under the occasional load case.
If you enter the pressure value, the software automatically calculates the Pm stresses.
6. The processor will calculate the Pl, and Q stresses as defined earlier.
If needed, you can simultaneously compute the local stresses due to sustained,
expansion, and occasional loads.
7. Obtain the various stress components by combining the stress intensities computed from
applying the sustained, expansion, and occasional loads, if applicable.
8. Then use stress intensities to carry out the stress summations.
If needed, use the results to determine the acceptability of the local stresses in the
vessel shell. Notice how CAESAR II provides the WRC 107 Stress Summation module in
line with the stress calculation routines.
The equations used in CAESAR II to qualify the various stress components can be summarized
as follows:
Pm(SUS) < Smh
Pm(SUS + OCC) < 1.2Smh
Pm(SUS) + Pl(SUS) < 1.5Smh
Pm(SUS + OCC) + Pl(SUS + OCC) < 1.5(1.2)Smh
Pm(SUS + OCC) + Pl(SUS + OCC) + Q(SUS + EXP + OCC) < 1.5(S mc + Smh)

CAESAR II User's Guide

799

Technical Discussions

Description of Alternate Simplified ASME Section VIII

Division 2 Elastic Nozzle Analysis pre-2007
The most difficult problem associated with the comprehensive ASME Section VIII Division 2
nozzle/vessel analysis involves the pressure calculation. Hoop and longitudinal pressure hand
calculations are not considered reliable, and axial pressure loading on the junction is often
miscalculated or omitted. Another issue with the comprehensive calculation is the amount of
time it takes to organize and manipulate the stress data. For these reasons, an alternate
simplified approach was developed using three checks.
The first check, Pm due to pressure, must be 1.0 Smh. To eliminate the concern for pressure,
both the loading pressure term on the left side of the inequality and the allowable pressure term
on the right side of the inequality cancel out.
This assumes that the area of reinforcement around the nozzle satisfies the pressure
requirements. Also, let Pm equal the maximum value.
The second check, Pm + Pl + Pb, must be 1.5 Smh. Subtract the stress due to pressure, Pm, from
both sides of the inequality and assuming Pm equals Smh. This reduces the check to: Pl + Pb
0.5 Smh (due to external sustained forces without pressure).
The third check, Pm + Pl + Q, is the root of the application controversy. There are three schools
of thought:
Pm+Pl+Q is an operating loading condition, and as such, includes the loads due to pressure
and weight.
Pm+Pl+Q is the range of loads or the expansion loading condition, and as such, excludes the
effects of sustained, or primary loads. Also, exclude the primary sustained loads like weight
and pressure.
Pm+Pl+Q is the range of loads and excludes the primary load weight, but includes the
varying pressure load at least in those thermal load cases where the system goes from a
startup ambient temperature and pressure condition to operating condition.
To simplify the calculation, assume that Pm, due to pressure, is included on both sides of the
Pm+Pl+Pb+Q < 3Sm inequality. Also, assume that the area reinforcement requirements are
exactly satisfied. Again, let Pm = Sm and subtract this term from the expansion allowable (Pm + Pl
+ Q < 3Sm) to provide a simplified allowable limit.
The expansion, operating, or both loads from the CAESAR II Restraint report (see
"Restraints" on page 489) must satisfy the computed stress requirement:
Pl + Pb + Q (operating or expansion excluding pressure) < 2Sm.
To summarize:
1. Ensure proper nozzle reinforcement for pressure and assume pressure stresses are at their
maximum.
2. Compare primary stresses without pressure to Smh.
3. Compare stresses due to the sum of primary and secondary loads to 2S m(avg); where Sm(avg)
is the average of the hot and cold allowable stress intensities Smh and Smc.

800

CAESAR II User's Guide

Technical Discussions

ASME Section VIII Division 2-Elastic Nozzle Simplified

Analysis pre-2007
1. Perform a CAESAR II analysis of the piping loads on the vessel/nozzle junction. Use WRC
297 flexibilities to compute loads more accurately, but less conservatively or do two
analyses, one with flexibilities and one without.
From this analysis you should have sustained, operating, and expansion loads on the
vessel/nozzle junction.
2. Find Smh and Smc from the Sect. VIII allowable stress tables.
Smh is the vessel material hot allowable, and Smc is the vessel material cold allowable.
3. Run WRC 107 with the sustained loads on the vessel/nozzle junction from CAESAR II, and
verify that the computed stress intensities are < 0.5 Smh.
This operation helps in conservatively considering bending stresses from internal
pressure and sustained moments and also lets you categorize the stresses and moment as
a primary classification. If the operation fails, review the stresses in more detail.
4. Run WRC 107 with the operating loads on the vessel/nozzle junction from CAESAR II, and
verify that the computed stress intensities are < Smh + Smc.
5. Run WRC 107 with the expansion loads on the vessel/nozzle junction from CAESAR II, and
verify that the computed stress intensities are < Smh + Smc.
Should any of the checks described fail, then perform the more comprehensive analysis of the
junction described earlier. For more information, see ASME Section VIII Division 2 - Elastic
Analysis of Nozzle Comprehensive Analysis (see "ASME Section VIII Division 2-Elastic Nozzle
Comprehensive Analysis (pre-2007)" on page 797).

Inclusion of Missing Mass Correction

The response of a system under a dynamic load is often determined by superposition of modal
results, with CAESAR II specifically providing the Spectral Analysis method for use. One of the
advantages of modal analysis is that usually only a limited number of modes are excited and
need be included in the analysis. The drawback to this method is that although displacements
may be obtained with good accuracy using only a few of the lowest frequency modes, the force,
reaction, and stress results may require extraction of far more modes, possibly far into the rigid
range, before acceptable accuracy is attained. The Missing Mass option offers the ability to
include a correction which represents the quasi-static contribution of the higher order modes not
explicitly extracted for the modal/dynamic response, thus providing greater accuracy with
reduced calculation time.
The dynamic response of a linear multi-degree-of-freedom system is described by the following
equation:
Ma(t) + Cv(t) + Kx(t) = F(t)
Where:
M = n x n mass matrix of system
C = n x n damping matrix of system
K = n x n stiffness matrix of system

CAESAR II User's Guide

801

Technical Discussions
a(t) = n x 1, time-dependent acceleration vector
v(t) = n x 1, time-dependent velocity vector
x(t) = n x 1, time-dependent displacement vector
F(t) = n x 1, time-dependent applied force vector
Assuming harmonic motion and neglecting damping, the free vibration eigenvalue problem for
this system is
2

K - M = 0
Where:
= n x n mode shape matrix
= n x n matrix where each diagonal entry is the angular frequency squared of the
corresponding mode
2

The modal matrix can be normalized such that M = I (where I is the n x n identity matrix)
T
2
and = .
T

Partition the modal matrix into two sub-matrices:

= [e r ]
Where:
e = mode shapes extracted for dynamic analysis (that is., lowest frequency modes)
r = residual (non-extracted) mode shapes (corresponding to rigid response, or the "missing
mass" contribution)
The extracted mode shapes are orthogonal to the residual mode shapes, or:
e x r = 0
The displacement components can be expressed as linear combinations of the mode shapes:
T

x = Y = e Ye + r Yr = xe + xr
Where:
x = Total System Displacements
xe = System Displacements Due to Extracted Modes
xr = System Displacements Due to Residual Modes
Y = Generalized Modal Coordinates
Ye = partition of Y Matrix Corresponding to Extracted Modes
Yr = Partition of Y Matrix Corresponding to Residual Modes
The dynamic load vector can be expressed in similar terms:
F = K Y = K e Ye + Kr Yr = Fe + Fr
Where:
F = Total System Load Vector
Fe = Load Vector Due to Extracted Modes
Fr = Load Vector Due to Residual Modes
Y = Generalized Modal Coordinates
Ye = Partition of Y Matrix Corresponding to Extracted Modes
Yr = Partition of Y Matrix Corresponding to Residual Modes

802

CAESAR II User's Guide

Technical Discussions
Normally, modal superposition analyses completely neglect the rigid response the displacement
Xr caused by the load Fr. This response, of the non-extracted modes, can be obtained from the
system displacement under a static loading Fr. Based upon the relation\-ships stated above, you
can estimate Fr as follows:
F = K e Ye + K r Yr
Multiplying both sides bye and considering that e r = 0:
T

T
e

F = e K e Ye +
T

Substituting e for
2

T
e

T
e

K r Yr = e K e Ye
T

K e and solving for Ye:

e F = e Ye
T

Ye = e e F
The residual force can now be stated as
T

-2

Fr = F - K e Ye = F - e K e e F
As seen earlier
T

-2

M = I = K
T

Substituting e Me e for e K e:
T

Fr = F - e M e e e F = F - e Me F
Therefore, CAESAR II calculates the residual response (and includes it as the missing mass
contribution) according to the following procedure:
1. The missing mass load is calculated for each individual shock load as:
T

-2

Fr = F - e M e F
T

The load vector F represents the product of:

the force set vector and the rigid DLF for force spectrum loading;
the product of the mass matrix, ZPA, and directional vector for non-ISM seismic loads;
and the product of the mass matrix, ZPA, and displacement matrix (under unit ISM
support displacement) for seismic anchor movement loads.
Note that the missing mass load will vary, depending upon the number of modes
extracted by the user and the cutoff frequency selected (or more specifically, the DLF or
acceleration corresponding to the cutoff frequency). "Rigid," for the purposes of
determining the rigid DLF, or the ZPA, may be designated by the user, through a setup
parameter, to be either the DLF/acceleration associated with the frequency of the last
extracted mode, or the true spectral DLF/ ZPA that corresponding to the largest entered
frequency of the input spectrum.
2. The missing mass load is applied to the structure as a static load. The static structural
response is then combined (according to the user-specified combination method) with the
dynamically amplified modal responses as if it was a modal response. Actually this static
response is the algebraic sum of the responses of all non-extracted modesrepresenting
in-phase response, as would be expected from rigid modes.
3. The Missing Mass Data report is compiled for all shock cases, whether missing mass is to
be included or not. The percent of mass active is calculated according to:
% Active Mass = 1 - ( Fr[i] / F [i])
summed over i = 1 to n, where n is the number of modes included
The maximum possible percent that is theoretically possible for this value is of course 100%;
however numerical inaccuracies may occasionally cause the value to be slightly higher. If the
missing mass correction factor is included, the percent of mass included in the correction is
shown in the report as well.

CAESAR II User's Guide

803

Technical Discussions
Because the CAESAR II procedure assumes that the missing mass correction represents the
contribution of rigid modes, and that the ZPA is based upon the spectral ordinate value at the
frequency of the last extracted mode, we recommend that you extract modes up to, but not far
beyond, a recognized "rigid" frequency. Choosing a cutoff frequency below the spectrums
resonant peak [point (1) below] provides a non-conservative result, because resonant responses
may be missed. Using a cutoff frequency higher than the peak (2), but still in the resonant range,
will yield conservative results, because the ZPA/rigid DLF will be overestimated. Extracting a
large number of rigid modes for calculation of the dynamic response may be conservative (4),
because all available modal combination methods (SRSS, GROUP, ABS, and so forth) give
conservative results versus the algebraic combination method which gives a more realistic
representation of the net response of the rigid modes. Based upon the response spectrum
shown below, an appropriate cutoff point for the modal extraction would be about 33 Hz (3).

804

CAESAR II User's Guide

Technical Discussions

Maximum Stress Versus Extracted Loads

CAESAR II provides two options for combining the missing mass correction with modal dynamic
results SRSS and Absolute. The Absolute Combination method provides the more
conservative result and is based upon the assumption that dynamic amplification is going to
occur simultaneously with the maximum ground acceleration or force load. Literature
(References 1, 2) states that the modal and the rigid portions of the response to typical dynamic
loads are actually statistically independent, so that the SRSS Combination method is a more
accurate representation of reality. Because the SRSS Combination method is most closely
aligned to reality, CAESAR II defaults to this missing mass combination method.

References
1. A. K. Gupta, Response Spectrum Method in Seismic Analysis and Design of Structures,
CRC Press, 1990
2. K. M. Vashi, "Computation of Seismic Response from Higher Frequency Modes," ASME
80-C2/PVP-50, 1980
3. O. E. Hansteen and K. Bell, "On the Accuracy of Mode Superposition Analysis in Structural
Dynamics," Earthquake Engineering and Structural Dynamics, Volume 7, John Wiley &
Sons, Ltd., 1979

CAESAR II User's Guide

805

Technical Discussions

Fatigue Analysis Using CAESAR II

For most piping codes supported by CAESAR II, performing a fatigue analysis is an extension
to, rather than an explicit part of, the code requirements. However, it is an explicit part of the
IGE/TD/12 Pipework Stress Analysis for Gas Industry Plant code.

Fatigue Basics
Piping and vessels have been known to suffer from sudden failure following years of successful
service. Research done during the 1940s and 1950s, primarily advanced by A. R. C. Markls
"Piping Flexibility Analysis," published in 1955, provided an explanation for this phenomenon, as
well as design criteria aimed at avoiding failures of this type. The explanation was that materials
were failing due to fatigue, a process leading to the propagation of cracks, and subsequent
fracture, following repeated cyclic loading.
Steels and other metals are made up of organized patterns of molecules, known as crystal
structures. However, these patterns are not maintained throughout the steel producing an ideal
homogeneous material, but are found in microscopic isolated island-like areas called grains.
Inside each grain a pattern of molecules is preserved. From one grain boundary to the next the
molecular pattern is the same, but the orientations differ. As a result, grain boundaries are high
energy borders. Plastic deformation begins within a grain that is subject to both a high stress
and oriented such that the stress causes a slippage between adjacent layers in the same
pattern. The incremental slippages, called dislocations, cause local cold-working. On the first
application of the stress, dislocations can move through many of the grains that are in the local
area of high stress. As the stress is repeated, more dislocations move through their respective
grains. Dislocation movement is impeded by the grain boundaries. After multiple stress
applications, the dislocations tend to accumulate at grain boundaries. Eventually they become
so dense that the grains "lock up" causing a loss of ductility and thus preventing further
dislocation movement. Subsequent applications of the stress cause the grain to tear, forming
cracks. Repeated stress applications cause the cracks to grow. Unless abated, the cracks
propagate with additional stress applications until sufficient cross sectional strength is lost to
cause a catastrophic failure of the material.

806

CAESAR II User's Guide

Technical Discussions
You can estimate the fatigue capacity of a material through the application of cyclic
tensile/compressive displacement loads with a uniaxial test machine. A plot of the cyclic stress
capacity of a material is called a fatigue or endurance curve. These curves are generated
through multiple cyclic tests at different stress levels. The number of cycles to failure usually
increases as the applied cyclic stress decreases, often until a threshold stress, known as the
endurance limit, is reached below which no fatigue failure occurs, regardless of the number of
applied cycles. An endurance curve for carbon and low alloy steels, taken from the ASME
Section VIII Division 2 Pressure Vessel Code displays below:

Fatigue Analysis of Piping Systems

IGE/TD/12 does present specific requirements for true fatigue evaluation of systems subject to a
cyclic loading threshold. Furthermore, ASME Section III, Subsection NB and ASME Section VIII
Division 2 provide guidelines by which fatigue evaluation rules can be applied to piping and
other pressure retaining equipment. These procedures have been adapted, where possible, to
the methodology used by CAESAR II.

Perform fatigue analysis

1. From the Allowable auxiliary dialog box, enter fatigue data or import it in from a text file.
You can also define your own fatigue curves as discussed later in this section. By doing this,
you assign the fatigue curve data to the piping material.
To help with your fatigue analysis, CAESAR II provides a number of commonly used
curves.

CAESAR II User's Guide

807

Technical Discussions
2. From either the Static or Dynamic Load Case Builders you must define, for every fatigue
load case, the number of anticipated cycles.
Also we have added a new FAT stress type.
3. Unless explicitly defined in the applicable code, CAESAR II calculates the fatigue stress the
same way it calculates the stress intensity.
IGE/TD/12 is the only piping code supported by CAESAR II that has explicit
instructions for calculating fatigue stresses. For more information on IGE/TD/12, refer to
IGE/TD/12 (on page 870).
4. Allowable fatigue stresses are interpolated logarithmically from the fatigue curve based upon
the number of cycles designated for the load case. For static load cases, the calculated
stress is assumed to be a peak-to-peak cyclic value (for example, thermal expansion,
settlement, pressure, and so forth), so the allowable stress is extracted directly from the
fatigue curve. For harmonic and dynamic load cases, the calculated stress is assumed to be
a zero-to-peak cyclic value (for example, vibration, earth\-quake, and so forth), so the
extracted allowable is divided by two prior to use in the comparison.
5. The flip side of calculating the allowable fatigue stress for the designated number of cycles
is the calculation of the allowable number of cycles for the calculated stress level. You can
do this by logarithmically interpolating the "Cycles" axis of the fatigue curve based upon the
calculated stress value. Because static stresses are assumed to be peak-to-peak cyclic
values, the allowable number of cycles is interpolated directly from the fatigue curve.
Because harmonic and dynamic stresses are assumed to be zero-to-peak cyclic values, the
allow\-able number of cycles is interpolated using twice the calculated stress value.
6. CAESAR II provides two reports for viewing the results of load cases for the FAT stress
type. The first of these is the standard Stress report that shows the calculated fatigue stress
and fatigue allowable at each node.
You can generate individual stress reports for each load case to show whether any of the
individual load cases in isolation fail the system
However, in those instances where there is more than one cyclic load case potentially
contributing to a fatigue failure, the Cumulative Usage report is appropriate. To generate this
report, select all the FAT load cases that contribute to the overall system degradation. The
Cumulative Usage report lists for each node point the usage ratio actual cycle divided by
allowable cycles, and then sums these to obtain the total cumulative usage. A total greater than
1.0 indicates a potential fatigue failure.

Static Analysis Fatigue Example

Consider a sample job that potentially has several different cyclic load variations:
Operating cycle from ambient 70F to 500F, 12,000 cycles anticipated
Shut down external temperature variation from ambient 70F to -20F, 200 cycles
anticipated
Pressurization to 1800 psig, 12,000 cycles anticipated
Pressure fluctuations of +/- 30 psi from the 1800 psig, 200,000 cycles anticipated

808

CAESAR II User's Guide

Technical Discussions
To do a proper fatigue analysis, you must group the load pairs that represent the worst-case
combination of stress ranges between extreme states. These load variations can be laid out in
graphical form. The figure below shows a sketch of the various operating ranges this system
experiences. Each horizontal line represents an operating range. At the each end of each
horizontal line, the temperatures and pressures defining the range are noted. At the center of
each horizontal line, the number of cycles for each range is defined.

Using this sketch of the operating ranges, the four fatigue load cases can be determined. Case
1: Cover the absolute extreme, from -20F and 0 psi to 500F and 1830 psi. This occurs 200
times. As a result of this case, the cycles for the ranges defined must be reduced by 200. The
first range (-20, 0 to 70, 0) is reduced to zero, and has no contribution to additional load cases.
The second range (70, 0 to 500, 1800) is reduced to 11,800 cycles. The third and fourth ranges
are similarly reduced to 199,800 cycles.
These same steps can be used to arrive at cases 2 through 4, reducing the number of
considered cycles at each step. This procedure is summarized in the table below.
Segment

-20, 0 to 70, 0 70, 0 to 500, 1800 500, 1700 to 500,

1800

500, 1800 to 500, 1830

Initial

200

12,000

200,000

200,000

After 1

11,800

200,000

199,800

After 2

200,000

188,000

After 3

12,000

After 4

Case

This table is then used to set the load cases as cycles between the following load values:
Between -20F, 0 psig and 500F, 1830 psig (200 cycles)
Between 70F, 0 psig and 500F, 1830 psig (11,800 cycles)
Between 500F, 1770 psig and 500F, 1830 psig (188,000 cycles)
Between 500F, 1770 psig and 500F, 1800 psig (12,000 cycles)

CAESAR II User's Guide

809

Technical Discussions
These temperatures and pressures are entered as operating conditions accordingly:

Next enter the fatigue curve data for the material. This is done by clicking Fatigue Curves to
activate the Material Fatigue Curve dialog box. This dialog box can be used to enter the fatigue
curve for the materials.
For IGE/ TD/12, you only need to enter five sets of fatigue curves for fatigue
classes D, E, F, G, and W.
1. Enter up to eight Cycle versus Stress data points to define the curve. Interpolations are
made logarithmically.
2. Enter Cycle/Stress pairs in ascending cycle order.

810

CAESAR II User's Guide

Technical Discussions
3. Enter stress values as the allowable stress range, rather than the allowable Stress
Amplitude.

You can enter fatigue curve data from a text file, by clicking Read from file. This displays a
list of all \CAESAR\SYSTEM\*.FAT files.

The following fatigue curve files are delivered with CAESAR II. You can also construct additional
fatigue curve files. For more information on fatigue curve files, see Appendix A below:
5-110-1A.FAT
ASME Section VIII Division 2 Figure 5-110.1, UTS < 80 ksi
5-110-1B.FAT
ASME Section VIII Division 2 Figure 5-110.1, UTS = 115-130 ksi
5-110-2A.FAT
ASME Section VIII Division 2 Figure 5-110.2, Curve A
5-110-2B.FAT
ASME Section VIII Division 2 Figure 5-110.2, Curve B
5-110-2C.FAT
ASME Section VIII Division 2 Figure 5-110.2, Curve C

CAESAR II User's Guide

811

Technical Discussions
In this case for A106B low carbon steel operating at 500F, 5-110-1A.FAT is the appropriate
selection. This populates the fatigue curve data boxes in the dialog box:

Error check the job, and set up your load cases.

The static load case builder offers a new stress type, FAT (fatigue). Selecting this stress type
does the following:
1. Enables you to define the number of cycles for the load case. Dragging the FAT stress type
into the load case or clicking the Load Cycles button opens the Load Cycles field.
2. Calculates the stress range as per the Fatigue Stress method of the applicable code. This
is the stress intensity for all codes except IGE/TD/12.
3. Compares the calculated stress range to the full value extracted from the fatigue curve.
Indicates that the load case may be included in the Cumulative Usage report.

812

CAESAR II User's Guide

Technical Discussions
The last four load cases represent the load set pairs defined earlier.

After you run the job the presence of a FAT stress type adds the Cumulative Usage
report to the list of available reports.

CAESAR II User's Guide

813

Technical Discussions
You can check the fatigue stress range against the fatigue curve allowable for each load case
by selecting it along with the Stresses report. A review of each load case confirms that all stress
levels passed.

However, this is not a true evaluation of the situation because it is not a case of either-or. The
piping system is subjected to all of these load cases throughout its expected design life, not just
one of them. Therefore, we must also review the Cumulative Usage (see "Cumulative Usage
Report" on page 499) report, which shows the total effect of all fatigue load cases, or any
user-selected combination, on the design life of the system. This report lists for each load case
the expected number of cycles, the allowable number of cycles (based upon the calculated
stress), and the Usage Ratio (actual cycles divided by allowable cycles).

814

CAESAR II User's Guide

Technical Discussions
The Usage Ratios are then summed for all selected load cases. If this sum exceeds 1.0, the
system has exceeded its fatigue capabilities. In this case, it is apparent that with the maximum
cumulative usage ratio of 0.87 at node 115, this system is not predicted to fail due to fatigue:

Fatigue Capabilities in Dynamic Analysis

Fatigue analysis capability is also available for harmonic and dynamic analyses. Harmonic load
cases are entered as they always have been. They can be designated as being stress type FAT
by entering the number of expected load cycles on the harmonic input dialog box:

CAESAR II User's Guide

815

Technical Discussions
This produces the same types of reports as are available for the static analysis. They can be
processed as discussed earlier.

The only difference between the harmonic and static fatigue analyses is that for harmonic jobs
the calculated stresses are assumed to be zero-to-peak calculations so that they are compared
to only half of the stress value extracted from the fatigue curve. Likewise, when creating the
Cumulative Usage report, the number of allowable cycles is based upon twice the calculated
stress.
For other dynamic applications (response spectrum and time history), the stress type can be
identified as fatigue by selecting the stress type from the drop list for the Load Case or
Static/Dynamic Combination, and by entering the number of expected cycles in the provided
field.
Note that as with the harmonic analyses, the calculated stresses are assumed to be
zero-to-peak calculations so that they are compared to only half of the stress value extracted
from the fatigue curve. Likewise, when creating the Cumulative Usage report, the number of
allowable cycles is based upon twice the calculated stress.

Creating the .FAT Files

The .FAT file is a text file, containing the data points necessary to describe the fatigue curve for
the material, for both butt welded and fillet welded fittings. A sample FAT file is shown below.
* ASME SECTION VIII DIVISION 2 FATIGUE CURVE
* FIGURE 5-110.1
* DESIGN FATIGUE CURVES FOR CARBON, LOW ALLOY, SERIES 4XX,
* HIGH ALLOY AND HIGH TENSILE STEELS FOR TEMPERATURES NOT
* EXCEEDING 700 F
* FOR UTS 80 KSI
*
0.5000000 - STRESS MULTIPLIER (PSI); ALSO CONVERTS AMPLITUDE TO FULL RANGE
*
10
580000.0
100
205000.0
1000
83000.0
10000
38000.0
100000
20000.0
500000
13500.0
1000000
12500.0
0
0.0
*

816

CAESAR II User's Guide

Technical Discussions
You can create this text file by using any text editor. Lines beginning with an * are treated as
comment lines. It is good practice to use comment lines so that the data can be tied to a specific
material curve.
The first data line in the file the stress multiplier. This value is used to adjust the data values
from "zero to peak" to "peak to peak" or to convert the stress levels to psi. The entered values
are divided by this number. For example, if the stress values in the file represent the stress
amplitude, in psi, rather than a range, this "stress multiplier" should be 0.5. Following the stress
multiplier is the Fatigue Curve Data table. This table consists of eight lines, of two columns.
The first column is the Cycle column, and the second is the Stress column. For each value in
the cycle column, a corresponding stress value from the material fatigue curve is listed in the
stress column.
Fatigue curves intended for use with IGE/TD/12 are built slightly different. The first data line
contains three values: the stress multiplier, a modulus of elasticity correction, and a modulus of
elasticity multiplier (the correction factor is divided by this to convert to psi). After the files are
read in, the modulus of elasticity correction is inserted into the appropriate field on the Fatigue
Curve dialog. IGE/TD/12 fatigue files also include five sequential fatigue curves, Fatigue Class
D, E, F, G, and W, rather than one. You can use optional comment lines to separate the tables.
The comments help with the readability of the data file. You can best determine the format of the
IGE/TD/12 fatigue files by reviewing the contents of the TD12ST.FAT file.
In all tables, the number of cycles increases as you work down the table. If you do not have
enough data to use all eight lines, fill the unused lines with zeroes.

Calculation of Fatigue Stresses

For IGE/TD/12 the computation of fatigue stresses is detailed in Section 5.4.4 of that code. This
section of the code states: "The principal stress in any plane can be calculated for any set of
conditions from the following formula:"

Where:
Sh = Hoop stress
Sa = Axial stress
Sq = Shear stress
"This should be used for establishing the range of stress, due regard being paid to the direction
and sign." For all other piping codes in CAESAR II, the fatigue stress is computed as the stress
intensity, as follows:
3D Maximum Shear Stress Intensity (Default)
SI = Maximum of:
S1OT - S3OT
S1OB - S3OB
Max(S1IT,RPS) - Min(S3IT,RPS)
Max(S1IB,RPS) - Min(S3IB,RPS)
Where:
S1OT=Maximum Principal Stress, Outside Top
2
2
= (SLOT+HPSO)/2.0+(((SLOT-HPSO)/2.0) +TSO )1/2
S3OT=Minimum Principal Stress, Outside Top
2
2
=(SLOT+HPSO)/2.0-(((SLOT-HPSO)/2.0) +TSO ) 1/2

CAESAR II User's Guide

817

Technical Discussions

S1IT=Maximum Principal Stress, Inside Top

2
2
=(SLIT+HPSI)/2.0+(((SLIT-HPSI)/2.0) +TSI ) 1/2
S3IT=Minimum Principal Stress, Inside Top
2
2
=(SLIT+HPSI)/2.0-(((SLIT-HPSI)/2.0) +TSI ) 1/2
S1OB=Maximum Principal Stress, Outside Top
2
2
=(SLOB+HPSO)/2.0+ (((SLOB-HPSO)/2.0) +TSO ) 1/2
S3OB=Minimum Principal Stress, Outside Bottom
2
2
=(SLOB+HPSO)/2.0- (((SLOB-HPSO)/2.0) +TSO ) 1/2
S1IB=Maximum Principal Stress, Inside Bottom
2
=(SLIB+HPSI)/2.0+ (((SLIB-HPSI)/2.0)2+TSI ) 1/2
S3IB=Minimum Principal Stress, Inside Bottom
2
2
=(SLIB+HPSI)/2.0- (((SLIB-HPSI)/2.0) +TSI ) 1/2
RPS=Radial Pressure Stress, Inside
HPSI=Hoop Pressure Stress (Inside, from Lame's Equation)
HPSO=Hoop Pressure Stress (Outside, from Lame's Equation)
SLOT=Longitudinal Stress, Outside Top
SLIT=Longitudinal Stress, Inside Top
SLOB=Longitudinal Stress, Outside Bottom
SLIB=Longitudinal Stress, Inside Bottom
TSI=Torsional Stress, Inside
TSO=Torsional Stress, Outside

Pipe Stress Analysis of FRP Piping

Underlying Theory
The behavior of steel and other homogeneous materials has been long understood, permitting
their widespread use as construction materials. The development of the piping and pressure
vessel codes (Reference 1) in the early part of this century led to the confidence in their use in
piping applications. The work of Markl and others in the 1940s and 1950s was responsible for
the formalization of todays pipe stress methods, leading to an ensuing diversification of piping
codes on an industry by industry basis. The advent of the digital computer, and with it the
appearance of the first pipe stress analysis software (Reference 2), further increased the
confidence with which steel pipe could be used in critical applications. The 1980s saw the wide
spread proliferation of the microcomputer, with associated pipe stress analysis software, which
in conjunction with training, technical support, and available literature, has brought stress
analysis capability to almost all engineers. In short, an accumulated experience of close to 100
years, in conjunction with ever improving technology has led to the utmost confidence on the

818

CAESAR II User's Guide

Technical Discussions
part of todays engineers when specifying, designing, and analyzing steel, or other metallic,
pipe.
For fiberglass reinforced plastic (FRP) and other composite piping materials, the situation is not
the same. Fiberglass reinforced plastic was developed only as recently as the 1950s, and did
not come into wide spread use until a decade later (Reference 3). There is not a large base of
stress analysis experience, although not from a lack of commitment on the part of FRP vendors.
Most vendors conduct extensive stress testing on their components, including hydrostatic and
cyclic pressure, uni-axial tensile and compressive, bending, and combined loading tests. The
problem is due to the traditional difficulty associated with, and lack of understanding of, stress
analysis of heterogeneous materials. First, the behavior and failure modes of these materials
are highly complex and not fully understood, leading to inexact analytical methods and a general
lack of agreement on the best course of action to follow. This lack of agreement has slowed the
simplification and standardization of the analytical methods into universally recognized codes
BS 7159 Code Design and Construction of Glass Reinforced Plastics Piping (GRP) Systems for
Individual Plants or Sites and UKOOA Specification and Recommended Practice for the Use of
GRP Piping Offshore being notable exceptions. Second, the heterogeneous, orthotropic
behavior of FRP and other composite materials has hindered the use of the pipe stress analysis
algorithms developed for homogeneous, isotropic materials associated with crystalline
structures. A lack of generally accepted analytical procedures has contributed to a general
reluctance to use FRP piping for critical applications.
Stress analysis of FRP components must be viewed on many levels. These levels, or scales,
have been called Micro-Mini-Macro levels, with analysis proceeding along the levels according
to the "MMM" principle (Reference 4).

Micro-Level Analysis
Stress analysis on the "Micro" level refers to the detailed evaluation of the individual materials
and boundary mechanisms comprising the composite material. In general, FRP pipe is
manufactured from laminates, which are constructed from elongated fibers of a commercial
grade of glass, E-glass, which are coated with a coupling agent or sizing prior to being
embedded in a thermosetting plastic material, typically epoxy or polyester resin.
This means, on the micro scale, that an analytical model must be created which simulates the
interface between these elements. Because the number and orientation of fibers is unknown at
any given location in a FRP sample, the simplest representation of the micro-model is that of a
single fiber, extending the length of the sample, embedded in a square profile of matrix.

Micro Level GRP Sample -- Single Fiber Embedded in Square Profile of Matrix

Evaluation of this model requires use of the material parameters of:

1. the glass fiber
2. the coupling agent or sizing layer normally of such microscopic proportion that it may be
ignored

CAESAR II User's Guide

819

Technical Discussions
3. the plastic matrix
It must be considered that these material parameters might vary for an individual material based
upon tensile, compressive, or shear applications of the imposed stresses, and typical values
vary significantly between the fiber and matrix (Reference 5):

Material

Young's Modulus Ultimate Strength

Coefficient of Thermal Expansion

tensile (MPa)

m/m/C

Glass Fiber 72.5 x10

Plastic
Matrix

2.75 x 10

tensile (MPa)
1.5 x 10

5.0 x 10

-6

.07 x 10

7.0 x 10

-6

The following failure modes of the composite must be similarly evaluated to:
failure of the fiber
failure of the coupling agent layer
failure of the matrix
failure of the fiber-coupling agent bond
failure of the coupling agent-matrix bond
Because of uncertainties about the degree to which the fiber has been coated with the coupling
agent and about the nature of some of these failure modes, this evaluation is typically reduced
to:
failure of the fiber
failure of the matrix
failure of the fiber-matrix interface

You can evaluate stresses in the individual components through finite element analysis of the
strain continuity and equilibrium equations, based upon the assumption that there is a good
bond between the fiber and matrix, resulting in compatible strains between the two. For normal
stresses applied parallel to the glass fiber:
f = m = af / Ef = am / Em
af = am Ef / Em
Where:
f = Strain in the Fiber
= Strain in the Matrix
af = Normal Stress Parallel to Fiber, in the Fiber
Ef = Modulus of Elasticity of the Fiber
am = Axial Normal Stress Parallel to Fiber, in the Matrix
Em = Modulus of Elasticity of the Matrix

820

CAESAR II User's Guide

Technical Discussions
Due to the large ratio of the modulus of elasticity of the fiber to that of the matrix, it is apparent
that nearly all of the axial normal stress in the fiber-matrix composite is carried by the fiber.
Exact values are (Reference 6):
af = L / [ + (1-)Em/Ef]
am = L / [Ef/Em + (1-)]
Where:
L = nominal longitudinal stress across composite
= glass content by volume
The continuity equations for the glass-matrix composite seem less complex for normal stresses
perpendicular to the fibers, because the weak point of the material seems to be limited by the
glass-free cross-section, shown below:

Stress Intensification in Matrix Cross-Section

For this reason, it would appear that the strength of the composite would be equal to that of the
matrix for stresses in this direction. In fact, its strength is less than that of the matrix due to
stress intensification in the matrix caused by the irregular stress distribution in the vicinity of the
stiffer glass. Because the elongation over distance D1 must be equal to that over the longer
distance D2, the strain, and thus the stress at location D1 must exceed that at D2 by the ratio
D2/D1. Maximum intensified transverse normal stresses in the composite are:

Where:
b = intensified normal stress transverse to the fiber, in the composite
= nominal transverse normal stress across composite
m = Poisson's ratio of the matrix
Because of the Poisson effect, this stress produces an additional 'am equal to the
following:
'am = Vmb

CAESAR II User's Guide

821

Technical Discussions
Shear stress can be allocated to the individual components again through the use of continuity
equations. It would appear that the stiffer glass would resist the bulk of the shear stresses.
However, unless the fibers are infinitely long, all shears must eventually pass through the matrix
in order to get from fiber to fiber. Shear stress between fiber and matrix can be estimated as

Where:
ab = intensified shear stress in composite
T = nominal shear stress across composite
Gm = shear modulus of elasticity in matrix
Gf = shear modulus of elasticity in fiber
Determination of the stresses in the fiber-matrix interface is more complex. The bonding agent
has an inappreciable thickness, and thus has an indeterminate stiffness for consideration in the
continuity equations. Also, the interface behaves significantly differently in shear, tension, and
compression, showing virtually no effects from the latter. The state of the stress in the interface
is best solved by omitting its contribution from the continuity equations, and simply considering
that it carries all stresses that must be transferred from fiber to matrix.
After the stresses have been apportioned, they must be evaluated against appropriate failure
criteria. The behavior of homogeneous, isotropic materials such as glass and plastic resin,
under a state of multiple stresses is better understood. Failure criterion for isotropic material
reduces the combined normal and shear stresses (a, b, c, ab, ac, bc) to a single stress, an
equivalent stress, that can be compared to the tensile stress present at failure in a material
under uniaxial loading, that is, the ultimate tensile stress, S ult.
Different theories, and different equivalent stress functions f(a, b, c, ab, ac, bc) have been
proposed, with possibly the most widely accepted being the Huber-von Mises-Hencky criterion,
which states that failure will occur when the equivalent stress reaches a critical value the
ultimate strength of the material:
eq = {1/2 [(a - b) + (b - c) + (c - a) + 6(ab + ac + bc )} Sult
This theory does not fully cover all failure modes of the fiber in that it omits reference to direction
of stress, that is, tensile versus compressive. The fibers, being relatively long and thin,
predominantly demonstrate buckling as their failure mode when loaded in compression.
2

822

CAESAR II User's Guide

Technical Discussions
The equivalent stress failure criterion has been corroborated, with slightly non-conservative
results, by testing. Little is known about the failure mode of the adhesive interface, although
empirical evidence points to a failure criterion which is more of a linear relationship between the
normal and the square of the shear stresses. Failure testing of a composite material loaded only
in transverse normal and shear stresses are shown in the following figure. The kink in the curve
shows the transition from the matrix to the interface as the failure point.

Mini-Level Analysis

Mini-Level Analysis Fiber Distribution Models

Although feasible in concept, micro level analysis is not feasible in practice. This is due to the
uncertainty of the arrangement of the glass in the composite the thousands of fibers that might
be randomly distributed, semi-randomly oriented, although primarily in a parallel pattern, and of
randomly varying lengths. This condition indicates that a sample can truly be evaluated only on
a statistical basis, thus rendering detailed finite element analysis inappropriate.
For mini-level analysis, a laminate layer is considered to act as a continuous hence the common
reference to this method as the "continuum" method, material, with material properties and
failure modes estimated by integrating them over the assumed cross-sectional distribution,
which is, averaging. The assumption regarding the distribution of the fibers can have a marked
effect on the determination of the material parameters. Two of the most commonly postulated
distributions are the square and the hexagonal, with the latter generally considered as being a
better representation of randomly distributed fibers.

CAESAR II User's Guide

823

Technical Discussions
The stress-strain relationships, for those sections evaluated as continua, can be written as:
aa = aa/EL - (VL/EL)bb - (VL/EL)cc
bb = -(VL/EL)aa + bb/ET - (VT/ET)cc
cc = -(VL/EL)aa - (VT/ET)bb + cc/ET
ab = ab / 2 GL
bc = bc / 2 GT
ac = ac / 2 GL
Where:
ij = strain along direction i on face j
ij, ab = stress (normal, shear) along direction i on face j
EL = modulus of elasticity of laminate layer in longitudinal direction
VL = Poissons ratio of laminate layer in longitudinal direction
ET = modulus of elasticity of laminate layer in transverse direction
VT = Poissons ratio of laminate layer in transverse direction
GL = shear modulus of elasticity of laminate layer in longitudinal direction
GT = shear modulus of elasticity of laminate layer in transverse direction
These relationships require that four modules of elasticity, EL, ET, GL, and GT, and two Poissons
ratios, VL and V, be evaluated for the continuum. Extensive research (References 4 - 10) has
been done to estimate these parameters. There is general consensus that the longitudinal terms
can be explicitly calculated; for cases where the fibers are significantly stiffer than the matrix,
they are:
EL = EF + EM(1 - )
GL = GM +/ [ 1 / (GF - GM) + (1 -) / (2GM)]
VL = VF + VM(1 - )
You cannot calculate parameters in the transverse direction. You can only calculate the upper
and lower bounds. Correlations with empirical results have yielded approximations (Reference 5
and 6):
2
2
1.25
2
ET = [EM(1+0.85f ) / {(1-VM )[(1-f) + f(EM/EF)/(1-VM )]}
GT = GM (1 + 0.6) / [(1 - )
+ (GM/GF)]
VT = VL (EL / ET)
Use of these parameters permits the development of the homogeneous material models that
facilitate the calculation of longitudinal and transverse stresses acting on a laminate layer. The
resulting stresses can be allocated to the individual fibers and matrix using relationships
developed during the micro analysis.
1.25

824

CAESAR II User's Guide

Technical Discussions

Macro-Level Analysis

Macro to Micros Stress Conversion

Where Mini-level analysis provides the means of evaluation of individual laminate layers,
Macro-level analysis provides the means of evaluating components made up of multiple
laminate layers. It is based upon the assumption that not only the composite behaves as a
continuum, but that the series of laminate layers acts as a homogeneous material with
properties estimated based on the properties of the layer and the winding angle, and that finally,
failure criteria are functions of the level of equivalent stress.
Laminate properties may be estimated by summing the layer properties (adjusted for winding
angle) over all layers. For example

Where:
ExLAM = Longitudinal modulus of elasticity of laminate
tLAM = thickness of laminate
Ek = Longitudinal modulus of elasticity of laminate layer k
Cik = transformation matrix orienting axes of layer k to longitudinal laminate axis
Cjk = transformation matrix orienting axes of layer k to transverse laminate axis
tk = thickness of laminate layer k
After composite properties are determined, the component stiffness parameters can be
determined as though it were made of homogeneous material that is, based on component
cross-sectional and composite material properties.
Normal and shear stresses can be determined from 1) forces and moments acting on the
cross-sections, and 2) the cross-sectional properties themselves. These relationships can be
written as:
aa = Faa / Aaa Mba / Sba Mca / Sca
bb = Fbb / Abb Mab / Sab Mcb / Scb
cc = Fcc / Acc Mac / Sac Mbc / Sbc
ab = Fab / Aab Mbb / Rab
ac = Fac / Aac Mcc / Rac
ba = Fba / Aba Maa / Rba
bc = Fbc / Abc Mcc / Rbc
ca = Fca / Aca Maa / Rca
cb = Fcb / Acb Mbb / Rcb

CAESAR II User's Guide

825

Technical Discussions
Where:
ij = normal stress along axis i on face j
Fij = force acting along axis i on face j
Aij = area resisting force along axis i on face j
Mij = moment acting about axis i on face j
Sij = section modulus about axis i on face j
ij = shear stress along axis i on face j
Rij = torsional resistivity about axis i on face j
Using the relationships developed under macro, mini, and micro analysis, these stresses can be
resolved back into local stresses within the laminate layer, and from there, back into stresses
within the fiber and the matrix. From these, the failure criteria of those microscopic components,
and hence, the component as a whole, can be checked.

Implementation of Macro-Level Analysis for Piping Systems

The macro-level analysis described above is the basis for the preeminent FRP piping codes in
use today, including Code BS 7159 (Design and Construction of Glass Reinforced Plastics
Piping Systems for Individual Plants or Sites) and the UKOOA Specification and Recommended
Practice for the Use of GRP Piping Offshore.

BS 7159
BS 7159 uses methods and formulas familiar to the world of steel piping stress analysis in order
to calculate stresses on the cross-section, with the assumption that FRP components have
material parameters based on continuum evaluation or test. All coincident loads, such as
thermal, weight, pressure, and axial extension due to pressure need be evaluated
simultaneously. Failure is based on the equivalent stress calculation method. Because one
normal stress (radial stress) is traditionally considered to be negligible in typical piping
configurations, this calculation reduces to the greater of (except when axial stresses are
compressive):
(when axial stress is greater than hoop)
(when hoop stress is greater than axial)
A slight difficulty arises when evaluating the calculated stress against an allowable, due to the
orthotropic nature of the FRP piping normally the laminate is designed in such a way to make
the pipe much stronger in the hoop, than in the longitudinal, direction, providing more than one
allowable stress. This difficulty is resolved by defining the allowable in terms of a design
strained, rather than stress, in effect adjusting the stress allowable in proportion to the strength
in each direction. In other words, the allowable stresses for the two equivalent stresses above
would be (ed ELAMX) and (ed ELAMH) respectively. In lieu of test data, system design strain is
selected from Tables 4.3 and 4.4 of the Code, based on expected chemical and temperature
conditions.
Actual stress equations as enumerated by BS 7159 display below:
1. Combined stress straights and bends:
C = (f + 4S )
or

d ELAM

C = (X + 4S

d ELAM

826

2 0.5

2)0.5

CAESAR II User's Guide

Technical Discussions
Where:
ELAM = modulus of elasticity of the laminate; in CAESAR II, the first equation uses the
modulus for the hoop direction and in the second equation, the modulus for the longitudinal
direction is used.
C = combined stress
= circumferential stress
= P + B
S = torsional stress
= MS(Di + 2td) / 4I
X = longitudinal stress
= XP + XB
P = circumferential pressure stress
= mP(Di + td) / 2 td
B = circumferential bending stress
2
2 0.5
= [(Di + 2td) / 2I] [(Mi SIFi) + Mo SIFo) ]
for bends, = 0 for straights
MS = torsional moment on cross-section
Di = internal pipe diameter
td = design thickness of reference laminate
I = moment of inertia of pipe
m = pressure stress multiplier of component
P = internal pressure
Mi = in-plane bending moment on cross-section
SIFi= circumferential stress intensification factor for in-plane moment
M = out-plane bending moment on cross-section
SIFo = circumferential stress intensification factor for out-plane moment
XP = longitudinal pressure stress
= P(Di+ td) / 4 td
XB = longitudinal bending stress
2
2 0.5
= [(Di + 2td) / 2I] [(Mi SIFxi) + Mo SIFxo) ]
SIFxi = longitudinal stress intensification factor for in-plane moment
SIFxo = longitudinal stress intensification factor for out-plane moment
2. Combined stress branch connections:
CB = ((P + bB) + 4SB )
Where:
2

2 0.5

d ELAM

CB = branch combined stress

P = circumferential pressure stress
= mP(Di + tM) / 2 tM
bB = non-directional bending stress
2
2 0.5
= [(Di + 2td) / 2I] [(Mi SIFBi) + Mo SIFBo) ]
SB = branch torsional stress
= MS(Di + 2td) / 4I
tM = thickness of the reference laminate at the main run

CAESAR II User's Guide

827

Technical Discussions
SIFBi = branch stress intensification factor for in-plane moment
SIFBo = branch stress intensification factor for out-plane moment
3. When longitudinal stress is negative (net compressive):
- Vx x ELAM
Where:
Vx = Poissons ratio giving strain in longitudinal direction caused by stress in circumferential
direction
= design strain in circumferential direction
ELAM= modulus of elasticity in circumferential direction
BS 7159 also dictates the means of calculating flexibility and stress intensification (k- and i-)
factors for bend and tee components, for use during the flexibility analysis.

828

CAESAR II User's Guide

Technical Discussions
BS 7159 imposes a number of limitations on its use, the most notable being: the limitation of a
system to a design pressure of 10 bar, the restriction to the use of designated design laminates,
and the limited applicability of the k- and i- factor calculations to pipe bends (that is, mean wall
thickness around the intrados must be 1.75 times the nominal thickness or less).

This code appears to be more sophisticated, yet easy to use. We recommend that its calculation
techniques be applied even to FRP systems outside its explicit scope, with the following
recommendations:
Pressure stiffening of bends should be based on actual design pressure, rather than
allowable design strain.
Design strain should be based on manufacturers test and experience data wherever
possible (with consideration for expected operating conditions).
Fitting k- and i- factors should be based on manufacturers test or analytic data, if available.

UKOOA
The UKOOA Specification is similar in many respects to the BS 7159 Code, except that it
simplifies the calculation requirements in exchange for imposing more limitations and more
conservatism on the piping operating conditions.
Rather than explicitly calculating a combined stress, the specification defines an idealized
envelope of combinations of axial and hoop stresses that cause the equivalent stress to reach
failure. This curve represents the plot of:
(x / x-all) + (hoop / hoop-all) - [x hoop / (x-all hoop-all)] 1.0
2

CAESAR II User's Guide

829

Technical Discussions
Where:
x-all = allowable stress, axial
hoop-all = allowable stress, hoop
The specification conservatively limits you to that part of the curve falling under the line between
x-all (also known as sa(0:1)) and the intersection point on the curve where hoop is twice sx-(a
natural condition for a pipe loaded only with pressure), as shown in the following figure.

An implicit modification to this requirement is the fact that pressure stresses are given a factor of
safety (typically equal to 2/3) while other loads are not. This gives an explicit requirement of:
Pdes f1 f2 f3 LTHP
Where:
Pdes = allowable design pressure
f1 = factor of safety for 97.5% lower confidence limit, usually 0.85
f2 = system factor of safety, usually 0.67
f3 = ratio of residual allowable, after mechanical loads
= 1 - (2 a ) / (r f1 LTHS)
b

b
a

= axial bending stress due to mechanical loads

r = a(0:1)/a(2:1)
a(0:1) = long term axial tensile strength in absence of pressure load
a(2:1) = long term axial tensile strength under only pressure loading
LTHS = long term hydrostatic strength (hoop stress allowable)
LTHP = long term hydrostatic pressure allowable
This has been implemented in the CAESAR II pipe stress analysis software as:
Code Stress
a (f2 /r) + PDm / (4t)
b

Code Allowable

(f1 f2 LTHS) / 2.0

Where:
P = design pressure
D = pipe mean diameter
t = pipe wall thickness
K and i-factors for bends are to be taken from the BS 7159 Code, while no such factors are to
be used for tees.
The UKOOA Specification is limited in that shear stresses are ignored in the evaluation process;
no consideration is given to conditions where axial stresses are compressive; and most required
calculations are not explicitly detailed.

830

CAESAR II User's Guide

Technical Discussions

FRP Analysis Using CAESAR II

Practical Applications
CAESAR II has had the ability to model orthotropic materials such as FRP almost since its
inception. It also can specifically handle the requirements of the BS 7159 Code, the UKOOA
Specification, and more recently ISO 14692. FRP material parameters corresponding to those of
many vendors lines are provided with CAESAR II. You can pre-select these parameters to be
the default values whenever FRP piping is used. Other options, as to whether the BS 7159
pressure stiffening requirements should be carried out using design strain or actual strain can be
set in CAESAR IIs configuration module as well.

CAESAR II User's Guide

831

Technical Discussions

Selecting material 20 Plastic (FRP) activates CAESAR IIs orthotropic material model and
brings in the appropriate material parameters from the pre-selected materials. The orthotropic
material model is indicated by the changing of two fields from their previous isotropic values:
Elastic Modulus (C) changes to Elastic Modulus/axial and Poisson's Ratio changes to
Ea/Eh*Vh/a.

832

CAESAR II User's Guide

Technical Discussions
These changes are necessary because orthotropic models require more material parameters
than do isotropic. For example, there is no longer a single modulus of elasticity for the material,
but now two: axial and hoop. There is no longer a single Poissons ratio, but again two: Vh/a
(Poissons ratio relating strain in the axial direction due to stress-induced strain in the hoop
direction) and Va/h (Poissons ratio relating strain in the hoop direction due to stress-induced
strain in the axial direction). Also, unlike isotropic materials, the shear modulus does not follow
the relationship G = 1 / E (1-V), so that value must be explicitly input.

To minimize input, a few of these parameters can be combined due to their use in the program.
Generally, the only time that the modulus of elasticity in the hoop direction or the Poissons
ratios is used during flexibility analysis is when calculating piping elongation due to pressure
(note that the modulus of elasticity in the hoop direction is used when determining certain stress
allowables for the BS 7159 code):
dx = (x / Ea - Va/h * hoop / Eh) L

CAESAR II User's Guide

833

Technical Discussions
Where:
dx

= extension of piping element due to pressure

= longitudinal pressure stress in the piping element

= modulus of elasticity in the axial direction

Va/h

= Poissons ratio relating strain in the axial direction due to stress-induced

strain in the hoop direction

hoop = hoop pressure stress in the piping element

Eh

= modulus of elasticity in the hoop direction

= length of piping element

This equation can be rearranged, to require only a single new parameter, as:
dx = (x - Va/h hoop * (Ea / Eh )) * L / Ea
In theory, that single parameter, Vh/a is identical to (Ea / Eh * Va/h) giving: dx = (x Vh/ahoop) * L / Ea
The shear modulus of the material is required in ordered to develop the stiffness matrix. In
CAESAR II, this value, expressed as a ratio of the axial modulus of elasticity, is brought in from
the pre-selected material, or can be changed on a problem-wise basis using the Special
Execution Parameter (see "Special Execution Parameters" on page 255) dialog box
accessed by the Environment menu from the piping spreadsheet (see figure). This dialog box
also shows the coefficient of thermal expansion (extracted from the vendor file or user entered)
for the material, as well as the default laminate type, as defined by the BS 7159 Code:
Type 1 All chopped strand mat (CSM) construction with an internal and an external
surface tissue reinforced layer.
Type 2 Chopped strand mat (CSM) and woven roving (WR) construction with an internal
and an external surface tissue reinforced layer.
Type 3 Chopped strand mat (CSM) and multi-filament roving construction with an internal
and an external surface tissue reinforced layer.
The latter is used during the calculation of flexibility and stress intensification factors for piping
bends.
You can enter bend and tee information by using the auxiliary spreadsheets.

834

CAESAR II User's Guide

Technical Discussions
You can also change bend radius and laminate type data on a bend by bend basis, as
shown in the corresponding figure.

Specify BS 7159 fabricated and molded tee types by defining CAESAR II tee types 1 and 3
respectively at intersection points. CAESAR II automatically calculates the appropriate flexibility
and stress intensification factors for these fittings as per code requirements.
Enter the required code data on the Allowables auxiliary spreadsheet. The program provides
fields for both codes, number 27 BS 7159 and number 28 UKOOA. After selecting BS 7159,
CAESAR II provides fields for entry of the following code parameters:
SH1 through SH9 = Longitudinal Design Stress = d ELAMX
Kn1 through Kn9 = Cyclic Reduction Factor (as per BS 7159 paragraph 4.3.4)
Eh/Ea = Ratio of Hoop Modulus of Elasticity to Axial Modulus of Elasticity
K = Temperature Differential Multiplier (as per BS 7159 paragraph 7.2.1)

CAESAR II User's Guide

835

Technical Discussions
After selecting UKOOA, CAESAR II provides fields for entry of the following code parameters:
SH1 through SH9 = hoop design stress = f 1 * LTHS
R1 through R9 = ratio r = (a(0:1) / a(2:1))
f2 = system factor of safety (defaults to 0.67 if omitted)
K = temperature differential multiplier (same as BS 7159)
These parameters need only be entered a single time, unless they change at some point in the
system.

Performing the analysis is simpler than the system modeling. <Product> evaluates the operating
parameters and automatically builds the appropriate load cases. In this case, three are built:
Operating includes pipe and fluid weight, temperature, equipment displacements, and
pressure. This case is used to determine maximum code stress/strain, operational
equipment nozzle and restraint loads, hot displacements, and so forth.
Cold (same as above, except excluding temperature and equipment movements). This case
is used to determine cold equipment nozzle and restraint loads.
Expansion (cyclic stress range between the cold and hot case). This case may be used to
evaluate fatigue criteria as per paragraph 4.3.4 of the BS 7159 Code.
After analyzing the response of the system under these loads, CAESAR II displays a menu of
possible output reports. Reports may be designated by selecting a combination of load case and
results type (displacements, restraint loads, element forces and moments, and stresses). From
the stress report, you can determine at a glance whether the system passed or failed the stress
criteria.
For UKOOA, the piping is considered to be within allowable limits when the operating stress falls
within the idealized stress envelope this is illustrated by the shaded area in the following figure.

836

CAESAR II User's Guide

Technical Discussions

Conclusion
A pipe stress analysis program with worldwide acceptance is now available for evaluation of
FRP piping systems as per the requirements of the most sophisticated FRP piping codes. This
means that access to the same analytical methods and tools enjoyed by engineers using steel
pipe is available to users of FRP piping design.

References
1. Cross, Wilbur, An Authorized History of the ASME Boiler an Pressure Vessel Code, ASME,
1990
2. Olson, J. and Cramer, R., "Pipe Flexibility Analysis Using IBM 705 Computer Pro\-gram
MEC 21, Mare Island Report 277-59," 1959
3. Fiberglass Pipe Handbook, Composites Institute of the Society of the Plastics Indus\-try,
1989
4. Hashin, Z., "Analysis of Composite Materials a Survey," Journal of Applied Mechanics, Sept.
1983
5. Greaves, G., "Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic Pipe Design," Ciba-Geigy Pipe Systems
6. Puck, A. and Schneider, W., "On Failure Mechanisms and Failure Criteria of
Filament-Wound Glass-Fibre/Resin Composites," Plastics and Polymers, Feb. 1969
7. Hashin, Z., "The Elastic Moduli of Heterogeneous Materials," Journal of Applied Mechanics,
March 1962
8. Hashin, Z. and Rosen, B. Walter, "The Elastic Moduli of Fibre Reinforced Materials," Journal
of Applied Mechanics, June 1964
9. Whitney, J. M. and Riley, M. B., "Elastic Properties of Fiber Reinforced Composite
Materials," AIAA Journal, Sept. 1966
10. Walpole, L. J., "Elastic Behavior of Composite Materials: Theoretical Foundations,"
Advances in Applied Mechanics, Volume 21, Academic Press, 1989
11. BS 7159: 1989 British Standard Code of Practice for Design and Construction of Glass
Reinforced Plastics GRP Piping Systems for Individual Plants or Sites.
12. UK Offshore Operators Association Specification and Recommended Practice for the Use of
GRP Piping Offshore., 1994

Code Compliance Considerations

This section comprises general notes that cover code compliance. The first several pages
contain information that applies to all of the codes. The last pages contain code-specific
discussions. Review the general notes, highlighting those that apply to your problem. Also,
review the notes for the piping code that you need.
Configuration and Environment (on page 41) gives details about the various parameters that you
can use in the CAESAR II setup file. Many of these parameters are discussed from an
"application point-of-view" in the text that follows. For more information on the CAESAR II setup
file, see Configuration and Environment (on page 41).

CAESAR II User's Guide

837

Technical Discussions

General Comments on Configuration Settings' Effect on

Piping Code Calculations
Stress Intensification Factors (SIF) for all codes
Use the table below to determine which SIF value you need.
If you have...

then use an SIF Value of ...

threaded joints

2.3

double welded slip-on flanges

1.2

lap joint flanges with B16.9 stub

ends

1.6

Calculate Bonney Forge sweepolet and insert weldolet fittings

Use the Weld ID on the SIF & TEE Auxiliary dialog box to calculate the sweepolet and insert
weldolet fittings.
If you can verify that the welds for these fittings are finished or dressed, then specifying the
weld ID lowers the SIF.

Bend SIF overrides

User-defined bend SIF overrides affect the entire cross section of the bend, and as such you
cannot use them to specify a single point on the bend curvature. You must specify the SIFs for
the bend TO node. CAESAR II will apply this SIF, in place of the code SIF, over the entire bend
curvature, from weldline to weldline.
The default value for Fiberglass-Reinforced Plastic (FRP) bend and intersection SIFs is 2.3. Use
this value for all user-modified bends and intersections. The default flexibility factor value for
FRP bends is 1.0. If you modify these values, and generate the SIFs using the steel fatigue tests
you might not be able to use them as a basis for SIFs with FRP fittings.
CAESAR II does not permit the use of SIF values less than 1.0.

WRC 329
The only piping codes that cannot take advantage of the WRC 329 options, or the option to use
the ASME NC and ND rules for reduced intersections, are BS806 and the Swedish Power
Method 1. These codes do not use the effective section modulus, and any extrapolation of the
ASME methods into these codes is unwarranted.
There is a small difference between Use WRC329 and Reduced Intersection = WRC329. Use
Use WRC329 for all full and reduced intersections that are not welding tees or reinforced tees.
Use Reduced Intersection =WRC329 for reduced fittings that are not welding tees or
reinforced fabricated tees. A fitting is reduced when d/D is less than 0.975.

WRC 329 impact on use with B31.3, B31.4, B31.11, or B31.1 (1967) codes
1. Include torsional stresses in all stress calculations (sustained and occasional).
2. Use a torsional SIF of (r/R) io.
2/3
3
3. Compute i(ib) use 0.6(R/T) [1+0.5(r/R) ](r/rp).

838

CAESAR II User's Guide

Technical Discussions
2/3

1/2

4. For i(ob) use 1.5(R/T) (r/R) (r/rp) and i(ob)(t/T)>1.5

2/3
when (r/R) < 0.9 use 0.9(R/T) (r/rp) and i(ob)(t/T)>1.0
when (r/R) = 1.0 and use interpolation when 1.0 > (r/R) > 0.9
2/3
5. For ir use 0.8 (R/T) (r/R), and ir > 2.1
6. If the radius at the junction provided is greater than the larger of t/2 or T/2, then divide the
calculated SIFs by 2.0, but with ib>1.5 and ir>1.5.

WRC 329 impact on use with B31.1, B31.8, ASME III NC, ASME III ND, Navy 505, Z183, Z184,
or Swedish Method 2 codes
2/3

1/2

1. For ib use 1.5(R/T) (r/R) (r/rp), and ib(t/T)>1.5

when (r/R) < 0.9
2/3
use 0.9(R/T) (r/rp), and ib(t/T)>1.0
when (r/R) = 1.0 and
use interpolation when 1.0 > (r/R) > 0.9
2/3
2. For ir use 0.8 (R/T) (r/R), and ir > 2.1
3. If a radius at the provided junction is greater than the larger of t/2 or T/2, then divide the
calculated SIFs by 2.0, but with ib>1.5 and ir>1.5.
Bonney Forge Sweepolets tend to be a little more conservative because they are used for
fittings in the nuclear industry. Bonney Forge Sweepolet equations can generate SIFs less than
one because they are stronger than the girth butt weld used as the unity basis for the code fitting
SIFs. CAESAR II does not permit SIFs of less than 1.0. If you generate a Bonney Forge
Sweepolet SIF that is less than 1.0, the default value 1.0 is used.
The Bonney Forge SIF Data came from the technical flyer: "Bonney Forge Stress Intensification
Factors" Bulletin 789/Sl-1, Copyright 1976.
Although CAESAR II allows the specification of two element intersections, you cannot specify
two SIFs at a single node and get an increased SIF. For example, you cannot specify a socket
weld SIF and an intersection SIF at the same point.

Stress calculations for under-specified fittings

For two element joints use the largest diameter and the smallest wall thickness, when
discrepancies exist between the two adjoining pipes. For two element fittings modeled as socket
welds use the largest wall thickness. Both of these selections generate the largest SIFs and the
most conservative stress calculations for under-specified fittings.
The mismatch given for girth butt welds is the average mismatch and not the maximum
mismatch. You must verify that any maximum mismatch requirements are satisfied.
If a fillet leg is given in conjunction with a socket weld SIF definition, then both socket weld types
result in the same SIF.

B31.3 sustained case SIF

The B31.3 sustained case SIF factor in the setup file affects all of the following codes: B31.4,
B31.8, B31.11, Navy 505, Z662, and B31.1 (1967). The default value for the B31.3 SUS case
SIF factor is 1.0.

CAESAR II User's Guide

839

Technical Discussions
Corrosion
Calculate the corroded effective section modulus by using (r )te
Where:
r is the average cross sectional radius of the non-corroded pipe
(te) is the corroded thickness.
2

Select the thickness (te) based on the non-corroded thicknesses of the branch and header,
in other words, the lesser of Th and iTb. The resulting value has the corrosion subtracted from it
before the effective section modulus calculation is made.
Always use the corroded wall thickness to calculate the Maximum Shear Stress regardless of
the setting of the All Stress Cases Corroded option located in the setup file.

Using more than one Piping Code

If you use different piping codes in one job, the code that displays at the top of the Output
Stress report is the last code used during model input. SIFs, allowables, and code equations
are all computed in accordance with the code that varies with the input.
When there are multiple piping codes in the same piping job, and a piping code change occurs
at an intersection, if the intersection is completely defined with three pipes framing into the
intersection then the piping code used to generate the SIF equations will be that one associated
with the first header pipe framing into the intersection. If the intersection is only partially defined,
then the piping code will be selected from the first pipe framing into the intersection point.

Axial Stress in the Expansion Stress Range

The ASME piping codes primarily combine moments for thermal expansion stresses. When
there is any tendency for large axial forces to exist in the pipe these code equations are not
adequate. An example of this is for buried or partially buried pipe. Here the axial stresses can be
very high. B31.4 directs you to compute a longitudinal stress for completely restrained pipe.
CAESAR II enables you to specify just how much of the pipe is buried. This longitudinal stress is
then added to the stress calculations for thermal and contributes to a failure prediction that might
have otherwise been ignored. Similar effects can be achieved in CAESAR II by using the axial
soil restraint and telling the setup file to include F/A components in the stress calculations. Be
aware that for any type of problem, if large axial loads are developed because of the design, the
piping code might not be adequately considering it.

Application of Torsion in Stress Calculations

The piping codes that do not, by default, include torsion in the sustained or occasional stress
calculations display below:
B31.3

Navy 505

B31.4

Z662

B31.8

B31.1 (1967)

B31.11

GPTC/Z380

These codes tell you to add the longitudinal stresses due to weight, pressure, and other
sustained loadings so torsion is not added. Torsional shear stresses are not longitudinal
stresses. You can request that torsion is added into the sustained and occasional stress
equations by including the Add Torsion in SL Stress option in the setup file. The torsion stress
is still not intensified as it is in the power piping codes. This lack of intensification is considered

840

CAESAR II User's Guide

Technical Discussions
an oversight and is corrected in WRC 329. You can include this fix by running any of the above
codes and including the Use WRC330 option in the setup file.

Radius Entry for Mitered Joints

The radius given in CAESAR II is always the equivalent closely spaced miter radius. Only use
the radius calculation for widely spaced miters in the piping codes after breaking the widely
spaced miter bend down into individual single cut miters as recommended.

Reduced intersection calculations

Use reduced intersection calculations when d/D < 0.975.
Where:
d = Outside Diameter of the Branch
D = Outside Diameter of the Header
B31.1 and the ASME Section III piping codes provide stress intensification factors for reduced
branch ends. None of the other piping codes provide these SIFs. The Reduced Intersection
option in the setup file enables other piping code users to access improved SIFs for reduced
fittings. You should review the notes associated with the B31.1 and the ASME Section III codes
that follow to verify that any other parameters or input associated with the reduced intersection
calculations are set as necessary.

Pressure Stiffening
If you request pressure stiffening for those codes that do not normally provide it, CAESAR II
applies pressure stiffening for all bends and for both miter types.

Occasional Load Factors

The defaults occasional load factor from the setup file used in the evaluation of the allowable
stress, display the text that follows for each of the piping codes.
B31.1: The occasional load factor is 1.15.
B31.3: The occasional load factor is 1.33.
B31.4: This is 0.8Sy as defined in the most recent edition of B31.4. OCC does not affect a
B31.4 analysis in CAESAR II.
B31.5: The occasional load factor is 1.33.
B31.8: Occasional cases are not specifically defined. If you enter an OCC load case the
allowable defaults to 1.0 times the sustained allowable stress in other words OCC=1.0.
B31.11: This is 0.88Sy as defined in the most recent edition of B31.11 OCC does not affect
a B31.11 analysis in CAESAR II.
ASME Section III NC and ND: The default value of OCC is 1.2, the occasional stress
allowable is 1.8 (1.2 X 1.5)Sh but not greater than 1.5Sy. If OCC is 1.5 or 2.0, the allowable
is set to the minimum of 2.25Sh/1.8Sy (Level C) or 3.0Sh/2.0Sy (Level D). Note in the latter
two cases, enter Sm for Sh.
Navy 505: Occasional cases are not addressed but defaults to the method used in B31.1,
and an OCC value of 1.15 is the default.
Z662: The occasional case is not defined, but if you make an entry the allowable for the
case defaults to 1.0 times the sustained allowable.
BS806: The occasional load case is not defined, but if you make an entry the allowable
stress for the OCC load case is KSh. This is the occasional load factor times the sustained
allow\-able. The default value for k is 1.0.

CAESAR II User's Guide

841

Technical Discussions

Swedish Method 1: OCC is not used. The load cases are not differentiated. The same
allowable Sigma(ber)/1.5 is used for all load cases.
Swedish Method 2: Uses an OCC default of 1.2 as recommended in the Swedish Piping
Code.
B31.1(1967): OCC default is 1.15.
Stoomwezen: OCC default is 1.2.
RCC-M C&D: OCC default is 1.2.
CODETI: OCC default is 1.15.
NORWEGIAN: OCC default is 1.2.
FBDR: OCC default is 1.15
BS 7159: The occasional load case is not defined.
UKOOA: The occasional load case is not defined.
IGE/TD/12: Table 4 of the code addresses occasional stress increases. The occasional
factor in the setup file has no bearing on this code.
EN-13480: The occasional load factor varies from 1.0 to 1.8, depending on the loading.
Refer to Section 12.3.3 for details.
GPTC/Z380: Occasional cases are not specifically defined. If you enter an OCC load case
the allowable defaults to 1.0 times the sustained allowable stress in other words OCC=1.0.
HPGSL: The occasional load factor is 1.33.
JPI: The occasional load factor is 1.33.
You can change the occasional load factor from the program defaults by using the setup file.
Enter the value as a percent. To get an occasional load factor of 1.5, you must type 50.0.

Code-Specific Notes
B31.1
Calculate pressure stiffening using B31.1
Pressure stiffening is defined by default in the code. You can exclude pressure stiffening on
bends in the analysis by including the Use Pressure Stiffening=No option in the setup file.

Flanged end modifications using B31.1

Modifications resulting from flanged ends are permitted in the code providing the bend is not a
widely spaced miter. CAESAR II does not verify the B31.1 criteria "B" length for closely spaced
miters.
B31.1 does not by default add F/A into the stress calculation. F/A and the pressure stresses are
added to the bending stress, whether the tensile or compressive component of bending, to
produce the largest longitudinal stress component. This is true for all codes where the addition
of axial and pressure terms are concerned. You can include the axial force terms into the code
stress by inserting the Add F/A In Stress=Yes option in the setup file.
The F/A forces are structural forces developed in the pipe independent of the pressure
PD/4t forces.

Calculate reduced branch stress intensification factors (SIFs) using B31.1

In 1980, B31.1 added a reduced branch SIF equation to Appendix D. This equation came from
ASME Section III. However, B31.1 continued to use the effective section modulus calculation for
the branch. The ASME Section III rules clearly stated that the branch section modulus, not the
effective section modulus should be used with the new SIF. B31.1 continued use of the effective

842

CAESAR II User's Guide

Technical Discussions
section modulus produced unnecessarily high calculated stresses. This error was corrected in
the 1989 version of B31.1. Prior to CAESAR II version 3.0, you had two options:
Use the pre-1980 version of the B31.1 SIF rules
Use the very conservative post-1980 B31.1 SIF rules
These options also exist in version 3.0 and later except that the section modulus problem is
corrected. If you need to run version 3.0 and later without the section modulus correction, then
include the B31.1 Reduced Z Fix=No option in the setup file.

Calculate reduced intersection branch using B31.1

Reduced intersection branch SIFs were not intended for reinforced or welding tees.
Conservative results are produced, but the original researchers did not intend for SIFs to be
used for these fittings. You can disable the reduced branch fitting calculations for reinforced or
welded tees by including the No Reduced SIF for RFT and WLT option in the setup file. This
produces less conservative results, but can in some cases be justified.
B31.1 102.3.2 (c) says to divide the allowable stresses coming from the stress tables in
Appendix A by the applicable weld joint factors listed in Paragraph 102.4.3.

Calculate the B31.1 stress allowables

Use the equations below to calculate the stress allowables.
Expansion Allowable = f [ (1.25/Eff)(Sc+Sh) - Sl ]
Sustained Allowable = Sh/Eff
Occasional Allowable = Sh/Eff * (Occ)
Where:
f = Cyclic Reduction Factor
Eff = Longitudinal Weld Joint Efficiency
Sc = Cold Allowable Stress
Sh = Hot Allowable Stress
Sl = Sustained Stress
Occ = Occasional Load Factor Default is 1.15

Calculate stress intensification factors (SIFs) for intersections using B31.1

Inplane and outplane SIFs for intersections are the same.

B31.1 reducer default values

The default flexibility factor value is 1.0. Use the following equation to determine the SIF value:
maximum of 2.0 or 0.5 + .01*Alpha* SQRT(D2/t2).
Where:
D1- Diameter of the Large End
t1- Thickness of the Large End
D2 - Diameter of the Small End
t2 - Thickness of the Small End
Alpha - the Reducer Cone Angle in Degrees.
Where:
Alpha = atan[ 0.5 * (D1-D2) / (length of the sloped portion of the reducer) ]

CAESAR II User's Guide

843

Technical Discussions
Alpha is the slope of the reducer transition in degrees. If left blank, the value is set from an
estimated slope equal to the arc tangent times 1/2 the change in diameters times sixty percent
of the entered reducer length.
Alpha cannot exceed 60 and the larger of D1/t1 and D2/t2 cannot exceed 100.

B31.3
Flanged end modifications using B31.3
Modifications resulting from flanged ends are permitted in the code providing the bend is not a
widely spaced miter.

Calculate stress intensification factors (SIFs) for intersections using B31.3

In-plane and out-plane SIFs for intersections are separate and unique.
B31.3 piping code gives the equation for the expansion stress. Because that equation does not
include the longitudinal stress due to axial loads in the pipe, CAESAR II does not include the F/A
component of the stress in the expansion stress equation. The code also says that you can add
the F/A component where it is significant. Change this by including the Add F/A In Stress
option in the setup file. The F/A longitudinal stress components are added by default to the code
stress component for all other stress categories.

B31.3 girth butt welds default value

The default SIF value for a girth butt weld is 1.0. This is also Markls original basis for SIFs.

Calculate socket welds using B31.3

B31.3 makes no distinction between socket welds with undercut and socket welds without
undercut. Codes that do differentiate use 1.3 for socket welds with no undercut, and 2.1 for all
others. Unless you are specifying a fillet weld leg length, use a default SIF value of 1.3 for all
B31.3 socket welds.

Calculate the B31.3 stress allowables

Use the equations below to calculate the stress allowables.
Expansion Allowable = f [ (1.25)(Sc+Sh) - Sl ]
Sustained Allowable
= Sh
Occasional Allowable = Sh * (Occ)
Where:
f = Cyclic Reduction Factor
Sc = Cold Allowable Stress
Sh = Hot Allowable Stress (as selected)
Sl = Sustained Stress
Occ = Occasional Load Factor Default is 1.33

Calculate corroded stress using B31.3

By default, B31.3 applied corrosion to section modulus calculation for sustained and occasional
stress calculation. Specifying All Stress Cases Corroded in the setup file performs the
corroded stress calculations for all stress calculations.

844

CAESAR II User's Guide

Technical Discussions
Calculate pressure effects on miters using B31.3
Pressure effects on miters are allowed in the B31.3 piping code.

B31.3 reducer default values

The default SIF value is 1.0. The default flexibility factor value is 1.0.

B31.4
Calculate pressure stiffening using B31.4
Pressure stiffening is defined by default in the code. You can exclude pressure stiffening on
bends in the analysis by including the Use Pressure Stiffening on Bends in the setup file.

Flanged end modifications using B31.4

Modifications resulting from flanged ends are permitted in the code providing the bend is not a
widely spaced miter.

B31.4 girth butt welds default value

The default SIF value for a girth butt weld is 1.0. This is also Markls original basis for SIFs.

Calculate stress intensification factors (SIFs) for intersections using B31.4

In-plane and out-plane SIFs for intersections are separate and unique.

Calculate the B31.4 stress allowables

Use the equations below to calculate the stress allowables.
Expansion Allowable = (0.72)(Sy)
Sustained Allowable = (0.75)(0.72)(Sy)
Occasional Allowable = (0.8)(Sy)
Operating Allowable = (0.9)(Sy) if the axial stress is compressive, no code check is done if
axial stress tensile
Where:
Sy = Specified Minimum Yield Stress
B31.4 does not use EFF, (found in the Allowable Stress auxiliary field). The minimum yield
stress is all that is required to compute flexibility stress allowables.

Calculate effective section modulus using B31.4

B31.4 has no provision for using an effective section modulus calculation at intersections.

Calculate liberal allowable using B31.4

B31.4 does not include a provision for the liberal allowable. This particular option is not used for
B31.4 stress allowable calculations. The occasional load factor, used in the other piping codes
for determining the allowable stress for occasional load sets, is not used in B31.4, as the default
allowable stress is 0.8 times the minimum yield stress.
CAESAR II assumes that 419.6.4(b) establishes a requirement for the allowable operating
stress at 90% of Sy; when the net axial stress is compressive (for example, when longitudinal
pressure stresses can be ignored in underground pipes). The last sentence in the paragraph
establishes that: "Beam bending stresses shall be included in the longitudinal stress for those

CAESAR II User's Guide

845

Technical Discussions
portions of the restrained line which are supported above ground." You have two options for
including the axial stress in your analyses:
1. Include axial friction restraints and include the ADD_F/A parameter into the setup file. Set
Fac to 0.001 to indicate that the line is buried, so longitudinal pressure stresses are not
present, so the hoop stress component must be considered.
2. Use the Fac value to have CAESAR II compute the "axially-restrained" stress and include it
during stress calculations. If you enter a nonzero Fac value, then multiply the pressure plus
axial loads in the pipe by (1-Fac). This gives a more realistic estimation of the axial stress in
the pipe when you include both of the effects above.
Paragraph 419.6.4(b) requires 1) the reduction of the axial expansion stress by the
product of Poisson's ratio and the pressure hoop stress, and 2) the addiction of the hoop stress
to the axial stress. The latter represents the calculation of stress intensity when the axial stress
is compressive, implying that there is no longitudinal pressure stress in buried pipe (the pressure
loads are transmitted directly to the soil). CAESAR II handles this case in the Operating Load
Case, where the hoop stress is added in and the allowable stress is set to 0.9 Sy whenever the
axial stress is compressive. If Fac is 0.001, the piping element is considered buried, so the
longitudinal pressure stress is replaced by the product of Poissons ratio and the hoop stress, in
keeping with the spirit of paragraph 419.6.4(b). "Fac" is automatically set to 0.001 when B31.4
pipe is sent through the Buried Pipe Modeler. The stress due to axial force is also included for
these elements.
The Fac variable should probably not be set to 1.0 with B31.4 and thermal expansion cases
where you are going from one thermal state to another state. In other words, where the case is
of the form: L1-L2, and both L1 and L2 contain temperatures. In this case, the thermal
expansion used in the restrained pipe calculation comes from the last thermal specified in the
load case definition. In the example above the thermal expansion associated with the L2 load
case.
The Base Hoop Stress On OD flag in the setup file is used by B31.4 when the hoop stress is
calculated for the restrained pipe longitudinal stress calculation. The default is to base the hoop
stress calculation on the average diameter, and the equation PD/2t. In the mechanical stress
calculations the hoop stress is based on the inside diameter.
This is the hoop stress that is printed in the extended CAESAR II Stress report.

B31.4 reducer default values

The default SIF value is 1.0. The default Flexibility Factor value is 1.0.

846

CAESAR II User's Guide

Technical Discussions

B31.4 Chapter IX
Chapter IX presents the offshore requirements of the B31.4 (on page 845).

Calculate Stress Intensification Factors (SIFs), flexibility factors, and section moduli
Calculate all SIFs, flexibility factors, and section moduli exactly as stated in the standard B31.4
code.

Calculate stress using B31.4 Chapter IX

Use the uncorroded wall thickness to make stress calculations.

Calculate load cases using B31.4 Chapter IX

There is no provision for a code check for the expansion load case, so no expansion cases are
generated under this code. Operating, sustained, or occasional load cases are treated
identically. Do three stress calculations for these load cases, each with a different allowable
limit. The Stress Report displays the calculation causing the highest percent of allowable along
with its specific allowable. These three stress checks are:
Hoop Stress: Sh F1 Sy
Longitudinal Stress: |SL| 0.8 Sy
Equivalent Stress: Se 0.9 Sy
Where:
Sh = (Pi Pe) D / 2t
Pi = Internal Pressure
Pe = External Pressure
D = Outer Diameter
t = Wall Thickness
F1 = Hoop Stress Design Factor 0.60 or 0.72, see Table A402.3.5(a) of the B31.4 Code
Sy = Specified Minimum Yield Strength
SL = Sa + Sb or Sa - Sb, whichever results in greater stress value
Sa = Axial Stress Positive Tensile and Negative Compressive
Sb = Bending Stress
2
2 1/2
Se = 2[((SL - Sh)/2) + St ]
St = Torsional Stress

CAESAR II User's Guide

847

Technical Discussions

B31.5
B31.5 reducer default values
The default SIF value is 1.0. The default flexibility factor value is 1.0.

B31.8
Restrained Pipe (as defined in Section 833.1):
For Straight Pipe:
Both SL and SC < 0.9ST (OPE)
Both SL, and SC < 0.9ST (SUS)
SL < 0.9ST and Sc < ST (OCC)
and
* The Stress Report displays the calculation causing the highest percent of allowable along
with its specific allowable.
For All Other Components
SL < 0.9ST (OPE, SUS, OCC)

Unrestrained Pipe (as defined in Section 833.1):

SL < 0.75ST (SUS, OCC)
SE < f[1.25(SC + SH) SL] (EXP)
Where:
SL = SP + SX + SB
SP = 0.3SHoop (for restrained pipe); 0.5SHoop (for unrestrained pipe)
SX = R/A
SB = MB/Z (for straight pipe/bends with SIF = 1.0); MR/Z (for other components)
2
2
SC = Max (|SHoop SL|, sqrt[SL SLSHoop + SHoop ])
2
2
MR = sqrt[(0.75iiMi) + (0.75ioMo)2 + Mt ]
SE = ME/Z
2
2
ME = sqrt[(0.75iiMi) + (0.75ioMo)2 + Mt ]
S = Specified Minimum Yield Stress
T = Temperature Derating Factor
SH = 0.33SUT
SC = 0.33SU
SU = Specified Minimum Ultimate Tensile Stress
B31.8 distinguishes between restrained and unrestrained piping for the purposes of stress
computations. To implement B31.8 you must define which sections of the piping system are
restrained, as per Code Section 833.1. In general, restrained piping is piping in which the soil or
supports prevent axial displacement of flexure at bends. Conversely, unrestrained piping is
piping that is free to displace axially or flex at bends. For more information, see Section 833.1.
Processing a B31.8 model through the Buried Pipe Modeler designates the buried sections as
restrained.
For restrained pipe, B31.8 specifies that the operating case stresses should include the thermal
axial stress component, a constant stress due to linear thermal expansion, but exclude thermal

848

CAESAR II User's Guide

Technical Discussions
bending stresses from the SB component. Because CAESAR II cannot go back and segregate
internal thermal forces and moments from those of other loads, the thermal axial stresses are
calculated and included as part of SX (as opposed to added as a constant), and thermal bending
stresses are conservatively included in SB.
Bending stress SB is defined differently for straight pipe or "large-radius" bends than it is for
other components. CAESAR II resolves the ambiguity of exactly what constitutes a
"large-radius" bend by considering any bend having an SIF of 1.0 as being a "large-radius"
bend.

Occasional load default values

The occasional load default value for B31.8 is 1.111 (1/0.9) and is only applied to the allowable
for SC combined stress calculated only in straight pipes. The allowable in this case is ST as
opposed to 0.9ST. There is no provision for increasing or decreasing this allowable.
In the case of occasional stresses in straight pipes, there are potentially two stresses (S L and
SC) to be compared against two different allowable limits. CAESAR II only prints the one that
provides the greater ratio of calculated stress versus allowable stress. You can visually
determine which stress prints by examining the magnitude of the allowable.

Calculate pressure stiffening using B31.8

Pressure stiffening is included by default in the code. You can exclude pressure stiffening on
bends in the analysis by setting the Use Pressure Stiffening switch in the setup file.

Modifications to the flexibility factor and Stress Intensification Factor (SIF) using B31.8
Modifications to the flexibility factor and SIF of bends resulting from flanged ends are permitted
by the code.

Calculate socket welds using B31.8

B31.8 makes no distinction between socket welds with undercut and socket welds without
undercut. Unless you are specifying a fillet weld leg length, use a default SIF value of 2.1 for all
B31.8 socket welds.

Using reducers with B31.8

Use of reducers is subject to the following limitations:
Alpha the reducer cone angle is limited to 60
The larger of D1/SQRT(t1) and D2/SQRT(t2) cannot exceed 100 where D1/t1 and D2/t2 are
the diameters and thicknesses of the large and small ends, respectively.

CAESAR II User's Guide

849

Technical Discussions

B31.8 Chapter VIII

Chapter VIII discusses the offshore requirements of B31.8. For more information, see B31.8 (on
page 848)

Calculate the Stress Intensification Factors (SIFs), flexibility factors, and section moduli
using B31.8 Chapter VIII
Calculate all SIFs, flexibility factors, and section moduli exactly as in the standard B31.8 Code.
Make all stress calculations using the non-corroded wall thickness for the hoop and longitudinal
stresses. Use the corroded thickness for the combined stress.

Calculate the expansion load case using B31.8 Chapter VIII

There is no provision for a code check for the expansion load case, so no expansion cases are
generated under this code.

Calculate the operating, sustained, or occasional load cases using B31.8 Chapter VIII
Operating, sustained, or occasional load cases are treated identically. For these load cases, you
must perform three stress calculations, each with specific allowable limits. The stress calculation
causing the highest percent of allowable displays in the stress report along with its specific
allowable. The stress checks are:
Hoop Stress: Sh F1ST
Longitudinal Stress: |SL| 0.8S
Equivalent Stress: Se 0.9S
Where:
Sh = (Pi Pe) D / 2t
Pi = Internal Pressure
Pe = External Pressure
D = Outer Diameter
t = Wall Thickness
F1 = Hoop Stress Design Factor 0.50 or 0.72 see Table A842.22 of B31.8
S = Specified Minimum Yield Strength
T = Temperature Derating Factor see Table 841.116A of B31.8
The product of S and T, the yield stress at operating temperature, is required in
the SH field of the CAESAR II Input:
SL = Maximum Longitudinal Stress Positive Tensile and Negative Compressive
2
2 1/2
Se = 2[((SL - Sh)/2) + Ss ]
Ss = Torsional Stress

850

CAESAR II User's Guide

Technical Discussions

B31.9 Notes
Paragraph 919.4.1.b states that for analysis methods follow B31.1. For more information, refer
to B31.1 (see "B31.3 Code-Specific Settings" on page 78).

B31.11
Calculate pressure stiffening using B31.11
Pressure stiffening is included by default in the code. You can exclude pressure stiffening on
bends in the analysis by setting the Use Pressure Stiffening switch in the setup file.

Flanged end modifications using B31.11

Modifications resulting from flanged ends are permitted in the code provided the bend is not a
widely spaced miter.

B31.11 girth butt welds default value

The default SIF value for a girth butt weld is 1.0. This is also Markls original basis for SIFs.

Calculate stress intensification factors (SIFs) for intersections using B31.11

In-plane and out-plane SIFs for intersections are separate and unique.

Calculate the B31.11 allowable stresses

Use the equations below to calculate the stress allowables.
Expansion Allowable = (0.72)(Sy)
Sustained Allowable = (0.75)(0.72)(Sy)
Occasional Allowable = (0.88)(Sy)
Operating Allowable = (0.9)(Sy) if the axial stress is compressive; no code check done if the
axial stress is tensile
Where:
Sy = Specified Minimum Yield Stress
B31.11 does not use EFF, found on the Allowable Stress Auxiliary field. The minimum yield
stress is all that is required to compute flexibility stress allowables.

Calculate effective section modulus using B31.11

B31.11 has no provision for using an effective section modulus calculation at intersections.

Calculate liberal allowable using B31.11

B31.11 does not include a provision for the liberal allowable. This option is not used for B31.11
stress allowable calculations. The occasional load factor, used in the other piping codes for
determining the allowable stress for occasional load sets, is also not used in B31.11, as the
allowable stress is 0.88 times the minimum yield stress.
CAESAR II assumes that 1119.6.4(b) establishes a requirement for the allowable operating
stress at 90% of Sy when the net axial stress is compressive (when longitudinal pressure
stresses can be ignored in underground pipes). The last sentence in the paragraph establishes
that: "Beam bending stresses shall be included in the longitudinal stress for those portions of the

CAESAR II User's Guide

851

Technical Discussions
restrained line which are supported above ground." You have two options for including this axial
stress in your analyses:
1. Include axial friction restraints and include the Add F/A option in the setup file. Set Fac to
0.001 to indicate that the line is buried, so longitudinal pressure stresses are not present,
and so the hoop stress component is considered.
2. Use Fac to tell CAESAR II to compute the axially-restrained stress and include it during
stress calculations. If you enter a nonzero Fac, the pressure plus axial loads in the pipe are
multiplied by (1-Fac). This gives a more realistic estimation of the axial stress in the pipe
when you have included both of the effects above.
Paragraph 1119.6.4(b) requires 1) the reduction of the axial expansion stress by the
product of Poissons ratio and the pressure hoop stress, and 2) the addition of the hoop stress to
the axial stress. The latter represents the calculation of stress intensity when the axial stress is
compressive, implying that there is no longitudinal pressure stress in buried pipe (the pressure
loads are transmitted directly to the soil). CAESAR II handles this case in the operating load
case, where the hoop stress is added in and the allowable stress is set to 0.9 Sy whenever the
axial stress is compressive. If Fac is 0.001, the piping element is considered buried, so the
longitudinal pressure stress is replaced by the product of Poissons ratio and the hoop stress, in
keeping with the spirit of paragraph 1119.6.4(b). Fac is automatically set to 0.001 when B31.11
pipe is sent through the buried pipe modeler (on page 411). The stress due to axial force is also
included for these elements.
Do not set Fac to 1.0 when using B31.11with thermal expansion cases where you are going
from one thermal state to another state. In other words where the case is of the form: L1-L2, and
both L1 and L2 contain temperatures. In this case the thermal expansion used in the restrained
pipe calculation comes from the last thermal specified in the load case definition. In the example
above the thermal expansion associated with the L2 load case.
When calculating the hoop stress for the restrained pipe longitudinal stress calculation use the
Base Hoop Stress On option in the setup file. The default is to base the hoop stress calculation
on D = average diameter in the equation PD/2t. In mechanical stress calculations the hoop
stress is based on the inside diameter. This is the hoop stress that displays in the extended
CAESAR II Stress report.

B31.11 reducer default values

The default SIF value is 1.0. The default flexibility factor value is 1.0.

ASME III Subsections NC and ND

Calculate pressure stiffening using NC and ND
Pressure stiffening is not defined by default in this code. You can include pressure stiffening on
bends in the analysis by including the Use Pressure Stiffening=Yes option in the setup file.

Flanged end modifications using NC and ND

Modifications resulting from flanged ends are permitted in this code providing the bend is not a
widely spaced miter.

Minimum SIF for reinforced and unreinforced fabricated tees using NC and ND
The minimum SIF for reinforced and unreinforced fabricated tees is 2.1.

Calculate B1 and B2 using NC and ND

Calculate B1 and B2 according to the equations in ASME NC and ND.

852

CAESAR II User's Guide

Technical Discussions
Calculate liberal allowable using NC and ND
If you are using this piping code and define a dynamic load case as an Expansion, a request
for Liberal Allowable is ignored and the (Sh-Sl) term is removed from the allowed limit (see
below). This is a programming decision rather than an interpretation of the piping code or a
recommendation for doing dynamic analysis.

Calculate stress intensification factors (SIFs) for intersections using NC and ND

Inplane and outplane SIFs for intersections are the same.

Using WRC 329 with NC or ND

For all intersections that are not welding tees or reinforced fabricated tees use the equation
2
*r *t to calculate the approximate section modulus for the stress calculations.
This includes all reduced intersections and all d/D ratios.

Determine the branch SIF using NC or ND

If you do not want to use the branch SIF of the Code for welding and reinforced reducing tees,
include the No Reduced SIF for RFT and WLT flag in the setup file.

Calculate the NC and ND stress allowables

Use the equations below to calculate the stress allowables.
Expansion Allowable = f(1.25Sc + 0.25Sh) + (Sh-Sl)
Sustained Allowable = 1.5Sh If not at an intersection
Occasional Allowable = 1.8Sh not greater than 1.5Sy, if OCC=1.2;
2.25Sh not greater than 1.8Sy, if OCC=1.5;
3.0Sh not greater than 2.0Sy, if OCC=2.0
Where:
f = Cyclic Reduction Factor
Sc = Cold Allowable
Sh = Hot Allowable
Sl = Sustained Stress from PD/4t+0.75iMb
Sy = Material Yield Stress
OCC = Occasional Factor from the CAESAR II configuration file

Calculate two pipe intersections using NC and ND

For two pipe intersections, for example butt welds or socket welds, B1 and B2 factors are 1.0. If
the ratio of the average branch to average run radius is less than 0.5, then apply the reduced
intersection rules to the B1 and B2 calculations regardless of the intersection type. If the
reduced intersection rules do not apply then use the following rules for butt welded fittings:
B2b = 0.4 * (R/T)**2/3 but not < 1.0
B2r = 0.5 * (R/T)**2/3 but not < 1.0
You can modify the values for B1 and B2 for any node in the SIF&TEE auxiliary field. Any
changes you make to B1 and B2 on an auxiliary field only apply for that element, regardless of
whether the node is an intersection or not.

CAESAR II User's Guide

853

Technical Discussions
Calculate the ratio of r/R using NC and ND
When r/R < 0.5 use the following equations for B1 and B2:
B2b = 0.50 C2b but not < 1.0
B2r = 0.75 C2r but not < 1.0
2/3
1/2
C2b = 3(R/T) (r/R) (t/T)(r/rp), but not < 1.5
1/4
C2r = 1.15(r/t) but not < 1.5

Branch SIFs using NC and ND

WRC 329 produces smaller branch SIFs than ASME NC and ND, and the same run SIFs. The
branch SIFs are smaller by a factor of 2. This is when d/D<0.5 and WRC 329 corrects the Mob
(out of plane bending) inconsistency when d/D is between 0.5 and 1. In the lower ranges of d/D
ratios WRC 329 is less conservative than the present codes and in the higher ranges WRC 329
is more conservative than the present codes.

Calculate Pvar using NC and ND

Pvar represents the difference between the operating pressure and Pmax, which is used in eq
11. CAESAR II forms occasional stresses by adding the sustained stress including pressure,
and the occasional stress including the stress difference between the operating pressure and
the peak pressure.

Limit for expansion stress range

To satisfy equations 10 or 11, the expansion stress, iMc/Z, must remain below the maximum of
either f(1.25Sc + 0.25Sh) or f(1.25Sc + 0.25Sh) + (Sh-Sl) where Sl is the sustained stress as
defined by equation 11: Sl= PDo/4tn+0.75iMa/Z.

Calculate moment summations using NC and ND

The approach taken by CAESAR II for moment summations at inter\-sections to satisfy
equations 8 and 9 is to use the SRSS of the moments at each end of the pipe framing into the
intersection. You do not have to adhere to the cumulative moment summation rules for a single
intersection as per NB 3683.1. In addition, use the effective section modulus rules of NC and ND
for all intersection stress calculations like equations 8 and 9. Use subsection NB to get the
values for B1 and B2 only, and to compute the local flexibility if requested. Because of the use of
this approach in CAESAR II, there is no allowable calculated for intersection points and
sustained or occasional loads.

Determine sustained case SIF using NC and ND

Do not use the SIF in the ASME class 2 or 3 sustained stress calculations.

NC and ND reducer default values

The default flexibility factor value is 1.0. Use the following equation to determine the SIF value:
2.0 max or 0.5 + .01*alpha* SQRT(D2/t2).
Where:
D1- Diameter of the Large End
t1- Thickness of the Large End
D2 - Diameter of the Small End
t2 - Thickness of the Small End
Alpha - the reducer cone angle in degrees

854

CAESAR II User's Guide

Technical Discussions
Where:
Alpha = atan[ 0.5 * (D1-D2) / (length of the sloped portion of reducer) ]
Alpha is the slope of the reducer transition in degrees. If left blank, the value is set from an
estimated slope equal to the arc tangent times 1/2 the change in diameters times sixty percent
of the entered reducer length.
Alpha cannot exceed 60. The larger of D1/t1 and D2/t2 cannot exceed 100.
B1=.5 if alpha 30, 1.0 if 30 < alpha 60; B2 = 1.0.
There is an error in the code, the code states note 12 however, they meant note 14.
Alpha cannot exceed 60.

CANADIAN Z662
Calculate pressure stiffening using Z662
Pressure stiffening is not defined by default in the code. You can include pressure stiffening on
bends in the analysis by including the Use Pressure Stiffening=Yes option in the setup file.

Flanged end modifications using Z662

Modifications resulting from flanged ends are permitted in the code providing the bend is not a
widely spaced miter.

Pad thickness using Z662

There is no limit in Z662 for the beneficial effect of the pad on an intersection. Most codes limit
the pad thickness to 1.5 times the header thickness. For Z662, CAESAR II does not limit the
pad thickness.

Z662 girth butt welds default value

The default SIF value for a girth butt weld is 1.0. This is also Markls original basis for SIFs.
In-plane and out-plane stress intensification factors for intersections are the same.

Calculate socket welds using Z662

Z662 makes no distinction between socket welds with undercut and socket welds without
undercut. Codes that do differentiate use 1.3 for socket welds with no undercut, and 2.1 for all
others. Unless you are specifying a fillet weld leg length, use a default SIF value of 1.3.

Calculate effective section modulus using Z662

Z662 has no provision for using an effective section modulus calculation at intersections.

Calculate the CANADIAN Z662 allowable stress limits

Use the equations below to calculate the stress allowables.
Expansion Allowable = (0.72)(T)(Sy)
Sustained Allowable = (Fac)(T)(L)(Sy)
Occasional Allowable = (Occ)(Fac)(T)(L)(Sy)
Operating Allowable = 0.9(T)(Sy), if pipe is buried and axial stress is compressive
Operating Allowable = (T)(Sy), if pipe is not buried and axial stress is compressive

CAESAR II User's Guide

855

Technical Discussions
Where:
Sy = Specified Minimum Yield Stress
Fac = Construction Design Factor
T = Temperature De-rating Factor
Occ = Occasional Load Factor (Default is 1.0)
L = Location Factor
CAESAR II assumes that Section 4.6.2 of the Z662 code establishes a requirement for the
allowable operating stress of 0.9 x S x T whenever the net axial stress is compressive in the
absence of bending stress, and an allowable operating stress of S x T when the net axial stress
is compressive in the presence of bending stress.
Section 4.6.2 requires the following:
1. The reduction of the axial expansion stress by the product of Poissons Ratio and the
pressure hoop stress.
2. The addition of the hoop stress to the axial stress.
The latter represents the calculation of stress intensity when the axial stress is compressive,
implying that there is no longitudinal pressure stress in buried pipe (the longitudinal pressure
thrust loads are transmitted directly to the soil). CAESAR II handles these requirements, in the
operating load case, in the following manner:
1. If FAC is 1.0, the piping system is fully restrained in the axial direction as described in
Section 4.6.2.1, and the operating stress is calculated as:
Sh + E a (T2 - T1) - v Sh < 0.9 S x T
2. If FAC is 0.001, the piping system is buried, but the soil supports are modeled (rather than
just assumed to be fully rigid). This setting removes the longitudinal pressure stress from the
equation (as described above), and takes bending stresses into consideration, as required
by Section 4.6.2.2.1. In this case, the operating stress is calculated as:
Sh +Fax/A + Sb - v Sh < S x T
3. If FAC is 0.0, the piping system is either not restrained, or is a freely spanning or above
ground portion of a restrained line, as described in Section 4.6.2.2.1. In this case, the
longitudinal pressure stress is restored, so this formula only comes into effect if the net axial
stress including pressure is compressive, in which case the operating stress is calculated
as:
Sh +Slp + Fax/A + Sb < S x T
4. CAESAR II does not do an operating code stress check for those elements for which the net
axial stress is longitudinal.
5. CAESAR II does not check for buckling, as required by Section 4.6.2.2.2.

Z662 reducer default values

The default SIF value is 1.0. The default flexibility factor value is 1.0.

NAVY 505
Calculate pressure stiffening using Navy 505
Pressure stiffening is not defined by default in the Code. You can include pressure stiffening on
bends in the analysis by including the parameter Use Pressure Stiffening in the setup file.

856

CAESAR II User's Guide

Technical Discussions
Flanged end modifications using Navy 505
Modifications resulting from flanged ends are permitted in the code providing the bend is not a
widely spaced miter.

Navy 505 girth butt welds default value

The default SIF value for a girth butt weld is 1.0. This is also Markls original basis for SIFs.

Calculate effective section modulus using Navy 505

Navy 505 has no provision for using an effective section modulus calculation at intersections.

Calculate stress intensification factors (SIF)s for intersections using Navy 505
In-plane and out-plane SIFs for intersections are the same.

Calculate liberal allowable using Navy 505

Navy 505 has no provision for a liberal allowable, that is, adding the difference between Sh and
Sl to the allowed expansion stress range. This feature from the control parameter spreadsheet
has no effect on 505 runs.

Calculate cold and the hot allowable using Navy 505

Navy 505 uses longitudinal weld joint efficiency (Eff) to compute the cold and the hot allowable
stress. The use of this parameter is subject to some speculation however.

Calculate the Navy 505 allowable for occasional loads

Navy 505 has no specific allowable for occasional loads. An occasional load factor (k), similar to
the B31.1 code is used, and the occasional allowable calculated from kSh.

Calculate the Navy 505 allowable stress limits

Use the equations below to calculate the stress allowables.
Expansion Allowable = [f(1.25Sc + 0.25Sh)]/Eff
Sustained Allowable = Sh/Eff
Occasional Allowable = k*Sh/Eff
Where:
f = Cyclic Reduction Factor
Eff = Joint Efficiency (Not explicitly in the Code)
Sc = Cold Allowable Stress
Sh = Hot Allowable Stress
k = Occasional Load Factor, Defaults to 1.15
Use the B31.3 SUS Case SIF Factor option to multiply the SIFs for sustained and
occasional loads to be more in line with the current B31.1 practice.

BS806
For BS806, the maximum hot stress case is considered to be the operating load case. Operating
load case allowables are only given as per BS806 when the creep rupture strength governs the
stress range allowable. See BS806 sect 4.11.2.

CAESAR II User's Guide

857

Technical Discussions
Stress Intensification Factors (SIFs) using BS806
BS806 SIFs printed are labeled fti and fto for bends, and Bi and Bo for intersections.

Calculate pressure stiffening using BS806

Pressure stiffening is not defined by default in the code. You can include pressure stiffening on
bends in the analysis by including the Use Pressure Stiffening option in the setup file.

Pad thickness using BS806

There is no limit in BS806 for the beneficial effect of the pad on an intersection. Most codes limit
the pad thickness to 1.5 times the header thickness. For BS806, CAESAR II does not limit the
pad thickness.

Flanged end modifications using BS806

The code permits modifications due to flanged ends for all bend types. This includes closely and
widely spaced mitered bends.

BS806 girth butt welds default value

The default SIF value for a girth butt weld is 1.0. This is also Markls original basis for SIFs.

Calculate the BS806 allowable stress limits

Use the equations below to calculate the stress allowables.
Expansion Allowable = lesser of (H)(Sc)+(H)(Sh) <or> (H)(Sc)+F
Sustained Allowable = Sy
Occasional Allowable = (Sy)(Occ)
Operating Allowable = S avg rupture at design temperature
Where:
H = Multiplication Factor 0.9 or 1.0 from CAESAR II
Sc = 0.2% Proof Stress at Room Temperature
Sh = 0.2% Proof Stress at Design Temperature
F = Mean Stress to Failure in Design Life at Design Temperature
Occ = Occasional Load Factor Default is 1.0

Calculate pressure at intersections using BS806

The pressure calculation at the intersections is made as required in BS806 4.8.5.1 Eq. (17). The
pressure stress as per Eq. (17) is computed and then combined with the bending and torsional
moment at each of the intersection ends 1, 2 and 3 respectively. The m factor is computed as
required with a value of n=1, in other words, for non-interacting intersections. BS806 does not
address reducers for SIF calculations.

Other BS806 Notes

When there is more than one thermal case to evaluate, read the following note carefully
concerning CAESAR II and the application of BS806.
Regarding BS806 4.11.3.1 paragraph 2, for sectionalized systems: CAESAR II only
makes the moment summation on a load case by load case basis, and does not take the largest
moments for an axis for any combination of load cases. The CAESAR II method is designed to
enable you to set up and combine the effects of each of the load transients that the piping

858

CAESAR II User's Guide

Technical Discussions
system undergoes. This method, for the most part is used in the B31/ASME piping codes. The
BS806 method is conservative in that it uses what is basically a shakedown approach and
computes a single worst case moment difference. The CAESAR II method satisfies the
shakedown theory but, also computes the moment range for each different load traversed. The
BS806 method of combining the maximum moment range is more conservative. The BS806
method also eliminates the need to know where on the pipe the stress is the highest. Use the
moment tables in Appendix F, to get the moment difference between any two load cases.
However, you cannot use the moment tables to get the maximum moment difference for any of
the three moment axes as requested by the sectionalized piping rules. To satisfying 4.11.3.1(a)
CAESAR II uses the moment difference between the cold and the hot case to compute the
stress.
You can only enter a single modulus of elasticity for a single element in each job. Different
elements can have different moduli of elasticity, but you cannot vary that modulus between load
cases in the same run. Also, you cannot use cold and a hot moduli of elasticity in the same run
at this time.
For BS806 in 4.11.5.2 the value of n is 1.0.for all branches of the non-interacting type. See the
fourth paragraph 4.11.4.2 for the definition of n for interacting branches.
The CAESAR II equation modeling of the BS806 SIF curves for bends displays in the following
plots.

Swedish Method 1 and 2

Calculate pressure stiffening using Swedish Method 1 and 2
Pressure stiffening is not defined by default in the code. You can include pressure stiffening on
bends in the analysis by including the parameter Use Pressure Stiffening in the setup file.

CAESAR II User's Guide

859

Technical Discussions
Flanged end modifications using Swedish Method 1 and 2
Modifications resulting from flanged ends are permitted in the code providing the bend is not a
widely spaced miter.

WRC329 recommendations
Swedish Method 1 cannot take advantage of the WRC 329 recommendations. WRC 329, if
requested, is ignored.

Calculate effective section modulus using Swedish Method 1

Swedish Method 1 has no provision for using an effective section modulus calculation at
intersections.

Calculate stress intensification factors (SIFs) for intersections using Swedish codes
Inplane and outplane SIFs for intersections are the same.
Swedish Code item 9 is dealt with as a US tapered transition. Also, items 10 and 11 in the
Swedish table 9:2 correspond to items 8 and 9 in the CAESAR II nomenclature.

Calculate the allowable stress limits using Method 1

Use the equations below to calculate the stress allowables.
Sber = lesser of Sh or F
Allowable = (Fac)(Sber) / 1.5
Where:
Sh = Yield Stress at Temperature
F = Creep Rupture Stress at Temperature
Fac = Usually 1.5 for Pre-stressed Pipe Use 1.35.

Calculate the allowable stress limits using Method 2

Expansion Allowable = f ( 1.17S1 + 0.17S2 )
Sustained Allowable = Sh
Occasional Allowable = Occ * Sh
Where:
f = Cyclic Reduction Factor
S1 = Lesser of Sc or 0.267Sy
S2 = Lesser of Sh or 0.367Sy
Sc = Allowable Stress at Room Temperature (Stn2)
Sh = Allowable Stress at Design Temperature (Stn1)
Sy = Ultimate Tensile Strength at Room Temperature
Occ = Occasional Load Factor Default is 1.2

Default girth butt welds for Swedish Method codes

If the weld is ground flush inside and out then the default SIF value for a girth butt weld is 1.0.

860

CAESAR II User's Guide

Technical Discussions
Pressure Variation in Swedish Codes
Swedish methods 1 and 2 Beta in the code is entered in the Pvar field on the Allowable Stress
Auxiliary dialog box. Enter the value for Pvar in percent, for example 10.0 for ten percent. If left
blank, the default is 10.0 percent.
Limits on the reasonable Betas that you may enter for the Swedish piping code is 10% to 25%.
Anything less than 0.1 is taken to be 10% and anything entered greater than 0.25 is taken to be
25%.

Pressure Stress in Swedish Codes

Include the Use PD/4t option in the setup file to tell CAESAR II to use the thin walled equations
for stress calculations for Swedish Method 1 code compliance.

Default occasional load factor for Swedish Method 2

The default value for the occasional load factor for Swedish Method 2 is 1.2.

Pad thickness using the Swedish Method 1 and 2

The pad thickness on an intersection reduces stresses up to pad thickness of 2.5 times the
header wall thickness.

Calculate reducers using the Swedish Method 1 and 2

The default value for the flexibility factor is 1.0 and the equation to calculate reducer SIFs is:
2.0 max or 0.5 + .01*alpha* SQRT(D2/t2)
Where D1 and t1 are the diameter and thickness of the large end and D2 and t2 are the
diameter and thickness of the small end.
Alpha is the reducer cone angle in degrees.
Where:
Alpha = atan[ 0.5 * (D1-D2) / (0.60 * length of sloped portion of the reducer) ]
Alpha is the slope of the reducer transition in degrees. If left blank, the value is set from an
estimated slope equal to the arc tangent times 1/2 the change in diameters times sixty percent
of the entered reducer length.

Other Swedish Notes

If you are using Swedish Method 1 to calculate the CAESAR II allowable, assume that the
SIGMA(tn) multiplier is 1.5 for piping that is not pre-stressed. If you use pre-stressed or cold
sprung pipe change Fac on the Allowable Stress Auxiliary field to 1.35 as per the Swedish
code.
Use the corroded section modulus for all stress calculations as per the definition of Di in the
Swedish code.

B31.1 (1967)
Calculate full-sized intersections for both the header and the branch using B31.1 (1967)
B31.1 (1967) uses ii = io for full-sized intersections for both the header and the branch, and for
reduced intersections uses ii = 0.75io + 0.25 for both the header and the branch.

CAESAR II User's Guide

861

Technical Discussions
Calculate pressure stiffening using B31.1 (1967)
Pressure stiffening is not defined by default in this code. You can include pressure stiffening on
bends in the analysis by including the Use Pressure Stiffening option in the setup file.

Flanged end modifications using B31.1 (1967)

Modifications resulting from flanged ends are permitted in the code providing the bend is not a
widely spaced miter.

B31.1 (1967) girth butt welds default value

The default SIF value for a girth butt weld is 1.0. This is also Markls original basis for SIFs.

Calculate socket welds using B31.1 (1967)

B31.1 (1967) makes no distinction between socket welds with undercut and socket welds
without undercut. Codes that do differentiate use 1.3 for socket welds with no undercut, and 2.1
for all others. Unless you are specifying a fillet weld leg length, use a default SIF value of 1.3.

Calculate the B31.1 (1967) allowable stress limits

Use the equations below to calculate the stress allowables.
Expansion Allowable = f [ (1.25/Eff)(Sc+Sh) - Sl ]
Sustained Allowable = Sh/Eff
Occasional Allowable = Sh/Eff * Occ
Where:
f = Cyclic Reduction Factor
Eff = Longitudinal Weld Joint Efficiency
Sc = Cold Allowable Stress
Sh = Hot Allowable Stress
Sl = Sustained Stress
Occ = Occasional Load Factor (Default is 1.15)

Stoomwezen

862

Sc

The yield stress at room temperature is referred to as Re in the code.

Sh1

The yield stress at design temperature is referred to as Re (um) in the

code.

Sh2

not used

Sh3

not used

FN

The average creep stress to produce one percent set is referred to as

Rrg in the code. F2 is the average creep tensile stress to produce
rupture and is referred to as Rmg in the code. F3 is the minimum creep
tensile stress to produce rupture and is referred to as Rmmin in the
code.

Eff

The cyclic reduction factor is referred to as Cf in the code.

Sy

The tensile strength at room temperature is referred to as Rm in the

code.

CAESAR II User's Guide

Technical Discussions
Fac

A constant whose value is either 0.44 or 0.5. For more information, refer
to Stoomwezen Section 5.2.

Pvar

The Cm coefficient in the code whose value is usually 1.0.

Calculating reducers using Stoomwezen

Stoomwezen does not mention reducers for Stress Intensification Factor (SIF) calculations.

RCC-M Subsection C and D

Calculate pressure stiffening using RCC-M Subsection C and D
Pressure stiffening is not defined by default in the code. You can enable pressure stiffening on
bends in the analysis by including the Use Pressure Stiffening option in the configuration file.

Flanged end modifications using RCC-M

Modifications resulting from flanged ends are permitted providing the bend is not a widely
spaced miter.

Calculate stress intensification factors (SIFs) for intersections using RCC-M

Inplane and outplane SIFs for intersections are the same for these piping codes.

Calculate SIF for branch connection using RCC-M

If you do not want to use the SIF for branch connections, found in Figure C3680.1 of the code
for welding and reinforced reduced tees, include the No Reduced SIF For RFT and WLT option
in the configuration file.

Calculate the RCC-M allowable stress limits

Use the equations below to calculate the stress allowables.
Expansion Allowable

= F (1.25Sc + 0.25Sh)+(Sh SSL)

Sustained Allowable

= Sh

Occasional Allowable = OCC * Sh

OCC defaults to 1.2 for Level
B
OCC defaults to 1.8 for Level
C
OCC defaults to 2.4 for Level
D
Where:
F = Cyclic Reduction Factor
Sc = Cold Allowable
Sh = Hot Allowable
SSL = Sustained Stress (PD/4t + 0.75i Mb/Z)
OCC = Occasional Factor from the CAESAR II configuration file

CAESAR II User's Guide

863

Technical Discussions
Calculate Pvar using RCC-M
Pvar represents the difference between the operating pressure and Pmax, which is used in eq
10. To satisfy equations 7 or 8 use iMc/Z stress as the maximum of either F(1.25Sc + 0.25Sh) or
F(1.25Sc + 0.25Sh) + (Sh - Ssl) where Ssl is the sustained stress as defined by equation 6.

Calculate reducers using RCC-M

For reducers RCC-M states that the flexibility factor is 1.0. The code also states that the SIF is:
The minimum of 2.0 or 0.5 + .01*alpha* SQRT(D2/t2)
Where:
D2 - Diameter of the Small End
t2 - Thickness of the Small End
Alpha is the reducer cone angle in degrees.
If not specified:
Alpha = atan[ 0.5 * (D1-D2) / (0.60 * length of the reducer element) ]
Alpha cannot exceed 60 and the larger of D1/t1 and D2/t2 cannot exceed 100.

CODETI
Modifications resulting from flanged ends using CODETI
Modifications resulting from flanged ends are permitted in the code for all bends, including
widely spaced miters.

Calculate stress intensification factors (SIFs) for intersections using CODETI

CODETI provides two separate equations to calculate the in-plane and out-plane SIFs for
intersections.

Calculate expansion stress using CODETI

CODETI provides an equation to calculate the expansion stress. This equation does not include
calculations for the longitudinal stress due to axial loads in the pipe. CAESAR II does not include
the F/A longitudinal stress component for stress in the expansion stress equation. You can
change this by setting Add F/A In Stress to the configuration file. The program adds the F/A
longitudinal stress component, by default, to the code stress component for all other stress
categories.

Calculate the CODETI allowable stress limits

Use the equations below to calculate the stress allowables.
Expansion Allowable = F [1.25 (Sc + Sh)] - Sl
Sustained Allowable = Sh
Occasional Allowable = OCC * Sh
Where:
F = Cyclic Reduction Factor
Sc = Cold Allowable Stress
Sh = Hot Allowable Stress
Sl = Sustained Stress
OCC = Occasional Load Factor from Configuration - Defaults to 1.15

864

CAESAR II User's Guide

Technical Discussions
Pressure stiffening using CODETI
Pressure stiffening of bends is automatically included as directed by the code. You can disable
pressure stiffening on bends in the analysis by excluding the Use Pressure Stiffening option in
the configuration file.

SIFs and flexibility coefficients using CODETI

Flexibility coefficients and SIFs are phased in for bends with an included angle between 15 and
45. The default value for bends smaller than 15 is 1.0.

SIFs and fabricated tees using CODETI

To determine the SIF of a fabricated tee having an angle of incidence other than 90divide it by
(sin a)3/2

CODETI recommended occasional load factor values

Recommended occasional load factor values are 1.15, 1.2, and 1.3, as per Code Table C3.3.
CODETI requires that when "the design temperature is such that the creep
characteristics are determinant, and if a section of the piping presents locally weaker
characteristics," the sum of the primary and secondary stresses must not exceed the value
flexibility factor (from Section C1.4.3). CAESAR II does not implement this requirement and is
left for you to verify.

CODETI reducer default values

The default SIF value is 1.0. The default flexibility factor value is 1.0.

Norwegian (TBK 5-6)

Calculate pressure stiffening using TBK 5-6
Pressure stiffening of bends is required for flexibility factors only and is done by default. You can
disable pressure stiffening by excluding the Use Pressure Stiffening option in the setup file.
You can enable pressure stiffening for stress intensification factors (SIF)s as well by including
the Use Pressure Stiffening option.

Expansion stress in TBK 5-6

Summing the longitudinal component F/A into the stress calculation is not defined by default in
the code. You can enable the axial force term in the code stress by including the Add F/A In
Stress option in the configuration file.
The code uses a circumferential weld strength factor (Z) when calculating longitudinal
pressure stress. Enter this value as Eff.

Calculate cyclic reduction factor using TBK 5-6

You can calculate the cyclic reduction factor using the following equation: F = (7000/Ne)0.2
Where
Ne = Number of Anticipated Cycles
F may be as high as 2.34 but not greater than 1.0 when Rm governs the expansion
stress allowable.

CAESAR II User's Guide

865

Technical Discussions
Calculate SIFs for bends and intersections using TBK 5-6
In-plane and out-of-plane SIFs for bends and intersections use the same stress equation.

Calculate the Norwegian allowable stress limits

Use the equations below to calculate the stress allowables.
Expansion Allowable = Sr + F2 - SSUS
Sustained Allowable = F2
Occasional Allowable = Occ * F2
Where:
Sr =

Minimum of 1.25F1 + 0.25F2; Fr * Rs - F2; or Fr (1.25 R1 + 0.25 R2) The latter for higher
temperatures; above 425C for austenitic stainless steel, or above 370C for other
materials.

F2 =

Hot Allowable Stress (entered in Sh)

OCC

Occasional Load Factor from the configuration file (defaults to 1.2)

SSUS = Sustained Stress

F1 =

Allowable Stress at Ambient (entered in Sc)

Fr =

Cyclic Reduction Factor

RS =

Permissible Extent of Stress for 7000 Cycles (from Code Table 10.2)

R1 =

Lesser of F1 and 0.267 RM

R2 =

Lesser of F2 and 0.367 RM

Rm =

Ultimate Tensile Strength at room temperature

Calculate SIFs using TBK 5-6

As of this writing, SIFs or fitting types 6 (branch with raised edge radius), 7 (branch on locally
thickened pipe), 13 (conical reducer with knuckles), and 14 (reducer without knuckles) have not
been implemented in CAESAR II so you must enter them manually. The Norwegian code offers
an alternative stress analysis method in Appendix D. However, CAESAR II does not implement
this method.

TBK 5-6 reducer default values

Calculate the SIFs by using the following equation: 2.0 max or 0.5 + .01*alpha* SQRT(D2/t2).
Where:
D2 - Diameter of the Small End
t2 - Thickness of the Small End
alpha - the slope of the reducer

TBK 5-6 flexibility factor default value

The default flexibility factor value is 1.0.

FDBR
FDBR is similar to B31.1 (see "B31.3 Code-Specific Settings" on page 78) in most requirements.
For more information, see B31.1 (see "B31.3 Code-Specific Settings" on page 78).

866

CAESAR II User's Guide

Technical Discussions
Calculate reinforced tees using FDBR
FDBR limits the pad thickness to a maximum equal to the header thickness. If you enter a pad
thickness that is greater than the header thickness the program overrides it with the header
thickness.

Calculate reduced intersections using FDBR

Treat intersections similar to ASME NC. For more information, see ASME NC.

Calculate butt welds using FDBR

Use either 1.0 or 1.8 depending on the thickness.

Calculate flexibility analysis using FDBR

You must use the Hot Modulus of Elasticity in your flexibility analysis.

Calculate the expansion case allowable stress using FDBR

Additionally, when computing the expansion case allowable stress you must include the ratio of
Ehot to Ecold. You can override the program computed ratio by manually entering a value for
Fac.

Calculate reducers using FDBR

The value for the flexibility factor is 1.0 and the equation to calculate reducer SIFs is:
2.0 max or 0.5 + .01*alpha* SQRT(D2/t2)
Where:
D1 - Diameter of the Large End
t1 - Thickness of the Large End
D2 - Diameter of the Small End
t2 - Thickness of the Small End
Alpha - Reducer Cone Angle in Degrees
When not entered:
Alpha = atan[ 0.5 * (D1-D2) / (0.60 * length of the reducer element) ]
Alpha cannot exceed 60 and the larger of D1/t1 and D2/t2 cannot exceed 100.

CAESAR II User's Guide

867

Technical Discussions

BS 7159
BS 7159 for Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic (FRP) pipe requires that you evaluate the operating
load case only. You must verify the following operating load case combined stress requirements
are met:
If Sx is tensile:

(OPE)
and
(OPE)
or
if Sx is compressive:

If Fx/A > P(Dm)/(4t) and it is compressive

(OPE)
and
(OPE)
Circumferential Stress
for straight pipes

for bends

for tees
Dm and t are always for the Run Pipe

Calculate the allowable stress limits using BS 7159

BS 7159 allowables are based on material design strain d. Therefore allowable stresses differ in
the axial and hoop directions by the ratio of the axial and hoop moduli of elasticity:
Sh = dEx
SHOOP = (dEx) (Eh/Ex)
Enter the ratio Eh/Ex in the allowable stress Eff field. If left blank, the value defaults to 1.0 for
isotropic materials.

868

CAESAR II User's Guide

Technical Discussions
Calculate pressure stiffening using BS 7159
Pressure stiffening of bends is done assuming the bends are fully pressurized up to the design
strain of the components. You can exclude pressure stiffening on bends by including the Use
Pressure Stiffening option in the configuration file.
BS 7159 does not by default add F/A into the stress calculation (unless this puts an element into
compression as described above). Use the Add F/A in Stress option to tell CAESAR II to
include the axial force term into the code stress.

Calculate the fatigue factor using BS 7159

The fatigue factor, Kn, is used inversely relative to the cyclic reduction factor in most codes, so
its value should be greater than or equal to 1.0 (allowable stress is divided by this number). K n is
calculated as:
Kn = 1.0 + 0.25 (As/n) (Log10(n) - 3.0)
Where:
As = Stress Range During Fatigue Cycle
n = Maximum Stress During Fatigue Cycle
n = Number of Cycles During Design Life
Enter Kn in the Cyclic Reduction Factor fields.
BS 7159 requires that you consider the thermal strain of the pipe material as being from 80% 85% below the true material strain due to insulation effects of the pipe wall. Enter this reduction
factor K in the allowable stress FAC field. If left blank, this value defaults to 1.0.

Calculate the stress intensity and flexibility factors of bends using BS 7159
The stress intensity and flexibility factors of bends vary based on laminate type:
All chopped strand mat (CSM) construction with internal and external surface tissue
reinforced layer.
CSM and woven roving (WR) construction with internal and external surface tissue
reinforced layer.
CSM and multi-filament roving construction with internal and external surface tissue
reinforced layer.
You can enter the laminate type in the Bend Type field, or set the type default on the
Special Execution Parameter dialog box.

Calculate SIFs for Reducers using BS 7159

BS 7159 does not mention reducers for SIF calculations.

UKOOA
The United Kingdom Offshore Operators Association (UKOOA) Specification and
Recommended Practice for the Use of GRP Piping Offshore is similar in many respects to the
BS 7159, except that it simplifies the calculation requirements in exchange for imposing more
conservatism on the piping operating conditions. Rather than explicitly calculating a combined
stress, the specification defines an idealized envelope of combinations of axial and hoop
stresses which cause the equivalent stress to reach failure. This curve represents the plot of:
(x / -all) + hoop / hoop-all) - [x hoop / (x-all hoop-all)] 1.0
2

CAESAR II User's Guide

869

Technical Discussions
Where:
x-all = Allowable Stress Axial
hoop-all = Allowable Stress Hoop
The specification conservatively limits you to that part of the curve falling under the line between
x-all also known as a(0:1) and the intersection point on the curve where hoop is twice x a
natural condition for a pipe loaded only with pressure. An implicit modification to this
requirement is the fact that pressure stresses are given a factor of safety typically equal to 2/3
while other stresses are not. This gives an explicit requirement of:
Pdes f1 f2 f3 LTHP
Where:
Pdes = Allowable Design Pressure
f1 = Factor of Safety for 97.5% Lower Confidence Limit Usually 0.85
f2 = System Factor of Safety Usually 0.67
f3 = Ratio of Residual Allowable After Mechanical Loads
b
= 1 - (2 sa ) / (r f1 LTHS)
b
sa = Axial Bending Stress Due to Mechanical Loads
r = a(0:1) / a(2:1)
a(0:1) = Long Term Axial Tensile Strength In Absence Of Pressure Load
a(2:1) = Long Term Axial Tensile Strength Under Pressure Loading Only
LTHS = Long Term Hydrostatic Strength Hoop Stress Allowable
LTHP = Long Term Hydrostatic Pressure Allowable
This is implemented in the CAESAR II using the following equations:
Code Stress
a (f2 /r) + PDm / (4t)
b

Code Allowable

(f1 f2 LTHS) / 2.0

Where:
P = Design Pressure
Dm = Pipe Mean Diameter
t = Pipe Wall Thickness
On the Allowable auxiliary dialog box, the product of f1 and LTHS is entered in the SH1, SH2,
SH3 fields; r is entered in the F1, F2, F3 fields; f2 is entered in the Eff field; and the temperature
reduction factor K (described for BS 7159 above) is entered in the Fac field if omitted, it defaults
to 1.0. K- and i-factors for bends and tees, and bending and pressure stresses are calculated
as described for the BS 7159.

Calculate SIFs using UKOOA

UKOOA refers to BS 7159 for SIF calculations.

IGE/TD/12
CAESAR II performs calculations as per the IGE/TD/12 Edition 2 code requirements. The
complexity of these requirements far exceeds what can be described here. We recommend that
you acquire a copy of this code from the International Institution of Gas Engineers & Managers.

870

CAESAR II User's Guide

Technical Discussions

Det Norske Veritas (DNV)

This code is entitled "Rules for Submarine Pipeline Systems." The Allowable Stress Design
(ASD) provisions of the code are implemented here, rather than the limit state requirements.

Calculate the Stress Intensification Factors (SIFs), flexibility factors, or section moduli
using DNV
DNV does not provide any guidance on calculating SIFs, flexibility factors, or section moduli. An
informal poll of DNV experts and users was taken and the decision was made to use the B31.1
Power Code. Make all stress calculations using the corroded wall thickness.

Calculate the expansion load case using DNV

There is no provision for a code check for the expansion load case, so no expansion cases are
generated under this code.

Calculate the operating, sustained, or occasional load cases using DNV

Treat the operating, sustained, or occasional load cases identically. For these load cases, you
must perform three stress calculations with different allowable limits. The stress calculation
causing the highest percent of allowable is reported in the stress report, along with its specific
allowable. These stress checks are:
Hoop Stress:

Sh ns SMYS

Hoop Stress:

Sh nu SMTS

Longitudinal Stress:

SL n SMYS

Equivalent Stress:

Se n SMYS

Where:
Sh = (Pi Pe) (D t) / 2t
Pi = Internal Pressure
Pe = External Pressure
D = Outer Diameter
t = Wall Thickness
ns = Hoop Stress Yielding Usage Factor; see Tables C1 and C2 of the DNV Code
SMYS = Specified Minimum Yield Strength at Operating Temperature
nu = Hoop Stress Bursting Usage Factor; see Tables C1 and C2 of the DNV Code
SMTS = Specified Minimum Tensile Strength at Operating Temperature
SL = Maximum Longitudinal Stress
n = Equivalent Stress Usage Factor; see Table C4 of the DNV Code
2
2
2 1/2
Se = [Sh + SL - ShSL + 3t ]
t = Torsional Stress

Calculate reducers using DNV

DNV does not mention reducers for SIF calculations.

CAESAR II User's Guide

871

Technical Discussions

EN-13480
Flexibility calculations using EN-13480
EN-13480 uses the hot modulus of elasticity in the flexibility calculations (Sect 12.1.7.2). The
expansion allowable stress is subsequently modified by the ratio of Eh/Ec.

Calculate the flexibility stresses using EN-13480

EN-13480 provides two methods of determining the flexibility stresses. The CAESAR II default
implementation is to use Sections 12.3.2 through 12.3.6, which perform an SRSS of the bending
moments with a single SIF. As an alternative, the flexibility stresses can be determined by
distinguishing between in and out of plane bending, using distinct SIFs, as discussed in Section
12.3.1. The option to implement this alternative can be found on the "SIF & Stress" tab of the
configuration module.

EN-13480 pressure stiffening

EN-13480 does not consider pressure stiffening effects on bends.

GPTC/Z380
The recommendations of this code apply only to above ground steel piping through 450F.
GPTC/Z380 and B31.8, prior to 2004, recommendations are similar in many ways. The
differences between GPTC/Z380 and B31.8 display below:
The longitudinal joint factors vary slightly between B31.8 Table 841.115a and GPTC/Z380
Table 192.113.
The design factor in B31.8 Table 841.114b provides more detail than GPTC/Z380 Table
192.11.
The allowable for the combined stress calculation in GPTC/Z380 Section 192.159-1.5e
includes a "0.75" factor, while B31.8 Section 833.4 does not.
GPTC/Z380 uses a single stress intensification factor (SIF) for both in-plane and
out-of-plane loads, while B31.8 distinguishes between in-plane and out-of-plane SIFs.

ISO-14692
ISO-14692 addresses the analysis of Fiber Reinforced Plastic (FRP) pipe. Qualification is based
on the comparison of actual stresses, hoop and axial, to a failure envelope. See BS 7159 (on
page 867) for the CAESAR II approach for FRP pipe analysis.

HPGSL
Calculate stress intensification factors (SIFs) for intersections using HPGSL
HPGSL provides two separate equations to calculate the in-plane and out-plane stress
intensification factors (SIFs) for intersections.

Calculate expansion stress using HPGSL

HPGSL provides an equation to calculate the expansion stress. This equation does not include
calculations for the longitudinal stress due to axial loads in the pipe. CAESAR II does not include
the F/A longitudinal stress component for stress in the expansion stress equation. You can
change this by including the Add F/A In Stress option in the configuration file. The program

872

CAESAR II User's Guide

Technical Discussions
adds the F/A longitudinal stress component, by default, to the code stress component for all
other stress categories.

HPGSL girth butt welds default value

The default SIF value for a girth butt weld is 1.0. This is also Markls original basis for SIFs.

Calculate socket welds using HPGSL

HPGSL makes no distinction between socket welds with undercut and socket welds without
undercut. Codes that do differentiate use 1.3 for socket welds with no undercut, and 2.1 for all
others. Unless you are specifying a fillet weld leg length, use a default SIF value of 1.3.

Calculate the HPGSL stress allowables

Use the equations below to calculate the stress allowables.
Expansion Allowable

f [ (1.25/Eff)(Sc+Sh) - Sl ]

Sustained Allowable

Sh/Eff

Occasional Allowable =

(Occ)*Sh/Eff

Where:
f = Cyclic Reduction Factor
Eff = Weld Joint Efficiency Minimum Wall Thickness Only
Sc = Cold Allowable Stress
Sh = Hot Allowable Stress
SI = Sustained Stress
Occ = Occasional Load Factor Default is 1.33
When specifying a corrosion allowance, do not use a corrosion value in the sustained
and occasional stress calculations.

HPGSL reducer default values

The default SIF value is 1.0. The default Flexibility Factor value is 1.0.

HPGSL Pressure effects

Pressure effects on miters are allowed in this piping code.

JPI
Calculate stress intensification factors (SIFs) for intersections using JPI
JPI provides two separate equations to calculate the in-plane and out-plane SIFs for
intersections.

Calculate expansion stress using JPI

JPI provides an equation to calculate the expansion stress. However, this equation does not
include calculations for the longitudinal stress due to axial loads in the pipe. CAESAR II does
not include the F/A longitudinal stress component for stress in the expansion stress equation.
The program adds the F/A longitudinal stress component, by default, to the code stress
component for all other stress categories.

CAESAR II User's Guide

873

Technical Discussions
JPI girth butt welds default value
The default SIF value for a girth butt weld is 1.0. This is also Markls original basis for SIFs.

Calculate socket welds using JPI

JPI makes no distinction between socket welds with undercut and socket welds without
undercut. Unless you are specifying a fillet weld leg length, use a default SIF value of 1.3.

Calculate the JPI Stress allowables

Expansion Allowable

= f [ (1.25/Eff)(Sc+Sh) - Sl
]

Sustained Allowable

= Sh/Eff

Occasional Allowable = (Occ)*Sh/Eff

Where:
f = Cyclic Reduction Factor
Eff = Weld Joint Efficiency minimum wall thickness only
Sc = Cold Allowable Stress
Sh = Hot Allowable Stress
SI = Sustained Stress
Occ = Occasional Load Factor Default - 1.33
When specifying a corrosion allowance, do not use a corrosion value in the sustained
and occasional stress calculations.

JPl reducer default value

The default SIF value is 1.0. The default Flexibility Factor value is 1.0.

Pressure effects and JPl

Pressure effects on miters are allowed in this piping code.

Local Coordinates
Many analytical models in engineering are based upon being able to define a real physical
object mathematically. This is accomplished by mapping the dimensions of the physical object
into a similar mathematical space. Mathematical space is usually assumed to be either
two-dimensional or three-dimensional. For piping analysis, the three dimensional space is
necessary, because almost all piping systems are three dimensional in nature.

874

CAESAR II User's Guide

Technical Discussions
Two typical three-dimensional mathematical systems are shown below in Figure 1. Both of these
systems are "Cartesian Coordinate Systems". Each axis in these systems is perpendicular to all
other axes.

Figure 1 Typical Cartesian Coordinate Systems

In addition, for these Cartesian coordinate systems the "right hand rule" is used to define
positive rotation about each axis and the relationship, or ordering, between the axes. Before
illustrating the "right hand rule", there are several traits of the systems in Figure 1 that should be
noted.
Each axis can be thought of as a "number line", where the zero point is the point where all of
the axes intersect. While only the positive side of each axis is shown in Figure 1, each axis
has a negative side as well.
The direction of the arrow heads indicates the positive direction of each axis.
In Figure 1, the X-axis has one arrowhead, the Y-axis has two arrowheads, and the Z-axis
has three arrowheads. The circular arcs labeled RX, RY, and RZ define the direction of
positive rotation about each axis. (This point will be dis\-cussed later.)
Any point in space can be mapped to these coordinate systems by using its position along
the number lines. For example, a point 5 units down the X-axis would have a coordinate of
(5.0, 0.0, 0.0). A point 5 units down the X-axis and 6 units down the Y-axis would have a
coordinate of (5.0, 6.0, 0.0).
Notice that if the system on the right side of Figure 1 is rotated a positive 90-degrees about
the X-axis, the result is the system on the left side of Figure 1.
The coordinate system on the left side of Figure 1 is the default CAESAR II global coordinate
system. In this system, the X and Z axes define the horizontal plane, and the Y-axis is vertical.
The other coordinate system in Figure 1 can be obtained in CAESAR II by selecting the
Z-axis Vertical option, discussed later in this section.
All further discussion in this section targets this default coordinate system, unless other\-wise
noted.

Other Global Coordinate Systems

There are other types of coordinate systems that can be used to mathematically map a physical
object.
A Polar coordinate system maps points in a two dimensional space using a radius and a
rotation angle (r, theta).

CAESAR II User's Guide

875

Technical Discussions

A Cylindrical coordinate system maps points using a radius, a rotation angle, and an
elevation (r, theta, z). The origin in this system could be considered the center of the bottom
of a cylinder. Cylindrical coordinates are convenient to use when there is an axis of
symmetry in the model.
A Spherical coordinate system maps points using a radius and two rotation angles (r, theta,
phi). The origin in this system could be considered the center of a sphere. Spherical
coordinates are convenient to use when there is a point which is the center of symmetry in
the model.
Typically, none of these coordinate systems are easily used to map piping systems. Most piping
software deals exclusively with the Cartesian coordinate system.

The Right Hand Rule

In the Cartesian coordinate system, each axis has a positive and a negative side, as previously
mentioned. Translations, straight-line movement, can be defined as movement along these
axes. Rotation can also occur around these axes, as illustrated by the arcs in Figure 1.
A standard rule must be applied in order to define the direction of positive rotation about these
axes. The right hand rule is used as the standard. Put the thumb of your right hand along the
axis, in the positive direction of the axis. The direction your fingers curl is positive rotation about
that axis. This is best illustrated in Figure 2.

Figure 2 The Right Hand Rule

The right hand rule can also be used to describe the relationship between the three axes.
Mathematically, the relationship between the axes can be defined as:
X cross Y = Z (EQ 1)
Y cross Z = X (EQ 2)
Z cross X = Y (EQ 3)
Where cross indicates the vector cross product.

876

CAESAR II User's Guide

Technical Discussions
Physically, using your right hand, what do the above equations mean? This question is best
answered by Figure 3.

Figure 3 The Right Hand Rule - Continued

The left pane of Figure 3 corresponds to vector equation 3 above. Similarly, the center pane in
Figure 3 also corresponds to vector equation 3 above. The right pane in Figure 3 corresponds to
vector equation 2 above. All panes of Figure 3 refer to the left hand image of Figure 1.
Straight-line movement along any axis can be therefore described as positive or negative,
depending on the direction of motion. This straight-line movement accounts for three of the six
degrees of freedom associated with a given node point in a model.
Analysis of a model requires the discretization of the model into a set of nodes and
elements. Depending on the analysis and the element used, the associated nodes have certain
degrees of freedom. For pipe stress analysis, using 3D Beam Elements, each node in the model
has six degrees of freedom.
The other three degrees of freedom are the rotations about each of the axes. In accordance with
the right hand rule, positive rotation about each axis is defined as shown in Figures 1 and 2.
When modeling a system mathematically, there are two coordinate systems to deal with, a
global or model coordinate system and a local (or elemental) coordinate system. The global or
model coordinate system is fixed, and can be considered a constant characteristic of the
analysis at hand. The local coordinate system is defined on an elemental basis. Each element
defines its own local coordinate system. The orientation of these local systems varies with the
orientation of the elements.
An important concept here is the fact that local coordinate systems are defined by, and
therefore associated with, elements. Local coordinate systems are not defined for, or associated
with, nodes.

CAESAR II User's Guide

877

Technical Discussions

Pipe Stress Analysis Coordinate Systems

As noted previously, most pipe stress analysis computer programs use the 3D Beam Element.
This element can be described as an infinitely thin stick, spanning between two nodes. Each of
these nodes has six degrees of freedom three translations and three rotations. Piping systems
models are constructed by defining a series of elements, connected by nodes. These pipe
elements are typically defined as vectors, in terms of delta dimensions referenced to a global
coordinate system. Several example pipe elements are shown below in Figure 4.

Figure 4 - Example Pipe Elements

For most pipe stress applications, there are two dominant global coordinate systems to choose
from, either Y-axis or Z-axis up. These two systems are depicted in Figure 1. As previously
noted, the global coordinate system is fixed. All nodal coordinates and element delta dimensions
are referenced to this global coordinate system. For example, in Figure 4 above, the pipe
element spanning from node 10 to node 20 is defined with a DX (delta X) dimension of 5 ft.
Additionally, node 20 has a global X coordinate 5 ft. greater that the global X coordinate of node
10. Similar statements could be made about the other two elements in Figure 4, only these
elements are aligned with the global Y and global Z axes.
In CAESAR II, you can choose between the two global coordinate systems shown in Figure 1.
By default, the CAESAR II global coordinate system puts the global Y-axis vertical, as shown
in the left half of Figure 1, and in Figure 4. There are two ways to change the CAESAR II global
coordinate system so that the global Z-axis is vertical.

878

CAESAR II User's Guide

Technical Discussions
The first method is to modify the configuration file in the current data directory. This can be
accomplished from the Main Menu, by selecting Tools>Configure Setup. After the
configuration dialog appears, select the Geometry tab, as shown in Figure 5. On this tab, click
the Z-axis Vertical check box, as shown in the figure below.

Figure 5 - Geometry Configuration

After the Z axis Vertical check box is selected, the CAESAR II global coordinate system is in
accordance with the right half of Figure 1. This configuration affects all new jobs created in this
data directory. Existing jobs with the Y-axis vertical are not affected by this configuration
change.

CAESAR II User's Guide

879

Technical Discussions
The second method to obtain a global coordinate system with the Z-axis vertical is to switch
coordinate systems from within the input for the specific job at hand. This can be accomplished
from the Special Execution Parameters dialog box of the piping input processor. This dialog
box is shown below in Figure 6.

Figure 6 - Special Execution Parameters Dialog

Checking the Z Axis Vertical check box immediately changes the orientation of the global
coordinate system axis, with corresponding updates to the element delta dimensions. However,
the relative positions and lengths of the elements are not affected by this switch.

880

CAESAR II User's Guide

Technical Discussions

Defining a Model
Using the CAESAR II default coordinate system (Y axis vertical), and assuming the system
shown below in Figure 7, the corresponding element definitions are given in Figure 8.

Figure 7 - Sample Piping Model

Figure 8 - Sample Piping Model Element Definitions

For this sample model, most of the element definitions are very simple:
The first element, 10-20, is defined as 5 ft. in the positive global X direction. This element
starts at the model origin.
The second element, 20-30, is defined as 5 ft. in the positive global Y direction. This
element begins at the end of the first element, because both elements share node 20.
The third element, 30-40, is defined as 5 ft. in the negative global Z direction. Note in Figure
8 that the delta dimension for this element is a negative number. This is necessary to define
the element in a negative direction.
The fourth element, 40-50, runs in both the positive global X and negative global Y
directions. This element slopes to the right and down, and is defined with delta dimensions
in both the DX and DY fields. Notice that these delta dimensions are equal in magnitude;
therefore this element slopes at 45 degrees.

CAESAR II User's Guide

881

Technical Discussions
Continuing the model, from node 50, along the same 45 degree slope can be rather tedious,
because most often only the overall element length is known, not its components in the global
directions. In CAESAR II this can be best accomplished by activating the Edit Deltas dialog
box, shown below in Figure 9. The Edit Deltas dialog box can be activated by clicking the
Browse button next to the DX field. Using this dialog box, you can enter the element length, and
CAESAR II determines the appropriate components in the global directions, based on the
current direction cosines, which default to those of the preceding element.

Figure 9 - Edit Deltas Dialog Box

CAESAR II provides an additional coding tool, for longer runs of pipe with uniform node spacing.
Element Break enables you to break an element into equal length segments, given a node
number increment.
In the preceding example, the model is defined solely using delta dimensions. By constructing
the model in this fashion, it is assumed that the world coordinates of node 10 the first node in
the model are at (0., 0., 0.). This assumption is acceptable in all but one instance, when
environmental loads are applied to the model. In this instance, the elevation of the model is
critical to the determination of the environmental loads, and therefore must be specified. In
CAESAR II, the specification of the starting node of the model can be accomplished using the
Alt+G key combination, and all nodal coordinates are displayed as absolute coordinates.
Regardless of whether or not the global coordinates of the starting node are specified, the
relative geometry of the model will plot the same.
After a model has been defined, there are a number of operations that can be performed on the
entire system, or on any section of the system. These operations include:
Translating the model: translation can be accomplished by specifying the global coordinates
of the starting node of the model. If the model consists of disconnected segments,
CAESAR II requests the coordinates of the starting node of each segment.

882

CAESAR II User's Guide

Technical Discussions

Rotating the model: by using the List processor or by clicking List Input
. The List
processor presents the model in a spreadsheet, format, as shown in Figure 8. Options in this
processor allow you to rotate the model about any of the three global axes, or a specified
amount. For example, if the model shown in Figures 7 and 8 is rotated a negative -90
degrees about the global Y-axis, the result is as shown in Figure 10.

Figure 10 - Example of Model Rotation

Duplicating the model: duplication can also be accomplished by using the List processor.
The entire model, or any sub-section of the model, can be duplicated.

Using Local Coordinates

When analyzing a piping system, there are a number of items that must be checked and
verified. These items include:
Operating Loads On Restraints & Terminal Points

Maximum Operating Displacements

Hanger design results

Code stresses for code cases

Equipment Evaluations

Vessel Nozzle Evaluation

Expansion joint evaluation

Restraint loads and displacements are checked in the global coordinate system. This is
necessary because restraint loads and displacements are nodal quantities. Element loads and
stresses are most often evaluated in their local coordinate system. A good example illustrating
the use of a local (element) coordinate system is the free body diagram, of forces and moments.
The forces and moments in this free body diagram remain the same, regardless of the position
of the element in the global coordinate system. Note however, that each element has its own
local coordinate system. Furthermore, the local coordinate system of one element may be
different from the local coordinate system of a different element.
While the global coordinate system is typically referred to using the capital letters X, Y, and Z,
local coordinate systems use a variety of nomenclature. In almost all cases, local coordinate
systems use lower case letters. Typical local coordinate system axes are: xyz, abc, and uvw.
CAESAR II uses xyz to denote the local element coordinate system.
The local coordinate system for an element is related to the global coordinate system through a
rule. There may be a number of such rules, depending on the type of element. In CAESAR II,
the following rules are used to define the local coordinate systems of the piping elements in a
model.

CAESAR II User's Guide

883

Technical Discussions

CAESAR II Local Coordinate Definitions

Rule 1 - Straight Pipe -- For straight pipe elements, the local X-axis always points from the
"From Node" to the "To Node". You can find the local Y-axis by using the vector cross product of
the local X-axis along with the global Y-axis.

Apply the "Right Hand Rule" to the local Y-axis

1. Lay your right hand on the pipe, with the wrist at the From Node, and the fingers pointing to
the To Node.
2. Align or rotate your hand so that the global Y-axis points perpendicularly out from the palm.
The thumb is now aligned with the local Y-axis for this element.

Find the local Z-axis

Find the local Z-axis by using the vector cross product of the local x and local y axes.
An exception to this rule is the case of a vertical element. In this case, the local X-axis is still
aligned in the From - To direction. However, you cannot cross a vertical element into global Y,
so the local Y-axis was arbitrarily assigned to align with the global X-axis.
The straight elements of the model in Figure 7 are reproduced below in Figure 11, along with
their local coordinate systems. Notice that each of these straight elements has its own local
coordinate system, and that in this model, they are all aligned differently.

Figure 11 - Local Coordinate Systems for Straight Elements (1)

In Figure 11, the positive direction of the local X-axis for each element is defined according to
the From - To definition of the element. For example, the local X-axis of element 10-20 is
aligned with the positive global X-axis, because that is the direction defined in moving from node
10 to node 20. The local X-axis of element 30-40 is aligned with the negative global Z-axis,
because that is the direction defined in moving from node 30 to node 40. Figure 11 should be
studied to ensure a good understanding of how the local element coordinate system can be
defined based on the definition of the element, especially with regard to the skewed element
40-50.

884

CAESAR II User's Guide

Technical Discussions
As an additional example, the local element coordinate systems for the rotated system of Figure
10 are shown below in Figure 12.

Figure 12 - Local Coordinate Systems for Straight Elements (2)

Rule 2 - Bend Elements -- For the near weld line of bend elements, the local X-axis is directed
along the incoming tangent, in the From To direction. The local Z-axis points to the center of
the circle described by the bend. For the far weld line of bend elements, the local X-axis is
directed along the outgoing tangent, in the From To direction. The local Z-axis points to the
center of the circle described by the bend. In both cases, the local Y-axis can be found by
applying the right hand rule. The local coordinate system for the bends in the example model of
Figure 7 display below in Figure 13.

Figure 13 Local Coordinate Systems for Bend Elements

Rule 3 - Tee Elements -- For tees, there is no element or fitting as there is in a CAD application.
Rather designating a node as a tee simply applies code defined SIFs at that point, for the three
elements framing into the tee node. As usual, the local X-axis is defined by the element From To direction. The local Y-axis coincides with the line that defines the in-plane plane of the tee. In
other words, the local Y-axis is perpendicular to the plane of the three tee elements. The
positive direction of the local Y-axis is found by vectorally crossing the local X-axis of the header

CAESAR II User's Guide

885

Technical Discussions
element with the local X-axis of the branch, and then reversing the sign direction. In those cases
where the two header elements have opposite local x axes, CAESAR II chooses the first one
that it finds. The local Z-axis can then be determined using the right-hand rule.
The local Z-axis coincides with the out-of-plane axis of the tee, for each element. Examples of
local coordinates for elements framing into tees are depicted below in Figure 14.

Figure 14 - Local Coordinate Systems for Tee Elements

Applications Using Global and Local Coordinates

Global coordinates are used most often when dealing with piping models. Global coordinates
are used to define the model and review nodal results. Even though element stresses are
defined in terms of axial and bending directions, which are local coordinate system terms, local
coordinates are rarely used. A typical piping analysis scenario is:
A decision is made as to how the global coordinate system for the piping model will align
with the plant coordinate system. Usually, one of the two horizontal axes is selected to
correspond to the North direction. However, if this results in a majority of the system being
skewed with respect to the global axes, you should consider realigning the model. It is best
to have most of the system aligned with one of the global coordinate axes.
The piping system is then assigned node points at locations where: there is a change in
direction, a support, a terminal point, a point of cross section change, a point of load
application, or any other point of interest.
After you assign the nodes, define the piping model using the delta dimensions as dictated by
the orientation of the global coordinate system. Use Break, List, Rotate, Duplicate, and the
Direction Cosines to construct the model.
After verifying the input, confirming the load cases, and analyzing the model, output review
commences.
Output review involves checking various output reports to ensure the system responds within
certain limits. These checks include:

886

CAESAR II User's Guide

Technical Discussions

Checking that operating displacements make sense and are within any operational limits to
avoid ponding. Displacements, being nodal quantities, are reviewed in the global coordinate
system. There is no local coordinate system associated with nodes. For the model defined in
Figures 7 and 8, the operating displacements are shown in Figure 15 below.

Figure 15 - Operating Displacements

This report shows the movements of all of the nodes in the model, in each of the six degrees
of freedom, in the global coordinate system.

CAESAR II User's Guide

887

Technical Discussions

Checking that the restraint loads for the structural load cases are reasonable. This includes
ensuring that the restraints can be designed to carry the computed load. Restraints being
nodal quantities are reviewed in the global coordinate system. There is no local coordinate
system associated with restraints. For the model defined in Figures 7 and 8, the operating /
sustained restraint summary is shown in Figure 16 below.

Figure 16 - Operating / Sustained Restraint Summary

This report shows the loads on the anchor at 10 and the nozzle at 50, for all six degrees of
freedom, for the two selected structural load cases, in the global coordinate system.

888

CAESAR II User's Guide

Technical Discussions

Checking the code cases for codes stress compliance. Typically the code stress is
compared to the allowable stress for each node on each element. Occasionally, when there
is an overstress condition, a review of axial, bending, and torsion stresses are necessary.
These stresses axial, bending, and torsion are local coordinate system terms, and therefore
relate to the elements local coordinate system. For the model defined in Figures 7 and 8, a
portion of the sustained stress report is shown in Figure 17 below.

Figure 17 - Sustained Stress Report

These reports provide sufficient information to evaluate the pipe elements in the model, to
ensure proper behavior and code compliance. However, the analysts job is not complete, loads
and stress must still be evaluated at terminal points, where the piping system connects to
equipment or vessel nozzles. Depending on the type of equipment or nozzle, various
procedures and codes are applied. These include API-610 for pumps and WRC-107 for vessel
nozzles, as well as others. In the case of API-610 and WRC-107, a local coordinate system
specific to these codes is employed. These local coordinate systems are defined in terms of the
pump or nozzle/vessel geometry.

CAESAR II User's Guide

889

Technical Discussions
When the equipment coordinate system aligns with the global coordinate system of the piping
model, the nozzle loads from the restraint report (node 50 in Figure 14) can be used in the
nozzle evaluation. However, when the equipment nozzle is skewed as it is in the case of node
50 in Figure 14, the application of the loads is more difficult. In this case, it is best to use the
loads from the elements force/moment report, in local coordinates. The only thing to remember
here is to flip the signs on all of the forces and moments, because the element force/moment
report shows the loads on the pipe element, not on the nozzle. For the element FROM node 40
to node 50, the local element force/moment report is shown in Figure 18 below.

Figure 18 - Local Element Force/Moment Report

Because the correlation between the pipe models coordinate systems and those of equipment
codes API and WRC are often times tedious and error prone, CAESAR II provides an option in
its equipment modules to acquire the loads on the nozzle directly from the static output. Select
the node and the load case; CAESAR II acquires the loads and rotates them into the proper
coordinate system as defined by the applicable equipment code. You really do not have to be
concerned with the transformation from global to local coordinates, even for skewed
components. This is illustrated below, in Figure 19. In this figure, the API-610 nozzle loads at
node 50 have been acquired by clicking Select Loads Job and Load Case.

890

CAESAR II User's Guide

Technical Discussions
Notice that the loads shown in Figure 19 are in the CAESAR II global coordinate system. This
can be easily verified by comparing these values to those in the restraint summary for the
operating load case as shown previously in Figure 16.

Figure 19 - API-610 Nozzle Load Acquisition

In the corresponding output report for this API-610 analysis, both the global and API local loads
are reported. This is shown below in Figure 20.

CAESAR II User's Guide

891

Technical Discussions

Figure 20 - API-610 Nozzle Output Report Segments

Notice in Figure 20, that each report segment indicates which values are related to the global
coordinate system and which are related to the local API coordinate system.

Restraint Data in Local Element Coordinates

A new report Local Restraint Loads (see "Restraint Report - In Local Element Coordinates" on
page 490), is available to assist in dealing with restraint loads on skewed nozzles. This report
uses the local coordinate system of the "defining" element (because restraints do not have a
local coordinate system). If the restraint is defined on the straight element to which the restraint
is attached, then the proper orientation of local loads is reported in the Local Restraint Loads
report. However, if the restraint was defined on some other element, or on the mid-side node of
a bend, then the loads reported in the Local Restraint Loads report are associated with the
local coordinate system of that defining element.

Transforming from Global to Local

Converting or transforming values from the CAESAR II Global Coordinate System to a local
coordinate system involves applying a number of rotation matrices to the global values. Matrix
mathematics is not a trivial task, and you must exercise the utmost care to arrive at the correct
result. To complete this task, visit the CAESAR II Downloads page at
http://www.intergraph.com/products/ppm/caesarii/downloads.aspx and click CAESAR II "Global
to Local" to download the GlbtoLocal utility, glbtoLoca. zip. For more information, see the
July 2001 issue of our Mechanical Engineering News. For an example on how to use the
GlbtoLocal utility using the nozzle at node 50 see below.
The element 40-50 is defined with the delta coordinates of:
DX = 3 ft. (6.426 in)
DY = -3 ft. (6.426 in)
DZ = 0.0
The global restraint forces at node 50, in global coordinates, for the operating case are:
FX = 323 MX = -953
FY = 4 MY = -9
FZ = -271 MZ = -548

892

CAESAR II User's Guide

Technical Discussions
Using this data as input to GlbtoLocal, the utility yields the forces on the restraint in the
elements local coordinate system. This is shown in Figure 21 below.

Example Global to Local Transformation

Compare the set of values labeled Rotated Displacements / Load Vector with the Local
Element Force / Moment report, as shown above. A change in sign is necessary because the
Restraint report shows loads acting on the restraint, while the Element report shows loads
acting on the element.

Frequently Asked Questions

What are global coordinates?
Global coordinates defines the mapping of a physical system into a mathematical system. For a
given model, the global coordinate system is fixed for the entire model. In CAESAR II, there are
two alternative global coordinate systems that you can apply to a model. Both coordinate
systems follow the Right Hand Rule and use X, Y, and Z as mutually perpendicular axes. The
first uses the Y-axis vertical, while the second uses the Z axis Z-axis as vertical.
What are local coordinates?
Local coordinates represent the mapping for a single element. Use Local coordinate systems to
define positive and negative directions and loads on elements. Typically, Local Coordinate
systems are aligned with the elements, therefore vary throughout the model.
What coordinates are used to plot and view the model?
Use the global coordinate system of the model to generate plots of the model. This is necessary
because each element has its own local coordinate system, and these local systems vary from
element to element. Local coordinate systems are an element property, not a system property.
How do you obtain nodal displacements in local coordinates?
In general, you do not. Displacements are a nodal property. Nodes do not have local coordinate
systems, elements do. For more information, see Restraint Data in Local Element Coordinates.
What do you do with local coordinates?
In most instances nothing. The local coordinates are only useful in CAESAR II is when dealing
with a skewed nozzle. This coordinate system is used in the Local Restraint Report.

CAESAR II User's Guide

893

Technical Discussions

894

CAESAR II User's Guide

SECTION 14

Miscellaneous Processors
This section discusses the processors that are available in CAESAR II.

In This Section
Accounting ..................................................................................... 895
Batch Stream Processing .............................................................. 900
CAESAR II Fatal Error Processing ................................................ 900
Units File Operations ..................................................................... 901
Material Database .......................................................................... 905

Accounting
The CAESAR II accounting system possesses the following characteristics:
It is an optional function. If you have no need to keep accounting records of your runs, then
you never need to use it.
Allows you to conveniently control all pricing factors. The total price of any job is computed
from:
IF (C4 > 0.0) THEN
cost = C1*cputime + (C2*nodes + C3*elements) * C4 * numcases + C5
ELSE
cost = C1*cputime + (C2*nodes + C3*elements) + C5
ENDIF

You can enter C1, C2, C3, C4, and C5 one time, and change them only when necessary.
Any of the constants may be zero, but at least one constant must be greater than zero.
Accounting reports are generated on a per run basis and are summarized on a per account
basis.
You can generate reports for any requested combination of account numbers.
Account numbers are user-defined and may contain up to 25 alphanumeric characters.
Account and program access can be controlled using the optional password protection
feature.
Account numbers can be identified for each job using either of the following two methods:
Select the account number from a table of allowed account numbers; otherwise, the
system defaults to the last valid account number input. The account number table is set
up and maintained by the account manager.
Enter an account number, which can be any non-blank string, in a text box. There is no
default, but your entry must match one of the allowed account numbers previously input
by the account manager.

Access to the available account number list is password protected.

If you do not have a valid account number, the run is not permitted.

CAESAR II User's Guide

895

Miscellaneous Processors

All generated reports contain the following items:

Account number
Job name
Time and date of run
Number of nodes, elements, and load cases
Calculated job cost
Accounting summary reports include subtotals on a per account number basis, the number
of jobs run under the account, and the time period the account has been active.

Accounting File Structure

The CAESAR II accounting file (ACCTG.DAT) contains all of the information used by CAESAR II
to produce accounting reports. The file format allows you to create a program to access or
manipulate the file. You can open the accounting file (in FORTRAN) with the following:
OPEN(1,FILE=ACCTG.DAT,STATUS=OLD,FORM=BINARY,
ACCESS=DIRECT,RECL=55)
The following information is stored on each record:

896

Variable

Type

Definition

JOBNAME

CHARACTER*8

Name of the job being run

ICPUTIME

INTEGER*4

Analysis CPU time used (Seconds)

NODES

INTEGER*2

Number of nodes in the job

NELEMS

INTEGER*2

Number of elements in the job

NLOADS

INTEGER*2

Number of load cases in the job

MYEAR

INTEGER*2

Year the job was run

MMONTH

INTEGER*2

Month the job was run

MDAY

INTEGER*2

Day of the month the job was run

MHOUR

INTEGER*2

Hour of the day the job was run

MMINUTE

INTEGER*2

Minutes of the hour when the job was run

MSECOND

INTEGER*2

Seconds of the minute when the job was run

ACCOUNTNO

CHARACTER*25 Account number to be billed for job

CAESAR II User's Guide

Miscellaneous Processors
The first record contains only a single integer value (ILAST), giving the last valid record number
in the accounting file. The number of job entries is equal to (ILAST-1). This first record may be
read:
READ(1,REC=1) ILAST

Accounting System Activation

The accounting system is delivered in an uninitialized state and must be changed to active
before it can be used. To access the accounting system, click Tools > Accounting on the Main
Menu. The CAESAR II Accounting dialog box displays. You can use the options in this dialog
box to specify the accounting method, set pricing, define account numbers, and generate
reports.

For information about the options available on a specific dialog box tab, see:
Activate Accounting Tab (on page 898)
Pricing Factors Tab (on page 898)
Account Numbers Tab (on page 899)
Reports Tab (on page 899)
Status Tab (on page 900)
After the accounting system is initialized, the pricing factors are set, and account numbers
entered, you can initiate jobs with account tracking. The prompt for the account number appears
during analysis immediately after you initiate the accounting process.

The prompt for accounting information requires user-account identification.

If you selected Type 2 on the Activate Accounting tab (on page 898), enter a valid account
number, or click OK for the default (last used) account number.

CAESAR II User's Guide

897

Miscellaneous Processors

If you selected Type 1, select the appropriate account number from the list and click OK to
continue.

Activate Accounting Tab

Select the applicable accounting method (Type 1 or Type 2), and then click Activate
Accounting. After the accounting system is activated, click OK in the message box.
If the accounting system becomes unnecessary, deactivate it by clicking Deactivate
Accounting.

Pricing Factors Tab

Enter any costs as appropriate; blanks are allowed. Each rate is multiplied by the respective job
quantity, and the sum of these products is equivalent to the job cost. Job costs are calculated on
an integer dollar basis, and are never be less than one dollar. Any of the five rate constants can
be zero, but not all; none of the constants may be negative.
Rate per CPU second - Specifies the cost per second of computer processing time.
Rate per NODE - Specifies the cost per node in the input file.
Rate per ELEMENT - Specifies the cost per element in the input file.
Rate per LOAD CASE - Specifies the cost per load case evaluated during the analysis.
Desired monetary label - Specifies the monetary label. For example, type $ for US dollars.
Submit - Saves the pricing factors.

898

CAESAR II User's Guide

Miscellaneous Processors

Account Numbers Tab

Enter the required account numbers, and then click Save. These are the numbers that the
software uses to prompt you for an account number during program execution.

Reports Tab
Accounts - Controls for which accounts a report is generated. Select Entire Data File to
generate a report that includes all accounts. To generate a report for a specific account or set of
accounts, select Specific Accounts, click Select Accounts, and select the accounts from the
list that displays.
Date Range - Controls the range of dates for which a report is generated. Select Entire Data
File to generate a report that includes all dates. Select Specific Date Range to specify a range
of dates for which to generate a report.
Report - Controls the length of the report. Select Detailed to generate a full report; select
Summary to generate a shorter report. The example below shows a sample detailed report.

CAESAR II User's Guide

899

Miscellaneous Processors

Status Tab
Summarizes the number of accounts and pricing factors that are in the current accounting
system. A total count of the number of accounting records (analysis runs) is also included.

Batch Stream Processing

Tools > Multi-Job Analysis opens the Batch Stream Processor, which you can use to
analyze multiple jobs in batch mode.
You can run up to twelve different jobs completely unattended. Before initiating the batch stream
process, verify that the batch jobs meet the following criteria:
All jobs are located in the same data folder, and the default data folder is set to this folder.
All jobs have successfully passed error checking and must have dynamic load cases
defined. If the static load cases have not been defined, CAESAR II uses the standard
recommended cases.
Accounting is turned off or is set so that a default account number can be assumed by the
software.
The Batch Stream Processor creates a log file, named BATCH.LOG, and saves it in the same
folder as the batch jobs. You can use the log file to review processing times and to help
diagnose any failures in the batch process. The log file is a standard ASCII text file, which can
be edited or printed using a standard text editor, such as Notepad.

Define Jobs to Run

Opens the Batch Stream Data Definition dialog box in which you can define the names and
job types to be executed by the stream. The job names are the usual CAESAR II job names that
have been prepared for analysis.

Analyze Specified Jobs

Analyzes all previously defined jobs. You do not have to analyze the jobs immediately. Job
names and analysis types are stored in a data file, BATCH.STM, which can be invoked at any
time.

CAESAR II Fatal Error Processing

CAESAR II makes every effort to alert you when it encounters data that is inconsistent or
unusual for the type of analysis that it is performing. Even so, the potential still exists for
user-modeling techniques or hardware/operating system problems that can generate an error
condition within the CAESAR II computation routines. Recognizing this potential, the software
performs internal self-checks to trap abnormal conditions such as full hard disks, invalid or
expired ESLs, file corruption, and insufficient free memory.
Whenever a fatal error condition arises, CAESAR II aborts the current process and uses a
multi-stage approach to provide you with an explanation regarding why the process was
aborted.

900

CAESAR II User's Guide

Miscellaneous Processors
First, each error trap/condition is assigned a unique number. When an abort condition occurs,
this error number and a short description of the fatal error are displayed in a Help Facility
window similar to the one shown below.

When you click OK, the software closes the Help Facility window and opens the Additional
Error Information dialog box. You can use this dialog box to reference another error number,
which can be useful when one error definition references another. Clicking OK on the
Additional Error Information dialog box returns the software to the main CAESAR II window.
At any time, you can review fatal error information by clicking Diagnostics > Error
Review, entering the appropriate error number, and then clicking OK. The Help Facility window
opens and displays the corresponding fatal error description.

Units File Operations

The active units file as specified in the configuration file is used with all new input files and all
existing output files in the given data directory. The units file specified in the configuration file
does not modify the units in an existing CAESAR II input file

CAESAR II User's Guide

901

Miscellaneous Processors

Create/Review Units
Creates a custom units file. Click Tools > Create/Review Units to display the CAESAR II Units Maintenance dialog box, which you can use to create a new units file or to review data in
an existing units file.

Review Existing Units File

Enables the Existing Files to Review list, which contains all existing units files located in both
the data folder and the program folder. Select the units file you want to review, and then click
View/Edit File. The software displays the Units File Review window, which contains all
CAESAR II dimensional items, their internal units, the conversion factor between the internal
units and the user-specified units, and the user-defined units.

902

CAESAR II User's Guide

Miscellaneous Processors

Create a New Units File

Creates a new units file and activates the Existing File to Start From list and New Units File
Name box. After you have completed both items, click View > Edit File. The software displays
the Units File Maintenance dialog box, in which you can edit your units and conversion factor
entries.

If the user-defined units for a given item exist in the list, then it is not necessary to specify
a conversion factor, as it is updated automatically. If a new set of units is required, such as, for
example, feet (instead of inches) in the Length category, either select the new unit name (ft.) in
the User Units list and select the new conversion factor in the Constant list or type a new factor
in the text box.

Existing File to Start From

Select an existing units file in the list. In CAESAR II, you create a new units file by using an
existing units file as a template. For ease and simplicity, we recommend that the units contained
within the existing file closely mirror the units contained within the new file to be created.

CAESAR II User's Guide

903

Miscellaneous Processors

New Units File Name

Enter a unique file name without the extension.

View/Edit File
Displays one of the following windows, depending on whether you are reviewing an existing
units file or creating a new one.
User File Review - Displays only when you click View/Edit File in conjunction with
reviewing an existing units file (see "Review Existing Units File" on page 902). The contents
of this window are read-only.
User File Maintenance - Displays only when you click View/Edit File in conjunction with
creating a new units file (see "Create a New Units File" on page 903). The contents of this
window are editable.

Change Model Units

Converts an existing input file to a new set of units. Click Tools > Change Model Units. The
software opens the CAESAR II Input File Units Conversion dialog box.

Enter the Name of the Input File to Convert

Type the full path name followed by the input file name, including the .c2a extension, to be
converted. Alternatively, you can click Browse and use Windows Explorer to navigate to the
appropriate file.

904

CAESAR II User's Guide

Miscellaneous Processors

Enter the Name of the Units File to Use

Select the name of the appropriate units file in the list of available units files.

Enter the Name of the Output File (Optional)

Type the full path name followed by the input file name that corresponds to the new input file.
If you select an existing ._a file using Browse, the converted file overwrites the
existing ._a file chosen from the list.

Material Database
CAESAR II delivers a material database that defines the physical properties and
code-dependent allowable stresses for more than 300 materials. You can edit and manage the
delivered materials data, as well as create new materials, using the Material Database Editor.
To open the editor, click Tools > Material Data Base or click Materials
on the toolbar.

Material Database Editor Toolbar

The Material Database Editor toolbar displays icons for commonly-used commands.
Print - Prints the materials data for every material in the entire material database.
Cut - Removes the selected data from its current location and places a copy on the Clipboard.
Copy - Creates a copy of the selected data and places it on the Clipboard.
Paste - Places a copy of the Clipboard contents in the specified location.

CAESAR II User's Guide

905

Miscellaneous Processors
Clear Screen to Add - Saves the current editor window contents, and then clears the screen so you can
add a new material. For more information, see Add a new material to the database (on page 910).
Edit a Material - Allows you to edit a material item in the database. For more information, see Edit a
material in the database (on page 911).
Delete a Material - Deletes the material from the database. For more information, see Delete a material
from the database (on page 911).
Save Material - Saves the changes made to the current material item.
Print the Current Material - Prints only the materials data for the current material item.

It is your responsibility to check material allowables and other physical property data for the
particular code being used. While Intergraph CAS makes every attempt to keep the material
database up-to-date, the codes are subject to change frequently, and the accuracy of the
database is not guaranteed.
The Material Database Editor does not modify the data in the material database delivered
with CAESAR II. Any changes that you make are saved to a secondary database, which, by
default, is named umat1.umd and is located in the \System directory. You can specify a
different secondary database using User Material Database File Name (on page 52) in the
Configuration Editor. This setup permits multiple user-supplied database files to be used
on a single system.

What do you want to do?

Add a new material to the database (on page 910)

Delete a material from the database (on page 911)
Edit a material in the database (on page 911)

Number
Enter a number by which the material is to be referenced. The number must be between 101
and 999 and should not already be a reference for another material.

Name
Enter the material name as listed in the applicable code.

Applicable Piping Code

Select the CAESAR II piping code for the material. The following piping codes are currently
supported:

906

ALL

B31.5

NAVY 505

Stoomwezen

FDBR

B31.1

B31.8

CAN Z662

RCC-M C

BS 7159

B31.1 1967

B31.11

BS 806

RCC-M D

UKOOA

B31.3

ASME NC

Swedish 1

CODETI

IGE/TD/12

B31.4

ASME ND

Swedish 2

Norwegian TBK-6

DNV

EN-13480

GPTC/Z380

PD-8010-1

PD-8010-2

ISO-14692

CAESAR II User's Guide

Miscellaneous Processors

Density
Enter the density of the material.

Minimum Temperature Curve (A-D)

Specify the curve used to check the material. As defined by B31.3 (Section 323.2.2), some
carbon steels are limited to a minimum metal temperature as shown in Figure 323.2.2. If this
code section is applicable, select A, B, C, or D. If this code section is not applicable, leave this
field blank.
CAESAR II does not currently use this information.

Eff, Cf, z
Enter the appropriate factor as required by the following piping codes:
Stoomwezen - Enter the cyclic reduction factor. This is referred to in the code as Cf.
Norwegian TBK-6 - Enter the circumferential weld strength factor. This is referred to in the
code as z.
BS 7159 - Enter the ratio of the design stress (d) in the circumferential (hoop) direction to
the design stress in the longitudinal direction. Because design stress is defined in Sec. 4.3 of
the code as:
d = d * EIam, sdx = d * EIamx
and design strain should be the same for both directions, this entry is also the ratio of the
moduli of elasticity:
EIam (hoop) to EIam (longitudinal)
For Norwegian TBK-6 and BS 7159 piping codes, if the Eff, Cf, z field is left blank, the
software uses the default value of 1.0.

Cold Elastic Modulus

Enter the value of the elastic modulus to be used in code compliance stress cases. The software
uses this value only if no Elastic Modulus (on page 909) is given for the ambient (70 F)
temperature.

Poisson's Ratio
Enter the value to be used for Poissons ratio. This input is only required for metals.

CAESAR II User's Guide

907

Miscellaneous Processors

FAC
Enter the applicable factor as determined by the following piping codes.
Stoomwezen - Enter 0.44 or 0.5. This value is used to compute the equilibrium stresses as
discussed in Section 5.2 of the code. You can use 0.5 for steel if the design and fabrication
are such that stress peaks are avoided.
Norwegian - Enter the material ultimate tensile strength at room temperature Rm. If you do
not define a value, this factor is not considered to control the expansion stress allowable.

Laminate Type
Enter the laminate type (as defined in the BS 7159 code) of the fiberglass reinforced plastic pipe
used. Valid laminate types are:
CSM and Woven Roving - Chopped strand mat (CSM) and woven roving (WR)
construction with internal and external surface tissue reinforced layer.
CSM and Multi-filament - Chopped strand mat and multi-filament roving construction with
internal and external surface tissue reinforced layer.
CSM - All chopped strand mat construction with internal and external surface tissue
reinforced layer.

Eh / Ea
Displays the ratio of the hoop modulus to the axial modulus of elasticity. If omitted, the software
uses a default value of 2.0.

Temperature
Enter the temperature that corresponds to the database values you will add in the remaining
cells.

In the database delivered with the software, all temperatures are in 100F increments.
Some codes list physical property values in 50F increments; therefore, small
discrepancies may occur between CAESAR II and a given code because of the interpolation of
data.

908

CAESAR II User's Guide

Miscellaneous Processors

Exp. Coeff.
Enter the coefficient of thermal expansion at the reference Temperature in the indicated units.
6
This value must be multiplied by 10 F prior to being entered. For example, for carbon steel at
400-deg F, B 31.3 Table C-3 gives an expansion coefficient of 6.82 in/in/F. Thus, you would
enter 6.82 in the database.

Allowable Stress
Enter the code allowable stress corresponding to the reference Temperature. These values
generally correspond to the SC and SH values on the allowable auxiliary screens.

Elastic Modulus
Enter the modulus of elasticity to the reference Temperature. If no entry is given for ambient
(70 F), the software uses the value defined for Cold Elastic Modulus (on page 907).

Yield Stress
Enter the yield stress that corresponds to the reference Temperature.

Ult Tensile Stress

Enter the temperature dependent stress value (lbs./sq.in.).This value varies by piping code.
Valid entries based on the current piping code are:
BS 806 - Mean stress to failure for design life at temperature.
Swedish Method 1 - Creep rupture stress at temperature.
Stoomwezen - Rrg average creep stress to produce 1% permanent set after 100,000 hours
at temperature (vm).
IGE/TD/12 - Ultimate tensile strength.
Norwegian - The material ultimate tensile strength at room temperature is Rm (lbs./sq. in.).
If no value is entered, this factor is not considered to control the expansion stress allowable.

Weld Strength Reduction Factor (W)

The Weld Strength Reduction Factor, W, is a temperature dependent value from B31.3/B31.1.
CAESAR II uses this value as:
W1 - A longitudinal reduction factor used in the determination of the pipe's minimum wall
thickness.
Wc - A circumferential reduction factor used in the determination of the allowable stress.
The use of W is optional, and is controlled through a configuration setting in the SIF and
Stresses section of the Configuration Editor.

CAESAR II User's Guide

909

Miscellaneous Processors

Add a new material to the database

When adding a new material to the database, you must add at least two records in the Material
Database Editor. The first record saves the new material for the All Codes option. CAESAR II
uses the All Codes option to populate the Material list in the Classic Piping Input dialog box.
Enter all the material information except for the allowable stresses. You can add subsequent
records for the same material to address additional piping codes and identify the allowable
stresses for each piping code.
1. In the Material Database Editor, click Clear Screen to Add
.
The software saves any data currently shown in the editor window, and then clears the
window contents.
2. Enter the required data for the new material, except for the allowable stresses. At a
minimum, you must specify the Number and select All Codes in the Applicable Piping
Code list.
You must enter a number that is less than 1000. If you enter a number that currently
exists in the database, the software prompts you to enter a different number.
3. Click Save Material
to save the new material.
4. After you save the new material, you can add subsequent new material records to modify
the piping code and define the allowable stresses. Select the Applicable Piping Code for
the new material. Then, specify the allowable stresses.
5. Click Save Material
to save the new material in the Piping Input processor. Repeat
steps 4 and 5 to add new material records for each piping code that you need.
6. Close the Material Database Editor dialog box, and open the Classic Piping Input dialog
box for the current job.

910

CAESAR II User's Guide

Miscellaneous Processors
CAESAR II displays the new material as an option in the Material list on the Classic Piping
Input dialog box.

Delete a material from the database

1. In the Material Database Editor, click Delete a Material
.
2. Select the material item you want to delete, and then click OK.
The software deletes the material from the database.
You can only delete user-defined materials. Materials that are delivered with the
CAESAR II material database cannot be deleted. If no user-defined materials exist in the
database, the software displays an informational message.

Edit a material in the database

1. In the Material Database Editor, click Edit a Material
.
2. In the Material Selection dialog box, do one of the following to select the material item you
want to modify:
Scroll through the list and double-click the material name.
Type all or part of a material name or number in the text box and click Search. The
software searches the database and displays matching materials for selection.
3. Edit the material item as needed, and then click Save Material
the material database.

to save your changes to

The Piping Code ID list corresponds to the piping code ID on the Piping Input dialog box.
To exit the dialog box without selecting a material press Esc or click Cancel.

CAESAR II User's Guide

911

Miscellaneous Processors

912

CAESAR II User's Guide

External Interfaces

SECTION 15

External Interfaces
External Interfaces allow data transfer between CAESAR II and other software applications. To
view a list of those software applications, click Tools > External Interfaces in the Main menu.

In most cases, data transfer is from a drawing or analysis package to CAESAR II. However, the
CAESAR II Neutral File transfers both to and from CAESAR II.
Intergraph CADWorx Plant provides a seamless, bi-directional interface between
CADWorx and CAESAR II without a translation procedure.
Most of the interfaces are CAD interfaces. The exceptions are LIQT, AFT IMPULSE,

PIPENET, Pipeplus, FlowMaster , the CAESAR II Data Matrix, and the CAESAR II
Neutral File.
CAD interfaces (CADPIPE, Intergraph Smart 3D PCF, Intergraph PDS, and PCF) are
intended to transfer piping geometry into CAESAR II. The resulting CAESAR II input must be
thoroughly checked, with loads, restraints, and other specifics added.
The CAESAR II Neutral File and the Intergraph CADWorx Plant interfaces are capable of
transferring 100% of the data that comprises the _A (input) file.
LIQT, AFT IMPULSE, PIPENET, PipePlus, and FlowMaster are transient analysis packages
for liquids in piping networks that calculate pressure imbalances as a function of time. The
CAESAR II interface converts this LIQT output from these packages to create force
response spectra for CAESAR II dynamic input.

CAESAR II User's Guide

913

External Interfaces

The interfaces typically prompt you for a file name, transfer the data, and then prompt for
another file name. This cycle continues either until a blank file name is encountered or you
cancel the process.
Before beginning an interface to CAESAR II, follow the requirements of the CAESAR II
Neutral File interface. This enables all of the spreadsheet data to be transferred.
Intergraph CADWorx Plant is the Intergraph CAS piping design and drafting software for the
AutoCAD environment. Data may be completely and seamlessly transferred between CAESAR
II and Intergraph CADWorx Plant, without creating any neutral files or going through any
intermediate steps.

CAESAR II Neutral File

Enables access to any particular data item from an _A input file, to enable a complete _A file to
be built from a CAD application. The general neutral file can be used to send data either to or
from the standard CAESAR II binary input file, otherwise known as the _A file. The name of the
file used or generated by this interface is the CAESAR II job name with the extension .CII.
Also, the interface allows CAESAR II input data to be used for other analysis purposes.
The content and format described in this section is subject to change as a function of the
enhancements made to CAESAR II. Every effort is being made to keep "drastic" changes to a
minimum.

Several third-party CAD applications, such as AVEVA s PDMS and Jacobus PlantSpace,
also support this neutral file. If you prefer, instead of launching this interface from Tools >
External Interface, the processor can be run in "batch mode" from either a batch file or the
command line as shown below.
f:\ProgramDirectory\iecho
f:\DataDirectory\NeutralFile.cii
where:
f:\ProgramDirectory and f:\DataDirectory must be changed as appropriate.
The CAESAR II neutral file, also referred to as the .CII file, is divided into sections which
organize the piping data in logical groupings. Section divisions are denoted in the neutral file by
the #$ character sequence found in columns 1 and 2. The token following the #$ character
sequence is a section identifier that is used by CAESAR II for data sequencing purposes, and to
aid you in reading the neutral file. For each item listed on the following pages, the necessary
FORTRAN format for the input/output is provided. The variables listed below are used in
dimensioning arrays.
N1Base memory allocation quantity used to set array sizes. For example, if N1=2,000,
your neutral file can handle up to 2,000 elements.
N21/2 N1
N31/3 N1
N41/4 N1
N51/5 N1
N6N1/13.33

914

CAESAR II User's Guide

External Interfaces

Version and Job Title Information

#$ VERSION - Provides section header information.
Use FORTRAN format (2X, 4G13.6) to write the values of the following variables on the first line
of the neutral file:
GVERSION is the version of the neutral file interface being used. This corresponds to the
major version number of CAESAR II (4 for 4.x., for example).
RVERSION is the specific CAESAR II version generating this file, for example. 4.50.
SPARE are unused (at this time) locations on the record.
The next 60 lines of 75 characters each are reserved for the CAESAR II title-page text. Use
FORTRAN format (2X, A75).
The last line of the job title array, if blank, is set by this transfer interface. The text that is set
here indicates that the file was created by the CAESAR II interface.

Control Information
#$ CONTROL - Provides the section division header. The #$ and space are required, and the
word CONTROL is in all uppercase.
Use the FORTRAN format (2X, 6I13) to write the values of the following variables on the next
line of the neutral file:
NUMELT - Defines the number of piping elements (spreadsheets) in the input file.
NUMNOZ - Defines the number of nozzles in the input file.
NOHGRS - Defines the number of spring hangers in the input file.
NONAM - Defines the number of Node Name data blocks in the input file.
NORED - Defines the number of reducers in the input file.
NUMFLG - Defines the number of flanges in the input file.
Write 13 items that contain the number of auxiliary data types used in the input file followed by
the vertical axis indicator. Use the FORTRAN format (2X, 6I13). These 13 values are:
The number of bend auxiliary data blocks in the input file.
The number of rigid-element auxiliary data blocks in the input file.
The number of expansion-joint auxiliary data blocks in the input file.
The number of restraint auxiliary data blocks in the input file.
The number of displacement auxiliary data blocks in the input file.
The number of force/moment auxiliary data blocks in the input file.
The number of uniform-load auxiliary data blocks in the input file.
The number of wind-load auxiliary data blocks in the input file.
The number of element-offset auxiliary data blocks in the input file.
The number of allowable-stress auxiliary data blocks in the input file.
The number of intersection auxiliary data blocks in the input file. IZUP flag. Equal to zero (0)
for the global -Y axis vertical; equal to 1 for the global -Z axis vertical.
The number of (nozzle) equipment limits data blocks in the input file.

CAESAR II User's Guide

915

External Interfaces

Basic Element Data

#$ ELEMENTS - Contains integer and real data for each element in the input file. The data is
organized as shown below.
1. Real values for element "i"
2. Integer values for element "i"
3. Real values for element "i+1"
4. Integer values for element "i+1"
These real and integer values are stored in arrays that are described below.
A 98-member array (REL) contains the real basic-element data. The REL array is dimensioned
(N1,98).
Use the FORTRAN format (2X, 6G13.6) to write the values of the following 53 items on the
appropriate nine lines of the neutral file.
1. FROM node number
2. TO node number
3. Delta X
4. Delta Y
5. Delta Z
6. Diameter (value stored here is actual OD)
7. Wall Thickness (actual)
8. Insulation Thickness
9. Corrosion Allowance
10. Thermal Expansion Coefficient #1 (or Temperature #1)
11. Thermal Expansion Coefficient #2 (or Temperature #2)
12. Thermal Expansion Coefficient #3 (or Temperature #3)
13. Thermal Expansion Coefficient #4 (or Temperature #4)
14. Thermal Expansion Coefficient #5 (or Temperature #5)
15. Thermal Expansion Coefficient #6 (or Temperature #6)
16. Thermal Expansion Coefficient #7 (or Temperature #7)
17. Thermal Expansion Coefficient #8 (or Temperature #8)
18. Thermal Expansion Coefficient #9 (or Temperature #9)
19. Pressure #1
20. Pressure #2
21. Pressure #3
22. Pressure #4
23. Pressure #5
24. Pressure #6
25. Pressure #7
26. Pressure #8
27. Pressure #9
28. Elastic Modulus (cold)
29. Poissons Ratio
30. Pipe Density

916

CAESAR II User's Guide

External Interfaces
31. Insulation Density
32. Fluid Density
33. Minus Mill Tolerance
34. Plus Mill Tolerance
35. Seam Weld (1=Yes, 0=No)
36. Hydro Pressure
37. Elastic Modulus (Hot #1)
38. Elastic Modulus (Hot #2)
39. Elastic Modulus (Hot #3)
40. Elastic Modulus (Hot #4)
41. Elastic Modulus (Hot #5)
42. Elastic Modulus (Hot #6)
43. Elastic Modulus (Hot #7)
44. Elastic Modulus (Hot #8)
45. Elastic Modulus (Hot #9)
46. "wL" Factor
47. -not used48. -not used49. Cladding Thickness
50. Cladding Density
51. Insulation + Cladding Weight/length
52. Refractory Thickness
53. Refractory Density
Non-specified real values are assigned a value of 0.0 by this interface.
If the delta coordinates are not specified, they default to zero. If the To/From fields are not
specified, it is considered an error.
An 18-member array (IEL) contains the pointers to the auxiliary data arrays. The IEL array is
dimensioned (N1,18).
At this time, only 15 of the members of this array are used.
Use the FORTRAN format (2X, 6I13) to write the values of the following 15 items on the next
three lines of the neutral file.
1. Pointer to Bend Auxiliary field. This indicates where in the bend auxiliary array the bend
data for the current element can be found.
2. Pointer to Rigid Element Auxiliary field.
3. Pointer to Expansion Joint Auxiliary field.
4. Pointer to Restraint Auxiliary field.
5. Pointer to Displacement Auxiliary field.
6. Pointer to Force/Moment Auxiliary field.
7. Pointer to Uniform Load Auxiliary field.
8. Pointer to Wind Load Auxiliary field.
9. Pointer to Element Offset Auxiliary field.
10. Pointer to Allowable Stress Auxiliary field.
11. Pointer to Intersection Auxiliary field.

CAESAR II User's Guide

917

External Interfaces
12.
13.
14.
15.

Pointer to Node Name Auxiliary field.

Pointer to Reducer Auxiliary field.
Pointer to Flange Auxiliary field.
Pointer to Nozzle/Equipment Check Auxiliary field.

When there is no auxiliary data of a particular type associated with the current element
use a pointer value of zero.

Auxiliary Element Data

#$ AUX_DATA - Contains the auxiliary data corresponding to the elements. This data is
arranged in the same order as the IAUXAU array described previously. For example, if
IAUXAU(1) contains a 3, then there are three bends in the model, and their data is found next in
the neutral file. Likewise, if IAUXAU(2) contains a 5, then there are five rigid elements in the
model and their data follows the bend data.
Each set of auxiliary data is separated by a sub-section header. If a particular value in IAUXAU
is zero, then only the subsection header is written to the neutral file.
The data storage for these arrays is allocated at runtime based on the available free system
memory. These arrays are allocated proportionally as a percentage of the n-number of elements
allowed. Four proportions are used: 1/2, 1/3, 1/4, and 1/5. These proportions correspond to the
variables: N2, N3, N4, and N5. Maintain these proportions to ensure that the neutral file reader
can accept the file.
#$ NODENAME - Defines the Node Name data. To maintain downward compatibility, this
section is optional. The data for each element set of node names in the input file is listed here.
A two-member array (NAM) defines each set of node names. The NAM array is dimensioned
(N6, 2). Use the FORTRAN format (2X, A10, 16X, A10) to read the character name of the
FROM node and then that of the TO node.
#$ BEND - Defines the bend data. The data for each bend in the input file is listed here.
A 15-member array (BND) defines each bend. The BND array is dimensioned (N3,15).
Only 13 items are currently used. Use the FORTRAN format (2X, 6G13.6) to write the values of
the following 13 items on the next three lines of the neutral file.
1. Bend radius
2. Type: 1 - single flange; 2 - double flange; 0 or blank - welded
3. Angle to node position #1
4. Node number at position #1
5. Angle to node position #2
6. Node number at position #2
7. Angle to node position #3
8. Node number at position #3
9. Number of miter cuts
10. Fitting thickness of bend if different from the pipe
11. Seam Weld (1=Yes, 0=No)
12. Bend flexibility (K) factor
13. Weld strength reduction factor WL
#$ RIGID - Defines the rigid data. The data for each rigid in the input file is listed here.
A single-element array (RIG) is used for each rigid. The RIG array is dimensioned (N3,1). The
single element of the array represents the rigid weight.

918

CAESAR II User's Guide

External Interfaces
Use the FORTRAN format (2X, 6G13.6) to write the value.
#$ EXPJT - Defines the expansion joint data. The data for each expansion joint in the input file
is listed here. The EXP array is dimensioned (N5,5).
Use FORTRAN format (2X, 6G13.6) to write the values of the following five items on the next
line of the neutral file.
1. Axial stiffness
2. Transverse stiffness
3. Bending stiffness
4. Torsional stiffness
5. Effective inside bellows diameter
#$ RESTRANT - Defines the restraint data.
The data for each restraint auxiliary data block in the input file is listed here. The RES array is
dimensioned (N2,36).
Use the FORTRAN format (2X, 6G13.6) to write the values of the following nine items on the
next two lines of the neutral file. These nine items are repeated four times for the four possible
restraints defined in the auxiliary data block.
This requires two lines in the neutral file for each restraint specification. This means eight lines
total for each restraint auxiliary.
1. Restraint node number
2. Restraint type (see additional notes to follow)
3. Restraint stiffness
4. Restraint gap
5. Restraint friction coefficient
6. Restraint connecting node
7. X direction cosine
8. Y direction cosine
9. Z direction cosine
The restraint type is an integer value whose valid range is from 1 to 62. The 62 possible restraint
types include:

#$ DISPLMNT - Defines the displacement data. The data for each displacement auxiliary data
block in the input file is listed here.
Use the FORTRAN format (2X, 6G13.6) to write the values of the following 55 items on the next
lines of the neutral file. The DIS array is dimensioned (N3,110).

CAESAR II User's Guide

919

External Interfaces
This requires 10 lines in the neutral file for each displacement specification. This means 20 lines
total for each displacement auxiliary.

These 55 items are repeated twice for the two possible displacements defined on the auxiliary.
Unspecified displacement values (free-displacement degrees of freedom, for example)
are designated by using a value of 9999.99.
#$ FORCMNT - Defines the start of the force/moment data. The data for each force/moment
auxiliary data block in the input file is listed here.
Use the FORTRAN format (2X, 6G13.6) to write the values of the following 55 items on the next
ten lines of the neutral file. The FOR array is dimensioned (N3,38).
This requires ten lines in the neutral file for each force/moment specification. This means 20
lines total for each force/moment auxiliary data block.

920

CAESAR II User's Guide

External Interfaces
#$ UNIFORM - Defines the start of the uniform load data. The data for each uniform load in the
input file is listed here.
Use FORTRAN format (2X, 6G13.6) to write the values of the following 12 items on the next two
lines of the neutral file. The UNI array is dimensioned (N5,36). Currently three vectors of four
values each (three directions and a G-load flag) are used.
This requires two lines in the neutral file for each uniform load auxiliary data block.
G-flag is 1 for the input values in G's and 0 for input values in force-per-length notation.
{vector 1 & 2}

UX1

UY1

UZ1 G-fla UX2 UY2

g1

{vector 2 & 3}

UZ2

G-flag UX3 UY3

2

UZ3 G-flag
3

#$ WIND - Defines the start of the wind/wave data. The data for each wind/wave specification in
the input file is listed here. The WIND array is dimensioned (N5,6).
Use the FORTRAN format (2X, 6G13.6) to write the set of values on the next line of the neutral
file. This requires a single line in the neutral file for each wind auxiliary.
The data items on each line are as follows:
1. Entry type (0.0 for Wind, 1.0 for Wave, 2.0 for Off)
2. Wind shape factor or wave drag coefficient
3. Wave added mass coefficient
4. Wave lift coefficient
5. Wave marine growth
6. Marine growth density
#$ OFFSETS - Defines the start of the element offset data. The data for each offset pipe in the
input file is listed here.
Use FORTRAN format (2X, 6G13.6) to write the values of the following six items on the next line
of the neutral file. The OFF array is dimensioned (N5,6).
This requires a single line in the neutral file for each offset auxiliary.
1. Element FROM node offset in X direction
2. Element FROM node offset in Y direction
3. Element FROM node offset in Z direction
4. Element TO node offset in X direction
5. Element TO node offset in Y direction
6. Element TO node offset in Z direction
#$ ALLOWBLS - Defines the start of the allowable stress data. The data for each allowable
spec in the input file is listed here.
Use FORTRAN format (2X, 6G13.6) to write the values of the following 153 items on the next 26
lines of the neutral file. The ALL array is dimensioned (N5,153).
1. Cold allowable stress
2. Hot allowable for thermal case #1
3. Hot allowable for thermal case #2
4. Hot allowable for thermal case #3
5. Code cyclic reduction factor for thermal case #1
6. Code cyclic reduction factor for thermal case #2
7. Code cyclic reduction factor for thermal case #3

CAESAR II User's Guide

921

External Interfaces
8. Eff.
9. Sy
10. Fac
11. Pmax
12. Piping code id
13. Hot allowable for thermal case #4
14. Hot allowable for thermal case #5
15. Hot allowable for thermal case #6
16. Hot allowable for thermal case #7
17. Hot allowable for thermal case #8
18. Hot allowable for thermal case #9
19. Code cyclic reduction factor for thermal case #4
20. Code cyclic reduction factor for thermal case #5
21. Code cyclic reduction factor for thermal case #6
22. Code cyclic reduction factor for thermal case #7
23. Code cyclic reduction factor for thermal case #8
24. Code cyclic reduction factor for thermal case #9
Items 25 through 32 represent Cycles, and items 33 through 40 represent Stresses for eight BW
(butt-weld)/Class D Fatigue pairs.
Items 41 through 48 represent Cycles, and items 49 through 56 represent Stresses for eight FW
(fillet-weld)/Class E Fatigue pairs.
Items 57 through 64 represent Cycles, and items 65 through 72 represent Stresses for eight
Class F Fatigue pairs used with TD/12 piping code.
Items 73 through 80 represent Cycles, and items 81 through 88 represent Stresses for eight
Class G Fatigue pairs used with TD/12 piping code.
Items 89 through 96 represent Cycles, and items 97 through 104 represent Stresses for eight
Class W Fatigue pairs used with TD/12 piping code.
Item 105 Elastic Modulus correction
Item 106 has different meanings based on the active piping code: Allowed Cycles Maximum
(per B31.3); Restrained Piping (per B31.8); Material Composition/Type (per HPGSL and JPI).
Item 107 UTS ambient
Item 108 Allowable Sy/St value
Items 109 through 117 represent nine SY values at temperature.
Items 118 through 126 represent nine UTS values at temperature.
Items 127 through 153 are currently unused. Write the value of 0.000000.

Some of these items (notably 8-24) may have various meanings based on the active piping
code.
Piping code ISO-14692 has special mapping for the first 24 items.
#$ SIF&TEES - Defines the start of the SIF/TEE data. The data for each SIF/TEE specification
in the input file is listed here.
Use FORTRAN format (2X, 6G13.6) to write the values of the following 30 items, for each of the
two tees that can be specified on the dialog box. The SIF array is dimensioned (N4,60).

922

CAESAR II User's Guide

External Interfaces
The software requires five lines in the neutral file for each SIF/TEE specified. This means you
must specify 10 lines total for each auxiliary element.
The information in parenthesis below gives information about each input value.
1. Node (the intersection node number)
2. Type (the intersection type code, if not specified this auxiliary this is only used to specify
SIFs)
3. SIF (i) (SIF, in-plane)*
4. SIF (o) (SIF, out-of-plane)*
5. Weld (d) (circumferential weld mismatch, used for butt welds and tapered transitions
6. Fillet (fillet leg length)
7. Pad Thk (thickness of the reinforcing pad)
8. Ftg Ro (fitting outside radius for branch connections)
9. Crotch R (crotch radius of the formed lip on an extruded welding tee)
10. Weld ID (weld ID value)
11. B1 (code-specific value)
12. B2 (code-specific value)
13-22*
*Values 3, 4, 11, and 13-22 are for the IGE/TD/12 piping code.
23. (code-related "Note" options)
24. (code-related "Note" options)
25. Stress Index - Axial (Ia)
26. Stress Index - Torsional (It)
Some of these values may have different meanings based on the piping code you have
selected. For more information on piping input specifics, see SIFs & Tees (on page 111).
#$ REDUCERS - This subsection header defines the start of the REDUCER data. The data for
each REDUCER spec in the input file is listed here.
Use FORTRAN format (2X, 6G13.6) to write the values of the following five items on the next
line of the neutral file. The RED array is dimensioned (N6,5).
This requires one line in the neutral file for each REDUCER specified.
1. Second diameter of the reducer
2. Second thickness of the reducer
3. Alpha angle of the reducer
4. R1 value of the reducer for the TD/12 piping code
5. R2 value of the reducer for the TD/12 piping code
These values are repeated for the second intersection specification.
#$ FLANGES - Defines the FLANGE data. The data for each FLANGE spec in the input file is
listed here. There are 72 data values used to describe a flange.
1. FROM/TO (0 = FROM, 1 = TO, 2= BOTH)
2. METHOD (0 = PEQ, 1 = ASME NC)
3. GASKET OR BOLT CIRCLE DIAMETER, DEPENDING ON METHOD
4. BOLT AREA (ASME METHOD ONLY)
5. SYC (ASME METHOD ONLY)
6. SY1 (ASME METHOD ONLY)

CAESAR II User's Guide

923

External Interfaces
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.

SY2 (ASME METHOD ONLY)

SY3 (ASME METHOD ONLY)
SY4 (ASME METHOD ONLY)
SY5 (ASME METHOD ONLY)
SY6 (ASME METHOD ONLY)
SY7 (ASME METHOD ONLY)
SY8 (ASME METHOD ONLY)
SY9 (ASME METHOD ONLY)
15-24 CLASS NAME, (40 CHAR MAX)
25-48 24 TEMPERATURES OF THE TEMP/PRESS RATING CURVE (PEQ METHOD
ONLY)
17. 49-72 24 PRESSURES OF THE TEMP/PRESS RATING CURVE (PEQ METHOD ONLY)
These values are arranged in the neutral file on 12 lines using a format of (2X, 6G13.6) unless
otherwise specified:
Line 1: Flange items 1-5
Line 2: Flange items 6-11
Line 3: Flange items 12-14
Line 4: Class Name, using a format of (2X, A40)
Line 5: Flange items 25-30
Line 6: Flange items 31-36
Line 7: Flange items 37-42
Line 8: Flange items 43-48
Line 9: Flange items 49-54
Line 10: Flange items 55-60
Line 11: Flange items 61-66
Line 12: Flange items 67-72
All 12 lines must be written to the neutral file for each flange. Unused fields/values can be
represented by 0.00.
#$ EQUIPMNT - Defines the Equipment/Nozzle Check data. The data for each EQUIPMNT
spec in the input file is listed here. There are two sets of 17 data values that use a format of
(2X, 6G13.6) as shown below:
1. Node Number
2. Limiting load value FX
3. Limiting load value FY
4. Limiting load value FZ
5. Limiting load value MX
6. Limiting load value MY
7. Limiting load value MZ
8. Reference axis direction cosine CosX
9. Reference axis direction cosine CosY
10. Reference axis direction cosine CosZ
11. Flange rating
12. Interaction method: 0=absolute; 1=SRSS; 2=Unity Check;

924

CAESAR II User's Guide

External Interfaces
Items 13-17 are spares represented by 0.00. These values are arranged in the neutral file on six
lines. All six lines must be written to the neutral file for each Nozzle/Equipment check. Unused
fields/values can be represented by 0.00.

Miscellaneous Data Group #1

#$ MISCEL_1 - Contains the material id (RRMAT) for each element in the input file, the nozzle
data (VFLEX), the hanger data, and the execution options.
Material ID - Contains the material id number in the first array for each element in the input file.
Use the FORTRAN format (2X, 6G13.6).
The RRMAT array is dimensioned (N1). The material ids range from 1 to 699 (See the Users
Guide for details).
The number of lines required to write the RRMAT array in the neutral file is determined by the
following FORTRAN routine:
NLINES = NUMELT / 6
IF(MOD(NUMELT,6).NE.0)THEN
NLINES = NLINES + 1
ENDIF
Nozzles - Describes the flexible (WRC-297, PD-5500, API 650) nozzles in the input file.
The value 9999.99 represents infinity.
Use the FORTRAN format (2X, 6G13.6). The nozzle (VFLEX) contains 16 values for each
nozzle in the input.
This requires four lines in the neutral WRC-297, PD-5500, and/or API 650 spread\-sheet. The
VFLEX array is dimensioned (N6, 16).
For WRC-297 nozzles, the 16 items are:
1. Nozzle Node Number
2. Vessel Node Number (optional)
3. Nozzle type indicator (-1.0101 = 297, 1.0 = 650)
4. Nozzle Outside Diameter (in.)
5. Nozzle Wall Thickness (in.)
6. Vessel Outside Diameter (in.)
7. Vessel Wall Thickness (in.)
8. Vessel Reinforcing Pad Thickness (in.)
9. Spare (not used)
10. Dist. to stiffeners or head (in.) (9999.99 = )
11. Dist. to opposite side stiffeners or head (in.) (9999.99 = )
12. Vessel centerline direction vector X
13. Vessel centerline direction vector Y
14. Vessel centerline direction vector Z
15. Vessel Temperature (optional) (F)
16. Vessel Material # (optional)(1-17)
For PD-5500 nozzles, the 16 items are:
1. Nozzle Node Number
2. Vessel Node Number (optional)
3. Nozzle type indicator (2.0-5500)

CAESAR II User's Guide

925

External Interfaces
4. Vessel Type (0-Cylinder, 1-Sphere)
5. Nozzle Outside Diameter (in.)
6. Vessel Outside Diameter (in.)
7. Vessel Wall Thickness (in.)
8. Vessel Reinforcing Pad Thickness (in.)
9. Spare (not used)
10. Dist. to stiffeners or head (in.) (9999.99 = )
11. Dist. to opposite side stiffeners or head (in.) (9999.99 = )
12. Vessel centerline direction vector X
13. Vessel centerline direction vector Y
14. Vessel centerline direction vector Z
15. Vessel Temperature (optional) (F)
16. Vessel Material # (optional) (1-17)
For API 650 nozzles, the 16 items are:
1. Nozzle
2. Specific gravity of fluid
3. Thermal expansion coefficient (in/in/deg)
4. Delta Temperature (F)
5. Elastic Modulus (psi)
Hangers - Describes the spring hangers in the input file. Some of the hanger data listed below
represents uninitialized data. In the instances where this uninitialized data represent infinite
values (such as maximum travel limit and available space), it is reported here as 9999.99.
The next line contains values for the following parameters in FORTRAN format (2X, I13,
5G13.6):
IDFTABLE is the default hanger table.
DEFVAR is the default for allowed load variation.
DEFRIG is the default for rigid support displacement criteria.
DEFMXTRAVEL is the default for maximum allowed travel.
DEFSHTSPR is the default for allowing short range springs (0=no 1=yes).
DEFMUL is the default multi-load case design option.
The next line contains values for the following parameters in the FORTRAN format (2X, 5I13):
IDFOPER is the default number of hanger design operating cases (always 1).
IACTCLD is the default cold load calculation switch (0=no, 1=yes).
IHGRLDS is the number of hanger operating loads (0 -3).
IACTUAL is the load case defining actual cold loads.
IMULTIOPTS is the multi-load case design option (1-7).
An array of hanger node numbers (IHGRNODE) is read and written for each hanger in the input
file and is dimensioned (N5). There are seven lines in the neutral file for this data if all N5
hangers are specified. Use the FORTRAN format (2X, 6I13).

926

CAESAR II User's Guide

External Interfaces
A 10-element array (HGRDAT) is read and written for each hanger in the input file. The
HGRDAT array is dimensioned (10,N5). Each hanger in the model requires two lines in the
neutral file. Use the FORTRAN format (2X, 6G13.6).
1. Hanger stiffness
2. Allowable load variation
3. Rigid support displacement criteria
4. Allowed space for hanger
5. Cold load #1 (theoretical)
6. Hot load #1 (initialize to 0.0)
7. User defined operating load f/ variable springs (init to 0.0)
8. Maximum allowed travel limit
9. Multiple load case design option
10. Hanger hardware weight
A four-element array (IHGRFREE) is read/written for each hanger in the input file. The
IHGRFREE array is dimensioned ( 4,N5). Each hanger in the file requires one line in the neutral
file.
Use FORTRAN format (2X, 6I13).
1. Anchor node to be freed (#1)
2. Anchor node to be freed (#2)
3. d.o.f. type for #1 (1-free Y, 2-free XY, 3-free ZY, 4-free X, Y, Z, 5-free all)
4. d.o.f. type for #2
An array (IHGRNUM) lists the number of hangers at this location for each hanger in the input
file. There is one entry here for every hanger in the file. The IHGRNUM array is dimensioned
(N5). There are seven lines in the neutral file for this data if all N5 hangers are specified. Use
the FORTRAN format (2X, 6I13).
An array (IHGRTABLE) lists the hanger table numbers for each hanger in the input file. There is
one entry here for every hanger in the file. The IHGRTABLE is dimensioned (N5). There are
seven lines in the neutral file for this data if all N5 hangers are specified. Use the FORTRAN
format (2X, 6I13).
An array of flags (IHGRSHORT) indicates if short range springs can be used at each hanger
location. The IHGRSHORT array is dimensioned (N5). There are seven lines in the neutral file
for this data. Use the FORTRAN format (2X, 6I13).
0 = cannot use short range springs
1 = can use short range springs
An array of connecting node numbers (IHGRCN) is available for each hanger. The IHGRCN
array is dimensioned (N5). There are seven lines in the neutral file for this data if all N5 hangers
are specified. Use the FORTRAN format (2X, 6I13).
Execution Options - Defines the execution options used by CAESAR II. Use the FORTRAN
format (2X, 4I13, G13.6, I13). This requires three lines in the neutral file. These values are:
Print forces on rigids and expansion joints 0=no, 1=yes
Print alphas & pipe props. during error checking 0=no, 1=yes
Activate Bourdon Pressure Effects 0, 1, or 2
Activate Branch Error and Coordinate Prompts 0=no, 1=yes
Thermal Bowing Delta Temperature degrees
Use Liberal Stress Allowable 0=no, 1=yes

CAESAR II User's Guide

927

External Interfaces
For the following data, use the FORTRAN format: (2X, I13, 2G13.6, 3I13):
Uniform Load Input in gs 0=no, 1=yes
Stress Stiffening due to Pressure 0, 1, 2
Ambient Temperature (If not 70.00 deg F ) degrees
FRP Expansion * 1,000,000 len/len/deg
Optimizer 0-Both, 1-CuthillMcKee, 2-Collins
Next Node Selection 0-Decreasing, 1-Increasing
For the following data, use the FORTRAN format (2X, 4I13, G13.6, I13):
Final Ordering 0-Reversed, 1-Not Reversed
Collins Ordering 0-Band, 1-No. of Coefficients
Degree Determination 0-Connections, 1-Band
User Control 0-None, 1-Allow User Re-Looping
FRP Shear ratio
Laminate type

Units Conversion Data

#$ UNITS - Defines both the conversion constants and the conversion labels. The conversion
constants are all REAL*4 values in FORTRAN format (2X, 6G13.6). This requires four lines in
the neutral file. The character definitions for the labels are listed below.
CNVLEN - Defines the length conversion
CNVFOR - Defines the force conversion
CNVMAS - Defines the mass conversion
CNVMIN - Defines the moment (input) conversion
CNVMOU - Defines the moment (output) conversion
CNVSTR - Defines the stress conversion
CNVTSC - Defines the temperature conversion
CNVTOF - Defines the temperature offset
CNVPRE - Defines the Pressure conversion
CNVYM - Defines the Youngs modulus conversion
CNVPDN - Defines the pipe density conversion
CNVIDN - Defines the insulation density conversion
CNVFDN - Defines the fluid density conversion
CNVTSF - Defines the translational stiffness conversion
CNVUNI - Defines the uniform load conversion
CNVWND - Defines the wind load conversion
CNVELE - Defines the elevation conversion
CNVCLN - Defines the compound length conversion
CNVDIA - Defines the diameter conversion
CNVTHK - Wall thickness conversion
Next, enter the following labels for units, one per line, in the format given in the label
descriptions. This requires 24 lines in the neutral file.
CCVNAME - Defines the name of the units used, such as English (CHARACTER*15)
CCVNOM - Sets On or Off, and tells PREPIP whether or not nominal diameters are allowed
(CHARACTER* 3)

928

CAESAR II User's Guide

External Interfaces
CCVLEN - Defines the length label (CHARACTER* 3)
CCVFOR - Defines the force label (CHARACTER* 3)
CCVMAS - Defines the mass label (CHARACTER* 3)
CCVMIN - Defines the moment (input) label (CHARACTER* 6)
CCVMOU - Defines the moment (output) label (CHARACTER* 6)
CCVSTR - Defines the stress label (CHARACTER*10)
CCVTSC - Defines the temperature label (CHARACTER* 1)
CCVTOF - Defines the temperature offset/label (CHARACTER* 1)
CCVPRE - Defines the pressure label (CHARACTER*10)
CCVYM - Defines Youngs modulus label (CHARACTER*10)
CCVPDN - Defines the pipe density label (CHARACTER*10)
CCVIDN - Defines the insulation density label (CHARACTER*10)
CCVFDN - Defines the fluid density label (CHARACTER*10)
CCVTSF - Defines the translational stiffness label (CHARACTER* 7)
CCVRSF - Defines the rotational stiffness label (CHARACTER*10)
CCVUNI - Defines the uniform load label (CHARACTER* 7)
CCVGLD - Defines the gravitational load label (CHARACTER* 3)
CCVWND - Defines the wind load label (CHARACTER*10)
CCVELE - Defines the elevation label (CHARACTER* 3)
CCVCLN - Defines the compound length label (CHARACTER* 3)
CCVDIA - Defines the diameter label (CHARACTER* 3)
CCVTHK - Defines the wall thickness label (CHARACTER* 3)

Nodal Coordinate Data

#$ COORDS - Specifies the X, Y, Z global coordinates of the starting node point of each
discontinuous piping segment. The data in this section of the neutral file is optional; it may not
exist. The existence of this data depends on user preference and the particular job. The data is
defined below.
NXYZ - Defines how many sets of coordinates follow. Use FORTRAN format (2X, I13).
INODE, XCORD, YCORD, ZCORD - Consists of four values in a line and is repeated NXYZ
times.
Use FORTRAN format (2X, I13, 3F13.4) to define a node number and the X, Y, Z global
coordinates.
This section only exists in Versions 3.22 and later.

CAESAR II Data Matrix

The generic CAESAR II data matrix input routine creates a CAESAR II file from a simple neutral
file. The Data Matrix Interface transfers only the piping geometry. This requires you to input
additional data to complete the stress model. It expects to read a file that contains a single line
of data for each pipe in the model. Each line of data contains 12 parameters as listed below.
ELMT - Defines the element number sequential from 1.
N1 - Defines the From node number.
N2 - Defines the To node number.

CAESAR II User's Guide

929

External Interfaces
DX - Defines the delta dimension in the global "X" direction.
DY - Defines the delta dimension in the global "Y" direction (the "Y" axis is vertical in
CAESAR II).
DZ - Defines the delta dimension in the global "Z" direction.
DIAM - Defines the actual pipe diameter.
THK - Defines the actual pipe wall thickness.
ANCH - Provides a restraint flag. A value of 1 sets the From node to be restrained. A zero (0)
value is otherwise and is currently ignored.
BEND - Defines the bend indicator. A value of 1 sets a bend at the To node. A zero (0) value is
no bend.
BRAD - Defines the bend radius if not a long radius bend.
RIGID - Defines a rigid element flag. A value of 1 sets the element to rigid. A value of zero (0)
value sets the element to nonrigid.
All values in the matrix should be real floating point numbers. The format for each line of data
must be (12E13.6). This generic interface prompts for an arbitrary conversion constant for the
delta dimensions, and the diameter /thickness values to overcome any differences between the
assumed units of the neutral file and the CAESAR II defaults.
If you are developing a completely new interface, use the CAESAR II Neutral File (on page 914).

Batch Output File

Aids in the generation of output from large Static models/runs.
1. Click Tools > External Interfaces > Batch Output File.
The Big-Print Setup dialog box displays.

2. Enter the job name in the Enter the job name for "batch" output processing box. The
default location is the current data directory displayed in the title bar of the Main menu. To
select another file, specify the full path name.
3. In the Output Device section, select the type of output file to be generated.
4. In the Report Selection section, select the check box for each type of report you want.

930

CAESAR II User's Guide

External Interfaces
5. Click OK.
The specific job is accessed and the Load Case Selection dialog box displays.
Hanger design cases, if they exist, are the first load cases listed in the dialog box.
Reports for hanger design cases are usually not generated.
6. Select the load cases to appear in the output report/file by checking the load cases you
want.
Reports are generated to the specified output file or device.
7. Click OK in the Done dialog box.
Output device
Ascii Text File

Job name.OUT located in same directory as the

original CAESAR II job

Binary file

Job name.BIN located in same directory as the

original CAESAR II job. The contents of the binary file
is the same as the text file, only formatted as binary
real* 4 data. Use this format to provide other
applications easy access to the data.

Active printer

Sent directly to the specified printer

Data Export Wizard

Provides export of both the input model and output data.
You can also export output data automatically with each analysis through ODBC
Settings in the configuration file under Database Definitions.
This wizard is compatible with ODBC Microsoft Access and Excel and can also export data in
XML format. The Excel interface produces a semicolon delimited text file that can quickly be
imported into Excel. You can access the Data Export Wizard by clicking Tools > External
Interfaces > Data Export Wizard.

Export Data Using the Data Export Wizard

1. Click Tools > Eternal Interfaces > Data Export Wizard.
The Data Export Wizard displays.
2. Review the export types and click Next to proceed.
3. On the Input and Output Files page, browse for the required CAESAR II piping file to
export. This file can be the .C2 file or the specific ._A file). By default, the current CAESAR II
file is selected for export.
4. Specify a revision number for the exported data set, if applicable.
5. Select Export Output Data Also if you want to include any output results (if available) in the
exported data set.
6. Select Use System Units to convert the output data to the set of units currently defined in
the CAESAR II Configure/Setup.

CAESAR II User's Guide

931

External Interfaces
7. Do one of the following:
a. Click Quick XML Export to transfer the input data to the "filename_ INPUT.xml" file and
output data to the "filename_OUTPUT.xml" file (where filename is the name of the file
you selected to export).
CAESAR II prompts you and asks if you want to open the newly exported file. Click OK to
open the file or Cancel to exit the wizard.

8.

9.

10.
11.

You must have the appropriate application installed to open the file format or the
exported file does not open.
b. Complete steps 8 through 15.
Click Browse in the Select the Data Export Output File box and navigate to the location of
the output data. CAESAR II defaults the output filename to the name of the file you have
open currently.
Select the Save as type list to specify the required data output. You can export files in the
following formats: .mdb (Microsoft Office 2001/2002/Access Database, .accdb (Microsoft
Office 2007/2010/Access Database), .txt (Microsoft Excel compatible text), or .xml
(Extensible Markup Language).
Click Save.
Click Next.
CAESAR II displays the CAESAR II Input Export Options dialog box.

12. Select the input options you want to export and then click Next.

932

CAESAR II User's Guide

External Interfaces
CAESAR II displays the CAESAR II Output Report Options dialog box.

13. Select the static load cases for your results and the output report options that you want to
export.
Several built-in reports, queries, and other helpful options are provided in the default
Access file format, or you can develop custom reports and queries.
14. Click Finish.
CAESAR II prompts you and asks if you want to open the newly exported file.
15. Do one of the following:
a. Click OK to open the exported file.
b. Click Cancel to close the wizard.

CAESAR II Input and Output Files Dialog Box

Select the file that you want to export.
Additionally, you can specify details about the file, such as a revision number, whether or not
you want output results included in the exported data set, and if you want to convert the output
data set into another unit of measure. Also, you specify for CAESAR II to perform a quick export
of the job, where CAESAR II uses a standard naming convention and exports the input and
output of the job into .xml format.

Select CAESAR II File

Browse and select the CAESAR II file that you want to export.
This file can be a CAESAR II (.C2) file or the specific CAESAR II binary input (._A) file. By
default, the current CAESAR II file is selected for export.

Specify Revision Number

Specifies a revision number for the CAESAR II exported file. The revision number is stored as
ISSUE_NO in the exported file.

CAESAR II User's Guide

933

External Interfaces

Export Output Data Also

Indicates whether you want to also export output reports. If you select this checkbox, CAESAR II
prompts you with the Output Report Options dialog box after you specify input export options.

Use System Units

Indicates that CAESAR II uses the units of measure specified in the CAESAR II configuration file
(Caesar.cfg, which is located in the current input file directory) for the exported output file. When
not selected, CAESAR II uses the units of measure specified in the selected input file.

Quick XML Export

Click Quick Xml Export if you want CAESAR II to export the selected file using all default
export options selected. CAESAR II immediately begins the export, exporting the input data to
the "filename_ INPUT.xml" file and output data to the "filename_OUTPUT.xml" file (where
filename is the name of the file you selected to export).

Select Data Export Output File

Click Browse to locate and select an existing output file to which you want to export the current
file, or specify a file name and format for the data export.
You can export files in the following formats: .mdb (Microsoft Office 2001/2002/Access
Database), .accdb (Microsoft Office 2007/2010/Access Database), .txt (Microsoft Excel
compatible text), or .xml (Extensible Markup Language).

CAESAR II Input Export Options Dialog Box

Select the input options to export.

Elements
Exports the basic element data including pointers to auxiliary data.
Microsoft Access table name: INPUT_BASIC_ELEMENT_DATA
XML Primary Tag: PIPINGELEMENT.

934

Data Name

Access Column Name XML Tag Name

From node number

FROM_NODE

FROM_NODE

To node number

TO_NODE

TO_NODE

Delta X

DELTA_X

DELTA_X

Delta Y

DELTA_Y

DELTA_Y

Delta Z

DELTA_Z

DELTA_Z

Diameter (actual OD)

DIAMETER

DIAMETER

Wall Thickness (actual)

WALL_THICK

WALL_THICK

Insulation Thickness

INSUL_THICK

INSUL_THICK

Corrosion Allowance

CORR_ALLOW

CORR_ALLOW

CAESAR II User's Guide

External Interfaces
Data Name

Access Column Name XML Tag Name

Thermal Expansion Coefficient #1 or

Temperature #1

TEMP_EXP_C1

TEMP_EXP_C1

Thermal Expansion Coefficient #2 or

Temperature #2

TEMP_EXP_C2

TEMP_EXP_C2

Thermal Expansion Coefficient #3 or

Temperature #3

TEMP_EXP_C3

TEMP_EXP_C3

Thermal Expansion Coefficient #4 or

Temperature #4

TEMP_EXP_C4

TEMP_EXP_C4

Thermal Expansion Coefficient #5 or

Temperature #5

TEMP_EXP_C5

TEMP_EXP_C5

Thermal Expansion Coefficient #6 or

Temperature #6

TEMP_EXP_C6

TEMP_EXP_C6

Thermal Expansion Coefficient #7 or

Temperature #7

TEMP_EXP_C7

TEMP_EXP_C7

Thermal Expansion Coefficient #8 or

Temperature #8

TEMP_EXP_C8

TEMP_EXP_C8

Thermal Expansion Coefficient #9 or

Temperature #9

TEMP_EXP_C9

TEMP_EXP_C9

Pressure #1

PRESSURE1

PRESSURE1

Pressure #2

PRESSURE2

PRESSURE2

Pressure #3

PRESSURE3

PRESSURE3

Pressure #4

PRESSURE4

PRESSURE4

Pressure #5

PRESSURE5

PRESSURE5

Pressure #6

PRESSURE6

PRESSURE6

Pressure #7

PRESSURE7

PRESSURE7

Pressure #8

PRESSURE8

PRESSURE8

Pressure #9

PRESSURE9

PRESSURE9

Elastic Modulus

MODULUS

MODULUS

Poisson's Ratio

POISSONS

POISSONS

Pipe Density

PIPE_DENSITY

PIPE_DENSITY

Insulation Density

INSUL_DENSITY

INSUL_DENSITY

Fluid Density

FLUID_DENSITY

FLUID_DENSITY

Material Number

MATERIAL_NUM

MATERIAL_NUM

Material Name

MATERIAL_NAME

MATERIAL_NAME

Plus Mill Tolerance

MILL_TOL_PLUS

MILL_TOL_PLUS

CAESAR II User's Guide

935

External Interfaces
Data Name

Access Column Name XML Tag Name

Minus Mill Tolerance

MILL_TOL_MINUS

MILL_TOL_MINUS

Seam Weld

SEAM_WELD

SEAM_WELD

Auxiliary Data Pointers

The auxiliary data pointers indicate the location of the details for each piece of auxiliary data.
For example, if Bend Pointer is equal to 1 here, then the details of this bend will be contained in
the Bend table where the bend number is also equal to 1.
Auxiliary pointers are only applicable to data export for Microsoft Access and Microsoft
Excel and not to XML.
Pointer Type

Access Column Name

XML Tag Name

Bend Auxiliary

BEND_PTR

BEND

Rigid Element Auxiliary

RIGID_PTR

RIGID

Expansion Joint Auxiliary

EXPJ_PTR

EXPANSIONJOINT

Restraint Auxiliary

REST_PTR

RESTRAINT

Displacement Auxiliary

DISP_PTR

DISPLACEMENTS

Force/Moment Auxiliary

FORCMNT_PTR

FORCEMOMENTS

Uniform Load Auxiliary

ULOAD_PTR

UNIFORMLOAD

Wind/Wave Load Auxiliary WLOAD_PTR

WIND OR WAVE

Element Offset Auxiliary

EOFF_PTR

OFFSET

Allowable Stress Auxiliary

ALLOW_PTR

ALLOWABLESTRESS

Intersection Auxiliary

INT_PTR

SIF

Hangers Auxiliary

HGR_PTR

HANGER

Nozzles Auxiliary

NOZ_PTR

NOZZLE

Reducers Auxiliary

REDUCER_PTR

REDUCER

Flanges Auxiliary

FLANGE_PTR

FLANGE

Bends
Exports all the bend information defined in the job. Below are the details of the bend data
available from CAESAR II along with the respective column names and XML tag names.
Microsoft Access table name: INPUT_BENDS
Microsoft Excel section name: BEND DATA
XML Primary Tag: BEND

936

Data Name

Access Column Name XML Tag Name

Bend Radius

RADIUS

RADIUS

CAESAR II User's Guide

External Interfaces
Data Name

Access Column Name XML Tag Name

Type
(1-Single flange,
2- double flange,
0 or blank- welded)

TYPE

TYPE

Angle to node position #1

ANGLE1

ANGLE1

Node number at position #1

NODE1

NODE1

Angle to node position #2

ANGLE2

ANGLE2

Node number at position #2

NODE2

NODE2

Angle to node position #3

ANGLE3

ANGLE3

Node number at position #3

NODE3

NODE3

Number of miter cuts

NUM_MITER

NUM_MITER

Fitting thickness of bend if

different from the pipe

FIT_THICK

FITTINGTHICKNESS

Access and Excel contain a number that identifies on which element they were defined.
INPUT_BASIC_ELEMENT_DATA.BEND_PTR = INPUT_BENDS.BEND_PTR

Rigids
Exports rigid information of all rigid elements defined in the input file.
Microsoft Access table name: INPUT_RIGIDS
Microsoft Excel Section Name: RIGID DATA
XML Primary Tag: RIGID
Data Name

Access Column Name

XML Tag Name

Rigid Weight

RIGID_WGT

WEIGHT

Access and Excel contain a number that identifies on which element they were defined.
INPUT_BASIC_ELEMENT_DATA.RIGID_PTR = INPUT_BENDS.RIGID_NUM.

Expansion Joints
Export expansion joint information of all expansion joints defined in the input file.
Microsoft Access table name: INPUT_EXPJT
Microsoft Excel Section Name: EXPANSION JOINT DATA
XML Primary Tag Name: EXPANSIONJOINT
Data Name

Access Column Name

XML Tag Name

Axial stiffness

AXIAL_STIF

AXIAL_STIF

Transverse stiffness

TRANS_STIF

TRANS_STIF

Bending Stiffness

BEND_STIF

BEND_STIF

Torsional stiffness

TORS_STIF

TORS_STIF

Effective inside bellows diameter BEL_DIA

CAESAR II User's Guide

BEL_DIA

937

External Interfaces
Access and Excel contain a number that identifies on which element they were defined.
INPUT_BASIC_ELEMENT_DATA.EXPJT_PTR = INPUT_EXPJT.EXPJT_PTR.

Restraints
Export Restraint information of all restraints defined in the input file.
Microsoft Access Table Name: INPUT_RESTRAINTS
Microsoft Excel Section Name: RESTRAINT DATA
XML Primary Tag Name: RESTRAINT
Data Name

Column Name

XML Tag Name

Node number

NODE_NUM

NODE

Restraint type (see

"Restraint Codes" on
page 951)

TYPE

TYPE

Stiffness

STIFFNESS

STIFFNESS

Gap

GAP

GAP

Friction coefficient

FRIC_COEF

FRIC_COEF

Connecting node

CNODE

CNODE

X direction cosine

XCOSINE

XCOSINE

Y direction cosine

YCOSINE

YCOSINE

Z direction cosine

ZCOSINE

ZCOSINE

Access and Excel contain a number that identifies on which element they were defined.
INPUT_BASIC_ELEMENT_DATA.REST_PTR = INPUT_RESTRAINTS.REST_PTR.

Displacements
Export user specified displacement information defined in the input file.
Microsoft Access Table Name: INPUT_DISPLMNT
Microsoft Excel Section Name: DISPLACEMENT DATA
XML Primary Tag Name: DISPLACEMENTS
Data Name

938

Column Name

XML Tag Name

Displacement Number DISP_NUM

DISP_NUM

Node Number

NODE_NUM

NODE_NUM

Vector Number

VECTOR_NUM

NUMBER*

X axis displacement

DX

DX*

Y axis displacement

DY

DY*

Z axis displacement

DZ

DZ*

X axis rotation

RX

RX*

Y axis rotation

RY

RY*

Z axis rotation

RX

RX*

CAESAR II User's Guide

External Interfaces
*These tags are child tags of the VECTOR tag.
Access and Excel contain a number that identifies on which element they were defined.
INPUT_BASIC_ELEMENT_DATA.DISP_PTR = INPUT_DISPLMNT.DISP_PTR

Forces/Moments
Export user specified forces/moments information defined in the input file.
Microsoft Access Table Name: INPUT_FORCMNT
Microsoft Excel Section Name: FORCES/MOMENTS DATA
XML Primary Tag Name: FORCESMOMENTS
Data Name

Column Name

XML Tag Name

Force/Moment Number FORCMNT_NUM

FORCMNT_NUM

Node Number

NODE_NUM

NODE_NUM

Vector Number

VECTOR_NUM

NUMBER*

X axis force

FX

FX*

Y axis force

FY

FY*

Z axis force

FZ

FZ*

X axis moment

MX

MX*

Y axis moment

MY

MY*

Z axis moment

MX

MX*

*These tags are child tags of the VECTOR tag.

Access and Excel contain a number that identifies on which element they were defined.
INPUT_BASIC_ELEMENT_DATA.FORCMNT_PTR = INPUT_FORCMNT.FORCMNT_PTR

Uniform Load
Export user specified uniform load information defined in the input file.
Microsoft Access Table Name: INPUT_UNIFORM
Microsoft Excel Section Name: UNIFORM LOAD DATA
XML Primary Tag Name: UNIFORMLOAD
Data Name

Column Name

XML Tag Name

Uniform Load Number UNIF_NUM

UNIF_NUM

X axis load

UX

UX

Y axis load

UY

UY

Z axis load

UZ

UZ

Access and Excel contain a number that identifies on which element they were defined.
INPUT_BASIC_ELEMENT_DATA.ULOAD_PTR = INPUT_UNIFORM.ULOAD_PTR

CAESAR II User's Guide

939

External Interfaces
Wind / Wave
Export user specified wind or wave information defined in the input file.
Microsoft Access Table Name: INPUT_WIND
Microsoft Excel Section Name: WIND/WAVE DATA
XML Primary Tag Name: WIND or WAVE
Data Name

Column Name

XML Tag Name

Entry Type

ENTRY_TYPE

Not Applicable

Wind Shape Factor OR Wave

Drag Coefficient

WSHAP_WDRC

WSHAP_WDRC

Wave added mass coefficient

WADD_MASS

WADD_MASS

Wave Lift Coefficient

WLIFT_COEFF

WLIFT_COEFF

Wave Marine Growth

WMAR_GROWTH WMAR_GROWTH

Access and Excel contain a number that identifies on which element they were defined.
INPUT_BASIC_ELEMENT_DATA.WLOAD_PTR = INPUT_WIND.WIND_PTR

Offsets
Export user specified offset information defined in the input file.
Microsoft Access Table Name: INPUT_OFFSETS
Microsoft Excel Section Name: OFFSET DATA
Microsoft XML Primary Tag Name: OFFSET
Data Name

Column Name

XML Tag Name

From node offset in X direction

FROMX

FROMX

From node offset in Y direction

FROMY

FROMY

From node offset in Z direction

FROMZ

FROMZ

To node offset in X direction

TOX

TOX

To node offset in Y direction

TOY

TOY

To node offset in Z direction

TOZ

TOZ

Access and Excel contain a number that identifies on which element they were defined.
INPUT_BASIC_ELEMENT_DATA.OFFSETS_PTR = INPUT_OFFSETS.OFFSETS_PTR

Allowables
Export user specified allowable stress information defined in the input file.
Microsoft Access Table Name: INPUT_ALLOWBLS
Microsoft Excel Section Name: ALLOWABLE STRESS DATA
XML Primary Tag Name: ALLOWABLESTRESS

940

Data Name

Column Name

XML Tag Name

Case Number

CASE_NUM

CASE_NUM

Cold Allowable

COLD_ALLOW

COLD_ALLOW

CAESAR II User's Guide

External Interfaces
Eff

EFF

EFF

Sy

SY

SY

Fac

FAC

FAC

PMax

PMAX

PMAX

Piping Code

PIPING_CODE

PIPING_CODE

Hot Allowable

HOT_ALLOW

HOT_ALLOW*

Cyclic Reduction Factor

CYC_RED_FACTOR

CYC_RED_FACTOR*

Cycles for BW (butt-weld) fatigue pair

BUTTWELDCYCLES

BUTTWELDCYCLES*

Stress for BW fatigue pair

BUTTWELDSTRESS

BUTTWELDSTRESS*

Cycles for FW (fillet-weld) fatigue pair FILLETWELDCYCLES

FILLETWELDCYCLES*

Stress for FW fatigue pair

FILLETWELDSTRESS*

FILLETWELDSTRESS

* These tags are child tags of CASE_NUM (can range from 1 through 9)
Access and Excel contain a number that identifies on which element they were defined.
INPUT_BASIC_ELEMENT_DATA.ALLOW_PTR = INPUT_ALLOWBLS.ALLOW_PTR

SIF's & Tees

Export user specified SIF information defined in the input file.
Microsoft Access Table Name: INPUT_SIFTEES
Microsoft Excel Section Name: SIF DATA
XML Primary Tag Name: SIF
Data Name

Column Name

XML Tag Name

SIF Number

SIF_NUM

SIF_NUM

Node Number

NODE

NODE

Type

TYPE

TYPE

SIF In-Plane

SIF_IN

SIF_IN

SIF Out-Plane

SIF_OUT

SIF_OUT

Circumferential Weld

WELD_D

WELD_D

Fillet

FILLET

FILLET

Pad Thickness

PAD_THK

PAD_THK

FTG Ro

FTG_RO

FTG_RO

Crotch

CROTCH

CROTCH

Weld ID

WELD_ID

WELD_ID

B1

B1

B1

B2

B2

B2

CAESAR II User's Guide

941

External Interfaces
Access and Excel contain a number that identifies on which element they were defined.
INPUT_BASIC_ELEMENT_DATA.INT_PTR = INPUT_SIFTEES.SIF_PTR

WRC297 Nozzle
Export user specified WRC297 nozzle information defined in the input file.
Microsoft Access Table Name: INPUT_NOZZLES_WRC297
Microsoft Excel Section Name: WRC297 NOZZLE DATA
XML Primary Tag Name: WRC297_NOZZLE
Data Name

Column Name

XML Tag Name

Nozzle Node Number

NOZZLE_NODE

NOZZLE_NODE

Vessel Node Number

VESSEL_NODE

VESSEL_NODE

Nozzle Outside Diameter

NOZ_OD

NOZ_OD

Nozzle Wall Thickness

NOZ_WT

NOZ_WT

Vessel Outside Diameter

VES_OD

VES_OD

Vessel Wall Thickness

VES_WT

VES_WT

Vessel Reinforcing Pad Thickness

VES_RPT

VES_RPT

Dist. to stiffeners or head

DIST_HEAD

DIST_HEAD

Dist. to opposite side stiffeners or head

DIST_OPP_HEAD

DIST_OPP_HEAD

Vessel centerline direction vector X

VES_CENT_X

VES_CENT_X

Vessel centerline direction vector Y

VES_CENT_Y

VES_CENT_Y

Vessel centerline direction vector Z

VES_CENT_Z

VES_CENT_Z

Vessel Temperature

VES_TEMP

VES_TEMP

Vessel Material #

VES_MAT

VES_MAT

Material Name

MATERIAL_NAME

MATERIAL_NAME

Access and Excel contain a number that identifies on which element they were defined.
INPUT_BASIC_ELEMENT_DATA.NOZ_PTR = INPUT_NOZZLES_WRC297.NOZ_PTR

API650 Nozzle
Export user specified API650 nozzle information defined in the input file.
Microsoft Access Table Name: INPUT_NOZZLES_API650
Microsoft Excel Section Name: API650 NOZZLE DATA
XML Primary Tag Name: API650_NOZZLE

942

Data Name

Column Name

XML Tag Name

Nozzle Node Number

NOZZLE_NODE

NOZZLE_NODE

Tank Node Number

TANK_NODE

TANK_NODE

Nozzle Outside Diameter

NOZ_OD

NOZ_OD

Nozzle Wall Thickness

NOZ_WT

NOZ_WT

CAESAR II User's Guide

External Interfaces
Data Name

Column Name

XML Tag Name

Tank Outside Diameter

TANK_OD

TANK_OD

Tank Wall Thickness

TANK_WT

TANK_WT

Reinforcing

REINFORCE

REINFORCE

Nozzle height

NOZ_HEIGHT

NOZ_HEIGHT

Fluid height

FLUID_HEIGHT

FLUID_HEIGHT

Fluid specific gravity

FLUID_SG

FLUID_SG

Thermal expansion coefficient THERM_EXP_COEFF THERM_EXP_COEFF

Temperature change

DELTAT

DELTAT

Elastic modulus

EMOD

EMOD

Access and Excel contain a number that identifies on which element they were defined.
INPUT_BASIC_ELEMENT_DATA.NOZ_PTR = INPUT_NOZZLES_API650.NOZ_PTR

BS5500 Nozzle
Export user specified BS5500 nozzle information defined in the input file.
Microsoft Access Table Name: INPUT_NOZZLES_BS5500
Microsoft Excel Section Name: BS5500 NOZZLE DATA
XML Primary Tag Name: BS5500_NOZZLE
Data Name

Column Name

XML Tag Name

Nozzle Node Number

NOZZLE_NODE

NOZZLE_NODE

Vessel Node Number

VESSEL_NODE

VESSEL_NODE

Vessel Type

VESSEL_TYPE

VESSEL_TYPE

Nozzle Outside Diameter

NOZ_OD

NOZ_OD

Vessel Outside Diameter

VES_OD

VES_OD

Vessel Wall Thickness

VES_WT

VES_WT

Vessel Reinforcing Pad Thickness

VES_RPT

VES_RPT

Dist. to stiffeners or head

DIST_HEAD

DIST_HEAD

Dist. to opposite side stiffeners or head DIST_OPP_HEAD

DIST_OPP_HEAD

Vessel centerline direction vector X

VES_CENT_X

VES_CENT_X

Vessel centerline direction vector Y

VES_CENT_Y

VES_CENT_Y

Vessel centerline direction vector Z

VES_CENT_Z

VES_CENT_Z

Vessel Temperature

VES_TEMP

VES_TEMP

Vessel Material #

VES_MAT

VES_MAT

Material Name

MATERIAL_NAME

MATERIAL_NAME

CAESAR II User's Guide

943

External Interfaces
Access and Excel contain a number that identifies on which element they were defined.
INPUT_BASIC_ELEMENT_DATA.NOZ_PTR = INPUT_NOZZLES_BS5500.NOZ_PTR

Hangers
Export user specified hanger information defined in the input file.
Microsoft Access Table Name: INPUT_HANGERS
Microsoft Excel Section Name: HANGER DATA
XML Primary Tag Name: HANGER
Data Name

Column Name

XML Tag Name

Node number

NODE

NODE

Connecting node

CNODE

CNODE

Constant effort support load or

stiffness

CONST_EFF_LOAD

CONST_EFF_LOAD

Rigid support displacement criteria

RIGID_SUP

RIGID_SUP

Load variation

LOAD_VAR

LOAD_VAR

Available space for hanger

AVAIL_SPACE

AVAIL_SPACE

Theoretical cold load

COLD_LOAD

COLD_LOAD

Operating load

HOT_LOAD

HOT_LOAD

Maximum travel limit

MAX_TRAVEL

MAX_TRAVEL

Multiple load case option

MULTI_LC

MULTI_LC

Anchor to be freed #1

FREEANCHOR1

FREEANCHOR1

Anchor to be freed #2

FREEANCHOR2

FREEANCHOR2

Degree of freedom for #1

DOFTYPE1

DOFTYPE1

Degree of freedom for #2

DOFTYPE2

DOFTYPE2

Number of hangers

NUM_HGR

NUM_HGR

Hanger table

HGR_TABLE

HGR_TABLE

Short range springs

SHORT_RANGE

SHORT_RANGE

Access and Excel contain a number that identifies on which element they were defined.
INPUT_BASIC_ELEMENT_DATA.HGR_PTR = INPUT_HANGERS.HGR_PTR

944

CAESAR II User's Guide

External Interfaces
Reducers
Export user specified reducer information defined in the input file.
Microsoft Access Table Name: INPUT_REDUCERS
Microsoft Excel Section Name:
XML Primary Tag Name:
Data Name

Column Name

XML Tag Name

DIAMETER2

DIAMETERS2

THICKNESS2

THICKNESS2

ALPHA

ALPHA

R1

R1

R2

R2

Access and Excel contain a number that identifies on which element they were defined.
INPUT_BASIC_ELEMENT_DATA.RED_PTR = INPUT_REDUCERS.RED_PTR

Flanges
Export user specified flange information defined in the input file.
Microsoft Access Table Name: INPUT_FLANGES
Microsoft Excel Section Name:
XML Primary Tag Name:
Data Name

CAESAR II User's Guide

Column Name

XML Tag Name

FLANGE_LOCATION

FLANGE_LOCATION

METHOD

METHOD

CLASS_GRADE

CLASS_GRADE

GASKET_DIAMETER

GASKET_DIAMETER

BOLT_CIRCLE_DIA

BOLT_CIRCLE_DIA

BOLT_AREA

BOLT_AREA

SY_COLD

SY_COLD

SY1

SY1

SY2

SY2

SY3

SY3

SY4

SY4

SY5

SY5

SY6

SY6

SY7

SY7

SY8

SY8

SY9

SY9

945

External Interfaces
Data Name

Column Name

XML Tag Name

TEMPERATURE1 through
TEMPERATURE24

TEMPERATURE1
through
TEMPERATURE24

PRESSURE1 through
PRESSURE24

PRESSURE1 through
PRESSURE24

Access and Excel contain a number that identifies on which element they were defined.
INPUT_BASIC_ELEMENT_DATA.FLG_PTR = INPUT_FLANGES.FLG_PTR

Title
Export user specified title information defined in the input file.
Microsoft Access Table Name: INPUT_TITLE
Microsoft Excel Section Name:
XML Primary Tag Name:
Data Name

Column Name

XML Tag Name

TITLE

TITLE

Equipment
Export user specified equipment information defined in the input file.
Microsoft Access Table Name: INPUT_EQUIPMENT
Microsoft Excel Section Name:
XML Primary Tag Name:
Data Name

946

Column Name

XML Tag Name

NODE1

NODE1

FX1

FX1

FY1

FY1

FZ1

FZ1

MX1

MX1

MY1

MY1

MZ1

MZ1

COSX1

COSX1

COSY1

COSY1

COSZ1

COSZ1

RATING1

RATING1

METHOD1

METHOD1

NODE2

NODE2

CAESAR II User's Guide

External Interfaces
Data Name

Column Name

XML Tag Name

FX2

FX2

FY2

FY2

FZ2

FZ2

MX2

MX2

MY2

MY2

MZ2

MZ2

COSX2

COSX2

COSY2

COSY2

COSZ2

COSZ2

RATING2

RATING2

METHOD2

METHOD2

Access and Excel contain a number that identifies on which element they were defined.
INPUT_BASIC_ELEMENT_DATA.EQP_PTR = INPUT_EQUIPMENT.EQP_PTR

Elements Input Export Option - SHARED

Exports the basic element data including pointers to auxiliary data.
Microsoft Access table name: INPUT_BASIC_ELEMENT_DATA
XML Primary Tag: PIPINGELEMENT.
Data Name

Access Column
Name

XML Tag Name

From node number

FROM_NODE

FROM_NODE

To node number

TO_NODE

TO_NODE

Delta X

DELTA_X

DELTA_X

Delta Y

DELTA_Y

DELTA_Y

Delta Z

DELTA_Z

DELTA_Z

Diameter (actual OD)

DIAMETER

DIAMETER

Wall Thickness (actual)

WALL_THICK

WALL_THICK

Insulation Thickness

INSUL_THICK

INSUL_THICK

Corrosion Allowance

CORR_ALLOW

CORR_ALLOW

Thermal Expansion Coefficient #1

or Temperature #1

TEMP_EXP_C1

TEMP_EXP_C1

Thermal Expansion Coefficient #2

or Temperature #2

TEMP_EXP_C2

TEMP_EXP_C2

Thermal Expansion Coefficient #3

or Temperature #3

TEMP_EXP_C3

TEMP_EXP_C3

CAESAR II User's Guide

947

External Interfaces

948

Data Name

Access Column
Name

XML Tag Name

Thermal Expansion Coefficient #4

or Temperature #4

TEMP_EXP_C4

TEMP_EXP_C4

Thermal Expansion Coefficient #5

or Temperature #5

TEMP_EXP_C5

TEMP_EXP_C5

Thermal Expansion Coefficient #6

or Temperature #6

TEMP_EXP_C6

TEMP_EXP_C6

Thermal Expansion Coefficient #7

or Temperature #7

TEMP_EXP_C7

TEMP_EXP_C7

Thermal Expansion Coefficient #8

or Temperature #8

TEMP_EXP_C8

TEMP_EXP_C8

Thermal Expansion Coefficient #9

or Temperature #9

TEMP_EXP_C9

TEMP_EXP_C9

Pressure #1

PRESSURE1

PRESSURE1

Pressure #2

PRESSURE2

PRESSURE2

Pressure #3

PRESSURE3

PRESSURE3

Pressure #4

PRESSURE4

PRESSURE4

Pressure #5

PRESSURE5

PRESSURE5

Pressure #6

PRESSURE6

PRESSURE6

Pressure #7

PRESSURE7

PRESSURE7

Pressure #8

PRESSURE8

PRESSURE8

Pressure #9

PRESSURE9

PRESSURE9

Elastic Modulus

MODULUS

MODULUS

Poisson's Ratio

POISSONS

POISSONS

Pipe Density

PIPE_DENSITY

PIPE_DENSITY

Insulation Density

INSUL_DENSITY

INSUL_DENSITY

Fluid Density

FLUID_DENSITY

FLUID_DENSITY

Material Number

MATERIAL_NUM

MATERIAL_NUM

Material Name

MATERIAL_NAME

MATERIAL_NAME

Plus Mill Tolerance

MILL_TOL_PLUS

MILL_TOL_PLUS

Minus Mill Tolerance

MILL_TOL_MINUS

MILL_TOL_MINUS

Seam Weld

SEAM_WELD

SEAM_WELD

CAESAR II User's Guide

External Interfaces
Auxiliary Data Pointers
The auxiliary data pointers indicate the location of the details for each piece of auxiliary data.
For example, if Bend Pointer is equal to 1 here, then the details of this bend will be contained in
the Bend table where the bend number is also equal to 1.
Auxiliary pointers are only applicable to data export for Microsoft Access and Microsoft
Excel and not to XML.
Pointer Type

Access Column Name

XML Tag Name

Bend Auxiliary

BEND_PTR

BEND

Rigid Element Auxiliary

RIGID_PTR

RIGID

Expansion Joint Auxiliary

EXPJ_PTR

EXPANSIONJOINT

Restraint Auxiliary

REST_PTR

RESTRAINT

Displacement Auxiliary

DISP_PTR

DISPLACEMENTS

Force/Moment Auxiliary

FORCMNT_PTR

FORCEMOMENTS

Uniform Load Auxiliary

ULOAD_PTR

UNIFORMLOAD

Wind/Wave Load Auxiliary WLOAD_PTR

WIND OR WAVE

Element Offset Auxiliary

EOFF_PTR

OFFSET

Allowable Stress Auxiliary

ALLOW_PTR

ALLOWABLESTRESS

Intersection Auxiliary

INT_PTR

SIF

Hangers Auxiliary

HGR_PTR

HANGER

Nozzles Auxiliary

NOZ_PTR

NOZZLE

Reducers Auxiliary

REDUCER_PTR

REDUCER

Flanges Auxiliary

FLANGE_PTR

FLANGE

Bends Input Export Option - SHARED

Exports all the bend information defined in the job. Below are the details of the bend data
available from CAESAR II along with the respective column names and XML tag names.
Microsoft Access table name: INPUT_BENDS
Microsoft Excel section name: BEND DATA
XML Primary Tag: BEND
Data Name

Access Column Name XML Tag Name

Bend Radius

RADIUS

RADIUS

Type
(1-Single flange,
2- double flange,
0 or blank- welded)

TYPE

TYPE

Angle to node position #1

ANGLE1

ANGLE1

Node number at position #1

NODE1

NODE1

Angle to node position #2

ANGLE2

ANGLE2

CAESAR II User's Guide

949

External Interfaces
Data Name

Access Column Name XML Tag Name

Node number at position #2

NODE2

NODE2

Angle to node position #3

ANGLE3

ANGLE3

Node number at position #3

NODE3

NODE3

Number of miter cuts

NUM_MITER

NUM_MITER

Fitting thickness of bend if different FIT_THICK

from the pipe

FITTINGTHICK
NESS

Access and Excel contain a number that identifies on which element they were defined.
INPUT_BASIC_ELEMENT_DATA.BEND_PTR = INPUT_BENDS.BEND_PTR

Rigids Input Export Option - SHARED

Exports rigid information of all rigid elements defined in the input file.
Microsoft Access table name: INPUT_RIGIDS
Microsoft Excel Section Name: RIGID DATA
XML Primary Tag: RIGID
Data Name

Access Column Name

XML Tag Name

Rigid Weight

RIGID_WGT

WEIGHT

Access and Excel contain a number that identifies on which element they were defined.
INPUT_BASIC_ELEMENT_DATA.RIGID_PTR = INPUT_BENDS.RIGID_NUM.

Expansion Joints Input Export Option - SHARED

Export expansion joint information of all expansion joints defined in the input file.
Microsoft Access table name: INPUT_EXPJT
Microsoft Excel Section Name: EXPANSION JOINT DATA
XML Primary Tag Name: EXPANSIONJOINT
Data Name

Access Column Name

XML Tag Name

Axial stiffness

AXIAL_STIF

AXIAL_STIF

Transverse stiffness

TRANS_STIF

TRANS_STIF

Bending Stiffness

BEND_STIF

BEND_STIF

Torsional stiffness

TORS_STIF

TORS_STIF

Effective inside bellows diameter BEL_DIA

BEL_DIA

Access and Excel contain a number that identifies on which element they were defined.
INPUT_BASIC_ELEMENT_DATA.EXPJT_PTR = INPUT_EXPJT.EXPJT_PTR.

950

CAESAR II User's Guide

External Interfaces

Restraints Input Export Option - SHARED

Export Restraint information of all restraints defined in the input file.
Microsoft Access Table Name: INPUT_RESTRAINTS
Microsoft Excel Section Name: RESTRAINT DATA
XML Primary Tag Name: RESTRAINT
Data Name

Column Name

XML Tag Name

Node number

NODE_NUM

NODE

Restraint type (see

"Restraint Codes" on
page 951)

TYPE

TYPE

Stiffness

STIFFNESS

STIFFNESS

Gap

GAP

GAP

Friction coefficient

FRIC_COEF

FRIC_COEF

Connecting node

CNODE

CNODE

X direction cosine

XCOSINE

XCOSINE

Y direction cosine

YCOSINE

YCOSINE

Z direction cosine

ZCOSINE

ZCOSINE

Access and Excel contain a number that identifies on which element they were defined.
INPUT_BASIC_ELEMENT_DATA.REST_PTR = INPUT_RESTRAINTS.REST_PTR.

Restraint Codes
There are 62 different restraints available in CAESAR II. When the restraint information is
exported to a format such as Microsoft Access, a restraint type code is exported. The following
is the key for those restraint codes.
Code

Abbreviation Type

ANC

Anchor

Translational Double Acting

Translational Double Acting

Translational Double Acting

RX

Rotational Double Acting

RY

Rotational Double Acting

RZ

Rotational Double Acting

GUI

Guide, Double Acting

LIM

Double Acting Limit Stop

10

XSNB

Translational Double Acting Snubber

11

YSNB

Translational Double Acting Snubber

CAESAR II User's Guide

951

External Interfaces

952

Code

Abbreviation Type

12

ZSNB

Translational Double Acting Snubber

13

+X

Translational Directional

14

+Y

Translational Directional

15

+Z

Translational Directional

16

-X

Translational Directional

17

-Y

Translational Directional

18

-Z

Translational Directional

19

+RX

Rotational Directional

20

+RY

Rotational Directional

21

+RZ

Rotational Directional

22

-RX

Rotational Directional

23

-RY

Rotational Directional

24

-RZ

Rotational Directional

25

+LIM

Directional Limit Stop

26

-LIM

Directional Limit Stop

27

XROD

Large Rotation Rod

28

YROD

Large Rotation Rod

29

ZROD

Large Rotation Rod

30

+XROD

Large Rotation Rod

31

+YROD

Large Rotation Rod

32

+ZROD

Large Rotation Rod

33

-XROD

Large Rotation Rod

34

-YROD

Large Rotation Rod

35

-ZROD

Large Rotation Rod

36

X2

Translational Double Acting Bilinear

37

Y2

Translational Double Acting Bilinear

38

Z2

Translational Double Acting Bilinear

39

RX2

Rotational Double Acting Bilinear

40

RY2

Rotational Double Acting Bilinear

41

RZ2

Rotational Double Acting Bilinear

42

+X2

Translational Directional Bilinear

43

+Y2

Translational Directional Bilinear

CAESAR II User's Guide

External Interfaces
Code

Abbreviation Type

44

+Z2

Translational Directional Bilinear

45

-X2

Translational Directional Bilinear

46

-Y2

Translational Directional Bilinear

47

-Z2

Translational Directional Bilinear

48

+RX2

Rotational Directional Bilinear

49

+RY2

Rotational Directional Bilinear

50

+RZ2

Rotational Directional Bilinear

51

+X2

Rotational Directional Bilinear

52

+Y2

Rotational Directional Bilinear

53

+Z2

Rotational Directional Bilinear

54

-X2

Rotational Directional Bilinear

55

-Y2

Rotational Directional Bilinear

56

-Z2

Rotational Directional Bilinear

57

+XSNB

Directional Snubber

58

+YSNB

Directional Snubber

59

+ZSNB

Directional Snubber

60

-XSNB

Directional Snubber

61

-YSNB

Directional Snubber

62

-ZSNB

Directional Snubber

Displacements Input Export Option - SHARED

Export user specified displacement information defined in the input file.
Microsoft Access Table Name: INPUT_DISPLMNT
Microsoft Excel Section Name: DISPLACEMENT DATA
XML Primary Tag Name: DISPLACEMENTS
Data Name

Column Name

XML Tag Name

Displacement Number DISP_NUM

DISP_NUM

Node Number

NODE_NUM

NODE_NUM

Vector Number

VECTOR_NUM

NUMBER*

X axis displacement

DX

DX*

Y axis displacement

DY

DY*

Z axis displacement

DZ

DZ*

X axis rotation

RX

RX*

CAESAR II User's Guide

953

External Interfaces
Data Name

Column Name

XML Tag Name

Y axis rotation

RY

RY*

Z axis rotation

RX

RX*

*These tags are child tags of the VECTOR tag.

Access and Excel contain a number that identifies on which element they were defined.
INPUT_BASIC_ELEMENT_DATA.DISP_PTR = INPUT_DISPLMNT.DISP_PTR

Forces Moments Input Export Option - SHARED

Export user specified forces/moments information defined in the input file.
Microsoft Access Table Name: INPUT_FORCMNT
Microsoft Excel Section Name: FORCES/MOMENTS DATA
XML Primary Tag Name: FORCESMOMENTS
Data Name

Column Name

XML Tag Name

Force/Moment Number FORCMNT_NUM

FORCMNT_NUM

Node Number

NODE_NUM

NODE_NUM

Vector Number

VECTOR_NUM

NUMBER*

X axis force

FX

FX*

Y axis force

FY

FY*

Z axis force

FZ

FZ*

X axis moment

MX

MX*

Y axis moment

MY

MY*

Z axis moment

MX

MX*

*These tags are child tags of the VECTOR tag.

Access and Excel contain a number that identifies on which element they were defined.
INPUT_BASIC_ELEMENT_DATA.FORCMNT_PTR = INPUT_FORCMNT.FORCMNT_PTR

Uniform Load Input Export Option - SHARED

Export user specified uniform load information defined in the input file.
Microsoft Access Table Name: INPUT_UNIFORM
Microsoft Excel Section Name: UNIFORM LOAD DATA
XML Primary Tag Name: UNIFORMLOAD
Data Name

954

Column Name

XML Tag Name

Uniform Load Number UNIF_NUM

UNIF_NUM

X axis load

UX

UX

Y axis load

UY

UY

Z axis load

UZ

UZ

CAESAR II User's Guide

External Interfaces
Access and Excel contain a number that identifies on which element they were defined.
INPUT_BASIC_ELEMENT_DATA.ULOAD_PTR = INPUT_UNIFORM.ULOAD_PTR

Wind Wave Input Export Option - SHARED

Export user specified wind or wave information defined in the input file.
Microsoft Access Table Name: INPUT_WIND
Microsoft Excel Section Name: WIND/WAVE DATA
XML Primary Tag Name: WIND or WAVE
Data Name

Column Name

XML Tag Name

Entry Type

ENTRY_TYPE

Not Applicable

Wind Shape Factor OR Wave

Drag Coefficient

WSHAP_WDRC

WSHAP_WDRC

Wave added mass coefficient

WADD_MASS

WADD_MASS

Wave Lift Coefficient

WLIFT_COEFF

WLIFT_COEFF

Wave Marine Growth

WMAR_GROWTH WMAR_GROWTH

Access and Excel contain a number that identifies on which element they were defined.
INPUT_BASIC_ELEMENT_DATA.WLOAD_PTR = INPUT_WIND.WIND_PTR

CAESAR II User's Guide

955

External Interfaces

Offsets Input Export Option - SHARED

Export user specified offset information defined in the input file.
Microsoft Access Table Name: INPUT_OFFSETS
Microsoft Excel Section Name: OFFSET DATA
Microsoft XML Primary Tag Name: OFFSET
Data Name

Column Name

XML Tag Name

From node offset in X direction

FROMX

FROMX

From node offset in Y direction

FROMY

FROMY

From node offset in Z direction

FROMZ

FROMZ

To node offset in X direction

TOX

TOX

To node offset in Y direction

TOY

TOY

To node offset in Z direction

TOZ

TOZ

Access and Excel contain a number that identifies on which element they were defined.
INPUT_BASIC_ELEMENT_DATA.OFFSETS_PTR = INPUT_OFFSETS.OFFSETS_PTR

Allowables Input Export Option - SHARED

Export user specified allowable stress information defined in the input file.
Microsoft Access Table Name: INPUT_ALLOWBLS
Microsoft Excel Section Name: ALLOWABLE STRESS DATA
XML Primary Tag Name: ALLOWABLESTRESS
Data Name

Column Name

XML Tag Name

Case Number

CASE_NUM

CASE_NUM

Cold Allowable

COLD_ALLOW

COLD_ALLOW

Eff

EFF

EFF

Sy

SY

SY

Fac

FAC

FAC

PMax

PMAX

PMAX

Piping Code

PIPING_CODE

PIPING_CODE

Hot Allowable

HOT_ALLOW

HOT_ALLOW*

Cyclic Reduction Factor

CYC_RED_FACTOR

CYC_RED_FACTOR*

Cycles for BW (butt-weld) fatigue pair

BUTTWELDCYCLES

BUTTWELDCYCLES*

Stress for BW fatigue pair

BUTTWELDSTRESS

BUTTWELDSTRESS*

Cycles for FW (fillet-weld) fatigue pair FILLETWELDCYCLES

FILLETWELDCYCLES*

Stress for FW fatigue pair

FILLETWELDSTRESS*

FILLETWELDSTRESS

* These tags are child tags of CASE_NUM (can range from 1 through 9)

956

CAESAR II User's Guide

External Interfaces
Access and Excel contain a number that identifies on which element they were defined.
INPUT_BASIC_ELEMENT_DATA.ALLOW_PTR = INPUT_ALLOWBLS.ALLOW_PTR

SIFs Tees Input Export Option - SHARED

Export user specified SIF information defined in the input file.
Microsoft Access Table Name: INPUT_SIFTEES
Microsoft Excel Section Name: SIF DATA
XML Primary Tag Name: SIF
Data Name

Column Name

XML Tag Name

SIF Number

SIF_NUM

SIF_NUM

Node Number

NODE

NODE

Type

TYPE

TYPE

SIF In-Plane

SIF_IN

SIF_IN

SIF Out-Plane

SIF_OUT

SIF_OUT

Circumferential Weld

WELD_D

WELD_D

Fillet

FILLET

FILLET

Pad Thickness

PAD_THK

PAD_THK

FTG Ro

FTG_RO

FTG_RO

Crotch

CROTCH

CROTCH

Weld ID

WELD_ID

WELD_ID

B1

B1

B1

B2

B2

B2

Access and Excel contain a number that identifies on which element they were defined.
INPUT_BASIC_ELEMENT_DATA.INT_PTR = INPUT_SIFTEES.SIF_PTR

WR297 Nozzle Input Export Option - SHARED

Export user specified WRC297 nozzle information defined in the input file.
Microsoft Access Table Name: INPUT_NOZZLES_WRC297
Microsoft Excel Section Name: WRC297 NOZZLE DATA
XML Primary Tag Name: WRC297_NOZZLE
Data Name

Column Name

XML Tag Name

Nozzle Node Number

NOZZLE_NODE

NOZZLE_NODE

Vessel Node Number

VESSEL_NODE

VESSEL_NODE

Nozzle Outside Diameter

NOZ_OD

NOZ_OD

Nozzle Wall Thickness

NOZ_WT

NOZ_WT

Vessel Outside Diameter

VES_OD

VES_OD

CAESAR II User's Guide

957

External Interfaces
Data Name

Column Name

XML Tag Name

Vessel Wall Thickness

VES_WT

VES_WT

Vessel Reinforcing Pad Thickness

VES_RPT

VES_RPT

Dist. to stiffeners or head

DIST_HEAD

DIST_HEAD

Dist. to opposite side stiffeners or head

DIST_OPP_HEAD

DIST_OPP_HEAD

Vessel centerline direction vector X

VES_CENT_X

VES_CENT_X

Vessel centerline direction vector Y

VES_CENT_Y

VES_CENT_Y

Vessel centerline direction vector Z

VES_CENT_Z

VES_CENT_Z

Vessel Temperature

VES_TEMP

VES_TEMP

Vessel Material #

VES_MAT

VES_MAT

Material Name

MATERIAL_NAME

MATERIAL_NAME

Access and Excel contain a number that identifies on which element they were defined.
INPUT_BASIC_ELEMENT_DATA.NOZ_PTR = INPUT_NOZZLES_WRC297.NOZ_PTR

API650 Nozzle Input Export Option - SHARED

Export user specified API650 nozzle information defined in the input file.
Microsoft Access Table Name: INPUT_NOZZLES_API650
Microsoft Excel Section Name: API650 NOZZLE DATA
XML Primary Tag Name: API650_NOZZLE
Data Name

Column Name

XML Tag Name

Nozzle Node Number

NOZZLE_NODE

NOZZLE_NODE

Tank Node Number

TANK_NODE

TANK_NODE

Nozzle Outside Diameter

NOZ_OD

NOZ_OD

Nozzle Wall Thickness

NOZ_WT

NOZ_WT

Tank Outside Diameter

TANK_OD

TANK_OD

Tank Wall Thickness

TANK_WT

TANK_WT

Reinforcing

REINFORCE

REINFORCE

Nozzle height

NOZ_HEIGHT

NOZ_HEIGHT

Fluid height

FLUID_HEIGHT

FLUID_HEIGHT

Fluid specific gravity

FLUID_SG

FLUID_SG

Thermal expansion coefficient THERM_EXP_COEFF THERM_EXP_COEFF

Temperature change

DELTAT

DELTAT

Elastic modulus

EMOD

EMOD

Access and Excel contain a number that identifies on which element they were defined.
INPUT_BASIC_ELEMENT_DATA.NOZ_PTR = INPUT_NOZZLES_API650.NOZ_PTR

958

CAESAR II User's Guide

External Interfaces

BS5500 Nozzle Input Export Option - SHARED

Export user specified BS5500 nozzle information defined in the input file.
Microsoft Access Table Name: INPUT_NOZZLES_BS5500
Microsoft Excel Section Name: BS5500 NOZZLE DATA
XML Primary Tag Name: BS5500_NOZZLE
Data Name

Column Name

XML Tag Name

Nozzle Node Number

NOZZLE_NODE

NOZZLE_NODE

Vessel Node Number

VESSEL_NODE

VESSEL_NODE

Vessel Type

VESSEL_TYPE

VESSEL_TYPE

Nozzle Outside Diameter

NOZ_OD

NOZ_OD

Vessel Outside Diameter

VES_OD

VES_OD

Vessel Wall Thickness

VES_WT

VES_WT

Vessel Reinforcing Pad Thickness

VES_RPT

VES_RPT

Dist. to stiffeners or head

DIST_HEAD

DIST_HEAD

Dist. to opposite side stiffeners or head DIST_OPP_HEAD

DIST_OPP_HEAD

Vessel centerline direction vector X

VES_CENT_X

VES_CENT_X

Vessel centerline direction vector Y

VES_CENT_Y

VES_CENT_Y

Vessel centerline direction vector Z

VES_CENT_Z

VES_CENT_Z

Vessel Temperature

VES_TEMP

VES_TEMP

Vessel Material #

VES_MAT

VES_MAT

Material Name

MATERIAL_NAME

MATERIAL_NAME

Access and Excel contain a number that identifies on which element they were defined.
INPUT_BASIC_ELEMENT_DATA.NOZ_PTR = INPUT_NOZZLES_BS5500.NOZ_PTR

Hangers Input Export Option - SHARED

Export user specified hanger information defined in the input file.
Microsoft Access Table Name: INPUT_HANGERS
Microsoft Excel Section Name: HANGER DATA
XML Primary Tag Name: HANGER
Data Name

Column Name

XML Tag Name

Node number

NODE

NODE

Connecting node

CNODE

CNODE

Constant effort support load or

stiffness

CONST_EFF_LOAD

CONST_EFF_LOAD

Rigid support displacement criteria

RIGID_SUP

RIGID_SUP

CAESAR II User's Guide

959

External Interfaces
Data Name

Column Name

XML Tag Name

Load variation

LOAD_VAR

LOAD_VAR

Available space for hanger

AVAIL_SPACE

AVAIL_SPACE

Theoretical cold load

COLD_LOAD

COLD_LOAD

Operating load

HOT_LOAD

HOT_LOAD

Maximum travel limit

MAX_TRAVEL

MAX_TRAVEL

Multiple load case option

MULTI_LC

MULTI_LC

Anchor to be freed #1

FREEANCHOR1

FREEANCHOR1

Anchor to be freed #2

FREEANCHOR2

FREEANCHOR2

Degree of freedom for #1

DOFTYPE1

DOFTYPE1

Degree of freedom for #2

DOFTYPE2

DOFTYPE2

Number of hangers

NUM_HGR

NUM_HGR

Hanger table

HGR_TABLE

HGR_TABLE

Short range springs

SHORT_RANGE

SHORT_RANGE

Access and Excel contain a number that identifies on which element they were defined.
INPUT_BASIC_ELEMENT_DATA.HGR_PTR = INPUT_HANGERS.HGR_PTR

Reducers Input Export Option - SHARED

Export user specified reducer information defined in the input file.
Microsoft Access Table Name: INPUT_REDUCERS
Microsoft Excel Section Name:
XML Primary Tag Name:
Data Name

Column Name

XML Tag Name

DIAMETER2

DIAMETERS2

THICKNESS2

THICKNESS2

ALPHA

ALPHA

R1

R1

R2

R2

Access and Excel contain a number that identifies on which element they were defined.
INPUT_BASIC_ELEMENT_DATA.RED_PTR = INPUT_REDUCERS.RED_PTR

960

CAESAR II User's Guide

External Interfaces

Flanges Input Export Option - SHARED

Export user specified flange information defined in the input file.
Microsoft Access Table Name: INPUT_FLANGES
Microsoft Excel Section Name:
XML Primary Tag Name:
Data Name

Column Name

XML Tag Name

FLANGE_LOCATION

FLANGE_LOCATION

METHOD

METHOD

CLASS_GRADE

CLASS_GRADE

GASKET_DIAMETER

GASKET_DIAMETER

BOLT_CIRCLE_DIA

BOLT_CIRCLE_DIA

BOLT_AREA

BOLT_AREA

SY_COLD

SY_COLD

SY1

SY1

SY2

SY2

SY3

SY3

SY4

SY4

SY5

SY5

SY6

SY6

SY7

SY7

SY8

SY8

SY9

SY9

TEMPERATURE1 through
TEMPERATURE24

TEMPERATURE1
through
TEMPERATURE24

PRESSURE1 through
PRESSURE24

PRESSURE1 through
PRESSURE24

Access and Excel contain a number that identifies on which element they were defined.
INPUT_BASIC_ELEMENT_DATA.FLG_PTR = INPUT_FLANGES.FLG_PTR

CAESAR II User's Guide

961

External Interfaces

Title Input Export Option - SHARED

Export user specified title information defined in the input file.
Microsoft Access Table Name: INPUT_TITLE
Microsoft Excel Section Name:
XML Primary Tag Name:
Data Name

Column Name

XML Tag Name

TITLE

TITLE

Equipment Input Export Options - SHARED

Export user specified equipment information defined in the input file.
Microsoft Access Table Name: INPUT_EQUIPMENT
Microsoft Excel Section Name:
XML Primary Tag Name:
Data Name

962

Column Name

XML Tag Name

NODE1

NODE1

FX1

FX1

FY1

FY1

FZ1

FZ1

MX1

MX1

MY1

MY1

MZ1

MZ1

COSX1

COSX1

COSY1

COSY1

COSZ1

COSZ1

RATING1

RATING1

METHOD1

METHOD1

NODE2

NODE2

FX2

FX2

FY2

FY2

FZ2

FZ2

MX2

MX2

MY2

MY2

MZ2

MZ2

COSX2

COSX2

CAESAR II User's Guide

External Interfaces
Data Name

Column Name

XML Tag Name

COSY2

COSY2

COSZ2

COSZ2

RATING2

RATING2

METHOD2

METHOD2

Access and Excel contain a number that identifies on which element they were defined.
INPUT_BASIC_ELEMENT_DATA.EQP_PTR = INPUT_EQUIPMENT.EQP_PTR

CAESAR II Output Report Options Dialog Box

Select the output reports to export.

Static Load Cases

Displays the list of load cases that are available for exporting. The load cases might not contain
data for all reports. The generation of data for all reports is controlled by Load Case Options Tab
(Static Analysis Dialog Box) (on page 459). If Hanger Reports is selected, the load case
selection is not effective because Hanger reports are not tied to any particular load case.

Displacement Reports
Exports the displacement report for the selected load cases. In Microsoft Access, this data is
stored in the table OUTPUT_DISPLACEMENTS. In XML, these data values appear under the
tag DISPLACEMENT_REPORT.
Data Name

Access Column Name

XML Tag Name

Node

NODE

NODE

Load Case

CASE

LOADCASE

Translation X

DX

DX

Translation Y

DY

DY

Translation Z

DZ

DZ

Translation Units

DUNITS

UNITS

Rotation X

RX

RX

Rotation Y

RY

RY

Rotation Z

RZ

RZ

Rotation Units

RUNITS

UNITS

CAESAR II User's Guide

963

External Interfaces
Restraint Reports
Exports the restraint report for the selected load cases. In Microsoft Access, this data is stored
in the table OUTPUT_RESTRAINTS. In XML, these data values appear under the tag
RESTRAINT_REPORT.
Data Name

Access Column Name

XML Tag Name

Node

NODE

NODE

Load Case

CASE

LOADCASE

Force X

FX

FX

Force Y

FY

FY

Force Z

FZ

FZ

Resultant Force

RESULTANTF

RESULTANT

Force Units

FUNITS

UNITS

Moment X

MX

MX

Moment Y

MY

MY

Moment Z

MZ

MZ

Resultant Moment

RESULTANTM

RESULTANT

Moment Units

MUNITS

UNITS

Restraint Type

TYPE

TYPE

Global Force Reports

Exports the global force report for the selected load cases. In Microsoft Access, this data is
stored in the table OUTPUT_GLOBAL_ELEMENT_FORCES. In XML, these data values appear
under the tag GLOBAL_FORCE_REPORT.

964

Data Name

Access Column Name XML Tag Name

From Node

FROM_NODE

FROM_NODE

To Node

TO_NODE

TO_NODE

Load Case

CASE

LOADCASE

Force X From Node

FX

FORCES\FROM\FX

Force Y From Node

FY

FORCES\FROM\FZ

Force Z From Node

FZ

FORCES\FROM\FZ

Force X To Node

FX

FORCES\TO\FX

Force Y To Node

FY

FORCES\TO\FY

Force Z To Node

FZ

FORCES\TO\FZ

Force Units

FUNITS

UNITS\FORCE

Moment X From Node

FX

MOMENTS\FROM\FX

CAESAR II User's Guide

External Interfaces
Data Name

Access Column Name XML Tag Name

Moment Y From Node

FY

MOMENTS\FROM\FZ

Moment Z From Node

FZ

MOMENTS\FROM\FZ

Moment X To Node

FX

MOMENTS\TO\FX

Moment Y To Node

FY

MOMENTS\TO\FY

Moment Z To Node

FZ

MOMENTS\TO\FZ

Moment Units

FUNITS

UNITS\MOMENT

Axial Force From Node

AXIAL_FORCEF

AXIAL_FORCE\FROM

Axial Force To Node

AXIAL_FORCET

AXIAL_FORCE\TO

Shear Force From Node

SHEAR_FORCEF

SHEAR_FORCE\FROM

Shear Force To Node

SHEAR_FORCET

SHEAR_FORCE\TO

Bending Moment From Node

BENDING_MOMENTF

BENDING_MOMENT\FROM

Bending Moment To Node

BENDING_MOMENTT

BENDING_MOMENT\TO

Torsion Moment From Node

TORSION_MOMENTF

TORSION_MOMENT\FROM

Torsion Moment To Node

TORSION_MOMENTT

TORSION_MOMENT\TO

Local Force Report

Exports the global force report for the selected load cases. In Microsoft Access, this data is
stored in the table OUTPUT_LOCAL_ELEMENT_FORCES. In XML, these data values appear
under the tag LOCAL_FORCE_REPORT.
Data Name

Access Column Name

XML Tag Name

From Node

FROM_NODE

FROM_NODE

To Node

TO_NODE

TO_NODE

Load Case

CASE

LOADCASE

Force X From Node

FX

FORCES\FROM\FX

Force Y From Node

FY

FORCES\FROM\FZ

Force Z From Node

FZ

FORCES\FROM\FZ

Force X To Node

FX

FORCES\TO\FX

Force Y To Node

FY

FORCES\TO\FY

Force Z To Node

FZ

FORCES\TO\FZ

Force Units

FUNITS

UNITS\FORCE

Moment X From Node

FX

MOMENTS\FROM\FX

Moment Y From Node

FY

MOMENTS\FROM\FZ

Moment Z From Node

FZ

MOMENTS\FROM\FZ

CAESAR II User's Guide

965

External Interfaces
Data Name

Access Column Name

XML Tag Name

Moment X To Node

FX

MOMENTS\TO\FX

Moment Y To Node

FY

MOMENTS\TO\FY

Moment Z To Node

FZ

MOMENTS\TO\FZ

Moment Units

FUNITS

UNITS\MOMENT

Stress Reports
Exports the stress report for the selected load cases. In Microsoft Access, this data is stored in
the table OUTPUT_STRESSES. In XML, these data values appear under the tag
STRESS_REPORT.

966

Data Name

Access Column Name

XML Tag Name

Axial Stress From Node

AXIAL_STRESSF

AXIAL_STRESS\FROM

Axial Stress To Node

AXIAL_STRESST

AXIAL_STRESS\TO

Torsion Stress From Node

TORSION_STRESSF

TORSION_STRESS\FROM

Torsion Stress To Node

TORSION_STRESST

TORSION_STRESS\TO

Bending Stress From Node

BENDING_STRESSF

BENDING_STRESS\FROM

Bending Stress To Node

BENDING_STRESST

BENDING_STRESS\TO

Hoop Stress From Node

HOOP_STRESSF

HOOP_STRESS\FROM

Torsion Stress To Node

HOOP_STRESST

HOOP_STRESS\TO

Code Stress From Node

CODE_STRESSF

CODE_STRESS\FROM

Code Stress To Node

CODE_STRESST

CODE_STRESS\TO

Code Stress From Node

ALLOW_STRESSF

ALLOWABLE_STRESS\FROM

Code Stress To Node

ALLOW_STRESST

ALLOWABLE_STRESS\TO

SIF In

SIFINF

SIF_IN_PLANE\FROM

SIF In

SIFINT

SIF_IN_PLANE\TO

SIF Out

SIFOUTF

SIF_OUT_PLANE\FROM

SIF Out

SIFOUTT

SIF_OUT_PLANE\TO

Max 3D Stress Intensity

3DMAXF

MAX_STRESS_INTENSITY\FRO
M

Max 3D Stress Intensity

3DMAXT

MAX_STRESS_INTENSITY\TO

Percent Stress From

PRCT_STRF

PERCENTAGE\FROM

Percent Stress To

PRCT_STRT

PERCENTAGE\TO

CAESAR II User's Guide

External Interfaces
Hanger Reports
Exports the hanger report. In Microsoft Access, this data is stored in the table
OUTPUT_HANGERS. In XML, these data values appear under the tag HANGER_REPORT.
Data Name

Access Column Name

XML Tag Name

Number Required

NUMREQ

HANGER\NUMREQUIRED

Hanger Node

NODE

HANGER\NODE

Figure

FIGNUM

HANGER\FIGURE

Size

SIZE

HANGER\SIZE

Vertical Movement

VERT_MOVEMENT

HANGER\VERT_MOVEMENT

Hot Load

HOT_LOAD

HANGER\HOT_LOAD

Theoretical Installed Load TH_INSTALL_LOAD

HANGER\TH_INSTALL_LOAD

Actual Installed Load

AC_INSTALL_LOAD

HANGER\AC_INSTALL_LOAD

Spring Rate

SPRING_RATE

HANGER\SPRING_RATE

Horizontal Movement

HOR_MOVEMENT

HANGER\HOR_MOVEMENT

Load Variation

LOAD_VARIATION

HANGER\LOAD_VARIATION

Manufacturer

MANUF

HANGER\MANUFACTURER

Load Units

LOAD_UNITS

HANGER\LOAD_UNITS

Movement Units

MOVEMENT_UNITS

HANGER\MOVEMENT_UNITS

Spring Units

SPRING_UNITS

HANGER\SPRING_UNITS

Equipment Reports
Exports the equipment reports. In Microsoft Access, this data is stored in the table
OUTPUT_EQUIPMENT. In XML, these data values appear under the tag EQUIPMENT.
Data Name

CAESAR II User's Guide

Access Column Name

XML Tag Name

LCASE_NUM

LCASE_NUM

CASE

CASE

NODE

NODE

METHOD

METHOD

FX_LIMIT

FX_LIMIT

FY_LIMIT

FY_LIMIT

FZ_LIMIT

FZ_LIMIT

MX_LIMIT

MX_LIMIT

MY_LIMIT

MY_LIMIT

MZ_LIMIT

MZ_LIMIT

967

External Interfaces
FRES_LIMIT

FRES_LIMIT

MRES_LIMIT

MRES_LIMIT

PASSFAIL

PASSFAIL

FX

FX

FY

FY

FZ

FZ

MX

MX

MY

MY

MZ

MZ

FRES

FRES

MRES

MRES

FX_PER

FX_PER

FY_PER

FY_PER

FZ_PER

FZ_PER

MX_PER

MX_PER

MY_PER

MY_PER

MZ_PER

MZ_PER

FRES_PER

FRES_PER

MRES_PER

MRES_PER

FUNITS

FUNITS

MUNITS

MUNITS

Select All - Selects all reports for export.

Clear All - Clears the selection of all reports.

Static Load Cases Output Report Options - SHARED

Displays the list of load cases that are available for exporting. The load cases might not contain
data for all reports. The generation of data for all reports is controlled by Load Case Options Tab
(Static Analysis Dialog Box) (on page 459). If Hanger Reports is selected, the load case
selection is not effective because Hanger reports are not tied to any particular load case.

968

CAESAR II User's Guide

External Interfaces

Displacement Reports Output Report Option - SHARED

Exports the displacement report for the selected load cases. In Microsoft Access, this data is
stored in the table OUTPUT_DISPLACEMENTS. In XML, these data values appear under the
tag DISPLACEMENT_REPORT.
Data Name

Access Column Name

XML Tag Name

Node

NODE

NODE

Load Case

CASE

LOADCASE

Translation X

DX

DX

Translation Y

DY

DY

Translation Z

DZ

DZ

Translation Units

DUNITS

UNITS

Rotation X

RX

RX

Rotation Y

RY

RY

Rotation Z

RZ

RZ

Rotation Units

RUNITS

UNITS

Restraint Reports Output Report Option - SHARED

Exports the restraint report for the selected load cases. In Microsoft Access, this data is stored
in the table OUTPUT_RESTRAINTS. In XML, these data values appear under the tag
RESTRAINT_REPORT.
Data Name

Access Column Name

XML Tag Name

Node

NODE

NODE

Load Case

CASE

LOADCASE

Force X

FX

FX

Force Y

FY

FY

Force Z

FZ

FZ

Resultant Force

RESULTANTF

RESULTANT

Force Units

FUNITS

UNITS

Moment X

MX

MX

Moment Y

MY

MY

Moment Z

MZ

MZ

Resultant Moment

RESULTANTM

RESULTANT

Moment Units

MUNITS

UNITS

Restraint Type

TYPE

TYPE

CAESAR II User's Guide

969

External Interfaces

Global Force Reports Output Report Option - SHARED

Exports the global force report for the selected load cases. In Microsoft Access, this data is
stored in the table OUTPUT_GLOBAL_ELEMENT_FORCES. In XML, these data values appear
under the tag GLOBAL_FORCE_REPORT.

970

Data Name

Access Column Name XML Tag Name

From Node

FROM_NODE

FROM_NODE

To Node

TO_NODE

TO_NODE

Load Case

CASE

LOADCASE

Force X From Node

FX

FORCES\FROM\FX

Force Y From Node

FY

FORCES\FROM\FZ

Force Z From Node

FZ

FORCES\FROM\FZ

Force X To Node

FX

FORCES\TO\FX

Force Y To Node

FY

FORCES\TO\FY

Force Z To Node

FZ

FORCES\TO\FZ

Force Units

FUNITS

UNITS\FORCE

Moment X From Node

FX

MOMENTS\FROM\FX

Moment Y From Node

FY

MOMENTS\FROM\FZ

Moment Z From Node

FZ

MOMENTS\FROM\FZ

Moment X To Node

FX

MOMENTS\TO\FX

Moment Y To Node

FY

MOMENTS\TO\FY

Moment Z To Node

FZ

MOMENTS\TO\FZ

Moment Units

FUNITS

UNITS\MOMENT

Axial Force From Node

AXIAL_FORCEF

AXIAL_FORCE\FROM

Axial Force To Node

AXIAL_FORCET

AXIAL_FORCE\TO

Shear Force From Node

SHEAR_FORCEF

SHEAR_FORCE\FROM

Shear Force To Node

SHEAR_FORCET

SHEAR_FORCE\TO

Bending Moment From Node

BENDING_MOMENTF

BENDING_MOMENT\FROM

Bending Moment To Node

BENDING_MOMENTT

BENDING_MOMENT\TO

Torsion Moment From Node

TORSION_MOMENTF

TORSION_MOMENT\FROM

Torsion Moment To Node

TORSION_MOMENTT

TORSION_MOMENT\TO

CAESAR II User's Guide

External Interfaces

Local Force Report Output Report Option - SHARED

Exports the global force report for the selected load cases. In Microsoft Access, this data is
stored in the table OUTPUT_LOCAL_ELEMENT_FORCES. In XML, these data values appear
under the tag LOCAL_FORCE_REPORT.
Data Name

Access Column Name

XML Tag Name

From Node

FROM_NODE

FROM_NODE

To Node

TO_NODE

TO_NODE

Load Case

CASE

LOADCASE

Force X From Node

FX

FORCES\FROM\FX

Force Y From Node

FY

FORCES\FROM\FZ

Force Z From Node

FZ

FORCES\FROM\FZ

Force X To Node

FX

FORCES\TO\FX

Force Y To Node

FY

FORCES\TO\FY

Force Z To Node

FZ

FORCES\TO\FZ

Force Units

FUNITS

UNITS\FORCE

Moment X From Node

FX

MOMENTS\FROM\FX

Moment Y From Node

FY

MOMENTS\FROM\FZ

Moment Z From Node

FZ

MOMENTS\FROM\FZ

Moment X To Node

FX

MOMENTS\TO\FX

Moment Y To Node

FY

MOMENTS\TO\FY

Moment Z To Node

FZ

MOMENTS\TO\FZ

Moment Units

FUNITS

UNITS\MOMENT

CAESAR II User's Guide

971

External Interfaces

Stress Reports Output Report Option - SHARED

Exports the stress report for the selected load cases. In Microsoft Access, this data is stored in
the table OUTPUT_STRESSES. In XML, these data values appear under the tag
STRESS_REPORT.

972

Data Name

Access Column Name

XML Tag Name

Axial Stress From Node

AXIAL_STRESSF

AXIAL_STRESS\FROM

Axial Stress To Node

AXIAL_STRESST

AXIAL_STRESS\TO

Torsion Stress From Node

TORSION_STRESSF

TORSION_STRESS\FROM

Torsion Stress To Node

TORSION_STRESST

TORSION_STRESS\TO

Bending Stress From Node

BENDING_STRESSF

BENDING_STRESS\FROM

Bending Stress To Node

BENDING_STRESST

BENDING_STRESS\TO

Hoop Stress From Node

HOOP_STRESSF

HOOP_STRESS\FROM

Torsion Stress To Node

HOOP_STRESST

HOOP_STRESS\TO

Code Stress From Node

CODE_STRESSF

CODE_STRESS\FROM

Code Stress To Node

CODE_STRESST

CODE_STRESS\TO

Code Stress From Node

ALLOW_STRESSF

ALLOWABLE_STRESS\FROM

Code Stress To Node

ALLOW_STRESST

ALLOWABLE_STRESS\TO

SIF In

SIFINF

SIF_IN_PLANE\FROM

SIF In

SIFINT

SIF_IN_PLANE\TO

SIF Out

SIFOUTF

SIF_OUT_PLANE\FROM

SIF Out

SIFOUTT

SIF_OUT_PLANE\TO

Max 3D Stress Intensity

3DMAXF

MAX_STRESS_INTENSITY\FRO
M

Max 3D Stress Intensity

3DMAXT

MAX_STRESS_INTENSITY\TO

Percent Stress From

PRCT_STRF

PERCENTAGE\FROM

Percent Stress To

PRCT_STRT

PERCENTAGE\TO

CAESAR II User's Guide

External Interfaces

Hanger Reports Output Report Option - SHARED

Exports the hanger report. In Microsoft Access, this data is stored in the table
OUTPUT_HANGERS. In XML, these data values appear under the tag HANGER_REPORT.
Data Name

Access Column Name

XML Tag Name

Number Required

NUMREQ

HANGER\NUMREQUIRED

Hanger Node

NODE

HANGER\NODE

Figure

FIGNUM

HANGER\FIGURE

Size

SIZE

HANGER\SIZE

Vertical Movement

VERT_MOVEMENT

HANGER\VERT_MOVEMENT

Hot Load

HOT_LOAD

HANGER\HOT_LOAD

Theoretical Installed Load TH_INSTALL_LOAD

HANGER\TH_INSTALL_LOAD

Actual Installed Load

AC_INSTALL_LOAD

HANGER\AC_INSTALL_LOAD

Spring Rate

SPRING_RATE

HANGER\SPRING_RATE

Horizontal Movement

HOR_MOVEMENT

HANGER\HOR_MOVEMENT

Load Variation

LOAD_VARIATION

HANGER\LOAD_VARIATION

Manufacturer

MANUF

HANGER\MANUFACTURER

Load Units

LOAD_UNITS

HANGER\LOAD_UNITS

Movement Units

MOVEMENT_UNITS

HANGER\MOVEMENT_UNITS

Spring Units

SPRING_UNITS

HANGER\SPRING_UNITS

CAESAR II User's Guide

973

External Interfaces

Equipment Reports Output Report Option - SHARED

Exports the equipment reports. In Microsoft Access, this data is stored in the table
OUTPUT_EQUIPMENT. In XML, these data values appear under the tag EQUIPMENT.
Data Name

974

Access Column Name

XML Tag Name

LCASE_NUM

LCASE_NUM

CASE

CASE

NODE

NODE

METHOD

METHOD

FX_LIMIT

FX_LIMIT

FY_LIMIT

FY_LIMIT

FZ_LIMIT

FZ_LIMIT

MX_LIMIT

MX_LIMIT

MY_LIMIT

MY_LIMIT

MZ_LIMIT

MZ_LIMIT

FRES_LIMIT

FRES_LIMIT

MRES_LIMIT

MRES_LIMIT

PASSFAIL

PASSFAIL

FX

FX

FY

FY

FZ

FZ

MX

MX

MY

MY

MZ

MZ

FRES

FRES

MRES

MRES

FX_PER

FX_PER

FY_PER

FY_PER

FZ_PER

FZ_PER

MX_PER

MX_PER

MY_PER

MY_PER

MZ_PER

MZ_PER

FRES_PER

FRES_PER

MRES_PER

MRES_PER

FUNITS

FUNITS

MUNITS

MUNITS

CAESAR II User's Guide

External Interfaces

Intergraph CADWorx Plant

Provides a bi-directional data transfer link to CAESAR II. Intergraph CADWorx Plant is an
AutoCAD-based design/drafting product that allows you to create models in ortho, iso, 2D, or 3D
modes. You can transfer these models into CAESAR II; likewise, models built in CAESAR II can
be sent into Intergraph CADWorx Plant. Modifications made in either product are retained for
future transfers.
Intergraph CADWorx Plant also allows CAESAR II output data to be imported and placed on the
drawing. This provides the ability to generate stress and restraint isometrics.
Because the external interface operates seamlessly, no action is required in CAESAR II.
Intergraph CADWorx Plant reads CAESAR II _A (input) and _P (output) files without
modification, and creates CAESAR II _A files directly. The Intergraph CADWorx Plant
command that appears on the Tools menu serves only as a reminder that the external interface
exists. For more information about importing and exporting data between these two products,
refer to documentation delivered with lntergraph CADWorx Plant.

CADPIPE
Provides a one-way transfer of the geometry data from CADPIPE to CAESAR II. The geometry
data consists of pipe lengths, diameters, thicknesses, connectivities, and node numbers. All
nodal specific quantities, such as restraints, loads, and displacements, must be manually added
to the CAESAR II input file.
The CADPIPE external interface is set up so that several models can be transferred in a single
session. During data transfer, the interface first prompts you for the name of the CADPIPE
connectivity (.UDE) neutral file. After you specify the file name, the data transfer process begins.
When that transfer is complete, the interface prompts you for another neutral file name. This
cycle continues until you cancel the data transfer process.

The neutral file read by the interface must be generated by the CADPIPE software. For
more information, refer to the CADPIPE product documentation.
The CADPIPE neutral file must be transferred to the current CAESAR II folder so that it is
available to the external interface.
The interface reads the CADPIPE neutral file, and generates the CAESAR II input file and a log
file of the data transfer process. Check the data in both the CAESAR II input file and the log file
for consistency and any assumptions made by the interface.
The following paragraphs describe the layout of the data extracted from the CADPIPE neutral
file and how it is arranged for storage in the interface. The data storage is maintained in two
arrays. The first array contains geometry data for each pipe element; the second array contains
additional load and specification data.
In the first array, an entry is required for each piece of pipe in the system. "Pipe" refers to an
entity between two nodes, which can be a pipe or a rigid element. There are 12 values per entry,
and all values must be specified.

CAESAR II User's Guide

975

External Interfaces

Field 1- ELMT

Enter the pipe element number, which can correspond to an entry in the
second array. This is also the pipe or element number in the model.
Values must be sequential from 1.

Field 2 - N1

Enter the From node number, which is the starting node for the element.
Values must be greater than zero and less than 32000.

Field 3 - N2

Enter the To node number, which is the ending node for the element.
Values must be greater than zero and less than 32000.

Field 4 - DX

Enter the delta X dimension for the element. This is the distance
between N1 and N2 in the X direction.

Field 5 - DY

Enter the delta Y dimension for the element. This is the distance
between N1 and N2 in the Y direction. In CAESAR II, Y is vertical.

Field 6 - DZ

Enter the delta Z dimension for the element. This is the distance
between N1 and N2 in the Z direction.

Field 7 - DIAM

Enter the pipe outer diameter.

Field 8 - THK

Enter the pipe wall thickness.

Field 9 - ANCH

Specify the location of the restraint (support). If there is a restraint on

N1, ANCH is 1. If there is a restraint on N2, then ANCH is 2. The type of
restraint can be obtained from the second array.

Field 10 - BND

Specify whether there is a bend at the N2 end of the element. If BND is

1, there is a bend at N2. If BND is 0, this is a straight pipe.

Field 11 - BRAD

Specify the bend radius if the bend is not a long radius bend. This value
is the required bend radius.

Field 12 - RIGD

Indicate whether the current element is a rigid element.

Records in the second array are only necessary when additional data is required. This means
there is always a record in the first array for pipe element #1, which could be the only entry in
the array. Any additional entries contain some type of change to data normally duplicated
forward by CAESAR II.
Field 1 - ELMT

Enter the pipe element number, which corresponds to an entry in the first
array. This is also a pipe or element number in the model. Values are
sequential from 1.

Field 2 - TEMP1

Enter the operating temperature for load case 1. You can find this value
by scanning the CADPIPE data for the maximum temperature.

Field 3 - PRESS1

Enter the operating pressure for load case 1. You can find this value by
scanning the CADPIPE data for the maximum pressure.

Field 4 - RGDWGT Enter the weight of rigid elements. This entry is only required if you set
the RIGID flag in the first array.

976

CAESAR II User's Guide

External Interfaces
Field 5 - TEEFLG

Specify the TEE type. Acceptable values are:

Field 6 - RESTYP

1 - reinforced
2 - unreinforced
3 - welding tee
4 - sweepolet
5 - weldolet
6 - extruded welding tee

Specify the restraint (support) type indicator. Acceptable values are:

0 - anchor
1 - double acting X
2 - double acting Y
3 - double acting Z
4 - double acting RX
5 - double acting RY
6 - double acting RZ

Field 7 - RINFO1

Enter the restraint stiffness for the support.

Field 8 - RINFO2

Enter the restraint gap for the support.

Field 9 - RINFO3

Enter the restraint friction coefficient for the support.

Field 10 - MATID

Enter the CAESAR II material ID value.

If the coefficient of expansion is to be changed, it should be
entered in the Temperature field above (Field 2).

Field 11 - EMOD

Enter the value of Youngs modulus.

Field 12 - POIS

Enter the value of Poissons ratio.

Field 13 - GAMMA Enter the weight density of the material.

Field 14 - INSTHK

Enter the insulation thickness.

Field 15 - INSWGT Enter the weight density of the insulation material.

Field 16 FLDWGT

Enter the weight density of the pipe contents (fluid).

Field 17 - TEENOD Enter the element node number where there is a tee.
Field 18

Placeholder for future development.

Field 19

Placeholder for future development.

Field 20

Placeholder for future development.

CADPIPE Example Transfer

The following is an example connectivity file produced by the CADPIPE interface. Examination
of this file reveals two distinct regions. The first region defines the entities which make up the
piping system; the second region connects the entities. Both regions are required for the
interface to work properly. The first line of each entity definition contains various codes that
define: the element type, the element diameter, and the element thickness.

CAESAR II User's Guide

977

External Interfaces
BEGIN_ENTITY
ENTITY_NUMBER 1
ATTRIBUTES 1CAESAR AAA1 C-2OBB1dLATL
INSERTION 1.80000000e+002 3.36000000e+002 1.20000000e+003
END 1.80000000e+002 3.36000000e+002 1.20000000e+003
END 1.80000000e+002 3.35999961e+002 1.20350000e+003
END_ENTITY
BEGIN_ENTITY
ENTITY_NUMBER 2
ATTRIBUTES 1CAESAR AAA1 C-2OPPATLATL
134.50
INSERTION 1.80000000e+002 3.35999997e+002 1.27075000e+003
END 1.80000000e+002 3.35999961e+002 1.20350000e+003
END 1.80000000e+002 3.36000033e+002 1.33800000e+003
END_ENTITY
BEGIN_ENTITY
ENTITY_NUMBER 3
ATTRIBUTES 1CAESAR AAA1 C-3O1BATLATL
INSERTION 1.80000000e+002 3.36000000e+002 1.34700000e+003
END 1.89000000e+002 3.36000000e+002 1.34700000e+003
END 1.80000000e+002 3.36000033e+002 1.33800000e+003
END_ENTITY
BEGIN_ENTITY
ENTITY_NUMBER 4
ATTRIBUTES 1CAESAR
AAA1
C-0OPPATLATL
105.38
INSERTION 2.41687500e+002 3.35999959e+002 1.34700000e+003
END 1.89000000e+002 3.36000000e+002 1.34700000e+003
END 2.94375000e+002 3.35999917e+002 1.34700000e+003
END_ENTITY
BEGIN_ENTITY
ENTITY_NUMBER 5
ATTRIBUTES 1CAESAR
AAA1
C-0O2HATLATLATL
INSERTION 3.00000000e+002 3.36000000e+002 1.34700000e+003
END 3.05625000e+002 3.36000083e+002 1.34700000e+003
END 2.94375000e+002 3.35999917e+002 1.34700000e+003
END 3.00000083e+002 3.30375000e+002 1.34700000e+003
END_ENTITY
BEGIN_ENTITY
ENTITY_NUMBER 6
ATTRIBUTES 1CAESAR
AAA1
C-0O1BATLATL
INSERTION 4.02000000e+002 3.36000000e+002 1.34700000e+003
END 3.93000000e+002 3.35999934e+002 1.34700000e+003
END 4.01999934e+002 3.45000000e+002 1.34700000e+003
END_ENTITY
BEGIN_ENTITY
ENTITY_NUMBER 7
ATTRIBUTES 1CAESAR
AAA1
C-0OPPATLATL
90.00
INSERTION 4.02000017e+002 3.90000000e+002 1.34700000e+003
END 4.01999934e+002 3.45000000e+002 1.34700000e+003
END 4.02000099e+002 4.35000000e+002 1.34700000e+003
END_ENTITY
BEGIN_ENTITY
ENTITY_NUMBER 8
ATTRIBUTES 1CAESAR
AAA1
C-3O1BATLATL
INSERTION 4.02000000e+002 4.44000000e+002 1.34700000e+003

978

CAESAR II User's Guide

External Interfaces
END 4.02000099e+002 4.35000000e+002 1.34700000e+003
END 4.02000033e+002 4.44000000e+002 1.33800000e+003
END_ENTITY
BEGIN_ENTITY
ENTITY_NUMBER 9
ATTRIBUTES 1CAESAR
AAA1
C-2OBB1dLATL
INSERTION 4.02000000e+002 4.44000000e+002 1.20000000e+003
END 4.02000000e+002 4.44000000e+002 1.20000000e+003
END 4.02000000e+002 4.43999961e+002 1.20350000e+003
END_ENTITY
BEGIN_ENTITY
ENTITY_NUMBER 10
ATTRIBUTES 1CAESAR
AAA1
C-2OPPATLATL
134.50
INSERTION 4.02000017e+002 4.43999981e+002 1.27075000e+003
END 4.02000000e+002 4.43999961e+002 1.20350000e+003
END 4.02000033e+002 4.44000000e+002 1.33800000e+003
END_ENTITY
BEGIN_ENTITY
ENTITY_NUMBER 11
ATTRIBUTES 1CAESAR
AAA1
C-0O1BATLATL
INSERTION 3.00000000e+002 2.16000000e+002 1.34700000e+003
END 2.99999967e+002 2.25000000e+002 1.34700000e+003
END 3.09000000e+002 2.16000033e+002 1.34700000e+003
END_ENTITY
BEGIN_ENTITY
ENTITY_NUMBER 12
ATTRIBUTES 1CAESAR
AAA1
C-0OPPATLATL
105.38
INSERTION 3.00000025e+002 2.77687500e+002 1.34700000e+003
END 2.99999967e+002 2.25000000e+002 1.34700000e+003
END 3.00000083e+002 3.30375000e+002 1.34700000e+003
END_ENTITY
BEGIN_ENTITY
ENTITY_NUMBER 13
ATTRIBUTES 1CAESAR
AAA1
C-0OPPATLZTL
69.00
INSERTION 3.43500000e+002 2.16000017e+002 1.34700000e+003
END 3.09000000e+002 2.16000033e+002 1.34700000e+003
END 3.78000000e+002 2.16000000e+002 1.34700000e+003
END_ENTITY
BEGIN_ENTITY
ENTITY_NUMBER 14
ATTRIBUTES 1CAESAR
AAA1
C-0OPPATLATL
87.38
INSERTION 3.49312500e+002 3.36000008e+002 1.34700000e+003
END 3.05625000e+002 3.36000083e+002 1.34700000e+003
END 3.93000000e+002 3.35999934e+002 1.34700000e+003
END_ENTITY
BEGIN_RUN
LINE_NUMBER CAESAR
AAA1
BEGIN_COORD 1.80000000e+002 3.00000000e+002 1.20000000e+003
END_COORD
3.00000000e+002 3.36000000e+002 1.34700000e+003
BEGIN_SEGMENT
BEGIN_COORD 1.80000000e+002 3.00000000e+002 1.20000000e+003
END_COORD
1.80000000e+002 3.36000000e+002 1.20000000e+003
ENTITY 1
END_SEGMENT

CAESAR II User's Guide

979

External Interfaces
BEGIN_SEGMENT
BEGIN_COORD 1.80000000e+002
END_COORD
1.80000000e+002
ENTITY 1
ENTITY 2
ENTITY 3
END_SEGMENT
BEGIN_SEGMENT
BEGIN_COORD 1.80000000e+002
END_COORD
3.00000000e+002
ENTITY 3
ENTITY 4
ENTITY 5
END_SEGMENT
END_RUN
BEGIN_RUN
LINE_NUMBER CAESAR
AAA1
BEGIN_COORD 3.00000000e+002
END_COORD
3.78000000e+002
BEGIN_SEGMENT
BEGIN_COORD 3.00000000e+002
END_COORD
3.00000000e+002
ENTITY 5
ENTITY 12
ENTITY 11
END_SEGMENT
BEGIN_SEGMENT
BEGIN_COORD 3.00000000e+002
END_COORD
3.78000000e+002
ENTITY 11
ENTITY 13
END_SEGMENT
END_RUN
BEGIN_RUN
LINE_NUMBER CAESAR
AAA1
BEGIN_COORD 3.00000000e+002
END_COORD
4.44000000e+002
BEGIN_SEGMENT
BEGIN_COORD 3.00000000e+002
END_COORD
4.02000000e+002
ENTITY 5
ENTITY 14
ENTITY 6
END_SEGMENT
BEGIN_SEGMENT
BEGIN_COORD 4.02000000e+002
END_COORD
4.02000000e+002
ENTITY 6
ENTITY 7
ENTITY 8
END_SEGMENT
BEGIN_SEGMENT
BEGIN_COORD 4.02000000e+002
END_COORD
4.02000000e+002

980

3.36000000e+002 1.20000000e+003
3.36000000e+002 1.34700000e+003

3.36000000e+002 1.34700000e+003
3.36000000e+002 1.34700000e+003

3.36000000e+002 1.34700000e+003
2.16000000e+002 1.34700000e+003
3.36000000e+002 1.34700000e+003
2.16000000e+002 1.34700000e+003

2.16000000e+002 1.34700000e+003
2.16000000e+002 1.34700000e+003

3.36000000e+002 1.34700000e+003
4.44000000e+002 1.20000000e+003
3.36000000e+002 1.34700000e+003
3.36000000e+002 1.34700000e+003

3.36000000e+002 1.34700000e+003
4.44000000e+002 1.34700000e+003

4.44000000e+002 1.34700000e+003
4.44000000e+002 1.20000000e+003

CAESAR II User's Guide

External Interfaces
ENTITY 8
ENTITY 10
ENTITY 9
END_SEGMENT
BEGIN_SEGMENT
BEGIN_COORD 4.02000000e+002 4.44000000e+002 1.20000000e+003
END_COORD
4.44000000e+002 4.44000000e+002 1.20000000e+003
ENTITY 9
END_SEGMENT
END_RUN
As the interface runs, status messages display for information purposes. After the transfer is
complete, review the log file to insure that there are no unexplained errors or warnings.
The log file generated for the above .UDE file is listed as follows.
*** CAESAR II / CADPIPE Geometry Translator ***
CADPIPE data as read in for NEUTRAL file: NRGTST1.UDE

General Notes
This file contains the status of the data conversion from the CADPIPE ISO system to the
CAESAR II stress analysis package. The data contained in this file is grouped into three
sections:
1. Entity information
2. Segment connectivity information
3. Final interpreted CAESAR II data.
Anomalies with final CAESAR II model geometry should be traced through this file, possibly
back to the CADPIPE connectivity file. Notes and warning messages are shown below as
necessary.
Because all required CAESAR II data is not available in the CADPIPE environment, CAESAR II
must make certain modeling assumptions. As such, it is important that you verify the following
assumptions:
1. Thicknesses of .05 are generated by the software because no match could be found in the
standard CAESAR II diameter/thickness tables. This value must be corrected after it is in
CAESAR II.
2. Rigid elements are assumed to have a weight of 1.0. This value should be corrected after it
is in CAESAR II.
3. Temperatures, pressures, and other loading items are not available for transfer by the
interface.
4. Restraint information is not available for transfer by the interface.
5. Material #1 (low carbon steel) is assumed by the interface.

Error Code Statements

1. The item code for this entity indicates that it is a custom bend. The interface makes the
transfer assuming it is a long radius elbow. The correction to the proper radius must take
place in CAESAR II.
2. The item code for this entity indicates that it is a mitered bend. The interface makes the
transfer assuming it is a long radius elbow. The correction to the proper radius and number
of cuts must take place in CAESAR II.

CAESAR II User's Guide

981

External Interfaces
3. The item code for this entity indicates that it is some type of OLET fitting. Because there is
only a single reference to this entity in the CADPIPE neutral file, this segment is not
contiguous with the rest of the model in CAESAR II. The interface attempts to connect the
OLET as it sees fit. The final geometry should be checked.
4. The item code for this entity is unknown to the current version of the interface. The entity is
set to a 2 node, zero length rigid element. You must modify the CAESAR II data to correct
this anomaly.
5. The segment being processed referenced an ENTITY that was not defined in the ENTITY
Information section of the .UDE file. This indicates some type of error during the generation
of the neutral file. Regenerate the neutral file before using the interface again.

CADPIPE LOG File Discussion

The log file is useful in identifying problems that may have been encountered by the interface
during the data transfer. The log file is divided into the following sections:
Introduction - Lists general notes about the interface and defines the error code. Typically,
this is a one-page summary.
Section 1 - Lists the entity information as read from the CADPIPE connectivity file. Each
entity is grouped into one of four possible element types, node numbers are assigned, and
the coordinate system is rotated to conform to the standard pipe stress coordinate system (Y
vertical).
Section 2 - Details the interpretation and model building process.
Section 3 - Lists the final transformed data which the interface system wrote as the
CAESAR II input file.
The following is a sample log file:
Section 1-Entity Information
--------------------------------------------------------Element types are: 1 - Pipe 2 - Bend 3 - Intersection 4 - Rigid
Interpreted Entity information for: 14 Entities.

982

CAESAR II User's Guide

External Interfaces

Section 1 - Entity Information

Section 1-Entity Information
--------------------------------------------------------Element types are: 1 - Pipe 2 - Bend 3 - Intersection 4 - Rigid
Interpreted Entity information for: 14 Entities.

Section 2-Segment Information

Processing LINE_NUMBER:
CAESAR AAA1
Entity
1 Original nodes:
10.
20.
STARTING new segment with new Entity # 1, "FROM" node is 10.
CAESAR II type is PIPE
Final nodes:
10.
20.
Finished processing segment with entities:
1
Entity
1 Original nodes:
10.
20.
STARTING new segment with old Entity # 1, "FROM" node is 20.
CAESAR II type is 1.
Entity 1 PIPE has already been processed. Skip in progress.
Entity 2 Original nodes:
30.
40.
Final nodes:
20.
40.
Entity 3 Original nodes:
50.
60.
Switched TO/FROM orientation.
Final nodes:
40.
50.
Finished processing segment with entities:
1
2
3
Entity
3 Original nodes:
60.
50.
STARTING new segment with old Entity # 3, "FROM" node is 50.
CAESAR II type is 2.
Entity 3 BEND has already been processed. Skip in progress.
Entity 4 Original nodes:
70.
80.
Final nodes:
50.
80.
Entity 5 Original nodes:
90.
100.
Resetting element 4 "TO" node from 80. to 100. and adjusting deltas.
Finished processing segment with entities:
3
4
5
Processing LINE_NUMBER:
CAESAR
AAA1
Entity
5 Original nodes:
100.
100.
STARTING new segment with old Entity # 5, "FROM" node is 100.
CAESAR II type is 3.
Entity 5 TEE has already been processed. Skip in progress.
Entity 12 Original nodes:
230.
240.
Switched TO/FROM orientation.
Final nodes:
100. 230.
Entity 11 Original nodes:
210. 220.
Final nodes:
230.
220.
Finished processing segment with entities:
5 12 11
Entity 11 Original nodes:
210.
220.
STARTING new segment with old Entity # 11, "FROM" node is
220.

CAESAR II User's Guide

983

External Interfaces
CAESAR II type is 2.
Entity 11 BEND has already been processed. Skip in progress.
Entity 13 Original nodes:
250. 260.
Final nodes:
220. 260.
Finished processing segment with entities:
11 13
Processing LINE_NUMBER: CAESAR
AAA1
Entity 5 Original nodes:
100. 100.
STARTING new segment with old Entity # 5, "FROM" node is 100.
CAESAR II type is 3.
Entity 5 TEE has already been processed. Skip in progress.
Entity 14 Original nodes:
270.
280.
Final nodes:
100.
280.
Entity 6 Original nodes:
110. 120.
Final nodes:
280.
120.
Finished processing segment with entities:
5
14
6
Entity
6 Original nodes:
110.
120.
STARTING new segment with old Entity #
6, "FROM" node is
120.
CAESAR II type is 2.
Entity
6 BEND has already been processed. Skip in progress.
Entity
7 Original nodes:
130.
140.
Final nodes:
120.
140.
Entity
8 Original nodes:
150.
160.
Final nodes:
140.
160.
Finished processing segment with entities:
6
7
8
Entity
8 Original nodes:
150.
160.
STARTING new segment with old Entity #
8, "FROM" node is
160.
CAESAR II type is 2.
Entity
8 BEND has already been processed. Skip in progress.
Entity 10 Original nodes:
190.
200.
Switched TO/FROM orientation.
Final nodes:
160.
190.
Entity
9 Original nodes:
170.
180.
Switched TO/FROM orientation.
Final nodes:
190.
170.
Finished processing segment with entities:
8 10
9
Entity
9 Original nodes:
180.
170.
STARTING new segment with old Entity #
9, "FROM" node is
170.
CAESAR II type is 1.
Entity
9 PIPE has already been processed. Skip in progress.
Finished processing segment with entities:
9

Section 3-Final CAESAR II Data

*** C A E S A R I I INTERPRETED GEOMETRY DATA ***
*** C A E S A R I I INTERPRETED PROPERTY DATA ***
Part 1
*** C A E S A R I I INTERPRETED PROPERTY DATA ***
Part 2
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Data transferred to CAESAR II array structures.

984

CAESAR II User's Guide

External Interfaces
The CAESAR II job file name is: NRGTST._A
Starting generation of CAESAR II input file for:
13 Elements
4 Bends
0 Rigids
0 Restraints
Conversion of data to CAESAR II completed.

Checking the CADPIPE/CAESAR II Data Transfer

It is important to verify the resulting CAESAR II input file. Begin by reviewing the log file to see if
any errors or warnings were generated.
The log file is a standard ASCII text file that can be output to a printer or viewed with a
text editor, such Notepad.
Next, enter the input mode of CAESAR II and plot the model. The CAESAR II plot for the
CADPIPE data transfer example is shown in the following figure.

If the resulting CAESAR II geometry is inconsistent with the CADPIPE drawing, use the log file
to identify the problem:
1. Identify the problem area and locate the relevant elements in Section 3 of the log file.
2. Find the appropriate segment in Section 2 of the log file and verify that it contains the same
entities as shown in the CADPIPE connectivity file.
3. Verify that the information in Section 1 of the log file matches the interpreted data in Section
3.
Anomalies with the resulting CAESAR II geometry can usually be attributed to one of the
following causes:
An unexpected geometry condition was handed to the CAESAR II interface. The solution is
to update the interface for the current condition. Forward the .UDE file to Intergraph CAS
Support for analysis and subsequent interface modification.

CAESAR II User's Guide

985

External Interfaces

An unknown item code was encountered during the data transfer, indicating that the
CADPIPE software has been updated and new item codes added. Because the interface
does not recognize the new items, it must be modified. Contact Intergraph CAS Support for
assistance.
OLET entities in the CADPIPE connectivity file do not contain a reference to the piping
element they intersect. As a result, the interface attempts to determine the associated pipe
using coordinate computation and 3D intersection calculations. Potentially, the procedure
can pass over the intersection point, and the branch containing the OLET plots at the origin
of the CAESAR II model. You can correct this in the CAESAR II input by breaking the
intersected pipe and assigning the OLET node number to the break point.
Some CADPIPE connectivity files that have been submitted to Intergraph CAS for analysis
have been found to contain errors consisting of either pipe doubling back on itself or piping
elements indicated as bends where there was no change in direction. Errors such as these
can be detected by the CAESAR II error checker when it is run prior to attempting the data
transfer.

Intergraph Smart 3D PCF

Processes a Piping Component File (PCF) or multiple PCFs generated from Intergraph
SmartPlant 3D, and then generates a CAESAR II piping input model file from the conversion
information.
Both the Intergraph Smart 3D PCF and the PCF menu options in the External
Interfaces menu operate the same.
See PCF (on page 1009) for detailed information about how this command works.

Intergraph PDS
Transfers piping system geometry from an Intergraph neutral file to a standard CAESAR II _A
binary input file. The geometry data consists of pipe lengths, diameters, thicknesses,
connectivities, and node numbers. All nodal specific quantities, such as loads, displacements,
and so forth, must be manually added to the CAESAR II input file.
There are three basic steps necessary to generate a CAESAR II input file from an Intergraph
neutral file:

986

CAESAR II User's Guide

External Interfaces
1. Click Tools > External Interfaces > Intergraph PDS to create an Intergraph neutral file.

2. Transfer this ASCII file to the CAESAR folder.

You can create and transfer as many Intergraph neutral files as necessary. During
data transfer, the interface continues to prompt you for neutral file names until you cancel
the session.
3. Verify the proper units file is active in the folder in which the neutral file is located. This is
necessary for the proper conversion of the data.

File Name
Specifies the full path and filename of the neutral file. When you open the software, this field
displays the current data path. You can manually add a file name to the end of this string, or
click Browse to search for a neutral file.

CAESAR II User's Guide

987

External Interfaces

Browse
Opens a standard file selection dialog box from which you can search for the appropriate neutral
file. You can use the options at the bottom of the dialog box to switch between the neutral file
suffix types, such as .N or .NEU.

Minimum Anchor Node

Identifies the node number interpreted as the minimum node number for a terminal point in the
model. Only change the default value if your Intergraph system has been set up with a different
anchor node range.

Maximum Anchor Node

Identifies the node number interpreted as the maximum node number for a terminal point in the
model. Only change the default value if your Intergraph system has been set up with a different
anchor node range.

Start Node
Indicates the starting node number in the resulting CAESAR II model. By default, the entire
model is renumbered using this value as the starting point. To disable renumbering, you must
set this option and Increment (on page 286) to zero.

Increment
Defines the value used as a node number increment. This value is used during the renumbering
of the model. To disable renumbering, you must set this option and Start Node (on page 286) to
zero.

Filter Out Elements Whose Diameter is Less Than

Defines the minimum allowed pipe size. Any elements less than this minimum diameter are
ignored. This option is used to keep drain lines and taps out of the stress model.

Remove HA Elements
Controls whether HA elements are removed. Typically, HA (hanger-support direction) elements
should be removed. The support is placed on the pipe where the HA element joins it. Clear this
check box to keep HA elements in the stress model.

988

CAESAR II User's Guide

External Interfaces

Force Consistent Bend Materials

Allows the interface to ensure that all bend elements, incoming and outgoing, have the same
material name and properties. Often, bends are given a material specification that is different
from that of the attached piping, even though the properties are the same. Select this option to
change the material information on the bend elements to that of the attached piping.

Include Additional Bend Nodes

Allows the interface to add a mid-point node and a near-point node on bends. Clear this box to
cause bends to have only the far-point node.

Enable Advanced Element Sort

Allows a second, more thorough sorting of the elements. This sort considers the length of the
runs, the diameter, and the elevation in determining where to begin the node numbering
sequence. By default, this option is turned on. Turning off this option uses only the first sort
where the elements are sorted starting with the largest (diameter) anchor nodes and proceeds
to the smallest.

Model TEES as 3 Elements

Instructs the software to treat tees as three elements, instead of condensing them down to a
point. In either case, the SIF is applied at the tee node. Using three elements allows pipe
properties of the tee to differ from those of the attached piping.

Model Rotation
The rotation of the +X-axis of the CAESAR II model should be rotated about the vertical axis
away from the PCF's East compass point. The default setting is zero, which imposes no rotation.
Select +90 to rotate the model a positive 90-degrees. Select -90 to rotate the model a negative
90-degrees.
Z can also be vertical based on special execution setting.
Alternatively, you can rotate the model after importing it to CAESAR II. Use the Rotate
command on the Block Operations toolbar.

Neutral File Weight Units

Defines the value for the neutral file weight units. This value allows the software to properly
interpret the weight values contained in the neutral file. This is necessary because the neutral
file does not indicate the units for the weight values. The value you select should match the
corresponding value in the active CAESAR II units file.

CAESAR II User's Guide

989

External Interfaces

Neutral File Insulation Units

Specifies the value for the neutral file insulation units. This value allows the software to properly
interpret the insulation thickness values contained in the neutral file. This is necessary because
the neutral file does not indicate the units for insulation thickness values. The value you select
should match the corresponding value in the active CAESAR II units file.

Data Modification and Details

After the Intergraph PDS data transfer is complete, you can open the CAESAR II input files. You
must make the following modifications and additions:
Specification of material properties. Material 1 is assumed, unless a material mapping file is
provided.
Specification of temperatures and pressures. The temperature/pressure pairs are assigned
to T1, T2, T3 and P1, and P2 in order.
Specification of intersection types. Unreinforced is assumed.
Specification of restraints details. By default, only anchors and double acting supports are
detected by the interface. If the exact type of restraint is to be transferred, PDS must be
configured to generate the CAESAR II restraint type indicators. These restraint type
indicators are shown in the Additional Notes section of the complete Neutral File interface,
discussed later in this chapter. These restraint type values must be placed in HA Field 7 of
the neutral file.
The fluid density can be transferred into CAESAR II also. Place this density value in Field 7
of the neutral file. The density value should be defined according to the density unit used in
the CAESAR II units file, not in terms of specific gravity.
Specification of other loads. The weight of rigid elements can be transferred into CAESAR II
for 3W, 4W, AV, RB, and VA type elements. For the weight of these elements to transfer, the
weight value must be placed in Field 8.
Insulation thickness and density can also be transferred into CAESAR II. The thickness and
density values should be placed in Fields 9 and 10, respectively.
In addition, review the log file generated by the interface for any anomalies. The interface sorts
the elements and then ensures that diameters and wall thicknesses are defined for each
element. Depending on how disorganized the Intergraph neutral file is, some assumptions made
by the interface may not be correct and may require you to modify the resulting CAESAR II input
file.
If the interface encounters any major problems, the process aborts and no CAESAR II input is
generated. In these instances, contact Intergraph CAS Support for assistance.
If necessary, you can define a material mapping file to relate the material designations in the
Intergraph neutral file to the standard CAESAR II materials. You must name this file
PDS_MAT.MAP, and place it beneath the application's \SYSTEM subfolder. This mapping file
contains two fields of data per line. Field 1 is 5 characters wide, and contains the CAESAR II
material number that corresponds to the PDS material name. Field 2 is held in columns 7
through 21 and contains the PDS material name as it appears in the neutral file. Neither of these
values should contain a decimal point.

990

CAESAR II User's Guide

External Interfaces

Example Neutral File from PDS

The following is an example neutral file from PDS.
! Model Design file(s) : ZG2:[006,006]MDLTEST.DGN
!
: ZG2:[006,006]EQPTEST.DGN
! Line name(s)
: P-1002
! Date
: 26-JUL-89 13:58:12
DRAW ,P-1002,P-1002
LOAD, 202000E, 1, 3, 100.00, 300.00,
0.00,
500.00
LOAD, 202000E, 4, 6, 200.00, 400.00,
0.00,
0.00
LSET, 202000E,3,6,5,3
LOAD, 102001F, 1, 3, 100.00, 300.00,
0.00,
500.00
LOAD, 102001F, 4, 6, 200.00, 400.00,
0.00,
0.00
LSET, 102001F,3,6,5,3
LOAD, 202000F, 1, 3, 100.00, 300.00,
0.00,
500.00
LOAD, 202000F, 4, 6, 200.00, 400.00,
0.00,
0.00
LSET, 202000F,3,6,5,3
LOAD, 102001A, 1, 3, 100.00, 300.00,
0.00,
500.00
LOAD, 102001A, 4, 6, 200.00, 400.00,
0.00,
0.00
LSET, 102001A,3,6,5,3
LOAD, 102001D, 1, 3, 100.00, 300.00,
0.00,
500.00
LOAD, 102001D, 4, 6, 200.00, 400.00,
0.00,
0.00
LSET, 102001D,3,6,5,3
LOAD, 1020020, 1, 3, 100.00, 300.00,
0.00,
500.00
LOAD, 1020020, 4, 6, 200.00, 400.00,
0.00,
0.00
LSET, 1020020,3,6,5,3
LOAD, 1020023, 1, 3, 100.00, 300.00,
0.00,
500.00
LOAD, 1020023, 4, 6, 200.00, 400.00,
0.00,
0.00
LSET, 1020023,3,6,5,3
CODE,CODE23,ASME2,1982,D
TF, 3020009,16"x10"STDCB390155,,CODE23, 25, 24
PROP,TF, 3020009, 1,A105,0,0,0,0,0,0.
PROP,TF, 3020009, 2,0,0.0,90
PROP,TF, 3020009, 3,16.,16,BE,0.375,, 202000E
PROP,TF, 3020009, 4,10.,10.75,BE,0.365,, 102001F
RB, 302000B,16"STDCB30255,,CODE23, 901, 26
PROP,RB, 302000B, 1,A234-WPB,0,0,0,0,0,0.
PROP,RB, 302000B, 3,16.,16,BW,0.375,, 202000E
PROP,RB, 302000B, 4,0.,0,BW,0.,, 202000E

CAESAR II User's Guide

0.00,

300.00,

0.00,

0.00,

0.00,

300.00,

0.00,

0.00,

0.00,

300.00,

0.00,

0.00,

0.00,

300.00,

0.00,

0.00,

0.00,

300.00,

0.00,

0.00,

0.00,

300.00,

0.00,

0.00,

0.00,

300.00,

0.00,

0.00,

991

External Interfaces
PI, 5020013,16"STDCB10075,,CODE23, 26, 25
PROP,PI, 5020013, 1,API-5L-B,0.0000E+00,0.0000E+00,,0,,0.0000E+00
PROP,PI, 5020013, 3,16.,16,BW,0.375,, 202000E
PROP,PI, 5020013, 4,16.,16,BW,0.375,, 202000E
RB, 302000A,16"STDCB30255,,CODE23, 902, 12
PROP,RB, 302000A, 1,A234-WPB,0,0,0,0,0,0.
PROP,RB, 302000A, 3,16.,16,BW,0.375,, 202000F
PROP,RB, 302000A, 4,0.,0,BW,0.,, 202000F
TF, 302000C,16"x10"STDCB390155,,CODE23, 15, 14
PROP,TF, 302000C, 1,A105,0,0,0,0,0,0.
PROP,TF, 302000C, 2,0,0.0,90
PROP,TF, 302000C, 3,16.,16,BE,0.375,, 202000F
PROP,TF, 302000C, 4,10.,10.75,BE,0.365,, 102001A
PI, 5020014,16"STDCB10075,,CODE23, 17, 15
PROP,PI, 5020014, 1,API-5L-B,0.0000E+00,0.0000E+00,,0,,0.0000E+00
PROP,PI, 5020014, 3,16.,16,BW,0.375,, 102001D
PROP,PI, 5020014, 4,16.,16,BW,0.375,, 102001D
FL, 3020042,10"STDCB20015,,CODE23, 27, 13
PROP,FL, 3020042, 1,A105,0,0,0,0,0,0.
PROP,FL, 3020042, 3,10.,16,WN,0.,CL150, 102001A
PROP,FL, 3020042, 4,10.,10.75,BW,0.365,CL150, 102001A
PI, 5020015,10"STDCB10075,,CODE23, 14, 13
PROP,PI, 5020015, 1,API-5L-B,0.0000E+00,0.0000E+00,,0,,0.0000E+00
PROP,PI, 5020015, 3,10.,10.75,BW,0.365,, 102001A
PROP,PI, 5020015, 4,10.,10.75,BW,0.365,, 102001A
TE, 3020008,16"STDCB30245,,CODE23, 22, 17, 20, 951
PROP,TE, 3020008, 1,A234-WPB,0,0,0,0,0,0.
PROP,TE, 3020008, 2,0,0.0,90
PROP,TE, 3020008, 3,16.,16,BW,0.375,, 1020020
PROP,TE, 3020008, 4,16.,16,BW,0.375,, 102001D
PROP,TE, 3020008, 5,16.,16,BW,0.375,, 1020023
FL, 3020041,10"STDCB20015,,CODE23, 28, 23
PROP,FL, 3020041, 1,A105,0,0,0,0,0,0.
PROP,FL, 3020041, 3,10.,16,WN,0.,CL150, 102001F
PROP,FL, 3020041, 4,10.,10.75,BW,0.365,CL150, 102001F
PI, 5020012,10"STDCB10075,,CODE23, 23, 24
PROP,PI, 5020012, 1,API-5L-B,0.0000E+00,0.0000E+00,,0,,0.0000E+00
PROP,PI, 5020012, 3,10.,10.75,BW,0.365,, 102001F
PROP,PI, 5020012, 4,10.,10.75,BW,0.365,, 102001F
EL, 3020040,16"STDCB30215,,CODE23, 903,
1, 952
PROP,EL, 3020040, 1,A234-WPB,0,0,0,0,0,0.
PROP,EL, 3020040, 2,24,90,0,0.
PROP,EL, 3020040, 3,16.,16,BW,0.375,, 1020023
PROP,EL, 3020040, 4,16.,16,BW,0.375,, 1020023
EL, 3020023,16"STDCB30215,,CODE23, 18, 16, 953
PROP,EL, 3020023, 1,A234-WPB,0,0,0,0,0,0.
PROP,EL, 3020023, 2,24,90,0,0.
PROP,EL, 3020023, 3,16.,16,BW,0.375,, 1020023
PROP,EL, 3020023, 4,16.,16,BW,0.375,, 1020023
EL, 3020024,16"STDCB30215,,CODE23, 16, 10, 954
PROP,EL, 3020024, 1,A234-WPB,0,0,0,0,0,0.
PROP,EL, 3020024, 2,24,90,0,0.
PROP,EL, 3020024, 3,16.,16,BW,0.375,, 1020023
PROP,EL, 3020024, 4,16.,16,BW,0.375,, 1020023

992

CAESAR II User's Guide

External Interfaces
EL, 302002A,16"STDCB30215,,CODE23, 11,
9, 955
PROP,EL, 302002A, 1,A234-WPB,0,0,0,0,0,0.
PROP,EL, 302002A, 2,24,90,0,0.
PROP,EL, 302002A, 3,16.,16,BW,0.375,, 1020023
PROP,EL, 302002A, 4,16.,16,BW,0.375,, 1020023
EL, 302002B,16"STDCB30215,,CODE23,
8,
6, 956
PROP,EL, 302002B, 1,A234-WPB,0,0,0,0,0,0.
PROP,EL, 302002B, 2,24,90,0,0.
PROP,EL, 302002B, 3,16.,16,BW,0.375,, 1020023
PROP,EL, 302002B, 4,16.,16,BW,0.375,, 1020023
EL, 302003C,16"STDCB30235,,CODE23,
5,
3, 957
PROP,EL, 302003C, 1,A234-WPB,0,0,0,0,0,0.
PROP,EL, 302003C, 2,24.1421,45,0,0.
PROP,EL, 302003C, 3,16.,16,BW,0.375,, 1020023
PROP,EL, 302003C, 4,16.,16,BW,0.375,, 1020023
EL, 302003D,16"STDCB30215,,CODE23,
4,
2, 958
PROP,EL, 302003D, 1,A234-WPB,0,0,0,0,0,0.
PROP,EL, 302003D, 2,24,90,0,0.
PROP,EL, 302003D, 3,16.,16,BW,0.375,, 1020023
PROP,EL, 302003D, 4,16.,16,BW,0.375,, 1020023
PI, 5020016,16"STDCB10075,,CODE23, 19, 18
PROP,PI, 5020016, 1,API-5L-B,0.0000E+00,0.0000E+00,,0,,0.0000E+00
PROP,PI, 5020016, 3,16.,16,BW,0.375,, 1020023
PROP,PI, 5020016, 4,16.,16,BW,0.375,, 1020023
PI, 5020018,16"STDCB10075,,CODE23, 10, 11
PROP,PI, 5020018, 1,API-5L-B,0.0000E+00,0.0000E+00,,0,,0.0000E+00
PROP,PI, 5020018, 3,16.,16,BW,0.375,, 1020023
PROP,PI, 5020018, 4,16.,16,BW,0.375,, 1020023
PI, 5020019,16"STDCB10075,,CODE23,
9,
8
PROP,PI, 5020019, 1,API-5L-B,0.0000E+00,0.0000E+00,,0,,0.0000E+00
PROP,PI, 5020019, 3,16.,16,BW,0.375,, 1020023
PROP,PI, 5020019, 4,16.,16,BW,0.375,, 1020023
PI, 502001A,16"STDCB10075,,CODE23,
6,
7
PROP,PI, 502001A, 1,API-5L-B,0.0000E+00,0.0000E+00,,0,,0.0000E+00
PROP,PI, 502001A, 3,16.,16,BW,0.375,, 1020023
PROP,PI, 502001A, 4,16.,16,BW,0.375,, 1020023
PI, 502001B,16"STDCB10075,,CODE23,
3,
4
PROP,PI, 502001B, 1,API-5L-B,0.0000E+00,0.0000E+00,,0,,0.0000E+00
PROP,PI, 502001B, 3,16.,16,BW,0.375,, 1020023
PROP,PI, 502001B, 4,16.,16,BW,0.375,, 1020023
PI, 502001C,16"STDCB10075,,CODE23,
2,
1
PROP,PI, 502001C, 1,API-5L-B,0.0000E+00,0.0000E+00,,0,,0.0000E+00
PROP,PI, 502001C, 3,16.,16,BW,0.375,, 1020023
PROP,PI, 502001C, 4,16.,16,BW,0.375,, 1020023
EL, 302003E,16"STDCB30235,,CODE23,
5,
7, 959
PROP,EL, 302003E, 1,A234-WPB,0,0,0,0,0,0.
PROP,EL, 302003E, 2,24.1421,45,0,0.
PROP,EL, 302003E, 3,16.,16,BW,0.375,, 1020023
PROP,EL, 302003E, 4,16.,16,BW,0.375,, 1020023
EL, 302005A,16"STDCB30215,,CODE23, 19, 21, 960
PROP,EL, 302005A, 1,A234-WPB,0,0,0,0,0,0.
PROP,EL, 302005A, 2,24,90,0,0.
PROP,EL, 302005A, 3,16.,16,BW,0.375,, 1020023
PROP,EL, 302005A, 4,16.,16,BW,0.375,, 1020023

CAESAR II User's Guide

993

External Interfaces
PI, 502005E,16"STDCB10075,,CODE23, 21, 20
PROP,PI, 502005E, 1,API-5L-B,0.0000E+00,0.0000E+00,,0,,0.0000E+00
PROP,PI, 502005E, 3,16.,16,BW,0.375,, 1020023
PROP,PI, 502005E, 4,16.,16,BW,0.375,, 1020023
PI, 5027531,16"STDCB10075,,CODE23, 25, 22
PROP,PI, 5027531, 1,API-5L-B,0.0000E+00,0.0000E+00,,0,,0.0000E+00
PROP,PI, 5027531, 3,16.,16,BW,0.375,, 1020020
PROP,PI, 5027531, 4,16.,16,BW,0.375,, 1020020
PI, 5027532,16"STDCB10075,,CODE23, 15, 12
PROP,PI, 5027532, 1,API-5L-B,0.0000E+00,0.0000E+00,,0,,0.0000E+00
PROP,PI, 5027532, 3,16.,16,BW,0.375,, 202000F
PROP,PI, 5027532, 4,16.,16,BW,0.375,, 202000F
LNOD, 27,RE, 1.0, 1.0, 1.0, 1.0, 1.0, 1.0
LNOD, 28,RE, 1.0, 1.0, 1.0, 1.0, 1.0, 1.0
NODE,
1, 12024.00, 12000.00,
3011.12, 2,
0.00
NODE,
2, 12044.50, 12000.00,
3011.12, 2,
0.00
NODE,
3, 12068.50, 12000.00,
2470.00, 2,
0.00
NODE,
4, 12068.50, 12000.00,
2987.12, 2,
0.00
NODE,
5, 12075.57, 12000.00,
2452.93, 2,
0.00
NODE,
6, 12082.64, 12000.00,
1764.00, 2,
0.00
NODE,
7, 12082.64, 12000.00,
2435.86, 2,
0.00
NODE,
8, 12106.64, 12000.00,
1740.00, 2,
0.00
NODE,
9, 12168.00, 12000.00,
1740.00, 2,
0.00
NODE,
10, 12192.00, 11815.00,
1740.00, 2,
0.00
NODE,
11, 12192.00, 11976.00,
1740.00, 2,
0.00
NODE,
12, 12198.00, 11911.00,
1644.00, 2,
0.00
NODE,
13, 12210.00, 11911.00,
1594.12, 2,
0.00
NODE,
14, 12210.00, 11911.00,
1632.94, 2,
0.00
NODE,
15, 12210.00, 11911.00,
1644.00, 2,
0.00
NODE,
16, 12216.00, 11791.00,
1740.00, 2,
0.00
NODE,
17, 12228.00, 11911.00,
1644.00, 2,
0.00
NODE,
18, 12240.00, 11815.00,
1740.00, 2,
0.00
NODE,
19, 12240.00, 11887.00,
1740.00, 2,
0.00
NODE,
20, 12240.00, 11911.00,
1656.00, 2,
0.00
NODE,
21, 12240.00, 11911.00,
1716.00, 2,
0.00
NODE,
22, 12252.00, 11911.00,
1644.00, 2,
0.00
NODE,
23, 12270.00, 11911.00,
1594.12, 2,
0.00
NODE,
24, 12270.00, 11911.00,
1632.94, 2,
0.00
NODE,
25, 12270.00, 11911.00,
1644.00, 2,
0.00
NODE,
26, 12282.00, 11911.00,
1644.00, 2,
0.00
NODE,
27, 12210.00, 11911.00,
1590.05, 2,
0.00
NODE,
28, 12270.00, 11911.00,
1590.05, 2,
0.00
NODE, 901, 12285.50, 11911.00,
1644.00, 2,
0.00
NODE, 902, 12194.50, 11911.00,
1644.00, 2,
0.00
NODE, 903, 12000.00, 12000.00,
2987.12, 2,
0.00
NODE, 904, 12210.00, 11911.00,
1577.18, 2,
0.00
NODE, 905, 12270.00, 11911.00,
1577.18, 2,
0.00
NODE, 951, 12240.00, 11911.00,
1644.00, 2,
0.00
NODE, 952, 12000.00, 12000.00,
3011.12, 2,
0.00
NODE, 953, 12240.00, 11791.00,
1740.00, 2,
0.00
NODE, 954, 12192.00, 11791.00,
1740.00, 2,
0.00
NODE, 955, 12192.00, 12000.00,
1740.00, 2,
0.00
NODE, 956, 12082.64, 12000.00,
1740.00, 2,
0.00
NODE, 957, 12068.50, 12000.00,
2460.00, 2,
0.00

994

CAESAR II User's Guide

External Interfaces
NODE,
NODE,
NODE,

958,
959,
960,

12068.50,
12082.64,
12240.00,

12000.00,
12000.00,
11911.00,

3011.12,
2445.86,
1740.00,

2,
2,
2,

0.00
0.00
0.00

The .LOG file produced by the CAESAR II translator is shown below, followed
by a plot of the job from the CAESAR II input module.
*** CAESAR II / Intergraph Geometry Translator ***
INTERGRAPH DATA AS READ IN FOR FILE: P-1002.NEU
Maximum Temperature and Pressure encountered:
300.0
Looking for node:
901
Have sorted element:
1, its location pointer is:
2
Number of "resume" nodes is:
0
Element type is: 10
Looking for node:
26
Have sorted element:
2, its location pointer is:
Number of "resume" nodes is:
0
Element type is: 9
Looking for node:
25
Have sorted element:
3, its location pointer is:
Number of "resume" nodes is:
0
Element type is: 14
Looking for node:
24
Have sorted element:
4, its location pointer is:
Number of "resume" nodes is:
0
Element type is: 9
Looking for node:
23
Have sorted element:
5, its location pointer is:
Number of "resume" nodes is:
0
Element type is: 7
Looking for node:

Looking for node:

15
Have sorted element:
8, its location pointer is:
Number of "resume" nodes is:
0
Element type is: 14

CAESAR II User's Guide

11

10

28

Looking for node:

902
Have sorted element:
6, its location pointer is:
Number of "resume" nodes is:
0
Element type is: 10
Looking for node:
12
Have sorted element:
7, its location pointer is:
Number of "resume" nodes is:
0
Element type is: 9

Looking for node:

Have sorted element:

500.0

14
9, its location pointer is:

29

995

External Interfaces
Number of "resume" nodes is:
Element type is: 9

Looking for node:

13
Have sorted element: 10, its location pointer is:
Number of "resume" nodes is:
0
Element type is: 7
Looking for node:
27
Looking for node:
903
Have sorted element: 11, its location pointer is:
Number of "resume" nodes is:
0
Element type is: 5
Looking for node:
1
Have sorted element: 12, its location pointer is:
Number of "resume" nodes is:
0
Element type is: 9
Looking for node:
2
Have sorted element: 13, its location pointer is:
Number of "resume" nodes is:
0
Element type is: 5
Looking for node:
4
Have sorted element: 14, its location pointer is:
Number of "resume" nodes is:
0
Element type is: 9
Looking for node:
3
Have sorted element: 15, its location pointer is:
Number of "resume" nodes is:
0
Element type is: 5
Looking for node:
5
Have sorted element: 16, its location pointer is:
Number of "resume" nodes is:
0
Element type is: 5
Looking for node:
7
Have sorted element: 17, its location pointer is:
Number of "resume" nodes is:
0
Element type is: 9
Looking for node:
6
Have sorted element: 18, its location pointer is:
Number of "resume" nodes is:
0
Element type is: 5
Looking for node:
8
Have sorted element: 19, its location pointer is:
Number of "resume" nodes is:
0
Element type is: 9
Looking for node:

996

12

24

18

23

17

25

22

16

21

CAESAR II User's Guide

External Interfaces
Have sorted element: 20, its location pointer is:
Number of "resume" nodes is:
0
Element type is: 5
Looking for node:
11
Have sorted element: 21, its location pointer is:
Number of "resume" nodes is:
0
Element type is: 9
Looking for node:
10
Have sorted element: 22, its location pointer is:
Number of "resume" nodes is:
0
Element type is: 5
Looking for node:
16
Have sorted element: 23, its location pointer is:
Number of "resume" nodes is:
0
Element type is: 5
Looking for node:
18
Have sorted element: 24, its location pointer is:
Number of "resume" nodes is:
0
Element type is: 9
Looking for node:
19
Have sorted element: 25, its location pointer is:
Number of "resume" nodes is:
0
Element type is: 5
Looking for node:
21
Have sorted element: 26, its location pointer is:
Number of "resume" nodes is:
0
Element type is: 9
Looking for node:
20
Have sorted element: 27, its location pointer is:
Number of "resume" nodes is:
0
Element type is: 13
Looking for node:
22
Have sorted element: 28, its location pointer is:
Number of "resume" nodes is:
1
Element type is: 9
Looking for node:

CAESAR II User's Guide

20

14

13

19

26

27

28

25

Looking for node:

17
Have sorted element: 29, its location pointer is:
Number of "resume" nodes is:
0
Element type is: 9
Looking for node:

15

15

997

External Interfaces

Intergraph Data After Element Sort

998

CAESAR II User's Guide

External Interfaces

Intergraph Data After TEE/Cross Modifications

CAESAR II User's Guide

999

External Interfaces
(End nodes replaced with center point, and TEE/CROSS element removed. Modifications also
performed on 3 & 4 way valves.)

Intergraph Data After Valve Modifications

(Flange lengths added to valve lengths.)

** BEND MODIFICATION START **
INCOMING ELEMENT: 11 NODES:
1
BEND ELEMENT
: 11 NODES:
903
EXITING ELEMENT : 12 NODES:
1
CURRENT COORDINTES FOR ELEMENT: 11
NODE:
1 X, Y, Z =
12024.00
NODE:
903 X, Y, Z =
12000.00
CURRENT COORDINTES FOR ELEMENT: 12
NODE:
1 X, Y, Z =
12024.00
NODE:
2 X, Y, Z =
12044.50
COMPUTED TANGENT INTERSECTION POINT
NODE:
1 X, Y, Z =
12000.00

1000

903
1
2
3011.12 -12000.00
2987.12 -12000.00
3011.12 -12000.00
3011.12 -12000.00

3011.12 -12000.00

CAESAR II User's Guide

External Interfaces
** BEND MODIFICATION START **
INCOMING ELEMENT: 13 NODES:
4
BEND ELEMENT
: 13 NODES:
2
EXITING ELEMENT : 14 NODES:
4
CURRENT COORDINTES FOR ELEMENT: 13
NODE:
4 X, Y, Z =
12068.50
NODE:
2 X, Y, Z =
12044.50
CURRENT COORDINTES FOR ELEMENT: 14
NODE:
4 X, Y, Z =
12068.50
NODE:
3 X, Y, Z =
12068.50
COMPUTED TANGENT INTERSECTION POINT
NODE:
4 X, Y, Z =
12068.50
** BEND MODIFICATION START **
INCOMING ELEMENT: 15 NODES:
5
BEND ELEMENT
: 15 NODES:
3
EXITING ELEMENT : 16 NODES:
5
CURRENT COORDINTES FOR ELEMENT: 15
NODE:
5 X, Y, Z =
12075.57
NODE:
3 X, Y, Z =
12068.50
CURRENT COORDINTES FOR ELEMENT: 16
NODE:
5 X, Y, Z =
12075.57
NODE:
7 X, Y, Z =
12082.64
COMPUTED TANGENT INTERSECTION POINT
NODE:
5 X, Y, Z =
12068.50
** BEND MODIFICATION START **
INCOMING ELEMENT: 16 NODES:
7
BEND ELEMENT
: 16 NODES:
5
EXITING ELEMENT : 17 NODES:
7
CURRENT COORDINTES FOR ELEMENT: 16
NODE:
7 X, Y, Z =
12082.64
NODE:
5 X, Y, Z =
12068.50
CURRENT COORDINTES FOR ELEMENT: 17
NODE:
7 X, Y, Z =
12082.64
NODE:
6 X, Y, Z =
12082.64
COMPUTED TANGENT INTERSECTION POINT
NODE:
7 X, Y, Z =
12082.64
** BEND MODIFICATION START **
INCOMING ELEMENT: 18 NODES:
8
BEND ELEMENT
: 18 NODES:
6
EXITING ELEMENT : 19 NODES:
8
CURRENT COORDINTES FOR ELEMENT: 18
NODE:
8 X, Y, Z =
12106.64
NODE:
6 X, Y, Z =
12082.64
CURRENT COORDINTES FOR ELEMENT: 19
NODE:
8 X, Y, Z =
12106.64
NODE:
9 X, Y, Z =
12168.00
COMPUTED TANGENT INTERSECTION POINT
NODE:
8 X, Y, Z =
12082.64
** BEND MODIFICATION START **
INCOMING ELEMENT: 20 NODES:
11
BEND ELEMENT
: 20 NODES:
9
EXITING ELEMENT : 21 NODES:
11
CURRENT COORDINTES FOR ELEMENT: 20
NODE:
11 X, Y, Z =
12192.00

CAESAR II User's Guide

2
4
3
2987.12 -12000.00
3011.12 -12000.00
2987.12 -12000.00
2470.00 -12000.00

3011.12 -12000.00
3
5
7
2452.93 -12000.00
2470.00 -12000.00
2452.93 -12000.00
2435.86 -12000.00

2460.00 -12000.00
5
7
6
2435.86 -12000.00
2460.00 -12000.00
2435.86 -12000.00
1764.00 -12000.00

2445.86 -12000.00
6
8
9
1740.00 -12000.00
1764.00 -12000.00
1740.00 -12000.00
1740.00 -12000.00

1740.00 -12000.00
9
11
10
1740.00 -11976.00

1001

External Interfaces

1002

NODE:
9 X, Y, Z =
12168.00
CURRENT COORDINTES FOR ELEMENT: 21
NODE:
11 X, Y, Z =
12192.00
NODE:
10 X, Y, Z =
12192.00
COMPUTED TANGENT INTERSECTION POINT
NODE:
11 X, Y, Z =
12192.00
** BEND MODIFICATION START **
INCOMING ELEMENT: 22 NODES:
16
BEND ELEMENT
: 22 NODES:
10
EXITING ELEMENT : 23 NODES:
16
CURRENT COORDINTES FOR ELEMENT: 22
NODE:
16 X, Y, Z =
12216.00
NODE:
10 X, Y, Z =
12192.00
CURRENT COORDINTES FOR ELEMENT: 23
NODE:
16 X, Y, Z =
12216.00
NODE:
18 X, Y, Z =
12240.00

1740.00 -12000.00

COMPUTED TANGENT INTERSECTION POINT

NODE:
16 X, Y, Z =
12192.00
** BEND MODIFICATION START **
INCOMING ELEMENT: 23 NODES:
18
BEND ELEMENT
: 23 NODES:
16
EXITING ELEMENT : 24 NODES:
18
CURRENT COORDINATES FOR ELEMENT: 23
NODE:
18 X, Y, Z =
12240.00
NODE:
16 X, Y, Z =
12192.00
CURRENT COORDINTES FOR ELEMENT: 24
NODE:
18 X, Y, Z =
12240.00
NODE:
19 X, Y, Z =
12240.00
COMPUTED TANGENT INTERSECTION POINT
NODE:
18 X, Y, Z =
12240.00
** BEND MODIFICATION START **
INCOMING ELEMENT: 25 NODES:
21
BEND ELEMENT
: 25 NODES:
19
EXITING ELEMENT : 26 NODES:
21
CURRENT COORDINTES FOR ELEMENT: 25
NODE:
21 X, Y, Z =
12240.00
NODE:
19 X, Y, Z =
12240.00
CURRENT COORDINTES FOR ELEMENT: 26
NODE:
21 X, Y, Z =
12240.00
NODE:
951 X, Y, Z =
12240.00
COMPUTED TANGENT INTERSECTION POINT
NODE:
21 X, Y, Z =
12240.00

1740.00 -11791.00

1740.00 -11976.00
1740.00 -11815.00

1740.00 -12000.00
10
16
18
1740.00 -11791.00
1740.00 -11815.00
1740.00 -11791.00
1740.00 -11815.00

16
18
19
1740.00 -11815.00
1740.00 -11791.00
1740.00 -11815.00
1740.00 -11887.00

1740.00 -11791.00
19
21
951
1716.00 -11911.00
1740.00 -11887.00
1716.00 -11911.00
1644.00 -11911.00

1740.00 -11911.00

CAESAR II User's Guide

External Interfaces

Intergraph Data After Bend Modifications

CAESAR II User's Guide

1003

External Interfaces

(Far Weld Line Nodal coordinates changed to Tangent Intersection Point coordinates)
DATA FOR PROPERTY ARRAY WITH # ENTRIES = 5
LOCATIONS 1-11
LOCATIONS 1, 12-20
*** CAESAR II INTERPRETED GEOMETRY DATA ***
*** CAESAR II INTERPRETED PROPERTY DATA *** Part 1
*** CAESAR II INTERPRETED PROPERTY DATA *** Part 2

1004

CAESAR II User's Guide

External Interfaces

CAESAR II User's Guide

1005

External Interfaces

1006

CAESAR II User's Guide

External Interfaces

CAESAR II User's Guide

1007

External Interfaces

The CAESAR II job file name is P-1002_A Y

Starting generation of CAESAR II input file for:
28 elements
9 Bends
2 Rigids
2 Restraints

1008

CAESAR II User's Guide

External Interfaces
Conversion of data to CAESAR II completed.

PCF
Processes a single Piping Component File (PCF) or multiple PCFs, and then generates a
CAESAR II piping input model file from the conversion information.
The goal of the conversion process is:
To create a CAESAR II model that is complete, ready to run, and contains no errors.
To provide a method for stress engineers to quickly and accurately collect data.
After the PCF is created from external software, it can be converted to a CAESAR II piping input
model file.
The Intergraph Smart3D PCF and the PCF menu options in the External Interfaces
menu operate the same.
The PCF file format is a standard drawing exchange format developed by Alias Ltd. The PCF is
a flat text file containing detailed information about the piping system components. The
information is extracted from a CAD system. Details on the format of the PCF and its capabilities
can be obtained from Alias.
A valid PCF has a .pcf file extension name.

CAESAR II User's Guide

1009

External Interfaces

PCF Interface Custom Attributes

PCFs contain custom attributes in the form of component-attribute<n>. Intergraph Smart 3D can
generate PCFs with ISO_STRESS PCF configuration. This configuration assures that a number
of various data fields are passed in specific PCF data fields.
COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE1 = Design pressure
COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE2 = Maximum temperature
COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE3 = Material name
COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE4 = Wall thickness (reducing thickness in the case of reducing
components)
COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE5 = Insulation thickness
COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE6 = Insulation density
COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE7 = Corrosion allowance
COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE8 = Component weight
COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE9 = Fluid density
COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE10 = Hydro test pressure
The units associated with the values of these attributes are defined by including a descriptive
unit label after the value. For example, the pressure attribute, COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE1, can
be specified as COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE1 15.3 barg. If the unit label chosen (barg) is not
one of the labels recognized by CAESAR II as defined through Tools > Create/Review Units
on the CAESAR II Main menu, then you must include that label in the PCF_UNITS_MAP.TXT
file in the CAESAR II System folder.

The only PCF SUPPORT attribute that is not ignored is the SUPPORT-DIRECTION
attribute. It must have a value of UP, DOWN, EAST, WEST, NORTH, or SOUTH.
One note on the Material Number setting is that the selected material is applied to a piping
element as the default only if the PCF COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE3 for that element is not
specified or recognized.
You can achieve the best results by preparing customized mapping files before beginning the
conversion process.
You may use default mapping files if the values fit our model. There are a number of mapping
files that define various values. Locate these files in the CAESAR II System folder.

PCF Unit Mapping

The PCF_UNITS_MAP.TXT file maps the PCF Units name to the conversion factor used to
convert it to the CAESAR II internal units (English).
This file defines three columns:
CAESAR II Unit

Displays the internal unit used by the software

PCF Unit

Displays the user-supplied unit label

Conversion from CAESAR II -> PCF

Displays the conversion factor used to convert the

user-supplied unit to a CAESAR II internal unit

Comments can be added at the end of each line separated from the last column value by
spaces and preceded by the "*" character.

1010

CAESAR II User's Guide

External Interfaces
All PCF component attributes can be specified inside the PCF with their associated units. Any
unit specified by the PCF component attributes which is not a standard internal CAESAR II unit
as defined by the Tools > Create/Review Units dialog box on the CAESAR II Main menu needs
to be mapped inside the PCF_UNITS_MAP.TXT file.
CAESAR II divides the user-supplied value by this constant to calculate the value for the
attribute that is displayed by the software according to the units specified in the configuration
options (except that temperature from C to F will also add the 32 ).

To Modify the PCF_UNITS_MAP.TXT File

Locate this file in the CAESAR II System folder.
This is an optional task. You can review the default file and determine if you need to
make changes to fit your model.
1. Open the PCF_UNITS_MAP.TXT file in any text editor, such as Notepad.
An example of the CAESAR II default file is shown below.

2. Modify any of the units definitions or add another unit definition as needed.
3. Save, and close the file.

CAESAR II User's Guide

1011

External Interfaces

PCF Material Mapping

The PCF_MAT_MAP.TXT file maps PCF material names to a corresponding CAESAR II
material number. Note that the first line is currently reserved to the CAESAR II version number.
The match in this file must be an exact match. If no match is found, then the software searches
the CAESAR II material database to find the "best match" (where the "best match" tries to do an
intelligent match, adjusting for dashes, spaces, "GR", "SA" versus "A", and so forth) for the
material name.
PCF COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE3 is used by the software to set the material attribute for each
component. If the COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE3 value is not defined or recognized, the software
applies the default material as specified by the Material Number value in the dialog box.
Any material specified by the PCF COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE3 which is not a standard
CAESAR II material as defined in the Tools > Material Data Base dialog under the Material >
Edit menu must be mapped inside the PCF_MAT_MAP.TXT file.

To Modify the PCF_MAT_MAP.TXT File

This file is located in the CAESAR II System folder.
This is an optional task. You can review the default file and determine if you need to
make changes to fit your model.
1. Open the PCF_MAT_MAP.TXT file in any text viewer, such as Notepad.
The CAESAR II default file looks like this.

2. Modify any of the materials definitions.

3. Save and close the file.

1012

CAESAR II User's Guide

External Interfaces

PCF Restraint Mapping

The PCF_RES_MAP.TXT file defines the CAESAR II restraint types corresponding to PCF
support/restraint names.
The PCF SUPPORT attribute is used by CAESAR II to apply supports at the specified
coordinates. Only the SUPPORT-DIRECTION identifier is interpreted by the software if no
match is found for a particular support NAME in the PCF_RES_MAP.TXT file. The
SUPPORT-DIRECTION identifier must have a value of UP, DOWN, EAST, WEST, NORTH, or
SOUTH.
In order to fine-tune the support configuration placed on the imported model by CAESAR II for a
given PCF SUPPORT component, the PCF support NAME identifier value needs to be mapped
in the PCF_RES_MAP.TXT file.
The example below shows a typical PCF SUPPORT component, highlighting the support NAME
value which should be used to define CAESAR II support mapping.

To Modify the PCF_RES_MAP.TXT File

Locate the file in the CAESAR II system folder.
This is an optional task. You can review the default file and determine if you need to
make changes to fit your model.
This file defines the CAESAR II function corresponding to PCF support/restraint names.
1. Open the PCF_RES_MAP.TXT file in any text editor, such as Notepad.
2. Modify any of the restraints definitions.
3. Save, and close the file.
In the example, the Support type VG100 corresponds functionally to two CAESAR II supports:
+Vertical support (weight support)
Guide, each with friction coefficients equal to 0.3

CAESAR II User's Guide

1013

External Interfaces
This file supports a wide range of support functions, plus the key words MU= (for friction) and
GAP= (to define gaps in the restraint).

Syntax for each support type is:

<Support Name>
<N->
<Restraint Function>
<MU=>
<GAP=>
<Support Name> - CAESAR II considers a matching as any PCF support/restraint name that
contains this <Support Name> (not an exact match). Best results are achieved if the <Support
Names> are listed in order of longest names to shortest names. Otherwise VG1" might register
as a match before VG100 is processed.
<N> - Followed by N lines of: This means how many CAESAR II restraints need to get placed
on the corresponding Restraint auxiliary screen. N should be limited to 4 or less.
<Restraint Function> - This is defined in terms of CAESAR II function (GUI, LIM, VHGR, and
so forth.), Global Axes (VERT, NS, EW, and so forth), or Local Axes (A, B, C, and so forth):
ANC, GUI, LIM, VHGR, CHGR These create a CAESAR II Anchor, Guide, Axial Restraint,
Variable Hanger, or Constant Hanger, respectively. The last two create to-be-designed
hangers, which may end up as either variable or constant hangers.
VERT, EW, NS These create translational restraints corresponding to the compass points
of the global axes (Y, X, Z respectively for the Y-up setting, and Z, X, Y respectively for the
Z-up setting). See the figure below. One-way restraints may be created by prefixing with "+"
or "-".

1014

A, B, C These create translational restraints corresponding to the local axes of the

support/pipe installation. The A corresponds to the centerline of the pipe, B corresponds to

CAESAR II User's Guide

External Interfaces
the "direction" attributed to the support, and C corresponds to the cross-product of the A and
B axes. As with the global restraints, one-way restraints may be created by prefixing with +
or -. See the figure below.

<MU=> Optional keyword followed by a value for adding a friction coefficient to the restraint (not
valid with ANC, VHGR, CHGR).
<GAP=> Optional keyword followed by a value and set of units for adding a gap to the restraint
(not valid with ANC, VHGR, CHGR).
The software also processes equipment nozzles designated by the
END-CONNECTION-EQUIPMENT keyword as imposed thermal displacements in all degrees of
freedom, all with values of 0.0. This creates an initial behavior of an anchor, but allows you to
easily impose actual thermal displacements when known.

Examples
The examples below illustrate typical restraint configurations, along with suggested mapping
entries.
Variable Spring Hanger

These represent variable spring hangers, and are mapped onto a single CAESAR II support (=
VHGR). This is interpreted as a program-designed spring hanger in CAESAR II.

CAESAR II User's Guide

1015

External Interfaces

Constant Effort Spring Hanger

This represents a constant effort spring hanger, and thus is mapped onto a single CAESAR II
support (= CHGR). This is treated as a program-designed spring hanger in CAESAR II.
Note that it is identical to the VHGR shown in the figure above.

1016

CAESAR II User's Guide

External Interfaces
These hanger rod assemblies only resist downward (weight) loads, and allow upward
movement. In CAESAR II, they are typically modeled as +Y (or +Z, depending on how the
vertical axis is set).

These sliding supports only resist downward (weight) loads, and allow upward movement. They
are represented as a single +VERT support. However, since they slide against a base, most
stress analysts prefer to add a friction coefficient (MU=x.xx).

YRIGID 1
VERT MU=0.3
or
YRIGID 1
B
MU=0.3
These restraints resist load/movement in both directions (so the "+" of the previous two supports
is eliminated). If the restraint is always installed vertically, then use the first definition (VERT). If
the restraint is installed in any direction (for example, vertically or horizontally), use the second
definition B, indicating that it acts along the installed support direction. This assumes that the

CAESAR II User's Guide

1017

External Interfaces
installed direction of the restraint is always defined as the direction from the main steel towards
the pipe. Since sliding is involved, a friction coefficient is included as well.

UGUIDE
1
GUI
MU=0.3
or
UGUIDE
1
C
MU=0.3
If this restraint is always installed vertically on horizontal lines (as shown in the figure above),
then the support function can always be modeled as a Guide (with sliding friction). If the restraint
may be installed in any direction at all (with restraint direction corresponding to the direction of
the attachment point toward the pipe), then use the second definition (C) as it represents the
direction lateral to the pipe and the restraint.

TEESUPPORT 2
+VERT
MU=0.3
GUI
MU=0.3
This restraint maps to two functions:
+VERTical
GUIde

1018

CAESAR II User's Guide

External Interfaces
Since sliding is involved in both functions, friction coefficients are provided for both.

VERTLATERAL
2
VERT
MU=0.3
GUI
MU=0.3
or
VERTLATERAL
2
B
MU=0.3
C
MU=0.3
This restraint maps to two functions:
up/down restraint
side-to-side restraint
If it is always installed vertically, then it is defined as a VERTical and a GUIde. If it is possible
that the restraint may be rotated about the pipe to be installed in any direction, then use the
second definition, which represents restraint along the direction of the support as well as lateral
to the support and pipe.

VERTAXIAL
2
+VERT
MU=0.3
LIM
MU=0.3
or
VERTAXIAL
2
+VERT
MU=0.3
A
MU=0.3
This restraint maps to two functions:
+VERT support

CAESAR II User's Guide

1019

External Interfaces

An axial restraint. The axial restraint can be defined equally as LIM or A (as A corresponds
to restraint along the direction of the pipe centerline).

SWAYSTRUT
1
B
These represent sway struts, which may be installed in any direction, and provide restraint along
the line of action of the sway strut. Assuming that the restraint direction corresponds to the
direction of the sway strut, then the best way to define these restraints is B (restraint along the
support direction).

ANCHOR
ANC

1020

CAESAR II User's Guide

External Interfaces
These restraints all restrict movement of the pipe in all six degrees-of-freedom, so they can be
defined as Anchors ("ANC").

PENETRATION
+C
-C
-VERT
+VERT

4
GAP=aMM
GAP=bMM
GAP=cMM
GAP=dMM

In the example above, the pipe (and the local A-axis) is running into the page. With B up, +C is
to the right.
Some of these can get quite complex, especially if restraints have different gaps in different
directions. It may require trial and error to determine exactly how the +/- restraint directions
correspond to the support direction passed in the PCF. In some cases, you may want to model
the restraint behavior in CAESAR II rather than in the mapping file.

PCF Stress Intensification Factor Mapping

The PCF_SIF_MAP.TXT file defines the CAESAR II SIF data to be applied at the intersection of
tees and olets. The file also provides support for some SIF keywords.
Stress Intensification Factors (SIF) are not assigned a separate PCF
COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE or defined in any other way inside PCFs. In order to tune Stress
Intensification Factor settings of imported PCF components, CAESAR II provides the
PCF_SIF_MAP.TXT mapping file.
The file defines five columns:
SKEYS

PCF components use SKEYS to indicate how their subtype is

used within the general component group.

CAESAR II SIF TYPE

Should be set to the SIF type number used by CAESAR II as

shown in the CAESAR II SIF TYPE figure below.

PAD=X.X UNITS

(optional) Should be set to the SIF pad thickness, including the

applicable unit (for example, PAD=10 MM)

Ii=X.XX

(optional) Should be set to the in-plane SIF of the component.

This is a multiplier, and therefore unit-less (for example, Ii=1.23)

CAESAR II User's Guide

1021

External Interfaces
Io=X.XX

(optional) Should be set to the out-plane SIF of the component.

This is a multiplier, and therefore unit-less (for example, Io=2.34)

Applying the above example values to set the TERF SKEY to the associated reinforced type
requires the following mapping entry to be specified inside the PCF_RES_MAP.TXT file:
TERF 1 PAD=10 MM Ii=1.23 Io=2.34
Each PCF component defines an SKEY. For an example, see the SUPPORT component
identifier listed in the figure in PCF Restraint Mapping (see "PCF Restraint Mapping" on page
273) (SKEY 01HG). In this case, these are typically four-character words indicating tee type
(CROSS, OLET) and end type. The PCF menu command matches the SKEYS to the entries in
this mapping file. If an SKEY is not found in this file, you should add it.

To Modify the PCF_SIF_MAP.TXT File

Locate this file in the CAESAR II system folder.
This step is strongly recommended in order to take advantage of the capabilities of the
PCF menu command.

1022

CAESAR II User's Guide

External Interfaces
1. Open the PCF_SIF_MAP.TXT file in any text editor, such as Notepad.

2. Modify any of the SIF definitions.

3. Save, and close the file.

How to Use the PCF Interface

1. Click Tools > External Interfaces > PCF or Tools > External Interfaces > Intergraph
Smart3D PCF from the Main menu.
The Intergraph Smart3D PCF and the PCF options are identical.

CAESAR II User's Guide

1023

External Interfaces
The PCF Interface dialog box displays.

2. Click Add PCF Files to Conversion List

on the toolbar.

A PCF must have a file extension of .pcf.

You can add one or multiple files to be converted.
You can remove PCF(s) from the list by clicking Remove PCF Files from the
Conversion List
.
The selected file(s) displays in the PCF Files section of the dialog box.
The default corresponding CAESAR II input file that will be built from the conversion process
displays in the CAESAR II Files section of the dialog box. You can change the path by
clicking the "..." ellipsis button and selecting another path.
3. Change any of the options listed under Conversion Options, as needed.
Condense Rigids (on page 286)
Condense Tees (on page 1027)
Condense Elbows (on page 286)
Use Pipe Materials Only (on page 286)

1024

CAESAR II User's Guide

External Interfaces

Combine PCF Files (on page 287)

Model Rotation (on page 287)
Diameter Limit (on page 287)
Material Number (on page 287)
Pipe Schedule/Wall Thickness (on page 287)

4. Click Convert selected PCF files into CAESAR II

to initiate the conversion process.
During the conversion process, status messages display in the Message Area, which is
located in the lower right of the PCF Interface dialog box.
These messages are also written to a LOG file with the name XXXX.LOG, where XXXX
represents the name (less the extension) of the combined CAESAR II file. The log file is
placed in the selected CAESAR II output file folder.

CAESAR II User's Guide

1025

External Interfaces
5. View your new CAESAR II input model.
For example, this CAESAR II model was created from the sample file 1001-P.PCF:

1026

Elements are ordered and nodes are numbered in a logical manner.

The following attributes transfer correctly from the PCF_UNITS_ MAP_TXT file.
Materials
Diameter and Wall Thickness
Corrosion Allowance and Fluid Density
Operating Conditions (Temperature and Pressures) also are translated.
The following attributes transfer correctly from the PCF_RES_MAP.TXT file.
Restraints
The following attributes transfer correctly from the PCF_SIF_MAP.TXT file.
Tees convert with the correct SIFs in this case a Welding Tee and a Weldolet.
Besides supports/restraints, boundary conditions such as equipment connections are also
transferred. (In this example, all three nozzle connections are set.) You can easily change
these to thermal displacements.
Weights of in-line components, insulation thickness and density, all material properties, and
Allowable Stress information transfer correctly.
Line numbers are assigned according to the name of the PCF file.

CAESAR II User's Guide

External Interfaces
In this example, the output displays the applicable CAESAR II warnings, which are informational
only.
Phantom components (PCF items marked as CONTINUATION or STATUS DOTTED or
MATERIAL LIST EXCLUDE) are ignored during the conversion process.
Tee components are modeled using the thickness of the matching pipe.
Node Numbering preferences (start node and increment) are based on the Node
Numbering Increment set in the active CAESAR II Configuration file.

Add PCF Files to Conversion List

Select PCF(s) for conversion. You can also select a text file (*.txt) that contains a list of
PCFs.

Remove PCF Files from Conversion List

Remove selected PCF(s) from the Conversion List pane.

Convert selected files into CAESAR II format

Initiates the conversion process to convert a PCF(s) to a standard CAESAR II piping

input file.

Condense Rigids
Instructs the software to combine rigids that connect to each other into a single element.
This indicates whether these items should be condensed/merged into adjacent elements. For
example, a valve with adjacent gaskets and flanges would be combined into a single rigid
element.
If activated, then elements are condensed/merged unless there is a valid reason not to (change
of cross section, change of operating conditions, restraint at the location, and so forth).
The default value is TRUE.

Condense Tees
When set to TRUE, this directive instructs the software NOT to treat tees as three elements but
instead condense them to a single node. The SIF is applied at the tee node. The use of the
three elements allows pipe properties of the tee to differ from the attached piping.
The default value is TRUE.

Condense Elbows
Controls whether the software treats elbows as two designated elements. When set to TRUE,
this directive instructs the software NOT to treat elbows as two designated elements. Rather, it
is condensed into its adjacent elements for each direction in which the elbow travels.
The default value is TRUE.

CAESAR II User's Guide

1027

External Interfaces

Use Pipe Materials Only

Instructs the software to apply pipe materials only as defined by the PCF
COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE3 identifiers.
Activating this option replaces the material of various components (elbows, valves, flanges,
reducers, tees, and so forth) with the appropriate piping material, where possible, leading to a
much more homogenous CAESAR II model. Matching components to their corresponding piping
material is done by assembling a matrix of Pipe Spec/diameter combinations, based the
available data transmitted in the PCF. Where an exact match is available, the material
substitution is made. Where piping materials are available for the Pipe Spec but not the
diameter, a match is made to the closest diameter. Where no piping material is available for the
Pipe Spec, the component material is retained. For example, A106 Grade B would be applied
but A234 Grade WPB would be ignored.
If you choose to condense Rigids, Tees, or Elbows, set Use Pipe Materials Only to
TRUE.

Combine PCF Files

Converts and combines PCFs in the dialog box into a single CAESAR II model. You are
prompted for the name of the combined CAESAR II file.
When you merge multiple PCFs into a single CAESAR II model using Combine PCF
Files, line numbers are assigned based on the originating PCF name.

Model Rotation
The rotation of the +X-axis of the CAESAR II model should be rotated about the vertical axis
away from the PCF's East compass point. The default setting is zero, which imposes no rotation.
Select +90 to rotate the model a positive 90-degrees. Select -90 to rotate the model a negative
90-degrees.
Z can also be vertical based on special execution setting.
Alternatively, you can rotate the model after importing it to CAESAR II. Use the Rotate
command on the Block Operations toolbar.

Diameter Limit
Use this to exclude the processing of small pipes, such as vents and drains, by specifying the
size (nominal diameter) below which pipes will be ignored. Enter a diameter limit of -1.000 to
include all pipe sizes that you want to import into CAESAR II.

1028

CAESAR II User's Guide

External Interfaces

Material Number
Select the CAESAR II material to be assigned to components which do not have the material
attribute explicitly set otherwise.
The default is low carbon steel (material number 1).

Pipe Schedule/Wall Thickness

Select the default schedule of the pipe to be used in case the wall thickness of the pipe cannot
be determined from the PCF.

PRO-ISO
Provides a one-way transfer of the geometry data from PRO-ISO to CAESAR II. The geometry
data consists of the pipe lengths, diameters, thicknesses, connectivities, and node numbers.
You must add all nodal specific quantities (restraints, loads, and displacements, for example) to
the CAESAR II input file in the usual manner.
Select Tools > External Interfaces > PRO-ISO and enter the name of the PRO-ISO neutral file.
After you specify the name of the file (without an extension), the transfer process occurs, and
the interface prompts for another neutral file name. This process continues until you have
completed the transfer. The neutral files generated by the interface have the suffixes .PI1 and
.PI2.
The neutral files read by the interface must be generated by the PRO-ISO application. Details of
this step can be found in the PRO-ISO documentation. The PRO-ISO neutral files must be
transferred into the CAESAR II directory so that they are available to the interface.
The interface reads the PRO-ISO neutral files and generates the CAESAR II input file and a log
file of the transfer process. Check the data in both the CAESAR II input file and the log file for
consistency and any assumptions made by the interface. The data transferred (and the data
structure) is described below.
In the first file, a record is required for each piece of pipe in the system. A "pipe" in this sense is
an entity between two nodes, which could be a pipe or a rigid element. There are 12 values per
entry and all values must be specified.
Field 1 - ELMT

Enter the pipe element number, which may correspond to

an entry in the second file. This is also the pipe/element
number in the model. These values must be sequential
from 1.

Field 2 - N1

Enter the From node number (for example, the starting

node for the element). These values must be greater than
zero and less than 32000.

Field 3 - N2

Enter the To node number (for example, the ending node

for the element). These values must be greater than zero
and less than 32000.

Field 4 - DX

Enter the Delta X dimension for the element. This is the

distance between N1 and N2 in the X direction.

Field 5 - DY

Enter the Delta Y dimension for the element. This is the

distance between N1 and N2 in the Y direction. In CAESAR
II, Y is vertical.

CAESAR II User's Guide

1029

External Interfaces

1030

Field 6 - DZ

Enter the Delta Z dimension for the element. This is the

distance between N1 and N2 in the Z direction.

Field 7 - DIAM

Enter the outer pipe diameter.

Field 8 - THK

Enter the pipe wall thickness.

Field 9 - ANCH

Indicate a restraint (support) indicator flag. If ANCH is 1,

then there is a restraint on N1. If ANCH is 2, then there is a
restraint on N2. The type of restraint can be obtained from
the second file.

Field 10 - BND

Indicate the presence of a bend at the N2 end of the

element. If BND is 1, there is a bend at N2. If BND is 0, this
is a straight pipe.

Field 11 - BRAD

Specify the bend radius if the bend is not a long radius

bend.

Field 12 - RIGD

Indicate the current element is a rigid element. The weight

of the element can be obtained from the second file.
Records in the second file are only necessary when
additional data is required. This means there is always a
record in the second file for pipe element #1 (this could be
the only entry in the file). Additional entries contain some
type of data change normally duplicated forward by
CAESAR II.

Field 1 - ELMT

Enter the pipe element number, which corresponds to an

entry in the first file. This is also a pipe/element number in
the model. These numbers are sequential from 1.

Field 2 - TEMP1

Enter the operating temperature for load case 1. This is

found by scanning the PRO-ISO data for the maximum
temperature.

Field 3 PRESS1

Enter the operating pressure for load case 1. This is found

by scanning the PRO-ISO data for the maximum pressure.

Field 4 RGDWGT

Enter the weight of rigid elements. This entry is only

required if the "RIGID" flag was set in the first file.

Field 5 TEEFLG

Enter one of the following values to indicate the "TEE" type:

1 - reinforced
2 - unreinforced
3 - welding tee
4 - sweepolet
5 - weldolet
6 - extruded welding tee

CAESAR II User's Guide

External Interfaces
Field 6 RESTYP

Enter one of the following values to indicate the restraint

(support) type indicator:
0 - anchor
1 - double acting X
2 - double acting Y
3 - double acting Z
4 - double acting RX
5 - double acting RY
6 - double acting RZ

Field 7 - RINFO1 Enter the restraint stiffness.

Field 8 - RINFO2 Enter the restraint gap
Field 9 - RINFO3 Enter the restraint friction coefficient.
Field 10 - MATID Enter the CAESAR II material ID value.
If the coefficient of expansion is to be changed, it
must be entered in the Temperature field above (Field 2).
Field 11 - EMOD Enter the Youngs modulus value.
Field 12 - POIS

Enter the Poissons ratio value.

Field 13 GAMMA

Enter the weight density of the material.

Field 14 INSTHK

Enter the insulation thickness.

Field 15 INSWGT

Enter the weight density of the insulation material.

Field 16 FLDWGT

Enter the weight density of the pipe contents (fluid).

Field 17 TEENOD

Enter the element node number where there is a tee.

Field 18

Unused

Field 19

Unused

Field 20

Unused

CAESAR II User's Guide

1031

External Interfaces

PRO-ISO Example Transfer

Listed below are example neutral files produced by the PRO-ISO interface.
The field width for each value is actually 13 characters. The figures in this section have
been compressed for the documentation.

As the interface runs, the system displays status messages. After the transfer is complete, you
can review the .LOG file generated. An example log file is shown below.
*** CAESAR II / ADEV Geometry Translator ***
ADEV data as read in for GEOMETRY file: TEST1.PI1 PROPERTY file: TEST1.PI2
Starting read of CAD neutral files.
CAD geometry successfully read. CAD properties successfully read.
*** C A E S A R I I INTERPRETED GEOMETRY DATA ***

1032

CAESAR II User's Guide

External Interfaces
*** C A E S A R II INTERPRETED PROPERTY DATA *** Part 1

*** C A E S A R II INTERPRETED PROPERTY DATA *** Part 2

Data transferred to CAESAR II array structures.
The CAESAR II job file name is: TEST1._A
Starting generation of CAESAR II input file for:
15 Elements
2 Bends
1 Rigids
5 Restraints
Conversion of data to CAESAR II completed.

Check the PRO-ISO/CAESAR II Data Transfer

You must verify the resulting CAESAR II input file.
1. Review the log file to see if any errors or warnings were generated. (The .LOG file is a
standard ASCII text file that can be printed or scanned read using any standard text editor.)

CAESAR II User's Guide

1033

External Interfaces
2. Enter the input mode of the interface and plot the model. The CAESAR II plot for the
example transfer file (see PRO-ISO Example Transfer (on page 1032)) is shown in the
figure below.

LIQT
Reads the output file generated by LIQT, extracts the information needed, and generates the
response spectra. The LIQT interface generates CAESAR II dynamic input data files containing
response spectra for input files. The spectra input files contain the dynamic pipe forces. These
time history loads are determined by the Stoner Associates, Inc. (SAI) LIQT package from
pressure transient loading. Then, the generated response spectrum files can be used for the
dynamic analysis in CAESAR II.

Technical Discussion of LIQT Interface

Normal piping system operating procedures such as pump start-up and shutdown, valve
closure, and unexpected events such as power failure, may produce unsteady pressure-flow
conditions. A piping system with rapid pressure-flow variations must be carefully designed to
prevent devastating results.
The SAI LIQT package performs the analysis and simulation of the unsteady flow situations for a
particular liquid piping system, and generates the piping load time histories for the pressure
transient of this particular liquid piping system.
In the dynamic analysis module of CAESAR II, a response spectrum can be generated from the
input of time history pulse. However, there are typically too many data points from a time history
analysis for you to manually input the data into CAESAR II. The LIQT interface bridges the gap
between the SAI LIQT package and the CAESAR II dynamic analysis module.
After the time history loads have been generated by the SAI LIQT package, the CAESAR II
LIQT Interface extracts the dynamic pipe forces from the LIQT generated file, and computes the

1034

CAESAR II User's Guide

External Interfaces
response spectrum. Afterward, the response spectrum can be used as the DLF curve for the
dynamic analysis in CAESAR II.
The response spectrum is a plot giving the maximum response of all possible linear one-degree
of freedom systems because of a given input, which is a force. The abscissa of the spectrum is
the frequency axis, and the ordinate is the maximum response such as the dynamic load factor
(DLF). The DLF is the ratio of the dynamic deflection at any time to the deflection which would
have resulted from the static application of the load. In cases where the applied load is not
constant, the maximum load that occurs at any time during the period of interest is taken.
The dynamic load factor is non-dimensional and independent of the magnitude of load. The
following examples illustrate the characteristics of the DLF curve in terms of the magnitude and
the duration of the load.

How to Use the LIQT Interface

When you reach the LIQT interface, enter the following input to process the LIQT data:
LIQT output file name. (This file is generated by SAIs LIQT package with extension .FRC)
Names of LIQT nodes identifying pipes for which response spectra are to be generated.
Corresponding CAESAR II node numbers for the LIQT pipes.
Maximum number of points on each generated response spectrum curve.
Frequency cut-off value.
After the proper input data is acquired, the LIQT interface module starts the data transfer. During
the computation, you can monitor the process status. Click Cancel at any time to stop the
computation.
The resulting force spectrum files (DLF curves) are written to the CAESAR II data directory
during the computation phase of the software. The names of generated force spectrum files
have the following format:
L*.DLF where "*" is the user CAESAR II node number in the piping model that corresponds to
the equivalent LIQT pipe name.
When all computations have completed, you are returned to the CAESAR II Main menu.

CAESAR II User's Guide

1035

External Interfaces

Example 1
Find the DLF response spectrum of the trapezoidal pulse loads shown in the following figure.

1036

CAESAR II User's Guide

External Interfaces
Solution: The response spectra generated from all four pulse loads are identical, as displayed
below.

The result shows that the DLF curve is independent of the magnitude of the pulse load.

CAESAR II User's Guide

1037

External Interfaces

Example 2
Find the response spectrum of the following trapezoidal pulse loads.

1038

CAESAR II User's Guide

External Interfaces

CAESAR II User's Guide

1039

External Interfaces
Solution: The plotted results displayed below shows that the longer the duration of the force,
the higher the DLF. The triangular pulse, which has a duration of zero, generates the lowest
DLF curve.

AFT IMPULSE
Generates CAESAR II dynamic input data files containing response spectra.
Response spectra input files contain dynamic pipe forces. These time history loads are
determined from pressure transient loading by the AFT Impulse software. CAESAR II reads the
output file generated by AFT Impulse, extracts the information needed, and generates the
response spectra. The generated response spectrum files can then be used for the dynamic
analysis in CAESAR II.

How to Use the AFT IMPULSE Interface

1. Click Tools > External Interfaces > AFT IMPULSE from the Main menu.
The AFT IMPULSE dialog box displays.
2. Enter the following inputs to process the AFT IMPULSE data:
AFT IMPULSE output file name. (This file is generated by AFT IMPULSE with extension
.FRC.)
Names of AFT IMPULSE pipes for which response spectra are to be generated
Corresponding CAESAR II node numbers for the AFT IMPULSE pipes
Maximum number of points on each generated response spectrum curve
Frequency cut-off value
The data transfer begins. During the computation, you can monitor the process status.
3. Click Cancel at any time to stop the computation.

1040

CAESAR II User's Guide

External Interfaces
The resulting force spectrum files (DLF curves) are written to the CAESAR II data directory
during the computation phase of the transfer.
The names of generated force spectrum files have the following format:
P*.DLF where "*" is your CAESAR II node number in the piping model that corresponds to
the equivalent AFT IMPULSE pipe name.
The AFT IMPULSE interface creates a complete CAESAR II Dynamic Input file including
spectrum definition, force sets, load cases, and combination load cases. The resulting input
file is ready to be run, or you can further modify it.
When all computations have completed, the CAESAR II Main menu displays.

PIPENET
Generates CAESAR II dynamic input data files containing response spectra.
Response spectra input files contain dynamic pipe forces. These time history loads are
determined from pressure transient loading by the Sunrise System's PIPENET package. The
PIPENET interface reads the output file generated by PIPENET, extracts the information
needed, and generates the response spectra. The generated response spectrum files can then
be used for the dynamic analysis in CAESAR II.

Technical Discussion of the PIPENET Interface

Normal piping system operating procedures such as pump start-up and shutdown, valve
closure, and unexpected events such as power failure, may produce unsteady pressure-flow
conditions. A piping system with rapid pressure-flow variations must be carefully designed to
prevent devastating results.
PIPENET performs the analysis and simulation of the unsteady flow situations for a particular
liquid piping system, and generates the piping load time histories for the pressure transient of
this particular liquid piping system.
In the dynamic analysis module of CAESAR II, a response spectrum can be generated from the
input of time history pulse. However, there are typically too many data points from a time history
analysis to manually input the data into CAESAR II. The CAESAR II PIPENET Transfer
Interface bridges the gap between PIPENET and the CAESAR II dynamic analysis module.
After the time history loads have been generated by PIPENET, the CAESAR II PIPENET
Interface extracts the dynamic pipe forces from the PIPENET generated file, and computes the
response spectrum. Afterward, the response spectrum can be used as the DLF curve for the
dynamic analysis in CAESAR II.
The response spectrum is a plot giving the maximum response of all possible linear, one-degree
of freedom systems because of a given input, which is a force. The abscissa of the spectrum is
the frequency axis, and the ordinate is the maximum response, such as dynamic load factor
(DLF). The DLF is the ratio of the dynamic deflection at any time to the deflection that would
have resulted from the static application of the load. In cases where the applied load is not
constant, the maximum load, which occurs at any time during the period of interest, is taken.
The dynamic load factor is non-dimensional and independent of the magnitude of load.

CAESAR II User's Guide

1041

External Interfaces

How to Use the CAESAR II / PIPENET Interface

1. Click Tools > External Interfaces > PIPENET from the Main menu.
The PIPENET dialog box displays.
2. Enter the following inputs to process the PIPENET data:
PIPENET output file name. (This file is generated by Sunrise System's PIPENET
package with extension .FRC.)
Names of PIPENET pipes for which response spectra are to be generated
Corresponding CAESAR II node numbers for the PIPENET pipes
Maximum number of points on each generated response spectrum curve
Frequency cut-off value
The data transfer begins. During the computation, you can monitor the process status.
3. Click Cancel at any time to stop the computation.
The resulting force spectrum files (DLF curves) are written to the CAESAR II data directory
during the computation phase of the transfer.
The names of generated force spectrum files have the following format:
P*.DLF where "*" is your CAESAR II node number in the piping model that corresponds to
the equivalent PIPENET pipe name.
The PIPENET interface creates a complete CAESAR II Dynamic Input file including
spectrum definition, force sets, load cases, and combination load cases. The resulting input
file is ready to be run, or you can further modify it.
When all computations have completed, the CAESAR II Main menu displays.

Pipeplus
Reads a Pipeplus neutral file (.pnf suffix), and translates it into a CAESAR II model.

How to Use the Pipeplus Interface

1. Click Tools > Eternal Interfaces > Pipeplus.

1042

CAESAR II User's Guide

External Interfaces
The Pipeplus Interface dialog box displays.

2. Enter the name of the target neutral file.

If needed, use the Browse button to locate the neutral file on your hard disk.
3. Enter the CAESAR II Starting Node Number.
The default value is 10.
4. Enter the CAESAR II Node Number Increment.
The default value is 10.
5. Select the Model Orientation by clicking either the Y axis or Z axis radio button.
CAESAR II assumes the units of the data in the neutral file match the units
designated in the CAESAR II configuration file.
The CAESAR II input file is created in the same directory as the Pipeplus neutral file.
6. Click OK to begin translation of the data.
The CAESAR II input file is created in the same directory as the Pipeplus neutral file.
7. Review the Pipeplus Interface dialog box with the updated information:
Log File Warnings: Number of warnings/problems encountered.
Current Units File: Units file that was used for translation and stored in the CAESAR II
input file.

CAESAR II User's Guide

1043

External Interfaces

The name and location of the CAESAR II input file.

The log file name is the name of the neutral file with .LOG suffix. This file contains general
information about the translation process, including:
The number of lines in the neutral file
The number of CAESAR II elements that were created
Any warning or error messages
Node Association table that relates the Pipeplus node names to the corresponding
CAESAR II node numbers.
8. Compare the CAESAR II input model with the Pipeplus model.

1044

CAESAR II User's Guide

External Interfaces
a. View the CAESAR II model in the Classic Piping Input dialog box or in the 3D Graphics
pane.

b. View the Pipeplus view of this same model in the Pipeplus software.

CAESAR II User's Guide

1045

External Interfaces
An example of the Pipeplus model is shown below.

FlowMaster
Generates CAESAR II dynamic input data files containing response spectra.
Response spectra input files contain dynamic pipe forces. These time history loads are
determined from pressure transient loading by the FlowMaster package. The FlowMaster
interface reads the output file generated by FlowMaster, extracts the information needed, and
generates the response spectra. The generated response spectrum files can then be used for
the dynamic analysis in CAESAR II.

1046

CAESAR II User's Guide

External Interfaces

How to Use the Flowmaster Interface

1. Click Tools > External Interfaces > Flowmaster from the Main menu.
The Flowmaster dialog box displays.
2. Enter the following inputs to process the Flowmaster data:
Flowmaster output file name. (This file is generated by Flowmaster with extension
.FRC.)
Names of Flowmaster pipes for which response spectra are to be generated
Corresponding CAESAR II node numbers for the Flowmaster pipes
Maximum number of points on each generated response spectrum curve
Frequency cut-off value
The data transfer begins. During the computation, you can monitor the process status.
3. Click Cancel at any time to stop the computation.
The resulting force spectrum files (DLF curves) are written to the CAESAR II data directory
during the computation phase of the transfer.
The names of generated force spectrum files have the following format:
P*.DLF where "*" is your CAESAR II node number in the piping model that corresponds to
the equivalent Flowmaster pipe name.
The Flowmaster interface creates a complete CAESAR II Dynamic Input file including
spectrum definition, force sets, load cases, and combination load cases. The resulting input
file is ready to be run, or you can further modify it.
When all computations have completed, the CAESAR II Main menu displays.

CAESAR II User's Guide

1047

External Interfaces

1048

CAESAR II User's Guide

SECTION 16

Data Export to ODBC Compliant Databases

CAESAR II permits the export of the analysis results to ODBC-compliant databases. ODBC is a
programming interface that enables applications to access data in database management
systems that use Structured Query Language (SQL) as a data access standard. CAESAR II
uses two drivers supplied by Microsoft to communicate with the Access database or Excel
spreadsheet. These drivers are installed by default when either of the two products is set up on
a system.

DSN Setup
To use the CAESAR II data export facility, you need to set up two Data Source Names (DSNs)
on the system. DSNs contain information regarding where the database resides on the
computer and how to communicate with (what driver to use, for example). CAESAR II has
capabilities to export data to either an Access database or an Excel spreadsheet. Therefore, you
need two DSNs set up to allow use of this feature. The names of these two DSNs are fixed
(read-only) by ICAS.
The CAESAR II installation program is designed to set up these DSNs automatically. However,
in the event that the DSNs are not set up, follow the procedure below.

Setting Up the Data Source Name:

1. From the Start menu, select Settings > Control Panel.
2. Double-click ODBC Data Sources, and click User DSN.
3. Click Add.
The system displays a dialog box similar to the figure below.

Follow steps 4 through 7 for Microsoft Access DSN Setup ONLY. Skip to step 9
for Microsoft Excel DSN Setup. [no info for Excel DSN setup - missing]

CAESAR II User's Guide

1049

External Interfaces
4. Select the Microsoft Access Driver (*.mdb), and click Finish.
The system displays a dialog box similar to the one below. You are prompted to select your
database.

The data source name must be the C2_OUT_ACCESS. The description is an

optional field, and can hold any description information.
5. Enter the Data Source Name and the Description. Click Select to select the CAESAR II
template database.
CAESAR II is supplied with a template database that contains the structure to hold
data exported from the program. For Microsoft Access, this file is named caesarII.mdb and
is present in the system directory of your CAESAR II installation directory.
6. Select the file, and click OK.

1050

CAESAR II User's Guide

External Interfaces
The system returns you to the ODBC Microsoft Access Setup dialog box.

7. Click OK.
The C2_OUT_ACCESS has been added to list of available user DSNs.

You have now successfully completed the Access DSN setup.

This above process needs to be performed only once per computer.

CAESAR II User's Guide

1051

External Interfaces

Controlling the Data Export

The CAESAR II data export is controlled using the Setup/Configuration module. By default,
data export is disabled. You must run Configure/Setup to enable ODBC data export.

Setting Up the ODBC Data Export

1. Click Tools > Configure/Setup.
The CAESAR II Configuration Editor window displays.
2. Click Database Definitions.
3. Set Enable Data Export to ODBC Compliant Databases to True.
4. On ODBC Database File Name, click Browse and then type the name of your database.
CAESAR II copies the template database to the specified directory and names the database
as specified.
5. The Append re-runs to existing data configuration setting is optional. If set as False (the
default setting), re-runs of the same job overwrite any existing data for the same job in the
database/spreadsheet. If you set this option to True, then re-runs add or append data from
the new runs to the database/spreadsheet.
Click Save and Exit

to save changes to the configuration.

As in previous versions of CAESAR II, the configuration file applies to all CAESAR II jobs
present in that directory. Similarly, the external database/spreadsheet specified in one
configuration file applies to all jobs present in that directory.

1052

CAESAR II User's Guide

SECTION 17

File Sets
This chapter discusses two sets of files: the files that CAESAR II delivers to your computer
during installation, and the files that CAESAR II creates for a particular job.

In This Section
CAESAR II File Guide .................................................................... 1053
Required Program Files ................................................................. 1054
Required Error Data Files .............................................................. 1055
Required Data Sets ....................................................................... 1056
Required Printer/Listing Files......................................................... 1058
Dynamics Files .............................................................................. 1060
Auxiliary Sets ................................................................................. 1060
Structural Data Files ...................................................................... 1061
Example Files ................................................................................ 1061
External Interface Files .................................................................. 1062
CAESAR II Operational (Job) Data ............................................... 1063

CAESAR II File Guide

Approximately 60 MB of free disk space is required for a complete installation of the software. If
your hard drive has limited free space, you may have to manually delete files from your hard
disk before installing a new version of CAESAR II. If you are storing data files in your CAESAR II
installation folder, archive them before you begin the file deletion process. If you are performing
a partial installation, verify that the folder is clean before you start; if this folder is not clean, the
mixing of software versions may generate CRC errors during installation and can adversely
impact performance.
If you have adequate space on your hard drive, the new software data files will overwrite the
data files from the previous version. Some files, such as the material database file, change from
year to year, and may have to be deleted manually to maximize disk space.
After a successful installation of the software, the following folder structure will exist on the hard
drive, assuming that you have named the installation folder caesar and the data directory
caesar data.
\caesar

Main program files

\caesar\acrobat

Adobe Reader installation file

\caesar\assidrv

HASP device drivers and instructions

\caesar\c2_docu

CAESAR II online documentation

\caesar data\examples

Example jobs

\caesar data\lib_i

CADWorx library file in Imperial units

\caesar data\lib_m

CADWorx library file in Metric units

\caesar\setupesl

CAESAR II User's Guide

1053

File Sets
\caesar data\Spec

CADWorx specification files

\caesar\ssidrv
\caesar data\system

program data file templates and libraries

As the hard drive reaches its storage capacity, disk access can slow considerably.
Intergraph CAS recommends that you periodically use the File > Clean Up Files command to
perform general hard disk housekeeping tasks such as deleting scratch files and old job files.

Required Program Files

Required Program
Filename

Description

ANAHLP01.EXE

Help file for dynamic input and load case

editor

ANAHLP02.EXE

Help file for dynamic input and load case

editor

ANAL1.EXE

Static load cases/dynamic input program file

ANNOUNCE.EXE

Build changes announcement program file

C2.EXE

Main Menu program file

C2DATA.EXE

Input conversion to new units program file

C2SET01.EXE

Help file

C2SET02.EXE

Help index file

C2SETUP.EXE

Configuration program file

C2U.EXE

Buried pipe modeler

CRCCHK.EXE

CRC check program file

ELEM.EXE

Element generator

ENGLISH.FIL

English units file

EXPJT.HED

Generic expansion joint header file

FRP.HED

Generic FRP header file

ECHO.EXE

Input echo setup/Neutral file program file

INCORE.EXE

In-core solution module program file

M1HELP01.EXE

Miscellaneous help file

M1HELP02.EXE

Miscellaneous help file

OP2HLP01.EXE

Output processor help file

OP2HLP02.EXE

Output processor help file

MM.FIL

Millimeter units file

OUTCORE.EXE

Out-of-core solution module program file

OUTP01.EXE

Static force/stress computation program file

1054

CAESAR II User's Guide

File Sets
Required Program
Filename

Description

OUTP02.EXE

Static output processor

PIERCK.EXE

Piping error checker

PREPIP.EXE

Piping input module

REPORT.EXE

Input list/echo generation program file

SI.FIL

SI units file

STREAM.EXE

Batch stream processor program file

TIPS.TXT

Start-up Tip-of-the-Day program file

TYPE.BIN

Parameter definition file TUV.fil

VALVE.HED

Generic valve/flange header file

XX.CRC

CRC check data file

Required Error Data Files

Error Data Filename

Description

C2ER01A.EXE

Error explanation text

C2ER01B.EXE

Error index file

C2ER01C.EXE

Error explanation text

C2ER01D.EXE

Error index file

C2ER01E.EXE

Error explanation text

C2ER01F.EXE

Error index file

C2ER01Z.EXE

Error explanation text

C2ER02A.EXE

Error index file

C2ER02B.EXE

Error explanation text

C2ER02C.EXE

Error index file

C2ER02D.EXE

Error explanation text

C2ER02E.EXE

Error index file

C2ER02F.EXE

Error explanation text

C2ER02Z.EXE

Error index file

C2ERROR.EXE

Error reporting program

CAESAR II User's Guide

1055

File Sets

Required Data Sets

Data Set Filename

Description

5-110-1A.FAT

Material fatigue curve

5-110-1B.FAT

Material fatigue curve

5-110-2A.FAT

Material fatigue curve

5-110-2B.FAT

Material fatigue curve

5-110-2C.FAT

Material fatigue curve

ACCESS2K.BAT

Batch file to switch to Access 2000

ACCESS97.BAT

Batch file to switch to Access 97

AMRN2020.FRP

FRP data

ANVIL.HGR

Anvil hanger data

AP.BIN

ANSI pipe sizes

API650.DIG

API650 chart data

APPRVD.BIN

Stoomwezen approval certificate

BE.HGR

Basic engineering hanger data

BERGEN.HGR

Bergen Power hanger data

BHEL.HGR

BHEL hanger data

C2MAT.EXE

Material database editor

CAESAR.FRP

FRP data

CAESARII.MDB

Access template file

CAESARI1997I.MDB

Access 97 database template

CAESARII2000.MDB

Access 2000 database template

CAESARII.XLS

Excel template file

CAPITOL.HGR

Capitol hanger data

CARPAT.HGR

Carpenter & Paterson hanger data

CHINAPWR.HGR

China Power hanger data

CMAT.BIN

Supplied material database

CMP_INP.BAT

Batch file for compressed input listing

COL_INP.BAT

Batch file for column oriented input listings

COMET.HGR

Comet hanger data

CRANE.DAT

Crane valve/flange database

CRANE.VHD

Crane valve/flange header file

DP.BIN

DIN pipe sizes

ENGLISH.FIL

English units template

1056

CAESAR II User's Guide

File Sets
Data Set Filename

Description

FLEXIDIR.HGR

Flexidir hanger data

FLEXPATH.DAT

Flexonics/Pathway Bellows expansion joint database

FLEXPATH.JHD

Flexonics/Pathway Bellows header file

FRONEK.HGR

Fronek hanger data

GENERIC.DAT

Generic valve/flange database

GENERIC.VHD

Generic valve/flange header file

HYDRA.HGR

Witzenmann hanger data

HYDRAANG.DAT

Witzenmann angular expansion joint database

HYDRAANG.JHD

Witzenmann angular expansion joint header file

HYDRAAXI.DAT

Witzenmann axial expansion joint database

HYDRAAXI.JHD

Witzenmann axial expansion joint header file

HYDRALAT.DAT

Witzenmann lateral expansion joint database

HYDRALAT.JHD

Witzenmann lateral expansion joint header file

INOFLEX.HGR

Inoflex hanger data

IWK_ANG.DAT

IWK angular expansion joint database

IWK_ANG.JHD

IWK angular expansion joint header file

IWK_AXI.DAT

IWK axial expansion joint database

IWK_AXI.JHD

IWK axial expansion joint header file

IWK_LAT.DAT

IWK lateral expansion joint database

IWK_LAT.JHD

IWK lateral expansion joint header file

JP.BIN

JIS pipe sizes

LISEGA.HGR

Lisega hanger data

MATFIL1.BIN

ASME Sect VIII material database

MM.FIL

Millimeter units template

MITSUBISHI.HGR

Mitsubishi hanger data

MYATT.HGR

Myatt hanger data

MYRICKS.HGR

Myricks hanger data

NETUSERC2.BAT

DLL registration batch file

NHK.hgr

NHK hanger data

NOFLANGE.DAT

Valve/flange database (no flanges)

NOFLANGE.VHD

Valve/flange header file (no flanges)

NPS.HGR

NPS hanger data

OUTPUT.HED

Dynamic report header template

PDS_MAT.MAP

Intergraph PDS material mapping file

CAESAR II User's Guide

1057

File Sets
Data Set Filename

Description

PDS_PIPES_CSV

Intergraph PDS pipe sizes

POWER.HGR

Power piping hanger data

PRINTER.FMT

Printer formatting string file

PSC.HGR

PSC hanger data

PSU.HGR

Pipe Supports USA data

PTP.HGR

PTP hanger data

PTP-LRG.DAT

PTP large expansion joint database

PTP-LRG.JHD

PTP large expansion joint header file

PTP-SML.DAT

PTP small expansion joint database

PTP-SML.JHD

PTP small expansion joint header file

QUALITY.HGR

Quality Pipe Supports data

SANWATEKKI.HGR

Sanwa Tekki hanger data

TECHNOINDUSTRIES.HGR

Techno Industries hanger data

YAMASHITA.HGR

Yamashita hanger data

Required Printer/Listing Files

Printer/ Listing Filename

Description

LIST.CRC

CRC check data file

OUTPUT.HED

Dynamic output report headers file

TITLE.HED

Piping input title page template file

SCREEN.TXT

Piping input resource file

ALLOW.INP

Compressed formatting for allowable stresses

ALLWTD.INP

Formatting for TD/12 allowables

API650.INP

Formatting for API 650

API6502.INP

Alternate formatting for API 650 nozzles

BENDS.INP

Compressed formatting for bends

PD5500.INP

Formatting for PD5500 nozzles

PD55002.INP

Alternate formatting for PD5500 nozzles

CONPARM.INP

Compressed formatting for control parameters

COORDS.INP

Compressed formatting for coordinates

DISPLACE.INP

Compressed formatting for displacements

ELEMENT.INP

Compressed formatting for elements, layout 1

ELEMENT0.INP

Compressed formatting for elements, layout 2

ELEMENT1.INP

Compressed formatting for elements, layout 3

1058

CAESAR II User's Guide

File Sets
Printer/ Listing Filename

Description

ELEMENT2.INP

Compressed formatting for elements, layout 4

ELEMENT3.INP

Compressed formatting for elements, layout 5

ELEMTD12.INP

Element formatting for TD/12

EXPJTS.INP

Compressed formatting for expansion joints

FORCES.INP

Compressed formatting for forces

HANGERS.INP

Compressed formatting for spring hangers

INITIAL.INP

Listing setup file

MATERIAL.INP

Compressed formatting for materials

MAT_FRP.INP
NOZZLES.INP

Compressed formatting for nozzles

OFFSETS.INP

Compressed formatting for offsets

RIGIDS.INP

Compressed formatting for rigid elements

RIGIDS2.INP

Alternate formatting for rigids

SETUP.INP

Compressed formatting for setup parameters

SIF&TEE.INP

Compressed formatting for SIFs & tees

SIF&TD12.INP
TITLE.INP

Compressed formatting for title page

UNIFORM.INP

Compressed formatting for uniform loads

UNITS.INP

Compressed formatting for units

WIND.INP

Compressed formatting for wind shape factors

ALLOW2.INP

Column oriented formatting for allow\-able stresses

BENDS2.INP

Column oriented formatting for bends

DISPLAC2.INP

Column oriented formatting for dis\-placements

ELEMENT4.INP

Column oriented formatting for elements

EXPJTS2.INP

Column oriented formatting for expansion joints

FORCES2.INP

Column oriented formatting for forces

HANGERS2.INP

Column oriented formatting for spring hangers

MATRIAL2.INP

Column oriented formatting for materials

NOZZLES2.INP

Column oriented formatting for nozzles

OFFSETS2.INP

Column oriented formatting for offsets

RIGIDS2.INP

Column oriented formatting for rigid elements

SIF&TEE2.INP

Column oriented formatting for SIFs & tees

SUPPORT2.INP

Column oriented formatting for restraints

UNIFORM2.INP

Column oriented formatting for uniform loads

CAESAR II User's Guide

1059

File Sets
Printer/ Listing Filename

Description

WIND2.INP

Column oriented formatting for wind shape factors

Dynamics Files
Dynamics Filename

Description

DYN.EXE

Dynamic setup/Harmonic Solution

DYNHEAD.BIN

Dynamic input screen data

DYNOUT1.EXE

Dynamic force/stress computation pro\-gram file

DYNOUT2.EXE

Dynamic output reporting program file

DYNPLOT.EXE

Graphics animation program file

DYNSTART.BIN

Dynamic input example data

EIGEN.EXE

Eigen solution program file

Auxiliary Sets
Auxillary Set Filename

Description

ACCTNG.EXE

Accounting report generator

BIGPRT.EXE

Large print program file

C2_MAT.EXE

Material Database Editor program file

COADEXE.EXE

EXE file scanner

DLLVBASE.TXT

DLL baseline information

DLLVERSN.EXE

DLL version scanner program file

DLLVERSN.LST

DLL data list

HLPROT1.EXE

Help file

HLPROT2.EXE

Help file index

MAKEUNIT.EXE

Units generation program file

MATDAT.92

ASME material database

MISC.EXE

SIF, WRC297, B31G, Flange program file

MISC01.EXE

Help file

MISC02.EXE

Help file index

NETUSERC2.BAT

DLL registration batch file

ROT.EXE

Equipment analysis program file

RUN107.EXE

WRC107 program file

UCS66.BIN

ASME UCS-66 chart data

WRC-2.DIG

WRC107 chart data

1060

CAESAR II User's Guide

File Sets

Structural Data Files

Structural Data Filename

Description

AISC.EXE

AISC unit check program file

AISC77.BIN

1977 AISC steel database

AISC89.BIN

1989 AISC steel database

AISCHLP.HLP

AISC program help file

AISCHLP.PTR

Help index file

AUST90.BIN

1990 Australian steel database

C2S.EXE

Structural input program file

C2SHL01.EXE

Help file for structural input

C2SHL02P.EXE

Help file for structural input

GERM91.BIN

1991 German steel database

HELPSTR.HLP

Help file for structural input

KOREAN.BIN

1990 Korean structural database

SAFRICA.BIN

1990 South African structural database

UK.BIN

United Kingdom structural database

Example Files
Example Filename

Description

45-75

DLF file for HAMMER job

90-110

DLF file for HAMMER job

CRYISM._7(.C2)

Dynamic input example

CRYISM._A(.C2)

Dynamic input example

CRYISM._J(.C2)

Static load case data

CRYNOS._7(.C2)

Dynamic input example

CRYNOS._A(.C2)

Dynamic input example

CRYNOS._J(.C2)

Static load case data

CRYSTR.STR(.C2)

Structural input for CRYISM job

FRAME.J(.C2)

Static load case data

FRAME.STR(.C2)

Structural input example

HAMMER._7(.C2)

Dynamic input example

CAESAR II User's Guide

1061

File Sets
Example Filename

Description

HAMMER._A(.C2)

Dynamic input example

HAMMER._J(.C2)

Dynamic input example, NRC benchmark

JACKET._A(.C2)

Jacketed pipe example input

JACKET._J(.C2)

Static load case data

NUREG9._7(.C2)

Dynamic input example, NRC benchmark

NUREG9._A(.C2)

Dynamic input example, NRC benchmark

NUREG9._J(.C2)

Static load case data

OMEGA._A(.C2)

Omega loop example input

OMEGA._J(.C2)

Static load case data

RELIEF.C2

DLF file for RELIEF job

RELIEF._7(.C2)

Dynamic input example

RELIEF._A(.C2)

Relief Valve example input

RELIEF._J(.C2)

Static load case data

TABLE._7(.C2)

Dynamic input example, harmonic

TABLE._A(.C2)

Dynamic input example, harmonic

TABLE._J(.C2)

Dynamic input example, harmonic

External Interface Files

External Interface
Filename

Description

ACADX.EXE

AutoCad DXF generator program file

ADEV.EXE

PRO-ISO interface program file

APLANT.EXE

Autoplant interface program file

C2DATIN.EXE

Generic neutral file interface program file

C2DXF.DAT

AutoCad DXF template file

C2LIQT.EXE

LIQT interface program file

C2PIPNET.EXE

PIPENET interface program file

C2PIP.EXE

PipePlus interface program file

C2VUECONVERTER.EXE Converts Smart 3D view to a CAESAR II view

CADPIP.EXE

CADPIPE interface program file

COMPRESSOR.EXE

Imports Smart 3D views

CVISON.EXE

ComputerVision interface program file

DATAEXP.CHM

Data export wizard help file

1062

CAESAR II User's Guide

File Sets
External Interface
Filename

Description

DATAEXP.EXE

Data export wizard program file

INTGRPH.EXE

Intergraph interface program file

ISOMET.EXE

Isomet interface program file

NODSIZ.LSP

Autocad node display routine

PCF.EXE

PCF interface program file

PCFDLL.DLL

Supports DLL for PCF interface

PIPEDLL.DLL

Supports DLL for PCF interface

CAESAR II Operational (Job) Data

During the input/analysis/output phases of operation, CAESAR II creates a number of
job-specific data files. Some of these data files are used solely by CAESAR II, while others
contain either input or output data. This section defines the files that you will most likely
encounter, their purpose, and whether they are important for archiving purposes. In most cases,
the job files listed below are only exposed, or visible, on the machine when a job is active. When
a job is not active, all of its files are compressed into either a C2 archive (for piping) or a C2S
archive (for structural).

In the following list, an asterisk (*) after the file extension indicates that it should be saved to
archive input data. A double asterisk (**) indicates the file should be saved to archive output
data.
Not every file listed may be present for a given job. The presence of a file is dependent upon
what analysis has been run.

Static Input Files

._A *

User-defined spreadsheet input data.

._J *

Load case data.

Dynamic Input File

._7 *

User-defined dynamic input data.

Structural Input File

.STR * User-defined structural input data.

Soil Input File

.SOI * User-defined soil property data.

Scratch Files
._B -

Nodal boundary condition file created by the piping error checker and used by the
analysis modules.

CAESAR II User's Guide

1063

File Sets
._C

Element properties file created by the piping error checker and used by the analysis
modules.

._N

Nodal coordinate file created by the piping error checker and used by the analysis
modules.

._R

Job control information created by the piping error checker and used by the analysis
modules.

._E

Element connectivity file created by the piping error checker and used by the analysis
modules.

._X

Structural geometry file used with piping preprocessor.

._1

Scratch file.

._2

Scratch file.

._5

Scratch file with intermediate hanger data.

._6

Scratch file.

.DXF

Geometric data file created for input into AUTOCAD.

.HAR

Harmonic components for animation.

.FRQ

Harmonic solution frequency and phase data.

._L

Intermediate harmonic data file.

.XYT

Animation output data file from time history analysis.

Listing Files
.MSG

Secondary output file with intermediate computation data.

.LST

Data listing file

.LIS

Data listing file

.C2U

Buried modeler error check file.

Output Files
._M ** Intermediate output file that contains data generated by the piping error checker and
load case setup modules.
Static output data file.
._P **
Actual harmonic displacement data.
._Q **
Dynamic output data file.
._S **
Time history output data file.
._T **

1064

CAESAR II User's Guide

File Sets
.OUT

User-generated output (text) data file.

.VAL

Intermediate eigenvalue output file.

.VEC

Intermediate eigenvector output file.

.OTL
**

Input/Output QA sequencing data file.

.WRN Model warning messages from the error checker.

CAESAR II User's Guide

1065

File Sets

1066

CAESAR II User's Guide

APPENDIX A

Update History
The lists on the following pages detail the functional updates made to CAESAR II by version
number. These lists correspond to the major releases of the software and do not reflect items
such as minor releases (1.0P, 2.1D); re-publication of the User Guide, or additional new
modules released to aid customers between updates.

In This Appendix
CAESAR II Initial Capabilities (12/84) ........................................... 1068
CAESAR II Version 1.1S Features (2/86) ...................................... 1068
CAESAR II Version 2.0A Features (10/86) .................................... 1068
CAESAR II Version 2.1C Features (6/87) ..................................... 1069
CAESAR II Version 2.2B Features (9/88) ...................................... 1070
CAESAR II Version 3.0 Features (4/90) ........................................ 1070
CAESAR II Version 3.1 Features (11/90) ...................................... 1071
CAESAR II Version 3.15 Features (9/91) ...................................... 1071
CAESAR II Version 3.16 Features (12/91) .................................... 1073
CAESAR II Version 3.17 Features (3/92) ...................................... 1073
CAESAR II Version 3.18 Features (9/92) ...................................... 1074
CAESAR II Version 3.19 Features (3/93) ...................................... 1075
CAESAR II Version 3.20 Features (10/93) .................................... 1076
CAESAR II Version 3.21 Changes and Enhancements (7/94)...... 1077
CAESAR II Version 3.22 Changes & Enhancements (4/95) ......... 1078
CAESAR II Version 3.23 Changes (3/96) ...................................... 1079
CAESAR II Version 3.24 Changes & Enhancements (3/97) ......... 1080
CAESAR II Version 4.00 Changes and Enhancements (1/98)...... 1082
CAESAR II Version 4.10 Changes and Enhancements (1/99)...... 1082
CAESAR II Version 4.20 Changes and Enhancements (2/00)...... 1082
CAESAR II Version 4.30 Changes and Enhancements (3/01)...... 1083
CAESAR II Version 4.40 Changes and Enhancements (5/02)...... 1083
CAESAR II Version 4.50 Changes and Enhancements (11/03).... 1084
CAESAR II Version 5.00 Changes and Enhancements (11/05).... 1085
CAESAR II Version 5.10 Changes and Enhancements ( 9/07)..... 1085
CAESAR II Version 5.20 Changes and Enhancements (4/09)...... 1086
CAESAR II Version 5.30 Changes and Enhancements (11/10).... 1087
CAESAR II Version 5.31 Changes and Enhancements (5/12)...... 1088

CAESAR II User's Guide

1067

Update History

CAESAR II Initial Capabilities (12/84)

Input data spreadsheets featuring data duplication to the next pipe element
Vessel local Flexibility Calculations
Multiple load case spring hanger design
Algebraic load case combinations
Nonlinear restraints with gaps, friction, 2-node, and skewed options
Zero or finite length expansion joints with Tension Only tie-bars
Built-in database of pipe materials and properties
B31 code compliance reports
Static and dynamic capabilities, including animated mode shape plots
Extensive input/output graphics
Pressure effects on bends, including consideration of circular or slightly oval cross-sections

CAESAR II Version 1.1S Features (2/86)

Help Windows
AutoCAD Interface
HP Plotter Interface
Batch Execution Opinion
Accounting System
File Handler
Spooled Input Listings
Uniform Load in Gs
Liberal Code Stress Allowable
Cursor Pad and Function Key Implementation in Input Spreadsheets
Plot Menu Single Keystroke Access
Stainless Steel Pipe Schedules
Direct Input of Specific Gravity
Bourdon Pressure Options
Hanger Control Spreadsheet Updates

CAESAR II Version 2.0A Features (10/86)

1068

AISC Structural Steel Database with over 800 different structural steel cross-sections.
Keyword/Batch Structural Steel Preprocessor - Provides the same quality CAESAR II
graphics with structural steel volume plots, interactive error checking, extensive interactive
help, and is fully compatible with CAESAR II piping models.
High Resolution Graphics - EGA support for monochrome and 640x350, 16 color mode.
Tecmar Graphics Master support for monochrome and 640x200, 16 color mode. Hercules
support for monochrome 720x348 mode.
Graphics - Added Pan and Range options. Improved zooming, stresses and displaced
shapes in color, hidden lines removed from volume plots, and pipe and structure plotted
together.
3D-Graph - Added an option to plot stresses for all nodes for all load cases on the same
plot.

CAESAR II User's Guide

Update History

Simultaneous Use Of Two Screens - Supports one monochrome screen and another for
graphics.
WRC 107 Stress Calculations.
Units - Use English and SI standard options, or define your own set of unit constants and
labels. Output may be generated in multiple unit sets, and input files may be converted from
one unit set to another.
Wind Load Calculations - According to ANSI A58.1-1982, or you can input your own velocity
or pressure versus elevation tables.
Pipe/structure include Option - Piping input from one file may be included in another with a
given node and rotational offset.
Quick Natural Frequency Range Calculations - Computes the number of natural frequencies
in any user given range in the amount of time needed to do a single static solution.
High Resolution Hardcopy Printer Plots.
Setup file options - You can set the following CAESAR II execution parameters:
Graphics hardware configurations.
Colors for over 27 different plotted items.
B3.1 reduced intersection options.
Plot/Geometry connection through CNodes options.
Corroded cross section stress calculation options.
Minimum and Maximum allowed bend angle options.
Occasional load factors.
Loop closure tolerance.

CAESAR II Version 2.1C Features (6/87)

Uniform and Independent support shock spectrum capability.

Force Spectrum Dynamic Analysis of Fluid Waterhammer.
Force Spectrum Dynamic Analysis of Relief Loads.
Force Spectrum Dynamic Analysis of Wind Gust Loads.
Fluid Mechanics Analysis of Gas or Liquid open vent relief system. Includes vent stack
sizing, thrust, and pressure rise computations.
NRC Dynamics Benchmarks for: NUREG/CR-1677, BNL-NUREG-51267, Vol. I, 1980; and
NUREG/CR-1677, BNL-NUREG-51267, Vol. II, 1985.
Dynamic Friction modeling based on static load case results.
Eleven pre-defined shock spectra including all Reg. Guide 1.60 spectra and the El Centro
North-South component spectra.
Improved Harmonic Analysis including the effect of phased loading relationships. This
analysis allows the modeling of eccentrically loaded rotating equipment.
Improved dynamic output processor, includes user-defined headings and comments.
Animated static and dynamic solutions with structural members and hidden line volume
plots.
Improved EIGENSOLVER many times faster than earlier algorithms, with automatic
out-of-core solution mode.
Updated Static Analysis Load Case Processor.
New Friction Algorithm with interactive control during solution of nonlinear restraints.
Improved Output file handling of various solution methods.
Ability to abort any function at any time during a session using the <ESC> key.

CAESAR II User's Guide

1069

Update History

New keydisk memory protection scheme.

Hardware/Software QA capability for analysis verification.

CAESAR II Version 2.2B Features (9/88)

Large Rotation Supports - Allows large rotation supports to be handled properly, by

computing the support forces in all three global directions. Rod and Chain hanger supports
can now be modeled.
Nonlinear Out-of-Core Solver - This new solver increases the range of problems CAESAR II
can solve by allowing nonlinear solutions to be performed on the hard disk. This capability is
necessary when a job is too large to be solved in memory.
Friction Report - Friction is a non-conservative force, and CAESAR II treats it as such. The
restraint reports now show restraint loads due to friction for each load case.
New External Interface Hooks - A new interface module allows smooth interface to data
conversion modules between CAESAR II and other programs such as AutoCAD. A new
AutoCAD DXF interface is provided, and two thirds of the part vendors have completed
interfaces from their AutoCAD ISO packages to CAESAR II.
ASCII Editor - Due to an overwhelming need and subsequent lack of easy to use system
editors, a standalone ASCII editor is provided. This editor easily modifies files such as
AUTOEXE.BAT, CONFIG.SYS, and SETUP.CII.
2D XY Engineering Plotting Program - Standalone plotting software that allows you to plot
engineering data such as CAESAR II spectrum files. This software plots any real data
arranged in columns.
Valve & Flange Database - The addition of a valve and flange database enables you to
define or select the specific rigid element to insert into the piping system. The database is
constructed to allow you to add or modify entries.
Dynamic Restart - The most time consuming part of a dynamic analysis is the Eigensolution.
This feature allows a job to be restarted and use a previous Eigensolution.
WRC Updates - The latest edition (1979) of the WRC107 bulletin has been incorporated.
Input Title Page - An optional title page has been added to the input module. You can now
define a title page of up to 19 lines which is stored with the input.
Expansion Joint Rating Program - This standalone software allows you to compute the
compression of each expansion joint corrugation and the compression of the joint as a
whole. These values can then be compared to manufacturers recommendations for joint
acceptance.

CAESAR II Version 3.0 Features (4/90)

1070

VGA Graphics support on input.

Interactive (immediate) rotation of the input graphics image.
Updated graphics user interface.
Optional WRC 329 implementation of new stress intensification factors for intersections.
Optional ASME Class 1 flexibility calculations for reduced intersections.
Optional WRC 329 fixed to B31.1 and B31.3 piping code equations.
Piping codes - B31.4, B31.8, ASME Sect III Class NC and ND, CAN Z184 and Z183,
Swedish Power Methods 1 and 2, BS806.
Updated SIF library to include welded joints and Bonney Forge fittings.
New scrolling help screens.

CAESAR II User's Guide

Update History

Editing list features, including rotate and duplicate of total or partial models
Updated WRC 107 table limit check.
AISC member check.
Wind load calculations on structural members.
Additional stress equation control using the SETUP file.
Numerical sensitivity checks in both the in-core and out-of-core solvers.
Automatic expansion joint modeler using manufacturers database.
Additional restraint types including bottomed-out spring hangers and bi-linear soil springs.

CAESAR II Version 3.1 Features (11/90)

Graphical Updates

Instantaneous center-of-rotation calculation.

Element Highlight.
Element Range.

Rotating Equipment Report Updates

API 610 7th Edition Addition.

SI/User Units.
HEI Additions.

WRC 107 Updates

Simplified input.
WRC 297 stress calculations.

Miscellaneous Modifications

Screen data presentation changes.

Direct control jumping between executables.
Increased number of allowed software designed hangers.
Additional spring hanger design options.
Database updates include additional spring hanger tables.
Soil Modeler for Buried Pipe.

CAESAR II Version 3.15 Features (9/91)

The installation software uses the file compression routines from PKWARE. This significantly
reduces the number of diskettes distributed and the time needed to install the CAESAR II
package.

CAESAR II User's Guide

1071

Update History

Flange Leakage and Stress Calculations

Elastic models of the annular plate, gasket and bolts predict the relative degrees of gasket
deformation leading to a leaking joint. Stress calculations in accordance with ASME Sect. VIII
Div. 1 are also provided for comparison.

WRC 297 Local Stress Calculations

This bulletin supplements WRC 107, addition to computing stresses in the nozzle as well as the
vessel.

Stress Intensification Factor Scratchpad

The new module shows the effects of the various code options available in CAESAR II, and
illustrates the relationship between the various interpretations. WRC 329 SIF options are
included. SIFs for stanchions on elbows are also computed.

Miscellaneous

1072

A pen plotting program (PENPLT) plots up to 2500 element models (LARGE Includes) on
the screen or on an HPGL compatible hardware device.
The static output processor has been updated to support VGA graphics and to provide
screen dumps to HP Laser Jet Series II compatible printers.
Updated SYSCHK program now checks that SHARE is loaded when necessary. Missing
coprocessor is also immediately reported.
Updated PLTS now allow you to save labels, scaling information, and file names during
plotting sessions.
Updated ROT (rotating equipment program) provides additional code interpretations for the
HEI bulletin.
The BIGPRT (large job printing program) has been expanded to handle even larger jobs and
to provide a local element report.
As of Version 3.15, CAESAR II uses ESL devices to authorize access to the software. The
ESLs are more stable than the previously used keydisk and provide additional client
information to the software. Additional information on the ESLs can be found in the update
pages for the User Manual.
The first access of Version 3.15 will cause the ESL activation code to prompt for the
keydisks (both unlimited and limited). Both keydisks must be available to properly activate
the ESL.
A printer setup program (PRSET) is provided to adjust the number of lines per logical page
for dot matrix printers, useful for page lengths longer than 11 inches.

CAESAR II User's Guide

Update History

CAESAR II Version 3.16 Features (12/91)

The internal file maintenance utility has been completely rewritten. The new file handler
provides the same capabilities as the previous file handler but with faster response times.
Additionally, the new file handler is compatible with disk partitions larger than 32 Mbytes,
and manipulates the data files created by Versions 3.xx of CAESAR II.
A configuration program has been added to CAESAR II to allow you to modify the
SETUP.CII file from spreadsheets. The configuration program also includes the standard
COADE help interface to facilitate setting the directives.
The structural programs (C2S and AISC) have been revised to access either the 1977 AISC
database or the 1989 AISC database. Additionally, the AISC program has been updated to
perform the unity checks (code compliance) using the 1989 code which includes the
methodology for checking single angles.
The equipment module (ROT) has been enhanced to handle vertical in-line pumps for
API-610, 7th Edition.
The Stoomwezen 1989 (Dutch) piping code has been added.
Three additional spring hanger tables have been added (Basic Engineering, Capitol Pipe
Supports, Piping Services Company).
The editors found in the structural preprocessor, the ASCII file editor, and the piping
preprocessor title page have been modified to allow the insertion and deletion of single
characters. Appropriate screen instructions are provided where necessary.
An automatic loop closure command has been added to the piping preprocessor.
A jacketed pipe example has been included in the documentation. The input file for this
example is included in the EXAMPLES set on the distribution diskettes.
Updated moduli of elasticity for default CAESAR II materials based on 1990 code revisions.

CAESAR II Version 3.17 Features (3/92)

Support of DOS environments now available in CAESAR II. This allows you to run the
software from various subdirectories on the hard disk other than the installation directory.
Facilities have been provided to enable you to modify the default colors used throughout
CAESAR II. Four predefined sets of text colors are provided as well as the ability to modify
whichever set is currently selected.
The Utilities menu has been expanded to include all of the secondary CAESAR II
processors.
Help has been added for the Input graphics, the Pen Plot graphics, and WRC 107.
A new online error processor has been incorporated. This enables the software to provide
an explanation of the cause of many fatal error messages, as opposed to the display of only
the error number.
The file handler has been modified to allow the manual entry of a new job name.
The input piping preprocessor now includes a material number (21) for User Defined
Materials.
The Static and Dynamic Output menus have been modified to allow you to return directly to
the input, or in the case of the dynamics output, to invoke the animation module directly.
Graphics for flange selection and output have been added to the ASME Flange modules.
Input and output file sequencing are checked to aid in Quality Assurance, insuring that the
current input file produced the current output file. Input Echo reports are also possible from
the static output processor.

CAESAR II User's Guide

1073

Update History

CAESAR II Version 3.18 Features (9/92)

Codes and Databases

The Canadian codes Z183 and Z184 have been revised according to the 1990/1992
publications.
The Italian spring hanger manufacturer INOFLEX has been added.
The Database option of the configuration program now allows you to set the Valve and
Flange database. Additionally a database excluding flanges (NOFLANGE) is included.
The Material Database used for the Flange Stress/Leakage module has been updated. The
new database includes all changes from the ASME Sect VIII, Division 1, A91 Addenda, the
materials are listed in code order, and the number of materials has increased from 450 to
1100.
The structural modules C2S and AISC have been updated to work with the German
structural steel library.

Interfaces Added

A new neutral file interface is provided which allows a two way transfer of data between the
CAESAR II input file and an ASCII text file.
An interface is provided between Stoners LIQT program and the dynamic modules of
CAESAR II. This interface enables dynamic pipe forces from a time domain analysis to be
used in the generation of a force spectrum.

Miscellaneous Changes

The static stress summary report has been modified so that the maximum code stress
percent is reported, not the maximum code stress.
A miscellaneous option has been added to the configuration program. This option allows
various options, including the specification of the ANSI, JIS, or DIN piping specifications.
Other options available from the Miscellaneous menu are:
Intro/Exit Screens (On/Off) - This option can be used to disable the display of the initial entry
screen and the final exit screen.
Yes/No Prompts (On/Off) - This option can be used to disable the yes/no/are_you_sure
prompts.
Output Reports by Load Case (Yes/No) - By default, CAESAR II produces static output
reports by load case. This option can be used to generate the same reports by subject.
Displacement Report Node Sort (Yes/No) - This option can be used to disable the nodal
sorting of the static displacement report.
The file handler has been modified to enable directory and disk drive selection and logging.
You also have control of the initial display of the file names. This allows you to set the sort
order as well as the single/multi-column display presentation.
A file verification routine has been added to check the installation of CAESAR II. This aids in
detecting software corruption due to hard disk defects and viruses.
A new report has been added to the static output menu. This enables you to obtain a local
force/moment report for the elements in the system.
A 32 bit version of the dynamic summation module is provided for large dynamic analysis.
This module requires at least a 386 processor.
The animation module has been modified to provide hard copy output of the mode shapes.

1074

CAESAR II User's Guide

Update History

CAESAR II Version 3.19 Features (3/93)

Batch Stream Processor - A new processor has been included which allows multiple jobs
(up to 12) to be run in series, without intervention. The jobs can be static analysis, dynamic
analysis, or both.
Expansion Joint Database - The Pathway Bellows expansion joint database has been
updated. The new database includes two additional pressure classes and diameters out to
144 inches.
A new expansion joint database from RM Engineered Products has been added for this
release.
Input Echo - The input echo processor has been modified so that the input echo precedes
the output data. Additionally, the intermediate data generated by the error checker now
appears in this listing.
B31G - The B31G criteria for the remaining strength of corroded pipelines has been
incorporated. This module includes the original B31G criteria as well as several of the
modified methods discussed in the Battelle project.
Output Processor - A new report has been added to the output processor which generates a
Restraint Summary report. This summary details all the loads for all selected load cases for
each restraint in the model.
Thermal Bowing - The effects of thermal bowing on horizontal pipes can be analyzed. By
specifying the thermal gradient between the bottom and the top of the pipe, CAESAR II
computes the loads induced and include them with the thermal loads.
32 Bit Modules - All of the dynamic modules have been moved from the 16 bit mode to the
32 bit mode. Additionally, the animation program now supports EGA and VGA display
modes.
Title Page Template - A user-configurable ASCII text file can now be used as a title page
template.
Interface Updates - The CAESAR II data matrix interface and the Autoplant interface have
both been updated to use the currently active units file. The ComputerVision interface has
been updated to handle tube type piping.
Expansion Joint Rating - The expansion joint rating module, ERATE, has been moved into
the Miscellaneous Module, facilitating input through the standard spreadsheets.
Refractory Lining - The computation modules of CAESAR II have been modified to accept a
negative value of insulation thickness. If a negative thickness is encountered, the software
assumes the insulation is refractory lining (inside the pipe).
Minimum Required Thickness - The piping error checker now makes the minimum required
thickness computation according to B31.1, 104.1. This information is reported for each pipe
in the listing of intermediate data (See item 3 above).
Spring Hanger Tables - The E. Myatt & Co. spring hanger table has been added.
ESL Updates - All of the code used to access the ESLs has been updated to allow access to
the 50 and 66 Mhz CPUs.
Missing Mass - The dynamics modules can consider missing mass effects in the spectrum
solutions.
Seismic Anchor Movements - The dynamics modules allows the specification of seismic
anchor movements for independent support motion analysis.
RCC-M - The French piping code RCC-M, Section C has been incorporated.
Languages - The input and dynamic output supports English, French, and Spanish language
headings. Language dependent files can be activated with the appropriate command line

CAESAR II User's Guide

1075

Update History

switch on the INSTALL directive. For example, INSTALL /S installs any Spanish specific
files.
PCX Files - All of the graphics modules have been modified to allow the images to be saved
to disk files in PCX format. This enables these images to be brought into word processing
and desktop publishing systems.

CAESAR II Version 3.20 Features (10/93)

1076

A completely new documentation set accompanies this release. This documentation

consists of: a User Guide, an Applications Guide, and a Technical Reference Guide.
The static in-core and out-of-core solvers have been converted to run in 32 bit protect mode
utilizing extended memory. Solution times for large jobs have been cut by an order of
magnitude.
The Static Output processor has been converted to run in 32-bit protect mode utilizing
extended memory.
Both the Static and Dynamic Output processors now have the capability to generate ASCII
disk files on any drive or directory (using the COADE file manager) on the computer.
Additionally, a table of contents summarizing the output is generated for printer and disk
devices.
The Dynamic Output processor now includes titles and page numbers (similar to statics),
and provides input echo (both system and dynamic) abilities.
Modal time history analysis has been added. This includes output report review and
animated response review.
Standard spectrum analysis now includes modal components for displacements.
Additionally displacement information is now available for static-dynamic combinations.
The Included Mass Report has been clarified and modified to include the active mass in
each of the global directions. The percent of the force included/added is now based on a
vector sum rather than an absolute sum.
The ZPA used in the missing force correction can now be controlled via the configuration
file. You can specify that the ZPA be based on the last extracted mode or the last spectrum
value.
The static load case array space has been increased by a factor of 5, allowing more
flexibility in static load case setup.
API 650 nozzle flexibilities, according to the ninth edition, July 1993.
Checks for allowable loads on Fired Heater Tubes according to API-560 have been added.
As an option, you can consider the effects of pressure stiffening on straight pipes.
Three additional spring hanger tables: Sinopec (China), BHEL (India), and Flexider (Italy).
The Australian structural steel shape database has been added.
The ASME material database has been updated to reflect the 1992 Code addendum.
The printer testing routines have been completely rewritten. Additionally, output can be
directed to any LPT port.
The ability to configure the printer, either dot matrix or laser jet. This is implemented through
a text file containing the printer formatting codes which you can modify.
Password protection for input data files, to prevent modification of completed projects.
All of the screens in the piping preprocessor (except for the main spreadsheet) are now
supported in Spanish and French.
Input/Output file time/date sequencing checks have been added to the dynamics modules.
The Break command in the piping input processor has been modified to accept input in
feet-inch units instead of only feet. This should allow compound entries in any units system.

CAESAR II User's Guide

Update History

CAESAR II Version 3.21 Changes and Enhancements

(7/94)
Most of the CAESAR II executable modules have been converted from Microsoft 16 bit
FORTRAN to WATCOM 32 bit FORTRAN. This has reduced the low DOS RAM requirements of
the software from 577k to 475k.
The modules converted to 32 bit operation for Version 3.21 are summarized below:
Static Stress Computation Module (1)
Piping, Buried & Structural Steel Input Modules (3)
Piping Error Checker (1)
Load Case & Dynamic Input Module (1)
All CAD interfaces (8)
Neutral File interfaces (2)
The software now supports an ESL from a new vendor. This provides CAESAR II with full
networking abilities. The software first checks for a local ESL (from either vendor), then for a
network ESL.
Toward the support for network operations, the data files which are not job specific are now
assumed to be located in a SYSTEM subdirectory underneath the CAESAR II installation
directory. These data files include: the input listing formatting files (*.INP), the accounting data
files, the printer formatting file, the file handler template file, and the various header files.
The common factor among all of these files is that they are specific to a company installation,
not a particular data directory. Up until Version 3.21, these data files were manipulated by the
software (or sometimes directly by you) in the installation directory. However, many network
installations write protect their installation directories, making modifications to these files
impossible. These files are placed in a SYSTEM subdirectory to which you should be given
complete access.
CAESAR II Version 3.21 is capable of running on a local machine (with either vendors
local ESL) or on a network (with the network ESL). The changes made to the software enable
the same version to be run under these various configurations.
Added additional spring hanger manufacturer has been added, Carpenter & Paterson, UK.
The UBC (Uniform Building Code) earthquake spectra have been added.
The B31.5 piping code has been added.
The piping code addenda have been reviewed and any necessary changes made to the
software. The addenda include revisions for: ASCE #7, B31.1, B31.8, ASME NC, and ASME
ND.
The SIF scratch-pad from the Miscellaneous processor (Option C of the Main Menu) has
been incorporated into the piping preprocessor. This processor includes all of the supported
piping codes (not just B31.1 and B31.3 as before) and all of the fittings. Additionally, any
changes made to the scratch-pad data can optionally be transferred directly to the main
CAESAR II data spreadsheets.
Additional changes to the input piping preprocessor include the following:

problem size is now dependent on the amount of free extended memory - the old
limit of 400 elements is now upwards of 8,000 elements

graphics menus automatically turned off for hard copies

optional node number display for supports, anchors, hangers, and nozzles

CAESAR II User's Guide

1077

Update History

function key map shown on main spreadsheet

auxiliary input spreadsheets support help

The accounting system has been completely rewritten. This provides a more streamlined
interface. Additionally, accounting statistics are now recorded from the stress computation
modules (previous versions only recorded the actual matrix decomposition times).
The API-617 and NEMA-SM23 reports have been overhauled so that the code compliance
when using non-English units systems is consistent.
The new Flange Rigidity factor from ASME Section VIII has been added.
A new loader (C2.EXE) has replaced the original one (C2.COM). This new loader performs
initial startup checks, with diagnostic reporting if necessary, and enables error processing
from the Main Menu.
The configuration program has been modified to track changes. If you attempt to [Esc] out
after making changes, you are warned that the changes will not be saved.
A graphics viewer has been added to the file manager. This enables rapid model plotting
directly from the file manager of the Main Menu.
Additional directives are available to disable the generation of the Table of Contents page,
and disable the display of the spreadsheet function key mapping.

CAESAR II Version 3.22 Changes & Enhancements

(4/95)

1078

The Harmonic solver has been updated to provide damping. Harmonic analysis can now
include or exclude damping as you deem necessary.
The following codes have been reviewed (and any necessary changes made) for
compliance to the latest editions: B31.1, B31.3, B31.4, B31.5, B31.8, NC, ND, and BS-806.
The following additional piping codes have been added: RCCM-D, CODETI, and TBK 5-6.
Center of Gravity calculations have been added with results displayed in the error checker.
A Bill of Materials report has been added.
Yield criterion stresses can be computed as either Von Mises or as 3D Maximum Shear
Stress intensity.
Hoop Stress can be computed based on Outer Diameter, Inner Diameter, Mean Diameter,
or Lames equation.
The spring hanger design spreadsheet has been modified to default to a 25% load variation.
In addition, the actual hanger load variation now appears in the hanger output reports.
A new command (WIND) has been added to the structural steel preprocessor. This allows
selective wind loading on an element by element basis.
A new key-combination Alt-D is available in the input processor to compute the distance
between two nodes.
User-specified coordinates for up to 30 nodes are saved in the input file.
The input title page has been expanded from 19 to 60 lines.
Automatic node numbering abilities have been added to the spreadsheets of the main piping
input module
Expansion Joint databases from IWK (Germany) are provided.
Expansion Joint database from Senior Flexonics is provided.
MISC converted to 32 bit operations. This module provides the SIF, Flange, WRC297,
B31G, and expansion joint rating computations.

CAESAR II User's Guide

Update History

ROT converted to 32 bit operations. This module provides the equipment calculations for
NEMA, API, and HEI. General revisions made for more consistent input screens and help
messages.
A new report option (in static output) is available to review the miscellaneous computations
made by the error checker. This report includes: SIFs and flexibility factors, pipe properties,
nozzle flexibility data, wind data, CG data, and the bill of materials report.
The Intergraph Interface has been improved. The interface now transfers the
temperature/pressure pairs. Additionally, if a material mapping file is present, material data
can be set correctly by CAESAR II.
The CADPIPE Interface has been updated in accordance with CADPIPE Version 4.0.
The Restraint Summary in the static output processor has been modified to include the
translational displacements of the restrained nodes.
The output processors (static and dynamic) have been modified to allow you to change the
name of the disk output file if necessary. Additionally, modifications have been made so that
only a single output device can be enabled.
All language files have been translated into German. Use INSTALL /G to acquire the
German files.
A new control F8 at the output menu level allows switching jobs without returning to the
Main menu.

CAESAR II Version 3.23 Changes (3/96)

The following items have been completed for the 3.23 release:
Mouse support has been added to most modules.
The German piping code, FBDR, has been added.
Major improvements to FRP (fiber reinforced plastic) stress calculations. This includes the
BS 7159 code and guidelines set forth by FRP manufacturers.
A bi-directional link to CADWorx/Plant (COADEs Piping CAD system) has been added.
The WRC107 module has been redesigned to incorporate multiple load cases and perform
the ASME Division 2 Stress Intensity Summation, all in one step.
An interface to Sunrise Systems PIPENET program has been developed.
The South African structural steel tables are being added.
Two new spring hanger manufacturers tables have been added; Comet (UK), and
Witzenmann (Germany).
Two new commands have been added to the structural preprocessor: UNIT, and GLOAD.
The CADPIPE interface has been updated to comply with the new release (Version 4.1) of
CADPIPE.
Additional modifications have been made to the Intergraph interface.
The low DOS RAM requirement has been reduced to 420 Kbytes.
The equipment module has been updated to reflect the 1995 edition of API-617.
The following U.S. piping codes have been updated according to recent editions: B31.3
(1995)

CAESAR II User's Guide

1079

Update History

CAESAR II Version 3.24 Changes & Enhancements

(3/97)

1080

Multiple (3) displacement/force/uniform load vectors have been added. These load cases,
called D1/D2/D3 and F1/F2/F3, may be toggled on the input plot by continuing to press F3
and F5 (displacements cycle through D1, D2, D3, and then off). The naming of these load
cases has also required the renaming of the CAESAR II load combination terms D1, F1,
S1, etc. must now be called DS1, FR1, and ST1. All hanger loads and cold spring forces
(from materials 18 and 19) are still combined into load case F1 for consistency with previous
versions of CAESAR II.
A material database for piping properties and allowable stresses for many of the piping
codes supported by CAESAR II has been implemented. This is invoked by pressing [ALT M]
on the main CAESAR II input spreadsheet (also at the list option and on the WRC 297
nozzle flexibility spreadsheet). After bringing up the list of materials, a material name can be
typed in; matching records are then displayed for selection. Allowable stresses are updated
automatically whenever temperatures, materials, and/or piping codes change.
Database management is provided from the Utilities option of the main menu. You can edit
COADE provided materials or add your own. Material parameters can be provided for code
0 (represents generic values for any non-specified code) or for specific codes. It is
recommended, due to future implementation plans, that metals be assigned identification
numbers between 100 and 699. FRP materials receive numbers between 700 and 999.
Selection of FRP materials from the material database does not currently activate the
orthotropic material model in CAESAR II. This must still be done through the use of material
20 (see item 6 concerning this below).
Eight-character job names are now supported. Input files are identified by extension ._A,
output files by extension ._P, ._S, and so on. Existing files are automatically recognized and
converted to their new format. (See related item 16 below.)
Modifications have been made to allow multiple users working from the same network data
directory through the environment variable COADE_USER. This environment variable
should be set to a unique 3 character combination, such as the initials, for each user working
in the common directory. Implementation can be done by adding to your AUTOEXEC.BAT
file a line such as: SET COADE_USER=TVL
CAESAR IIs Valve and Flange database now incorporates data files from
CADWorx/Plant. This change provides four advantages:
Component weights and lengths are more accurate, as well as traceable to specific
catalogs, standards, and so on.
Weights and lengths are provided for more components than were previously available
in the CRANE or GENERIC databases.
Because CADWorx/Plant data files are text files, you can easily edit or add
components.
If you also have CADWorx/Plant on your computer, the two programs share the same
data files and project specs, enhancing the performance of the bi-directional interface.
Gaskets are included for flanged items, so a better fit is provided between the
CADWorx/Plant and CAESAR II models.

CAESAR II User's Guide

Update History

You can now set default values for FRP (material 20) parameters through the
configuration/setup. These default parameters can be read automatically from
manufacturers data files by toggling through the list of available files, and then pressing
[ALT-U] (for Update) on the selected vendor file. Vendor files are recognized by their .FRP
extensions; because these are text files, you can create them easily yourself, or vendors
may distribute them to their customers.
The UKOOA (United Kingdom Offshore Operators Association) piping code for FRP piping
has been added.
The Z183 and Z184 piping codes have been replaced with the Z662 code, which has been
expanded to consider calculation of stresses in restrained piping.
The ASCE #7 wind code has been updated to the 1995 edition.
The API-610 code in the equipment module has been updated to the 8th edition.
ASME Section VIII Division 2 stress indices and WRC-107 SIF (kn, kb) values have been
incorporated into the WRC-107 module.
The Relief Load Synthesis dynamics module now supports metric (or custom) units.
A number of configuration file default values have been revised in order to improve
calculated results or software performance:
Changed

From

To

BEND_LENGTH_ATTACHMENT=

5.0

1.0

BEND_AXIAL_SHAPE =

NO

YES

FRICT_STIFF =

50000

1.0E6

FRICT_NORM_FORCE_VAR =

25

15

FRICT_ANGLE_VAR =

30

15

VALVE_&_FLANGE =

GENERIC

CADWORX

Four new directives added to the configuration file.

SYSTEM_DIRECTORY_NAMEUser defined, defaults to SYSTEM. You can now maintain
multiple system directories for different projects)
UNITS_FILE_NAMEUser-selected from list. Current units are now set through the
configuration/setup, not through the units option of the main menu.
BS_7159_PRESSURE_STIFFENINGDesign strain or Actual Pressure.
FRP_PROPERTY_DATA_FILEUser-selected from list.
The configuration file can also be password protected in the Installation Directory. This
prevents modification of all Computation and Stress Control directives. Subsequent use of
the configuration module prevents modification of these directives, unless the password is
known. Colors, printer settings, and so on can still be changed without the password.
CAESAR II has been modified to accept an optional job name (including full drive and path
data) as an argument. The software switches to the appropriate drive and directory, opens
the specified job, and goes into input bypassing the Main Menu. This allows the definition of
._A files as CAESAR II input files under Windows 95 and subsequent double clicking on the
file name in a Windows/95 explorer window to start the input processor on the picked job file.
This also allows CAESAR II to be spawned from other programs, right into a job.
Modifications to CAD interfaces: Intergraph and CADPIPE.
All necessary routines have been checked and modified where appropriate to address the
Year 2000 issue.
A Korean structural steel shape library has been added.

CAESAR II User's Guide

1081

Update History

A new spring hanger table has been added (SARAFTHI).

PD-5500 nozzle flexibilities have been incorporated to complement the WRC-297 and API
650 nozzle connections.

CAESAR II Version 4.00 Changes and Enhancements

(1/98)
The CAESAR II Version 4.00 release is a major program rewrite making it compatible with
Windows 95/NT (version 4.0) operating systems. Minimal functionality enhancements were
included in order to make CAESAR II input files interchangeable between Version 4.00 and
CAESAR II Version 3.24, the last DOS-based version. Specific new features include:
Simultaneous review of graphics and spreadsheet.
Addition of rendering and wireframe graphics in plot mode.
The ability to turn off subsequent occurrences of an error type in the piping error checker.
The ability to extract loads directly from a piping output file for inclusion in the WRC 107 and
rotating equipment modules.
Addition of bend mid-point modes (indicated by angle M) which allow you to designate the
mid-point of the bend without knowing the included angle.
Ability to review 132-column reports on screen.

CAESAR II Version 4.10 Changes and Enhancements

(1/99)

9 temperatures, 9 pressures, 9 displacement sets, and 9 force/moment sets.

Finalization of TD/12 piping code.
Fatigue capabilities including cumulative damage.
Increase in number of load cases to 99.
Reactivation of the input LIST facilities.
Printing capabilities for graphical renderings.
Saving graphics images to BMP files.
Online User and Quick Reference Guide in PDF format.
Update of piping codes (CODETI, NC, ND, B31.1, B31.3).
Addition of results filters to output reports.
Update of the Technical Reference Manual to reflect Windows version of CAESAR II.
Variability of mill tolerance on an element-by-element basis.

CAESAR II Version 4.20 Changes and Enhancements

(2/00)

1082

New Input Graphics - utilizes a true 3D library, enabling graphic element selection.
New local coordinate element input and specification.
Completely revised material database, including Code updates.
Optional static output in ODBC compliant database format.
Hydrodynamic loading for offshore applications. This includes the Airy, Stokes 5th, and
Stream Function wave theories, as well as Linear and Power Law current profiles.

CAESAR II User's Guide

Update History

Wind analysis expanded to handle up to 4 wind load cases.

New piping codes: B31.4 Chapter IX, B31.8 Chapter VIII, and DNV (ASD).
A wave scratchpad - see the recommended theory graphically, or plot the particle data for
the specified wave.
Updated piping codes: B31.1, B31.3, B31.4, ASME NC, and ASME ND.
Automatic Dynamic DLF Plotting.
Witzenmann expansion joint databases.
As a result of the merger between Senior Flexonics and Pathway Bellows, a new expansion
joint database replaces the two previous individual databases.
A new spring hanger vendor (Myricks) is provided.
PCF Interface.

CAESAR II Version 4.30 Changes and Enhancements

(3/01)

New Static Load Case Builder / Editor. Allows multiplication factors on load components
plus additional combination methods (SRSS, Algebraic, ABS, Min, Max, Signed Min, Signed
Max, and Scalar).
Z-Up - Build or review models with Z as the vertical axis instead of Y. Switch between Y and
Z up automatically.
New undo/redo ability in the piping input module.
Piping input can be sent to ODBC database.
A new data export wizard is provided to selectively target input or output data for ODBC
export.
All modules support optional output directly to MS-Word.
Updated piping codes: B31.1, B31.3, B31.4, ASME NC, and ASME ND.
User control over the auto-save feature implemented.
Improvements to the 3D graphics (job specific configuration, additional data display).
Added graphics to the WRC 107 Module to show loads and orientation.
Added a new Code Compliance report to the static output processor.
Spring hanger design expanded from 3 to 9 operating cases.

CAESAR II Version 4.40 Changes and Enhancements

(5/02)

Revised piping codes: B31.3, B31.4, B31.5, B31.8, ASME NC, ASME ND.
Added the B31.11 piping code.
Added an alpha-numeric node label option to the piping input module.
Expanded Static Load case options: (1) added load components H, CS, HP, and WW
(hanger loads, cold spring, hydro pressure, and weight filled with water, respectively), (2)
added HYDRO stress type, (3) added option to set snubber and hanger status on a load
case basis, (4) provided ability to scale friction factor on a load case basis.
Added automatic generation of a hydrotest load case (WW+HP, HYD stress type, and
spring hangers locked), triggered by the presence of a non-zero HP.
Updated the 3D input graphics as well as partial implementation in the static output
processor, including the Element Viewer.

CAESAR II User's Guide

1083

Update History

Updated the spring hanger design algorithm to provide the option to iterate the Operating for
Hanger Travel load case to include the stiffness of the selected hanger.
Added new configuration options for the following:
Ambient temperature.
Default friction coefficient. If this value is nonzero, it automatically gets applied to new
translational restraints.
Liberal stress allowable.
Stress stiffening.
Bourdon settings.
How to handle B16.9 welding tee and sweepolet SIFs in B31.3.
Added two new spring manufacturers' tables Pipe Supports USA and Quality Pipe Supports.
Added the ability to define the flexibility factor on bends.
Piping and structural files now support long file names. These files may be located in any
directory path. The number of included structural files has been expanded from 10 to 20.
Results of the Hanger Design Cases are now optionally viewable in the Static Output
Processor. To use this option, set status to KEEP in the Load Case Options.
Added the ability to filter static Restraint reports by CNODE status.
Added a new warning report to the static output.
Added a dirty flag to the piping input preprocessor and the configuration modules.
Attempting to exit these processors without saving changes produces a warning message.
Added the ability to detect the differences between material data in the input file and that in
the material database (including missing user-materials). This feature offers you the
opportunity to use the original data.
Reviewed/updated the minimum wall computation for all piping codes for straight pipe.
Added a field for specifying Marine Growth Density to the Wind/Wave dialog box.
Updated API-661 to 4th Edition.
Added the ability to save static load case data without running the job.

CAESAR II Version 4.50 Changes and Enhancements

(11/03)

1084

Revised material database for B31.1 A2001 changes.

Added Reducer element.
Improved interaction and error reporting in static load case editor.
Improved graphics changes include:
A walk-through option is available.
The static output processor can now produce colored stress plots of the piping system.
A graphical find (zoom to) option has been added.
Instant use of graphics, even before drawing is completed.
Recitable restraint/hanger symbols.
Added Spectrum wizard for the generation of earthquake and relief valve spectra.
Revised codes: B31.1, B31.4, ASME NC, ASME ND, IGE/TD/12, API-610.
Included additional FRP data files.
The static output processor remembers all user settings, such as filters, labels, and report
size.

CAESAR II User's Guide

Update History

Added dynamic help system for piping & structural input and configuration.
Added automatic acquisition of website software updates.
Combined WRC-107/297 module for local stress calculations.
Redesigned the structural steel interface for easier operation.
Implemented a new job wizard for the creation of structural steel input models.
Modified to allow multiple instances of CAESAR II to run.
Implemented Load Case Template for recommending static load cases.
Modified to allow access to the output for expired date or run limited ESL.

CAESAR II Version 5.00 Changes and Enhancements

(11/05)

Added the following new piping codes: EN-13480, GPTC/192, Z662 Ch 11.
Revised, due to code changes, the following piping codes: B31.1, B31.3, B31.5, B31.8,
B31.11, ASME NC, ASME ND, CODETI, TBK 5-6.
Updated API-610 codes and standards.
Added Ameron Bondstrand, and Conely FRP Pipe Specification files.
Added Binder (UK) and PiHASA (Spain) Spring Hanger tables.
Added Structural Steel databases from India and Japan.
Renamed all references to Grinnell to Anvil.
Added the capability to perform dynamic analysis optionally using a consistent mass matrix.
This obviates the need to re-mesh the model for better mass distribution.
Added the capability to perform an analysis using the hot material elastic modulus.
Enhanced the static output processor to provide you with the ability to create custom,
reusable reports.
Revised the piping input processor to provide a combined view showing both the graphics
and the spreadsheet. The new piping input processor has integrated the Piping Error
Checker, and access to the configuration module has been provided. For debugging and
problem solving, relevant sections of the spreadsheet can be torn off and placed on the
graphics pane, allowing the spreadsheet to be hidden for larger graphics display.
Additionally, sections of the model can be graphically selected and then modified.
Updated the Intergraph and PCF interfaces.
Added an Isogen export facility allowing the creation of Isogen stress isometrics.

CAESAR II Version 5.10 Changes and Enhancements

(9/07)

Added flange rating evaluation per B16.5 and NC-3658.

Graphics Improvements:
Improved graphics rendering speed proved by 20% to 50% depending on the job.
Added additional controls to view corrosion and densities.
Added the ability to import an Autocad (CADWorx) model directly into the piping input,
to provide visualization of supporting steel, vessels and other equipment.
Static Output Processor Improvements:
Reduced report generation times by 70% or better.

CAESAR II User's Guide

1085

Update History

Added Presentation in tabbed window to allow viewing multiple reports, and immediate
switching between reports.
Added ability to select Individual items from the Miscellaneous Report.
Added ability to zoom reports and individually direct to an output device using a context
menu.
Added ability to import and export custom report templates.
Static Load Case Editor Enhancements
Added In-Line Flange Evaluation at the load case level.
Added the ability to alter the occasional load multiplier on a per load case basis.
Added the ability to import static load case data from different jobs.
Added the ability to copy wind and wave vectors.
Added user control over whether or not insulation should be considered in hydro test cases.
Added PD-8010 Part 1 and Part 2 piping code.
Revised the following piping codes due to code changes: B31.1, B31.3, B31.4, Z662,
EN-13480.
Added support for B31.3 Section 319.2.3(c), allowing axial stress to be included in the
Expansion Code Stress.
Revised API-661 to 6th Edition.
Revised Wind and Seismic load calculations to ASCE #7 2005.
Added a number of European materials to the material database.
Updated stainless steel pipe specification data per B36.19M.
Updated DIN pipe size specification to comply with EN-10220 (seamless) instead of
DIN-2458 (welded).
Added Chinese structural steel and expansion joint databases.
Added spring hanger data from Gradior Power, (Czech Republic).
Updated the flange material database per ASME Sect VIII Div 1, 2007 Edition.
Updated the Inoflex Spring Hanger data.

CAESAR II Version 5.20 Changes and Enhancements

(4/09)

1086

Added ISO-14692 Code for FRP systems.

Added a Loop Optimization Wizard to assist in expansion loop design.
Added the American LifeLines Alliance as a second soil stiffness method to the Buried Pipe
Modeler.
Added the Mexican Seismic Code to the Dynamic Input module for the automatic generation
of response spectra.
Added a static seismic wizard to assist in computing G factors for ASCE, NBC, and CFE.
Added additional wind codes (10) to the Static Load setup.
Raised the permitted number of static load cases from 99 to 999.
Modified the valve/flange insertion routine to cut back the straight pipe length if necessary.
Added a number of lists to the Piping Input Spreadsheet to assist with input specification.
These lists appear on the bend radius and insulation density fields.
Streamlined Spring Hanger Table definition through the addition of three checkboxes for
cold load design, extended range springs, and centered hot load.

CAESAR II User's Guide

Update History

Flange Symbols are now drawn on the piping elements if flange ratings have been
requested.
Revised the following piping codes have been revised due to code changes: B31.1, B31.8,
GPTC/Z380, ASME NC, ASME ND.
Moved user-writeable subdirectories from below \caesarii to the %allusersprofile area.
Added automatic e-mail generation for technical support issues.
Improved the File Open dialog box to permit the roll-back to earlier revisions of the (piping)
input.
Added a new export to MS Excel option for Static Output data. This is raw data only to
improve export speed.

CAESAR II Version 5.30 Changes and Enhancements

(11/10)

Added the B31.9 piping.

Updated the following piping codes: RCCM-C, RCCM-D, ASME-NC, ASME-ND,
GPTC/Z380, Z662, B31.1, B31.3, EN-13480 (2010 Draft).
Added the ability to visually show on the Static Output menu which load cases have passed
or failed.
Added the spring hanger databases for PSS (Germany) and Seonghwa (Korea).
Added structural tubing shapes to the AISC Structural database.
Added a new restraint report showing reactions in local element coordinates.
Added additional flexibility with user material databases through user named files.
Added the ability to have user configurable nozzle limits.
Added insulation, cladding & refractory specifications
Improved the uniform load to display Gs or force/length in same job
Improved the displacement import/export facility.
Improved the PCF interface.
Improved the WRC module.
Added graphics/modeling/Interfacing improvements:
Improved the Valve/Flange database option to keep 3 elements
Added the ability to automatically generate Flange G values
Added the ability to specify optional spring hanger hardware weight.
Added the ability to automatically included API-650 nozzle displacement values in the
model.
Added the ability to plot Spectra and Time Histories in dynamics.
Added line number specification and manipulation.
Added the ability to add or reassign key strokes.
Improved the CAESAR II documentation search capabilities by adding a combined PDF
Search.

CAESAR II User's Guide

1087

Update History

CAESAR II Version 5.31 Changes and Enhancements

(5/12)

1088

Enhanced and improved the Smart 3D to CAESAR II interface (PCF).

Introduced a faster, interactive, on-demand and flexible PCF interface, called Advanced
PCF (APCF) Import, into the Piping Input processor.
Enhanced the CAESAR II Data Export Wizard to support ODBC Microsoft Access format,
which facilitates round-trip results to S3D and SPR.
Added new element order commands for block operations: Invert and Change Sequence.
Added usability improvements to reduce user input and editing time, including the use of line
numbers to block select elements.
Improved many Isogen-related issues.

CAESAR II User's Guide

Index
%
% of Iterations Per Shift Before
Orthogonalization 602

1
1, 2, ... 9 for Partial Factor for Temperature
(A1) 189

3
3D Graphics Configuration 308
3D Modeler 305

4
4 View 296, 525

A
About the CAESAR II Documentation 22
Absolute Method 595
Access Protected Data 87
Account Numbers Tab 899
Accounting 895
Accounting System Activation 897
Activate Accounting Tab 898
Activate Bourdon Effects 257
Active Boundary Conditions 643
Actual Stress Settings 68
Add a new material to the database 910
Add custom annotations for elemental
features 653
Add custom annotations for nodal
features 651
Add F/A in Stresses 82
Add input feature information 648
Add output feature information 650
Add PCF Files to Conversion List 1027
Add Pressure Thrust Force 761
Add Torsion in SL Stress 82
Added Mass Coefficient, Ca 170
Adding annotations for input features 665
Adding annotations for output features 666
Adding custom annotations 667
Advanced Options 61
Advanced PCF Import (APCF) 262
Advanced Settings 77
Advanced Tab 599

CAESAR II User's Guide

AFT IMPULSE 1040

After the Current Element 358
Airy Wave Theory Implementation 789
AISC 1977 Database 395
AISC 1989 Database 400
al(01) 187
al(11) 187
al(21) 187
all 364
All Cases Corroded 83
all stiffness 364
Allow Short Range Springs 142, 231
Allow Sidesway 726
Allow User's SIF at Bend 83
Allowable Load Variation (%) 141, 231
Allowable Stress 171, 909
Allowable Stress (ISO 14692) 186
Allowable Stress Increase Factor 725
Allowables 722
Allowables Input Export Option SHARED 956
Alpha 111
ALPHA - ADHESION FACTOR 424
Alpha [x] 382
Alpha Tolerance 45
Alternate CAESAR II Distributed Data
Path 50
Always Use System Colors 70
Always Use System Fonts 70
Ambient Temperature 259, 472
American Lifelines Alliance Soil Model 419
Analysis Menu 36
Analysis Results 625
Analysis Type
(Harmonic/Spectrum/Modes/Range/Time
Hist) 573
Analyze Specified Jobs 900
Anchor 133
Anchor CNode 63
Anchor Movement 554
Anchors 63, 288, 519
angle 374, 377
Angle 104, 373
Animation of Dynamic Results
Harmonic 645
Animation of Dynamic Results Time
History 645
Animation of Dynamic Results
Modal/Spectrum 645

1089

Index
Animation of Static Results Displacements 644
Annotation Text 69
API 560 (Fired Heaters for General Refinery
Services) 761
API 560 Input Data Tab 763
API 610 (Centrifugal Pumps) 736
API 617 (Centrifugal Compressors) 745
API 617 Input Tab 746
API 650 153
API 661 (Air Cooled Heat
Exchangers) 753
API650 Nozzle Input Export Option SHARED 958
Append Reruns to Existing Data 53
Appendix P - OPE Allowable
Reduction 185
Applicable Piping Code 906
Applicable Wave Theory
Determination 788
Applications Using Global and Local
Coordinates 886
Apply a Template 661
Apply Para 319.2.3(c) Saxial 78
Applying a template 673
Archive 200
area 383
As/Nz 1170
2002 Options 476
ASCE Example Problem 236
ASCE Static Seismic Wizard 234
ASCE7 607
ASME III Subsections NC and ND 852
ASME NC/ND 3673.2(b)-1 Note 3 119
ASME NC-3658.3 Calculation Method for
B16.5 Flanged Joints with High Strength
Bolting 767
ASME Section VIII Division 2-Elastic Nozzle
Comprehensive Analysis
(pre-2007) 797
ASME Section VIII Division 2-Elastic Nozzle
Simplified Analysis pre-2007 801
At End of Model 359
At Node 248
Australian 1990 Database 406
Auto Node Number Increment 59
Autosave Time Interval 73
Auxiliary Element Data 918
Auxiliary Sets 1060
Available Commands 198, 507
Available Expansion Joint End-Types 227
Available Space 228
Available Space (neg. for can) 140

1090

Axial Force 709

Axial Member Force 729
Axial Modulus of Elasticity 55
Axial Strain
Hoop Stress (Ea/Eh*Vh/a) 55
Axis Mode 70

B
B2 118
B31.1 842
B31.1 (1967) 861
B31.1 Appendix II (Safety Valve) Force
Response Spectrum 611
B31.1 Reduced Z Fix 80
B31.1/B31.3 Verified Welding and Contour
Tees 80
B31.11 851
B31.3 844
B31.3 Code-Specific Settings 78
B31.4 845
B31.4 Chapter IX 847
B31.5 848
B31.8 848
B31.8 Chapter VIII 850
B31.9 Notes 851
Back View 295, 524
Background Colors 62
Backplane Culling 61
Bandwidth Optimizer Options 261
Base Hoop Stress On (ID/OD/Mean/
Lam) 83
Basepoint Node Number 742
Basic Element Data 916
Basic Operation 28
Basic Soil Modeler Dialog Box 423
Basic Wind Speed 466
Batch Output File 930
Batch Run 200
Batch Stream Processing 900
Beams 386
Before Current Element 358
Bellows Application Notes 228
Bellows Stiffness Properties 108
Bend Angle (Degrees) 686
Bend Axial Shape 47
Bend Cost Factor 249
Bend Length Attachment Percent 58
Bend Radius 685
Bend Stress Intensification Factors 682
Bend Tab 684
Bending Coefficient 726
Bending Moment 710
Bends 58, 103

CAESAR II User's Guide

Index
Bends Input Export Option - SHARED 949
Beta 475
Block Operations 205
Bolt Allowable @ Ambient
Temperature 708
Bolt Allowable @ Design
Temperature 708
Bolt Allowable Stress Multiplier 709
Bolt Area (Ab) 162
Bolt Diameter 700
Bolt Initial Tightening Stress 700
Bolt Material 707
Bolt Tightening Stress Notes 700
Bolts and Gasket Tab 699
Bottom 62
Bottom View 295, 525
Boundary Conditions 131
Bounding - Box from Selection 322
Bounding Volume
Height 323
Bounding Volume - Depth 323
Bounding Volume - Width 323
boxH 384
boxW 384
Braces 388
Branch Error and Coordinate Prompts 257
Branch Largest Diameter at
Intersection 680
Branch Pipe Outside Diameter 680
Branch Pipe Wall Thickness 680
Brazil NBR 6123 Options 473
Break 213
Browse 988
BS 7159 868
BS 7159 Pressure Stiffening 56
BS5500 Nozzle Input Export Option SHARED 959
BS-6399-97 Options 477
BS806 857
Building Load Cases 33
Building Static Load Cases 440
Buried Pipe Example 430
Buried Pipe Modeler 411
Buried Pipe Modeler Window 413
by 360, 363, 378

C
C - SOIL COHESION OF BACKFILL 424
CADPIPE 975
CADPIPE Example Transfer 977
CADPIPE LOG File Discussion 982
CAESAR II Basic Model 418
CAESAR II Configuration 288

CAESAR II User's Guide

CAESAR II Configuration File

Generation 41
CAESAR II Data Matrix 929
CAESAR II Dialog Box 465
CAESAR II Fatal Error Processing 900
CAESAR II File Guide 1053
CAESAR II Initial Capabilities
(12/84) 1068
CAESAR II Input and Output Files Dialog
Box 933
CAESAR II Input Export Options Dialog
Box 934
CAESAR II Local Coordinate
Definitions 884
CAESAR II Neutral File 914
CAESAR II Operational (Job) Data 1063
CAESAR II Output Report Options Dialog
Box 963
CAESAR II Version 1.1S Features
(2/86) 1068
CAESAR II Version 2.0A Features
(10/86) 1068
CAESAR II Version 2.1C Features
(6/87) 1069
CAESAR II Version 2.2B Features
(9/88) 1070
CAESAR II Version 3.0 Features
(4/90) 1070
CAESAR II Version 3.1 Features
(11/90) 1071
CAESAR II Version 3.15 Features
(9/91) 1071
CAESAR II Version 3.16 Features
(12/91) 1073
CAESAR II Version 3.17 Features
(3/92) 1073
CAESAR II Version 3.18 Features
(9/92) 1074
CAESAR II Version 3.19 Features
(3/93) 1075
CAESAR II Version 3.20 Features
(10/93) 1076
CAESAR II Version 3.21 Changes and
Enhancements (7/94) 1077
CAESAR II Version 3.22 Changes &
Enhancements (4/95) 1078
CAESAR II Version 3.23 Changes
(3/96) 1079
CAESAR II Version 3.24 Changes &
Enhancements (3/97) 1080
CAESAR II Version 4.00 Changes and
Enhancements (1/98) 1082

1091

Index
CAESAR II Version 4.10 Changes and
Enhancements (1/99) 1082
CAESAR II Version 4.20 Changes and
Enhancements (2/00) 1082
CAESAR II Version 4.30 Changes and
Enhancements (3/01) 1083
CAESAR II Version 4.40 Changes and
Enhancements (5/02) 1083
CAESAR II Version 4.50 Changes and
Enhancements (11/03) 1084
CAESAR II Version 5.00 Changes and
Enhancements (11/05) 1085
CAESAR II Version 5.10 Changes and
Enhancements ( 9/07) 1085
CAESAR II Version 5.20 Changes and
Enhancements (4/09) 1086
CAESAR II Version 5.30 Changes and
Enhancements (11/10) 1087
CAESAR II Version 5.31 Changes and
Enhancements (5/12) 1088
Calculate Actual Cold Loads 230
Calculation of Fatigue Stresses 817
CANADIAN Z662 855
Centerline Direction Cosine X 741
Centerline Direction Cosine Z 741
CFE Diseno por Sismo 609
CFE Sismo Example Problem 238
CFE Sismo Static Seismic Wizard 237
Change Model Units 904
Change Password 87
Change Sequence 211
Changing the Model Display 310
Check the PRO-ISO/CAESAR II Data
Transfer 1033
Checking the CADPIPE/CAESAR II Data
Transfer 985
Chemical Resistance (A2) 190
Clad Thk 196
Cladding Density 197, 292, 523
Cladding Thickness 292, 523
Class 1 Branch Flexibilities 775
Class 1 Branch Flexibility 77
Classic Piping Input Dialog Box 90
Close Loop 203
Closely Spaced Mode Criteria/Time History
Time Step (ms) 586
CNode 132, 138, 571
Code 172
Code Compliance Considerations 837
Code Compliance Report 498
Code Options (B31.1 & B31.8) 118
Code-Specific Notes 842
Code-Specific Settings 79

1092

CODETI 864
Coefficient of Friction (Mu) 45
Cold Elastic Modulus 907
Cold Spring 768
Columns 390
Combination Method 461
Combine PCF Files 287, 1028
Comma Separated Value Format 299
Commands Menu 359
Comment 393
Comparison Method 164
Compass 290, 520
Component Amplification Factor [Rp]
(NBC) 240
Component Amplification Factor ap
(ASCE) 236
Component Colors 62
Component Elevation Ratio [hx/hn]
(NBC) 240
Component Elevation Ratio z/h
(ASCE) 236
Component Force Amp. Factor [Ar]
(NBC) 240
Component Information 102
Composition/Type 186
Compress CAESAR II Files 75
Computational Control 43
Computed Mass Flow Rate 623
Computed Mass Flowrate (Vent Gas) 620
Conclusion 837
Condense Elbows 286, 1027
Condense Rigids 286, 1027
Condense Tees 1027
Configuration and Environment 41
Configure annotation preferences 655
Configure isometric drawing split
points 656
Configuring annotation preferences 669
Connect Geometry Through CNodes 59
Constant Effort Support 774
Constant Effort Support Load 148
Continue 202
Control Information 915
Control Parameters Tab 571
Controlling Results 456
Controlling the Data Export 1052
Convergence Tolerances 43
Convert selected files into CAESAR II
format 1027
Coordinates 721
Copy 202
Copy Environmental Loading Data Dialog
Box 465, 479

CAESAR II User's Guide

Index
Copy Wave Vector 479
Copy Wind Vector 465
Corrosion 98, 291, 521
Cos X & Y 734
Covers 229
Create a drawing using a new style 659
Create a drawing using an existing
style 659
Create a drawing using the default
style 658
Create a new job 28
Create a new job file 357
Create a New Units File 903
Create and save an annotation
template 661
Create Loop on Element 248
Create Spring Load Cases 774
Create/Review Units 902
Creating a drawing using the default
style 663
Creating a template 671
Creating the .FAT Files 816
Crest Distance 467
CROTCH R 116
Culling Maximum Extent 62
Cumulative Usage 638
Cumulative Usage Report 499
Current Data 794
Current Profile Type 479
Current Table Depth 482
Current Table Velocity 482
Custom Reports Toolbar 511
Cut 202
Cycle Stress Table 186
Cyclic Service (A3) 190

D
Damping (DSRSS) (ratio of critical) 587
Data Export to ODBC Compliant
Databases 1049
Data Export Wizard 931
Data Modification and Details 990
Data Tab 715
Database Definitions 49
Databases 49
Decomposition Singularity Tolerance
44, 600
Default 392
Default Operator 65
Default Piping Code 83
Default Projection Mode 65
Default Render Mode 65
Default Rotational Restraint Stiffness 45

CAESAR II User's Guide

Default Spring Hanger Table 50

Default Translational Restraint
Stiffness 46
Default View 65
Define a cross-section 358
Define Jobs to Run 900
Defining a Model 881
Definition of a Load Case 452
Delete 202, 207
Delete a material from the database 911
Delete Custom Report Template 515
Deltas 92
dens 382
Densities 194
Density 482, 907
Description of Alternate Simplified ASME
Section VIII Division 2 Elastic Nozzle
Analysis pre-2007 800
Design (Button) 250
Design Data 138
Design Factor (S) 716
Design Pressure 709, 715, 760
Design Temperature 682, 707
Design Wind Speed 467
Det Norske Veritas (DNV) 871
DFac 181
Diagnostics Menu 38
Diameter 96
Diameter 2 110
Diameter Limit 287, 1028
Diameters 290, 521
Dim S3D/SPR Model 323
Dir. 553
Direction 542, 544, 557, 569, 570
Direction Cosines 95, 480
Directional Combination Method
(SRSS/ABS) 598
Directive Builder 603
Disable 73
Disable ANSI B16.5 Check 710
Disable Graphic Tooltip Bubble 65
Disable Leakage Calculations 710
Disable Stress Calculations 710
Disable Undo/Redo Ability 73
Discharge 742
Discharge Nozzle Nominal Diameter 742
Discharge Nozzle Tab 744, 749
Discharge Nozzle Type 742
Displaced Shape 68
Displacement 544
Displacement File Formats 298
Displacement Reports Output Report
Option - SHARED 969

1093

Index
Displacement Reports Sorted by
Nodes 74
Displacements 158, 289, 488, 519, 633
Displacements and Rotations 721
Displacements Input Export Option SHARED 953
Displacements Toolbar 509
Displaying Displacements, Forces, Uniform
Loads, and Wind/Wave Loads 313
Distance 204
Distance from Crest to Site 467
Distance to Opposite Stiffener 152, 158
Distance to Stiffener or Head 152, 157
DLF/Spectrum Generator 605
Do/r3 123
Does the Vent Pipe have an Umbrella
Fitting (Y/N) 615
Double Angle Spacing 729
Double Sum Method 594
dP - YIELD DISP FACTOR, LAT, MAX
MULTIPLE OF D 424
dQd - YIELD DISP FACTOR, DOWN,
MULTIPLE OF D 424
dQu - YIELD DISP FACTOR, UP, MAX
MULTIPLE OF D 424
dQu - YIELD DISP FACTOR, UPWARD,
MULTIPLE of H 425
Drag Coefficient, Cd 170
Draw Cube 249
DSN Setup 1049
dT - YIELD DISP FACTOR, AXIAL 425
Duplicate 202, 208
DX 93, 735, 743, 744
dx, dy, dz 362, 372
DY 93, 735, 743, 745
Dynamic Analysis 527
Dynamic Analysis Workflow 533
Dynamic Example Input Text 73
Dynamic Input 642
Dynamic Loads in Piping Systems 527
Dynamic Output Animation Window 643
Dynamic Output Processing 629
Dynamic Output Window 629
Dynamics Files 1060
DZ 93, 735, 744, 745

E
Earthquake Response Spectrum
Analysis 537
Edim 371
Edit a material in the database 911
Edit Custom Report Template 514
Edit Dynamic Load Cases 213

1094

Edit Menu 202

Edit Static Load Cases 213
Editing Wave Case 479
Editing Wind Case 465
Eff 179
Eff, Cf, z 907
Effective Diameter 721
Effective Gasket Modulus 701
Effective ID 109, 771
EFill 366
EGen 368
Eh / Ea 908
Eh/Ea 189
Elastic Analyses of Shells near Nozzles
Using WRC 107 799
Elastic Modulus 463, 687, 909
Elbow Stiffening Elastic Modulus 463
Elbow Stiffening Pressure 463
Elem 365
Element or Component Factor [Cp]
(NBC) 240
Element/Node/Stress/Restraint Load
Component 248
Elements Input Export Option SHARED 947
Elevation 785
EN-13480 872
EN-13480 - Use In-Plane/Out-Plane
SIF 80
Enable Advanced Element Sort 989
Enable Autosave 73
Enable Data Export to ODBC-Compliant
Databases 53
Ending Frequency 539
Enter a Report Title 631
Enter Pulse Data 612
Enter the Name of the Input File to
Convert 904
Enter the Name of the Output File
(Optional) 905
Enter the Name of the Units File to
Use 905
Enter/Edit Spectrum Data 604
Environment Menu 250
Equipment Centerline 747
Equipment Component and
Compliance 675
Equipment Input Export Options SHARED 962
Equipment Reports Output Report Option SHARED 974
Error Check 200
Error Checking 437

CAESAR II User's Guide

Index
Error Code Statements 981
ESL Menu 38
Estimated Number of Significant Figures in
Eigenvalues 600
Evaluating Vessel Stresses 797
Event Viewer Dialog Box 526
Example 362, 364, 367, 370, 373
Example 1 1036
Example 2 1038
Example Files 1061
Example Neutral File from PDS 991
Example Output - Gas Relief Load
Synthesis 619
Example Output - Liquid Relief Load
Synthesis 623
Example Problem
Multiple Load - Case Spring - Hanger
Design 144
Examples 375, 377, 378, 380, 386, 388,
390, 392, 549, 557, 560, 565
Excitation Frequencies Tab 538
Exclude F2 from UKOOA Bending
Stress 57
Execution of Static Analysis 450
Existing File to Start From 903
Exit 202
Exp. Coeff. 909
Expansion Joint 220
Expansion Joint Design Notes 224
Expansion Joint Modeler - Expansion Joint
Database 223
Expansion Joint Modeler - From / To
Nodes 223
Expansion Joint Modeler - Hinge/Pin
Axis 223
Expansion Joint Modeler - Modeler
Results 224
Expansion Joint Modeler - Overall
Length 223
Expansion Joint Modeler - Tie Bar
Plane 223
Expansion Joint Modeler Notes 224
Expansion Joint Rating 717
Expansion Joint Styles 225
Expansion Joints 51, 63, 108, 290,
521, 770
Expansion Joints Input Export Option SHARED 950
Export Custom Report 515
Export Output Data Also 934
Exporting Displacements to a File 301
External Interface Files 1062
External Interfaces 913

CAESAR II User's Guide

Extraction Nozzle #1 Tab 750

Extraction Nozzle #2 Tab 752
Extrusion Crotch Radius 681

F
F - COATING FACTOR 427
F1, F2, ... F9 176
Fac 181
FAC 908
Facing Column 705
Facing Sketch 705
Factor 553, 565
Factor for Allowables 748
Factor for Table 4 Allowables 743
Factor of Safety (FS) 716
Fatal Error Message 438
Fatigue Analysis of Piping Systems 807
Fatigue Analysis Using CAESAR II 806
Fatigue Basics 806
Fatigue Capabilities in Dynamic
Analysis 815
Fatigue Class 130
Fatigue Curves 185
FDBR 866
Ferritic Material 682
Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic (FRP) 193
File Menu 35, 198
File Name 987
File Sets 1053
FILLET 116
Filter Out Elements Whose Diameter is
Less Than 988
Filter Reports 485
Find 203
Finite Length Expansion Joints 108
First Element 212
First Mode Period (CFE) 238
Fitting Thickness 105
Fix 362
Fixed Format 298
Fixed Size Restraint Size 70
Flange 63
Flange Allowable @ Ambient
Temperature 708
Flange Allowable @ Design
Temperature 707
Flange Allowable @ Stress Multiplier 709
Flange Analysis Temperature 464
Flange Check 289, 519
Flange Checks 160
Flange Class 696
Flange Class/Grade 161
Flange Face ID or Lapjt Cnt ID 698

1095

Index
Flange Face OD or Lapjt Cnt 698
Flange Grade 696
Flange Inside Diameter (B) 697
Flange Leakage and Stress
Calculations 1072
Flange Leakage/Stress Calculations 694
Flange Material 707
Flange Modulus of Elasticity @
Ambient 708
Flange Modulus of Elasticity @
Design 708
Flange Outside Diameter (A) 697
Flange Rating 710
Flange Reports 493
Flange Tab 696
Flange Thickness (t) 698
Flange Type 696
Flange Yield Strength, SYC, SY1-SY9 162
Flanges Input Export Option SHARED 961
Flaw Length 715
Flexible Joint Length 721
FlowMaster 1046
Fluid Bulk Modulus 618
Fluid Density 98, 291, 522
Fluid Density (Specific Gravity) 618
Fluid Height 154
Fluid SG 154
Fluid Weight in Rigid Elements 766
Force 541, 556, 612
Force Black and White Printing 66
Force Consistent Bend Materials 989
Force Orthogonalization After Convergence
(Y/N) 602
Force Set # 555, 557
Force Sets Tab 555
Forces 289, 520
Forces - Moments 165
Forces Moments Input Export Option SHARED 954
Forces on Nozzle 744, 745
Forces/Moments 166
Forces/Stresses 637
Form Factor Qa 726
Free Code 147
Free End Connections - FREE 384
Free Restraint at Node 146
Free Surface Elevation 481
Frequency Array Spaces 602
Frequency Cutoff (HZ) 585
Frequently Asked Questions 893
FRICT. ANGLE 427
Friction Angle Variation 44

1096

FRICTION COEFFICIENT 427

Friction Multiplier 463
Friction Normal Force Variation 44
Friction Slide Multiplier 44
Friction Stiffness 44
from 360, 361, 363, 365, 366, 368, 371,
375, 376, 378, 379, 385
From 92
From Node 414
From, To, Both 160
From/To End Mesh 415
Front View 295, 524
FRP Alpha (xe-06) 55
FRP Analysis Using CAESAR II 831
FRP Coef. of Thermal Expansion (x
1,000,000 ) 259
FRP Density 55
FRP Laminate Type 55, 260
FRP Pipe Properties 54
FRP Property Data File 56
FRP Ratio of Shear Modulus/Emod
Axial 260
Ftg Ro 116
Full Load 321
fx, fy, fz 378

G
g 382
GAMMA - DRY SOIL DENSITY 425
GAMMA PRIME - EFFECTIVE SOIL
DENSITY 426
Gap 135
Gas Constant (R) 615
Gasket Diameter, G / Bolt Circle 161
Gasket Inner Diameter 701
Gasket Outer Diameter 701
Gasket Seating Stress 703
General Comments on Configuration
Settings' Effect on Piping Code
Calculations 838
General Computed Results 499
General Notes 981
General Settings 82
Generate Spectrum 613
Generate Stress Isometrics Overview 647
genInc 369
genIncTo 369
genLast 369
Geometry 720
Geometry Definitions 57
German 1991 Database 405
Getting Started 27
Gimbal 226

CAESAR II User's Guide

Index
GLoads 380
Global 203
Global Element Forces 495
Global Force FX 736
Global Force FY 736
Global Force FZ 736
Global Force Reports Output Report Option
- SHARED 970
Global Forces 635
Global Input 724
Global Moment MX 736
Global Moment MY 736
Global Moment MZ 736
GPTC/Z380 872
Graphic Settings 60
Graphical Output 516
Grouping Method 593
Grow Toolbar 509
Guide 133

H
H - BURIED DEPTH TO TOP OF
PIPE 427
Hand Lay 189
Hanger CNode 63
Hanger Default Restraint Stiffness 46
Hanger Design Control Data 229
Hanger Hardware Weight 143
Hanger Reports Output Report Option SHARED 973
Hanger Sizing Algorithm 772
Hanger Stiffness 462
Hanger Table 138, 232
Hanger Table with Text 501
Hangers 63, 137, 289, 519
Hangers Input Export Option SHARED 959
Harmonic 529, 626
Harmonic Analysis 536, 573
Harmonic Displacements Tab 543
Harmonic Forces Tab 540
Header Pipe Outside Diameter 680
Header Pipe Wall Thickness 680
Heat Exchange Institute 758
HEI Nozzle 760
Height of Hill or Escarpment 467
Height of the Windward Face 469
Help Menu 38
Help Screens and Units 91
Hide Overlapping Text 70
Highlighting Graphics 311
Hill Type 467
Hinged 226

CAESAR II User's Guide

hl(11) 187
hl(21) 187
Horizontal Thermal Bowing Tolerance 59
How to Use the Advanced PCF Import
(APCF) 284
How to Use the AFT IMPULSE
Interface 1040
How to Use the CAESAR II / PIPENET
Interface 1042
How to Use The Flowmaster
Interface 1047
How to Use the LIQT Interface 1035
How to Use the PCF Interface 1023
How to Use the Pipeplus Interface 1042
HPGSL 872
Hub Length 699
Hydrodynamic (Wave and Current)
Loading 785

I
IBC 609
ID Manifold Piping 618
ID of Relief Valve Orifice 614
ID of Relief Valve Piping 615
ID of Vent Stack Piping 615
ID Relief Exit Piping 618
ID Relief Orifice or Rupture Disk
Opening 617
ID Supply Header 618
Idle Processing Count 66
IGE/TD/12 870
IGE\TD\12 Reference 126
IGE\TD\12 Requirements 122
Ignore B31.3 Wc Factor 80
Ignore Spring Hanger Stiffness 47
Implement Appendix P 79
Implementation of Macro-Level Analysis for
Piping Systems 826
Import Custom Report 515
Import Load Cases 459
Import/Export Displacements Dialog
Box 297
Import/Export Displacements from
File 297
Importance Factor 466, 607, 608
Importance Factor I (ASCE) 235
Importance Factor IE (NBC) 240
Importing Displacements from a File 301
Impulse 531
in G's, in F/L 168
In-And Out-Of-Plane Fixity Coefficients Ky
And Kz 728
inc 361, 367, 369, 372, 375, 376, 379, 385

1097

Index
Include Additional Bend Nodes 989
Include Insulation in Hydrotest 47
Include Missing Mass Components 595
Include Piping Input Files 261
Include Pseudostatic (Anchor Movement)
Components (Y/N) 595
Include Spring Stiffness in Hanger OPE
Travel Cases 47
Included Mass Data 641
Including Structural Input Files 262
Including the Spring Hanger Stiffness in the
Design Algorithm 775
Inclusion of Missing Mass Correction 801
incmatId 372
incMatId 367, 370
Incore Numerical Check 47
Increase Factor 610
Increase Factor (CFE) 238
Increment 204, 286, 539, 542, 545,
554, 988
Increments 569
incSecId 372
incTo 367, 369, 372, 375, 377, 379, 385
Inlet Nozzle Node Number 756
Inlet Nozzle Nominal Diameter 756
Inlet Nozzle Tab 756
In-Line Flange Evaluation 767
In-Plane 729, 730
In-Plane Bending Moment 729
Input
Specifying Hydrodynamic Parameters in
CAESAR II 793
Input Data Tab 740, 755
Input Echo 502
Input Items 59, 72
Input Items Optionally Effecting SIF
Calculations 113
Input Items Optionally Effecting SIF
Calculations For ISO 14692 119
Input Menu 36
Input Spreadsheet Defaults 45
insecid 367
inSecId 370
Insert 202
Insert Menu 358
Insul Thk 196
Insul/Cladding Unit Weight 197
Insul/Cladding Unit Wt. 293, 523
Insulation Density 196, 292, 523
Insulation Thickness 292, 523
Insulation Weight on Rigid Elements 766
Intergraph CADWorx Plant 975

1098

Intergraph Data After Bend

Modifications 1003
Intergraph Data After Element Sort 998
Intergraph Data After TEE/Cross
Modifications 999
Intergraph Data After Valve
Modifications 1000
Intergraph PDS 986
Intergraph Smart 3D PCF 986
Intersection Crotch Radius 681
Intersection Crotch Thickness 681
Intersection Stress Intensification
Factors 676
Intersection Type 679
Introduction 21
Invert 210
IS-875 Options 474
ISO-14692 872

J
Jacobi Sweep Tolerance 600
JPI 873

K
K2 135
Kellogg Equivalent Pressure Method 767
K-Factor 107
Kinematic Viscosity 481
KO - COEFFICIENT OF PRESSURE AT
REST 428
Korean 1990 Database 408
Ksd 181

L
L1/Lb 125
Laminate Type 908
Large End Hub Thickness 699
last 361, 367, 369, 372, 375,
377, 379, 385
Last Element 212
Leak Pressure Ratio 701
Left-side View 295, 525
Legend Text 69
Length 95, 290, 521
Length of Manifold Piping 618
Length of Relief Exit Piping 618
Length of the Vent Stack 615
Liberal Stress Allowable 258
Lift Coefficient, Cl 170
LIM 133
Limiting the Display 315

CAESAR II User's Guide

Index
Line Number 197
Line Numbers 250
Line Temperature 614
Liners 229
LIQT 1034
List 204
List Options 394
Load 377
Load Case 565
Load Case (for Design) 247
Load Case Editor Tab (Static Analysis
Dialog Box) 457
Load Case Name 460, 517
Load Case Options Tab (Static Analysis
Dialog Box) 459
Load Case Report 500
Load Case Template 51
Load Cases 458
Load Cases with Hanger Design 441
Load Cases with Pitch and Roll 442
Load Cases with Thermal
Displacements 442
Load Cases with Thermal Displacements
and Settlement 442
Load Cycles 459, 540
Load Duration (DSRSS) (sec) 587
Load S3D/SPR Dialog Box 320
Load S3D/SPR Model 319
Loading Conditions 165
Loads Defined in Input 457
Loads Tab 709
Local Coordinates 874
Local Element Forces 495
Local Force Report Output Report Option SHARED 971
Local Forces 634
Local Member Data Tab 727
Loop Closure Tolerance 60
Loop Optimization Wizard Overview 247
Loop Type 248
Lumped Masses Tab 568
lxx 383
lyy 383

M
Macro-Level Analysis 825
Main Menu 34
Major Direction 249
Major Direction Available Space 250
Manipulating the Toolbar 311
Mapped MCESRA at One
Second (S1) 608

CAESAR II User's Guide

Mapped MCESRA at Short

Periods (Ss) 608
Marine Growth 170
Marine Growth Density 170
Marker Color 64
Marker Options 64
Marker Size 64
Mass 569
Mass Model 642
Mass Model (LUMPED/
CONSISTENT) 598
Mass Participation Factors 638
Material 171, 291, 522
Material Allowable Stress 760
Material Data Tab 707
Material Database 905
Material Elastic Properties 192
Material Number 287, 1029
Material Properties 54, 192
Material Specified Minimum Yield 715
Material Yield Strength 715, 725, 729, 760
Materials 170, 228
matId 365, 367, 369, 381
matID 372
MatId 381
Max. Mapped Res. Acc. Ss (ASCE) 236
Max. No. of Eigenvalues Calculated 583
Max. Stress 247
Maximum Allowable Bend Angle 58
Maximum Allowed Travel Limit 142, 232
Maximum Anchor Node 988
Maximum Desired Unity Check 727
Maximum Longitudinal Moment 761
Maximum Radial Force 761
Maximum Stress Versus Extracted
Loads 805
Maximum Table Frequency 611
Measurement Increment 715
Measurements Tab 716
Member End Node 727
Member Start Node 727
Member Type 728
Memory Allocated (Mb) 76
Mexico 1993 Options 470
Micro-Level Analysis 819
-Mill Tol % 98
Mini-Level Analysis 823
Minimum Allowable Bend Angle 58
Minimum Anchor Node 988
Minimum Angle to Adjacent Bend 59
Minimum Desired Unity Check 726
Minimum Temperature Curve (A-D) 907
Minimum Wall Mill Tolerance (%) 46

1099

Index
Mini-windows 297
Minor Direction 250
Minor Direction Available Space 250
Miscellaneous 47, 1072
Miscellaneous Data 503
Miscellaneous Data Group #1 925
Miscellaneous Options 64, 72
Miscellaneous Processors 895
Missing Mass Combination Method
(SRSS/ABS) 597
Missing Mass ZPA 48
Miter Points 105
Modal 625
Modal Analysis 536
Modal Combination Method
(Group/10%/DSRSS/ABS/SRSS) 592
mode 387, 389, 391
Model an underground piping system 429
Model Error Checking 32
Model Menu 213
Model Modifications for Dynamic
Analysis 533
Model Rotation 287, 989, 1028
Model Setup using the Structural Steel
Wizard 357
Model TEES as 3 Elements 989
Modeling Friction Effects 778
Modes Mass Normalized 640
Modes Unity Normalized 640
Moments on Nozzle 744, 745
Move Geometry 317
Movement Capability 228
Moving elements 317
Mu 136
Multiple Load Case Design Option 143
Multiple Load Case Design Options 234
mx, my, mz 378

N
name 383
Name 92, 547, 906
Natural Frequencies 640
Navigating the Classic Piping Input Dialog
Box using the Function Keys 91
NAVY 505 856
NBC Example 241
NBC Importance Factor 469
NBC Static Seismic Wizard 239
NEMA Input Data Tab 734
NEMA SM23 (Steam Turbines) 730
NEMA Turbine Example 732
Neutral File Insulation Units 990
Neutral File Weight Units 989

1100

New 35, 198

New Custom Report Template 513
New Job Ambient Temperature 46
New Job Bourdon Pressure 46
New Job Liberal Expansion Stress
Allowable 84
New Password 87
New Units File Name 904
Next Element 212
NFill 360
NGen 360
No RTF/WLT in Reduced Fitting SIFs 80
No. Hangers at Location 142
No. of Hanger - Design Operating Load
Cases 230
No. of Iterations Per Shift (0 - Pgm
computed) 601
No. to Converge Before Shift Allowed (0 Not Used) 601
Nodal Coordinate Data 929
Node 105, 114, 122, 132, 138, 159, 164,
166, 359, 557, 570
Node Name 517
node number 359
Node Number 747
Node Number for 721
Node Numbers 91, 290, 521
Node Text 69
nodeInc 361
Nominal Diameter 747
Nonlinear Code Compliance 779
Northeast ISO View 296, 525
Northwest ISO View 296, 525
Norwegian (TBK 5-6) 865
Note Message 439
Notes on Occasional Load Cases 781
Nozzle Check 289, 520
Nozzle Check Report 493
Nozzle Diameter 735
Nozzle Flexibility 289, 519
Nozzle Height 154
Nozzle Lmt Check 163
Nozzle Node 151, 153, 156
Nozzle Number 734
Nozzle Outer Diameter 151, 154, 157
Nozzle Outside Diameter 760
Nozzle Type 735
Nozzle Wall Thickness 151, 154
Nozzles 63, 148
Nubbin Width or Ring 705
Number 906
Number of Bolts 700
Number of Convolutions 721

CAESAR II User's Guide

Index
Number of Cuts 686
Number of Flanges (Laminate Type for
BS7159 & UKOOA) 686
Number of Points 611

O
Occ Load Factor 464
Occasional Load Factor 81
Ocean Currents 790
Ocean Wave Particulars 787
ODBC Compliant Database Name 54
ODBC Settings 53
Off 170
Offsets 94
Offsets Input Export Option SHARED 956
On Element 248
On Screen 512
Open 35, 198
Open a Job 631
Open CADWorx Model 199
Opening an existing CAESAR II file 663
Opening Time 611
Operating Conditions 99
Operating Load (Total at Loc.) 142
Optimal Frame Rate 66
Optimization Type 247
Optimization Wizard 241
Options Menu 288, 512
Ordinate 604
Ordinate Interpol 549
Ordinate Type 548
Orient 376
Orifice Flow Conditions/Exit Pipe End Flow
Conditions/Manifold Pipe End Flow
Conditions 624
Other Global Coordinate Systems 875
Other Notes on Hanger Sizing 775
Outlet Nozzle Node Number 756
Outlet Nozzle Nominal Diameter 756
Outlet Nozzle Tab 757
Out-of-Plane 730
Out-of-Plane Bending Moment 729
Output Colors 67
Output Items 74
Output Menu 37
Output Reports by Load Case 74
Output Status 460
Output Table of Contents 74
Output Text 69
Output Type 460
Output Viewer Wizard 504
Outside Diameter 688

CAESAR II User's Guide

OVERBURDEN COMPACTION
MULTIPLIER 428
Overview 325

P
Pad Thickness 681
Pad Thk 116
Parameters for Degrees of Freedom 385,
387, 389, 391
Partial Load 321
Paste 202
PCF 1009
PCF Interface Custom Attributes
270, 1010
PCF Material Mapping 272, 1012
PCF Restraint Mapping 273, 1013
PCF Stress Intensification Factor Mapping
281, 1021
PCF Unit Mapping 271, 1010
PD 5500 156
Percent Stress Settings 68
Phase 542, 544
Phase Angle 481
Pipe Density 98, 291, 522
Pipe Nominal Diameter 715
Pipe Outside Diameter 685
Pipe Schedule/Wall Thickness 287, 1029
Pipe Sizes 95
Pipe Stress Analysis Coordinate
Systems 878
Pipe Stress Analysis of FRP Piping 818
Pipe Surface Condition 473
Pipe Wall Thickness 715
Pipeline Remaining Strength Calculations
(B31G) 712
PIPENET 1041
Pipeplus 1042
Pipes 63
Piping Code ID 679, 684
Piping Codes 291, 522
Piping Element Data 796
Piping Input generation 29
Piping Input Reference 89
Piping Size Specification 51
Plate 227
Plot Options Menu 518
Plot View Menu 524
pois 382
Poisson's Ratio 907
Post-Selection Load Case (Optional)
Setting the Actual Installed (Cold)
Load 773
Practical Applications 831

1101

Index
Predefined Hanger Data 147
Pre-Selection Load Case 2 Setting
Hanger Deflection through the Operating
Case 773
Pressure (abs) 614
Pressure (Design Strain for BS 7159 &
UKOOA) 686
Pressure Rating 228
Pressure Stiffening 687
Pressure Variation in EXP Case 81
Pressures 101, 293, 524
Previous Element 212
Pricing Factors Tab 898
Print <filename> 200
Print Alphas and Pipe Properties 257
Print Forces on Rigids and Expansion
Joints 256
Print Preview 200
Print Setup 200
Printing or Saving Reports to File
Notes 486
PRO-ISO 1029
PRO-ISO Example Transfer 1032
Prompted Autosave 74
Propagate Properties 99, 193, 197
Providing Wave Data 450
Providing Wind Data 448
Pseudostatic (Anchor Movement) Comb.
Method (SRSS/ABS) 597
Pseudo-Static Hydrodynamic Loading 788
Pvar 184

Q
Qs 188
Quick XML Export 934

R
r 188
R1 111
r1/Tc/Lh 125
R2 111
r2/rc 124
Radius 104
Random 529
Range 288, 519, 604
Range Interpol 549
Range Type 548
Ratio of Gas Specific Heats (k) 615
Ratio Shear Modulus
Elastic Modulus 56
RCC-M Subsection C and D 863
Read from File 161, 165, 186

1102

Recent Piping Files 201

Recent Structural Files 201
Recommend 459
Recommended Load Cases 446
Recommended Load Cases Dialog
box 459
Recommended Load Cases for Hanger
Selection 447
Redo 212
Reduced Intersection 81
Reducer 109
Reducers Input Export Option SHARED 960
Ref Vector X, Y, Z 165
Ref. Wind Velocity [Vb,0] 469
Reference Wind Pressure 468
References 796, 837
Refract Density 195
Refract Thk 195
Refractory Density 292, 522
Refractory Thickness 292, 522
Re-Import 321
Reinforcing on Shell (1) or Nozzle (2) 154
Relief Load Synthesis 613
Relief Load Synthesis for Gases Greater
Than 15 psig 614
Relief Load Synthesis for Liquids 617
Relief Load Synthesis Results 646
Relief Loads and Water Hammer/Slug Flow
Spectra Analysis 537
Relief Valve or Rupture Disk 617
Remove HA Elements 988
Remove Password 88
Remove PCF Files from Conversion
List 1027
Rendered Mode Text Always Visible 69
Renumber 208
Report Options 487
Report Template Editor 505
Report Types 633
Reports Navigation Toolbar 511
Reports Tab 899
Required Data Sets 1056
Required Error Data Files 1055
Required Printer/Listing Files 1058
Required Program Files 1054
Reset 295, 524
Reset Default Custom Report
Templates 515
Reset Toolbar Layout 296
Reset View on Refresh 288
Resetting Loads on Existing Spring
Hangers 148

CAESAR II User's Guide

Index
Resize Members Whose Unity Check Value
Is . . . 726
Response Factor R (ASCE) 235
Response Modification R 609
Restore Previous Anchor Size 66
Restore Previous Hanger Size 66
Restore Previous Operator 66
Restore Previous Projection Mode 67
Restore Previous Render Mode 67
Restore Previous Restraint Size 67
Restore Previous View 67
Restrained Piping per B31.8 185
Restrained Weight Case 772
Restraint CNode 63
Restraint Codes 951
Restraint Data in Local Element
Coordinates 892
Restraint Helix is a Line 71
Restraint Report - In Local Element
Coordinates 490
Restraint Reports Output Report Option SHARED 969
Restraint Summary 492
Restraints 63, 131, 288, 489, 519, 633
Restraints Input Export Option SHARED 951
Restraints Toolbar 509
Resultant Force and Moment
Multiplier 756
Return to Input 517
Re-use Last Eigensolution (Frequencies
and Mode Shapes) 591
Review Error Report 296
Review Existing Units File 902
Review SIFs at Bend Nodes 253
Review SIFs at Intersection Nodes 250
Review Static Results 296
Review Units 213
Right-side View 295, 525
Rigid 107
Rigid Element Application 765
Rigid Support Displacement Criteria
141, 231
Rigid Weight 765
Rigids 64
Rigids Input Export Option - SHARED 950
Rod Increment (Degrees) 45
Rod Tolerance (Degrees) 45
Rotate 207
Roughness Factor 469
rp/do 124
Run a static analysis 33
rx 364

CAESAR II User's Guide

RX (cosx, cosy, cosz) or RX (vecx, vecy,

vecz) 134
rx stiffness 364
RX, RY, or RZ 133
ry 364
ry stiffness 364
rz 364
rz stiffness 364

S
S3D Graphics Environment Dialog
Box 324
S3D/SPR Import View 319
S3D/SPR Visibility Options 324
Sa(0.2) (NBC) 240
Sample Input 331
Save <filename> 199
Save Animation to File 644
Save As 199
Save as Graphics Image 199
Saving an Image for Later
Presentation 315
SC 173
Seam Welded 97, 686
Seam-Welded 107
Seawater Data 795
secId 365, 367, 369
secID 372
SecId 382
Section 1 - Entity Information 983
Section 2-Segment Information 983
Section 3-Final CAESAR II Data 984
section Id 383
Seismic Coefficient Ca 607
Seismic Coefficient Cv 607
Seismic Wizard 234
Seismic Zone 610
Seismic Zone (CFE) 238
Select a file 321
Select a units file 357
Select a vertical axis 357
Select CAESAR II File 933
Select Data Export Output File 934
Select Load Jobs and Load Case 736
Select material properties 357
Select the model definition method 358
Select Wind Code or Profile 465
Send Reports to Microsoft Word 632
Set Default Data Directory 35
Set Displacement Vector 155
Set Project Information 654
Set Report Font 512
Set Sustained SIF Multiplier 79

1103

Index
Set/Change Password 87
Settings 56
SH1, SH2, ... SH9 175
Shadow Mode 71
shape 379
Shell Outside Diameter 760
Shell Thickness 760
Should CAESAR II Size the Vent Stack
(Y/N) 617
Show Bounding Box 71
Show Informational Messages 287
Show/Hide S3D/SPR Model 323
SIF (i) 115
SIF (o) 115
SIF Scratchpad 121
SIFs & Tees 112
SIFs and Stresses 76
SIFs Tees Input Export Option SHARED 957
SIFs/Tees 64
Silhouette Mode Text Always Visible 69
Site Class (ASCE) 236
Site Class (NBC) 240
Site Coefficient Fa 608
Site Coefficient Fv 608
Slipon 227
Small End Hub Thickness 698
Smooth Transitions 71
Snubbers Active 462
Snubbers Tab 570
Software Revision Procedures 23
Software Support/User Assistance 22
SOIL DENSITY 428
Soil Model No. 414
Soil Model Type and Classification 423
Soil Models 417
Soil Type 610
Soil Type (CFE) 238
South African 1992 Database 408
Southeast ISO View 295, 525
Southwest ISO View 295, 525
Spatial Combination Method
(SRSS/ABS) 592
Spatial or Modal Combination First 591
Special Execution Parameters 256
Specify Revision Number 933
Spectrum 627
Spectrum Analysis 577
Spectrum Name 605
Spectrum Type 606
Spectrum/Time History Definitions
Tab 546

1104

Spectrum/Time History Load Cases

Tab 550
Spectrum/Time History Profile 552
Spring Design Requirements 772
Spring Forces 228
Spring Rate 147
Square Root of the Sum of the Squares
Method 594
Standard Toolbar 508
Start Node 286, 542, 545, 554, 988
Starting CAESAR II 27
Starting Frequency 539
Starting Point X 323
Starting Point Y 323
Starting Point Z 323
Static Analysis 437
Static Analysis Dialog Box 456
Static Analysis Fatigue Example 808
Static Analysis Overview 437
Static Load Case Editor 439
Static Load Case for Nonlinear Restraint
Status 582
Static Load Cases Output Report Options SHARED 968
Static Output Processor 483
Static Output Review 33
Static Seismic Inertial Loads 782
Static Seismic Load Cases 443
Static/Dynamic Combinations Tab 564
Status 212
Status Tab 900
Steel 64
Stif 136
Stiffness 570
Stiffness Factor for Friction 583
STOKES 5th Order Wave Theory
Implementation 789
Stoomwezen 862
Stop Node 542, 545, 554, 569
Stream Function Order 480
Stream Function Wave Theory
Implementation 790
Stress Concentration Factor 688
Stress Concentration Factors 130
Stress Concentrations and
Intensification 688
Stress Index - Axial (Ia) 115
Stress Index - Torsion (It) 115
Stress Intensification Factor
Scratchpad 1072
Stress Intensification Factors Details 119
Stress Isometric Tutorials 662

CAESAR II User's Guide

Index
Stress Reduction Factors Cmy and Cmz
725
Stress Reports Output Report Option SHARED 972
Stress Summary 497
Stress Types 458
Stresses 496, 636
Stresses Toolbar 510
Structural Classification 466
Structural Code 725
Structural Damping Coef. 466
Structural Data Files 1061
Structural Database 51
Structural Databases 395
Structural Group 610
Structural Steel Checks - AISC 722
Structural Steel Example #1 331
Structural Steel Example #2 341
Structural Steel Example #3 350
Structural Steel Graphics 329
Structural Steel Modeler 325
Structure Group (CFE) 238
Structure Natural Frequency, f (Hz) 467
Sturm Sequence Check on Computed
Eigenvalues 598
Subspace Size (0-Not Used) 600
Suction Nozzle Node Number 742
Suction Nozzle Nominal Diameter 742
Suction Nozzle Tab 743, 748
Suction Nozzle Type 742
Summary Report 300
Supply Header Pipe Wall Thickness 618
Supply Press. (abs) 617
Surface Velocity 480
SUS Case Sh 463
Sustained Stresses and Nonlinear
Restraints 779
Swedish Method 1 and 2 859
Sy 179
SY (c) 181
SY1, SY2, ... SY9 176
SYa 181
System Design Factor 191
System Level Items 75

T
T/Th/T'b 123
Table 4 Force and Moment Multiplier 756
Tank Coefficient of Thermal
Expansion 155
Tank Modulus of Elasticity 155
Tank Node (optional) 154
Tank Outer Diameter 154

CAESAR II User's Guide

Tank Wall Thickness 154

Target Stress 247
TD/12 Modulus Correction 186
Te/Tb 124
Technical Discussion of LIQT
Interface 1034
Technical Discussion of the PIPENET
Interface 1041
Technical Discussions 765
Technical Notes on CAESAR II
Hydrodynamic Loading 790
Tees 290, 521
Temperature 908
Temperature Change 155
TEMPERATURE CHANGE 428
Temperature-Pressure Table 162
Temperatures 100, 293, 523
Ten Percent Method 593
Terrain Roughness Category 472
Text Options 69
The Dynamic Analysis Window 535
The Right Hand Rule 876
The Structural Modeler Window 356
Theoretical Cold (Installation) Load 148
Thermal Bowing Delta Temperature 258
Thermal Expansion 101
THERMAL EXPANSION
COEFFICIENT 428
Thermal Factor (k) 191
Thermodynamic Entropy Limit/Subsonic
Vent Exit Limit 621
Thickness 2 110
Thrust at the End of the Exit Piping 623
Thrust at the End of the Manifold
Piping 623
Thrust at the Vent Pipe Exit 620
Thrust at Valve Pipe/Vent Pipe
Interface 620
Tied 226
Time 612
Time History 580, 627
Time History Analysis 538
Time History Animation 75
Title Input Export Option - SHARED 962
Title Lines 517
Title Page 229
to 360, 361, 363, 365, 366, 368, 372, 375,
376, 378, 379, 385
To 92
To Node 414
Toggle Graphics Update 295
Toolbars 293
Tools Menu 37, 296

1105

Index
Top 62
Top View 295, 524
torsion 383
Torsional Spring Rates 223
Total Wind Height 473
Transforming from Global to Local 892
Transient Pressure Rise on Valve Closing
621, 623
Transient Pressure Rise on Valve Opening
621, 623
Trunnion Tab 687
Tube Axial Force 763
Tube Bundle Direction 756
Tube Horizontal Moment 764
Tube Horizontal Shear Force 763
Tube Node Number 763
Tube Nominal Diameter 763
Tube Torsional Moment 764
Tube Vertical Moment 764
Tube Vertical Shear Force 763
T-UNIV 227
Tutorial A - Creating a stress isometric
drawing using the default drawing
style 662
Tutorial B - Adding annotations for Input
and Output features 665
Tutorial C - Adding custom annotations and
configure annotations preferences 667
Tutorial D - Creating and applying a stress
iso template 671
Type 104, 114, 123, 132

U
UBC 606
UBC Options 468
UK 1993 Database 410
UKOOA 869
Ult Tensile Stress 909
Ultimate Axial Load 416
Ultimate Downward Load 417
Ultimate Lateral Load 416
Ultimate Upward Load 416
Uncompressed Gasket Thickness 701
Underlying Theory 818
Understanding Jobs 28
Undo 212
UNDRAINED SHEAR STRENGTH 428
Unif 374
Uniform Load in G's 259
Uniform Load Input Export Option SHARED 954
Uniform Loads 166, 289, 520
Unit 394

1106

Units Conversion Data 928

Units File Name 51
Units File Operations 901
Unsupported Axial Length 728
Unsupported Length (In-Plane
Bending) 728
Unsupported Length (Out-Of-Plane
Bending) 728
Untied 225
Update History 1067
Updates and License Types 25
Use Background Color 62
Use Culling Frustrum 62
Use Fixed Size Restraints 71
Use FRP Flexibilities 57
Use FRP SIF 57
Use Model Bounding Box 322
Use Out-of-Core Eigensolver (Y/N) 602
Use PD/4t 84
Use Pipe Materials Only 286, 1028
Use Pressure Stiffening on Bends 48
Use Schneider 78
Use SL Formulation Para 320 (2010) 79
Use System Units 934
Use WRC 329 78
User Defined Time History Waveform 611
User ID 76
User Material Database File Name 52
User Wind Profile 465
User-Defined 383
User-Defined Axial Stif 416
User-Defined Downward Stif 417
User-Defined Lateral 415
User-Defined SIFs Anywhere in the Piping
System 119
User-Defined Upward Stif 416
Using Local Coordinates 883
Using Microsoft Excel 513
Using Microsoft Word 513
UTS (c) 181
UTS1, UTS2, ... UTS9 176
UTSa 181
U-UNIV 226
ux, uy, uz 375

V
Valve 216
Valve Orifice Gas Conditions/Vent Pipe Exit
Gas Conditions/Subsonic Velocity Gas
Conditions 622
Valve/Flange Data File Location 53
Valves and Flanges 53
Vector 1, Vector 2, ... Vector 9 159, 166

CAESAR II User's Guide

Index
Vector 1, Vector 2, Vector 3 168
Version and Job Title Information 915
Vertical 393
Vertical In-Line Pumps 740
Vessel Centerline Direction Cosine VX, VY,
VZ 152, 158
Vessel Material (Optional) 152, 158
Vessel Node (Optional) 151, 157
Vessel Outer Diameter 151, 157
Vessel Pad Thickness 152, 157
Vessel Temperature (Optional) 152, 158
Vessel Type - Cylinder (0) or
Sphere (1) 157
Vessel Wall Thickness 151, 157
Video Driver 67
View Animations 516
View Load Cases 632
View Menu 38, 293, 507
View Reports 632
View/Edit File 904
Visibility % 71
Visual Options 70

W
Walking Through the Model 316
Wall Thickness 291, 521, 688
Wall Thickness of Attached Pipe 685
Wall Thickness of Bend 685
Warning Message 438
Warning Messages 299
Warnings 503
Water Depth 480
Wave Data 794
Wave Direction Cosines 481
Wave Height 480
Wave Kinematics Factor 481
Wave Loads 169
Wave Loads Tab (Static Analysis Dialog
Box 479
Wave Period 480
Wave Phase Option 481
Wave Theory 480
B1 117
WELD (D) 116
Weld ID 117, 130
Weld Strength Reduction Factor (W) 909
Weld Type 681
Welded 227
What's New in CAESAR II 17
WI Factor 98
Width to Height Ratio 249
Wind / Wave Loads 168
Wind Direction Specification 465

CAESAR II User's Guide

Wind Exposure 466

Wind Loads 169, 378, 783
Wind Loads Tab (Static Analysis Dialog
Box) 465
Wind Shape Factor 169
Wind Wave Input Export Option SHARED 955
Wind/Wave 290, 520
+Mill Tol % 98
Wl for Bends 107
WN 227
Work with Reports 484
WR297 Nozzle Input Export Option SHARED 957
WRC 107 Stress Summations 692
WRC 107/297 Vessel/Nozzle
Stresses 689
WRC 297 149
WRC 297 Local Stress Calculations 1072
WRC Bulletin 107(537) 691
WRC Bulletin 297 693
WRC-107 Interpolation Method 48
WRC-107(537) Version 48
Wt/Sch 97

X
x 363
X (cosx, cosy, cosz) or X (vecx, vecy,
vecz) 133
X Distance to Discharge 749
X Distance to Extraction Nozzle #1 751
X Distance to Extraction Nozzle #2 752
X Distance to Suction 748
X Force Acting on Discharge Nozzle 750
X Force Acting on Suction Nozzle 748
X Force Acting on the Extraction Nozzle
751, 752
X Force Applied to Inlet Nozzle 757
X Force Applied to Outlet Nozzle 758
X Moment Acting on Discharge
Nozzle 750
X Moment Acting on Suction Nozzle 749
X Moment Acting on the Extraction Nozzle
751, 753
X Moment Applied to Inlet Nozzle 757
X Moment Applied to Outlet Nozzle 758
x stiffness 363
X, Y, or Z 133
x, y, z 359
X2, Y2, Z2 134
XROD (COSX, COSY, COSZ) or XROD
(VECX, VECY, VECZ) 134
XROD, YROD, ZROD 133

1107

Index
XSNB, YSNB, ZSNB 134
XSPR, YSPR, ZSPR 134

Y
y 363
Y Distance From Header Center to Nozzle
Face 758
Y Distance from Nozzle Face to Header
Center 757
Y Distance to Discharge 749
Y Distance to Extraction Nozzle #1 751
Y Distance to Extraction Nozzle #2 752
Y Distance to Suction 748
Y Force Acting on Discharge Nozzle 750
Y Force Acting on Suction Nozzle 748
Y Force Acting on the Extraction
Nozzle 751
Y Force Applied to Inlet Nozzle 757
Y Force Applied to Outlet Nozzle 758
Y Moment Acting on Discharge
Nozzle 750
Y Moment Acting on Extraction
Nozzle 752
Y Moment Acting on suction Nozzle 749
Y Moment Acting on the Extraction Nozzle
751, 753
Y Moment Applied to Inlet Nozzle 757
Y Moment Applied to Outlet Nozzle 758
y stiffness 363
YIELD DISPLACEMENT FACTOR 428
Yield Stress 909
Yield Stress Criterion 85
ym 382
Youngs Modulus 725
Young's Modulus 729
ys 382

Z Moment Acting on the Extraction Nozzle

751, 753
Z Moment Applied to Inlet Nozzle 757
Z Moment Applied to Suction Nozzle 758
z stiffness 363
Z-Axis Vertical 60, 260, 734
Zero Length Expansion Joints 108
ZPA (Reg. Guide 1.60/UBC - g's) <or> #
Time History Output Cases 588

Z
z 363
Z Axis Up 721
Z Distance to Discharge 750
Z Distance to Extraction Nozzle #1 751
Z Distance to Extraction Nozzle #2 752
Z Distance to Suction 748
Z Force Acting on Discharge Nozzle 750
Z Force Acting on Suction Nozzle 749
Z Force Acting on the Extraction Nozzle
751, 752
Z Force Applied to Inlet Nozzle 757
Z Force Applied to Outlet Nozzle 758
Z Moment Acting on Suction Nozzle 749

1108

CAESAR II User's Guide